Aztec SM PDF

AZTEC
SERVICE
MANUAL
CARD1 OF5
PA-23-235
APACHE
PA-23-250
AZTEC
PA-23-250
(SIXPLACE)
AZTEC
PIPERAIRCRAFT
CORPORATION
(PART
NUMBER
753564)
lAl
PIPER AZTEC SERVICE MANUAL
AEROFICHE EXPLANATION AND REVISION STATUS
Service manual information incorporated in this set of Aerofiche cards is arranged in accordance with
general specificationsof Aerofiche adopted by the General Aircraft Manufacturer's Association.Information
compiled in this Aerofiche servicemanual is kept current by revisionsdistributed periodically.Theserevisions
supersedeall previous revisions,are complete Aerofichecard replacements,and supersedeAerofichecards of
same number.
Identification of revised material:

Revised text and illustrations are indicated by a black vertical line along the left-hand margin of the
frame, opposite revised or added material. Revisionlines indicate only current revisions with changes and
additions to existing text and illustrations.Changes in capitalization, spelling,punctuation, indexing, physical
location of material, or complete page additions are not identified by revision lines.
Revisions to Service Manual 753 564 issued November 11, 1972are as follows:
Revisions Date Aerofiche Card Effectivity
ORG600401 April 1, 1960 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5

CR810218 February 18, 1981 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
PR830426 April 26, 1983 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
IR860429 April 29, 1986(Interim) 1
IR860921 September 21, 1986 (Interim)*
* INTERIM REVISION
Revisionsappear in Table III-Iof card 1.
There are no other changes included in
this servicemanual. Please discard your
current card 1 and replace it with this
revised one. DO NOT DISCARD
CARDS 2, 3, 4, or 5.
The date on Aerofiche cards must not be earlier than date noted for respectivecard effectivity.Consult latest
card in this series for current Aerofiche card effectivity.
0
1A2
TABLE
OFCONTENTS
AEROFICHE
CARD
NO.1 GRID
NO.
I INTRODUCTION
........................ 1A21
II HANDLING
ANDSERVICING ......... .. .... 1B2
III INSPECTION
............ 1E23
IV STRUCTURES
................ 1F15
V SURFACE
CONTROLS ................. . 11119
AEROFICHE
CARD
NO.2
VI HYDRAULIC
SYSTEM.................... 2A8
VII LANDING
GEARANDBRAKE SYSTEM ........... 2G1
AEROFICHE
CARD
NO.3
VIII POWER
PLANT
(NORMALLYASPIRATED).......... 3A8
VIIIA POWER
PLANT
(TURBOCHARGED)............. 3D17
VIIIB POWER
PLANT
(LYCOMING-TURBOCHARGED) ...... 3H4
IX FUEL
SYSTEM
........ . . . . . . . . . . . .310
AEROFICHE
CARD
NO.4
X INSTRUMENTS. . ...................... 4A8
XI ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM .....
............. 4C1
AEROFICHE
CARD
NO.5
XII ELECTRONICS
............. . 5A9
XIII HEATING
ANDVENTILATING
...... ... 5B5
XIV ACCESSORIES
ANDUTILITIES
..... ......... 5H13
1A3
AIRPLANE SERIAL NUMBER LISTING
PA-23-250 Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-504 incl.
PA-23-235 Serial Nos. 27-505 to 27-622 incl.
PA-23-250 (six place) "B" Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.
PA-23-250 (six place) "C" Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3836 incl.

and 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl.
PA-E23-250 Start at Serial No. 27-2997
PA-23-250 (six place) "D" Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 to

27-4425 incl. and 27-4427 to 27-4573
incl.
PA-23-250 (six place) "E" Serial Nos. 27-4426, 27-4574 to

27-7554168 incl.
PA-23-250(six place) "F" Serial Nos.

27-7654001to 27-7654203incl.
27-7754001to 27-7754162incl.
27-7854001to 27-7854139incl.
27-7954001to 27-7954121incl.
27-8054001to 27-8054059incl.
27-8154001to 27-8154030
Reissued:2/18/8
1A4
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
2-1. Three-View of PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 ........................ 1
2-2. Three-View of PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to
27-2504 incl .. . ... ..... ......... B7
2-3. Three-View of PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 to
27-4573 incl ...................... . .... . B8
2-4. Three-View of PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-4426
and 27-4574 to 27-7554168 incl ............................ 1B9
2-5. Three-View of PA-23-250, Model "F" Serial Nos. 27-7654001 to
27-7954121 incl. .............. .......... .... 1B10
2-6. Three-View of PA-23-250, Model "F" Serial Nos. 27-8054001
and up . . .............................................. ... IB I
2-7. Access Plates and Panels, PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 ............ .. IC3
2-8. Access Plates and Panels, PA-23-250 (six place) ................. IC5
2-9. Torque Wrench Formula . ..................................... C9
2-10. Station Reference Lines ... 1.............................
1C13
2-11. Jacking Arrangements ........................................ 1
2-12. Weighing .................................................... IC22
2-13. Longitudinal Leveling ......................................... IC23
2-14. Lateral Leveling .............................................. 1C23
2-15. Cherrylock Rivet Removal .......................... ........... 1D8
2-16. Hose/Line Markings .......................................... IDIO
2-17. Flareless Tube Fittings ........................................ IDI I
2-18. Maximum Distance Between Supports for Fluid Tubing ........... ID12
2-19. Service Points, PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 ...... .. ............... ID 15
2-20. Service Points, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000
to 27-2504 incl........................................... 1D16
2-21. Service Points, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up... ID17
2-22. Servicing Landing Gear Oleo Struts ............................. ID 19
2-23. Oil Pressure Screen ...... .................................... .. E5
2-24. Oil Suction Screen ... ... ..... ............................... IE5
2-25. Lubrication Chart, PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 .................... IEII
2-26. Lubrication Chart, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. .. .. ...... ........ IE 15
2-27. Lubrication Chart, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 and up........... ............................. IE19
3-1. Inspection of Outboard Flap Hinge, Serial Nos. 27-3050,
27-3154 to 27-7405330 incl . .............................. IFI
3-2. Fuel Selector Valve Control Cables, PA-23-235, PA-23-250, and
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 thru 27-7954076 ..... IF3
3-3. Fuel Selector Valve Control Cables, PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-7954077 and up .............................. 1
4-1. Aileron and Flap Installation .................................. IF21
4-2. Fuselage Cradle .............................................. 1G2
4-3. Wing Installation ............................................. IG5
4-4. Positioning of Front Spar Aligning Tool ... ................... 1
1A5
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS(cont)
Figure Aerofiche
GridNo.
4-5. Positioningof MainSpar AligningTool.................................................................. 1G7

4-6. EmrennageInstallation........................................................................................ 1G13
4-7. WindshieldInstallation.PA-23-250and PA-23-235............................................. 1G16
4-8. WindshieldInstallation.PA-23-250(six place)..................................................... 1G17
4-9. Side WindowInstallation(Typical),PA-23-250,PA-23-235and
PA-23-250(six place),Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504 incl.............................. 1G20
4-10. Side Window Installation(Typical),PA-23-250(six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505and up ........................................ ................... 1G20
4-11. EmergencyExit WindowInstallation,PA-23-250(six place) ................................. 1G23
4-12. Cabin EntranceDoorLatchAssembly.................................................................. 1H4
4-13. TypicalAccess Plates and Panels ........................................ ................... 1 H9
4-14. CheckingStabilatorBalance................................................................................. 1H11
4-15. StabilatorBalanceWeight- Rework...................................................................... 1H12
4-16. CheckingRudderBalance........................................ ................... 1H13
4-17. CheckingAileronBalance........................................ ................... 1H16
4-18. FuselageFrameTubing........................................................................................ 1H18
4-19. SkinMaterialsandThicknesses ........................................................... 1H20
4-20. SkinMaterialsandThicknesses, PA-23-250 (sixplace)....................................... 1H22
4-21. FabricatedTool,WingInstallation ........................................ ................... 1H24
4-22. FabricatedTool,WingInstallation ........................................ ...................
4-23. NoseConeInstallation ............................................................ 113
4-24. Removalof NoseCone/Radome........................................ ................... 114
4-25. NoseCone/Radome 115
.............................................................................................
4-26. Installationof NoseCone/Radome .......................................................................119
4-27. SurfaceScratches,Abrasions orGround-in-Dirt .................................................. 1111
4-28. DeepScratches, ShallowNicksandSmallHoles................................................. 1112
4-29. Mixingor EpoxyPatchingCompound .................................................................. 1112
4-30. WeldingRepairMethod ........................................................... 1113
4-31. Repairing of Cracks........................................................... ................... 1113
4-32. 1114
VariousRepairs.....................................................................................................
4-33. Repairof Stress Lines...........................................................................................1116
4-34. Repairof ImpactedDamage ........................................ ................... 1116
5-1. ControlColumnInstallation ........................................ ................... 1J5
5-2. CorrectMethodof InstallingRodEnd Bearing...................................................... 1J8
5-3. AileronControls........................................................................... 1J9
5-4. of Aileron
Installation Bellcrank Rigging Tool ........................................................ 1J15
5-5. Stabilator and Stabilator Trim Controls ................................................................. 1J20
5-6. StabilatorTrim and Flap Interconnect System, PA-23-250,
(sixplace),SerialNos.27-7654001 andup ...................................................... 1J24
5-7. LevelingStabilator, SerialNos.27-1to 27-7554168 incl.,and
27-80540001 andup . ........................................................... 1K2
5-8. LevelingStabilator, SerialNos.27-7654001 to 27-7954121 incl........................... 1K2
5-9. Methodsof BlockingTrimCables........................................................... 1K6
5-10. RudderandRudderTrimControls........................................................................1K11
5-11. ClampingRudderPedalsin Neutral.....................................................................1K14
5-12. of RudderAligningTool...........................................................
Installation 1K14
5-13. TrimScrewAssembly ........................................ ................... 1K22
5-14. FlapControlsInstallation ........................................ ................... 1K24
5-15. FlapRigging.................................................................... 1L2
1A6
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont)

Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
5-16. Fabricated Tool, Aileron Rigging ...................... L 15
5-17. Fabricated Tool, Stabilator Leveling, Serial Nos. 27-1 to
27-7554168 incl., and 27-8054001 and up.................... 1L
5-18. Fabricated Tool, Stabilator Leveling, Serial Nos. 27-7645001
to 27-7954121 incl ......................................... 1L17
5-19. Fabricated Tool, Rudder Rigging . .............................. L18
5-20. Fabricated Tool, Rudder Rigging, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" only... I L 19
6-1. Hydraulic System Schematic, PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl...... 2A19
6-2. Hydraulic System Installation, PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and
6-3. Hydraulic System Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 to 27-4425 incl.; and 27-4427 to 27-4573 incl ......... 2A21
6-4. Hydraulic System Installation, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-4426 and 27-4574 to 27-7854050 incl .................... 2A23
27-4426 and 27-4574 to 27-7954121 incl 2A24
6-7. Hydrualic System Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos
27-7854051 to 27-7954121 incl. ............................. 2B1
6-8. Hydraulic System Installation PA-23-250 (six place), Serial
Nos. 27-8054001 and up................................... 2B2
6-9. Hydraulic System Schematic PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-8054001 and up ........................................ 2B3
6-10. Flow Diagram, Both Selector Levers Neutral ..................... 2B4
6-11. Flow Diagram Landing Gear Selector Lever Up .................. 2B4
6-12. Flow Diagram, Landing Gear Selector Lever Down............... 2B5
6-13. Flow Diagram, Flap Selector Lever Down ....................... 2B5
6-14. Flow Diagram, Flap Selector Lever Up ....... ................. 2B6
6-15. Hydraulic System Checking Diagrams, PA-23-250, PA-23-235,
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to
27-2504 incl.............................................. 2B13
6-16. Hydraulic System Checking Diagrams, PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up ..................... ........... 2B15
6-17. Hydraulic Pump, Exploded View ............................... 2C8
6-18. Identification of Powerpak .................................... 2C 11
6-19. Location of Powerpak Components ............................. 2C17
6-20. Hydraulic Powerpak, Exploded View ........ ........ ...... 2C19
6-21. Checking and Adjusting Powerpak ............................. 2D14
6-22. Checking Powerpak Operation ..................... ............ 2D 14
6-23. Hydraulic System Check Valve ................................. 2D23
6-24. Anti-Retraction Valve ......................................... 2E2
6-25. Adjustment of Anti-Retraction Valve ........................... 2E4
6-26. Shuttle Valve ............................................... 2E6
6-27. Nose and Main Landing Gear Actuating Cylinder ................ 2E10
1A7

Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
6-28. Flap Actuating Cylinder ....................................... 2E11

6-29. Nose Gear Door Actuating Cylinder ............................ 2E15
6-30. Main Gear Door Actuating Cylinder ............................ 2E16
6-31. Timer Check Valve ........................................... 2E19
6-32. Priority Valve ................................................ 2E22
6-33. Hydraulic Filter .............................................. 2E24
6-34. Emergency Gear Extender Cable Rigging ........................ 2F3
6-35. Bypass Flow Valve ........................................... 2F4
6-36. Fabricated Work and Test Stand ........................... .... 2F19
6-37. Fabricated Hook ............................................. 2F20
6-38. Fabricated Hook, Double ..................................... 2F20
7-1. Nose Gear Oleo Strut Assembly ............................... . 2G9
7-2. Nose Landing Gear Installation ................................ 2G 14
7-3. Adjustment of Nose Gear Drag Link and Latch Assembly ......... 2G16
7-4. Clamping Rudder Pedals in Neutral ............................ 2G18
7-5. Rudder Pedals Neutral Angle .................................. 2G18
7-6. Aligning the Nose Gear ....................................... 2G20
7-7. Mechanical Nose Gear Door Mechanism, PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl...... 2G22
7-8. Hydraulic Nose Gear Door Mechanism, PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up ................................ 2G24
7-9. Main Gear Oleo Strut Assembly ................................ 2H3 &
2H4
7-10. Main Landing Gear Installation (Left) .......................... 2H8
7-11. Adjustment of Main Gear Drag Link and Latch Assembly ......... 2H10
7-12. Aligning Main Gear ..................... ..................... 2H12
7-13. Mechanical Main Gear Door Mechanism, PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl...... 2H14
7-14. Hydraulic Main Gear Door Mechanism, PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up ..................... ........... 2H16
7-15. Deleted ..................................................... 2H18
7-16. Deleted ..................................................... 2H18
7-17. Adjustment of Nose Gear Up Limit Switch ...................... 2H20
7-18. Adjustment of Main Gear Up Limit Switch ...................... 2H21
7-19. Adjustment of Landing Gear Down Limit Switches ............... 2H22
7-20. Landing Gear Warning Switches ............................... 2H24
7-21. Nose Wheel Assembly ......................................... 211
7-22. Main Wheel Assembly ........................................ 212
7-23. Brake Installation ............................................ 214
7-24. Wheel Brake Assembly (Typical) ...................... ......... 218
7-25. Wheel Brake Assembly, Latest Models of PA-23-250 (six place) .... 218
7-26. Removal and Installation of Anchor Bolts ....................... 2110
7-27. Brake Master Cylinder Assembly ............................... 2114
7-28. Parking Brake ValveAssembly ..................... ............ 2116
7-29. Bleeding Brakes .............................................. 2117
7-30. Nose Gear Oleo Service Tolerances ............................. 2119
1A8

Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
7-31. Main Gear Oleo Service Tolerances ............................. 2122

7-32. Fabricated Tool, Checking Nose Wheel Alignment ............... 2J4
7-33. Tire Balancer . .................................. 2J5
8-1. Cowl Flap Installation ................................. 3A18
8-2. Propeller Installation, PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl ............... 3A20
8-3. Typical Nicks and Removal Method ............................ 3A22
8-4. Propeller Installation, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 and up . ........................... ........ .. 3A24
8-5. Propeller Governor ..................................... 3B10
8-6. Engine Installation, PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.............. 3B13
8-7. Engine Installation, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 and up........................................... 3B19
8-8. Carburetor .................................................. 3B24
8-9. Schematic of RSA Fuel Injection System ........................ 3C2
8-10. Fuel Injector ................................................. 3C6
8-11. Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle......................................... 3C7
8-12. Magneto Inspection ........................................... 3C8
8-13. Contact Spring Inspection..................................... 3C9
8-14. Impulse Coupling ............................................ 3C9
8-15. Magneto Timing Marks ....................................... 3C12
8-16. Timing Pointer............................................... 3C12
8-17. Timing Kit Installed.......................................... 3C14
8-18. Breaker Compartment with Cast Timing Marks .................. 3C14
8-19. Engine Timing Marks ......................................... 3C16
8-20. Ignition System Schematic ..................................... 3C18
8-21. Removing Spark Plug Frozen to Bushing ........................ 3C19
8-22. Adjustment of Ball Joint Exhaust System ........................ 3C24
8A-1. Cowl Flap Installation .................................. . 3D24
8A-2. Propeller Installation . ................................. . 3E3
8A-3. Typical Nicks and Removal Method ............................ 3E4
8A-4. Propeller Governor ..................................... . 3EI I
8A-5. Engine Installation ........................................... 3E15
8A-6. Schematic of RSA Fuel Injection System ........................ 3E20
8A-7. Fuel Injector ................................................. 3E21
8A-8. Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle ......................................... 3E24
8A-9. Contact Points ............................................... 3F2
8A-10. Contact Spring Inspection ................................ .. 3F2
8A-I 1. Rotor Holding Tool Installed .................................. 3F4
8A-12. Timing Kit Installed .................................... . 3F4
8A-13. Aligning Timing Marks .................................... 3F6
8A-14. Forming Leads in Breaker Compartment ........................ 3F7
8A-15. Engine Timing Mark .......................................... 3F8
8A-16. Magneto Timing Mark ........................................ 3F8
8A-17. Removal of Spring From Lead Assembly ........................ 3F9
8A-18. Assembly Tool .................................. 3F10
1A9

Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
8A-19. Using Assembling Tool........................................ 3F I

8A-20. Measuring Lead Assembly Length .............................. 3F12
8A-21. Cutting Metallic Braid From End of Lead ....................... 3F12
8A-22. Unbraiding Metallic Shielding.................................. 3F12
8A-23. Forming Shielding Around Ferrule ............................. 3F13
8A-24. Ferrule Seating Tool.......................................... 3F13
8A-25. Needle ...................................................... 3F13
8A-26. Measuring Wire .............................................. 3F14
8A-27. Installing Grommet Over Lead Assemblies....................... 3F14
8A-28. Lead Assembly Installed in Grommet ........................... 3F15
8A-29. Wire Doubled Over for Installation of Eyelet .................... 3F15
8A-30. Ignition System Schematic..................................... 3F16
8A-31. Removing Spark Plug Frozen to Bushing........................ 3F18
8A-32. Turbocharger System Diagram ................................. 3F22
8B-I. Cowl Flap Installation ........................................ 3H9
8B-2. Engine Installation ........................................... 3H15
8B-3. Turbocharger System Diagram ................................ 3H20
9-1. Fuel System Diagram (2 Valves), PA-23-250 and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2222 incl ................ 3114
9-2. Fuel System Diagram, PA-23-235 and PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2223 to 27-2504 incl .......................... 3115
9-3. Fuel System Diagram, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2322 to 27-2504 incl. ................................... 3116
27-2505 to 27-3836; 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl................... 3117
27-3937, 27-3944 to 27-7554172 incl. ........................ 3118
9-6. Fuel System Diagram, PA-23-250 "F", Serial Nos.
27-7654001 and up........................................ 3119
27-2582, 27-2686, 27-3135 and 27-4520 ...................... 3120
9-8. Wing Tip Fuel Cell Installation ................................ 3124
9-9. Fuel Cell Installation, Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-7654000 incl.......... 3J2
9-10. Fuel Cell Installation, Serial Nos. 27-7654000 and up ............. 3J3
9-11. Fuel Indicating System Wiring Schematic ........................ 3J10
9-12. Check Fuel Quantity Sender ................................... 3J11
9-13. Check Fuel Gauges Schematic ................................. 3JII
9-14. Fuel Selector Valve........................................... 3J14
9-15. Fuel Selector Valve Installation, PA-23-250 and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl ................ 3J15
9-16. Fuel Selector Valve (Scott) .................................... 3J18
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2223 to 27-7305126 incl............. 3J19
9-18. Fuel Selector Valve Port Positions ............................. 3J21
1A10

Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
(six place) (Dukes P/N 3654-00-1, -2)..................... 3J23
9-20. Fuel Crossfeed Valve ...... ................ 3K5
9-21. Fuel Filter, PA-23-235, PA-23-250 and PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl .......................... 3K8
9-22. Fuel Filter, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up ...... 3K8
9-23. Bendix Electric Fuel Pumps (Early and Late) .................... 3K12
9-24. Weldon Rotary Fuel Pump ................................... 3K15
9-25. Shaft Seal Installation ........................................ 3K 17
9-26. Bench Test Set-Up (Typical) ..................................... 3K19
9-27. Engine Primer .............................................. 3K21
9-28. Fabricated Fuel Quantity Transmitter Checking Jig............... 3 I
9-29. Fuel Selector Control Cables, PA-23-235, PA-23-250, and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 thru 27-7954076 3L3
9-30. Fuel Selector Control Cables, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos:
27-7954077 and up ........................................ 3L4
10-1. Instrument Panel, PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 ..................... 4A11
10-2. Instrument Panel, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2000 to 27-2504 inc................................... 4A 12
27-2505 to 27-3153 incl. 4A 13
27-3154 to 27-3836 and 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl.............. 4A14
27-3837, 27-3944 to 27-4425 and 27-4427 to 27-4573 incl. ...... 4A15
27-4426 and 27-4574 to 27-7554172 incl ..................... 4A16
10-7. Dual Instrument Panel (Optional Equipment), PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-7305222, 27-7405235 to 27-7554172 incl ........ 4A17
27-7554001 to 27-7554168 incl ............................. 4A18
10-9. Instrument Panel (Typical), PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up .... .................. ..... 4A 19
10-10. Vacuum System, PA-23-250, Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-443 incl ........ 4B3
10-11. Vacuum System, PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. ......................... 4B5
10-12. Vacuum System, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 and up.......................................... 4B7
10-13. Vacuum System, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-3837, 27-3944 and up .. ... ...................... 4B8
10-14. Vacuum System, Dual (Optional Equipment), PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 7305222 and 7405235 and up .......... 4B9
11-1. Generator Wiring System Schematic ....................... .. ... 4C12
11-2. Sectional View of Generator .. ................................. 4C 16
11-3. Wiring Circuit ............................................... 4C18
1All

Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
11-4. Current/Voltage Regulator .................................... 4C24

11-5. Use of Riffler File to Clean Contact Points ...................... 4D4
11-6. Voltage Regulator Air Gap .. .............................. 4D4
11-7. Checking Voltage Setting - Fixed Resistance Method ............. 4D5
11-8. Checking Voltage Setting - Variable Resistance Method ........... 4D5
11-9. Adjusting Voltage Regulator Setting ............................ 4D6
11-10. Cutout Relay Air Gap Check and Adjustments ................... 4D8
11-11. Cutout Relay Point Opening Check and Adjustment .............. 4D8
11-12. Checking Cutout Relay Closing Voltage ......................... 4D9
11-13. Adjustment of Cutout Relay Closing Voltage .................... 4D9
11-14. Checking Current Regulator, Load Method ...................... 4D10
11-15. Checking Current Regulator, Jumper Lead Method ............... 4D10
11-16. Checking and Adjusting Relay Air Gap ......................... 4D13
11-17. Checking and Adjusting Relay Point Opening .................... 4D13
11-18. Checking Relay Closing Voltage ................................ 4D14
11-19. Adjusting Relay Closing Voltage ............................... 4D14
11-20. Alternator System Wiring Schematic (Delco-Remy) ............... 4D17
11-21. Cross-Sectional View of Alternator ............................. 4D18
11-22. Checking Rotor ..................... ......................... 4D19
11-23. Slip Ring End Frame ............ .................... ... 4D20
11-24. Checking Stator .............................................. 4D20
11-25. Checking Diodes ............................................. 4D21
11-26. Brush Holder Assembly ............ ..................... 4D23
11-27. Exploded View of Heat Sink Assembly .......................... 4D24
11-28. Alternator Output Check ...................................... 4EI
11-29. Volt - Ohmmeter Test ......................................... 4E4
11-30. Jumper Connection ........................................... 4E4
11-31. Regulator Checks ........................................ 4E5
11-32. Relay Tests .................................. 4E7
11-33. Exploded View of Alternator .................................. 4E8
11-33a. Alternator Blast Tube Routing ................................ 4E9
11-34. Alternator System Wiring Schematic (Prestolite) .................. 4E10
11-35. Removal of Rectifier .......................................... 4E11
11-36. Removal of Slip Ring End Bearing ............................. 4E11
11-37. Removal of Drive End Head ................................... 4E12
11-38. Removal of End Head Bearing ................................. 4E12
11-39. Testing Rotor for Grounds ............ ................. 4E13
11-40. Testing Rotor for Shorts ...................................... 4E13
11-41. Installation of Bearing ........................................ 4E14
11-42. Installation of Rectifier ........................................ 4E14
11-43. Terminal Assembly ........................................... 4E15
11-44. Slip Ring End Bearing Assembly ............................... 4E15
11-45. Testing Alternator ............................................ 4E16
1A12

Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
11-46. Brush Installation ............................................ 4E17
11-47. Internal Wiring Diagram ...................................... 4E17
11-47a. Alternator Paralleling System Wiring Schematic .................. 4E21
11-48. Regulator Diagram (Prestolite) ................................. 4F2
11-48a. Regulator Diagram (Lamar) ................................... 4F2
11-49. Testing Regulator (Prestolite) .................................. 4F5
11-49a. Testing Regulator (Lamar) ..................................... 4F6
11-49b. Adjusting Regulator (Lamar) .................................. 4F7
11-50. Application of Over-Voltage Control............................ 4F9
11-51. Testing Over-Voltage Control .................................. 4F9
11-52. No-Load Test Hookup ........................................ 4F15
11-53. Lock-Torque Test Hookup .................................... 4F16
11-54. Resistance Test Hookup ....................................... 4F16
11-55. Exploded View of Gear Reduction Starting Motor ................ 4F20
11-56. Turning Starting Motor Commutator ................... ........ 4F23
11-57. Testing Motor Armature for Shorts ............................. 4F23
11-58. Testing Motor Fields for Grounds .............................. 4F24
11-59. No-Load Test Hookup ........................................ 4GI
11-60. Stall-Torque Hookup ......................................... 4GI
11-61. Landing Light Installation, PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 ............. 4G6
- 1-62. Landing Light Installation, PA-23-250 (six place) ................. 4G6
NOTE
Electrical Schematics for Section XI, see Grid 4C5.
12-1. Two Year, Magnesium Battery Connection (Garrett) .............. 5A11

12-2. Five Year, Lithium Battery Connections (Garrett) ................ 5A12
12-3.* Emergency Locator Transmitter Schematics (Garrett) ............. 5A21
12-4. Emergency Locator Transmitter Schematic (Communications
Components Corp. Early Models) .......................... 5A22
Components Corp. Later Models) .......................... 5A23
12-6. Emergency Locator Transmitter Schematic (Narco) ............... 5A23
12-7. ELT Portable Folding Antenna (Narco) ......................... 5A24
12-8. ELT Using Fixed Aircraft Antenna (Narco) ...................... 5A24
12-9. Avionic Antenna Locations .................................... 5B1
13-1. Heating and Ventilating System, PA-23-235 and PA-23-250,
Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-504 incl ............................. 5B11
13-2. Heating and Ventilating System, PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl ......................... 5B12
Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3049, 27-3051 to 27-3153 incl ........ 5B13
1A13

Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.

Serial Nos. 27-3050, 27-3154 to 27-3836, 27-3838 to
27-3943 incl. .............................. 5B14
Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 and up ................. 5B15
13-6. Heating and Ventilating System, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial
Nos. 244426 and 27-4574 and up .................. 5B16
13-7. Flow System (South Wind Heater) .................... 5B20
13-8. Fuel Safety Valve (Cutaway View) .................... 5B21
13-9. Fuel Control Valve (Cutaway View) ................... 5B24
13-10. Wiring, Models 940-D and 940-DA .................... 5C1
13-11. Wiring, Models 940-DB and 940-K .................... 5C1
13-12. Heater Installation, PA-23-235 and PA-23-250 ............. 5C10
13-13. Heater Installation, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.; PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3049, 27-3051 to 27-3153 incl. ..... 5C12
13-14. Flame Detector Switch (Cutaway View) ................. 5C15
13-15. Exploded Parts View, Heater Assembly ................. 5D2
13-16. Exploded Parts View, Ventilating Air Blower Assembly ........ 5D4
13-17. Ventilating Air Blower Motor ....................... 5D7
13-18. Combustion Air Blower Motor .............. . 5D8
13-19. Detail of Exhaust Extensions Installation .......... .... . 5D13
13-20. Fuel flow Test Set Up ........................... 5D15
13-21. Heater Assembly and Combustion Air Blower .............. 5E2
13-22. Diagramatic Cutaway of Heater to Show Wirling Flame Action .... 5E3
13-23. Fuel Regulator and Shutoff Valve ..................... 5E4
13-24. Top View - Duct Switch (Typical Control Lever Positions) ...... 5E4
13-25. Wiring Diagram ............................... 5E6
13-26. Primary Power Circuit ........................... 5E10
13-27. Starting Power Circuit ................... ........ 5E 1
13-28. Spark Plug Gap Adjustment ........................ 5E14
13-28a. Spark Plug Fixture ........................................... 5E18
13-28b. Wiring - Test Setup ........................................... 5E18
13-29. Suggested Design for Seal Plate, Plugs and Caps for Combustion
Tube Leakage Test ........................... 5F4
13-30. Test Set-Up for Combustion Air Pressure Switch ........... 5F5
13-31. Exploded View of Heater Assembly No. 751 978 and No. 751 999.. 5F8
13-32. Exploded View - Combustion Air Blower and Motor Assembly
No. 753 443 ............................... 5F12
13-33. Suggested Set-Up for Heater Operation Test ............... 5F 13
13-34. Wiring connections for Heater Operation Test .............. 5F14
13-35. Heater Fuel Filter ............................. . 5F17
1A14

Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
13-36. Heater Fuel Valve ............. ............................... 5F 17

13-37. Heater Assembly and Combustion Air Blower .................... 5F19
13-38. Diagramatic Cutaway of Heater to Show Whirling Flame Action ... 5G2
13-39. Fuel Regulator and Shutoff Valve .............................. 5G3
13-40. Top View - Duct Switch (Typical Control Lever Position) ......... 5G3
13-41. Wiring Diagram .............................................. 5G5
13-42. Primary Power Circuit ........................................ 5G8
13-43. Starting Power Circuit ........................................ 5G9
13-44. Spark Plug Gap Adjustment and Tool .......................... 5G 13
13-44a. Spark Plug Fixture ........................................... 5G15
13-44b. Wiring - Test Setup .................. ......... 5G 17
13-45. Suggested Design for Seal Plate Plugs and Caps for
Combustion Tube Leakage Test ............................ 5H I
13-46. Test Setup for Combustion Air Pressure Switch .................. 5H I
13-47. Exploded View of Heater Assembly No. 755 257 ............. ... . 5H7
13-48. Exploded View of Combustion Air Blower and Motor
Assembly No. 758 304 .................................... 5H9
13-49. Suggested Setup for Heater Operation Test ...................... 5H 10
13-50. Wiring Connection for Heater Operation Test .................... 5H II
14-1. Oxygen Tubing Installations ................................... 5H 19
14-2. Oxygen System Installation, PA-23-250 .......... .............. 5H20
14-3. Oxygen System Installation, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial
Nos. 27-2000 to 27-3049 incl.; and 27-3051 to 27-3153
incl .................................................... 5H21
Nos. 27-3154 to 27-3836 incl.; and 27-3838 to 27-3943
incl ...................... ....................... ...... 5H 22
Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 and up .............................. 5H 23
14-6. Propeller De-Icer Installation, PA-23-250 ........................ 516
14-7. Propeller De-Icer Installation, PA-23-250 (six place) .............. 516
14-8. Electrical Diagram Showing Cycle Sequence, Phase I ............. 518
14-9. Electrical Diagram Showing Cycle Sequence, Phase 2 ............. 518
14-12. Relocating Bend in Deicer Lead ................................ 5111
14-13. Determining Brush Wear ...................................... 5112
14-14. Determining Brush Wear ...................................... 5112
14-15. Checking Slip Ring Run-Out .................................. 5113
14-16. Wear Pattern of Misaligned Brush .............................. 5113
14-17. Brush Block Positioning ....................................... 5115
14-18. Schematic Wiring Diagram, PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl............... 5118
14-19. Schematic Wiring Diagram, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 and up........................................... 5118
1A15
PIPER AZTEC SERVICE MANUAL,
Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
14-20. Brush Insert Assembly, PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and PA-23-250

14-21. Brush Block Assembly, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial
Nos. 27-2505 and up ...................................... 5J4
14-22. Holding Brushes for Soldering, PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and
27-2504 incl.............................................. 5J5
14-23. Holding Brushes for Soldering, PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up ................................ 5J6
14-24. Modular Brush Assembly ..................................... 5J7
14-25. Patching Deicer Lead Strap .................................... 5J12
14-26. Spinner Dome Cushioning ..................................... 5J13
14-27. Hub Clamp Cushioning ....................................... 5J14
14-28. Propeller Blade in Low Pitch .................................. 5J16
14-29. Propeller Blade in Feather Position ............................. 5J16
14-30. Pneumatic Deicer Installation (Wet Vacuum Pump), Serial
Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3944 incl................................ 5J18
14-31. Pneumatic Deicer Installation (Dry Vacuum Pump), Serial
Nos. 27-4510 to 27-7304963; 27-7304965 to
27-7304993 incl........................................... 5 19
Nos. 27-7304964 to 27-7554168 incl .......................... 5J20
Nos. 27-7554112 to 27-7554168 incl .......................... 5J21
28-Volt DC System, 3D1472 Timer ............................. 5J24
14-34.
14-Volt DC System, 3D1740 Timer ............................. 5324
14-35.
14-36. Pneumatic Deicer System Schematic (Using Time Module) ........ 5KI
14-37. Pneumatic Deicer System Schematic (Airborne System) ........... 5KI
Propeller Synchronizer System Installation ...................... 5K20
14-38.
Synchronizer Schematic ....................................... 5K22
14-39.
Mechanical Connections ....................................... 5K23
14-40.
14-41. Fabricated Test Box .......................................... 5LI
Synchrophaser Installation ..................................... 5L6
14-42.
Strobe Sensor................................................ 5L12
14-43.
Pulse Generator.............................................. 5L13
14-44.
Computer Assembly .......................................... 5L16
14-45.
Fabricated Test Box .......................................... 5L17
14-46.
Electrical Schematic .......................................... 5L17
14-47.
Strobe Sensor Internal Wiring Test Unit......................... 5L18
14-48.
Strobe Sensor Simulator ...................................... 5L18
14-49.
Patch Cable and Test Terminal ................................ 5L19
14-50.
Pulse Generator Simulator..................................... 5L19
14-51.
14-52. Synchrophaser Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-7854068 and up........................................ 5L21
1A16
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1A17
LIST OF TABLES
Table Aerofiche
Grid No.
II-I. Leading Particulars and Principle Dimensions ................. 1

II-11. Consumable Materials ...................................... 1
II-III. Flair Fitting Torques ................................ IC1O
II-IV. Recommended Nut Torques ................................. IC11
II-V. Conversion Tables .................................. IC15
II-VI. Decimal/Millimeter Equivalents of Drill Sizes .......... 1
II-VII. Paint Materials ............................................ ID6
II-VIII. Propeller Chamber Pressure Requirements with
Temperature........................................... D24
II-IX. Indicated Oxygen Cylinder Pressure vs. Ambient
Temperature ........................................... I E3
II-X. Recommended Lubricating Oils .............................. IE8
II-XI. Thread Lubricants .................................. 1
III-I. Inspection Report ....................... ................... 1F5
IV-I. List of Materials (Thermoplastic Repair) .............. 1110
V-I. Control Surface Travel and Cable Tension .................... 1123
V-II. Troubleshooting Chart (Surface Controls) ..................... L7 1
VI-l. Leading Particulars, Hydraulic System ........................ 2A 17
VI-II. Leading Particulars, Powerpak Assembly ..................... 2A18
VI-III. Inspection and Repair, Engine-Driven Hydraulic Pump ......... 2C7
VI-IV. Special Tools and Test Equipment ............................ 2C23
VI-V. Hydraulic System Troubleshooting ........................... 2F5
VI-VI. Powerpak Troubleshooting .................................. 2F8
VI-VII. Powerpak Parts List ........................................ 2F11
VI-VIII. Powerpak Service Limits .................................... 2F17
VII-l. Wheel and Brake Wear Limits ............................... 213
VII-II. Landing Gear Oleo Service Tolerances 19273-02
Nose Gear............................................. 2120
VII-III. Landing Gear Oleo Service Tolerances 19272-02
Main Gear ............................................ 2123
VII-IV. Landing Gear and Brake System Troubleshooting .............. 2J I
VIII-I. Propeller Specifications - PA-23-250; PA-23-235 and
27-2504 incl............................................ 3A23
VIII-II. Propeller Specifications - PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up .............................. 3B1
VIII-Ill. Engine Troubleshooting (Carburetor) ......................... 3D2
VIIIA-I. Propeller Specifications ..................................... 3E6
VIIIA-II. Engine Troubleshooting (Fuel Injection) ....................... 3G12
VIIIB-I. Engine Troubleshooting ..................................... 3H24
IX-I. Fuel System Troubleshooting ........... ..................... 3K23
IX-II. Fuel System Pressures ..... ............................... 3L2
X-I. Instrument Markings - PA-23-250; PA-23-235 and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. with
Carburetor Induction System ............................ 4B12
1A18
LIST OF TABLES (cont)

Table Aerofiche
Grid No.
X-II. Instrument Markings - PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2322 and up with Fuel Injected Induction System or
AiResearch Turbocharger ............................... 4B13
X-III. Instrument Troubleshooting ................................. 4B14
XI-I. Index - Electrical System Schematics ....................... 4C5
XI-II. Summary of Alternator Checks .............................. 4E3
XI-III. Electrical System Troubleshooting ............................ 4G 12
XI-IV. Lamp Replacement Guide................................... 4G23
XI-V. Circuit Load Chart......................................... 4H1
XI-VI. Electrical Wire Coding...................................... 4H8
XI-VII. Electrical Symbols ....................................... 4H9
XIII-I. Heater Troubleshooting (South Wind) ........................ 5C21
XIII-II. Heater Troubleshooting (Janitrol) 14 Volt ......... .......... 5D20
XIII-III. Heater Troubleshooting (Janitrol) 28 Volt ..................... 5F20
XIV-I. Propeller Deicer System Troubleshooting ..................... 5119
XIV-II. Pneumatic Deicer Operating Pressures ........................ 5K3
XIV-III. Pneumatic Deicer System Troubleshooting .................... 5K15
XIV-IV. Troubleshooting Chart (Propeller Synchronizer)................ 5L2
XIV-V. Troubleshooting Chart (Engine Synchrophaser)................ 5L20
1A19
1A20
SECTION
I
INTRODUCTION
Aerofiche
Grid No.
Paragraph
1-1. General ..... .... 1A22
1-2. Scope of Manual .. .... 1A22
1-3. Description .... . . .
.... 1A22
1-4. Fuselage ... ..... . . .
.... 1A22
1-5. Wing ..... . . .
.... 1A23
1-6. Empennage .... . . .
.... 1A23
1-7. Flight Controls ... .... 1A23
1-8. Hydraulic System. .... 1A23
1-9. Landing Gear ... .... 1A23
1-10. Engines and Propellers .. .... 1A23
1-11. Fuel System .. ..... .... . IBI
1-12. Instruments .... ... . 1B1
1-13. Electronic Equipment . ... .. . 1B1
1-14. Heater and Ventilating System •... . 1B1
Reissued: 2/18/81
1A21
SECTION I
INTRODUCTION
1-1. GENERAL. This manual contains service and maintenance instructions for the Piper
Aztec, PA-23-250, PA-23-250 (six place) and Apache PA-23-235 airplanes, designed and
manufactured as a versatile aircraft in the Personal, Businessand Military aviation field by
the Piper Aircraft Corporation, Lock Haven,Pennsylvania.
1-2. SCOPE OF MANUAL. Sections II and III comprise the service part of this
manual, whereas Sections IV through XIV comprise the maintenance instructions.
The service instructions include ground handling, servicing and inspection. The
maintenance instructions for each system include troubleshooting, removal and
installation of components, and corrective maintenance and testing; each major
system of the airplane is covered in a separate section. Only qualified personnel
should perform the operations described in this manual.
The description of the airplane included in this section is limited to general
information. Section II gives leading particulars and principal dimensions, while
each major system is described in its appropriate section of the manual.
1-3. DESCRIPTION. The Piper PA-23 series airplanes are a five or six place,
twin-engine, low-wing monoplane of all-metal construction. The following para-
graphs provide descriptions of the major components and systems.
1-4. FUSELAGE. The fuselage, of truss and semi-monocoque type construction,

is a combination of four basic units: The nose section, cabin section, tail sec-
tion and a steel tubular frame, which extends from the tail section, through the
cabin section, to the nose wheel.
INTRODUCTION
Reissued: 2/18/81
1A22
1-5. WING. The rectangular wingis of all-metal stressed skin, full cantilever,
low-wing design, consisting of two wing panels bolted together at the center of
the fuselage. The wing tips are removable. The ailerons are cable and push rod
controlled and are statically and dynamically balanced. The trailing edge type
wing flaps are hydraulically operated.
1-6. EMPENNAGE. The empennage consists of the vertical stabilizer (fin),

rudder with trim tab, and a horizontal stabalator. The control surfaces are dy-
namically and statically balanced.
1-7. FLIGHT CONTROLS. The flight controls are conventional equipment, con-
sisting of a control wheel which operates the ailerons and stabilators and pedals
for operating the rudder and brakes. Except for the brakes, duplicate controls
are provided for the co-pilot.
1-8. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. Two separate hydraulic systems are incorporated

in the airplane. The main system incorporates a hydraulic Powerpak that oper-
ates the landing gear and flaps. The second system operates the airplane's brake
system.
1-9. LANDINGGEAR. The tricycle landing gear system is hydraulically oper-

ated and retractable with doors that cover the gear when retracted. The gear
struts are air-oil type units.
1-10. ENGINES AND PROPELLERS. The airplane is powered by two Avco-

Lycoming six cylinder, direct drive, wet sump, horizontally opposed, fuel in-
jected engines. The propellers are Hartzell full feathering, constant speed units
controlled by a governor mounted on each engine. Each model with its engines
and propellers are listed on the next page.
INTRODUCTION
Reissued:2/18/81
1A23
MODEL ENGINE PROPELLER H.P. OCTANE
PA-23-250 0-540-A I B5 HC-A2XK-2 250 91, 96

14-Volt Electrical or HC-A2VK-2 or
System 0-540-A I D5 HC-82XK-2C I See Note 2
PA-23-250 O-540-A3D5 HC-A2XK-2 250 91/96

28-Volt Electrical HC-A2VK-2 or
System HC-82XK-2C I See Note 2
PA-23-235 0-540-B I A5 HC-A2XK-2 or 235 80, 87

HC-A2VK-2 See Note 2
PA-23-250 (six place) 0-540-A I D5 HC-A2XK-2 250 91/96

Ser. Nos. 27-2000 to or HC-A2VK-2 or
27-2504 10-540-C B5 HC-82XK-2C I See Note 2
1O-540-C4B5 250 91 96
PA-23-250 (six place)
Ser. Nos. 27-2505 See Note I Below
and up (non-Turbo) See Note 2
10-540-J4A5 250 100/130

and up with
AiResearch Turbo
Charger See Note 2
TIO-540-CIA 250 100/130

and up with Lycoming
Turbo Charger
Installation See Note 2
NOTES:
1. Propellers that may be used on these model planes include HC-E2YK-2RB. HC-E2YK-2RBS.
HC-E2YR-2RB, HC-E2YR-2RBS. HC-E2YR-2RBF, and HC-E2YR-2RBSF.
2. For alternate fuel grade designations, see latest Avco Lycoming Service Instructions No. 1070.
INTRODUCTION
1A24
1A24 Reissued: 2/18/81
1-1 1. FUEL SYSTEM. The fuel system consists of four bladder type fuel cells located in
the wings with a total fuel capacity of 144 U.S. gallons. Aircraft with serial nos. 27-7654001
and up may have optional wing tip fuel cells which will increase the total fuel capacity to
184 U.S. gallons. Incorporated in the fuel system are fuel filters, electric auxiliary fuel
pumps, engine driven pumps, and a crossfeed system.
1-12. INSTRUMENTS. Provisions for the instrument installation includes panels for engine
instruments and advance flight instruments, as well as space for electronics equipment. The
panel is shock mounted to minimize vibration to the instruments.
1-13. ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT. Provision for electronic equipment includes various

combinations of radio installations and Autopilot.
1-14. HEATER AND VENTILATING SYSTEM. The airplane's heater provides hot air for
the cabin and for windshield defrosting. In conjunction with the heating system is the
ventilating system which is used to cool the cabin and to furnish the heater with outside air.
INTRODUCTION
Reissued: 2/18/81
1B1
SECTION II
HANDLING AND SERVICING
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
2- . Introduction .............................................................. IB5

2-2. Dimensions ............................................................... 1B5
2-3. Station Reference Lines .................................................... IB5
2-4. Weight and Balance ........................................................ IC8
2-5. Serial Number Plate ....................................................... IC8
2-6. Access and Inspection Provisions ............................................ IC8
2-7. Tools and Test Equipment .................................................. IC8
2-8. Torque Requirements ...................................................... C8
2-9. Torque Wrenches .......................................................... IC9
2-10. Ground Handling .......................................................... IC21
2-11. Introduction to Ground Handling ................................... IC21
2-12. Jacking .......................................................... IC21
2-13. Weighing ........................................................ IC22
2-14. Leveling ......................................................... IC23
2-15. Mooring ........................................................ 1C24
2-16. Parking .......................................................... IC24
2-17. Towing .......................................................... IDI
2-18. Taxiing .......................................................... IDI
2-19. External Power Receptacle ......................................... ......... ID
2-20. Operation of External Power Receptacle ............................. IDI
2-21. Cleaning ......... ....................................................... ID2
2-22. Cleaning Engine Compartment ..................................... ID2
2-23. Cleaning Landing Gear ............................................ ID2
2-24. Cleaning Exterior Surfaces ......................................... ID3
2-25. Cleaning Windshield and Windows ................................... ID3
2-26. Cleaning Headliner, Side Panels and Seats ........................... ID3
2-27. Cleaning Carpets ............................................ ..... ID4
2-28. Repainting (Polythane Enamel) ..................................... ID4
2-29. Scratch Touch-up on Aluminum Surface ............................. ID4
2-30. Coating Procedure for New Aluminum Panel -
Non-Alodized .................................................... D4
2-31. Coating Procedure for Alodized Aluminum .......................... ID4
2-32. Mixing Instructions for Primers and Topcoats ........................ ID5
2-33. V-48 Wash Primer ................................................ ID5
2-34. Epoxy Primer .................................................... ID5
2-35. Polytane 6351 Primer ............................................. ID5
2-36. Mixing Instructions for Polytane Enamel ............................ ID6
2-37. Polytane Enamel all Colors ........................................ ID6
2-38. Standard Practices - Airframe ............................................... 1D7
2-39. Cherrylock Rivets, Removal ........................................ 1D7
2-40. Identification of Fluid Lines ........................................ D9
2-41. Flareless - Tube Assemblies ................ ...................... .. D9
2-42. Support Clamps .................................................. D 12
2-43. Servicing ................................................................. ID13
2-44. Introduction to Servicing .......................................... 1D13
Reissued: 2/18/81
1B2
Aerofiche
Grid No.
2-45. Hydraulic System ......................................................... ID13

2-46. Servicing Hydraulic System ........................................ ID13
2-47. Powerpak Reservoir ....................................................... ID14
2-48. Filling Powerpak Reservoir (Gravity) ................................ ID14
2-49. Filling Powerpak Reservoir (Pressure) ............................... ID18
2-50. Landing Gear System ...................................................... ID18
2-51. Servicing Landing Gear ............................................ ID18
2-52. Oleo Struts ............................................................... ID19
2-53. Servicing Oleo Struts .............................................. ID19
2-54. Adding Fluid to Struts ................. ID20
2-55. Filling Oleo Struts ..................... ID20
2-56. Inflating Oleo Struts ................... ......... ............... ID21
2-57. Brake System .................................. ID21
2-58. Servicing Brake System ................. ......... ............... ID21
2-59. Filling Brake Cylinder Reservoir......... ......... ............... ID21
.. ............
2-60. Draining Brake System ................. ......... ..... . 1 ID21
2-61. Tires .......................................... ID21
2-62. Servicing Tires ........................ ID21
2-63. Power Plant ................................... ID22
2-64. Servicing Power Plant .................. ........................ ID22
2-65. Induction Air Filter ............................. ........................ ID22
2-66. Removal and Installation of Air Filter.... ........................ ID22
2-67. Service Instructions .................... ........................ ID23
2-68. Propeller ...................................... ID24
........................
2-69. Servicing Propeller..................... ID24
........................
2-70. Fuel System ................................... IEl
........................
2-71. Servicing Fuel System .................. IEI
........................
2-72. Filling Fuel Cells ...................... IEl
2-73. Draining Moisture from Fuel System ..... IEI
2-74. Draining Fuel System .................. 1El
2-75. Oxygen System................................. IEI
2-76. Servicing Oxygen System .............. IEI
2-77. Oxygen System Safety Precautions....... IE2
2-78. Filling Oxygen Cylinder ................ IE3
2-79. Lubrication.................................... IE4
2-80. Oil System (Engine) ............................. 1E4
2-81. Servicing Oil System ................... IE4
2-82. Draining Oil Sump..................... IE4
2-83. Filling Oil Sump ....................... IE5
2-84. Oil Screen (Pressure) ................... IE5
2-85. Oil Filter. Full Flow ................... IE5
2-86. Oil Screen (Suction) ................... 1E6
2-87. Recommendations for Changing Oil ...... IE6
2-88. Lubrication Instructions .................................... IE7
2-89. Application of Oil......................................... IE7
2-90. Application of Grease ...................................... IE7
2-91. Lubrication Chart ......................................... IE8
...........
...........
Reissued: 2/18/81
1B3
1B4
*PIPER AZTEC SERVICE MANUAL
SECTION II
HANDLINGAND SERVICING
2-1. INTRODUCTION. This sectioncontains routinehandlingandservicingpro-

cedures that are most frequently encountered. Frequent reference to this section
will aid the individual by providing information such as the location of various
components, ground handling procedures, routine service procedures and lubri-
cation. When any system or component requires service other than the procedures
as outlined in this section, refer to the appropriate section for that component.
2-2. DIMENSIONS. The principle airplane dimensions are shown in Figures

2-1, 2-2 and 2-3 and are listed in Table II-I.
2-3. STATION REFERENCE LINES. In order to facilitate the location of vari-

ous components of the airplane which require maintenance and servicing, a
method utilizing fuselage station (Sta. ), wing station or buttock line (BL), and
water line (WL) designations is frequently employed in this manual. (Refer to
Figure 2-6.) Fuselage stations, buttock lines, and water lines are reference
points measured by inches in the vertical or horizontal direction from a given
reference line which indicates station locations of structural members of the
airplane. The BL station 0 of the wing and stabilator is the center line of the
airplane; and station 0 (WL) of the vertical stabilizer and rudder is 12 inches
below the bottom edge of the forward left side window.
NOTE
For weight and balance purposes, refer to the airplane

Flight Manual. The fuselage station reference lines
and the datum lines (arm) are not the same. The ref-
erence datum line or arm 0 is 6.25 inches forward of
fuselage station 0.

Reissued: 2/18/81
1B5
2118
37' 1.8"
Figure 2-1. Three-View of PA-23-250 and PA-23-235

Reissued: 2/18/81
1B6
2119
0.614
ENGINE
THRUST
CENTER
LINE
Figure 2-2. Three-View of PA-23-250 (six place)

Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.

Reissued: 2/18/81
1B7
2115


Reissued: 2/18/81
1B8
2112 12' 6.00"
37' 1.750"
2114
2113

Serial Nos. 27-4426 and 27-4574 to 27-7554168 incl.

Reissued: 2/18 81
1B9
2171
37' 3.75"


Reissued: 2/18/81
1B10
9.515M

Serial Nos. 27-8054001 and up

Reissued: 2/18/81
1Bl1
1B12
TABLE II-I. LEADING PARTICULARS AND PRINCIPLE DIMENSIONS
MODEL PA-23-250 PA-23-235
ENGINE
Manufacturer Avco-Lycoming Avco-Lycoming

Model 0-540-A 1B5, 0-540-A1D5 0-540-B IA5
or O-540-A3D5
FAA Type Certificate 295 295
Rated Horsepower 250 235
Rated Speed:
Full Throttle 2575 RPM 2575 RPM
Turbocharger Power Setting:
Turbo Cruise
Oil S.A.E. Number See Table II-V See Table II-V
Oil Sump Capacity 12 U.S. quarts 12 U.S. quarts
Fuel, Aviation Grade, Minimum
Octane 91/96 80/87(16)
Carburetor, Marvel-Schebler MA-4-5 MA-4-5
Fuel Injector Bendix
Magnetos, Scintilla:
Right S6LN-21 1/ S6LN-204(2)(3 S6LN-204
Left S6LN-21 ( / S6LN-200(2,(3) S6LN-200
Magneto Timing 25 degrees BTC 25 degrees BTC
Magneto Point Clearance:
Main .018 + .006 .018 + .006
Retard .018 + .006 .018 ± .006
Retard Angle
Spark Plugs, Shielded:
Champion REM-40E EM-42E
AC SR-88 S-88
Spark Plug Gap Setting(8) .018 to .022 .018 to .022
Firing Order 1-4-5-2-3-6 1-4-5-2-3-6
Starter, Delco-Remy:
14-Volt 1109688<,)/1109511(2) 1109511
28-Volt 1109696(3)
Starter, Prestolite:
14-Volt
28-Volt
REFER TO GRID IB20 FOR FOOTNOTE LEGEND

Reissued: 2/18/81
1B13
TABLE II-I. LEADING PARTICULARS AND PRINCIPLE DIMENSIONS (cont)
PA-23-250 (six place) PA-23-250 (six place) PA-23-250 (six place)

Ser. Nos. 27-2000 Ser. Nos. 27-2505 and up Ser. Nos. 27-3944
to 27-2504 incl. and up
ENGINE
Manufacturer Avco-Lycoming Avco-Lycoming Avco-Lycoming

Model 0-540-AID5 10-540-C4B5 TIO-540-C IA
or 10-540-C B5 or IO-540-J4A5
FAA Type Certificate 295()/ 1E4(4) IE4 E14EA

Rated Horsepower 250 250 250
Rated Speed:
Full Throttle 2575 RPM 2575 RPM5) 2575 RPM
Turbocharger Power Setting:(7)
Turbo Cruise 2400 RPM @ 28.5 in.(6) 2400 RPM @ 34.0 in.
Oil S.A.E. Number See Table II-V See Table II-V See Table II-V
Oil Sump Capacity 12 U.S. quarts 12 U.S. quarts 12 U.S. quarts
Fuel, Aviation Grade, Minimum
Octane 91/96 91/96(s5 100/130(6) 100/130
Carburetor, Marvel-Schebler MA-4-5(2)
Fuel Injector Bendix RSA-5ADI(4) RSA-5AD1 RSA-SAD 1
Magnetos, Scintilla:
Right S6LN-204 S6LN-204()/ S6LN-1209(6) S6LN- 1209 |
Left S6LN-200 S6LN-200(s)/S6LN-1208(6) S6LN-1208
Magneto Timing 25 degrees BTC 25 degrees BTC 25 degrees BTC
Magneto Point Clearance:
Main .018 + .006 .018 + .006(s)/.0166) 0.016
Retard .018 + .006 .018 + .006(5)
Retard Angle 37° 30'(6) 370 30'
Spark Plugs, Shielded:
Champion REM-40E REM-40E(5)/REB-37N( 6) REB 37N
AC SR-88 SR-88(s)/AC 171(6) AC171
Spark Plug Gap Setting(s) .018 to .022 .018 to .022(5) .015 to .021
.015 to .021(6)
Firing Order 1-4-5-2-3-6 1-4-5-2-3-6 1-4-5-2-3-6
Starter, Delco-Remy:
14-Volt 1109511 1109511
28-Volt
Starter, Prestolite:
14-Volt MZ-4218 MZ-4218
28-Volt MHB-4010 MHB-4010
HANDLING AND SERVICINC

Reissued: 2 18;'81
1B14
TABLE 11-I. LEADING PARTICULARS AND PRINCIPLE DIMENSIONS (cont)
PA-23-250 PA-23-235 PA-23-250 (six place)

MODEL Ser. Nos. 27-2000
to 27-2504 incl.
ENGINE (cont)
Generator, Delco-Remy:
14-Volt 1101915 (50 amp)(1)(2) 1101915 (50 amp) 1101915 (50 amp)
28-Volt 1101905 (25 amp)(3) 1105055 (50 amp)
Voltage Regulator, Delco-Remy:
14-Volt 1119246 (50 amp)(1)(2) 1119246 (50 ?mp) 1119246
28-Volt 1118976 (25 amp)(3) 1119656
Paralleling Relay, Delco-Remy:
14-Volt 1116887 (50 amp),) (2) 1116887 (50 amp) 1116887
28-Volt 1116902 (25 amp)(3) 1116902
Alternator, Delco-Remy:
14-Volt
28-Volt
14-Volt
28-Volt
Overvoltage Relay. Delco-Remy:
14-Volt
28-Volt
Alternator, Prestolite:
14-Volt
28-Volt
Voltage Regulator, Prestolite:
14-Volt
28-Volt
Voltage Regulator, LAMAR:
14-Volt
28-Volt
OverVoltage Relay, Prestolite:
14-Volt
28-Volt
Fuel Pump Drive Plunger type Plunger type Plunger type

Reissued: 2/18/81
1B15
PA-23-250 (six place) PA-23-250 (six place)

MODEL Ser. Nos. 27-2505 and up Ser. Nos. 27-3944 and up
ENGINE (cont)
Generator, Delco-Remy:
14-Volt
28-Volt
14-Volt
28-Volt
Paralleling Relay, Delco-Remy:
14-Volt
28-Volt
Alternator, Delco-Remy:
14-Volt 1100660 or 1100717 (70 amp)
28-Volt 1100718 (50 amp)
14-Volt 9000590
28-Volt 9000591
Overvoltage Relay, Delco-Remy:
14-Volt 1115831
28-Volt 1115832
Alternator, Prestolite:
14-Volt ALX 84()3 (70 amp) 14V ALX 8403 (70 amp) 14V
28-Volt ALU 84()3 (70 amp) 28V ALU 8403 (70 amp) 28V
Voltage Regulator, Prestolite:
14-Volt VSF 72003-7A VSF 7203-7A
28-Volt VSF 74013 VSF 7403
Voltage Regulator, LAMAR:
14-Volt B-00286-1(17)
28-Volt B-00288-l (18s
OverVoltage Relay, Prestolite:
14-Volt X 17621 X 17621
28-Volt X 17620 X 17620
Fuel Pump Drive Plunger type(s) Lear Siegler #RG-17980
Lear 5Siegler #RG-17980(6)

Reissued: 2/18/81
1B16
PA-23-250 PA-23-235 PA-23-250 (six place)

MODEL Ser. Nos. 27-2000
to 27-2504 incl.
PROPELLER
Manufacturer Hartzell Hartzell Hartzell

Type (2 blades) Constant speed, full Constant speed, full Constant speed, full
feathering feathering feathering
Hub, Model HC-82XK-2CI or HC-A2XK-2 HC-82XK-2C 1 or
HC-A2XK-2 or or HC-A2VK-2 HC-A2XK-2 or
HC-A2VK-2 HC-A2VK-2
Blade, Model 8433-10 or 8433B-10 8433-10 8433-10 or 8433B-10
Diameter 74 in. 74 in. 74 in.
Diameter, Minimum 73 in. 73 in. 73 in.
Blade Angle, Low Pitch(9) 15.5 degrees 15.5 degrees 15.5 degrees
Blade Angle, High Pitch,9, 80 degrees (Feathered) 80 degrees (Feathered) 80 degrees (Feathered)
Governor Control Hartzell Hartzell Hartzell
Governor Model B-4 B-4 B-4

Reissued: 2/18/81
1B17
TABLE I1-I. LEADING PARTICULARS AND PRINCIPLE DIMENSIONS (cont)

0
PA-23-250 (six place) PA-23-250 (six place)
Ser. Nos. 27-2505 and up Ser. Nos. 27-3944 and up
MODEL
PROPELLER
Manufacturer Hartzell Hartzell
Type (2 blades) Constant speed, full Constant speed, full
feathering feathering
Hub, Model HC-E2YK-2RB or HC-E2YR-2RB or
HC-E2YR-2RB14) HC-E2YK-2RB(,4,
Blade, Model 8465-7R 8465-7R
Diameter 77 in. 77 in.
Diameter, Minimum 76 in. 76 in.
Blade Angle, Low Pitch(9 ) 14.5 degrees 15.2 degrees
Blade Angle, High Pitch() 80 degrees (Feathered) 80 degrees (Feathered)
Governor Control Hartzell Hartzell
Governor Model F-6-5S or F-6-5A F-6-5S or F-6-5A
HANDLING AND SERVICIN(G

Reissued: 2/18/81
1B18
TABLE 11-1. LEADING PARTICULARS AND PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS (cont.)
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Cells Four(A) Four(B) Four + wing tip

cellsc)
Capacity (each) 36 U.S. gals. 35 U.S. gals. 35 U.S. gals.
Wing Tip Cells (each) 20 U.S. gals.
Combined Cells (total) SEE
NOTE 144 U.S. gals. 140 U.S. gals. 180 U.S. gals.
NOTE: Refer to Flight Manuals for unusable fuel per aircraft.
A. All aircraft up to serial nos. 27-7405476.
B. Aircraft with serial nos. 27-7554001 and up.
C. Aircraft with serial nos. 27-7654001 and up with optional wing tip fuel cells.
LANDING GEAR
Type Hydraulically Retractable

Shock Strut Type Combination Air-Oil
Fluid Required (Struts, Hydraulic
System and Brakes) MIL-H-5606(19)
Strut Exposure (Static Load) 3 in.
Wheel Tread (from each tire center) 11 ft. 4 in.
Wheel Base 7 ft. 6 in.
Wheel, Nose Cleveland 38501
Wheel, Main Cleveland 3080B-l(o) , 3080D(In,
Cleveland 40-131(,5)
Brake Disc Cleveland 37-200-2 or 37-200Aii),
Cleveland 30-96(15)
Tire, Nose 600 x 6 - 4 Ply Rating or
600 x 6 - 6 Ply Rating
Tires Main 700 x 6 - 8 Ply Rating
Tire ressure, Nose 27 psi20) , 32 psi(21)
Tire Pressure, Main 42 psi2), 46 psi(13)
CONTROL SURFACES AND CABLE TENSIONS
Refer to Section V, Table V-I, Grid No. 1H19.

Reissued: 2/18/81
lB19
FOOTNOTE LEGEND
(1) 0-540-AIB5
(2) 0-540-AID5
(3) 0-540-A3D5
(4) 10-540-CIB5
(5) IO-540-C4B5
(6) 1O-540-J4A5
(7) TO DETERMINE FUEL CONSUMPTION FOR THESE POWER SETTINGS, REFER TO FUEL CONSUMPTION
CHART IN OWNER'S HANDBOOK.
(8) SEE LYCOMING SERVICE INSTRUCTION NO. 1042.
(9) MEASURED AT 30 INCH RADIUS.
(10) SERIAL NOS. 27-1 TO 27-3737 INCL.
(11) SERIAL NOS. 27-3738 AND UP
(12) 4800 LBS. GROSS WT.
(13) 4995 LBS. AND 5200 LBS. GROSS WT.
(14) HC-E2YR-2RBS, HC-E2YK-2RBS. HC-E2YR-2RBF OR HC-E2YR-2RBSF CAN ALSO BE USED WITH THE
10-540-C4B5, TIO-540-CIA OR 10-540-J4A5 ENGINES.
(15) PA-23-250 "F- ONLY
(16) MINIMUM OCTANE: 80/87
SPECIFIED OCTANE: 80/87
ALTERNATE FUELS: REFER TO LYCOMING SERVICE LETTER NO. L185A WHEN USING OTHER THAN
SPECIFIED OCTANE FUELS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND SERVICE PROCEDURES.
(17) LAMAR 14-VOLT VOLTAGE REGULATOR B-00288-1 APPLIES TO AIRCRAFT WITH SERIAL NOS. 27-4794
TO 27-7405476 INCLUSIVE.
(18) LAMAR 28-VOLT VOLTAGE REGULATOR B-00286-1 APPLIES TO AIRCRAFT WITH SERIAL NOS. 27-4801
AND UP.
(19) SEE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS TABLE.
(20) PRESSURE FOR 600 x 6 - 4 PLY TIRE
(21) PRESSURE FOR 600 x 6- 6 PLY TIRE
0
Reissued: 2/18/81
1B20
TABLE 11-11.CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
Material Specification or
Manufacturer
Brand Name
Alcohol MC200 *See Note 1
Cartridge. Engine P/N AC6435683 A.C Spark Plug Division,

Oil Filter General Motors Corp.,
Flint 2. Mich.
Cement EC-678 Minnesota Mining Co.

St. Paul, Minn.
Cement EC-1300L Minnesota Mining Co.

St. Paul, Minn.
Cement 3230 Uniroyal

Mishawaka, Ind. 46455
Cement A-56-B B.F. Goodrich Co.

Akron, Ohio
Cement, Carbolene F-l

Neoprene
Cleaner, Air D-1400 Donaldson Co., Inc.

Filter 1400W. 94th St.
Minneapolis, Minn. 55431
Cleaner, Plastic *See Note I

Window
Cloth, Crocus Federal Spec. *See Note 1

P-C458
Compound. Anti- Fel-Pro High Temp. Fel-Pro Inc.

Seize 7450 N. McCormick Blvd.
Skokie, Ill.
Compound, Sealing EC-801 Minnesota Mining Co.

St. Paul. Minn.
Compound, Sloshing 1005-L, MIL-S-4383B Products Research and

Chemical Corp.,
Gloucester City, N.J.
Compound, Sloshing 444R Coast Pro-Seal Co.,

Compton, Cal.
Fiberglass Paste Filler Piper Kit 763 904 Piper Products
*Refer to Grid IB24 for Notes.

Reissued: 2/18/81
1B21
TABLE II-II. CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
Material Specification or Manufacturer

Brand Name
Film, Vinyl 48 Gage,Type B *See Note 1

Chloride Copolymer Saran Wrap
Fluid, Anti-icing MIL-F-566
Fluid, Detector Type CD-1Solution
Fluid, Hydraulic 3126 Hydraulic Oil Humble RefiningCo.

Petroleum Base MIL-H-5605 Box 2180
Houston, Texas 77001
Fluid, Hydraulic PED3337 Standard Oil 225 Bush St.

Petroleum Base MIL-H-5606 San Francisco, Calif. 94120
Flux, Welding Type I, Type B Solar
Flux, Welding No. 16GH Solar
Flux, Solder 709 *See Note 1

Kester Solder Co.
4201 WrightwoodAve.
Fuel, Engine See S/M 753-564

Chicago, Ill. 60639
*See Note 1
0
Page 1A24
Grease P/N 10-27165 Bendix Co.

Sidney, N.Y. 13838
Grease, Aircraft MIL-G-23827A *See Note 2

Royal Lubricants Co.,
Box 298
East Hanover, N.J.
Grease, Aircraft MIL-G-3545 *See Note 2

Royal Lubricants Co.
Box 298
East Hanover, N.J

Royal Lubricants Co..
Box 298
East Hanover, N.J
Grease, Aircraft MIL-G-81322 *See Note 2

Box 298
East Hanover, N.J.
*Refer to Grid 1B24for Notes. HANDLING AND SERVICING

Reissued: 2/18/81
1B22
TABLE 11-1I. CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

Brand Name

Box 298
East Hanover, N J
Grease, Aircraft MIL-G-21164C *See Note 2
Box 298
East Hanover, N.J.
Grease. Beacon 325 Exxon Co. Box 2180
Grease, Lithium *1925 Molytex "O"
Soap Base
Grease, Lubricating Cosmolube G 15 E.F. Houghton and Co.

MIL-G-4343 303 W. Lehigh Ave.
Phila., PA 19133
Lubricant No. 1960373 Delco-Remy
P.O. Box 2439
Anderson, Ind. 46011
Lubricant Lubriplate 777 Fiske Bros. Refining Co.
129 Lockwood St.
Neward, N.J. 07105
Lubricant, Bearing No. 2 Shell Oil Co.
One Shell Plaza
Lubricant Krytox No. 240 AB
MEK *3339 Uniroyal

Federal Spec. TT-M-261 Mishawaka, Ind. 46455
Naptha TT-N-95 *See Note I
Oil *10
Oil, Breaker 10-86527 Bendix Electrical
Felt Lube Components Div.
Sidney, N.Y. 13838
Oil, Engine MIL-L-6082 *See Note 1
*Refer to Grid IB24 for Notes.

Reissued: 2/18/81
1B23
TABLE 11-11. CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

Brand Name
Oil Lubricating, General Caltex Low Temp. Oil, Caltex Oil Products Co.
Purpose Low Temp. MIL-L-7870 New York, N.Y.
Oil, Preserving 1010. MIL-O-6081 *See Note I
Oil, Turbo Automotive Multigrade *See Note I

SAE-IOW-30
Permatex, Aviation Permatex Co., Inc.

Kansas City, Kansas
Rivet AN426AD3-4 *See Note I
Rivet MS20470AD3 *See Note I
Rod, Stainless Steel SAE Type 309 *See Note I

Welding
Sealant, Ribbon Dope Permacel 412 Permacel

Thread New Brunswick, N.J.
08903
Sealer #1126 3M Center

St. Paul, Minn. 55101
Sealer Parker Sealube Parker Seals 10567

Jefferson Blvd.
Culver City. Calif. 90230
Sealer #1221-B-2 Product Research Co.

Empire Ave.
Burbank, Calif. 91504
Sealer. Bead EC1055 3M Center

St. Paul, Minn. 55101
Sealer. Permagum #576.1 Presstite - Keystone Eng.

Co., 3900 Chateau Ave.
St. Louis, Mo.
Silicone Spray SM-O-O-TH Turco Products, Inc.

24600 South Main St.
Wilmington, Calif. 90746
Solution, Stripper M-S Stripper Oakite Products, Inc.

50 Valley Rd.
BerkleyHeights,N.J. 07922
*Refer to Grid IB24 for Notes HANDLING AND SERVICING

Reissued: 2/18/81
1B24
TABLE II-II. CONSUMABLE MATERIALS

Brand Name
Solvent CRC 2-26 Corrosion Reaction

Consultants, Inc.
Phila. Pa.
Solvent, Cleaning Turco 4217 Turco Products Inc.

MIL-T-7003 24600 South Main St.
Wilmington, Calif. 90746
Solvent, Cleaning Federal Sepc. P-S-661
Solvent, Dry Cleaning Federal Spec. P-D-680 *See Note 1

Mineral spirits
Tape, Moleskin *See Note 1
Tape, Prestite 163 Presstite-Keystone Eng. Co.,
3900 Chateau Ave.
St. Louis, Mo.
Wax, Simonize *See Note 1
Wire, Safety MS20995-C32 *See Note 1
Wire, Safety MS20995-F32 *See Note 1
Wire, Safety MS20995-F20 *See Note 1
Wire, Safety MS20995-C20 *See Note 1
Wire, Safety MS-20995-C41 *See Note 1
Wire, Safety MS-20995-NC32 *See Note 1
Rain Repellent REPCON UNELKO Corporation

FSCM 50159 727 E. 110th Street
Chicago, Illinois 60628
*NOTES: 1. Purchase locally.

2. Available in small quantities.

Reissued: 2/18/81
1C1
1C2
2120 2123 2124
13
I. WING TIP 10. DEICER LINES

2. FUEL VENT LINE I 1. FUEL LINES, FUEL CONTROL CABLES 5. RUDDER TRIM ROD
3. FUEL CELL OUTLET LINE 12. PROPELLER 1. TRIM INDICATOR WIRE, ANTENNA CONNECTOR 7. BRAKE RESERVOIR 1. ROTATING BEACON 6. RUDDER TRIM ROD
4. FUEL SELECTOR, FUEL STRAINER 13. FUEL VENT LINE, TIP HINGE 2. FIN RIB 8. POWERPAK FILLER TUBE 2. STABILATOR TORQUE TUBE 9. RUDDER TRIM DRUM
5. WIRING, CONTROL CABLES, LINE FITTING 14. AILERON BELLCRANK 3. STABILATOR TORQUE TUBE 9. CONTROL CABLES AND PULLEYS 3. FIN RIB 10. BAGGAGE AREA
WING ATTACHMENTS 15. AILERON CONTROL CABLES 4. ROTATING BEACON 10. RUDDER HORN 4. TRIM INDICATOR WIRE, AdTENNA CONNECTOI 11. RUDDER PEDALS, CONTROL CABLES,
6. INSPECTION 16. PITOT LINE (LEFT WING ONLY), INSPECTION S. LANDING LIGHT 11:. STABILATOR TRIM MECHANISM 5. STABILATOR TRIM ROD HYDRAULIC LINES, WIRING
7. FUEL STRAINER 17. ENGINE ACCESS, BOTTOM 6. HEATER, WIRING, MISC. FLUID AND AIR LINES 12. STABILATOR TRIM ROD 6. STABILATOR TRIM MECHANISM 12. BATTERY
B. FUEL STRAINER 18. LANDING GEAR 7. RUDDER HORN 13. LANDING LIGHT
9. FUEL LINES, FUEL CONTROL CABLES, 19 LANDING GEAR
AILERON CABLES
SKETCH C SKETCH D
SKETCH B
2101 1. LANDING GEAR
2. WING ATTACHMENT
3. FLAP MECHANISM
4. LANDING GEAR
5. CONTROL CABLES, LINE FITTINGS,

WIRING, WING ATTACHMENT
6. WING ATTACHMENT
7. FLAP MECHANISM
SKETCH E
1. AILERON PULLEY AND CABLE
B 2. TRIM SENSOR, ALTIMATIC II
3. INSPECTION
3 4 1 1 13 4. FLAP SENDER
5. RUDDER CABLES
1. FUEL FILLER 10. NACELLE FAIRING

2. FUEL FILLER 11. WING TIP
3. ENGINE ACCESS, TOP 12. FUEL SENDER AND CELL
4. OIL FILLER 13. FUEL SENDER AND CELL
5. OIL FILLER 14. NACELLE FAIRING 6. AILERON PULLEY AND CABLE
6. ENGINE ACCESS, OUTBOARD 15. ENGINE SUPPORT 7. MAIN SPAR
E 8. RUDDER CABLE AND PULLEY
7. PROPELLER 16. ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP, VACUUM REGULATOR
8. ENGINE ACCESS, INBOARD i 9. STABILATOR CABLES AND PULLEYS
9. WIRING, CONTROL CABLES, LINE FITTINGS, 1O. STABILATOR CABLES AND PULLEYS
WING ATTACHMENTS II. RUDDER CABLE AND PULLEY
SKETCH A SKETCH F
Figure 2-7. Access Plates and Panels

PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 HANDLING AND SERVICING
Reissued: 2/18/81
1C3 1C4
*PIPER AZTEC SERVICE MANUAL.
2104 2102
2 3 4 5 6 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2103
- 10
II 12 13 14 17 1413 12 11
18
I
18
27-2505 TO 27425 INCL. AND
- - 27-2505 TO 27-4425 INCL. AND
27-2000 TO 27-2504 27-4427 TO 27-4573 INCL 7
1. WING TIP 11. WING TIP HINGE
2. FUEL VENT 12. AILERON BELLCRANK 1. OXYGEN FILLER 8. CONTROL CABLES AND PULLEYS 1. ROTATING BEACON 10. BAGGAGE DOOR. SERIAL NOS.
3. FUEL CELL OUTLET LINE 13. AILERON CONTROL CABLES 2. TRIM INDICATOR WIRE LUX SENSOR,
9. Flux sensor, SERIAL
serial NOS.
nos. 2. STABILATOR TORQUE TUBE TO 27-3050, 27 -3052 TO 27 -3152
4. FUEL SELECTOR, FUEL STRAINER AND 14. PITOT LINE (LEFT WING ONLY), INSPECTION 3. FIN RIB 274-7505446,27-7505456 AND UP.
27-7505446, 3. FIN RIB 11. BAGGAGE DOOR, SERIAL NOS.
FUEL DRAINS 15. ENGINE CONTROL CABLES, MISC. LINES 4. STABILATOR TORQUE TUBE 10. RUDDER HORN 4. RUDDER TRIM DRUM AND UP
5. FUEL STRAINER AND FUEL DRAINS 16. DEICER LINES 5. ROTATING BEACON STABILATOR TRIM
11. STABILIZER TRIM MECHANISM
MECHANISM 5. TRIM INDICATOR WIRE 12. RUDDER PEDALS. CONTROL CABLES
6. INSPECTION 17. ENGINE ACCESS, BOTTOM 6. HEATER TABILATOR TRIM
12. STABILATOR TRIM ROD ROD 6. STABILATOR TRIM ROD AND HYDRAULIC LINES
7. WIRING, CONTROL CABLES, LINE FITTINGS 18. PROPELLER 7. BRAKE RESERVOIR AND POWER 7. STABILATOR TRIM MECHANISM 13. BATTERY
AND WING ATTACHMENTS 19. PROPELLER RECHARGE VALVE PACK FILLER TUBE 8. RUDDER TRIM ROD 14. BAGGAGE AREA, ELECTRONICS
8. LANDING GEAR 20 9. RUDDER HORN
9. LANDING GEAR
10. FUEL LINES, FUEL CONTROL CABLES AND SKETCHC SKETCHD
AILERON CABLES SKETCH B
2105 1. LANDING GEAR
5 2. AILERON PULLEY
3. CONTROL CABLES, LINE FITTINGS.
2
WIRING AND WING ATTACHMENT
4. WING ATTACHMENT
5. FLAP MECHANISM
6. LANDING GEAR
1 7. HEATER DUCTS
8. WING ATTACHMENT
--- SKETCH E
9. FLAP MECHANISM
1. AILERON PULLEY AND CABLE 3. INSPECTION

7 11 12 13 14 15S 16 14 13 5
1212 11 70 IC 2. TRIM SENSOR, ALTIMATIC II 4. FLAP SENDER
27-2505 TO 27-44 25 INCL. AND
27-2000 TO 27-2504 2 3 4 117 5 5. RUDDER CABLES
27,427 TO 27 -45 73 INCL. 6. AILERON PULLEYAND CABLE
1. PROPELLER RECHARGE VALVE 11. FUEL SENDER AND CELL

2. PROPELLER 12. NACELLE FAIRING
3. ENGINE ACCESS, OUTBOARD 13. ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP, VACUUM REGULATOR,
4. OIL FILLER AILERON CONTROL CABLES, LANDING GEAR
5. ENGINE ACCESS, INBOARD ACTUATING CYLINDER AND ROLL SERVO 7. MAIN SPAR
6. ENGINE ACCESS, TOP (LEFT NACELLE ONLY) ) 10 118.
RUDDER CABLE AND PULLEY
7. WING TIP 14. ENGINE SUPPORT 9. STABILATOR CABLES AND PULLEYS
8. FUEL FILLER 15. NACELLE FAIRING 10. STABILATOR CABLES AND PULLEYS
9. FUEL SENDER AND CELL 16. WIRING, CONTROL CABLES, LINE FITTINGS 11. RUDDER CABLE AND PULLEY
10. FUEL FILLER AND WING ATTACHMENTS 12. STABILATOR TRIM & FLAP INTERCONNECT CABLES & PULLEYS,
SKETCH A SERIAL NOS. 27-7654001 AND UP SKETCH F
Figure 2-8. AccessPlates and Panels

PA-23-250 (six place) HANDLING AND SERVICING
Rcissued: 2/18/81
1C5 1C6
A433
SERIAL NOS. 27-7654001 AND UP
1. PROPELLER RECHARGE VALVE

2. PROPELLER
3. ENGINE ACCESS, OUTBOARD
4. ENGINE ACCESS, TOP
5. ENGINE ACCESS, INBOARD
6. OIL FILTER
7. NACELLE FAIRING
8. WIRING, CONTROL CABLES, LINE
FITTINGS, WING ATTACHMENTS
9. NACELLE FAIRING
10. ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP, VACUUM
REGULATOR, AILERON CONTROL
CABLES, LANDING GEAR
ACTUATING CYLINDER, AND ROLL
SERVO (LEFT NACELLE ONLY)
11. ENGINE SUPPORT
12. FUEL SENDER AND CELL
13. FUEL FILLER
14. WING TIP
15. FUEL FILLER OR ACCESS COVER
16. FUEL SENDER OR ACCESS COVER
17. OIL COOLER VENT
27-4426 AND 27-4574 AND UP

A434
1. WIRING, CONTROL CABLES, LINE

FITTINGS, WING ATTACHMENTS
2. INSPECTION
3. FUEL SELECTOR, FUEL STRAINER,
FUEL DRAINS
5 4. FUEL VENT
5. WING TIP
6. LANDING GEAR
7. FUEL CELL OUTLET LINE
8. LANDING GEAR
9. LANDING GEAR
10. FUEL STRAINER
11. DEICER LINES
12. FUEL LINES, FUEL CONTROL
CABLES, AILERON CABLES
13. ENGINE CONTROL CABLES, MISC.
LINES
14. ENGINE
21
21 15. ENGINE ACCESS, BOTTOM
16. PROPELLER RECHARGE VALVE
17. PROPELLER
18. PITOT LINE (LEFT WING ONLY),
INSPECTION
19. AILERON CONTROL CABLES
20. AILERON BELLCRANK
21. WING TIP HINGE
SERIAL NOS. 27-7654001 AND UP
Figure 2-8. Access Plates and Panels PA-23-250 (six place) (cont.)
Serial Nos. 27-4426 and 27-4574 and up

Reissued: 2/18/81
1C7
2-4. WEIGHT AND BALANCE DATA. Whenfiguringvariousweightandbalancecompu-

tations, the weight and empty weight center of gravity of the airplane may be found in the
Weight and Balance Form of the Airplane Flight Manual.
2-5. SERIAL NUMBER PLATE. The Serial Number Plate for airplanes with Serial
Numbers 27-1 to 27-3559 inclusive is located on the top of the tail stringer, underneath the
rudder. The Serial Number Plate on airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-3560 and up is located
on the bottom of the fuselage just forward of the tail skid. Airplane Serial Numbers will be
used in this manual where model differences occur, and should be used when contacting the
factory on service or warranty matters. M.A.A. plate is located under the rug in front of the
co-pilot's seat.
2-6. ACCESS AND INSPECTION PROVISIONS. The access and inspection provisions
for the airplane are shown in Figures 2-7 and 2-8. The component to be serviced or inspected
through each opening is assigned an index number to identify it in illustration. All access plates
and panels are secured by either metal fasteners or screws. To enter the aft section of the fuse-
lage, remove the rear baggage compartment upholstery panel by removing the attaching
screws.
CAUTION
Before entering the aft section of the fuselage, be sure the

airplane is supported at the tail skid.
2-7. TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT. Because of the simplicity and easy accessibility
of components, few special tools outside normal shop tools will be required. Tools that are
required may be fabricated from dimensions given in the section that pertains to a particular
component or are listed in the back of the PA-23-250 Parts Catalog.
2-8. TORQUE REQUIREMENTS. The torque values given in Table II-III and Table II-IV
are derived from oil-free cadmium-plated threads and are recommended for all airframe in-
stallation procedures when torquing is required, unless otherwise noted. Engine torque values
are found in the latest revision of Avco-Lycoming Service Bulletin No. 268.

Reissued: 2/18/81
1C8
2-9. TORQUE WRENCHES. Torque wrenches should be checked daily and calibrated by
means of weights and a measured lever arm to make sure that inaccuracies are not present.
Checking one torque wrench against another is not sufficient and is not recommended. Some
wrenches are quite sensitive as to the way they are supported during a tightening operation.
Any instructions furnished by the manufacturer must be followed explicitly.
When it is necessary to use a special extension or adapter wrench together with a torque
wrench, a simple mathematical equation must be worked out to arrrive at the correct torque
reading. Following is the formula to be used: (Refer to Figure 2-9.)
T = Torque desired at the part.
A = Basic lever length from center of wrench shank to center of handle or stamped on
wrench or listed for that model wrench.
B = Length of adapter extension, center of bolt to center of shank.
C = Scale reading needed to obtain desired torque (T).
The formula: C=
A+B
EXAMPLE
A bolt requires 30 foot-pound and a 3 inch adapter (one-

quarter of a foot or .25) is needed to get at it. You want to
know what scale reading it will take on a one-foot lever arm
wrench to obtain the 30 foot-pounds at the bolt.
x 30 30
C= 24ft.-lbs.
1.25
Remember, the 3 inch adapter must be projecting 3 inches

straight along the wrench axis. In general, avoid all complex
assemblages or adapters and extensions of flex joints.
A933
90
Figure 2-9. Torque Wrench Formula

Reissued: 2/18/81
1C9
CAUTION
Do not overtorque fittings.
NOTE
When flared fittings are being installed, ascertain that the male
threads are properly lubricated. Torque the fittings in
accordance with Table II-III.
TABLE II-III. FLARE FITTING TORQUES
TORQUE - INCH-POUND
TUBING ALUMINUM - ALLOY STEEL TUBING HOSE END FITTING

OD TUBING FLARE - AND FLARE AND
INCHES 10061 OR AND 10078 AND 10061 HOSE ASSEMBLIES
MINIMUM MAXIMUM MINIMUM MAXIMUM MINIMUM MAXIMUM
1/8
3/16
3/16 90 100 70 100
40 65 135 150 70 120
5/16 60 80 180 200 85 180
75 125 270 300 100 250
1/2 150 250 450 500 210 420
5/8 200 350 650 700 300 480
3/4 300 500 900 1000 500 850
500 700 1200 1400 700 1150
1-1/4 600 900
1-1/2 600 900
1-3/4
2

Reissued: 2/18/81
1C10
TABLE II-IV. RECOMMENDED NUT TORQUES (INCH-POUNDS)
TORQUES:The importanceof correct applicationcan not be

overemphasized. Undertorque canresultin unnecessary wearof nuts BOLTS
Steel Tension
and bolts as well as the parts they are holdingtogether.When
insufficientpressures are applied,unevenloadswill be transmitted AN 3 thru AN 20
throughoutthe assemblywhich may result in excessive wear or AN 42 thru AN 49
prematurefailure dueto fatigue.Overtorque canbe equallydamaging AN 73 thru AN 81
because of failureof a boltor nut fromoverstressing
the threaded areas. AN 173 thru AN 186
MS 20033 thru MS 20046
Therearea few simple,but very important,procedures that shouldbe MS 20073
followedto assure that thecorrecttorqueisapplied: MS 20074
1. Calibratethe torquewrenchperiodicallyto assure accuracy; AN 509 NK9
andrecheck frequently. MS 24694
2. Ascertainthat the bolt and nut threadsare cleananddry AN 525 NK525
MS 27039
(unlessotherwise specifiedby the manufacturer).
3. Run nut downto near contactwith the washeror bearing NUTS
surfaceandcheck"friction dragtorque"requiredto turnthe
nut. Steel Tension Steel Shear
4. Add the friction drag torque to the desired torque AN 310 AN 320
recommended by the manufacturer,or obtaindesiredtorque AN 315. AN 364
AN 363 NAS 1022
as shownin Table II-IV. This is referredto asfinal torque AN 365 MS 17826
which shouldregisteron the indicatoror the settingfor a NAS 1021 MS 20364
snapover typewrench. MS 17825
MS 21045
NOTE MS 20365
MS 20500
NAS 679
For moredetailson torquing,referto FAA Manual
AC43.13-1A
COARSE THREAD SERIES
FRICTIONDRAG TORQUES Nut-bolt Torque Limits Torque Limits

COARSEAND FINE size in-lbs in-lbs
BOLT SIZE FRICTIONDRAG TORQUE (IN.-LBS.) Min. Max. Min. Max.
10 18 8 -32 12 15 7 9
10 -24 20 25 12 15
1/4-20 40 50 25 30
1/4 30
5/16-18 80 90 48 55
3/8-16 160 185 95 110
7/16-14 235 255 140 155
5/16 60
1/2-13 400 480 240 290
9/16-12 500 700 300 420
3/8 80 5/8-11 700 900 420 540
3/4-10 1,150 1,600 700 950
7/8- 9 2,200 3,000 1,300 1,800
100 1 -8 3,700 5,000 2,200 3,000
1-1/8--8 5,500 6,500 3,300 4,000
1-1/4-8 6,500 8,000 4,000 5,000

Revised: 4/26/83
1C11
TABLE II-IV. RECOMMENDED NUT TORQUES (INCH-POUNDS) (cont.)
BOLTS BOLTS BOLTS

Steel Tension Steel Tension Aluminum
AN 3 thru AN 20 MS 20004 thru MS 20024 AN 3DD thru AN 20DD

AN 42 thru AN 49 NAS 144 thru NAS 158 AN 173DD thru AN 186DD
AN 73 thru AN 81 NAS 333 thru NAS 340 AN 509DD
AN 173 thru AN 186 NAS 583 thru NAS 590 AN 525D
MS 20033 thru MS 20046 NAS 624 thru NAS 644 MS 27039D
MS 20073 NAS 1303 thru NAS 1320 MS 24694DD
MS 20074 NAS 172
AN 509 NK9 NAS 174
MS 24694 NAS 517 Steel shearbolt
AN 525 NK525
MS 27039 NAS 464
NUTS NUTS NUTS
Steel Tension Steel Shear Steel Tension Steel Shear Alum. Tension Alum. Shear
AN 310 AN 320 AN 310 AN 320 AN 365D AN 320D

AN 315 AN 364 AN 315 AN 364 AN 310D AN 364D
AN 363 NAS 1022 AN 363 NAS 1022 NAS 1021D NAS 1022D
AN 365 MS 17826 AN 365 MS 17826
NAS 1021 MS 20364 MS 17825 MS 20364
MS 17825 MS 20365
MS 21045 MS 21045
MS 20365 NAS 1021
MS 20500 NAS 679
NAS 679 NAS 1291
FINE THREAD SERIES
Nut-bolt Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits Torque Limits
size in-lbs in-lbs in-lbs in-lbs in-lbs in-lbs
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
8 -36 12 15 7 9 5 10 3 6
10 -32 20 25 12 15 25 30 15 20 10 15 5 10
1/4-28 50 70 30 40 80 100 50 60 30 45 15 30
5/16-24 100 140 60 85 120 145 70 90 40 65 25 40
3/8-24 160 190 95 110 200 250 120 150 75 110 45 70
7/16-20 450 500 270 300 520 630 300 400 180 280 110 170
1/2-20 480 690 290 410 770 950 450 550 280 410 160 260
9/16-18 800 1,000 480 600 1,100 1,300 650 800 380 580 230 360
5/8-18 1,100 1,300 660 780 1,250 1,550 750 950 550 670 270 420
3/4-16 2,300 2,500 1,300 1,500 2,650 3,200 1,600 1,900 950 1,250 560 880
7/8-14 2,500 3,000 1,500 1,800 3,550 4,350 2,100 2,690 1,250 1,900 750 1,200
1 -14 3,700 4,500 2,200 3,300 4,500 5,500 2,700 3,300 1,600 2,400 950 1,500
1-1/8-12 5,000 7,000 3,000 4,200 6,000 7,300 3,600 4,400 2,100 3,200 1,250 2,000
1-1/4-12 9,000 11,000 5,400 6,600 11,000 13,400 6,600 8,000 3,900 5,600 2,300 3,650

Revised: 4/26/83
1C12
A716
A716
A713
2106
FUSE
STA
FUSE
STA
Figure 2-10. Station Reference Lines

Reissued: 2/18/81
1C13
2108
A712
. NOS. 27-4426, 27-4574 AND UP.
Figure 2-10. Station Reference Lines (cont.)

Reissued: 2/18/81
1C14
TABLE II-V. CONVERSION TABLES
1. These tables contain the various conversion data that may be useful when figuring capacities.
lengths, temperatures, and various weights and measures from the English system values to the
metric system values or back again.
2. The English system is in use by England and the United States. All other countries use the metric
system.
3. Procedure for Converting Inches to Millimeters (Refer to Table II-V.)
A. Example: Convert 1.5 inches to millimeters.
(1) Read down inches column to 1. inches.

(2) Read across top inch column to 0.5.
(3) Read down and across to find millimeters to (1.5 inches is 38.10 millimeters).
4. Procedure for Converting Fahrenheit (°F) and Celsius (°C) (Centigrade) Temperature. (Refer to
Table II-V.)
A. Read number in middle column, if in degrees Celsuis (°C), read Fahrenheit equivalent in right-
hand column. If in degrees Fahrenheit (°F), read Celsius equivalent in left-hand column.
(1) 70°F = 21.1°C.

(2) 30°C = 86.0°F.

Reissued: 2/18/81
1C15
PIPER AZTEC SERVICE MANAUL
TABLE II-V. CONVERSION TABLES (cont.)
CENTIGRADE-FAHRENHEIT CONVERSION TABLE
Example: To convert 20°C. to Fahrenheit, find 20 in the center

column headed (F-C); then read 68.0° F. in the column (F) to the
right. To convert 20° F. to Centigrade; find 20 in the center column
and read -6.67° C. in the (C) column to the left.
C F-C F C F-C F
-56.7 -70 -94.0 104.44 220 428.0

-51.1 -60 -76.0 110.00 230 446.0
-45.6 -50 -58.0 115.56 240 464.0
-40.0 -40 -40.0 121.11 250 482.0
-34.0 -30 -22.0 126.67 260 500.0
-38.9 -20 -4.0 132.22 270 518.0
-23.3 -10 14.0 137.78 280 536.0
-17.8 0 32.0 143.33 290 554.0
-12.22 10 50.0 148.89 300 572.0
-6.67 20 68.0 154.44 310 590.0
-1.11 30 86.0 160.00 320 608.0
4.44 40 104.0 165.56 330 626.0
10.00 50 122.0 171.11 340 644.0
15.56 60 140.0 176.67 350 662.0
21.11 70 158.0 182.22 360 680.0
26.67 80 176.0 187.78 370 698.0
32.22 90 194.0 193.33 380 716.0
27.78 100 212.0 198.89 390 734.0
43.33 110 230.0 204.44 400 752.0
38.89 120 248.0 210.00 410 770.0
54.44 130 266.0 215.56 420 788.0
60.00 140 284.0 221.11 430 806.0
65.56 150 302.0 226.67 440 824.0
71.00 160 320.0 232.22 450 842.0
76.67 170 338.0 257.78 460 860.0
82.22 180 356.0 243.33 470 878.0
87.78 190 374.0 248.89 480 896.0
93.33 200 392.0 254.44 490 914.0
98.89 210 410.0 260.00 500 932.0

Reissued: 2/18/81
1C16
INCHES TO MILLIMETER
INCHES 0.0000 0.0001 0.0002 0.0003 0.0004 0.0005 0.0006 0.0007 0.0008 0.0009
MILLIMETER
0.000 0.0025 0.0050 0.0076 0.0101 0.0127 0.0152 0.0177 0.0203 0.0228
0.001 0.0254 0.0279 0.0304 0.0330 0.0355 0.0381 0.0406 0.0431 0.0457 0.0482
0.002 0.0508 0.0533 0.0558 0.0584 0.0609 0.0635 0.0660 0.0685 0.0711 0.0736
0.003 0.0762 0.0787 0.0812 0.0838 0.0863 0.0889 0.0914 0.0939 0.0965 0.0990
0.004 0.1016 0.1041 0,1066 0.1092 0.1117 0.1143 0.1168 0.1193 0.1219 0.1244
0.005 0.1270 0.1295 0.1320 0.1346 0.1371 0.1397 0.1422 0.1447 0.1473 0.1498
0.006 0.1524 0.1549 0.1574 0.1600 0.1625 0.1651 0.1676 0.1701 0.1727 0.1752
0.007 0.1778 0.1803 0.1828 0.1854 0.1879 0.1905 0.1930 0.1955 0.1981 0.2006
0.008 0.2032 0.2057 0.2082 0.2108 0.2133 0.2159 0.2184 0.2209 0.2235 0.2260
0.009 0.2286 0.2311 0.2336 0.2362 0.2387 0.2413 0.2438 0.2463 0.2489 0.2514
INCHES 0.000 0.001 0.002 0.003 0.004 0.005 0.006 0.007 0.008 0.009
MILLIMETER
0.00 0.025 0.050 0.076 0.101 0.127 0.152 0.177 0.203 0.228
0.01 0.254 0.279 0.304 0.330 0.355 0.381 0.406 0.431 0.457 0.482
0.02 0.508 0.533 0.558 0.584 0.609 0.635 0.660 0.685 0.711 0.736
0.03 0.762 0.787 0.812 0.838 0.863 0.889 0.914 0.939 0.965 0.990
0.04 1.016 1.041 1.066 1.092 1.117 1.143 1.168 1.193 1.219 1.244
0.05 1.270 1.295 1.320 1.346 1.371 1.397 1.422 1.447 1.473 1.498
0.06 1.524 1.549 1.574 1.600 1.625 1.651 1.676 1.701 1.727 1.752
0.07 1.778 1.803 1.828 1.854 1.879 1.905 1.930 1.955 1.981 2.006
0.08 2.032 2.057 2.082 2.108 2.133 2.159 2.184 2.209 2.235 2.260
0.09 2.286 2.311 2.336 2.362 2.387 2.413 2.438 2.463 2.489 2.514
INCHES 0.00 0.01 0.02 0.03 0.04 0.05 0.06 0.07 0.08 0.09
MILLIMETER
00 0.254 0.508 0.762 0.016 1.270 1.524 1.778 2.032 2.286
0.1 2.540 2.794 3.048 3.302 3.556 3.810 4.064 4.318 4.572 4.826
0.2 5.080 5.334 5.588 5.842 6.096 6.350 6.604 6.858 7.112 7.366
0.3 7.620 7.874 8.128 8.382 8.636 8.890 9.144 9.398 9.652 9.906
0.4 10.160 10.414 10.668 10.922 11.176 11.430 11.684 11.938 12.192 12.446
0.5 12.700 12.954 13.208 13.462 13.716 13.970 14.224 14.478 14.732 14.986
0.6 15.240 15.494 15.748 16.002 16.256 16.510 16.764 17.018 17.272 17.526
0.7 17.780 18.034 18.288 18.542 18.796 19.050 19.304 19.558 19.812 20.066
0.8 20.320 20.574 20.828 21.082 21.336 21.590 21.844 22.098 22.352 22.606
0.9 22.860 23.114 23.368 23.622 23.876 24.130 24.384 24.638 24.892 25.146

Revised: 4/26/83
1C17
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
1C18

MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN MULTIPLY BY TO OBTAIN
CENTIMETERS 0.3937 IN. KILOGRAMS 2.205 LB.

0.03281 FT. 35.27 OZ.
1000 GRAMS
CU. CENTIMETERS 0.001 LITERS
0.06102 CU. IN. LITERS 1000 CU. CM.
0.0002642 U.S. GAL. 61.03 CU. IN.
CU. FT. 0.03532 CU. FT.
28.320 CU. CM.
1.728 0.2642 U.S. GAL.
CU. IN.
7.481 0.22 IMPERIAL GAL.
U.S. GAL.
1.057 QUARTS
28.32 LITERS
METERS 39.37 IN.
CU. IN. 16.39 CU. CM.
0.01639 LITERS 3.281 FT.
0.004329 1000 MM.
U.S. GAL.
0.01732 QUARTS METER-KILOGRAM 7.233 FT.-LB
CU. METERS 1000000 9.807 JOULES
CU. CM.
35.314 CU. FT. OUNCES. AVDP 0.0625 LB.. AVDP
61.023 CU. IN. 28.35 GRAMS
264.17 GAL. 437.5 GRAINS
999.97 LITERS
OUNCES. FLUID 29.57 CU. CM.
FEET 0.3048 METERS 1.805 CU. IN.
12.000 MILS.
304.8 MM. LB.. AVDP 453.6 GRAMS
0.3333 YARDS 7000 GRAINS
16.0 OUNCES
FT.-LB. 0.1383 M-KG
0.001285 BTU SQUARE INCH 64516 SQ. CM.
0.000000376 KW-HR POUND PER 0.0703 KG-CM
FLUID OZ. 8 DRAM SQUARE INCH SQUARED
29.6 CU. CM. (PSI)
GAL.. IMPERIAL 277.4 CU. IN. STATUTE MILE 1.609 KILOMETER

1.201 U.S. GAL. 0.8684 NAUTICAL MILE
4.546 LITERS NAUTICAL MILE 1.151 STATUTE
GAL.. U.S. DRY 268.8 CU. IN. MILE
0.1556 CU. FT. QUART .9463 LITER
1.164 U.S. GAL.. LIQ.
4.405 LITERS MILLIMETER 1000 MICRON
GAL.. U.S. LIQ. 231.0 CU. IN. MICRON 0.001 MILLIMETER
0.1337 CU. FT. 0.000039 INCH
3.785 LITERS
INCH 11.521 METER
0.8327 IMPERIAL GAL.
POUNDS GRAMS
128 FLUID OZ.
IN. INCH 0.72 METER
2.540 CM.
OUNCES GRAMS
.08333 FT.
JOULES POUNDS 0.453 KILOGRAMS
0.000948 BTU
0.7376 FT.-I.B.

Reissued: 2/18/81
1C19
TABLE II-VI. DECIMAL/MILLIMETER EQUIVALENTS OF DRILL SIZES
Decimal/ Millimeter Equivalents of Drill Sizes From 1/2" to No. 80
Size Decimal Millimeter Size Decimal Millimeter Size Decimal Millimeter Size Decimal Millimeter
Equiv Equiv. Equiv. Equiv. Equiv. Equiv. Equiv Equiv
1/2 0.500 12.7000 G 0.261 6.6294 5/32 0.1562 3.9687 51 0.067 1.7018
31/64 0.4843 12.3031 F 0.257 6.5278 23 0.154 3.9116 52 0.0635 1 6129
15/32 0.4687 11.9062 E-1/4 0.250 6.3500 24 0.152 3.8608 1/16 0.0625 1.5875
29/64 0.4531 11.5094 D 0.246 6.2484 25 0.1495 3.7973 53 0.0595 1 5113
7/16 0.4375 11.1125 C .0.242 6.1468 26 0.147 3.7338 54 0.055 1.397
27/64 0.4218 10.7156 B 0.238 6.0452 27 0.144 3.6576 55 0.052 1.3208

Z 0.413 10.4902 15/64 0.2343 5.9531 9/64 0.1406 3.5719 3/64 0.0468 1.1906
13/32 0.4062 103187 A 0234 5.9436 28 0.1405 3.5687 56 0.0465 1.1811
Y 0404 10.2616 1 0228 5.7912 29 0.136 3.4544 57 0.043 1.0922
X 0.397 10 0838 2 0221 5.6134 30 0.1285 3 2639 58 0.042 1.0668
25/64 0.3906 99212 7/32 02187 5.5562 1/8 0.125 3.1750 59 0041 1.0414
W 0.386 9 8044 3 0.213 5.4102 31 0.120 3.048 60 0.040 1.016
V 0.377 9 5758 4 0209 5 3086 32 0.116 2.9464 61 0.039 0 9906
3/8 0 375 9 5250 5 0.2055 5.2197 33 0113 2.8702 62 0.038 0.9652
U 0.368 9.3472 6 0204 51816 34 0.111 2.8194 63 0.037 0.9398
23/64 0.3593 91262 13/64 02031 5.1594 35 0110 2.794 64 0 036 0 9144
T 0.358 91281 7 0201 51054 7/64 0 1093 2 7781 65 0.035 0.899
S 0.346 8.7884 8 0.199 5.0546 36 0.1065 2.7051 66 0.033 0.8382
11 /32 0 3437 8 7300 9 0196 49784 37 0 104 2.6416 1/32 0.0312 0 7937
R 0.339 86106 10 0.1935 4.9149 38 0 1015 2.5781 67 0.032 08128
Q 0332 84328 11 0191 48514 39 0.0995 2.5273 68 0031 0.7874

21 /64 0.3281 8 3337 12 0189 48006 40 0.098 2.4892 69 0.029 0 7366
P 0 323 8 2042 3/16 0.1875 47625 41 0.096 2.4384 70 0.028 0.7112
0 0.316 8 0264 13 0.185 4.699 3/32 0.0937 2.3812 71 0.026 0 6604
5/16 03125 7 9375 14 0182 46228 42 0 0935 2.3749 72 0.025 0.635
N 0302 7 6708 15 0 180 4572 43 0 089 2 2606 73 0.024 0 6096

19/64 0.2968 7 5387 16 0177 44958 44 0 086 2.1844 74 00229 0 58166
M 0 295 7 4930 17 0.173 43942 45 0 82 2.0828 75 0.021 0.5334
L 0290 7 3660 11/64 01718 43656 46 081 2 0574 76 0.020 0.508
9/ 32 02812 7.1425 18 0.1695 4.3053 47 0.0785 1 9939 77 0018 0 4572
K 0.281 71374 19 0.166 4.2164 5/64 00781 1.9844 1/64 0.0156 0.3969
J 0 277 7 0358 20 0.161 40894 48 0.076 1 9304 78 0.016 04064
I 0272 69088 21 0159 4 0386 49 0.073 1 8542 79 0.0145 0 3683
H 0266 6 7564 22 0157 3 9878 50 0.070 1.778 80 0.0135 0.3429
17.64 0.2656 6 7462
DRILL SIZES AVAILABLE

Drill may be obtained in regular sizes to a 4 inch diameter, and increase in 64ths of an inch.
The regular metric drills vary from 2 to 76mm and increase in 0 5mm variations

Reissued: 2/18/81
1C20
2129
Figure 2-11. Jacking Arrangements
2-10. GROUND HANDLING.
2-11. INTRODUCTION TO GROUND HANDLING. Ground handling covers all es-

sential information governing the handling of the airplane while on the ground.
This includes jacking, weighing, leveling, mooring, parking, towing and taxiing.
When the airplane is handled in the manner described in the following paragraphs,
the chance of possible damage to the airplane and it's equipment will be prevented.
2-12. JACKING. The airplane is provided with a jacking pad on each main spar
just outboard of the engine nacelle and a support positionby making use of the tail
skid. (Refer to Figure 2-11.) To jack the airplane, proceed as follows:
a. Place the jacks under the jack pads.
b. Attach the tail support to the tail skid. Place approximately 250 pounds of
ballast on the support to hold the tail down.

Reissued:2/18/81
1C21
2135
Figure 2-12. Weighing

CAUTION
Be sure to apply sufficient tail support ballast; other-

wise the airplane will tip forward and fall on the fuse-
lage nose section.
c. Raise the jacks evenly until all three wheels clear the floor.
2-13. WEIGHING. (Refer to Figure 2-12.)

a. Position a scale and ramp in front of each of the three landing gear wheels.
b. Secure the scales from rolling, and tow the airplane up on to the scales.
(Refer to Towing, Paragraph 2.17.)
c. Remove the ramps so as not to interfere with the scales.
d. If the airplane is to be weighed for weight and balance computations, level
the airplane per instructions given in paragraph 2-14.
e. The airplanes weight is obtained by adding the reading on each of the three
scales.

Reissued: 2/18/81
1C22
A710 A709
LEVEL PLANE
Figure 2-13. Longitudinal Leveling Figure 2-14. Lateral Leveling
2-14. LEVELING. All configurations of the airplane are provided with a means for longitudinal and lateral
leveling. The airplane may be leveled while on jacks, during the weighing procedure while the wheels are on
scales, or while the wheels are on the ground. To level the airplane for purpose of weighing or rigging, the
following procedure should be used:
a. Level the airplane longitudinally as follows:
1. Ascertain that all tires are inflated to normal pressures.
2. Block the nose gear to obtain 2.50 inches of strut extrusion and the main gear to obtain 6.50
inches of strut extrusion.
3. Partially withdraw the two leveling screws located on the right side of the fuselage forward of
the stabilator as shown in Figure 2-13.
4. Place a spirit level on the heads of the screws.
5. Level the airplane by inflating or deflating the nose wheel tire or adjusing the jacks until the
bubble on the level is centered.
b. Level the airplane laterally as follows:
I. Ascertain that the landing gear is blocked to the specified strut extensions as stated in step a, 2.
2. Set a bubble protractor at five degrees and place it on a straightedge held along the front spar
on the under surface of the wing as shown in Figure 2-14. Do not place the straightedge on any rivet heads.
3. Raise or lower the wing by inflating or deflating the main gear tires or adjusting either jack,
until the bubble is centered indicating a five degree dihedral of the wing which will level the fuselage.
4. Check the opposite wing with the protractor to ascertain it also has a five degree dihedral.

Reissued: 2/18/81
1C23
2-17. TOWING. The airplane may be moved by using the nose wheel steering bar that is
stowed in the baggage area or power equipment that will not damage or cause excess strain to
the nose gear steering assembly. Towing lugs are incorporated as part of the nose gear fork.
CAUTIONS
1. Do not tow airplane with control locks installed.

2. Observe turning limits to prevent strut damage.
CAUTION
When moving the aircraft forward by hand, avoid pushing on

the trailing edge of the ailerons as this will cause the aileron
contour to change resulting in an out-of-trim condition.
2-18. TAXIING. Before attempting to taxi the airplane, ground personnel should bechecked
out by a qualified pilot or other responsible person. Engine starting and shut-down procedures
should be covered as well. When it is ascertained that the propeller back blast and taxi areas are
clear, apply power to start the taxi roll and perform the following checks:
a. Taxi forward a few feet and apply brakes to determine their effectiveness.
b. Taxi with propeller set in low pitch, high RPM setting.
c. While taxiing, make slight turns to ascertain the effectiveness of steering.
d. Observe wing clearances when taxiing near buildings or other stationary objects. If
possible, station a guide outside the airplane to observe.
e. When taxiing on uneven ground, look for holes and ruts.
f. Do not operate the engine at high RPM when running up or taxiing over ground
containing loose stones, gravel or any loose material that may cause damage to the propeller
blades.
2-19. EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTACLE.
2-20. OPERATION OF EXTERNAL POWER RECEPTACLE. The external power

receptacle is located on the underside of the nose section forward of the landing gear. When
using external power for starting insure that the master switch and all avionics switches are
turned OFF. Reduce engines to idle before removing the external power unit. Turn master
switch and avionics switches ON only after the external power unit has been disconnected!

Reissued: 2/18/81
1D1
2-21. CLEANING.
2-22. CLEANING ENGINE COMPARTMENT. Before cleaning the engine com-

partment, place a strip of tape on the magneto vents to prevent any solvent from
entering these units.
a. Place a large pan under the engine to catch waste.
b. With the engine cowling removed, spray or brush the engine with solvent
or a mixture of solvent and degreaser, as desired. It may be necessary to brush
areas that were sprayed where heavy grease and dirt deposits have collected in
order to clean them.
CAUTION
Do not spray solvent into the generator or alternator,

starter and air intakes.
c. Allow the solvent to remain on the engine from 5 to 10 minutes, then rinse
the engine clean with additional solvent and allow to dry.
CAUTION
Do not operate engine until excess solvent has evapo-

rated or otherwise been removed.
d. Remove the protective covers from the magnetos.

e. Lubricate controls, bearing surfaces, etc., per Lubrication Chart.
2-23. CLEANING LANDINGGEAR. Before cleaning the landing gear, place a

plastic cover or similar material over the wheel and brake assembly.
a. Place a pan under the gear to catch waste.
b. Spray or brush the gear area with solvent or a mixture of solvent and de-
greaser, as desired. It may be necessary to brush areas thatwere sprayed where
heavy grease and dirt deposits have collected in order to clean them.
c. Allow the solvent to remain on the gear from 5 to 10 minutes, then rinse
the gear with additional solvent and allow to dry.
d. Remove the cover from the wheel and remove the catch pan.
e. Lubricate the gear per Lubrication Chart.

Reissued:2/18/81
1D2
2-24. CLEANING EXTERIOR SURFACES. The airplane should be washed with a mild
soap and water. Harsh abrasive or alkaline soaps or detergents used on painted or plastic sur-
faces could make scratches or cause corrosion of metal surfaces. Cover areas where cleaning
solution could cause damage. To wash the airplane, the following procedure may be used:
a. Flush away loose dirt with water.
b. Apply cleaning solution with a rag, sponge or soft bristle brush.
c. To remove stubborn oil and grease, use a cloth dampened with naptha.
d. Where exhaust stains exist, allow solution to remain on the surface longer.
e. Any good automotive wax may be used to preserve the painted surfaces. Soft cleaning
cloths or a chamois should be used to prevent scratches when cleaning or polishing. A heavier
coating of wax on the leading surfaces will reduce the abrasion problems in these areas.
2-25. CLEANING WINDSHIELD AND WINDOWS.

a. Remove dirt, mud, etc., from exterior surface with clean water.
b. Wash with mild soap and warm water or an aircraft plastic cleaner. Use a soft cloth or
sponge using a straight rubbing motion. Do not harshly rub surfaces.
c. Remove oil and grease with a cloth moistened with kerosene.
NOTE
Do not use gasoline, alcohol, benzene, carbon tetrachloride,

thinner, acetone, or window cleaning sprays.
d. After cleaning plastic surfaces, apply a thin coat of hard polishing wax. Rub lightly
with a soft cloth. Do not use a circular motion.
e. A severe scratch or mar in plastic can be removed by using jeweler's rouge to rub out
the scratch. Smooth both sides and apply wax.
f. To improve visibility through windshield and windows during flights through rain, a
rain repellent such as REPCON should be applied to the windshield and windows. The sur-
faces of the windshield and windows treated becomes so smooth that water beads up and
readily flows off the surface. Apply this product in accordance with the manufacturer's instruc-
tions. (Refer to Table II-II. Consumable Materials, for Specifications and Manufacturer's
address.)
2-26. CLEANING HEADLINER, SIDE PANELS AND SEATS.

a. Clean headliner, side panels and seats with a stiff bristle brush and vacuum where
necessary.
b. Soiled upholstery, except leather, may be cleaned by using an approved air type
cleaner or foam upholstery cleaner. Carefully follow the manufacturer's instructions. Avoid
soaking or harsh rubbing.

Reissued:2/ 18/81
1D3
CAUTION
Solvent cleaners require adequate ventilation.
c. Leather material should be cleaned with saddle soap or a mild soap and water.
2-27. CLEANING CARPETS. Use a small wisk broom or vacuum to remove dirt. For soiled spots, use a
non-inflammable dry-cleaning fluid.
2-28. REPAINTING (Polythane Enamel). If it becomes necessary or desirable to repaint the aircraft, the
following procedures will apply (PA-23-250 [Six Place] Aztec).
a. Wash the area to be painted thoroughly. It is not necessary to strip the previous coating, unless it is
desired, use an appropriate stripper.
2-29. SCRATCH TOUCH UP ON ALUMINUM SURFACE.

a. "Feather-Edge" the surface with fine wet or dry paper (400-600 grit).
b. If gouges are deep, fill with polyester or epoxy filler. Sand lightly.
c. Apply a coat of Epoxy Primer (8951/8678). Dry overnight and sand lightly. (For Piper Part No.
refer to Table II-VII.)
d. Apply a Polytane Enamel.
2-30. COATING PROCEDURE FOR NEW ALUMINUM PANEL-NON ALODIZED.

a. Thoroughly clean all contaminents from surface: solvent wash with industrial grade MEK or
Titanine Ti-Two Cleaning Thinner.
NOTE
Deoxidiene 624 or equal is recommended but not absolutely

required.
b. Apply V-48 Wash Primer.

c. Apply either Epoxy Primer (8951)/Epoxy Converter 8678 or Polytane (6351) Urethane Primer.
d. Topcoat with Polytane Enamel.
2-31. COATING PROCEDURE FOR ALODIZED ALUMINUM.

a. Thoroughly clean all contaminents from surface; solvent wash with industrial grade MEK or
Titanine Ti-Two Cleaning Thinner.
b. Apply either Epoxy Primer/Converter, or Polytane Urethane Primer.
c. Topcoat with Polyuthane Enamel.

Reissued:2/18/81
1D4
2-32. MIXING INSTRUCTIONS FOR PRIMERS AND TOPCOATS.
2-33. V-48 WASH PRIMER.
NOTE
Never use Polytane Enamel directly over V-48 without an in-

termediate primer.
a. Agitate the primer well.

b. While stirring slowly add I volume of catalyst to 4 volumes of Primer. DO NOT
REVERSE THIS PROCEDURE.
c. Reduce the above mixture with 1/2 (by volume) of LT 327 Thinner.
2-34. EPOXY PRIMER.

a. Mix equal volumes of Epoxy Primer (8951) and Converter (8678). Allow mixture to
stand at least 20 minutes before spraying.
NOTE
The pot life of the mixture is 16 hours at 70°-75 ° F. Approxi-

mate spreading rate is 400 Sq. Ft. per gallon of mixture (a).
b. Allow to dry overnight before sanding and recoating with Polytane Enamel.
2-355. POLYTANE 6351 PRIMER.

a. Mix 4 volumes of Primer (6351) with I volume of Polytane Catalyst (6352).
b. Reduce this mixture with LT-345 Polytane Reducer, approx. 50%.
NOTE
One gallon of mixed material will cover approximately 300

square feet. Pot life of mixed material is 6-8 hours at 75° F.
Allow to dry overnight before light sanding and recoating with
Polytane Enamel.

Reissued:2 18,81
1D5
TABLE II-VII. PAINT MATERIAI.S
Piper Part No. Titanine No. Description
V-48 Wash Primer Kit

LT 327 Wash Primer Reducer
3022 Ti-Two Cleaning Solvent
170-139 8905-A Epoxy Reducer
170-729 8951 Epoxy Primer
170-825 8678 Epoxy Converter
170-735 6351 Polytane Primer
179-141 6350 Polytane Reducer
170-807 6352 Polytane Catalyst
*No Piper number assigned.
2-36. MIXING INSTRUCTIONS FOR POLYTANE ENAMEL.
2-37. POLYTANE ENAMEL ALL COLORS.

a. Mix 4 volumes of Polytane Enamel with 1 volume of Polytane (6352) Catalyst. Up to
10% of 6350 Polytane Reducer may be added to adjust viscosity for spray.
b. Spray a mist coat, allow 20 minutes setting time, follow with a full wet coat.
NOTE
Pot life of mixed material is 8 hours at 75° F. Allow Polytane

Enamel to dry 10hours minimum before taping. The universal
mixing ratio of all colors makes it possible to intermix any
combination of POLYTANE colors before catalyzing mix-
ture. This is an aid to those wishing to mix their own special
colors. For technical information,phone Titanine (201) 933-
1000.
HANDLING AND SFRVICING

Reissued: 2/18/81
1D6
2-38. STANDARD PRACTICES - AIRFRAME. This general information pertains to

standard aircraft hardware installation and removal practices. The information included will
be very helpful if it is referred to on a regular basis.
For standard repair practices of a minor nature, refer to AC43.13.
If repairs dictate Non-Destructive Testing (N.D.T.) after repair such as welding,
magniflux should be used on materials made from 4130 steel such as engine mounts and seat
frames.
Testing and inspecting of aluminum castings and machined aluminum parts may be
accomplished by the dye penetrant method.
Usually, a good visual inspection with 10X magnifying glass will show any damage or
defect in a repair that is of a significant nature.
2-39. CHERRYLOCK RIVETS, REMOVAL. (Refer to Figure 2-15.) Should it be

necessary to remove an installed cherrylock rivet, the following procedures are recommended.
a. In thick material remove the lock by driving out the rivet stem. using a tapered steel
drift pin. (See View 1.)
NOTE
Do not drill completely through the rivet sleeve to remove a

rivet as this will tend to enlarge the hole.
b. If the rivets have been installed in thin sheets, driving out the locked stem may damage
the sheets. It is recommended that a small center drill be used to provide a guide for a larger
drill on top of the rivet stem, and the tapered portion of the stem be drilled away to destroy the
lock. (See Views 2 and 3.)
c. Pry the remainder of the locking collar out of the rivet head with the drift pin. (See
View 3.)
d. Drill nearly through the head of the rivet, using a drill the same size as the rivet shank.
(See View 4.)
e. Break off rivet head, using a drift pin as a pry. (See View 5.)
f. Drive out the remaining rivet shank with a pin having a diameter equal to the rivet
shank. (See View 6.)

Reissued: 2/18/81
1D7
B361
1.
DRIFT PIN
2. 4.
SMALL
CENTERDRILL
5.
3. 6.
Figure 2-15. Cherrylock Rivet Removal

Reissued: 2/ 18/81
1D8
2-40. IDENTIFICATION OF FLUID LINES. (Refer to Figure 2-16.)Fluid lines in aircraft

are often identified by markers made up of color codes, words, and geometric symbols. These
markers identify each line's function, content, and primary hazard, as well as the direction of
fluid flow.
In most instances, fluid lines are marked with I-inch tape or decals. Paint is used on lines
in engine compartments, where there is the possibility of tapes, decals or tags being drawn into
the engine induction system.
In addition to the above-mentioned markings, certain lines may be further identified as to
specific function within a system; for example, DRAIN, VENT, PRESSURE, or RETURN.
Lines conveying fuel may be marked FLAM: lines containing toxic materials are marked
TOXIC in place of FLAM. Lines containing physically dangerous materials, such as oxygen,
nitrogen, or freon, are marked PHDAN.
The aircraft and engine manufacturers are responsible for the original installation of
identification markers, but the aviation mechanic is responsible for their replacement when it
becomes necessary.
Generally, tapes and decals are placed on both ends of a line and at least once in each
compartment through which the line runs. In addition, identification markers are placed
immediately adjacent to each valve, regulator, filter or other accessory within a line. Where
paint or tags are used, location requirements are the same as for tapes and decals.
2-41. FLARELESS TUBE ASSEMBLIES. (Refer to Figure 2-17.) Although the use of
flareless tube fittings eliminates all tube flaring, another operation, referred to as presetting.is
necessary prior to installation of a new flareless tube assembly which is performed as follows:
a. Cut the tube to the correct length, with the ends perfectly square. Deburr the inside and
outside of the tube. Slip the nut, then the sleeve over the tube (Step a).
b. Lubricate the threads of the fitting and nut. See Figure 20-17 for proper lubricant to
use, depending on the type system of the tubing assemblies are to be used on. Place the fitting in
the vise (Step 2), and hold the tubing firmly and squarely on the seat in the fitting. (Tube must
bottom firmly in the fitting.) Tighten the nut until the cutting edge of the sleeve grips the tube.
This point is determined by slowly turning the tube back and forth while tightening the nut.
When the tube no longer turns, the nut is ready for final tightening.
c. Final tightening depends upon the tubing. For aluminum allow tubing up to and
including 1/2 inch outside diameter, tighten the nut from one to one and one-sixth turns. For
steel tubing and aluminum alloy tubing over 1/2 outside diameter tighten from one and one-
sixth to one and one-half turns.
After presetting the sleeve, disconnect the tubing from the fitting and check the following
points (illustrated in Step c):
a. The tube should extend 3/32 to 1/8 inch beyond the sleeve pilot: otherwise blowoff
may occur.
b. The sleeve pilot should contact the tube or have a maximum clearance of 0.005 inch for
aluminum alloy tubing or 0.015 inch for steel tubing.
c. A slight collapse of the tube at the sleeve cut is permissable. No movement of the sleeve
pilot, except rotation is permissible.

Reissued:2 18 81
1D9
B362 TWO COTTON BRAIDS IMPREGNATED YELLOW NUMERALS LETTERS

WITH SYNTHETIC COMPOUND AND STRIPE
YELLOW LETTERING SINGLE WIRE BRAID

SYNTHETICINNER TUBE
B. NON-SELF-SEALING. AROMATIC
A. FLAME AND AROMATIC RESISTANT HOSE RESISTANTHOSE
WHITE NUMERALS, LETTERSAND STRIPE RED NUMERALS, LETTERSAND STRIPE
(VIEWS SHOWING OPPOSITESIDES OF HOSE)

C. NON-SELF-SEALING, AROMATIC AND D. SELF-SEALING. AROMATIC
HEAT RESISTANT HOSE RESISTANTHOSE
E. FLAME.
RED NUMERALS AND LETTERS
HOSE IDENTIFICATIONMARKINGS
BROWN ORANGE ORANGE ORANGE GRAY GRAY
ELECTRICAL COMPRESSED INSTRUMENT HYDRAULIC DEICING

CONDUIT GAS AIR
GREEN ORANGE BLUE YELLOW
BREATHING FUEL PNEUMATIC LUBRICATION AIR

OXYGEN CONDITION
RED
LINE IDENTIFICATIONUSING TAPE AND DECALS
FLUID
USINGTAPEAND DECALS
FLUIDLINEIDENTIFICATION
Figure 2-16. Hose Line Markings

Reissued: 21 18 81
D10
B363
TUBING SYSTEM LUBRICANT

HYDRAULIC MIL-H-5606
FUEL MIL-H-5606
OIL System Oil
PNEUMATIC MIL-L-4343
OXYGEN* MIL-T-5542
*CAUTION-DONOT USE OIL OR GREASE
TUBINGAND HOSE LUBRICANTS TUBE
SLEEVE
CUTTING
EDGE-
SLEEVE
ITTING PILOT TUBENUT
FLARELESS-TUBEFITTING
SLEEVE TUBE
SLEEVE CUTTING EDGE

STEP 1
STEP 2
3/32 TO
STEP 3
SLIGHT DEFORMATION
PERMISSIBLE
-. 005 INCH MAXIMUM- ALUMINUM
ALLOYTUBING
015 INCH MAXIMUM - CORROSION
RESISTANTSTEEL TUBING
PRESETTINGFLARELESS-TUBEASSEMBLY
Figure 2-17. Flareless Tube Fittings

Reissued: 2/ 18/81
1D11
2-42. SUPPORT CLAMPS. Support clamps are used to secure the various lines to the airframe or power-
plant assemblies. Several types of support clamps are used for this purpose. The rubber cushioned and plain
are the most commonly used clamps. The rubber cushioned clamp is used to secure lines subject to vibration;
the cushioning prevents chafing of the tubing. The plain clamp is used to secure lines in areas not subject to
vibration.
A teflon-cushioned clamp is used in areas where the deteriorating effect of Skydrol 500, hydraulic fluid
(MIL-H-5606)or fuel is expected, however, because it is less resilient, it does not provide as good a vibration-
damping effect as other cushion materials.
Use bonded clamps to secure metal hydraulic, fuel and oil lines in place. Unbonded clamps should be used
only for securing wiring. Remove any paint or anodizing from the portion of the tube at the bonding clamp
location. Make certain that clamps are of the correct size. Clamps or supporting clips smaller than the outside
diameter of the hose may restrict the flow of the fluid through the hose.
All plumbing lines must be secured at specified intervals. The maximum distance between supports for
rigid fluid tubing is shown in Figure 2-18.
TUBE OD DISTANCE BETWEEN SUPPORTS (IN.)

(IN.) ALUMINUM ALLOY STEEL
1/8 9-1/2 11-1/2

3/16 12 14
1/4 13-1/2 16
5/16 15 18
3/8 16-1/ 2 20
1/2 19 23
5/8 22 25-1/2
3/4 24 27-1/2
1 26-1/2 30
Figure 2-18. Maximum Distance Between Supports for Fluid Tubing

Reissued: 2/ 18/81
1D12
2-43. SERVICING.
2-44. INTRODUCTION TO SERVICING. Servicing the airplane includes the replenish-

ment of fuel, oil, hydraulic fluid, tire pressures, lubrication requirements and other items re-
quired to completely service the airplane.
2-45. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM.
2-46. SERVICING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. The hydraulic system, which consists of the
landing gear and flap actuating system, powerpak and associated lines, should be checked and
serviced every 100 hours. The powerpak should be filled with petroleum base hydraulic fluid,
MIL-H-5606 and all hydraulic lines connections, and actuating rods should be kept clean of
dirt by wiping with a clean shop rag. Detailed instructions for maintenance of the hydraulic
system may be found in Section VI. (See CONSUMABLE MATERIALS CHART for name
of fluid vendor.)
NOTE
Every precaution must be exercised in handling hydraulic fluid

to prevent its contamination. Dirt or other foreign matter in
the system may become lodged between the valves and seats of
the powerpak and component parts in the various actuating
cylinders, thus preventing the system from operating properly.
It is recommended that the hydraulic fluid be filtered before
using, whether it is new or used fluid. Use a small funnel, a
piece of standard commercial filter paper and a container to
hold the funnel and filtered oil.

Reissued:2/18/81
1D13
2-47. POWERPAK RESERVOIR.
2-48. FILLING POWERPAK RESERVOIR (GRAVITY).

a. Open the access door or remove the left side panel on the nose to gain access to the
hydraulic filler tube. (Refer to Figure 2-8.)
b. Place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to Jacking, Paragraph 2-12.)
c. Remove the cap of filler tube.
d. Place the landing gear selector lever in the UP position.
e. Using the hand pump, raise the landing gear. When the landing gear selector lever
returns to neutral, place the wing flaps selector lever in the DOWN position and extend flaps.
f. Add fluid to the system through the filler tube (refer to Figures 2-19, 2-20 or 2-21) until
fluid drips from the overflow located in the nose gear wheel well.
NOTE
Remember in Step e above, the landing gear is UP and the

flaps are DOWN. so overflow fluid will first appear on the
nose wheel tire.
g. Swivel the elbow at the cap end of the filler tube until it points down. Hold the loose
end of the filer tube down and let the excess fluid drain off.
h. Recap the filler tube and close the access door or install side panel.
i. Operate the landing gear and flaps through their complete cycle, UP and DOWN at
least five times to insure that all air is bled from the system, as indicated by smooth operation
of the landing gear and wing flaps.
NOTE
As an added precaution, have a container ready to catch ex-

cessive fluid that will be exhausted through the overboard
drain in the nose wheel well when recycling landing gear and
flaps.

Reissued: 2/18/81
1D14
2125
12 45 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 15 17 18
13 10 14 16
19
20
22
23
1. COLLECTOR TANK, OIL 19. FILLER, OUTBOARD FUEL CELL, RIGHT

2. FILLER, INBOARD FUEL CELL, RIGHT 20. OIL FILLER, RIGHT ENGINE
3. CARBURETOR 21. SCREEN, OIL SUCTION
4. SCREENOR FILTER, OIL PRESSURE 22. FILTER, INDUCTION
5. FILTER, VACUUM REGULATOR 23. BATTERY
6. STRAINER, FUEL DRAINS 24. FILLER, OLEO SHOCK STRUT, NOSE
7. STRAINER, HEATER FUEL 25. TIRE
8. POWERPAK 26. HEATER
9. FILTER, ARTIFICIAL HORIZON 27. FILTER, INSTRUMENT AIR
(WITHOUT CENTRAL AIR FILTER) 26. FILLER TUBE, POWERPAK
10. FILTER, DIRECTIONAL GYRO 29. RESERVOIR
(WITHOUT CENTRAL AIR FILTER) 30. FILTER, INDUCTION
II. DRAIN, CROSSFEED FUEL 31. SCREEN, OIL SUCTION
12. CYLINDER CO2 32. CARBURETOR
13. OIL FILLER, LEFT ENGINE 33. SCREEN OR FILTER, OIL PRESSURE
14. FILTER, VACUUM REGULATOR 34. COLLECTOR TANK, OIL
15. FILTER, HYDRAULIC 35. TIRE
16. STRAINER, FUEL DRAINS 36. FILLER, INBOARD FUEL CELL, LEFT
17. FILLER, OLEO SHOCK STRUT, L AND R 37. FILLER, OUTBOARD FUEL CELL, LEFT
18. CYLINDER OXYGEN
Figure 2-19. Service Points. PA-23-250 and PA-23-235

Reissued: 2/18/81
1D15
2109
21
22
1. FILLER, OUTBOARD FUEL CELL, RIGHT 18. FILTER, VACUUM REGULATOR

2. OIL FILLER, RIGHT ENGINE 19. SCREEN, OIL SUCTION
3. FILLER, INBOARD FUEL CELL, RIGHT 20. CARBURETOR OR FUEL INJECTOR
4. SCREEN OR FILTER, OIL PRESSURE 21. FILTER, INDUCTION
5. STRAINER, FUEL DRAINS 22. BATTERY
6. FILTER, ARTIFICIAL HORIZON 23. FILLER, OLEO SHOCK STRUT, NOSE
(WITHOUT CENTRAL AIR FILTER) 24. TIRE
7. FILTER, DIRECTIONAL GYRO 25. HEATER
(WITHOUT CENTRAL AIR FILTER) 26. FILTER, INSTRUMENT AIR
8. DRAIN, CROSSFEED FUEL 27. FILLER TUBE, HYDRAULIC
9. CYLINDER CO2 28. RESERVOIR, BRAKE SYSTEM
10. OIL FILLER, LEFT ENGINE 29. FILTER, INDUCTION
II. FILTER, VACUUM REGULATOR 30. SCREEN, OIL SUCTION
12. FILTER, HYDRAULIC 31. CARBURETOR OR FUEL INJECTOR
13. STRAINER, FUEL DRAINS 32. SCREEN OR FILTER, OIL PRESSURE
14. FILLER, OLEO SHOCK STRUT, L AND R 33. TIRE
15. CYLINDER OXYGEN 34. FILLER, OUTBOARD FUEL CELL, LEFT
16. POWERPAK RESERVOIR 35. FILLER, INBOARD FUEL CELL, RIGHT
17. STRAINER, HEATER FUEL
Figure 2-20. Service Points, PA-23-250 (six place)


Reissued: 2/18/81
1D16
2110
1. OIL FILLER, RIGHT ENGINE 23. TIRE, NOSE

2. FILLER, INBOARD FUEL CELL, RIGHT 24. HEATER
3. SCREEN OR FILTER, OIL PRESSURE 25. FILTER, INSTRUMENTAIR
4. STRAINER, FUEL DRAINS 26. FILLER TUBE, POWERPAK
5. STRAINER, HEATER FUEL 27. RESERVOIR, BRAKE SYSTEM
(SOUTH WIND HEATER ONLY) 28. SCREEN, OIL SUCTION, LEFT ENGINE
6. POWERPAK RESERVOIR 29. FUEL INJECTOR, LEFT ENGINE
7. DRAIN, CROSSFEED FUEL 30. FILTER, INDUCTION
8. CYLINDER CO 2 31. STRAINER, FUEL DRAINS
9. OIL FILLER, LEFT ENGINE 32. TIRE, LAND R
10. FILTER, VACUUM REGULATOR 33. FILLER, OUTBOARD FUEL CELL, LEFT -
11. FILTER, HYDRAULIC WITHOUT TIP FUEL CELL
12. OXYGEN CYLINDER, SERIAL NOS. 27-2505 34. FILLER, INBOARD FUEL CELL, LEFT
TO 27-3049, 27-3051 TO 27-3153 35. SCREEN, OIL SUCTION
13. OXYGEN CYLINDER, SERIAL NOS. 27-3050, 36. FUEL INJECTOR
27-3153 AND UP 37. OIL RESERVOIR
14. FILLER, OLEO SHOCK STRUT, L AND R 38. STRAINER, FUEL DRAINS
15. SCREEN OR FILTER, OIL PRESSURE 39. SCREEN OR FILTER, OIL PRESSURE
16. FILTER, VACUUM REGULATOR 40. FILTER, HYDRAULIC
17. FILTER, INDUCTION 41. FILTER, VACUUM REGULATOR
18. FILLER, OUTBOARD FUEL CELL, RIGHT - 42. OIL FILLER
WITHOUT TIP FUEL CELL 43. FILTER, INDUCTION
19. SCREEN, OIL SUCTION, RIGHT ENGINE 44. WING TIP FUEL CELL FILLER - RIGHT -SERIAL
20. FUEL INJECTOR, RIGHT ENGINE NOS. 27-7654001 AND UP -OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
21. BATTERY 45. WING TIP FUEL CELL FILLER - LEFT -SERIAL
22. FILLER, OLEO SHOCK STRUT, NOSE NOS. 27-7654001 AND UP - OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
Figure 2-21. Service Points, PA-23-250 (six place)


Reissued: 2/18/81
1D17
2-49. FILLING POWERPAK RESERVOIR (PRESSURE).

a. Open the access door or remove the left side panel to gain access to the hydraulic filler
tube. (Refer to Figure 2-8.)
b. Place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to Jacking, Paragraph 2-12.)
c. Remove the filler tube cap (refer to Figures 2-19, 2-20 or 2-21) and swivel the elbow
down.
d. Disconnect the pressure and suction hydraulic lines from the engine driven hydraulic
pump and connect these lines to the auxiliary fluid source.
e. Fill the hydraulic system by turning on the motor of the auxiliary fluid source. Fill
until fluid overflows the filler tube.
NOTE
Do not cap the filler tube.
f. Turn off the motor of the auxiliary fluid source and operate both the landing gear
and flaps at least twice, using the hand pump.
g. With the landing gear retracted and the flaps down start the motor of the auxiliary
fluid source and refill the system until the fluid overflows the filler tube.
h. Close the line leading from the reservoir of the auxiliary fluid source to its motor.
Start the motor and operate the landing gear and the flap system at least five times.
i. With the landing gear retracted and the flaps down, recheck the fluid level.
j. Extend the landing gear and raise the flaps. Disconnect the auxiliary fluid source and
re-attach the lines to the engine driven pump.
k. Recap the filler tube and close the access door or install side panel.
2-50. LANDING GEAR SYSTEM.
2-51. SERVICING LANDING GEAR. The landing gear consisting of tires, brakes, oleo
strut assembly, drag links, down locks and gear doors, should be visually inspected to de-
termine proper strut extension, possible hydraulic fluid leakage, security and condition of all
related components. Minor service is described in the following paragraphs and detailed
service and overhaul instructions are listed in Section VII.
1D18 1D18 Reissued: 2/18/81

A479
V
Figure 2-22. Servicing Landing Gear Oleo Struts
2-52. OLEO STRUTS.
2-53. SERVICING OLEO STRUTS. Air-oil shock struts are incorporated in each
landing gear oleo assembly to absorb the shock resulting from the impact of the
wheels on the runway during landing. To obtain proper oleo action, the nose and
main gear oleo struts must have approximately 3.0 inches of piston tube exposed
under normal static loads. (Refer to Figure 2-22.) If a strut has less than the
required inches exposed, determine whether it needs air or oil by rocking the
airplane. If the oleo strut oscillates with short strokes (approximately one inch)
and the airplane settles to its normal position within one or two cycles after the
rocking force is removed, the oleo strut requires inflating. Check the valve core
and filler plug for air leaks, correct if required, and add air as described in
paragraph 2-56. If the oleo strut oscillates with long strokes (approximately
three inches) and the airplane continues to oscillate after the rocking force is
removed, the oleo struts require fluid. Check the oleo for indications of oil
leaks, correct if required and add fluid as described in paragraph 2-54. For
repair procedures of the landing gear and/or struts, refer to Section VII.
WARNING
Do not release air by removing the strut valve core

or filler plug. Depress the valve core pin until strut
pressure has diminished.

Reissued:2/18/81
1D19
NOTE
Struts may be serviced per placard on strut.
2-54. ADDING FLUID TO STRUTS. To add fluid to an oleo strut which is partly
full, proceed as follows:
a. Place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to Jacking, Paragraph 2-12.)
b. Place a pan under the gear to catch spillage.
c. Release the air in the oleo strut by pressing in on the air valve core pin.
d. Remove the air valve (filler plug). Allow valve core to remain in valve.
e. Extend the strut to two inches from the fully compressed position and fill
the strut through the filler opening with fluid as specified.
f. Slowly compress the strut to the fully compressed position allowing fluid
to overflow.
g. With oleo strut in the compressed position, reinstall air valve and safety.
h. Inflate the oleo struts with air to the required extension per instructions in
paragraph 2-56.
2-55. FILLING OLEO STRUTS. To fill an oleo strut which has been completely
emptied because of repair, leakge, etc., proceed as follows:
a. Place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to Jacking, Paragraph 2-12.)
b. Place a pan under the gear to catch spillage.
c. Remove valve core from air valve.
d. Attach a clear plastic tube to the valve stem and place the other end of the
tube in a container of hydraulic fluid as specified.
NOTE
An air-tight connection is necessary between the plas-

tic tube and valve stem. Without such a connection, a
small amount of air will be sucked into the oleo strut
during each sequence, resulting in an inordinate amount
of air bubbles and a prolonged filling operation.
e. Extend the oleo strut by pulling down on the wheel. Fluid will be sucked
into the oleo strut. Compress and extend the oleo strut until it is full of fluid,
and air bubbles cease to appear in the plastic tube.
f. Compress the oleo strut to within 1/4 inch of full compression, allowing the
excess fluid to overflow. Reinstall the valve core.
g. Remove the airplane from the jacks.
h. Inflate the oleo struts per instructions given in paragraph 2-56.

Reissued:2/18/81
1D20
2-56. INFLATING OLEO STRUTS. With the proper amount of fluid contained in the
strut as describedin paragraph 2-53,inflate the strut to the following pressures:
Tire Tire Pressure(psi) Strut Pressure(psi)
6.00 x 6 - 4 ply 27 132

6.00 x 6 - 6 ly 32 151
7.00 x 6 - 8 ply 46
NOTE
Strut pressure is with strut fully extended.
2-57. BRAKE SYSTEM.
2-58. SERVICING BRAKE SYSTEM. The brake system incorporates a hydraulic fluid
reservoir through which the brake system is periodically serviced. Fluid is drawn from the
reservoir by the brake master cylinders to maintain the volume of fluid required for
maximum braking efficiency. Spongy brake pedal action is often an indication that the
brake fluid reservoir is running low on fluid. Instructions for filling the reservoir are givenin
paragraph 2-59. When found necessary to accomplish repairs to any of the brake system
components, these instructions may be found in Section VII.
2-59. FILLING BRAKE CYLINDER RESERVOIR. The brake cylinder reservoir should
be filled to the level marked on reservoir, with the fluid specified in Table II-I. The reservoir.
located in the left side of the nose, shown in Figure 2-8 should be checked at every 100hour
inspection and replenished as necessary.
2-60. DRAINING BRAKE SYSTEM. To drain the brake system, connect a hose to the
bleeder fitting on the bottom of the cylinder and place the other end of the line in a suitable
container. Open the bleeder and slowly pump the desired brake pedal until fluid ceases to
flow. To clean the brake system, flush with denatured alcohol.
2-61. TIRES.
2-62. SERVICING TIRES. The tires should be maintained at the pressure specified in
Table II-I. When checking tire pressure, examine the tires for wear, cuts, bruises and
slippage. (Refer to Card 2116 Section 7, paragraphs 7-75 and 7-76 for suggestionson tire
balancing. See Card 2J3, Figure 7-31 for information concerning construction of a tire
balancer.)

Reissued:2/18/81
1D21
2-63. POWER PLANT.
2-64. SERVICING POWERPLANT. The power plants should be visuallyinspected before

each flight to determine possible fuel and oil leakage, and condition and security of all
related components. Additional serviceinformation may be found in Section VIII or VIIIA.
2-65. INDUCTION AIR FILTER.
2-66. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF AIR FILTER.

a. On PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes with Serial
Numbers 27-1 to 27-2504 inclusive, the air filter may be removed and installed
by the following procedure:
1. Remove the scoop assembly from the bottom front of the nacelle.
2. Remove the air filter by turningthe quick disconnect wing nut fasteners.
3. Install the air filter in reverse order of removal.
b. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplaneswith Serial Number 27-2505 and up, that are not
equipped with turbocharging units, the air filter may be removed and installed by the
followingprocedure:
1. Remove the cover plate from the air filter box by turning the quick dis-
connect wing nut fasteners.
2. Remove the filter from the box.
3. Install the air filter.
c. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-2505 and up, that are
equipped with AiResearch turbocharging units, the air filter may be removed by the
followingprocedure:
1. Loosen the quarter turn fasteners.
2. Lower the air scoop and remove the filter.
3. Install a new air filter or cleaned one in reverse order of removal.
d. On PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-3944 and up, that are equipped with
Lycoming Turbocharging units, the air filter may be removed by the following procedure:
1. Remove the right and top engine access panels from the engine the filter
is to be removed.
2. Remove the two machine screws from the securing brackets on both
sides of the filter box and remove the filter.
3. Install a new air filter or a cleaned one in reverse order of removal.
1D22 1D22 Reissued: 2/18/81

2-67. SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS. The induction air filters should be cleaned

every 50 hours or sooner depending upon operating conditions. Filters should
be rejected for use if the paper filter material is torn or ruptured, or the housing
is damaged. The filter gasket should have no tears and be securely positioned
in place.
a. The cartridge type air filters should be cleaned by the following procedure:
1. Remove filter, inspect, and clean by tapping it against a hard surface
to remove grit, sand and dirt. (Do not blow out with an air hose, soak in oil, or
cleaning fluid.)
2. If the filter is found to be in good condition and is not obstructed after
being properly cleaned, reinstall filter.
b. The panel type filter installed only on airplanes equipped with turbocharging
units may be cleaned by one of two basic methods, the compressed air method
and thewashingmethod. The compressed air method is effective when the major
contamination on the panel is dust. The washing method is effective on carbon,
soot and oil laden filters. Accumulation of exhaust soot (fine carbonparticles)
collects on the filter and causes a rapid increase in restriction or short filter
life. For best results, visually determine condition of filter and choose either
method. This choise will also depend on the availability of the cleaning equip-
ment.
1. The compressed air method of cleaning the filter is as follows:
(a) With the filter removed, direct a jet of air against the downstream
or clean air side of the filter (opposite to normal airflow).
(b) Move the air jet up and down the pleats, moving air jet over the
complete filter.
(c) Nozzle pressure must not exceed 100 psi and be kept at least one
inch away from filter. Take care that the paper is not ruptured by
the nozzle or air jet.
2. The washing method of cleaning the filter is as follows:
(a) If compressed air is available, blow the filter as given in (a).
(b) The filter can be cleaned by washing in a good non-sudsing deter-
gent or the filter manufacturer's cleaner D-1400. Mix two ounces
of D-1400 to one gallon of water.
(c) Soak filter in solution for 15 minutes, then move filter back and
forth about two minutes to free filter of dirt deposits.
(d) Rinse complete filter in a stream of water until rinsewater is clear.
(Maximum water pressure 40 psi.) A good thorough rinse is very
important.
(e) Dry filter thoroughly before re-using. Do not use light bulbs or ex-
treme heat for drying.

Reissued: 2/18/81
1D23
2-68. PROPELLER.
2-69. SERVICING PROPELLER. The propeller blades, spinner and visible hub parts
should be inspected frequently for damage, cracks and oil leakage. Propellers containing an
air charge should be checked for proper air pressure as given in Table II-VIII below. The air
charge should be free of moisture. Use dry nitrogen gas if available. Nicks should be removed
from the leading edge of the blades in accordance with applicable FAA regulations. The blades
should be checked that they turn freely on the hub pilot tube, by rocking the blades back and
forth through the slight freedom allowed by the pitch change mechanism. Lubricate the pro-
peller at 100 hour intervals according to the Lubrication Charts, Figures 2-25, 2-26 and 2-27.
Additional Service Information for the propeller may be found in Section VIII or VIIIA.
A spring backup kit for HC-E2YK-2RB and HC-E2YR-2RB propellers is available to
safeguard against an overspeed due to loss of the air charge. This spring produces sufficient
force to control propeller rpm, within normal operating range, provided airspeed is reduced
and power is applied slowly. Propellers which have this kit installed will have the letter "S"
after the hub dash number (H C-E2YK-2RBS or HC-E2YR-2RBS). When servicing propellers
make certain that the propellers have the proper air charge, according to the followingcharts.
TABLE II-VIII. CHAMBER PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS WITH TEMPERATURE
HC-E2YK-2RB or HC-E2YR-2RB
Temp. °F Press. (psi) Temp. °F Press. (psi)

100 188 30 165
90 185 20 162
80 182 10 159
70 178 0 154
60 175 -10 152
50 172 -30 146
HC-E2YK-2RBS, HC-E2YK-2RBSF or HC-E2YR-2RBS
Temp. °F Press. (psi)

100 74
70 70
40 66
10 62
-20 58
NOTE: Do not check pressure or charge with propeller in feather position.

Reissued: 2/18/81
1D24
2-70. FUEL SYSTEM.
2-71. SERVICING FUEL SYSTEM. At intervals of 50 hours or 90 days, whichever comes

first, clean the screens and bowl in each fuel filter unit located between each bottom wing
inboard gear door and fuselage. Remove and clean the filters in accordance with the instruc-
tions outlined in Section IX. Additional service information may also be found in Section IX.
Inspection intervals of the various fuel system components may be found in Section III.
2-72. FILLING FUEL CELLS. Observe all required precautions for handling gasoline. Fill
the fuel cells to the bottom of the filler neck with the fuel specified in Table 11-I. Refer to
Figure 2-8 for the location of the access panels for the fuel cells.
WARNING
When replacing a filler cap that is worn, ascertain that the cap
is correct for the model in question. Early models have caps
with vents. Later ones have caps without vents in them. See
Figures 9-9 and 9-10 in Section 9.
2-73. DRAINING MOISTURE FROM FUEL SYSTEM.

a. Drain the crossfeed fuel valve by turning the crossfeed line drain control located on
the front of the fuel panel selector control box which is between the two front seats.
b. The strainers and fuel line drains may be reached by opening the access panel located
on the inboard sides of the main wheel wells. (Refer to Figure 2-8.) To drain, push up the easy
drain valves.
2-74. DRAINING FUEL SYSTEM. Drain the bulk of the fuel from the system by pumping
the fuel out of each cell through the filler opening with an electric fuel pump. Complete the
draining by opening the crossfeed line drain control. Drain the inboard cells first; then move
the fuel selectors to the outboard position, thus allowing the outboard cells to drain through
the crossfeed line drain. For an alternate draining procedure, open the fuel line quick drain
valves and the fuel strainer bowl drain valve or remove the fuel strainer bowl and allow the
fuel to run out by gravity.
2-75. OXYGEN SYSTEM.
2-76. SERVICING OXYGEN SYSTEM. The oxygen for the breathing system is furnished
from a stationary cylinder charged to a pressure of 1800psi with a capacity of 48.3 cubic feet
for (DOT 3A A 1800classification), or 1850psi with a capacity of 15 cubic feet for (DOT 3HT
1850 classification).
a. On PA-23-250 airplanes the oxygen bottle is installed in the aft cabin area on the left
side where the fifth seat is normally installed. These cylinders are serviced at the cylinder
regulator by removing the regulator outlet line.

~Reissued: 2/18/81
1E1
b. On airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-2000 to 27-3049 and 27-3051 to 27-3153 in-
clusive, the oxygen is installed under the aft baggage compartment floor, on the right side.
These airplanes are serviced through a remote charging valve located in the forward right side
of the baggage compartment floor.
c. On airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-3050, 27-3154 to 27-3403 inclusive, except those
modified by kit Piper No. 757050, the oxygen bottle is installed in a nearly vertical position on
the left side of the aft baggage compartment. These airplanes are serviced at the cylinder regu-
lator by removing the pressure gauge line at the cylinder regulator. The gauge line is copper
and is the smaller of the two lines coming from the regulator.
NOTE
To refill the oxygen systems, an oxygen filler coupling, Part

No. 757 810, is needed.
d. On airplanes with modification kit Piper No. 757050 and Serial Numbers 27-3404 and
up, the oxygen bottle is located in a nearly vertical position on the left side of the aft baggage
compartment. These airplanes are serviced from outside the airplane on the left side at station
193.38.
e. The plastic disposable mask and its components should be kept in its polifilm enve-
lope, or a suitable container when not in use, so that they will be kept dust free and not dis-
torted by heat or pressure for satisfactory service. Plastic disposable masks may be worn many
times by the same person.
2-77. OXYGEN SYSTEM SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. The utmost care must be exercised
in servicing, handling and inspection of the oxygen system. Comply with the following
precautions:
a. Keep the oxygen regulators, cylinders, gauges, valves, fittings, masks and all other
components of the oxygen system free of oil, grease, gasoline and all other readily combustible
substances.
b. Do not allow foreign matter to enter the oxygen lines.
WARNING
The presence of foreign matter in the high pressure lines can

cause an explosion. When coming in contact with oxygen
equipment, keep hands, tools and clothing clean - hospital
clean.
c. Never attempt to repair or repaint oxygen equipment.

d. Keep fire and heat away from oxygen equipment. Do not smoke while working with
or near oxygen equipment and take care not to generate sparks with carelessly handled tools
when working on the oxygen system.
e. Never allow electrical equipment to come in contact with the oxygen cylinder.
f. Use Ribbon Dope Thread Sealant (Permacel 412) on male ends of fittings only. Wrap
thread in direction of thread spiral, beginning with the second thread on the fitting. Do not
allow sealant to get into the lines. See Consumable Materials Chart.

Reissued: 2/18/81
1E2
TABLE II-IX. INDICATED OXYGEN CYLINDER PRESSURES

VS. AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
Ambient Temperature - ° F Indicated Cylinder Pressure - Psig
110 1980
100 1935
90 1890
80 1845
70 1800
60 1755
50 1710
40 1665
NOTE
These pressures are not exact, but sufficiently accurate for
practical purposes for working pressures between 1800 and
2400 psig cylinders.
2-78. FILLING OXYGEN CYLINDER.

a. To fill the oxygen cylinder, remove the cap from the filler valve and attach the filler
hose from the oxygen recharge unit to the filler valve. Ascertain that all fittings are free
from oil, grease, dirt, etc. The oxygen cylinder must be removed to refill if there is no filler
valve. Otherwise, the procedure is the same.
NOTE
If the airplane's oxygen cylinder pressure is below 50 psi, the

system should be purged as described in Section XIV.
b. When using a recharge unit consisting of one supply cylinder, slowly open the valve
of the supply unit and allow the oxygen to transfer until the service pressure for the
cylinder is reached. Ambient temperature must be considered when filling oxygen cylinders.
Refer to Table II-IX for the appropriate filling pressure for the prevailing ambient temper-
ature.
c. When using a recharge unit consisting of two or more supply cylinders (cascade
storage system), it is recommended that the following procedure be used:
1. Before opening any valves, check the pressure remaining in the airplane's oxygen
cylinder. If it is still partly charged, note the pressure indicated on the cylinder gauge. Then
open and close each valve on the cascade storage system and determine which cylinder has
the lowest pressure. When found, if this cylinder has a pressure lower than the oxygen
cylinder in the airplane, do not attempt using it for filling. Use the storage cylinder that has
a pressure higher than the airplane's cylinder but lower than the others.

Reissued: 2/ 18/81
1E3
2. Open the valve on only the one storage cylinder with the lowest pressure.When
the pressure indicated on the airplane's oxygen gauge and charginggaugehas become equal,
close the valve of the storage cylinder; then go to the storage cylinder with the next higher
pressure and repeat the procedure.
3. If, after using the last storage cylinder, the airplane's oxygen system is still not
fully charged, a full storage cylinder should be put in place of a cylinder with the lowest
pressure and used in the same manner.
4. A good deal of oxygen will remain in the large cylinders used in the cascade
system after filling only one of the cylinders, but such remaining oxygen will be at a
pressure something less than the 1800 pounds, which is not sufficient pressure to
completely refill another aircraft cylinder, although it will refill severalsmallercylinders.
5. It is not economical, even on a three or four-cylinder cascade system, to begin
recharging with oxygen at lessthan 300 psi pressure in the 300 cubic foot bank of cylinders.
So, use 300 cubic foot cylindersdown to approximately 300 psi; then return for refilling.In
two-cylinder systems, use to approximately 600 psi; then return for refilling.
d. When the pressure gauge on the recharge unit or in the airplane reaches the
appropriate service pressure, close the pressure regulator valve on the recharge unit.
Disconnect the filler hose from the filler valve; replace the protective cap on the filler valve
and close the accesscover.
NOTE
Refer to Section XIV for detailed serviceinstructions of oxygen system components.
2-79. LUBRICATION.
2-80. OIL SYSTEM(ENGINE).
2-81. SERVICINGOIL SYSTEM. The engine oil level should be checked before each flight
and oil changed after each 50 hours of engine operation. During oil change, the oil pressure
and suction screen should be removed and cleaned. (Intervals between oil changes can be
increased as much as 100%on enginesequipped with full flow (cartridge type) oil filters,
provided the element is replaced each 50 hours of operation and the specifiedoctane fuel is
used.) Should fuel other than the specified octane rating for the power plant be used, refer
to latest Lycoming Service Letter No. L185 for additional information and recommended
service procedures.
2-82. DRAINING OIL SUMP. To drain oil sump, provide a suitable container with a
minimum capacity of 12 quarts. Remove the left side panel from the engine cowl and open
the oil drain valve located on the forward left underside of the engineby pushing the arms
of the drain up and turning counterclockwise.This will hold the drain in the open position.
It is recommended the engine be warmed to operating temperature to insure complete
draining of the old oil.

Reissued: 2/18/81
1E4
A721 A720
ACCESSORY HOUSING
GASKET
OIL SUCTION
SCREEN
HEX HEAD PLUG
SCREEN OILSUMP
HOUSING
Figure 2-23. Oil Pressure Screen Figure 2-24. Oil Suction Screen
2-83; FILLING OIL SUMP. The oil sump should normally be filled with oil to the U.S. quart
mark on the engine dipstick. The specified grade of oil may be found in Table II-X, the Lubri-
cation Chart or on each engine oil filler access door. To service the engine with oil, open the
quick release access door on top of the nacelle and remove the oil filler cap with dipstick.
284. OIL SCREEN (PRESSURE). (Refer to Figure 2-23.) On airplanes without full flow
oil filters, the pressure screen located in a housing on the accessory case of the engine between
the magnetos should be cleaned at each oil change to remove any accumulation of sludge and
to examine for metal filings or chips. If metal particles are found in the screen, the engine
should be examined for internal damage. The pressure screen is removed by disconnecting the
temperature indicator wire and removing the four hex head bolts that secure the screen hous-
ing to the accessory case. Clean and inspect the screen. Reinstall by first ascertaining that the
screen fits flush with the base of the housing. Install the screen and housing to the accessory
case using a new gasket; torque the attaching bolts, 50 to 70 inch-pounds.
2-85. OIL FILTER, FULL FLOW.

a. The oil filter cartridge should be replaced after each fifty hours of engine operation;
this is accomplished by removing the lockwire from the bolt-head at the end of the filter
housing, loosening the bolt, and removing the filter assembly from the adapter. If the filter is
a spin on type, simply turn it counterclockwise to remove.
b. Before discarding the filter cartridge, remove the outer perforated paper cover, and

Reissued: 2/18/81
1E5
using a sharp knife, cut through the folds of the element at both ends, close to the metal caps.
Then, carefully unfold the pleated cartridge and examine the material trapped in the filter for
evidence of internal engine damage such as chips or particles from bearings. In new or newly
overhauled engines, some small particle of metallic shavings might be found; these are gen-
erally of no consequence and should not be confused with particles produced by impacting,
abrasion or pressure. Evidence of internal engine damage found in the oil filterjustifies further
examination to determine the cause. Champion cutter tool CT-470 (available from Champion
Spark Plug Co., Toledo, Ohio 43601) may be used to cut open any spin-on type oil filter for
inspection.
c. After the cartridge has been replaced, tighten the attaching bolt within 20 to 25 foot-
pounds torque. Lockwire (MS-20995C-41) the bolt through the loops on the side of the hous-
ing to the drilled head of the thermostatic valve. Be sure the lockwire is replaced at both the
attaching bolt head and the thermostatic oil cooler bypass valve. (Replacement filter element
assembly, P/N AC6435683.)
d. To install a spin-on filter, lubricate the gasket of the filter with a thin coating of DOW
Corning Compound (DC-4) and install on the adapter making sure that gasket is in place.
Hand tighten the filter until the gasket just makes contact with the seating surface of the
adapter and then turn an additional 3/4 to 7/8 of a turn with torque wrench until a torque of
18-20 foot-pounds is reached.
e. Run engine until warm. SHUT OFF ENGINE FIRST, then check filter for oil leaks.
2-86. OIL SCREEN (SUCTION). The suction screen located in the rear of the sump, should
be cleaned at each oil change to remove any accumulation of sludge and to examine for metal
filings or chips. If metal particles are found in the screen, the engine should be examined for
internal damage. The screen is removed from the sump by cutting the safety wire and removing
the hex head plug. Clean and inspect the screen and gasket, and replace the gasket if over-
compressed. To eliminate damage to the screen, place it inside the recess in the hex head plug
before inserting the assembly in the sump. Exercise care to permit screen to enter recess in
sump as shown in Figure 2-24 before tightening plug. As above, any appearance of difficult
threading of the plug is indicative of an incorrect installation and the process must be repeated.
After installation, safety the hex head plug with MS-20995-C41.
2-87. RECOMMENDATIONS FOR CHANGING OIL. (Refer to latest revision of

Lycoming Service Instruction No. 1014.)
a. In engines that have been operating on straight mineral oil for several hundred hours,
a change to additive oil should be made with a degree of caution, since the cleaning action of
some additive oils will tend to loosen sludge deposits and cause plugged oil passages. When an
engine has been operating on straight mineral oil and is known to be in excessively dirty condi-
tion, the switch to additive or compounded oil should be deferred until after the engine is
overhauled.
b. When changing from straight mineral oil to compounded oil, the following pre-
cautionary steps should be taken:
1. Do not add additive oil to straight mineral oil. Drain the straight mineral oil from
the engine and fill with additive oil.
2. Do not operate the engine longer than five hours before the first oil change.
3. Check all oil screens for evidence of sludge or plugging. Change oil every 10hours if
sludge conditions are evident. Resume normal oil drain periods after sludge conditions improve.
1E6 1E6 Reissued: 2/18/81

2-88. LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS. Proper lubrication procedures are of immeasurable value both as
a means of prolonging the service life of the airplane and as a means of reducing the frequency of extensive and
expensive repairs. The periodic application of recommended lubricants to their relevent bearing surfaces, as
detailed in the following paragraphs, together with the observance of cleanliness, will insure the maximum
efficiency and utmost service of all moving parts. Lubrication instruction regarding the locations, time
intervals, and type of lubricants used may be found in Lubrication Chart. To insure best possible results from
the application of lubricants, the following precautions should be observed:
a. Use recommended lubricants. Where general purpose lubricating oil is specified, but unavailable,
clean engine oil may be used as a satisfactory substitute. (See Consumable Materials Chart.)
b. Check the components to be lubricated for evidence of excessive wear and replace them as
necessary.
c. Remove all excess lubricants from components in order to prevent the collection of dirt and sand in
abrasive quantities capable of causing excessive wear or damage to bearing surfaces.
2-89. APPLICATION OF OIL. Whenever specific instructions for lubrication of mechanisms requiring
lubrication are not available, observe the following precautions:
a. Apply oil sparingly, never more than enough to coat the bearing surfaces.
b. Since the cables are sufficiently coated by the manufacturer, additional protection for the
prevention of corrosion is unnecessary.
c. Squeeze the magneto cam follower felts at regular inspection periods. If oil appears on fingers, do
not add oil. If the felt is dry, moisten with Bendix Breaker Felt Lubricant 10-86527. (Bendix Electrical
Components Division Sidney, N.Y. 13838.)
CAUTION
Be careful not to add to much oil, because the excess will be thrown off during operation and will cause
pitting and burning of the magneto points.
2-90. APPLICATION OF GREASE. Care must be taken when lubricating bearings and bearing surfaces
with a grease gun, to insure that gun is filled with new, clean grease of the grade specified for the particular
application before apply lubricant to the grease fittings.
a. Where a reservoir is not provided around a bearing, apply the lubricant sparingly and wipe off any
excess.

Reissued: 2/ 18/81
1E7
b. Remove wheel bearings from the wheel hub and clean thoroughly with a suitable
solvent. When repacking with grease, be sure the lubricant enters the space between the
rollersin the retainer ring. Do not pack the greaseinto the wheel hub.
c. Use extra care when greasingthe Hartzell propeller hub to avoid blowing the clamp
gaskets. Remove one grease fitting while applying greaseto the other fitting and ensure that
new greasecomes out opposite fitting.
2-91., LUBRICATIONCHART. Each part of the airplane to belubricated, as de-

picted on the lubrication chart, is indicated by a frequency symbol which shows
the time intervals between lubrications. Application symbols with the frequency
symbols show how the lubrication is applied. A parts nomenclature key, refer-
red to by a number adjacent to the frequency symbol, identifies the part to be lu-
bricated. Within the frequency symbol is a code letter which identifies the type
of lubricant to be used and a special instructions number which gives instruction
for lubricating a particular component. (Refer to Table II-II for consumable materials.)
TABLE II-X. RECOMMENDED LUBRICATING OILS
Average Average Ambient Oil Inlet Temperatures

Grade Oil Air Temperature Desired Maximum
SAE 50 Above 60 ° F 180 ° F 245 ° F

(10 ° C) (80 ° C) (118 ° C)
SAE 40 30 ° F to 90 ° F 180 ° F 245 ° F

(-1 ° C to 32 ° C) (82 ° C) (118 ° C)
SAE 30 0 ° F to 70° F 170° F 225° F

(-17 ° C to 20 ° C) (77 ° C) (107 ° C)
SAE 20 Below 10 ° F 160 ° F 210 ° F

(12 ° C) (71 ° C) (99 ° C)

Reissued: 2/18/81
1E8
TABLE II-XI. THREAD LUBRICANTS
TYPE OF LINE TYPE OF LUBRICANT
Brakes MIL-H-5606
Freon TT-A-580 or MIL-T-5544, Anti-Seize Compound
Fuel MIL-T-5544, Anti-Seize, Graphite Petrolatum
Landing Gear (Air Valve) 6PB Parker
Oil MIL-G-6032, Lubricating Grease

(Gasoline and Oil Resistant)
Pitot and Static TT-A-580 (JAN-A-669), Anti-Seize Compound

(White Lead Base)
NOTE
Lubricate engine fittings only with fluid contained in the particular

lines.

Reissued:2/18/81
1 E9
1E01
2142
47
UENCY
FREQU -HOURS METHOD 2
HAND
DAILY OR
PACK
50 OIL
100 GREASE
GUN
3
12
500 SPRAY
CAN
HYDRAULIC
FLUID
AE
SKETCH
Figure 2-25. Lubrication Chart, PA-23-250 and PA-23-235

Reissued: 2/18/81
1E1
A44 16 17
CHC
SKET A446
E
SKETCH A446
TCH
D
Reissued:
21 / 8/81
A-6
G
SKETCH
SKETCH SKETCH
H
SKETCH
Figure 2-25.
Figure 2-25. Lubrication PA-23-250and
Chart, PA-23-250
Lubrication Chart, and PA-23-235 (cont.)
PA-23-235(cont.)
HANDLING AND
HANDLING SERVICING
AND SERVICING
Reissued: 2/18/81
1E12
EXAMPLE
CAUTIONS
1. DONOTUSEHYDRAULICFLUIDWITHA CASTOROIL ORESTER
BASE.
2. DONOTOVER-LUBRICATE COCKPITCONTROLS.
3. DO NOTAPPLY LUBRICANTTO RUBBERPARTS.
NOTES
1. PILOT AND PASSENGER SEATS - LUBRICATE TRACK ROLLERS

AND STOP PINS AS REQUIRED. (TYPE OF LUBRICANT: "A")
2. WHEEL BEARINGS REQUIRE CLEANING AND REPACKING AFTER
EXPOSURE TO AN ABNORMAL QUANTITY OF WATER.
3. SEE LATEST REVISION OF LYCOMING SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS NO.
1014 FOR USE OF DETERGENT OIL.
4. SEE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS TABLE II-VII FOR LUBRICANT
VENDORS.
PARTS NOMENCLATURE
1. UNIVERSAL, DOUBLE SPROCKET, GUIDE ROLLERS 26. FLAP CYLINDER ATTACHMENT
2. AILERON CONTROL CHAIN 27. ROD END BEARINGS
3. AILERON CONTROL CABLE PULLEY 28. FLAP BEARING BLOCKS, SENDER LINKAGE
4. CONTROL COLUMN BEARINGS 29. OLEO AIRCHARGE VALVE
5. STEERING ROD END BEARINGS 30. MAIN GEAR ATTACHMENTS, DRAG LINKS, TORQUE LINKS
6. OLEO AIRCHARGE VALVE 31. TORQUE LINKS
7. NOSE GEAR ATTACHMENT FITTINGS 32. WHEEL BEARINGS
8. TORQUE LINK ATTACHMENTS 33. DRAG LINKS, TORQUE LINKS
9. WHEEL BEARINGS 34. CYLINDER ATTACHMENT, LATCH, RETRACTION LINKAGE
10. TORQUE LINKS, STEERING LINK ENDS 35. BRAKE RESERVOIR, POWERPACK FILLER
11. STEERING TORQUE TUBE BEARING BLOCKS 36. NOSE GEAR DOOR HINGES
12. DRAG LINKS 37. ENGINE CONTROL CABLE ENDS
13. LATCH ATTACHMENT, ROD END BEARINGS 38. MAIN GEAR DOOR HINGES
14. PROPELLER 39. AILERON AND FLAP HINGES
15. AILERON BELLCRANK 40. AFT BAGGAGE DOOR
16. BRAKE CYLINDERS 41. STABILATOR TRIM HINGES
17. RUDDER CABLE ATTACHMENTS 42. RUDDER, RUDDER TRIM HINGES AND TAB BOLTS
18. RUDDER CABLE ATTACHMENTS 43. RUDDER PULLEYS
19. RUDDER TORQUE TUBE, BEARING BLOCKS 44. AILERON CONTROL CABLE PULLEYS
20. STABILATOR CABLE ATTACHMENTS, 45. CABIN DOOR HINGES
RUDDER BELLCRANK ATTACHMENTS 46. FUEL CONTROL CABLES AND FUEL VALVES
21. RUDDER TRIM ROD BEARINGS 47. SEAT TRACKS
22 RUDDER TRIM SCREW 48. ENGINE CONTROL QUADRANT
23. STABILATOR TORQUE TUBE, TRIM LINKAGE 49. FULL FLOW OIL FILTER (CARTRIDGE TYPE ELEMENT)
24. STABILATOR TRIM SCREW 50. ENGINE OIL FILLER TUBE
25. TRIM LINKAGE 51. NOSE GEAR DOWNLOCK
Figure 2-25. Lubrication Chart, PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 (cont.)

1E13
1E13
Reissued: 2/18/81
TYPEOFLUBRICANTS
IDENTIFICATION SPECIFICATION LUBRICANT

LETTER
A MIL-L-7870 LUBRICATINGOIL, GENERALPURPOSE,
LOWTEMPERATURE
B MIL-L-6082 LUBRICATINGOIL, AIRCRAFTRECIPRO-

CATINGENGINE(PISTON)GRADEAS
SPECIFIED
SAE50 ABOVE60 F AIR TEMP.
SAE40 30° TO 90 F AIR TEMP.
SAE30 0° TO 70F AIR TEMP.
SAE20 BELOW10F AIR TEMP.
C MIL-H-5606 HYDRAULICFLUID, PETROLEUMBASE
D MIL-G-23827GREASE,AIRCRAFTANDINSTRUMENT,
GEARANDACTUATORSCREW
E MIL-G-3545 GREASE,AIRCRAFT,HIGHTEMPERATURE
F MIL-G-7711A GREASE, AIRCRAFT, GENERAL

PURPOSE
SPECIALINSTRUCTIONS
1. AIR FILTER - TO CLEAN FILTER, TAP GENTLY TO REMOVE DIRT

PARTICLES. DO NOT BLOW OUT WITH COMPRESSED AIR OR USE OIL.
REPLACE FILTER IF PUNCTURED OR DAMAGED.
2. BEARINGS AND BUSHINGS - CLEAN EXTERIOR WITH A DRY TYPE SOLVENT
BEFORE LUBRICATING.
3. WHEEL BEARINGS - DISASSEMBLE AND CLEAN WITH A DRY TYPE SOLVENT.
ASCERTAIN THAT GREASE IS PACKED BETWEEN THE BEARING ROLLER
AND CONE. DO NOT PACK GREASE IN WHEEL HOUSING.
4. OLEO STRUTS, HYDRAULIC PUMP RESERVOIR AND BRAKE RESERVOIR -
FILL PER INSTRUCTIONS ON UNIT OR CONTAINER, OR REFER TO SERVICE
MANUAL, SECTION II.
5. PROPELLER - REMOVE ONE OF THE TWO GREASE FITTINGS FOR EACH
BLADE. APPLY GREASE THROUGH FITTING UNTIL FRESH GREASE APPEARS
AT HOLE OF REMOVED FITTING.
6. LUBRICATION POINTS - WIPE ALL LUBRICATION POINTS CLEAN OF OLD
GREASE, OIL, DIRT, ETC., BEFORE LUBRICATING.
7. INTERVALS BETWEEN OIL CHANGES CAN BE INCREASED AS MUCH AS
100% ON ENGINES EQUIPPED WITH FULL FLOW (CARTRIDGE TYPE) OIL
FILTERS - PROVIDED THE ELEMENT IS REPLACED EACH 50 HOURS OF OP-
ERATION, AND THE SPECIFIED OCTANE FUEL IS USED. SHOULD FUEL
OTHER THAN THE SPECIFIED OCTANE RATING FOR THE POWER PLANT BE
USED, REFER TO LATEST REVISION OF LYCOMING SERVICE LETTER NO.
L185 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDED SERVICE
PROCEDURES.
Figure 2-25. Lubrication Chart, PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 (cont.)

Reissued: 2/18/81
1E14
2142
48
UENCY- HOURS METHOD 47
45 A 9
FREQ
PACK
OIL
50 CAN
GREASE
100 GUN
REQUIRED
Reissued: 2/18/81
1E15
A448
A446
SKETCH
C
2146
SKETCH
G SKETCH
H
Figure 2-26. Lubrication Chart, PA-23-250 (si)x place),

Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. (con t.)
Reissued: 2/18/81
1E16
EXAMPLE
CAUTIONS
1. DONOT USEHYDRAULICFLUID WITHA CASTOROIL ORESTER

BASE.
2. DONOTOVER-LUBRICATE COCKPITCONTROLS.
3. DO NOTAPPLY LUBRICANTTO RUBBERPARTS.
NOTES
1. PILOT AND PASSENGER SEATS - LUBRICATETRACK ROLLERS AND

STOP PINS AS REQUIRED. (TYPE OF LUBRICANT: "A")
VENDORS.
PARTS NOMENCLATURE
1. UNIVERSAL, DOUBLE SPROCKET, GUIDE ROLLERS 27. ROD END BEARINGS
2. AILERON CONTROL CHAIN 28. FLAP BEARING BLOCKS, SENDER LINKAGE
3. AILERON CONTROL CABLE PULLEY 29. OLEO AIRCHARGE VALVE
4. CONTROL COLUMN BEARINGS 30. MAIN GEAR ATTACHMENTS. DRAG LINKS, TORQUE LINKS
5. STEERING ROD END BEARINGS 31. TORQUE LINKS
6. OLEO AIRCHARGE VALVE 32. WHEEL BEARINGS
7. NOSE GEAR ATTACHMENT FITTINGS 33. DRAG LINKS, TORQUE LINKS
8. TORQUELINK ATTACHMENTS 34. CYLINDER ATTACHMENT, LATCH, RETRACTION LINKAGE
9. WHEEL BEARINGS 35. BRAKE RESERVOIR, POWER PACK FILLER
10. TORQUE LINKS, STEERING LINK ENDS 36. NOSE BAGGAGE DOOR
11. STEERING TORQUE TUBE BEARING BLOCKS 37. NOSE GEAR DOOR HINGES
12. DRAG LINKS 38. ENGINE CONTROL CABLE ENDS
13. LATCH ATTACHMENT, ROD END BEARINGS 39. MAIN GEAR DOOR HINGES
14. PROPELLER 40. AILERON AND FLAP HINGES
15. AILERON BELLCRANK 41. AFT BAGGAGE DOOR
16. BRAKE CYLINDERS 42. STABILATOR TRIM HINGES
17. RUDDER CABLE ATTACHMENTS 43. RUDDER, RUDDER TRIM HINGES AND TAB BOLTS
19. RUDDER TORQUE TUBE, BEARING BLOCKS 45. AILERON CONTROL CABLE PULLEYS
20. STABILATOR CABLE ATTACHMENTS, 46. CABIN DOOR HINGES
RUDDER BELLCRANK ATTACHMENTS 47. FUEL CONTROL CABLES AND FUEL VALVES
21. RUDDER TRIM ROD BEARINGS 48. SEAT TRACKS
22. RUDDER TRIM SCREW 49. ENGINE CONTROL QUADRANT
23. STABILATOR TORQUE TUBE, TRIM LINKAGE 50. FULL FLOW OIL FILTER (CARTRIDGE TYPE ELEMENT)
24. STABILATOR TRIM SCREW 51. ENGINE OIL FILLER TUBE
25. TRIM LINKAGE 52. NOSE GEAR DOWNLOCK
26. FLAP CYLINDER ATTACHMENT
Figure 2-26. Lubrication Chart. PA-23-250 (six place),

Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. (cont.)
1E17 Reissued: 2/18/81
TYPEOFLUBRICANTS

LETTER
A MIL-L-7870 LUBRICATINGOIL, GENERALPURPOSE,
LOWTEMPERATURE
MIL-L-6082 LUBRICATINGOIL, AIRCRAFTRECIPRO-
SPECIFIED
SAE40 30 TO 90 F AIR TEMP.
SAE30 0 TO 700F AIR TEMP.
SAE20 BELOW10F AIR TEMP.
D MIL-G-23827 GREASE,AIRCRAFTAND INSTRUMENT,
F MIL-G-7711A GREASE, AIRCRAFT, GENERAL
PURPOSE
SPECIALINSTRUCTIONS
1. AIR FILTER - TO CLEANFILTER, TAP GENTLYTO REMOVE

DIRT PARTICLES.DONOTBLOWOUT WITHCOMPRESSED AIR OR
USEOIL. REPLACEFILTER IF PUNCTUREDORDAMAGED.
2. BEARINGS AND BUSHINGS - CLEANEXTERIORWITHA DRYTYPE
SOLVENTBEFORELUBRICATING.
3. WHEELBEARINGS- DISASSEMBLE ANDCLEANWITHA DRYTYPE
SOLVENT.ASCERTAIN THAT GREASEIS PACKEDBETWEENTHE
BEARINGROLLERANDCONE. DONOT PACKGREASEIN WHEEL
HOUSING.
4. OLEOSTRUTS,HYDRAULICPUMPRESERVOIRANDBRAKERES-
ERVOIR- FILL PERINSTRUCTIONS ONUNIT OR CONTAINER,OR
REFERTO SERVICEMANUAL,SECTIONII.
5. PROPELLER- REMOVEONEOF THE TWOGREASEFITTINGSFOR
EACHBLADE. APPLYGREASETHROUGHFITTING UNTIL FRESH
GREASE APPEARSAT HOLEOF REMOVED FITTING.
6. LUBRICATIONPOINTS- WIPEALL LUBRICATIONPOINTSCLEAN
OF OLD GREASE,OIL, DIRT, ETC. BEFORELUBRICATING.
7. INTERVALSBETWEEN OIL CHANGES CANBE INCREASEDAS
MUCHAS 100%ONENGINESEQUIPPEDWITHFULL FLOW(CAR-
TRIDGETYPE) OIL FILTERS- PROVIDED THE ELEMENTIS RE-
PLACEDEACH50HOURSOF OPERATION.
Figure 2-26. Lubrication Chart, PA-23-250 (six place),

Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. (cont.)
FREQUENCY-HOURS METHOD
2

Serial Nos. 27-2505and up
Reissued: 2/18/81
1E19
A447
A446
2146
SKETCH
G
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up (cont.)
Reissued: 2/18/81
1E20
EXAMPLE
METHOD OF PARTS
LUBRICATION/NOMENCLATURE
FREQUENCY
OFLUBRICCAUTIONN S
1. DO NOT USE HYDRAULIC FLUID WITH A CASTOROIL OR ESTER

BASE.
2. DO NOT OVER.LUBRICATE COCKPIT CONTROLS.
3. DO NOT APPLY LUBRICANT TO RUBBER PARTS.
LUBRICANT
SPECIAL
INSTRUCTIONS
NOTES
1. PILOT AND PASSENGER SEATS - LUBRICATE TRACK ROLLERS AND

STOP PINS AS REQUIRED. (TYPE OF LUBRICANT: "A")
3. FUEL SELECTOR VALVE - LUBRICATE SELECTOR VALVE AS RE-
QUIRED, REFER TO LATEST REVISION OF PIPER SERVICE LETTER
NO. 351.
VENDORS.
PARTSNOMENCLATURE
1. UNIVERSAL, DOUBLE SPROCKET, GUIDE ROLLERS 28. FLAP BEARING BLOCKS, SENDER LINKAGE
2. AILERON CONTROL CHAIN 29. OLEO AIRCHARGE VALVE
3. AILERON CONTROL CABLE PULLEY 30. MAIN GEAR ATTACHMENTS, DRAG LINKS, TORQUE LINKS
4. CONTROL COLUMN BEARINGS 31. TORQUE LINKS
5. STEERING ROD END BEARINGS 32. WHEEL BEARINGS
6. OLEO AIRCHARGE VALVE 33. DRAG LINKS, TORQUE LINKS
7. NOSE GEAR ATTACHMENT FITTINGS 34. CYLINDER ATTACHMENT, LATCH, RETRACTION LINKAGE
8. TORQUE LINK ATTACHMENTS 35. BRAKE RESERVOIR, POWER PACK FILLER
9. WHEEL BEARINGS 36. NOSE BAGGAGE DOOR
10. TORQUE LINKS, STEERING LINK ENDS 37. NOSE GEAR DOOR HINGES
11. STEERING TORQUE TUBE BEARING BLOCKS 38. ENGINE CONTROL CABLE ENDS
12. DRAG LINKS 39. MAIN GEAR DOOR HINGES
13. LATCH ATTACHMENT, ROD END BEARINGS 40. AILERON AND FLAP HINGES
14. PROPELLER 41. AFT BAGGAGE DOOR
15. AILERON BELLCRANK 42. STABILATOR TRIM HINGES
16. BRAKE CYLINDERS 43. RUDDER, RUDDER TRIM HINGES AND TAB BOLTS
18. RUDDER CABLE ATTACHMENTS 45. AILERON CONTROL CABLE PULLEYS
19. RUDDER TORQUE TUBE, BEARING BLOCKS 46. CABIN DOOR HINGES
20. STABILATOR CABLE ATTACHMENTS, 47. FUEL CONTROL CABLES AND FUEL VALVES
RUDDER BELLCRANK ATTACHMENTS 48. SEAT TRACKS
21. RUDDER TRIM ROD BEARINGS 49. ENGINE CONTROL QUADRANT
22. RUDDER TRIM SCREW 50. COWL FLAP LINKAGE
23. STABILATOR TORQUE TUBE, TRIM LINKAGE 51. TURBO OIL SUMP AIRESEARCH TURBOCHARGED
24. STABILATOR TRIM SCREW ENGINES ONLY
25. TRIM LINKAGE 52. FULL FLOW OIL FILTER (CARTRIDGE TYPE ELEMENT)
26. FLAP CYLINDER ATTACHMENT 53. ENGINE OIL FILLER TUBE
27. ROD END BEARINGS 54. NOSE GEAR DOWNLOCK
Figure 2-27. Lubrication Chart. PA-23-250 (six place).

Reissued: 2 18/81
1E21
TYPEOFLUBRICANTS

LETTER
A OIL, GENERALPURPOSE,
MIL-L-7870 LUBRICATING
LOWTEMPERATURE
B MIL-L-6082 LUBRICATING OIL, AIRCRAFTRECIPRO-

SPECIFIED
SAE40 30 TO 90 FAIR TEMP.
SAE 30 0 TO 70F AIR TEMP.
SAE 20 BELOW10F AIR TEMP.
D MIL-G-23827 GREASE,AIRCRAFTANDINSTRUMENT,
F LUBRICATINGOIL, 10W30
G MIL-G-7711A GREASE, AIRCRAFT, GENERAL
PURPOSE
SPECIALINSTRUCTIONS
1. AIR FILTER,STANDARD - TO CLEANFILTER, TAP GENTLYTO
REMOVEDIRT PARTICLES.DO NOTBLOWOUTWITHCOMPRESSED
AIR OR USEOIL. REPLACEFILTER IF PUNCTUREDOR DAMAGED.
AIR FILTER, TURBOCHARGED - TO CLEANFILTER, BLOWOUT
WITHCOMPRESSED AIR FROMGASKETSIDEORWASHIN WARM
WATERANDMILD DETERGENT,ANDDRY.DO NOT USEOIL.
2. BEARINGS ANDBUSHINGS - CLEAN EXTERIORWITHA DRYTYPE
SOLVENTBEFORELUBRICATING.
3. WHEELBEARINGS - DISASSEMBLE ANDCLEANWITHA DRYTYPE
SOLVENT. ASCERTAIN THAT GREASEIS PACKEDBETWEEN THE
BEARINGROLLERANDCONE. DONOT PACKGREASEIN WHEEL
HOUSING.
4. OLEOSTRUTS,HYDRAULICPUMPRESERVOIR ANDBRAKERES-
ERVOIR- FILL PER INSTRUCTIONS ONUNIT ORCONTAINER,OR
REFERTO SERVICEMANUAL,SECTIONII.
5. PROPELLER- REMOVEONEOF THE TWOGREASEFITTINGSFOR
EACHBLADE. APPLY GREASETHROUGHFITTINGUNTIL FRESH
GREASEAPPEARSAT HOLE OF REMOVED FITTING.
6. LUBRICATION POINTS- WIPEALL LUBRICATIONPOINTSCLEAN
OF OLD GREASE,OIL, DIRT, ETC. BEFORELUBRICATING.
7. INTERVALSBETWEEN OIL CHANGES CAN BE INCREASEDAS
MUCHAS100%ON ENGINES EQUIPPEDWITHFULL FLOW(CAR-
TRIDGETYPE) OIL FILTERS- PROVIDEDTHE ELEMENTIS RE-
PLACEDEACH50 HOURSOF OPERATION.
8. AIRESEARCH TURBOCHARGED ENGINESONLY- DRAINAND REFILL
TURBOOIL SUMP(2.6 QUARTS)AS INDICATED WITHAUTOMOTIVE
MULTIGRADE SAE 10W 30.
(SERIALNUMBERS27-2505 TO 27-4221 INCLUSIVE)
Figure 2-27. Lubrication Chart. PA-23-250 (six place).

Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up (cont.) SERVICING
Reissued: 2/18 81
1E22
SECTION
III
INSPECTION
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
3-1. Introduction . ............... ................. IE24
3-2. Recommended Lubricants ............................ IE24
3-3. Inspection Periods ................................. IE24
3-4. Inspection Requirements ....................... IE24
3-5. Preflight Check .......................... IFI
3-6. Overlimits Inspection ......................... IFI
3-7. Special Inspections ................................ IF2
3-8. Inspection of Flap Outboard Hinges ....................... IF2
3-9. Inspection of Fuel Selector Control Cables ................... IF2
Reissued: 2/18/81
1E23
SECTION III
INSPECTION
3-1. INTRODUCTION. This section provides instructions for conducting in-

spections. These inspections are described in paragraphs 3-4 and 3-5. Repair
or replacement instructions for those components found to be unserviceable at
inspection may be found in the section covering the applicable aircraft system.
CAUTION
When working on engines, ground the magneto pri-

mary circuit before performing any operation.
3-2. RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS. Refer to Recommended Lubricants, Sec-

tion II, for lubrication servicing instructions.
3-3. INSPECTION PERIODS.
3-4. INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS. The required inspection procedures are

listed inTable III-I. The inspection procedure is broken down into major groups
which are Propeller, Engine, Turbocharger, Cabin, Fuselage and Empennage,
Wing, Landing Gear, Operational Inspection and General. The first column in
each group lists the inspection or procedure to be performed. The second column
is divided into four columns indicating the required inspection intervals of 50
hours, 100 hours, 500 hours and 1000 hours. Each inspection or operation is
required at each of the inspection intervals as indicated by a circle (O). If an
item is not entirely accessible or must be removed, refer to the applicable sec-
tion of this manual for instructions on how to gain access or remove the item.
When performing inspection use forms furnished by the Piper Factory Service
Department, available through Piper Dealers or Distributors.
INSPECTION
~Reissued:
IE24 ~~~1E24 2/18/81
NOTE
In addition to inspection intervals required in Table III-I a preflight

check must be performed as described in Paragraph 3-5.
3-5. PREFLIGHT CHECK. The airplane must be given a thorough preflight and
walk-around check. The pilot and/or mechanic must include the preflight check as a normal
procedure necessary for the safe operation of the aircraft. Refer to the Pilot s Operating
Manual for a listing of items that must be checked.
3-6. OVERLIMITS INSPECTION. If the airplane has been operated so that any of its
components have exceeded their maximum operational limits, check with the appropriate
manufacturer.
I A722
HINGE
SKETCHA
Figure 3-1. Inspection of Outboard Flap Hinge, Serial Nos.

27-3050, 27-3154 to 27-7405330 incl.
INSPECLIIUN
Reissued: 2/18/81
1F1
3-7. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS. The special inspections given in the following paragraphs
supplement the scheduled inspections as outlined in the Inspection Report, Table III-I, to in-
clude inspection of items which are required to be examined at intervals not compatible with
airframe operating time or airframe inspection intervals. Typical of this type are:
a. Inspections required because of special conditions or incidents that arise and because
of these conditions or incidents, an immediate inspection would be required to insure further
safe flight.
b. Inspection of airframe or components on a calendar basis. This type of inspection
could often be accomplished during the nearest scheduled inspection.
c. Specific definitive inspection on engines based strictly upon engine operating time.
d. Those inspections not completely covered in other sections of this manual but out-
lined in the Inspection Report and must be explained in more detail to give a clearer and com-
plete inspection.
3-8. INSPECTION OF FLAP OUTBOARD HINGES. (Refer to Figure 3-1.) This inspec-
tion must be accomplished at each 100 hours of operation or at each subsequent annual inspec-
tion (whichever comes first). The following steps should be used to perform this inspection:
a. Using the hydraulic hand pump, lower the flaps to the full down position.
b. Clean the flap outboard hinges thoroughly.
c. Using a 10 power magnifying glass, inspect the hinges thoroughly for evidence of
cracks.
d. If hinge cracks are evident, replace with new replacement hinge, P/N 17103-04 (left)
and/or 17103-05 (right).
e. If cracks are not apparent, no further action is required until the next inspection. Make
appropriate logbook entry complying with latest revision of Piper Service Bulletin No. 408.
3-9. INSPECTION OF FUEL SELECTOR CONTROL CABLES. (Referto Figure 3-2.) At

each 100 hour inspection of the airplane, inspect the fuel selector control cable wires. (Refer
to latest revision of Piper Service Bulletin No. 507.) Conduct the inspection as follows:
a. Remove the access panel covering the main spar from the bottom section of the nacelle
and the access panel covering the main spar from the bottom of the fuselage.
b. Visually check control cable wires at swivel fittings for indications of binding, kinks
or bends: Have someone in cockpit operate fuel controls while mechanic inspects wires at
swivel fittings.
c. Replace cable(s) exhibiting any of the above conditions.
d. Check adjustments of selector valve per Section IX.
e. Replace access panels and covers.
INSPECTION
I ArW.
,~ Reissued: 2/18/81
lr
RIGHT FUEL SELECTOR VALVE
PA-23-250 (Six Place)

SerialNos. 27-2505 thru 27-7954076
SWIVEL FITTING
SELECTOR CABLE
LEFT FUEL SELECTOR CABLE
FITTING
RIGHT FUEL SELECTOR VALVE
SWIVEL FITTING
FUEL SELECTOR
CABLE ASSEMBL
LEFT FUEL SELECTOR VALVE
PA-23-235
PA-23-250
Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504
Figure 3-2. Fuel Selector Valve Control Cables, PA-23-235, PA-23-250, and
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 thru 27-7954076
INSPECTION
Reissued: 2/18/81
1F3
RIGHT SWITCH
ACTUATING CABLE
FUELSELECTOR
CABLES
SELECTOR
VALVE
LEFT SWITCH
CABLE END
BEARINGS
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
CABLE END
BEARINGS
0
BEARINGS
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
LEFTFUEL
SELECTOR
VALVE
Figure 3-3. Fuel Selector Cables, PA-23-250 (six place),

INSPECTION
Reissued: 2/18/81
1F4
TABLEIII-I. INSPECTIONREPORT
- NOTE-
Perform inspectionsor operationsat each of the inspection intervals
as indicated by a circle (0).
Inspection Time (hrs)

Nature of Inspection
L R 50 100 500 1000
A. PROPELLERGROUP
1. Inspect spinner and back plate for cracks .................. 0 0 O O 0 O
2. Inspect blades for nicks and cracks ........................ 0 0 O 0 O O
3. Inspect for grease and oil leaks ........................... 0 0 O O 0 O
4. Lubricate propeller per lubrication chart 0 0 O O O
5. Inspect spinner mounting brackets for cracks ............... 0 0 O 0 0
6. Inspect propeller mounting bolts and safety (check torque
if safety is broken) ...................................... 0 0 0 0 0
7. Inspect hub parts for cracks and corrosion ................. 0 0 0 0 0
8. Inspect pitch actuating arms and bolts ..................... 0 0O O 0 0
9. Rotate blades and check tightness in hub pilot
tube (see note 17) ...................................... 0 0 O O 0
10. Check propeller air pressure (check at least once a month) ... 0 0 O 0 0
11. Inspect condition of propeller deicer system ................ 0 0O 0 0 0
12. Remove propellers; remove sludge from propeller
and crankshaft ........................................ 0 0 0 0
13. Overhaul propeller (per latest revision of Hartzell
Service Letter 61) ....................................... 0 0
B. ENGINE GROUP
WARNING:Ground magneto primary circuit before working
on engine.
NOTE: Read notes 7 and 22 before completing this
inspection group.
1. Remove the engine cowl ................................. 0 0 O O 0
2. Clean and inspect cowling for cracks, distortion, and loose
or missing fasteners ...... ............................... 0 0 O O 0
3. Drain oil sump (see note 5) .............................. 0 0 0 O O O
4. Clean suction oil strainer at oil change (inspect strainer
for foreign particles)..................................... 0 0 O O O O
5. Clean pressure oil strainer or change full flow (cartridge
type) oil filter element (inspect strainer or element
for foreign particles)..................................... 0 0 O 0 O O
6. Inspect oil temperature sender unit for leaks and security .... 0 0 O O 0
7. Inspect oil lines and fittings for leaks, security, chafing, dents,
and cracks (see note 7) .................................. 0 0 0 O 0
8. Clean and inspect oil radiator cooling fins.................. 0 0 O O 0
9. Remove and flush oil radiator ............................ 0O 0O O O
INSPECTION
InterimRevision:9/21/86
1F5
TABLE III-1. INSPECTION REPORT (cont.)

L R 50 100 500 1000
B. ENGINE GROUP (cont.)
10. Inspect rocker box covers for evidence of oil leaks. If

found, replace gasket, torque cover screws 50 inch-pounds
(See Note 9)............................................ 0 0 0 0 0 0
NOTE: Lycoming requires a Valve Inspection be made
after every 400 hours of operation. (See Note 10.)
11. Inspect wiring to engine and accessories. Replace damaged
wires and clamps. Inspect terminals for security and
cleanliness ............................................ 0 0 0 0 0
12. Inspect spark plug cable leads and ceramics for
corrosion and deposits................................... 0 0 0 0 0 0
13. Inspect condition of spark plugs. (Clean and adjust
gap per latest revision of Lycoming Service
Instruction No 1042) .................................... 0 0 0 0 0
NOTE: If fouling of spark plugs has been apparent, rotate
bottom plugs to upper plugs.
14. Inspect ignition harness and insulators for high tension
leakage and continuity .................................. 0 0 0 0 0
15. Inspect magneto main points for clearance per Service
Manual ............................................... 0 0
16. Inspect magneto retard points for proper clearance or
retard angle per Service Manual .......................... 0 0 0 0
17. Inspect magneto for oil seals leakage ...................... 0 0 O 0 0
18. Inspect breaker felts for proper lubrication ................. 0 0 0 0 0
O O O
19. Inspect distributor block for cracks, burned areas, or
corrosion and height of contact springs .................... 0 0 O 0 0
20. Inspect magnetos to engine timing per Service Manual....... 0 0 O 0 0
21. Overhaul or replace magnetos (See Note 6)................. 0 0 0
22. Inspect cylinder compression (Ref: AC43.13-IA) ............ 0 0 O 0 0
23. Inspect cylinders for cracked or broken fins (See Note 9)..... 0 0 O 0 0
24. Fill engine with oil per lubrication chart ................... 0 0 0 0 0 0
25. Clean engine as required ................................. 0 0 O 0 0
26. Remove air cleaner screen and clean per Service Manual ..... 0 0 0 0 0 0
27. Drain carburetor, remove and clean carburetor inlet
screen or remove and clean fuel injector screen (Clean
injector nozzles as required, clean with acetone only) ........ 0 0 0 0 0 0
28. Inspect condition of carburetor heat or alternate air door
and box ........... ............... ................... 0 0 O 0 0 0
29. Inspect intake seals for leaks and clamps for tightness ....... 0 0 O 0 0
30. Inspect condition of flexible fuel lines ..................... 0 0 0 0 0
31. Replace flexible lines .................................... 0 0 0
32. Inspect fuel system for leaks............................... 0 0 0 0 0
0
INSPECTION
Revised: 4 26 83
1F6
*PIPER AZTECSERVICEMANUAL
TABLE III-I. INSPECTION REPORT (cont)

L R 50 100 500 1000
B. ENGINE GROUP (cont)
33. Clean screens in electric fuel pumps (plunger type pump) O 0 O 0 0 0
34. Check fuel pumps for operation (enginedriven and electric) O 0 0 0 0
35. Overhaul or replace fuel pumps (engine driven) (see
vendor data) 0 0
36. Replace hydraulic filter element (inspect filter element for
contamination) O 0 O 0 0
37. Inspect hydraulic pump and gasket for leaks O 0 O 0 0
38. Overhaul or replace hydraulic pump (see note 6) O 0 0
39. Inspect vacuum pumps, oil separators and lines 0 0 0 0 0
40. Overhaul or replace vacuum pumps (see note 16) O 0 0
41. Inspect all engine and propeller controls for travel and
operating condition (see latest revision of Piper Service
Bulletin 550) 0 0 0 O 0
42. Inspect exhaust stacks, gaskets and augmentor tubes for
condition and leakage (replace gaskets as required) O 0 0 0 0
43. Inspect breather tube for obstructions and security O 0 0 O 0
44. Inspect crankcase for cracks, leaks, and security of seam bolts O 0 0 O 0
45. Inspect rubber engine mounts for cracks and loose mounting O 0 0 O 0
46. Inspect rubber engine mount bushings for deterioration
(see note 15) O 0 0 0 0
47. Inspect all engine bafflesfor cracks O 0 0 0 0
48. Inspect firewall for cracks O 0 0 0
49. Inspect condition of firewall seals O 0 0 O 0
50. Inspect condition and tension of generator or alternator
drive belt O 0 O0 0
51. Inspect condition of generator or alternator and starter O 0 0 0 0
52. Replace vacuum or pressure regulator filter O 0 0 0 0
53. Lubricate all engine controls (DO NOT lubricate teflon
liners of control cables) 0 0 0 0 0
54. Inspect cowl flap torque tube for axial play (min 0.005- max.
0.012) O 0 0 0 0
55. Inspect cowl flap doors for cracks, loose rivets, defective
hinges, missing stop screws,and control rods for
loose connections 01 0 0 0 0
56. With cowl installed, check cowl flap rigging per Service
Manual O 0 0 0 0
57. Overhaul or replace propeller governor (see latest revision
of Hartzell Service Letter 61) O 0 0 0 0
58. Complete overhaul of engine or replace with factory rebuilt
(see note 6) O 0
59. Replace rubber lord mounts (see note 15) O 0 0
60. Reinstall engine cowl 0 0 0 0 0
InterimRevision:9/21/86 INSPECTION
1F7
TABLE Ill-I. INSPECTION REPORT (cont.)

0
L R 50 100 500 1000
C. TURBOCHARGER
I. Change turbo oil (See Note 12) ........................... 0 O 0 0 0 0

2. Clean oil filter elements (See Note 5)...................... 0 O 0 0 0 0
3. Visually inspect system for oil leaks, exhaust system leaks and
general condition ....................................... 0 0 O O O O
4. Inspect the compressor wheel for nicks, cracks or broken blades 0 0 O O O
5. Inspect for excess bearing drag or wheel rubbing against
housing ................................................ 0 0 O O O O
6. Inspect turbine wheel for broken blades or signs of rubbing .. 0 0 O O O
7. Check rigging of alternate air control ..................... 0 0 O O O
8. Inspect oil inlet and outlet ports in center housing for leaks .. 0 0 O O O
9. Inspect turbine heat blanket for condition and security....... 0 0 O O O
10. Inspect linkage between bypass valve and actuator .......... 0 0 O O O
11. Inspect induction and exhaust components for worn or damaged
areas, loose clamps, cracks and leaks (See Note 14).......... 0 0 O O O
12. Inspect fuel injection nozzle pressure reference manifold for
deteriorated hose, loose connections, leaks or obstructions ... 0 0 O O O
13. Inspect fluid power lines leaks and security ................. 0 0 O O O
14. Inspect for oil leakage from controller ..................... 0 0 O O O
15. Inspect rigging and action of transfer valve ................. 0 0 0 O (
16. Inspect all mounting brackets for tightness, damage or visible
cracks ................................................. 0 0 O O O
17. Reinstall engine cowl .................................... 0 0 O O O O
D. CABIN GROUP
1. Inspect cabin entrance door, baggage compartment door and windows

for damage, operation and security ................................... O O O
2. Check operation of emergency exit window (See Note 13) .............. O O O
3. Inspect upholstery for tears ......................................... O O O
4. Inspect seats, seat belts and securing hardware ......................... O O O
5. Inspect trim operation .............................................. O O O
6. Check operation of rubber pedals .................................... O O O
7. Check operation of parking brake.................................... O O O
8. Inspect condition and security of control wheels, column, pulleys.
cables and on Serial Nos. 27-8054001 and up, bobweight installation ..... O O O
9. Check operation of landing, navigation, cabin and instrument lights ...... O O O
10. Inspect instruments, lines and attachments for condition and security ..... O O O
11. Inspect instruments central air filter lines and replace filter .............. O O O
12. Inspect vacuum operated instruments and electric turn and bank
(Overhaul or replace as required) .................................... O
0 0O O
0
13. Replace filters, if installed, gyro horizon, directional gyro, and manifold
pressure line ....................................................... O O
INSPECTION
Revised: 4 26.83
1F8
TABLE III-I. INSPECTION REPORT (cont.)

0
50 100 500 1000
D. CABIN GROUP (cont.)
14. Check altimeter (Calibrate altimeter system in accordance with

FAR 91.170, if appropriate) ......................................... O 0 0
15. Drain crossfeed line ................................................ 0 0 0 0
16. Check operation of crossfeed valve ................................... O 0 0
17. Check operation of heater fuel valve.................................. O 0 0
18. Inspect fuel selector and crossfeed valve control cables per
Section III, Paragraph 3-9.......................................... O 0 0
19. Check operation of cowl flaps ....................................... O 0 0
20. Inspect oxygen outlets for defects and corrosion ....................... O 0 0
21. Inspect oxygen system operation and components ...................... O 0 0
E. FUSELAGE AND EMPENNAGE GROUP
I. Remove inspection panels and plates ................................. O 0 0

2. Check fluid in brake reservoir (Fill as required) ........................ O 0 0
3. Check battery, box and cables (Check at least every 30 days. Flush box
as required and fill battery per instructions on box) .................... 0 O O O
. 4. Inspect heater for fuel or fume leaks..................................

5. Inspect manual heater fuel shutoff valve for fuel leaks and
capnut safety ......................................................
O
O
O
0
O
0
6. Drain and clean heater gascolater bowl (South Wind) .................. O 0 0
7. Check recommended time for overhaul of heater per Piper Service
Manual, Section XIII .............................................. O 0 0
8. Inspect electronic installations for security and operation................ O 0 0
9. Inspect fuselage cabin entrance step attachments to fuselage
frame for condition, security, etc. (See latest revision of Piper
S,B. No. 672) ..................................................... O 0 0
10. Inspect bulkheads and stringers for damage ........................... O 0 0
II. Inspect antenna mounts and electric wiring for damaged insulation
and security ......... ............................................. O 0 0
12. Inspect E.L.T. installation and condition of battery and antenna
(See latest revision of Piper S/L No. 820) ............................. O 0 0
13. Inspect hydraulic power pack and lines for damage, leaks and proper
fluid level (See Note 20)............................................ O 0 0
14. Inspect flap torque tube, bearing supports, brackets and hydraulic
actuator and bellcrank for security, loose rivets, cracks and leaks......... O 0 0
15. Inspect C02 system for fluid in lines and safeties on C02 bottle
(Weight C02 bottle at 500 hours or at annual inspection, 132 grams
unless otherwise noted on bottle) (See latest revision of Piper S/B
No. 564)................ .......................................... O 0 0
16. Inspect fuel lines, valves, and gauges for-damage and operation .......... 0 0 0
17. Inspect security of all lines .......................................... 0 0 0
INSPECTION
Reissued: 2 18:81
1F9
TABLE 111-1. INSPECTION REPORT (cont.)

50 100 500 1000
E. FUSELAGE AND EMPENNAGE GROUP (cont.)
18. Inspect stabilator fin and rudder surface for damage .................... O 0 0
19. Inspect stabilator bearing and horns for damage and operation .......... O 0 0
20. Inspect stabilator tip balance weight arms for cracks (Refer to latest
revision of Piper S/B Nos. 540/547) .................................. O 0 0
21. Inspect condition of stabilator attachment bolts ........................ 0 0
22. Inspect rudder and tab hinges, horns and attachments for damage
and operation ..................................................... O 0 0
23. Inspect rudder hinge bolts for excess wear.............................
24. Inspect rudder trim mechanism ...................................... 0 0 0
25. Inspect stabilator trim mechanism and control rod end bearing
(See latest revision of Piper S/B No. 590) ............................. O O O
26. Inspect aileron, rudder, stabilator cables, trim cables, turnbuckles,
guides and pulleys for safeties, damage and operation (Refer to
latest revision of Piper S/L No. 628) ................................. O O O
27. Inspect stabilator and rudder control cab! attachments ................. O O O
28. Replace rudder hinge bolts ......................................... 0 0
29. Inspect anti-collision light for security and operation ................... O O O
30. Lubricate per lubrication chart ...................................... O O O
31. Inspect condition of pneumatic deicers ...............................
32. Inspect security of Autopilot pitch servo bridle cable clamps............. O O 0
33. Inspect fuel selector valve control cables per Section 111,Paragraph 3-9
of Service Manual ................................................. O O O
34. Reinstall inspection panels and plates.................................
O O O
F. WING GROUP
(Refer to Note 16.)
I. Remove inspection plates and fairings ................................ O O O
2. Inspect surfaces, skins and tips for damage and loose rivets .............. O O O
3. Inspect condition of walkway and step................................ O O O
4. Inspect ailerons and attachments for damage and operation ............. O O O
5. Inspect aileron cables, pulleys and bellcranks for damage and
operation ......................................................... O O O
6. Inspect aileron balance weight and arm for security and condition........
7. Inspect flaps and attachments for damage and operation (See
Note 21).......................................................... O 0 0
8. Replace pins and bolts used as flap and aileron hinges .................. 0
9. Lubricate per lubrication chart ................................... 0 0 0
10. Inspect wing attachment bolts and brackets ......................... O 0 0
1. Inspect engine mount attaching structure .............................. 0 0 0
12. Inspect fuel cells and lines for leaks and water ......................... 0 O 0 0
13. Remove, drain, and clean fuel strainer bowl and screen (Drain and
clean at least every 90 days) ......................................... , O O O
0 0 0
INSPECTION
Interim Revision: 4/29/86
1F10
TABLE II1-1. INSPECTION REPORT (cont.)

50 100 500 1000
F. WING GROUP (cont.)
14. Fuel cells marked for capacity ....................................... O 0 0

15. Fuel cells marked for minimum octane rating.......................... O 0 0
16. Inspect switches to indicators registering fuel cell quantity ............... O 0 0
17. Inspect fuel cell vents and vent lines .................................. O 0 0
18. Inspect condition of pneumatic deicers ............................... O 0 0
19. Inspect security of Autopilot roll servo bridle cable clamps .............. O 0 0
20. Reinstall inspection plates and fairings ................................ O 0 0
G. LANDING GEAR GROUP

(Refer to Note 16.)
1. Inspect oleo struts for proper extension (3 in.) (Check for proper
fluid level as required) .............................................. O 0 0 0
2. Inspect nose gear steering control and travel........................... O 0 0
3. Inspect wheels for alignment ........................................ O 0 0
4. Put airplane on jacks ............................................... O 0 0
5. Inspect tires for cuts, uneven or excessive wear and slippage ............. O 0 0
6. Remove wheels, clean, check and repack bearings ...................... O 0 0
7. Inspect wheel for cracks, corrosion and broken bolts
(Refer to Figure 7-22) .............................................. O 0 0
8. Check tire pressure (N27-M42) (M-46, 5200 Ibs. gross wt.) .............. O 0 0
9. Inspect brake lining and disc for wear and cracks ...................... O 0 0
10. Inspect brake backing plates for cracks ............................... O 0 0
11. Inspect condition of brake and hydraulic lines (See Note 19)............. O 0 0
12. Inspect shimmy dampener operation .................................. O 0 0
I J. Inspect gear forks for damage ....................................... O 0 0
14. Inspect oleo struts for fluid leaks and scoring .......................... O 0 0
15. Inspect gear struts, attachments, torque links, retraction links and
bolts for operation ................................................. O 0 0
16. Inspect downlocks for operation and adjustment ....................... O 0 0
17. Inspect torque link bolts and bushings (Rebush if necessary) ............. 0 0
18. Inspect drag link bolts (Replace as required) ........................... 0
19. Inspect gear doors and attachments .................................. O 0 0
20. Check warning horn and light for operation ........................... O 0 0
21. Retract gear- check operation ....................................... O O 0
22. Retract gear - check doors for clearance and operation ................. O 0 0
23. Inspect anti-retraction system ........................................ O 0 0
24. Inspect actuating cylinders for leaking and security ..................... 0 0 0
25. Inspect position indicating switches and electrical leads for security...... 0 0 0
26. Lubricate per lubrication chart ...................................... 0 0 0
27. Remove airplane from jacks ......................................... 0 0 0
INSPECTION
Interim Revision: 4/29/86
1F11
TABLE I11-I. INSPECTION REPORT (cont.)

50 100 500 1000
H. OPERATIONAL INSPECTION
1. Check fuel pump, fuel cell selector and crossfeed operation .............. O O O O
2. Check indication of fuel quantity and pressure of flow gauges ........... O O O O
3. Check oil pressure and temperature indications ........................ O O O O
4. Check generator or alternator output ................................. O O O O
5. Check manifold pressure indication .................................. O O O O
6. Check operation of carburetor heat or alternate air..................... O O O O
7. Check operation of parking brake.................................... O O O O
8. Check operation of vacuum gauge ................................... O O O O
9. Check gyros for noise and roughness ................................. O O O O
10. Check cabin heater operation ........................................ O O O O
11.Check magneto switch operation ..................................... O O O O
12. Check magneto RPM variation ...................................... O O O O
13. Check throttle and mixture operation ................................. O O O O
14. Check propeller smoothness ......................................... O O O O
15. Check propeller governor action ..................................... O O O O
16. Check electronic equipment operation ................................ O O O O
17. Check operation of Autopilot, including automatic pitch trim, and
Manual Electric Trim (See Note II) .................................. 0 0 0 0
18. Check operation of pneumatic deicer system if installed ................. 0 0 0
I. GENERAL
I. Aircraft conforms to FAA specifications ......... ..................... 0 O 0 0

2. All FAA Airworthiness Directives complied with....................... 0 0 0 0
3. All Manufacturers Service Letters and Bulletins complied with........... 0 0 0 0
4. Check for proper Flight Manual ..................................... 0 0 0 0
5. Aircraft papers in proper order ...................................... 0 0 0 0
INSPECTION
Revised: 4/26/83
1F12
NOTES:
1. Refer to the last card of the Piper - Parts Price List - Aerofiche, for a checklist of current revision
dates to Piper Inspection Reports and Manuals.
2. All inspections or operations are required at each of the inspection intervals as indicated by a (O).
Both the annual and 100 hour inspections are complete inspections of the airplane, identical in
scope, while both the 500 and 1000 hour inspections are extensions of the annual or 100 hour
inspection, which require a more detailed examination of the airplane, and overhaul or replacement
of some major components. Inspections must be accomplished by persons authorized by the FAA.
3. Piper Service Bulletins are of special importance and must be complied with promptly.
4. Piper Service Letters are product improvements and service hints pertaining to servicing the
airplane and should be given careful attention.
5. Intervals between oil changes can be increased as much as 100% on engines equipped with full flow
(cartridge type) oil filters - provided the element is replaced each 50 hours of operation.
6. Replace or overhaul as required or at engine overhaul. (For engine overhaul, refer to latest revision
of Lycoming Service Letter No. L201.)
7. Replace flexible oil lines at engine T.B.O. as per latest revision Lycoming Service Bulletin No. 240.
8. Inspections given for power plant are based on the engine manufacturer's operator's manual
(Lycoming Part No. 60297-10). Any changes issued to the engine manufacturer's operator's manual
shall supersede or supplement the instructions outlined in this report. Occassionally, service
bulletins or service instructions are issued by Avco Lycoming Division that require inspection
procedures that are not listed in this manual. Such publications usually are limited to specific models
and become obsolete after corrective steps have been accomplished. All such publications are
available from Avco Lycoming distributors, or from the factory by subscription. Consult latest
revision of Lycoming Service Letter No. L 1 14for subscription information. Maintenance facilities
should have an up-to-date file of these publications available at all times.
9. Check cylinders for evidence of excessive heat which is indicated by burned paint on the cylinders.
This condition is indicative of internal damage to the cylinder and, if found, its cause must be
determined and corrected before the aircraft is returned to service.
Heavy discoloration and appearance of seepage at the cylinder head and barrel attachment area
is usually due to emission of thread lubricant used during assembly of the barrel at the factory, or by
slight gas leakage which stops after the cylinder has been in service for awhile. This condition is
neither harmful nor detrimental to engine performance and operation. If it can be proven that
leakage exceeds these conditions, the cylinder should be replaced.
10. At every 400 hours of engine operation, remove the rocker box covers and check for freedom of
valve rockers when valves are closed. Look for evidence of abnormal wear or broken parts in the
area of the valve tips, valve keeper, springs and spring seat. If any indications are found, the cylinder
and all of its components should be removed (including the piston and connecting rod assembly) and
inspected for further damage. Replace any parts that do not conform with limits shown in the latest
revision for Service Table of Limits No. SSP1776.
II. Refer to Flight Manual Supplement for preflight and flight check, for intended function in all
modes.
12. Applies only to 10-540-J4A5 engines adapted with AirResearch Turbocharger Unit.
13. Check at each annual or 100 hour inspection, whichever comes first.
14. Latest revision of Lycoming Service Bulletin No. 347 should be complied with.
15. Inspect rubber mount for severe cracking, signs of high temperature or burning, separation of
rubber from metal surfaces, excessive "sag" or permanent deflection resulting in internal bottoming
With spacer, engine and cowl interference, unusual vibration. The mounts must be replaced in
accordance with Piper Service Letter Number 592.
16. Refer to Piper Service Bulletin 822.
INSPECTION
1F13 Interim Revision: 4/29/86
NOTES: (cont.):
16. Pressure pumps (431) installed with pneumatic deicer boots should be replaced or overhauled at
1000hours intervals. All other pressure pumps installed on aircraft with or without pneumatic
deicers can be replaced or overhauled at engine TBO or upon condition.
17. Does not apply to propellers with spring backup kit installed.
18. When using other than 80/87 octane rating fuel, refer to latest revision Lycoming Service Letter
L185 for additional information and service procedures.
19. Comply with latest revision of Piper Service Bulletin 629.
20. Comply with latest revision of Piper Service Bulletin 635.
21. Refer to latest revision of Piper Service Bulletin 671, for flap control system inspection.
22. Refer to VSP 69.
I
INSPECTION
InterimRevision9/21/86
1F14
SECTION IV
STRUCTURES
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
4-1. Introduction ................................................. IF19
4-2. Description .......... ........................................ F19
4-3. Wing Group ................................................. IF20
4-4. Wing Tip .................................................... F20
4-5. Removal of Wing Tip ................................ IF20
4-6. Installation of Wing Tip .............................. 1F23
4-7. Aileron ..................................................... F23
4-8. Removal of Aileron .................................. IF23
4-9. Installation of Aileron ....................... ......... IF23
4-10. Flap ......................................... ............. 1F24
4-11. Removal of Flap .................................... IF24
4-12. Installation of Flap ............................ ...... IF24
4-13. Wing ....................................................... F24
4-14. Removal of Wing .................................... 1F24
4-15. Installation of Wing .................................. 1G3
4-16. Empennage Group ............................................ 1G8
4-17. Stabilator ................................................... 1G8
4-18. Removal of Stabilator ....................... ......... IG8
4-19. Installation of Stabilator .............................. 1G9
4-20. Installation of New Stabilator .................. ....... 1G9
4-21. Stabilator Trim Tab .......................................... 1G10
4-22. Removal of Stabilator Trim Tab ....................... IG10
4-23. Installation of Stabilator Trim Tab .................... IG10
4-24. Stabilator Trim Tab Free Play ........................ 1G10
4-25. Rudder .................................................... IGIO
4-26. Removal of Rudder .................................. IG IO
4-27. Installation of Rudder ......................... ....... 1G11
4-28. Rudder Trim Tab ............................................ IGII
4-29. Removal of Rudder Trim Tab ......................... IG I
4-30. Installation of Rudder Trim Tab ................... .... G12
4-31. Vertical Stabilizer (Fin) ....... .............. ................. 1G12
4-32. Removal of Vertical Stabilizer (Fin) ..................... G12
4-33. Installation of Vertical Stabilizer (Fin) .. ... ............. G15
4-34. Fuselage Assembly ........................................... 15
4-35. Windshield .................................................. G15
4-36. Removal of Windshield .. ...... ....................... G 15
4-37. Installation of Windshield ........................... . 1G19
Reissued: 2/18/81
1F15
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
4-38. Side Windows ............................................... IG19

4-39. Removal of Side Windows (PA-23-250, PA-23-235
and PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos. 27-2000
to 27-2504 incl.) ................................. IG19
4-40. Installation of Side Windows (PA-23-250, PA-23-235
to 27-2504 incl.) ................................ G20
4-41. Removal of Side Windows (PA-23-250 [six place],
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up) ....................... 1G20
4-42. Installation of Side Windows (PA-23-250 [six place],
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up) ....................... 1G21
4-43. Emergency Exit (PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos. 27-2000
and up) ................................................. IG 21
4-44. Removal of Emergency Exit Assembly ................. 1G21
4-45. Installation of Emergency Exit Assembly ............... 1G22
4-46. Removal of Emergency Exit Window .................. 1G22
4-47. Installation of Emergency Exit Window ................ 1G22
4-48. Baggage Doors ............................................... 1G24
4-49. Removal of Aft Baggage Door ........................ 1G24
4-50. Installation of Aft Baggage Door ...................... 1G24
4-51. Removal of Aft Baggage Door Latch Assembly.......... IH
4-52. Installation of Aft Baggage Door Latch ................ 1H1
4-53. Removal of Forward Baggage Door (PA-23-250
[six place])...................................... 1H2
4-54. Installation of Forward Baggage Door (PA-23-250
[six place])...................................... 1H2
4-55. Removal of Forward Baggage Door Latch
(PA-23-250 [six place]) ........................... 1H2
4-56. Installation of Baggage Door Latch (PA-23-250
[six place])...................................... 1H2
4-57. Cabin Entrance Door ........................................ 1H3
4-58. Removal of Cabin Entrance Door ..................... 1H3
4-59. Installation of Cabin Entrance ......................... 1H3
4-60. Adjustment of Cabin Entrance Door ................... 1H3
4-61. Cabin Door Latch and Lock Assembly .......................... H5
4-62. Removal of Cabin Door Latch and Lock Assembly ...... 1H5
4-63. Installation of Cabin Door Latch and Lock
Assembly ....................................... 1H6
4-64. Structural Repairs ............................................ 1H8
4-65. Checking Control Surface Balance .............................. 1H8
4-66. Balancing Stabilators ......................................... 1H10
4-67. Balancing Rudders ........................................... H 13
4-68. Balancing Aileron ............................................ 1H15
Reissued: 2/18/81
1F16
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
4-69. Fiberglass Repairs............................................ 1H16
4-70. Fiberglass Touch-Up and Surface Repairs .............. IH16
4-71. Fiberglass Fracture and Patch Repairs ................. IH17
4-72. Replacement of Damaged Nose Cone (PA-23-250,
PA-23-235) .. ....................................... 113
4-73. Replacement/ Installation of Nose Cone or Radome,
(PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos. 27-4426, 27-4574
and up) ................................................. 114
4-74. Thermoplastic Repairs........................................ 118
4-75. Safety Walk Repairs ......................................... 1117
4-76. Surface Preparation.................................. 1117
4-77. Product Listing for Liquid Safety Walk Compound .... 1117
4-78. Application of Liquid Safety Walk Compound .......... 1117
4-79. Surface Preparation for Pressure Sensitive
Safety Walk .................................... 1118
4-80. Application of Pressure Sensitive Safety Walk........... 1118
4-81. Shoulder Harness Inertia Reel Adjustment ......... ............ 1118
Reissued: 2/18/81
1F17
IF18
SECTION IV
STRUCTURES
4-1. INTRODUCTION. This section explains procedures for removal and installation of
structural components of the airplane, for the check and balance of the stabilator and
rudder and for the repair of structural surfaces on all models. Information for the rigging
and adjustment of control surfaces, as well as the removal and installation of their controls,
may be found in Section V.
4-2. DESCRIPTION. The fuselage is composed of two basic sections. The forward section
which extends from the foremost point on the nose to station 171.1, a point just aft of the
rearmost side window, is a tubular structure or truss type construction with bulkheads,
channels and stringers. The aft section of the fuselage which extends from station 171.1 to
station 299.38 is of semi-monocoque type construction. Windows include a two piece
windshield and three windows along each side. A storm window is located on the left side
forward window which opens inward when the latch is released. On PA-23-250 (six place)
models, the center window on the left side has been designed for use as an emergency exit.
On PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 airplanes, there is a baggage door located on the right side of
the fuselage at the rear of the cabin area. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes there are two
baggage doors on the right side, one located just aft of the cabin area, and the other located
on the nose section.
Each wing panel is an all metal, full cantilever, multi-spar type construction with
metal ribs and stringers covered with stressed skin. Installed in each wing just aft of the
center main spar are two bladder type fuel cells. Attached to each wing is the power plant,
aileron, flap and main landing gear. The center full length "I" beam type main spar, on each
wing, extends into the fuselage where they are joined together with high strength butt
fittings, making in effect a continuous center main spar. The main spar is also attached to
the side of the fuselage as are the front and rear spars.
The empennage or tail section is an all metal, full cantilever, multi-spar type
construction, with ribs, covered with stressed skin. The empennage consists of a vertical
stabilizer, rudder, and a two part horizontal stabilator. The vertical stabilizer, rudder and
stabilator incorporate two main spars, and attach to the aft bulkhead assembly of the
fuselage.
STRUCTURES
1F19 Reissued: 2/18/81
NOTE
When torquing structural assemblies,standard torque values

are to be used as found in FAA AdvisoryCircular 43.13-1 or
Torque Tables in Section II of this manual, unless otherwise
stated in this section.
4-3. WINGGROUP.
4-4. WINGTIP.
4-5. REMOVALOF WINGTIP.

NOTE
Airplanes with pneumatic deicers, remove deicers as per

instructions in Section XIV.
NOTE
Airplanes with wing tip tanks, disconnect tip cell per

instructions in Section IX.
a. Remove the access plate located on the bottom of the front wing spar where the
wing skin and tip skin join together. (Refer to Accessand Inspection Provisions,Section II.)
b. Remove the hinge pin located inside the access opening on the bottom of the wing
tip. Removethe pin through the top of the wing tip by pushing up on the bottom of the pin
until the top can be grasped with pliers and pulled out.
NOTE
Some airplanes are equipped with a small plate coveringthe
top of the pin. If the cover plate is installed, loosen the
screwson either side and slide the plate into the wing tip.
c. Remove the screwsattaching the wing tip to the wing.
d. Pull the wing tip far enough off to disconnect the two fuel cell vent lines and the
navigationlight wire at the quick disconnect fitting.
STRUCTURES
Reissued:2/18/81
1F20
A722 A724
AN4-13A
MS20365-428C
80122-68 WASHER, 2 REQ.
SKETCH D
A727 A726
AN5-26A
MS20365-524C
AN4-13A
MS20365-428C
80012-94 BUSHING, 2 REQ.
SKETCH A SKETCHB
Figure 4-1. Aileron and Flap Installation
STRUCTURES
1F21
A462
AN4 -21 A
AN960-416 (2 REQ.)
MS20365-428C
14175-89 BUSHING
82732-121 BUSHING
BOTTOM VIEW
SERIAL NOS. 27-7405331 AND UP. SKETCHC
A723
WASHER 80122-68 (LEFT INSTALLATION ONLY); .
ON RIGHT FLAP INSTALLATION INSTALL ONE
AN960-416 AND ONE 80122-68 ON INBOARD SIDE
AND ONE AN960-416 ON OUTBOARD SIDE
FLAP INBOARD END
AN4 -13 A
MS20365-428C
SKETCHE
Figure 4-1. Aileron and Flap Installation (cont.)
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1F22
NOTE
On airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-524 incl., and

27-2000 to 27-2269 incl., there are no fuel cell vent lines
installed in the wing tip.
e. Remove the wing tip.
4-6. INSTALLATION OF WING TIP.
NOTE
See Section IX for instructions on installation of wing tip

fuel cells if wing tip tanks are installed.
a. Hold the wing tip near the wing and connect the navigation light wire and the two
fuel cell vent lines, where applicable.
b. Position the wing tip on the wing.
c. Insert a new hinge pin from the top of the wing tip.
d. Install tip attaching screws and tighten.
e. Install the access cover plate on the bottom of the wing tip.
f. Cover the top of the hinge pin, where applicable, by sliding the cover plate over top
of the pin and tightening the screws on either side.
4-7. AILERON.
4-8. REMOVAL OF AILERON. (Refer to Figure 4-1.)

a. Disconnect the aileron control tube at the center aileron hinge by removing
attaching nut and bolt and spacer bushings.
b. Remove the balance weight from the balance weight arm by removing attaching nut
and bolt.
c. Disconnect the aileron from its hinge brackets by removing hinge nuts and bolts.
Note spacer washers and their locations, if any.
d. Remove the aileron by lowering the inboard end of the aileron and swinging it under
the wing so the balance weight arm can be drawn out from the wing tip.
4-9. INSTALLATION OF AILERON. (Refer to Figure 4-1.)

a. Install the aileron by first inserting the balance weight arm into the wing tip.
b. Align the hinges and install the three hinge bolts. Check each hinge attachment for
need of spacer washers and secure bolts with nuts.
c. Slide the aileron balance weight on the balance weight arm and secure with bolt and
nut.
d. Connect the aileron control tube to the hinge fitting at the center of the aileron with
bushings, bolt and nut.
STRUCTURES
1F23
e. Check clearances of control tube, and balance weight and arm.

f. Check rigging and adjustment of aileron as described in Section V.
4-10. FLAP.
4-11. REMOVAL OF FLAP. (Refer to Figure 4-1.)

a. Remove the rear wing root fairing adjacent to flap by removing attaching
screws.
b. Using the hydraulic hand pump, lower the flaps to the down position.
c. Disconnect the control tube at the inboard end of the flap by removing at-
taching bolt and nut.
d. Disconnect the flap from its hinge brackets by removing hinge nuts and
bolts. Note spacer bushings and washers, and their locations.
e. Remove the flap from the wing.
4-12. INSTALLATION OF FLAP. (Refer to Figure 4-1.)

a. Align the hinges and install the three hinge bolts. Check alignment and in-
stall washers and nuts.
b. With the flap control rod extended to the down position connect the rod to
the flap.
c. Check rigging and adjustment of flaps as described in Section V.
d. Install the rear wing root fairing with attaching screws.
4-13. WING.
4-14. REMOVAL OF WING. (Refer to Figure 4-2.)

a. Remove wing rootfairings, all wing inspection plates and panels, front fuse-
lage side access panels and the bottom fuselage access panel. (Refer to Access
and Inspection Provisions, Section II.)
b. Close the fuelvalve and drain the fuel from the wing to be removed. (Refer
to Draining Fuel System, Section II.)
c. Remove theenginefrom the wingto beremoved. (Refer to EngineRemoval,
Section VIII.)
STRUCTURES
1F24
CAUTION
To prevent damage or contamination of fuel, hydrau-

lic and miscellaneous lines, place a protective cover
over the line fittings and ends.
NOTE
To help facilitate reinstallation of control cables and

fuel or hydraulic lines, before removing mark cable
and line ends in some identifying manner and attach a
line where applicable to cables before drawing them
through the fuselage or wing.
d. Drain the brake lines and reservoir. (Refer to Draining Brake System,
Section II.)
e. Remove the front and center seats.
f. Place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to Jacking, Section II.)
g. Place a cradle under the airplane, lower and remove jacks. If necessary,
retract gears slightly.
h. Drain the hydraulic system. (Refer to Draining Hydraulic System, Section
II.)
i. Disconnect the fuel shut-off control cable at the fuel shut-off valve. Re-
move the cable clamp at the rib beside the valve and at the wing butt rib.
j. Disconnect the primer, if installed, and fuel crossfeed lines under the fuel
control panel.
k. Remove the interior trim panel just below the door sill on the right side
and remove the lower middle section of the panel on the left side.
I. Remove the attaching screws at the floor, at the front and rear of the spar
cover. Remove seat brackets from spar and remove cover.
m. Disconnect the aileron control cables at the bellcrank, which are access-
ible through the inspection opening on the bottom of the wing, about half way out
between the engine and the end of the wing. Remove the pulley at the next inboard
inspection opening and at the wing butt. Remove the cap on the rub block in the
nacelle space and remove the cables from the wing.
n. Disconnect the vacuum and fuel pressure lines.
o. Disconnect the fuel lines at the wing butt, and disconnect the manifold pres-
sure lines.
p. Disconnect the airspeed lines.
q. Disconnectthe hydrauliclines and remove the CO2 bottle. (Refer to Emer-
gency Gear Extension System, Section VI.)
r. On PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 airplanes, remove the insulating cap from the
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1G1
A714
Figure 4-2. Fuselage Cradle
electric wiring terminal block in the rear section of the fuselage access opening and
disconnect the wires. On PA-23-250 (Six place) airplanes, the above wires are connected by
a cannon plug located just forward of the main spar.
s. All engine controls (throttle, carburetor heat or alternate air door, pro-
peller governor and mixture) must be removed from the wing. The tachometer
shaft is removed last and must be inserted first through the control tube when
reassembling, due to the large nut on the shaft.
t. Remove the outside wing bolts and arrange a fuselage support cradle.
u. Place a table or some kind of support under the wing to be removed. Sup-
port other wing as necessary.
NOTE
The support for the wing should be covered with felt

or similar material to prevent damage to the wing sur-
face.
v. Remove the center bolts and the rear spar bolts. To facilitate reinstalla-
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1G2
tion, note the location and amount of shim or spacer plates and washers.
w. Remove the front spar bolt.
x. Remove the wing.
4-15. INSTALLATION OF WING. (Refer to Figures 4-1 and 4-3.)

a. Ascertain that fuselage is positioned solidly on a support cradle.
b. Place the wing in position for installation, with the spar end a few inches from the side
of the fuselage and set on trestles.
c. Prepare the various lines, control cables and wires for inserting into the wing or fuse-
lage when the wing is slid into place.
d. Slide the wing into the fuselage and butt the spar ends. (Maximum distance of .031
of an inch is permissible between spar caps.)
e. Insert the tachometer shaft through the control cable guide tube, followed with the
throttle, carburetor heat or alternate air, propeller governor and mixture controls.
f. Attach the main spar to the fuselage frame on the side of the fuselage. Install a bolt
down through the spar and fuselage frame on the forward side and secure with washer and
self-locking nut. Install a bolt and shim (P/N 17480-00) down through the spar and fuselage
frame, and secure with a washer and self-locking nut.
g. Attach the rear spar to the fuselage frame fitting by inserting the bolt from the aft side.
The maximum permissible gap between the rear spar and the frame fitting is .125 of an inch,
before the attaching bolt is tightened. If the gap is .062 of an inch or under, draw up with bolt,
washer and self-locking nut. If the gap is .062 to. 125 of an inch. use a shim (P/ N 80122-87) and
draw up remaining gap with bolt, washer and self-locking nut.
h. Install the spar straps. Position the straps, one to the top front (a shim P'/N 18283-00
may be used if needed), one to the bottom front, and one to the bottom aft. Keeping in mind the
.032 of an inch maximum allowed gap between the spar caps, secure the straps with bolts, in-
stalled through the forward side, and self-locking nuts. Torque bolts from 100 to 140 inch-
pounds.
i. Connect the top of the main spar at the side of the fuselage. Install the bolt from the
front, a spacer block on the front, and a bushing and spacer block on the aft side. Secure with
a washer and self-locking nut. Shims (.020, P/N 18380-02: .032, P/N 18380-03: or .064, P/N
18380-04) may be installed between the fuselage frame brackets and the spacer blocks, as re-
quired, to obtain a proper fit.
j. Install the plates to the top and bottom of the spar with bolts, washers and self-locking
nuts. Washers are required under the heads of the two front center bolts of the upper and lower
plates. Torque bolts to 160-190 inch-pounds.
k. Attach the front spar to the fuselage frame bracket with a bolt installed from the front
and secured with a self-locking nut. A maximum of two washers (AN960-616) may be in-
stalled between spar fitting and frame bracket to provide a proper fit. When installing a new
wing, first drill a pilot hole through the forward side of the spar using a fabricated tool, as
shown in Figure 4-5, for hole alignment, and a .125 inch drill. (The tool may be fabricated
from dimensions given in Figure 4-22.) Then, drill out the spar attachment hole from the aft
side using a .375 inch drill.
STRUCTURES
1G3 Revised: 4/26/83
1G4
A731
NOTE
WHEN TORQUING STRUCTURAL

ASSEMBLIES, STANDARD TORQUE
VALUES ARE TO BE USED AS
FOUND IN FAA ADVISORY
CIRCULAR 43.13-1, OR TORQUE
TABLES IN SECTION II OF THIS
MANUAL, UNLESS OTHERWISE
STATED IN THIS SECTION.
A732
AN6-14A AN6-13A
AN960-616 (2 REQ) (UNDERNUT)
MS20365-624C
8 REQ
TORQUE 160-190 ,AN6-13A
IN -LBS AN960-616 (2 REQI (UNDER
MS20365-624C
6 REQ
TORQUE 160-190
IN -LBS
STRAP 17476-02
SHIM 18283 (2)
SHIM 19459-03 (1)
*
SHIM 19459-02 (1)
STRAP 17477-03
SHIM 18283
189/.191 HOLE
AN3-10A
AN960-10
MS20365-1032C
6 REQ
TORQUE 35-40
IN -LBS
STRAP 17477-02
(1) PA-23-250 AND PA-23-235 AIRPLANES ONLY

(2) PA-23-250 (SIX PLACE) AIRPLANES ONLY MS20365-624C
8 REQ
Figure 4-3. Wing Installation
STRUCTU RES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1G5
A729
A728
REAR SPAR
AN 176-1 OA
AN 96 0-6 16
MS20365-624C
FUSELAGE FRAME
SKETCH B SKETCH C
A730 SHIM AS NECESSARY

WITH 18380-02 OR
18380-03 OR 18380-041
AN4-34A
AN960-416 (2 REQ)
MS20365-428C
BLOCK
30697
BLOCK
30696 L
30696-01 R
BUSHING
61402-09
I BLOCK
17480
AN5-24A
AN960-516 AN5-25A
MS20365-524C I AN96 0-516
M520365-524C
SKETCH D
Figure 4-3. Wing Installation (cont.)
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1G6
A733 A734
Figure 4-4. Positioning of Front Figure 4-5. Positioning of Main

Spar Aligning Tool Spar Aligning Tool
1. Bolt the center of butt end of the main spar. If a new wing is being installed, it will be
necessary to drill holes in the spar to .189/. 191 of an inch to match the fuselage frame fitting.
Drill the holes in the spar with the use of a hole jig as shown in Figure 4-5. and a .189 (No. 12)
I inch drill. (The tool may be fabricated from dimensions given in Figure 4-21.)
NOTE
The holes must be drilled straight for proper alignment and

to prevent damaging the aft fuselage frame fitting.
On PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 airplanes, insert a .187 shim plate(P/N 19459-00)against

the back of the main spar and a .125 shim plate (P/N 19459-03) between the previous
mentioned shim and the aft fuselage frame fitting. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes, insert
a .313 shim plate (P/N 19303-00) between the main spar and the aft fuselage frame fitting.
Install bolts from the front and secure with self-locking nuts. Torque bolts from 35 to 40 inch-
pounds. Washers must be used under the nuts of the six center bolt and nut assemblies.
STRUCTURES
1G7
1G7 Revised: 4/26/83
m. Place the wing jacks under the wings and remove the supports.
n. Connect the wires at the electrical wiring terminal block in the rear section
of the fuselage access opening.
o. Connect the oil pressure lines.
p. Connect the hydraulic lines.
q. Connect the airspeed lines.
r. Connect the fuel lines at the wing butt and connect the manifold pressure
lines.
s. Connect the vacuum and fuel pressure lines.
t. Replace the aileron control cables in the rub block on the wheel well. Re-
place the pulley at the wing butt and inspection hole, and connect the cables at the
bellcrank, which is accessible through the plate on the bottom of the wing midway
between the engine and the end of the wing. (Check aileron rigging and adjust-
ment per Section V.)
u. Connect the flap control rod to the inboard end of the flap. (Check flap rig-
ging and adjustment per Section V.)
v. Replace the spar cover.
w. Replace the interior trim panel just below the door sill on the right side
and replace the lower middle section of the panel on the left side.
x. Connect the primer and fuel crossfeed lines under the fuel control box.
y. Connect the fuel shut-off control cable at the fuel shut-off valve and re-
clamp the cable at the rib beside the valve and at the wing butt rib.
z. Fill the hydraulic system. (Refer to Filling Hydraulic System, Section II.)
aa. Replace the front and rear seats.
ab. Fill the brake reservoir and brake system. (Refer to Servicing Brake Sys-
tem, Section II.)
ac. Remove the jacks and fuselage support.
ad. Fill the fuel tank. (Refer to Filling Fuel Cells, Section II.)
ae. Replace engine, engine cowling and top nacelle. (Refer to Installation of
Engine, Section VIII or VIIIA.)
af. Replace the bottom fuselage access panel, the front fuselage side access
panels, the wing inspection plates and panels, and the wing root fairings.
4-16. EMPENNAGEGROUP.
4-17. STABILATOR.
4-18. REMOVALOF STABILATOR. (Refer to Figure 4-6.)

a. Disconnect the stabilator trim control rod at the horn on the center of the tab
assemblyby removingcotter pin, nut, washer, bushing and bolt.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1G8
b. Disconnect the stabilator halves at the attachment fittings on the inboard end of
each rear spar by removingnut, washerand bolt.
c. Remove two bolts (close tolerance) with nuts and washers attaching the stabilator
half to the torque tube.
d. Slide stabilator from torque tube.
NOTE
Should torque tube bearing block removal become necessary,
items secured with Bearing Mount No. 72 may be separated
with adequate pressing tools. Installation is accomplishedby
cleaning parts with Loctite Locquic Primer T and allowing 5
minutes to dry. Apply Loctite BearingMount No. 72 to both
the inner and outer surfaces of bearing and to the torque
tube. Assemble parts and wipe off excess bearing mount
sealant. Allow parts to cure 60 minutes at room temperature.
4-19. INSTALLATIONOF STABILATOR.(Refer to Figure 4-6.)

a. Slide the stabilator torque tube and align the two holes in the stabilator with the
holes in the torque tube.
b. Secure the stabilator to the torque tube with two close tolerance bolts which have
been sprayed with zinc chromite (install when still wet), washers and self-lockingnuts.
Torque the two bolts between 60-85 inch-pounds.
c. Connect halves of the stabilator assembly at the attachment fittings on the inboard
end of each rear spar by installingthe bolt, washer and self-lockingnut.
d. Temporarily attach the stabilator trim control rod to the stabilator trim tab horn
using bushing, washer and bolt. Add washer(s) between each horn to maintain parallel
position of horns.
e. Checkriggingand adjustment of the trim tab as described in Section V.
f. Secure trim control rod to horn and secure with cotter pin. Torque nut between
three (3) to 35 inch-pounds on serial numbers 27-1 to 27-7554168 inclusive. Serialnumbers
27-7654001 and up require a torque of 50 to 70 inch-pounds.
4-20. INSTALLATION OF NEW STABILATOR.The two mounting holes in a new
stabilator are not drilled to full .312 inch diameter. The reason for this is to assure proper
alignment upon installation. To fit a new stabilator to the torque tube, proceed as follows:
a. Slide the stabilator onto the stabilator torque tube.
b. Align the stabilator halves and bolt rear spar attachment fitting together with bolt,
washerand nut.
c. Insert a drift pin in one of the stabilator mounting holes to assistin alignmentof the
stabilator during the reamingoperation.
d. Using a .312 reamer, enlarge the mounting holes and install the bolt (close
tolerance).
e. Remove the drift pin and repeat the reaming operation on the remainingmounting
hole.
f. Install washer and nut with each attaching bolt and torque 60-85 inch-pounds.
g. Refer to paragraph 4-65for balancingof the stabilator.
STRUCTURES
1G9
1G9 Reissued:2/18/81
4-21. STABILATOR TRIM TAB. (Refer to Figure 4-6.)
4-22. REMOVAL OF STABILATOR TRIM TAB.

a. Disconnect the stabilator trim control rod at the horn on the center of the tab
assembly by removing cotter pin, nut, washer, bushing, and bolt.
b. Remove the stabilator trim hinge pins. Straightening the hinge pin to remove it may
enlarge the hinge pin holes. It is recommended that the pins be cut at their bend angle
before removal and replaced with new pins upon installation.
4-23. INSTALLATION OF STABILATOR TRIM TAB.

a. Align the hinge pin holes of the trim tab with the stabilator and insert new pins.
Refer to Parts Catalog for proper pin size.
b. Secure the pin by bending the end down to 90 degrees.
c. Connect the stabilator trim control rod to the tab horn with attachment hardware.
On serial numbers 27-1 to 27-7554168 inclusive, torque the nut finger tight (3 to 35 in. lbs.)
then install cotter pin. On serial numbers 27-7654001 and up, the bolt torque is (50 to 70
in. lbs.).
d. Check rigging of stabilator trim as described in Section V.
4-24. STABILATOR TRIM TAB FREE PLAY.

a. Place tab in neutral position (refer to Section V, Table V-I).
b. The total tab free play may not exceed 1/10 inch, measured between the outboard
trailing edge of the tab and the trailing edge of the stabilator.
c. Free play in excess of 1/10 inch will require a close inspection of hinge assemblies
for source of looseness.
d. Replace hinge pins if evidence of wear is present. Hinge pin diameter should be .093
to .095 of an inch.
NOTE
To withdraw hinge pins, cut pin at bend angle. Do not

attempt to straighten.
e. If new hinge pins do not eliminate looseness, replace appropriate stabilator and
stabilator tab hinges.
4-25. RUDDER.
4-26. REMOVAL OF RUDDER.

a. Remove the upper section of the tail cone fairing and the rudder horn access panel
by removing attaching screws.
b. Remove the left or right access panel, as desired, to the cockpit area below the
windshield area.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1G10
c. Relieve tension from the rudder cables by loosening one turnbuckle at the rudder
pedal torque tube.
d. Disconnect the two control cables from the rudder horn by removing cotter pin,
nut, washer and clevis bolt.
e. Disconnect the rudder horn from the lower rudder hinge bracket by removing cotter
pin, nut, washer and clevis bolt.
f. Disconnect the rudder trim tab control rod at the tab horn by removing cotter pin,
nut, washer and clevis bolt.
g. Disconnect the navigation light and rotating beacon wires at their quick disconnects
located between the rudder and fin.
h. Remove the two hinge bolts with cotter pin, washer and nut and remove the rudder.
4-27. INSTALLATION OF RUDDER.

a. Align the two hinge brackets of the rudder with the hinges on the fin and install the
two hinge bolts. Install washer and nut on each bolt. Tighten to allow freedom of rotation
but with no end float, and safety nut with cotter pin.
b. Connect the rudder horn to the lower hinge bracket of the rudder and install clevis
bolt, washer, and nut. Ascertain that the bolt slips freely through each fitting. Should it not,
shims (P/N 81262-94) may be used to obtain correct alignment. Tighten nut to allow
freedom of rotation and safety nut with cotter pin.
c. Connect the rudder trim tab control rod to the tab horn and secure with clevis bolt,
washer, nut and cotter pin.
d. Connect the two control cables to the rudder horn with clevis bolt, washer, nut and
cotter pin.
e. Connect the navigation light and rotating beacon wires at their attaching point
between the rudder and fin.
f. Set rudder cable tension and alignment as given in Rigging and Adjustment of
Rudder, Section VI.
NOTE
The rotating beacon is required for proper rudder mass

balance. IT MUST BE INSTALLED.
g. Replace the access fairings and panels and secure.
4-28. RUDDER TRIM TAB.
4-29. REMOVAL OF RUDDER TRIM TAB.

a. Disconnect the trim tab control rod at the tab horn by removing cotter pin, nut,
washer and clevis bolt.
b. Remove the rudder trim hinge pins. Straightening the hinge pin to remove it may
enlarge the hinge pin holes. It is recommended that the pin be cut at its bend angle before
removal and replaced with new pin upon installation.
STRUCTURES
Reissued:2/18/81
1G11
4-30. INSTALLATIONOF RUDDERTRIMTAB.

a. Align the hinge pin holes of the trim tab with the rudder and insert new pins.
b. Bend the hinge pin ends over to 90 degreesprovidinga safety for the pin.
c. Connect the rudder trim control rod to the tab horn with clevis bolt, washer, nut
and cotter pin. The bolt should be free to rotate by hand when lubricated with general
purpose oil.
4-31. VERTICALSTABILIZER(FIN).
4-32. REMOVALOF VERTICALSTABILIZER(FIN). (Refer to Figure 4-6.)

a. Remove the tail cone fairings and access panel located on the left side of the
fuselagebelow the leading edgeof the fin by removingattaching screws.
b. Remove the fin fairing located between the fuselage and leading edge of the fin,
and accessplates on the right side of the fin by removingattaching screws.
c. Remove the access panel to the aft section of the fuselagelocated at the aft wall
of the baggagecompartment.
d. Remove the rudder in accordance with paragraph 4-26.
e. Block the trim cable at the trim drum with wooden blocks, or by tape, to prevent
the cable from unwrapping from the drum.
f. Disconnect the trim cable at the turnbuckles within the aft section of the
fuselage.
g. Remove the cotter pin cable guards from the cable pulleys within the aft section
of the fuselage at station 261.0. Enter through the access opening in the left side of the
fuselage.
h. Remove the rudder horn hinge fitting from the fin attachment plate by removing
cap bolts; then remove trim pulleys from the fitting by removingattaching bolt, washer and
nut. The trim cable is free for removal. Note, if any, the number of shimsbetween the hinge
fitting and attachment.
i. Disconnect the trim indicator wire from the forward end of the rudder trim
screw.
j. Disconnect electrical wires, antenna wires and cables, and deicer line, as installed.
k. Remove the attaching bolts and screwswith nuts and washersat the top of the fin
spar rear attachment plate.
1. Remove the attaching bolts and screwswith nuts and washersat the top of the fin
spar front attachment plate.
m. Pull the fin directly up from the fuselage.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1G12
A742
A740 A736
NAS222-11
AN365-428
NAS222-12
AN960-416 (Z REO
AN365-428
UNDER SCREW HEAD
AN960-416 (2 REO
4 REQ
UNDER SCREW HEAC
4 REO
r
N
SKETCHA SKETCHB
e
Figure 4-6. Empennage Installation
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/ 18/81
1G13
A737 A738
AN 174-23A
AN960-416L
AN960-416
AN365-428
2 REQ
AN364-1032
2 REQ
UPPER AND LOWER ARE THE SAME EXCEPT AS NOTED
SKETCH C
A739
AN 173-7
AN960- 0
AN32 0-3
AN380-2-2
SKETCH F
A735
TOP SKIN AN 175-C32A
AN 960-5 16
MS20365-524C
SKETCH D
A741
AN4-5A
AN960-416L
MS20365-428C
BOTTOM SKIN
SKETCH E SKETCH G
Figure 4-6. Empennage Installation (cont.)

STRUCTURE
Reissued: 2/18/81
1G14
4-33. INSTALLATION OF VERTICAL STABILIZER (FIN). (Refer to Figure4-4.)

a. Position and align the mounting holes of the front and rear spar of the fin
with the matching holes of the attachment plates on the fuselage. Ascertain that
the rubber extrusion is attached to the lower skin of the fin.
b. Install and torque attaching bolts and screws with washers and nuts at the
front and rear fin attachment locations. A washer is also required under the
heads of each attaching screw.
c. Install the rudder trim cable pulleys, with trim cable, on the rudder horn
hinge fitting and secure with bolt, washer and nut.
d. Attach the hinge fitting to the attachment plate and secure with washers and
cap bolts. If previously installed, install spacer shims between the fitting and
plate.
e. Route the trim cable ends forward and connect to the forward control cable.
f. Ascertain that the cable is positioned in the slot of each pulley at fuselage
station 261.0, and install cotter pin cable guards.
g. Remove the blocks or tape that secure the cable at the trim mechanism.
h. Draw the trim indicator wire to the trim mechanism in the fin and connect
it to the trim screw.
i. Install the rudder in accordance with paragraph 4-30.
j . Connect electrical wires, antenna wires and cables, and de-icer lines, as
appropriate.
k. Set cable tensions, and rigging and adjustment of the rudder and rudder
trim in accordance with instructions given in Section V. Check rudder and rud-
der trim operation.
1 . Install access panels, plates and fairings and secure with attaching screws
or fasteners.
4-34. FUSELAGE ASSEMBLY.
4-35. WINDSHIELD.
4-36. REMOVAL OF WINDSHIELD. (Refer to Figure 4-7 or 4-8.)

a. Remove the trim molding from around the inside of the windshield by re-
moving attaching screws.
b. Remove the machine screws that secure the collar molding around the bot-
tom of the windshield.
c. Remove the outside trim strip from between the windshield halves by hold-
ing the round nuts in the inside channel and turning out the machine screws.
STRUCTURES
1G15 Reissued: 2/18/81
2128
PRESSTITE TAPE
PRESSTITE TAPE
SECTIONA-A SECTIONB-B SECTIONC-C
BLACK VINYL TAPE

1/8 PERMAGUM
BEAD
PRESSTITE TAPE
SECTIOND-D SECTIONE-E SECTIONF-F
Figure 4-7. Windshield Installation. (PA-23-250 and PA-23-235.)
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1G16
2127
2127
2 THICKNESSES
OF PRESSTITE TAPE
PRESSTITE TAPE
BLACK VINYL TAPE ON WINDSHIELD

UNDER PRESSTITE TAPE
SECTIONA.A SECTIONB.B
Figure 4-8. Windshield Installation (PA-23-250 - six place)
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/ 18/81
1G17
3M 1/8" BEAD EC1055
PRESSTITE TAPE
TAPE
3M 1/4" BEAD EC0055
3M 1/8" BEAD EC105
SECTIONC.C SECTIONF.F
3M 1/8" BEAD EC1055

PRESSTITE TAPE
3M 1/8" BEAD EC1055
3M 1/4" BEAD EC1055

PRESSTITE TAPE
SECTIOND-D SECTIONG-G
2440
3M 1/8" BEAD EC1055

3M 1/8" BEAD EC1055
PRESSTITE TAPE,
3M 1/4" BEAD EC
PRESSTITE TAPE
3M 1/4" BEAD EC1055
SECTIONE-E SECTIONH.H
Figure 4-8. Windshield Installation (PA-23-250 - six place) (cont.)
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2 18/81
1G18
d. Remove the retainer screws from around the top and outboard side of the
windshield.
e. Push the windshield out at the bottom and work out of upper and side chan-
nels.
f. Clean old window tape from around inside of channel.
4-37. INSTALLATION OF WINDSHIELD. (Refer to Figure 4-7 or 4-8.)

a. Ascertain that new windshield is cut to match windshield removed.
b. Apply one piece of Prestite Tape Number 163 or equivalent over the edge
of, and completely around, the windshield; and 3M EC1055 Bead or equivalent
under the edge of the fuselage skin at the top and in the recess at the bottom of
the windshield opening.
c. Slide the windshield into place being careful not to disturb the placed tape
and bead material.
d. Cover the center section of the windshield with a strip of black vinyl tape
and two thicknesses of Prestite tape.
e. Install center strip and secure with round nuts and screws.
f. Install inside channel and secure windshield with retainer screws and nuts
around the outside of the windshield.
g. Install the collar molding around the bottom of the windshield with screws.
h. Install the trim molding around the inside of the windshield with screws.
i. Seal with sealer any areas around the windshield that may allow water to
penetrate past the windshield.
j . Remove excess exposed sealer and tape.
4-38. SIDE WINDOWS.
4-39. REMOVAL OF SIDE WINDOWS. (PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and PA-23-250

(six place) Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.)
a. Remove the trim molding from around the window by removing attaching
screws.
b. Remove the window retaining strips by removing attaching screws.
c. Remove the window.
d. Clean the old window sealer from the retaining strips and the fuselage skin.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1G19
A472 A473
WINDOW
PRESTITE TAPE OR WINDOW

PERMACEL SEALANT EXTRUSION RUBBER
INNER WINDOW
TRIM STRIP
RUBATEX
CHANNEL
Figure 4-9. Side Window Installation Figure 4-10. Side Window Installation
(Typical) (Typical)
PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and PA-23-250 PA-23-250(six place)
(six place) Serial Nos. 27-2000 to Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up
27-2504 incl.
4-40. INSTALLATION OF SIDE WINDOWS. (PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and

PA-23-250 (six place) Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.)
a. Ascertain that the new window is cut to the same dimensions as the old
window.
b. Apply sealer and tape to the window as follows:
1. On windows with curved edges, apply Prestite Tape No. 163 or equiva-
lent around the window where it contacts the fuselage skin.
2. On windows with straight edges, apply Prestite Tape No. 163 or equiv-
alent around the edge of the window and 3M Sealer No. 1126 or equivalent along
the fuselage skin where it contacts the window.
c. Install the window and secure the retaining strips with screws.
d. Install the trim molding around the windows and secure with screws.
4-41. REMOVAL OF SIDE WINDOWS.PA-23-250 (six place) Serial Nos. 27-2505 and
up.)
a. Remove the trim molding from around the window by removing attaching
screws.
b. Remove the window retaining strips by removing attaching screws.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1G20
c. Remove the inner and outer window.

d. Remove the old window sealer from the retaining strips and the fuselage
skin.
4-42. INSTALLATIONOF SIDE WINDOWS.PA-23-250 (six place) Serial Nos. 27-2505

and up.)
a. Ascertain that the new windows are cut to the same dimension as the old
windows.
b. Apply Prestite Tape No. 163 or equivalent over the edge of the outer win-
dow.
c. Apply 3M 1126 Sealer or equivalent along the fuselage skin where it con-
tacts the window.
d. Install the outer window.
e. Cement the rub-tex strip around the edge of the outer window using Carbo-
lene Neoprene Cement F-I. Air dry five minutes.
f. Install the inner window against the rub-tex strip and secure the retaining
strips.
g. Position and secure retaining strips with screws.
h. Install the trim molding around the window with screws.
4-43. EMERGENCY EXIT. (PA-23-250 (six place) Serial Nos. 27-2000 and up.)
4-44. REMOVAL OF EMERGENCY EXIT ASSEMBLY. The emergency exit,

located on the left side of the fuselage is sealed when installed and should only
be removed in case of an emergency or for maintenance.
a. Remove the plastic placard.
b. Turn the handle and push out on the bottom of the assembly using a steady
pressure. Use caution so as not to drop the assembly.
c. Clean the sealer from around the side of the window and the emergency exit
opening in the side of the fuselage.
STRUCTURES
1G21
4-45. INSTALLATION OF EMERGENCY EXIT ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 4-11.)

a. Place sealer, EC1055 bead .250 in. thick, or equivalent, around window assembly.
b. Cover the contacting surfaces of the window assembly with vinyl chloride
copolymer film (Saran, 48 gauge, type B MIL-P-6264B.) SEE CONSUMABLE MATERIALS
TABLE II-II,
c. Install the exit window by the following procedure:
1. Remove the two access plugs on bottom window panel by prying under plug
with a screwdriver blade.
2. Loosen but do not remove screw in access hole.
3. Insert the top of the window assembly under the fuselage skin at the top of the
exit opening. Push in on the bottom and sides of the window assembly until it is properly
seated.
4. Lock window by turning release handle.
d. Check that the window assembly is flush with the surrounding fuselage skin and
install the plastic placard over the release handle.
e. Trim excess polymer film from the inside and outside of the window installation.
f. Fill exterior gap between window assembly and fuselage with Permagum Sealer No.
576.1. (Presstite - Keystone Engineering Co. 3900 Chateau Ave., St. Louis, Missouri.)
4-46. REMOVAL OF EMERGENCY EXIT WINDOW.

a. Remove the trim molding around the inside of the window.
b. Remove the rivets that secure the window retainer molding and remove window.
c. Remove the old window sealer from window retainer molding and fuselage skin.
4-47. INSTALLATION OF EMERGENCY EXIT WINDOW. (Refer to Figure 4-11.)

a. Ascertain that the new window is cut to the same dimensions as the old window.
b. Apply P.R.C. Sealer 1221-B-2 (Product Research Co., Empire Ave., Burbank, Calif.
91504) over the edge of the window.
c. Place the window and retainer molding in position and secure with rivets
AN426AD34.
d. Install trim molding around inside of window.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1G22
2132
NO PERMAGUM SEALER
BETWEEN ARROWS. 2
A412
A418
SECTION B-B
1. BEAD SEALER EC1055, .250 INCH THICK (3M COMPANY) 8

2. PERMAGUM SEALERS576.1 (PRESTITE ENG. COMPANY)
3. SPONGE RUBBER STRIP 2
4. ACCESS PLUG
5. OUTSIDE SKIN
6. POLYMER FILM
7. WINDOW
8. P.R.C.SEALER 1221-B-2 SECTION A-A
Figure 4-1 1. Emergency Exit Window Installation

STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1G23
4-48. BAGGAGEDOORS.
4-49. REMOVAL OF AFT BAGGAGEDOOR.

a. On airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-2000 and up, disconnect the baggage
door holding rod from the door by removing the cotter pin and washer.
b. Remove the hinge pin that holds the door to the fuselage.
c. Remove the door.
4-50. INSTALLATION OF AFT BAGGAGEDOOR.

a. The installation of an old baggage door may be as follows:
1. Place the door in position and align the hinge halves.
2. Install the hinge pin. It is recommended that a new hinge pin be in-
stalled.
3. On airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-2000 and up, connect the baggage
door holding rod with a washer and cotter pin.
b. The installation of a new baggage door may be as follows:
1. Remove the hinge half attached to the fuselage by removing the rivets
securing it between the outside skin and the door frame.
2. Install a new fuselage hinge half to the baggage door hinge half using a
new pin.
3. Place the door in position, inserting the fuselage hinge half between the
outside skin and the door frame.
NOTE
The edges of the door may have to be trimmed to allow

the door skin to fit flush with the fuselage skin.
4. Using the old rivet holes in the fuselage for a pattern, drill new holes
through the top and bottom of the hinge.
5. Temporarily secure the fuselage hinge half in place and check the door
for proper fit and operation.
6. Drill the remaining holes in the hinge and secure with rivets.
7. Install the trim panels to the inside of the door and weather molding.
8. Install the latch assembly and cover. (Refer to Paragraph 4-52.)
9. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes, install the holding arm and bracket.
STRUCTURES
1G24
4-51. REMOVAL OF AFT BAGGAGE DOOR LATCH ASSEMBLY.

a. On PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 airplanes, the door latch may be removed as
follows:
1. Remove the trim panel onthe inside of the door by either removing the
trim screws or unsnapping it.
2. Remove the two roll pins in the center of the tube assembly.
3. Remove one of the two locking pins located in the end of the tube assem-
bly.
4. Remove the tube assembly by pulling it from the opposite end where the
locking pin was removed.
5. Remove the spring and spring retaining pin from the handle assembly.
6. Remove the lock and handle assembly.
b. On PA-23-250(six place) airplanes, the door latch may be removed as follows:
1. Removethe plastic accesscover around the latch assembly.
2. Remove the lock assembly by removing the large nut inside the latch.
3. Remove the latch mechanism by removing the attaching nuts and bolts.
4-52. INSTALLATION OF AFT BAGGAGE DOOR LATCH.

a. On PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 airplanes, the door latch may be installed as
follows:
1. Insert the lock and handle assembly into the baggage door.
2. Holding the lock and handle assembly in place, install the spring and
spring retaining pin to the door and the lock handle.
3. Install the tube assembly to the handle by sliding it through the bushings
on either side of the door.
4. Install the locking pins on either end of the tube assembly.
5. Secure the tube assembly to the handle by means of two roll pins.
6. Install the trim panel to the inside of the baggage door by snapping it in
place or using trim screws.
b. PA-23-250(six place) airplanes, the door latch may be installed as follows:
1. Install the latch mechanism to the door and secure with attaching nuts
and bolts.
2. Install the lock assembly and secure with large nut inside the latch.
3. Install the plastic trim cover with attaching screws.
STRUCTURES
1H1 1H1 Reissued:2/18/81
4-53. REMOVAL OF FORWARD BAGGAGE DOOR. PA-23-250 (six place).

a. Remove the attaching bolts and nuts from the two hinge brackets.
b. Remove the door from the airplane.
4-54. INSTALLATION OF FORWARD BAGGAGE DOOR. PA-23-250 (six place).

a. Align the door to the hinges and install the attaching bolts and nuts through the hinges
and hinge brackets.
b. Check operation of door and catch mechanism.
4-55. REMOVAL OF FORWARD BAGGAGE DOOR LATCH. PA-23-250 (six place).

a. Remove the plastic cover on the inside of the door by removing attaching screws.
b. Remove the roll pin and spring that attaches the door handle to the tube assembly.
c. Remove the door handle by removing attaching nuts and bolts.
d. Remove the lock assembly by removing the large nut on the inside of the door that
holds it in place.
e. Remove the tube assembly by removing the springs and attaching pins on both ends.
f. Remove the arm assemblies from the door by removing attaching screws.
4-56. INSTALLATION OF BAGGAGE DOOR LATCH. PA-23-250 (six place).

a. Install the arm assemblies to the door with attaching screws.
b. Install the door handle with attaching bolts and nuts.
c. Holding the tube assembly in place, adjust both ends to obtain a 90 degree angle
between the locking arms and the edge of the door.
d. Install the tube assembly to the locking arms with attaching pins.
e. Install the springs between the locking arm and the tube assembly.
STRUCTURES
Reissued:2/18/81
1H2
4-57. CABIN ENTRANCE DOOR.
4-58. REMOVAL OF CABIN ENTRANCE DOOR.

a. Remove right inside windshield molding by removing attaching screws.
b. Loosen right front interior side panel to gain access to hinge pins.
c. Remove cotter pin from two hinge pins and remove hinge pins.
d. Remove door from fuselage.
4-59. INSTALLATION OF CABIN ENTRANCE.

a. Install the old door as follows:
1. Position the door to the airplane hinge brackets.
2. Insert the hinge pins and safety with cotter pins.
b. Install a new door as follows:
I. Position the door to the airplane aligning the latch, locking pins, and hinges. Shims
(.032, P/ N 19642-02 and .064, P/ N 19642-03)may be added between the door frame and hinge
to provide proper alignment of the door to the airplane.
2. Trim the edges of the door to provide a proper fit to the fuselage.
3. If the new door being installed is not complete, install the old latch assembly to
the new door frame per instructions in paragraph 4-63.
4. Secure the door skin to the door hinges using four MS20470AD3 rivets.
5. Position the door to the airplane and install the hinge pins. Recheck the door for
proper fit and operation.
c. Install the right front interior side panel with attaching screws.
d. Install the right windshield molding with attaching screws.
4-60. ADJUSTMENT OF CABIN ENTRANCE DOOR. The only adjustment provided for
the cabin entrance door is an adjustable latch plate located on the aft side of the door frame.
The screws may be loosened and the latch plate moved to provide the desired fit of the door
when closed.
NOTE
Improper installation of the cabin door, or use of a damaged

door which does not fit properly may cause minor airflow dis-
turbances in the stabilator control system.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1H3
2126
1. CONTROL WIRE 16. JAM NUT

2. SWIVEL FITTING 17. LOCKING PIN
3. LOCKING PIN 18. BELLCRANK
4. JAM NUT 19. LATCH AND TUBE ASSY.
5. UPPER DOOR LOCK ASSY. 20. BOLT AND BUSHING
6. OUTSIDE DOOR HANDLE 21. RELEASE ROD
7. RETAINING PIN 22. CLAMP
8. RETAINING SCREW 23. INSIDE DOOR HANDLE
9. STOP PIN 24. CLIP
10. LATCH STOP BLOCK 25. LOCKING MECHANISM
II. SPRING 26. LOCKING TRIM KNOB
12. CLAMP 27. CONTROL WIRE
t 13. CLEVIS 28. SWIVEL FITTING
N 29. MAIN BELLCRANK
14. JAM NUT
15. ADJUSTING ROD 30. SPRING
Figure 4-12. Cabin Entrance Door Latch Assembly
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1H4
4-61. CABINDOOR LATCH AND LOCK ASSEMBLY.
4-62. REMOVAL OF CABIN DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ASSEMBLY. (Refer to

Figure 4-11.)
a. Remove cabin door. (Refer to paragraph 4-58.)
NOTE
It is recommended that the door be placed on a work-

table covered with a clean soft material so as not to
damage the door or door window.
b. Remove the locking trim knob (26).

c. Remove the window trim molding by removing attaching screws.
d. On airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-2505 and up, remove the armrest by
removing attaching screws.
e. Remove the inside door handle (23) by pushing in on the trim panel around
the handle and removing the clip (24) that locks the handle to the spline.
f. Remove the trim panels by unsnapping them from the door frame.
g. Remove the upper door lock assembly by the following procedure:
1. Reach up under the door frame along the forward edge and disconnect
the control wire (I) from the main bellcrank by loosening the swivel fitting (2)
that holds it in place.
2. Remove the attaching bolts from the door frame that secure the flexible
control housing inside the door frame.
3. Remove the attaching screws or bolts that hold the upper door lock bell-
*crank bracket in place.
4. Remove the upper door lock assembly (5)by moving the entire unit for-
ward withdrawing it from the aft opening in the door frame.
h. Remove the lower door lock assembly by removing the bolt from the clevis
(13) end of the rod that attaches to the bellcrank (18).
i. Remove the locking mechanism (25) by removing the attaching bolts from
the locking mechanism assembly and remove the assembly.
j . Remove the latch assembly as follows:
1. Remove the spring (11) attached to the door lock release rod (21) and
the stop pin (9) inserted in the end of the latch.
2. Remove the stop pin (9).
3. Remove the attaching bolts from the clamps (12 and 22) that hold the
door lock release rod in place.
4. Remove the door lock release rod by pulling the aft endof the rod down,
removing it from the outside door handle, and withdrawing it from the door frame.
STRUCTURES
1H5 Reissued: 2/18/81
NOTE
The door lock release rod will have to be sprung slight-

ly to remove it from the door frame.
5. Remove the aft bottom retaining screw (8) from around the outside door
handle.
6. Remove the outside door handle by removing the pin (7) that holds it in
place.
7. Disconnect the tube assembly (19) from the main bellcrank (18) by re-
moving nut, washers and bolt.
8. Remove the bolt and bushing (20) from the tube assembly that actuates
the bellcrank (16) for the lower lock assembly.
9. Remove the door latch stop block (10) from the door assembly by re-
moving nuts, washers and bolts.
10. Remove the door latch and tube assembly (19).
4-63. INSTALLATION OF CABIN DOORLATCH AND LOCK ASSEMBLY. (Refer

to Figure 4-11.)
NOTE
Any new door to be installed should be compared with

the old door for similarity of hole location.
a. Install the latch assembly as follows:

1. Install the tube and latch assembly (19) through the opening in the edge
of the door.
2. Install the door latch stop block (10) to the door assembly with attaching
bolts, washers and nuts.
3. Install the stop pin (9) through the top of the latch.
4. Temporarily install the bolt that attaches the tube to the main bellcrank.
5. Temporarily install the inside door handle (23) to the spline.
6. If the tube and latch assembly is adjusted properly, a distinct snap
through action results when the main bellcrank passes center travel.
(a) If the snap through action is loose, remove the tube assembly from
the bellcrank and lengthen the tube and latch assembly by rotating
the tube counterclockwise.
(b) If the snap through action is tight, remove the tube assembly from
the bellcrank and shorten the tube and latch assembly by rotating
the tube clockwise.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1H6
NOTE
To check for proper snap through action, five to six

pounds tension should be required to unlock the door.
Measure the tension with a spring scale 0.5 inch from
the end of the inside door handle.
7. Install the bolt, bushing (20), and nut to the tube assembly that actuates
the lower lock assembly bellcrank (18).
8. Install the outside door handle (6) to the door and secure in place with
a pin (7) inserted up through the door handle bracket.
9. Install a long screw (8) along the bottom of the outside door handle.
10. Insert the door lock release rod (21) inside the door frame by inserting
the spring tab end first through the aft end of the door.
NOTE
The door lock release rod will have to be sprung slight-

ly to install it inside the door frame.
11. Insert the aft end of the rod up through the hole in the outside door handle.
12. Install the clamps (12 and 22) around the door lock release rod and se-
cure in place with attaching bolts, washers and nuts.
13. Install the spring (II) that attaches to the door lock release rod and the
stop pin in the end of the latch.
b. Install the locking mechanism (25) assembly in place inside the forward end
of the door frame and secure with attaching bolts, washers and nuts.
c. Install the lower lock assembly with bolt, washers and nut through the clevis
(13) end of the rod attaching it to the bellcrank (18).
d. Install the upper door lock assembly as follows:
1. Install the upper door lock assembly as a complete unit. Insert the
flexible control inside the door frame at the top aft opening sliding it around the
edge toward the main bellcrank. Insert the rest of the assembly through the
opening and move forward into place.
2. Secure the upper door lock assembly with attaching screws, bolts,
washers and nuts.
3. Attach the clamps to the flexible control and secure them around the
edge of the door frame with bolts, washers and nuts.
4. Connect the control wire (27) to the main bellcrank (29) using a swivel
fitting (28).
e. Install the door to the airplane. (Refer to paragraph 4-59.)
STRUCTURES
Reissued:2/18/81
1H7
f. Adjust the top and bottom locking pins (3 and 17) to allow adequate clearance between
the fuselage door frame and the pins using appropriate tools.
g. Operate the door several times to insure proper fit, positive locking and free movement
of all parts.
h. Remove the inside door handle and install the trim panels by snapping them in place.
i. Install the inside door handle. Secure the handle by pushing in on the trim panel
around it and installing the locking clip (24).
j. On airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-2505 and up, install the armrest with attaching
bolts.
k. Install the window trim molding with attaching screws.
1. Install the locking trim knob (26).
4-64. STRUCTURAL REPAIRS. Structural repair methods used may be made in accor-
dance with the regulations set forth in FAA Advisory Circular 43.13-1A. To assist in making
repairs, Figure 4-18 identifies the material and dimensions of the tubing used with the con-
struction of the fuselage frame. Figures 4-19 and 4-20 identifies the type and thickness of skin
structure used. Never make a skin replacement or patch from a material thinner than the
original skin. Original material and thickness is recommended and must result in a surface
which is as strong as, or stronger than, the original skin. However, flexibility must be retained
so that the surrounding areas will not receive extra stress.
When making major structural repairs, other than using factory manufactured parts, it is
recommended the manufacturer be contacted. No major alterations are recommended without
contacting the manufacturer. Stabilator skins and ribs aft of the main spar are manufactured
using a structural adhesive, which prevents skin and rib replacement in these areas. If struc-
tural adhesive has been applied between the ribs and skins, contact the manufacturer for
recommended alternatives to skin or rib replacement.
4-65. CHECKING CONTROL SURFACE BALANCE. The movable control surfaces of

the PA-23-250 have been balanced at time of installation at the factory and normally need not
be rebalanced unless the surfaces have been repainted or repaired. Should it become necessary
to check the balance of the control surfaces, the procedures given in paragraphs 4-66 and 4-67
may be used.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1H8
C169
!, Ir--------------- - --------------- ' - PLATE
!', o 1^ o '
Figure 4-13. Typical Access Plates and Panels
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1H9
4-66. BALANCING STABILATORS. (Refer to Figure 4-14.)

Balancing must be done whenever the balance characteristics of the stabilator have for
any reason been altered, such as, repairing, repainting or replacing stabilators, installing or
removing deicers, or modifying balance weight. The stabilator installation must be complete
before balancing, including trim tab and paint. The stabilator control cables and bungee cable
must be disconnected from the stabilator balance arm. Hold the tab in its neutral position with
a small piece of tape. Due to variations in stabilators used throughout the production life span
of this airplane the following instructions have been grouped into Serial Number effectivities.
Check the serial number of the airplane being serviced and use the balancing instructions for
that airplane.
a. Serial Numbers 27-1 to 27-7305134 inclusive:
1. Disconnect the tab actuator arm from the stabilator tab horn during balancing.
The stabilator must be free to rotate.
2. Hook the test weight P/N 16854 on the stabilator rear spar attachment fittings for
balancing. (Remove after balancing is completed.)
3. Add trim weight P /N 16780-3 one at a time on the trim weight attachment bolt un-
til the stabilator balances on the neutral position (level). Refer to Paragraph 5-18 for stabilator
leveling procedures.
4. If the last weight added for balancing causes overbalance, this complete weight
may be used. Secure these weights and recheck the balance. Desired overbalance (leading edge
heavy) is 152 inch-pounds.
5. One trim weight P/N 16780 may be used to replace two trim weights P/ N 16780-3.
6. When proper balance is obtained, safety the trim weight mounting bolts, connect
the control cables and bungee cable to the balance arm and connect the tab actuator arm.
b. Serial Numbers 27-7305135 to 27-7554168 inclusive, and 27-8054001 and up:
1. Disconnect the tab actuator arm at the trim mechanism end during balancing.
Cradle the actuator arm just aft of the disconnected end with tape between the left and right
stabilator. The stabilator must be free to rotate.
2. Hook the test weight P/N 16854 on the stabilator rear spar attachment fittings for
balancing. (Remove after balancing is completed.)
3. Add trim weights P/N 16780-3 one at a time on the trim weight attachment bolt
until the stabilator balances in neutral position (level). Refer 8 Paragraph 5-18 for stabilator
leveling procedures.
4. If the last weight added for balancing causes overbalance, this complete weight
may be used. Secure the weights and recheck the balance. Desired overbalance (leading edge
heavy) is 152-158 inch-pounds.
5. One trim weight P/N 16780 may be used to replace two trim weights P/N 16780-3.
6. When proper balance is obtained, safety the trim weight bolts, connect the control
and bungee cables and tab actuator arm.
c. Serial Numbers 27-7654001 to 27-7954121 inclusive:
1. Disconnect the trim tab actuator arm at the trim mechanism end during balancing.
Cradle the actuator arm just below the installation location between the left and right stabila-
tors with tape. The stabilator must be free to rotate.
2. Add trim weight P / N 49979-17 one at a time on the trim weight attachment bolt as
required to balance the stabilator in neutral position (level). Refer to Paragraph 5-18 for stabi-
lator leveling procedures.
STRUCTURES
A480
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ADJUST

TIP WEIGHT SERIAL NOS.
27-7654001 TO 27-7954121 INCL
7.75 LB TEST WEIGHT USED

ON SERIAL NOS. 27-1 TO
27-7554168 INCLUSIVE, AND
28-8054001 AND UP.
P/N 16780-03
TRIM WEIGHT MAIN
BALANCE WEIGHT
SERIAL NOS. 27-1 TO 27-7554168 INCLUSIVE, AND
27-8054001 AND UP.
Figure 4-14. Checking Stabilator Balance
3. The maximum number of trim weights allowed is eight for stabilators without de-
icer boots or ten for stabilators with de-icer boots. The trim weights must be divided equally on
each side of the bolt.
4. The desired overbalance (leading edge heavy) is 2 + 2 inch-pounds. Secure the
weights and recheck balance.
5. Reconnect the control and bungee cables and trim actuator arm.
NOTE
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ADJUST TIP WEIGHTS.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1Hll
MANUFACTURER'S
DIMENSIONS FOR
ORIGINAL PART.
THIS REWORK DIMENSION

RE-DRILL AND TAP: NECESSARYWITH DEICERS
.211 HOLE. DEPTH.75 INCH INSTALLED.
TAP -28NF-3 THD. DEPTH
.50 INCH
Figure 4-15. Stabilator Balance Weight - Rework
d. BALANCING STABILATORS WITH DEICER BOOTS INSTALLED.

(PA-23-250 Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-7554168 inclusive; 27-8054001 and up.) The following
balancing sequence should be followed when installing deicer boots on stabilators of the
above listed aircraft. Stabilator installation must be complete before balancing (including
tabs and paint).
1. Disconnect stabilator control cables and bungee cable from stabilator balance
arm.
2. Disconnect tab actuator arm from stabilator tab horn. Rest actuator arm in a thin
wire loop below stabilator tab horn. Stabilator must be free to rotate.
3. Remove all trim weights.
4. Hook 7.75 lb. test weight on stabilator rear spar attachment fittings for balancing
(Remove after balancing is completed). If stabilator overbalance with the trim weights
removed, rework balance weight per paragraph 4-65 b.
5. Add trim weights one at a time on trim weight attachment bolts until stabilator
balances. Refer to Paragraph 5-18 for stabilator leveling procedures.
6. If last weight added causes overbalance, this complete weight may be used. Secure
these weights and recheck to assure balance.
7. Desired overbalance (leading edge heavy) is 152 inch-pounds with test weight
assembly removed. Safety wire the trim weight attachment bolts and remove the test weight
assembly.
8. Reconnect stabilator and tab controls.
e. REWORK - STABILATOR BALANCE WEIGHT
1. Remove balance weight from balance arm.
2. Rework balance weight as per figure 4-15.
3. Replace balance weight in balance arm.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1H12
2451
USE SMALL PIECE OF TAPE

TO HOLD TAB IN NEUTRAL
LINKS AND IDLER LINK
BOLTS AND RUDDER FREE TO ROTATE FOR PART NO.
Figure 4-16. Checking Rudder Balance
4-67. BALANCING RUDDERS. (Refer to Figure 4-16.)

Rudder balancing must be accomplished with the assembly removed from the airplane
and placed on a fabricated support as shown in figure 4-16, with the rudder hinge bolts in place.
The support fixture must be secured to a solid workbench and the rudder allowed to rotate
freely on the hinge bolts. Use small pieces of tape to hold the rudder trim tab in its neutral posi-
tion.
To insure the correct balancing instructions check the data plate on the rudder assembly
lower rib for the particular rudder assembly number and using the table supplied below pro-
ceed to the given method.
a. Method I.
1. The rudder must be complete before balancing, including rudder control horn, ro-
tating beacon, navigation light, main balance weight, trim tab and tab push rod, idler link
bracket and links, and painted. Rudder tip must be in position but need not be secured.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1H13
2. Level the rudder and establish a reference mark which aligns with the rudder
trailing edge.
3. Loosen the beacon mounting screw and hang the test weight P/N 16857 on this
screw, over the leading edge. (Remove the test weight after balancing is completed.)
4. Should the trailing edge of the rudder not align with the level reference line (test
weight attached), add trim weights P/N 16845-2 one at a time directly above trim weight at-
tachment anchor nuts until the rudder balances.
5. If the last weight added causes overbalance, this complete weight may be used. At-
tach these weights under the trim weight attachment screws and recheck balance. Desired un-
derbalance (trailing edge heavy) is 45 ± 5 inch-pounds.
6. One trim weight P/N 16845-3 may be used to replace two P/N 16845-2 trim
weights.
b. Method II.
1. The rudder must be complete before balancing, including rudder trim control
horn, navigation light, main balance weight, trim tab, trim tab push rod, idler link bracket, id-
ler links and paint. Rudder tip must be in position but need not be secured.
2. Level the rudder and establish a reference mark which aligns with the rudder trail-
ing edge.
3. Loosen the tip attaching screw and hang the test weight P/N 16857from this screw,
over the leading edge. (Remove the test weight after balancing is completed.)
4. Should the trailing edge of the rudder not align with the level reference line (with
test weight attached), add trim weights P/N 33451-2 one at a time directly above the trim
weight attachment screws until the rudder balances (level with the reference mark).
5. If the last trim weight added for balancing causes an overbalance, the complete
weight may be used. However the desired underbalance (trailing edge heavy) is 45 + 5 inch-
pounds.
weights.
Rudder Assy. No. Method to Use Test Weight

P/N & WT.
16199-00 16857
16199-14 3 lbs. - 5 oz.
16199-18 16857
16199-19 3 lbs. - 5 oz.
16199-20(1)
16199-20(2) Method III 16857-9
with strobe 2 lbs. -10 oz.
16199-21 16857-9
without strobe 2 lbs. - 10 oz.
(1) This information to be used when 16844-00and 16844-02 balance weights are
incorporated, affecting aircraft 27-7554001 to 27-7954121.
(2) This information to be used when 28592-02 balance weight is used affecting
aircraft 27-8054001 and up.
STRUCTURES
1H14 14 Reissued: 2/18/81

c. Method III.
1. Rudder must be complete before balancing, including rudder control horn, strobe
light, navigation light, main balance weight, trim tab and tab push rod, idler link bracket and
links, and paint. Rudder tip must be in position but need not be secured.
ing edge.
3. Loosen the strobe light mounting screw and hang the test weight P/N 16857-9 on
this screw, over the leading edge. (Remove test weight after balancing is completed.)
test weight attached), add trim weights P/N 16845-2 one a a time directly above trim weight
attachment anchor nuts until the rudder balances.
5. If the last weight added causes overbalance, the complete weight may be used. At-
tach these weights under the trim weight attachment screws and recheck balance. The desired
underbalance (trailing edge heavy) is 35 + 5 inch-pounds.
weights.
d. Method IV.
1. The rudder must be complete before balancing, including rudder with control
horn, navigation light, main balance weight, trim tab, trim tab push rod, idler link bracket,
idler links and paint. Rudder tip must be in position but need not be secured.
ing edge.
3. Loosen the tip attachment and screw and hang the test weight P/N 16857-9 from
this screw, over the leading edge. (Remove the test weight after balancing is completed.)
the test weight attached), add trim weights P/N 33451-2 one at a time on the main weight at-
tachment screws until the rudder balances (level with reference mark). Replace main weight at-
tachment nuts and recheck balance.
5. If the last trim weight added causes overbalance the complete weight may be used.
However, the desired underbalance (trailing edge heavy) is 35 ± 5 inch-pounds.
6. One trim weight P/N 33451-3 may be used to replace two trim weights P/N
33451-2.
4-68. BALANCING AILERON. (Refer to Figure 4-17.)

The aileron must be complete including paint.
a. Disconnect the aileron from airplane and position on fabricated support stand, similar
to stand shown in Figure 4-16 for rudder balancing.
b. Level the aileron and establish a reference mark which aligns with aileron chord line
and trailing edge.
c. Place the hook end of a spring scale under the aileron trailing edge. Bring the aileron to
a neutral position while pulling up on the spring scale. Note the reading on the spring scale.
d. Using the formula (Ref. figure 4-17) determine the aileron underbalance. Desired
underbalance (trailing edge heavy) 4±3 inch-pounds.
e. If the aileron is too trailing edge heavy because of painting over old paint, it is
necessary to strip all paint from the aileron and start over. Normally, on the ailerons, the
tolerance noted in Step c will be available to permit repainting repairs, addition of static wicks,
etc. However, to be certain check the balance.
STRUCTURES
1H1
1H155 Reissued: 2/18/81
(B) SPRING
SCALE
READING
(OUNCES)
FORMULA (A) x (B)

IN. LB.
16 (OZ/LB)
BALANCING FIXTURE
HINGE CENTERLINE
12"
(A)
Figure 4-17. Checking Aileron Balance
4-69. FIBERGLASS REPAIRS. The repair procedure in this manual will describe the
methods for the repair of fiberglassreinforced structures. Paragraph 4-68 describesTouch-up
and Surface Repairs such as blisters, open seams, delaminations, cavities,small holes and
minor damages that have not harmed the fiberglasscloth material. Paragraph 4-69 describes
Fracture and Patch Repairs such as puncture, breaks and holes that have penetrated through
the structure and damaged the fiberglasscloth. A repair kit, part number 756 729, that will
furnish the necessarymaterial for such repairs is available through Piper Aircraft dealers or
distributors.
NOTE
Very carefully follow resin and catalyst mixing instructions
furnished with repair kit.
4-70. FIBERGLASS TOUCH-UP AND SURFACE REPAIRS.

a. Remove wax, oil and dirt from around the damaged area with acetone, Methylethyl-
ketone or equivalent and remove paint to gel coat.
b. The damaged area may be scraped with a fineblade knife or a power drill with a burr
attachment to roughen the bottom and sidesof the damaged area. Feather the edgesurround-
ing the scratch or cavity. Do not undercut the edge.(If the scratch or cavityis shallowand pen-
etrates only the surface coat, continue to Step h.)
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1H16
c. Pour a small amount of resin into ajar lid or on a pieceof cardboard,just enough to fill
the area being worked on. Mix an equal amount of milled fiberglass with the resin, using a
putty knife or stick. Add catalyst, according to kit instructions, to the resin and mix thor-
oughly. A hypodermic needle may be used to inject gel into small cavitiesnot requiring fiber-
glass millings mixed with the gel.
d. Work the mixture of resin, fibers and catalyst into the damaged area, using the sharp
point of a putty knife or stick to press it into the bottom of the hole and to puncture any air
bubbles which may be present. Fill the scratch or hole abovethe surrounding undamaged area
about 1/16 inch.
e. Lay a piece of cellophane or wax paper over the repair to cut off air and start the cure
of gel mixture.
f. Allow the gelt to cure 10to 15minutes until it feelsrubbery to the touch. Removethe
cellophane and trim flush with the surface, using a sharp razor blade or knife. Replace the
cellophane and allow to cure completely for 30 minutes to an hour. The patch will shrink
slightly below the structure surface as it cures. (If wax paper is used, ascertain wax is removed
from surface.)
g. Rough up the bottom and edges of the hole with the electric burr attachment or rough
sandpaper. Feather hole into surrounding gel coat, do not undercut.
h. Pour out a small amount of resin, add catalyst and mix thoroughly, using a cutting
motion rather than stirring. Use no fibers.
i. Usingthe tip of a putty knife or fingertips, fill the hole to about 1/16 inch above the
surrounding surface with the gel coat mixture.
j. Lay a piece of cellophane over the patch to start the curing process. Repeat Step f,
trimming patch when partially cured.
k. After trimming the patch, immediatelyplace another small amount of gel coat on one
edge of the patch and cover with cellophane. Then, using a squeegee or the back of a razor
blade, squeegeelevel with area surrounding the patch; leavethe cellophaneon patch for one to
two hours or overnight, for complete cure.
1. After repair has cured for 24 hours, sand patch area using a sanding block with finewet
sandpaper. Finish by priming, again sanding and applying color coat.
4-71. FIBERGLASS FRACTURE AND PATCH REPAIRS.

a. Remove wax, oil and dirt from around the damaged area with acetone, Methylethyl-
ketone or equivalent.
b. Using a key hole saw, electric saber saw, or sharp knife cut away ragged edges. Cut
back to sound material.
c. Remove paint three inches back from around damaged area.
d. Working inside the structure, bevel the edges to approximately a 30 degree angle and
rough-sand the hole and the area around it, using80 grit dry paper. Feather back for about two
inches all around the hole. This roughens the surface for strong bond with patch.
e. Cover a piece of cardboard or metalwith cellophane.Tape it to the outside of the struc-
ture, coveringthe hole completely.The cellophane should face toward the inside of the struc-
ture. If the repair is on a sharp contour or shaped area, a sheet of aluminumformed to a similar
contour may be placed over the area. The aluminum should also be covered with cellophane.
f. Prepare a patch of fiberglassmat and cloth to cover an area two incheslarger than the
hole.
g. Mix a small amount of resin and catalyst, enough to be used for one step at a time,
according to kit instructions.
h. Thoroughly wet mat and cloth with catalyzed resin. Daub resin on mat first, and then
on cloth. Mat should be applied against structures surface with cloth on top. Both piecesmay
be wet out on cellophane and applied as a sandwich. Enough fiberglass cloth and mat rein-
forcements should be used to at least replacethe amount of reinforcements removed in order
to maintain the original strength. If damage occurred as a stress crack, an extra layer or two of
cloth may be used to strengthen area. STRUCTURES
2438
9
24
25
72 27
71
Figure
4-18. FrameTubing
Fuselage
STRUCTU RES
21/18/81
Reissued:
1H18
NO. PART NO. MATERIAL DIMENSIONS NO. PART NO. MATERIAL DIMENSIONS
1 17134-89 4130 RD STEEL TUBE I X.065 X21.5 42 17134-34 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1 X.035 X48
2 17134-91 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1 X.065 X 18 43 22102-28 4130 RDSTEELTUBE .375 X .028 X 8
3 17134-31 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.035 X 21.25 44 171346-06 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.035 X42
4 17134-29 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .875 X .035 X365 2112143 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .665 X.035 X9.5
5 17134-39 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1 X.049 X 39.5 (LINER TUBE)
6 17134-23 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .625 X .035 X20.5 45 1713463 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X .035 X 22.25
7 22102-19 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X .058 X 21 46 1313464 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .5 X .035 X 18.25
8 22102-17 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1 X.049 X 225 47 1713462 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X .035 X 22.25
9 1713460 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.035 X 37 (1) 48 1713456 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .625 X.035 X25
10 22102-16 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1 X .049 X 22.5 49 17134-04 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X .035 X 20.5
11 22102-18 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.058 X21 50 1713445 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X .035 X 20.5
12 17134-22 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .625 X .035 X 20.5 51 22102-44 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .625 X.035 X 16.25
13 17134-38 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1 X.049 X395 52 17134-71 1025 RD STEEL TUBE .625 X.035 X9
14 17134-30 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X .035 X 21.25 53 17134-72 1025 RD STEEL TUBE .625 X.035 X9
15 17134-92 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1 X .065 X 18 54 1408902 1020 SQ STEEL TUBE .687 X.025 X 14.75
16 17134-90 4130 RDSTEELTUBE 1 X.065 X 21.5 55 1713458 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X .035 X 26
17 17134-25 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .625 X .035 X 18.5 56 1713459 4130 RDSTEEL TUBE .75 X .035 X 26
.18 17134-33 4130 RDSTEELTUBE .875 X .049 X 26 57 1713408 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X .035 X 38
19 22102-27 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .875 X .049 X22 58 1713449 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X .035 X 38
20 22102-40 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1X .058 X48.5 59 1713447 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.035 X 43.5
22 22102-25 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1 X .058 X 27 1713482 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X .035 X 30.5
23 22102-15 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.058 X24.5 61 17134-10 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X .035 X 30.5
24 22102-21 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.035 X 8.5 1713442 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.035 X 30.5
25 1713465 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X .035 X65 62 17134-12 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1 X.049 X 38.5
26 22102-20 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X .035 X 8.5 63 17134-13 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1 X .049 X 38.5
27 22102-14 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.058 X 24.5 64 17134-18 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1 X .049 X 45
28 22102-24 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1 X .058 X27 65 17134-15 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X .035 X 26
29 22102-42 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .875 X .065 X16.5 66 17134-17 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.035 X51.75
30 2210241 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1 X .058 X485 67 17134-16 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.035 X 25.75
31 22102-26 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .875 X .049 X22 68 1713469 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .375 X.028 X1.937
32 17134-32 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .875 X .049 X 26 69 1713457 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .875 X.035 X42
33 17134-24 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .625 X.035 X8.5 70 17134-14 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .375 X.028 X45.5
35 17134-98 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.049 X 24.75 72 1713499 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.049 X 44
36 22102-28 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .375 X .028 X8 73 1713446 1025 RD STEEL TUBE .625 X.035 X6
37 17134-34 4130 RD STEEL TUBE I X .035 X48 74 1713467 1025 RD STEEL TUBE .625 X.035 X5.5
38 1713444 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1.125 X.049 X62 75 2210250 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X .049 X 37.25 (2)
39 22102-13 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1.125 X.058 X44.5 76 2210247 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.035 X 27.812 (2)
40 22102-13 4130 RD STEEL TUBE 1.125 X.058 X44.5 77 2210248 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.035 X 17.5 (2)
41 1713444 4130 RDSTEELTUBE 1 X .049 X62 78 22102-49 4130 RD STEEL TUBE .75 X.049 X 38.343 (2)
(1) ON PA-23-250, PA-23-235,PA-E23-250 ANDPA-23-250 (SIX PLACE) SERIAL NOS. 27-2000 TO 27-3049 INCL. AND
27-3051 TO 27-3153 INCL.
(2) ON PA-E23-250 AND PA-23-250 (SIX PLACE) SERIAL NOS. 27-3050,27-3154 AND UP.
Figure 4-18. Fuselage Frame Tubing (cont.)
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1H19
2133
A439
2133
NUMBER MATERIAL THICKNESS
1 2024-0 0.032*
2 2024-0 0.025
A444 2133 3 5052-0 0.040
4 2024-T3 0.025
5 61 SO 0.025
6 2024-T3 0.020
7 2024-T3 0.040
2 4
8 2024-T3 0.051
9 2024-T3 0.016
10 24 ST3 0.016
11 24 ST3 0.025
12 2024-T3 0.032
13 5052-H34 0.025
14 2024-0 0.040
15 24 ST3 0.020
16 6061-0 0.032
17 2024-0 0.020
18 THERMOPLASTIC
SECTION 19 FIBERGLASS
A-A
*HEAT TREAT TO 2024-T4 AFTER FORMING
**HEAT TREAT TO 61 ST4 AFTER FORMING
Figure 4-19. Skin Materials and Thicknesses
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1H20
2111
2133 A442
1 2024-0 0 032*
2 2024-0 0.025*
3 5052-0 0.040
4 2024-T3 0 025
5 61 SO 0.025**
6 2024-T3 0 020
7 2024-T3 0.040
8 2024-T3 0.051
.
7 9 2024-T3 0016
10 24ST3 0016
11 24 ST3 0 025
12 2024-T3 0 032
4
13 5052-H34 0 025
14 2024-0 0.040*
15 24 ST3 0.020
II 16 6061-0 0032
17 2024-0 0 020*
18 THERMOPLASTIC
19 FIBERGLASS
*HEAT TREAT TO 2024-T4 AFTER FORMING
**HEAT TREAT TO 61 ST4 AFTER FORMING
Figure 4-19. Skin Materials and Thicknesses (cont.)
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1H21
A A
A408-
PA-23-250 E
PA-23-250 F WING TIP
WING TIP
Figure 4-20. Skin Materials and Thicknesses.

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-4426, 27-4574 and up
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2 18 81
1H22
A40
THE LEFT UPPER STABILATOR

SURFACE IS SHOWN.
THE LOWER AND OPPOSITE
SKINS ARE OF THE SAME
MATERIAL AND THICKNESS.
2133
A4:
SECTION A-A
NORMAL
A431 1 2024-0 0.032*

2 2024-0 0.025*
3 5052-0 0.040
4 2024 -T3 0.025
5 6150 0.025 **
6 2024-T3 0.020
7 2024-T3 0.040
8 2024 -T3 0.051
9 2024-T3 0.016
10 24ST3 0.016
11 24ST3 0.025
12 2024-T3 0.032
13 5052-H34 0.025
14 2024-0 0.040*
15 24ST3 0.020
16 6061-0 0.032
17 2024-0 0.020*
18 THERMOPLASTIC
19 FIBERGLASS
20 2024 -T3 .064
LYCOMINGTURBO. ' HEAT TREAT TO 2024-T4 AFTER FORMING

**HEAT TREAT TO 61ST4 AFTER FORMING
Figure 4-20. Skin Materials and Thicknesses,

PA-23-250 (six place). Serial Nos. 27-4426. 27-4574 and up (cont.)
STRUCTURES
DRILL .128THRU
40
MATERIALLIST
0.187x 1 x 6 STEEL PLATE
0375 x 0.75STEEL ROD
Figure 4-21. Fabricated Tool, Wing Installation
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1H24
ILL .189 THRU
-1.125
MATERIALLIST
1.25 x 1.75 x 8 STEELSTOCK
Figure 4-22. Fabricated Tool, Wing Installation
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1I1
i. Lay patch over hole on inside of structure, cover with cellophane, and
squeegee from center to edges to remove all air bubbles and assure adhesion
around edge of hole. Air bubbles will show white in the patch and they should all
be worked out to the edge. Remove excess resin before itgels on the part. Allow
patch to cure completely.
j. Remove cardboardor aluminum sheet from outside of hole and rough-sand
the patch and edge of hole. Feather edge of hole about two inches into undamaged
area.
k. Mask area around hole with tape and paper to protect surface. Cut a piece
of fiberglass mat about one inch larger than the hole and one or more pieces of
fiberglass cloth two inches larger than the hole. Brush catalyzed resin over hole,
lay mat over hole and wet out with catalyzed resin. Use a daubing action with
brush. Then apply additional layer or layers of fiberglass cloth to build up patch
to the surface of structure. Wet out each layer thoroughly with resin.
1 . Witha squeegee or broad knife, work out allair bubbles inthe patch. Work
from center to edge, pressing patch firmly against the structure. Allow patch to
cure for 15 to 20 minutes.
m. As soon as the patch begins to set up, but while still rubbery, take a sharp
knife and cut away extra cloth and mat. Cut on outside edge of feathering. Strip
cut edges of structure. Do this before cure is complete, to save extra sanding.
Allow patch to cure overnight.
n. Using dry 80 grit sandpaper on a power sander or sanding block, smooth
patch and blend with surrounding surface. Should air pockets appear while sand-
ing, puncture and fill with catalyzed resin. A hypodermic needle may be used to
fill cavities. Let cure and resand.
o. Mix catalyzed resin and work into patch with fingers. Smooth carefully
and work into any crevices.
p. Cover with cellophane and squeegee smooth. Allow to cure completely
before removing cellophane. Let cure and resand.
q. Brush or spray a coat of catalyzed resin to seal patch. Sand patch, finish
by priming, again sanding and applying color coat.
NOTE
Brush and hands may be cleaned in solvents such as

acetone or Methylethylketone. If solvents are not avail -
able, a strong solution of detergent and water may be
used.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1I2
A426 RIVET AN426AD34 (8 REQUIRED)
NOSE CONE SKKIN

/ BULKHEAD ASSEMBLY
STA. -12.62
FIBERGLASS CLOTH
A A
Figure 4-23. Nose Cone Installation, PA-23-250 and PA-23-235

4-72. REPLACEMENT OF DAMAGED NOSE CONE.
a. Disconnect the electrical leads to the landing light and any other equipment located
in the nose cone.
b. Remove the damaged nose cone by cutting away the fiberglass attachment cloth
between the inner surface of the nose cone and the flange on bulkhead at station -12.62.
c. Drill out the rivets around the mating edge of the nose cone and fuselage skin.
d. Sand off any filler material used on the other mating surfaces between the fuselage
skin and nose cone.
CAUTION
Do not sand into the fuselage skin or the bulkhead.
e. Position new nose cone in place over the bulkhead flange.

f. Drill eight .098 holes in new nose cone using existing holes in bulkhead flange as
template.
g. Rivet the nose cone to the flange with AN 426 AD3-4 rivets.
h. Fasten the nose cone to the fuselage with the application of fiberglass cloth layed up
between the inner surface of the nose cone and flange on the bulkhead. (Refer to Figure
4-23 and instructions given on the use of fiberglass in paragraph 4-69.)
i. The outside seam between the nose cone and fuselage skin is coated with Hysol
Epoxy Surface 4343 coat or equivalent and sanded smooth.
j. Finish by priming; again sanding and applying color coat.
STRUCTU RES
Reissued: 2/18/81
113
A814
STEP 2
STEP 1
Figure 4-24. Removal of Nose Cone/Radome
4-73. REPLACEMENT/INSTALLATION OF NOSE CONE OR RADOME. PA-23-250

(six place), Serial Nos. 27-4426, 27-4574 and up. (Refer to Figures 4-24, 4-25 and 4-26.)
a. Nose Cones or Radomes damaged beyond repair should be removed as follows:
1. Remove the landing light window, any additional equipment installed in the nose
cone or radome, and floorboard access panels in the nose cone.
2. Disconnect any electrical leads to the landing light and remove light assembly.
3. Should the floorboard and light supports in the radome assembly still be service-
able, disconnect them by removing the screws attaching them to the radome bulkhead and
dome flanges.
4. If the floorboard and light supports are still serviceable in the standard nose cone,
drill out the rivets that attach the floorboard and supports to the bulkhead, station -12.62.
5. To remove the damaged nose cone/radome cut around the dome just forward of
the mounting strip(s) (Figure 4-24, Step l)attached to bulkhead, station -12.62, and remove
cone.
6. Remove the floorboard and supports from the nose cone by cutting away the fiber-
glass attachment cloth at the mounting strips.
b. After removing the nose cone/radome from the aircraft, back drill and remove the
rivets on and around the mounting flange at station - 12.62where any fiberglass is still attached.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
114
1. NOSE CONE/RADOME
2. FLOOR PANEL
3. MOUNTING BULKHEAD
4. MOUNTING FLANGE
5. ALUMINUM SKIN
A813
SECTION A-A
C (3 REQ.)
(SEE SECTION C-C)
SECTION C-C
- USE AS REQUIRED(REQ.)-
A. FIBERGLASS MAT (.75 x 15 INCH)
B. FIBERGLASS CLOTH (3 x 15.5 INCH)
C. FIBERGLASS CLOTH (4.0 x 6.0 INCH)
D. FIBERGLASS TAPE (1.0 INCH WIDTH)
E. USING SECTION C-C AS REFERENCE
USE .75 x 6.0 INCH MATTING AND
1 INCH WIDTH TAPE AS REQ.
NOSE CONE
Figure 4-25. Nose Cone/ Radome
STRUCTU RES
Reissued: 2/18/81
115
c. If the bulkhead and mounting flange at station -12.62 are undamaged and not to be
replaced, proceed to remove any old fiberglass and filler by grinding or sanding as shown in
Step 2 of Figure 4-24. Make sure holes in mounting flange are clear, drill out if necessary.
CAUTION
When grinding off the filler and fiberglass on the mounting

flange and skin, be careful not to grind into the aluminum skin
of the aircraft. When getting near the skin sand by hand and
only ruff up the skin surface such that the filler and body
putty will stick.
NOTE
If the floorboard assemblies or bulkheads have been damaged,

replacement parts may be ordered using the PA-23-250 Parts
Catalog, Part Number 753 522. Piper Kit 761 026 furnishes the
radome and hardware for attachment.
d. After removing the old fiberglass, filler, and body putty, position the new nose cone/
radome on the mounting flange at bulkhead, station -12.62. Check to make sure the cone
covers the holes in the mounting flange.
e. If the nose cone/radome floor panels haven't been removed, ascertain that the floor
panels fit properly in the nose cone before proceeding. The floor panel in the nose cone
configuration should fit snugly against the nose cone such that it does not deflect up or down.
The floor panel in the radome configuration should fit snugly against the bulkhead in the
radome in the same manner. If the floor panels on the nose cone/radome have been removed
or replaced, check the fit, remove the nose cone, and install the floor panel and supports. Make
sure the floor panel and support bonding flanges are clean.
NOTE
Before proceeding with any fiberglassing, wipe down the areas

to be bonded with white gas or acetone. AFTER SANDING
MAKE SURE DUST IS ALL BLOWN OR CLEANED OFF.
When working on exterior of nose cone/radome, make sure
to sand prior to applying putty to remove mold wax. (See
Paragraph 4-69 for working with fiberglass.)
- WARNING -
Because of the combustibility of the substances used in this

procedure, be sure to do the work in a WELL VENTILATED
AREA that is FREE FROM sparks and smoking.
STRUCTU RES
Reissued:2/18/81
116
f. With floorboards and supports installed, reposition the nose cone/radome over the
floorboard and onto the mounting flange at bulkhead, station -12.62. The nose cone/ radome
should fit far enough on the mounting flange that the edge of the cone completely covers the
holes in the mounting flange at bulkhead, station -12.62.
CAUTION
DO NOT physically FORCE the nose cone/radome to fit flush

with the aluminum nose section. Maintain at least a 3/8 inch
gap and build up the cone with paste (Kit 763 904), and then
body putty as shown in Figure 4-26 (of the proper mix) re-
spectively.
g. Drill (as shown in Figure 4-26, Step 1) .098 inch holes in the nose cone to match those
in the bulkhead mounting flange, twenty eight of the same for the radome (equally spaced to
clear holes in flange), maintaining in the cone at least a 3/8 inch edge distance from the center
of the rivet holes to the edge of the fiberglass.
h. Rivet the nose cone or radome to the mounting flange with MS20426AD3 rivets for the
nose cone or MS20426AD4 rivets for the radome.
i. With the nose cone/radome riveted in position, prepare four pieces of fiberglass
matting (3/4 oz., .75 x 15 inch) by placing the pieces on a piece of carboard, or other, and
saturating them with prepared resin by pouring it over them as shown in Figure 4-26, Step 2.
Lay and pack the matting around the mounting flange at bulkhead, station -12.62. MAKE
SURE the matting is packed such that it contacts the fiberglass cone through the holes in the
flange.
j. Prepare the other required matting (see Figure 4-26, Step 2) pieces and install them
along their specific mating flanges.
NOTE
Make sure all mating flanges to be bonded are covered and

bonded properly.
k. Prepare and apply to the specific areas the proper fiberglass cloth in the same manner
as the matting shown in Figures 4-25 and 4-26.
NOTE
If the nose cone/radome does not touch the air scoop on both
sides fill in from inside with fiberglass matting and later,
outside with body putty as shown in Figure 4-26, Step 5.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1I7
1. Using the fiberglass paste kit (763 904) mix up the required amount (working time 15to
30 min. depending on amount of hardener used) and lay masking tape (as shown in Figure
4-26, Steps 3 and 4) around the seam such that the paste does not spread onto the metal or
fiberglass cone. Spread paste into seam with a wood (tongue depressor) or soft plastic spatula.
m. When paste is dry, sand the paste down by hand to a smooth finish.
NOTE
Before applying any body putty to smooth in nose cone/

radome to nose section, sand paint off aluminum nose section
down to bare metal and entire nose cone/radome.
NOTE
Do not fiberglass the light supports on the bottom of the

RADOME. (See Figure 4-25.)
n. Mix some body putty and hardener; then with a wooden or plastic spatula (to keep
from scratching the cone or aluminum) apply putty to the seam area, also to the sides of the
lower air vent (see Figure 4-26, Step 5) if the cone doesn't contact it, and go over the putty
with a wide plastic spreader to even out the putty.
o. Wait for putty to dry and sand down to acquire a smooth finish and pattern from the
cone to the nose section.
NOTE
Build up cone to nose section, do not physically force cone to

fit.
p. Finish by priming, sanding, and color coating. DO NOT paint over honeycomb
section. When finishing radome, tape around the nose cone 18.75 inches back from the tip of
the cone and paint that area with a flat black polyurethane paint only. (Refer to Figure 4-26.)
q. Reinstall/install all necessary equipment.
4-74. THERMOPLASTIC REPAIRS. The following procedure will assist in making field
repairs to items made of thermoplastic which are used throughout the airplane. A list of
material needed to perform these repairs is given along with suggested suppliers of the
material. Common safety precautions should be observed when handling some of the
materials and tools used while making these repairs.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1I8
A81
A
STEP 2
3/8 INCHEDGEDISTANCE
STEP 1 A812
A FAIR
BODY INPUTTY
WITH
STEP 4
MASKINGTAPE
STEP 3
BODYPUTTY
A818
STEP 6 18.75 INCHES
I
Figure 4-26. Installation of Nose Cone/Radome
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1I9
TABLE IV-I. LIST OF MATERIALS (THERMOPLASTIC REPAIR)
ITEMS DESCRIPTIONS SUPPLIERS
Buffing and Rubbing Automotive Type - DuPont DuPont Company

Compounds #7 Wilmington, Del. 19898
Ram Chemical #69 x I Ram Chemicals

Gardena, Cal. 90248
Mirror Glaze #1 Mirror Bright Polish Co., Inc.

Irvin, Cal. 92713
Cleaners. Fantastic Spray Obtain From Local Suppliers

Perchloretylene
VM&P Naptha (Lighter
Fluid)
ABS-Solvent Cements Solarite #11 Series Solar Compounds Corp.

Linden, N.J. 07036
Solvents Methylethylketone Obtain From Local Suppliers

Methylene Chloride
Acetone
Epoxy Patching Solarite #400 Solar Compounds Corp.

Compound
Hot Melt Adhesives Stick Form 1/2 in. dia. Sears Roebuck & Co. or Most
Polyamids and Hot Melt 3 in. long Hardware Stores
Gun
Hot Air Gun Temp. Range 300° to Local Suppliers

400° F
STRUCTU RES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1110
a. Surface Preparation:
1. Surface dirt and paint if applied must be removed from the item being repaired. Household
cleaners have proven most effective in removing surface dirt.
2. Preliminary cleaning of the damaged area with perchlorethylene or VM&P Naptha will
generally insure a good bond between epoxy compounds with thermoplastic.
b. Surface Scratches, Abrasion or Ground-in-Dirt: (Refer to Figure 4-27.)
1. Shallow scratches and abraded surfaces are usually repaired by following directions on
containers of conventional automotive buffing and rubbing compounds.
2. If large dirt particles are embedded in thermoplastic parts, they can be removed with a hot air
gun capable of supplying heat in the temperature range of 300° to 400° F. Use care not to overheat the material.
Hold the nozzle of the gun about 1/4 of an inch away from the surface and apply heat with a circular motion
until the area is sufficiently soft to remove the dirt particles.
3. The thermoplastic will return to its original shape upon cooling.
c. Deep Scratches, Shallow Nicks and Small Holes: (Less than I inch in diameter.)(Refer to Figure 4-28.)
1. Solvent cements will fit virtually any of these applications. If the area to be repaired is very
small, it may be quicker to make a satisfactory cement by dissolving thermoplastic material of the same type
being repaired in solvent until the desired paste-like consistency is achieved.
2. This mixture is then applied to the damaged area. Upon solvent evaporation, the hard durable
solids remaining can easily be shaped to the desired contour by filing or sanding.
3. Solvent adhesives are not recommended for highly stressed areas, on thin walled parts or for
patching holes greater than 1/4 inch in diameter.
871
Figure 4-27. Surface Scratches, Abrasions or Ground-in-Dirt
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1I11
871
Figure 4-28. Deep Scratches, Shallow Nicks and Small Holes

825
THOROUGHLY MIX
USING FIGURE EIGHT
MOTION.
Figure 4-29. Mixing of Epoxy Patching Compound
4. For larger damages an epoxy patching compound is recommended. This type material is a two
part, fast curing, easy sanding commercially available compound.
5. Adhesion can be increased by roughing the bonding surface with sandpaper and by utilizing as
much surface area for the bond as possible.
6. The patching compound is mixed in equal portions on a hard flat surface using a figure eight
motion. The damaged area is cleaned with perchlorethylene or VM&P Naptha prior to applying the
compound. (Refer to Figure 4-29.)
7. A mechanical sander can be used after the compound is cured, providing the sander is kept in
constant motion to prevent heat buildup.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1I12
870
Figure 4-30. Welding Repair Method

827
DOUBLERPLATEBONDEDTO
UNDERSIDE
OF DAMAGEDAREA
HOLES
Figure 4-31. Repairing of Cracks
STRUCTURES
Revised: 4/26/83
1113
831
PATCHING
COMPOUND
828 DAMAGED AREA
830
ABS
ROD
Figure 4-32. Various Repairs
STRUCTURES
Revised: 4/26/83
1114
8. For repairs in areas involving little or no shear stress, the hot melt adhesives, polyamids which
are supplied in stick form may be used. This type of repair has a low cohesive strength factor.
9. For repairs in areas involving small holes, indentations or cracks in the material where high
stress is apparent or thin walled sections are used, the welding method is suggested.
10. This welding method requires a hot air gun and ABS rods. To weld, the gun should be held to
direct the flow of hot air into the fusion (repair) zone, heating the damaged area and rod simultaneously. The
gun should be moved continuously in a fanning motion to prevent discoloration of the material. Pressure must
be maintained on the rod to insure good adhesion. (Refer to Figure 4-30.)
11. After the repair is completed, sanding is allowed to obtain a surface of acceptable appearance.
d. Cracks: (Refer to Figure 4-31.)
1. Before repairing a crack in the thermoplastic part, first determine what caused the crack and
alleviate that condition to prevent it recurring after the repair is made.
2. Drill small stop holes at each end of the crack.
3. If possible, a double plate should be bonded to the reverse side of the crack to provide extra
strength to the part.
4. The crack should be "V" grooved and filled with repair material, such as solvent cement, hot
melt adhesive, epoxy patching compound or hot air welded, whichever is preferred.
5. After the repair has cured, it may be sanded to match the surrounding finish.
e. Repairing Major Damage: (Larger than I inch in diameter.) (Refer to Figure 4-32.)
1. If possible a patch should be made of the same material and cut slightly larger than the section
being repaired.
2. When appearances are important, large holes, cracks, tears, etc., should be repaired by cutting
out the damaged area and replacing it with a piece of similar material.
3. When cutting away the damaged area, under cut the perimeter and maintain a smooth edge.
The patch and/or plug should also have a smooth edge to insure a good fit.
4. Coat the patch with solvent adhesive and firmly attach it over the damaged area.
5. Let the patch dry for approximately one hour before any additional work is performed.
6. The hole, etc., is then filled with the repair material. A slight overfilling of the repair material is
suggested to allow for sanding and finishing after the repair has cured. If patching compound is used the repair
should be made in layers, not exceeding a I / 2 inch in thickness at a time, thus allowing the compound to cure
and insuring a good solid buildup of successive layers is required.
f. Stress Lines: (Refer to Figure 4-33.)
1. Stress lines produce a whitened appearance in a localized area and generally emanate from the
severe bending or impacting of the material.(Refer to Figure 4-34.)
2. To restore the material to its original condition and color, use a hot air gun or similar heating
device and carefully apply heat to the affected area. Do not overheat the material.
g. Painting the Repair:
I. An important factor in obtaining a quality paint finish is the proper preparation of the repair
and surrounding area before applying any paint.
2. It is recommended that parts be cleaned prior to painting a commercial cleaner or a solution
made from one-fourth cup of detergent mixed with one gallon of water.
3. The paint used for coating thermoplastic can be either lacquers or enamels depending on which
is preferred by the repair facility or customer. (SEE NOTE.)
NOTE
It is extremely important that solvent formulations be considered

when selecting a paint, because not all lacquers or enamels can be
used satisfactorily on thermoplastics. Some solvents used in the
paints can significantly affect and degrade the plastic properties.
STRUCTURES
1I15 Reissued: 2, 18,81
827
STRESS
LINES
Figure 4-33. Repair of Stress Lines
829
PROFILE VIEW INDICATING

DAMAGED AREA
Figure 4-34. Repair of Impacted Damage
STRUCTURES
Revised: 4/26/83
1116
4. Another important matter to consider is that hard. brittle coatings that are usually best for
abrasion resistance should not be used in areas which incur high stress, flexing or impact. Such coating may
crack, thus creating a weak area.
4-75. SAFETY WALK REPAIR.
4-76. SURFACE PREPARATION.

a. Clean all surfaces with a suitable cleaning solvent to remove dirt, grease and oils. Solvents may be
applied by dipping, spraying or mopping.
b. Insure that no moisture remains on the surface by wiping with a clean dry cloth.
c. Outline the area to which the liquid safety walk compound is to be applied, and mask adjacent
surfaces.
NOTE
Newly painted surfaces shall be allowed to dry for 2.5 hours

minimum prior to the application of the safety walk.
4-77. PRODUCT LISTING FOR LIQUID SAFETY WALK COMPOUND. (PPS-45010-1)

a. Suggested Solvents:
Safety Solvent per MIL-S-18718
Sherwin Williams Lacquer Thinner R7KC120
Glidden Thinner No. 207
b. Safety Walk Material:
Walkway Compound and Matting Nonslip (included in Piper Code No. 179 872)
4-78. APPLICATION OF LIQUID SAFETY WALK COMPOUND. Liquid safety walk compound shall
be applied in an area, free of moisture for a period of 24 hours minimum after application. Do not apply when
surface to be coated is below 50° F. Apply liquid safety walk compound as follows:
a. Mix and thin the liquid safety walk compound in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
on the container.
b. Coat the specified surfaces with a smooth, unbroken film of the liquid safety walk compound. A nap
type roller or a stiff brush is recommended, using fore and aft strokes.
c. Allow the coating to dry for 15 minutes to one hour before recoating or touch-up; if required after
application of the initial coating.
d. After recoating or touch-up, if done, allow the coating to dry for 15 minutes to one hour before
removing masking.
NOTE
The coated surface shall not be walked on for six hours minimum
after application of final coating.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1I17
4-79. SURFACE PREPARATION FOR PRESSURE SENSITIVE SAFETY WALK. The areas to which
the pressure sensitive safety walk is to be installed must be free from all contaminates and no moisture present.
If liquid safety walk is installed the area must be prepared as follows:
a. Area must be masked off to protect painted surfaces.
b. Apply suitable stripper MEK Federal Spec. TT-M-261, U.S. Rubber No. 3339 to wingwalk
compound. As compound softens remove by using putty knife or other suitable tool.
c. Area must be clean and dry prior to painting.
d. Prime and paint area.
NOTE
Newly painted surfaces, shall be allowed to dry for 2.5 hours

minimum prior to the application of the safety walk.
4-80. APPLICATION OF PRESSURE SENSITIVE SAFETY WALK. Wipe area with a clean dry cloth to
insure that no moisture remains on surface. Do not apply when surface temperature is below 50° F. Apply
pressure sensitive safety walk as follows:
a. Peel back the full width of the protective liner approximately 2 inches from the leading edge of the
safety walk.
b. Apply the safety walk to the wing area, begin at the leading edge, insure proper alignment and
position from wing lap.
c. Remove the remaining protective liner as the safety walk is being applied from front to back of wing
area.
d. Roll firmly with a long handled cylindrical brush in both lengthwise directions. Make sure all edges
adhere to the wing skin.
e. Install and rivet leading edge retainer.
4-81. SHOULDER HARNESS INERTIA REEL ADJUSTMENT.
a. Allow the harness to wind up on the reel as much as possible.

b. On the end of the reel, pry off the plastic cap over the spring, making sure the spring does not come
out of the plastic cap, and set cap aside.
c. Unwind the harness completely, then measure and mark the harness 24 inches from the reel center.
d. Wind the harness onto the reel until the 24 inch mark is reached, then hold reel and place cap with
spring over the reel shaft end.
e. Aligning slot in shaft with spring tank, wind spring 6 turns + 1/ 2 turn and snap in the plastic cover
into holes in reel end shaft.
f. Release harness and allowing it to wind up, extend the harness a few times to check reel for smooth
operation.
g. With reel fully wound, hold with inertia mechanism end up and pry off plastic cap over mechanism
and set reel aside.
h. Install nut in plastic cap so that stud in cap is flush with nut surface, then reposition cap over reel end
and orientating properly, snap in place. Extend harness a few times to make sure action is correct.
STRUCTURES
Reissued: 2/18/81
1I18
SECTION
V
SURFACE
CONTROLS
rofiche
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid
id No.
No.
5-1. Introduction .................. 1122
5-2. Description ..................................... 1122
5-3. Troubleshooting ................. 1J2
5-4. Standard Procedures .................. ............. 1J2
5-5. Control Column Assembly .............. 1J2
5-6. Removal of Control Column Assembly
Components .......... ................ 1J2
5-7. Installation of Control Column Assembly
Components .......................... 1J4
5-8. AileronControls ............ ....... ............. 1J6
5-9. Removal of Aileron Control Cables ........ 1J6
5-10. Installation of Aileron Control Cables ................ lJ11
5-11. Removal of Aileron BellcrankAssembly ....... 1J12
5-12. Installation of Aileron BellcrankAssembly ............. IJ13
5-13. Riggingand Adjustment of AileronControls ............ IJ13
5-14. Aileron Trim ............... IJ16
5-15. Stabilator Controls . .... ....... IJ16
5-16. Removal of Stabilator Control Cables ................ IJ16
5-17. Installation of Stabilator Control Cables .. .......... 1J18
5-18. Riggingand Adjustment of Stabilator Controls ......... IKI
5-19. Stabilator Trim ................................... IK3
5-20. Removal of Forward Stabilator Trim Assembly .......... IK3
5-21. Installation of Forward Stabilator Trim
Assembly .............................. IK4
5-22. Removal of Aft Stabilator Trim Assembly ............. IK5
5-23. Installation of Aft Stabilator Trim Assembly ............ IK5
5-24. Riggingand Adjustment of Stabilator Trim ...... IK6
5-25. Removal of Stabilator Trim Indicator Wire
(PA-23-250,PA-23-235and PA-23-250
(six place), SerialNos. 27-2000 to 27-2504
incl.; and PA-23-250(six place), Serial
Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3836 incl., 27-3838
to 27-3943 incl.) ......................... 1K7
Reissued: 2/18/81
1119
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
5-26. Installation of StabilatorTrim Indicator
Wire(PA-23-250,PA-23-235and
PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos.
27-2000 to 27-2504incl. and
27-2505 to 27-3836incl. and 27-3838
to 3943 incl.) ................. ........ IK8
5-27. Riggingand Adjustment of Stabilator Indicator
Wire(PA-23-250,PA-23-235and
27-2000 to 27-2504incl. and
27-2505 to 27-3836incl. and
27-3838 to 27-3943incl.) .................... 1K8
5-28. Removalof Stabilator Trim Indicator Wires
27-3837, 27-3944 and up) .................... IK9
5-29. Installation of Stabilator Trim Indicator Wire
27-2827, 27-3944 and up) .................... 1K9
5-30. Adjustment of Stabilator Trim Indicator Wire
27-3837, 27-3944 and up) .................... K10
5-31. Rudder Controls .. .............................. .K 13
5-32. Removalof Rudder Control Cables ............... IK13
5-33. Installation of Rudder Control Cables ................ 1K13
5-34. Riggingand Adjustment of Rudder Controls ............ K 14
5-35. Rudder Trim Controls ............................... IK15
5-36. Removalof Forward Rudder Trim Assembly ......... IK 15
5-37. Installation of Forward Rudder Trim Assembly .......... IK16
5-38. Removalof Aft Rudder Trim Assembly .............. 1K17
5-39. Installation of Aft Rudder Trim Assembly ............. I K18
5-40. Riggingand Adjustment of Rudder Trim .............. IK 18
5-41. Removalof Rudder Trim Indicator Wire
(PA-23-250;PA-23-235and PA-23-250
(six place), SerialNos. 27-2000 to
27-2504 incl. and PA-23-250(six place),
SerialNos. 27-2505 to 27-3836 incl. and 27-3838
to 27-3943 incl) ........................ . IK19
Reissued: 2/18/81
1120
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
5-42. Installation of Rudder Trim Indicator Wire

(PA-23-250; PA-23-235 and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to
27-2504 incl. and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505
to 27-3836 incl. and 27-3838
to 27-3943 incl.) ............. IK19
5-43. Rigging and Adjustment of Rudder Trim
Indicator Wires (PA-23-250
to 27-2504 incl. and PA-23-250
to 27-3836 incl. and 27-3838 to
27-3943 incl.) ............. IK20
5-44. Removal of Rudder Trim Indicator Wires
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-383 7, 27-3944 and up) .................. IK20
5-45. Installation of Rudder Trim Indicator Wire
27-3837, 27-3944 and up) ............ IK21
5-46. Adjustment of Rudder Trim Indicator Wire
27-3837, 27-3944 and up) .................... IK21
5-47. Trim Drum .............. ......... ............. 1K22
5-48. Wrapping Trim Drum ............ .. .... ..... .. K22
5-49. Wing Flap Controls ................... ............. 1K23
5-50. Removal of Flap Actuator Assembly . . . ............. IK23
5-51. Installation of Flap Actuator Assembly . . ............. 1K23
5-52. Rigging and Adjustment of Flaps ..... .. . . . . . . . .. . . IL
5-53. Removal of Flap Position Sender .. .. . . . . . . . .. . . IL3
5-54. Installation of Flap Position Sender .... ............. IL3
5-55. Rigging and Adjustment of Flap Position Sender IL3
5-56. Stabilator Trim and Flap Interconnect System
(Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up) ....................... IL4
5-57. Removal of Stabilator Trim and Flap
Interconnect System ........... 1L4
5-58. Installation of Stabilator Trim and Flap
Interconnect System ........... IL4
5-59. Adjustment of Stabilator Trim and Flap
Interconnect System ........... IL5
5-60. Control System Friction Limits ............ IL5
5-61. Friction in the Stabilator Control System ...... 1L5
5-62. Friction in the Rudder Control System ............... IL5
5-63. Friction in the Aileron Control System ............... IL6
5-64. Adjustment of Stabliator Tab Position Indicator IL6
Reissued: 2/18/81
1121
SECTION V
SURFACE CONTROLS
5-1. INTRODUCTION. This section provides the removal, installation, and

rigging and adjustment procedures for the control assemblies of the various
structural surfaces. For the removal and installation of the structural surfaces
of the airplane, refer to Section IV. The assemblies need not be removed in
order of paragraphs since each paragraph describes the individual removal and
installation of a component.
5-2. DESCRIPTION. The primary flight controls of PA-23 series airplanes are
of the conventional type, operated by dual control wheels and rudder pedals. A
system of cables, pulleys, push-pull rods and bellcranks transfer the movement
of the control wheel, control column and rudder pedals to the ailerons, stabilator
and rudder.
The aileron controls consist of two-control wheels connected by torque
tubes to sprockets on each end of the control column cross member. A chain is
wrapped around the sprockets and around a double adjustable sprocket on the
vertical post of the control column. The chain is connected to the two piece pri-
mary aileron control cable which is routed along the sides of the fuselage to the
main spar, where the two pieces are permanently fastened together, and out
through the wings to a bellcrank in each wing. A one-piece balance cable is also
connected between the bellcranks. As the control wheels are moved, the control
cables move the bellcranks and actuate push-pull rods to move the ailerons.
The stabilator controls are also connected to the control column on the top
left side. From the connecting point, cables are routed around a series of pulleys
down under the floor and aft to the tail section of the airplane. The aft end of
each cable connects to the stabilator balance arm which in turn is attached to the
stabilator torque tube. As the control wheels are moved forward or aft, the
cables move the balance arm up and down, thus turning the torque tube and stab-
ilator.
The rudder is controlled by the pilot's and copilot's rudder pedals. The
rudder pedals also control the nose wheel steering on the ground which is ex-
plained in Section VII. Cables are connected to both sides of the rudder pedal
assemblyand are routed aft through the bottom of the fuselage to the rudder horn.
As rudder pedals are pushed, the cables move in opposite directions turning the
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1I22
TABLE V-I. CONTROL SURFACE TRAVEL AND CABLE TENSION
A750
Aileron 30° + 2°
LEVEL
15 ± 2°
A749 SERVO TAB TRAVELS REQUIRE NO

Rudder
ADJUSTMENTS. THE TRAVEL IS
RudderServoTab DEPENDENT UPON MAIN SURFACE
RudderTrim Tab TRAVEL AND TRIM ADJUSTMENT.
25 ° + 1°
NEUTRAL
19° + 10
TRIM TAB TRAVELS
WITH RUDDER IN
NEUTRAL POSITION.
Flap 50° 2° Down
Control Wheel A756
86 86
MEASURED FROM FACE

OF INSTRUMENT PANEL
Rudder Pedal Neutral 12° aft of vertical

Neutralto fwd 18.5° , 2.45 in.
Neutral to aft 21.5 ° , 2.843 in. 40° , 5.293 Total
SURFACE CONTROLS
Revised: 4/26/83
1123
TABLE V-I. CONTROL SURFACE TRAVEL AND CABLE TENSION (cont.)
Stabilator (PA-23-250)
Stabilator Anti-ServoTravel
Stabilator Trim Travel
NOTE:
Stabilator Anti-Servo Travel
Stabilator Trim Travel
NOTE:
TRIM TAB FREE PLAY MUST
Serial Nos. 27-4426, 27-4574 EXCEED 1/10 OF AN INCH. R
to 27-7554168 incl., and TO SECTION IV, PARAGRAPI
FOR PROCEDURE.
27-8054001
SURFACE CONTROLS
Revised: 4/26/83
1124
TABLE V-I. CONTROL SURFACE TRAVEL AND CABLE TENSION (cont.)
Stabilator (PA-23-250)
StabilatorAnti-ServoTravel
9° 10
LEVEL
- 00
3°30 ' +30' UP
- 00
LEVEL
Stabilator Trim Travel. Use angles

noted or seeFigure 5-5a for travel
measurements.
NOTE:
TRIM TAB FREE PLAY MUST NOT EXCEED 1/10 OF AN INCH.
Serial Nos. 27-76540001 to
REFER TO SECTION IV, PARAGRAPH 4-23a FOR PROCEDURE.
27-7954121 incl.
CABLE TENSIONS:
AILERON 40 LBS + 25% -0%
STABILATOR 35 LBS +/- 10%
STABILATOR SERVOTAB* 15 LBS +/- 20%
RUDDER 30 LBS +/- 20%
RUDDER SERVOTAB 10 LBS +/- 20%
TRIM TAB INTERCONNECT** 30-60 LBS.
NOTE
CABLE TENSIONS GIVENAPPLY ONLYTO

AIRPLANES WITHOUT AUTOPILOT
BRIDLE CABLES ATTACHED. REFER TO
APPROPRIATE AUTOPILOT SERVICE
'WITH BUNGEE DISCONNECTED MANUAL FOR PROPERCABLE TENSIONS
**TENSION OF BOTH CABLES ADDED TOGETHER. WHEN ATTACHING BRIDLE CABLES
SURFACE CONTROLS
Revised: 4/26/83
1J1
rudder horn and rudder.

Stabilator and rudder trim are controlled by hand crank systems located within the
cockpit ceiling. As each crank is turned the movement is transferred to the particular trim
drum in the tail section. With the rotation of the drums, a screw is moved through the drum,
moving a push-pull rod connected to the trim tab. An indicator wire is connected which
transmits an indication of trim position to the indicator located in the cockpit ceiling. On
PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up, a trim tab interconnect
system is installed which connects the flap actuation to the stabilator trim tab. On PA-23-250
(six place) airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-8054001 and up a control column bobweight is
installed.
The wing flap system is operated by the hydraulic system of the airplane and is
described in Section VI. Non-hydraulic components and rigging of the flaps are discussed in
this section.
For a visual description of the various control systems, refer to the illustrated figures
throughout this section.
5-3. TROUBLESHOOTING. Troubles peculiar to the control system are listed in Table
V-II at the back of this section, along with their probable causes and suggested remedies.
54. STANDARDPROCEDURES. The following tips may be helpful in the removal and
installation of the various assemblies.
a. It is recommended, though not always necessary, to level and place the airplane on
jacks during riggingand adjustment of controls.
b. Remove turnbuckle barrels from cable ends before withdrawing cables through
structures.
c. Tie a cord to cable end before drawing cable through structures to facilitate
reinstallation of cable.
d. Turnbuckle stations are givenat neutral position.
e. When referring to marking cable ends, etc., before disconnecting,a felt inker may be
used.
f. When turnbuckles have been set to correct cable tension, no more than three threads
should be exposed from either end of the turnbuckle barrel.
g. Cable tension should be taken with the appropriate surface control in its neutral
position.
h. To remove or install any unit of an AutoPilot, refer to grid 5A9 for the appropraite
Piper ServiceManual.
i. When installing rod end jam nuts refer to Figure 5-2 for proper installation
method..
5-5. CONTROL COLUMN ASSEMBLY.
5-6. REMOVAL OF CONTROL COLUMN ASSEMBLYCOMPONENTS. (Refer to
Figure 5-I.)
a. Remove either control tube and wheel by removing the two nuts, washers
and bolts from the forward end of the tube. Pull the tube through the instrument
panel.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1J2
b. The control column roller guide assembly may be removed by the following
procedure:
1. Disconnect the recoil strap spring (1I) from the fuselage frame guide tube (3)
by removingthe bolt and self-lockingnut holdingit in place. (S/N 27-1 to 27-7554168only.)
2. Cut the safety wire and remove the bolt, spacer (14), bushing (12) and
roller (13) from each side of the guide tube.
3. Remove the bushing (12), spring (11), and roller mounting blocks (10)
by removing the bolt, bushing, and self-locking nut.
c. The control wheel tube roller assembly (4) may be removed by the following
procedure:
1. Remove the instrument trim panel that surrounds the control tube by
removing attaching screws and disconnecting instrument lights behind the trim
panel, if installed.
2. Remove the four screws from around the control wheel tube that secure
the roller assembly.
3. If the control wheel assembly is still installed, remove the rolled as-
sembly by removing the self-locking nut, machine screw, roller, and spring
washer from one side and at the bottom of the assembly thus separating the unit.
The assembly may be further disassembled as necessary.
d. Either sprocket assembly on the top of the control column maybe removed
1. Remove the chain (9) from the sprocket (15) by disconnecting the turn-
buckles on either end of the chain.
2. Remove the bolt and self-locking nut on the forward side of the sprocket
to be removed.
3. Remove the bolts installed through the forward end of the control wheel
tube, if not previously removed.
4. Remove the sprocket shaft and universal joint (20) from the aft side of
the tube.
5. Remove the two bearings (17) and shims (18 and 19), if installed.
e. Remove the center sprocket (2) by removing the attaching bolt and self-
locking nut.
f. Remove the bottom center aileron pulley by removing the attaching nut,
washer and bolt.
g. Remove the bearings from the bottom of the tube assembly as follows:
1. Remove the nuts from either end of the retaining rod installed through
the tube.
2. Remove the retaining rod from the tube.
3. Move the tube away from the mounting brackets.
4. Remove the bearings from both ends of the bottom control tube.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1J3
h. On airplane with serial numbers 27-8054001 and up, remove the bobweight assembly
as follows:
1. Remove the access panels on the left and right side of the fuselage nose section at
station 51.00
2. Disconnect the bobweight control tube from the arm assembly.
3. Remove the lock nuts from the attachment rod extending through the arm assem-
bly piviot and fuselage frame.
4. Remove the attachment rod, bobweight and arm assembly with the inserted bear-
ing on both ends of the piviot tube.
5. The bobweight control tube may be removed from the control column by loosen-
ing the clamp from the protective boot inside the cockpit and disconnecting the tube rod end at
the control column.
5-7. INSTALLATION OF CONTROL COLUMN ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS.

(Refer to Figure 5-I.)
a. Install the bearings to the bottom of the tube assembly as follows:
1. Insert the bearings in both ends of the bottom control tube.
2. Align the tube with the mounting brackets on the floor.
3. Install the retaining rod through the brackets and the bottom control
tube.
4. Secure the rod in place with attaching nuts on either end.
b. Install the bottom center aileron pulley with attaching bolt and self-locking
nut.
c. Install the center sprocket (2) with attaching bolt and self-locking nut.
d. Install either sprocket assembly to the top of the control column by the
following procedure:
1. Install a bearing (17) to each side of the tube for the sprocket to be in-
stalled.
2. Install the sprocket shaft and universal (20) through the aft side of the
tube.
NOTE
It may be necessary to shim (.012, P/N 85012-58 and

.018, P/N 85012-59) the shaft on the aft side to insure
a proper fit between the bearings and the end of the
universal joint. A .010 maximum clearance is per-
missible.
3. Install the sprocket (15) on the forward end of the shaft and secure with
bolt and self-locking nut.
4. Install the universal (20) to the control wheel tube, if installed.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued:2/ 18/81
1J4
A751
2454
1. TURNBUCKLE
2. DOUBLESPROCKET ASSEMBLY
3. FUSELAGEFRAME
4. ROLLERASSEMBLY
5. CONTROL WHEELAND TUBE
6. CONTROLCOLUMN
7. AILERONCABLES
8. STABILATORCABLES
9. CONTROLCHAIN
10. ROLLERMOUNTINGBLOCKS
11. SPRING- NEGATOR
12. BUSHING
13. ROLLER
14. SPACER
15. SPROCKET
16. STOPPINS
17. BEARING
18. SHIM (.012)
19. SHIM (.018)
20. UNIVERSALJOINT
21. SPRING- CONTROLCOLUMN
22. BOBWEIGHT
23. CONTROL TUBE
24. ARM ASSEMBLY
A449
* A752
20
II
2 REQ., SERIAL NOS. 27-2505

27-7554168 Incl.
SKETCH B
N
SKETCH A
Figure 5-1. Control Column Installation
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1J5
e. Install the control wheel tube roller assembly (4) by the following procedure:
1. If the control wheel tube is removed, install the assembled unit to the
forward side of the instrument panel and secure with attaching screws.
2. If the control wheel tube is installed, assemble the unit around the tube,
slide into position and secure to the forward side of the instrument panel with
self-locking screws.
3. Position the control wheel in neutral (fore and aft) and adjust the roller
attaching bolts until all three rollers contact the tube and the spring washers
start to compress.
4. Install the instrument trim panel, if applicable, and connect the instru-
ment lights, if installed.
f. Install the control column roller guide assemblyby the followingprocedure:
1. Assemble the spring (11) to the bushing (12). (On Serial Nos. 27-2505 to
27-7554168, use two springs.)
2. Position the bushing (12), spring(s)(11), and roller mounting blocks (10) to the
control column and secure with a bolt and self-lockingnut. (No spring for 27-7654001 and
up.)
3. Position the spacer (14) below the roller guide tube and install a bolt
bushing (12) and roller (13), through the spacer, to each side of the guide tube.
g. Install the control tube and wheel (5) by inserting it through the instrument
panel. Slide the tube over the aft end of the sprocket universal (20) and secure
with attaching bolts and self-locking nuts.
h. On airplanes with serial numbers 27-8054001and up install the bobweightassemblyas
follows:
1. Position the arm assemblywith the bearingsinserted in the piviot tube ends and the
bobweight towards the nose of the airplane, between the fuselage frames at station 42.00.
2. Install the attachment rod through the frame and arm assembly.Secure the rod
with locknuts. Ascertain that the arm assemblyrotates freely.
3. If removed, install the control tube through the protective boot and connect the
rod end to the control column.
4. Connect the control tube to the bobweight arm assembly.
5. Ascertain that there is clearance of 1.20of an inch betweenthe top surface of the
bobweightand the fuselagecross tube at station 36.25when the control wheelis in its aft most
position (stabilator against the up stop).
6. Secure the boot to the control tube inside the cockpit after insuring fulltravel re-
quirements. Install the accesspanels to the forward nose section.
5-8. AILERON CONTROLS.

5-9. REMOVAL OF AILERON CONTROL CABLES. (Refer to Figure 5-3.)
a. Remove the access plates located under each wing along the leading edge at
stations 121.75 and 141.25.
b. Remove the wing root fairings from each wing by removing attaching screws.
c. Remove the top center section or access panel from each nacelle.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued:2/ 18/81
1J6
d. Remove the aileron control primary cable (3) by the following procedure:
1. Remove the front seats and tracks.
2. Remove the main spar cover by the following procedure:
(a) Remove the attaching screws around the fuel control pedestal.
(b) Remove the spar cover attaching screws by pulling the floor and
side carpet back gaining access to the screws.
(c) Lean the fuel control pedestal forward slightly and remove the spar
cover.
3. Remove the scuff plates below the rudder pedals.
4. Pull the carpet back around the rudder pedals and remove the pulley
cover in each corner.
5. Disconnect the aileron cables at the control column by separating turn-
buckle assemblies (8).
6. Remove the aileron cable pulley (9) on the control column by removing
attaching nut, washers and bolt.
7. Remove the side carpet trim panels by removing the trim screws and
the molding just under the cabin entrance door.
8. Remove the access panel on the left side of the nose section.
9. Remove the plastic tape from the edge of the left front floor plate around
the rudder pedals.
10. Remove the machine screw from the forward outboard side of the floor
plate by holding the nut inside the access opening in the nose.
11. Remove the machine screw from the aft outboard side of the floor plate.
12. Remove the left front pulley (7). Lift the left side of floor plate and
remove the nut, washers and bolt.
13. Remove the access plate on the bottom right side of the fuselage.
14. Remove the right front pulley (7) by removing the nut, washers and bolt.
15. Remove the aileron rub-blocks (5) that are secured to the fuselage frame
on each side of the forward cabin area.
16. Remove the aft aileron pulleys (15) by removing nut, washers, rub-
block (12), guard clip (11) and bolt.
17. Draw the forward ends of the control cable back to the main spar.
18. Remove the wiring tube (19) and "U" bolt (18) on each side, located on
the inboard wing rib (16).
19. Remove the guide pulleys (17) from the bracket just inside the inboard
end of each wing. Move the wiring tube (19) out of the way and remove the nut,
washers and bolt.
20. Remove the retaining cap from each rub-block (4) located inside the
nacelle.
21. Remove the guard pins from the pulleys (1) at station 121.75 in each
wing.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued:2/18/81
1J7
DAMAGE
HERE
WRONG
TOOL(RESULTINGIN LOCKEDBALL)
IMPROPER DAMAGE
HERE
ONLY CORRECT METHOD A SPECIAL WRENCH MAY BE

REQUIRED WITH A LONG THROAT
Figure 5-2. Correct Method of Installing Rod End Bearings
22. Separate the forward turnbuckle assembly at the aileron bellcrank (25)
and remove the turnbuckle barrel.
23. Draw the cable through the wing into the fuselage.
e. Remove the aileron balance cable (2) by the following procedure:
1. Remove the wiring tube (19), "U" bolt (18) on each side locatedon the
inboard wing rib (16), if not previously removed.
2. Remove the guide pulleys (17) from the bracket just inside the inboard
end of each wing. Move the wiring tube out of the way and remove the nut,
washers and bolt.
3. Remove the rub-block retaining cap (4) from each rub-block located
inside the top center section of the nacelle.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1J8
2130
1. PULLEYS
A754 2. BALANCE CABLE
3. CONTROL CABLE
4. RUB BLOCK
5. RUB BLOCK
6. GUARD POSTS
7. PULLEY
8. TURNBUCKLES
9. PULLEY
10. CONTROL COLUMN
11. CABLE GUARD
12. RUB BLOCK
13. BALANCE CABLE
14. CONTROL CABLE
15. PULLEY
16. INBOARD WING RIB
17. PULLEYS
18. "U" BOLT
19. WIRING TUBE
20. GUARD PIN
21. CONTROL CABLE
22. BALANCE CABLE
23. AILERON CONTROL TU BE
24. TURNBUCKLE
25. BELLCRANK
15 26. BOLT STOP
27. ADJUSTMENT SCREW
28. STOP BLOCK
SKETCHA
Figure 5-3. Aileron Controls
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1J9
A753
SKETCH B
28-
27 -
SKETCH C
Figure 5-3. Aileron Controls (cont.)
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1J10
NOTE
If an AltiMatic III or AutoControl III is installed, re-

move the bridle cable from the aileron balance cable
inside the right engine nacelle. Remove the squeeze
sleeve and the bridle cable clamp by removing three
screws from each clamp.
4. Remove the guard pins from the pulleys (1) at station 121.75 in each
wing.
5. Separate the aft turnbuckle assembly (24) at the aileron bellcrank.
6. Draw the cable through the fuselage, the wings, and the access hole at
the aileron bellcrank.
5-10. INSTALLATION OF AILERON CONTROL CABLES. (Refer to Figure 5-3.)

a. Install the aileron balance cable (2) by the following procedure:
1. Insert the cable through the access hole at the aileron bellcrank and
draw it through the wings and fuselage.
2. Connect the aft turnbuckle assembly (24) to the aileron bellcrank (25)
with clevis bolt, washer, nut and cotter pin.
3. Hold the cable inthe pulley slot and install a new guard pin through the
pulley bracket at station I2I.75.
4. Install the cables to the rub-block (4), located inside the top center
section of each nacelle, and secure the retaining cap.
5. Install the pulleys (17) to the mounting bracket just inside the inboard
end of each wing with bolt, washers and nut.
6. Move the wiring tube (19) on each wing into position and secure with a
"U" bolt (18) to the inboard wing rib.
b. Install the aileron control cable (3) by the following procedure:
1. Insert the cable through the side of the fuselage and draw it through the
wing.
2. Connect the forward turnbuckle assembly at the aileron bellcrank (25).
3. Hold the cable in the pulley slot and install a new guard pin through the
pulley bracket at station 121.75.
4. Install the cables to the rub-block (4), located inside the top center
section of each nacelle, and secure the retaining cap.
5. Install the pulleys (17) to the mounting bracket, just inside the inboard
end of each wing, with bolt, washers and nuts.
6. Move the wiring tube (19) on each wing into position and secure with a
"U" bolt (18) to the inboard wing rib.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1Jll
7. Install the cable to the aft aileron pulleys (15) and secure in place with
bolt, guard clip (11), rub-block (12), washers and nut.
8. Install the aileron rub-blocks (5) to the fuselage frame on each side of
the forward cabin area.
9. Install the cable to the forward pulleys (7) and secure them in place
with bolt, washers and nut.
10. Secure the left front floor plate using a machine screw in the aft left
corner, and a bolt and nut in the forward left corner.
II. Apply plastic tape around the edge of the left front floor plate to cover
rough edges and provide a seal between the floorboards and the plate.
12. Wrap the cables around the control column pulley (9) and install the
pulley to the lower end of the control column with bolt, washers and nut.
13. Connect the turnbuckle assemblies (8) to the chainonthe control column.
14. Install the pulley covers on the front floor plates on each side.
c. Set cable tension per Table V-I and check control cable rigging and adjust-
ment per paragraph 5-13.
NOTE
If an autopilot is installed, consult the bottom of the Section

XII (Electronics) Table of Contents page (Aerofiche Grid
5A9) for the part number of the appropriate ServiceManual
for information on installation of the bridle cable.
d. Install all access plates, panels and trim.
5-11. REMOVAL OFAILERON BELLCRANK ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 5-3.)

a. Remove the access plate to the bellcrank assembly. (Refer to Access and
Inspection Providions, Section II.)
b. Relieve cable tension from the control system by rotating one of the turn-
buckles attached to the bellcrank.
c. Disconnect the turnbuckle ends from the forward and aft ends of the bell-
crank (25) by removing cotter pin, nut, washer and clevis bolt.
d. Disconnect the aileron control tube (23) at the bellcrank.
e. Remove the pivot bolt securing the bellcrank by first bending the corners
of the bolt stop (26) away from the nut and removing the nut and bolt.
f. Remove the bellcrank (25) from the wing.
g. The stop block (28) may be removed by unbolting it and removing it from
the wing.
SURFACE CONTROLS
1J12
1J12 Reissued: 2/18/81
5-12. INSTALLATION OF AILERON BELLCRANK ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 5-3.)

a. Install the stop block (28) and torque bolts, if previously removed.
b. Position the bellcrank (25) with the adjustable stops (27) toward the outboard end of
the wing.
c. Install the pivot bolt and nut.
d. Torque the nut, then bend the corners of the bolt stop (26) around the bolt holding it
secure.
e. Connect the turnbuckle ends to the bellcrank with clevis bolt, washer and nut. Secure
and safety with cotter pins. Do not tighten turnbuckle fork ends on bellcrank so tight that the
ends cannot rotate.
f. Connect the aileron control tube (23) to the bellcrank (25) with bolt, nut and cotter
pin.
g. Set cable tension and check rigging and adjustment of aileron controls as described in
paragraph 5-13.
h. Install access plate and secure.
5-13. RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT OF AILERON CONTROLS. (Refer to Figure 5-4.)
NOTE
If an autopilot is installed, consult the bottom of the Section
XII (Electronics) Table of Contents page (Aerofiche Grid 5A9)
for the part number of the appropriate Service Manual for
information on rigging and adjustment.
a. To rig the aileron controls, set the right and left aileron bellcranks in neutral position
by attaching a fabricated aligning tool within both wings as shown in Figure 5-4. (This tool
may be fabricated from dimensions given in Figure 5-16.) The fabricated tool may be
installed by the following procedure:
1. Remove the access plate to the aileron bellcrank just aft from the leading edge of
each wing at station 141.1.
2. Remove the bellcrank stop block by removing the self-locking nuts and bolts.
3. Remove the cotter pin and nut from the forward turnbuckle clevis attached to the
bellcrank. The bolt should not be removed.
4. Position the tool to the bellcrank bracket with the tool pins inserted in the stop
block attachment holes and the turnbuckle clevis attachment bolt inserted through the thin
arm of the tool. Position the holding device in the lightening hole under the tool tightening
the machine screw until the bellcrank tool is securely held in place. Do not over tighten the
screw.
b. Check and adjust the aileron for neutral position by the following procedure:
1. Place a straight-edge against the underside of the wing, with the aft end even with
the trailing edge of the aileron. Do not place the tool over rivets.
2. With the bellcrank neutral, the underside of the wing and aileron should fit flush
with the straight edge. Apply a slight up pressure against the underside of the aileron at the
trailing edge while making this check (or adjustment) to allow for free motion in the controls.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1J13
1J13
3. If the wing skin and the aileron skin do not contact the straight edge,
disconnect the control tube from either the aileron or the bellcrank and rotate
the tube and rod-end until the straight edge contacts both skin surfaces.
4. Connect the tube and tighten the rod end jam nuts.
NOTE
Be sure that there are no more than 9 rod end threads

exposed on either end after adjustment has been made.
c. With the bellcranks in the neutral position, adjust the cable tension on the
balance cable and the control cable between the bellcranks, using tensions given
in Table V-I. Alternately adjust the balance and control cable turnbuckles.
d. Ascertain that the control wheels are in a parallel relationship with each
other. If the control wheels are not parallel, adjust using the following procedure:
1. Loosen the vertical aileron turnbuckles at the control column.
2. Remove the chain from the center sprocket and one control wheel
sprocket.
3. Holding the control wheels in a parallel relationship, reinstall the chain
to the sprockets with the chain end turnbuckle hanging even.
4. Tighten the aileron cable turnbuckles.
5. If only a fine adjustment is needed, use the following procedure:
(a) Loosen the two outside bolts through the center sprocket.
(b) Adjust the chain turnbuckle to provide a parallel condition in the
control wheels.
NOTE
Whenever the chain is moved or the chain turnbuckle

adjusted, make sure there is no slack in the chain.
e. With the bellcranks in neutral position, adjust the cable tension on the con-
trol cable withinthe fuselage at the vertical turnbuckles or control column. Ad-
just to maintain a neutral-center alignment of control wheels.
SURFACE CONTROLS
.Reissued: 2/18/81
1J14
2462
TOOL
Figure 5-4. Installation of Aileron Bellcrank RiggingTool

NOTE
It may be necessary to readjust the horizontal turn-

buckle on the control column to maintain a parallel
relationship between the control wheels. If this turn-
buckle is adjusted, the vertical turnbuckles on the
control column must be adjusted to maintain proper
cable tension.
f. Tighten the nuts of the bolts installed through the center sprocket.
NOTE
When rigging has been completed, tension should be

equal all through the system including the control chain.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued:2/18/81
1J15
g. With the aileron neutral, place a bubble protractor on the inboard section of the
aileron and establish neutral or zero on the protractor. Remove the tools holding the aileron
bellcranks in neutral, replace the aileron stop block and the nut and cotter pin on clevis
attaching bolt, and safety. Adjust the bellcrank stop bolts to the specific aileron travel from
neutral as given in Table V-I. Stops of both bellcranks should contact their stop blocks at the
same time and before the control wheel contacts its stops.
NOTE
Later model PA-23-250(6) Aztecs have provided a means for

safetying the aileron bellcrank stop screws. The appropriate
parts must be lock-wired in such a manner that the lock-wire is
put in tension should the stop screw or lock nut loosen. After
starting the lock-wire thru the head of the screw, make one
complete wrap around the shank of the screw next to the jam
nut. Finish safety wiring thru holes provided in the bellcrank
(the lock-wire should be installed and twisted so that the loop
around the head stays down and does not tend to come up over
the bolt head and leave a slack loop).
h. Check control operation, bolts and turnbuckles for safety and installation of cable
guard pins.
i. Install access plates and panels.
5-14. AILERON TRIM. A fixed metal tab, which is adjustable on the ground for lateral trim
of the airplane, is incorporated in the trailing edge of each aileron.
5-15. STABILATOR CONTROLS.
5-16. REMOVAL OF STABILATOR CONTROL CABLES. (Refer to Figure 5-5.)
a. Remove the bottom fuselage access panel by removing attaching screws.
b. Remove the access panel located on the left side of the fuselage just forward of the
stabilator and the access plate on the underside of the fuselage, located just left of the wheel
well.
c. Remove the seats from the airplane.
d. Remove the rear seat tracks.
e. Pull the floor carpet back from the aft cabin wall and remove the access plate from the
left corner.
f. Remove the aft cabin trim panel or aft baggage compartment trim panel by removing
attaching screws.
g. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes, remove the baggage compartment floor panel by
removing the attaching screws.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1J16
NOTE
If the airplane is equipped with an oxygen system and

removal of the oxygen cylinder is necessary, refer to
Section XIV.
h. Relieve tension from the stabilator control cables by loosening one of the
cable turnbuckles within the aft section of the fuselage.
i. Remove the guard pins (18) from the stabilator control pulley bracket (14)
located on the top left side of the control column (16).
j. Remove the cable guard pins (18) from the stabilator pulley bracket (14)
beneath the floor panel at station 44.25 by entering through the access opening
to the left of the nose gear wheel well.
k. Disconnect the cables at the control column by removing cotter pin, nut,
washer and bolt.
. Draw the cable(s) (2) from the forward part of the fuselage aft to the main
spar.
m. Remove the pulleys (1), just aft of the main spar at station 93.5, by remov-
ing the self-locking nut, washers and bolt.
n. Remove the cable guard pins from the stabilator pulleys (3) on both sides
of the aft cabin area bulkhead at station 153.25.
o. On PA-23-250 and PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes, Serial Nos. 27-3050, 27-3154
and up, if removing the left stabilator cable, remove the cable guard pin from the stabilator
pulley bracket just aft of the baggage compartment at station 193.0.
p. If removing the right stabilator cable, remove the fairlead from the fuselage
bulkhead at station 192.4.
q. Disconnect the stabilator cable(s) from the aft cable(s) at the turnbuckle(s)
in the aft section of the fuselage and draw the cable(s) forward to the main spar.
r. If required, the two aft cables attached to the balance tube maybe removed
1. Disconnect the cables from the balance tube by removing cotter pin,
nut, washer and bolt.
2. For the removal of the upper cable, remove the fairlead from the
bracket mounted to the bulkhead at station 257.5.
3. Remove the top and/or bottom stabilator pulley, as required, by re-
moving nut, washer and bolt.
4. Remove the cable(s).
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1J17
5-17. INSTALLATIONOF STABILATORCONTROLCABLES. (Refer to Figure 5-5.)

a. If either of the two cables attached to the balance tube were removed, reinstall by
the followingprocedure:
1. Connect the two cables to the balance arm (40) with bolt, washers, nut and
cotter pin.
2. Position the stabilator cables and pulleys (8) above and below the balance tube.
Install a bolt, washersand a self-lockingnut, securing each pulley in place.
3. For the upper cable, assemble the fairlead (12) to the cable and install it to the
bracket mounted to the bulkhead at station 258.0.
b. Install the stabilator cables by drawing them aft from the main spar to the aft
section of the fuselage and connect them to turnbuckles of the short cables connected to
the balance tube.
c. Assemble the fairlead (11) to the lower cable and install it in the bulkhead at station
192.4.
d. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes, Serial Nos. 27-3050, 27-3154 and up, install a
new cable guard pin to the bracket of the left cable pulley bracket, just aft of the baggage
compartment, at station 193.0.
e. Install new cable guard pin(s) to the pulley bracket at the forward and/or aft side of
the bulkhead, located to the lower rear of the tubular structure, at station 153.25.
f. Install the stabilator pulleys (1) just aft of the main spar at station 93.5 using a bolt,
washer and self-lockingnut.
g. Draw the forward end(s) of the cable(s) forward through the stabilator pulley
bracket (14), located through the access opening, to the left of the nose gear wheel well at
station 44.25.
h. Position the left cable over the top forward pulley (13) of the stabilator pulley
control bracket (14) located at the top left of the control column (16). Temporarily
connect the cable end to the control column.
i. Position the right cable over the bottom forward pulley (13) and around the aft
pulley (13) of the stabilator pulley control bracket (14). Connect the cable ends to the
control column with a bolt, washer, nut and cotter pin. Allow ends freedom to rotate.
CAUTION
Determine that no control cables are crossed, causing

opposite control.
j. Install cable guard pins (18) to the control pulley bracket (14) and the bracket
directly below at station 44.25.
k. On airplanes equipped with a stabilator bungee spring installation, install bungee
spring (47) by attaching it to the adjuster link (50) and to link at station 192.3.
1. Adjust the cable tension and check rigging and adjustment of the stabilator per
paragraph 5-18.
m. Safety turnbuckles; install access plates, panels, carpet, trim; and in PA-23-250(six
place) airplanes, the aft baggagecompartment floor.
SURFACE CONTROLS
1J18
1J18 Reissued: 2 /18/81
1J19
2449
2
BALANCE ARM POSITION WITH AIRPLANE AT REST AND STABILATOR AGAINST STOPS.
40
46 \
B B
r
PRIMARY
STABILATOR CABLE
WITH TORQUE TUBE IN POSITION SHOWN
SPRING TO BE INSTALLED WITH 10 LB. TENSION AND
ATTACHED TO THE MOST APPROPRIATE HOLE IN 45. BRACKET ASSEMBLY
CABLE ASSEMBLY
CABLE ASSY. TO MAINTAIN A 10 LB. LOAD INSTALLED. 46
47 SPRING
48 LINK
49 PULLEY
50. ADJUSTER LINK
Stabilator Bungee SpringInstallation SKETCH F

2449 2449
48
47
49/
45
VIEW B-B VIEWA-A
Figure 5-5. Stabilator and Stabilator Trim Controls
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: /2 18/81
1J20
2131
1. PULLEYS - STA. 93.5

2. CONTROL CABLES
3. PULLEYS - STA. 153.25
4. PULLEY -STA.192.4
5. AFT STABILATOR TRIM
CABLE PULLEYS
6. RUB BLOCK
7. STABILATOR TRIM
INDICATOR-WIRE
8. PULLEYS
9. TURNBUCKLES - TRIM CABLES
10. FORWARD STABILATOR TRIM
CABLE PULLEYS
11. FAIRLEAD - STA. 192.4
12. FAIRLEAD - STA. 257.5
13. PULLEY
14. PULLEY BRACKET 22. BRACKET 30. SPRING 37. TRIM DRUM BRACKET
15. CONTROL TUBE 23. PLACARD 31. IDLER LINK 38. STABILATOR STOPS
16. CONTROL COLUMN 24. STABILATOR TRIM HANDLE 32. ADJUSTMENT SCREW 39. STABILATOR STOP HORN
17. FUSELAGE FRAME 25. RUDDER TRIM HANDLE 33. STABILATOR TRIM CONTROL 40. STABILATOR BALANCE ARM
18. GUARD PINS 26. DOUBLE PULLEY ROD 41. TURNBUCKLES - CONTROL CABLES
19. STABILATOR CONTROL CABLES 27. RUDDER TRIM INDICATOR WIRE 34. BELLCRANK ASSEMBLY 42. FWD. TRIM CABLE
20. STABILATOR TRIM CABLE 28. STABILATOR TRIM INDICATOR 35. STOP 43. AFT TRIM CABLE
21. IDLER PULLEY 29. RUDDER TRIM INDICATOR 36. TRIM DRUM 44. ANGLE
2164 15 2165
2440
13
SKETCHB
Figure 5-5. Stabilator and Stabilator Trim Controls (cont.)
SURFACE CONTROLS
1J21
1J21
Reissued: 2/18/81
2450 2163
PA-23-250 PA-23-250. PA-23-235,

(SIX PLACE) SERIAL NOS. PA-23-250 (SIX PLACE) SERIAL NOS.
27-2000 TO 27-3836 INCL. AND
27-3838 TO 27-3943 INCL.
SERIAL NOS.
27-4426 AND 27-4574
AND UP.
SKETCHC-1 SKETCHC-2
TO RQUE5 to 35 IN. LBS.
FINGER
FINGER
TIGHT & INSTALL
TIGHT & INSTALL
CO TTER PIN
NOTE: OBTAIN A PRELIMINARY SETTING OF
.390 PER RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT
OF STABILATOR TRIM INSTRUCTIONS
A419 GIVEN IN PARAGRAPH 5-24, STEP d.
TORQUE50 TO 7
32 SERIAL NOS.
SHOWN-27-4426 AND 27-4574
AND UP.
TRIM INDICATOR WIRE
TRIM INDICATOR WIRE
FORWARD ETABILATOR PA-23-250

TRIM INDICATOR WIRE (SIX PLACE) SERIAL NOS.
27-3837, 27-3944 TO
27-4425, 27-4427 TO
27-4573.
PA-23-250, PA-23-235,
SKETCHD PA-23-250 (SIX PLACE) SERIAL SKETCH E
NOS. 27-2000 TO 27-7554168 INCL.
Figure 5-5. Stabilator and Stabilator Trim Controls (cont.)
SURFACE CONTROLS
1J22
1J22 ~Reissued: 2/18/81
2453
A477 2 TURNS AROUND PULLEY. THIS

CABLE (WITH R.H. THREAD
A478 TERMINAL) GOES TO THE BOTTOM
OF THE PULLEY ON THE FLAP
1 7/8 TURNS AROUND PULLEY TORQUE TUBE.
FWD
26
.025 CL
.125 TO .187
CLEARANCE
15/8 TURNS AROUND PULLEY.
THIS CABLE (WITH L.H. THREAD
TERMINAL) GOES TO THE TOP OF
THE ECCENTRIC PULLEY.
1 1/2 TURNS AROUND PULLEY
NO SPECIFIED
CLEARANCE, BUT
MUST NOT CONTACT
SKETCH B STOP. SKETCHC
Figure 5-6. Stabilator Trim and Flap Interconnect (Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up)
SURFACE CONTROLS
1123 Revised: 4/26/83
2459
A477
TORQUE AN173-IIA 20 TO 25 IN. LBS. TORQUE 50 TO 70 IN. LBS.
TORQUE AN174-IA 50 TO 70 IN. LBS.
VIEW A-A
NOTE 1. OBTAIN A PRELIMINARY SETTING OF
.390 PER RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT
OF STABILATOR TRIM INSTRUCTIONS
GIVEN IN PARAGRAPH 5-24, STEP d.
NOTE 2. OBTAIN A PRELIMINARY SETTING

OF .3125.
NOTE 3. LATER MODEL PA-23-250(6)
AIRCRAFT STABILATORSTOPS
REQUIRE SAFETYING.APPLY THE
LOCK WIRE IN SUCH A MANNER
SEE NOTE 2 THAT THE LOCK WIRE SHALL BE PUT
IN TENSION SHOULD THE SCREW
TEND TO LOOSEN. THE LOCK WIRE
SKETCHA SHOULD ALWAYS BE INSTALLED
AND TWISTED SO THAT THE LOOP
AROUND THE HEAD STAYS DOWN
AND DOES NOT TEND TO COME UP
OVER THE BOLT HEAD AND LEAVE A
SLACK LOOP.
1. PULLEY - FLAP TORQUE TUBE 14. STABILATOR CONTROL CABLES

2. PULLEY -STA. 130.75 15. STABILATOR STOP HORN
3. PULLEYS-STA. 153.88 16. STABI LATOR STOPS
4. PULLEYS -STA. 229.00 17. BELLC.RANK ASSEMBLY
5. PULLEYS -STA. 273.38 18. STOP
6. PULLEY -ECCENTRIC 19. TRIM DRUM
7. TURNBUCKLE- STA. 258.50 20. TRIM DRUM BRACKET
8. TURNBUCKLE - STA. 267.50 21. STABILATOR TRIM INDICATOR WIRE
9. CABLE - FORWARD INTERCONNECT 22. ANGLE
10. CABLE - AFT INTERCONNECT 23. STABILATOR TRIM CONTROL ROD
11. GUARD 24. STOP - ECCENTRIC PULLEY
12. FLAP TORQUE TUBE 25. SPRING
13. STABILATOR BALANCE ARM 26. BALL-CABLE
Figure 5-6. Stabilator Trim and Flap Interconnect (Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up) (cont.)
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1J24
5-18. RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT OF STABILATOR CONTROLS.

a. Level the airplane. (Refer to Leveling, Section II.)
b. Place the stabilator in a neutral position using a fabricated tool and bubble
protractor as shown in Figure 5-7 or Figure 5-8. (The tool may be fabricated from dimensions
given in Figure 5-17 or Figure 5-18.)
c. Support the stabilator in neutral position and adjust the control wheel for neutral
fore and aft. Refer to Table V-I for neutral position of control wheel.
d. Should adjustment be required, remove the tail cone fairing and the access panel
from the left side of the fuselage, just ahead of the stabilator, at station 261.0 by removing
attaching screws.
e. To neutralize the control wheel with the stabilator, adjust the stabilator cable
turnbuckles within the aft section of the fuselage at stations 249.25 and 296.25 to obtain
proper cable tension and to allow the control wheel to neutralize fore and aft. (Refer to
Table V-I.)
f. To obtain the proper stabilator travel, as given in Table V-I, adjust the stabilator
stop bolts at the torque tube horn. Measure the angle of the stabilator travel up and down
with a bubble protractor on the fabricated leveling tool.
NOTE
The stabilator should hit stabilator stop screws before control
wheel shaft in cockpit hits stops. Later model PA-23-250(6)
Aztecs require that a safety be applied to the stop screws after
adjustments are made. Refer to Figure 5-6 for approved
installation of safety wire.
g. Check control and direction of travel.
h. To rig airplanes with a stabilator bungee spring installation, position the balance arm
(40) so that the stabilator is against its stops, then attach the bungee spring to one of the holes
on the adjuster link so that it maintains a 10 lb. load installed.
i. Safety turnbuckles and install the access panel to the side of the fuselage and the tail
cone fairing.
SURFACE CONTROLS
1K1 Reissued: 2/18/81
1
A41
Figure 5-7. Leveling Stabilator

(Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-7554168 incl. and 27-80540001 and up)
A409
3.94
DOWN
4.13
Figure 5-8. Leveling Stabilator

(Serial Nos. 27-7654001 to 27-7954121 incl.)
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2 18 81
1K2
5-19. STABILATOR TRIM.
- NOTE -
Remove excess lubricant build-up from the stabilator trim

cable as follows:
a. Dampen a clean white cloth with Methyl-Ethyl-Ketone
solvent.
b. Place the dampened cable in hand and grasp stabilator
trim cable near the stabilator trim crank.
c. Crank the cable through it's full travel fore and aft
removing any excess buildup of lubricant.
5-20. REMOVAL OF FORWARD STABILATOR TRIM ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure

5-5.)
a. Remove the rudder trim control knob or handle (25) by removing the roll pin securing
it in place.
b. Remove the stabilator trim control knob and handle (24) by removing the attaching
screws from the hub of the handle.
c. Remove the headliner trim plate from around the trim crank assembly by the
1. Remove the attaching screws securing the trim plate.
2. Lower the aft side of the trim plate and disconnect the vent lines.
3. Disconnect the wiring from the lights and their switches.
- NOTE -
It is recommended that the wires be marked for identification

before removal to facilitate reinstallation.
4. Disconnect the control cable from the air control assembly on each side.
5. Remove the headline trim plate.
d. Remove the trim crank bearing bracket assembly (22) by removing attaching screws.
e. Remove the aft cabin or baggage area trim panel gaining access to the aft section of
the fuselage.
f. Disconnect the forward stabilator trim cable (42) at the turnbuckles (9) located in the
aft section of the fuselage.
g. On airplanes equipped with an electric pitch trim servo, use the following procedure:
1. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes only, remove the baggage compartment
ceiling trim panel by removing attaching screws.
2. On all PA-23 airplanes, loosen the two machine screws on the left side of the
servo unit in the baggage compartment that hold the cable guard bracket in place.
3. Unwrap the cable from the pulleys on top of the servo unit.
h. If the cable is not to be reused, cut the left end of the forward cable removing the
turnbuckle. Solder the blank end of a new cable to the end of the old cable.
NOTE
If the trim cables are to be reused, the headliner insulation,

rubblocks and pulleys must be removed from the cabin ceiling.
Unless the headliner is to be replaced, it is not recommended
that it be removed because of difficulties replacing an old
headliner.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued:2 18/81
1K3
5-21. INSTALLATION OF FORWARD STABILATOR TRIM ASSEMBLY. (Refer to

Figure 5-5.)
a. Ascertain that the splice where the old and new cables are joined, as described in
paragraph 5-20, is smooth and minimum in size.
b. Draw the old stabilator trim cable, that is spliced to the new cable, through the
ceilingto the cabin.
NOTE
To prevent breaking the splice, draw the cable in a straight
line and do not use force.
c. Wrap the cable (20) around the trim crank and idler pulleys. Starting at the left side,
the cable is routed around the top groove on the double pulley (26), then around the idler
pulley (21) from right to left and back around the bottom groove on the double pulley (26)
from left to right.
d. With the old and new cable ends still soldered together, draw the cable through the
ceilingto the aft section of the fuselage.
e. Connect the forward cable end to the corresponding aft cable end by rotating the
turnbuckle barrel until three threads on each end are showing.
f. On airplanesequipped with an electric pitch trim servo, use the followingprocedure:
1. Wrap the cable coming from the forward section of the airplane around top
groove on the capstan, around the idler pulley and back around the bottom groove of the
capstan to the aft section of the airplane.
2. Position the cable guard to allow a clearance of .031 of an inch between the
capstan and the guard. Tighten the two machine screwsthat secure it in place.
3. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes only, install the baggagecompartment ceiling
trim panel with attaching screws.
g. Assemblythe turnbuckle eyes and thimble on the remainingaft cable end (43). Turn
the barrel until three threads on each end are showing.
h. Separate the old cable from the new cable where the two were spliced together.
i Insert the free cable end and a thimble through the turnbuckle eye and draw the
cable until it is tight.
j. Temporarily clamp the cable so as not to damage it or allow it to slip.
k. Operate the trim severaltimes to seat the cable to the pulleys and to insure clearance
of all movingparts.
1. Remove the temporary clamp and draw the free end of the cable to the approximate
required cable tension. (Refer to Table V-I.)
m. Secure the free cable end using a nicopress sleeve.
n. Readjust the cable tension using the turnbuckles.
o. Check riggingand adjustment per paragraph 5-24.
p. Safety all turnbuckles.
q. Install all access plates, panels, and trim.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued:2 18/81
1K4
5-22. REMOVAL OF AFT STABILATOR TRIM ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figures 5-5 and
5-6.)
a. Remove the tail cone fairing by removing attaching screws.
b. Remove the access panel from the aft left side of the fuselage.
c. On PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 airplanes, remove the rear seat and the aft cabin trim
panel by removing attaching screws.
d. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes, remove the aft panel from the baggage compart-
ment by removing attaching screws.
e. Block the trim cable at the trim drum to prevent it from unwrapping. (Refer to
Figure 5-9.)
f. Disconnect the turnbuckle (item 9, Figure 5-5) at the ends of the aft stabilator trim
cables (item 43, Figure 5-5).
g. Remove the guard pins from the stabilator trim pulleys (item 5, Figure 5-5) at station
260.2.
h. Remove the guard pins from the rub blocks at station 272.4.
i. Disconnect the trim screw from the bellcrank per Step 1 or 2 noted below:
1. On airplanes not including the stabilator trim and flap interconnect system, re-
move cotter pin, nut, washer and bolt connecting trim screw to bellcrank. (Refer to Sketch E,
Figure 5-5.)
2. Airplanes including stabilator trim and flap interconnect system require relief of
interconnect cable tension. Loosen turnbuckles at stations 258.50 and 267.50. Remove
attaching hardware securing trim screw to eccentric pulley on bellcrank and disconnect
tension spring. (Refer to Sketch A, Figure 5-6.)
j. Remove the trim drum bracket assembly by removing the four attachment bolts at
the bottom of screw assembly.
5-23. INSTALLATION OF AFT STABILATOR TRIM ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figures

5-5 and 5-6.)
a. Ascertain that the trim cable assembly (item 43, Figure 5-5) is evenly wrapped
(centered) on drum (item 36, Figure 5-5 or item 19, Figure 5-6) as given in paragraph 5-48, and
the cables are blocked to prevent them from unwrapping. (Refer to Figure 5-9.)
b. Position the trim drum bracket assembly (item 37, Figure 5-5 or item 20 in Figure 5-6)
between its support brackets and secure with four bolts, washers and nuts.
c. Draw the cable ends into the fuselage and connect the aft trim cable (item 43, Figure
5-5) to the forward trim cable (item 42, Figure 5-5) at the turnbuckles (item 9, Figure 5-5).
d. Connect trim screw to bellcrank. On airplanes including stabilator trim and flap
interconnect system, connect trim screw to eccentric pulley on bellcrank and attach tension
spring.
e. Install the guard pins to the rub blocks at station 272.4.
f. Install the guard pins to the stabilator trim pulleys at station 260.2.
g. Set cable tension and check rigging and adjustment of aft stabilator trim assembly
per paragraph 5-24. If stabilator trim and flap interconnect system is installed, set cable
tension and rigging per paragraph 5-59.
h. Install access plates, panels and trim.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1K5
A451
Figure 5-9. Methods of Blocking Trim Cables
5-24. RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT OF STABILATOR TRIM. (Refer to Figures 5-5

and 5-6.)
a. Remove the tail cone fairing. On airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-4426, 27-4574 and up,
remove the access panel on the aft left side of the fuselage.
b. Rotate the trim drum (item 36, Figure 5-5 or item 19, Figure 5-6) until the cable is
evenly wrapped and the turnbuckle ends (item 9, Figure 5-5) inside the aft fuselage section
are even. (There should be nine and one-quarter wraps on each end of the trim drum.)
c. Ascertain that the cable tension is set as given in Table V-1.
d. A preliminary setting of .390 of an inch between the upper screw stop (item 35,
Figure 5-5 or item 18, Figure 5-6) and the drum housing (item 37, Figure 5-5 or item 20,
Figure 5-6) as measured along the screw (refer to Sketch E, Figure 5-5 or Sketch A, Figure 5-6)
must be confirmed. This measurement is obtained by disconnecting the upper end of the trim
screw from the bellcrank (item 34, Figure 5-5) or eccentric pulley connected to the bellcrank
(item 17, Figure 5-6) and turning the trim screw until .390 of an inch is obtained. Hold the trim
drum stationary while adjusting the screw. If stabilator trim and flap interconnect system is
installed, disconnect interconnect cables at turnbuckles before removing eccentric pulley.
Reconnect the screw with attachment hardware.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Revised: 4/26/83
1K6
e. Position the stabilator in neutral and proceed to set tab travels. Turn the trim in each
direction to screw stops. If tab travels do not agree with angles given in Table V-I, disconnect
the control rod (item 33, Figure 5-5 or item 23, Figure 5-6) from the tab, loosen the jam nut on
the forward end of the rod and turn the rod until the proper travels are obtained. On aircraft
with Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up the rod end adjustments should be made from both ends
of the rod.
NOTE
Upon completion of trim tab rigging of aircraft with Serial

Nos. 27-7654001 and up, the tab trailing edge may be .125 to
.250 of an inch up from the stabilator neutral position.
f. Check minimum number of wraps left on drum. (Minimum allowable is one and
one-quarter wraps.)
g. Check adjustment of trim indicator wire. (Refer to paragraph 5-27 or 5-30.)
h. If stabilator trim and flap interconnect system is installed, reconnect interconnect
cables at turnbuckles and adjust per paragraph 5-59.
i. Install the tail cone fairing and if removed, also install the access panel on the aft left
side of the fuselage.
NOTE
The stabilator trim control rod end bearing located at the

forward end of the control rod (item 33, Figure 5-5 or item
23, Figure 5-6) should be checked for freedom of movement
during the regular 100 hour inspection by disconnecting the
rod at the trim tab and holding the end between your fingers,
try to turn the rod from side to side and rotate up and down.
If the rod will not turn or is hard to turn, the bearing should
be checked more thoroughly by removing the complete
assembly from the airplane.
5-25. REMOVAL OF THE STABILATOR TRIM INDICATOR WIRE. (PA-23-250,

PA-23-235 and PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.; and PA-23-250
[six place], Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3836 incl., 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl.) (Refer to Figure
5-5.)
a. Remove the placard plate from the ceiling of the cabin by removing attaching screws.
b. Remove the tail cone fairing by removing attaching screws.
c. Disconnect the indicator wire at the trim control bellcrank.
d. Disconnect the indicator wire at the indicator arm inside the cabin.
e. Solder a piece of .024 steel wire to the old indicator wire.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Revised:4/26/ 83
1K7
5-26. INSTALLATION OF STABILATOR TRIM INDICATOR WIRE. (PA-23-250,

PA-23-235 and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-000 to 27-2504 incl. and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3836 incl. and 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl.) (Refer to
Figure 5-5.)
a. Draw the old wire from the fuselage installing a new one at the same time.
NOTE
If the indicator wire has broken at a point other than

at either end, it may be necessary to remove access
and trim panels to the overhead area of the cabin to
determine the breaking point and installation proce-
dure.
b. Attach the end of the wire to the aft attachment point and center the nut on
the adjustment screw.
c. Ascertain that the stabilator trim tab is rigged properly. (Refer to Para-
graph 5-24.)
d. Position the stabilator in a neutral position as described in paragraph 5-18
and turn the trim until the trailing edges of the stabilator and stabilator trim tab
align.
e. Insert the end of the wire through the attachment point inside the cabin
ceiling. Pull the wire through the hole until the indicator would read approxi-
mately neutral. Bend the wire back twisting it around itself a minimum of seven
times.
f. Install the placard plate to the ceiling with attaching screws.
g. Adjust the indicator as per paragraph 5-27.
h. Install the tail cone fairing with attaching screws.
5-27. RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT OF STABILATOR INDICATOR

WIRE. (PA-23-250,PA-23-235, and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504
incl. and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3836 incl. and 27-3838 to
27-3943 incl.) (Refer to Figure 5-5.)
a. Ascertain the stabilator is rigged properly as per paragraph 5-18 and posi-
tion the stabilator in neutral. Turn the trim tab until its trailing edge aligns with
that of the stabilator.
b. Withthe tailcone fairing removed, holdthe adjusting screw locknut located
at the aftend of the indicator wire and adjust the screw to obtaina neutral indica-
tion in the cabin.
c. Install the tail cone fairing with attaching screws.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1K8
5-28. REMOVAL OF STABILATOR TRIM INDICATOR WIRES. (PA-23-250 (six place),

Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 and up.)
a. Remove the trim panel from the ceiling of the aft baggage compartment by
b. Remove the placard panel from the cabin ceiling by loosening the set screws in the
light knobs and removing knobs, and removing panel attaching screws.
c. The forward stabilator indicator wire may be removed by the following procedure:
1. Disconnect the indicator wire from the tab on the indicator in the cabin ceiling.
2. Solder a piece of .024 steel wire to the old indicator wire.
NOTE
If the indicator wire has broken at a point other than at

either end, it may be necessary to remove access or trim
panels to determine the breaking point and installation
procedure.
d. The aft stabilator indicator wire may be removed by the following procedure:
1. Remove the bottom section of the tail cone fairing by removing attaching
screws.
2. Disconnect the wire at the arm forward of the trim drum.
4. Disconnect the indicator wire or wires at the idler link inside the baggage
.. compartment.
5-29. INSTALLATION OF STABILATOR TRIM INDICATOR WIRE. (PA-23-250 (six

place), Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 and up.)(Refer to Figure 5-5, Sketch D.)
a. Draw the old wire out installing a new wire at the same time.
b. Ascertain that the adjustment nuts, located in the baggage compartment on the idler
link and on the stabilator trim control bellcrank, are centered on their screws.
c. Position the stabilator in the neutral position. If stabilator trim and flap
interconnect system is installed, also position flaps in full up position. Adjust the trim tab
until the trailing edges of each align.
d. Connect the aft wire by the following procedure:
1. Separate the old wire from the new wire.
2. Insert the aft end of the wire through the angle at the attachment point on the
trim control bellcrank. Bend the wire forward and wrap it around itself at least seven turns.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1K9
3. Hold the idler link perpendicular to its attachment point and attach the forward
end of the wire to the angle on the adjustment screw in the same manner as the aft end.
NOTE
The position of the adjustment screw in the idler link is

important for proper trim indicator operation. Refer to
Figure 5-5, Sketch D for proper location.
e. Connect the forward wire by the following procedure:

2. Insert the aft end of the wire through the bottom hold in the idler link. Bend the
wire forward and wrap it around itself at least seven times.
3. Insert the forward end of the wire through the indicator attachment.
NOTE
Refer to Figure 5-5, Sketch C-l for the proper routing of the
trim indicator wire at the indicator panel for the various
installations.
4. Pull the wire through the indicator attachment until the indicator is centered.
Bend the wire back and secure it in the same manner as the opposite end.
f. Adjust the wire per instructions in paragraph 5-30.
g. Install the placard plate, light control knobs, baggage compartment trim and the tail
cone fairing.
5-30. ADJUSTMENT OF STABILATOR TRIM INDICATOR WIRE. (PA-23-250 (six

place), Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 and up.)
a. Remove the trim panel from the baggage compartment ceiling.
b. Place the stabilator in a neutral position as described in paragraph 5-18. If stabilator
trim and flap interconnect system is installed, also position flaps in full up position.
c. Turn the trim tab control until the trailing edge of the tab aligns with the stabilator.
d. Holding the nut, adjust the screw through the idler link in the baggage compartment
until the indicator is centered.
e. Reinstall the trim panel to the baggage compartment ceiling.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued:2/18/81
1K10
SKETCH A SKETCH B-2

PA-23-250
(SIX PLACE) SERIAL NOS.
27-3837, 27-3944 TO
27-4425, 27-4427 TO
27-4573.
Figure 5-10. Rudder and Rudder Trim Controls
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1Kll
SKETCH D
Figure 5-10. Rudder and Rudder Trim Controls (cont.)
SURFACE CONTROLS
1K12
5-31. RUDDER CONTROLS.
5-32. REMOVAL OF RUDDER CONTROL CABLES.

a. Remove the aft access panel from each side of the nose section by releasing
the stud type panel fasteners.
b. Remove the access panel from the bottom of the fuselage by removing at-
taching screws.
c. Remove the access panel from the left side of the fuselage located below
the leading edge of the vertical fin.
d. Remove the tail cone fairings by removing attaching screws.
e. Remove the center and rear seats.
f. Remove the rear outboard seat tracks from each side of the cabin floor.
g. Pull the carpet back and remove the access plates from each corner of the
aft floor panel of the cabin by removing attaching screws.
h. Remove the trim panel from either the aft cabin or baggage area gaining
access to the aft section of the fuselage.
i. Remove the cable guard pins from the rudder cable pulleys just aft of the
main spar at station 94.0.
j . Remove the rudder pulleys under the aft cabin floor at station 152.0 by re-
moving nut, washers, and cable guard bracket.
k. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes, remove the cable guard pins from the pulleys
just forward of the fuselagebulkhead at station 192.4.
1. Removethe guard pins from the rudder cable pulleys at station 257.5.
m. Disconnect the cables from the torque tube arms by removing the turnbuckle
barrel.
n. Disconnect the cables from the rudder horn by removing the cotter pin, nut,
washers, and bolt from each side.
o. Remove the cables by drawing them aft through the fuselage.
5-33. INSTALLATION OF RUDDER CONTROL CABLES.

a. Connect the cable end straps to each side of the rudder horn with bolt,
washers, nut and cotter pin.
b. Draw the cables forward through the fuselage and connect the cable ends to
the torque tube arms with the use of turnbuckles.
c. Install new cable guard pins to the pulleys at station 257.5.
d. Within the aft section of the fuselageon PA-23-250(six place) airplanes, install new
cable guard pins to the pulleysjust forward of the fuselagebulkhead at station 192.4.
fuselage bulkhead at station 192.4.
e. Install the rudder pulleys, with guard clips, under the aft cabin floor at
station 152.0 using bolt, washers and self-locking nut.
SURFACE CONTROLS

2157 A423
Figure 5. Clamping Rudder Figure 5-12. Installation of Rudder

Figure 5-11. Clamping Rudder Figure 5-12. Installation of Rudder
Pedals in Neutral Aligning Tool (Typical)
f. Install new guard pins to the rudder pulleys just aft of the main spar at
station 94.0.
g. Check rigging and adjustment of rudder controls. (Refer to Paragraph
5-34.)
h. Safety turnbuckles and install all access plates, panels, carpets, seat
tracks, seats and tail cone fairings.
5-34. RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT OF RUDDER CONTROLS. To adjust the

rudder and rudder pedal for neutral, it first should be ascertained that the nose
gear steering has been aligned with the rudder pedals according to Alignment of
Nose Landing Gear, Section VII. Adjustment of the rudder and rudder cables
may be accomplished as follows:
a. Place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to Jacking, Section II.)
b. Level the airplane laterally. (Refer to Leveling, Section II.)
c. Clamp the rudder pedals to align in a lateral position as shown in Figure
5-11.
d. Remove the aft cabin or baggage area trim panel to gain access to the aft
section of the fuselage.
e. Remove the tail cone fairing by removing attaching screws.
f. Remove the nut and washer from the bolt that attaches the left and right
stabilator halves together at the rear spar.
SURFACE CONTROLS
1K14
g. Attach a fabricated checking tool to the previously mentioned bolt and se-
cure with washer and nut. (Referto Figure 5-12.)(The tool may be fabricated from dimensions
given in Figure 5-19.)
h. Place a level on the edge of the tool, leveling the tool vertically.
i . Position the rudder in neutral by adjusting the rudder cable turnbuckles, at
the rudder pedal torque tube arms, until the trailing edge of the rudder is aligned
with the scribe line on the fabricated tool. At the same time adjust the cable
tension as given in Table V-I.
j . Remove the rudder cable clamps.
k. Move the rudder to the right and left and adjust the stops located at the base
of the vertical fin to provide 12.25 + .25 inches left and 14.5 + .25 inches right
as measured from a point on the tool where the rudder tip contacts the tool to the
center of rudder tip with the rudder against its stop.
1 . Check all moving components for freedom of movement.
m. Safety turnbuckles and install the access panel and tail cone fairing.
5-35. RUDDER TRIM CONTROLS.
5-36. REMOVAL OF FORWARD RUDDER TRIM ASSEMBLY.

a. Remove the rudder trim control knob or handle by removing the attaching
roll pin.
b. Remove the stabilator trim control knob and handle by removing the attach-
ing screws.
c. Remove the headliner trim plate around the trim crank assembly by the
1. Remove the attaching screws securing the trim plate.
2. Lower the aft side of the trim plate and disconnect the vent lines.
3. Disconnect the wiring from the lights and their switches.
NOTE
It is recommended that the wires be marked for iden-

tification before removal.
4. Disconnect the control cable from the air control assembly on each
side of the trim plate.
5. Remove the headliner trim plate by removing attaching screws.
d. Remove the trim crank bearing bracket assembly by removing attaching
screws.
e. Remove the aft cabin or baggage area trim panel gaining access to the aft
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1K15
f. Block the aft cables maintaining their position on the pulleys and the trim
drum. (Refer to Figure 5-9.)
g. Disconnect the forward rudder trim cable at the rudder turnbuckle assem-
blies in the aft fuselage section.
h. If the cable is not to be reused, cut one end of the forward cable removing
the turnbuckle thimble. Solder the blank end of a new cable to the end of the old
cable.
NOTE
If the trim cables are to be reused, the headliner, in-

sulation, rub blocks and pulleys must be removed from
the cabin ceiling. Unless the headliner is to be re-
placed, it is not recommended that it be removed be-
cause of the difficulties replacing an old headliner.
5-37. INSTALLATION OF FORWARD RUDDER TRIM ASSEMBLY.

a. Ascertain that the splice where the two cables are joined together is secure,
smooth and minimum in size.
b. Draw the old rudder cable that is spliced to the new cable forward through
the ceiling to the cabin area.
NOTE
To prevent breaking the splice, draw the cable in a

straight line and do not force.
c. Wrap the cable around the trim crank and draw it aft through the ceiling to
the aft section of the fuselage.
d. For cables of undetermined length, connect the forward cable end to the
corresponding aft cable and rotate the turnbuckle barrel until three on each end
are showing.
e. Separate the old cable from the new cable where the two were spliced to-
gether.
f. Assemble the turnbuckle on the remaining aft rudder trim cable. Turn the
barrel until three threads on each end are showing.
g. Insert the free cable end and a thimble through the turnbuckle eye and draw
it until it is tight. Temporarily clamp the cable so as not to damage it or allow
it to slip.
h. Operate the trim several times to seat the cable to the pulleys and to insure
clearance of all moving parts.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1K16
i. Remove the temporary clamp and draw the free end of the cable to the
approximate required tension. (Refer to Table V-I.)
j . Secure the free cable end using a nicopress sleeve.
k. Readjust the cable tension, adjusting the turnbuckles evenly.
1 . Check rigging and adjustment of rudder trim. (Refer to Paragraph 5-40.)
m. Safety all turnbuckles.
n. Install all access plates and panels, bearing blocks, and trim cranks.
5-38. REMOVAL OF AFT RUDDER TRIM ASSEMBLY.

a. Remove the tail cone fairing by removing attaching screws.
b. Remove the two access plates from the right side of the vertical fin by re-
c. Remove the aft cabin or baggage area trim panel, gaining access to the aft
d. Block the trim cables at the trim drum to prevent them from unwrapping.
-(Refer to Figure 5-9.)
e. Block the forward rudder trim cables at any bulkhead inside the aft section
of the fuselage and disconnect the rudder trim cable turnbuckles in the aft section
of the fuselage. (Refer to Figure 5-9.)
f. Disconnect the rudder trim indicator wire from the forward end of the trim
screw.
g. Disconnect the rudder trim control rod from the trim screw by removing
cotter pin, nut, washer and bolt.
CAUTION
Do not push on the rudder.
h. Turn the nose wheel to the left movingthe rudder to the left.
i. Remove the four bolts securing the trim drum and bracket in place. It may be
necessary to remove the trim drum from the bracket before removal.
j . If the cable is not to be reused, cut the cable ends removing the turnbuckle
eyes. Draw the cable and trim drum aft through the fuselage and vertical fin,
removing it from the airplane.
k. If the cable is to be reused, remove the guard pins from the rudder trim
cable pulleys at station 160.75 and remove the pulleys at station 290.0. Draw
the cable and trim drum aft through the fuselage and vertical fin, removing it
from the airplane.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued:2/18/81
1K17
5-39. INSTALLATION OF AFT RUDDER TRIM ASSEMBLY.

a. If a new cable is being installed, use the following procedure:
1. Ascertain that the trim drum is wrapped properly as described in para-
graph 5-48.
2. Draw the cables forward through vertical fin and the aft section of the
fuselage.
3. Insert the free cable ends and a thimble throughthe turnbuckle eye and
draw them until it is tight. Temporarily clamp the cable so as not to damage it
or allow it to slip.
4. Operate the trim several times to seat the cable to the pulleys and to
insure clearance of all moving parts.
5. Remove the temporary clamp and draw the free ends of the cable to the
approximate required tension (Refer to Table V-I.) and secure with nicopress
sleeve.
6. Secure the trim drum and bracket inside the vertical fin with four at-
taching bolts.
7. Check rigging and adjustment per paragraph 5-40.
b. If the old cable is being installed, use the following procedure:
1. Ascertainthat the trim drum is wrapped properly as describedin para-
graph 5-48.
2. Draw the cables forward through the vertical fin and the aft section of
the fuselage.
3. Connect the trim cable turnbuckles.
4. Secure the trim drum and bracket inside the vertical fin with four at-
taching bolts.
5. Check rigging and adjustment per paragraph 5-40.
5-40. RIGGINGAND ADJUSTMENTOF RUDDER TRIM. (Refer to Figure 5-10.)

a. Remove the access plate from the right side of the fin if not previously
removed.
b. Rotate the trim drum (33) until the cable is evenly wrapped and the turn-
buckle ends (9) inside the aft section fuselage are even. (There should be nine
and one-quarter wraps on each end of the trim drum. )
c. Ascertain that the cable tension is set as given in Table V-I.
d. A preliminary setting of. 875 of an inch between the aft screw stop (28) and
the drum housing (32) as measured along the screw must be confirmed. This
measurement is obtained by disconnecting the end of the trim screw from the
trim control rod and link (29 & 30), if not previously disconnected, and turn the
trim screw until. 875 of an inch if obtained. Hold the trim drum stationary while
adjusting the screw. Reconnect the screw with bolt, washers, nut and cotter pin.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1K18
e. Position the rudder in neutral and proceed to set tab travels. Turn the trim
in each direction to screw stops. If tab travels do not agree with angles given in
Table V-I, disconnect the control rod (30) from the tab, loosen the jam nut on
the forward end of the rod and turn the rod until the proper travels are obtained.
f. Check minimum number of wraps left on drum. (Minimum allowable is one
and one-quarter wraps. )
g. Check adjustment of trim indicator wire. (Refer to Paragraphs 5-43 or
5-46. )
h. Install the access plate with attaching screws.
5-41. REMOVALOF RUDDER TRIM INDICATORWIRE. (PA-23-250; PA-23-235 and

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. and PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3836 incl. and 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl.)
a. Remove the placard plate from the ceiling of the cabin by removing attach-
-ing screws.
b. Remove the access plate from the right side of the vertical fin.
c. Disconnect the indicator wire at the indicator arm inside the cabin ceiling.
d. Disconnect the indicator wire at the trim screw.
e. Solder a piece of .024 steel wire to one end of the old indicator wire.
NOTE
If the wire has broken at a point other than either end,

it may be necessary to remove certain access or trim
panels to determine the breaking point and installation
procedure.
5-42. INSTALLATIONOF RUDDER TRIM INDICATORWIRE. (PA-23-250;PA-23-235

and PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. and PA-23-250(six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505to 27-3836 incl. and 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl.) (Refer to Figure 5-10.)
a. Draw the old wire from the fuselage installing a new one at the same time.
b. Attach the end of the indicator wire to the attachment point on the end of
the trim screw.
c. Position the rudder in a neutral position and turn the rudder trim until the
trailing edges of the rudder and rudder trim tab align.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1K19
d. Insert the remaining end of the wire through the attachment point inside
the cabin ceiling. Ascertain the nut on the adjustment screw is centered and pull
the wire through the hole until the indicator is centered. Bend the wire back and
wrap it around itself at least seven times.
e. Adjust the wire per instructions in paragraph 5-43.
f. Install the placard plate to the ceiling and access plate to the right side of
the fin.
5-43. RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT OF RUDDER TRIM INDICATOR

WIRE. (PA-23-250;PA-23-235 and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504
incl. and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3836 incl. and 27-3838 to
27-3943 incl.) (Refer to Figure 5-10.)
a. Remove the placard cover from the cabin ceiling if not previously removed.
b. Position the rudder in a neutral position as described in paragraph 5-34.
c. Turn the rudder trim until the trailing edges of the rudder and rudder trim
tab align.
d. Hold the screw where the forward end of the indicator wire is attached and
adjust the nut until the indicator is centered.
e. Install the placard cover to the cabin ceiling.
5-44. REMOVALOF RUDDER TRIM INDICATORWIRES. (PA-23-250(six place), Serial

Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 and up.)
a. Remove the trim panel from the ceiling of the aft baggage compartment by
b. Remove the placard panel from the cabin ceiling by loosening the set screws
in the light knobs, removing the knobs and removing attaching screws.
c. The forward stabilator indicator wire may be removed by the following
procedure:
1. Disconnect the indicator wire from the tab in the cabin ceiling.
NOTE
If the indicator wire has broken at a point other than

either end, it may be necessary to remove certain
access or trim panels to determine the breaking point
and installation procedure.
d. The aft rudder indicator wire may be removed by the following procedure:
1. Remove the access plate on the right side of the vertical fin.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued:2/18/81
1K20
2. Disconnect the wire at the trim screw inside the vertical fin.
5-45. INSTALLATION OF RUDDER TRIM INDICATOR WIRE. (PA-23-250 (six place),

Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 and up.) (Refer to Figure 5-10.)
a. Disconnect the indicator wire or wires at the idler arm inside the baggage compart-
ment.
b. Draw the old wire out installing a new wire at the same time.
c. Ascertain that the adjustment nut located in the baggage compartment is centered on
the screw.
d. Position the rudder in a near neutral position and adjust the trim tab until the trailing
edges of each align.
e. Connect the aft wire by the following procedure:
2. Insert the aft end of the wire through attachment point just forward of the trim
drum. Bend the wire forward and wrap it around itself at least seven turns.
3. Hold the idler link perpendicular to its attachment point and attach the forward
end of the wire to the angle in the same manner as the aft end.
f. Connect the forward wire by the following procedure:
2. Insert the aft end of the wire through the idler link. Bend the wire forward and
wrap it around itself at least seven times.
3. Insert the forward end of wire through the indicator attachment. Pull the wire
through until the indicator is centered. Bend the wire back and secure it in the same manner as
opposite end.
g. Adjust the wire per instructions in Paragraph 5-46.
h. Install the placard plate, light control knobs, baggage compartment trim and vertical
fin access plate.
5-46. ADJUSTMENT OF RUDDER TRIM INDICATOR WIRE. (PA-23-250 (six place),

Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 and up.) (Refer to Figure 5-10.)
a. Remove the trim panel from the baggage compartment ceiling.
b. Place the rudder in a neutral position as described in Paragraph 5-34.
c. Turn the trim tab control until the trailing edge of the tab aligns with the rudder.
d. Holding the nut, adjust the screw through the idler link in the baggage compartment
until the indicator is centered.
e. Reinstall the trim panel to the baggage compartment ceiling.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1K21
(5) is removed by removing the stop (4) located on the end of the screw, opposite
the base of the housing bracket. Turn the screw from the drum (2).
d. Remove the drum from the housing.
e. Unwrap the trim cable (1) and remove the cable and lock pin (3) from the
drum. (If one end of the cable has been marked to facilitate hook-up of the cable
ends, note this location in relation to the drum when installing a new cable on the
drum.)
f. Check the condition of the bushings (6) in the housing bracket for excess
wear.
g. To install and wrap the trim cable, locate the center of the cable, meas-
uring from end to end.
h. Insert the center of the cable into the cable slot in the drum and install the
lock pin (3).
i . Hold the drum (2) with the previously marked or base end of the drum down.
j . Looking down on the drum, wrap up the cable that leads from the base end
nine and one-quarter turns in a counterclockwise direction. The cable from the
upper end, wrap down in a clockwise direction nine and one-quarter turns.
k. Insert the drum in the housing bracket, position the drum and route the
cables from the assembly as shown in Figure 5-13.
1. Install the screw (5) and screw stop (4) and secure with the roll pin (3).
m. Block the trim cables in center position to keep them tight and from un-
wrapping, by the method shown in Figure 5-9.
n. Center the drum between the stops on the screw by rotating the screw.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1K22
5-49. WING FLAP CONTROLS.
5-50. REMOVAL OF FLAP ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 5-14.)

a. Disconnect the flap control rods allowing both flaps to hang free.
b. Remove the two access plates from the outboard undersides of the fuselage at
station 128.75.
c. Remove the locknut from the sender unit rod installed through the torque tube and
remove the rod.
d. Remove the bellcrank assembly from one end of the torque tube by removing the
two bolts, washers, and cotter pins installed through the torque tube.
NOTE
If the bellcrank assembly is to be removed from the right

side, disconnect the actuating rod from the bellcrank by
removing the bolt, washer and self-locking nut.
e. Cut the safety wire from the bearing block bolts and remove the bolts, washers,
bearing blocks, bearings and shims if installed from each side.
f. Remove the torque tube, withdrawing it from the aircraft on the opposite side of
the airplane that the bellcrank was removed. If stabilator trim and flap interconnect system
is installed, slide pulley from torque tube by removing attachment hardware and retaining
pulley in fuselage while withdrawing torque tube.
5-51. INSTALLATION OF FLAP ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 5-14.)

a. Install the torque tube by installing it through the side of the fuselage at station
128.75.
b. Lubricate the torque tube bearings per Lubrication Chart, Section II.
c. Position the torque tube (if stabilator trim and flap interconnect system is installed,
slide the pulley on torque tube while positioning tube) and install the bearing blocks with
bearings, bolts, washers and shims as required. (Install shims .010 to .014, P/N 41371-02;
.015 to .020, P/N 41371-03 or .032, P/N 41371-04 between the bearing blocks to insure a
proper fit.)
d. Position the bellcrank on the torque tube end and secure by installing two bolts,
washers, nuts and cotter pins through the bellcrank and torque tube.
e. Check rigging and adjustment of flaps. (Refer to Paragraph 5-55.)
f. Check adjustment of flap position sender. (Refer to Paragraph 5-52.)
g. Safety the bearing block bolts with MS20995-C32 safety wire and install the access
plates.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1K23
2445
1. HYDRAULIC CYLINDER
2. GUIDE BLOCK
3. BELLCRANK
4. BEARING BLOCK
5. FLAP CONTROL ROD
6. TORQUE TUBE
7. SAFETY WIRE
8. BEARING
9. BELLCRANK ATTACHMENT BOLTS
10. SHIMS
11. FLAP SENDER LINKAGE
12. SENDER MOUNTING PLATE
13. POSITION SENDER
14. BEARING END
15. CHECK NUT
16. BUSHING SPACER
17. STABILATOR TRIM AND FLAP
INTERCONNECT PULLEY
and up
Figure 5-14. Flap Controls Installation
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1K24
5-52. RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT OF FLAPS.

a. Connect all the flap system linkages together, temporarily.
b. Place the cockpit FLAP control lever inthe DOWNposition. Using the ped-
estal hand pump, lower the flaps till there is no movement. At this time the
piston will be withdrawn into the flap actuating hydraulic cylinder as far as the
bushing, located on it, permits it to go. The locknut for the tube threaded into
the piston rod and the bottom of the cylinder are the members between which the
bushing is compressed.
c. Observe the position of the flap bellcrank assembly with respect to the slot
in the flap actuating arm guide block. The bellcrank must be at least 1/8-inch
from the end of the slot. If it strikes the block, remove the bolt, washer, and
self-locking nut securing the tube end bearing to the bellcrank and rotate the
tube counterclockwise to extend it. Tighten the tube locknut to maintain the new
position of the tube relative to the piston rod. Check to see if end bearing lock-
nut is tight.
d. Connect the tube end bearing to the bellcrank with a bolt, plain washer and
a self-locking nut.
e. Raise the flaps as far up as they will go.
f . Place a straight edge beneath the wing surface and check if the flap is par-
allel with the bottom of the wing.
NOTE
On certain airplanes, the bottom of the flaps will not

be flush with the wing. When the flaps and wings are
not flush, set two rubber blocks between a straight-
edge and the bottom of the wing to check parallelism.
(Refer to Figure 5-15.) Those serial numbers affected
will be shown in the following chart:
Distance Between
Serial Numbers Straightedge and Wing
27-1 to 27-2504 inclusive 1/4 inch
27-2505 to 27-3049 inclusive

27-3051 to 27-3153 inclusive Flush
27-3050, 27-3154 and up 1/8 inch
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1L1
A491
RUBBER BLOCKS
(SEECHARTFORSIZE)
/8 OR1/4 INCH
Figure 5-15. Flap Rigging
g. Rectify a non-parallel condition by lowering the flaps completely by the

hand pump. Then disconnect the flap control rod assembly from the bolt in the
flap bellcrank. Rotate the control rod end bearing to correct the misalignment.
Reconnect the control rod to the bellcrank. Raise the flaps until the cockpit con-
trol lever returns to neutral and check for parallelism again.
h. If still unsatisfactory, lower the flap and repeat the adjustment. If neces-
sary, also adjust the control rod end bearing at the flap. To do this, do not
separate the end bearing from the flap but rotate the flap control rod itself. When
satisfactory, install a washer between the end bearing and the bellcrank and
secure with a castellated nut and a cotter pin.
i . Repeat all of the above procedures on the remaining flap.
NOTE
Place a plain washer under the castellated nut in addi-

tion to the washer located between the control rod end
bearing and the bellcrank at the left flap.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1L2
j . Move the flap within its limits and note if there is 50 degrees of movement,
plus or minus two degrees. Check all locknuts for tightness.
5-53. REMOVAL OF FLAP POSITIONSENDER.

a. Remove the access plate from the outboard right underside of the fuselage
just inboard of the flap.
b. Disconnect the flap position indicator rod by removing the self-locking ad-
justment nut and withdraw the rod from the torque tube.
c. Remove the center and rear seats from the right side of the airplane.
d. Remove the outboard seat track from the right side of the airplane by re-
e. Pull the carpet back and remove the access plate located below the center'
window at station 117.75.
f. Disconnect the electrical leads from the position sender.
g. Remove the position sender by removing the attaching screws.
5-54. INSTALLATION OF FLAP POSITIONSENDER.

a. Position the sender and secure with attaching screws.
b. Connect the electrical leads to the sender.
c. Insert the flap position indicator rod through the torque tube and install the
C
self-locking adjustment nut.
d. Adjust the sending unit as described in paragraph 5-55.
e. Install the access plates, carpet, seat track and seats.
5-55. RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT OF FLAP POSITION SENDER.

a. Remove the access plate from the right underside of the fuselage, just in-
board of the flap, if not previously removed.
b. Lower the flaps to an angle of 25 degrees as checked with a bubble protractor.
NOTE
To adjust the flap position sender, the electrical system must
supply either 14 or 28 volts to the sender unit, depending on
electrical system designfor the particular aircraft.
c. Tighten or loosen the adjustment nut until the indicator on the instrument
panel points to the half-way mark.
d. Check the three flap positions (retracted, half-way or 25° and extended)
with respect to the angular settings and the position indicated on the flap gauge.
e. Install the access plate to the underside of the fuselage with attaching screws.
SURFACE CONTROLS
1L3
1L3 Reissued: 2/18/81
5-56. STABILATOR TRIM AND FLAP INTERCONNECT SYSTEM. (Serial Nos.

27-7654001 and up.) On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes with serial nos. noted above, a
stabilator trim and flap interconnect system is installed which connects the flap torque tube to
the stabilator trim tab. The system includes cables connecting a pulley on the flap torque tube
to an eccentric pulley on the stabilator trim bellcrank, so that when the flaps are extended,
pressure is exerted against the bellcrank to increase down trim. Thus reducing the pitch change
during flap extension. The amount of trim tab displacement is directly proportional to the
amount of flap extension.
5-57. REMOVAL OF STABILATOR TRIM AND FLAP INTERCONNECT SYS-

TEM. (Refer to Figure 5-6.)
a. Remove center seats and rails. Pull the carpet back to gain access to the stabilator
trim and flap interconnect access cover at station 126.75. Remove aft baggage compartment
trim and floor panels by removing attaching screws. Remove the tail cone fairing.
b. Disconnect the turnbuckles (7 & 8) at stations 258.50 and 267.50.
c. Remove guard pins from pulleys at stations 130.75, 153.88 and 229.00; pull cable (9)
forward through fuselage to flap torque tube (12).
d. Remove guard from around flap torque tube pulley; unwind cable from pulley. Re-
move cotter pins securing cable to torque tube pulley and remove cable from airplane.
e. Remove flap torque tube pulley (1) per paragraph 5-50.
f. Pull guard pin from pulley at station 273.38 and pull remaining cable (10) aft to the
stabilator trim bellcrank assembly (17).
g. Disconnect eccentric pulley (6) and remove cable and eccentric pulley from aircraft.
5-58. INSTALLATION OF STABILATOR TRIM AND FLAP INTERCONNECT SYS-

TEM.
a. Install pulley on torque tube per paragraph 5-51.
b. Hold cable ball in place on flap torque tube pulley with cotter pins.
c. Wrap cable around pulley as shown in Figure 5-6, Sketch B and install pulley guard.
d. Feed cable aft through pulleys at stations 130.75, 153.88 and 229.00 and install
guard pins.
e. Slide cable ball on eccentric pulley and wrap cable as shown in Figure 5-6, Sketch C.
Install eccentric pulley on bellcrank and screw assembly.
f. Connect tension spring (25) as shown in Figure 5-6.
g. Feed cable forward to the turnbuckles. Install pulley guard pin at station 273.38.
Connect the cable end from the bottom of the flap torque tube pulley to the cable from the
top of the eccentric pulley. (Refer to Figure 5-6, Sketches B and C.) Connect the other cables
and adjust tension per paragraph 5-59.
h. Replace items removed in Step a of paragraph 5-57.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1L4
W 5-59. ADJUSTMENT OF STABILATOR TRIM AND FLAP INTERCONNECT SYSTEM. (Refer to

Figure 5-6.)
a. Ascertain that the stabilator trim is rigged and adjusted per paragraph 5-24.
b. Place the flaps in the up position with the stabilator and stabilator trim in neutral then adjust the
turnbuckles to obtain the combined cable tension as given in Table V-I.
c. When rigging the interconnect system, the eccentric pulley stop arms should have .125 to. 187 of an
inch gap between the upper stop pin and the stop arm. Therer is no specified clearance at the lower stop, but the
eccentric pulley arm should not conduct the stop pin.
NOTE
With the flaps lowered, one cable will be slack on the eccentric cam,
if the lower stop makes contact, tighten up on the slack cable to
provide the cushion gap, always maintaining the combined tension
as given in Table V-I.
d. With the flaps in the full down position, trim tab deflection should be 3.5° (minimum) up. If
deflection of 3.5° is unobtainable recheck the stabilator trim adjustment per paragraph 5-24 and installation of
stabilator trim and flap interconnect system per paragraph 5-58.
5-60 CONTROL SYSTEM FRICTION LIMITS.
5-61. FRICTION IN THE STABILATOR CONTROL SYSTEM.

a. Attach a spring scale to the brackets which join the rear spar just forward of the tab.
b. Record the scale reading as the stabilator passes through neutral by raising it from 2.0 inches below
neutral to 2.0 inches above neutral.
c. Record the scale reading as the stabilator passes through neutral by lowering it to the original
position.
d. Repeat the previous raising and lowering until average readings are obtained, making sure the
movement is slow and steady.
e. The total friction is obtained by subtracting the two readings. This shall not exceed 16 lbs. on serial
nos. 27-1 to 27-7554172 incl. or 13 lbs. on serial nos. 27-7654001 and up, when stabilator control system is
rigged with proper travels and cable tension.
5-62. FRICTION IN THE RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM.

a. The aircraft shall be on jacks with the nose wheel fully extended and clear of the floor.
b. The rudder shall be pushed to the stop and allowed to slowly return to its stable point.
c. A spring scale is place against the lower rearward corner of the rudder.
d. Move the rudder from the above position through neutral, recording the maximum scale reading.
e. Repeat the procedure for both left and right, gear up and gear down until an average reading is
obtained. The movement should be slow and steady with the scale always perpendicular to the chord line of the
rudder.
f. The friction is the direct reading obtained in each direction and shall not be in excess of 10 lbs. with
the gear down, and 2 lbs. with the gear up, both to the right and left.
SURFACE CONTROLS
1L5
1L5
Revised: 4/ 26 83
5-63. FRICTION IN THE AILERONCONTROLSYSTEM.

a. A spring scale is placed against the trailing edge of either the left or right aileron.
b. Record the scale reading as the aileron passes through neutral by raising it from
1.5 inches below neutral to 1.5 inchesabove neutral.
c. Record the scale reading as the aileron passes through neutral by loweringit to
the originalposition.
d. Repeat above until averagereadings are obtained making sure movement is slow
and steady with the scale always perpendicularto the chord line of the aileron.
e. The friction is the direct reading obtained in each direction and shall not be in
excess of 7 lbs. for each.
5-64. ADJUSTMENT OF STABILATOR TAB POSITION INDICATOR. (Refer to

Figure 5-5.)
a. Set tab travels as per Table V-I.
b. Verify that the indicator multiplying link is properly rigged as per Sketch D,
Figure 5-5.
c. Crank stabilator trim handle (24) to full nose down position and turn back six (6)
full turns.
d. Make adjustment to indicator system placing stabilator trim indicator (28) in
center of "TAKE OFF" area.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1L6
TABLE V-II. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART (SURFACE CONTROLS)
Trouble
I Cause
I Remedy
AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM
Lost motion between Cable tension too low. Adjust cable tension.
control wheel and (Refer to Paragraph
aileron. 5-13. )
Linkage loose or worn. Check linkage and

tighten or replace.
Cables not in place on Install cables correctly.

pulleys. Check cable guards.
Broken pulley. Replace pulley.
Resistance to control System not lubricated Lubricate system.

wheel rotation. properly.
Cable tension too high. Adjust cable tension.

(Refer to Paragraph
5-13. )
Control column chain Adjust chain tension.

improperly adjusted. (Refer to Paragraph
5-13d. )
Pulleys binding or Replace binding pulleys

rubbing. and/or provide clear-
ance between pulleys
and brackets.
Cables crossed or Check routing of control

routed incorrectly. cables.
Cables not in place on Install cables correctly.

pulleys. Check cable guards.
Bent aileron and/or Repair or replace

hinge. aileron and/or hinge.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued:2/18/81
1L7
TABLE V-II. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART (SURFACE CONTROLS) (cont.)
Trouble
I Cause Remedy
AILERON CONTROL SYSTEM (cont.)
Control wheels not Incorrect control Rig in accordance with

synchronized. column rigging. Paragraph 5-13d.
Control wheels not Incorrect rigging of Rig in accordance with

horizontal when aileron system. Paragraph 5-13.
ailerons are neutral.
Incorrect aileron Aileron control tubes Adjust in accordance

travel. not adjusted properly. with Paragraph 5-13b.
Aileron bellcrank Adjust in accordance

stops not adjusted with Paragraph 5-13a.
properly.
Correct aileron Incorrect rigging of Rig in accordance with

travel cannot be aileron cables, control Paragraph 5-13.
obtained by adjusting wheel and control tube
bellcrank stops. rod ends.
Control wheel stops Incorrect rigging Rig in accordance with

before control between control wheel Paragraph 5-13.
surfaces reach full and control cables.
travel.
STABILATORCONTROL SYSTEM
Lost motion between Cable tension too low. Adjust cable tension
control wheel and per Paragraph 5-18.
stabilator.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued:2/18/81
1L8
TABLE V-II. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART (SURFACE CONTROLS) (cont.)
Trouble
I Cause
I Remedy
STABILATOR CONTROL SYSTEM (cont.)
Lost motion between Linkage loose or worn. Check linkage and

control wheel and tighten or replace.
stabilator. (cont.)
Cables not in place Install cables correctly.

on pulleys.
Resistance to System not lubricated Lubricate system.

stabilator control properly.
movement.
Cable tension too high. Adjust cable tension
per Paragraph 5-18.
Binding control column. Adjust and lubricate

per Paragraph 5-7.

and brackets.


on pulleys.
Bent stabilator hinge. Repair or replace

stabilator or hinge.
Incorrect stabilator Stabilator stops Adjust stop screws per

travel. incorrectly adjusted. Paragraph 5-18.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1L9
Trouble Cause Remedy

I
STABILATOR CONTROL SYSTEM (cont.)
Incorrect stabilator Stabilator control Adjust control cables

travel. (cont. ) cables incorrectly per Paragraph 5-18.
adjusted.
Correct stabilator Stabilator cables Rig cables in accor-

travel cannot be incorrectly rigged. dance with Paragraph
obtained by adjusting 5-18.
stabilator stops.
STABILATOR TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM
Lost motion between Cable tension too low. Adjust in accordance

trim control handle with Paragraph 5-24.
and trim tab.
Cables not in place Install cables according
on pulleys. to Paragraphs 5-21
and 5-23.

tighten or replace.
Trim control handle System not lubricated Lubricate system.

moves with exces- properly.
sive resistance.
Cable tension too high. Adjust in accordance
with Paragraph 5-24.
Pulleys binding or Replace binding pulleys.

rubbing. Provide clearance be-
tween pulleys and
brackets.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued:2/18/81
1L10
TABLE V-II. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART (SURFACE CONTROLS) (cont. )
Trouble Cause
I Remedy
STABILATOR TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM (cont.)
Trim control handle Cables crossed or Check routing of control

moves with exces- routed incorrectly. cables.
sive resistance.
(cont. )
Cables not in place Refer to Paragraphs
on pulleys. 5-21 and 5-23.
Trim tab hinge Lubricate hinge. If

binding. necessary, replace.
Trim tab fails to System incorrectly Check and/or adjust

reach full travel. rigged. rigging per Paragraph
5-24.
Trim drum in- Check and/or adjust

correctly wrapped. rigging per Paragraph
5-24.
Trim indicator fails Trim indicator unit Adjust in accordance

to indicate correct not adjusted properly. with Paragraph 5-27.
trim position.
Trim indicator fails Trim indicator Replace indicator unit.

to indicate any defective.
movement.
Wire broken. Locate break and splice
or replace.
Trim control cable Refer to Service Letter Refer to Service Letter

slippage. No. 628. No. 628.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1L11
Trouble
I Cause
I Remedy
RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM
Lost motion between Cable tension too low. Adjust cable tension
rudder pedals and per Paragraph 5-34.
rudder.
tighten or replace.
Bolts attaching rudder Tighten bellcrank bolts.

to bellcrank are loose.
Excessive resistance System not lubricated Lubricate system.

to rudder pedal properly.
movement.
Rudder pedal torque Lubricate torque tube
tube bearing in need bearings.
of lubrication.
Cable tension too high. Adjust cable tension

per Paragraph 5-34.


on pulleys. Check cable guards.

and brackets.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued:2/18/81
1L12
Trouble
I Cause
I Remedy
RUDDER CONTROL SYSTEM (cont.)
Rudder pedals not Rudder cables Rig in accordance with

neutral when rudder incorrectly rigged. Paragraph 5-34.
is streamlined.
Incorrect rudder Rudder bellcrank stop Rig in accordance with

travel. incorrectly adjusted. Paragraph 5-34.
Nose wheel contacts Rig in accordance with

stops before rudder. Paragraph 5-34.
RUDDER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM
Lost motion between Cable tension too low. Adjust in accordance

trim control handle with Paragraph 5-40.
and trim tab.
Cables not in place on Install cables according

pulleys. to Paragraphs 5-37
and 5-39.

tighten or replace.
Trim control handle System not lubricated Lubricate system.

moves with exces- properly.
sive resistance.

SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1L13
Trouble
I Cause Remedy
RUDDER TRIM CONTROL SYSTEM (cont. )
Trim control handle Cables not in place Install cables according

moves with exces- on pulleys. to Paragraphs 5-37
sive resistance. and 5-40.
(cont. )
Pulleys binding or Replace binding pulleys.
rubbing. Provide clearance be-
tween pulleys and
brackets.
Trim tab hinge Lubricate hinge. Re-

binding. place if necessary.
Trim tab fails to System incorrectly Check and/or adjust

reach full travel. rigged. rigging per Paragraph
5-40.
Trim drum in- Check and/or adjust

correctly wrapped. rigging per Paragraph
5-48.
Trim indicator fails Trim indicator unit Adjust in accordance

to indicate correct not adjusted with Paragraph 5-43.
trim position. properly.
Trim indicator fails Trim indicator Replace indicator unit.

to indicate any defective.
movement.
Wire broken. Locate break and splice
or replace.
FLAP CONTROL SYSTEM
Refer to Hydraulic System Troubleshooting Section VI, Table VI-V,

Pages 102, 103 and 104 for probable Causes and Remedy.
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1L14
.157 HOLE-
A755
TAP #10-32
.75
Figure 5-16. Fabricated Tool. Aileron Rigging
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1L15
A748
19.438
-DRILL & TAP

3 DRILL 0.250
1/4-28 NF-3 TAP
AN315-4
3 REQ. 2 REQ.
AN4-15A
1 REQ.
0.531 18.312
1.500 2.50C
MATERIAL:
0.250 X 3.00 STEEL STOCK
Figure 5-17. Fabricated Tool, Stabilator Leveling

(Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-7554168 incl. and
27-8054001 and up)
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1L16
A410
DRILL & TAP

3 DRILL
1/428 NF-3 TAP
3 REQ.
.861
AN315-4
3 REQ. AN4-7A
BREAK SHARP EDGES 2 REQ.
AN4-21 A
25.50
24.98 18.312
FWD.
SYM. - 2.00
3.00
MATERIAL:
0.250 x 3.00 STEEL STOCK
Figure 5-18. Fabricated Tool, Stabilator Leveling

(Serial Nos. 27-7654001 to 27-7954121 incl.)
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1L17
A747
6.0
SCRIBECENTERLINE
PLAINLY IN METAL
9.0
MATERIAL:
.125x 1.0 x 15.0 APPR.
DRILL .25 DIA. THRU
Figure 5-19. Fabricated Tool, Rudder Rigging

(All PA-23 series models except for the PA-23-250 [6] "F")
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1L18
A426
SCRIBECENTERLINE
PLAINLY IN METAL
.250
1.62
8.78
MATERIAL: 1025STEEL
.095THICKNESS
RIVET
SCRIBECENTERLINE
PLAINLY IN METAL
Figure 5-20. Fabricated Tool, Rudder Rigging

(PA-23-250 [six place] "F" Only)
SURFACE CONTROLS
Reissued: 2/18/81
1L19
1L20 THRU 1L24
LEFTBLANK
INTENTIONALLY
1L20
PIPER
AZTEC
MANUAL
SERVICE
CARD
2 OF5
APACHE
PA-23-235
PA-23-250
AZTEC
(SIXPLACE)
PA-23-250 AZTEC
CORPORATION
PIPERAIRCRAFT
(PART
NUMBER
753564)
2A1

Service manual information incorporated in this set of Aerofichecards is arranged in accordance with
general specificationsof Aeroficheadopted by the GeneralAircraft Manufacturer's Association.Information
compiled in this Aeroficheservice manual is kept current by revisionsdistributed periodically.Theserevisions
supersede all previous revisions, are complete Aerofichecard replacements, and supersede Aerofichecards of
same number.

frame, opposite revised or added material. Revisionlines indicate only current revisions with changes and
additions to existingtext and illustrations. Changes in capitalization, spelling,punctuation, indexing, physical
ORG600401 April 1, 1960 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5

CR810218 February 18, 1981 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
PR830426 April 26, 1983 1, 2, 3, 4and 5
IR860921 September 21, 1986(Interim)* 1
* INTERIM REVISION
this service manual. Please discard your
CARDS 2, 3, 4, or 5.
The date on Aerofichecards must not be earlier than date noted for respectivecard effectivity.Consult latest
2A2
OFCONTENTS
TABLE
AEROFICHE
CARD
NO.1 GRID
NO.
I ..................
INTRODUCTION . 1A21
HANDLING
ANDSERVICING
........ ...... 1B2
II
..................
INSPECTION ....... 1 E23
IV ..........
STRUCTURES ........ ...... 1F15
V SURFACE
CONTROLS ..................... 1119
IV
AEROFICHE
CARD
NO.2
VI HYDRAULIC ...............
SYSTEM ...... 2A8
VII LANDING ANDBRAKE
GEAR SYSTEM
............ 2G1
AEROFICHE
CARDNO.3
VIII PLANT
POWER (NORMALLYASPIRATED).......... 3A8
VIIIA PLANT
POWER (TURBOCHARGED)............. 3D17
VIIIB POWER
PLANT .......
(LYCOMING-TURBOCHARGED) 3H4
IX .........................
SYSTEM
FUEL 3110
NO.4
CARD
AEROFICHE
X .................
INSTRUMENTS ... 4A8
XI SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL ..................... 4C1
AEROFICHE
CARD
NO.5
XII ELECTRONICS
................... .. 5A9
XIII HEATING
ANDVENTILATING
................. 5B5
XIV ...............
ANDUTILITIES
ACCESSORIES 5H13
2A3
Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
6-1. Hydraulic System Schematic, PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and

6-2. Hydraulic System Installation, PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl ..... 2A20
27-4426 and 27-4574 to 27-7854050 incl ..................... 2A23
27-4426 and 27-4574 to 27-7954121 incl. ..................... 2A24
27-7854051 to 27-7954121 incl ............................. 2B1
6-8. Hydraulic System Installation, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial
Nos. 27-8054001 and up ................................... 2B2
27-8054001 and up ........................................ 2B3
6-10. Flow Diagram, Both Selector Levers Neutral ..................... 2B4
6-11. Flow Diagram Landing Gear Selector Lever Up ................ .. 2B4
6-12. Flow Diagram, Landing Gear Selector Lever Down ............... 2B5
6-13. Flow Diagram, Flap Selector Lever Down ....................... 2B5
6-14. Flow Diagram, Flap Selector Lever Up ......................... 2B6
6-15. Hydraulic System Checking Diagrams, PA-23-250, PA-23-235,
27-2504 incl.................... 2B 13
6-16. Hydraulic System Checking Diagrams, PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up ............................... . 2B15
6-17. Hydraulic Pump, Exploded View ............................... 2C8
6-18. Identification of Powerpak .................................... 2C11
6-19. Location of Powerpak Components ............................. 2C17
6-20. Hydraulic Powerpak, Exploded View ........................... 2C19
6-21. Checking and Adjusting Powerpak ............................. 2D14
6-22. Checking Powerpak Operation ................................. 2D14
6-23. Hydraulic System Check Valve ................................. 2D23
6-24. Anti-Retraction Valve ......................................... 2E2
6-25. Adjustment of Anti-Retraction Valve ........................... 2E4
6-26. Shuttle Valve ................................................ 2E6
6-27. Nose and Main Landing Gear Actuating Cylinder ................ 2E10
6-28. Flap Actuating Cylinder ....................................... 2E 11
6-29. Nose Gear Door Actuating Cylinder ........................... 2E15
6-30. Main Gear Door Actuating Cylinder ............................ 2E16
6-31. Timer Check Valve ........................................... 2E19
6-32. Priority Valve ............................................... 2E22
6-33. Hydraulic Filter .............................................. 2E24
6-34. Emergency Gear Extender Cable Rigging ........................ 2F3
6-35. Bypass Flow Valve ........................................... 2F4


Aerofiche
Figure Grid No.
6-36. Fabricated Work and Test Stand ............................... 2F19

6-37. Fabricated Hook ............................................. 2F20
6-38. Fabricated Hook, Double ..................................... 2F20
7-1. Nose Gear Oleo Strut Assembly ................................ 2G9
7-2. Nose Landing Gear Installation ................................ 2G14
7-3. Adjustment of Nose Gear Drag Link and Latch Assembly . ........ 2G16
7-4. Clamping Rudder Pedals in Neutral ............................ 2G18
7-5. Rudder Pedals Neutral Angle ................................. 2G18
7-6. Aligning the Nose Gear ....................................... 2G20
7-7. Mechanical Nose Gear Door Mechanism, PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl ..... 2G22
7-8. Hydraulic Nose Gear Door Mechanism, PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up ................................ 2G24
7-9. Main Gear Oleo Strut Assembly ................................ 2H3
7-10. Main Landing Gear Installation (Left) .......................... 2H8
7-11. Adjustment of Main Gear Drag Link and Latch Assembly ......... 2H 10
7-12. Aligning Main Gear .......................................... 2H12
7-13. Mechanical Main Gear Door Mechanism, PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl ..... 2H 14
7-14. Hydraulic Main Gear Door Mechanism, PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up ................................ 2H 16
7-15. Landing Gear Circuit Schematic, PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2298 and 27-2331 ........ 2H18
7-16. Landing Gear Circuit Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2000 and up ................................ 2H18
7-17. Adjustment of Nose Gear Up Limit Switch ........... ........... 2H20
7-18. Adjustment of Main Gear Up Limit Switch ...................... 2H21
7-19. Adjustment of Landing Gear Down Limit Switches ............... 2H22
7-20. Landing Gear Warning Switches ............................... 2H24
7-21. Nose Wheel Assembly ......................................... 211
7-22. Main Wheel Assembly ........................................ 212
7-23. Brake Installation ........................................... 214
7-24. Wheel Brake Assembly (Typical) ............................... 218
7-25. Wheel Brake Assembly, Latest Models of PA-23-250 (six place) ... 218
7-26. Removal and Installation of Anchor Bolts ....................... 2110
7-27. Brake Master Cylinder Assembly ............................... 2114
7-28. Parking Brake Valve Assembly ................................ 2116
7-29. Bleeding Brakes .............................................. 2117
7-30. Nose Gear Oleo Service Tolerances ........ ..................... 2119
7-31. Main Gear Oleo Service Tolerances ............................. 2122
7-32. Fabricated Tool, Checking Nose Wheel Alignment ................ 2J4
7-33. Tire Balancer ................................................ 2J5

LIST OF TABLES
Table Aerofiche
Grid No.
VI-I. Leading Particulars, Hydraulic System ........................ 2A17

VI-II. Leading Particulars, Powerpak Assembly ..................... 2A18
VI-lll. Inspection and Repair, Engine-Driven Hydraulic Pump ......... 2C7
VI-IV. Special Tools and Test Equipment ........................... 2C23
Vl-V. Hydraulic System Troubleshooting ........................... 2F5
VI-VI. Powerpak Troubleshooting .................................. 2F8
VI-VII. Powerpak Parts List ........................................ 2FII
VI-VIII. Powerpak Service Limits .................................... 2F17
VII-I. Wheel and Brake Wear Limits ............................... 213
VII-II. Landing Gear Oleo Service Tolerances 19273-02 Nose Gear...... 2120
VII-III. Landing Gear Oleo Service Tolerances 19272-02 Main Gear ..... 2123
VII-IV. Landing Gear and Brake System Troubleshooting ............. 2JI
Reissued: 2/18/81
2A6
INTENTIONALLYLEFT BLANK
2A7
SECTION VI
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
6-1. Introduction ................. ................ ............. 2A14

6-2. Description and Principles of Operation . ............... 2A14
6-3. Troubleshooting ................... .............. .......... 2B7
6-4. Hydraulic Test Units ......................... 2B7
6-5. Hydraulic Test Unit (Piper No. 753 080) ................ 2B7
6-6. Hydraulic Test Unit (Optional) ........................ 2B8
6-7. Connecting Hydraulic Test Unit ....................... 2B8
6-8. Disconnecting Hydraulic Test Unit ..................... 2B8
6-9. Cycling Landing Gear ......................................... 2B9
6-10. Flushing Hydraulic System ................ .................. 2B10
6-11. Hydraulic System Operation Checks . ................. 2B10
6-12. Pre-Check and General Instructions .................... 2B10
6-13. Checking Engine-Driven Hydraulic Pump Operation ..... 2B12
6-14. Checking Powerpak Main Relief Valve................. 2B12
6-15. Checking Selector Lever Release to Neutral............. 2B18
6-16. Internal Leakage Checks ...................................... 2B19
6-17. Checking Hydraulic System for Internal Leaks.......... 2B19
6-18. Checking Powerpak for Internal Leaks ................. 2B20
6-19. Checking Hand Pump for Internal Leaks ............... 2B22
6-20. Checking Components for Internal Leaks ............... 2B23
6-21. Checking Anti-Retraction Valve for Internal Leaks ....... 2CI
6-22. Checking Shuttle Valves for Internal Leaks ............. 2C1
6-23. Checking Landing Gear Actuating Cylinders for
Internal Leaks ................................... 2C2
6-24. Checking Timer Check Valve (Sequence Valve) for
Internal Leaks (PA-23-250 [six place], Serial
Nos. 27-2505 and up) ............................ 2C3
6-25. Checking Priority Valve for Internal Leaks
(PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos.
27-2505 and up) ................................ 2C3
6-26. Checking Flap Actuating Cylinder for Internal
Leaks .......................................... 2C3
6-27. Engine-Driven Hydraulic Pump ............................. 2C4
6-28. Procedure After Engine-Driven Pump Failure ........... 2C4
6-29. Removal of Engine-Driven Pump ...................... 2C4
6-30. Disassembly of Engine-Driven Pump ................... 2C5
6-31. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Engine-Driven
Pump .......................................... 2C6
2A8
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
6-32. Assembly of Engine-Driven Pump ..................... 2C9

6-33. Installation of Engine-Driven Pump .................... 2C10
6-34. Priming Engine-Driven Pump ......................... 2C10
6-35. Hydraulic System Failure ...................................... 2C0
6-36. Hydraulic Powerpak ......................................... 2C II
6-37. Identification of Powerpak ............................ 2C 1I
6-38. Removal of Powerpak ................................ 2C 11
6-39. Installation of Powerpak ............................. 2C13
6-40. Overhaul of Powerpak ........................................ 2C14
6-41. Overhaul Instructions and Precautions ................. 2C14
6-42. Special Tools and Test Equipment ..................... 2C15
6-43. Disassembly of Powerpak ..................................... 2C24
6-44. Removal of Reservoir, Baffle and Plates ............... 2C24
6-45. Removal and Disassembly of Main Relief Valve ......... 2DI
6-46. Removal and Disassembly of Thermal Relief Valve ...... 2D2
6-47. Removal of Camshaft Release Detent Assemblies ........ 2D2
6-48. Removal of Poppets and Selector Camshafts ............ 2D3
6-49. Removal and Disassembly of Hand Pump .............. 2D5
6-50. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Powerpak . ............. 2D6
6-51. Assembly of Powerpak ........................................ 2D7
6-52. Assembly and Installation of Hand Pump............... 2D7
6-53. Installation of Poppets and Selector Camshafts .......... 2D8
6-54. Installation of Camshaft Release Detent
Assemblies ...................................... 2D 10
6-55. Assembly and Installation of Thermal Relief
Valves .......................................... 2D 11
6-56. Assembly and Installation of Main Relief Valve ......... 2DI I
6-57. Installation of Reservoir, Baffle and Plates .............. 2D13
6-58. Powerpak Bench Checks and Adjustments ....................... 2D13
6-59. Check and Adjustment Instructions and
Precautions ..................................... 2D13
6-60. Powerpak Bleeding Procedure ......................... 2D 15
6-61. Check and Adjustment of Main Relief Valve ............ 2D15
6-62. Check and Adjustment of Thermal Relief Valve ......... 2D16
6-63. Check and Adjustment of Camshaft Release
Detent Assemblies ............................... 2D 16
6-64. Check of Poppets for Leakage ......................... 2D18
6-65. Check of Hand Pump ................................ 2D20
6-66. Final Check of Powerpak ............................. 2D20
6-67. Testing Reservoir for Leakage ......................... 2D22
6-68. System Check Valve .......................................... 2D23
6-69. Removal of Check Valve ............................. 2D23
6-70. Cleaning, Inspection and Overhaul of Check
Valve ........................................ 2D23
2A9 2A9 Reissued: 2/18/81

Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
6-71. Testing Check Valve ................................. 2D24

6-72. Installation of Check Valve ........................... 2D24
6-73. Anti-Retraction Valve......................................... 2D24
6-74. Removal of Anti-Retraction Valve ..................... 2D24
6-75. Disassembly of Anti-Retraction Valve .................. 2E
6-76. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Anti-
Retraction Valve ................................ 2E1
6-77. Assembly of Anti-Retraction Valve .................... 2E3
6-78. Testing Anti-Retraction Valve ......................... 2E3
6-79. Installation of Anti-Retraction Valve ................... 2E3
6-80. Adjustment of Anti-Retraction Valve ................... 2E5
6-81. Shuttle Valves ............................................... 2E5
6-82. Removal of Shuttle Valves ............................ 2E5
6-83. Cleaning, Inspection and Overhaul of Shuttle
Valve .......................................... 2E5
6-84. Testing Shuttle Valve ................................ 2E7
6-85. Installation of Shuttle Valves ......................... 2E7
6-86. Actuating Cylinders ........................................... 2E8
6-87. Visual Check of Actuating Cylinders ................... 2E8
6-88. Gear and Flap Actuating Cylinders ............................. 2E8
6-89. Removal of Nose Gear Actuating Cylinder .............. 2E8
6-90. Removal of Main Gear Actuating Cylinder ............. 2E9
6-91. Removal of Flap Actuating Cylinder ................... 2E9
6-92. Disassembly of Gear and Flap Actuating Cylinders ...... 2E9
6-93. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Gear and Flap
Actuating Cylinders .............................. 2E12
6-94. Assembly of Gear and Flap Actuating Cylinders ......... 2E12
6-95. Installation of Nose and Main Gear Actuating
Cylinders....................................... 2E12
6-96. Installation of Flap Actuating Cylinder ................. 2E 13
6-97. Gear Door Actuating Cylinders (PA-23-250 [six place],
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up). ................... 2E14
6-98. Removal of Nose and Main Gear Door Actuating
Cylinders ....................................... 2E14
6-99. Disassembly of Nose Gear Door Actuating
Cylinder ........................................ 2E14
6-100. Disassembly of Main Gear Door Actuating
Cylinder........................................ 2E14
6-101. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Nose and
Main Gear Door Actuating Cylinders .............. 2E 17
6-102. Assembly of Nose Gear Door Actuating Cylinder ........ 2E17
6-103. Assembly of Main Gear Door Actuating Cylinder ........ 2E17
6-104. Installation of Nose and Main Gear Door Actuating
Cylinders....................................... 2E 18
Reissued: 2/18/81
2A10
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
6-105. Timer Check Valve (Sequence Valve) (PA-23-250

[six place], Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up) ..................... 2E18
6-106. Removal of Timer Check Valve ....................... 2E18
6-107. Disassembly of Timer Check Valve .................... 2E18
6-108. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Timer
Check Valve .................................... 2E20
6-109. Assembly of Timer Check Valve ....................... 2E20
6-110. Testing Timer Check Valve ........................... 2E20
6-111. Installation of Timer Check Valve ..................... 2E20
6-112. Priority Valve (PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos.
27-2505 and up).......................................... 2E21
6-113. Removal of Priority Valve ............................ 2E21
6-114. Disassembly of Priority Valve ......................... 2E21
6-115. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Priority
Valve .......................................... 2E21
6-116. Assembly of Priority Valve ........................... 2E21
6-117. Testing and Adjustment of Priority Valve ............. .. 2E23
6-118. Installation of Priority Valve .......................... 2E23
6-119. Hydraulic Lines .................... ......................... 2E23
6-120. Removal and Installation of Hydraulic Lines ............ 2E24
6-121. Hydraulic Filter ........................... ................... 2E24
6-122. Removal and Installation of Hydraulic Filter ............ 2E24
6-123. Replacement of Filter Element ........................ 2E24
6-124. Emergency Gear Extension System (Serial Nos. 27-1 to
27-7954121 incl.) ......................................... 2F1
6-125. Description of Emergency Gear Extension
System ......................................... 2F1
6-126. Servicing Emergency Gear Extender .................... 2F1
6-127. Resetting Emergency Gear Extender ................... 2F1
6-128. Resetting Priority Valve, (PA-23-250 [six place],
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up)....................... 2F2
6-129. Emergency Gear Extender Cable Rigging ............... 2F2
6-130. Bypass Flow Valve ................................... 2F2
6-131. Bypass Flow Valve Test .............................. 2F2
6-132. Bypass Flow Valve Adjustment ........................ 2F4
2A11
2A12
2A12
2A13
2A13
SECTION VI
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
6-1. INTRODUCTION. The hydraulic system components covered in this section consist of
the hydraulic pump(s), the powerpak and its related components, various valves within the
system, actuating cylinders, hydraulic lines and filter. The brake system, although hydrau-
lically operated, is not included in this section as it has its own hydraulic system independent
of the landing gear and flap system. The brake system along with mechanical aspects of the
landing gear is covered in Section VII.
This section provides instructions for remedying difficulties which may arise in the
operation of the hydraulic system. The instructions covered are: Description and Principles of
Operation, for a basic understanding of the system; Troubleshooting, for a methodical
approach in locating the difficulty; Corrective Maintenance, for the removal, repair and
installation of components; and Adjustments and Tests, for the operation of the repaired
system.
WARNING
Prior to starting any investigation of the hydraulic system,

place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to Jacking, Section II.)
6-2. DESCRIPTION AND PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION. The hydraulically operated

landing gear and flap system within the PA-23 is supported by a powerpak unit located in the
control pedestal below the instrument panel. The operation of the powerpak is controlled by
levers protruding through the face of the pedestal; with knobs in the shape of a wheel for the
landing gear, and an air foil for the flap. The powerpak also serves as a hydraulic reservoir.
Pressure for the hydraulic system is supplied by a pump mounted on the left engine. Hydraulic
pumps are installed on both engines on models with Serial Nos. 27-7854051 and up.
The hydraulic pump(s) draws fluid from the reservoir and pumps it through a filter
back to the main check valve at the inlet pressure port of the powerpak. From the pressure
port, fluid flows into the landing gear selector pressure chamber. When the gear and flap
selector levers and poppet valves are in the neutral position, center poppets open, fluid travels
through the landing gear selector port, through the wing flap selector port and back to the
reservoir.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2A14
When either selector lever is moved to the UP or DOWN positions, the fluid then travels
through the selected port into the actuating cylinders. An example of this operation, which is
the same for both the gear selector lever and the flap selector lever, unless otherwise noted,
is as follows. As a selector lever is moved to the UP position, it is locked in place by the action
of the detent assembly. The detent snaps into the groove in the camshaft and is held in place by
the detent spring. The movement of the camshaft, which is attached to the selector lever, opens
and closes poppets within the powerpak to control the flow of fluid to the actuating cylinder(s).
As fluid pressure is building up on one side of the piston within the actuating cylinder(s), fluid
is forced from the other side of the cylinder through the selector return port and back into the
reservoir. When the piston "bottoms" or moves as far as possible, fluid pressure then starts
to build up until it reaches a required pressure. At this time, the pressure forces the plunger of
the detent assembly up against the spring, relieving the holding pressure from the camshaft.
The camshaft return spring then forces the camshaft and selector lever to neutral, thus
trapping fluid under pressure in the section of the system actuated. When a selector lever is
moved to the DOWN position, operation is identical. The flap may be stopped at any position
by moving the selector to neutral. A pictorial description of this operation may be found in
Figures 6-10 through 6-14.
NOTE
Either system may be actuated independently of the other.

However, although both selector levers may be moved at the
same time, the flap system will not operate until the landing
gear system completes its operation.
On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up, a timer check valve
(sequence valve) is provided for each landing gear to prevent the gear doors from closing until
each landing gear has fully retracted. When the landing gear is to extend, a priority valve lo-
cated in the control pedestal, prevents the reverse flow of hydraulic fluid from the gear ac-
tuating cylinder to the reservoir until a pressure of 600 psi has build up in the landing gear
actuating cylinders. The gear doors, with no pressure restriction, will be allowed to open first.
The hand pump serves as an emergency pump should the engine-driven pump(s) fail.
The system check valve prevents the fluid from backing up through the engine-driven pump(s)
into the reservoir. In the event of severe leakage of the hydraulic fluid, the standpipe prevents
the fluid level from dropping below the emergency quantity required for the operation of the
system by means of the hand pump. The engine-driven pump(s) are supplied fluid through the
standpipe, so that when the fluid level goes below the top of the standpipe, no fluid will flow.
Thus, even though the system may develop a break, and the engine-driven pump continues to
operate, devoiding the system of fluid, the standpipe insures enough fluid in the system for
hand pump operation. At altitudes above 10,000 feet the hand pump becomes increasingly
inefficient.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2A15
2A15 Reissued: 2/18, 81
Also incorporated in the powerpak is the main relief valve and four thermal relief valves.
The main relief valve functions as a safety between the engine-driven pump(s) or hand pump
and the selector poppets, should an uncontrollable pressure build up in this area of the system.
When the main relief valve opens, fluid is directed back to the reservoir. The thermal relief
valves provide a means of relieving pressure due to thermal expansion in the hydraulic system.
Included on the left main gear is an oleo actuated bypass valve which makes it impossible
to retract the landing gear while the weight of the airplane is on the gear. This valve is open
when the oleo strut is compressed and bypasses all hydraulic fluid on the pressure side of the
system to the return side, preventing any pressure buildup in the retraction system. When the
oleo strut is extended as in flight, or when the aircraft is on jacks, the valve is closed permitting
the system to operate in the normal manner.
On airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-7954121 inclusive an independent C02 emer-
gency landing gear extension system is available to extend the landing gear if failure of the
hydraulic system should occur due to line breakage or powerpak malfunction. The control for
the system is located beneath a small cover plate under the pilot's seat. When the control is
pulled, C02 flows from a cylinder under the floor panel through separate lines to shuttle valves
adjacent to the gear actuating cylinders. The gas pressure opens the shuttle valves allowing
C02 to enter the gear cylinders, extending the gears.
A mechanical latch is incorporated at the landing gear control lever to guard against
inadvertent retraction of the landing gear while the aircraft is on the ground. The mechanical
latch is located on the control pedestal just above the control lever and must be operated before
the control lever can be moved upward. Should the landing gear control lever become movable
without using the mechanical latch, the latch and related parts should be checked for wear and
possible replacement. (Refer to Parts Catalog.)
Further operating procedures may be found in the Pilot's Operating Manual.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2A16
TABLE VI-I. LEADING PARTICULARS, HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Airplane Model PA-23-250; PA-23-235; PA-23-250

and PA-23-250 (six place), (six place), Serial Nos.
Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2505 and up
27-2504 incl.
System Capacity 0.65 gal. (151 cu. in.) 0.68 gal. (158 cu. in.)
Pump Operating Note identification plate Note identification plate

Pressure and on pump. on pump.
Flow Rate
Hydraulic Fluid 2
Required MIL-H-5606 2 MIL-H-5606
Powerpak Model 750P-1 , 31800-0 31800-2, 31800-2M and

31800-3.
Priority Valve 600 psi to Timer Check Valve

Cracking Pressure and
18 psi to Gear and Door Control
and Gear Actuator
NOTES:
1. ORIGINAL EQUIPMENT
2. PETROLEUM BASE 3126 HYDRAULIC OIL.
PURCHASE EXXON CO. BOX 2180 HOUSTON,
TEXAS 77001
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2 / 18 81
2A17
TABLE VI-II. LEADING PARTICULARS, POWERPAKASSEMBLY
Powerpak Model 750P-1, 14-volt 31800-2, 14-volt

31800-0, 14-volt 31800-2M, 14-volt
31800-3, 28-volt
Operating Pressure 1000 psi nominal 1000 psi nominal
Main Relief Valve 1250 + 50 psi 1350 + 50-0 psi

Cracking Pressure
Thermal Relief Valve 2000 ± 50 psi 2000 ± 50 psi

Cracking Pressure
Selector Lever Detent

Release Pressure:
Landing Gear 900 + 100 psi 1250 + 50-0 psi
Flap 900 ± 100 psi 1000 ± 100 psi
Hand Pump Fluid per 0.74 cu. in. 0.74 cu. in.
Cycle (two strokes)
Reservoir Capacity 4.5 pints 4.5 pints

Approx. (full) (120 cu. in.) (120 cu. in.)
Reservoir Capacity 0.95 pints 1.0 pint (30 cu. in.)

Approx. (emergency) (27 cu. in.)
Weight (dry) 8.25 pounds 8.25 pounds
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2A18
2195
NOSEGEAR
LEFTENGINE GEAR
ACTUA
TOR
SHUTTLE
VALVE
II
LCEGEND
2
Co SYSTEM FLAPS •
Figure 6-1. Hydraulic System Schematic. PA-23-250;PA-23-235;

and PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504incl.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2A19
2117
Figure 6-2. Hydraulic System Installation. PA-23-250; PA-23-235;

and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/ 18/81
2A20
2194
GEAR
NOSE
Figure 6-3. HydraulicSystem Schematic

PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos. 27-2505 to 274425 incl.
and 27-4427 to 274573 incl.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2A21
216
1. MAIN GEAR ACTUATING CYLINDER

2. TIMER CHECK VALVE
3. MAIN GEAR DOOR ACTUATING CYLINDER
4. SHUTTLE VALVE
5. HYDRAULIC FILTER
6. HYDRAULIC PUMP
7. POWERPAK
8. POWERPAK FILLER
9. TIMER CHECK VALVE
10. NOSE GEAR DOOR ACTUATING CYLINDER
11. NOSE GEAR ACTUATING CYLINDER
12. SHUTTLE VALVE
13. CHECK VALVE
14. CO2 CYLINDER
15. FLAP ACTUATING CYLINDER
Figure 6-4. Hydraulic System Installation.

PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos. 27-2505 to 274425 incl. and
27-4427 to 27-4573 incl.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18,81
2A22
HOSE
GEAR
SHUTTLE
VALVE
NOTE
DUAL HYDRAULICPUMP INSTALLATIONKIT PIPERP/N 763 836 AVAIL-
ABLE FOR AIRCRAFT S/N 27-7654001 THRU 27-7854050.
Figure 6-5. Hydraulic System Schematic

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-4426 and 27-4574 to 27-7854050 incl.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2 /18/81
2A23
2169
MAIN GEAR ACTUATING CYLINDER

TIMER CHECK VALVE
MAIN GEAR DOOR ACTUATING CYLINDER
SHUTTLE VALVE
HYDRAULIC FILTER
HYDRAULIC PUMP
POWERPAK
POWERPAK FILTER
TIMER CHECK VALVE
NOSE GEAR DOOR ACTUATING CYLINDER
NOSE GEAR ACTUATING CYLINDER
SHUTTLE VALVE
CHECK VALVE
CO2 CYLINDER
FLAP ACTUATING CYLINDER
FLOW CONTROL BYPASS VALVE
Figure 6-6. Hydraulic System Installation

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-4426 and 27-4574
to 27-7954121 incl.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2A24
24
SEAL
DRAIN
FLAPS.UP
GEAR-RETRACTED
CONTROL-NEUTRAL
FLAP
GEARCONTROL-NEUTRAL
Figure 6-7. Hydraulic System Schematic

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-7854051 to 27-7954121 incl.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2 18/81
2B1
1. MAIN GEARACTUATINGCYLINDER \
2. TIMERCHECKVALVE
3. MAIN GEARDOORACTUATINGCYLINDER
4. SHUTTLEVALVE HYDRAULICPUMPAND
5. HYDRAULICFILTER FILTERALSO INSTALLED
6. HYDRAULICPUMP ON RIGHTENGINE
7. POWERPAK
8. POWERPAKFILTER
9. TIMERCHECKVALVE
10. NOSEGEARDOORACTUATINGCYLINDER
11. NOSEGEARACTUATINGCYLINDER
12. SHUTTLEVALVE
13. CHECKVALVE
14. DELETED
15. FLAPACTUATINGCYLINDER
16. FLOWCONTROLBYPASSVALVE
Figure 6-8. Hydraulic System Installation

PA-23-250 (six place). Serial Nos. 27-8054001 and up
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2B2 2B2 Reissued: 2! 18 81
LEFT
ENGINE RIGHT
ENGIE
NOSE
GEAR
GEAR
ACTUATOR
FLAPS-UP
GEARRETRACTED
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-8054001 and up
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2, 18 81
2B3
2477
-MAIN RELIEF VALVE
LANDINGGEAR LEVER
LEVER "NEUTRAL" POSITION
POSITION
LOWPRESSURE
Figure 6-10. Flow Diagram, Both Selector Levers Neutral
PUMP 2176
MAINRELIEFVALVE
WINGFLAP LANDING GEAR -

ACTUATINGCYLINDER ACTUATING CYLINDERS
WINGFLAPLEVER
"NEUTRAL POSITION
LOWPRESSURE
LANDINGGEAR LEVER
HIGH PRESSURE "UP" POSITION
Figure 6-11. Flow Diagram, Landing Gear Selector Lever Up
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2B4
2175
WING FLAP LEVER LOWPRESSURE

"NEUTRAL POSITION
HIGHPRESSURE
Figure 6-12. Flow Diagram, Landing Gear Selector Lever Down
TO RESERVOIR FROM
TO RESERVOII
WINGFLAP
ACTUATINGCYLINDER
WINGFLAP LEVER LOWPRESSURE LANDINGGEAR LEVER

"DOWN" POSITION "NEUTRAL" POSITION
HIGHPRESSURE
Figure 6-13. Flow Diagram. Flap Selector Lever Down
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2B5
C171
RELIEF VALVE
LANDING GEAR LEVER

"NEUTRAL" POSITION
-WING FLAP LEVER LOW PRESSURE

"JP" POSITION
HIGH PRESSURE
Figure 6-14. Flow Diagram, Flap Selector Lever Up
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2B6
6-3. TROUBLESHOOTING. Malfunctions of the hydraulic system will result in

failure of the landing gear or flaps to operate properly. When trouble arises,
jack up the airplane (Refer to Jacking, Section II) and then proceed to determine
the extent of the trouble. Table VI-V, at the back of this section, lists the
troubles which may be encountered and their probable cause, and suggests a
remedy for the trouble involved. A hydraulic system operational check may be
conducted beginning with paragraph 6-11. When the trouble has been recognized,
the first step in troubleshooting is isolating the cause. Hydraulic system troubles
are not always traceable to one cause. It is possible that a malfunction may be
the result of more than one difficulty within the system. Starting first with the
most obvious and most probable reasons for the trouble, check each possibility
in turn and, by process of elimination, isolate the troubles. Table VI-VI lists
the possible troubles that may arise with the powerpak.
NOTE
If itis found that the powerpakis at fault and requires

disassembly, itis recommended thatit be replaced on
an exchange basis or overhauled by an overhaul shop
recommended by Piper Aircraft Corporation. If, how-
ever, this cannot be achieved, the powerpak may be
repaired in accordance with the instructions in this
section.
6-4. HYDRAULICTEST UNITS.
6-5. HYDRAULICTEST UNIT (PIPER NO. 753 080). The Piper unit would offer
invaluable assistance in checking hydraulic systems, hydraulic powerpaks and
related components in the PA-23. Examples are: Gear and flap cycling, and
mechanical operations. Powerpak operating pressure, main relief valve cracking
pressure, thermal relief valve cracking pressure, and landing gear detent re-
lease pressure.
This unit consists of an electric motor driven hydraulic pump, by-pass
valve, fluid reservoir, filter, pressure gauge, hoses and adapter fittings housed
in a metal cabinet mounted on casters. This unit is available through Piper
Dealers.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2B7
6-6. HYDRAULIC TEST UNIT (OPTIONAL). The use of an optional test unit, or
one which has many capabilities, must be capable of duplicating the same oper-
ating pressures and flow rate as given in Table VI-I for the particular powerpak
being tested. Some of its uses are: To flush or fill the airplane's system with
micronically filtered hydraulic fluid, to provide hydraulic flow and pressure for
testing leakage, and operation of the airplane's hydraulic system without the
necessity of operating the airplane's engines. Also, to test and adjust the various
components of the airplane's powerpak and hydraulic system. This type of unit
should be equipped with a hydraulic hand pump as well as its power driven pump.
6-7. CONNECTING HYDRAULIC TEST UNIT.

a. Remove the inboard engine access panel from the left engine by turning the
quarter turn fasteners.
b. Disconnect the hydraulic pump suction hose from the fitting at the engine
compartment firewall and connect the suction hose of the test unit to the fitting.
Cap the disconnected suction hose.
c. Disconnect the hydraulic pump pressure hose from the inlet side of the
hydraulic filter on the engine mount and connect the pressure hose of the test
unit to the filter's inlet fitting. Cap the disconnected pressure hose.
d. Connect the vent hose of the test unit, if supplied, to the vent fitting of the
powerpak.
e. Operate the test unit per instructions with the unit.
6-8. DISCONNECTING HYDRAULICTEST UNIT.

a. Ascertain that the landing gear is down and locked, and the selector lever
is in the neutral position.
b. Close or open any valves on the test unit per instructions with the unit.
c. Disconnect the test unit suction hose from the firewall fitting. Ascertain
that there is fluid inthe suction hose from the airplane's pump before connecting
it to the firewall fitting.
d. Disconnect the test unit pressure hose from the hydraulic filter. Ascertain
that there is fluid in the pressure hose from the airplane's pump before connect-
ing it to the inlet side of the filter.
e. When connected, disconnect the vent hose and check fluid level in the power-
pak reservoir.
f. Install the access panel to the inboard side of the left engine.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2B8 2B8 Reissued: 2/18/81
6-9. CYCLING LANDING GEAR.

a. Jack the airplane as outlined in Section II and connect the hydraulic test
unit in accordance with paragraph 6-7.
b. If any reason exists to suspect fluid contamination, take a fluid sample
from the hydraulic filter bowl located on the engine mounts.
NOTE
Fluid sampling is necessary only when good reason

exists to suspect contamination. If examination of
fluid reveals contamination, flush complete hydraulic
system with clean hydraulic fluid (MIL-H-5606) and
examine several seals and cylinder bores for damage.
c. Operate the hydraulic test unit per instructions furnished with the unit.
d. Set hydraulic test unit by-pass valve open.
e. Start hydraulic test unit pump motor.
f. Slowly close by-pass valve completely.
g. Observe fluid flowing through test unit sight gauge, if test unit is equipped
with one. When all air bubbles have dissipated, operations may be continued.
h. Using landing gear selector lever in airplane, operate gear as desired.
NOTE
Gear cycling time can be prolonged by slowly opening

the test unit by-pass valve part way. This will bleed
off part of the pump flow.
i. After completion of cycling, open test unit by-pass valve and stop pump
motor.
j . Disconnect hydraulic test unit in accordance with paragraph 6-8.
k. Ascertain that the landing gear is down and locked and the selector lever is
in the neutral position.
1 . Remove the airplane from jacks as outlined in Section II.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2B9
2B9
Reissued: 2/18/81
6-10. FLUSHING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. When contamination of the hydraulic

system is suspected, the complete system should be drained and flushed to re-
move the contaminated fluid. The cause and type of contamination should be de-
termined and corrected. Use the following steps to perform this operation:
a. Remove the engine cowlings as explained in Section VIII or VIIIA.
b. Using the hand pump, lower the flaps to the full DOWN position.
c. Drain the hydraulic system by disconnectingthe hydraulic extension line at the nose
gear actuating cylinder, place the end of the line in a suitable container; select lever to the
DOWNposition and operate the hand pump until the system is empty.
d. Disconnect the hydraulic lines at the actuating cylinders and drain the fluid from the
hydraulic lines and cylinders.
e. Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the filter inlet line and the firewall
suction line fitting.
f. Remove the hydraulic filter element(s)and flush out the filter bowl(s)and install a new
filter element(s).
g. Using a hydraulic test unit, pump clean hydraulic fluid (MIL-H-5606) through
the entire system. Examine several seals and cylinder bores for damage.
h. When the hydraulic system is completely flushed and there is no more in-
dication of contamination, reconnect the previously disconnected fittings and re-
plenish the system with clean hydraulic fluid.
i . Bleed the hydraulic system and check for leaks. (Refer to Paragraph 6-9.)
j . Replace the engine cowlings as explained in Section VII or VIIIA.
k. Recheck filter element(s)after 10 hours of airplane's operation.
6-11. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OPERATION CHECKS.
6-12. PRE-CHECK AND GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS. Should the hydraulic sys-

tem malfunction, it may be necessary to perform operational checks to deter-
mine the specific cause of the malfunction. The checks in the following para-
graphs are intended as a guide for isolating a malfunction to a specific area or
component of the system. These checks do not have to be accomplished in order
of which they are listed; however, it is recommended that the instructions in
paragraphs 6-13 thru 6-26 be read and understood before commencing. In many
instances, one check will lead to the next. A review of Description and Principles
of Operation, paragraph 6-2, will also help to give a better understanding of the
hydraulic system. The following maybe helpful in performing operational checks.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued:218 81
2B10
WARNING
Before attempting any hydraulic system operational checks,

the airplane should be supported on jacks. (Refer to Jacking,
Section II.)
a. Beforecommencingwith checks,remove the accesspanels from both sides of the fuse-

lage nose section. For some of the various checks, remove the panel from the nacellesection
aft of the engine firewall.
b. For most checks, a hydraulic test unit of the type described in Paragraph 6-5 or 6-6
may be used. The use of a test unit will require the removal of the inboard accesspanel at the
left engine. The powerpak hand pump may be used to cyclethe system should a test unit not be
available. The hand pump will not checkthe pressure and suction lines from the enginedriven
pumps.
c. Before attempting a check for internal leaks, the entire system should be visually
checked for external leaks.
d. Special tools required in addition to a hydraulic test unit are a minimum of two pres-
sure gauges with a range from zero to 2000psi, and necessarytee fittings and plugs or caps to
accomplish the required checks.
e. During checks, ascertain that the powerpak reservoir has sufficient fluid.
f. Before disconnecting any hydraulic lines, place rags or similar material under the
connection to absorb any spilled fluid.
g. When disconnectinghydraulic line connection, secure the union fitting whilerotating
the line coupling.
h. Slowly loosen all line couplingswhen disconnecting hydraulic lines should any pres-
sure remain present in the system. Moving the selector lever through its full range of travel
should remove any high pressure from the system.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2Bll
6-13. CHECKING ENGINE-DRIVEN HYDRAULIC PUMP(S) OPERATION. To

determine the operational condition of the hydraulic system, the following checks may be
conducted to determine condition of the engine-driven hydraulic pump(s).
a. Start the left engine and allow it to warm up.
b. With the engine operating at 1200 RPM, move the landing gear selector lever to the
DOWN position. The engine-driven hydraulic pump should build up pressure in the system
and return the selector lever to the neutral position within a few seconds.
c. Should it be found that the selector lever is abnormally slow during the check, it can
be assumed that the hydraulic pump or powerpak is at fault.
d. To determine which of the two units is defective, proceed with the following steps:
1. Shut down the engine and select gear DOWN.
2. Operate the powerpak hand pump until the gear selector lever returns to the
neutral position.
3. If the time is shorter than the engine-driven time, it is an indication of a defective
engine-driven pump. (Refer to paragraph 6-27.)
4. If the time is approximately the same as the engine-driven time, it is an indication
that the powerpak is at fault and requires further checks to isolate the trouble. (Refer to
paragraph 6-16.)
e. On airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-7854051 and up, an engine-driven pump has also been
installed on the right engine. Check this pump by shutting down the left engine and repeating
the preceding steps with the right engine operating. Should it be found that the selector handle
is abnormally slow for one pump, but will return normally with the other pump, then it can be
assumed that the pump is at fault and it should be removed to determine the cause of the
malfunction.
6-14. CHECKING POWERPAK MAIN RELIEF VALVE. The cracking pressure that the
main relief valve opens within the powerpak may be determined as follows:
a. Connect a test unit in accordance with instructions given in paragraph 6-7.
b. Open the hydraulic test unit by-pass valve.
c. Hold the landing gear selector lever full DOWN.
d. Operate the test unit, and slowly close the by-pass valve, observing pressure build-up
and point at which the pressure stabilizes on test unit gauge. Stabilization indicates relief
valve setting. (Refer to Table VI-II for powerpak and its pressure requirement.)
e. The powerpak must be removed (refer to paragraph 6-38) and partially disassembled
to adjust the relief valve. (Refer to paragraph 6-61.)
f. If no further checks are desired, remove the hydraulic test unit per instructions in
paragraph 6-8.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2B12 2B12 Reissued: 2/18/81
TO
DIAGRAM
A
A468
DIAGRAM
C
A470
/
/
DIAGRAM
B
A469
DIAGRAMF
DIAGRAMD
A471
DIAGRAM
E
A456
Figure 6-15. Hydraulic System Checking Diagrams, PA-23-250;PA-23-235;

and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504incl.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2B13
DIAGRAMG DIAGRAMI
A457
DIAGRAMH
DIAGRAMJ
A458
DIAGRAMK
A453
Figure 6-15. Hydraulic System Checking Diagrams, PA-23-250:PA-23-235;

and PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504incl. (cont.)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2B14
DIAGRAMA DIAGRAMB
A454 A455
DIAGRAM
C
A460
DIAGRAM
D
A459
DIAGRAM
E DIAGRAMF
A463
A464
Figure 6-16. Hydraulic System Checking Diagrams, PA-23-250 (six place),

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/ 18/81
2B15
DIAGRAMH
DIAGRAMG A466
A467
DIAGRAMJ
A461
DIAGRAMK
A465
Figure 6-16. Hydraulic System Checking Diagrams. PA-23-250 (six place),

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18,'81
2B16
2B17
6-15. CHECKING SELECTOR LEVER RELEASETONEUTRAL. Thefollowingoutline

may be used to determine the pressure at which the detent assemblies within the powerpak
release the gear and flap selector camshafts, thus allowing their respective levers to return to
neutral from either the up or down position. This check may be conducted as follows:
b. Connect a hydraulic test unit in accordance with instructions given in paragraph 6-7.
(The airplane's hand pump may be used for this check should a test unit not be available.)
c. To check operation of the gear selector lever, proceed as follows:
1. Connect pressure gauges to the landing gear extension and retraction lines, at their
connections, located in the access opening at the right side of the fuselage just forward of the
cabin entrance door. Separate the lines, removing the union fittings, and reconnect using tee
fittings with gauges attached. (Refer to Diagram C, Figure 6-15 or 6-16.) To allow separation
of the lines, loosen the line support blocks located above the fittings.
NOTE
An alternate and less accurate method for checking release

pressures is to use the pressure gauge supplied with the test unit
in lieu of connecting gauges into the retraction and extension
lines.
2. Turn on the hydraulic test unit (or operate the airplane's hand pump) and operate
the landing gear several times through its complete cycle. As the selector lever returns to
neutral from both the up and down positions, check the pressure at which the lever trips. The
selector lever detent release pressure with powerpak model or part number may be found in
Table VI-II.
NOTE
To identify model number of powerpak, refer to paragraph

6-37.
d. To check the operation of the flap selector lever, proceed as follows:

1. Connect pressure gauges to the flap extension and retraction lines, at their connec-
tions, located in the access opening at the right side of the fuselage. Separate the lines, re-
moving the union fittings; and reconnect using tee fittings with gauges attached. (Refer to
Diagram F, Figure 6-15 or 6-16.) If not previously accomplished, loosen the line support
blocks.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2B18 Reissued: 2/18/81
2. Operate the flap through several complete cycles and check the pressure
at which the lever trips to neutral. The flap lever detent release pressure may
also be found in Table VI-II.
e. Should either lever not return to neutral at the required pressure, the ex-
ternal components of the powerpak should be checked for such things as binding
of the selector levers and broken or damaged camshaft return springs. The
powerpak must be removed (refer to paragraph 6-38) and partly disassembled to adjust the
detent assemblies. (Refer to paragraph 6-63.)
f. If no further checks are desired, remove the pressure gauges from the
lines, reinstall union fittings and secure support blocks. Also, as desired, dis-
connect the test unit in accordance with instructions in paragraph 6-8. Check that
the landing gear is down and locked and the gear selector lever is at neutral.
Remove the airplane from jacks.
6-16. INTERNAL LEAKAGE CHECKS.
6-17. CHECKING HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FOR INTERNAL LEAKS. The outline

in this paragraph is given to help determine if an internal leak exists in one of
the four areas of operation of the hydraulic system, including the powerpak; these
being landing gear retraction, landing gear extension, flap retraction and flap
extension. To check each of these areas, proceed as follows:
b. Connect a hydraulic test unit in accordance with instructions given in para-
graph 6-7. (The airplane's hand pump may be used for this check should a test
unit not be available.)
c. To check for internal leaks within the landing gear retraction and extension
areas of operation, proceed as follows:
1. Connect pressure gauges to the landing gear extension and retraction
lines, at their connections, located in the access opening at the right side of the
fuselage just forward of the cabin entrance door. Separate the lines, removing
the union fittings, and reconnect using tee fittings with gauges attached. (Refer
to Diagram C, Figure 6-15 or 6-16.)To allow separation of the lines, loosen the line support
blocks located above the fittings.
2. Operate the hydraulic test unit (or hand pump) and select gear UP. Allow
the selector lever to return to neutral and note pressure reading over a 10 minute
period.
3. After gear up check, select gear DOWN. Allow the selector handle to
return to neutral and note pressure reading over a 10 minute period.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
2B19
4. As the selector lever returns to neutral, the pressure reading on

either gauge will drop slightly and then should stabilize. Once the pressure drop
has stabilized, a further drop should not be indicated. Under no circumstances
should the initial pressure drop below 700 psi. A slow decrease in pressure or
a droppage below 700 psi indicates a possible internal leak in the landing gear
section of the powerpak or one of the components in the landing gear portion of
the hydraulic system.
d. To check for leaks within the flap areas of operation, continue as follows:
1. Connect pressure gauges to the flap extension and retraction lines also
located in the access opening at the right side of the fuselage. Separate the lines,
removing the union fitting, and reconnecting using the fittings with gauges attach-
ed. (Refer to Diagram F. Figure 6-15or 6-16.)If not previouslyaccomplished,loosen the line
support blocks.
2. Operate the hydraulic test unit (or hand pump) and select flap DOWN.
Allow the selector handle to return to neutral and note pressure reading over a
10 minute period.
3. After flap down check, select flap UP. Allow handle to return to neutral
and note pressure reading over a 10 minute period.
4. As in the landing gear check, once the pressure drop has stabilized,
there should be no further drop indicated on either gauge. Here, too, a slow
decrease in pressure or a droppage below 500 psi indicates a possible internal
leak in the powerpak or one of the flap components.
e. Should an internal leak be indicated, isolate by using the procedures out-
lined in the following paragraphs.
f. If no internal leaks are indicated, remove the pressure gauges from the
lines, reinstall union fittings and re-secure support blocks. Disconnect the test
unit as described in paragraph 6-8. Check that the landing gear is down and
locked and the gear selector is at neutral. Remove the airplane from jacks.
6-18. CHECKING POWERPAKFOR INTERNAL LEAKS. The procedure outlined

in this paragraph enables a check of the powerpakfor internal leaks. The system
main check valve, an external component of the powerpak, may also be checked
from instructions given in this paragraph. The check may be conducted as fol-
lows:
b. Connect a hydraulic test unit in accordance with paragraph 6-8. (The air-
plane's hand pump may be used should a test unit not be available.)
c. To check for internal leaks within landing gear section of the powerpak,
proceed as follows:
lines that lead from the powerpak, at the line connections, located in the access
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2B20
opening at the right side of the fuselage. Separate the lines at the union fittings,
allowing the fittings to remain attached to the lines from the powerpak. Attach
pressure gauges to the union fittings. (Refer to Diagram D, Figure 6-15 or 6-16.)
To allow separation of lines, loosen the line support blocks located above the
fittings. Lines to the landing gear should be covered to prevent contamination.
NOTE
On airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up, two

retraction lines are incorporated in the system; these
are to the landing gear actuating cylinder and to the
door actuating cylinder via the timer check valve.
Disconnect the line not fitted with a pressure gauge at
the union fitting and cap to prevent leakage.
2. At the access opening in the left side of the fuselage, disconnect the
retraction and extension lines at the union fittings and cap off the lines leading
from the powerpak. (Refer to Diagram J.)
3. Atthe shuttle valve located onthe aft side of the forward cabinbulkhead,
disconnect and cap the retraction and extension lines leading from the powerpak.
(Refer to Diagram B.)
4. Operate the hydraulic test unit (or hand pump) and select gear UP. Allow
the selector lever to return to neutral and note pressure reading over a 10 minute
period.
5. After gear up check, select gear DOWN. Allow the selector lever to
return to neutral and note reading over a 10 minute period.
6. As the selector lever returns to neutral, the pressure reading on either
gauge will drop slightly and then should stabilize. Once the pressure drop has
stabilized, a further drop should not be indicated. A slow decrease in pressure
indicates an internal leak in the landing gear section of the powerpak.
d. To check for internal leaks within the flap section of the powerpak, proceed
as follows:
1. Connect pressure gauges to the flap extension lines that lead from the
powerpak, at the line connections, located in the access opening at the right side
of the fuselage. Separate the lines at the union fitting allowing the fittings to re-
main attached to the lines from the powerpak. Attach pressure gauges to the
union fittings. (Refer to Diagram G, Figure 6-15 or 6-16.) Lines to the flap cylinder should
be covered.
2. Operate the hydraulic test unit (or hand pump) and select flap DOWN.
Allow the selector lever to return to neutral and note pressure reading over a
10 minute period.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2B21
3. After flap down check, select flap UP. Allow the selector lever to re-
turn to neutral and note reading over a 10 minute period.
4. As in the landing gear check, once the pressure has stabilized there
should be no further drop indicated on either gauge. Here, too, a slow decrease
in pressure indicates an internal leak in the flap section of the powerpak.
e. Should an internal leak be indicated in either the landing gear or flap section,
the powerpak must be removed(Refer to Paragraph 6-36.) and exchanged or over-
hauled. Uncap and reconnectlines as required. If no internal leaks are indicated
in the powerpak, continue with the checks outlined in the following paragraphs.
f. The main check valve may be checked as follows:
1. Disconnect the engine driven pump pressure line at the inlet side of the
main check valve, located on the right side of the powerpak.
2. Select flap DOWN, operate the powerpak hand pump and allow the handle
to return to neutral.
3. With pressure built up in the system, note if any fluid is seeping from
the check valve.
4. If a leak is indicated, remove the valve and replace or overhaul.
g. If no further checks are desired, remove remaining gauges and reconnect
lines. Disconnect hydraulic test unit in accordance with instructions in paragraph
6-8. Check that the landing gear is down and locked, and the selector levers are
at neutral. Remove the airplane from jacks.
6-19. CHECKING HAND PUMP FOR INTERNAL LEAKS.

a. Connect a gauge to the flap extension line from the powerpak, located in the
access openingatthe right side of the fuselage, just forward of the cabin entrance
door. Separate the line at the union fitting allowing the fitting to remain on the
line from the powerpak. Attach the gauge to the fitting. (Refer to Diagram H,
Figure 6-15 or 6-16.)
b. Select flap DOWNwith the selector lever. Operate the hand pump and ob-
serve the pressure reading. The gauge should show a steady increase in pressure
during both the up and down stroke.
c. As the gauge reaches approximately 1000 psi, stop the handle operation at
mid-stroke; the handle should remain steady. If the handle moves up from the
stopped position, the hand pump piston valve is leaking. If the handle moves
down, the hand pump suction valve in the powerpak is leaking. A slow build-up
of pressure indicates a leaking piston packing.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
2B22
6-20. CHECKING COMPONENTS FOR INTERNAL LEAKS. This check is given

as a method for isolating an internal leak to a specific area of the hydraulic sys-
tem, such as the nose landing gear, left main landing gear or right main landing
gear. Components affected in these areas are the actuating cylinders, the shuttle
valves and, for the left gear, the anti-retraction valve. Once the defective area
is determined, then each component may be individually checked as found in fur-
ther paragraphs. The three areas as stated may be checked as follows:
NOTE
Before any of the following checks can accurately be

accomplished, it must be determined that the power-
pak has been checked and found not defective.

c. The check for internal leaks in the hydraulic components located within the
area of the nose landing gear may be accomplished as follows:
1. Connect gauges to the nose landing gear extension line at the shuttle
valve located at the aft side of the forward cabin bulkhead and the retraction line
at the bulkhead fitting forward of the bulkhead. Use tee fitting in the lines to
facilitate use of gauges. (Refer to Diagram A, Figure 6-15 or 6-16.)
2. At the access openings in both the left and right sides of the fuselage,
disconnect and cap off the retraction and extension lines leading from the power-
pak. (Refer to Diagram J for the left side and E for the right side, Figure 6-15
or 6-16.)
3. Operate the hydraulic test unit (or hand pump) and select gear UP (only
the nose gear will retract). Allow the selector lever to return to neutral and note'
pressure reading over a 10 minute period.
5. As the selector lever returns to neutral, the pressure reading on either
gauge will drop slightly and then should stabilize. Once the pressure drop has
stabilized, a further drop should not be indicated. A slow decrease in pressure
indicates an internal leak in the actuating cylinder(s) and/or shuttle valve.
d. The check for internal leaks within the left main gear area may be con-
ducted as follows:
lines, at their connections, located in the access opening at the left side of the
fuselage. Separate the lines, removing the union fittings, and reconnect using
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2B23
tee fittings with gauges attached. (Refer to Diagram K, Figure 6-15 or 6-16.)
2. At the access opening in the right side of the fuselage, just forward of
the cabin entrance door, disconnect the landing gear retraction and extension
lines at the union fittings and cap off the lines leading from the powerpak. (Refer
to Diagram E.)
3. At the shuttle valve located on the aft side of the forward cabin bulkhead,
disconnect and cap the retraction and extension lines leading from the powerpak.
(Refer to Diagram B.)
the left gear will retract). Allow the selector lever to return to neutral and note
6. As the selector lever returns to neutral and the pressure drop has sta-
bilized, hereto a further drop should not be indicated. A slow decrease in pres-
sure indicates an internal leak in the actuating cylinder(s), shuttle valve and/or
anti-retraction valve.
e. The check for internal leaks within the right main gear area may be con-
ducted as follows:
1. Connect gauges to the landing gear extension and retraction lines, at
their connections, located in the access opening at the right side of the fuselage,
just forward of the cabin entrance door. Separate the lines, removing the union
fittings, and reconnect using tee fittings with gauges attached. (Refer to Diagram
C, Figure 6-15 or 6-16.)
2. At the access opening in the left side of the fuselage, disconnect the
landing gear extension and retraction lines at the union fittings and cap off lines
leading from the powerpak. (Refer to Diagram J.)
3. At the shuttle valve in the nose, disconnect and cap the retraction and
extension lines leading from the powerpak. (Refer to Diagram B.)
the right gear will retract). Allow the selector lever to return to neutral and
note pressure reading over a 10 minute period.
5. After gear up check, select gear DOWN. Allow lever to return to neu-
tral and note reading over a 10 minute period.
6. For either the gear up or down check, once the pressure has stabilized
there should be no further drop. A slow decrease in pressure indicates an inter-
nal leak in the actuating cylinder(s) and/or shuttle valve.
f. Should a leak be indicated and isolated to one of the three landing gear areas,
the components within that area may be individually checked in accordance with
instructions given in paragraphs 6-21 thru 6-23.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2B24
g. If no further checks are desired, remove the remaining gauges and re-
connect hydraulic lines. Disconnect hydraulic test unit in accordance with in-
structions in paragraph 6-8. Check that the landing gear is down and locked, and
the selector levers are at neutral. Remove the airplane from jacks.
6-21. CHECKING ANTI-RETRACTION VALVE FOR INTERNAL LEAKS. The

anti-retraction valve, located on the strut housing of the left main landing gear,
may be checked as follows:
b. Disconnect the left landing gear doors at the control rods, and secure back.
c. Connect a hydraulic test unit in accordance with instructions given in para-
d. Operate the test unit (or hand pump) and retract the landing gear. Allow
the selector lever to return to neutral.
e. Disconnect the hydraulic line from the valve at the port stamped "R".
f. Check for evidence of fluid leakage at the open port. An alternate method
is to attach a pressure gauge to the fitting at the port stamped "R" and note if a
pressure reading on the gauge begins to appear over a few minutes period.
g. Should the valve show indications of leakage, by seepage or by the pressure
gauge, the valve should be repaired or replaced. (Refer to paragraph 6-73.)
h. If no further checks are desired, reinstall the hydraulic line and disconnect
the hydraulic test unit in accordance with instructions in paragraph 6-8. Check
that the landing gear is down and locked, and the selector levers are at neutral.
i. Reconnect gear doors, check adjustment and remove the airplane from jacks.
6-22. CHECKING SHUTTLE VALVE FOR INTERNAL LEAKS. The shuttle

valves, one of which is located on the aft side of the forward cabin bulkhead and
one located in each engine nacelle aft of the firewall, may be checked by the fol-
lowing procedure:
c. Operate the test unit (or hand pump) and extend the landing gear. Allow the
selector lever to return to neutral.
d. Disconnect the hydraulic line from the valve at the port stamped "EMG".
e. Check for evidence of fluid leakage at the open port. An alternate method
is to attach a pressure gauge to the fitting at the port stamped "EMG" and note if
a pressure reading on the gauge begins to appear over a few minutes period.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2C1
2C1 Reissued: 2/18/81
f. Should a valve show indications of leakage, by seepage or by the pressure

gauge, the valve should be repaired or replaced. (Refer to Paragraph 6-80.)
g. If no further checks are desired, reinstall the hydraulic line and disconnect
6-23. CHECKING LANDING GEAR ACTUATING CYLINDERS FOR INTERNAL

LEAKS. The landing gear actuating cylinders and, if installed, the door actu-
ating cylinders, whether they be installed within the fuselage nose section or
wing, may be checked by the following procedure:
c. Operate the test unit (or hand pump) and select gear DOWN. Allow the
selector lever to return to neutral.
d. To check a landing gear actuating cylinder, disconnect the hydraulic line
from the cylinder at its lower end. (The end closest to the exposed actuating
rod.)
WARNING
Slowly loosen the line coupling from the cylinder should

any pressure remain present in the system.
e. To check a landing gear door actuating cylinder, disconnect the hydraulic

line from the forward end of the nose cylinder or inboard end of the left or right
main cylinder. (The end closest to the cylinder attachment lug.)
f . Check for evidence of fluid leakage at the open port. An alternate method
is to attach a pressure gauge to the fitting from where the line was disconnected
and note if a pressure reading on the gauge begins to appear over a few minutes
period.
g. Should a cylinder show indications of leakage, by seepage or by the pres-
sure gauge, the cylinder should be replaced or repaired. (Refer to Paragraph
6-85.)
h. If no further checks are desired, reinstall the hydraulic line, and disconnect
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2C2
6-24. CHECKING TIMER CHECK VALVE (SEQUENCE VALVE) FOR INTERNAL

LEAKS. (PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up.) Three timer check valves are
incorporated in the hydraulic system. The valve for the nose gear is located in the lower area
of the nose section, just ahead of the forward cabin bulkhead. The valve for each main landing
gear is located in the wheel well, above the gear support brace. Any one valve may be checked
b. Disconnect both hydraulic lines from the valve.
c. Connect the pressure line of a hydraulic test unit to the port of the valve furthest from
its mounting base.
d. Open the test unit by-pass valve.
e. Operate the test unit and slowly close the by-pass valve.
f. Apply 2000 psi maximum hydraulic pressure to the valve and ascertain that fluid does
not appear at the open port.
g. Should the valve show indications of internal leakage, the unit should be replaced or
repaired. (Refer to paragraph 6-105.)
h. After completion of check, ascertain that the landing gear is down and locked, and the
selector levers are at neutral. Remove the airplane from jacks.
6-25. CHECKING PRIORITY VALVE FOR INTERNAL LEAKS. (PA-23-250[six place],

Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up.) The priority valve, located in the lower right side of the control
pedestal, should be removed and checked for internal leaks according to instructions given in
paragraph 6-112.
6-26. CHECKING FLAP ACTUATING CYLINDER FOR INTERNAL LEAKS.
NOTE
Before the following checks can accurately be accomplished,

it must be determined that the flap section of the powerpak
has been checked and found not defective. (Refer to paragraph
6-18.)
a. Connect a hydraulic test unit in accordance with instructions given in paragraph 6-7.
(The airplane's hand pump may be used for this check should a test unit not be available.)
b. Connect pressure gauges to the flap extension and retraction lines, at their connection,
located in the access opening at the right side of the fuselagejust forward of the cabin entrance
door. Separate the lines, removing the union fitting and reconnect using tee fittings with
gauges attached. (Refer to Diagram F, Figure 6-15 or 6-16.)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
2C3
c. Operate the hydraulic test unit (or hand pump) and select flap DOWN. Allow the
selector lever to return to neutral and note pressure reading over a 10 minute period.
d. After flap down check, select flap UP. Allow lever to return to neutral and note
e. As the selector lever returns to neutral, the pressure reading on either gaugewilldrop
slightly and then should stabilize. Once the pressure drop has stabilized, a further drop should
not be indicated. A slow decrease in pressure indicates a possible internal leak in the flap
actuating cylinder.
f. Should a leak be indicated in the cylinder, the unit should be replaced or repaired.
g. After completion of check, remove the pressure gauges from the lines and reinstall
union fitting. Disconnect the hydraulic test unit as described in paragraph 6-8.
6-27. ENGINE-DRIVEN HYDRAULIC PUMP(S).
6-28. PROCEDURE AFTER ENGINE-DRIVEN PUMP FAILURE. Should a pump

breakage occur, there may be metal particles in the hydraulic system. To rectifythis condition,
the hydraulic system should be flushed. Proceed with the followingsteps:
a. Replace the defective engine-drivenhydraulic pump and prime it in accordance with
paragraph 6-34.Do not connect the pump to the rest of the hydraulic systemuntil the system
has been flushed.
b. Proceed to flush the system in accordance with paragraph 6-10.
c. Remove the filter element and check for metal particles. If metal particles are evident
in the filter, clean the filter bowl with dry cleaning solventand dry with compressedair. Install
new filter element in accordance with paragraph 6-123.
6-29. REMOVAL OF ENGINE-DRIVEN PUMP.

a. Remove the engine cowl by releasing skin fasteners and screwsfrom around the cowl,
and separate the two halves.
b. Place a drip pan under the engine to catch spillage.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2C4
NOTE
If desired, to facilitate easier removal of the pump,

the right magneto may be removed.
c. Disconnect the two hydraulic hoses from the pump.

d. Disconnect drain hose from bottom of pump.
e. Remove four nuts, lockwashers, and flat washers from the base of the pump.
f. Remove the pump from engine housing.
g. Upon removal of the pump from its drive pad, remove and discard the gas-
ket from the pump mounting face. The gasket and all seal rings should be re-
placed with new parts upon reassembly. Never reinstall an old gasket or seal
ring.
6-30. DISASSEMBLY OF ENGINE-DRIVEN PUMP. (Refer to Figure 6-17.)

NOTE
The following instructions apply only to Eastern Industries

pumps, (Model 1233HNG, Type 284), (1235HGG, Type 263)
or (1233 HNG, Type 311).
a. Clean outside of pump thoroughly.

b. Mark a line from the rear side, across the centerplate to the drive side
with blue Dykem or some equivalent removable substance. This will assure
proper reassembly.
CAUTION
During disassembly, do not use a screwdriver or

sharp tool to separate the parts.
c. Remove the four socket head cap screws (12) securing the rear side (13),
centerplate (10) and drive side (7) together. These screws are threaded into the
drive side.
d. Remove the four locknuts (8) from the studs (14) extending out of the drive
side flange that mates with the center plate.
e. Remove the rear side by rocking it from side to side and sliding it from the
four dowels (11). In case of sticking, tap gently with a plastic or rubber hammer.
f. Remove the four studs (14) from the rear side. Remove and discard the
large "O" ring seal (15) from the rear side. Pull the drive (1) and secondary
shafts (17) until drive pins (16 and 2) clear gears. Remove drive pins.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2C5
g. Remove drive gear (19), secondary gear (18), and secondary shaft (17) by
pulling from centerplate (10).
h. Remove drive shaft by pushing out of drive side. Remove centerplate with
dowels by rocking it from side to side.
i. Remove large "O" ring seal (9) from drive side and discard.
j. Remove retainer ring (3) securing seal (4 or 5) in drive side seal bore.
Note proper position of seal (4 or 5) upon disassembly. Seal mustnotbe reversed
at reassembly. Remove and discard the two part seal.
6-31. CLEANING, INSPECTION, REPAIR OF ENGINE DRIVEN PUMP.

a. Immerse and wash all metallic parts in trichlorethylene (Military Specifi-
cation MIL-T-7003) or some equivalent commercial cleaning solvent. Clean all
openings and passages with a fine fiber brush, or equivalent, dipped in solvent.
Do not scrub any surface with a tool that will scratch surface.
WARNING
Wear goggles, rubber gloves and provide adequate

ventilation when using trichlorethylene or cleaning
solvents. Repeated contact of solvent with skin may
produce irritation. If vapors are inhaled, serious
damage may result.
b. Dry all parts thoroughly with a clean, lint-free cloth or with dry, filtered
compressed air at 20 psi maximum. Blow out all parts, bores and passages with
compressed air.
c. Under strong light and preferably under magnification, inspect all parts for
scoring, nicks, scratches, pitting, corrosion, cracks and excessive wear. In-
spect all threaded surfaces for chipping and crossed or stripped threads. Inspect
parts for conformance to information given in Table VI-III. The table gives the
items which should be inspected and the corrective action necessary when the
pump parts do not pass this inspection.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2C6
TABLE VI-III. INSPECTION AND REPAIR, ENGINE-DRIVEN HYDRAULIC PUMP
ITEM INSPECTION REPAIR
Rear Side Visually inspect the lapped Lap the surface to remove
face for scratches or signs any scratches.
of scoring.
Centerplate Visually inspect the two lap- Lightly stone any burrs around
ped faces for scratches or the gear pockets. Lap the
scoring. Inspect the gear faces, but do not remove more
pockets for deep scratches. than 0.0001 in. total of metal
from both sides.
Drive Side Visually inspect the lapped Lap the surface to remove any
surface for scratches or scratches. If deep scratches
signs of scoring. are present, replace part.
Secondary Inspect the shaft for deep If deep scratches are present,
Shaft scratches in the bearing area. replace secondary shaft.
Gears Visually inspect gears for evi- If gears are not within tolerance
dence of chipped teeth or or if there are any cracked
cracks around the bore. Mea- teeth, replace the pump.
sure the gear O.D., which
should be 1..1646/1.1644 in.
Bearings Visually inspect the bearing If badly scored, replace pump.

bores for scratches and/or
scoring.
NOTE
The PA-23 Parts Catalog, P/N 753 522, should be used

to obtain repair kits to service this pump.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2C7
1. DRIVE SHAFT
2. DRIVE PIN
3. RETAINER RING
4. SEAL - WITHOUT GARTER SPRING
5. SEAL - WITH GARTER SPRING
6. GASKET
7. DRIVE SIDE ASSEMBLY
8. LOCKNUT
9. "O" RING
10. CENTER PLATE ASSEMBLY
11. DOWELS (4)
12. SCREW, SOC. HD. CAP.
13. REAR SIDE ASSEMBLY
14. STUD
15. "O" RING
16. DRIVE PIN
17. SECONDARY SHAFT
18. SECONDARY GEAR
19. DRIVE GEAR
Figure 6-17. Hydraulic Pump, Exploded View
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2C8
2C8 Reissued: 2, 18 81
NOTE
Although the pump may still operate under conditions

where some of the parts exceed the wear limits, it
will probably be found that the pump is not producing
its rated capacity and, therefore, the system may not
be doing an adequate job. Therefore, it is necessary
to repair or replace any parts that are not within the
stated limits.
6-32. ASSEMBLY OF ENGINE-DRIVEN PUMP. (Refer to Figure 6-17.) The seal

and seal rings should be soaked in the hydraulic (MIL-H-5606)fluid for two hours minimum
time before installation.
a. Replace drive shaft seal (4 or 5) into drive side seal bore. Be sure to in-
stall drive shaft seal, "back to back", as noted during disassembly.
b. Replace retainer ring (3) into drive side seal bore.
c. Install new "O" ring seal (9) on drive side.
d. Mate centerplate assembly (10) with drive side assembly (7) and align dowel
pins.
e. Install drive shaft (1) from engine side of drive side assembly.
f. Install secondary shaft (17) into centerplate. Install drive and secondary
gears (19 and 18) onto drive and secondary shafts (1 and 17). Be sure the drive
pin counterbore on the drive gear faces the pump rear side. Install drive pins.
g. Install the four studs (12) and new "O" ring seal (15) on the rear side as-
sembly (13).
h. Lightly oil gear teeth with hydraulic fluid before completing assembly.
i . Mate the rear side assembly (13) with the centerplate (10), using caution to
align the drive and secondary shafts with the respective holes in the rear side
assembly.
j . Replace the four locknuts (8) on the studs (14) extending out of the drive side
flange that mates with the centerplate.
k. Replace the four socket head cap screws (12) that secure the rear side,
centerplate and drive side assemblies together. Torque the socket head cap
screws and locknut to 60 inch-pounds.
1. When the pump is assembled, turn drive shaft by hand to make sure the
pump turns freely. If there is any sticking or binding at all, disassemble pump
and determine the trouble. Do not apply power to the pump until it turns freely
by hand.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2C9
NOTE
If possible, run pump at rated speed while gradually
increasing the pressure up to rated pressure by the end of the
thirty minute period.
6-33. INSTALLATIONOF ENGINE DRIVENPUMP(S).

a. Place new gasket on the base of housing.
b. Install pump on the housing.
NOTE
When installing pump, keep the drain fitting facing

downward.
c. Line shaft up with the gear inside of the housing.

d. Install flat washers,lockwashersand nuts on the base of pump and tighten.
e. Install the two hydraulic hoses and prime the pump before completing the hookup
to the firewallfittings in accordance with paragraph 6-34.
f. Install and time magneto.
g. Check to be sure that system reservoir contains the required amount of clean fluid.
h Checkall fluid lines for leaks, obstructions or restrictions.
i Changesystem fluid filter in accordance with paragraph 6-123.
j. Replace cowling.
k. Run up the engine and check for leaks.
6-34. PRIMING ENGINE DRIVEN PUMP. The following instructions for priming the
hydraulic pump assures that the pump will not be operated in a dry condition and shall be
followed whenevera pump is serviced or replaced.
a. Remove the hydraulic suction and pressure lines from the firewall fitting and oil
filter.
b. Install caps on suction and pressure fitting at the firewall and oil filter to prevent the
loss of fluid prior to the hookup of the hydraulic lines.
c. Holding both lines at a level higher than the pump; pour hydraulic fluid,
MIL-H-5606,into the lines.
d. Remove one cap at a time from the fittings and connect the appropriate line to the
fitting, trying not to spill any of the hydraulic fluid previouslyput into the lines.
e. After the engine has been operated, check the hookups for leaks.
6-35. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FAILURE. The emergencyuse of the hand pump or C02
system to extend the gears is an indication the engine driven pump(s) were operating
without sufficient fluid. This condition causes additional wear on the engine driven
pump(s). Therefore, the filter element(s) must be removed and checked even if pump failure
is not apparent and/or the primary cause of the problem.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2C10
2C10
Reissued: 218 81
A475
PIPER AIRCRAFT CORP
Figure 6-18. Identification of Powerpak
a. Remove the filter element(s)and check for metal particles.

b. If no metal particles are evident, proceed with the following:
1. Replacefilter element(s)per paragraph 6-123.
2. Replenish fluid as noted in Section II.
c. If metal particles are evident in filter, proceed with the following:
1. Inspect, replace or repair hydraulic pump. On aircraft with dual pumps both
pumps must be inspected if metal particles are found in either filter. (Refer to paragraphs
6-29 to 6-33.)
2. Prime pump(s) in accordance with paragraph 6-34.Do not connect the pump(s) to
the rest of the hydraulic system until the system has been flushed.
3. Proceed to flush the system in accordance with paragraph 6-10.
6-36. HYDRAULIC POWERPAK.
6-37. IDENTIFICATION OF POWERPAKS. The manufacturer's identification placard

located on the powerpak reservoirbody, as shown in Figure 6-18,shouldbe used to determine
which powerpak is in the airplane being serviced. The placard furnishes the part/model
number and serial number of each unit.
6-38. REMOVAL OF POWERPAK.

b. Lower the flaps to the full down position, using the hand pump.
c. Drain the hydraulic system by disconnectingthe hydraulic extension line at the nose
gear actuating cylinderand placingthe end of the line in a suitable container. Move the landing
gear selector to the DOWN position and operate the hand pump until the system is empty.
d. Remove the two front seats and the carpet from around the base of the control
pedestal.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2C11
e. Remove the access plate from both sides of the upper section of the pedes-
tal.
f . Disconnect the cannon plug inside the left access opening.
NOTE
On airplanes equipped with turbocharges, disconnect

both cannon plugs and mark them for identification.
g. Remove the flap and landing gear selector knobs by removing the Allen
screw from the flap knob and the nut and bolt from the landing gear knob.
h. Disconnect the carburetor heat or alternate air knobs on the pedestal con-
trol placard. Extend the control knob approximately one inch. Unscrew the out-
side knob and remove the spring. Unscrew the inside knob and the outside nut
that secures the cable to the placard. (The removed cables should be marked for
identification.)
i. Remove the attaching screws from around the upper pedestal control cover
and remove the cover with placard attached.
j On airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-2505 and up, disconnect the voltage
regulator selector switch from the lower placard panel by removing the nut which
holds it to the panel.
k. On airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-2505 and up, remove the quick drain
from its line coming through the lower placard panel.
1. Disconnect the cabin air controls from the lower placard panel. Extend
the control knobs approximately one inch. Unscrew the outside knob and remove
the spring. Unscrew the inside knob and the outside nut that connects the cables
to the placard panel. (The removed cables should be marked for identification.)
m. Remove the attaching screws from the lower placard panel. On airplanes
with Serial Numbers 27-1 to 27-2504 inclusive, swing the panel off to the left.
On airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-2505 and up, remove the panel.
n. Disconnect the two wire leads coming through the top left forward section
of the upper pedestal plate assembly.
o. On airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-2505 and up, remove the screw from
the right side of the lower pedestal plate assembly that secures the priority valve
to the plate.
p. Remove the attaching screws from around the outside edge of the lower
pedestal plate assembly.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2C12
NOTE
It may be necessary to loosen or remove the drip pan

and the spacer bar by removing the screws on both
sides that hold them in place.
q. Remove the "U" shaped brace from the aft section mounting channel.
r. Remove all hydraulic lines at the powerpak. The lines should be capped
or plugged to prevent dirt or dust from entering the system.
s. Remove the vent hose from the grommet at the base of the pedestal assem-
bly.
t. Remove the attaching screws from the two mounting channels that hold the
powerpak.
u. Remove the powerpak and place on a rigid base prepared for removal.
6-39. INSTALLATION OF POWERPAK.

a. Insert the powerpak, with mounting channels attached, into the pedestal and
attach the channels to the top side panels.
b. Insert the vent hose into the grommet at the base of the pedestal assembly.
c. Connect all hydraulic lines to the powerpak.
d. Connect the "U" shaped brace to the bottom of the aft section mounting
channel.
e. Install the lower pedestal plate assembly.
f. On airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-2505 and up, connect the priority
valve to the lower pedestal plate assembly on the right side.
g. Insert the two wires from the horn through the grommet on the upper left
side of the pedestal plate assembly.
h. Install the lower placard panel.
i . Connect the cabin air controls to the lower placard panel. Screw on the nut
that holds the cable to the panel. Screw on the inside knob. Install the spring and
screw on the outside knob.
j . On airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-2505 and up, install the quick drain
on its line coming through the lower placard panel.
k. On airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-2505 and up, connect the voltage reg-
ulator switch to the lower placard panel.
I . Install the upper pedestal cover with placard attached.
m. Connect the carburetor heat or alternate air knobs. Screw on the nut that
secures the cable to the placard. Screw on the inside nut. Install the spring and
screw on the outside nut.
n. Install the flap and landing gear selector knobs to their respective levers.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
2C13
o. Connect the cannon plug inside the left access opening.

p. Connect the hydraulic line at the nose gear actuating cylinder.
q. Fill and bleed the hydraulic system (refer to Filling Hydraulic System, Section II) and
check for leaks.
r. Install the access plates on both sides of the upper section of the pedestal.
s. Install the two front seats and the carpet around the base of the pedestal.
t. Raise the flaps using the hand pump.
CAUTION
Before removing the airplane from the jacks, ascertain that

landing gear is down and lockedand selector leversare neutral.
6-40. OVERHAUL OF POWERPAK.
6-41. OVERHAUL INSTRUCTIONS AND PRECAUTIONS. For complete disassembly

and assemblyof the powerpak, refer to Figure 6-20.The procedure described in the following
paragraphs is presented in such a manner that a complete or partial overhaul may be
conducted.
NOTE
Before attempting to disassemble the powerpak, be sure the

specialtools and test equipmentspecifiedin paragraph 6-42 are
available. The test equipment is necessary for checking ad-
justing pressures following re-assembly. Refer to paragraph
6-58 for adjustment and check procedures.
Be sure to observe the precautions listed below when overhauling the powerpak. Strict
adherence to these precautions ensures a minimum of time and expense for repair of the
powerpak and reduces the chance of damage to poppet and valve seats due to carelessmis-
handling of tools. Damage to poppet or valve seats requires return of powerpak to Piper
Aircraft Corporation for overhaul or exchanged.
a. Keep the unit free of all foreign matter.
b. For removal and replacement of internal snap rings, use Waldes-Kohinoor, Inc.
snap ring pliers No. I and 3 (or equivalent).
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2C14
c. Use long-nose pliers for removal and replacement of all retainer plugs, detent plungers
and poppets.
d. Use a hooked tool to remove check valve, relief valve and poppet seats. (These tools
may be fabricated from dimensions given in Figures 6-37 and 6-38.)
CAUTION
Use extreme care when handling poppet seats, check valves

and seats, relief valve seats and bores. Damage to these parts
requires returning the powerpak for overhaul.
NOTE
Poppets and seats are matched parts and must be kept to-
gether. Damage to either a poppet or a seat requires replace-
ment of the poppet and seat subassembly.
e. It is recommended that the powerpak be mounted to a combination work and test

stand. A stand of this type may be fabricated from dimensions given in Figure 6-36.
f. All threads, either straight or pipe, are right-hand twist unless otherwise noted in
instructions.
g. Prior to removal of camshafts, relieve the tension on the appropriate spring loaded
detent plungers and poppets.
h. Use care when handling "O" rings. Coat "O" rings and associated parts with grease
(MIL-G-4343) or hydraulic fluid before reassembly.
6-42. SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT. Refer to Table VI-IV for special tools
and test equipment required for disassembly, reassembly and testing of the powerpak.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2C15
2C16
71 7
I 2 3 4 5 4 6 7 4 8 4
1. SELECTOR LEVER, LANDING GEAR

2. EMERGENCY HAND PUMP
3. SELECTOR LEVER, FLAP
4. VALVE, THERMAL RELIEF
5. VALVE, MAIN RELIEF
6. POPPET ASSY, RETURN, FLAP RETRACTION SEE SKETCH A
7. POPPET ASSY, PRESSURE, FLAP EXTENSION LEFT SIDE VIEW
8. POPPET ASSY, PRESSURE, FLAP OPEN CENTER
9. POPPET ASSY, PRESSURE, FLAP RETRACTION
10. POPPET ASSY, RETURN, FLAP EXTENSION
II. RESERVOIR STAND PIPE
12. SPRING ASSY, CAMSHAFT RETURN
13. SUCTION PORT, TO PUMP
14. CAMSHAFT DETENT ASSY, FLAP
15. CAMSHAFT DETENT ASSY, LANDING GEAR
16. POPPET ASSY, RETURN, GEAR RETRACTION
17. POPPET ASSY, PRESSURE, GEAR EXTENSION
18. CHECK VALVE, MAIN
19. POPPET ASSY, PRESSURE, GEAR OPEN CENTER
20. PRESSURE PORT, GEAR EXTENSION
21. PRESSURE PORT, GEAR RETRACTION
22. POPPET ASSY, PRESSURE. GEAR EXTENSION
23. POPPET ASSY, RETURN, GEAR RETRACTION
24. PRESSURE PORT, FLAP RETRACTION
25. PRESSURE PORT, FLAP EXTENSION
26. IDENTIFICATION PLACARD
9
10
II
A476
24 25
26 16
NOTE 15
THIS SWITCH USED ON KING - 14
SKETCH A KFR-200 INSTALLATION SKETCH B
Figure 6-19. Location of Powerpak Components
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2C17 2C18
2160
I. NUT
2. WASHER, RESERVOIR
Figure 6-20. Hydraulic Powerpak,Exploded View
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Rcissued: 2/18/81
2C19 2C20
211i
19
c" 120
N
155. PLUNGER DETENT
156. PACKING
157. PACKING, "O" RING
138 K
158. ADAPTER, RELIEF VALVE \
159.
160.
NOT ASSIGNED
THERMAL RELIEF VALVE ASSY
N
161. MAIN RELIEF VALVE ASSY
162. MAIN RELIEF VALVE ASSY
163. HAND PUMP SUCTION VALVE ASSY
1
164. CAMSHAFT RELEASE DETENT ASSY
165. CAMSHAFT RELEASE DETENT ASSY
166. HAND PUMP ASSY 129
167. POPPET ASSY, RETURN
168. POPPET ASSY, PRESSURE
169. CAMSHAFT AND RETURN SPRING ASSY -113
PLUG
PACKING, "O" RING 170. MAIN CHECK VALVE ASSY
K1
SCREW 64 \
WASHER
SPRING 56 5 65 6 K11
SPACER
WASHER
lD 10 N
CAMSHAFT 'N1
aI
PACKING, "O" RING
END FITTING
N 136 135 1 133132 1 130
GASKET
PACKING
POPPET
SPRING
N•
BODY
ELBOW N
PIPE, STAND
BODY
PLUG
HEAD, THERMAL RELIEF VALVE
N
END FITTING
RETAINER
N
Ne
BODY
'O"
POPPET
RING
ASSY
r- 116s
BALL
SPRING
GUIDE
NUT
CAP
PACKING, "O" RING
GEAR DETENT CAP
SPRING
DETENT SPRING GUIDE
Figure 6-20. Hydraulic Powcrpak, Exploded View (cont.)
IIYDI'RAUI.IC SYST EM
Rcissuied:2,18/I
2C21 2C22
TABLE VI-IV. SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT
Nomenclature Part No. Manufacturer
Retaining Ring Pliers Cat. No. 1 Waldes-Kohinoor, Inc.

or 47-16 Austel Place
equivalent Long Island City 1, N.Y.
11101
Retaining Ring Pliers Cat. No. 3 Waldes-Kohinoor, Inc.

or 47-16 Austel Place
equivalent Long Island City 1, N.Y.
11101
Piper Hydraulic Test Unit 753 080 Piper Aircraft Corporation

or Lock Haven, Pa. 17745
equivalent
Actuating Cylinder, 2 reqd. 31870-02 Piper Aircraft Corporation

(double acting, 1-1/4 in. Lock Haven, Pa. 17745
ID x 8-in. stroke)
Speed Control Valve, 4 reqd. CA111-5 Canfield Supply Comp.

(adjusted for 300-400 psi 17 Dederick Street
back pressure) Kingston,New York
Pressure Gage, 4 reqd. Standard

(2000 psi, 2-in. dial)
Reservoir, Open Top 31827-00 Piper Aircraft Corporation

(Mod.) Lock Haven, Pa. 17745
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2C23
6-43. DISASSEMBLY OF POWERPAK.
6-44. REMOVAL OF RESERVOIR, BAFFLE AND PLATES. (Refer to Figure

6-20.)
a. Remove the self-locking nut (1), washer (2) and "O" ring (3) from the top
of the powerpak reservoir (4).
b. Remove the powerpak reservoir. The reservoir is held by a snug fit, and
can be removed by grasping it firmly on both sides and applying a steady twisting
and lifting force.
c. Remove the "O" ring (5) from around the powerpak body (138).
d. Remove the safety wire (27) from around the upper reservoir spacer (12)
and main relief valve (161 or 162).
e. Remove the safety wire from between the thermal relief valves (160).
f. Remove the baffle (13) and lower spacer (14).
NOTE
Before disassembling the powerpak further, any checks

and/or adjustments should be accomplished at this
time. (Refer to paragraph 6-58.)
g. Remove the stud(16) and nut(15). To assist in removal of the stud, install
two nuts at the top; lock one against the other and remove with a wrench on the
lower of the two nuts.
h. Remove one or both retainer plates by removing screws (17) and washers
(18) securing the plate(s) to the powerpak body.
CAUTION
When removing the retainer plates, use caution that

the poppet retainers and springs do not "fly" from
their ports.
NOTE
On powerpaks withpart numbers 31800-2 and 31800-3,

it may be necessary to loosen the main relief valve
(162) before the retainer plates can be lifted from the
powerpak body.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2C24
6-45. REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY OF MAIN RELIEF VALVE. (Refer to

Figure 6-20.) Two style relief valves are used with the various model powerpaks.
Powerpaks with part numbers 750P-1 and 31800-0 incorporate the shorter valve
(162) of the two shown, while those with part numbers 31800-2, 31800-2M and
31800-3 incorporate the taller valve (161). An adapter (158) is used with the
taller valve in powerpak, part number 31800-2M.
a. The main relief valve (162) in powerpaks with part numbers 750P-1 or
31800-0 may be removed and disassembled as follows:
1. Ascertain that the retainer plates (19) have been removed.
2. Lift the valve assembly from the powerpak body.
3. Remove the "O" ring (26) from the valve body (25).
4. Support the valve body in an upside down position and with a 3/16 Allen
wrench, remove plug (32) from the bottom of the body.
5. Loosen the jam nut (29) and remove the valve adjusting screw (28).
6. Remove the spring (30) and plunger (31) from the top of the body.
7. With a 0.25 inch aluminum rod inserted into the top of the body, push
out the seat (34) with "O" ring (33), check ball (35) and retainer (36).
b. The main relief valve (161) in powerpaks with part numbers 31800-2,
31800-2M and 31800-3 may be removed and disassembled as follows:
1. Ascertain that the retainer plates (19) have been removed.
2. Note if the valve is fitted with an adapter (158) in the powerpak body,
and if so, lift the valve assembly from the body. A valve without an adapter in-
stalled will require removal by turning a wrench affixed to the hexagon surface
of the end fitting (141) at the base of the assembly.
3. If installed, and only if necessary, remove the adatper from the end
fitting.
4. If an adapter has been installed, remove the "0" ring (157) from the
adapter.
5. Remove the "0" ring (151) from the base of the end fitting.
6. Loosen the jam nut (149) and remove the valve adjusting cap (screw)
(150).
7. Remove the spring (147), guide (148), ball (146) and poppet (145) from
the top of the valve body (143).
8. Support the end fitting and remove the valve body from the fitting by
inserting an aluminum rod, 0.187 of an inch, through the holes in the body and
turning it from the fitting.
9. Remove the "O" ring (144) from the fitting.
10. From the inside of the body, remove the retainer (142) and poppet seat
(145). An aluminum rod, 0.375 of an inch, maybe inserted through the top of the
body to push out the seat.
11. Remove the "O" ring from the poppet seat.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2D1
NOTE
The poppet and seat assembly (145) is a matched set.

If necessary to replace, replace as a set only.
6-46. REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLYOF THERMAL RELIEF VALVES. (Refer

to Figure 6-20.) Four identical valve assemblies (160)are installed in the power-
pak; each is removed and disassembled by the following procedure:
a. Cut safety wire attached to the valve.
b. To disassemble the valve assembly, first remove the adjusting screw (67)
from the top of the valve body (68).
c. Remove the upper spring retainer (69) and spring (70). The retainer may
be lifted from the valve body with a small amount of grease on a small stick or
rod.
d. Remove the valve body by inserting a brass rod, 0.156 of an inch, through
the holes inthe body and turning it from the powerpak body or head(140), which-
ever applies.
e. Remove the lower spring retainer (71) and ball (72).
f. Remove the valve seat (73) by inserting a fabricated hooked tool into the
port hole in the seat and pulling it from the powerpak body or head. (A tool may
be fabricated from dimensions given in Figure 6-37.)
g. Remove the "O" ring (74) from the seat.
h. If installed, and only if necessary, the valve head (140) may be removed.
Use caution not to damage or crush the head.
6-47. REMOVAL OF CAMSHAFT RELEASE DETENT ASSEMBLIES. (Refer to

Figure 6-20.) The two detent assemblies found in the various model powerpaks
will be either alike or different in design; this being determined by the model of
the powerpak. Powerpaks with part numbers 750P-1 and 31800-0 incorporate the
like detent assemblies depicted by call out number 164, while those with part
numbers 31800-2, 31800-2M and 31800-3 incorporate one of 164 and one of the
later design, used only for the landing gear release, and this is depicted by call
out 165. When removing the assemblies, it will be noted that the later assembly
(165) must be removed before the earlier or shorter detent assembly (164) can
be removed.
a. The later or longer design detent assembly (165) may be removed as fol-
lows:
1. Turn the adjusting cap (152) from the powerpak body (138).
2. Remove the spring (153) and spring guide (154) from the port.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2D2
3. Remove the plunger detent (155). To facilitate removal of the detent,

affix an air hose to the port marked Cl at the right side of the powerpak body and
select gear up. Apply air pressure slowly, plug any air leaks and allow the air
pressure to push the detent from the port. Place a rag over the port to catch the
detent should it leave the port with force. (If the camshaft is removed, apply
pressure directly to the port from where the shaft was removed.)
4. Remove the "O" ring (156) from the detent.
b. The earlier or shorter design detent assembly (164) may be removed as
follows:
1. Turn the adjusting plug (75) from the powerpak body.
2. Remove the spring (76) and plunger (77) from the port.
3. Remove the "O" ring (78) from the plunger.
4. Remove the ball (79) from the detent. Turn the powerpak upside down
to allow the ball to drop out(Use caution that no other parts drop out unintention-
ally.) or use air pressure applied to port C1 or C4 of the powerpak body and with
the selector lever up.
6-48. REMOVAL OF POPPETS AND SELECTOR CAMSHAFTS. (Refer to Figure

6-20.) The arrangement of the poppet assemblies (167 and 168) and selector
camshaft assembly (169) is identical for both the landing gear or flap sections of
the powerpak. The instructions that follow may be used when working with either
section.
CAUTION
Do not mix parts. When removing the various com-

ponents of the powerpak, keep them in order. The
poppet and seat assemblies (84 and 91) are matched
sets and should be replaced as a set.
a. Ascertain that the reservoir (4), baffle (13) and plates (19) have been re-
moved in accordance with paragraph 6-44.
b. Ascertain that the camshaft release detent assemblies have been removed
in accordance with instructions given in paragraph 6-47.
c. The pressure poppet assemblies (168) that control either the landing gear
or flap may be removed as follows:
1. Remove the poppet retainer (87) from the port. Movement of the selec-
tor lever through its full travel should move the retainer up from its position in
the port.
2. Remove the "O" ring (88) from the retainer.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2D3
3. Remove the poppet return spring (89) from the port.

4. Remove the poppet from the poppet seat by lightly gripping the tang on
the top of the poppet with a pair of long nose pliers and, while applying a steady
pulling force, bring the poppet from the seat.
5. Remove the "O" ring (92) from the poppet.
6. Remove the poppet seat from the port by inserting a tool, fabricated of
aluminum, down into the hole in the seat and allowing the hooks of the tool to enter
the flow passages. (The tool may be fabricated from dimensions given in Figure
6-38.) Applying a steady pulling force, bring the seat up from the port.
7. Remove the "O" rings (90 and 93) from the seat.
8. Place the poppet back into the seat. Each poppet and seat is a matched
set and must be kept together to insure proper operation.
9. The remaining pressure poppet assemblies may be removed, as re-
quired, using the same procedure as above.
d. The return poppet assemblies (167) for either the landing gear or flap sec-
tions may be removed as follows:
1. Remove the poppet retainer (80) from the port. Movement of the selec-
tor through its full travel should move the retainer up from its position in the port.
2. Remove the poppet return spring (82) from the port.
3. Remove the poppet from the poppet seat by lightly gripping the tang on
the top of the poppet with a pair of long nose pliers and, while applying a steady
pulling force, bring the poppet from the seat.
4. Remove the "O" ring (85) from the poppet.
5. Remove the poppet seat from the port by inserting the tool down into the
hole in the seat and allowing the hooks of the tool to enter the flow passages.
Applying a steady pulling force, bring the seat from the port.
6. Remove the "O" rings (83 and 86) from the seat.
7. Place the poppet back into the seat.
8. The remaining return poppet assemblies maybe removed, as required,
using the same procedure as above.
e. The selector levers, either the landing gear or flap, may be removed from
the powerpak as follows:
1. Disconnect the selector lever (107 or 109) from the camshaft (128) at
the links (97) by removing cotter pin (94), washer (95) and clevis pin (96).
2. Separate the lever from the stud (114) by removing cotter pin (98),
washers (99 and 100) and clevis pin (101).
3. The stud may be removed by driving the roll pin (113) from the body and
stud with a 3/16 inch punch. (This operation need not be accomplished during
cleaning and/or replacement of other components. Normally, only when replac-
ing a damaged stud or an "O" ring (116) on the plug (115).)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2D4 2D4 Reissued: 2/18/81
4. The forward plug (115) or aft plug (121) maybe removed by inserting a
soft aluminum wire into either the forward or aft return port and pushing it from
the body. To remove the aft plug, it will first require that the spring retainer
attaching screw (117) be removed. (It is not recommended either plug be removed
unless an external leak around the plug area has been observed.) Remove "O"
ring (116 or 122) from plug.
f. The landing gear or flap selector camshaft assembly(128) maybe removed
as follows:
1. Remove the spring retainer (120)by removing attaching screw (117) and
washers (118 and 119). At the lower attachment point, temporarily remove the
screw holding the powerpak to the work stand.
2. Remove the return spring (125), spacer(126)and washers (124 and 127)
by turning the retaining screw (123) from the camshaft. (Should there be more
than two washers (124 and 127) installed on each adjusting screw, note and re-
place with the same amount.)
3. Remove the camshaft(128) by grasping the selector attachment end with
pliers and pulling while rotating it from the body.
4. Remove the "O" ring (129) from the camshaft.
6-49. REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY OF HAND PUMP. (Refer to Figure 6-20.)

a. Remove the hand pump handle assembly from the powerpak as follows:
1. Disconnect the link (46) from between the fork (55) and piston (60) by
removing cotter pin (37), washer (39) and clevis pin (38).
2. Disconnect the fork from the powerpak housing (138) by removing cotter
pin (40), nut (41) and bolt (42).
b. The pump piston assembly may be removed and disassembled as follows:
1. Remove the snap ring (56), that holds the assembly in the powerpak
body, from the annular slot in the body.
2. Pull the piston assembly from the body.
3. Withdraw the stop gland (58) with "O" rings (57 and 59) from the piston
(60).
4. Remove the piston valve assembly from the piston by removing the snap
ring (62), seat (64) with "O" ring (63), check ball (65) and spring (66).
c. The suction valve assembly (163) may be removed as follows:
1. Ascertain that the reservoir (4), baffle (13) and plates (19) have been
removed in accordance with paragraph 6-44.
2. Lift the strainer (20) from the housing.
3. Using a small hook fabricated from aluminum rod, pull the seat (21)
from the body.
4. Remove "O" ring (22) from the seat.
5. Withdraw the check ball (23) and spring (24) from the body.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2D5
6-50. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF POWERPAK.

a. Discard all old "O" rings and gaskets.
b. Clean all parts with a dry type cleaning solvent (Federal Specification P-S-
661 or equivalent) and dry with filtered compressed air.
NOTE
The conditions at repair require cleanliness, careful-

ness and proper handling of parts to prevent entrance
of foreign materials or prevent damage.
c. Inspect all parts for scratches, scores, chips, cracks and indications of
excess wear.
d. Service wear limits for components of the powerpak maybe found in Table
VI-VIII at the back of this section.
e. If the selector lever release detent adjusting plug or cap has been staked
to prevent it from rotating, it will be required that the hole be cleaned with a
1/2-20NF-3 tap. Flush body with solvent to remove any metal chips.
f . Repairs are limited to replacement of parts, "O" rings and gaskets.
g. The parts catalog should be used to obtain the proper parts for the power-
pak being serviced.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
6-51.. ASSEMBLYOF POWERPAK.
6-52. ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION OF HAND PUMP. (Refer to Figure 6-20.)

a. The piston assembly may be assembled and installed as follows:
1. Place an "O" ring (63) on the check seat (64).
2. Insert into the piston (60), in order, the check ball spring (66), check
ball (65) and seat. Note the two lands on the seat; the thicker land must be in-
serted into the piston first or next to the ball.
3. Secure the seat with snap ring (62).
4. Place an "O" ring (61) on the piston.
5. Insert the piston into the port provided in the powerpak body.
6. Install "O" rings (57 and 59) on and in the piston stop gland (58).
7. Slide the stop gland over the end of the piston and into the port.
CAUTION
The stop gland must be installed onthe piston with the

outside "O" ring forward or first.
8. Secure stop gland in position by inserting a snap ring (56) into the an-
nular slot.
b. The hand pump handle may be installed as follows:
1. Position the pump handle fork (55) to the powerpak and secure with bolt
(42), nut (41) and cotter pin (40).
2. Attach the fork with the piston using link(46) and secure with clevis pin
(38), washer (39) and cotter pin (37).
c. The suction valve assembly (163) may be installed as follows:
1. Place into the suction port in the powerpak body, the spring (24) and
check ball (23).
2. Place an "O" ring (22) on the check seat (21).
3. Insert the check seat into the suction port. Note the two lands on the
seat, the thicker land must be inserted into the port first or next to the ball.
4. Position the strainer (20) in place on the powerpak body.
5. If no other assemblyand/or adjustments are required, install the plates
(19), baffle (13) and reservoir (4) in accordance with instructions in paragraph
6-57.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
2D7
6-53. INSTALLATION OF POPPETS AND SELECTOR CAMSHAFTS. (Refer to

Figure 6-20.) The procedure for the installation of the poppet assemblies (167
and 168) and the camshaft assembly (169) for either the landing gear or flap sec-
tions of the powerpak is identical, unless otherwise noted in the instructions to
follow. It is recommended that before commencing with this assembly, the over-
haul precaution in paragraph 6-41 be reviewed.
a. The landing gear or flap selector camshaft assembly(169) maybe installed
as follows:
NOTE
The landing gear and flap camshafts are not identical.

For identification purposes, the landing gear shaft is
stamped with the letter "R " on its aft or selector lever
attachment end. The flap camshaft is stamped with
the letter "L".
1. Place two "O" rings (129) on the aft end of the camshaft (128).
2. Insert the forward end of the camshaft into the aft end of the powerpak
body by applying a steady pushing and rotating pressure. Allow the forward end
of the shaft to extend through the body far enough to expose the two forward "O"
ring grooves in the shaft.
3. Place the two remaining "O" rings (129) on the shaft.
4. Push the camshaft back into the body until the end of the shaft is flush
with the surface of the body. Ascertain that the lobes of the shaft are up.
5. Assemble onto the retaining screw (123), in order, a washer (127),
spacer (126), spring (125) and remaining washer (124). (If an additional washer
was installed, install that washer also.)
6. Turn the screw with attachments into the end of the camshaft.
7. Place the spring retainer (120) over the end of the screw and secure it
at the top with flat washer (119), lockwasher (118) and screw (117). Secure the
bottom of the retainer with the screw that also attaches the powerpak to the work
stand.
8. Adjust the camshaft return spring by first setting the camshaft at neu-
tral. (Neutral position is when the forward end of the camshaft is flush with the
powerpak body.) Next, turn the retaining screw in until a gap exists between the
aft washer (127) and spring retainer, and then back out until the washer just con-
tacts the retainer.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2D8
2D8 Reissued: 2/18/81
b. The landing gear or flap selector lever may be installed as follows:

1. If plug (115 or 121) from the flow passage was removed, install an "O"
ring (116 or 122)on the plug and insert it into the open port where required. The
flat end of the plug is inserted first.
2. Install the selector lever attaching stud (114) by inserting it into the
port provided, aligning the holes in the plug and body and securing with roll pin
(113).
3. Attach the selector lever (flap to left side and landing gear to right side
of powerpak) to the stud and secure with clevis pin (101), washers (99 and 100)
and cotter pin (98).
NOTE
Determine that the lobes of the shaft are up before

proceeding further.
4. Attach the links (97) with the lever tothe camshaft using clevis pin(96),
washer (95) and cotter pin (94).
5. Place the selector lever at neutral.
c. The return poppet assemblies (167) for either the landing gear or flap sec-
tions of the powerpak may be installed as follows:
1. Place an "O" ring (85) on the poppet of the poppet seat assembly (84).
2. Place "O" rings (83 and 86) on the outside of the poppet seat.
3. Install the poppet into the poppet seat. The poppet must be assembled
with the flow passages of the seat pointing toward the head of the poppetas viewed
from the outside of the seat.
4. Insert the poppet seat assembly (84) into the port provided in the power-
pak until it bottoms.
NOTE
The poppet seat assembly must be installed with the

flow passages pointing upward as viewed from the out-
side of the seat.
5. Position the spring (82) on the head of the poppet. Determine that the
spring surrounds the tang on the poppet.
6. Insert the poppet retainer (80) into the port allowing it to align and bot-
tom .
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2D9
d. The pressure poppet assemblies (168) for either the landing gear or flap
sections of the powerpak may be installed as follows:
1. Place an "O" ring (92) on the poppet of the poppet seat assembly (91).
2. Place "O" rings (90 and 93) on the outside of the poppet seat.
3. Install the poppet into the poppet seat. The poppet must be assembled
with the flow passages of the seat pointing toward the head of the poppet as viewed
from the outside of the seat.
4. Place an "O" ring (88) on the poppet retainer (87).
5. Insert the retainer into the port allowing it to align and bottom.
e. If no other assembly and/or adjustments are required, install the retainer
plates (19) in accordance with instructions in paragraph 6-57.
6-54. INSTALLATION OF CAMSHAFT RELEASE DETENT ASSEMBLIES. (Re-

fer to Figure 6-20.) Powerpaks with part numbers 750P-1 and 31800-0 require
two like detent assemblies as depicted by callout 164, while those with part num-
bers 31800-2, 31800-2M and 31800-3 require one each of detent assembly 165
and assembly 164.
a. Ascertain that the threads within the ports that receive the detent cap or
plug have been retaped and cleaned. This is required if the cap or plug was
staked in place during previous assembly.
b. If the camshaft(128) is not installed, install in accordance with instructions
given in paragraph 6-53.
c. The earlier or shorter design detent assembly (164) may be installed into
left (flap) port or, if applicable, into the right (gear) port of the powerpak body,
as follows:
1. Insert the detent ball (79) into the detent port.
2. Place an "O" ring (8) on the plunger (77).
3. Insert the plunger and spring (76) into the port.
4. Turn the plug (75) into the port until its top is flush with the top of the
port.
d. The later or longer design detent assembly (163) may be installed into the
right (gear) port as follows:
1. Place an "O" ring (156) on the plunger detent (155).
2. Insert the detent, spring guide (154) and spring (153) into the port.
3. Place the adjusting cap (152) over the spring and turn the cap into the
port.
e. Check and adjust either assembly in accordance with instructions given in
paragraph 6-63.
f. After completion of adjustment, lightly stake the body next to the cap or
plug to prevent it from turning.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
6-55. ASSEMBLYAND INSTALLATION OF THERMAL RELIEF VALVES.

a. Place the "O" ring (74) on the valve seat (73).
b. Insert the valve seat into the powerpak body or valve head (140), whichever
applies. The end of the seat with the port countersunk or bored larger is inserted
first or toward the powerpak body or base of the head.
c. If applicable, secure the head into the powerpak body.
d. Turn the valve body (68) into the powerpak body or until it bottoms against
the seat. Turn by inserting a 0.156 rod through the holes in the body.
e. Insert into the top of the body, in order, the ball (72), lower spring retainer
(71), spring (70) and upper retainer (69).
f. Turn the adjusting screw (67) into the top of the valve body (68). Pre-set
the valve by turning the cap in until its top is approximately 0.156 of an inch be-
low the top of the body.
g. Check and adjust the valve in accordance with instructions in paragraph
6-62.
h. After completion of adjustment, safety as explained in paragraph 6-57.
6-56. ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION OF MAIN RELIEF VALVE. (Refer to

Figure 6-20.)
a. The main relief valve (162) for powerpaks with part numbers 750P-1 and
31800-0 may be assembled and installed as follows:
1. With the valve body (25) supported in the upside down position, insert
the retainer (36) into the base end of the body. The end of the retainer with the
small hole is inserted first.
2. Install an "O" ring (33) on the valve seat (34).
3. Insert the check ball (35) and valve seat into the base end of the body.
A countersink has been machined into the port at one end of the seat; this end is
installed away from the check ball.
4. Install the plug (32) into the base of the valve, small end first, and using
3/16 Allen wrench, torque to 25 inch pounds. If the plug turns into the base and
bottoms with no drag, due to worn camlock inserts, a new plug must be installed.
5. Insert the plunger (31), small diameter end first, into the top of the
valve body and ascertain that the end of the plunger positions itself into the re-
tainer (36).
6. Insert the valve spring (30) into the body.
7. Twist the jam nut (29) on the valve adjusting screw (28), and install the
screw over the exposed end of the spring and into valve body.
8. Place an "O" ring (26) on the base of the valve.
9. Push the base of the valve into the port provided in the powerpak base
and allow to bottom.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
2D 1
10. If the retainer plates (19) can be installed at this time, do so as ex-
plained in paragraph 6-57.
11. Check and adjust the valve in accordance with instructions given in par-
agraph 6-61.
12. After completion of adjustment, safety as explained in paragraph 6-57.
b. The main relief valve (161) for powerpaks with part numbers 31800-2,
31800-2M and 31800-3 may be assembled and installed as follows:
1. Place an "O" ring (144) on the poppet and seat assembly (145).
2. Insert the small end of the square based retainer (142) into the end of
the poppet seat opposite the "O" ring.
3. With the valve body (143) supported in an upside down position, install
the poppet and seat assembly with retainer into the base of the body. The end of
the seat with the "O" ring is inserted first.
4. Place an "O" ring (144) on the end fitting (141).
5. Install the end fitting into the valve body and tighten finger tight. Rotate
the body end for end, support, and tighten with an aluminum rod (0.187) inserted
through the holes in the valve body until the retainer bottoms against the fitting.
6. Install the ball (146) and guide (148) with spring (147) into the body.
7. Twist the jam nut (149) on the valve adjusting cap (screw) (150) and in-
stall the cap over the exposed end of the spring and into the valve body. Pre-set
the valve by turningthe adjusting cap in until a dimension of approximately 4.165
inches overall is obtained.
8. Place an "O" ring (151) on the end fitting.
9. If an adapter (158) is required with the valve, install it on the valve.
Place an "O" ring (157) on the adapter.
10. Install the valve. Valves with an adapter, push the assembly into the
port provided in the powerpak base and allow it to bottom. Valves without adapt-
ers will require twisting into the base. (On powerpaks with part numbers 31800-2
and 31800-3, it maybe necessary to install the valve after the retainer plates
have been installed.)
11. If the retainer plates (19) canbe installed at this time, do so as explain-
ed in paragraph 6-57.
12. Check and adjust the valve in accordance with instructions given in par-
agraph 6-61.
13. After completion of adjustment, safety as explained in paragraph 6-57.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2D12
6-57. INSTALLATION OF RESERVOIR, BAFFLE AND PLATES. (Refer to Fig-

ure 6-20.) Before installing retainer plates and baffle, check thatthe main relief
valve (161 or 162), poppet assemblies (167 and 168), and hand pump suction
screen assembly (162) are all properly installed.
a. Place the retainer plates (19) in position on the powerpak base (138) and
secure with washers (18) and screws (17).
b. If the thermal relief valve heads (140) are drilled to allow for safety wire,
safety between the left set and then the right set with MS20995-F32 wire.
c. Complete all checks and adjustments as required. (Refer to Paragraph
6-58.)
d. Install reservoir retaining stud (16) and lock with jam nut (15).
e. Place the lower spacer (14) on the stud.
f. Position the baffle and allow it to rest on the lower spacer.
g. Place the upper spacer (12) on the stud.
h. If holes are provided, safety the thermal relief valves by routing MS20995-
F32 wire between the holes in the valve bodies of the left set and then the right
set.
i. Safety the main relief valve with MS20995-F32 wire. For the short valve
in powerpaks with part numbers 750P-1 and 31800-0, the wire is routed through
valve hole and the edge of the baffle, through the provided hole in the valve jam
nut (29) and to the valve adjusting screw (28). For the taller valve in powerpaks
with part numbers 31800-2, 31800-2M and 31800-3, the wire is routed from the
upper spacer (12), to the valve jam nut (149) and then to the adjusting cap (150).
j . Install an "O" ring (5) around the powerpak body.
k. Ascertain that the strainer and fittings are installed, and install reservoir,
with fittings forward.
I . Secure the reservoir with "O" ring (3), washer (2) and locknut (1).
6-58. POWERPAKBENCH CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS.
6-59. CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT INSTRUCTIONSAND PRECAUTIONS. Before

overhaul, to determine faults of the powerpak; to adjust components of the unit;
or after completion of overhaul, before installation in the airplane, the powerpak
may be bench checked using a minimum of test equipment and the instructions
given in the paragraphs that follow. Observe the preliminary instructions and
precautions that follow:
a. Use only clean hydraulic fluid (MIL-H-5606).
b. Cap all fittings with high pressure caps.
c. Because of using high pressure during check, determine that caps, where
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2D 13
A758
CHECK VALVE-
HYDRAULICTEST UNIT
NOTE: TEST EACH

W.F. & L.G. CYL. PORT
INDIVIDUALLY
C
L
CYLINDER PORT
WING FLAP
POWERPAK
Figure 6-21. Checking and Adjusting Powerpak

0
A768
CYLINDER
I (2 REQ'D)
(4
REFERTO
TABLE VI-IV
FOR PARTS
LIST VALVE
SPEEDCONTROL
(4 REQ'D)
Figure 6-22. Checking Powerpak Operation

0
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2D14
2D14 Revised: 4/26 83
required, are secure.

d. Mound the base on a combination work and test stand which may be manu-
factured from dimensions given in Figure 6-36.
e. Minimum equipment is as follows:
1. Hydraulic test unit as described in paragraphs 6-5 or 6-6 and arranged
as shown in Figure 6-21 and 6-22.
2. Tools and test equipment as required in Table VI-IV.
6-60. POWERPAK BLEEDING PROCEDURE. Before conducting any cracking

pressure checks and adjustments, the powerpak passages should be free of
trapped air and filled with hydraulic fluid. This maybe accomplished as follows:
a. Install an open top reservoir.
b. Add hydraulic fluid maintaining level below the top of the powerpak stand
pipe.
c. While operating the powerpak hand pump, move the selector levers through
each cycle, in sequence, until fluid begins to flow from each pressure port. Pro-
vide a container to catch fluid.
d. To check leakage of the poppet assemblies, paragraph 6-64, it will be re-
quired to drain the reservoir and wipe the bottom of the reservoir dry.
6-61. CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF MAIN RELIEF VALVE. The main relief
valve, located in the aft center area of the powerpak, may be pressure checked
and adjusted as follows:
a. Connect the pressure line of a hydraulic test unit to the landing gear exten-
sion port (C2) fitting at the right forward side of the powerpak. (Refer to Figure
6-21.)
b. Open the hydraulic test unit by-pass valve.
c. Hold the landing gear selector lever full DOWN.
d. Operate the power driven pump or hand pump of the hydraulic test unit and
slowly close the by-pass valve.
e. Observe pressure build-up to the point at which the pressure stabilizes on
the test unit gauge and fluid begins to ooze from the main relief valve. The re-
quired cracking pressure to open the valve for the powerpak being checked will
be found in Table VI-II.
f. Should the valve open at a pressure higher or lower than that required, it
will be necessary to adjust it by first loosening the jam nut to allow turning of the
adjusting plug or cap. To adjust pressure, turn the plug or cap in a clockwise
direction to increase pressure or in a counterclockwise direction to decrease
pressure.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2D15
2D15 Reissued: 2/ 18/81
g. Tighten jam nut and recheck cracking pressure.

h. Again, build up pressure to approximately 100 psi below that required for
cracking and note if any fluid seeps from the valve. If so, the valve should be
rechecked for a possible leak between the valve and seat or around the seat.
6-62. CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT OF THERMAL RELIEF VALVES. Four ther-

mal relief valves are located in the powerpak, one receiving pressure from each
pressure port. Each valve may be checked as follows:
a. Connect the pressure line of a hydraulic test unit to the landing gear exten-
sion port(C2) fitting at the right forward side of the powerpak. (Refer to Figure
6-21.)
b. Cap the fittings at the pressure ports not being utilized.
c. Open the hydraulic test unit by-pass valve.
d. Allow the selector levers to remain neutral.
e. Operate the power driven pump or hand pump of the hydraulic test unit and
f. Observe pressure build-up to the point at which the pressure stabilizes on
the test unit gauge and fluid begins to ooze from the valve. The cracking pres-
sure required to open the valve will be found in Table VI-II.
g. Should the valve open at a pressure higher or lower than that required, it
will be necessary to adjust it by turning adjusting screw in the valve body. To
adjust pressure, turn the screw in a clockwise direction to increase pressure or
in a counterclockwsie direction to decrease pressure.
h. After adjustment, recheck cracking pressure.
i. Again, build up pressure to approximately 100 psi below that required for
cracking and note if any fluid seeps from the valve. If so, the valve should be
rechecked for a possible leak between the check ball and seat or around the seat.
j . To check the remaining thermal relief valves, connect the pressure line to
the fittings at ports C1, C3 and C4 and check by following steps b thru i for each-
valve.
6-63. CHECK AND ADJUSTMENTOF CAMSHAFT RELEASE DETENT ASSEM-

BLIES. The camshaft release detents, installed diagonally into the center of the
powerpak body, may be checked and adjusted as follows:
a. The flap detent assembly may be adjusted as follows:
1. Should the landing gear detent assembly be that of the later type, with
the adjusting cap extending above the surface of the powerpak body, as depicted
by callout 165 in Figure 6-20, it will be required that the cap, spring and spring
guide be removed and a plug (75, P/N 31904-00) be installed in the port to pre-
vent loss of pressure. This step is not necessary if the detent assembly is of the
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
2D16
early or short type.

2. Connect the pressure line of a hydraulic test unit to the flap retraction
port (C4) fitting at the left rear side of the powerpak.
3. Cap the fittings at the pressure ports not being utilized.
4. Open the test unit by-pass valve.
5. Select flap UP, operate the power driven pump or hand pump of the hy-
draulic test unit and slowly close the by-pass valve.
6. Observe pressure build-up and note the pressure at which the selector
lever returns to neutral. The detent release pressure for the flap with powerpak
model may be found in Table VI-II.
7. Should the lever return to neutral at a pressure higher or lower than
that required, it will be necessary to adjust by turning the adjusting plug. To ad-
just release of the detent, turn the plug in a clockwise direction to increase re-
lease pressure or counterclockwise to decrease pressure.
8. After adjustment, re-cycle and recheck release pressure.
9. Reconnect the pressure line to the flap extension port (C3) fitting and
cap the fitting from where the line was removed.
11. Select flap DOWN, operate the power driven pump or hand pump and
lever returns to neutral.
that required, it will be necessary to adjust the plug slightly to bring both release
pressures within tolerance.
14. Again re-cycle and check release pressure.
15. If a plug was temporarily installed in the landing gear detent port, re-
move and reinstall the spring guide, spring and cap. (Refer to paragraph 6-54.)
b. The landing gear detent assembly, whether it be the early (short) type or
the later (long) type, may be checked and adjusted as follows:
1. Connect the pressure line of the test unit to the landing gear retraction
port (C1) fitting at the right rear side of the powerpak.
4. Select landing gear UP, operate the power driven pump or hand pump of
the hydraulic test unit and slowly close the by-pass valve.
lever returns to neutral. The detent release pressure for the landing gear with
powerpak model may be found in Table VI-II.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2D17
2D 17 Reissued: 2/18/81

that required, it will be necessary to adjust by turning the adjusting plug or cap.
To adjust release of the detent, turn the plug or cap in a clockwise direction to
increase release pressure or counterclockwise to decrease pressure.
7. After adjustment, re-cycle and recheck release pressure.
8. Reconnect the pressure line to the landing gear extension port (C2) fitting
and cap the fitting from where the line was removed.
10. Select landing gear DOWN, operate the power driven pump or hand pump
and slowly close the by-pass valve.
lever returns to neutral.
that required, it will be necessary to adjust the plug or cap slightly to bring both
release pressures within tolerance.
13. Again re-cycle and check release pressure.
c. Upon completion of the adjustment of the flap and landing gear detents,
lightly stake the body next to the threads of the plug or cap to prevent them from
turning out of adjustment.
6-64. CHECK OF POPPETS FOR LEAKAGE. The check procedure for the poppet
assemblies to determine if any leakage occurs between a poppet and seat maybe
conducted by grouping each return and pressure assembly with a port in the pow-
erpak, thus dividing this check into four individual checks. The open center
poppet assemblies are checked separately. These checks may be conducted as
follows:
a. The cylinder return and pressure poppets may be checked as follows:
1. Connect the pressure line of a hydraulic test unit to the landing gear
retraction port (C1) fitting at the right rear side of the powerpak.
2. Cap the fittings at the ports not being utilized.
3. Open the hydraulic test unit by-pass valve.
4. Allow the selector lever to remain neutral.
5. Operate the power driven pump or hand pump of the hydraulic test unit
6. Increase pressure to approximately 1200 psi for powerpaks with part
numbers 750P- 1 and31800-0 or 1300psi for powerpaks withpartnumbers 31800-2,
31800-2M and 31800-3. Hold pressure at this requirement.
7. To check a return poppet assembly (that assembly closest to the port
being pressurized) for leakage, observe the area around the return hole in the
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
2D18
retainer plate for any evidence of fluid leakage. Should fluid seepage be evident,
the return poppet seat sub-assembly should be inspected and replaced as neces-
sary.
8. To check a pressure poppet assembly (that assembly adjacent to the
port being pressurized) for leakage, observe the area around the hole in the top
of the detent assembly for any evidence of fluid leakage. Due to the area to fill
between the poppet and detent, fluid may not appear for a few minutes after pres-
sure has been applied. Should fluid seepage be evident, the pressure poppet-seat
sub-assembly should be inspected and replaced as necessary.
9. To check the remaining return and pressure poppet assemblies for leak-
age, connect the pressure line to the fitting at ports C2, C3 and C4 and check by
following steps b thru h for each set.
b. The landing gear and flap center poppet assemblies maybe checked as fol-
lows:
1. Connect the pressure line of a hydraulic test unit to the engine driven
pump pressure port(system check valve) at the right side of the powerpak. (The
airplane's hand pump can also be used for this check.)
2. Cap the fitting at all pressure ports, C1 thru C4.
3. Open the hydraulic test unit by-pass valve.
4. Move the landing gear selector lever to the DOWN position. (This will
allow the landing gear center poppet assembly to be checked.)
(or powerpak hand pump) and slowly close the by-pass valve.
6. Increase pressure to approximately 1200 psi for powerpaks with part
numbers 750P-1 and 31800-0 or 1300 psi for powerpaks with part numbers,
31800-2, 31800-2M and 31800-3. Hold pressure at this requirement.
7. To check the landing gear center poppet assembly, observe the area
around the hole in the top of the detent assembly for any evidence of fluid leakage.
Should fluid seepage be evident, the landing gear center poppet-seat sub-assembly
should be inspected and replaced as required.
8. Move the landing gear selector lever to neutral and the flap lever to the
DOWN position.
9. To check the flap center poppet assembly, again observe the area around
the hole in the top of the detent assembly for any evidence of fluid leakage. Should
fluid seepage be evident, the flap center poppet-seat sub-assembly should be in-
spected and replaced as required.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2D 19
6-65. CHECK OF HAND PUMP.

a. Connect a pressure gauge to the landing gear extension port (C2) fitting at
the right forward side of the powerpak.
b. Select landing gear DOWNwith the selector lever.
c. Operate the powerpak hand pump and observe the pressure reading. The
gauge should show a steady increase in pressure during both the up and down
stroke.
d. As the gauge reaches approximately 1000 psi, stop the handle operation at
mid-stroke; the handle should remain steady. If the handle moves up from the
stopped position, the hand pump piston valve is leaking. If the handle moves
down, the hand pump suction valve in the powerpak is leaking.
e. Disconnect the pressure gauge and at the fitting from where the gauge was
attached, connect a line to a pint (one U.S. pint) container.
f. With gear selector lever down, operate the hand pump and allow fluid to flow
into the container. It should not take more than 40 cycles of the handle, both up
and down, to fill the pint container.
6-66. FINAL CHECK OF POWERPAK.

a. Ascertain that the powerpak is completely assembled.
b. Mount the powerpak on the test stand.
c. Using a test unit of the type described in paragraph 6-5 or 6-6, connect the
pressure line of the unit to the inlet fitting of the main relief valve and the suction
line to the suction port of the powerpak.
d. Connect a hose from the powerpak vent to the vent fitting or reservoir of
the test unit.
e. Cap the filler fitting on the forward side of the reservoir.
f. Connect the pressure gauges, speed control valves and actuating cylinders
called for in Table VI-IV to the pressure ports of the powerpak as shown in Fig-
ure 6-22.
g. Operate the test unit and fill the powerpak reservoir.
h. With the test unit operating, operate the landing gear and flap selector levers
UP and DOWN through a minimum of five cycles to remove any air from the cir-
cuit.
i. During the operation in step h, adjust all speed control valves to provide
300 to 400 psi back pressure.
j . The main relief valve cracking pressure may be checked as follows:
2. Hold the landing gear selector lever full DOWN.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2D20
4. Observe pressure build-up to the point at which the pressure stabilizes

onthe pressure gauge of the test unit. Stabilization indicates the valve has begun
to open. The required pressure will be found in Table VI-II.
5. Should the valve not open at the required pressure, check and adjust
the valve in accordance with instructions in paragraph 6-61.
k. The pressures at which landing gear and flap selector levers return to
neutral may be checked as follows:
2. Select landing gear DOWN.
3. Operate the power driven pump or hand pump and close the by-pass
valve.
4. Observe the pressure at which the lever returns to neutral. The re-
quired pressure will be found in Table VI-II.
5. Repeat the above steps for landing gear up, flap down and flap up.
6. Should either lever not return to neutral at their required pressure,
check and adjust the camshaft detent release assemblies in accordance with in-
structions in paragraph 6-63.
1 . During the checks in step k, upon return to neutral of the landing gear and
flap selector levers, a minimum of 500 psi should be trapped and maintained be-
tween the powerpak and actuating cylinders. A loss in pressure indicates a leak
in one or more poppet valves. Check poppets in accordance with instructions in
paragraph 6-64.
m. Operate the powerpak hand pump and select gear DOWN. When pressure
builds up to 1000 psi, stop the handle at mid-stroke; the handle should not creep
up or down. Creeping of the handle indicates an internal leak in the pump and
should be further checked as found in paragraph 6-65.
n. Disconnect the lines from the pressure ports of the powerpak.
o. The thermal relief valves may be checked as follows:
1. Connect the pressure line of the hydraulic test unit to the landing gear
extension port (C2) fitting as shown in Figure 6-22.
4. Allow the selector unit to remain neutral.
5. Operate the test unit and slowly close the by-pass valve.
6. Observe pressure build-up to the point at which the pressure stabilizes
on the test unit pressure gauge. Stabilization indicates the valve adjacent to the
port has begun to open. The required pressure will be found in Table VI-II.
7. To check the remaining valves, connect the pressure line to the fittings
at ports Cl, C3 and C4 and repeat steps 2 thru 6 for each valve.
8. Valves not opening at the required pressure should be further checked
and adjusted as given in paragraph 6-62.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2D21
p. Check the powerpak reservoir for leakage per instructions given in para-
graph 6-67.
q. Disconnect lines and remove powerpak from test stand.
6-67. TESTING RESERVOIR FOR LEAKAGE.

a. Cap the powerpak suction port.
b. Fill the powerpak reservoir with hydraulic fluid.
c. Attach an air valve to either the reservoir overflow fitting or filler fitting.
Cap the fitting not being utilized.
d. Apply 1 psig of air for 12 hours. At the end of the 12 hour period, check
for external leaks.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2D22
A759
2 3
4 5 6
1. SPRING 4. VALVE BODY

2. "O" RING PACKING 5. POPPET
3. "O" RIN GASKET 6. END FITTING
Figure 6-23. Hydraulic System Check Valve
6-68. SYSTEM CHECK VALVE.
6-69. REMOVAL OF CHECK VALVE.

b. Drain the hydraulic powerpak by disconnecting the hydraulic extension line
at the nose gear actuating cylinder and placing the end of the line in a suitable
container. Move the landing gear selector to the DOWN position and operate the
hand pump until the system is empty.
c. Remove the access plate from the right side of the pedestal.
d. Disconnect the fitting from the forward end of the valve.
e. Remove the valve from the side of the powerpak.
6-70. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND OVERHAUL OF CHECK VALVE. (Refer to

Figure 6-23.)
NOTE
The following procedure covers only valves with part

number 31862-00 as shown in Figure 6-23. Valves
with no part number on them should be replaced with
the new type valve.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2D23
a. Cut the safety wire and remove the end fitting (6) from the end of the valve.
b. Remove the poppet (5) and spring (1) from inside the valve body (4).
c. Inspect the valve and valve parts for nicks, scratches and broken or cut
"O" rings.
d. Overhaul of the valve is limited to polishing out small nicks or scratches
and replacement of "O" rings.
e. Install the spring (1) into the valve body (4).
f. Install the poppet (5) into the valve body by inserting the open end of the
poppet first.
g. Install the end fitting (6) with new "O" rings (2 and 3).
h. Safety the end fitting to the valve body with MS20995-NC32 safety wire.
6-71. TESTING CHECK VALVE.

a. Connect the pressure line of a hydraulic test unit to the discharge end of
the check valve. (Fittings, AN816nipple and AN910 coupling maybe used to make
this connection.)
b. Open the test unit by-pass valve.
c. Operate the test unit and slowly close the by-pass valve.
d. Apply 2000 psi maximum pressure to the valve and ascertain that there is
no leakage from the open end.
6-72. INSTALLATION OF CHECK VALVE.

a. Install the check valve to the side of the powerpak.
b. Connect the hydraulic line to the forward end of the valve.
c. Fill the powerpak and cycle the landing gear and flaps several times. (Re-
fer to Filling Powerpak, Section II.)
d. Ascertain that the check valve is not leaking and install the access plate to
the right side of the nacelle.
e. Remove the airplane from jacks.
6-73. ANTI-RETRACTION VALVE.
6-74. REMOVAL OF ANTI-RETRACTION VALVE.

b. Place a drip pan under the landing gear to catch hydraulic fluid spillage.
c. Move the landing gear selector lever in the cabin to the up position, down
position, and to neutral to relieve the pressure in the system.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2D24 2D24 Reissued: 2/18/81
d. Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the valve. Mark lines to facilitate re-
installation.
e. Remove the barrel nut on the top of the valve arm rod.
f. Disconnect the valve arm return spring from the valve arm.
g. Remove the valve by removing the self-locking nuts, washers and bolts
securing it in place.
NOTE
Be careful that the valve arm does not come out of the
valve body.
6-75. DISASSEMBLY OF ANTI-RETRACTION VALVE. (Refer to Figure 6-24.)

a. Holding the valve with the end plug (1) up, remove the plug, being careful
not to drop the valve spring (2).
b. Remove the valve spring and poppet assembly (3 thru 8) from the valve body
(10).
c. Remove the valve arm (13) with the cam (12) attached from the valve body.
d. Remove the line fittings (6 and 9) from the valve body.
6-76. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF ANTI-RETRACTION VALVE.

(Refer to Figure 6-24.)
a. Clean the valve parts with a suitable solvent and dry thoroughly.
b. Inspect the following parts of the valve for defects:
1. Inspect the cam for corrosion, burrs, scratches and excess wear spe-
cifically in the areas where the valve rides on the cam, where the attaching bolt
extends through the slot in the cam, and the surfaces between the cam and valve
body. Check the handle for security of mounting.
2. Inspect the poppet assembly for corrosion, burrs, scratches and excess
wear specifically inthe areas where the valve contacts the seat and the surfaces
between the valve poppet and valve seat.
3. Inspect the line fittings in the threaded area for crossed threads and
corrosion.
c. Repairs to the valve are limited to polishing out small scratches and re-
placing "O" rings.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2E1
2476 2160
13
I. PLUG
2. SPRING
3. VALVE POPPET
4. "0" RING
"O" RING
6. LINE FITTING
7. VALVE SEAT
8. "O" RING
9. LINE FITTING
10. VALVE BODY
II. "O" RING
12. CAM
13. VALVE HANDLE
Figure 6-24. Anti-Retraction Valve
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2E2
6-77. ASSEMBLY OF ANTI-RETRACTION VALVE. (Refer to Figure 6-24.)

a. Install the line fittings (6 and 9) to the valve body (10) being careful not to
strip the threads.
b. Lubricate with hydraulic fluid (MIL-H-5606), and install new "O" rings on
the cam (12), valve poppet (3) and seat (7).
c. Insert the cam into the valve body.
d. Assemble the valve and seat, and insert the unit into the end of the valve
body.
e. Install the valve spring (2) in the hole in the top of the valve.
f. Install the plug into the valve and torque to 20 foot-pounds.
6-78. TESTING ANTI-RETRACTION VALVE.

a. Connect the pressure line of a hydraulic test unit to the port of the valve
marked "P".
b. Ascertain that the valve is closed.
c. Open the test unit by-pass valve.
d. Operate the test unit and slowly close the by-pass valve.
e. Apply 1500 psi maximum hydraulic pressure to the valve and ascertain that
fluid does not appear at the open end marked "R".
f. Cap the fitting at the port marked "R", open the valve and ascertain that
fluid does not appear around the cam or from the attaching hole in the valve body.
6-79. INSTALLATION OF ANTI-RETRACTION VALVE.

a. Position the valve on the landing gear and install two AN3-16A bolts with
washers down through the valve and secure with washers and self-locking nuts.
b. Connect the hydraulic lines to the valve, the outboard line is pressure "P"
and the inboard line is return "R".
c. Connect the arm return spring to the valve arm.
d. Install the barrel nut to the top of the valve arm rod and adjust per instruc-
tions in paragraph 6-80.
e. Fill the powerpak and cycle the landing gear several times to bleed the air
out of the system. (Refer to Filling Powerpak, Section II.)
NOTE
When cycling the gear, allow the landing gear selector

handle to return to neutral automatically
f. Check the anti-retraction valve to determine that there is no evidence of
hydraulic fluid leakage.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
2E3
2141
1. ROD
2. BARREL NUT
3. COIL SPRING
4. ANTI-RETRACTION VALVE
5. VALVE ARM
Figure 6-25. Adjustment of Anti-Retraction Valve
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
6-80. ADJUSTMENT OF LANDING GEAR ANTI-RETRACTION VALVE. (Refer to

Figure 6-25.) The landing gear anti-retraction valve, located on the left main gear strut
housing, restricts hydraulic fluid pressure from building up in the retraction system until the
landing gear strut is fully extended.
b. With the landing gear strut piston in the fully extended position, hold the valve arm in
the full down position.
c. Adjust the barrel nut on top of the actuating rod to allow 0.062 to 0.093 of an inch as
measured at the end of the valve arm.
6-81. SHUTTLE VALVES.
6-82. REMOVAL OF SHUTTLE VALVES. (Refer to Figure 6-2 or 6-4.)

b. Operate the landing gear selector lever to the up position, down position and to neutral
to relieve any pressure in the lines.
c. The nose landing gear shuttle valve may be removed by the following procedure:
1. Remove the access panel(s) from the right side of the nose section by turning the
quarter turn fasteners and/or attaching screws.
2. Disconnect the hydraulic line and CO2 line from the shuttle valve inside the cabin
section, just aft of the forward bulkhead.
3. Disconnect the hydraulic line(s) from the forward side of the shuttle valve inside the
nose section just forward of the forward cabin bulkhead.
4. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes, Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up, remove the tee
fitting installed in the forward end of the valve.
5. Remove the retaining nut securing the valve to the forward cabin bulkhead and
remove the valve.
d. The right or left main landing gear shuttle valves may be removed by the following
procedure:
1. Remove the top center section of the engine nacelle by removing attaching screws.
2. Disconnect the hydraulic line(s) from the top side of the shuttle valve.
3. Disconnect the hydraulic line and the CO2 line from the valve.
4. Remove the retaining nut securing the valve to the mounting plate inside the nacelle
center section and remove the valve.
6-83. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND OVERHAUL OF SHUTTLE VALVE. (Refer to

Figure 6-26.)
NOTE
The following procedure covers only valves with part number

32803-00. Valves with part numbers 492 047 and 31424-00
should be replaced if found defective.
a. For I.B.C. Products Inc. shuttle valves refer to the following:

1. Remove the end fitting (4) from the end of the valve marked "MAIN".
2. Remove the piston (6) by pushing from the end of the valve marked "EMG".
3. Inspect the valve and valve parts for nicks, scratches and broken or cut "O" rings.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

1. "O" RING GASKET I I

2. "O" RINGSEAL 4 5 6
3. "O" RINGSEAL
4. END FITTING
5. VALVEBODY I.B.C. PRODUCTS SHUTTLE VALVE
6. PISTON
7. END FITTINGS
8. SHUTTLE
9. VALVE BODY
10. "O" RING 12 10 10 12
11. SPRING
12. "O" RINGGASKET
7 8 11 9 7
GAR-KENYON SHUTTLE VALVE
Figure 6-26. Shuttle Valve
4. Overhaul of the valve is limited to replacement of "O" rings and polishing out-
small nicks and scratches.
5. Lubricate with hydraulic fluid (MIL-H-5606) and install the piston (6) with
new "0" rings into the open end of the valve.
6. Install the end fitting (4) with a new "0" ring (1) to the valve.
b. For Gar-Kenyon shuttle valves refer to the following:
1. Remove the end fittings (7).
2. Remove the shuttle (8) from the valve body (9).
3. Inspect the valve and components for nicks,scratchesand broken or cut "0" rings.
4. Overhaul of the valve is limited to replacement of "O" rings and polishing out
small nicks and scratches.
5. Lubricate end fittings (7) with hydraulic fluid (MIL-H-5606)and install new "0"
rings (10 and (12).
6. Position spring (11) on shuttle to close the "EMG" port.
7. Install end fitting (7) and shuttle (8) as noted in Figure 6-26.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2E6
6-84. TESTING SHUTTLE VALVE.

a. Connect the pressure line of a hydraulic test unit to the end of the valve marked
"MAIN."
b. Plug the outlet port of the valve.
c. Open the test unit by-pass valve.
d. Operate the test unit and slowly close the by-pass valve.
e. Apply 2000 psi maximum hydraulic pressure and ascertain that the valve does not
leak fluid from the "EMG" port of the valve.
6-85. INSTALLATION OF SHUTTLE VALVES. (Refer to Figure 6-2 or 6-4.)

a. Install the nose landing gear shuttle valve by the following procedure:
1. Position the valve to the forward cabin bulkhead with the body of the valve on the
aft side of the bulkhead and secure the assembly with the retaining unit.
2. On PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up, install the tee fitting port
of the valve on the forward side of the bulkhead.
3. Connect the hydraulic line(s) to the forward side of valve or the tee fitting.
4. Connect the hydraulic line to the side of the valve stamped "MAIN" and the
C02 line to the side stamped "EMG."
b. Install the right or left main landing gear shuttle valve by the following procedure:
1. Position the valve inside the top center section of the nacelle with the body of the
valve below the mounting plate. Secure the valve with the retaining nut.
2. Connect the hydraulic line to the side of the valve stamped "MAIN" and the
C02 line to the side stamped "EMG."
3. On PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up, install the tee fitting to
the remaining open port of the valve.
4. Connect the hydraulic line(s) to the shuttle valve or the tee fitting.
c. Install the access panels as required.
d. Fill the hydraulic system to replace any hydraulic fluid spillage (refer to Filling
Powerpak, Section II), and cycle the landing gear to check for leaks and remove any air
trapped in the system.
e. Remove the airplane from jacks.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2E7
6-86. ACTUATING CYLINDERS.
6-87. VISUAL CHECKS OF ACTUATING CYLINDERS. Actuating cylinders may

leak externally at either elbow or at the seal. A coating of oil between the upper
and lower elbows indicates leakage of the top elbow, whereas a coating of oil
immediately under the bottom elbow only indicates leakage of the bottom elbow.
If the bottom of the cylinder is coated with oil, the seal is leaking.
CAUTION
If one or more of the landing gear actuating cylinders

are damaged, be sure the airplane is on jacks before
attempting any repairs. This is not necessary if the
wing flap cylinder is to be repaired or replaced. Be
sure both selector levers are in the neutral position
before disconnecting a hydraulic line from a fitting.
a. If either elbow fitting is leaking, do not remove the actuating cylinder from
the airplane. Remove the appropriate line and take out the fitting. If the leakage
is through the threads, apply a suitable sealing compound to the threads of the
fitting and install the fitting. If the fitting is damaged, replace with a new one
and reconnect the hydraulic line.
b. If a seal is leaking, remove the actuating cylinder by instructions in the
following paragraphs.
6-88. GEAR AND FLAP ACTUATING CYLINDERS.
6-89. REMOVAL OF NOSE GEAR ACTUATING CYLINDER.

b. Remove the access panels from both sides of the nose section. (Refer to
Access and Inspection Provisions, Section II.)
c. Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the actuating cylinder and cover the
open line ends to prevent contamination.
d. Remove the cotter pin, nut, washers and bolt securing the top end of the
hydraulic cylinder to the fuselage frame.
e. Remove the cotter pin, nut, washers and bolt securing the actuating rod
end bearing to the drag link assembly.
f. Remove the cylinder from the wheel well.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

6-90. REMOVAL OF MAIN GEAR ACTUATING CYLINDERS.

b. Remove the access panel from the top center section of the nacelle. (Refer to Access
and Inspection Provisions, Section II.)
c. Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the actuating cylinder and cover the open line
ends to prevent contamination.
d. Remove the cotter pin, nut, washers and bolt securing the actuating rod end bearing
to the drag link assembly.
e. Remove the cotter pin, nut, washers and bolt securing the top end of the hydraulic
cylinder.
f. Remove the cylinder from the wheel well by removing the black plastic tape around
the cylinder and rubber boot and drawing the cylinder through the boot.
6-91. REMOVAL OF FLAP ACTUATING CYLINDER.

a. Remove the center seats from the airplane.
b. Remove the trim panels from right side of the cabin just aft of the cabin entrance door
by removing attaching screws.
c. Place the flap selector to the up position, to the down position, and then to neutral to
relieve any pressure in the hydraulic lines.
d. Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the flap cylinder. Cap the open line fittings to
prevent contamination.
e. Disconnect the cylinder piston rod end bearing from the flap bellcrank by removing
the self-locking nut, washer and bolt.
f. Remove the cylinder from airplane by removing the cotter pin, nut, washer and bolt
securing the cylinder end fitting to the fuselage frame fitting.
6-92. DISASSEMBLY OF GEAR AND FLAP ACTUATING CYLINDERS. (Refer to

Figures 6-27 or 6-28.)
a. With the cylinder removed from the airplane, on early cylinders cut the safety wire (1)
and remove the two plugs (2) from the side of the cylinder body (10).
b. On early cylinders draw the piston assembly (8) and cylinder end (6) from the cylinder
body (10). On later cylinders, unscrew cylinder end (6) from cylinder body (10).
c. If necessary, the piston assembly (8) may be separated from the cylinder end (6) by
loosening the jam nut (4) and unscrewing the rod end (3) from the piston assembly.
d. For the flap actuating cylinder (refer to Figure 6-23), it may be necessary to remove the
tube (12), jam nut (13) and bushing (14) from the piston assembly (8).
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
2E9
2473 2174
247
1. SAFETYWIRE (EARLYCYLINDERS
ONLY)
2. PLUG(EARLYCYUNDERSONLY)
3. ROD END
4 JAM NUT
5. O" RING
6. CYLINDEREND
7. "O" RING
8. PISTONASSEMBLY
9. "O" RING
10. CYLINDERBODY
11. CYUNDEREND FITTING
12. KEY(LATERCYLINDERSONLY)
Figure 6-27. Nose and Main Landing Gear Actuating Cylinder
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2E10
2456
2471
1 SAFETYWIRE (EARLYCYLINDERSONLY)
2 PLUG(EARLYCYLINDERSONLY)
3. ROD END
4 JAM NUT
5 "O" RING
6 CYLINDEREND
7 "O" RING
8 PISTONASSEMBLY
9. "O"RING
10. CYLINDERBODY
11. CYLINDEREND FITTING
12 TUBE
13 JAM NUT
14 BUSHING
15 KEY(LATERCYLINDERS ONLY)
Figure 6-28. Flap Actuating Cylinder
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2E11
6-93. CLEANING. INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF GEAR AND FLAP ACTUATING

CYLINDER.
a. Clean the cylinder parts with a suitable solvent and dry thoroughly.
b. Inspect the cylinder interior walls and piston exterior surfaces for scratches, burrs,
corrosion, etc.
c. Inspect threaded areas for damage.
d. Inspect the rod end fitting for wear and corrosion.
e. Repairs to the cylinder are limited to polishing out small scratches, burrs, and re-
placing parts.
6-94. ASSEMBLY OF GEAR AND FLAP ACTUATINGCYLINDERS. (Refer to Figure

6-27 or 6-28.)
a. Install an "O" ring (9) on the piston (8).
b. Install "O" rings (5 and 7) on the interior and exterior of the cylinder end (6). The
exterior "O" ring on later cylinders has an "O" ring back up whichmust be installedalong with
the "O" ring.
c. Lubricate the piston assembly (8), interior of the cylinder body (10) and the cylinder
end (6) with hydraulic fluid (MIL-H-5606).
d. Slide the cylinder end (6) onto the piston assembly (8).
e. Slide the piston assembly (8) and cylinder end (6) into the cylinder body (10). Later
cylinders require the cylinder end (6) to be screwed into the cylinder body (10).
f. On early cylinders install the two plugs (2) to the side of the cylinder and safetywith
MS20995-C41wire.
g. For the flap actuating cylinder (refer to Figure 6-28), install the tube (12) into the
piston assembly (8) and place the bushing (14) over the tube and secure in place with jam
nut (13).
h. Install the rod end bearing (3) and jam nut (4) to the piston assembly(8). Later cyl-
inders include the key which must be installed in the reverse order of removal.
6-95. INSTALLATION OF NOSE AND MAIN GEAR ACTUATING CYLINDERS.

CAUTION
Be sure to install each cylinder with its ports pointing down.

If installed with the ports pointing up, the cylinder will not
clear the tubular structure when the landing gear is retracted.
a. Position the cylinder and attach the cylinder end to the frame with bolt, washers, nut
and cotter pin.
b. Connect the hydraulic lines to the cylinder.
c. Cycle the landing gear several times, using the hand pump, to ascertain that all the
air is bled from the cylinder being installed.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2E12
CAUTION
While cycling the landing gear, make certain the piston

rod does not make contact with any items installed in
the wheel well.
d. Ascertain that the piston rod of the actuating cylinder being installed is
fully extended by operating the landing gear hand pump with the selector in the
down position.
e. Connect the piston rod end bearing to the drag links and adjust the landing
gear per instructions given in Adjustment of Nose Landing Gear or Adjustment
of Main Landing Gear, Section VII.
f. Install any access panels removed for access to the actuating cylinders.
6-96. INSTALLATION OF FLAP ACTUATING CYLINDER.

a. Position the cylinder to the attachment bracket of the fuselage frame and
secure with bolt, washer, nut and cotter pin.
NOTE
Do not tighten attaching bolt completely; allow suffi-

cient clearance to permit approximately 0.25 of an
inch side play at the attachment point of where the
cylinder rod end bearing attaches to the flap torque
tube arm, with the piston rod fully extended.
b. Temporarily connect the piston rod end of the cylinder to the flap bellcrank
using a bolt, washer and self-locking nut.
c. Connect the hydraulic lines to the flap cylinder.
d. Check rigging and adjustment of flap as described in Section V.
e. Install the trim panels with attaching screws.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2E13
6-97. GEAR DOOR ACTUATING CYLINDERS. (PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos.
27-2505and up.)
6-98. REMOVAL OF NOSE AND MAIN GEAR DOOR ACTUATING CYLINDERS.

a. Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the cylinder and cover the open line ends to pre-
vent contamination.
b. Remove the self-locking nut and machine bolt securing the top end of the cylinder and
the self-locking nut, washers and bolt securing the rod end bearings to the door mechanism.
c. Remove the cylinder from the airplane.
6-99. DISASSEMBLY OF NOSE GEAR DOOR ACTUATING CYLINDER. (Refer

to Figure 6-29.)
a. Cut the safety wire and drive the roll pins (6) from the cylinder barrel bearing end (5).
b. Remove the bearing end (5) by drawing it from the cylinder barrel (12).
c. The piston assembly (8) may be removed from the bearing end by loosening the jam
nut (2) and unscrewing the rod end bearing (1) from the piston.
d. Remove the "O" rings (4, 7 and 10) from the bearing end and piston.
6-100. DISASSEMBLY OF MAIN GEAR DOOR ACTUATING CYLINDERS. (Refer

to Figure 6-30.) On main gear door cylinders with Assembly No. 451 844 or 455 934 stamped
on the name plate, refer to Disassembly of Nose Gear Door Actuating Cylinder, paragraph
6-99.
a. Cut the safety wire and drive out the roll pins (6 and 12) from both ends of the cylinder.
b. Remove the anchor assembly (14) and the gland fitting (5) by drawing them from
the cylinder barrel ends (8).
c. The gland fitting (5) may be removed from the piston assembly (9) by loosening the
jam nut (2) and unscrewing the rod end bearing (1) from the piston.
d. Remove the "O" rings (11, 7 and 10) from the anchor assembly, gland fitting and
piston.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2E14
2161
3
4
6
7
9
10
11
12
1 3
1. ROD END
2. JAM NUT 8. PISTON ASSEMBLY
3. RETAINER RING 9. BACK-UP RING
4. "O" RING 10. "O" RING
5. BEARING END 11. BACK-UP RING
6. ROLL PIN (2) 12. CYLINDER BARREL
7. "O" RING 13. CYLINDER END BEARING
Figure 6-29. Nose Gear Door Actuating Cylinder (451 844 and 451 934)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2E15 2E15 Reissued: 2/18/81

2172
8. CYLINDER BARREL
9. PISTON ASSEMBLY
10. "O" RING
11. "O" RING
12. ROLL PIN (2)
13. CYLINDER END BEARING
0 14. ANCHOR ASSEMBLY
Figure 6-30. Main Gear Door Actuating Cylinder (451 845)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2E16
6-101. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF NOSE AND MAIN GEAR DOOR
ACTUATING CYLINDERS.
b. Inspect all surfaces for cleanliness, freedom from cracks and excessive wear.
c. Repair of most parts of the landing gear door actuator assembly is impractical. Re-
place defective parts with serviceable parts. Minor scratches and scores may be removed by
polishing with fine abrasive crocus cloth (Federal Specification P-C-458) providing their
removal does not affect the operation of the unit. Install all new "O" rings and back-up rings
during reassembly of the actuator.
6-102. ASSEMBLY OF NOSE GEAR DOOR ACTUATING CYLINDER. (Refer to

Figure 6-29.)
a. Install new "O" rings to the piston assembly (8) and barrel end (5).
b. Insert the piston assembly into the barrel end and install the jam nut (2) and rod end
bearing (1) to the piston end.
c. Insert the piston assembly and barrel end into the open end of the cylinder barrel (12).
d. Align the holes in the cylinder barrel and the barrel end. Install a roll pin (6) to each
hole.
NOTE
Install the roll pins with the slots outboard or away from each
other.
e. Safety the roll pins with MS20995-C32 wire.
6-103. ASSEMBLY OF MAIN GEAR DOOR ACTUATING CYLINDER. (Refer to

Figure 6-30.) On main gear door, cylinders with Assembly No. 451 844 or 455 934 stamped
on the name plate, refer to Assembly of Nose Gear Door Actuating Cylinder, paragraph
6-102. The following steps are for Cylinder Assembly No. 451 845 only:
a. Install new "O" rings to the anchor assembly (14), gland fitting (5) and piston (9).
b. Insert the piston into the gland fitting and install the jam nut (2) and rod end bearing
(1) to the end of the piston assembly.
c. Insert the piston and gland fitting into one end of the cylinder barrel (8) and the
anchor assembly (14) into the other end.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2E17
d. Align the holes in the cylinder barrel, gland fitting and the anchor assembly.Install a
roll pin (6 and 12) to each hole securing the cylinder ends.
NOTE
Install the roll pins with the slots outboard or away from each
other.
e. Safety the roll pins with MS20995-C32safety wire.
6-104. INSTALLATION OF NOSE AND MAIN GEAR DOOR ACTUATING CYL-

INDERS.
a. Position the cylinder inside the wheel well.
b. Install the machine bolt securing the cylinder end to the mounting bracket.
c. Connect the hydraulic lines to the cylinder.
d. Connect the rod end bearing to the door mechanism by followingthe procedure out-
lined in Adjustment of Main Landing Gear Doors or Adjustment of Nose Landing Gear
Doors, Section VII.
6-105. TIMER CHECK VALVE. (SEQUENCE VALVE.) (PA-23-250 [six place], Serial
Nos. 27-2505and up.)
6-106. REMOVAL OF TIMER CHECK VALVE.

b. Place a drip pan to catch hydraulic fluid spillage under the landing gear where the
valve is to be removed.
c. Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the valve and coverthe open line ends to prevent
contamination.
d. Remove the valve by removing the self-lockingnuts, washers and bolts securing it
inside the wheel well.
6-107. DISASSEMBLY OF TIMER CHECK VALVE. (Refer to Figure 6-31.)

a. Holding the valve with the plug end up, removethe plug (14)by unscrewingit from the
valve body (1). The plunger (9), washer (10), back-up rings (11 and 13)and the "O" rings
(8 and 12)will come out with the plug.
b. Separate the plunger assembly(8 thru 13)from the plug.
c. Remove the back-up seat (6) and its "O" rings (5 and 7).
d. Remove the ball (4), guide (3) and spring (2) from the valve body (1).
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2E18 2E18 Reissued: 2/18/81

2468 2173
Figure 6-31. Timer Check Valve
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2E19
6-108. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF TIMER CHECK VALVE.

a. Clean the valve parts with a suitable solvent and dry thoroughly.
b. Inspect all surfaces for cleanliness and for freedom from cracks and ex-
cessive wear.
c. Replace defective parts with serviceable parts. Minor scratches and
scores may be removed by polishing with fine abrasive crocus cloth (Federal
Specification P-C-458) providing their removal does not affect the operation of
the unit. Install all new "O" rings and back-up rings during reassembly of the
valve.
6-109. ASSEMBLY OF TIMER CHECK VALVE. (Refer to Figure 6-31.)

a. Install the spring (2), guide (3) and ball (4) to valve body (1).
b. Install new "O" rings (5 and 7) to the back-up seat (6) and install the as-
sembly to the valve body by inserting the large diameter end first.
c. Install an "O" ring (8) to the plunger (9).
d. On the small diameter end of the plunger, install a washer (10), back-up
ring (II), "O" ring (12) and back-up ring (13).
e. Insert the small end of the plunger assembly (8 thru 13) into the plug (14).
f . Position the plug and piston assembly to valve body and secure.
6-110. TESTING TIMER CHECK VALVE.

a. Connect the pressure line of a hydraulic test unit to the port of the valve
furthest from its mounting base.
b. Open the test unit by-pass valve.
c. Operate the test unit and slowly close the by-pass valve.
d. Apply 2000 psi maximum hydraulic pressure to the valve and ascertain that
fluid does not appear at the open end.
6-111. INSTALLATION OF TIMER CHECK VALVE.

a. Position the valve to its bracket inside the wheel well and secure with bolts,
washers and self-locking nuts.
b. Uncover and connect the hydraulic lines to the valve. The line coming from
the landing gear door cylinder should be connected to the lower of the two valve
ports.
c. Fill the powerpak(Refer to Filling Hydraulic System, Section II.) and cycle
the landing gear several times using the hand pump. Check the valve for proper
operation and leaks.
d. Remove the drip pan and the airplane from jacks.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2E20
6-112. PRIORITY VALVE. (PA-23-250[six place], Serial Nos. 27-2505and up.)
6-113. REMOVAL OF PRIORITY VALVE.

b. Place a container or rag under the priority valve to catch any hydraulic
fluid spillage.
c. Disconnect the control wire from lock pin in the end of the priority valve.
d. Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the top of the valve.
e. Remove the valve by removing the self-locking nuts, washers and bolts
securing the valve in place.
6-114. DISASSEMBLY OF PRIORITY VALVE. (Refer to Figure 6-32.)

a. Cut the safety wire and loosen the jam nut (5).
b. Remove the lock pin (3).
c. Unscrew the adjusting cap (1) and remove the lock pin bushing (2), spring
guide (4), spring (6) and spring guide (7) from the valve body (8).
d. Remove cap(I6) and "O" ring (15) from the opposite end of the valve body.
e. Remove the spring (14), check seat (12) with "O" ring (13), and the poppet
and pin assembly (II) with back-up ring (10) and "O" ring (9) by pulling on the
pin portion of the poppet and pin assembly.
6-115. CLEANING. INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF PRIORITY VALVE.

b. Inspect all surfaces for cleanliness, freedom from cracks and excessive
wear.
c. Replace defective parts with serviceable parts. Minor scratches and
scores may be removed by polishing with fine abrasive crocus cloth (Federal
Specification P-C-458) providing their removal does not affect the operation of
the unit. Install all new "0" rings and back-up rings during reassembly.
6-116. ASSEMBLY OF PRIORITY VALVE. (Refer to Figure 6-32.)

a. Install a new "O" ring (9) and back-up ring (10) to the poppet and pin as-
sembly (11) and insert the assembly into the valve body (8) with the round headed
poppet end first.
b. Install a new "O" ring (13) to the check seat (12) and install the assembly
into the valve body with the slotted end of the seat toward the outside.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2E21
2162
2447
A474
Figure 6-32. Priority Valve
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2E22
c. Install the spring (14) into the valvebody.

d. Install a new "O" ring (15) to the cap (16) and secure the cap to the end of the valve
body.
e. In the opposite end of the valve, install the spring guide (7), spring (6), spring guide
(4), lock pin bushing(2) and the knurled adjustingcap (1).
f. Tighten the adjusting cap until the lock pin can be freely inserted through the lock
pin bushing (2) and the end of the spring guide (4).
g. Test and adjust the valve in accordance with instructions in Paragraph 6-117, and
safety valve with MS20995-F20wire as shown in Figure 6-32.
6-117. TESTINGAND ADJUSTMENTOF PRIORITY VALVE.

a. Using a suitable hydraulic test stand, connect a pressure line to the side of the valve
marked "GEAR UP."
b. Connect a clear plastic line to the side of the valvemarked "DOOR CYL."
c. Apply pressure to the valve slowly to ascertain cracking pressure. The valve should
open and hydraulic fluid should appear in the clear plastic tube when 600 + 25 psi is
reached. If the valve does not open or opens below 600 ± 25 psi is obtained, the following
procedure may be used to adjust the valve:
1. Loosen the jam nut and tighten the adjusting cap until it stops.
2. Adjust the test unit to maintain 600 psi between the unit and the valve.
3. Slowly unscrew the adjusting cap until fluid starts to flow in the clear plastic
tube.
4. Tighten the jam nut against the adjusting cap. Recheck the pressure.
d. If the test stand permits, the valve may be checked for proper flow rate of 1.1
gallonsper minute at 700 psi.
e. To check the reverse flow, connect the pressure line to the side of the valvemarked
"DOOR CYL" and the clear plastic line to the side marked "GEAR UP."
f. Apply pressure to the valve slowly to ascertain cracking pressure. The valve should
open and hydraulic fluid should appear in the clear plastic tube when 18 psi is reached.
g. If the test stand permits, the valve may be checked for a proper reverse flow rate of
1.1 gallonsper minute at 22 psi.
h. If any of the precedingconditions cannot be obtained, the valvemust be overhauled
or replaced.
i Safety the valvein a figure 8 pattern with MS20995-F20. (Refer to Figure 6-32.)
6-118. INSTALLATIONOF PRIORITY VALVE.

a. Position the priority valve to its mounting bracket inside the control pedestal and
secure with bolts, washersand self-lockingnuts.
b. Uncover the hydraulic lines and connect them to the valve.
c. Connect the control wire to the lock pin installed through the end of the valve.
Position the pin with the round portion to the left.
d. Removethe airplane from jacks.
6-119. HYDRAULICLINES.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
2E23 2E23 Reissued: 2/18/81

205
"O" RING SEAL
Figure 6-33. Hydraulic Filter

6-120. REMOVALAND INSTALLATIONOF HYDRAULICLINES. Remove a damaged
hydraulic line by disconnecting the fittings at each end and by disconnectingwhere secured
by brackets. Refer to Figure 6-2 or 6-4 as an aid in the location of attaching brackets and
bends in the lines. Provide a small container for draining the line. Install a new or repaired
line in reverseorder.
NOTE
Where straight thread type fittings are used, the locknuts are
to be tightened so that the "O" ring seals are on the
non-threaded portion of the fitting.
6-121. HYDRAULIC FILTER(S).

6-122. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF HYDRAULIC FILTER. The hydraulic
filter, located on the upper tube of the engine motor mount, is removed by the following
procedure:
a. Remove the inboard side panel from the left engine cowl. On airplanes with serialnos.
27-7854051and up, a filter is also installedon the right engine mount. Accessis gainedthrough
the outboard side panel of the right engine cowl.
b. Disconnect the filter inlet hose and outlet line from the filter.
c. Removethe filter from the motor mount by holding the bolts at the filter and turning
off the nuts at the bracket.
d. The filter may be installed in the reverse procedure.
e. After the engine has been operated, check for leaks.
6-123. REPLACEMENT OF FILTER ELEMENT. (Refer to Figure 6-33.)

a. Remove the side panel from the engine cowl.
b. Cut safety wire, unscrew bowl and remove filter element.
c. Clean filter bowl with a suitable cleaning solvent and dry.
d. Replace filter element and "O"ring on bowl.
e. Half fill filter bowl to minimize trapped air in the hydraulic system and replace bowl.
f. Safety filter bowl with MS20995-C20safety wire and replace the side panel on the
engine cowl.
g. After engine has been operated, check for leaks.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2E24
6-124. EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENSION SYSTEM. (Serial Numbers 27-1to 27-7954121

incl.)
6-125. DESCRIPTIONOF EMERGENCYGEAR EXTENSION SYSTEM. In the event of a

hydraulic system failure caused by a line breaking or the powerpak malfunctioning, the
landing gear can be lowered by using the emergency gear extender. The control for the
extender is located beneath a small cover plate under the pilot's seat. When the control is
pulled, C02 flows from a cylinder under the floorboards through separate lines to the
landing gear cylinders and extends the gear.
6-126. SERVICINGEMERGENCYGEAR EXTENDER. Replace the C02 bottle whenever

it weighslessthan 132 grams or one gram less than the weight marked on the bottle.
6-127. RESETTINGEMERGENCYGEAR EXTENDER.

CAUTION
After using the emergency gear extender, do not actuate

landing gear or flap until the followingprocedures have been
performed.
a. Placethe aircraft on jacks. (Refer to Jacking, Section II.)

WARNING
Do not remove C02 bottle until the pressure is released.
b. Loosen the C02 lines at the fitting, adjacent to the C02 bottle, thus allowingrelease
of the pressurein the hydraulic system.
c. In airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up, reset priority valve per instructions
given in Paragraph 6-128.
d. On Gar-Kenyon shuttle valves only (Refer to Figure 6-26) remove the elbow fitting
from the side of the valve marked "MAIN"and resetthe shuttle to the "EMG"side of the valve.
Use a wood dowel rod to push on the shuttle. Listen for the click as the shuttle snaps into
position.
e. Repair the hydraulic system as required. If necessary for troubleshooting, fill the
hydraulic system. (Refer to Hydraulic System, Section II.)
f. After the hydraulic system has beenrepaired, filled and checked,cyclethe landing gear
several times, using the hand pump or test unit to ascertain that all the air is bled from the
cylinders. Reconnect the C02 lines and safety the discharge mechanismring with 0.016inch
soft aluminumsafetywire. After arming the cutter head by positioningthe cable actuated lever
against the cutter head body, install a charged C02 bottle and anchor with the set screw.
CAUTION
The bottle attachment must be gas tight.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2F1
6-128. RESETTING PRIORITY VALVE. (PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos. 27-2505 and
up.) When the emergency gear extender is pulled, a locking pin is withdrawn from the
hydraulic system priority valve, allowing the valve to open. The priority valve is located
approximately six inches up from the floor on the right rear side of the control pedestal.
a. Ascertain that the extender cable is not damaged.
b. Insert lock pin (3, Figure 6-32)into one side of the lock pin bushing (2).This holds the
bushing out.
c. Push the guide shaft (4) into the valve, align the holes and finish inserting pin.
d. Ascertain that when the extender ring is pulled, the priority valve will open prior to
the CO2 bottle discharging.
6-129. EMERGENCY GEAR EXTENDER CABLE RIGGING. (Refer to Figure 6-34.) It

is possible that flexing or slipping of the priority valve actuating cable may retard landing
gear extension with the CO2 system. If not previously installed, Kit number 756 878 should
be installed in aircraft Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-2658 inclusive to prevent further flexing or
slipping of this cable. The rigging of the cable follows:
a. Remove the CO2 bottle from the discharge unit.
b. Check the 2.50 inch dimension on the end of the cable housing to the pin in the priority
valve as shown in Figure 6-34, Sketch "A" and tighten clamp. If necessary, cut end of flexible
housing to obtain the 2.50 inch dimension. This dimension must be maintained.
c. Lift the emergency gear extension cover located under the pilot's seat. Gently pull on
the ring until all of the slack is taken up in the cable to the priority valve.
d. Gently take up the slack in the cable to the CO2 discharge unit so that it will slide up
the ring as shown in Figure 6-34, Sketch "B." The C02 cable should be 1 inch longer than the
priority valve cable at this point.
e. This will give you the proper rigging of the cables to mechanically open the priority
valve before introducing C02 to the system.
f. Replace the gear extension cover and CO2 bottle in the discharge unit.
6-130. BYPASS FLOW VALVE. (PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos. 27-4426, 27-4574 and
up.) When the flap system is activated the bypass flow valve allows a set amount of hydraulic
fluid to bypass the flap actuating cylinder, thus delaying the time required to extend the flaps.
6-131. BYPASS FLOW VALVE TEST. This test should be performed in flight. Use a
power setting of 2400 RPM to obtain an indicated airspeed of 125 MPH. Select flaps down
and record the time required for the selector handle to return to neutral; it should be 10
seconds +1 -2 seconds. If the selector handle does not return to neutral it could be due to
the bypass valve allowing an excess amount of fluid to flow through the return part of the
valve. To check this condition, remove the bypass line from the valve and plug the outlet
port and cap the bypass line. Then try the system again, if the handle returns to neutral it
means the valve needs readjustment. A slightly less time adjustment may be required to
correct this condition.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2F2
2472
Figure 6-34. Emergency Gear Extender Cable Rigging
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2F3
2470
1. HOUSING AND PLUNGER ASSEMBLY

2. SPRING
3. PACKING
4. LOCK NUT
5. ADJUSTMENT FITTING
DEC. TIME
MARKS
FACTORYADJUSTMENT LOCKWIRETO VALVE
Figure 6-35. Bypass Flow Valve

6-132. BYPASS FLOW VALVE ADJUSTMENT. (Refer to Figure 6-35.)
a. Remove the right center seat from the airplane.
b. Remove the trim panels from the right side of the cabin, just aft of the
cabin entrance door.
c. Cut and remove the safety wire from the bypass valve locknut.
d. Adjust the valve by loosening the locknut and turning the fitting IN to
decrease or OUT to increase the time.
NOTE
The adjustment fitting should be turned a quarter of

a turn between tests as this will give a one or two
second change in time.
e. Hold the adjustment fitting securely when tightening the locknut so as not
to change the setting.
f. Perform the test given in paragraph 6-131.
g. When the valve is properly adjusted, safety the locknut to the valve body
with MS20995C20 safety wire.
h. Install the trim panels and center seats.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2F4
TABLE VI-V. HYDRAULICSYSTEMTROUBLESHOOTING
Trouble
ouble Cause RemeRemedy
Flap and landing gear Hydraulic fluid reser- Refer to paragraph 6-35.
systems (both) fail voir below operating Then fill powerpak with
to operate. level. hydraulic fluid. (Refer
to ServicingHydraulic
System, Section II.)
Hydraulic pump(s) If both systems function
failure. using hand pump and
lines are not damaged,
check condition of hy-
draulic pump. (Refer to
paragraphs6-13 and
6-28.)
Leak or obstruction in Check each system with
hydraulic lines be- hand pump. If they both
tween pump(s) and work, check lines for
powerpak. damage. Replacedamaged
line. (Refer to para-
graphs 6-35 and 6-120.)
If hand pump fails to
work refer to "Hydrau-
lic Powerpakfailure"
under the column head-
ing "Cause."
Landinggear system Leak or damage in hy- Check lines for damage.

fails to operate. draulic lines be- Replace damaged line.
tween the three land- (Refer to paragraphs
ing gears actuating 6-35 and 6-120.)
cylinders and the
powerpak.
Internal or external Check all three actu-
leakagein actuating ating cylinders for
cylinder. damage.(Refer to
paragraph 6-35.)
Replace defective cylin-
der. (Refer to para-
graph 6-86.)
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2 18/81
2F5
TABLEVI-V. HYDRAULICSYSTEMTROUBLESHOOTING(cont.)
Landing gear system Hydraulic Powerpak fail- Refer to Table VI-VI.

failsto operate. ure.
(cont.)
Wingflap system fails Leak or damage in hy- Checklines for damage.

to operate. draulic lines be- Replace damagedline.
tween actuating cyl- (Refer to paragraphs
inder and Powerpak. 6-35 and 6-120.)
Internal or external Check actuating cylinder
leakagein actuating for damage. Replaceif
cylinder. defective. (Refer to
paragraph 6-35.)
Hydraulic Powerpak Refer to Table VI-VI.
failure.
Landing gearsystem HydraulicPowerpak Refer to Table VI-VI.

functions im- failure.
properly.
Landing gear operation Hydraulic fluid reser- Refer to paragraph 6-35.

extremely slow. voir level low. Then fill Powerpak with
hydraulic fluid. (Refer
to ServicingHydraulic
System, Section II.)
Engine-drivenhydraulic Replaceor rebuild pump(s).
pump(s) output low. (Refer to paragraph
6-29.)
Internal leak in Refer to Table VI-VI.
Powerpak.
Landing gear failsto Excessivehydraulic Drain C02 lines.

retract fully. fluid in C02 system.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
2F6
TABLE VI-V. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING(cont.)
Landing gear drops in Leakage in Anti-Retrac- Replace "O" rings in

flight. tion valve. valve or replace valve.
Leakage in Actuating Replace "O" rings in

cylinder. actuating cylinder or
replace cylinder.
Up light will not stay Hydraulic fluid internal Check system for fluid
on in flight. leak in system. leaks.
Powerpak valve sticking. Refer to Table VI-VI.
(1)Landinggear door(s) Timer check (sequence) Check condition of

closing prior to wheel(s) valve leaking. valve and replace if
retracting into well. necessary.
gear door(s)
(1)Landing Priority valve leaking Check valve required
not opening prior to below required pressure pressure (Refer to
landing gear(s) starting on valve side. Table VI-I and adjust
to extend. or replace if
necessary.
1. PA-23-250 (SIX PLACE),
SERIAL NOS. 27-2505
AND UP ONLY.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2F7
TABLE VI-VI. POWERPAKTROUBLESHOOTING
Flap and landing gear Broken inner "O" ring Isolate and replace "O"
systems both fail to seal (129) on landing ring seal.
operate. gear selector spool.
External leakage at Replace "O" rings

base of hand pump (57 and 59).
handle.
Internal leakage in Check for damage or

main relief valve. foreign matter lodged
between ball (35) and
seat (34) of short valve
assembly (162), or
poppet assembly (145)
of tall valve assembly
(161). Replace dam-
aged "O" ring (33 or
144).

hand pump and filter. foreign matter lodged
(only when using hand between ball (23) and
pump. ) seat (21). Replace
damaged "O" rings (22
and 61).
NOTE
Where duplicate parts are used in the two systems,

only one part is illustrated and indexed on the exploded
view. Be sure to check the part applicable to the land-
ing gear or flap systems. Also, check the parts which
are under pressure first. (Refer to the flow diagrams,
Figures 6-10 through 6-14 for illustrations of the parts
under pressure for the position of the selector valve
when the Powerpak fails. )
NOTE: Reference numbers, refer to Figure 6-20.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
2F8
TABLE VI-VI. POWERPAK TROUBLESHOOTING(cont. )
Landing gear system Internal leakage in pop- Check for damage or

fails to operate. pets (84 and 91). foreign matter lodged
between poppets and
seats. Replace dam-
aged "O" rings (81, 83,
86, 88, 90 and 93).
Internal or external Replace damaged "O"

leakage at cam spools rings (129).
(128).
Internal leakage at de- Replace damaged "O"

tent plunger (77). ring (78).

thermal relief valve. foreign matter lodged
seat (73). Replace
damaged "O" ring (74).
External leakage at Replace damaged "O"

at plugs (115 and 121). rings (116 and 122).
Flap system fails to Internal leakage in pop- Check for damage or

operate. pets (84 and 91). foreign matter lodged
between poppets and
seats. (Replace dam-
aged "O" rings (81, 83,
86, 88, 90 and 93).
Internal leakage at de- Replace damaged "O"

tent plunger (77). ring (78).
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2F9
TABLE VI-VI. POWERPAK TROUBLESHOOTING(cont.)
Flap system fails to Internal leakage in ther- Check for damage or

operate. (cont.) mal relief valve. foreign matter lodged
seat (73). Replace
damaged "O" ring (74).
External leakage at Replace damaged "O"

plugs (115 and 121). rings (116 and 122).
Landing gear drops in Thermal contraction of "Ground check".

flight. hydraulic fluid.
Hydraulic fluid leaks Excessive fluid in sys- Refer to Servicing Hy-

out of vent after fill- tem due to improper draulic System, Sec-
ing reservoir. filling technique. tion II.
Hydraulic fluid continues Engine pump(s) shaft Replace pump(s) or seal.

to leak out of vent after leaking.
three or more gear
cycles.
Landing gear drops Leak in pressure and/or Replace poppet(s) as

in flight. return poppet (84 and required.
91).
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
2F10
TABLE VI-VII. POWERPAKPARTS LIST
Electrol No. Piper No.

750P-1 31800-0(1)
31800-2
31800-2M
31800-3
DESCRIPTION
FIGURE 6-20 UNITS
INDEX PART PER
NUMBER NUMBER ASSY
1 AN365 -428 NUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2 31926-00 WASHER, Reservoir. .. . . ... . 1
3 AN6227-5 PACKING, O-ring. . . . . . . 1
4 31827 -00 RESERVOIR .. . . . . ·. 1
5 AN6230-36 PACKING, O-Ring. . . . . . . 1
6 AN924-6D NUT .... . . . . . 1
7 UNION, Reservoir . . . . . 1
7a 31927-00 ELBOW, Reservoir ... . .
8 Cleveland -
110-9/16 SEAL ... .. .. ... .
• • • •
8a AN960-916L WASHER .. . . . . . 1
• • • •
9 31925-00 STRAINER .. . . . . . 1
• • • •
10 AN815-6D UNION ... . . .
. .
1
1
11 AN6290-6 PACKING, O-ring. . . .
. . 1
• • • •
12 31924-00 SPACER, Reservoir. . . .
. . 1
• • • •
13 31944-00 BAFFLE, Reservoir. . . .
. . 1
14 31940-00 SPACER, Reservoir. . . 1
15 AN316-4R NUT ....
16 31939-00 STUD ... . . . . . . 1
17 1/4-28 NF3 SCREW, Cap socket hd 5/16 in. lg.. . . 8(3)or 10(4)
18 AN936B416 WASHER, Lock. . . . 8(3)or 10(4) . . .
19 31886-02 (L) PLATE, Retainer . . . 1

. . .
31886-03 (R) PLATE, Retainer. . . 1
. . .
20 31912-00 STRAINER .... . . 1
. . .
21 31937-00 SEAT, Check . . . . . 1
. . .
22 AN6227-6 PACKING, O-ring . . . 1
1. NOT AVAILABLE FOR SERVICE

2. USED ONLY WITH POWERPAK ASSEMBLIES 750P-1 AND 31800-0.
3. USED ONLY WITH POWERPAK ASSEMBLIES 750P-1, 31800-0, 31800-2M AND 31800-3.
4. USED ONLY WITH POWERPAK ASSEMBLY 31800-2M.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2Fll
DESCRIPTION (cont.)
UNITS
INDEX PART PER
NUMBER NUMBER ASSY
23 31804-05 BALL .. . . . 1.
24 31936-00 SPRING, Check. . 1
. . .
25 31951-00 BODY, Relief Valve 1(2)
. . .
26 AN6227-15 PACKING, O-ring. 1(2)
. . .
27 MS20995F32 LOCKWIRE . . . 1(2)
. . .
28 31955-00 SCREW . .. 1 (2)
. . .
29 31848-00 NUT ... 1 (2)
. . .
30 31957-00 SPRING .. 1 (2)
. . .
31 31952-00 PLUNGER .. . . 1 (2)
32 31953-00 PLUG .. 1 (2)
. . .
33 AN6227-4 PACKING, O-ring. . . . . . 1 (2)
34 31954-00 SEAT .. . . o . . (2)
35 31814-07 BALL .. . . . . . 1 (2)
36 31956-00 RETAINER . . . . . . 1 (2)

. .
37 AN380-2-2 PIN, Cotter . . . .. .. . . 1
. .
PIN, Clevis . .
.
38 AN394-19 . . . 1
.
. .
39 AN960PD416 WASHER .. 1
. .
40 AN380-2-2 PIN, Cotter . . . . . . 1
41 AN320-3 NUT ... . . , . . 1
42 AN3-10 BOLT .. . . . 1
43 AN380-2-2 PIN, Cotter . . . . . . 1
. . .
44 AN393-27 PIN, Clevis . . . 1
45 AN960PD10 WASHER .. 1
46 31922-00 LINK... 1
47 52-028-125-
1.187 PIN, Roll (ESNA) . 2
48 31934-00 STOP... 2
49 52-028-125-
1.375 PIN, Roll (ESNA). . . . . .. . . .. . I
50 31933-00 GRIP ... . . . . . . . . . .
51 AN500-6-3 SCREW .. . . . . . . . . . 2
52 AN935-6L WASHER, Lock. . . . . . . . ... . . 2

53 31906-00 SPRING.. . . . . . . . . . 1
54 31825-00 HANDLE .. . . . . . . . . . 1
2. USED ONLY WITH POWERPAKASSEMBLIES 750P-1 AND 31800-0.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2F12
DESCRIPTION (cont.)
UNITS
INDEX PART PER
NUMBER NUMBER ASSY
55 31829-00 FORK AND BUSHINGASSY ....... . . .. .. ...1

56 5000-106 RING, Snap ..... ....... . . ... 1
57 AN6227-16 PACKING, O-ring.... . . . . . . 1
58 31935-00 STOP ....
59 AN6227-13 PACKING, O-ring....
11 or
60 31938-00 PISTON .... ........
.
.... .. .... .. .. 1 or2(5)
2(5)
11
61 AN6227-15 PACKING, O-ring ... ·. . . .. . 1
62 NAS50-43 RING, Snap ...... .. . . . . 1
63 AN6227-6 PACKING, O-ring .
64 31937-00 SEAT, Check .....
65 31814-05 BALL .... .... .. 1
66 31936-00 SPRING, Check . ... . .. . . . 1
67 31876-00 SCREW ASSY .. .· . . ... .. 4
68 31872-00 BODY .... .· . .. . . . 4
69 31875-00 RETAINER, Upper . . . .· . . .. . . 4
70 31871-00 SPRING .... .·. . . . . 4
71 31877-00 RETAINER, Lower . . . . .. . . . 4
72 31814-02 BALL ....
73 31874-00 SEAT .... . . . ... .o. 4
o
74 AN6227-4 PACKING, O-ring . .. .·. . ... . 4
75 31904-00 PLUG .... ........ . l or 2(5)
76 31947-00 SPRING.... ...... l or 2(5)
77 31905-00 PLUNGER ... ... ... l or 2 ( 5 )
78 PRP902-3/4 PACKING, O-ring . ... . .. . . . l or 2(5)
79 31814-04 BALL ....
80 31923-00 RETAINER, Return . . . . . . .. . 4
81 AN6290-6 PACKING, O-ring....
82 31856-00 SPRING ....
83 2-15PSI-
30-5AN PACKING, O-ring .... . . . . . . 4
84 31854-00 POPPET AND SEAT ASSY . • . •
.• 4
. .
85 AN6227 -3 PACKING, O-ring . ... 4

5. TWO USED WITH POWERPAK ASSEMBLIES 750P-1 AND 31800-0,
ONE USED WITH POWERPAK ASSEMBLIES 31800-2, 31800-2M AND 31800-3.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2F13
DESCRIPTION (cont.)
UNITS
INDEX PART PER
NUMBER NUMBER ASSY
86 2-15PSI-
30-5AN PACKING, O-ring. . . 4
87 31913-00 RETAINER, Pressure . 6
88 AN6227 -10 PACKING, O-ring. . . 6
89 31856-00 SPRING. 6
90 2-15PSI-
30-5AN PACKING, O-ring . . . ... . . . . 6
91 31854-00 POPPET AND SEAT ASSY . . . . .. . . . 6
92 AN6227 -3 PACKING, O-ring.... . . . . . . 6
93 2-15PSI-
30-5AN PACKING, O-ring . .. . ... .. . . . 6
94 AN380-2-1 PIN, Cotter ...... . .. .. . . . 6
4
95 AN960-PD4L WASHER ... . . .. . . . 4
96 AN392-11 PIN, Clevis ...... . . . . . . 4
97 31930-00 LINK.. . . . . . . 4
98 AN380-2-2 PIN, Cotter ...... . . . . . . 2
99 AN960PD1OL WASHER ... . . . . . . 2

100 AN960PD10 WASHER ... . . . . . . 2
101 AN393-21 PIN, Clevis ......
102 AN364-832 NUT, Lock ...... ..... . 1
103 31908-00 BOLT .... . . .. .. 1
104 31909-02
(24V) KNOB, Landing gear. 1
31909-00
(12V) KNOB, Landing gear ... 1
105 52-040-187-
0312 PIN, Roll (ESNA) .... 2
106 31910-00 TUBE, Lever ......... 1
107 31931-00 LEVER, Landing gear ... 1
108 31932 -00 TERMINAL BLOCK AND WIRE ASSY 2
109 31928-00 LEVER ... 1
110 10-32NF3 SCREW, Cap 11/16 in. lg.. 1
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2F14
DESCRIPTION (cont.)
UNITS
INDEX PART PER
NUMBER NUMBER ASSY
111 AN935-10L WASHER .. 1

112 31929-00 KNOB, Wing flap
113 52-040-187-
0750 PIN, Roll (ESNA) ... . . ... . 2
114 31942-00 STUD ..... 2
115 31941-00 PLUG .. 2
116 PRP902-3/4 PACKING, O-ring . 2
117 1/4-28NF3 SCREW, Cap socket hd 5/16 in. 1g . . 2
118 AN936B416 WASHER, Lock. . 2
119 AN960-PD416 WASHER .. . 2
120 31943-00 RETAINER . . . 2
121 31941-00 PLUG .. . .. 2
122 PRP902-3/4 PACKING, O-ring. 2
123 31907 -00 SCREW . . . . 2
124 31902-00 WASHER .. .. 2
125 31946-00 SPRING . .. 2
126 31888-00 SPACER .. 2
127 31902-00 WASHER 2
128 31887-00 (L) CAMSHAFT
31887-01 (R) CAMSHAFT . . . 1
129 AN6227-6 PACKING, O-ring. 8
130 31803-00 END FITTING .
131 MS28778-6 GASKET . .
132 MS28775-011 PACKING .
133 31861-00 POPPET .
134 31799-00 SPRING .
135 31801-00 BODY . 1
136 W/H3400X2 ELBOW . .. ... .. 11
1 1
137 31911-00 PIPE, Stand . . .
138 31840-02 BODY ..
139 AN932-1 PLUG .. 1
140 31873-00 HEAD, Thermal Reliief Valve 4
141 31948-00 END FITTING . . .
6. USED ONLY WITH POWERPAK ASSEMBLIES 31800-2, 31800-2M AND 318003.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2F15
DESCRIPTION (cont.)
UNITS
INDEX PART PER
NUMBER NUMBER ASSY
1 (6)
142 31885-00 RETAINER .. ...
143 31963-00 BODY ........
2
1 (8)
144 AN6227-7 O-RING .... · . . . 1 (6)

()
145 31899-00 POPPET ASSY .. . . . .1 1 (6)
146 31814-03 BALL .. .....
· . . . . l (6)
147 31949-00 SPRING ....
l (6 )
148 31900-00 GUIDE .. .....
1 (6)
149 31848-00 NUT .. ......
l (6)
150 31962-00 CAP .. .... ..
151 AN6290-4 PACKING, O-ring . . .
GEAR DETENT CAP. .
·· .. .. .. (6)
1 (6) 6
152 31917-00
153 31915-00 SPRING .. ....
154 31916-00 DETENT SPRING GUIDE ·
.....
. . . l1 (6)
(6)
1 (6)
155 31914-00 PLUNGER DETENT . . 1(6)
156 PRP902-3/4 PACKING ....... • • •
l (6)
•
.1- •
157 AN6227-15 PACKING, O-ring .. . . . 1 (7)

. .
• •• • • 1 (7)
158 32278-00 ADAPTER, Relief Valve . . . . . ~ 1^
159 Not assigned ...
160 31878-00 THERMAL RELIEF VALVE ASSY . . 4
161 31950-00 MAIN RELIEF VALVE ASSY .. 1 (6)
162 MAIN RELIEF VALVE ASSY .. 1 (2)
163 HAND PUMPSUCTION VALVE ASSY 1
164 CAMSHAFT RELEASE DETENT ASSY . 1 or 2 (5)
165 CAMSHAFT RELEASE DETENT ASSY . 1 (6)
166 - HAND PUMP ASSEMBLY ... 1

167 - POPPET ASSEMBLY, Return .. 2
168 - POPPET ASSEMBLY, Pressure .. 6
169 - CAMSHAFT AND RETURN SPRING ASSY 2
170 31862-00 MAIN CHECK VALVE ASSEMBLY. . . 1

5. TWO USED WITH POWERPAK ASSEMBLIES 750-1 AND 31800-0,
ONE USED WITH POWERPAK ASSEMBLIES 31800-2, AND 31800-2M AND 31800-3.
6. USED ONLY WITH POWERPAK ASSEMBLIES 31800-2, 31800-2M AND 31800-3.
7. USED ONLY WITH POWERPAK ASSEMBLY 31800-2M.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2F16
TABLE VI-VIII. POWERPAKSERVICE LIMITS
FIGURE 6-20 MIN. MAX.

INDEX PART MFG. SERVICE SERVICE
NUMBER NO. ITEM TOL. NOMINAL LIMIT LIMIT
21 31937-00 I.D. Seat - Check ±.005 .171 .1655 .1765
25 31951-00 I.D. Body - Relief Valve +.002

-. 000 .343 .343 .3452
31 31952-00 O.D. Plunger +.000

-. 005 .160 .1545 .160
34 31954-00 I.D. Seat ±.001 .135 .1339 .1361
58 31935-00 I.D. Stop +.002

-. 000 .705 .705 .7072-
60 31938-00 O.D. Piston - Shaft +.000

-. 001 .704 .7029 .704
60 31938-00 O.D. Piston - Head +.000

-. 004 .998 .9936 .998
64 31937-00 I.D. Seat - Check ±.005 .171 .1655 .1765
73 31874-00 I.D. Seat ±.001 .100 .0989 .1011
77 31905-00 O.D. Plunger +.000

-. 003 .217 .2137 .2.17
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2F17
POWERPAK SERVICE LIMITS (cont.)
MAX. MIN.
INDEX PART MFG. SERVICE SERVICE
NUMBER NO. ITEM TOL. NOMINAL LIMIT LIMIT
91 & 84 31854-00 Poppet & Seat Ass'y
31853-00 I.D. Seat +.0005

-. 0000 .3125 .3125 .31305
31852-00 O.D. Poppet +.0000

-. 0003 .3122 .31187 .3122
128 O.D. Spool (Camshaft) +.0000

31887-00 (L) -. 0005 .4365 .43595 .4365
31887-01 (R)
138 31840-02 dy - Bushing Ass'y
Bod
31840-03
I.D. Piston Head Bore +.003 1.000

-.000 1.000 1.000 1.0033
I.D. Spool Bore +.002

-. 000 .437 .437 .4392
I.D. Spool Detent Bore +.003

-. 000 .219 .219 .2223
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2F18
2474
-0.50
MATERIAL LIST
2 - 35.49 x 1.0 x 0.375 STRAP STEEL
1- 7.75 x 4.0 x 0.25 STEEL PLATE
DRILL 0.281 HOLE

4 PLACES
5.187 -0.50
-DRILL 0.312 HOLE
4 PLACES
16.0
4.0 4.0
0.50R
(TYP)
d.
0.375
Figure 6-36. Fabricated Work and Test Stand
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2F19
A760
2.0
2.0
MATERIAL:0.125HARDALUM.WIRE
Figure 6-37. Fabricated Hook

A780
1.50
3.0
MATERIAL: 0.125HARDALUM.WIRE
Figure 6-38. Fabricated Hook, Double
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
2F20
2F21
2F22
2F23
2F24
SECTION VII
LANDING GEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
7-1. Introduction ................................................. 2G6

7-2. Description .................................................. 2G6
7-3. Troubleshooting .............................................. 2G7
7-4. Landing Gear System ......................................... 2G7
7-5. Nose Landing Gear System .................................... 2G7
7-6. Disassembly of Nose Gear Oleo ....................... 2G7
7-7. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Nose Gear Oleo...... 2G11
7-8. Assembly of Nose Gear Oleo .......................... 2G11
7-9. Removal of Nose Landing Gear ....................... 2G13
7-10. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Nose Landing
Gear ........................................... 2G13
7-11. Installation of Nose Landing Gear ..................... 2G15
7-12. Adjustment of Nose Landing Gear ..................... 2G16
7-13. Alignment of Nose Landing Gear ...................... 2G17
7-14. Nose Gear Door Assembly .................................... 2G21
7-15. Removal of Nose Gear Door Assembly
(PA-23-250;PA-23-235;and PA-23-250
[six place], Serial Nos. 27-2000to
27-2504incl.) .................................... 2G21
7-16. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Nose Gear
Door Assembly (PA-23-250;PA-23-235;
and PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos.
27-2000to 27-2504incl.) .......................... 2G21
7-17. Installation of Nose Gear Door Assembly
(PA-23-250;PA-23-235;and PA-23-250
27-2504incl.)............... 2G21
7-18. Adjustment of Nose Landing Gear Doors
(PA-23-250;PA-23-235;and PA-23-250
27-2504incl.).................................... 2G22
7-19. Removal of Nose Gear Door Assembly
(PA-23-250[six place], Serial Nos.
27-2505and up)................................. 2G23
7-20. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Nose Gear
Assembly (PA-23-250[six place],
Serial Nos. 27-2505and up)....................... 2G23
Reissued: 2/18/81
2G1
Paragraph h Aerofiche
Grid No.
7-21. Installation of Nose Gear Door Assembly

27-2505 and up) ............................... 2G23
7-22. Adjustment of Nose Landing Gear Doors
27-2505 and up) ................................. 2G24
7-23. Main Gear Assembly ......................................... 2H1
7-24. Disassembly of Main Gear Oleo ....................... 2H1
7-25. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Main Gear Oleo ..... 2H5
7-26. Assembly of Main Gear Oleo ......................... 2H5
7-27. Removal of Main Landing Gear ....................... 2H6
7-28. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Main
Landing Gear ................................... 2H7
7-29. Installation of Main Landing Gear ..................... 2H9
7-30. Adjustment of Main Landing Gear ..................... 2H10
7-31. Alignment of Main Landing Gear Wheel ............... 2H11
7-32. Main Gear Door Assembly .................................... 2H13
7-33. Removal of Main Gear Door and Actuator
Assembly (PA-23-250, PA-23-235; and
PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos.
27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) .......................... 2H13
7-34. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Main Gear
Door Assembly (PA-23-250, PA-23-235;
and PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos.
27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) .......................... 2H13
7-35. Installation of Main Gear Door and Actuator
Assembly (PA-23-250, PA-23-235; and
PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos.
27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) .......................... 2H13
7-36. Adjustment of Main Gear Doors (PA-23-250,
PA-23-235; and PA-23-250 [six place],
Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) ............... 2H14
7-37. Removal of Main Gear Door and Actuator
Assembly (PA-23-250 [six place],
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up) ....................... 2H15
7-38. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Main Gear
Door Assembly (PA-23-250 [six place],
7-39. Installation of Main Gear Door and Actuator
Assembly (PA-23-250 [six place],
7-40. Adjustment of Main Landing Gear Doors
27-2505 and up) ................................. 2H17
Reissued: 2/18/81
2G2
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
7-41. Adjustment of Landing Gear Limit Switches ...... ............... 2H19

7-42. Adjustment of Nose Gear Up Limit Switch ............. 2H 19
7-43. Adjustment of Main Gear Up Limit Switch ............. 2H20
7-44. Adjustment of Landing Gear Down Limit
Switches ............. ........ .................. 2H21
7-45. Landing Gear Warning System ................................. 2H22
7-46. Removal of Gear Warning Switches .................... 2H22
7-47. Installation of Gear Warning Switches .................. 2H22
7-48. Adjusting Gear Warning Switches ..................... 2H23
7-49. Wheels ...................................................... 2H24
7-50. Removal and Disassembly of Nose Wheel ............... 2H24
7-51. Inspection of Nose Wheel Assembly ................... 211
7-52. Assembly and Installation of Nose Wheel ............... 211
7-53. Removal and Disassembly of Main Wheel .............. 212
7-54. Inspection of Main Wheel Assembly ................... 213
7-55. Repair of Main Wheel Assembly ...................... 214
7-56. Assembly and Installation of Main Wheel .............. 215
7-57. Brake System ................................................ 216
7-58. Wheel Brake Assembly ........................................ 216
7-59. Brake Adjustment and Lining Tolerances ............... 216
7-60. Removal and Disassembly of Wheel Brake
Assembly ....................................... 216
7-61. Cleaning. Inspection and Repair of Wheel
Brake Assembly ......... ................... 216
7-62. Assembly and Installation of Wheel Brake
Assembly ....................................... 2111
7-63. Brake Master Cylinder ........................................ 2111
7-64. Removal of Brake Master Cylinder .................... 2111
7-65. Disassembly of Brake Master Cylinder ................. 2112
7-66. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Brake
Master Cylinder................................. 2112
7-67. Assembly of Brake Master Cylinder .................... 2113
7-68. Installation of Brake Master Cylinder .................. 2113
7-69. Parking Brake Valve .......................................... 2115
7-70. Removal of Parking Brake Valve ...................... 2115
7-71. Disassembly of Parking Brake Valve ................... 2115
7-72. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Parking Brake Valve.. 2115
7-73. Assembly of Parking Brake Valve ...................... 2116
7-74. Installation of Parking Brake Valve .................... 2116
7-75. Bleeding Procedure ........................................... 2116
7-76. Tire Balancing ............................................... 2118
7-77. Construction of Tire Balancer ......................... 2118
Reissued:2/18/81
2G3
2G4
2G4
2G5
SECTION VII
LANDINGGEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM
7-1. INTRODUCTION. This section contains instructions for maintenance,

overhaul, inspection and adjustment of the various components of the landing
gear and brake system. Adjustments are also given for electrical limit and
warning switches.
This section does not cover the hydraulic operation of the landing gear.
For maintenance of hydraulic system, refer to Section VI.
7-2. DESCRIPTION. The tricycle landing gear system is an air-oil oleo type unit that is
hydraulically operated and fully retractable with the nose gear retracting aft into the nose
section and the main gear retracting forward into the engine nacelles. On PA-23-250;
PA-23-235; and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl., the doors
operate by mechanical linkage, but do not cover the gear completely when retracted. On
PA-23-250 (six place), SerialNos. 27-2505 and up, the doors are hydraulically operated and
completely cover the gear when it is retracted.
To prevent the gear from being retracted while the airplane is on the
ground, an anti-retraction valve, located on the left main gear, prevents a build
up of hydraulic pressure in the retraction system while the weight of the airplane
is on its wheels.
The nose gear is steerable through a 30 degree arc by the use of the rudder
pedals. As the gear retracts, however, the steering linkage becomes separated
from the gear so that rudder pedal action with the gear retracted is not impeded
by the nose gear operation.
The position of the landing gear is indicated by four lights located on the
pedestal. When the three green lights are on, all three legs of the gear are down
and locked; when the amber light is on, the gear is entirely up, gear doors closed
and when no light is on, the gear is in an intermediate position. A red light in
the landing gear control knob flashes when gear is up and power from one engine
is reduced below 14 to 15 inches of manifold pressure. When power from both
engines is reduced below 10 to 12 inches of manifold pressure, a warning horn
in the cockpit will sound.
The brakes are hydraulically actuated by individual master cylinders
mounted on the left (optional on the right) set of rudder pedals. A reservoir,

2G6
accessible through an access panel located on the left side of nose supplies fluid
to each master cylinder. From these cylinders, hydraulic fluid is routed through
lines and hoses to a parking brake valve, located on the aft-left side of the nose
section, through wings to the brake assemblies on each main landing gear. The
brakes are self-adjusting, single-disc, double housing and double piston assem-
blies. To operate the brakes, apply toe pressure against the top of the rudder
pedal. The parking brake may be actuated by applying toe pressure and at the
same time pulling out on the brake handle. To relieve parking brake pressure,
apply toe pressure on the pedals and at the same time push in on the parking
brake handle.
Servicing the hydraulic and brake systems is found in Section II.
7-3. TROUBLESHOOTING. Mechanical and electrical switch troubles peculiar

to the landing gear system are listed in Table VII-IV at the back of this section.
When troubleshooting, first eliminate hydraulic malfunctions as listed in Section
VI. Then proceed to switch malfunctions and last to the mechanical operation of
the gear itself, both of which are listed in this section. Always place the air-
plane on jacks before attempting any troubleshooting of the gear.
7-4. LANDINGGEAR SYSTEM.
7-5. NOSE LANDINGGEAR SYSTEM.
7-6. DISASSEMBLYOF NOSE GEAR OLEO. (Refer to Figure 7-1.) The nose
gear oleo assembly may be removed and disassembled from the gear oleo housing
with the gear removed from or installed on the airplane.
b. Place a drip pan under the nose gear to catch hydraulic fluid spillage.
c. Remove air and fluid from the oleo strut. Depress the air valve core pin
(21) until strut chamber pressure has diminished, remove the air valve (18) and
with a small hose siphon as much hydraulic fluid from the strut as possible.
d. Remove the torque link assembly by removing the cotter pin, nut, washer and (close
tolerance) bolt from the strut housing and fork assembly.
e. Release and remove the snap ring (12) from the annular slot at the bottom
of the strut housing.
f. Pull the piston tube (13), with component parts, from the strut housing.

Reissued: 2/18/81
2G7
268
SO 2149
2462
1. GREASE FITTINGS
2. AIRCHARGE VALVE
3. SERVICING PLATE
4. BEARING, PISTON
5. RETAINING PIN
6. SPACER
7. "O" RING
8. BEARING
9. "O" RING
10. WIPER STRIP
II. WASHER
12. SNAP RING
13. PISTON TUBE
14. "O" RING
15. PI STON
16. BUSHING
17. GASKET
18. BODY
19. BUSHING
20. CAP
21. CORE
22. STRUT HOUSING
23. SHIMMY DAMPENER
24. "O" RING
25. ORIFICE TUBE
26. ORIFICE PLATE
27. SNAP RING
28. TORQUE LINK, UPPER
29. BUSHING
30. TORQUE LINK, LOWER
31. BOLT
32. WASHER
33. COLLAR
34. FORK ASSEMBLY
Figure 7-1. Nose Gear Oleo Strut Assembly

Reissued: 2/18/81
2G9 2G10
g. The piston tube components may be removed by reaching in the tube and
pushing out the upper bearing retaining pins (5). Slide the upper bearing (4),
spacer (6), lower bearing (8) with outer (7) and inner (9) "O" rings, wiper strip
(10), washer (11) and snap ring (12) from the tube.
h. To remove the orifice tube (25), remove the bolt (31) and washer (32) from
the top of the strut housing. Pull the tube from the housing (22).
i . The orifice plate (26) is removed from the bottom of the orifice tube by re-
leasing the snap ring (27) that holds the plate in position.
j . To remove the piston tube plug (15) with "O" ring (14) located in the lower
end of the tube, remove the bolt assembly at the top of the fork and insert a rod
up through the hole in the body of the fork (34), pushing the plug out through the
top of the tube.
7-7. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF NOSE GEAR OLEO.

a. Clean all parts with a suitable dry type cleaning solvent.
b. Inspect the landing gear oleo assembly components for the following:
1. Bearings and bushings for excess wear, corrosion, scratches and over-
haul damage.
2. Retaining pins for wear and damage.
3. Snap rings for cracks, burrs, etc.
4. Cylinder and orifice tube for corrosion, scratches, nicks and excess
wear.
5. Orifice plate for hole restriction.
6. Fork tube for corrosion, scratches, nicks, dents and misalignment.
7. Air valve for general condition.
c. Repair of the oleo is limited to smoothing out minor scratches, nicks and
dents and replacement of parts. Service tolerances for wear of the various com-
ponents may be found in Table VII-II.
7-8. ASSEMBLY OF NOSE GEAR OLEO. (Refer to Figure 7-1.)

a. Ascertain that parts are clean and inspected.
b. To assemble the fork assembly (34), press the tube end (13) into the fork
body, aligning the bolt holes.
c. If a new tube is to be installed that has not been drilled, press the tube into
the fork housing until it bottoms. Usingthe bolt holes inthe fork body as a guide,
drill a pilot hole and ream to .250 +.002 -. 000 through each side of the tube wall.
Remove burrs from the inside of the tube and flush the tube with a suitable sol-
vent to remove all metal particles.

Reissued: 2/18/81
2G11
d. To install the piston tube plug (15), first lubricate the tube plug and "0"
ring (14) with hydraulic fluid (MIL-H-5606) and install the "0" ring on the plug.
Lubricate the inside wall of the tube, insert the plug into the top of the tube and
push it to the fork end. Align the bolt holes and install bolt assembly.
e. If desired, cement a cork in the hole in the bottom of the fork body to pre-
vent dirt from entering the fork tube.
f. To assemble the orifice tube (25), insert the orifice plate (26) into the bot-
tom of the tube. Secure the plate with the snap ring (27). Lubricate and install
and "0" ring (24) on the top end of the tube.
g. Insert the tube up through the bottom of the strut housing (22). With the
tube exposed through the top of the housing, install washer (32) and bolt (31).
The bolt should only be installed finger tight at this time.
h. The fork tube assembly may be assembled by installing the tube components
on the tube. In the following order slide onto the tube, the snap ring (12), washer
(11), wiper (10), lower bearing (8) with outer (7) and inner (9) "0" rings, spacer
(6) and upper bearing (4). Align lock pin holes of the upper bearing and piston
tube and install pins (5).
i. Lubricate the inner wall of the cylinder. Carefully insert the piston tube
assembly into the bottom of the housing, allowing the orifice tube to guide itself
into the piston tube, until the retainer ring can be installed in the annular slot at
the bottom of the cylinder. Slide the washer into position and secure assembly
with snap ring.
j . At the top of the housing, tighten the orifice tube retaining bolt and safety.
k. Install the torque link assembly (28 and 30) using bolt (ct), washer, nut,
and cotter pin.
NOTE
The bolt should be installed with one of the flat sides

of the hex head against the milled stop on the drag
links.
m. Lubricate the gear assembly. (Refer to Lubrication Chart, Section II.)

n. Compress and extend the strut several times to ascertain that the strut
will operate freely. The weight of the gear wheel and fork should allow the strut
to extend.
o. Service the oleo strut with fluid and air. (Refer to Servicing Oleo Struts,
Section II.)
p. Check the nose gear for correct adjustment (Refer to Paragraph 7-12.)and
for alignment (Refer to Paragraph 7-13.) and gear operation.
q. Lower the airplane and remove jacks.

Reissued: 2/18/81
7-9. REMOVAL OF NOSE LANDINGGEAR. (Refer to Figure 7-2.)

a. Remove the left and right access panels from the aft portion of the nose
section by releasing fasteners to gain access to the landing gear attachment fit-
tings. (Refer to Access Plates and Panels, Section II.)
b. Place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to Jacking, Section II.)
c. Using the hand pump, retract the gear slightly to relieve the gear from its
down and locked position.
d. To remove the drag link assembly, the following procedure may be used:
1. Disconnect the gear retraction rod (19) from the upper drag link (15),
by removing cotter pin, nut, washers and bolt.
2. Disconnect the lower drag links (11) from the gear strut housing (4) by
removing from each support, the pin, nut, washers, clevis bolt and wire support
lug from the left side.
3. Lower the forward end of the drag link assembly and disconnect the
down lock indicating switch (22) from its attachment fitting.
4. Remove the drag link assembly by removing the attaching cotter pin,
nut, washers and bolt from the aft end of the upper drag link.
e. With the lower drag links disconnected from the gear housing, the gear may be
removed by removing the attaching cotter pins, nuts, washersand bolts (close tolerance) at
the fuselage frame fitting.
7-10. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF NOSE LANDINGGEAR.

a. Clean all parts with a suitable cleaning solvent.
b. Inspect the landing gear assembly components for the following unfavorable
conditions:
1. Bolts, bearings, bushings and ball joints for excessive wear, corrosion
and damage.
2. Gear housing, drag links, rods and attachments for cracks, bends or
misalignment.
3. Downlock springs for wear, corrosion and not returning to complete
compression.
4. General condition of limit switches.
5. Wiring for fraying, poor connections or conditions that may lead to
failures.
c. Attach the upper and lower drag links and check that there is 0 to .007 of
an inch clearance between the latch hook and pin. Dress upper and lower link
stop surfaces to obtain minimum clearance. Also check that when the stop sur-
faces touch, linkage is .250 +.031 -0 inch through center. (Refer to Figure 7-3.)
Should this distance exceed the required through center travel, and bolt and bush-
ings are tight, replace one or all drag links.

Reissued: 2/18/81
2G13
2134
2462
A428
A763
1. STEERING BELLCRANK
2. AIRCHARGE VALVE
3 STEERING TORQUE TUBE
4. GEAR STRUT HOUSING SKETCH A
6. TORQUE LINK, LOWER 12. SWITCH MOUNTING BRACKET 18. GEAR ACTUATING CYLINDER
7. WHEEL 13. SPRINGS 19. GEAR RETRACTION ROD
. TIRE 14. DOWN LOCK LINK 20. FUSELAGE FRAME
9. FORK ASSEMBLY 15. DRAG LINK, UPPER 21. LATCH ASSEMBLY
16. TIME DELAY VALVE 22. GEAR INDICATING SWITCH
10. STEERING LINK
11. DRAG LINKS, LOWER 17. STEERING ARM
Figure 7-2. Nose Landing Gear Installation

Reissued: 2/18/81
2G14
d. Repair to the landing gear is limited to reconditioning of parts such as re-

placingbearings and bushings, smoothingout minornicks and scratches, repaint-
ingof areas where paint has chipped or peeled and replacement of parts. Service
tolerances for wear of the various components may be found in Table VII-II.
7-11. INSTALLATION OF NOSE LANDINGGEAR. (Refer to Figure 7-2.)
NOTE
When assembling any units of the landing gear, lubri-

cate bearings and friction surfaces with proper lubri-
cant as described in Section II.
a. Position the landing gear portion of the steering mechanism and the gear
housing attachment point bushings so they align with the attachment points at the
front of the tubular structure. From each outboard side install the stop bolt
plate, bolt (ct), washer, nut and cotter pin. Tighten the pivot bolts to a snug fit,
allowing the gear to swing free, and safety.
b. If the drag link assembly was removed, reinstall by the following procedure:
1. Ascertain that the linkage through center travel is within tolerance.
(Refer to step c, Paragraph 7-10.)
2. Position the aft end of the drag link assembly (15) and install, from left
to right, the attaching bolt, washer, nut and cotter pin.
3. Temporarily install the landing gear down limit switch (22) to the attach-
ment bracket (12) on the drag links (11 and 15).
4. Connect the forward end of the drag link assembly (11) to the strut
housing. Install, from each outboard side, a clevis bolt, washer, nut and cotter
pin.
NOTE
A small right angle wire support lug is installed under

the head of the left bolt, with its outstanding leg aft.
5. With the drag link assembly in the down and locked position and the re-
traction rod (19) fully extended, adjust the rod end until the attachment bolt can
be freely inserted.
c. Check adjustment and operation of nose landing gear. (Refer to Paragraph
7-12.)
d. Check adjustment of nose gear down limit switch. (Refer to Paragraph
7-44.)

ACTUATORCYLINDER IN FULLY
EXTENDED POSITION.IF MORE
THAN .007 IS OBTAINED,REPLACE
UPPERLINK.
REPLACEAS A MATCHEDSET.
SKETCH A
TO OBTAINPROPERADJUSTMENT
DRESSSTOPSURFACEON THE
.250 + .031
MAX. TOLERANCE
OVERCENTER
Figure 7-3. Adjustment of Nose Gear Drag Link and Latch Assembly
e. Check alignment of nose gear. (Refer to Paragraph7-13.)
f. Lubricate the landing gear assembly. (Refer to appropriate Lubrication Chart,
Section II.)
g. Lower the airplane and removejacks.
h. Install canvas cover,if removed, around the upper side of the wheel well with screws
and install accesspanels.
7-12. ADJUSTMENTOF NOSE LANDINGGEAR.

b. Disconnect the actuator cylinder from the upper drag link assembly, if not
previously disconnected.
c. Check to determine that the gear housing is not restricted from swingingfar enough
forward as a result of the steering arm rollers pressing against the steering bellcrank, thus
preventing the drag link assembly from dropping into the locked position. Should there be
interference, remove the shims on the steering horn until after drag link adjustments are
made. Readjust per Paragraph7-13.
- d. Ascertain that the piston rod of the actuating cylinder is in the fully extended
position by operating the hand pump with the landing gear selector in the down position.
e. Disconnect the downlock springs, by removing cotter pin, nut and washer, and the
bolt installed through the latch and link assembly. Reinstallthe bolt and nut through catch
and link.

Reissued: 2/18/81
NOTE
Ascertain that the actuating cylinder has one inch side play,
measured at the rod end bearing with the cylinder fully ex-
tended. Adjust the actuating cylinder mounting bolt to allow
sufficient clearance to permit this side play.
f. Holding the drag links in the down and locked position, adjust the rod end bearing of
the actuator until the attaching bolt passesfreelythrough the gear idler link and downlock link
assembly. Secure rod end with bolt, washer, nut and cotter pin. Tighten jam nut on rod end
against piston rod.
CAUTION
If the actuator is over-extended,the pressuremay bend or snap

the lock link.
g. Ascertain there is 0 to .007of an inch clearance between the latch and hook. (Referto
Figure 7-3.)
NOTE
The stop surface on the upper link may be dressed to obtain the
0 to .007 of an inch clearance. If .007 is exceeded replace the
upper link. The lower links are matched sets and should be re-
placed as sets.
h. Reassemble the downlock springs and secure with bolt, washer, nuts and cotter pins.
i. Usingthe hand pump or a hydraulic test stand, raise and lower the gear severaltimes
to determine proper operation of all components.
j. Adjust the gear up bumper block so that the strut housingcompresses the rubber pad
by approximately .062 of an inch.
NOTE
The strut housing is made to bear against the pad to eliminate
up and down bouncing of the strut assembly. The bumper
block provides the necessary solid resistance without dam-
aging the gear.
k. Lower the airplane and remove jacks.
7-13. ALIGNMENT OF NOSE LANDING GEAR. Two methods of aligning the nose
landing gear are as follows:
I. CHALK METHOD:
a. Remove the access panels from both sides of the nose section and relievethe rudder
cable tension by loosening the turnbuckles.

Reissued: 2/18/81
2G17
A427
Figure 7-4. Clamping Rudder Figure 7-5. Rudder Pedals

Pedals in Neutral Neutral Angle
b. Place the airplane on a smooth levelfloor that willaccommodate the striking of a chalk
line.
c. Place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to Jacking, Section II.)
d. Level airplane laterally and longitudinally. (Refer to Leveling,Section II.)
e. From the center of the tail skid, extend a plumb bob and mark thecontact point on the
floor.
f. From the grease fitting, at the upper end of the drag link assembly,extend a plumb bob
and mark the contact point on the floor.
g. Using the two plumb bob marks as a guide, snap a chalk line extending several feet.
beyond each mark.
h. On airplanes with an adjustable nose wheelsteeringlink, check and, if required, adjust
the link to maintain a 2.31 inch dimension between the center of the attaching end fittings.
i. Clamp rudder pedals to align in a lateral position. (Refer to Figure 7-4.)
j. To insure full travel of nose wheel,make sure no gaps existat points wherethe steering
arm travel bushings contact with the steering bellcrank. If gaps exist, install shims (.032,
P/N 18874-00;.062, P/N 18874-02or .125, P/N 18874-03)as required until a maximumgap
of .032 of an inch exists between the steering bellcrank rollers and the steering arm.
k. Adjust the rod end bearings of each steering rod to align the nose wheelwith the chalk
line and to bring the rudder pedals into neutral angle fore and aft. (Referto Figure 7-5.) The
neutral angle of the pedalsis 12degreesaft of the vertical position, with the airplane level. To
align the nose wheelstraight forward, stand in front of the nose gear and alignthe center rib of
the tire with the chalk line or lay a straightedgealong the side of the tire and parallel the straight
edge with the chalk line.

Reissued: 2/18/81
2G18
1. To check nose gear steering for its 15degree maximum right and left travel, mark on
each side of the nose wheel a 15 degree angle line from centerline and wheel pivot point. Turn
wheel to maximum travel in both directions to check for allowable travel. Should travel be
exceeded in one direction and not enough in the other direction, check for possible damage
to the gear fork or torque links.
m. Adjust the shimmy dampener (refer to Figure 7-1, item 23) by means of its washers to
give a good firm fit. If the collar is too tight, the result will be hard steering and, if too loose,
nose wheel shimmy will be present. It may be necessary, at times, to try several combinations
or thicknesses of washers to get the proper result.
n. Adjust rudder cable tension per Adjustment of Rudder Controls, Section V, and install
the access panels.
II. JIG METHOD. (Refer to Figure 7-6.) Fabricate a jig tool conforming to specifications
given in Figure 7-32.
a. Remove the access panels from both sides of the nose section and relieve the rudder
cable tension by loosening the turnbuckles.
c. Level the airplane laterally and longitudinally.
d. Attach the (fabricated) nose wheel jig to the back of the nose wheel at the axle.
e. Extend and attach a plumb bob from the grease fitting at the upper end of the drag
link assembly.
f. On airplanes with an adjustable nose wheel steering link, check and if required, adjust
the link to maintain a 2.31 inch dimension between the center of the attaching end fittings.
g. Clamp the rudder pedals to align in a lateral position. (Refer to Figure 7-4.)
h. To insure full travel of nose wheel, make sure no gaps exist at points where the steering
arm travel bushings contact with the steering bellcrank. If gaps exist, install shims (.032,
P/N 18874-00; .062, P/N 18874-02 or .125, P/N 18874-03) as required until a maximum gap
of .031 of an inch exists between the steering bellcrank rollers and the steering arm.
i. Adjust the rod end bearings of each steering control rod to align the plumb bob with
the centerline marked on the jig and to bring the rudder pedals into neutral angle fore and aft.
The neutral angle of the pedals is 12 degrees aft of the vertical position, with the airplane level.
(Refer to Figure 7-5.) Do not attempt to make the adjustment by means of one bearing, but
divide the adjustment between the bearings at each end of the steering rods. Check that rod
ends have sufficient gripping thread by ascertaining that a wire will not go through the check
hole in the rod, and then tighten locknut.

2G19
2G19
Revised: 4/26/83
A405
Figure 7-6. Aligningthe Nose Gear
j. To check nose gear steering for its 15degree maximum right and left travel, turn the
nose wheelwith jig attached in each direction to determine that the plumb bob aligns with the
15degree marks on the jig. Should travel be exceeded in one direction and not enough in the
other direction, check for possible damage to the gear fork or torque links.
k. Adjust the shimmy dampener (refer to Figure 7-1,Item 23)by means of its washers to
give a good firm fit. If the collar is too tight, the result willbe hard steering and, if too loose,
nose wheel shimmy will be present. It may be necessary,at times, to try severalcombinations
or thicknesses of washers to get the proper result.
1. Adjust the rudder cable tension per instructions in Section V and install the access
panels.

Reissued: 2/18/81
2G20
7-14. NOSE GEAR DOOR ASSEMBLY.
7-15. REMOVAL OF NOSE GEAR DOOR ASSEMBLY. (PA-23-250; PA-23-235;

and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) (Refer to Fig-
ure 7-7.)
a. Disconnect the retraction rod assembly from the door by removing self-
locking nut, washers, and bolt from each door half.
b. On PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 airplanes, the doors may be removed by re-
moving the attaching bolt from each hinge. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes,
the doors may be removed by removing the hinge pins from each door.
c. The operating mechanism may be removed by removing the bolts and wash-
ers from the bearing blocks on each side of the wheel well.
NOTE
The operating mechanism may be further disassem-

bled as necessary.
7-16. CLEANING,INSPECTIONAND REPAIR OF NOSE GEARDOORASSEMBLY.

(PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to
27-2504 incl.)
b. Inspect the door for cracks or bent skin, loose hinge brackets and worn or
corroded bearings.
c. Check the retracting mechanism for worn downlock spring and worn or
damaged surfaces.
d. Repair to the door assembly is limited to replacing hinge bearings or rivets
and mechanism parts, minor skin repairs and repainting.
7-17. INSTALLATION OF NOSE GEAR DOOR ASSEMBLY. (PA-23-250; PA-23-

235; and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) (Refer to
Figure 7-7.)
a. Position the complete operating mechanism inside the wheel well and secure
the bearing blocks with attaching bolts and washers.
b. On PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 airplanes, install the doors by positioning the
doors and securing with attaching bolt. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes, in-
stall the gear doors by positioning the doors and installing a new hinge pin. The
hinge pin ends should be bent to provide a safety.
c. Adjust the gear doors. (Refer to Paragraph 7-18.)

2G21
2Gr21 Reissued: 2/18/81
2148
1. BEARING BLOCKS
2. SPRING
3. ACTUATING TUBE
4. ROLLER
5. ROD END BEARING
6. RETRACTION RODS
7. ROD END BEARINGS
8. GEAR DOORS
Figure 7-7. MechanicalNose Gear Door Mechanism

PA-23-250;PA-23-235;and PA-23-250(six place)
7-18. ADJUSTMENT OFNOSE LANDING GEARDOORS. (PA-23-250; PA-23-235;

and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) (Refer to Fig-
ure 7-7.)
b. Disconnect the nose gear door retraction rods, if not previously discon-
nected.
c. Using the hydraulic hand pump, raise the landing gear to the full up posi-
tion.
d. Adjust the doors one at a time. Close the door to the stop and adjust the
retraction rod so the connecting bolt passes freely through the hole in the rod
and attachment bracket.
e. Disconnect the adjusted door and adjust the other door accordingto step d.
f. Extend the landing gear and connect both doors.
g. Retract the landing gear fully and ascertain the doors close properly and
do not bind.

Reissued: 2/18/81
2G22
7-19. REMOVAL OF NOSE GEAR DOOR ASSEMBLY. (PA-23-250 (six place), Serial
Nos. 27-2505 and up.) (Refer to Figure 7-8.)
a. Disconnect the rod assembly from the doors by removing the attaching
self-locking nut and bolt.
b. The doors may be removed by removing the hinge pins from each door.
c. The operating mechanism may be removed by the following procedure:
1. If a downlock spring is installed, disconnect it from the left side of the
wheel well by removing bolt, washer and bushing.
2. Disconnect the hydraulic actuating rod from the front door mechanism.
3. Remove the attaching bolts from the bearing blocks located on each side
of the wheel well. Remove the operating mechanism.
NOTE
The operating mechanism may be further disassem-

bled as necessary.
7-20. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF NOSE GEAR DOOR

ASSEMBLY. (PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up.)
b. Inspect the outboard or inboard doors for cracks or bent skin, loose hinge
brackets and worn or corroded bearings.
c. Repair to the door assemblies is limited to replacing hinge bearing, brackets
or rivets, minor skin repairs and painting.
d. Refer to Section VI for repair of the actuating cylinder.
7-21. INSTALLATION OF NOSE GEAR DOOR ASSEMBLY. (PA-23-250 (six

place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up.) (Refer to Figure 7-8.)
a. Position the complete operating mechanism inside the wheel welland secure
.the bearing blocks with attaching bolts.
b. Install the gear doors by positioning the doors and installing a new hinge
pin. The hinge pin ends should be bent to provide a safety.
c. If previously installed, attach the downlock spring to the left side of the
wheel well with bushing, washer and bolt.
d. Adjust the gear doors. (Refer to Paragraph 7-22.)

Reissued: 2 18 81
2G23
2166
2JAM NUT
8. GEAR DOORS
9. CYLINDER ROD END BEARING
10. JAM NUT
CYLINDER ARM
13. CYLINDER END BEARING
14. FUSELAGE FRAME
15.BEARING, ADJUSTABLE (ON
PA-E23-250 AND PA-23-250
(SIX PLACE) SERIAL NOS. 27-3687
AND UP ONLY)
16. HYDRAULIC ACTUATOR
Figure 7-8. Hydraulic Nose Gear Door Mechanism

PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up
7-22. ADJUSTMENT OF NOSE LANDINGGEAR DOORS. (PA-23-250 (six place),

Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up.) (Refer to Figure 7-8.)
b. Disconnect the nose gear door retraction rods, if not previously discon-
nected .
c. Using the hydraulic hand pump, raise the landing gear to the fully retracted
position.
d. Ascertainthat the door actuator rodisfully extended andadjust the rod end
bearing to give 10.75 inches from center of the rod end bearings to center of the
cylinder end bearings.
e. Connect the actuating rod to the torque tube arm.
f. On PA-23-250 (six place), airplanes, Serial Nos. 27-3687 and up, with adjustable
actuating cylinder attachment bracket, use the followingprocedure:
1. Loosen the attaching bolts holding the bracket in place on the fuselage
frame.
2. With the actuator rod fully extended, move the bracket until a horizontal
dimension of 1.03 inches is obtained between the center of the torque tube and the

Reissued: 2 18 81
2G24
actuating rod end bearing.

3. Tighten the attaching bolts securing the bracket to the fuselage frame.
g. Adjust doors one at a time. Close door to stop and with no load exerted on the cylinder,
adjust retraction rods so the connecting bolts pass freely through their holes.
h. Extend the landing gear, connect both doors.
i. Retract the landing gear fully and ascertain that there is .031 of an inch between doors.
j. Take up each retraction rod two additional turns to pre-load the doors.
7-23. MAIN GEAR ASSEMBLY.
7-24. DISASSEMBLY OF MAIN GEAR OLEO. The main gear oleo assembly may be re-
moved and disassembled from the gear oleo housing with the gear removed from or installed
on the airplane. (Refer to Figure 7-9.)
a. Place the airplane on jacks. (Refer to Jacking, Section 11.)
b. Place a drip pan under the main gear to catch spillage.
c. Remove air and fluid from the oleo strut. Depress the air valve core pin (27) until strut
chamber pressure has diminished, remove the air charge valve (2) and, with a small hose,
siphon as much hydraulic fluid from the strut as possible by compressing the strut to the top
of the housing.
d. Disconnect the brake hydraulic lines just above the bracket on the main gear fork
assembly (18).
e. Remove the torque link assembly (23 and 25) by removing the cotter pin, nut, washer,
and bolt (close tolerance) from the strut housing (30) and fork assembly (18).
f. Release and remove the snap ring (14) from the annular slot at the bottom of the strut
housing.
g. Pull the piston tube (15), with component parts, from the strut housing.
h. The piston tube components may be removed by reaching in the tube and pushing out
the upper bearing retaining pins (7). Slide the upper bearing (6), spacer, lower bearing (10)
with outer (9) and inner ( 11)"O" rings and wiper strip (12), washer (13) and snap ring (14) from
the tube (15).
i. To remove the orifice tube (20), remove the bolt (1) and washer (4) from the top of the
strut housing. Pull the tube from the housing.
j. The orifice plate (21) is removed from the bottom of the orifice tube by releasing the
snap ring (22) that holds the plate in position.
k. To remove the piston tube plug (17) with "O" ring (16) located in the lower end of the
tube, remove the bolt assembly at the top of the fork and insert a rod up through the hole in
the body of the fork, pushing the plug out through the top of the tube.

2H1 Reissued: 218/81
2H2
2165 2464
.2153
2465
1. BOLT
2. AIR CHARGE VALVE
3. PISTON TUBE
4. WASHER
5. SERVICING PLACARD
6. BEARING PISTON
7. RETAINING PIN
8. SPACER
"
9. "O RING
10. BEARING
II. "O" RING
12. WIPER STRIP
13. WASHER
14. SNAP RING
15. PISTON TUBE
"
16. "0 RING
17. PISTON PLUG
18. FORK ASSEMBLY
19. "0" RING
20. ORIFICE TUBE
21. ORIFICE PLATE
22. SNAP RING
24. BUSHING
25. TORQUE LINK, LOWER
26. CAP
27. CORE
23. BODY 3
29. GASKET
30. STRUT HOUSING
Figure 7-9. Main Gear Oleo Strut Assembly

Reissued: 2/18/81
2H3 2H4
7-25. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF MAIN GEAR OLEO.

a. Clean all parts with a suitable dry type cleaning solvent.
b. Inspect the landing gear oleo assembly component for the following:
1. Bearings and bushings for excess wear, corrosion, scratches and over-
haul damage.
2. Retaining pins for wear and damage.
3. Snap rings for cracks, burrs, etc.
4. Cylinder and orifice tube for corrosion, scratches, nicks and excess
wear.
5. Orifice plate for hole restriction.
6. Fork tube for corrosion, scratches, nicks, dents and misalignment.
7. Air valve general condition.
c. Repair of the oleo is limited to smoothing out minor scratches, nicks and
dents and replacement of parts. Service tolerance for wear of the various com-
ponents may be found in Table VII-III.
7-26. ASSEMBLYOF MAIN GEAR OLEO. (Refer to Figure 7-9.)

a. Ascertain that parts are clean and inspected.
b. To assemble the fork assembly, press the tube end (15) into the fork body
(18), aligning the bolt holes.
c. If a new tube is to be installed that has not been drilled, press the tube into
the fork housing until it bottoms. Using the bolt holes inthe fork body as a guide,
drill a pilot hole and ream to . 250 + .002 - .000 through each side of the tube wall.
Remove burrs from the inside of the tube and flush the tube with a suitable sol-
vent to remove all metal particles.
d. To install the piston tube plug (17), first lubricate the tube plug and "O"
ring (16) with hydraulic fluid (MIL-H-5606) and install the "O" ring on the plug.
Lubricate the inside wall of the tube, insert the plug into the top of the tube and
push it to the fork end. Align the bolt holes and install bolt assembly.
e. If desired, cement a cork in the hole in the bottom of the fork body to pre-
vent dirt from entering the fork tube.
f . To assemble the orifice tube (20), insert the orifice plate (21) into the bot-
tom of the tube. Secure the plate with the snap ring (22). Lubricate and install
"O" ring (19) on the upper end of the tube.
g. Insert the tube up through the bottom of the strut housing (30). With the
tube exposed through the top of the housing install the packing, washer (4) and
bolt (1). The bolt should only be installed finger tight at this time.
h. Thefork tube assembly maybe assembled byinstallingthetube components
on the tube. In the following order slide onto the tube, the snap ring (14), washer
(13), wiper (12), lower bearing (10) with outer and inner "O" rings (9 and 11),
spacer (8) and upper bearing (6). Align lock pin holes of the upper bearing and

orifice tube and install pins (7).

i. Lubricate the inner wall of the cylinder. Carefully insert the piston tube
assembly into the bottom of the housing, allowing the orifice tube to guide itself
into the piston tube, until the snap ring can be installed in the annular slot at the
end of the cylinder.
j . Atthe top of the housing, tighten the orifice tube retainingbolt (1) and safety.
k. Install the torque link assembly (23 and 25) using bolt (ct), washer, nut and
cotter pin.
NOTE
The bolt should be installed with one of the flat sides

of the hex head against the milled stop on the torque
links.
1. Connect the brake line.

m. Lubricate the gear assembly. (Refer to Lubrication Chart, Section II.)
n. Compress and extend the strut several times to ascertain that the strut
will operate freely. The weight of the gear wheel and fork should allow the strut
to extend.
o. Service the oleo strut with fluid and air. (Refer to Servicing Oleo Struts,
Section II.)
p. Bleed the brake system. (Refer to Paragraph 7-74.)
q. Align the landing gear. (Refer to Paragraph 7-31.)
r. Lower the airplane and remove jacks.
7-27. REMOVAL OF MAIN LANDING GEAR. (Refer to Figure 7-10.)

b. Place a drip pan under the landing gear to be removed to catch spillage.
c. Disconnect the brake line fitting at the main spar.
d. At the left gear only, disconnect the hydraulic line fittings from the anti-
retraction valve (3).
e. Remove the clamp around the landing gear strut housing, holding the down
lock indicator switch wire.
f. Disconnect the lower drag links (17) from the landing gear strut housing (2)
by removing cotter pin, nut, washer and bolt (ct).
g. Remove the cotter pin and nut from the landing gear attaching bolts.
h. Remove the landing gear attaching bolts (ct) (24) with their stop (20), by
reaching through an opening in the wing ribs.

2H6
2H6 Reissued: 2/ 18/81
NOTE
It may be necessary to remove the fabric dust cover

from the openings in the wing rib.
i. Remove the landing gear.

j . If the drag link assembly is to be removed, use the following procedure:
1. Disconnect the gear retraction rod (12) from the drag link assembly
(14 and 17) by removing cotter pin, nut, washers and bolt.
2. Lower the drag link and remove the downlock indicating switch (16).
3. Remove the attaching cotter pin, nut, washer and bolt from the upper
drag link assembly and remove the assembly.
7-28. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF MAIN LANDING GEAR.

b. Inspect the landing gear assembly components for the following unfavorable
conditions:
1. Bolts, bearings, bushings and ball joints for excessive wear, corrosion
and damage.
2. Gear housing, drag links, rods and attachment cracks, bends or mis-
alignment.
3. Downlock springs for wear, corrosion and not returning to complete
compression.
4. General condition of limit switches.
5. Wiring for fraying, poor connections or conditions that may lead to
failures.
c. Attach the upper and lower drag links and check that there is 0 to .007 of
an inch clearance between the latch hook and pin. Dress upper and lower link
stop surfaces to obtain minimum clearance. Also check that when the stop sur-
faces touch, linkage is 0 to .031 inch through center. (Refer to Figure 7-11.)
Should this distance exceed the required through center travel and bolt and bush-
ings are tight, replace one or all drag links.
d. Repair to the landing gear is limited to reconditioning of parts such as re-
placing bearings and bushings, smoothing out minor nicks and scratches, repaint-
ing of areas where painthas chipped or peeled and replacement of parts. Service
tolerances for wear of the various components may be found in Table VII-III.

2H17
2H7 Reissued: 2/18 81
1. AIRCHARGE VALVE 7. FORK ASSEMBLY 13. LATCH ASSEMBLY

2. GEAR STRUT HOUSING 8. TIRE 14. DRAG LINK, UPPER
3. ANTI-RETRACTION VALVE 9. BRAKE HOUSING 15. SPRINGS
4. TORQUE LINK, UPPER 10. GEAR ACTUATING CYLINDER 16. INDICATING SWITCH
5. BRAKE LINE 11. TIME DELAY VALVE 17. DRAG LINK, LOWER
6. TORQUE LINK, LOWER 12. RETRACTION ROD 18. SWITCH MOUNTING BRACKET
19. REINFORCEMENT STRIP
20. BOLT STOP
21. TORQUE RIB
22. BOLT, WASHER, ELASTIC STOP NUT
(SEE NOTE 2)
23. BOLT, WASHER, ELASTIC STOP NUT
SHIMS (SEE NOTE 2)
24. GEAR ATTACHMENT BOLT
SKETCH A (SEENOTE1)
A73
A429
NOTES
1. USE SHIMS AS REQUIRED
BETWEEN OLEO STRUT
HOUSING AND GEAR
ATTACHING BRACKET. DO NOT
EXCEED 0.062 INCHES.
2. TORQUETO 50-70 IN.-LBS.
SKETCH B
21 A
Figure 7-10. Main Landing Gear Installation (Left)

Reissued: 2/18/81
2H8
7-29. INSTALLATION OF MAIN LANDING GEAR. (Refer to Figure 7-10.)
NOTE
When assembling any units of the landing gear, lubricate bearings

and friction surfaces with proper lubricant as described in Section
II.
NOTE
On high time aircraft the main gear attaching brackets may become
worn or bolts become loose. Access may be obtained by removing
fabric dust covers from the openings in the wing rib to remove the
bracket or tighten the bolts. Torque bolts to 50-70 in. lbs.
a. Position the landing gear and install, from each outboard side, the stop plate (20), bolt (ct) (24), nut
and cotter pin. Torque the five outer bolts to 50-70 in. lbs.
NOTE
Install shim washers, AN960-816L, as required, between gear strut

and gear attaching bracket to prevent side movement of the landing
gear. Do not add washers to exceed 0.062 of an inch.
b. If the drag link was removed, reinstall by the following procedure:

I. Ascertain that linkage through center travel is within tolerance as described in paragraph 7-28.
2. Position the aft end of the drag link assembly and install from left to right, bolt (ct), washer, nut
and cotter pin.
3. Temporarily install the landing gear down limit switch (16) to the drag link assembly (14 and
17).
4. Connect the forward end of the drag link assembly to the strut housing (2) by installing from
right to left, bolt (ct), washer, nut and cotter pin.
NOTE
A small right angle wire support lug is installed under the head of the
bolt, with its outstanding leg down.
c. Adjust the main landing gear. (Refer to Paragraph 7-30.)

d. At the left gear only, connect the hydraulic lines to the anti-retraction valve (3) and fill the Powerpak
Resevoir. (Refer to Filling Powerpak Reservoir, Section II.)
e. Connect the brake line at the fitting on the main spar and fill the brake cylinder reservoir. (Refer to
Filling Brake Cylinder Reservoir, Section II.)
f. Check alignment of main landing gear. (Refer to Paragraph 7-31.)
g. Lubricate the landing gear assembly. (Refer to the Lubrication Chart, Section II.)

Reissued: 2/18 81
2H9
OTO .007 WITHGEAREXTENSION

ACTUATORCYLINDERIN FULLY
EXTENDED POSITION.IF MORE
THAN .007 IS OBTAINEDREPLA
UPPERLINK.
SEE SKETCH A
TO OBTAINPROPER
ADJUSTMENT
DRESSSTOPSURFACEON THE
UPPERLINK.
0 TO .031
MAX. TOLERANCE
OVER CENTER
Figure 7-11. Adjustment of Main Gear Drag Link and Latch Assembly
h. Install access covers, lower airplane and remove jacks.
7-30. ADJUSTMENTOF MAINLANDINGGEAR. (Refer to Figure 7-10.)

b. Remove the bolt connecting the actuator cylinder retraction rod (12) end bearing to
the downlock latch (13).
c. Determine that the piston rod (12) of the actuating cylinder (10) is in the fully
extended position by re-cyclingthe power pack manually.
NOTE
Ascertain that the actuating cylinder has one inch side play,
measured at the rod end bearing with the cylinder fully
extended. Adjust the actuating cylinder mounting bolt to
allow sufficient clearance to permit this side play.
d. Loosen the rod end bearing jam nut at the end of the piston rod. Adjust the end
bearing by turning it in the internally threaded end of the piston rod until the attaching bolt
passes freely through the gear downlock link assembly and the bearing. This adjustment

Reissued: 2/18/81
2H10
should be made with the latch springs (15)detached and manuallyholding the latch (13) in the
closed position. When assured that the bolt is not binding, tighten jam nut and reasembly
springs.
NOTE
If the actuator is over-extended, rather than obtaining the

free fit for the bolt as describedabove, excessivepressure may
bend or snap the drag links.
e. Ascertain there is a 0 to .007 of an inch clearance between the latch and hook.
NOTE
The stop surface on the upper link maybe dressedto obtain the
0 to .007 of an inch clearance. If .007 is exceeded replace the
upper link. The lower links are matched sets and should be
replaced as sets.
f. Raise and lower the gear by means of the hand pump and check to see if there is any
interference encountered by the downlock latch and the stop. If it operates smoothly and the
latch completely seats itself, the adjustment is correct.
g. Lower the airplane and remove jacks.
7-31. ALIGNMENT OF MAIN LANDING GEAR WHEEL.

a. Place a straightedgeno lessthan twelvefeet long across the front of both main landing
gear wheels. Butt the straightedgeagainst the tire at the hub level. Devisea support, or use a
box, to hold the straightedge in this position.
b. Set a square against the straightedgeand check to see if its outstanding leg bears on
the front and rear sides of the tire. (Refer to Figure 7-12.)If it touches both outboard sidesof
the tire, the landing gear is correctly aligned. The toe-in for these wheels is 0 degrees.
NOTE
A carpenter's square, because of its especially long legs, is
recommended for this check.
c. If the square contacts the rear side of the tire, leaving a gap between it and the front
side of the tire, the wheel is toed-in. If a gap appears at the rear, the wheel is toed-out.
NOTE
At the point where the upper and lower torque links connect,
the upper link is positioned forward of the lower link.

Reissued: 2/18/81
2H1I
A437
Figure 7-12. Aligning Main Gear
d. Rectify a toed-in condition by removing the cotter pin, castellated nut and bolt at
the common pivotal point of the scissor and bushing assembly torque links. On the left
landing gear remove a spacer between the two links. If this same condition exists on the
right landing gear, it will be necessaryto remove a spacer between the two links. Reassemble
the torque links.
e. Recheck the wheel alignment. If corrected, safety the castellated nut with
a cotter pin. If this condition still exists, add or remove washers in the same
manner mentioned in the preceding step.
f. Rectify a toed-out condition on the left landing gear by disconnecting the
torque links from each other and add a spacer between the links. It will be nec-
essary to add a spacer between the links on the right landing gear. Reconnect
the links and recheck the alignment.
g. If still further adjustment is required, repeat procedure mentioned in pre-
ceding step.
NOTE
When adding spacers between the torque links, limit

the number installed so that the safety hole is access-
ible to the cotter pin.

Reissued: 2 18 81
2H12
7-32. MAIN GEAR DOOR ASSEMBLY.
7-33. REMOVAL OF MAIN GEAR DOOR AND ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY.

27-2504 inclusive.)
a. Disconnect the retraction rods from the door hinges by removing the self-
locking nut, washer and bolt from each door half.
b. Remove the doors by removing the attaching bolts from the nacelle door
hinge brackets.
c. Remove the machine screws securing the bottom of the door springs to the
wheel well.
d. Remove the actuating mechanism by removing the bolts, bushings and
washers securing the upper end of the link assembly to the wheel well bulkhead.
NOTE
The actuating mechanism may be further disassembled

as necessary.
7-34. CLEANING, INSPECTIONAND REPAIROF MAINGEAR DOOR ASSEMBLY.

27-2504 inclusive.)
b. Inspect the outboard or inboard doors for cracks or bent skin, loose hinge
brackets and worn or corroded bearings.
c. Repair to the door assemblies is limited to replacing hinge bearing, brack-
ets or rivets, minor skin repairs and painting.
7-35. INSTALLATION OF MAIN GEAR DOOR AND ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY.

PA-23-250; PA-23-.235;and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to
27-2504 inclusive.) (Refer to Figure 7-13.)
a. Ascertain that the actuating mechanism is fully assembled.
b. Position the actuating mechanism inside the wheel well and secure with
washer, bushing and bolt.
c. Attach the door springs to the sides of the wheel well with machine screws.
d. Position the doors and install the attaching bolts.
e. Adjust the main gear doors for proper operation. (Refer to Paragraph
7-36.)

Reissued: 2/18/ 81
2H13
2151
1. RETRACTION ROD END BEARINGS

2. ACTUATING TUBE
3. ROLLER BUSHING
4. SPRING
5. RETRACTION RODS
6. GEAR DOORS
Figure 7-13. Mechanical Main Gear Door Mechanism

PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and PA-23-250 (six place),
7-36. ADJUSTMENT OF MAIN GEAR DOORS. (PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) (Refer to Figure
7-13.)
b. Disconnect the main gear door retraction rods, allowing the doors to hang
free.
c. Using the hand pump, retract the landing gear to the fully retracted position.
d. Adjust the doors one at a time. Close the door and adjust the aft retraction
rod to allow the aft end of door to fit snug against the nacelle. Adjust the forward
retraction rod to allow the attaching bolt to be freely installed.
CAUTION
Over-shorting of the forward retraction rod will draw

the door up into the wheel well, warping the door.

Reissued:2/18/81
2H14
e. Disconnect the adjusted door and adjust the other door in a like manner.
f. Using a hand pump, extend the gear and connect all retraction rods.
g. Operate the landing gear and ascertain the doors close evenly, but do not
bind. If the doors do not close evenly, readjust the retraction rod of the lower
door until they fit evenly.
h. After the doors have been adjusted as previously described, the following
checks should be made:
1. Do not permit the hinge edge of either door assembly to strike the na-
celle skin when the gear is extended and the doors are open. If they do, adjust
the main gear cover actuating tube assembly to provide no less than 0.062 of an
inch clearance between the edges of the doors and the skin. On new doors, it
may be necessary to trim the hinge edge to provide this clearance.
2. When the landing gear is extended, see if there is a minimum clearance
of 6.875 of an inch between the interior surface of the inboard door and the con-
fronting side of the piston portion of the fork and piston assembly.
3. It is necessary to have a minimum of from 0.187 of an inch clearance
between the landing gear and the adjacent components.
7-37. REMOVAL OF MAIN GEAR DOOR AND ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY. (PA-23-250

[six place]. Serial Nos. 27-2505and up.) (Refer to Figure 7-14.)
a. The main gear doors may be removed by the following procedure:
1. Disconnect the retraction rods from the doors byremoving self-locking
nut and bolt from the front doors and the self-locking nut from the aft door.
2. Remove the hinge pins from each door removing each door.
b. The main gear door operating mechanism may be removed by the following
procedure:
1. Disconnect the hydraulic actuator rod from the mechanism by removing
self-locking nut, washers, and bolt.
2. Remove the connector rod by removing cotter pin, washers, pin, and
spring, if installed.
3. Remove the four retraction rods and disconnect the spring where in-
stalled by removing self-locking nuts, washers, bolts and the spring bushing.
4. Remove the rivets securing the forward tube assemblies to the aft tube
assemblies.
5. Remove the aft tube assemblies by drawing them aft through the main
spar.
6. Remove the forward tube assemblies by removing the bearing blocks
from the sides of the wheel well.

Reissued: 2/ 18/81
2H15
2162
1. RETRACTION ROD END BEARING 6. HYDRAULIC ACTUATOR 10. BEARING BLOCKS

2. FORWARD TUBE ASSEMBLY 7. ROD END BEARING 11. SPRING
3. AFT TUBE ASSEMBLY 8. RETRACTION RODS 12. SPRING BUSHING
4. CONNECTOR ROD END BEARING 9. CONNECTOR ROD 13. GEAR DOORS
Figure 7-14. Hydraulic Main Gear Door Mechanism

PA-23-250(six place) SerialNos. 27-2505 and up

Reissued: 2/18/81
2H16
7-38. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF MAIN GEAR DOOR ASSEMBLY.

(PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up.)
b. Inspect the outboard or inboard doors for cracks or bent skin, loose hinge brackets and
worn or corroded bearings.
c. Repair to the door assemblies is limited to replacing hinge bearing, brackets or rivets,
minor skin repairs and painting.
d. Refer to Section VI for Repair of the Actuating Cylinder.
7-39. INSTALLATION OF MAIN GEAR DOOR AND ACTUATOR ASSEMBLY.

(PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up.) (Refer to Figure 7-14.)
a. The main gear door operating mechanism may be installed by the following procedure:
1. Install the aft tube assemblies by inserting them forward through the main spar.
2. Install the forward tube assemblies with bearing blocks. Insert the forward tubes
into the aft tubes and secure the bearing blocks to the wheel well wall.
3. Align the holes in the tube assemblies and secure together with CR2249-4-2 rivets.
4. Adjust the connector rod to measure 11.312 inches between center line of each
attachment hole.
5. Install the adjusted rod to the tube assemblies with pin, washers and cotter pin.
Install the spring if previously removed from this position.
6. Install the four retraction rods and spring, where installed, with bolts, washers,
self-locking nut and spring bushing.
b. The gear doors may be installed by positioning the doors and installing a new hinge
pin. Bend the ends of the hinge pin over to provide a safety.
c. Adjust the main gear doors. (Refer to Paragraph 7-40.)
7-40. ADJUSTMENT OF MAIN LANDING GEAR DOORS. (PA-23-250 [six place],

Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up.) (Refer to Figure 7-14.)
a. Disconnect the main gear door retraction rods and static anti-closing spring, allow
the doors to hang clear.
c. Retract the landing gear fully.
d. Adjust the retraction rod for the rear door so the rod attaches to the door freely with
the door tight against its stops.

Reissued: 2/18/81
2H17
2H18
e. With the door actuator rod fully extended from the gear door cylinder, adjust the
rod end to give 10.88 inches from center of rod end bearing to center of cylinder end
bearing. If the door cylinder is removed to obtain this measurement,reinstall at this time.
f. Ascertain that the connector rod is 11.312 inches in length between the center of
each attaching point.
g. Adjust doors one at a time. Close door to stop and with load exerted on the
cylinder, adjust retraction rods so the connectingbolts pass freely through their holes.
h. Disconnect the adjusted door and adjust the other door in a like manner.
i Usingthe hand pump, extend the landing gear, connect both doors.
j. Retract the landing gear fully and ascertain that there is .031 inch between doors.
k. Take up all four retraction rods two turns.
L Using the hand pump, operate the landing gear and ascertain the doors close tight,
but do not bind.
7-41. ADJUSTMENTOF LANDINGGEAR LIMIT SWITCHES.
742. ADJUSTMENTOF NOSE GEAR UP LIMIT SWITCH. (Refer to Figure 7-17.) The
nose gear up limit switch, located just above the upper drag link assembly and aft of the
timer check valve on PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos. 27-2505 and up, may be adjusted by
the followingprocedure:
a. Placethe airplane on jacks. (Refer to Jacking, Section II.)
b. Remove the accesspanel from the left side of the nose section by releasing fasteners.
(Refer to AccessPlates and Panels, Section II.)
c. Unsnap the canvascover over the nose wheel well.
d. Usingthe hand pump, retract the landing gear to the fully retracted position.
e. On models with the early switches, adjust the switch by loosening the locknut and
the switch mounting nut. Then rotate the nuts in whicheverdirection provides the necessary
clearance. The switch actuator should be depressed just far enough to actuate and closethe
circuit. Tighten the mounting and locknut. On the later switches, rest the spacing tool on
switch actuator button between the upper drag link and the switch actuator and adjust by
rotating nut so that the tool fits snugly.
f. Extend the landing gear, resnap the canvascover, connect the gear doors, replace the
accesspanel and remove the jacks.

2H19 Reissued:2 18 1
2H19
A4o
03
NOTE
SEE APPLICABLE ELECTRICALSCHE-
MATIC FOR WIRE ATTACHMENT. FUSELAGE FRAME
UP LIMIT SWITCH
3/16 SPACING TOOL

A402
SWITCH MOUNTING
LATER SWITCH
UPPERDRAGLINK
SWITCH 281 188
BOW--
125 SPACER
FUSELAGE FRAME
3/16 SPACING TOOL

EARLY SWITCH
Figure 7-17. Adjustment of Nose Gear Up Limit Switch
743. ADJUSTMENTOF MAIN GEAR UP LIMIT SWITCH. (Refer to Figure 7-18.) The
main gear up limit switch, located just above the aft drag assembly on PA-23-250;
PA-23-235; and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 inclusive and on the
forward side of the main spar adjacent to the gear door mechanism on the PA-23-250(six
place), SerialNos. 27-2505 and up, may be adjusted by the followingprocedure:
b. Disconnect the door retraction rods and allow the doors to hang free.
c. Using the hand pump, retract the landing gear to the fully retracted position.
d. On the models with the early switches, adjust the switch by loosening the locknut and
the switch mounting nut. Then rotate the nuts in whichever direction provides the necessary
clearance when a .125 inch spacer is placed between the upper drag link and the switch
actuator. On models with the later switches, rest tool on switch actuator button between the
upper drag link and the switch actuator. Adjust in same manner as above. For configuration of
tool, refer to Figure 7-17.

Reissued: 2 18 81
2H20
GEARDOORMECHANISM
UP LIMITSWITCH
LATERSWITCH
.125 SPACER
SWITCHMOUNTINGBRACKET
A404
FRAMEASSEMBLY
EARLYSWITCH
Figure 7-18. Adjustment of Main Gear Up Limit Switch
e. Adjust the switch so that the actuator is completely depressed with the .125 inch spacer or 3/16 inch
spacing tool (depending on type of switch) inserted. Tighten the mounting nut until it bears against the bracket
and tighten the locknut to secure the switch.
f. Extend the gear, connect the door retraction rods and remove the jacks.
7-44. ADJUSTMENT OF LANDING GEAR DOWN LIMIT SWITCHES. (Refer to Figure 7-19.) The
adjustment of the landing gear down limit switches is common to all three landing gears and may be
accomplished by the following procedure:
a. Ascertain that the downlocks are properly adjusted. (Refer to Paragraphs 7-12 and 7-30.)
b. Rest tool on switch actuator button between the latch and the switch actuator. Adjust the switch by
loosening the locknut and the switch mounting nut. Then rotate the nuts in whichever direction provides the
necessary clearance for snug fitting of tool. For configuration of tool, refer to Figure 7-17.

Reissued: 2 18/81
2H21
c. Adjust the switch so that the ac- A764
tuator is completely depressed with the 3/16

inch spacing tool inserted. Tighten the
mounting nut until it bears against the 3/16
bracket and tighten the locknut to secure SPACING
the switch. TOOL
7-45. LANDING GEAR WARNING

SYSTEM.
7-46. REMOVALOF GEAR WARNING 1. ACTUATOR

2. LATCH
SWITCHES.
a. Remove the access plate on the
left side of the control pedestal. Figure 7-19. Adjustment of Landing
b. Disconnect the cannon plug inside Gear Down Limit Switches
the access opening.
c. Remove the knobs from the throttle mixture and propeller control levers.
d. Remove the flap and landing gear selector knobs, by removing the Allen
screw from the flap knob and the nut and bolt from the landing gear knob.
e. Disconnect the carburetor heat or alternate air knobs on the pedestal con-
trol placard. Extend the control knob approximately one inch. Unscrew the out-
side knob and remove the spring. Unscrew the inside knob and the outside nut
that secures the cable to the placard. (The removed cables should be marked
for identification.)
f. Remove the attaching screws from around the upper pedestal control cover
and remove the cover with placard attached.
g. Disconnect the wiring from the micro switches and mark them for identifi-
cation.
h. Remove the warning switches and striker plate by removing the two round
headed machine screws, nuts and washers securing them in place.
7-47. INSTALLATION OF GEAR WARNINGSWITCHES.

a. Position the warning switches and striker plate in the bracket and secure
with round headed machine screws, washers and self-locking nuts.
b. Connect the wiring to the warning switches. (Refer to Wiring Schematic,
Section XI.)
c. Install the upper pedestal cover with placard attached.

Reissued: 2/18/81
2H22
d. Connect the carburetor heat or alternate air knobs. Screwon the nut that secures the
cable to the placard. Screw on the inside nut. Install the spring and screw on the outside nut.
e. Install the flap and landing gear selector knobs to their respective handles.
f. Connect the cannon plug inside the left access opening.
g. Install the access plate to the left side of the pedestal.
h. Install the knobs to the control levers.
7-48. ADJUSTING GEAR WARNING SWITCHES. (Refer to Figure 7-20.) The follow-
ing is a procedure for adjusting the gear up warning light and warning horn micro-switches
which are located in the control pedestal at the base of the throttle levers. On serial nos.
27-4426,27-4574thru 27-7405476,the two outer switches actuate the warning horn and the
center switch actuates the warning light. On serial nos. 27-7554001and up, all switchesactuate
the warning horn and the warning light.
The ground adjustment procedure, as outlined in this paragraph, should allowthe land-
ing gear warning light to flash and the warning horn to operate when the power is reduced be-
low approximately 12inches of manifold pressurewith the aircraft in normal descent and the
landing gear retracted.
a. Start and run up the engine with the propeller set for high RPM.
b. For adjustment of the warning horn and warning light activation, advance the throttles
and then retard them until approximately 5 inchesof manifold pressure is indicated abovethe
desired in-flight pressure previously stated. Mark the throttles in some manner as a reference
for adjusting the gear up warning light and horn switches.
c. Shut the engines down.
d. Retard the throttles to the location, as marked above, which gavethe proper manifold
pressure indication for the operation of the warning horn and light. Adjust the center switch
up or down through the control travel slots until a clicking sound is heard when the switch
activates. To check,retard the throttle controls until it is ascertained that the switchesactuate
at the proper location.
e. Retard the throttles again to the same mark and adjust and checkthe outer switchesin
a like manner.
f. To check the horn and light operation, jack the airplane and retract the landing gear.
For airplanes with serial nos. 27-4426,27-4574thru 27-7405476,with the master switch on,
retard one throttle first and then the other until the gear up indicator light comes on. Check
the location of the throttle to the adjusting mark. Retard both throttles together and check the
warning horn adjustment. The warning horn should not operate when only one throttle is re-
tarded. For airplanes with serial nos. 27-7554001and up, with the master switch on, retarding
either throttle or both to the adjusting mark should actuate both the indicator light and horn.

Reissued: 2/18/81
2H23
6
A40
h. With the warning horn operating, 1. THROTTLE HANDLE
lower the gear to insure that the horn 2.
3.
MICRO SWITCH
LOCK NUT
and light cease to operate when the gear 4. ADJUSTING SCREW
is down and locked.

i. Remove the aircraft from the
jacks.
j. Flight test the aircraft to insure
operation of the warning system when
the gear is up and power is reduced to
the desired manifold pressure. Also,
reduce power on one engine and insure
the light operation.
k. If the light and horn fail to oper-
ate at the desired settings, mark the 4
throttles at the proper manifold pres-
sure and repeat the preceding adjust- Figure 7-20. Landing Gear
Warning Switches
7-49. WHEELS.
7-50. REMOVALAND DISASSEMBLYOF NOSE WHEEL. (RefertoFigure7-21.)

b. To remove the nose wheel, remove the axle tie rod nut, tie rod and axle
plugs. Insert a 1-7/16 inch diameter tube into the fork and tap out the axle from
the wheel assembly.
c. Flex the fork enough to remove the wheel spacers and to allow the wheel to
clear the fork assembly.
d. The wheel halves (1 and 2) may be separated by first deflating the tire.
With the tire sufficiently deflated, remove the wheel through bolts (3). Pull the
wheel halves from the tire by removing the wheel half (2) opposite the valve stem
first and then the other half.
e. The wheel bearing assemblies may be removed from each wheel half by
first removing the screws that secure the grease seal, and then the retainers (8),
grease seals (9) and bearing cones (7). The bearing cups (6) should be removed
only for replacement and may be removed by tapping out evenly from the inside.

2H24 2H24 Reissued: 2 18/81
2136
4 HALF
1. WHEEL
2. WHEEL HALF
3. BOLT
4. WASHER
8. GREASE SEAL RETAINER

GREASE SEAL
10. SCREW
Figure 7-21. Nose Wheel Assembly
7-51. INSPECTION OF NOSE WHEEL ASSEMBLY.

a. Visually check all parts for cracks, distortion, defects and excess wear.
b. Check tie bolts for looseness or failure.
c. Check internal diameter of felt grease seals. Replace the felt grease seal if surface is
hard or gritty.
d. Check tire for cuts, internal bruises and deterioration.
e. Check bearing cones and cups for wear and pitting and relubricate.
f. Replace any wheel casting having visible cracks.
7-52. ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION OF NOSE WHEEL. (Refer to Figure 7-21.)

a. Ascertain that the bearing cup (6) in each wheel half (1 and 2) is properly installed.
Install the tire and join the two wheel halves. Install the through bolts with the nuts to the wheel
stem side: torque to the specification given on the wheel and inflate the tire. (Refer to para-
graph 7-76 for balancing.) Lubricate the bearing cones (7) and install the cones, grease seals
(9) and seal retainer (8). Secure with screws (10).
b. Flex the fork enough to allow for the installation of the wheel and spacer tubes.
Insert the axle tube, fork caps and tie bolt. Adjust the tie bolt nut to allow the wheel to turn
free, yet not fit loose on the axle.

Reissued: 2/18/81
2I1
Figure 7-22. Main Wheel Assembly
7-53. REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY OF MAIN WHEEL. (Refer to Figure 7-22.)

b. To remove the main wheels, remove the four bolts that join brake cylinder and lining
back plate assemblies.
c. Remove the brake assembly.
d. Remove the lock ring (13) that secures the dust cover (12) and the lock ring (10) se-
curing the hub cap (11). Remove the cotter pin and axle nut. Slide the wheel off the axle.
e. The wheel may be disassembled by deflating the tire and removing the lock ring (10)
securing the grease seal (9) and seal washers (8) from the inner wheel half (2). Remove the
bearing cones (4) and loosen and remove the bolts securing the wheel halves. The bearing cups
(3) should be removed only for replacement and may be removed by tapping evenly from the
inside.

212 Reissued: 2/18/81
7-54. INSPECTIONOF MAIN WHEELASSEMBLY.(Refer to Figure 7-22.) It is advisable

to clean the assembly thoroughly before inspection. Degrease all parts and dry thoroughly.
A soft bristle brush may be used to remove hardened grease,dust or dirt.
WARNING
Quick drying cleaning solvents are toxic and volatile. Use in

well ventilated areas only. Avoid contact with skin or
clothing and do not inhale vapors.
a. Visually inspect the bearing cones for nicks, scratches, water staining, spalling, heat
discoloration, roller wear, cage damage, cracks or distortion. Replace cones if defective or
worn.
b. Inspect wheel bearing grease for contamination and solidification at each periodic
maintenance inspection. Repack wheel bearings in accordance with lubrication charts in
Section II of this manual.
c. Inspect wheel halves for cracks, corrosion, and other damage. Cracked or badly
corroded castings should be replaced. Small nicks, scratches, or pits can be blended out
using fine (400 grit) sandpaper.
d. Inspect snap rings and greaseseals for distortion or wear. Replace any item damaged
or deformed. Saturate the greaseseal felts with SAE 10 oil (do not soak).
e. Inspect bearing cups for looseness, scratches, pitting, corrosion, or evidence of
overheating. If evidence of any defect exists, replace the bearing cup. Refer to paragraph
7-55 for replacement procedures. Coat cups with clean bearing grease.
f. Inspect the brake disc assembly for cracks, excessive wear or scoring, rust and
corrosion. Remove rust and blend out small nicks, using fine (400 grit) sandpaper. Refer to
Table VII-I for wear limits.
g. Inspect wheel bolts for cracks, corrosion or any other damage. Replace cracked
bolts.
h. Inspect self-lockingnut for the self-locking feature. Replace any nuts with damaged
or destroyed self-lockingfeature.
TABLE VII-l. WHEEL AND BRAKE WEAR LIMITS
WHEEL BRAKE LINING MIN.

ASSY.NO. ASSY.NO. DISC MIN. PRESS.PLATE BACKPLATE
3080 B 37-200-2 .657 .097 (1)/.103 (2) .097 () /.103 (2)

3080D 37-200A .657 .097(1) /.103(2) .097(1) /.103(2)
40-131 30-96 .525 .100 .100
Footnotes: 1. Refers to Riveted Lining only.

2. Refers to Bonded Linings including back plate.

Reissued: 2 18/81
213
A435 1. FLUID RESERVOIR

2. MASTER CYLINDER, RIGHT
3. MASTER CYLINDER, LEFT
4. VALVE, PARKING BRAKE
5. HANDLE, PARKING BRAKE
6. HOSE, FLEXIBLE
7. BRAKE ASSEMBLY
Figure 7-23. Brake Installation
7-55. REPAIR OF MAIN WHEEL ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 7-22.) Repairs to the
main wheel assembly are limited to blending out small nicks, scratches, gaugesand areas of
slight corrosion, plus the replacement of parts which are cracked or badly worn or corroded.
NOTE
Corrosion originates at points where the protective wheel

coating is ruptured. All traces of corrosion and residue must
be removed before wheel halves are treated and repainted.
(Corrosion residue acceleratesthe corrosion process.)

214
214 Reissued:2/18/81
a. BearingCup Replacement:
1. Heat wheel half in boiling water for one hour, or in an oven not exceeding
250°F (121° C) for 30 minutes.
2. Remove wheel half from source of heat. Bearing cup should be loose enough to
fall out of the bearing bore when wheel half is inverted. If the cup does not drop out, tap
evenly from bore with a fiber drift pin.
3. To install new bearing cup, repeat step 1, and chill the bearing cup in dry ice.
4. Remove wheel half from source of heat and bearing cup from dry ice.
5. Dry chilled bearing cup and coat contacting surface with zinc chromate primer.
6. Install the chilled bearing cup in the heated wheel half. Tap gently and evenly
into place, using a fiber drift pin or suitable arbor press.
b. Repainting of of MainWheel Repaired Surfaces:
1. Thoroughly clean any repaired surfaces and areas of the wheel from which paint
has been removed.
2. Paint the exposed areas with one coat of primer and one coat of aluminum
lacquer.
CAUTION
Never paint the working surfaces of the bearing cups.
7-56. ASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION OF MAIN WHEEL. (Refer to Figure 7-22.)

a. Ascertain that the bearing cup (3) in each wheel half (1 and 2) is fully seated in the
wheel housing. Install the through bolts with the bolt heads opposite the brake disc side and
torque to 90 inch-pounds. Inflate the tire. (Refer to paragraph 7-76 for Tire Balancing.)
NOTE
Visually inspect thread protrusion on assembled and torqued

wheel assembly. Thread protrusion should be flush to .125
maximum. Bolts that are below flush or beyond maximum
should be replaced with P/N AN4-7Atie bolt (Refer to figure
7-22).
b. Lubricate the bearing cones (4). Install cone, grease seal (9) and seal washers(8) in
inner wheelhalf (2) and secure with lock ring (10).
c. Place the wheel on the axle and install axle nut. Tighten to allow the wheel to run
free yet not fit loose on the axle. Safety nut and install the hub cap (1 1) and dust cover (12)
securingwith lock rings (10 and 13).
d. Install the brake assembly by installing the brake cylinder on the torque plate,
positioning the spacer, lining back plate, and installing the six bolts securingassembly.If the
brake line was disconnected, reconnect and bleed brakes.

Reissued: 218 81
215
7-57. BRAKE SYSTEM.
7-58. WHEEL BRAKE ASSEMBLY.
7-59. BRAKE ADJUSTMENT AND LINING TOLERANCES. No adjustment of the

brake clearance is necessary as they are self-adjusting. Inspection of the lining is necessary, and
it may be inspected visually while installed on the airplane. The linings are of the riveted type
and the bonded type. The riveted type need not be replaced until the thickness of any one
segment becomes worn to limits given in Table VII-I. The bonded type need not be replaced
until the thickness of any one segment, including back plate, becomes worn to limits given in
Table VII-I. The linings should be replaced any time they become worn unevenly. Refer to
Table VII-I for wear limits for the particular assemblies in question.
7-60. REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY OF WHEEL BRAKE ASSEMBLY. (Refer to

Figure 7-24.)
a. Place a drip pan around the landing gear and disconnect the brake lines from the
cylinder housing.
b. Cut the safety wire and remove the self-locking cap bolts (18) that secure the backing
plates (1) to the brake cylinder housing (12). Remove the backing plate, shim spacerblock (5).
On 37-200A brake assemblies, remove the pressed fiber shim (2) between the backing plate and
the shim spacer block.
c. Slide the brake cylinder housing from the torque plate (21) by removing the self-
locking nuts (19) and washers (20) from the anchor bolts (13).
d. Remove the pressure plate (7) by removing the nut (17), washer (16), retraction spring
(15) and the sleeve (14) from the outside center of the brake cylinder housing (12).
e. The pistons may be removed (9) by injecting low air pressure in the cylinder fluid inlet
and forcing the pistons from the housing.
f. Check anchor bolt for wear.
g. Remove anchor bolt by the following procedure:
1. Position cylinder assembly on a holding fixture. (Refer to Figure 7-26.)
2. Use a suitable arbor press to remove the anchor bolt from the cylinder body.
h. Install anchor bolt by the following procedure:
1. Support anchor bolt in a holding fixture. (Refer to Figure 7-26, Step A.)
2. Align cylinder body over anchor bolt. (Refer to Figure 7-26, Step B.)
3. Use a suitable arbor press and apply pressure on the spot face directly over the
anchor bolt hole. (Refer to Figure 7-26, Step C.)
7-61. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF WHEEL BRAKE ASSEMBLY.

(Refer to Figures 7-24 and 7-25.)
a. Clean all metal parts, insulators, and O-rings with denatured alcohol, (gasoline and
dry cleaning fluids will damage O-rings). If O-rings are damaged or worn excessively, they
should be replaced.

Reissued: 2/18/81
216
`
b. Inspect the brake cylinder for cracks, nicks, corrosion, damaged threads, etc. Inspect
both inlet and outlet hydraulic ports for foreign contaminates. Examine cylinder walls for
scoring or excessive wear. Blend and polish light scratches in piston cavities with fine emery
cloth (600 grit). Castings that are cracked or have damaged threads should be replaced.
c. Ins pect anchor bolts for cracks, corrosion, permanent set, and excessive wear. Replace
bolts that are bent. cracked or severly corroded.
d. Inspect pistons for cracks, nicks, burrs or excessive wear. Remove burrs and blend
out nicks, using fine emery cloth (600 grit) and clean thoroughly.
e. Inspect pressure plate assembly for cracks, damaged rivets and excessive warpage.
Replace if found cracked or severly deformed. Replace cracked or deformed rivets.
f. Inspect brake cylinder bolts for cracks, thread damage, and self-locking feature. Re-
place bolts that are cracked, bent or have damaged threads.
g. Inspect brake linings for excessive edge chipping and surface deterioration. Refer to
Table VII-I for wear limits. Worn lining may be easily removed by prying loose with a
screwdriver or a thin, flat wedge. Install new linings in place. Insure that they snap into
position.
h. Inspect the torque plate for cracks, nicks, burrs, rust, excessive wear and brinelling
in the bolt holes. Replace if cracked or severly deformed.
i. If not previously accomplished inspect the brake disc for grooves, scratches, pits and
heat checks. A single groove or isolated grooves up to .031 of an inch deep would not
necessitate replacement, but a grooving of the entire surface would reduce lining life and
should be replaced. Heat checks are considered to be superficial surface cracks and are not
detrimental to the integrity or performance of the breaking system.
j. Replace brake disc if crack length and depth exceeds limits given. Disc P/N 164-32F=
length .800, depth .340. Disc P/N 164-57. = length .800, depth .280. If crack depth is not
measurable, replace brake disc if crack length exceeds .400 of an inch.
CAUTION
When changing parts or replacing brake lining, use only those

specified for that model brake assembly. Refer to Parts
Catalog for specific part numbers.
NOTE
If only the brake linings are being replaced, it is not necessary

to remove the complete brake assembly.
k. On brake assemblies which have riveted lining, remove worn lining by drilling and
punching out the old rivets. Install the new brake linings with rivets and rivet setting Kit
(P N 754 165) which is available through your nearest Piper Dealer or Distributor. (Rivet
setting tools should be used as rolling of the rivet is very important to get a tight fit between
the rivet and rivet hole.) Bonded linings may be removed and replaced as stated in Step g.

2I7
217 Reissued: 2/18/81
HER 2116
1. BACKPLATE 16. RETRACTWAS
2. SHIM 17. RETRACTSPRI NG NUT
3. BRAKE LINING 15. BOLT
4. RIVET 19. NUT
5. SHIM 20. WASHER
6. PRESSURE PLATE LINING 21. TORQUE PLATE CUP
7. PRESSURE PLATE 22. TORQUE PLATE RING
8. PISTON INSULATOR
9. CYLINDER PISTON
10. RETRACT CYLINDER
11. "O" RING
12. BRAKE CYLINDER
13. ANCHOR BOLT
14. RETRACT SPACER
15. RETRACT SPRING
3
NOTE: Refer to parts catalog for Information on 37-200A/30-72
heavy duty conversion kit.
Figure 7-24. Wheel Brake Assembly

PA-23-250 (six place) Serial Nos. 27-3738 to 27-7554137 incl.
27-7554139 and 27-7554141 to 27-7554149 incl.
A421
1. CYLINDER
2. PISTON
3. FRICTION SPRING
4. INSULATOR
5. PLATE ASSEMBLY, PRESSURE
6. LINING
7. PLATE ASSEMBLY, BACK
8. SHIM
9. BOLT
10. WASHER
11. SEAT, BLEEDER
12. SCREW, BLEEDER
13. CAP, BLEEDER
14. BOLT, ANCHOR
15. NUT
16-
16. FITTING, INLET

17. O-RING
18. O-RING
19. PLATE ASSEMBLY, TORQUE
NOTE: Refer to parts catalog for Information on

3046 kit.
heavy duty conversion
Figure 7-25. Wheel Brake Assembly

PA-23-250 (six place) Serial Nos. 27-7554138. 27-7554140, 27-7554150 and up

2I8 Reissued: 2/18,81
1. Thoroughly clean repaired surfaces and areas of the brake assembly from which
paint has been removed. Paint exposed areas with one coat of primer and one coat of
aluminum lacquer.
CAUTION
Do not paint pistons or the piston bores in the brake cylinder

assembly.
NOTE
Replacement linings should be conditioned as follows:
For Cleveland Brake No. 30-8, perform a minimum of six light

pedal effort braking applications from 25 to 40 MPH, allowing
the brake discs to partially cool between stops.
For Cleveland Brake Nos. 30-72 and 30-96, perform three

consecutive hard braking applications from 45 to 50 MPH
without allowing the brake discs to cool substantially between
stops.
THIS SPACE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

219 Reissued: 2/18/81
PRESS
CYLINDER BODY
ANCHORBOLT
HOLDING FIXTURE
STEPA
A123
CYLINDER BODY
ANCHORBOLT
HOLDING
HOLDING FIXTURE
FIXTURE
STEP B STEP C
PRESS
CYLINDER BODY
HOLDING FIXTURE-
STEPD
Figure 7-26. Removal and Installation of Anchor Bolts
2110
7-62. ASSEMBLYAND INSTALLATIONOF WHEEL BRAKE ASSEMBLY.(Refer to

Figure 7-24.)
a. Lubricate piston "O" rings (11) with fluid MIL-H-5606and install on pistons (9).
Slide the pistons in cylinder housing (12) until flush with surface of the housing. On
37-200A brake assembly,ascertain that the insulators(8) are cemented to the pistons.
b. Position the pressure plate (7) to the cylinder housing and install the retract cylinder
(14), retraction spring (15), washer (16) and self-lockingnut (17) securingit in place. Turn
the nut only to the point of contact with the sleeve. Do not apply torque in excess of that
required to overcome the self-lockingfriction of the nut.
NOTE
The retract cylinder will move proportional to the pressure

plate assembly and should be reset flush to the cylinder face
when the lining is replaced.
c. Install the brake cylinder housing to the torque plate (21).
d. Position the shim spacer block (5) and backing plate (1) to the brake cylinder. On
37-200A brake assemblies, position a pressed fiber (2) shim between the backing plate and
the shim spacer block. Install the self-lockingcap bolts (18) and safety with MS20995-C41
safety wire.
e. Connect the brake lines to the cylinder housing.
f. Bleed the brakes. (Refer to paragraph 7-74.)
7-63. BRAKEMASTERCYLINDER.
7-64. REMOVAL OF BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER. The following removal procedure

applies to all master brake cylinders, but is only described for removal of one on the left
side.
a. Remove the small access plate from the bottom left of the fuselageforward section.
b. Reach up through the access opening and remove the cotter pin, washer and pin
securingthe bottom of the master cylinder to the fuselageframe.
c. Pull the carpet back from around the rudder pedals.
d. Remove the tape from around the bottom of the brake cylinder boot.
e. Raise the bottom of the boot and disconnect the hydraulic lines from the top and
bottom.
NOTE
It is recommended that a lint-free rag be placed around the

master cylinder being removed to absorb hydraulic fluid
spillage.

2I11 Reissued: 2/18/81
f. Place a cap or some similar item over the end of the hydraulic lines re-
moved to prevent dust or dirt from entering the system.
g. Remove the cotter pin, washer and pin attaching the top of the master cyl-
inder to the brake pedal.
h. Remove the master cylinder.
7-65. DISASSEMBLYOF BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER. (Refer to Figure 7-27.)

a. Remove the snap ring (5) from the top of the cylinder (17).
b. Pull the clevis end (1) of the assembly removing all internal parts.
c. The piston and plunger may be further disassembled by unscrewing the
clevis from the top of the piston and plunger assembly (10 thru 15).
d. As necessary, the dyna seal (12) located between the pistonand plunger may
be removed by driving the steel pin (11) from the plunger rod (10).
CAUTION
It is recommended that the plunger and piston assembly

be placed on a wooden block to prevent damage to the
assembly when removing the pin.
NOTE
If the piston and plunger assembly has an "O" ring be-

tween the piston (13) and plunger rod (10), and a roll
pin attaching the plunger and Diston pin together, it is
recommended that the part be replaced with plunger
assembly, P/N 3115-02, with dyna seal (12) and solid
pin.
7-66. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER.

b. Inspect the interior walls of the cylinder for scratches, burrs, corrosion,
etc.
c. Inspect the general condition of the fitting threads of the cylinder.
d. Check the piston and valve for scratches, burrs, corrosion, etc.
e. Repairs to the cylinder are limited to polishing out small scratches, burrs,
etc. and replacing valve, washer, seal and "0" rings.

7-67. ASSEMBLYOF BRAKEMASTER CYLINDER. (Refer to Figure 7-27.)

a. If the piston rod (10) was removed from the plunger and piston assembly
(10 thru 15), reassemble by the following procedure:
1. Install new "O" ring (14) to the piston and slide it on to the piston rod.
2. Install a new dyna seal to the piston rod (12).
3. Insert the piston assembly (12 thru 15) into the plunger (10) and secure
by installing a solid pin (11), P/N 86092-27. Peen over both ends of the new pin
to provide a tight seal between the pin and the plunger.
b. Install the bushing (9) to the plunger with the slots down.
c. Install new "O" rings (6 and 8) to the brake cylinder cap (7) and slide it onto
the plunger.
d. Install the spring(16), with its ends closed and ground square, to the piston
rod (15).
e. Insert the assembled parts into the cylinder housing(17) and install a snap
ring (5) on top of the cylinder cap securing the parts inside the cylinder.
f. Install the spring, with its ends closed (4), to the exposed plunger rod.
g. Install the clevis (1) with jam nuts (2) and washer (3). Adjust the clevis
until the extended cylinder length is 8.312 inches + .250 as measured from center
of a cylinder housing attaching hole to center of clevis attaching hole.
7-68. INSTALLATION OF BRAKEMASTER CYLINDER.

a. Attach the clevis end of the cylinder to the brake pedal using a pin, washer
and cotter pin.
b. If the brake cylinder rubber trim boot was removed, reinstall at this time.
c. Connect the hydraulic lines to the top and bottom of the brake cylinder.
d. Tape the rubber boot to the floor and replace the carpet around the rudder
pedals.
e. Through the access plate in the bottom of the fuselage, secure the bottom
of the brake cylinder to the fuselage frame with a pin, washer and cotter pin.
f. Install the access plate to the bottom of the fuselage.
g. Bleed the brake system. (Refer to paragraph 7-75.)

2113
2113 Reissued: 2/18/81
2140
1. CLEVIS END 10. PLUNGER ROD

2. JAM NUT
3. WASHER
4. SPRING
5. SNAP RING
6. 'O" RING
7. CYLINDER CAP
8. "O" RING
9. BUSHING
Figure 7-27. Brake Master Cylinder Assembly
2114
7-69. PARKING BRAKE VALVE.
7-70. REMOVAL OF PARKING BRAKE VALVE. The parking brake valve is

located just forward of the cabin area in the lower left side of the nose.
a. Remove the access panel from the left side of the nose by releasing fasten-
ers. (Refer to Access Plates and Panels, Section II.)
b. Disconnect the control wire from the parking brake valve by loosening the
set screws.
c. Disconnect all hydraulic lines from the valve and place a protective cover-
ing over the line openings to prevent contamination.
NOTE
It is recommended that a lint free ragbe placed around

the master cylinder being removed to absorb hydraulic
fluid spillage.
d. Remove the thru bolts, washers and self-locking nuts securing the valve
to the fuselage frame and remove the valve.
7-71. DISASSEMBLYOF PARKING BRAKEVALVE. (Refer to Figure 7-28.)

a. Disconnect the piston assembly (6) from the lever by removing speed nut,
washers and pin.
b. Remove the end fitting (1) from the valve body (5).
c. Push the piston (6) out through the body. Ascertain that the end of the piston
that connects to the lever is free from damage or burrs that could cause the body
piston wall to become scratched or galled as the piston is pushed through.
d. Remove "O" ring packings from the end fitting and piston.
7-72. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF PARKING BRAKE VALVE.

a. Clean the valve components in a suitable dry type cleaning solvent.
b. Inspect the valve for the following:
1. Check that the friction surfaces of the valve body and stem are free from
nicks, dents and burrs.
2. Check that the stop on the piston is secure and undamaged.
3. Check that the threaded surfaces of the body and end fitting are not
stripped or cross-threaded.
c. Repair to the valve is limited to reconditioning of parts, such as smoothing
out minor nicks and scratches, and the replacement of "O" ring packings.

Reissued: 2/18/81
2I15
7-73. ASSEMBLY OF PARKING BRAKE A772 . END FITTING

2. "0" RING
VALVE 3. "O" RINGS
a. Install "0" ring packings (3) on 4. N. STOP

the piston (6) and install piston in the 6. PISTON
valve body (5). Lubricate "0" rings

with hydraulic fluid before installing
piston.
b. Install "0" ring packing(2) on end
fitting (1) and install end fitting in the
valve body. 4 43
c. Connect the piston assembly to
the lever with rivet pin, washers and
speed nut.
7-74. INSTALLATION OF PARKING Figure 7-28. Parking Brake

BRAKE VALVE. Valve Assembly
a. Position the parking brake valve
to the fuselage frame fitting and install the two thru bolts, washers and self-lock-
ing nuts.
b. Connect the hydraulic lines to the valve.
c. Connect the control cable to valve lever and determine that when valve
lever fits in the closed detent, parking brake handle is .062 to .125 of an inch of
being full in against stop.
d. Bleed the brake system. (Refer to paragraph 7-75.)
7-75. BLEEDING PROCEDURE. If the brake line has been disconnected for any
reason, it will be necessary to bleed the brake system as described below:
a. Place a suitable container at the brake reservoir to collect fluid overflow.
b. Remove the rubber bleeder fitting cap located on the bottom of the brake
unit housing on the landing gear.
c. Slide a hose over the bleeder fitting, loosen the fitting one turn and pres-
sure fill the brake system with MIL-H-5606 fluid. (Refer to Figure 7-29.)

Reissued:2/18/81
2116
A438
A420
Figure 7-29. Bleeding Brakes
NOTE
By watching the fluid pass through the plastic hose at

the top of the brake reservoir, it can be determined
whether any air has entered the system. If air bubbles
are evident, filling of the system shall be continued
until all of the air is out of the system and a steady
flow of fluid is obtained.
d. Tighten bleeder fitting, remove hose and check brakes for proper pedal
pressure.
e. Repeat this procedure in the other unit.
NOTE
There are two units on each gear and also two bleeder
fittings, therefore, it will be necessary to bleed both
units to be sure the system is completely free of air.

Reissued:2/18/81
2117
7-76. TIRE BALANCING. Proper balancing is critical for the life of the aircraft tires. If a
new tire is balanced upon installation it will usually remain balanced for the life of the tire with-
out having any shimmy or flat spots, and an inexpensive balancer can be made that will
balance almost any tire for light aircraft. (Refer to paragraph 7-77 for fabrication instruc-
tions.) Balance the tire as follows:
a. Mount the tire and tube on the wheel, but do not install the securing bolts. Install the
wheel bearings in the wheel; then, using the -7 bushings, -6 spacers, and -5 nuts, install the
wheel-tire assembly on the -8 pipe. Secure the -5 nuts finger-tight so that the wheel halves touch
each other. Be sure the bolt holes are aligned! Insert the -4 axle through the -8 pipe and place
the wheel in the center of the balancer. Make sure the axle is only on the chamfered edges of
the balancer and that it is at 90° to the sides of the balancer.
b. Release the tire. If it is out of balance it will rotate, coming to rest with the heaviest
point on the bottom. Tape a 1/2 ounce patch across top center of the tire. Rotate the tire
45° and release it again. If the tire returns to the same position, add a 1 ounce patch and
again rotate the tire and release it. Continue this procedure until the tire is balanced.
c. When balance is attained, put a chalk mark on the sidewall directly below the patch.
Use one mark for each half ounce of weight needed. Mark the valve stem location on the tire
and the opposite wheel half to assure reassembly in the same position. Remove the wheel
from the balance stand, break it down, and clean the tire with toluol. Apply a coat of patch
cement to both the patch and the inside center of the tire in line with the chalk marks. When
the cement has dried, install the patches making certain they are on the center line of the tire
and aligned with the chalk marks on the sidewall. Burnish the patches to remove trapped air,
etc.
d. When reassembling the wheel, powder the inside of the tire. Mount the tire on the
valve side of the wheel in the same position it was in when it was balanced. Install the other
wheel half, aligning the chalk marks. Install the bolts and tighten to required torque, (refer to
paragraph 7-56) then air the tire and recheck the balance. The wheel should not be more than
1/2 ounce out of balance.
7-77. CONSTRUCTION OF TIRE BALANCER. (Refer to Figure 7-33.)

a. The following instructions will help in building the balancer: chamfer top edges of -3
sides, leaving I / 16 inch flat on top inboard edge. Rivet -2 tee's to -3 sides using AN 470-AD5
rivets 2" spacing. Use AN 426-AD5 rivets 2" center to center to secure -2 tee's to - 1base. If tee
extrusion is unavailable, heavy angle extrusion could be used. -3 sides must be paralleled and
vertical.
b. The -4 axle must slide through the -8 pipe. The -5 nuts were made by reaming the
existing threads in the AN 365-624 nuts with an R drill, then tapping with a 1/ 8-27 pipe tap.
c. The -6 spacers were made from 1/2 inch aluminum tubing. The two lengths of spacers
are suitable for balancing most any aircraft wheel.
d. The -7 bushings may be benchmade from one inch phenolic or aluminum using a 1 1/2
inch hole saw to cut out the smaller bushing and a 134 hole saw to cut out the larger. By
inserting a 1/4 inch long threaded bolt through the pilot hole and securing with a washer and
nut, a drill press and file may be used to make the off-set on the bushing. The turned-down
part should just slide inside the bearing race. Ream the pilot hole to slide over the -8 pipe
threads.
e. The -8 pipe was made from a piece of 1/8 inch black ipe and threaded with a I ,'8-27 pipe
die. Thread 3 inches from each end of the pipe.

Revised: 4/26/83
2118
2138
10
Figure 7-30. Nose Gear Oleo Service Tolerances

Reissued: 2/18/81
2119
TABLE VII-II. LANDING GEAR OLEO SERVICE TOLERANCES

19273-02NOSE GEAR
Figure Min. Max.

7-29 Manufact. Manufact. Service Service
Index Part No. Item Dim. Toler. Limit Limit
8 751 363 Upper Bearing, Strut Housing 2.373 OD +.000 2.3708 2.3730
(31779-00) -. 002
I 751 930 Body, Strut Housing 2.375 ID +.003 2.3750 2.3795

(31768-00) -. 000
9 751 418 Lower Bearing, Strut Housing 1.9375 ID +.002 1.9375 1.9405
(31780-00) -. 000
10 752 770 Piston Rod, Strut 1.9370 OD +.000 1.9359 1.9370

(31790-00) -. 001
7 753 000 Tube, Orifice 1.623 OD +.000 1.6208 1.623

(31775-00) -. 002
10 752 770 Piston Rod, Strut 1.625 ID +.003 1.6250 1.6283

(31790-00) -. 000
3 751 417 Bushing, Drag Link .375 ID +.0015 .3750 .3773

(453 722)
6 751 369 Bushing, Torque Link .251 ID +.001 .251 .253

(31796-00) -. 000

Reissued:2/18/81
2120
TABLE VII-II. LANDING GEAR OLEO SERVICE TOLERANCES

19273-02NOSE GEAR (cont.)
Min. Max.
Figure 7-29 Manufact Manufact. Service Service
4 751 367 Bushing, Torque Link .313 ID+.002 .3130 .3160

(31785-00) -. 000
5 402 344 Bolt, Torque Link Attachment .3117 OD+.OOO0 .3112 .3117
(AN175-32) -. 0005
2 751 368 Bushing, Mounting .5000 ID+.0015 .5000 .5023

(31766-00) -. 0000
11 14843-11 Bushing, Upper Drag Link ID +.3755

-.3745
12 16198-00 Drag Link Assembly(Upper) ID +.3755

16198-03 (No Bushings) -.3745

Reissued:2 18/81
2121
2137
Figure 7-31. Main Gear Oleo Service Tolerances

Reissued: 2/18/81
2122
TABLE VII-III. LANDING GEAR OLEO SERVICE TOLERANCES

19272-02 MAIN GEAR
Min. Max.
Figure 7-30 Manufact. Manufact. Service Service
8 751 363 Upper Bearing, Strut Housing 2.373 OD +.000 2.3708 2.3730
(31779-00) -. 002
1 751 929 Body, Strut Housing 2.375 ID+.003 2.3750 2.3795

(31835-00) -. 000
9 751 418 Lower Bearing, Strut Housing 1.9375 ID +.002 1.9375 1.9405
(31780-00) -. 000
10 752 770 Piston Rod, Strut 1.9370 OD +.000 1.9359 1.9370

(31790-00) -. 001
7 753 000 Tube, Orifice 1.623 OD +.000 1.6208 1.6230

(31775-00) -. 002
10 752 770 Piston Rod, Strut 1.625 ID +.003 1.6250 1.6283

(31790-00) -. 000
3 751 416 Bushing, Drag Link .4375 ID+.0015 .4375 .4398

(453 723) -. 0000

(31796-00) -. 000

Reissued: 2/18/81
2123
TABLE VII-III. LANDING GEAR OLEO SERVICE TOLERANCES

19272-02 MAIN GEAR (cont.)
Min. Max.
Figure 7-30 Manufact. Manufact. Service Service

(31785-00) -.000
5 402 344 Bolt, Torque Link .3117 OD+.0000 .3112 .3117

(AN 175-32) -.0005
751 368 Bushing. Mounting .5000 ID +.0015 .5000 .5023

-.0000
11 14976-33 Bushing, Upper Drag Link ID +.438

-.436
12 16191-00 Link Assembly - Lower Drag ID +.438

16191-01 -.436

Reissued: 2 18 81
2124
TABLE VII-IV. LANDING GEAR AND BRAKE SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
Nose gear shimmies Tire out of balance. Check balance and

during fast taxi, take- replace tire if neces-
off and landing. sary.
Worn or loose wheel Replace and/or adjust

bearings. wheel bearings.
Worn drag link bolts Replace bolts and/or

and/or bushings. bushings.
Main landing gear shim- Tire out of balance. Check balance and re-
mies during fast taxi, place tire if necessary.
take-off and landing.
Worn or loose wheel Replace and/or adjust
bearings. wheel bearings.
Worn drag link bolts Replace bolts and/or

and/or bushings bushings.
Nose gear fails to Oleo cylinder binding Lubricate strut housing.

steer properly in strut housing.
One brake dragging. Determine cause and

correct.
Steering arm roller Replace defective

sheared at top of strut. roller.
Excessive or uneven Incorrect operating Inflate tire to correct

wear on main tires. pressure. pressure.
Wheel out of alignment Check wheel alignment.

(toe-in or toe-out).

2J1
2JI Reissued: 2/18/81
TABLE VII-IV. LANDING GEAR AND

BRAKE SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING (cont.)
Strut bottoms on nor- Insufficient air and/or Service strut with air
mal landing or when fluid in strut. and/or fluid.
taxiing over rough
ground. Defective internal parts Replace defective parts.
in strut.
Green gear down Lamp burned out. Replace lamp.

light out.
Gear down limit Adjust limit switch.
switch out of adjust-
ment.
Landing gear down Replace switch.

limit fails to operate.
Gear down indicator Reset circuit breaker.

light circuit breaker
open.
Flashing red light and Throttle switches out Adjust throttle switches.
warning horn fail to of adjustment.
operate when power
from both engines is Throttle switches are Replace switch.
reduced below 14 or defective.
15 inches manifold
pressure. Horn or light defective. Replace defective part.
Defective wiring. Check wiring.

TABLE VII-IV. LANDING GEAR AND

BRAKE SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING (cont.)
Landing gear and/or Possible jamming from Inspect for any obstruc-
doors not fully foreign objects. tion.
extended.
Down lock not Lubricate and check for
operating. malfunction.
Excessive friction in Lubricate. (Refer to

gear and door mech- Lubrication Chart.)
anism.
Warning horn fails Micro switches on the Adjust micro switches.

to operate when throttles out of
throttles are closed adjustment.
and landing gear is
retracting or fails Micro switches on the Check wiring, replace
to stop when throttles throttles inoperative. switch if necessary.
are closed and landing
gear is extended. Landing gear down Adjust limit switches.
limit switch out of
adjustment.
Landing gear down Check wiring, replace

limit switch inoperative. switch if necessary.
Warning horn assembly. Check wires, adjust or

replace.

Reissued: 2/18/81
2J3
2463
3.0
I .375
8.1875 1
1875 1 SPRING
93750
2.156 2.156
12.5
SECTION
A A
CASTER
AXLEPIVOT
PA 23
AXLEPIVOT
PA 31
4.0937 09
.09375- 2.375-
2.0
SCRIBE
LINES
ASSHOWN
31.0
- 10 .125x 9.0 STRAP
.125R- R
Figure 7-32. Fabricated Tool, Checking Nose Wheel Alignment

Reissued: 2/18/81
2J4
The following list of materials were used In making the balancer:
-1 1ea. Base 12 x 11 0.190 2024 T3 clad aluminum alloy

-2 2 ea. Tee 2.5 x 2 x11 0.190 2024 T4 extruded aluminum
alloy
-3 2 ea. Sdes 14 x 11 alloy
0.125 2024 T3 clad aluminum alloy
4 ea. Axle 0.125 x 10.25 4130 steel, normalized
-5 2 e. Nuts AN 365-624
3 4 2 . Spacer 0.50 x 2.25 5052-0 aluminum tubing
2 ea. Spacer 0.50 x 1.25 5052-0 aluminum tubing
-7 2 ea. Bushing 1.480 x 1.625 x 1.00 phenolic or aluminum
I -8
2 ea.
1 ea.
Bushing
Pipe
2.240 x 1.37 x 1.00
1/8 x 9.3
phenolic or aluminum
black steel pipe
* 2 ea. Bearings Save two of each size worn wheel bearings from
previous Inspections.
Figure 7-33. Tire Balancer
INTENTIONALLY
LEFTBLANK

2J5 Revised: 4, 26, 83
2J6 THRU 2L24
2J6
AZTEC
MANUAL
SERVICE
CARD3 OF5
PA-23-235
APACHE
PA-23-250
AZTEC
AZTEC
(SIXPLACE)
PA-23-250
CORPORATION
PIPERAIRCRAFT
(PART
NUMBER
753564)
3A1

Service manual information incorporated in this set of Aerofichecards is arranged in accordance with
general specifications of Aerofiche adopted by the General Aircraft Manufacturer's Association. Information
compiled in this Aerofiche servicemanual is kept current by revisionsdistributed periodically.These revisions
supersede all previous revisions, are complete Aerofichecard replacements,and supersede Aerofiche cards of
same number.

frame, opposite revised or added material. Revision lines indicate only current revisions with changes and
additions to existing text and illustrations. Changes in capitalization, spelling,punctuation, indexing, physical
ORG600401 April 1, 1960 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5

CR810218 February 18, 1981 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
PR830426 April 26, 1983 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
IR860921 September 21, 1986(Interim)* 1
* INTERIM REVISION
CARDS 2, 3, 4, or 5.
3A2
OFCONTENTS
TABLE
AEROFICHE
CARD
NO.1 GRID
NO.
I INTRODUCTION
.................... .. 1A21
II HANDLING
ANDSERVICING
................. 1B2
III INSPECTION
. ........................ 1E23
IV STRUCTURES
......................... 1F15
V SURFACE
CONTROLS ..................... 1I19
AEROFICHE
CARD
NO.2
VI ......................
SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC 2A8
VII ANDBRAKE
GEAR
LANDING SYSTEM ........ .... 2G1
* AEROFICHENO.3
CARD
VIII POWER
PLANT
(NORMALLY ..........
ASPIRATED) 3A8
VIIIA PLANT
POWER .............
(TURBOCHARGED) 3D17
VIIIB POWER
PLANT
(LYCOMING-TURBOCHARGED)
....... 3H4
IX FUEL
SYSTEM
........................ 3110
NO.4
CARD
AEROFICHE
X INSTRUMENTS
..................... 4A8
Xl ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
.................... 4C1
AEROFICHE
CARD
NO.5
XII ELECTRONICS
..................... .. . 5A9
XIII HEATING
ANDVENTILATING
................. 5B5
XIV ACCESSORIES
ANDUTILITIES
............... 5H13
3A3
LISTOF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
8-1. Cowl Flap Installation ........................... 3A18

8-2. Propeller Installation, PA-23-250,PA-23-235and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. .......... 3A20
8-3. Typical Nicks and Removal Method ................... 3A22
84. Propeller Installation, PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 and up............................. 3A24
8-5. 3B10
8-6. Engine Installation, PA-23-250,PA-23-235and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. ......... 3B13
8-7. Engine Installation, PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 and up ................ .............. . 3B19
8-8. Carburetor .................... .............. . 3B24
8-9. Schematic of RSA Fuel Injection System . . . ................ 3C2
8-10. Fuel Injector .................... ................ 3C6
8-11. Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle .............. ................. 3C7
8-12. Magneto Inspection ................ ................. 3C8
8-13. Contact Spring Inspection ............ ................. 3C9
8-14. Impulse Coupling ................. ................. 3C9
8-15. MagnetoTiming Marks .............. .................. 3C12
8-16. Timing Pointer ................. .............. 3C12
8-17. Timing Kit Installed ............... ................. 3C14
8-18. Breaker Compartment with Cast Timing Marks ............. . 3C14
..
8-19. Engine Timing Marks ............... ................. 3C16
8-20. Ignition System Schematic ............ ................. 3C18
8-21. RemovingSpark Plug Frozen to Bushing .... .............. 3C19
8-22. Adjustment of BallJoint Exhaust System . . ............... . 3C24
..
8A-1. Cowl Flap Installation .............. .............. . 3D24
..
8A-2. Propeller Installation ............... .............. . 3E3
..
8A-3. Typical Nicks and RemovalMethod ...... .............. . 3E4
..
8A-4. Propeller Governor ................ .................. 3E11
8A-5. Engine Installation ................ .............. . 3E15
...
8A-6. Schematic of RSA Fuel Injection System . . .............. . 3E20
..
8A-7. Fuel Injector .................... .................. 3E21
8A-8. Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle ............. .................. 3E24
8A-9. Contact Points ................... .............. . 3F2
..
8A-10. Contact SpringInspection ............ .............. . 3F2
..
8A-11. Rotor Holding Tool Installed ......... .............. . 3F4
..
8A-12. Timing Kit Installed ............... .............. . ..
3F4
8A-13. AligningTiming Marks ............. .............. . 3F6
..
8A-14. Forming Leads in BreakerCompartment . . . .............. . 3F7
..
8A-15. Engine Timing Mark .............. .............. . 3F8
..
8A-16. MagnetoTiming Mark ............. .............. . 3F8
..
8A-17. Removal of Spring from Lead Assembly . . . .............. . 3F9
..
8A-18. AssemblyTool .................. .............. . 3F10
..
8A-19. Using AssemblingTool ............. .............. . 3F11
...
8A-20. MeasuringLead AssemblyLength ....... .............. . 3F12
..
Reissued:2/18/81
3A4

Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
8A-21. Cutting Metallic Braid From End of Lead ....................... 3F12

8A-22. Unbraiding Metallic Shielding.................................. 3F12
8A-23. Forming Shielding Around Ferrule ............................. 3F13
8A-24. Ferrule Seating Tool .......................................... 3F13
8A-25. Needle ...................................................... 3F13
8A-26. Measuring Wire .............................................. 3F14
8A-27. Installing Grommet Over Lead Assemblies....................... 3F14
8A-28. Lead Assembly Installed in Grommet ........................... 3F15
8A-29. Wire Doubled Over for Installation of Eyelet .................... 3F15
8A-30. Ignition System Schematic..................................... 3F16
8A-31. Removing Spark Plug Frozen to Bushing........................ 3F18
8A-32. Turbocharger System Diagram ................ ........... 3F22
8A-33. Turbocharger Control Circuit Diagram S/N 27-2505
to 27-3836incl.; 27-3838to 27-3943incl ..................... 3F23
8B-1. Cowl Flap Installation ................................ ..... 3H9
8B-2. Engine Installation ........................................... 3H15
8B-3. Turbocharger System Diagram ................................ 3H20
9-1. Fuel System Diagram (2 Valves), PA-23-250and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2222incl........ 3114
9-2. Fuel System Diagram, PA-23-235 and PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2223to 27-2504incl ......................... 3115
9-3. Fuel System Diagram, PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos.
27-2322to 27-2504 incl ................................... 3116
27-2505to 27-3836;27-3838to 27-3943 incl.................. 3117
27-3937,27-3944to 27-7554172incl ........................ 3118
9-6. Fuel System Diagram, PA-23-250 "F", Serial Nos.
27-7654001 and up ........................................ 3119
9-7. Fuel System Diagram, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2582,
27-2686, 27-3135, 27-3941 and 27-4520 ...................... 3120
9-8. Wing Tip Fuel Cell Installation ................................ 3124
9-9. Fuel Cell Installation, Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-7654000 incl .......... 3J2
9-10. Fuel Cell Installation, Serial Nos. 27-7654000 and up ............. 3J3
9-11. Fuel Indicating System Wiring Schematic ........................ 3J10
9-12. Check Fuel Quantity Sender ................................... 3J 11
9-13. Check Fuel Gauges Schematic ................................. 3J 11
9-14. Fuel Selector Valve ....................................... 3J14
9-16. Fuel Selector Valve (Scott) ............... .................... 3J18
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2223 to 27-7305126 incl ............. 3J19
9-18. Fuel Selector Valve Port Positions .............................. 3J21
Revised:4 26 83
3A5
Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.

(six place) (Dukes P/N 3654-00-1, -2) ....................... 3J23
9-20. Fuel Crossfeed Valve ........................................ 3K5
9-21. Fuel Filter, PA-23-235, PA-23-250 and PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl .......................... 3K8
9-22. Fuel Filter, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up...... 3K8
9-23. Bendix Electric Fuel Pumps (Early and Late) .................... 3K12
9-24. Weldon Rotary Fuel Pump .................................... 3K15
9-25. Shaft Seal Installation ........................................ 3K17
9-26. Bench Test Set-up ............................................ 3K19
9-27. Engine Primer ............................................... 3K21
9-28. Fabricated Fuel Quantity Transmitter Checking Jig............... 3L1
9-29. Fuel Selector Control Cables, PA-23-235, PA-23-250 and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 thru 27-7954076 .............. 3L3
9-30. Fuel Selector Control Cables, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-7954077 and up........................................ 3L4
Reissued: 2/18/81
3A6
LIST
OFTABLES
Table Aerofiche
Grid No.
VIII-I. Propeller Specifications- PA-23-250;PA-23-235and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.... 3A23
VIII-II. Propeller Specifications - PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 and up.......................... 3B1
VIII-III. Engine Troubleshooting (Carburetor) ................ 3D2
VIIIA-I. Propeller Specifications ..................... 3E6
VIIIA-II. Engine Troubleshooting (Fuel Injection) .............. 3G12
VIIIB-I. Engine Troubleshooting ................. 3H24
IX-I. Fuel System Troubleshooting .................... 3K23
IX-II. Fuel System Pressures ........................ 3L2
Reissued: 2/18/81
3A7
SECTION
VIII
POWER
PLANT
ASPIRATED)
(NORMALLY
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
8-1. Introduction .............. ............ 3A1
8-2. Description ................... ..... 3A 1
8-3. Troubleshooting ............. 3A12
8-4. Standard Practices - Engine ....................... ·.... .............. 3A13
8-5. EngineCowling ...................... ......... 3A14
8-6. Removal of Engine Cowling.(PA-23-250;
Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) ..... ......... 3A14
8-7. Removalof Engine Cowling. (PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up) . . . ......... 3A14
8-8. Cleaning,Inspection and Repair of Engine
Cowling ...................... ......... 3A15
8-9. Installation of Engine Cowling.(PA-23-250;
PA-23-235;and PA-23-250(six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) ..... ......... 3A15
8-10. Installation of Engine Cowling. (PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up .... ......... 3A15
8-11. EngineCowl Flap. (PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 and up.) ...................... ......... 3A16
8-12. Removalof Cowl Flap Assembly .......... ......... 3A16
8-13. Removalof Cowl Flap Control Cable ....... ......... 3A16
8-14. Installation of Cowl Flap Control Cable ..... ......... 3A17
8-15. Installation of Cowl Flap Assembly ........ ......... 3A17
8-16. Riggingand Adjusting EngineCowl Flaps .... ......... 3A19
8-17. Propeller .............. ......... 3A20
8-18. Removal of Propeller. (PA-23-250;PA-23-235;
and PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos.
27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) . ..... ......... 3A20
8-19. Cleaning,Inspection and Repair of Propeller .. ......... 3A21
8-20. Installation of Propeller. (PA-23-250;PA-23-235;
and PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos.
27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) ........... ......... 3A22
Reissued: 2/18/81
3A8
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
8-21. Removal of Propeller, PA-23-250(six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505and up ....................... 3A24
8-22. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Propeller ............ 3B3
8-23. Installation of Propeller, PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505and up ...................... 3B4
8-24. Adjustment of Low Pitch Blade Angle and Stop,
PA-23-250;PA-23-235 and PA-23-250(six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504incl......... 3B5
8-25. Adjustment of Low Pitch Blade Angle and Stop,
Serial Nos. 27-2505and up ....................... 3B5
8-26. Blade Track ......................................... 3B7
8-27. Propeller Governor ............................................ 3B7
8-28. Removal of Propeller Governor ....................... 3B7
8-29. Installation of Propeller Governor ..................... 3B7
8-30. Rigging and Adjustment of Propeller Governor.......... 3B8
8-31. Engine ...................................................... 3B10
8-32. Removal of Engine, PA-23-250;PA-23-235and
PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to
27-2504incl ................ ..................... 3B10
8-33. Installation of Engine, PA-23-250;PA-23-235;and
PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000to
27-2504incl. ........ ............................ 3B15
8-34. Removal of Engine, PA-23-250(six place),
8-35. Installation of Engine, PA-23-250 (six place),
8-36. Removal of Engine Mount and Support Assemblies...... 3B18
8-37. Installation of Engine Mount and Support Assemblies .... 3B18
8-38. Engine Shock Mounts ........................................ 3B21
8-39. Replacing Engine Shock Mounts ...................... 3B21
8-40. Carburetor, PA-23-250;PA-23-235 and PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504incl.......................... 3B22
8-41. Carburetor Maintenance .............................. 3B22
8-42. Removal of Carburetor............................... 3B23
8-43. Installation of Carburetor ............................ 3B23
8-44. Adjustment of Throttle and Mixture Controls ........... 3B23
8-45. Adjustment of Idle Mixture ........................... 3B24
8-46. Adjustment of Engine Idling Speed .................... 3C1
8-47. Fuel Injector, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2322
and up ... ............... .......................... 3C1
8-48. Fuel Injector Maintenance ............................ 3C1
Reissued: 2/18/81
3A9
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
8-49. Lubrication of Fuel Injector ............ ..... 3C3
8-50. Removal of Fuel Injector ............ ..... 3C3
8-51. Preparation for Storage ............... ..... 3C3
8-52. Installation of Fuel Injector ...... ..... 3C4
8-53. Adjustment of Throttle and Mixture Controls . . 3C5 .
8-54. Adjustment of Idle Speed and Mixture ...... ..... 3C5
8-55. Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle ....................... ..... 3C7
8-56. Removal of Fuel Air BleedNozzle ......... ..... 3C7
8-57. Cleaningand Inspection of Fuel Air BleedNozzle ..... 3C7
8-58. Installation of Fuel Air BleedNozzle ....... ..... 3C7
8-59. Magneto ....... ... .... ................. ..... 3C8
8-60. Inspection of Magnetos ............... ..... 3C8
8-61. Removal of Magneto ...... .... ..... 3C10
8-62. Timing Procedure (Internal Timing) ........ 3C11 .
8-63. Installation and Timing Procedure
(Timing Magnetoto Engine) ......... 3C14 .
8-64. Harness Assembly .......................... ..... 3C16
8-65. Inspection of Harness ................ ..... 3C16
8-66. Removal of Harness ................. 3C16 .
8-67. Installation of Harness ............... .... 3C17
8-68. Spark Plugs ............................. 3C17 .
8-69. Removal of Spark Plugs ............... ..... 3C17
8-70. Inspection and Cleaningof Spark Plug ...... 3C19 .
8-71. Installation of Spark Plugs ............. 3C20 .
8-72. Starting Vibrator (14 and 28-Volt System) ........... 3C20 .
8-73. Starting Vibrator CheckingProcedure ....... 3C20 .
8-74. Removalof Starting Vibrator ........... 3C21 .
8-75. Installation of Starting Vibrator .......... 3C21 .
8-76. Lubrication System ......................... 3C22 .
8-77. Adjustment of Oil PressureRelief Valve ..... 3C22 .
8-78. Installation of Oil Cooler ................. ........ 3C22
8-79. Checks and Adjustments of Ball Joint Exhaust Systems ......... 3C23
Reissued:2/18/81
3A10
SECTION VIII
POWER PLANT
(NORMALLY ASPIRATED)
8-1. INTRODUCTION. This section covers non-turbocharged powerplants used

in the PA-23 airplanes and is comprised of instructions for the removal, minor
repair, service and installation of the engine cowling, propeller, propeller gov-
ernor, engine, engine shock mounts, induction system, carburetor, fuel injector,
fuel air bleed nozzle, ignition system and lubrication system. For more detailed
information, refer to the engine or component manufacturer's service manuals.
8-2. DESCRIPTION.The PA-23 is powered by two Avco-Lycoming0-540 or 10-540 series

six cylinder, direct drive, wet sump, horizontally opposed, air-cooled engines. (Refer to
Pilot's Operating Handbook for fuel octane ratings.)
Cowlings completely enclose the engines. The cowling is of cantilever con-

struction attached at the firewall. There are access panels on both sides to allow
inspection of the accessory section. The cowl flap doors are an integral part of
the lower cowl and are operated through mechanical linkage.
Propellers are Hartzell full feathering, constant speed, each controlled by
a governor mounted on the engine supplying oil through the propeller shaft at
various pressures. Oil pressure from the governor moves the blades into low
pitch (high RPM). The centrifugal twisting moment of the blades also tends to
move the blades into low pitch. Opposing these two forces are blade counter-
weights or the force produced by compressed air between the cylinder head and
the piston, which tends to move the blades into high pitch in the absence of gov-
ernor oil pressure. Thus, feathering is accomplished by counterweights or
compressed air.
The airframe induction system consists of a dry type air filter and alter-
nate air door. The fuel system of the 0-540 series engines consists of a Marvel-
Schebler MA-4-5 carburetor and AC diaphragm type fuel pump. The fuel system
on the I0-540 series engines consists of a Bendix RSA-5AD1 type injector and a
Lear-Seigler fuel supply pump. These engines are normally aspirated with no
restrictions on maximum power output.
Bendix Scintilla S-20 or S-200 series magnetos are installed with their
associated components. The S-20 series system consists of two single contact
magnetos. The left magneto incorporates an impulse coupling to aid in starting.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3A11
The S-200 series system consists of a single contact magneto, a dual contact
magneto to obtain the retard spark necessary for starting, a starter vibrator,
magneto switches and starter switch.
In addition to the previouslymentioned components, each engine is equipped with a
generator or alternator, geared starter, hydraulic pump and pressure pump. Engine mounts
are steel tubing construction attached at the firewall and incorporate vibration absorbing
mounts. The exhaust stacks and extensions are positioned one for each bank of cylinders.
The stack on the right side has a heat muff on it to heat the alternate air plenum. Both
stacks merge into one at the lower aft end of the engine nacelle.
The lubrication system is of the full pressure wet sump type. The oil pump,
which is located in the accessory housing, draws oil through a drilled passage
leading from the oil suction screen located in the sump. The oil from the pump
then enters a drilled passage in the accessory housing, which feeds the oil to a
threaded connection on the rear face of the accessory housing, where a flexible
line leads the oil to the external oil cooler. Pressure oil from the cooler returns
to a second threaded connection on the accessory housing from which point a
drilled passage conducts oil to the oil pressure filter. In the event that cold oil
or an obstruction should restrict the oil flow to the cooler, an oil cooler by-pass
valve is provided to pass the oil directly from the oil pump to the oil pressure
filter.
The oil pressure filter element, located on the accessory housing, is pro-
vided as a means to filter from the oil any solid particles that may have passed
through the suction screen in the sump. After being filtered in the pressure fil-
ter, the oil is fed through a drilled passage to the oil pressure relief valve, lo-
cated in the upper right side of the crankcase in front of the accessory housing.
This relief valve regulates the engine oil pressure by allowing excessive
oil to return to the sump, while the balance of the pressure oil is fed to the main
oil gallery in the right half of the crankcase. Residual oil is returned by gravity
to the sump where, after passing through a screen, it is again circulated through
the engine.
8-3. TROUBLESHOOTING. Troubles peculiar to the power plant are listed in

Table VIII-III in the back of this section, along with their probable causes and
suggested remedies. When troubleshooting engines, ground the magneto primary
circuit before performing any checks on the ignition system.
POWER PLANT
3A12
8-4. STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINE. The following suggestions should be applied wherever they
are needed when working on the power plant.
a. To insure proper reinstallation and/or assembly, tag and mark all parts, clips, and brackets as to
thier location prior to their removal and/or disassembly.
b. During removal of various tubes or engine parts, inspect them for indications of scoring, burning or
other undesirable conditions. To facilitate reinstallation, observe the location of each part during removal.
Tag any unserviceable part and/or units for investigation and possible repair.
c. Extreme care must be taken to prevent foreign matter from entering the engine, such as lockwire,
washers, nuts, dirt, dust, etc. This precaution applies whenever work is done on the engine, either on or off the
aircraft. Suitable protective caps, plugs, and covers must be used to protect all openings as they are exposed.
NOTE
Dust caps used to protect open lines must always be installed OVER
the tube ends and NOT IN the tube ends. Flow through the lines may
be blocked off if lines are inadvertently installed with dust caps in the
tube ends.
d. Should any items be dropped into the engine, the assembly process must stop and the item removed,
even though this may require considerable time and labor. Insure that all parts are thoroughly clean before
assembling.
e. Never reuse any lockwire, lockwashers, tablocks, tabwashers or cotter pins. All lockwire and cotter
pins must fit snugly in holes drilled in studs and bolts for locking purposes. Cotter pins should be installed so
the head fits into the castellation of the nut, and unless otherwise specified, bend one end of the pin back over
the stud or bolt and the other end down flat against the nut. Use only corrosion resistant steel lockwire and / or
cotter pins. Bushing plugs shall be lockwired to the assembly base or case. Do not lockwire the plug to the
bushing.
f. All gaskets, packings and rubber parts must be replaced with new items of the same type at
reassembly. Insure the new nonmetallic parts being installed show no sign of having deteriorated in storage.
g. When installing engine parts which require the use of a hammer to facilitate assembly or installation,
use only a plastic or rawhide hammer.
h. Whenever adhesive tape has been applied to any part, the tape and all residue must be removed and
thoroughly cleaned with petroleum solvents prior to being subjected to high temperature during engine run.
This would also apply to parts that have corrosion preventive compounds applied.
i. Anti-seize lubrication should be applied to all loose-fit spline drives which are external to the engine
and have no other means of lubrication. For certain assembly procedures, molybdenum disulfide in either
paste or powdered form mixed with engine oil or grease may be used.
CAUTION
Ensure that Anti-seize compounds are applied in thin even coats,

and that excess compound is completely removed to avoid
contamination of adjacent parts.
j.Temporary marking methods are those markings which will ensure identification during ordinary
handling, storage and final assembly of parts.
POWERPLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3A 13
8-5. ENGINE COWLING.
8-6. REMOVAL OF ENGINE COWLING. (PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and PA-23-250

(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504incl.)
a. Ascertain that the master switch and magneto switches are inthe off posi-
tion.
b. Release the quarter turn fasteners and remove the two access panels from
both sides of the nacelle.
c. Remove the attaching screws from the front and rear of the top cowling
section and lift it off.
d. Remove the fillet fairings from both the inboard and outboard sides of the
nacelle by removing attaching screws.
e. Remove the carburetor air scoop by releasing the quarter turn fasteners.
f. Release the four quarter turn fasteners holding the carburetor air bellows
to the air filter.
g. Remove the screws at the rear of the bottom cowling assembly and remove
by pulling forward and down.
h. The nose cowl may be removed by removing the screws at each side thus
separating the upper and lower half.
8-7. REMOVAL OF ENGINE COWLING. (PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505and

up.)
tion.
both sides of the engine nacelle.
e. Disconnect all drain lines attached to the bottom cowl.
f. Remove the attaching bolts and disconnect the cowl flap linkage from the
cowl doors.
g. Remove the screws from the front and rear of the bottom cowling assembly
and pull it forward and down.
h. Split and remove the nose cowl by pulling out the two (upper and lower)
hinge pins.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3A14
8-8. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF ENGINE COWLING.

a. The cowling should be cleaned with a suitable dry type solvent and then
wiped with a clean cloth.
b. Inspect the cowling for dents, cracks, loose rivets, damaged or missing
fasteners and damaged skin or fiberglas.
c. If repair is necessary, refer to Structural Repairs, Section IV.
8-9. INSTALLATION OF ENGINE COWLING. (PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and

PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504incl.)
NOTE
As engine shock mounts age, the engine will tilt forward and
down. To ensure clearance underneath the engine, pull down
on nose of cowl during installation.
a. Place the bottom cowling assembly in position and fasten to the rear engine nacelle
with attaching screws.
b. Attach the carburetor air bellows to the air filter by the four quarter turn
fasteners.
c. Place the carburetor air scoop in position and secure with the quarter turn
dzus fasteners.
d. Position the fillet fairings in place on both inboard and outboard sides of
the engine nacelle and secure with attaching screws.
e. Place the top cowling section in position and secure with attaching screws.
f. Position the two inboard and outboard access panels on the engine nacelle
and secure with the quarter turn dzus fasteners.
8-10. INSTALLATION OF ENGINE COWLING. (PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.

27-2505 and up.)
a. Install the nose cowl halves and insert the hinge pins.
b. Position the bottom cowling assembly and secure with the attaching screws.
c. Connect the drain lines to the bottom of the cowling.
d. Position the fillet fairings in place on both inboard and outboard sides of the
engine nacelle and secure with attaching screws.
e. Place the top cowling section in position and fasten with attaching screws.
f. Connect the cowl flap linkage to the doors with the attaching bolts and adjust
per instructions in paragraph 8-16.
g. Position the two inboard and outboard access panels in place and secure
with the quarter turn fasteners.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3A15
8-11. ENGINE COWL FLAP. (PA-23-250)(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505and up.)
8-12. REMOVAL OF COWL FLAP ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 8-1.)

a. Remove the two side cowl panels from the engine where the cowl flaps are to be
removed.
b. Note the position of the rod end (11) to the cowl flap and remove the self-locking
nut on the rod end disconnectingit from the cowl flap.
c. Remove the cowl flap by removing the cotter pin, nut, washer and bolt from the
hinge bracket on each side.
d. If the operating mechanism is to be removed, the followingprocedure may be used:
1. Disconnect the control cable clevis end (3) from the torque tube arm by
removing cotter pin and clevispin.
2. Remove the bearing blocks holding each end of the torque tube assembly in
place by removing the self-lockingnut, washer and bolts.
3. Remove the self-locking nuts, washers and machine screws from the center
bearing block. Remove the bearing block.
4. Remove the operating mechanismfrom the nacelle.
5. The mechanismmay be further disassembledas necessary.
e. For removal of the cowl flap control cables, refer to paragraph 8-13.
8-13. REMOVAL OF COWL FLAP CONTROL CABLE.

a. Remove the engine access panels from the sides of the nacelle, if not previously
removed.
b. Remove the top center section of the nacelle by removing attaching screws.
c. Remove the access panel from the bottom of the fuselage between the wings by
removingattaching screws.
d. Disconnect the clevis end of the control cable by removingthe cotter pin and clevis
pin.
e. Remove the clevisend from the cable.
f. Remove the clamp securing the cable to the engine mount by removing the
self-lockingnuts and machinescrews.
g. Draw the cable through the fire wall to the center section of the nacelle.
h. Loosen the cable clamps inside the center section of the nacelle.
i. Draw the cable through both clamps.
j. Loosen the clamp securingthe cable inside the bottom of the fuselage.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3A16
k. Disconnect the cable from the control handle, inside the fuel control box
by removing the bolt, washers, and self-locking nut.
l . Remove the cable by drawingit from the nacelle into the bottom of the fuse-
lage and through the clamp.
8-14. INSTALLATION OF COWL FLAP CONTROL CABLE.

a. Draw the cable end through the clamp in the bottom of the fuselage and con-
nect the cable end to the control handle inside the fuel control box.
b. Install the cable through the engine control tube in the wing.
c. Install the cable through the clamps in the center section of the nacelle.
d. Install the cable through the firewall and attach it with a clamp on the engine
mount.
e. Install the clevis end and jam nut to the control cable.
f. Check the position of the cable to be certain there are no sharp bends or
anything that might hamper proper operation.
g. Tighten all cable clamps.
h. With cowl flaps installed, check rigging and adjustment of cowl flaps as
described in paragraph 8-16.
i. Install all access panels.
8-15. INSTALLATION OF COWL FLAP ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 8-1.)

a. If the operation mechanism was removed, reinstall by the following proce-
dure:
1. Position the torque tube and bearing blocks inside the nacelle and secure
with bolts, washers and self-locking nuts.
2. Install the bearing block around the center of the torque tube with ma-
chine screws, washer and self-locking nuts.
3. Install the rod assembly if removed from the torque tube.
b. Position the cowl flap to the nacelle and secure with bolt, washer, nut and
cotter pin.
c. Connect the rod assembly to the cowl flap.
d. Rig and adjust the cowl flaps as described in paragraph 8-16.
e. Install all access panels.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3A17
A492
1. CONTROL CABLE
2. JAM NUT
3. CLEVIS COWL FLAP MAINTAIN AT LEAST.12 CLEARANCE OF EXHAUST TUBE
4. CLEVIS PIN
5. ENGINE MOUNT TUBE
1.0 MAX. IN CLOSED POSITION
6. ROD END BALL JOINT
7. BEARING BLOCK
8. ROD ASSEMBLY NACELLE SKIN
9. TORQUE TUBE SEE CHART IN PARAGRAPH 8-16
10. JAM NUT FOR OPEN DIMENSION
11 . ROD END BALL JOINT
12. STOP SCREW
13. COWL FLAP
VIEW A -A
Figure 8-1. Cowl Flap Installation
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3A18
8-16. RIGGING AND ADJUSTING ENGINE COWL FLAPS. (Refer to Figure 8-1.)
a. Remove the two side cowl panels from each engine.
b. Ascertain that the cowl flap mechanism is properly installed. (Refer to Paragraph
8-15.)
c. With the cowl flap selector in the cabin placed in the OPEN position, adjust the rod
ends (6 and 11) of the rod assembly(8) so the cowl flap is open to the dimension shown in
Figure 8-1 for the particular serial numbers noted in the followingchart.
SERIALNUMBERS DISTANCE
MINIMUM MAXIMUM
27-2505 to 27-2868 incl. * 3 inches

27-2869 and up 3.50 inches 3.75 inches
*Airplanes with Serial Numbers 27-2505 to 27-2868 inclusive which have been
modified to a gross weight of 5200 pounds use 3.50 min. to 3.75 max. inches.
d. This dimension should be measured normal to the nacelle skin. (Refer to Figure
8-1.) Divide the adjustment between both rod ends, andcheck all rod ends and clevisends
for adequate thread engagement.
e. Move the selector in the cabin to the CLOSEDposition and check that the trailing
edge of the outboard cowl flap clears the exhaust tube by at least .12 of an inch. Do not
exceed one inch opening on either the outboard or inboard cowl flap. The dimension is
measured normal to the nacelle skin and trailing edge of the cowl flap.
f. It may be necessary to readjust the OPEN position slightly to obtain these
measurements.
g. Adjust the two stop screws(12) at the trailing edge of the cowl flaps until they
contact the cowl flaps firmly.
POWER PLANT
1. SPINNER BACK PLATE 24

2. "O" RING SEAL
3. PROPELLER MOUNTING GASKET
4. STARTER RING
5. PROPELLER HUB
6. BOLT
7. GREASE FITTING
8. PROPELLER BLADE
9. JAM NUT
10. LOW PITCH STOP
11. SPINNER
11
7
10
9
4
Figure 8-2. Propeller Installation

8-17. PROPELLER.
WARNING
Before performing any service functions on the pro-

peller, ascertain that the master switch is OFF, the
magneto switches are OFF (grounded) and the mix-
ture control is in the IDLE CUT-OFF position.
8-18. REMOVAL OF PROPELLER. (PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and PA-23-250 (six

place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.)(Refer to Figure 8-2.)
a. Ascertain that the master switch and magneto switches are in the off posi-
tion and the mixture control lever in the idle cut-off position.
b. Place the propeller control levers in the feather position.
c. Remove the spinner by removing the screws from the outside edge.
POWER PLANT
3A20 3A20 Reissued: 2/18/81
d. Place a drip pan under the propeller to catch the oil spillage.
e. Slide a feathering paddle on each propeller blade and turn the blades slightly
in the low pitch direction to relieve the high pitch stop pins.
f. Push both pins into their brackets and feather propeller blades completely.
g. Remove the bolts which hold each of the high pitch stop brackets to the
propeller hub and remove brackets.
h. Remove the propeller hub mounting bolts holding the propeller hub to the
crankshaft flange.
i. Remove the propeller.
8-19. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF PROPELLER.

a. Check for oil and grease leaks.
b. Clean the spinner, propeller hub interior and exterior, and blades with a
non-corrosive solvent.
c. Inspect the hub parts for cracks.
d. Steel hub parts should not be permitted to rust. Use aluminum paint to
touch up, if necessary, or replate during overhaul.
e. Check all visible parts for wear and safety.
f. Check blades to determine whether they turn freely on the hub pivot tube.
This can be done by rocking the blades back and forth through the slight freedom
allowed by the pitch change mechanism. If they appear tight and are properly
lubricated, the pitch change mechanism should be removed so that each blade
can be checked individually. If blades are tight, the propeller should be dis-
assembled by an authorized service center.
g. Inspect blades for damage or cracks. Nicks in leading edges of blades
should be filed out and all edges rounded, as cracks sometimes start from such
places. Use fine emery cloth for finishing. Refer to Figure 8-4 for propeller
blade care.
h. It is recommended that for severe damage, internal repairs and replace-
ment of parts, the propeller should be referred to the Hartzell Factory or Ser-
vice Station.
i . Grease blade hub through zerk fittings. Remove one of the two fittings for
each propeller blade, alternate the next time. Apply grease through the zerk
fitting until fresh grease appears at the fitting hole of the removed fitting. Care
should be taken to avoid blowing out hub gaskets.
POWER PLANT
3A21
Exaggeatedview of nicks
in loding ed. Exaggeratedview of nick
in face o blade.
Rec d metod for remo ing SECTIONAA-

nicksbyriffle file andcrocos cloth. Nick In fce of blade
Blend deepest p tio of nick into removed by file and
lding edge alignment with smoth crocus cloth as recm-
crve S.
mendd.
Figure 8-3. Typical Nicks and Removal Method
8-20. INSTALLATION OF PROPELLER. (PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and PA-23-250

(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) (Refer to Figure 8-2.)
tion.
b. Place the propeller control levers in the feather position.
c. Observe the starter ring gear to make sure it is mounted properly on the
engine crankshaft flange. One of the bushings on the crankshaft is stamped with
an "O" mark andit must be inserted inthe starter ring gear hole, likewise iden-
tified by an "O" mark.
d. Install a new "O" ring on the crankshaft and the gasket on the propeller
mounting bushings.
POWER PLANT
3A22
TABLE VIII-I. PROPELLER SPECIFICATIONS

Blade Angle Low Pitch (High RPM) 15.5°(1)

(2 Blades) High Pitch (Low RPM) 80°
(Feathered)
(1) MEASUREMENT TAKEN AT 30 INCH RADIUS
Propeller RPM Engine Static High RPM 2575 RPM Max.

Setting Engine Static Low RPM 1900 RPM Min.
Propeller Torque Description Required Torque

Limits (Dry)
Spinner Bulkhead (Aft) 50-70 inch pounds
Propeller Mounting Bolts 60 foot pounds
Spinner Attaching Screws 40 inch pounds
NOTE
The reason for this arrangement is that it is necessary

to have the timing marks located in the proper position.
The timing marks appear on the gear ring inthe form
of a punch mark which must be lined up with a punch
mark or pin on the starter gear drive housing.
e. With the propeller blades feathered completely, raise the propeller into
position with the engine and slide the propeller onto the propeller mounting
bushings.
f. Install the hexagon head propeller hub mounting bolts and ferry screws and
tighten them to 60 foot pounds of torque. Safety with MS20995-C41 wire.
g. Install the high pitch stop brackets making sure there are a sufficient num-
ber of shim washers behind the bracket to attain proper alignment of the pin with
the pitch stop.
h. Check tightness of all the propeller bolts and safety.
i. Install the spinner and secure with attaching screws.
POWER PLANT
1. SPINNER CAP ATTACHMENT SCREW 246

2 SPINNER CAP
3, AIR VALVE
4. CHECK NUT
5. LOW PITCH STOP
6. "0" RING
7. SPINNER
8. SPINNER ATTACHMENT SCREW
9. CHECK NUT
10. HUB BOLT
11. HUB NUT
I2. BLADE
13. AFT SPINNER BULKHEAD
14. STUD
15. "O" RING
15
16. STARTER RING GEAR
INSTALL FLANGE STUDS

IN SHORT BUSHINGS
Figure 84. PropellerInstallation

PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos. 27-2505 and up
8-21. REMOVAL OF PROPELLER. (PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and
up.) (Refer to Figure 8-4.) This includes all propellers, standard and with spring backup kit
installed, identified by a letter "S" in the dash number.
NOTE
When removing the propeller, it is unnecessaryto remove the
spinner, feather the blades, or remove the air charge. When
the propeller is removed for serviceor overhaul,the propeller
with the spring kit installed should be feathered on the
aircraft (see following CAUTION)and the spinner on either
prop must be removed according to section d of this
paragraph.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3A24
TABLEVIII-II. PROPELLERSPECIFICATIONS
PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up.
Blade Angle Low Pitch (High RPM) 14.5 °

15.20
Feathered 80°
MEASUREMENT TAKEN AT 30 INCH RADIUS
(1) TIO-540-C1A ENGINES ONLY
Propeller RPM Engine Static High RPM 2575

Setting

Limits (Dry)
Spinner Bulkhead (Aft) 22 foot-pounds
Propeller Mounting Bolts 60 foot-pounds
Spinner Bulkhead Check Nut 35-40 foot-pounds
Spinner Attachment Screws 40 inch-pounds
CHAMBERPRESSURE REQUIREMENTS WITH TEMPERATURE

HC-E2YR-2RBor HC-E2YR-2RBFor HC-E2YK-2RBor HC-E2YK-2RBF
Temp. OF Press. (psi) Temp. OF Press. (psi)
100 188 30 165

90 185 20 162
80 182 10 159
70 178 0 154
60 175 -10 152
50 172 -20 149
40 168 -30 146
HC-E2YK-2RBSor HC-E2YK-2RBSFor HC-E2YR-2RBSor HC-E2YR-2RBSF

100 74
70 70
40 66
10 62
-20 58
POWER PLANT
WARNING
Do not attempt to disassemble the propeller assembly any

further than stated in this manual. Only personnel at a
certified repair shop are authorized for repair and overhaul of
the propeller mechanism.
CAUTION
Under NO condition should blade paddles be used on either

propeller, except to unfeather a propeller with the spring kit
installed (see paragraph 8-23). If a propeller is to be feathered
on the ground, it should be done with the engine operating,
by use of the propeller control on the throttle quadrant.
WARNING
Prior to performing any work on the propeller, ascertain that
the master switch and magneto switches are OFF (grounded)
and the mixture control is in the IDLE CUT-OFF position.
a. Remove all hardware that attaches the nose cowl to the top and bottom engine
cowls. The top and side panels of the main cowl assembly may be removed for greater
accessibility. Work the nose cowl as far forward as possible, reach through the opening and
split the cowl by pulling the upper and lower hinge pins. Pliers may be needed to pull the
pins. The two halves of the cowl may be pulled forward and to either side of the propeller,
which should be in a vertical position for ease in removingthe cowl.
NOTE
In some appropriate manner, index the propeller and starter

ring to facilitate installation. (Example - paint stripe.) Do not
scratch the surface.
b. Place a drip pan under the propeller to catch oil spillage.

c. Cut safety wire around the propeller mounting studs and remove the studs (14) from
the engine flange by wrenchingthe nuts. These nuts are "frozen" to the studs with loctite
and secured with roll pins, so the studs should turn with the nuts. Pull the propeller from
the engine shaft.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3B2
d. In the event that the spinner and spinner bulkhead are to be removed for cleaning,
inspection, adjustment of pitch stop, etc., removethe spinner nose cap attaching screwsand
cap (1 and 2). Remove the spinner (7) by removingthe safety wire and check nut (4) from
the propeller at the forward end of the forward spinner bulkhead and the screws (8) that
secure the spinner to the aft bulkhead (13). The aft spinner bulkhead may be removed from
the hub by removingthe locknuts ( 1 ).
8-22. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF PROPELLER.
CAUTION
Prior to performing any work on propeller, releasethe dome
pressure first.
a. Checkfor oil and greaseleaks.

b. Cleanthe spinner, propeller hub and blades with a non-corrosivesolvent.
d. Steel hub parts should not be permitted to rust. Use aluminum paint to touch up, if
necessary,or replate during overhaul.
e. Checkall visibleparts for wear and safety.
f. Check the blades of the standard propeller to determine whether they turn freely on
the hub pivot tube. This can be done by rocking the blades back and forth through the
slight freedomallowed by the pitch change mechanism. Do this by hand being careful not to
slam the internal mechanism against the stops. If blades appear tight and are properly
lubricated, the propeller may need internal repair. (See WARNING under "Removal of
Propeller".)This cannot be done with the spring propeller due to the pressure exerted by the
spring even though the dome pressure is discharged.
g. Inspect blades for damage or cracks. Nicks in leading edges of blades should be filed
out and all edges rounded , as cracks sometimesstart from such places. Use fineemery cloth
for finishing. Refer to Figure 8-3 for propeller blade care.
h. Check condition of propeller mounting nuts and studs.
NOTE
It is recommended that for severe damage, internal repairs

and replacement of parts, the propeller should be referred to
the HartzellFactory or Certified Repair Station.
i. Each blade face should be sanded lightly with fine sandpaper and painted, when
necessary, with a flat black paint to retard glare. A light application of oil or wax may be
applied to the surfaces to prevent corrosion.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3B3
8-23. INSTALLATION OF PROPELLER. (PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505and

up.) (Refer to Table VIII-II and Figure 8-4.)
WARNING
Prior to performing any work around propeller, ascertain that
and the mixture control is in the IDLE CUT-OFF position.
a. Clean the propeller flange, starter ring and crankshaft flange.

b. Install spinner bulkhead (13) on propeller hub and secure with locknuts. Torque
bolts to specifications givenin Table VIII-II.
c. Ascertain that the starter ring gear is properly on the crankshaft flange. The oversize
hole in the starter ring must go over the oversizebushing.
d. Position the prop flange and starter ring gear so the two short bushings are
horizontal. (Refer to Figure 8-4.)
e. Lubricate and install O-ring(15) in prop hub.
f. Place the propeller in a horizontal position and mount to the engine crankshaft.
Check alignment of paint stripe (refer to NOTE under paragraph 8-21).Screw each stud into
its mating engine flange bushing a few threads at a time until all are tight. Torque the studs
to the specifications given in Table VIII-II.
g. Safety studs with MS20995-C41wire. Safety wire is inserted through the roll pins.
h. Install spinner (7). Torque spinner screws (8) and check nut (4) per Table VIII-II.
Safety check nut with MS20995-C41wire.
NOTE
Do not check pressure or charge with PROPELLERin

feather position.
CAUTION
To obtain an accurate pressure reading when checking

propeller dome air pressure or to insure complete release of
all air pressure, place the propeller CONTROLin the feather
detent before measuring or releasing propeller air pressure.
This procedure will insure the free flow of all air within the
prop dome and prevent possible error in pressure readingsor
injury to service personnel should the low pitch stop be
removed.
NOTE
If the propeller is in feather on the ground, it is undesirable

to run it out of feather through engine operation due to
roughness which will occur possibly causingseveredamage to
POWER PLANT
engine mount and exhaust system. Remove the air charge,

unfeather the blades with equal pressure applied by means of
blade paddles used on both blades as close to the hub as
possible. Listen for the quiet distinctive "clicks" of the high
pitch stop pins, then stop and remove the paddles.
i. Charge the cylinder through air valve (3) with dry air or nitrogen gas to the
prescribed pressure. Refer to Table VIII-II of this manual for an exact pressure for the
existing temperature. It is most important that an accurate chargebe maintained.
k. The amount of air pressure per existing temperature, as shown by Table VIII-II, is
very important and should always be used. If excessive pressure is used in the propeller,
there is a possibilityof feathering taking place at idle speed when the engine is warm and the
oil viscosity is low. An accurate air pressure gauge should always be used. A pressure gauge
and valve kit, part number 756 771, may be purchased through a Piper Dealer or
Distributor.
1. When rechargingthe propeller, dry air or nitrogen gas should be used. It is important
not to allow moisture to enter the air chamber as this could cause the piston to freeze
during cold weather operation.
m. Test for leakageby using a soap solution or equivalent and applying it around the air
valve stem and adjustment stop nut.
n. To reinstall engine cowling, first put the propeller in a vertical position then fit the
two halves of the nose cowl together behind the spinner bulkhead and pin them together
with the two hinge pins through the top and bottom hinges. Slide the nose cowl back and
into proper location with the engine cowls. Locate holes and install all hardware that
attaches the cowls together. Install top and side engine cowl panels if removed. Install
spinner cap.
8-24. ADJUSTMENT OF LOW PITCH BLADE ANGLE AND STOP. (PA-23-250;

PA-23-235;and PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504incl.)
a. The propeller comes from the factory with the low pitch stop adjusted for proper
blade angle. If, however, this adjustment has been disturbed, the following procedure is
givenfor obtaining blade angle:
1. The blade angle (refer to Table VIII-II) is determined by placing a propeller
protractor on the face side of the propeller at the 30 inch station as measured from the hub
centerline. The blade must be horizontal.
2. The low pitch stop is adjusted by rotating the blades in the clamps. This is done
by loosening the outer clamp bolts and moving the blades, using a blade bar or plastic
mallet. Rotating the blade 0.031 of an inch at the circumference of the blade shank
ordinarily will change the static RPM by about 100. Torque the 3/8 bolts to 20 to 22
foot-pounds and the 7/16 bolts to 40 foot-pounds.
b. After the low pitch stop has been adjusted for proper blade angle, the governor
should then be adjusted to obtain maximumrated engine RPMduring take-off and climb as
described in paragraph 8-30.
8-25. ADJUSTMENT OF LOW PITCH BLADE ANGLE AND STOP. (PA-23-250(six

place), Serial Nos. 27-2505and up.)
POWER PLANT
NOTE
Both types of propellers referred to, come from the factory

with the low pitch stop adjusted for proper blade angle. If,
however this adjustment has been disturbed, the procedure
given below is used for obtaining blade angle, but applies
only to the propeller without the spring kit A-2273 installed.
There is no way to check the low pitch blade angle of the
propeller, with the spring kit installed, in the field. This is
due to the internal spring producing a force near to that of
the air charge in the standard propeller which can and has to
be released to make this adjustment. The spring supplies
constant pressure to the blades making it very difficult to
rotate the blades to a point where the low pitch stop is
contacted. Therefore, if the blade angle on a spring propeller
is suspected to be wrong it should be referred back to the
Hartzell factory or Certified repair shop.
a. Procedure for obtaining blade angle and adjusting low pitch stop.
1. The blade angle (Refer to Table VIII-II) is determined by placing a propeller
protractor on the face side of the propeller at the 30-inch station as measured from the hub
2. The low pitch stop is adjusted by rotating a screw in the nose of the propeller
cylinder. Rotating the screw clockwise increases the low pitch angle and reduces the static
RPM by about 100 RPM for each half turn, or vice versa.
CAUTION
Before adjusting the low pitch stop screw, the air pressure
should be dropped to zero. Unless this is done, it is possible
to unscrew the low stop far enough to disengagethe threads,
allowing the air pressure to blow the stop screw out with
great force. To insure the complete discharge of all air
pressure within the dome, place the propeller CONTROLin
the feather detent. There should be at least four threads of
the stop screw engaged.
b. After the low pitch stop has been adjusted for proper blade angle, torque the low
pitch stop jam nut to 30 foot-pounds. The governor should then be adjusted to obtain
maximum rated engine RPM during take-off and climb.
POWER PLANT
3B6
8-26. BLADE TRACK. Blade track is the ability of one blade tip to follow the other, while
rotating, in almost exactly the same plane. Excessivedifference in blade track - more than
0.062 of an inch, may be an indication of bent blades or improper propeller installation.
Check blade track as follows:
a. With the engine shut down and blades vertical, secure to the airplane a smooth board
just under the tip of the lower blade. Move the tip fore and aft through its full
"blade-shake" travel, making smallmarks with a pencil at each position. Then center the tip
between these marks and scribea line on the board for the full width of the tip.
b. Carefully rotate propeller by hand to bring the opposite blade down. Center the tip
and scribe a pencil line as before and check that lines are not separated more than 1/16 of
an inch.
c. Propellers having excessive difference in blade track should be removed and
inspected for bent blades, or for parts of sheared "0" ring, or foreign particles, which have
lodged between hub and crankshaft mounting faces. Bent blades will require repair and
overhaul of assembly.
8-27. PROPELLER GOVERNOR.
8-28. REMOVAL OF PROPELLER GOVERNOR.

a. Remove the upper engine cowl per paragraph 8-6 or 8-7.
b. Disconnect the control cable end from the governor control arm.
c. Remove the governor mounting stud nuts. It will be necessaryto move the governor
out from the mounting pad as the nuts are being removed before the nuts can be completely
removed.
d. Remove the mounting gasket. If the governor is to be removed for a considerable
length of time and another unit not substituted, it is advisableto cover the mounting pad to
prevent damagecaused by foreignmatter.
8-29. INSTALLATION OF PROPELLER GOVERNOR.

a. Clean the mounting pad thoroughly, making very certain that there are no foreign
particles in the recess around the drive shaft.
b. Place the governor mounting gasket in position with the raised portion of the screen
facing away from the engine.
c. Align the splines of the governor shaft with the engine drive and slide the governor
into position.
d. With the governor in position, raise the governor enough to install washers and start
mounting nuts. Torque nuts even.
e. Connect the control cable end to the governor control arm. The ball stud is installed
in the inner hole of the control arm.
f. Adjust governor control per paragraph 8-30.
g. Install engine cowl per paragraph 8-9 or 8-10.
POWER PLANT
8-30. RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT OF PROPELLER GOVERNOR. (Refer to Figure

8-5.)
a. Start the engine and warm in the normal manner.
b. To check high RPM, low pitch setting, move the propeller control all the way
forward to the INCREASE PROPELLER position. At this position the governor speed
control arm (3) should be against the high RPM fine adjusting screw (4). With the throttle
full forward, observe engine RPM which should be 2575 RPM with high RPM properly
adjusted.
c. Should engine RPM not be as required, the high RPM setting should be adjusted as
follows:
1. Shut down the engine and remove the upper engine cowl.
2. Adjust the governor by means of the fine adjustment screw (4) for 2575 RPM.
To do this, loosen the high RPM fine adjustment screw locknut and turn the screw in a
clockwise direction to decrease engine speed or in a counterclockwise direction to increase
enginespeed.
NOTE
One revolution of the fine adjustment screw will increase or

decrease the engine speed approximately 20 RPM.
3. Reinstall upper engine cowl and repeat step b to ascertain proper RPM setting.
4. After setting the proper high RPM adjustment, run the self-lockingnut on the
fine adjustment screw against the base projection to lock.
5. Ascertain that the governor control arm (3) is adjusted to the proper angle on
the control wheel (2) as shown in Figure 8-5.
d. With the high RPM adjustment complete, the control system should be adjusted so
that the governor control arm will contact the high RPM stop when the cockpit lever is
0.062 of an inch from its full forward stop, which is located in the control pedestal. To
adjust the control lever travel, disconnect the control cable end from the control arm,
loosen the cable end jam nut and rotate the end to obtain the desired lever clearance.
Reconnect the cable end and tighten jam nut.
e. It is usually only necessary to adjust the high RPM setting of the governor control
system, as the action automatically takes care of the positive high pitch setting.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3B8
3B9
A776
1. BOLT ASSEMBLY
2. CONTROL WHEEL 1 2 3 4 5
3. CONTROL ARM
4. RPM ADJUSTING SCREW
5. LOCKNUT
Figure 8-5. Propeller Governor
8-31. ENGINE.
8-32. REMOVAL OF ENGINE. PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and PA-23-250 (six place),

Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504incl.)
NOTE
On airplanes equipped with fuel injection, refer to

paragraph 8-34 for Removal of Engine.
The removal of either engine is basically the same procedure, though the
routing of some wires, cables, lines, etc. does vary between engines. Each
line should be identified to facilitate reinstallation and covered, where discon-
nected, to prevent contamination.
a. Turn off all cockpit switches and then disconnect the battery ground wire
at the battery.
b. Move the fuel valve control lever located on the outboard side of the fuel
selector panel to the OFF position.
c. Remove the engine cowling per paragraph 8-6.
POWER PLANT
3B10
d. Drain the engine oil, if desired.

e. Remove the propeller per paragraph 8-18.
f . Disconnect the starter cable at the starter, remove the cable clamps at the
left side of the engine and engine mount, and draw the cable aft through the engine
baffle to the firewall.
g. Disconnect generator wires and remove the wire clamps, pull the wires aft
through the engine baffling to the firewall.
h. Disconnect the governor control cable from the governor.
i. Disconnect the vacuum pump lines from the pump.
j. Disconnect the engine oil cooler air duct bellow by means of the square
split type clamp.
k. Disconnect the primer line at the tee connecting fitting.
l. Disconnect the mechanical fuel pump fuel inlet line connected to the right
side of the pump and from the connection at the electric fuel pumps.
m. Disconnect the mechanical fuel pump line from the "Y" connection fitting
at the left side of the pump.
n. Disconnect the "P" leads from the magnetos and the oil temperature wire
at the bulb.
o. Disconnect the tachometer cable, cylinder head temperature thermocouple,
oil pressure line and manifold pressure line.
p. Remove the clamp holding manifold pressure line to the rear baffle.
q. Disconnect the engine breather line from the rear of the engine.
r. Disconnect the oil cooler hoses at the rear of the engine.
s. Remove both magneto cooling baffles and rotate magnetos to clear the
engine mount.
t . Disconnect the hydraulic lines from the pump on the left engine.
u. Remove the bonding straps from the rear of the engine.
v. Remove engine control support bracket by removing bolts attaching bracket
to the engine crankcase.
w. Remove the carburetor mounting nuts and allow the carburetor and carbur-
etor air box to hang by means of the attached engine controls.
x. To prevent damage to the tail when removing the weight of the engine, attach
a stand to the tail skid.
y. Attach a one-half ton (minimum) hoist to the hoisting hook and relieve the
tension on the mounts.
z. Remove the cotter pin, nuts, washers and front rubber mount from each
bolt and remove sleeve. Slide bolts out of attaching points. Swing engine free
and place on a suitable support, being careful not to damage any attached parts,
and remove rear rubber mounts.
POWER PLANT
3B11
3B1l Reissued: 2/18/81
3B12
PIIPER AZTEC SI RVICE MANUAL
2437
24U5
24t12
1 A
SECTIONA-A
SECTIONB-B
SKETCHA
I
I. ul L ul I I *
.. .l lll I . I L I
J. It IJ .
OIJL HIlull I
. L 14ulIL I.IUIII A&t-. I IL. I
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3B13 3B14
8-33. INSTALLATION OF ENGINE. (PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and PA-23-250

(six place). Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504incl.)
NOTE
On airplanes equipped with fuel injection, refer to

paragraph 8-35 for Installation of Engine.
a. Attach a one-half ton hoist to the lifting eye and lift the engine. Tilt the
rear of the engine downward and out of line until the magnetos clear the ring of
the engine mount. Position the mounting lugs of the engine so they align with the
engine mount attaching points.
b. Insert a mounting bolt into the engine mount until its threaded end extends
one or two threads from the mount itself. Slide a shock mount in between the
engine mount and the engine.
c. Repeat the procedures described in step b at the three remaining attach-
ment points.
NOTE
When installing engine, alwaysuse new rubber shock mounts.
d. Install the front engine shock mounts on the bolts and over the forward end
of the mount spacer; check to see that the shock mounts are not binding. Install
a washer and castellated nut on each mounting bolt. Tighten the nuts progress-
ively, following a circular sequence and torque to 40 foot-pounds. Install cotter
pins.
e. Place gasket, carburetor, and carburetor air box to bottom of engine and
attach with nuts and pal nuts.
f. Attach engine control support bracket with controls attached to the bottom
of the engine crankcase with bolts.
g. Install the bonding straps to the rear of the engine.
h. Install both magneto cooling baffles.
i. Connect the oil cooler hoses to rear of engine and hydraulic lines to pump
on left engine.
j. Connect the tachometer cable, cylinder head temperature, oil pressure
line, oil temperature wire and magneto "P" leads.
k. Connect the fuel lines to the fuel pump.
1 . Connect the primer line at tee connection fitting.
m. Connect the vacuum pump hoses.
n. Connect the oil cooler air duct bellows by means of a square split type
clamp.
o. Install the governor control cable bracket and the control cable on the gov-
ernor.
p. Connect the generator wires and clamp them on the rocker arm oil return
lines.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3B15
q. Connect the starter cable and clamp it to the rocker arm oil return lines and engine mount.
r. Ascertain that the magneto switches are off and install the propeller per paragraph 8-20.
s. Install the proper grade and mount of engine oil. (Refer to the latest revision of Lycoming Service
Instruction No. 1241.)
t. Connect the battery ground wire at the .battery.
u. Turn on the fuel valve, open the throttle full, open mixture control and turn on the electric fuel
pump and check the fuel lines for leaks.
v. Perform an engine operational check.
w. Check for oil leaks.
x. Install the access plate on the engine nacelle and the cowling per paragraph 8-9.
8-34. REMOVAL OF ENGINE. (PA-23-250 (six place). Serial Nos. 27-2372 and up.) The removal of either
engine is basically the same procedure, though the routing of some wires, cables, lines, etc. does very between
engines. Each line should be identified to facilitate reinstallation and covered, where disconnected, to prevent
contamination.
a. Turn off all cockpit switches and then disconnect the battery ground wire at the battery.
b. Move the fuel valve control lever, located on the fuel control box between the two front seats, to the
OFF position.
c. Remove the engine cowling per paragraph 8-7.
e. Remove the propeller per paragraph 8-21.
f. Disconnect the starter cable at the starter, remove the cable clamps and pull it aft to the firewall.
g. Disconnect the alternator wires and wire clamps, pull the wires aft to the firewall.
h. Remove the governor control cable and injector control cables.
i. Disconnect the cylinder head temperature, manifold pressure, oil pressure, fuel pressure and fuel
flow gauge vent lines.
j. Disconnect the engine oil breather, magento "P" leads, oil temperature wire and tachometer cable.
k. Disconnect the vacuum hoses, air oil separator line to the engine, oil cooler lines and remove oil
cooler.
l. Disconnect fuel lines at the fuel pump, hydraulic pump lines and bonding straps.
m. Loosen the magneto mounting nuts and rotate the magnetos to clear the engine mount.
POWER PLANT
3B16
3B16
Reissued: 2, 18, 81
n. To prevent damage to the tail when removing the weight of the engine, at-
tach a stand to the tail skid.
o. Attach a one-half ton (minimum) capacity hoist to the engine lifting eye and
relieve the tension on the mount bolts.
p. Remove the cotter pin, nut, washer, front rubber mount and sleeve from
all four mount bolts.
q. Slide mount bolts out of their attaching points and slowly swing engine free.
Place on a suitable support being careful not to damage any attached parts.
r. Remove the rear rubber mounts.
8-35. INSTALLATION OF ENGINE. (PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505and

up.) Refer to Figure 8-7 for the proper arrangement of the engine mount shock assemblies.
The top shocks are assembled so the silver colored shocks are aft and the gold colored
shocks are forward. The lower shock mounts are installedopposite of the top shock mounts.
a. Attach a one-half ton hoist to the lifting strap and lift the engine. The ex-
haust stacks, injector and accessories may be installed.
b. Swing the engine into position with the nose slightly high and inward. Allow
the magnetos to clear the ring of the engine mount. Position the mounting lugs
of the engine so they align with the engine mount attaching points.
NOTE
When installing engine, alwaysuse new rubber shock mounts.
c. Insert a mounting bolt into the engine mount until its threaded and extends
one or two threads from the mount itself. Insert a shock mount between the en-
gine mounting bracket and the mount. Slide the mount bolt on through the mount
and insert a mount spacer over the bolt and through the engine mounting bracket.
d. Repeat the procedures in step c with the remaining three attaching points.
NOTE
A heat shield is installed with the bottom outboard

shock mount. Adjust so as to give maximum protec-
tion against exhaust tube heat.
e. Install the front engine shock mounts on the bolts and over the forward end
washers and self-locking nut on each mounting bolt. Tighten the nuts progress-
ively, following a circular sequence and torque to 34 to 42 foot-pounds.
f. Connect the fuel lines to the fuel pump hydraulic pump lines, left engine
only, and bonding straps.
g. Connect the vacuum hoses, air oil separator line to the engine.
h. Install the oil cooler and connect oil cooler hoses.
POWER PLANT
3B17
3B117 Reissued: 2/18/81
i. Connect engine oil breather, magneto "P" leads, oil temperature wire to
bulb and tachometer cable.
j . Connect cylinder head temperature, manifold pressure, oil pressure, fuel
pressure and fuel flow gauge vent line.
k. Install governor control cable bracket and cable.
1 . Connect injector unit control cables.
m. Connect alternator wires and clamp the wires to rocker arm oil return
lines.
n. Connect starter cable and clamp cable to rocker arm oil return lines.
o. Ascertain that the magneto switches are off and install the propeller per
paragraph 8-23.
p. Install the proper grade and amount of engine oil. (Referto latest revisionof Lycoming
Service Instruction No. 1241.)
q. Connect the battery ground wire at the battery.
r. Turn on the fuel valve, open the throttle full, open mixture control and turn on the
electric fuel pump and check the fuel lines for leaks.
s. Perform an engine operational check.
t. Check for oil leaks.
u. Install the access plates on the engine nacelle and the cowling per paragraph 8-10.
8-36. REMOVAL OF ENGINE MOUNT AND SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES. (Refer to

Figure 8-7.)
a. Remove the engine per Paragraph 8-34.
b. Disconnect all wires and vent lines that are attached to the firewall.
c. Remove the rivetsand screwsthat securethe firewallassemblyand removethe firewall.
d. Remove the bolts that secure the engine mount assembly and remove the mount
assembly.
e. Remove the nacelle top center skin assembly and the accessplate on the rear section
assembly.
f. Disconnect the landing gear actuating cylinder, remove the bolts that secures the
engine mount support assembly and remove the support assembly.
8-37. INSTALLATION OF ENGINE MOUNT AND SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES. (Refer

to Figure 8-7.)
a. Position the engine mount support assembly,connect landing gear actuating cylinder
and secure support assemblywith appropriate bolts. Do not torque the bolts at this time.
b. Position the enginemount assemblyand secure with appropriate bolts. Do not torque
the bolts at this time.
c. Shim the front mounts of the support assemblyand lower mounts of the enginemount
assembly as required (not to exceed .125). Refer to Parts Catalog for shim part nos.
d. Torque support assembly mounting bolts to 50-70 inch-pounds and the lower
mounting bolts of the engine mount assembly to 160-190inch-pounds.
e. Position the firewall, secure it with appropriate rivets (AN441-3-3P and
AN426AD3-3)and screws.
f. Connect all wires and vent lines previously disconnected.
g. Install the nacelle to center skin assembly, accessplate on the rear section assembly.
h. Install the engine per Paragraph 8-35.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3B18
2481
19 12
NOTE
LUBRICATE THREADS OF EXHAUST

STACK ATTACHMENT NUTS WITH FEL
PRO AND TORQUE NUTS TO 160-180
INCH-POUNDS.
1. OIL COOLER 19. EXHAUST STACK

2. MAGNETO, LEFT 20. NUT
3. OIL FILTER 21. ENGINE MOUNT FITTING
4. VACUUM PUMP 22. BUSHING
5. ENGINE MOUNT ASSEMBLY 23. BOLT
(SEE SKETCH A) 24. ENGINE MOUNT FRAME
6. SHOCK MOUNT 25. WASHER
7. OIL PRESSURERELIEFVALVE 26. ENGINE MOUNT SUPPORTASSEMBLY
8. FUEL INJECTOR MANIFOLD 27. BOLTS TORQUE 50-70 IN. LBS.
9. LIFTING STRAP 28. SHIMS (NOT TO EXCEED.125)
10. AIR BLEED NOZZLE 29. ENGINE MOUNT ASSEMBLY
11. STARTER RING GEAR 30. BOLT TORQUE 160-190 IN. LBS.
12. SPARK PLUG 31. SHIM (NOT TO EXCEED.125)
13. FUEL PUMP 32. FIREWALL ASSEMBLY
14. HYDRAULIC PUMP 33. RIVETS AN441-3-3P 18 REQ.
15. OIL SUCTION SCREEN 34. RIVETSAN426AD3-3 11 REQ.
16. MAGNETO, RIGHT
17. FUEL INJECTOR
18. INDUCTION INTAKES
Figure 8-7. Engine Installation, PA-23-250 (six place)

POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3B19
2444
A 20 6 21 22 23 24
25
20
6
SECTIONA-A
SECTIONB-B
A706
32
SKETCHA
L
A707
34
SKETCHC
SKETCHB
Figure 8-7. Engine Installation, PA-23-250 (six place)
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3B20
8-38. ENGINE SHOCK MOUNTS. Replace at engine T.B.O. or on condition.
NOTE
Reasons for replacing mounts on condition and prior to

engine TBO are:
1. Severe cracking of rubber.
2. Signs of high temperature or burning.
3. Separation of rubber from metal surfaces.
4. Excessive "sag" or permanent deflection resulting
in internal bottoming with spacer, engine and cowl
interference, unusual vibration.
8-39. REPLACING ENGINE SHOCK MOUNTS. The engine shock mounts may be
replaced with the engine installed as well as removed from the airplane. Refer to Figure 8-6
or 8-7 for the arrangement of the shock mount assemblies. On PA-23-250 (six place), Serial
Nos. 27-2505 and up, the top mounts are assembled so the silver colored shocks are aft and
the gold colored shocks are forward. The lower shock mounts are installed opposite of the
top shock mounts. The procedure described in this paragraph is with the engine installed.
a. Remove the engine cowling. (Refer to Paragraph 8-6 or 8-7.)
b. Attach a one-half ton (minimum) hoist to the engine hoisting hooks and relieve
tension from the shock mounts.
c. Loosen the upper shock mount attaching nuts.
d. Remove the lower mount attaching nuts, washers, heat shield, forward shock
mounts and spacers.
e. Remove the lower attaching bolts just far enough to allow the aft shock mounts to
be removed. The bushing in each lower mount must be removed with the bolt.
POWER PLANT
CAUTION
Care should be taken not to introduce adversestresseson the

control cables, electrical cables, hoses and other items
attached to the engine while hoisting the engine.
f. Raise the nose of the engine enough to remove the lower aft shock mounts and
replace with new ones.
g. Lower the engine, slide the attaching bolts with bushings into place and install the
spacers, forward shock mounts, heat shield, washersand nuts. Start nuts only a few threads.
Rotate the shield to provide greatest protection against exhaust heat.
h. Remove the upper mount attaching bolts, nuts, washers,forward shock mounts and
spacers.
i. Lower the engine enough to replace the upper aft shock mounts. Raise the engine
into position.
j. Install the spacers, forward shock mounts, mounting bolts, washersand nuts.
k. Tighten attaching bolts 34 to 42 foot-pounds.
8-40. CARBURETOR. (PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial

Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504incl.)
8-41. CARBURETOR MAINTENANCE. In general, little attention is required

between carburetor overhauls. However, it is recommended that the following items be
checked during periodic inspection of the engine.
a. Check tightness and lockwire of all nuts and screws which fasten the car-
buretor to the engine.
b. Check all fuel lines for tightness and evidence of leakage.
c. Check throttle and mixture control rods and levers for travel, tightness
and lockwiring.
d. Clean the fuel inlet screen. (Refer to Figure 8-8.)
e. Remove plug at aft position of carburetor and drain any accumulation of
foreign matter.
f. Check carburetor air box for wear and full travel of heat door.
g. Check adjustment of idle mixture and idle speed.
POWER PLANT
8-42. REMOVALOF CARBURETOR.

a. Ascertain that the fuel selector on the fuel control box inside the cabin is in the off
position.
b. Removethe bottom section of the cowlingas described in paragraph 8-6 or 8-7.
c. Disconnectthe throttle and mixture control cables at the carburetor.
d. Disconnectthe fuel lines at the carburetor.
e. Disconnect the air box by removing safety wire and cap bolts. Allow box to swing
free of carburetor.
f. Removethe pal locknuts and nuts securingthe carburetor to the engine.
g. Removethe carburetor.
8-43. INSTALLATIONOF CARBURETOR.

a. Position the carburetor and a new gasket to the engine, and secure with nuts and pal
locknuts.
b. Attach the carburetor air box with gasket and secure with cap bolts. Safety bolts
with MS20995-C41wire.
c. Connect the fuel lines to the carburetor.
d. Connect the throttle and mixture cables to the carburetor and adjust as describedin
paragraph 8-44.
e. Check adjustment of idle mixture as describedin paragraph 8-45.
f. Check the adjustment of idling speed as describedin paragraph 8-46.
g. Check the area around the carburetor for evidenceof fuel leakage.
8-44. ADJUSTMENT OF THROTTLE AND MIXTURE CONTROLS. Throttle and

mixture controls are adjusted so that when the throttle arm on the carburetor is rotated
forward against its full throttle stop and the mixture control is rotated forward against its
full rich stop, the cockpit control knob or lever of the throttle and mixture should have
0.062 of an inch springbackwhen in the forward position.
a. The throttle may be adjusted as follows:
1. At the carburetor, disconnect the clevis end of the throttle control cable from
the control arm. Loosen the jam nut that securesthe clevisend.
2. Adjust the linkage by rotating the clevisend on the cable to obtain 0.062 of an
inch springbackwhen the control is in the forward position.
3. Reconnect the clevisend to the control arm and safety.
b. The mixture may be adjusted as follows:
1. At the carburetor, loosen the swivelfitting that connects the wire of the control
cable to the mixture arm.
POWER PLANT
3B23
3B 23 Reissued: 2/18/81
2. Reposition the swivel fitting

on the wire to obtain 0.062 of an inch
spring back between the knob and plate
when the mixture control arm is against
its stop.
3. Tighten the swivel fitting and
safety. The control wire should be
straightened to align with the control
cable casing after tighteningthe swivel
fitting.
c. Check security of cable casing l
attachments.J
d. Pull throttle and mixture knob in
cockpit full aft to ascertain that the idle
screw contacts its stop and the mixture
control arm contacts its lean position.
1. IDLE MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT
2. MIXTURE CONTROL ARM
8-45. ADJUSTMENT OF IDLE MIX- 3. BOWL DRAIN
4. FUEL INLET SCREEN
TURE. 5.THROTTLE ARM
M
6. IDLE ADJUSTMENT
7. ARM SET SCREW
WARNING Figure 8-8. Carburetor

When performing engine warm-up
indoors, provide a barrier about the
engine to prevent serious injury.
Also, provide adequate means of
ventilating the work area.
a. After performing the standard engine starting procedure, operate the engine for at
least two minutes between 800 and 1200RPM to insure proper engine warm-up.
b. Draw back on the cockpit throttle control leverto obtain a reading of approximately
550 RPM on the tachometer.
c. Turn the idle adjustment screw, located near the rear of the carburetor, clockwise,
leaning the fuel mixture. Continue to do this until the engine begins to run roughly.
at which time the engine speed will decrease.
d. Turn the screw counterclockwise until the engine runs smoothly again. Continue
to turn the screw in the same direction until the engine begins to run roughly once more. At
this point, the fuel mixture will be too rich and engine speed will decrease again.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2, 1881
3B24
e. Now advance the screw to a midway position between the lean and rich fuel
mixture; the RPM of the engine will reach a maximum speed for idle mixture
settings.
8-46. ADJUSTMENT OF ENGINE IDLING SPEED.

a. Pull back the cockpit throttle control lever until, it is completely aft and in
the closed position. Observe the engine speed on the tachometer.
b. Adjust the idle adjustment screw to obtain from 550 to 600 RPM. Rotate
screw clockwise to increase the speed of the engine; counterclockwise to decrease
engine speed. The screw is located on the throttle arm.
NOTE
One complete revolution of the carburetor idle screw

provides a variation of approximately 100 RPM in idling
speed.
8-47. FUEL INJECTOR. (Serial Nos. 27-2322and up.)
CAUTION
Extreme caution should be exercised when handling or

working around the injector to prevent oil or fuel from
entering the air sections of the injector. As explained
previously, damage to the air diaphragm will result. Fluid can
easily enter the air section of the injector through the impact
tubes or the annular groove around the venturi. For this
reason, a protective plate should be installed on the scoop
mounting flange when performing routine maintenance on
the engine, such as washing down the engine and air scoop,
servicing the air filter (surplus oil on the element), or when
injecting preservative into the engine prior to storing or
shipping.
8-48. FUEL INJECTOR MAINTENANCE.

a. In general, little attention is required between injector overhauls. How-
ever, it is recommended that the following items be checked during periodic in-
spection of the engine.
1. Check tightness and lock of all nuts and screws which fasten the injector
to the engine.
2. Check all fuel lines for tightness and evidence of leakage. A slight fuel
stain adjacent to the air bleed nozzles is not cause for concern.
3. Check throttle and mixture control rods and levers for tightness and
lock.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3C1
2196
FUEL FLOW
INDICATOR
FUEL INLET FUEL STRAINER FLOWDIVIDER
1/8 INCH O.D. STAINLESS

STEEL LINE
NOZZLE
(ONE PER CYLINDER)
FLOW DIVIDER VALVE

SECTION - AA
IDLE VALVELEVER
CONNECTED TO
THROTTLE LEVER MANUAL MIXTURE
LINKAGE CONTROL AND IDLE
CUT-OFF LEVER
VALVE
R
AIR
TUBE
FUEL DIAPHRAGM
BALL SERVO VALVE-
Figure 8-9. Schematic of RSA Fuel Injection System
POWER PLANT
Reissued:2/18/81
3C2
4. Remove and clean the injector fuel inlet strainer at each 50 hour inspec-
tion. Damaged strainer "O" rings should be replaced.
b. Tests prove that gasoline which becomes stale due to prolonged storage
absorbs oxygen rapidly. This stale oxidized gasoline acquires a very distinctive
odor similar to varnish; causes rapid deterioration of synthetic rubber parts;
and also forms a gummy deposit on the internal metal parts. This condition,
however, does not occur during normal operation of the injector where fresh fuel
is being constantly circulated.
8-49. LUBRICATION OF FUEL INJECTOR.

a. There is very little need for lubrication of the injector in the field between
regular overhauls. However, the clevis pins used in connection with the throttle
and manual mixture control levers should be checked for freedom of movement
and lubricated, if necessary.
b. Place a drop of engine grade oil on the end of the throttle shaft in such a
manner that it can work into the throttle shaft bushings.
8-50. REMOVAL OF FUEL INJECTOR, NOZZLE LINES, FUEL LINES AND FUEL
FLOW DIVIDER.
a. Remove engine cowling. (Refer to Paragraph 8-6 or 8-7.)
b. Disconnect throttle and mixture control cables at the injector.
c. Remove air box by removing bottom access panel on the air box and remove
four attaching screws holding air box to the injector unit.
d. Disconnect fuel inlet line at the injector.
e. Disconnect fuel outlet line to the flow divider at the injector.
f. Remove attaching nuts and remove injector unit.
g. Disconnect the nozzle lines from the air bleed nozzles.
h. Disconnect the fuel flow meter line at the rear baffle.
i . Disconnect the inlet fuel line at the flow divider.
j. Remove the two attaching bolts and remove fuel flow divider and nozzle
lines as a unit.
k. Removeair bleed nozzles, (Refer to Paragraph 8-56.)
8-51. PREPARATION FOR STORAGE. Any unit taken out of service, or units being
returned for overhaul, must be flushed with preservingoil (Specification MIL-O-6081,Grade
1010). using the following procedure:
POWER PLANT
3C3 3C3 Reissued: 2/18/81

CAUTION
Do not exceed air pressure given in step a, below as internal

damage to the injector may result. See additional CAUTION
in Paragraph 8-47.
a. Remove plugs and drain all fuel from the injector. If available,apply 10 to 15 psi air
pressure to the fuel inlet until all fuel is dischargedfrom the injector.
b. Replace plugs and apply flushing oil filtered through a 10-micron filter at 13 to 15
psi to the injector inlet until oil is dischargedfrom the outlet.
c. Replace fuel inlet shippingplug.
d. After filling with preservative oil, the injector should be protected from
dust and dirt and given such protection against moisture as climatic conditions
at the point of storage require. In most cases, storing the unit in a dry area
will be sufficient.
e. If the unit is to be stored near or shipped over salt water, the following
precautions should be observed:
1. Spray the exterior of the injector with an approved preservative oil.
2. Pack in a dustproof container, wrap the container with moisture and
vapor-proof material, and seal. Pack the wrapped unit in a suitable shipping
case. Pack a one-half pound bag of silica gel crystals in the dustproof container
with injector. The bag must not touch the injector.
CAUTION
Extreme caution shouldbe exercised when handlingor

entering the air sections of the injector.
8-52. INSTALLATION OF FUEL INJECTOR.

a. Install air bleed nozzles. (Refer to Paragraph 8-58.)
b. Install fuel flow divider and nozzle lines, attach divider to the crankcase
with attaching bolts and connect lines to nozzles.
c. Connect the inlet fuel line and fuel flow meter line.
d. Install a gasket and attach the injector unit to the engine sump with washers
and nuts.
e. Install the air box with attaching bolts and attach bottom access plate with
screws.
f. Connect the throttle and mixture control cables. Check and adjust controls
as described in paragraph 8-53.
g. Connect the inlet and outlet fuel lines.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3C4
h. Install the cowling as described in paragraph 8-9 or 8-10.

i . Adjust the idle speed and mixture of the injector as described inparagraph
8-54.
8-53. ADJUSTMENT OF THROTTLE AND MIXTURE CONTROLS. The throttle

and mixture controls are adjusted so that when the throttle arm on the injector
is rotated forward against its full throttle stop and the mixture arm is rotated
forward against its full rich stop, their respective cockpit control levers should
be 0.062 to 0.125 of an inch in from their full forward stops, which are located
in the control pedestal.
a. At the injector, disconnect the throttle and/or mixture control cable end
from its control arm.
b. Loosen the jam nut securing the cable end.
c. Adjust the linkage by rotating the cable end to obtain the 0.062 to 0.125 of
an inch spring back of the cockpit control lever when the throttle or mixture con-
trol arm contacts its stop.
d. Reconnect the cable end to its control arm and secure jam nut.
e. Pull the throttle and mixture control lever in the cockpit full aft to ascer-
tain that the injector idle screw contacts its stop and the mixture control arm
contacts its lean position.
8-54. ADJUSTMENT OF IDLE SPEED AND MIXTURE.

a. Start the engine and warm up inthe usual manner until oil and cylinder head
temperatures are normal.
b. Check magnetos. If the "mag-drop" is normal, proceed with idle adjust-
ment.
c. Close the throttle to idle. If the RPM changes appreciably after making
the idle mixture adjustment during the succeeding steps, readjust the idle speed
to the desired RPM.
NOTE
The idle mixture must be adjusted with the fuel boost

pump ON.
d. When the idling speed has been stabilized, move the cockpit mixture control
lever with a smooth, steady pull toward the Idle Cut-Off position and observe
the tachometer for any change during the "leaning" process. Caution must be
exercised to return the mixture control to the Full Rich position before the RPM
can drop to a point where the engine cuts out. An increase of more than 50 RPM
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3C5
1. IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT

3. MIXTURE ARM
4. FUEL SCREEN
Figure 8-10. Fuel Injector
while "leaning out" indicates an excessively rich idle mixture. An immediate

decrease inRPM (if not preceded by a momentary increase) indicates idle mixture
is too lean.
e. If the above indicates that the idle adjustment is too rich or too lean, turn
the idle mixture adjustment in the direction required for correction, and check
this new position by repeatingthe above procedure. Make additional adjustments
as necessary. Each time the adjustment is changed, the engine should be run up
to 2000 RPM to clear the engine before proceeding with the RPM check. Make
final adjustment of the idle speed adjustment to obtain from 550 to 600 RPM
with closed throttle. The above method aims at a setting that will obtain maxi-
mum RPM with minimum manifold pressure. In case the setting does not remain
stable, check the idle linkage; any looseness in this linkage would cause erratic
idling. In all cases, allowance should be made for the effect of weather conditions
and field altitude upon idling adjustment.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3C6
8-55. FUEL AIR BLEED NOZZLE.
8-56. REMOVAL OF FUEL AIR BLEED

NOZZLE. The nozzles must be carefully
removed as they or the cylinders may be
damaged.
a. Remove the engine cowl. (Refer
to paragraph 8-6 or 8-7.)
b. Disconnect the fuel line from the
nozzle.
c. Carefully remove the nozzle, using
the correct size deep socket.
d. Clean and inspect the nozzle as
given in paragraph 8-57.
74591
Figure 8-11. Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle
8-57. CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF FUEL AIR BLEED NOZZLE.
CAUTION
Do not immerse "O" rings in cleaning fluid. The rings may

swell.
a. Clean the nozzle with acetone or equivalent and blow out all foreignparticles with
compressed air in the direction opposite that of the fuel flow. Do not use wire or other hard
objects to clean orifices. (Refer to latest revision Lycoming Service Instruction No. 1275.)
b. Inspect the nozzle and cylinder threads for nicks, stripping or cross-threading.
c. Inspect for battered or rounded hexagons.
d. A test procedure for air bleed nozzlesis described in latest revision LycomingService
Instructions No. 1275.
8-58. INSTALLATION OF FUEL AIR BLEED NOZZLES.

a. It is important for the nozzles to be correctly positioned with the air bleed hole
facing up.
b. Install the nozzles and tighten the nozzles to a little less than 60 inch-pounds torque.
c. Continue to tighten the nozzles until the letter or number stamped on the hex of the
nozzle is facingdown. In this position the air bleed hole will be facing up.
NOTE
Do not exceed 60 inch-pounds torque on nozzles when

aligningair bleed hole.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3C7
1 CONTACTSPRING 6. CAPACITOR 11. DELETED

2. RETAININGSPRING 7 BREAKERASSEMBLY 12. LEADCIRCUIT
3 DISTRIBUTOR BLOCK 8. BREAKERCAM 13. CONTACTSPRING
4 BREAKERCOMPARTMENT 9 IMPULSECOUPLING 14. INSULATOR
5 LEADWIRE 10. FLYWEIGHTS 15. VENTPLUG
Figure 8-12. Magneto Inspection
CAUTION
Start the nozzle and line coupling by hand to prevent the
possibilityof cross-threading.
d. Connect the fuel line to the nozzle.

e. Install the engine cowl. (Refer to Paragraph 8-9 or 8-10.)
8-59. MAGNETO.
CAUTION
Ascertain that the primary circuits of both magnetos are

grounded before working on the engine.
8-60. INSPECTION OF MAGNETOS. At time of engine inspection or when a magneto has

been removed from the engine, the following checks may be performed. Each step in the
checklist is keyed by number to a part shown in Figure 8-12.
POWER PLANT
3C8
3C8 Reissued: 2 18/81
926
0.422 MAX
MEASURE BODY
THICKNESS HERE
Figure 8-13. Contact Spring Figure 8-14. Impulse Coupling

Inspection
a. Inspect distributor block contact springs. Top of spring must not be more than
0.422 inches below top of tower. (Refer to Figure 8-13.) If broken or corroded, they should
be replaced.
b. Inspect oil felt washer. It should be saturated with oil. If dry, check for worn
bushing. If O.K., add No. 30 oil.
c. Inspect distributor block for cracks or burned areas. The wax coating on the block
should not be removed. Do not use solvents.
d. Look for excess oil in breaker compartment. If present, it may mean a bad oil seal or
oil seal bushing at drive end. Checkmanufacturer's overhaul procedure.
e. Look for frayed insulation or broken wire strands in leads in back of magneto. See
that terminals are secure. Be sure wiresare properly positioned.
f. Inspect capacitor visually. If possible,test for leakage, capacity and seriesresistance.
Remember, an electrical failure of an aircraft capacitor is rare.
g. Adjustment of breakers must be correct for proper internal timing of magneto.
(Refer to paragraph 8-62.)
h. Check if breaker cam is clean and smooth, if cam screw is tight (25 inch-pounds).If
new points are installed, blot a little oil on cam.
i. Inspect impulse coupling (-21 magneto) flyweights for excessive looseness on the
axles. Designcouplings having0.927 inch thick body are checked with a 1/8 drill. Couplings
having 0.974 inch thick body are checked with a No. 18 drill. If drill fits between cam and
flyweight, the fit is too loose and coupling should be replaced. (Refer to Figure 8-14.)
j. Check impulse coupling for excess wear on the contact edges of body and
flyweights.
k. Check that the impulse coupling flyweight axle rivets are tight and there are no
cracks in body.
POWER PLANT
1. Look at the lead conduits. A few broken strands won't hurt, but if the insulation
looks tired, you may be in for trouble. The special high temperature coating, used on
lightweight harnesses, is provided chiefly for vibration resistance and mechanicalprotection.
The integrity of the harness is not sacrificed if small areas of the braid show peeling or
flaking of this coating.
m. Check the springs for breaks, corrosion or deformation. If possible, check continuity
from block with tester or light.
n. Check insulators for cracks, breaks, or evidenceof "old age." Be sure they are clean.
o. Timing and ventilator plugs. Ventilator has drilled holes and should be in lowest hole
in magneto to serve also as drain for excess water or oil. Solid plug is used in other hole or in
location exposed to rain or water.
NOTE
The magneto service instructions in this manual are to cover

minor repairs and timing. For further repairs and adjustments
of the magnetos, it is recommended that the manufacturer's
service instructions be followed.
8-61. REMOVAL OF MAGNETO. Before removing the magneto, make sure magneto
switches are off.
a. Remove the engine accessplates from the side of the engine to be worked on.
b. On PA-23-250; PA-23-235;and PA-23-250(six place) airplanes, SerialNos. 27-2000
to 27-2504 inclusive,remove the magneto coolingbaffles.
WARNING
The magneto is not internally grounded; when the ground

lead is disconnected, the magneto is hot. Removing the
harness assembly terminal plate first and installing them last
minimizes the danger of starting the engine accidentally when
the ground lead is removed from the magneto.
c. Remove the harness assembly terminal plate from the magneto.

d. Disconnect the ground leads from the left and/or right magneto and, where
applicable, the retard spark lead on the left magneto, at the magneto.
e. Remove the nuts and washersand draw the magneto from the engine.
POWER PLANT
3C10
8-62. TIMING PROCEDURE. (Internal Timing) (-20 and -200 Series Magnetos).
When installingnew or adjusting breaker points and before timing the magneto to the engine,
it is important that the internal timing of the magneto be correct.
a. Timing procedures for magnetos without timing marks inthe breaker com-
partment.
1. Attach a timing template and pointer as follows:
(a) Using two 8-32 RH screws 1/4 inch long, secure timing template
to bottom of breaker housing. (Refer to Figure 8-17.)
(b) Attach a pointer to the magneto cam.
NOTE
A timing kit, including timing plate, etc., may be pur-

chased through the engine or magneto manufacturer.
NOTE
A pointer maybeformed as showninFigure 8-16using

soft wire. Solder formed wire to a flat washer similar
to the one used with cam screw. A pointer can also
be made by wrapping a piece of soft wire tightly around
the head of the cam securing screw and bending it to
extend to the timing template. Position pointer at the
zero mark when rotor is in its neutral position.
2. Remove the timing inspection plug from the top of the magneto. Turn
rotating magnet in its direction of rotation until the painted chamfered tooth on
the distributor gear is approximately in center of inspection window. Then turn
it back until rotating magnet locates in its neutral position.
3. Remove cam screw and flat washer from cam shaft if pointer was fab-
ricated as in preceding note. Holding magnet in neutral position, install timing
pointer on cam shaft so it indexes with the 0 degree mark on the timing plate.
Secure pointer in this position with cam screw.
4. Turn rotating magnet in proper rotation until pointer indexes with the
respective 10 degree mark ("E" gap). Usingthe timinglight, adjust main breaker
contacts to open at this point. Turn rotating magnet until breaker cam follower
is on the high point of the cam lobe. Measure contact clearance. It must be
0.018 + 0.006 of an inch. If not, readjust breaker and recheck to be sure that
contacts will open within "E" gap tolerance of + 4 degrees. Replace breaker
assembly if "E" gap tolerance and contact clearance cannot be obtained.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3Cll
RED OR
WHITE TOOTH
WASHER
TIMING MARK-
Figure 8-15. Magneto Timing Marks Figure 8-16. Timing Pointer
5. On retard breaker magnetos, the retard breaker is adjusted to open

37.5 degrees after the main breaker opens within +2 -0 degrees. The degree of
retard for any particular magneto is stamped in the bottom of the breaker com-
partment for convenience. At the exact point of main breaker opening, note the
degree reading. Add the degrees retard to this noted reading to determine retard
breaker opening point. Using the timing light, adjust retard breaker to open at
this point +2 -0 degrees. Measure contact clearance. It must be 0.018 + 0.006
of an inch. If not, readjust breaker and recheck to be sure that contacts will open
within retard degree tolerance. Replace breaker assembly if retard degree tol-
erance and contact clearance cannot be obtained. Remove pointer and replace
flat washer, lockwasher and screw. Torque to 16 to 20 inch-pounds.
b. Timing procedure for magnetos incorporating timing marks inthe breaker
compartment.
1. On each side of the breaker compartment there are timing marks indi-
cating "E" gap and various degrees of retard breaker timing. The marks on the
left hand side, viewed from the breaker compartment, are for clockwise rotation.
The marks on the right hand side are for counterclockwise rotation. The timing
marks indicate "O" position, "E" gap and various degrees of magneto retard.
The point in the center of the "E" gap boss indicates the exact "E" gap position.
The width of the boss on either side of the point is the allowable tolerance of + 4
degrees. (Refer to Figure 8-18.) In addition to these marks, some cams have
an indented line across their end for locating "E" gap position of the rotating
magnet when aligned with the mark at the top of the breaker housing.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3C12
2. If the cam does not have an indented line across its end, proceed as
follows:
(a) Turn rotating magnet in direction of rotation until painted chamfered
tooth on distributor gear is approximately in center of inspection window. Then
turn rotating magnet back until it locates in its neutral position.
(b) Attach a pointer. A pointer may be fabricated as shown in Figure
8-16. Remove cam screw and flat washer from cam. Holding magnet in neutral
position, install pointer on cam shaft so it indexes with the 0 degree mark. Se-
cure pointer in this position with cam screw.
(c) Turn rotating magnet in proper rotation until pointer indexes with
"E" gap mark. At this point, scribe a line on end of cam so it indexes with mark
at top of breaker compartment. Remove cam from magnet shaft. Using a three
corner file, file an indent on scribe mark at end of cam.
(d) Install cam, pointer and cam screw to magnet shaft and time mag-
neto in accordance with the following paragraphs.
3. Turn rotating magnet in direction of rotation until painted chamfered
tooth of distributor gear is just becoming visible in timing window. Continue
turning rotating magnet until line on end of cam is aligned with the mark at top
of breaker housing.
4. Attach a pointer. A formed pointer is installed by removing cam screw
and flat washer from cam shaft of magneto and install pointer.
NOTE
A pointer can be made by wrapping a piece of soft

wire tightly around the head of cam securing screw
and bending to extend over timing marks in breaker
compartment.
5. With indented slot on cam aligned to the mark at top of breaker com-
partment and with painted chamfered tooth on distributor gear visible in timing
window, set pointer on the "E" gap mark on side of breaker compartment. (The
magnet is at its exact "E" gap position.) Connect the timing light across main
breaker. Adjust main breaker contacts to open at this point. Turn magnet until
cam follower is on the high point of the cam lobe. Measure contact clearance.
It must be 0.018 + 0.006 of an inch. If necessary, readjust breaker and recheck
to be sure that contacts will open within "E" gap tolerance. Replace breaker
assembly if "E" gap tolerance and contact clearance cannot be obtained.
6. On retard breaker magnetos, the retard breaker is set to open a pre-
determined number of degrees after the main breaker opens within +2 -0 degrees.
The degree of retard for any particular magneto is stamped in the lower portion
of left hand side of the breaker compartment. (Refer to Figure 8-18.) Move the
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3C13
Figure 8-17. Timing Kit Installed Figure 8-18. Breaker Compartment

With Cast Timing Marks
rotating magnet back to the point of main breaker opening. Hold the magnet in
this position and move pointer to the "O" mark. Now turn magnet until pointer
is over the required retard degree mark. Using the timing light, adjust retard
breaker contacts to open at this point. A tolerance of .062 of an inch past the
point can be used to get proper contact clearance. Continue turning magnet until
cam follower is on the high point of the lobe. Measure contact clearance. It
should be 0.018 + 0.006 of an inch. If not, readjust breaker and recheck to be
sure that contacts will open within retard degree tolerance. Replace breaker
assembly if retard degree tolerance and contact clearance cannot be obtained.
8-63. INSTALLATION AND TIMING PROCEDURE. (Timing Magneto to Engine.)

a. Remove a spark plug from No. 1 cylinder and turn crankshaft in direction
of normal rotation until the compression stroke is reached.
b. Continue turning the crankshaft until the advance timing mark on the starter
ring gear is in alignment with the small hole located onthe top face of the starter
housing at the two o'clock position. (Refer to Figure 8-19.)
c. Remove the inspection plug on the left magneto and turn the drive coupling
in direction of normal rotation until the first painted chamfered tooth is aligned
in the center of the inspection hole. (Refer to Figure 8-15.) Without allowing
the gear to turn from this position, assemble gasket and magneto to the engine.
Secure in place with washers and nuts; tighten only finger tight.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3C14
d. Fasten ground wire of electric timing light to any unpainted portion of the
engine, and one of the positive wire of the timing light to a suitable terminal con-
nected to the ground terminal of the magneto. Then turn the engine crankshaft
several degrees from the advance timing mark in direction opposite to that of
normal rotation.
NOTE
Impulse Coupling Magneto - The crankshaft should not

be rotated more than 35 in direction opposite normal
rotation, as the pawl on the impulse coupling will en-
gage with the stop pin and late timing will be indicated
through the impulse coupling mechanism. If this
should happen, rotate engine in direction of normal
rotation until sharp click is heard, which will indicate
that impulse coupling has passed through firing posi-
tion; then turn crankshaft in direction opposite normal
rotation to approximately 35° before top center and
proceed with timing check.
e. Turn on the switch of the timing light, which should be lit. Turn the crank-
shaft slowly in direction of normal rotation until the mark on the starter gear
aligns with the hole in the starter housing, at which point the light should go out.
If not, turn the magneto in its mounting flange and repeat the procedure until the
light goes out. Repeat the same procedures with the right magneto.
NOTE
Battery powered timing lights operate in the reverse

manner from that described above; the light goes on
when the marks align.
f. After both magnetos have been timed, leave the timing light wires connected
and recheck magnetos as previously described to make sure that both magnetos
are set to fire together. If timing is correct, both timing lights will go out sim-
ultaneously when the timing marks are in alignment. Tighten nuts to specified
torque.
g. After magnetos have been properly timed, replace breaker cover and se-
cure.
h. Install the ground lead on both magnetos and the retard spark lead, if re-
quired, on the left magneto.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3C15
i. Place the harness terminal plate

on the magneto and tighten nut around
the plate alternately to seat cover
squarely on magneto. Torque nuts to
18 to 22 inch-pounds.
8-64. HARNESS ASSEMBLY.
8-65. INSPECTION OF HARNESS.

a. Check lead assemblies for nicks,
cuts, mutilated braiding, badly worn
section or any other evidence of phys-
ical damage. Inspect sparkplug sleeves
for chafing or tears and damaged or Figure 8-19. Engine Timing Marks
stripped threads on coupling nuts.
Check compression spring to see if it is broken or distorted. Inspect grommet
for tears. Check all mounting brackets and clamps to see that they are secure
and not cracked.
b. Using an ohmmeter, buzzer, or other suitable low voltage device, check
each lead for continuity. If continuity does not exist, wire is broken and must
be replaced.
c. Minor repair of the harness assembly, such as replacement of contact
springs, spring retainer assemblies, insulating sleeves or of one lead assembly,
can be accomplished with the harness assembly mounted on the engine. However,
should repair require replacement of more than one lead assembly or of a cable
outlet plate, the harness should be removed from the engine and sent to an over-
haul shop.
8-66. REMOVAL OF HARNESS.

a. Disconnect the clamps that secure the wires to the engine and accessories.
b. Loosen the coupling nuts at the spark plugs and remove the insulators
from the spark plug barrel well. Use caution when withdrawing the insulator
not to damage the insulator spring.
c. Place a guard over the harness insulators.
d. Remove the harness assembly terminal plate from the magneto.
e. Remove the engine baffle plate that receives the harness assembly.
f. Remove the harness from the airplane.
POWER PLANT
Reissued:2/18/81
316
8-67. INSTALLATION OF HARNESS. Before installing harness on magneto, check

mating surfaces for cleanliness.Spray entire face of grommet with a light coat of Plastic Mold
Spray, SM-O-O-TH Silicone Spray or equivalent. This will prevent harness grommet from
sticking to magneto distributor block.
a. Place the harness terminal plate on the magneto and tighten nuts around
the plate alternately to seat cover squarely on magneto. Torque nuts to 18 to
22 inch-pounds.
b. Route ignition wires to their respective cylinders.
c. Clamp the harness assembly in position and replace the engine baffle plate.
d. Connect the leads to the spark plugs.
8-68. SPARK PLUGS.
8-69. REMOVAL OF SPARK PLUGS.

a. Loosen the coupling nut on the harness lead and remove the terminal insu-
lator from the spark plug barrel well.
NOTE
When withdrawing the ignition cable lead connection

from the plug, care must be taken to pull the lead
straight out and in line with the center line of the plug
barrel; otherwise, a side load will be applied which
frequently results in damage to the barrel insulator
and connector. If the lead cannot be removed easily
in this manner, the resisting contact between the neo-
prene collar and the barrel insulator will be broken
by a rotary twisting of the collar. Avoid undue dis-
tortion of the collar and possible side loading of the
barrel insulator.
b. Remove the spark plug from the engine. In the course of engine operation,
carbon and other combustion products will be deposited on the end of the spark
plug and will penetrate the lower threads to some degree. As a result, greater
torque is frequently required for removing a plug than for its installation. Ac-
cordingly, the torque limitations given do not apply to plug removal and sufficient
torque must be used to unscrew the plug. The higher torque in removal is not as
detrimental as in installation, since it cannot stretch the threaded section. It
does, however, impose a shearing load on this section and may, if sufficiently
severe, produce a failure in this location.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3C17
1-4-5-2-3-6
FIRINGORDER
Figure 8-20. Ignition System Schematic
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
Reissued: 2/18/81
3C18
NOTE
Torque indicating handle

should not be used for spark
plug removal because of
the greater torque require-
ment.
c. Place spark plugs in a tray that

will identify their position in the engine
as soon as they are removed.
NOTE
Spark plugs should not be

Figure 8-21. Removing Spark Plug installed if they have been
Frozen to Bushing dropped.
d. Removal of seized spark plugs in the cylinder may be accomplished by ap-

plication of liquid carbon dioxide by a Conical metal funnel adapter with a hole at
the apex just large enough to accommodate the funnel of a CO2 bottle. (Refer to
Figure 8-20.) When a seized spark plug cannot be removed by normal means,
the funnel adapter is placed over and around the spark plug. Place the funnel of
the CO2 bottle inside the funnel adapter and release the carbon dioxide to chill
and contract the spark plug. Break the spark plug loose with a wrench. A warm
cylinder head at the time the carbon dioxide is applied will aid in the removal of
an excessively seized plug.
e. Do not allow foreign objects to enter the spark plug hole.
8-70. INSPECTION AND CLEANING OF SPARK PLUG.

a. Visually inspect each spark plug for the following non-repairable defects:
1 . Severely damaged shell or shield threads nicked up, stripped or cross-
threaded.
2. Badly battered or rounded shell hexagons.
3. Out-of-round or damaged shielding barrel.
4. Chipped, cracked or broken ceramic insulator portions.
5. Badly eroded electrodes worn to approximately 50% of original size.
b. Clean the spark plug as required, removing carbon and foreign deposits.
c. Test the spark plug both electrically and for resistance.
d. Set the electrode gap. (Refer to latest revision Lycoming Service Instruction 1042.)
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3C19
8-71. INSTALLATION OF SPARK PLUGS. Before installing spark plugs, ascertain

that the threads within the cylinder are clean and not damaged.
a. Apply anti-seize compound sparingly on the upper threads. Do not apply anti-seize
compound on bottom two threads to prevent plug failure. Install gasket and spark plugs.
Torque 360 to 420 inch-pounds.
CAUTION
Make certain the deep socket is properly seated on the spark

plug hexagon as damage to the plug could result if the
wrench is cocked to one side when pressure is applied.
b. Insure terminal insulator is free of carbon and dirt and carefully insert in the spark
plug and tighten the coupling nut.
8-72. STARTING VIBRATOR. (14 and 28-Volt System)
8-73. STARTING VIBRATOR CHECKING PROCEDURE.

a. Disconnect all spark plug leads from the left magneto at the spark plugs.
WARNING
Be sure all left magneto spark plug leads are removed,

thus preventing cross-firing of the magneto and the
possibility of hazardous conditions.
b. Rotate engine crankshaft until number one cylinder is in its retard firing
position. Using the timing light, check to see that both magneto contact assem-
blies are open.
c. Disconnect left starter solenoid terminal wire, coded in electrical schematics P20A.
WARNING
It is necessary that the starter be electrically removed

from the circuit before the vibrator is put into opera-
tion to eliminate possibility of starter being energized
during the test.
POWER PLANT
3C20 3C20 Reissued: 2/18/81

d. Place left magneto switch in its ON position.

e. Hold left starter switch in the energized position.
f. Holding the number one cylinder spark plug lead approximately 0.187 to 0.250 of an inch away
from a good ground, a series of hot sparks should occur.
WARNING
Grasp the spark plug lead far enough away from the connection so
as not to produce any dangerous electrical shock.
g. If the spark does not jump the gap, check the applied voltage to the starting vibrator. This voltage
should be 14 or 28-volts depending on the electrical system installed in the airplane.
h. If voltage is correct, check the contact points of the magneto. Both sets of contact points shall be
opened.
i. Reject all units not complying with the preceding requirements or which show any visual defects.
8-74. REMOVAL OF STARTING VIBRATOR.

a. Remove the left access panel to the nose section interior at station 70.0.
b. The starter vibrator is attached to the extreme left front side of the forward fuselage bulkhead at
station 81.0.
NOTE
Make note of positions of the wires before disconnecting electrical

leads to facilitate reinstallation.
c. Disconnect the electrical leads from the vibrator.

d. Remove the vibrator from the bulkhead by removing the attachment screws.
8-75. INSTALLATION OF STARTING VIBRATOR.

a. Position the vibrator on the bulkhead and secure with screws.
b. Connect the electrical leads to the vibrator.
NOTE
On 28-volt electrical system only, make sure that the lead with the
red marker has been put on the "IN" terminal of the starting
vibrator.
c. Check operation per Pargaraph 8-73.

d. Install access panel.
POWER PLANT
3C21
8-76. LUBRICATION SYSTEM.
8-77. ADJUSTMENT OF OIL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE. The 0-540 and 10-540
series enginesare equipped with either a non-adjustable or adjustable oil pressure reliefvalve
located above and to the rear of number 5 cylinder. A brief description and setting procedure
for both types follows:
a. Oil Relief Valve (Non-Adjustable): The function of the oil pressure relief
valve is to maintain engine oil pressure within specified limits (60 psi, min. to
90 psi, max.). This valve is not adjustable; however, the pressure can be con-
trolled by the addition of a maximum of three STD 425 washers under the cap to
increase pressure or the use of a spacer (Lyc. P/N 73629 or 73630) under the
cap to decrease pressure. Particles of metal or other foreign matter lodged be-
tween the ball and seat will result in a drop in oil pressure. It is advisable,
therefore, to disassemble, inspect and clean the valve if excessive pressure
fluctuations are noted. The oil pressure relief valve is not to be mistaken for
the oil cooler by-pass valve, whose function is to permit pressure oil to by-pass
the oil cooler in case of an obstruction in the oil cooler.
b. Oil Relief Valve (Adjustable): The adjustable oil relief valve enables the
operator to maintain engine oil pressure within the specified limits (60 psi, min.
to 90 psi, max.). If the pressure under normal operating conditions should con-
sistently exceed the maximum or minimum specified limits, adjust the valve as
follows:
With the engine warmed up and running at approximately 2000 RPM, observe
the reading on the oil pressure gauge. If the pressure is above maximum or
below minimum specified limits, stop engine and screw the adjusting screw out
to decrease pressure and into increase pressure. Depending on installation, the
adjusting screw may have only a screwdriver slot and is turned with a screw-
driver; or may have the screwdriver slot plus a pinned 0.375-24 castellated nut
and may be turned with either a screwdriver or a box wrench.
8-78. INSTALLATION OF OIL COOLER.

a. When installing fittings in the oil coolers, care should be used to prevent excessive
torque being applied to the cooler. Whena rectangular fitting boss is provided, backup wrench
should be used. employing a scissormotion, so that no load is transmitted to the cooler. When
the oil cooler has a round fitting boss, care should be taken not to permit excessivetorque on
the fitting.
b. If a pipe thread fitting is used, it should be installedonly far enough to seal with sealing
compound.
c. Apply Lubon No. 404 to all male pipe thread fittings; do not allowsealant to enter the
system.
d. If fitting cannot be positionedcorrectlyusing a torque of 10to 15foot-pounds, another
fitting should be used.
e. When attaching lines to the cooler, backup wrench should be used.
f. After installation, inspect the cooler, for distorted end cups.
g. Run-up engine. After run-up, check for oil leaks.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3C22
8-79. CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS OF BALL JOINT EXHAUST SYSTEM. (Refer

to Figure 8-22.) Refer to the latest revision of Piper S/B No. 662.
a. Remove both engine cowls. (Refer to Section VIII. Paragraph 8-7.)
b. Visually inspect both outboard exhaust stacks for alignment of ball joint tubes,
crossovertubes, and for any cracks which may have developed in the welds.
c. The centerline of the short slip joint tube on the tail pipe must be parallel with the
centerline of the tail pipe tube. (Remove the figure eight clamp.)
NOTE
If the checks described in Step c show any misalignment

between the two tubes or cracks at any of the welds, the tail
pipe assemblyshould be replaced.
d. The centerline of the ball joints must match the centerline of the mating tubes.
e. If the ball joints are not properly aligned, remove the outboard exhaust stacks and
crossovertube to properly realign the stacks.
NOTE
To facilitate alignment, the complete exhaust system should

be loosened.
CAUTION
Use a strip of masking tape to show the reference mark. Do

not scribe a reference mark or use a grease pencil, as this
could cause a weak spot or hot spot on the tube.
f. Clean and apply Fel-Pro C5A High Temperature Anti-seize Compound to both ends
of the crossover tube and its mating slip joint, covering approximately two inches of both
pieces. To determine that the slip joints are installed properly, insert the crossover tube into
the slip joints as far as it will go, then place a reference mark of masking tape on the tube, in
line with the end of the slip joint. Separate the slip joints, measure and record the engagement
dimensions.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3C23
1.25 + 125 (AFT JOINT)

1.50 TO 2.12 (FWD JOINT) /
TAPE EDGE
3/8"
A
SKETCHA
SLIP JOINT ENGAGEMENT
A
CLAMP ASSY. (STUDDED) - P/N 14235-18 CABLE ASSEMBLY
P/N 40123-100
SKETCHB
ASSY.
ISOLATOR
FIRE WALL
CHUTE WALL
OF ENGINE THRUST INBOARD TAIL PIPE
SKETCH E
MAINTAIN 1 1/4" MIN. CLEARANCE

BETWEEN TAIL PIPE & NACELLE CHUTE
WALL AND 1/8" MIN. CLEARANCE TO
COWL FLAP WHEN CLOSED.
FIRE WALL
LEFT ENGINE EXHAUST SHOWN
RIGHT ENGINE EXHAUST OPPOSITE INBOARD WALL
TAIL PIPE
SKETCHC
(AFT SLIP JOINT

ENGAGEMENT) C
SKETCH
(FORWARD SUP JOINT ENGAGEMENT)
Figure 8-22. Adjustment of Ball Joint Exhaust System
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3C24
g. Align the ball joint centerline with the centerline of the mating tube, forward and aft of
the ball joint as shown in Figure 8-22. Ascertain that the crossover tube is properly positioned
in the slip joints by checking the location of the previously made reference marks. Retighten
the exhaust system. Measure the distance between the slip joint end and the tape. Subtract this
dimension from the dimension recorded in step f. Refer to Figure 8-22 for min./max. slipjoint
engagement dimensions.
h. Ascertain that the support bracket is shimmed to clear the counterbore on the sump
housing with AN960-416 and AN960-416L washers (.062 max.). Adjust the support bracket
so there is no preloading on the exhaust system.
i. Adjust the clamp at the end of the support bracket to securely hold the tube. (Refer
to Figure 8-22, Sketch B.)
NOTES
1. The crossover tube must be free to move at both slip

joints prior to clamping or attaching isolator.
2. There must be a minimum clearance of 1-1/4 inches
between the tail pipe and the fire wall chute, as shown in
Figure 8-22, Sketch C. If this dimesnsion is not
obtainable, the system is not set properly and should be
readjusted.
3. Items h and i above not applicable if isolator type
exhaust support, per Sketch E, is installed. Isolators are
not to be compressed or stretched thus putting excessive
load or severe bending on cables.
j. Replace existing shroud assembly with the new assembly P/N 33178-02 and
33178-03. Ascertain that 3/8 of an inch clearance is maintained between the end of the
takeoff assembly and the flange on the new shroud. (Refer to Figure 8-22.) The mounting
holes in the new assembly should match the existing holes of the clamp assembly. The
clamp should be moved to locate the shroud and maintain the end clearance. Attach cable
assembly to shroud half retaining screw and studded clamp assembly.
k. Ascertain that the takeoff assembly is securely fastened to the stack; this may require
bending the ears of the takeoff assembly down over the stack before tightening the clamp.
1. Recheck all fasteners for tightness and reinstall the engine cowlings.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3D1
TABLE VIII-III. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING(CARBURETOR)
Failure of en- Lack of fuel. Check fuel system for leaks.

gine to start. Fill fuel cell.
Clean dirty lines, strainers,
or fuel cocks.
Underpriming. Prime with four or five

strokes of primer.
Overpriming. Place control in "idle cut-off",

open throttle and "unload"
engine by turning in counter
clockwise direction.
Incorrect throttle set- Open throttle to one-tenth

ting. of its range.
Defective spark plugs. Clean and adjust or replace

spark plug or plugs. Refer
to Table II-I for spark plug
gap adjustments.
Defective ignition wire. Check with electric tester

and replace any defective
wires.
Defective or weak Replace with charged

battery. battery.
Improper operation of Check internal timing of

magneto or breaker magnetos, paragraph 8-62.
points. Clean points.
Water in carburetor. Drain carburetor and fuel

lines.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3D2
TABLE VIII-III. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING (CARBURETOR) (cont.)
Failure of engine Internal failure Check oil sump strainer

to start (cont) for metal particles. If
found, complete over-
haul of the engine may
be indicated.
Improper switch wiring Reverse magneto switch

for left magneto start- wires.
ing.
Magnetized impulse Demagnetize impulse

coupling - if in- couplings.
stalled.
Frozen spark plug elec- Replace spark plugs or

trodes. dry out removed plugs.
Mixture control in idle Open mixture control.

cut-off.
Shorted ignition switch Check and replace or

or loose ground repair.
Failure of engine Incorrect carburetor Adjust throttle stop to

to idle properly. idle adjustment. obtain correct idle.
Idle mixture. Adjust mixture, paragraph

8-45 or refer to engine
manufacturer's handbook.
Leak in the induction Tighten all connections

system. in the induction system.
Replace any parts that
are defective.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2 18/81
3D3
TABLE VIII-III. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING(CARBURETOR) (cont.)

Failure of engine Low cylinder compres- Check cylinder compres-

to idle properly sion. sion.
(cont)
Faulty ignition system Check entire ignition

system.
Open primer. Lock primer.
Improper spark plug set- Check spark plug gap.

ting.
Dirty air filter. Clean or replace.
Low power and Mixture too rich; indi- Check primer. Readjust-
uneven run- cated by sluggish eng- ment of carburetor
ning engine ine operation, red ex- paragraph 8-45.
haust flame and black
smoke.
Mixture too lean; indi- Check fuel lines for dirt

cated by overheating or other restrictions.
or backfiring. Check fuel supply.
Leaks in induction Tighten all connections.

system. Replace defective parts.
Defective spark plugs Clean or replace spark

plug.
Improper grade of fuel. Fill fuel cell with recom-

mended grade.
Magneto braker points Clean points.

not working properly. Check internal timing of
magneto, paragraph 8-62.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3D4
Low power and Defective ignition wire Check wire with electric
uneven run- tester. Replace defec-
ning engine tive wire.
(cont)
Defective spark plug ter- Replace connectors on

minal connectors spark plug wire
Restriction in exhaust Remove restriction

system.
Improper ignition timing Check magnetos for

timing and synchron-
ization
Failure of Throttle lever out of Adjust throttle lever,

engine to adjustment paragraph 8-44.
develop full
power
Leak in induction Tighten all connections

system and replace defective
parts
Restriction in carburetor Examine air scoop and

air scoop remove restriction
Improper fuel Fill fuel cell with recom-

mended fuel.
Propeller governor out Adjust governor,

of adjustment paragraph 8-30.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 218 81
3D5
Failure of engine Faulty ignition. Tighten all connections.

to develop full Check system. Check
power (cont) ignition timing,
paragraph 8-63.
Rough running Cracked engine mounts Repair or replace engine

engine mount.
Unbalanced propeller Remove propeller and

have it checked for
balance
Defective mounting Install new mounting

bushings bushings.
Lead deposit on spark Clean or replace plugs.

plug.
Primer unlocked. Lock primer.
Low oil pres- Insufficient oil. Check oil supply

sure.
Dirty oil strainers. Remove and clean oil

strainers.
Defective pressure gauge Replace gauge.
Air lock or dirt in relief Remove and clean oil

valve. pressure relief valve.
Leak in suction line or Check gasket between

pressure line. accessory housing
crankcase.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3D6
Low oil pres- High oil temperature. See "High Oil Tempera-
sure (cont) ture" in trouble column.
Stoppage in oil pump Check line for obstruc-

intake passage. tion. Clean suction
strainer.
Worn or scored bearings. Overhaul.
High oil temper- Insufficient air cooling. Check air inlet and out-
ature. let deformation or
obstruction.
Insufficient oil supply. Fill oil sump to properly

level.
Clogged oil lines or Remove and clean oil

strainers. strainers.
Failing or failed bearing. Examine sump for metal

particles and, if found,
overhaul engine.
Defective thermostats. Replace.
Defective temperature Replace gauge.

gauge.
Excessive blow-by. Usually caused by weak

or stuck rings. Over-
haul.
Improper engine Check entire engine.

operation.
Excessive external dirt Clean engine.

on engine.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3D7
TABLE VIII-II. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING(CARBURETOR) (cont.)
Excessive oil Failing or failed bearing. Check sump for metal

consumption particles and, if found,
overhaul of engine is
indicated.
Worn or broken piston Install new rings.

rings.
Incorrect installation of Install new rings.

piston rings.
External oil leakage. Check engine carefully

for leaking gaskets, "0"
rings or sand holes.
Leakage through engine Replace fuel pump

fuel pump vent. seal.
Engine breather or Check engine and over-

vacuum pump breather. haul or replace pump.
Inaccurate oil Cold weather. In extremely cold weather

pressure oil pressure readings
readings. up to 100 pounds do not
necessarily indicate
malfunctioning.
Overpriming. Cold weather. Rotate the crankshaft in

the counter-clockwise
direction with throttle
FULL OPEN and
ignition switch OFF.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3D8
TABLE VIII-III. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING(CARBURETOR) (cont. )
Inaccurate oil Cold weather. High or low pressure

pressure readings. readings due to extreme-
ly cold weather are not
necessarily a malfunc-
tion. Small and long
oil lines will not trans-
fer pressure readings
accurately until engine
is quite warm.
I
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3D9
TABLE VIII-III. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING (FUEL INJECTION)
Failure of engine to start. Lack of fuel. Check fuel system for leaks. Fill
fuel tank. Clean dirty lines,
strainers or fuel cocks.
Underpriming. Prime by holding switch 4 to 10

seconds. Check fuel flow
indicator.
Overpriming. Place control in "idle cut-off".

Open throttle and unload engine
by turning over with starter.
Incorrect throttle. Open throttle to 1/8of its range.
Defective spark plugs. Clean and adjust or replace

spark plug or plugs.
Defective battery. Replace with charged battery.
Improper operation of magneto Clean points. Check internal

breaker points. timing of magnetos, paragraph
8-62.
Air bubbles in fuel system. Check fuel vent.
Boost or auxiliary fuel pump Replace pump.

failure.
Fuel line restricted. Check inlet line.
Lack of sufficient fuel Check fuel strainer and fuel

pressure. adjustments.
POWER PLANT
3D10
3D 10
Reissued: 2/18/81
TABLE VIII-III. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING(FUEL INJECTION) (cont.)
Failure of en- Internal failure. Check oil sump strainer for

gine to start. metal particles. If found,
(cont) complete overhaul of the
engine may be required.
Failure of en- Incorrect idle adjust- Adjust throttle stop to

gine to idle ment. obtain correct idle,
properly. paragraph 8-53.
Insufficient fuel Check fuel strainer and

pressure. pump pressure adjust-
ment.
Clogged injector Remove and clean,

nozzles. paragraph 8-55.
Leak in induction Tighten all connections in

system. the induction system. Re-
place any defective parts.
Low cylinder Check condition of piston

compression rings and valve seats.
Faulty ignition Check entire ignition

system. system.
Low power Mixture too rich; in- Injector may need recali-
and uneven dicated by sluggish bration by authorized
running. engine operation, personnel.
red exhaust flame
at night. Extreme
cases indicated by
black smoke from
exhaust.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3D11

Low power Mixture too lean; in- Check fuel supply. Check
and uneven dicated by overheat- fuel lines for obstructions
running. (cont) ing or back-firing. or restrictions.

nozzles. paragraph 8-55.
Dirt in inlet screen. Remove screen and flush

with solvent. Blow with
compressed air.
Dirt in "T" fitting. Remove "T" fitting at dis-

tributor, clean in solvent.
Blow through orifice with
compressed air - 100 psi.
Fuel supply pressure Readjust fuel pump for

excessively high. lower pressure.
Leak in manifoldline Tighten fittings.
Leak in induction Tighten all connections.

system. Replace defective parts.
Defective spark plugs. Clean or replace spark

plugs.
Poor fuel. Fill fuel cell with fuel of

recommended grade.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2 18 81
3D12

Low power Magneto breaker points Clean points. Check inter-

and uneven not working properly. nal timing of magnetos.
running. (cont)
Defective ignition wire. Check wire with electric

tester. Replace defective
wire.
Improper ignition Check magnetos for timing

timing. and synchronization.
Defective spark plug Replace connectors on

terminal connectors. spark plug wire.
Flow meter Clogged nozzle. Remove and clean,

reads high. paragraph 8-55.
Failure of en- Throttle lever nut out Adjust throttle lever.

gine to develop of adjustment.
full power.
Leak in induction Tighten intake pipe mount-

system. ingflange nuts and tighten
intake manifold. (Replace
defective gasketas req'd.)
Mixture too lean. Injector must be recali-

brated.
Throttle linkage limit- Check throttle linkage and

ing travel of throttle throttle valve opening.
valve.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2 18 81
3D13
TABLE VIII-III. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING(FUEL INJECTION) (cont. )
Failure of en- Restrictions in inlet air Examine air scoop and re-
gine to develop scoop. move restrictions.
full power.
(cont)
Improper fuel. Fill fuel cell with recom-
mended aviation fuel.
Faulty ignition. Tighten all connections.

Check system with tester.
Check ignition timing.
Rough engine Cracked engine mount. Replace mount.
Unbalanced propeller. Remove propeller and have

it checked for balance.
Defective mounting Install new mounting bush-

bushings. ings.
Low oil pres- Insufficient oil. Fill oil sump with oil of
sure. recommended viscosity.

pressure line. accessory housing and
crankcase.

strainers.
Air lock or dirt in Remove and clean oil pres-

relief valve. sure relief valve.
High oil temperature. See "High Oil Temperature"

in "Trouble" column.
Relief valve out of Adjust valve.

adjustment.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3D14

Low oil pres- Defective pressure Replace gage.

sure. (cont) gage.
Stoppage in oil pump Check line for obstruction.

intake passage. Clean suction strainer.
Failing or failed Check screens and sump

bearings. for metal particles.
High oil Insufficient oil cooling. Check air inlet and outlet
temperature. for deformation or
obstruction.
Insufficient oil supply. Fill oil sump to proper

level with specified oil.
Low grade of oil. Replace with oil conform-

ing to specification.

Excessive blow-by. Usually caused by worn or

sticking rings.
Failing or failed Examine sump for metal

bearings. particles. If found, over-
haul of engine is indicated.
Defective temperature Replace gage.

gage.
Excessive oil Low grade of oil. Fill oil sump with oil con-
consumption. forming to specification.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3D15
Excessive oil Failing or failed Check screens and sump for

consumption. bearings. metal particles. If found,
(cont) overhaul of engine is
indicated.
Worn piston rings. Install new rings.
Incorrect installation Install new rings.

of piston rings.
Cold weather Cold oil. Move aircraft into a heated

difficulties. hangar. Heat oil.
Inaccurate pressure In extreme cold weather,

readings. oil pressure readings up
to approximately 100 lbs.
Do Not necessarily mean
malfunctioning.
Overpriming. Rotate crankshaft in direc-

tion of normal rotation
with throttle "full open",
and mixture in "idle-cut-
off and ignition switch
"OFF".
Weak battery. Install fully charged

battery.
Faulty ignition switch. Check ground wires.
POWER PLANT
Reissued:2 18 81
3D16
VIIIA
SECTION
PLANT
POWER
(TURBOCHARGED)
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
8A-1. Introduction .............. .... 3D20

8A-2. Description .............. .... 3D20
8A-3. Troubleshooting ............ .... 3D22
8A-4. Standard Practices - Engine (See Section VIII) ............. ...... 3A13
8A-5. Engine Cowling ........................... .... 3D22
8A-6. Removal of Engine Cowling ............ .... 3D22
8A-7. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair .......... .... 3D23
8A-8. Installation of Engine Cowling ........... .... 3D23
8A-9. Engine Cowl Flap .......................... .... 3D23
8A- 10. Removal of Cowl Flap Assembly .... .... 3D23
8A- 11. Removal of Cowl Flap Control Cable ....... .... 3E1
8A-12. Installation of Cowl Flap Control Cable .... 3E1
8A-13. Installation of Cowl Flap Assembly ........ .... 3E2
8A-14. Rigging and Adjusting Engine Cowl Flaps .... .... 3E2
8A-15. Propeller ............... .... 3E2
8A-16. Removal of Propeller ........ .... 3E2
8A- 17. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Propeller . . . .... 3E5
8A-18. Installation of Propeller ............... .... 3E7
8A- 19. Adjustment of Low Pitch Blade Angle and Stop .... 3E8
8A-20. Blade Track ...................... .... 3E9
8A-21. Propeller Governor ......................... .... 3E10
8A-22. Removal of Propeller Governor .......... .... 3E10
8A-23. Installation of Propeller Governor ......... .... 3E10
8A-24. Rigging and Adjustment of Propeller Governor . 3E11
8A-25. Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 3E12
8A-26. Removal of Engine ................. .... 3E12
8A-27. Installation of Engine ................ .... 3E13
8A-28. Engine Shock Mounts ....................... .... 3E17
8A-29. Replacing Engine Shock Mounts .......... .... 3E17
8A-30. Fuel Injector ............................ .... 3E18
8A-31. Fuel Injector Maintenance ............. .... 3E19
8A-32. Lubrication ...................... ... 3E19
8A-33. Removal of Fuel Injector .............. .... 3E19
8A-34. Preparation for Storage ............... .... 3E21
Reissued: 2/18/81
3D17
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
8A-35. Installation of Fuel Injector .. . ... . 3E22

8A-36. Adjustment of Throttle and Mixture Controls . . 3E23
8A-37. Adjustment of Idle Speed and Mixture .. . 3E23
8A-38. Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle .. . . . . ..... 3E24
8A-39. Removal of Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle . .. 3E24
8A-40. Cleaning and Inspection of Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle . 3E24
8A-41. Installation of Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle . . . . 3F1
8A-42. Ignition System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . 3F1
8A-43. Magneto . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3F1
8A-44. Inspection of Magneto . . . . . . . . . . . 3F1
8A-45. Removal of Magneto ........... 3F3
8A-46. Timing Procedure (Internal Timing)
(-1200 series magnetos) ..... 3F4
8A-47. Installation and Timing Procedure. (Timing
Magneto to Engine.) . . . . 3F7
8A-48. Harness Assembly ............... 3F9
8A-49. Inspection of Harness .. . . .... 3F9
8A-50. Removal of Harness .. . . ..... 3F9
8A-51. Maintenance of Harness .. . .... . 3F10
8A-52. Installation of Harness . . ... . . .. 3F15
8A-53. Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3F17
8A-54. Removal of Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . 3F17
8A-55. Inspection and Cleaning of Spark Plug . . . . 3F18
8A-56. Installation of Spark Plugs .... . .. . 3F19
8A-57. Starting Vibrator (14 and 28-Volt System) .. ..... 3F19
8A-58. Starting Vibrator Checking Procedure. . . .3F19
8A-59. Removal of Starting Vibrator .... 3F20
8A-60. Installation of Starting Vibrator ...... 3F20
8A-61. Lubrication System ................ 3F21
8A-62. Adjustment of Oil Pressure Relief Valve . . . . 3F21
8A-63. Installation of Oil Cooler........................... 3F21
8A-64. Turbocharger (AiResearch) ............. 3F24
8A-65. Specifications .............. 3F24
8A-66. Nomenclature . ... . .. . . . . 3G1
8A-67. Removal and Installation of Turbocharger . . . 3G3
8A-68. Removal of Turbocharger . ... . . . 3G4
8A-69. Removal of Compressor Housing . . 3G4
8A-70. Installation of Turbocharger ......... 3G5
8A-71. Removal of Turbocharger Oil Pump ...... 3G6
8A-72. Installation of Turbocharger Oil Pump .. . .. 3G7
8A-73. Transfer Valve Purpose and Function .. . 3G8
3D18
3D18 Revised: 4 26 83
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
8A-74. Checking Transfer Valve for Leaks ...... 3G8

8A-75. Adjustment of Transfer Valve .. .... . 3G9
8A-76. Adjustment of Automatic System Controller . . 3G9
8A-77. Cleaning or Replacing Turbo Oil Filter Element . 3G I I
3D193D19 Revised: 4/26/83

SECTION VIIIA
POWER PLANT
(TURBOCHARGED)
8A-1. INTRODUCTION. This section covers power plants usedinthePA-23-250

(six place) turbo powered Aztec and is comprised of instructions for the removal,
minor repair, service and installation of the engine cowling, propeller, propeller
governor, engine, engine shock mounts, induction system, fuel injector, fuel
air bleed nozzle, turbocharger, ignition system and lubrication system.
8A-2. DESCRIPTION. The PA-23-250 (six place) turbo is powered by two Avco-
Lycoming IO-540-J4A5 series six cylinder, direct drive, wet sump, horizontally
opposed, fuel injected, air cooled engines witha compression ratio of 8.5:1, rated
at 250 HPat 2575RPM and designed to operate on 100/130 (minimum) octane avi-
ation grade fuel. The engine contains components which make it adaptable to
turbocharging.
Cowlings completely enclose the engines and consist of an upper and lower
section. The cowling is of cantilever construction attached at the firewall. Lo-
cated on both sides of the cowl are access panels that can be removed when their
quick fasteners are released, to allow inspection of the accessory section and
turbocharger area. Cowl flap doors are an integral part of the lower cowl and
are operated through mechanical linkage.
Propellers are Hartzell full feathering, constant speed, each controlled by
a governor mounted on the engine supplying oil through the propeller shaft at
various pressures. Oil pressure from the governor moves the blades into low
pitch (high RPM). The centrifugal twisting moment of the blade also tends to
move the blades into low pitch. Opposing these two forces is force produced by
compressed air between the cylinder head and the piston, which tends to move
the blades into high pitch in the absence of governor oil pressure. Thus, feath-
ering is accomplished by compressed air.
The airframe induction system consists of a dry type air filter and alter-
nate air door. The engine fuel system consists of a Bendix RSA-5AD1 type fuel
injector and a Lear-Seigler fuel supply pump as an integral part of the fuel in-
jector system.
An AiResearch model P-202 turbocharger is mounted as an integral kit to
the engine. The turbocharger is designed to increase the altitude power output
and efficiency of an internal combustion engine by supplying compressed air to
the engine intake manifold. The power to drive the turbocharger is extracted
POWER PLANT
3D20 3D20 Reissued: 2/18/81
from the energy of the exhaust gases.

This unit consists of a turbine wheel and an impeller wheel (compressor)
mounted on opposite ends of a common shaft, each contained in its own housing
with a center housing containing shaft bearings.
Exhaust gas is directed onto the turbine wheel causing it to turn. The
compressor wheel is fixed to the opposite end of the shaft and also turns, deliv-
ering compressed air to the engine induction system. The speed of the compres-
sor can be varied by dumping or by passing some of the exhaust gas around the
turbine and out the exhaust stack. This is done by a device called a wastegate
which is employed in the exhaust system. The wastegate is controlled by an
absolute controller which is very sensitive to air pressure. If the pressure it
senses decreases, a sealed bellows expands, extending a metering pin which re-
duces the flow of oil through the body of the unit, increasing the pressure across
the actuator diaphragm hence forcing the piston down and moving the wastegate
towards the closed position. When the air pressure increases, the controller
bellows contracts allowing oil to flow through it decreasing the pressure on the
piston of the wastegate actuator. Spring tension on the piston forces it up opening
the wastegate.
Bendix Scintilla S-1200 series magnetos are installed with their associated
components. Each system consists of a single contact magneto, a dual contact
magneto switches and starter switch. The magnetos are designed to generate
and distribute high tension current through high tension leads to the spark plugs.
In addition to the previously mentioned components, each engine is equipped with an
alternator, geared starter, and pressure pump. Some have a hydraulic pump. Engine mounts
are steel tubing construction attached at the firewall and incorporate vibration absorbing
dynafocal mounts. The two top exhaust stacks and extensions are positioned one for the
left and one for the right bank of cylinders. From the exhaust stacks, gasesare directed to
the turbocharger exhaust plenum, through or around the turbo turbine, as required, and
overboard at the bottom of the engine nacelle.
threaded connection on the rear face of the accessory housing where a flexible
drilled passage conducts the oil to the oil pressure filter. In the event that cold
oil or an obstruction should restrict the oil flow to the cooler, an oil cooler by-
pass valve is provided to pass the oil directly from the oil pump to the oil pres-
sure filter.
POWER PLANT
3D21 Reissued: 2/18/ 81
The oil pressure filter element, located on the accessory housing, is pro-
vided as a means to filter from the oil any solid particles that may have passed
through the suction screeninthe sump. After beingfilteredinthe pressure filter,
the oil is fed through a drilled passage to the oil pressure relief valve, located
in the upper right side of the crankcase in front of the accessory housing.
This relief valve regulates the engine oil pressure by allowing excessive
oil to return to the sump, while the balance of the pressure oil is fed to the main
oil gallery in the right half of the crankcase. Residual oil is returned by gravity
to the sump, where after passing through a screen it is again circulated through
the engine.
8A-3. TROUBLESHOOTING. Troubles peculiar to the power plant are listed in

Table VIIIA-II in the back of this section, along with their probable causes and
suggested remedies. The table is divided into two parts, engine and turbocharger.
When troubleshooting engines, ground the magneto primary circuit before per-
forming any checks on the ignition system.
8A-4. STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINE. (Refer to Section VIII.)
8A-5. ENGINE COWLING.
8A-6. REMOVAL OF ENGINE COWLING.

tion.
both sides of the engine nacelle.
e. Disconnect all drain lines attached to the bottom cowl.
f. Remove the attaching bolts and disconnect the cowl flap linkage from the
cowl doors.
g. Remove the screws from the front and rear of the bottom cowling assembly
and pull it forward and down.
h. Split and remove the nose cowl by pulling out the two (upper and lower)
hinge pins.
POWER PLANT
3D22 3D22 Reissued: 2/18/81
8A-7. CLEANING. INSPECTION AND REPAIR.

a. The cowling should be cleaned with a suitable dry type solvent and then
wiped with a clean cloth.
b. Inspect the cowling for dents, cracks, loose rivets, damaged or missing
fasteners and damaged skin or fiberglas.
c. If repair is necessary, refer to Structural Repairs, Section IV.
8A-8. INSTALLATION OF ENGINE COWLING.

a. Install the nose cowl halves and insert the hinge pins.
b. Position the bottom cowling assembly and secure with the attaching screws.
c. Connect the drain lines to the bottom of the cowling.
d. Position the fillet fairings in place on both inboard and outboard sides of the
engine nacelle and secure with attaching screws.
e. Place the top cowling section in position and fasten with attaching screws.
f. Connect the cowl flap linkage to the doors with the attaching bolts and adjust
per instructions in paragraph 8A-14.
g. Position the two inboard and outboard access panels in place and secure
with the quarter turn fasteners.
8A-9. ENGINE COWL FLAP.
8A-10. REMOVAL OF COWL FLAP ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 8A-1.)

a. Remove the two side cowl panels from the engine where the cowl flaps are
to be removed.
b. Note the position of the rod end (3) to the cowl flap and remove the self-
locking nut on the rod end disconnecting it from the cowl flap.
c. Remove the cowl flap by removingthe cotter pin, nut, washer and bolt from
the hinge bracket on each side.
d. Remove the interconnecting rod between the forward and rear cowl flap.
Remove the second cowl flap in the same manner.
e. If the operating mechanism is to be removed, the following procedure may
be used:
1. Disconnect the control cable clevis end (7) from the torque tube arm
(14) by removing cotter pin and clevis pin.
2. Remove the bearing blocks holding each end of the torque tube assembly
in place by removing the self-locking nut, washer and bolts.
3. Remove the self-locking nuts, washers and machine screws from the
center bearing block. Remove the bearing block.
POWER PLANT
Reissued:2/18/81
3D23
2487
1. CONTROL CABLE
2. JAM NUT COWL FLAP
MAINTAIN AT LEAST .12 CLEARANCE OF EXHAUST TUBE
3. CLEVIS
4. CLEVIS PIN 1.0 MAX. IN CLOSED POSITION
5. ENGINE MOUNT TUBE
6. ROD END BALL JOINT
-NACELLE SKIN
7. BEARING BLOCK
8. ROD ASSEMBLY
9. TORQUE TUBE
3.50 MIN. O
3.75 MAX. OPEN
10. JAM NUT
II. ROD END BALL JOINT
12. STOP SCREW
13. COWL FLAP VIEW A -A
Figure 8A-1. Cowl Flap Installation
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2 18/81
3D24
4. Remove the operating mechanism from the nacelle.

5. The mechanism may be further disassembled as necessary.
f. For removal of the cowl flap control cables, refer to paragraph 8A-6.
8A-11. REMOVAL OF COWL FLAP CONTROL CABLE.

a. Remove the engine access panels from the sides of the nacelle if not pre-
viously removed.
b. Remove the top center section of the nacelle by removing attaching screws.
c. Remove the access panel from the bottom of the fuselage between the wings.
d. Disconnect the clevis end of the control cable by removing the cotter pin
and clevis pin.
e. Remove the clevis end from the cable.
f. Remove the clamp securing the cable to the engine mount by removing the
self-locking nuts and machine screws.
g. Draw the cable through the firewall to the center section of the nacelle.
h. Loosen the cable clamps inside the center section of the nacelle.
i. Draw the cable through both clamp.
j . Loosen the clamp securing the cable inside the bottom of the fuselage.
k. Disconnect the cable from the control handle, inside the fuel control box,
by removing nut, washers and bolt.
1. Remove the cable by drawing it from the nacelle into the bottom of the
fuselage and through the clamp.
8A-12. INSTALLATION OF COWL FLAP CONTROL CABLE.

a. Draw the cable end through the clamp in the bottom of the fuselage and con-
nect the cable end to the control handle inside the fuel control box.
b. Install the cable through the engine control tube in the wing.
c. Install the cable through the clamps in the center section of the nacelle.
d. Install the cable through the firewall and attach it with a clamp on the
engine mount.
e. Install the clevis end and jam nut to the control cable.
f. Check the position of the cable to be certain there are no sharp bends or
anything that might hamper proper operation.
g. Tighten all cable clamps.
h. Check rigging and adjustment of cowl flaps as described in paragraph 8A-14.
i. Install all access panels.
POWER PLANT
3E1
8A-13. INSTALLATION OF COWL FLAP ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 8A-1.)

a. If the operating mechanismwas removed,reinstall by the followingprocedure:
1. Position the torque tube and bearing blocks inside the nacelle and secure with
bolts, washersand self-lockingnuts.
2. Install the bearing block around the center of the torque tube with machine
screws,washers,and self-lockingnuts.
3. Install the rod assemblyif removed from the torque tube.
b. Position the cowl flaps to the nacelle and secure with bolt, washer, nut and cotter
pin.
c. Connect the rod assemblyto the aft cowl flap.
d. Install the interconnecting rod to the cowl flaps.
e. Rig and adjust the cowl flaps as described in paragraph 8A-14.
f. Install all accesspanels.
8A-14. RIGGING AND ADJUSTING ENGINE COWL FLAPS. (Refer to Figure 8A-1.)
a. Remove the two side cowl panels from each engine.
b. Ascertain that the cowl flap mechanism is properly installed. (Refer to Paragraph
8A-13.)
c. With the cowl flap selector in the cabin placed in the OPEN position, adjust the rod
ends (6 and 11) of the rod assembly(8) so the cowl flap is open to the dimension shown in
Figure 8A-1.
d. This dimension should be measured normal to the nacelle skin. (Refer to Figure
8A-1.) Divide the adjustment between both rod ends, and check all rod ends and clevisends
for adequate thread engagement.
e. Move the selector in the cabin to the CLOSEDposition and check that the trailing
edge of the outboard cowl flap clears the exhaust tube by at least .12 of an inch. Do not
exceed one inch opening on either the outboard or inboard cowl flap. This dimension is
measured normal to the nacelle skin and trailing edge of the cowl flap.
f. It may be necessary to readjust the OPEN position slightly to obtain these
measurements.
g. Adjust the two forward flaps to fit flush when closed by adjusting the rod
connecting the front and aft cowl flaps.
h. Adjust the stop screws (12) at the trailing edge of the cowl flaps until they contact
the cowl flaps firmly.
8-15. PROPELLER.
8A-16. REMOVAL OF PROPELLER. (Refer to Figure 8A-2.)Thisincludesall propellers,

standard and with spring backup kit installed,identified by a letter "S" in the dash number.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3E2
2486
1. SPINNER CAP ATTACHMENT SCREW
2. SPINNER CAP
3. AIR VALVE
4. CHECK NUT
5. LOW PITCH STOP
6. "O" RING
7. SPINNER
8. SPINNER ATTACHMENT SCREW
9. CHECK NUT
10. HUB BOLT
11. HUB NUT
12. BLADE
13. AFT SPINNER BULKHEAD
14. STUD
15. "O" RING
INSTALL FLANGE STUDS

IN SHORT BUSHINGS
Figure 8A-2. Propeller Installation
NOTE
When removing the propeller, it is unnecessaryto remove the

spinner, feather the blades, or remove the air charge. When
the propeller is removed for serviceor overhaul, the propeller
with the spring kit installed should be feathered on the
aircraft (see CAUTIONon followingpage) and the spinner on
either prop must be removed according to section d of this
paragraph.
WARNING
Do not attempt to disassemble the propeller assembly any

further than stated in this manual. Only personnel at a
certified repair shop are authorized for repair and overhaul of
the propeller mechanism.
CAUTION
Prior to performing any work on the propeller, ascertain that

and the mixture control is in the IDLE CUT-OFFposition.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3E3
Exaggeratedvieof nicks
In leadingedge. Exaggeratedview of nick
in face of b
Recommendedmethod for removing SECTIONAA-

nicksby riffle file andcrocus cloth. Nick in faceof blade
Blend deepestportionof nick into removed byfile and
leadingedge aligment with smooth crocuscloth as recom-
curves. mended.
Figure 8A-3. Typical Nicks and RemovalMethod
CAUTION
Under NO condition should blade paddles be used on either

propeller, except to unfeather a propeller with the spring kit
installed (see paragraph 8A-18). If a propeller is to be
feathered on the ground, it should be done with the engine
operating, by use of the propeller control on the throttle
quadrant.
a. Remove all hardware that attaches the nose cowl to the top and bottom engine
cowls. The top and side panels of the main cowl assembly may be removed for greater
accessibility. Work the nose cowl as far forward as possible, reach through the openingand
split the cowl by pulling the upper and lower hinge pins. Pliers may be needed to pull the
pins. The two halves of the cowl may be pulled forward and to either side of the propeller,
which should be in a vertical position for ease in removingthe cowl.
NOTE
In some appropriate manner, index the propeller and starter

ring to facilitate installation. (Example- paint stripe.) Do not
scratch the surface.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3E4
b. Place a drip pan under the propeller to catch oil spillage.

c. Cut safety wire around the propeller mounting studs and remove the studs (14) from
the engine flange by wrenching the nuts. These nuts are "frozen" to the studs with loctite
and secured with roll pins, so the studs should turn with the nuts. Pull the propeller from
the engine shaft.
d. In the event that the spinner and spinner bulkhead are to be removed for cleaning,
inspection, adjustment of pitch stop, etc., remove the spinner nose cap attaching screwsand
cap (1 and 2). Remove the spinner (7) by removing the safety wire and check nut (4) from
the propeller at the forward end of the forward spinner bulkhead and the screws (8) that
secure the spinner to the aft bulkhead (13). The aft spinner bulkhead may be removed from
the hub by removingthe locknuts (11).
8A-17. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF PROPELLER.
WARNING
Prior to performing any work on propeller, ensure the

dome pressure is discharged.
a. Check for oil and greaseleaks.

b. Clean the spinner, propeller hub and blades with a non-corrosivesolvent.
d. Steel hub parts should not be permitted to rust. Use aluminum paint to touch up, if
necessary, or replate during overhaul.
e. Check all visibleparts for wear and safety.
f. Check the blades of the standard propeller to determine whether they turn freely on
the hub pivot tube. This can be done by rocking the blades back and forth through the
slight freedom allowed by the pitch change mechanism. Do this by hand being careful not to
slam the internal mechanism against the stops. If blades appear tight and are properly
lubricated, the propeller may need internal repair. (See WARNING under "Removal of
Propeller".) This cannot be done with the spring propeller due to the pressure exerted by the
spring even though the dome pressure is discharged.
g. Inspect blades for damage or cracks. Nicks in leading edges of blades should be filed
out and all edges rounded, as cracks sometimes start from such places. Use fine emery cloth
for finishing.Refer to Figure 8A-3 for propeller blade care.
h. Check condition of propeller mounting nuts and studs.
NOTE
It is recommended that for severe damage, internal repairs
and replacement of parts, the propeller should be referred to
the Hartzell Factory or Certified Repair Station.
i. Each blade face should be sanded lightly with fine sandpaper and painted, when
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3E5
TABLE VIIIA-I. PROPELLER SPECIFICATIONS
Blade Angle Low Pitch (High RPM) 14.5 °

15.2° (1)
Feathered 80°
MEASUREMENT TAKEN AT 30 INCH RADIUS
(1) TIO-540-CIA ENGINES ONLY
Propeller RPM Engine Static High RPM 2575

Setting

Limits (Dry)
Spinner Bulkhead (Aft) 22 foot-pounds
Propeller Mounting Bolts 60 foot-pounds
Spinner Bulkhead Check Nut 35-40 foot-pounds
Spinner Attachment Screws 40 inch-pounds
CHAMBER PRESSURE REQUIREMENTS WITH TEMPERATURE

HC-E2YR-2RBor HC-E2YR-2RBFor HC-E2YK-2RBor HC-E2YK-2RBF
Temp. °F Press. (psi) Temp. OF Press. (psi)
100 188 30 165

90 185 20 162
80 182 10 159
70 178 0 154
60 175 -10 152
50 172 -20 149
40 168 -30 146
HC-E2YK-2RBSor HC-E2YK-2RBSFor HC-E2YR-2RBSor HC-E2YR-2RBSF

100 74
70 70
40 66
10 62
-20 58
POWER PLANT
3E6
necessary, with a flat black paint to retard glare. A light application of oil or wax may be
applied to the surfaces to prevent corrosion.
8A-18. INSTALLATION OF PROPELLER. (Refer to Figure 8A-2.)
WARNING
Prior to performing any work around propeller, ascertain that

and the mixture control is in the IDLE CUT-OFFposition.
a. Clean the propeller flange, starter ring and crankshaft flange.

b. Install spinner bulkhead (13) on propeller hub and secure with locknuts. Torque
bolts to specificationsgivenin Table VIIIA-I.
c. Ascertain that the starter ring gear is properly on the crankshaft flange.The oversize
hole in the starter ring must go over the oversizebushing.
d. Position the prop flange and starter ring gear so the two short bushings are
horizontal. (Refer to Figure 8A-2.)
e. Lubricate and install O-ring(15) in prop hub.
f. Place the propeller in a horizontal position and mount to the engine crankshaft.
Check alignment of paint stripe (refer to NOTE under paragraph 8A-16). Screw each stud
into its mating engine flange bushing a few threads at a time until all are tight. Torque the
studs to the specificationsgiven in Table VIIIA-I.
g. Safety studs with MS20995-C41wire. Safety wire is inserted through the roll pins.
h. Install spinner (7). Torque spinner screws (8) and check nut (4) per Table VIIIA-I.
Safety check nut with MS20995-C41wire.
NOTE
Do not check pressure or charge with PROPELLERin

feather position.
WARNING
To obtain an accurate pressure reading when checking

propeller dome air pressure or to insure complete release of
all air pressure, place the propeller CONTROLin the feather
detent before measuring or releasing propeller air pressure.
This procedure will insure the free flow of all air within the
prop dome and prevent possible error in pressurereadings or
injury to service personnel should the low pitch stop be
removed.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3E7
NOTE
If the propeller is in feather on the ground, it is undesirable

to run it out of feather through engine operation due to
roughness which will occur possibly causingseveredamage to
engine mount and exhaust system. Remove the air charge,
unfeather the blades with equal pressure applied by means of
blade paddles used on both blades as close to the hub as
possible. Listen for the quiet distinctive "clicks" of the high
pitch stop pins, then stop and remove the paddles.
j. Charge the cylinder through air valve (3) with dry air or nitrogen gas to the
prescribed pressure. Refer to Table VIIIA-I of this manual for an exact pressure for the
existing temperature. It is most important that an accurate chargebe maintained.
k. The amount of air pressure per existing temperature, as shown by Table VIIIA-I,is
very important and should always be used. If excessive pressure is used in the propeller,
there is a possibility of feathering taking place at idle speed when the engine is warm and the
oil viscosity is low. An accurate air pressure gauge should always be used. A pressuregauge
and valve kit, part number 756 771, may be purchased through a Piper Dealer or
Distributor.
1. When rechargingthe propeller, dry air or nitrogen gas should be used. It is important
not to allow moisture to enter the air chamber as this could cause the piston to freeze
during cold weather operation.
m. Test for leakageby using a soap solution or equivalent and applying it around the air
valvestem and adjustment stop nut.
n. To reinstall engine cowling, first put the propeller in a vertical position then fit the
two halves of the nose cowl together behind the spinner bulkhead and pin them together
with the two hinge pins through the top and bottom hinges. Slide the nose cowl back and
into proper location with the engine cowls. Locate holes and install all hardware that
attaches the cowls together. Install top and side engine cowl panels if removed. Install
spinner cap.
8A-19. ADJUSTMENT OF LOW PITCH BLADE ANGLE AND STOP.
NOTE
Both types of propellers referred to, come from the factory

with the low pitch stop adjusted for proper blade angle. If,
however this adjustment has been disturbed, the procedure
given below is used for obtaining blade angle, but applies
only to the propeller without the springkit A-2273 installed.
There is no way to check the low pitch blade angle of the
propeller, with the spring kit installed, in the field. This is
due to the internal spring producing a force near to that of
the air charge in the standard propeller which can and has to
be released to make this adjustment. The spring supplies
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3E8
constant pressure to the blades making it very difficult to

rotate the blades to a point where the low pitch stop is
contacted. Therefore, if the blade angle on a spring propeller
is suspected to be wrong it should be referred back to the
Hartzell Factory or Certified Repair Shop.
a. Procedure for obtaining blade angle and adjusting low pitch stop.
1. The blade angle (refer to Table VIIIA-I) is determined by placing a propeller
protractor on the face side of the propeller at the 30 inch station as measured from the hub
2. The low pitch stop is adjusted by rotating a screw in the nose of the propeller
cylinder. Rotating the screw clockwiseincreases the low pitch angle and reduces the static
RPMby about 100 RPM for each half turn, or vice versa.
CAUTION
Before adjusting the low pitch stop screw, the air pressure
should be dropped to zero. Unless this is done, it is possible
. to unscrew the low stop far enough to disengage the threads,
allowing the air pressure to blow the stop screw out with
great force. To insure the complete discharge of all air
pressure within the dome, place the propeller CONTROLin
the feather detent. There should be at least four threads of
the stop screw engaged.
b. After the low pitch stop has been adjusted for proper blade angle, torque the low
pitch stop jam nut to 30 foot-pounds. The governor should then be adjusted to obtain'
maximum rated engine RPMduring take-off and climb.
8A-20. BLADE TRACK. Blade track is the ability of one blade tip to follow the other,
while rotating, in almost exactly the same plane. Excessivedifference in blade track - more
than 0.062 inch - may be an indication of bent blades or improper propeller installation.
Check blade track as follows:
a. With the engine shut down and bladesvertical, secure to the aircraft a smooth board
just under the tip of the lower blade. Move the tip fore and aft through its full
"blade-shake" travel making small marks with a pencil at each position. Then center the tip
between these marks and scribe a line on the board for the full width of the tip.
b. Carefully rotate propeller by hand to bring the opposite blade down. Center the tip
and scribe a pencil line as before and check that lines are not separated more than 0.062
inch.
c. Propellers having excessive difference in blade track should be removed and
inspected for bent blades, or for parts of sheared O-ring, or foreign particles which have
lodged between hub and crankshaft mounting faces. Bent blades will require repair and
overhaul of assembly. Other conditions will require installation in the prescribed manner.
(Refer to paragraph 8A-18.)
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3E9
8A-21. PROPELLER GOVERNOR.
8A-22. REMOVAL OF PROPELLER GOVERNOR.

a. Remove the upper engine cowl per paragraph 8A-6.
b. Disconnect the control cable end from the governor control arm.
c. Remove the governor mounting stud nuts. It will be necessary to move the
governor out from the mounting pad as the nuts are being removed before the
nuts can be completely removed.
d. Remove the mounting gasket. If the governor is to be removed for a con-
siderable length of time and another unit not substituted, it is advisable to cover
the mounting pad to prevent damage caused by foreign matter.
8A-23. INSTALLATION OF PROPELLER GOVERNOR.

a. Clean the mounting pad thoroughly, making very certain that there are no
foreign particles in the recess around the drive shaft.
b. Place the governor mounting gasket in position with the raised portion of
the screen facing away from the engine.
c. Align the splines on the governor shaft with the engine drive and slide the
governor into position.
d. With the governor in position, raise the governor enough to install washers
and start mounting nuts. Torque nuts even.
e. Connect the control cable end to the governor control arm. The ball stud
is installed in the inner hole of the control arm.
f. Adjust governor control per paragraph 8A-24.
g. Install engine cowl per paragraph 8A-8.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3E10
1.
2.
BOLT ASSEMBLY
CONTROL WHEEL
766 8A-24. RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENTOF
3. CONTROL ARM PROPELLER GOVERNOR. (Referto Figure
4. RPM ADJUSTING SCREW
5. LOCKNUT
8A-4.)
a. Start engine, park 90 degrees to wind
direction and warm in the normal manner.
b. To check high RPM, low pitch setting,
move the propeller control all the way
forward to the INCREASE PROPELLER
position. At this position the governor speed
control arm (3) should be against the high
RPM fine adjusting screw (4). With the
throttle full forward, observe engine RPM
which should be 2575 RPM with high RPM
properly adjusted.
c. Should engine RPM not be as
required, the high RPM setting should be
adjusted as follows:
Figure 8A-4. Propeller Governor
1. Shut down the engine and remove the upper enginecowl.
2. Adjust the governor by means of the fine adjustment screw (4) for 2575 RPM.
To do this, loosen the high RPM fine adjustment screw locknut and turn the screw in a
clockwise direction to decrease engine speed or in a counterclockwise direction to increase
engine speed.
NOTE
One revolution of the fine adjustment screw will increase or

decrease the engine speed approximately 20 RPM.
3. Reinstall upper engine cowl and repeat step b to ascertain proper RPM setting,
4. After setting the proper high RPM adjustment, run the self-locking nut on the
fine adjustment screw against the base projection to lock.
5. Ascertain that the governor control arm (3) is adjusted to the proper angle on
the control wheel (2) as shown in Figure 8A-4.
d. With the high RPM adjustment complete, the control system should be adjusted so
that the governor control arm will contact the high RPM stop when the cockpit lever is
0.062 of an inch from its full forward stop which is located in the control pedestal. To
adjust the control lever travel, disconnect the control cable end from the control arm,
loosen the cable end jam nut and rotate the end to obtain the desired lever clearance.
Reconnect the cable end and tighten jam nut.
POWER PLANT
3E11 3E11 Reissued:2/18/81
e. It is usually only necessary to adjust the high RPM setting of the governor control
system, as the action automatically takes care of the positive high pitch setting.
8A-25. ENGINE.
8A-26. REMOVAL OF ENGINE. The removal of either engine is basically the same
procedure, though the routing of some wires, cables, lines,etc., does vary between engines.
Each line should be identified to facilitate reinstallation and covered, where disconnected,
to prevent contamination.
a. Turn off all cockpit switches and then disconnect the battery ground wire at the
battery.
b. Move the fuel valve control lever, located on the fuel control box between the two
front seats, to the off position.
c. Remove the engine cowling per paragraph 8A-6.
e. Remove the propeller per paragraph 8A-16.
f. Disconnect the starter cable at the starter, remove the cable clamps and pull it aft to
the firewall.
g. Disconnect the alternator wires and wire clamps, pull the wires aft to the firewall.
h. Remove the governor control cable and injector control cables.
i. Disconnect the cylinder head temperature, manifold pressure, oil pressure, fuel
pressure and fuel flow gaugevent lines.
j. Disconnect the engine oil breather, magneto "P" leads, oil temperature wire and
tachometer cable.
k. Disconnect the vacuum hoses,air oil separator line to the engine, oil cooler lines and
remove oil cooler.
1. Disconnect the fuel lines at the fuel pump, the hydraulic pump lines and bonding
straps.
m. Loosen the magneto mounting nuts and rotate the magnetos to clear the engine
mounts.
n. Disconnect the instrument air line at the rear center baffle.
o. Disconnect the turbo oil cooler lines at the cooler located on top of the engine.
p. Disconnect the instrument compressor pressure line located on the turbo air duct
leading to the throttle.
q. Disconnect the instrument air line at the fuel pump.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3E12
r. Disconnect the oil line leading to the compressor and the return line leading
from the compressor to the oil supply tank.
s. Disconnect the oil lines at the wastegate actuator.
t. To prevent damage to the tail when removing the weight of the engine, at-
u. Attach a one-half ton(minimum) capacity hoist tothe engine lifting eye and
v. Remove the cotter pin, nut, washer, front rubber mount and sleeve from
all four mount bolts.
w. Slide mount bolts out of attaching points and slowly swing engine free and
place on a suitable support being careful not to damage any attached parts.
x. Remove the rear rubber mounts.
8A-27. INSTALLATION OF ENGINE. Refer to Figure 8A-5 for proper arrangement of

the engine mount shock assemblies.The top shocks are assembled so the silvercolored shocks
are aft and the gold colored shocks are forward. The lower shock mounts are installed
opposite of the top shock mounts.
a. Attach a one-half ton hoist to the lifting strap and lift the engine. The ex-
haust stacks, injector and accessories may be installed.
b. Swing the engine into position with the nose slightly high and inward. Allow
the magnetos to clear the ring of the engine mount. Position the mounting lugs
of the engine so they align with the engine mount attaching points.
c. Insert a mounting bolt into the engine mount until its threaded end extends
NOTE
A heat shield is installed with the bottom outboard

shock mount. Adjust so as to give maximum protec-
tion against exhaust tube heat.
washers and a self-locking nut on each mounting bolt. Tighten the nuts progres-
sively, following a circular sequence, and torque to 34 to 42 foot-pounds.
f. Connect the two wastegate actuator oil lines.
g. Connect the compressor oil line and the oil return line from the compressor
to the oil supply tank.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3E13
3 E14
769 2488 2483
SECTIONA-A
SKETCHA
1. OIL COOLER
2. OIL FILTER
3. PRESSURE CONTROLLER
4. VACUUM PUMP
30 29 8 25 8
5. MAGNETO, RIGHT
6. SOLENOID VALVE
7. ENGINE MOUNT ASSEMBLY
(SEE SKETCH B)
8. SHOCK MOUNT
9. OIL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
10. FUEL INJECTOR MANIFOLD
11. TURBO OIL COOLER TUBES
12. LIFTING STRAP
13. FUEL AIR BLEED NOZZLE
15. SPARK PLUG
16. PRESSURE WARNING SWITCH
17. OIL FILTER B
18. EXHAUST STACK
19. EXHAUST BY -PASS VALVE
20. TURBINE
21. COMINHESSOR LUBRICATE THREADS OF EXHAUST
22. AIR BOX 21 STACK ATTACHMENT NUTSWITH FEL
23. INDUCTION INTAKES
24. EXHAUST STACK
PRO AND TORQUE NUTSTO 160-180
25. ENGINEMOUNT
FILLING INCH-POUNDS.
26. BUSHING
SECTIONB-B
27. BOLT
28. ENGINE MOUNT FRAME
29. WASHER
30. NUT SKETCHB
Figure 8A-5. Engine Installation
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3E15 3E16
h. Connect the instrument air line to the fuel pump.

i. Connect the instrument compressor pressure line to the fitting on the tube air duct leading to the
throttle.
j. Connect the two oil lines to the turbo oil cooler located on top of the engine.
k. Connect the instrument air line located at the rear center baffle.
l. Connect the fuel lines to the fuel pump hydraulic pump lines, left engine only, bonding straps.
m. Connect the vacuum hoses, air oil separator line to the engine.
n. Install the oil cooler and connect oil cooler hoses.
o. Connect the engine oil breather, magneto "P" leads, oil temperature wire to bulb and tachometer
cable.
p. Connect the cylinder head temperature, manifold pressure, fuel pressure and fuel flow gauge vent
line.
q. Install the governor control cable bracket cable.
r. Connect the injector unit control cables.
s. Connect the alternator wires and clamp the wires to rocker arm oil return lines.
t. Connect the starter cable and clamp cable to rocker arm oil return lines.
u. Ascertain that the magneto switches are off and install the propeller per paragraph 8A-18.
v. Install the proper grade and amount of engine oil. (Refer to latest revision Lycoming Service
Instruction No. 1241 for engine pre-oiling prior to initial start.)
w. Connect the battery ground wire at the battery.
x. Turn on the fuel valve, open the throttle full and turn on the electric fuel pump and check the fuel
lines for leaks.
y. Perform an engine operational check.
z. Check for oil leaks.
aa. Install the access plates on the engine nacelle and the cowling per paragraph 8A-8.
8A-28. ENGINE SHOCK MOUNTS. Replace at engine TBO or on condition. (Refer to Section 8, Engine
Shock Mounts for conditions.)
8A-29. REPLACING ENGINE SHOCK MOUNTS. The engine shock mounts may be replaced with the
engine installed as well as removed from the airplane. Refer to Figure 8A-7 for the arrangement of the shock
mount assembly. The top shocks are assembled so the silver colored shocks are aft and the gold colored shocks
are forward. The procedure described in this paragraph is with the engine installed.
a. Remove the engine cowling. (Refer to Paragraph 8A-6.)
b. Attach a one-half ton (minimum) hoist to the engine hoisting hooks and relieve tension from the
shock mounts.
POWER PLANT
Revised: 4/26/83
3E17
c. Loosen the upper shock mount attaching nuts.

d. Remove the lower mount attaching nuts, washers, heat shield, forward shock
mounts and spacers.
e. Remove the lower attaching bolts just far enough to allow the aft shock mounts to
be removed. The bushing in each lower mount must be removed with the bolt.
f. Raise the nose of the engine enough to remove the lower aft shock mounts and
replace with new ones.
NOTE
Care should be taken not to introduce adverse stresses

on the control cables, electrical cables, hoses and
other items attached to the engine while hoisting the
engine.
g. Lower the engine, slide the attaching bolts with bushings into place and install the
spacers, forward shock mounts, heat shield, washersand nuts. Start nuts only a few threads.
Rotate the shield to provide greatest protection against exhaust heat.
h. Remove the upper mount attaching bolts, nuts, washers,forward shock mounts and
spacers.
i. Lower the engine enough to replace the upper aft shock mounts. Raise the engine
into position.
j. Install the spacers, forward shock mounts, mounting bolts, washers and nuts.
k. Tighten attaching bolts 34 to 42 foot-pounds.
8A-30. FUEL INJECTOR.
CAUTION

entering the air sections of the injector. As explained
previously, damage to the air diaphragm will result. Fluid can
easily enter the air section of the injector through the impact
tubes or the annular groove around the venturi. For this
reason, a protective plate should be installed on the scoop
mounting flange when performing routing maintenance on
the engine, such as washing down the engine and air scoop,
serviceingthe air filter (surplus oil on the element), or when
injecting preservative into the engine prior to storing or
shipping.
POWER PLANT
8A-31. FUEL INJECTOR MAINTENANCE.

a. In general, little attention is required between injector overhauls. How-
ever, it is recommended that the following items be checked during periodic in-
spection of the engine.
1. Checktightness and lock of all nuts and screws which fasten the injector
to the engine.
2. Check all fuel lines for tightness and evidence of leakage. A slight fuel
stain adjacent to the air bleed nozzles is not cause for concern.
3. Check throttle and mixture control rods and levers for tightness and
lock.
4. Remove and clean the injector fuel inlet strainer at each 50 hour inspec-
tion. Damaged strainer "O" rings should be replaced.
b. Tests prove that gasoline which becomes stale due to prolonged storage
absorbs oxygen rapidly. This stale oxidized gasoline acquires a very distinctive
odor similar to varnish, causes rapid deterioration of synthetic rubber parts,
and also forms a gummy deposit on the internal metal parts. This condition,
however, does not occur during normal operation of the injector where fresh fuel
is being constantly circulated.
8A-32. LUBRICATION.
a. There is very little need for lubrication of the injector in the field between
regular overhauls. However, the clevis pins used in connection with the throttle
and manual mixture control levers should be checked for freedom of movement
and lubricated, if necessary.
b. Place a drop of engine grade oil on the end of the throttle shaft in such a
manner that it can work into the throttle shaft bushings.
8A-33. REMOVAL OF FUEL INJECTOR, NOZZLE LINES, FUEL LINES AND FUEL
FLOW DIVIDER.
a. Remove the engine cowling. (Refer to Paragraph 8A-6.)
b. Disconnect the throttle and mixture control cables at the injector.
c. Remove the air box by removing bottom access panel on the air box and
remove attaching screws holding air box to the injector unit.
d. Disconnect the fuel inlet line at the injector.
e. Disconnect the fuel outlet line to the flow divider at the injector.
i . Disconnect the inlet fuel line at the flow divider.
j. Remove the two attaching bolts and remove fuel flow divider and nozzle
lines as a unit.
k. Remove air bleed nozzles, (Refer to Paragraph 8A-39.)
POWER PLANT
3E19
Figure 8A-6. Schematic of RSA Fuel Injection System
POWER PLANT
Reissued:2/18/81
3E20
1. IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT

3. MIXTURE ARM
4. FUEL SCREEN
3-
Figure 8A-7. Fuel Injector
8A-34. PREPARATION FOR STORAGE. Any unit taken out of service, or units
being returned for overhaul, must be flushed with preserving oil (Specification
MIL-O-6081, Grade 1010), using the following procedure:
CAUTION
Do not exceed air pressure below as internal damage to the

injector may result. See CAUTION in Paragraph 8A-30.
a. Remove plugs and drain all fuel from the injector. If available,apply 10 to 15 psi air
pressure to the fuel inlet until all fuel is dischargedfrom the injector.
b. Replace plugs and apply flushing oil filtered through a 10-micromfilter at 13 to 15
psi to the injector fuel inlet until oil is dischargedfrom the outlet.
c. Replace fuel inlet shipping plug.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3E21
d. After filling with preservative oil, the injector should be protected from
dust and dirt and given such protection against moisture as climatic conditions
at the point of storage require. In most cases, storing the unit in a dry area
will be sufficient.
e. If the unit is to be stored near or shipped over salt water, the following
precautions should be observed:
1. Spray the exterior of the injector with an approved preservative oil.
2. Pack in a dustproof container, wrap the container with moisture and
vapor-proof material, and seal. Pack the wrapped unit in a suitable shipping
case. Pack a one-half pound bag of silica gel crystals in the dustproof container
with injector. The bag must not touch the injector.
CAUTION

enteringthe air sections of the injector. As explained
previously, damage to the air diaphragm will result.
Fluid can easily enter the air section of the injector
through the impact tubes or the annular groove around
the venturi. For this reason, a protective plate should
be installed on the scoop mounting flange when per-
forming routing maintenance on the engine, such as
washing down the engine and air scoop, servicing the
air filter (surplus oil on the element), or when inject-
ing preservative into the engine prior to storing or
shipping.
8A-35. INSTALLATION OF FUEL INJECTOR.

a. Install air bleed nozzles. (Refer to Paragraph 8A-41.)
b. Install fuel flow divider and nozzle lines, attach divider to the crankcase
with attaching bolts and connect lines to nozzles.
c. Connect inlet fuel line and fuel flow meter line.
d. Install a gasket and attach the injector unit to the engine sump with washers
and nuts.
e. Install air box with attaching bolts; attach bottom access plate with screws.
f. Connect the throttle and mixture control cables.
h. Install the cowlingas described in paragraph 8A-8.
i . Adjust the idle speed and mixture of the injector.
POWER PLANT
3E22
8A-36. ADJUSTMENT OF THROTTLE AND MIXTURE CONTROLS. The throttle

and mixture are adjusted so that when the throttle arm on the injector is rotated forward
against its full throttle stop and the mixture arm is rotated forward against its full rich stop,
their respective cockpit control levers should be 1/16 to 1/8 of an inch in from their full
forward stops which are located in the control pedestal.
a. At the injector, disconnect the throttle and/or mixture control cable end from its
control arm.
b. Loosen the jam nut securing the cable end.
c. Adjust the linkage by rotating the cable end to obtain the 0.062 of an inch
springback of the cockpit control lever when the throttle or mixture control arm contacts
its stop.
d. Reconnect the cable end to its control arm and securejam nut.
e. Pull the throttle and mixture control lever in the cockpit full aft to ascertain that
the injector idle screw contacts its stop and the mixture control arm contacts its lean
position.
8A-37. ADJUSTMENT OF IDLE SPEED AND MIXTURE.

a. Start the engine and warm up in the usual manner until oil and cylinder head
temperatures are normal.
b. Check magnetos. If the "mag-drop" is normal, proceed with the idle adjustment.
c. Close the throttle to idle. If the RPM changes appreciably after making the idle
mixture adjustment during the succeeding steps, readjust the idle speed to obtain from 625
to 675 RPM.
NOTE
The idle mixture must be adjusted with the fuel boost pump
ON.
d. When the idling speed has been stabilized, move the cockpit mixture control lever
with a smooth, steady pull toward the "Idle Cut-Off" position and observe the tachometer
for any change during the "leaning" process. Caution must be exercised to return the
mixture control to the "Full Rich" position before the RPM can drop to a point where the
engine cuts out. An increase of more than 50 RPM while "leaning out" indicates an
excessively rich idle mixture. An immediate decrease in RPM (if not preceded by a
momentary increase) indicates the idle mixture is too lean.
POWER PLANT
3E23
A780
1. RETAINER
2. SPRING
3. CAP
4. "O" RING
5. "O" RING
6. NOZZLE 2
LW 10475
Figure 8A-8. Fuel Air BleedNozzle
e. If the above indicates that the idle adjustment is too rich or too lean, turn the idle
mixture adjustment in the direction required for correction, and check this new position by
repeating the above procedure. Make additional adjustments as necessary. Each time the
adjustment is changed, the engine should be run up to 2000 RPM to clear the engine before
proceeding with the RPM check. Make final adjustment of the idle speed adjustment to
obtain the desired idling RPM with closedthrottle. The above method aims at a setting that
will obtain maximum RPM with minimum manifold pressure. In case the setting does not
remain stable, check the idle linkage;any loosenessin this linkage would cause erratic idling.
In all cases, allowanceshould be made for the effect of weather conditions and field altitude
upon idling adjustment.
8A-38. FUEL AIR BLEED NOZZLE.
8A-39. REMOVAL OF FUEL AIR BLEED NOZZLE. The nozzles must be carefully
removed as they or the cylinders may be damaged.
a. Remove the lower engine cowl. (Refer to paragraph 8A-6.)
b. Disconnect the fuel line from the nozzle.
c. Removethe springretainer and spring from the nozzle stem.
d. Disconnect the nozzle shroud from the vent hose and remove it from the nozzle.
e. Carefully remove the nozzle using the correct size deep socket.
8A-40. CLEANING AND INSPECTION OF FUEL AIR BLEED NOZZLE.
CAUTION
Do not emerse "O" rings in cleaning fluid; the rings may

swell.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3E24
a. Clean the nozzle with acetone or equivalent and blow out all foreign particles with
compressed air in the direction opposite that of fuel flow. Do not use wire or other hard
objects to clean orifices. (Refer to latest revision of Lycoming Service Instruction No. 1275.)
b. Inspect and replace nozzle "0" rings if found to be cracked, brittle or distorted.
c. A test procedure is described in Lycoming Service Instruction No. 1275.
8A-41. INSTALLATION OF FUEL AIR BLEED NOZZLE.

a. It is important for the nozzles to be correctly positioned with the bleed hole facing
up.
b. Install the nozzles and torque to 60 inch-pounds.
c. Ascertain that the "0" rings are properly installed on the nozzle stem and install the
nozzle shroud. (Refer to Figure 8A-9.)
d. Connect the vent to the nozzle shroud.
e. Install the spring and spring retainer on the nozzle stem.
f. Connect the fuel line to the nozzle and clamp the fuel line as described in latest revision
of Lycoming Service Bulletin No. 335.
g. Install the engine cowl. (Refer to paragraph 8A-8.)
8A-42. IGNITION SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.
8A-43. MAGNETO.
WARNING
Ascertain that the primary circuit of both magnetos is

grounded before working on the engine.
8A-44. INSPECTION OF MAGNETO.

a. After the first 25 hour and 50 hour periods, and periodically thereafter, the contact
assemblies should be checked. Examine the points for excessive wear or burning. Points
which have deep pits or excessively burned areas should be discarded. Examine the cam
follower felt for proper lubrication. If necessary, points can be cleaned by using any hard
finished paper. Clean breaker compartment with dry cloth.
b. If engine operating troubles develop which appear to be caused by the ignition
system, it is advisable to check the spark plugs and wiring first before working on the
magnetos.
c. Should the trouble appear definitely associated with the magneto, the most effective
measure is to install a replacement magneto which is known to be in satisfactory condition
and send the suspected unit to the overhaul shop for test and repair.
d. Should this not be possible, a visual inspection may disclose the source of trouble.
Remove the harness outlet plate from the magneto. Inspect for the presence of moisture and
foreign matter on the rubber grommet and high tension outlet side of the distributor block.
Check height of block contact springs. (0.422 maximum from top of block tower to spring.)
(Refer to Figure 8A-10.) Also check for broken leads or damaged insulation. If either is
present, remove magneto and replace with one known to be in satisfactory condition.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3F1
223
NORMAL POINT IS SMOOTH MINOR IRREGULARITIES- WELL DEFINED MOUND

AND FLAT. SURFACE HAS SMOOTH ROLLING HILLS EXTENDING NOTICEABLY
DULL GRAY "SANDBLASTED" AND DALES WITHOUT ANY ABOVE SURROUNDING
APPEARANCE DEEP PITS OR HIGH PEAKS. SURFACE. REJECT POINTS.
THIS IS A NORMAL CONDITION
OF POINT WEAR.
Figure 8A-9. Contact Points
e. Remove the breaker cover and harness securing screws and nuts, and sep-
arate cover from magneto housing. Check contact assemblies to see that cam
follower is securely riveted to its spring. Examine the contact points for ex-
cessive wear or burning. Figure 8A-9 shows how the average contact point will
look when surfaces are separated for inspection. Desired contact surfaces have
a dull gray, sand-blasted (almost rough) or frosted appearance over the area
where electrical contact is made. This means that points are worn in and mated
to each other, thereby providing the
best possible electrical contact and 0.422 MAX.
highest efficiency of performance.
f. Minor irregularities or rough-
ness of point surfaces are not harmful.
(Refer to Figure 8A-9 center.) Neither
are small pits or mounds, if not too
pronounced. If there is a possibility of
pit becoming deep enough to penetrate
pad, Figure 8A-9 right, reject contact
assembly.
Figure 8A-10. Contact Spring

Inspection
POWER PLANT
Reissued:2/18/81
3F2
NOTE
No attempt should be made to stone or dress contact

points. Should contact assembly have bad points or
show excessive wear, the complete contact assembly
should be replaced.
g. Check the condition of the cam follower felt. Squeeze felt tightly between
thumb and forefinger. If fingers are not moistened with oil, re-oil using 2 or 3
drops of Bendix P/N 10-391200 lubricant. Allow approximately 30 minutes for felt to
absorb the oil. Blot off the excess with a clean cloth. Too much oil may foul contact points
and cause excessiveburning.
h. Check the capacitor mounting bracket for cracks or looseness. Using the
Scintilla 11-1767-1, -2, or -3 Condenser Tester or equivalent, check capacitor
for capacitance, series resistance and leakage. Capacitance shall be at least
0.30 microfarads.
i . Check magneto to engine timing as follows:
1. Connect Scintilla 11-851 Timing Light or equivalent across the main
contact assembly.
2. Slowly bring the engine up to number one cylinder advance firing posi-
tion as instructed in paragraph 8A-57. At this instant the timing light should go
out. If it does, the magneto is properly timed to the engine. If the timing light
does not go out, removal of the magneto for internal timing check and inspection
is recommended.
NOTE
The magneto service instructions in this manual are

to cover minor repairs and timing. For further re-
pairs and adjustments of the magneto, it is recom-
mended that the manufacturer's recommended ser-
vice instructions be followed.
8A-45. REMOVAL OF MAGNETO. Before removing the magneto, make sure magneto
switches are off.
a. Remove the engine access plates from the side of the engine to be worked on.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3F3
Figure 8A-11. Rotor Holding Figure 8A-12. Timing Kit Installed

Tool Installed
WARNING
The magneto is not internally grounded; when the ground

lead is disconnected, the magneto is hot. Removing the
harness assemblyterminal plate first and installing them last
minimizes the danger of starting the engine accidentally when
the ground lead is removed from the magneto.
b. Remove the harness assemblyterminal plate from the magneto.

c. Disconnect the ground lead and, where applicable, the retard spark lead on the left
magneto, at the magneto.
d. Remove the nuts and washersand draw the magneto from the engine.
8A-46. TIMING PROCEDURE. (Internal Timing.) (-120) series magnetos.)

a. Remove the cover to the contact(s), distributor block, etc.
b. To internally time the main contact assembly of either the dual-breaker
magnetos or the single-breaker magnetos, proceed as follows:
1. Loosen the nut securing the drive plate to the magneto shaft sufficiently
in order to install the Scintilla 11-8465 Rotor Holding Tool under the nut and flat
washer as shown in Figure 8A-11. Tighten the nut securely.
2. Remove the timing inspection plug from the top of the magneto. Turn
rotating magnet to proper neutral position. This position is determined by lo-
cating keyways on drive end of magnet shaft at 12 o'clock with respect to name
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2 18 81
3F4
plate on housing. Tighten adjusting knob of 11-8465 Rotor Holding Tool until
pressure is applied on housing flange preventing magnet from turning.
3. Loosen and rotate cam until cam follower of main contact assembly
rests on highestpointof cam lobe. Adjust main contactassembly securing screws
to 20 to 25 inch-pounds.
4. Install the 11-8693 Timing Plate Assembly and the 11-8149 Pointer
Assembly of the 11-8150 Scintilla Timing Kitto breaker compartmentof magneto.
(Refer to Figure 8A-12.) Align pointer assembly with the 0 degree mark on
timing plate. Loosen adjusting knob of 11-8465 Rotor Holding Tool and turn
rotating magnet in normal direction of rotation until pointer indexes with the
respective "E" gap mark (15° + 20). Tighten adjusting knob of 11-8465 Tool and
remove the 11-8149 Pointer Assembly from magneto. Using a timing light, ad-
just main contact points to just open. This adjustment shall be made by rotating
cam, in opposite direction of rotation, a few degrees beyond point where contacts
close. Then rotate cam in normal direction of rotation until contacts just open.
While holding cam in this exact position, push cam on magnet shaft as far as
possible with the fingers. Extreme care must be exercised in this operation.
If cam adjustment is changed in the slightest degree, the timing of the magneto
will be thrown off. Do not drive cam on shaft with a mallet or other instrument.
Tighten the securing screw thereby drawing the cam down, evenly and tightly.
Torque screw to 16-20 inch-pounds. Loosen the 11-8465 Rotor Holding Tool ad-
justing knob and return rotating magnetto neutralposition. Reinstall the 11-8149
Pointer Assembly over 0 degree mark on timing plate. Rotate magnet shaft in
normal direction of rotation and check for opening of main contact points at "E"
gap setting (15 + 2).
c. The retard contact assembly of the dual-breaker magnetos may be timed
as follows:
1. The retard contact assembly is adjusted to open a predetermined num-
ber of degrees after the main contact assembly opens. The degree of retard for
any particular magneto is stamped in the bottom of the breaker compartment.
2. Locate the exact point of main contact assembly opening and set the
11-8149 Pointer Assembly over the 0 degree mark on the 11-8693 Timing Plate
Assembly. Turn rotating magnet in the direction of normal rotation until pointer
indexes with the degree of retard. Tighten adjusting knob of 11-8465 Holding
Tool and set retard contact assembly to just open with +2 or -0 degrees. Tighten
securing screws to 20-26 inch-pounds. Loosen adjusting knob of holding tool and
turn rotating magnet until cam follower is on high point of cam lobe. Contact
clearance shall be 0.016 + 0.006 inch. If dimension is not within limits, readjust
contact assembly and recheck to be sure that points will open within retard degree
tolerance. Remove the 11-8150-1 Timing Kit and two studs from the magneto.
POWER PLANT
3F5
d. If the distributor block was not

removed from the housing, the internal
timing may be checked by turning the
magneto inthe normal rotationto num-
ber one firing position (keyway up and
main points just opening). At this po-
sition, the reference line on the dis-
tributor block should line up between
the L and LB marks on the gear. On
single contact magnetos the line should
favor the L mark and on the fuel contact
magnetos the line should favor the LB
mark, if possible.
e. If the distributor block was re-
moved from the housing, the distributor
gear alignment and internal check may Figure 8A-13. Aligning Timing Marks
be accomplished as follows:
1. Turn rotating magnet in direction of rotation until it is located in firing
position (keyway up and main points just opening). Tighten adjusting knob of
11-8465 Rotor Holding Tool. Apply alight coating of Bendix GreaseP/N 10-27165
to teeth of distributor gear, if needed. The large distributor gear incorporates
four timing marks, L and LB for left hand rotation and R and RB for right hand
rotation.
2. With distributor gear assembled to block, turn gear until raised rib on
block lines up between the L and LB marks. Assemble block and gear into hous-
ing, meshing the distributor gears together. For the dual contact assembly mag-
neto, distributor block rib must align between painted marks. However, the rib
should favor the LB mark, if possible. (Refer to Figure 8A-13.) On the single
contact magneto the rib should favor the L mark.
3. Secure distributor block to housing with studs and washers. Tighten
studs finger tight. Loosen the 11-8465 Rotor Holding Tool and turn rotating mag-
net in reverse direction of rotation until timing light indicates main contact as-
sembly has just opened and check to make certaintiming marks align within tol-
erance indicated above. Tighten block securing studs, first to 4-8 inch-pounds
torque and then final torque to 20 inch-pounds.
4. Insert the tip of your small finger through timing hole in housing and
against large distributor gear teeth. Rock distributor gear back and forth slight-
ly. There must be perceptible backlash between teeth of large and small gears.
This check should be made at three different points, 120 degrees apart on gear.
If backlash is not evident, replace large distributor gear.
POWER PLANT
Reissued:2/18 81
3F6
5. Install the breaker cover and

complete reassembly of the magneto.
RETARDTERMINAL Refer to the manufacturer's publica-
tions for complete disassembly and re-
assembly procedures.
f. Install and time magneto, re-
moved from engine, in accordance with
paragraph 8A-47.
g. Secure external switch and retard
leads to the breaker cover terminals.
Connect harness assembly to the mag-
neto.
CAPACITOR
8A-47. INSTALLATION AND TIMING

Figure 8A-14. Forming Leads in PROCEDURE. (Timing Magneto to En-
Breaker Compartment gine.)
a. Remove a spark plug from No. 1
cylinder and turn crankshaft in direction of normal rotation until the compression
stroke is reached.
b. Continue turning the crankshaft until the advance timing mark is in align-
ment with the small hole located on the top face of the starter housing at the two
o'clock position. (Refer to Figure 8A-15.)
c. Remove the inspection plug on the left magneto and turn the drive coupling
in direction of normal rotation until the first painted chamfered tooth is aligned
in the center of the inspection hole. (Refer to Figure 8A-16.) Without allowing
the gear to turn from this position, assemble gasket and magneto to the engine.
Secure in place with washers and nuts; tighten only finger tight.
d. Fasten ground wire of electric timing light to any unpainted portion of the
engine, and one of the positive wires of the timing light to a suitable terminal
connected to the ground terminal of the magneto. Then turn the engine crankshaft
several degrees from the advance timing mark in direction opposite to that of
normal rotation.
e. Turn on the switch of the timing light, which should be lit. Turn the crank-
shaft slowly in direction of normal rotation until the mark on the starter gear
aligns with the hole in the starter housing, at which point the light should go out.
If not, turn the magneto in its mounting flange and repeat the procedure until the
light goes out. Repeat the same procedures with the right magneto.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3F7
223
Figure 8A-15. Engine Timing Marks Figure 8A-16. Magneto Timing Marks
NOTE
Battery powered timing lights operate in the reverse

manner from that described above; the light goes on
when the marks align.
f. After both magnetos have been timed, leave the timing light wires connected
and recheck magnetos as previously described to make sure that both magnetos
are set to fire together. If timing is correct, both timing lights will go out si-
multaneously when the timing marks are in alignment. Tighten nuts to specified
torque.
g. After magnetos have been properly timed, replace breaker cover and se-
cure.
h. Install the ground lead and the retard spark lead on the left magneto.
i. Place the harness terminal plate on the magneto and tighten nut around the
plate alternately to seat cover squarely on magneto. Torque nuts to 18 to 22 inch
pounds.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3F8
230A 8A-48. HARNESS ASSEMBLY.
8A-49. INSPECTION OF HARNESS.

a. Check lead assemblies for nicks,
cuts, mutilated braiding, badly worn
section or any other evidence of phys-
ical damage. Inspect spark plug sleeves
for chafing or tears and damaged or
stripped threads on coupling nuts.
Check compression spring to see if it
is broken or distorted. Inspect grom-
met for tears. Check all mounting
brackets and clamps to see that they
are secure and not cracked.
Figure 8A-17. Removal of Spring b. Using an ohmmeter, buzzer, or
From Lead Assembly other suitable low voltage device, check
each lead for continuity. If continuity
does not exist, wire is broken and must be replaced.
c. For electricaltest of harness assembly, use a high voltage, direct current
tester such as the TAKK Model 86 or 86A or an equivalent direct current high
voltage tester capable of delivering a test potential of 10, 000 volts. Connect
ground lead of high voltage tester to outer shielding braid of a single lead. Con-
nect plug terminal. Turn tester "ON" and apply 10, 000 volts. The insulation
resistance should be 100 megohms minimum. Proceed to check other leads of
harness in same manner.
d. Minor repair of the harness assembly, such as replacement of contact
springs, spring retainer assemblies, insulating sleeves or of one lead assembly,
can be accomplished with the harness assembly mounted on the engine. However,
should repair require replacement of more than one lead assembly or of a cable
outlet plate, the harness should be removed from the engine and sent to an over-
haul shop.
8A-50. REMOVAL OF HARNESS.

a. Disconnect the clamps that secure the wires to the engine and accessories.
b. Loosen the coupling nuts at the spark plugs and remove the insulators from
the spark plug barrel well. Use caution when withdrawing the insulator not to
damage the insulator spring.
c. Place a guard over the harness insulators.
d. Remove the harness assembly terminal plate from the magneto.
e. Remove the harness from the airplane.
POWER PLANT
3F9
BRAZE DRILL NO. 47 ¼ IN. DEEP

TAP 3-48
2- IN.
BLEND O.D. TO I.D.

POLISH O.D.
12.000 IN.
MAT: NO. 30 DRILL ROD OR EQUIVALENT
Figure 8A-18. Assembly Tool
8A-51. MAINTENANCE OF HARNESS.

a. To replace contact springs, spring retainer assemblies or insulating
sleeves, proceed as follows:
1. Using a Scintilla 11-7073 Needle or a mechanical pencil with the lead
retracted, hook the end of the contact spring as shown in Figure 8A-17.
2. Using a needle or pencil, unscrew the spring.
3. Slide insulating sleeve and spring retainer assembly off end of lead
assembly.
4. Replace defective component and reassemble as follows:
(a) Fabricate a tool as shown in Figure 8A-18 for installing the insul-
ating sleeves over cable terminals.
(b) Push the tool thru insulating sleeve and spring retainer assembly
as shown in Figure 8A-19. Screw the cable terminal into the tool.
(c) Work insulating sleeve and spring retainer assembly into position
over the cable and unscrew the tool. Install contact spring on cable terminal.
NOTE
It may be necessary to lubricate the cable and insulat-

ing sleeve with a thin film of MC 200 (200, 000 centi-
stokes) or commercial grade alcohol to facilitate as-
sembly.
POWER PLANT
3FO10
SPRINGRETAINER ASSY
Figure 8A-19. Using Assembling Tool
b. To replace one of the lead assemblies, proceed as follows:

1. Remove clamps and brackets from applicable lead assembly. Cut cable
ties from assembly and discard.
2. Cut off condemned lead flush with outer surface of cable outlet plate.
3. Grip eyelet of lead with a pair of pliers and pull short length of con-
ductor out of grommet and cable outlet plate.
4. Using a 3 inch long, 0.270 inch diameter drift, applied at outer surfaces
of plate, drive out tapered ferrule and remaining pieces of insulation and shield-
ing.
5. To determine what length the new lead assembly should be cut to, pro-
ceed as follows:
(a) Measure the length of the condemned lead assembly. Move coupling
nut back on lead assembly and measure from outer end of ferrule at spark plug
end. (Refer to Figure 8A-20.)
(b) To the length determined in step a, add 1-3/4 inches.
NOTE
Spare part leads are supplied in various lengths. Use

a lead which is longer than, but nearest to the desired
length.
POWERPLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3F11
REQUIRED LENGTH
Figure 8A-20. Measuring Lead Assembly Length
6. Cut lead assembly to the length determined in step 5. Mark ferrule on

spark plug end of lead with a metal stamp, scribe or rubber stamp to correspond
with correct cylinder number.
7. Starting at spark plug location, thread new cable thru grommets and
clamps as necessary for correct routing of cut end of cable to magneto location.
231 A 231 A
Figure 8A-21. Cutting Metallic Figure 8A-22. Unbraiding

Braid From End of Lead Metallic Shielding
POWER PLANT
Reissued:2/18/81
3F12
Figure 8A-23. Forming Shielding Around Ferrule

CAUTION
Use care not to nick or cut insulation when removing braid.

8. Usingelectrician's scissors, carefully remove 1.250 inch of outer braid from end
of lead. (Refer to Figure 8A-21.)
9. Using a scribe or similar pointed tool, unbraid 3/8 inch of braided
shielding. (Refer to Figure 8A-22.) Wrap a single thickness of electrical tape
around unbraided strands to facilitate insertion of lead end thru hole in cable
outlet plate.
2.750
2.031
2.375
0.506
- BRASS
MATERIAL
Figure 8A-24. Ferrule Seating Tool Figure 8A-25. Needle
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3F13
11-7073 NEEDLE 0.50
Figure 8A-26. Measuring Wire Figure 8A-27. Installing Grommet

Over Lead Assemblies
10. Remove cable outlet plate from magneto. Support plate securely and,
using suitable cutting pliers, split and remove eyelets from leads adjacent to
lead being replaced. When splitting eyelet, make certain that wire strands are
not cut. Removal of eyelets on adjacent leads will allow grommet to be pulled
away from outlet plate to facilitate insertion of new lead.
11. Pass the taped end of new lead through hole in outlet plate. Remove
electrical tape from lead and install tpaered end of ferrule under the unbraided
strands of shielding. Form strands of shielding evenly around tapered ferrule
as shown in Figure 8A-23 and pull lead assembly back through cable outlet plate
until ferrule binds in the outlet well. Position the Scintilla 11-7074 Ferrule Seat-
ing Tool (Refer to Figure 8A-24) over the wire and firmly seat the ferrule by
tapping the seating tool with a hammer or by using an arbor press.
12. Measure 1/2 inch from tapered ferrule and strip remaining insulation
from wire. (Refer to Figure 8A-26.)
13. Insert Scintilla 11-7073 Needle(Figure 8A-25) thru smallhole of grom-
met and over stripped end of wire. (Refer to Figure 8A-27.) Slide grommet
down needle until it seats tightly against the tapered ferrule.
14. Cut wire 3/8 inch from top of grommet outlet. (Refer to Figure 8A-27.)
Double wire over as shown in A of Figure 8A-29. Slide eyelet over doubled wire
until it is firmly seated in recess of grommet outlet.
15. Using the "AB" groove of Scintilla 11-4152 Crimping Tool, or equiva-
lent, crimp eyelet to wire. Approximately 1/32 of an inch of wire should extend
from end of eyelet after crimping. (Refer to B of Figure 8A-29.)
POWER PLANT
Reissued:2/18/81
3F 14
NOTE
If the crimping tool is not available, a satisfactory

connection can be made by soldering with Kester Flux
709 or equivalent and a non-corrosive solder. After
soldering, clean solder joints using denatured alcohol.
16. Install clamps and cable ties as necessary to secure lead to the engine.
8A-52. INSTALLATION OF HARNESS. Before installing harness on magneto,

check mating surfaces for cleanliness. Spray entire face of grommet with a light coat of
Plastic Mold Spray, SM-O-O-TH Silicone Spray or equivalent. This will prevent harness
grommet from sticking to magneto distributor block.
a. Place the harness terminal plate on the magneto and tighten nuts around the
plate alternately to seat cover squarely on magneto. Torque nuts to 18 to 22 inch
pounds.
b. Route ignition wires to their respective cylinders as shown in Figure 8A-30.
c. Clamp the harness assembly in position.
d. Connect the leads to the spark plugs.
233 233
Figure 8A-28. Lead Assembly Figure 8A-29. Wire Doubled

Installed in Grommet Over For Installation of Eyelet
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3F15
1103
Figure 8A-30. Ignition System Schematic
POWER PLANT
3F16
3F 16 Reissued: 2 18/81
8A-53. SPARK PLUGS.
8A-54. REMOVAL OF SPARK PLUGS.

a. Loosen the coupling nut on the harness lead and remove the terminal in-
sulator from the spark plug barrel well.
NOTE
When withdrawing the ignition cable lead connection

from the plug, care must be taken to pull the lead
straight out andin line with the center line of the plug
barrel; otherwise, a side load will be applied which
frequently results in damage to the barrel insulator
and connector. If the lead cannot be removed easily
in this manner, the resisting contact betweenthe neo-
prene collar and the barrel insulator will be broken
by a rotary twisting of the collar. Avoid undue dis-
tortion of the collar and possible side loading of the
barrel insulator.
b. Remove the spark plug from the engine. In the course of engine operation,
carbon and other combustion products will be deposited on the end of the spark
plug and will penetrate the lower threads to some degree. As a result, greater
torque is frequently required for removing a plug than for its installation. Ac-
cordingly, the torque limitations given do not apply to plug removal and sufficient
torque must be used to unscrew the plug. The higher torque in removal is not as
detrimental as in installation since it cannot stretch the threaded section. It does,
however, impose a shearing load on this section and may, if sufficiently severe,
produce a failure in this location.
NOTE
Torque indicating handle should not be used for spark

plug removal because of the greater torque require-
ment.
c. Place spark plugs in a tray that will identify their position in the engine as
soon as they are removed.
POWER PLANT
3F17
NOTE
Spark plugs should not be in-

stalled if they have been
dropped.
d. Removal of seized spark plugs in

the cylinder may be accomplished by
application of liquid carbon dioxide by
a Conical metal funnel adapter with a
hole at the apex just large enough to
accommodate the funnel of a CO2
bottle. (Refer to Figure 8A-31.)
When a seized spark plug cannot be
removed by normal means, the funnel
adapter is placed over and around the Figure 8A-31. Removing Spark Plug
spark plug. Place the funnel of the CO2 Frozen to Bushing
bottle inside the funnel adapter and
release the carbon dioxide to chill and contract the spark plug. Break the spark
plug loose with a wrench. A warm cylinder head at the time the carbon dioxide
is applied will aid in removal of an excessively seized plug.
e. Do not allow foreign objects to enter the spark plug hole.
8A-55. INSPECTION AND CLEANING OF SPARK PLUG.

a. Visually inspect each spark plug for the following non-repairable defects:
1. Severely damaged shell or shield threads nicked up, stripped or cross-
threaded.
2. Badly battered or rounded shell hexagons.
3. Out-of-round or damaged shielding barrel.
4. Chipped, cracked or broken ceramic insulator portions.
5. Badly eroded electrodes worn to approximately 50% of original size.
b. Clean the spark plug as required, removing carbon and foreign deposits.
c. Test the spark plug both electrically and for resistance.
d. Set the electrode gap. (Refer to latest revision of Lycoming Service Instructions
No. 1042.)
POWER PLANT
3F18
8A-56. INSTALLATION OF SPARK PLUGS. Beforeinstalling spark plugs,ascertain that

the threads within the cylinder are clean and not damaged.
CAUTION
Make certain the deep socket is properly seated on the spark

plug hexagon as damage to the plug could result if the
wrench is cocked to one side when pressure is applied.
a. Apply anti-seize compound sparingly on the upper threads. Do not apply anti-seize
compound on bottom two threads to prevent plug failure. Install gasket and spark plugs.
Torque 360 to 420 inch pounds.
b. Insure terminal insulator is free of carbon and dirt and carefully insert in the spark
plug and tighten the coupling nut.
8A-57. STARTING VIBRATOR. (14 and 28-Volt System)
8A-58. STARTING VIBRATOR CHECKING PROCEDURE.

a. Disconnect all spark plug heads from the left magneto at the spark plugs.
WARNING
Be sure all left magneto spark plugleads are removed,

thus preventing cross-firing of the magneto and the
possibility of hazardous conditions.
b. Rotate engine crankshaft until number one cylinder is in its retard firing
position. Using the timing light, check to see that both magneto contact assem-
blies are open.
c. Disconnect left starter solenoid terminal wire, coded in electrical schematics P20A.
WARNING
It is necessary that the starter be electrically removed

from the circuit before the vibrator is put into opera-
tion to eliminate possibility of starter being energized
during the test.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3F19
d. Place left magneto switch in its "ON" position.

e. Hold left starter switch in the energized position.
f. Holding the number one cylinderspark pluglead approximately 3/16 to 1/4 of an inch
away from a good ground, a series of hot sparks should occur.
WARNING
Grasp the spark plug lead far enough away from the
connection so as not to produce any dangerous electrical
shock.
g. If the spark does not jump the gap, check the applied voltage to the starting
vibrator. This voltage should be 14 or 28-volts depending on the electrical system installed
in the airplane.
h. If voltage is correct, check the contact points of the magneto. Both sets of contact
points shall be opened.
i. Reject all units not complying with the preceding requirements or which show any
visual defects.
8A-59. REMOVAL OF STARTING VIBRATOR.
a. Remove the left access panel to the nose section interior at station 70.0.
b. The starter vibrator is attached to the extreme left front side of the forward fuselage
bulkhead at station 81.0.
NOTE
Make note of positions of the wires before disconnecting

electrical leads to facilitate reinstallation.
c. Disconnect the electrical leads from the vibrator.

d. Remove the vibrator from the bulkhead by removingthe attachment screws.
8A-60. INSTALLATION OF STARTING VIBRATOR.

a. Position the vibrator on the bulkhead and secure with screws.
b. Connect the electrical leadsto the vibrator.
NOTE
On 28-volt electrical system only, make sure that the lead

with the red marker has been put on the "IN" terminal of the
starting vibrator.
c. Check operation per Paragraph 8A-58.
d. Install accesspanel.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3F20
8A-61. LUBRICATION SYSTEM.
8A-62. ADJUSTMENT OF OIL PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE. The adjustable oil relief valve enables the
operator to maintain engine oil pressure within the specified limits (60 psi, min. to 90 psi, max.) If the pressure
under normal operating conditions should consistently exceed the maximum or minimum specified limits,
adjust the valve as follows:
With the engine warmed up and running approximately 2000 RPM. observe the reading on the oil
pressure gauge. If the pressure is above maximum or below minimum specified limits, stop engine and screw
the adjusting screw out to decrease pressure and in to increase pressure. Depending on installation, the
adjusting screw may have only a screwdriver slot and is turned with a screwdriver, or may have the screwdriver
slot plus a pinned 0.375-24 castellated nut and may be turned with either a screwdriver or a box wrench.
8A-63. INSTALLATION OF OIL COOLER.

a. When installing fittings in the oil coolers, care should be used to prevent torque being applied to the
cooler. When a rectangular fitting boss is provided, backup wrench should be used, employing a scissor
motion, so that no load is transmitted to the cooler. When the oil cooler has a round fitting boss, ca re should be
taken not to permit excessive torque on the fittings.
b. If a pipe thread fitting is used, it should be installed only far enough to seal with sealing compound.
c. Apply Lubon No. 404 to all male pipe thread fittings; do not allow sealant to enter the system.
d. If fitting canot be positioned correctly using a torque of 10to 15foot-pounds, another fitting should
be used.
e. When attaching lines to the cooler, a backup wrench should be used.
f. After installation, inspect the cooler for distorted end cups.
g. Run-up engine. After run-up, check for oil leaks.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18 81
3F21
LEGEND
Figure 8A-32. Turbocharger System Diagram
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3F22
3285
LOW OIL
PRESS.SW.LEFT H.
L.H
12V
D.C.
R.H.
OIL PRESS
WARN LIGHT
OVERBOOSTSW. OVERBOOST SW.

LEFT H. RIGHT H.
NC
LOW OIL PRESS -

SWITCH L.H.
Figure 8A-33. Turbocharger Control Circuit Diagram

S/ N 27-2505 to 27-3836 incl. 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl.
POWER PLANT
Added: 4/ 26/ 83
3F23
8A-64. TURBOCHARGER. (AiResearch).The followingparagraphs contain instructions

for the removal, installation, service maintenance and adjustment procedures for turbo-
charger units manufactured by AiResearch Aviation Service Company, 6201 W. Imperial
Highway. Los Angeles, California, 90045and installed in PA-23-250(six place) airplanes,
Serial Numbers 27-2505to 27-3836 inclusive,and 27-3838to 27-3943 inclusive.
The turbocharger part number, serial number, model number and other pertinent
information appears on the name plate attached to the unit components. Include this
information in all correspondence.
Inspection procedures may be found in Section III.
8A-65. SPECIFICATIONS. Listed below are some of the specifications and the
location of various turbocharger components.
Type of Control ...... Automatic

Naturally aspirated or turbocharged performance
available as selected with ON-OFF switch.
Control Medium ...... External Closed Loop Oil System
On-Off Control .......... Electrical (Solenoid)
Control Oil Pressure Source . .. . External Engine Driven Oil Pump
System Regulated Oil Pressure .. 60 psi
External Oil System Capacity . . . 2.6 quarts
External Oil Reservoir Sight Gauge. . Located in Wheel Well

On aft side of lower scoop fairing easily
viewed from either side of engine.
External Oil System Filler Tube .. Standpipe in LH side of

Remove combination cover and vent each Engine Accessory
tube to fill. Compartment
Oil Specifications ....................... Automotive Multigrade SAE 10W30
POWER PLANT
3F24
3F24
Revised: 4/26/83
8A-66. NOMENCLATURE. Many new and unfamiliar terms may appear on the
following pages of this manual. An understanding of them will be helpful, if not
necessary, in performing maintenance and troubleshooting. The following is a
list of commonly used terms and names as applied to turbocharging.
TERM MEANING
Turbine The exhaust driven end of the turbocharger unit.
Turbine Wheel The bucket wheel in the turbine section.
Turbine Housing The heaving ductal iron casting housing the

turbine wheel.
Turbine Inlet The opening in the turbine housing where exhaust

gases are induced.
Turbine Discharge The opening in the turbine housing where exhaust

gases are discharged and where the turbine wheel
is visible.
Compressor The air delivery end of the turbocharger unit.
Compressor Wheel The impeller wheel in the compressor section.
Compressor Housing The aluminum casting housing the compressor

or Compressor Scroll wheel.
Compressor Inlet The large opening in compressor housing where

ambient air pressures are supplied.
Compressor Discharge The smaller opening in compressor housing where

compressed air is delivered to engine induction
system.
Turbocharger Center The casting joining the turbine and compressor

Housing sections, containing shaft bearings, seals, oil
inlet and outlet ports and oil passages.
T/C Convenient abbreviation for "Turbocharging".
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G1
TERM MEANING
Compressor Discharge The pressure at any point in ducting between the

Pressure compressor discharge and the throttle valve.
Upstream Ducting carrying ambient air pressures from ram

air filter to compressor inlet.
Downstream Ducting from compressor discharge to throttle

valve, subject to compressor discharge pressures.
Inlet Plenum Formerly the "air box". This is now an airtight,

critically designed part of the induction system,
containing the by-pass door, pressure reference
ports and is subject to compressor discharge
pressures.
Exhaust Plenum or The area in the exhaust system where the total
Turbine Inlet combined exhaust gases enter the turbine housing.
Plenum
Pressure Reference Tubing or hose to transmit compressor discharge

Line pressure from the plenum to the controller, to the
fuel flow gauges, the fuel pump diaphragm and the
injector nozzles.
Exhaust By-Pass Valve The butterfly type valve in the exhaust by-pass
or Wastegate which, throughout its travel from open to closed,
allows varied amounts of exhaust pressure to
by-pass the turbine, controlling its speed hence
the output of the compressor.
By-Pass Door The hinged door in the inlet plenum. It allows

induction air to by-pass the compressor whenever
discharge pressure is less than ambient pressure,
and closes against a seal under discharge pressure
when it overcomes ambient pressure.
POWER PLANT
Reissued:2/18/81
3G2
TERM MEANING
Transfer Valve The small plunger valve mounted on the injector

and operated by the full open position of the throttle
valve arm. Its purpose is to evacuate the con-
troller sensing chamber further than the controller
setting at the full throttle position only.
Naturally Aspirated The turbocharger OFF condition. The wastegate

(by-pass) valve is open, the turbocharger is un-
loaded and the induction system is receiving ex-
isting ambient pressures through the by-pass
door.
Part Throttle Critical The maximum altitude that a given sea level power
Altitude setting can be maintained without advancing the
throttle.
8A-67. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF TURBOCHARGER. Should it be

necessaryto replacethe turbocharger unit, the followingprocedure has proven to be the fastest
and most thorough method. Listed are some do's and don'ts.
a. Do not attempt to remove or install the turbocharger with the turbine inlet plenum
attached.
b. Do not separate the lower air inlet plenum from the air box at the by-passdoor seal.
Always remove this as an assemblyat the attach point to the injector. If seal replacement is
necessary,do so while the assemblyis removed and reassembleprior to installation.
c. Do not overtorque V band clamps on tailpipe or compressor housing.Tailpipe clamp
torque is 40 to 50 inch-pounds; compressor clamp torque is 40 inch-pounds (light tapping
around the clamps while tighteninghelps them seat properly).
d. Removing the compressor housing will give better access to the lower mount leg
bolts. However,extreme caution must be used to avoiddamage to the compressor wheel.
e. Always apply penetrating oil to all mount bolts and turbine plenum bolts prior to
removal. Bolts seize due to carbon and rust build-up on threads. Workingthem back and
forth usually avoids shearingthem off.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G3
8A-68. REMOVAL OF TURBOCHARGER.

a. Remove all lower engine compartment cowling.
b. Remove clamp attaching turbine discharge duct(tailpipe)to turbine; remove
tailpipe.
c. Disconnect oil inlet and outlet lines on wastegate actuator valve (CAP lines).
d. Remove aft clamp on bellows between exhaust header and turbine inlet
plenum.
e. Remove four bolts attaching turbine inlet plenum to turbine flange.
f. Disconnect turbocharger oil inlet hose from oil inlet tube assembly.
g. Remove turbocharger oil drain hose between drain assembly and reservoir.
h. Remove ram air filter duct assembly at front of lower inlet plenum.
i. Disconnect alternate air control and all reference lines from air box.
j. Remove four screws attaching air box assembly to bottom of injector.
k. Loosen flex coupling between lower and upper plenum, remove lower
plenum and air box as an assembly.
1 . Remove upper plenum half and forward turbo mount from compressor inlet
and from clip on rear injector mount studs.
m. Remove compressor housing "V" clamp and remove compressor housing.
n. Remove the lower bolt attaching the right mount legto turbocharger. Loosen
the top bolt. (This applies to either the RH or LH Turbocharger.)
o. Using a 9/16 Universal socket remove the four nuts attaching upper mount
legs to engine.
p. Lower turbocharger (mounts attached) away from engine.
q. Remove mount legs, heat blanket and oil inlet and outlet tube assemblies.
8A-69. REMOVAL OF COMPRESSOR HOUSING.

a. The compressor scroll (housing) may be removed to provide better access
to the bolts attaching main turbine mounts to the turbine center housing. How-
ever, extreme caution must be used to avoid damage to the compressor wheel.
The shock mounted stabilizing rod must be forced up and high enough to allow
the compressor housing to come straight forward until it is clear of the com-
pressor wheel. The same caution is necessary when reinstallingthe compressor
housing.
CAUTION
Damage of any kind to the compressor blades is cause

for rejection of the turbocharger unit.
b. The main turbine mount brackets attach to the turbine center housing with
four bolts (two on each leg).
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G4
c. With reference to either engine, remove the lower right-hand bolt and
loosen the upper right-hand bolt.
d. Using a standard 3/8 inch drive 12 point 9/16 inch universal socket, remove
the four nuts holding the upper end of mount legs to the engine. By lowering the
right-hand mount bracket from the studs first, the left-hand will slip off easily.
(Notice shim washers on studs. They must be there on reinstallation.)
8A-70. INSTALLATION OF TURBOCHARGER.

a. Remove six each bolts and lock tabs holding turbine housing to center hous-
ing.
b. Orient center housing to turbine housing per old turbo.
NOTE
The oil inlet and outlet ports should be as near vertical

to the center line as possible in the installed position.
c. When properly oriented, install the clamp plates and two bolts (AN76-A-5)
that do not pick up the turbomount legs. Tighten to hold center housing in position.
d. Install and lace heat blanket.
e. Install inlet and outlet oil tube assemblies. Tighten and safety. Also safety
the two housing bolts that do not pick up the mounts.
NOTE
With reference to either right or left-hand turbo.
f. Install left-hand mount leg with AN76-A-7 bolts. (Do not tighten.)
g. Install right-hand mount leg with top bolt only. (Do not tighten.)
CAUTION
When shimming of upper mount attach points, the

casting thickness around the counterbore of the rear
engine mount studs (turbo mount attach point) varies.
These counterbores must be shimmed using thick and
thin washers to insure that the mount bracket is not
bottomed on the casting prior to being torqued down.
This has been a major cause of brackets cracking in
this area and is very critical. Both studs of each
mount leg should be shimmed equally.
POWER PLANT
3G5
3G5
Reissued:2/18/81
h. Raise turbocharger into place starting the left mount leg onto studs first
while guiding the right mount leg into position.
i. Install four nuts and lockwashers on studs and torque down.
j. Install remaining lower RH bolt. (Do not tighten.)
k. Install compressor housing and orient to approximate position. Snug "V"
band clamp (slight final adjustment may be necessary later).
11. Install upper plenum half and forward turbo mount. (Do not tighten large
ring bolts or three forward bolts in slotted holes.)
m. Install turbine inlet plenum using new gasket and clamp bellows in position.
n. Install turbine dischargeduct (tailpipe) torque clamp 40 to 50 inch-pounds.
o. Adjust turbocharger position.
1. The clearance of the tailpipe to the nacelle determines the final position
of the turbocharger.
2. The tailpipe should be generally centered in the nacelle cutout and
should clear the structure by three-quarters of an inch at the closest point.
3. Roll adjustment is provided in the lower mount leg bolt holes.
4. Pitch adjustment is provided by the slotted holes at the forward end of
the front mount.
5. When determining the pitch adjustment, insure that the ring on the com-
pressor inlet is properly positioned.
p. Tighten and safety the four lower mount leg bolts.
q. Install air box and plenum assembly to injector.
r. Position and tighten compressor housing and install compressor discharge
tube.
s. Tighten round forward mount clamp on compressor inlet and connect and
tighten flex coupling between lower and upper plenum.
t . Install shims required (maximum, one-eighth inch), and tighten three bolts
in slotted holes on forward mount.
u. Connect turbine oil inlet and outlet oil lines, actuator oil lines, all air ref-
erence lines to air box and rig alternate air control.
v. Install ram air filter duct and cowl engine.
8A-71. REMOVAL OF TURBOCHARGER OIL PUMP. The instructions to follow

apply to both oil pumps, except when removing the right pump eliminate steps f,
g and h.
a. Remove inboard and outboard engine compartment access panels.
b. Disconnect pump supply line from fitting on RH side of oil pump.
c. Disconnect pump pressure line from fitting on LH side of oil pump.
d. Disconnect hose from oil pump case drain fitting.
e. Remove four nuts and washers from studs at base of hydraulic pump (cover
plate on right engine).
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G6
NOTE
Do not disconnect supply or pressure lines from hyd-

raulic pump.
f. Remove hydraulic pump aft and away from mounting studs.

g. Turn fuel tank selector and crossfeed off at fuel management console be-
tween pilot and co-pilot seats.
h. Disconnect fuel supply line at engine-driven fuel pump inlet port.
i . Move turbo oil pump aft and off of four long mounting studs.
j . Remove three fittings (inlet, outlet, and case drain) from pump.
8A-72. INSTALLATION OF TURBOCHARGER OIL PUMP.

a. Reverse steps a thru j (eliminate steps f, g and h for right engine), using
new gaskets, AiResearch Part No. 8313, on the engine pad and hydraulic pump
base.
b. When pump hold-down nuts are installed, tighten evenly until pump is flush
and snug on the engine drive pad with no significant torque yet applied to the hold-
down nuts.
c. Rotate propeller in direction of engine rotation for at least two revolutions.
d. Torque hold-down nuts evenly by alternating the tightening process of the
four nuts.
CAUTION
Tighten nuts diagonally opposite.
e. Ensure there are no loose fittings or hose connections in the pump suction
line and the turbo oil reservoir is at least two-thirds full.
f . Disconnect pump pressure line at the bulkhead fitting in the upper engine
compartment near baffle (connects with turbo oil cooler).
g. Fill this line with turbo oil and reinstall on bulkhead fitting.
h. Start engine and observe that turbo low oil warning light goes out within 15
seconds of engine start under a maximum of 1500 RPM.
i . If the light does not go out within 15 seconds, stop the engine immediately
and investigate the cause.
j . Should it be necessary to further prime the pump, manually induce a small
amount of turbo oil into the center housing oil inlet line to lubricate the turbo-
charger bearings. Failure to do this can result in damage to the turbo bearings
and failure of the turbocharger. Repeat steps f, g, h and i.
POWER PLANT
3G7
3G7
Reissued:2/18/81
8A-73. TRANSFER VALVE PURPOSE AND FUNCTION.

a. The purpose of the transfer valve in the turbocharger system is to allow a
lower setting of the controller and a lower constant compressor discharge pres-
sure (deck pressure) at climb and cruise power settings (major operating range).
b. It is desirable to keep this pressure low to reduce exhaust back pressures
and improve power output and fuel economy. When take-off power is desired,
however, the low setting of the controller will not provide the necessary deck
pressure to result in take-off manifold pressure at full throttle.
c. When this valve is actuated by the throttle arm at the last bit of travel to
the wide open position, the controller reference point is changed from sensing
deck pressure to sensing manifold pressure. This utilizes the differential (drop)
across the throttle and results in the controller demanding the increase in deck
pressure necessary to provide 28.5 inches of manifold pressure.
8A-74. CHECKING TRANSFER VALVE FOR LEAKS.

a. The transfer valve on each engine is part of the control of the turbocharger
system. The function of the valve and its integrity influences the overall per-
formance of the turbo system.
b. The lines associated with this valve, copper tubing (superseded by steel
braided teflon hose) must be free from leaks or obstructions.
c. The valve itself must not leak by when in the closed position.
d. A quick field check may be made for leakage in the following manner:
1. Place throttle lever in the idle range.
2. Remove the line from the intake port on number 3 cylinder.
3. Substitute a suitable union or fitting in the end of the line and tighten
"B" nut.
4. Simulate a suction on the open end of the fitting by mouth and ascertain
that a vacuum can be held in the line without bleeding off; if it does not hold, the
valve is leaking and should be replaced or new "0" rings should be installed.
e. Rigging can also be checked in this manner by determining the point of full
throttle that the valve opens and allows flow.
f. Two orifices exist in the transfer valve system that should be clean and
never modified. They appear at these locations:
1. The tee fitting boss on the compressor discharge tube (.059 Dia.).
2. The bottom fitting in the transfer valve (.070 Dia.).
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2 18 81
3G8
8A-75. ADJUSTMENT OF TRANSFER VALVE.

a. Mount valve and bracket to the forward injector mount studs. Loosen "U"
clamp on valve to allow positioning.
b. Place throttle arm against the full open stop.
c. Adjust valve to hold plunger to its full travel. Tighten "U" clamp to secure
valve.
d. Remove all friction from the throttle control on pedestal.
e. Advance throttle slowly until contact is felt with the plunger. This should
be about three-quarters of an inch from full throttle by the knob.
f. Advance throttle lever to full open on the pedestal and lock with friction lock.
g. The following results must be obtained:
1. The throttle arm on the injector must contact its full open stop and must
be able to hold on the stop with normal throttle friction.
2. The plunger must open the valve and allow flow through it.
3. Consideration should be given to synchronizing the plunger action be-
tween left and right engines.
NOTE
When new "0" rings are installed, it is normal to ob-

serve a "spongy" return action of the plunger.
8A-76. ADJUSTMENT OF AUTOMATIC SYSTEM CONTROLLER. Prior to ad-

justing the controller it is -absolutely necessary to determine that there are no
leaks in the transfer valve or associated lines.
The absolute pressure controller in the Aztec system should need adjust-
ment only upon installation or replacement.
Caution should be used in assuming that the controller is at fault when a
malfunction of the system is reported and in no case should it be attempted to
compensate for a loss of critical altitude by increasing the controller setting.
Should it be determined, through troubleshooting, that the controller is
malfunctioning, it should be replaced and the replacement unit adjusted per the
a. When field elevation is 1500 feet MSL or above:
1. Start engine and allow the engine temperatures to rise into the normal
range.
2. Place turbo control switch in the ON position.
3. Advance throttle slowly to full open position.
4. Allow 12 seconds only for manifold pressure to stabilize. Should man-
ifold pressure go beyond 28.5 inches, the setting is too high. Below 28.2 inches
the setting is too low. DO NOT ALLOW MANIFOLD PRESSURE TO EXCEED 30
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2 18 81
3G9
inches of mercury.
(a) Remove lead seal and safety wire from the one inch hex plug in
bottom of controller body and with a stubby screwdriver, feel for slot in adjusting
screws.
NOTE
The controller adjustment is extremely sensitive. 20

degrees of turn will produce approximately one-half
inch of manifold pressure. The adjusting screw is
quite stiff due to a "nylock" friction insert. Turning
clockwise will increase manifold pressure; counter-
clockwise will decrease manifold pressure.
(b) Adjust accordingly until manifold pressure peaks at 28.5 inches in

12 seconds at full throttle. Turn turbo switch OFF. Manifold pressure should
drop to whatever the naturally aspirated engine will produce for the existing bar-
ometric conditions.
(c) Install plug in bottom of controller and safety.
b. When field elevation is below 1500 feet MSL, the following procedure is to
be followed for proper adjustment of the AiResearch 470688-4 Absolute Pressure
Controller at field elevations of 1500 feet MSL or below:
1. Remove the transfer valve sense line from cylinder No. 3 and plug the
line.
2. Remove controller sense line from the tee inthe compressor discharge
tube and connect it to cylinder No. 3 where the transfer valve line was removed
in step 1. Cap off the tee.
3. With the turbocharger on-off switch in the OFF position, start the
engine(s) and warm up to operating temperature. Advance the throttles to the
point at which 26 inches of manifold pressure can be obtained, and lock the
throttles. Turn the turbocharger on-off switch to the ON position. The manifold
pressure should advance to 29.5 inches of mercury. (There will be a slight
oscillation of manifold pressure before it stabilizes.) Should the manifold pres-
sure exceed 29.5 inches of mercury at this point, the controller setting is too
high and must be lowered. If the manifold pressure is below 29.5 inches of
mercury, the controller setting is too low and must be raised. Under no condition
should the manifold pressure be allowed to exceed 30.5 inches of mercury. Care
should be taken not to exceed cylinder head temperature limits.
4. After completion of the adjustment, return the system to normal by
reversing steps 1 and 2. With the system adjusted in this manner, full throttle
application will provide 28.5 inches of mercury manifold pressure up to 20, 000
feet density altitude.
POWER PLANT
3G10
3G 10 Reissued: 2/18/81
NOTE
It is necessary to have equal controller settings on

both engines to avoid throttle stagger, errors in fuel
flow indication and different part throttle critical al-
titudes between engines.
8A-77. CLEANING OR REPLACING TURBO OIL FILTER ELEMENT.

a. The turbo oil filter is located on the control cluster panel on the right-hand
side of each engine accessory compartment.
b. To remove the filter bowl and element:
1. Remove the safety wire.
2. Place an open end wrench on the square casting at the bottom of the
bowl.
3. While holding some pressure on the wrench in a counterclockwise di-
rection, (loosening) tap the head of the filter near the parting surface with a
plastic or fiber mallet.
4. Unscrew the bowl from the head and lower slowly.
5. Remove filter element and clean with any approved aircraft solvent or
replace with new element.
6. Replace "O" ring seal on bowl.
7. Reinstall element and bowl and safety.
POWER PLANT
3G11
3G11
Reissued: 2/ 18 81
TABLE VIIIA-II. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING(FUEL INJECTION)
Failure of engine Lack of fuel. Check fuel system for

to start. leaks. Fill fuel cell.
Clean dirty lines,
strainers or fuel cocks.
Underpriming. Prime by holding switch

4 to 10 seconds. Check
fuel flow indicator.
Overpriming. Place ontrol in "idle-

cut-off". Open throttle
and unload engine by
turning over with
starter.
Incorrect throttle. Open throttle to 1/8 of

its range.
Defective spark plugs. Clean and adjust or re-

place spark plug(s).
Defective ignition wire. Check with electric

tester. Replace any
defective wires.
Defective battery. Replace with charged

battery.
Improper operation of Clean points. Check in-

magneto breaker ternal timing of magne-
points. tos, paragraph 8A-46.
Air bubbles in fuel Check fuel vent.

system.
Fuel pump failure. Replace pump.
Fuel line restricted. Check inlet line.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G12
TABLE VIIA-II. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING(FUEL INJECTION) (cont.)
Failure of engine to Lack of sufficient fuel Check fuel strainer and

start (cont.). pressure. fuel adjustments.
Internal failure. Check oil sump strainer

for metal particles. If
haul of the engine may
be required.
Failure of engine to Incorrect idle adjust- Adjust throttle stop to

idle properly. ment. obtain correct idle,
paragraph 8A-37.
Insufficient fuel Check fuel strainer and

pressure. pump pressure adjust-
ment.

nozzle. paragraph 8A-38.
Leak in induction Tighten all connections

system. in the induction system.
Replace any defective
parts.
Low cylinder com- Check condition of piston

pression. rings and valve seats.
Faulty ignition Check entire ignition

system. system.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G13
TABLE VIIIA-II. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING(FUEL INJECTION) (cont.)
Low power and un- Mixture too rich; indi- Injector may need re-
even running. cated by sluggish engine calibration by author-
operation, red exhaust ized personnel.
flame at night. Extreme
cases indicated by black
smoke from exhaust.
Mixture too lean; indi- Checkfuelsupply. Check

cated by overheating or fuel lines for obstruc -
back-firing. tions or restrictions.
Clogged injector noz- Remove and clean,

zles. paragraph 8A-38.
Dirt in inlet screen. Remove screen and

flush with solvent. Blow
with compressed air.
Dirt in "T" fitting. Remove "T" fitting at

distributor, cleanin
solvent. Blowthrough
orifice with compres-
sed air - 100 psi.
Fuel supply pressure Readjust fuel pump for

excessively high. lower pressure.
Leak in manifold line. Tighten fittings.
Leak in induction sys- Tighten all connections.

tem. Replace defective parts.
Defective spark plugs. Clean or replace spark

plugs.
Poor Fuel. Fill fuel cell with fuel of

recommended grade.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G14
Low power and uneven Magneto breaker points Clean points. Check in-
running (cont. ). not working properly. ternal timing of mag-
netos, paragraph 8A-46.
Defective ignition wire. Check wire with electric

tester. Replace defec-
tive wire.
Improper ignition Check magnetos for tim-

timing. ing and synchronization.

Flow meter reads Clogged nozzle. Remove and clean,

high. paragraph 8A-38.
Failure of engine to Throttle lever nut out Adjust throttle lever.

develop full power. of adjustment.
Leak in induction Tighten intake pipe

system. mounting flange nuts and
tighten intake manifold.
(Replace defective
gasket as required.)
Mixture too lean. Injector must be re-
calibrated.
Throttle linkage limit- Check throttle linkage

ing travel of throttle and throttle valve
valve. opening.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G15
TABLE VIIIA-II. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING(FUEL INJECTION) (cont. )
Failure of engine to Restrictions in inlet air Examine air scoop and

develop full power scoop. remove restrictions.
(cont. ).
Improper fuel. Fill fuel cell with recom-
mended aviation fuel.

Check system with
tester. Check ignition
timing.
Rough engine. Cracked engine mount. Replace mount.
Unbalanced propeller. Remove propeller and

have it checked for
balance.

bushings. bushings.
Low oil pressure. Insufficient oil. Fill oil sump with oil of
recommended viscosity.

pressure line. accessory housing and
crankcase.

strainers.
Air lock or dirt in Remove and clean oil

relief valve. pressure relief valve.
High oil temperature. See "High Oil Tempera-

ture "in "Trouble"
column.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G16
Low oil pressure Relief valve out of Adjust valve.

(cont. ). adjustment.
Defective pressure Replace gauge.

gauge.

strainer.
Failing or failed Check screens and sump

bearings. for metal particles.
High oil temperature. Insufficient oil cooling. Check air inlet and out-
let for deformation or
obstruction.
Insufficient oil supply. Fill engine oil sump to

proper level with spec-
ified oil.
Low grade of oil. Replace with oil con-

formingto specification.

Excessive blow-by. Usually caused by worn

or sticking rings.
Failing or failed Examine sump for metal

bearings. particles. If found,
indicated.
Defective temperature Replace gauge.

gauge.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G17
TABLE VIIIA-II. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING(FUEL INJECTION) (cont. )
Excessive oil con- Low grade of oil. Fill oil sump with oil
sumption. conforming to speci-
fication.
Failing or failed Check sump for metal

bearings. particles. If found,
indicated.

of piston rings.
Cold weather Cold oil. Move aircraft into a

difficulties. hangar. Heat oil.
Inaccurate pressure In extreme coldweather,

readings. oil pressure readings
up to approximately
100 lbs Do Not nec-
essarily mean mal-
functioning.
Overpriming. Rotate crankshaft in di-

rection of normal ro-
tation with throttle
"full open", and mix-
ture in "idle-cut-off"
and ignition switch
"OFF ".
Weak battery. Install fully charged

battery.
Faulty ignition switch. Check ground wires.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G18
TABLE VIIIA-II. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING(TURBOCHARGER)
Turbocharger Inopera- Controller by-pass sole- Replace controller.

tive - will not come on. noid stuck open.
T/C oil system low or Check oil level.

empty.
T/C rotor jammed. Replace rotor.
T/C oil pump shaft Replace pump.

sheared.
Controller malfunc - Repair by approved re-

tioning. pair station.
Overboost sensing switch Replace switch.

stuck or broken.
Wastegate linkage dis- Reconnect or replace

connected or broken. linkage.
Metering jet inlet plug- Clean or replace jet.

ged.
Turbocharger inlet duct Clean duct.

blocked.
Controller pressure Clean or replace line.

sensing line obstructed.
Engine has low critical Leak in exhaust system. Locate and correct
altitude. leaks.
T/C system oil needs Change oil and refer to

changing. maintenance recom-
mendations, Section II.'
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G19
TABLE VIIIA-II. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING(TURBOCHARGER)(cont.)
Engine has low critical T/C oil viscosity too Change oil and refer to
altitude. (cont.) high. maintenance recom-
mendations, Section II.
Controller out of cal- Repair by approved

ibration. repair station.
Controller malfunction- Repair by approved

ing. repair station.
Metering jet in actuator Clean or replace jet.

inlet plugged.

sensing line obstruc-
ted.
Compressor discharge Locate and correct leak.

duct loose or leaking.
Coking in T/C center Clean, refer to mainten-

housing. ance recommendations.
Manifold pressure Controller malfunc- Repair by approved

surges at altitude. tioning. repair station.

inlet plugged.
Controller pressure sen- Clean or replace line.

sensing line obstruc-
ted.

POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G20
TABLE VIIIA-II. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING(TURBOCHARGER)(cont. )

Manifold pressure Ram air filter contam- Clean filter.

surges at altitude. inated.
(cont.)
T/C oil system low or Check oil level.
empty.
Leak in exhaust system. Locate and correct leak.
Compressor by-pass Correct leak, refer to

door leaking. maintenance recom-
mendations.
T/C oil system relief Disassemble and clean.

valve stuck open.
Tube to transfer valve Tighten or replace.

broken or loose.
Engine smokes at idle. T/C rotor jammed. Replace rotor.
Seal ruptured in Replace seal.

controller.
T/C bearing seals Replace seal.

leaking.
T/C oil reservoir vent Clean vent.

obstructed.

valve stuck open.
Switch will not turn Controller by-pass Replace controller.

turbo off. solenoid stuck closed.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G21
Switch will not turn Short in electrical sys- Locate short and repair.
turbo off. (cont.) tem.
Controller by-pass Ground solenoid.

solenoid not grounded.

Oil leaking from act- Actuator piston seal Replace seal.

uator drain. ruptured.
Excessive loss of T/C oil pump shaft seal Replace seal.

turbo oil. leaking.
External oil leaks. Determine cause and

correct.
T/C bearing seals Replace seals.

leaking.
T/C oil reservoir vent Clean vent.

obstructed.
T/C oil cooling being Determine cause and

impaired. correct.
Actuator seal piston Replace seal.

ruptured.
Seal ruptured in con- Replace seal.

troller.
POWER PLANT
Reissued:2/18/81
3G22

High manifold pressure Controller out of cali- Repair by approved

at take-off. bration. repair station.
Controller malfunc- Repair by approved

tioning. repair station.

Controller pressure Replace line.

sensing line broken.
T/C system oil needs Change oil, refer to

changing. maintenance recom-
mendations, Section II.
T/C oil viscosity too Change oil.

high.
Tube to transfer valve Tighten or replace tube.

broken or loose.
Overboost sensing Replace switch.

switch stuck or broken.

sensing line obstructed.

valve stuck closed.
Low manifold pressure Controller out of cali- Repair by approved

at take-off. bration. repair station.
Controller malfunc- Repair by approved

tioning. repair station.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G23
Low manifold pressure Controller pressure Clean or replace line.

at take-off. (cont.) sensing line obstruc-
ted.

Transfer valve out of Rerig, refer to main-

rig. tenance recommenda-
tions, paragraph 8A-75.
Overboost sensing Replace switch.

switch stuck or broken.

inlet plugged.
Leak in exhaust sys- Locate and correct leak.

tem.
Compressor by-pass Repair, refer to main-

door leaking. tenance recommenda-
tions.

valve stuck open.
Ram air filter con- Clean filter.

taminated.
High fuel pressure at Leak in pressure ref- Repair or replace line.

altitude. erence line at fuel
pressure gauge.
Pressure reference Clean or replace line.

line obstructed.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3G24

Low fuel pressure at Leak in pressure ref- Repair or replace line.

altitude. erencing line at fuel
pump.
Pressure reference Clean or replace line.

line obstructed.
Auxiliary fuel pumps Turn on or repair.

not on or inoperative.
Injector nozzle ref- Tighten line.

erence line loose.
Overboost warning Overboost sensing Replace switch.

light on - NO over- switch stuck or broken.
boost.
Short in electrical Locate short and repair.
system.
Low oil warning light Oil warning switch not Ground switch.
does not come ON. grounded.
Oil warning switch Replace switch.

malfunctioning.
Low oil warning light T/C oil system low or Check oil level.
remains ON. empty.
T/C oil pump shaft Replace pump.

sheared.

valve stuck open.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3H1
TABLE VIIIA-II. ENGINE TROUBLESHOOTING(TURBOCHARGER) (cont.)
Low oil warning light Oil warning switch Replace switch.

remains ON. (cont.) malfunctioning.
Low manifold pressure Ram air filter con- Clean filter.

on take-off (turbos off). taminated.
Turbo oil darkens pre- Coking in T/C center Clean, refer to main-
maturely. housing. tenance recommenda-
tions.
T/C oil cooling being Determine cause and

impaired. correct.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/ 18/ 81
3H2
3H3
SECTION
VIIIB
POWER
PLANT
(LYCOMING-TURBOCHARGED)
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
8B-2. Description .................................... 3H6

8B-3. Troubleshooting ....... ........................... 3H8
8B-4. Standard Practices - Engine (See Section VIII) ................ 3A13
8B-5. EngineCowling .................................. 3H8
8B-6. Removal of Engine Cowling .................... 3H8
8B-7. Engine Cowl Flap ................................. 3H8
8B-8. Removal of Cowl Flap MechanismAssembly ............ 3H8
8B-9. Removal of Cowl Flap Control Cable ................ 3H10
8B-10. Installation of Cowl Flap Control Cable .............. 3H11
8B-11. Installation of Cowl Flap MechanismAssembly .... ...... 3H11
8B-12. Riggingand Adjustment of Cowl Flaps ............... 3H12
8B-13. Engine ...................................... 3H13
8B-14. Removalof Engine ........................ 3H13
8B-15. Installation of Engine ........................ 3H17
8B-16. Turbocharger (Lycoming) ....................... .. 3H19
8B-17. Removal of Turbocharger ....................... 3H19
8B-18. Removal of the Controller Housing ................ 3H21
8B-19. Removal of Exhaust BypassValveAssembly ............ 3H21
8B-20. Turbocharger Lubrication System Priming ............. 3H21
8B-21. Installation of Turbocahrger .................. . 3H22
8B-22. Installation of the Controller Housing ................ 3H22
8B-23. Installation of Exhaust BypassValveAssembly .......... 3H22
8B-24. Adjustment of Turbocharger ................... .. 3H23
8B-25. Fuel Injector .................................... 3H23
8B-26. Removalof Fuel Injector, Linesand Flow
Divider ............................... 3H23
8B-27. Installation of Fuel Injector ..................... 3H23
The followingparagraphs for this section are located in Section VIIIA.
8A-15. Propeller .......... 3E2

8A-16. Removal of Propeller ............... .......... 3E2
8A-17. Cleaning,Inspection and Repair of Propeller . . .......... 3E5
8A-18. Installation of Propeller .............. .......... 3E7
8A-19. Adjustment of Low Pitch Blade Angle and Stop .......... 3E8
8A-20. BladeTrack ..................... .......... 3E9
Reissued: 2/18/81
3H4
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
8A-21. Propeller Governor ............................... 3E10

8A-22. Removal of Propeller Governor .................. 3E10
8A-23. Installation of Propeller Governor ................. 3E10
8A-24. Rigging and Adjustment of Propeller
Governor 3E11
8A-25. Engine ....................................... 3E12
8A-26. Removal of Engine ......................... 3E12
8A-27. Installation of Engine ........................ 3E13
8A-28. Engine Shock Mounts .............................. 3E17
8A-29. Replacing Engine Shock Mounts .................. 3E17
8A-30. Fuel Injector ................................... 3E18
8A-31. Fuel Injector Maintenance .. ..... ....... . .. 3E19
8A-32. Lubrication .............................. 3E19
8A-33. Removal of Fuel Injector ...................... 3E19
8A-34. Preparation for Storage ....................... 3E21
8A-35. Installation of Fuel Injector .................... 3E22
8A-36. Adjustment of Throttle and Mixture Controls .......... 3E23
8A-37. Adjustment of Idle Speed and Mixture .............. 3E23
8A-38. Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle .............................. 3E24
8A-39. Removal of Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle ................. 3E24
8A-40. Cleaning and Inspection of Fuel Air Bleed
Nozzle .............. 3E24
8A-41. Installation of Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle ............... 3F1
8A-42. Ignition System Maintenance .................... 3F1
8A-43. Magneto ...................................... 3F1
8A-44. Inspection of Magneto ....................... 3F1
8A-45. Removal of Magneto ........................ 3F3
8A-46. Timing Procedure (Internal Timing)
(-1200 series magnetos) ..................... 3F4
8A-47. Installation and Timing Procedure
(Timing Magneto to Engine) .................. 3F7
8A-48. Harness Assembly .. ....... ............. ....... 3F9
8A-49. Inspection of Harness ..... ........ ......... 3F9
8A-50. Removal of Harness ............ 3F9
8A-51. Maintenance of Harness ....................... 3F10
8A-52. Installation of Harness ........... 3F15
8A-53. Spark Plugs .................................... 3F17
8A-54. Removal of Spark Plugs ....................... 3F17
8A-55. Inspection and Cleaning of Spark Plugs .............. 3F18
8A-56. Installation of Spark Plugs .......... 3F19
8A-57. Starting Vibrator (14 & 28-Volt System) .................. 3F19
8A-58. Starting Vibrator Checking Procedure ............... 3F19
8A-59. Removal of Starting Vibrator ......... 3F20
8A-60. Installation of Starting Vibrator .................. 3F20
8A-61. Lubrication System ............... 3F21
8A-62. Adjustment of Oil Pressure Relief Valve ...... 3F21
8A-63. Installation of Oil Cooler ............................. 3F21
Reissued: 2/18/81
3H5
SECTION VIIIB
POWER PLANT
(Lycoming-Turbocharged)
8B-1. INTRODUCTION. This section covers power plants usedinthe PA-23-250

(six place) Lycoming Turbo powered Aztec and is comprised of instructions for
the removal and installation of the engine and turbocharger. For all components
not covered in this section, refer to Section VIIIA.
8B-2. DESCRIPTION. The PA-23-250 (six place) turbo is powered by two Avco-
Lycoming TI0-540-ClA six cylinder, direct drive, wet sump, horizontally op-
posed, fuel injected, turbocharged, air cooled engines with a compression ratio
of 7.2:1, rated at 250 HP at 2575 RPM and designed to operate on 100/130 (Min-
imum) octane aviation grade fuel.
Cowlings completely enclose the engines and consist of an upper and lower
section and a nose section. The cowling is of cantilever construction attached at
the firewall. Located on both sides of the cowl are access panels that can be
removed when their quick fasteners are released, to allow inspection of the ac-
cessory section and turbocharger area. Cowl flap doors are an integral part of
the lower cowl and are operated through mechanical linkage.
Propellers are Hartzell full-feathering, compact, constant speed, each
controlled by a governor mounted on the engine supplying oil through the propeller
shaft at various pressures. Oil pressure from the governor moves the blades
into low pitch (high RPM). The centrifugal twisting moment of the blade also
tends to move the blades into low pitch. Opposing these two forces is force pro-
duced by compressed air between the cylinder head and the piston, which tends
to move the blades into high pitch in the absence of governor oil pressures. Thus,
feathering is accomplished by compressed air.
The induction system consists of a dry type air filter and alternate air
door. The engine fuel system consists of a Bendix RSA-5AD1 type fuel injector
and a Lear-Seigler fuel supply pump as an integral part of the fuel injector sys-
tem.
A Lycoming model TE0659 turbocharger is mounted as an integral part of
the engine. The turbocharger is designed to increase the altitude power output
and efficiency of an internal combustion engine by supplying compressed air to
the engine intake manifold. The power to drive the turbocharger is extracted
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3H6
from the energy of the exhaust gas.

This unit consists of a turbine wheel and an impeller wheel (compressor)
mounted on opposite ends of a common shaft, each contained in its own housing
with a center housing containing shaft bearings.
Exhaust gas is directed onto the turbine wheel causing it to turn. The com-
pressor wheel is fixed to the opposite end of the shaft and also turns, delivering
compressed air to the engine induction system. The speed of the compressor
can be varied by dumping or by passing some of the exhaust gas around the tur-
bine and out the exhaust stack. This is done by a device called a wastegate which
is employed in the exhaust system. The wastegate is controlled by a density
controller at full throttle conditions and a differential pressure controller at part
throttle. If the pressure differential or density it senses decreases, a sealed
bellows expands, extending a metering pin which reduces the flow of oil through
the body of the unit, increasing the pressure across the actuator diaphragm hence
forcing the piston down and moving the wastegate towards the closed position.
When the differential or density it senses increases, the controller bellows con-
tracts allowing oil to flow through it decreasing the pressure on the piston of the
wastegate actuator. Spring tension on the piston forces it up, opening the waste-
gate.
Bendix Scintilla S-1200 series magnetos are installed with their associated
components. Each system consists of a single contact magneto, a dual contact
magneto switches and starter switch. The magnetos are designed to generate
and distribute high tension current through high tension leads to the spark plugs.
In addition to the previously mentioned components, each engine is equipped with
an alternator, geared starter, hydraulic pump, and vacuum pump. Engine mounts are steel
tubing construction attached at the firewall and incorporate vibration absorbing dynafocal
mounts. The two exhaust stacks and extensions are positioned one for the right with a
cross-over to the manifold for the left bank of cylinders. From the left exhaust manifold,
gases are directed to the turbocharger exhaust plenum, through or around the turbo turbine,
as required, and overboard at the outboard bottom of the engine nacelle.
threaded connection on the rear face of the accessory housing where a flexible
drilled passage conducts the oil to the oil pressure filter. In the event that cold
oil or an obstruction should restrict the oil flow to the cooler, an oil cooler by-
pass valve is provided to pass the oil directly from the oil pump to the oil pressure
POWER PLANT
3H7
filter. The oil pressure filter element, located on the accessory housing, is provided as a
means to filter from the oil any solid particles that may have passed through the suction
screen in the sump. After being filtered in the pressure filter, the oil is fed through a drilled
passage to the oil pressure relief valve, located in the upper right side of the crankcase
in front of the accessory housing.
This relief valve regulates the engine oil pressure by allowing excessive oil to return
to the sump, while the balance of the pressure oil is fed to the main oil gallery in the right
half of the crankcase. Residual oil is returned by gravity to the sump where, after passing
through a screen, it is again circulated through the engine.
8B-3. TROUBLESHOOTING. Troubles related to the power plant are listed in Section
VIIIA, in the front of Table VIIIA-II, Engine Troubleshooting (Fuel Injection). Trouble
related to the turbocharger is listed in Table VIIIB-I in the back of this section along with
the probable causes and suggested remedies.
8B-4. STANDARD PRACTICES - ENGINE. (Refer to Section VIII).
8B-5. ENGINE COWLING.
8B-6. REMOVAL OF THE ENGINE COWLING. (Refer to Removal of the Engine

Cowling, Section VIIIA.)
8B-7. ENGINE COWL FLAP.
8B-8. REMOVAL OF COWL FLAP MECHANISM ASSEMBLY.

a. Remove the two side cowl panels from the engine where the cowl flaps are to be
removed.
b. Remove the nut, washer and bolt attaching the operating rod end to the cowl flap.
c. Remove the cowl flap by removing the self-locking nuts and the machine screws
attaching either the flap to the hinge or the hinge to the nacelle. Remove the cowl flap or
the cowl flap and hinge assembly.
d. The operating mechanism may be removed by the following procedure:
1. Disconnect the clevis end of the control cable from the torque tube.
2. Remove the operating rods by removing the cotter pins, nuts, washers and
bolts attaching the rods to the torque tube.
POWER PLANT
3H8
3H8
Reissued: 2/18/81
1. CLEVIS PIN 6. OIL COOLER SUPPORT ROD II. HINGE

2. CLEVIS 7. BEARING BLOCK 12. ROD SUPPORT
3. JAM NUT 8. ACTUATING ARM 13. ROD ASSEMBLY
4. CONTROL CABLE 9. ROD END BEARING 14. STOP SCREW
5. TORQUE TUBE 10. COWL, FLAP IS. STOP ASSEMBLY
Figure 8B-1. Cowl Flap Installation.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3H9
3. Remove the self-locking nuts, washers and bolts securing the torque
tube to the bearing blocks.
4. Remove the torque tube, bearing blocks and shim washers, if any.
8B-9. REMOVAL OF COWL FLAP CONTROL CABLE. The removal instructions

are given for either side of the airplane.
a. Remove the outboard engine access side panel from the nacelle the cable
is to be removed.
b. Remove the top section of the nacelle aftof the firewall by removing attach-
ing screws.
c. Disconnect the clevis end of the control cable from the torque tube by re-
moving the cotter pin, washer and pin.
d. Remove the clamp securing the control cable to the engine mount frame
inside the nacelle center section.
e. Remove the clamp securing the cable where it enters the wing next to the
nacelle.
f. Remove the access plate from the bottom of the wing between the nacelle
and the fuselage. (Loosen fairing as required for access.)
g. Remove the clamp securing the cable to the anchor block between the na-
celle and the fuselage.
h. Remove the access panel from the bottom of the fuselage by removing at-
taching screws.
i. Remove the crossfeed drain lever from the fuel control box by removing
the Allen head screw.
j. Remove the plate from the front of the fuel control box by removing the
attaching screws.
k. Remove the screw from the side of the fuel control box securing the cowl
flap control arm assembly to the control lever mechanism.
l. Separate the arm assembly and cowl flap control cable from the control
mechanism.
m. Remove the cotter pin, washer and pin separating the cable from the arm
assembly.
n. Remove the jam nut that secures the cable to the support bracket below the
fuel control box.
o. From the bottom of the fuselage draw the cable from the fuel control box.
p. Remove the second jam nut from the end of the control cable.
q. It is recommended that a string be tied to the end of the control cable below
the fuselage and draw the cable through the wing to the center section of the na-
celle. Remove the string.
r. Remove the jam nut securing the control cable to the engine firewall and
remove the cable.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3H10
8B10. INSTALLATION OF COWL FLAP CONTROL CABLE.

a. Position one end of the control cable to the engine firewall with a jam nut
and lockwasher on the aft side of the firewall. Install a second jam nut and lock-
washer to the control cable on the forward side of the firewall.
b. Draw the remaining end of the cable through the center section of the na-
celle and through the wing to the underside of the fuselage.
c. Install a clamp securing the cable to the engine mount frame inside the na-
celle center section.
d. Install a clamp securing the cable to the anchor blocks at the inboard side
of the nacelle center section where the cable enters the wing.
e. Install a clamp securing the cable to the anchor blocks inside the wing be-
tweeen the nacelle and the fuselage.
f . Install a jam nut and lockwasher to the end of the cable and insert the cable
end up through the bracket below the fuel control box. Secure the cable to the
bracket with a second lockwasher and jam nut.
g. Connect the arm assembly to the clevis end of the cable at the fuel control
box with pin, washer and cotter pin.
h. Secure the arm assembly to the control mechanism inside the fuel control
box with screw, washer and nut.
i. Refer to paragraph 8B-12 for connecting the remaining cable end and ad-
justment of cowl flaps.
j . Install all access plates, panels, and the fuel crossfeed lever to the front
of the fuel control box.
8B-11. INSTALLATION OF COWL FLAP MECHANISM ASSEMBLY.

a. Install the hinges and cowl flaps to the bottom of the cowl with machine
screws and self-locking nuts.
b. Install the torque tube in the bearing blocks and position on brackets on the
engine mount tubes. Secure the assembly with bolt, washer and self-locking nut.
NOTE
As necessary, install shim washers on either or both

ends of the torque tube inboard of the bearing blocks
(.032, P/N 85012-117 or .062, P/N 85012-118) to pro-
vide .032 end play of the torque tube.
c. Position the torque tube with double stem arms of the torque tube pointing
aft.
POWER PLANT
3H11l
d. Connect the cowl flap operating rods to the double stem arms of the torque
tube with bolt, washer, nut and cotter pin.
NOTE
The curved operating rod must be installed on the

inboard side of the right engine. The end of the rod
painted red must be attached to the torque tube arm.
e. Refer to paragraph 8B-12 for connecting the remaining components and ad-
justment of cowl flaps.
f. Install all access plates and panels.
8B-12. RIGGING AND ADJUSTMENT OF COWL FLAPS.

a. Remove the side cowl panels, the top center section of the nacelle, and the
access panel from the bottom of the fuselage, if not previously removed.
b. Remove the access plate from the front of the fuel control box by first re-
moving the crossfeed drain knob and then the attaching screws.
c. Center the threaded attachment parts of the control cable housing where
they are secured to the engine firewall and the bracket below the fuel control box.
d. Position the cowl flap control lever in the half open position.
e. Connect the control cable clevis end to the operating arm assembly, if not
previously done, by installing the pin from the inboard side of the clevis and the
washer and cotter pin on the outboard side.
f. Position the arm assembly with the cable attached to the operating handle
mechanism inside the fuel control box. Secure the items with a screw installed
from the outside of the fuel control box and washer and nut.
g. Position the single stem arm of the torque tube vertical and parallel to the
engine firewall.
h. Maintaining the position of the torque tube, connect the end of the cable to
the single stem arm using a pin, washer and cotter pin.
i . Adjust the operating rods to provide 26 degrees of opening with the previous
items remaining constant.
j . Adjust the stops so the cowl flaps fit flush with the nacelles when closed.
k. Ascertain that the cowl flaps open to the full open position of 52 degrees.
l. Tighten all jam nuts, install all access plates and panels and the crossfeed
drain knob.
POWER PLANT
3H 12 3H12 Reissued: 2/18/81
8B-13. ENGINE.
8B-14. REMOVAL OF ENGINE. The removal of either engine is basically the same
procedure, though the routing of some wires, cables, lines, etc. does vary between engines.
Each line should be identified to facilitate reinstallation and covered, where disconnected,
to prevent contamination.
a. Turn off all cockpit switches and then disconnect the battery ground cable
at the battery.
b. Move the fuel valve control lever, located on the fuel control box between
the two front seats, to the off position.
c. Remove the engine cowling. (Refer to Removal of Engine Cowling, Section
VIIIA .)
e. Remove the propeller. (Refer to Removal of Propeller, Section VIIIA.)
f. Disconnect the starter cable at the starter, remove the cable clamps and
pull it aft to the firewall.
g. Remove cylinder head temperature wire from number six cylinder.
h. Disconnect the alternator wires and wire clamps, pull the wires aft to the
firewall.
i. Remove the governor control cable and injector control cables.
j . Disconnect the manifold pressure, oil pressure, fuel pressure and fuel flow
gauge vent lines.
k. Disconnect the engine oil breather, magneto "P" leads, oil temperature
wire and tachometer cable.
1 . Disconnect the vacuum hoses, air oil separator line to the engine, oil cooler
lines and remove oil cooler.
m. Disconnect the fuel lines at the fuel pump, the hydraulic pump lines and
bonding straps.
n. Loosen the magneto mounting nuts and rotate the magnetos to clear the
engine mounts.
o. Remove E.G.T. (Exhaust Gas Temperature) probe.
p. Remove exhaust tailpipe and mounting bracket.
q. Remove air filter assembly and inlet duct.
r. To prevent damage to the tail when removing the weight of the engine, at-
s. Attach a one-half ton(minimum) capacity hoist to the engine lifting eye and
POWER PLANT
3H13
3H14
,69 2480
SECTIONA-A
SKETCHA
1. PROPELLER GOVERNOR
3. LIFTING STRAP
4. FUEL DISTRIBUTION VALVE
S. SPARK PLUG
6. ENGINE MOUNT
7. VACUUM PUMP
6. SHOCK MOUNT
(SEE SKETCH B)
9. OIL FILTER
10. MAGNETO, RIGHT
II. AIR BOX
12. COMPRESSOR
13. TURBINE
(SEE SKETCH A)
14. EXHAUST PIPE
I5. MOUNTING BRACKET, EXHAUST PIPE
16. OIL COOLER
EXHAUST BY-PASS VALVE
B
17.
18. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE CONTROLLER
19. CONTROLLER HOUSING
20. INDUCTION PIPE
21. DENSITY CONTROLLER
22. EXHAUST MANIFOLD
23. INDUCTION PIPE HEAT SHIELD
24. FUEL AIR BLEED NOZZLE
25. ENGINE MOUNT FITTING SECTIONB-B
26. BUSHING
27. BOLT
28. ENGINE MOUNT FRAME
29.
30.
WASHER
IU r
SKETCHB
Figure 8B-2. Engine Installation
POWER PI.ANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3H15 3H16
t. Remove the self-locking nut, washer, front rubber shock mount and sleeve
from all four mount bolts.
u. Slide mount bolts out of attaching points and slowly swing engine free and
place on a suitable support being careful not to damage any attached parts.
v. Remove the rear rubber shock mounts.
8B-15. INSTALLATION OF ENGINE. Refer to Figure 8B-2 for the proper arrangement
of the engine mount shock assemblies.The top shocks are assembled so the silver colored
shocks are aft and the gold colored shocks are forward. The lower shock mounts are
installed opposite of the top shock mounts.
a. Attach a one-half ton hoist to the lifting strap and lift the engine. Install
remaining engine components at this time (exhaust manifolds, accessories, etc.).
b. Swingthe engine into position withthe nose slightly high and inward. Allow
the magnetos to clear the ring of the engine mount. Position the mounting lugs of
the engine so they align with the engine mount attaching points.
c. Insert a mounting bolt into the engine mount until its threaded end extends
NOTE
A heat shield is installed withthe bottom left shock

mount at exhaust by-pass valve. Adjust so as to
give maximum protection against exhaust tube heat.
washers and a self-locking nut on each mountingbolt. Tighten the nuts progress-
ively, following a circular sequence, and torque to 34 to 42 foot-pounds.
f. Connect the fuel lines to the fuel pump. Connect hydraulic pump lines, left
engine only, and bonding straps.
g. Install induction air filter assembly.
h. Connect the vacuum hose, air oil separator line to the engine.
i. Install E.G.T. (Exhaust Gas Temperature) probe.
j . Install the oil cooler and connect oil cooler hoses.
POWER PLANT
3H17
k. Connect the engine oil breather, magneto "P" leads, oil temperature wire to bulb and tachometer
cable.
1. Connect the cylinder head temperature, manifold pressure, fuel pressure and fuel flow gauge vent
line.
m. Install the governor control cable bracket and cable.
n. Connect the fuel injector unit control cables.
o. Connect the alternator wires and clamp the wires to rocker arm oil return lines.
p. Connect the starter cable and clamp cable to rocker arm oil return lines.
q. Time the magnetos to engine. (Refer to Installation and Timing Procedure, Section VIIIA.)
r. Install the exhaust tailpipe, but do not tighten the securing clamps.
s. Position the tailpipe by the following procedure:
1. Use a bubble protractor on top of one of the rocker box covers to determine a zero reference
position.
2. Place the protractor on the top of the tail pipe forward of the brace clamp.
°
3. Move the tail pipe to provide an angle of 12 from the zeroed position of the protractor. This
adjustment provides for clearance between the cowl flap mechanism, nacelle and the tail pipe.
t. Torque the V-clamp at the turbine outlet to 40-50 inch-pounds and safety.
NOTE
Do not over torque V band clamps on tailpipe or compressor

housing. (Light tapping around the clamps while tightening helps
them seat properly).
u. Torque the clamp at the outlet of by-pass valve to 120-140 inch pounds and safety.
v. Position and tighten the tail pipe brace clamp and torque the tail pipe support assembly cap screw 50
to 70 inch pounds and safety wire the cap screw to the oil sump boss with MS20995-C41 wire.
w. Ascertain that the magneto switches are off and install the propeller per paragraph 8A-18.
x. Install oil drain valve on the inboard side of left engine and the outboard side of the right engine.
Torque to 325 +/- 25 inch pounds.
y. Install the proper grade and amount of engine oil. (Refer to latest revision Lycoming Service
Instruction No. 1241.)
z. Connect the battery ground wire at the battery.
aa. Turn on the fuel valve, open the throttle full, mixture in idle cut-off, and turn on the electric fuel
pump and check the fuel lines for leaks.
POWER PLANT
3H18 3H18 Reissued: 2/18/81

ab. Perform an engine operational check.

ac. Check for oil leaks.
ad. Install the access plates on the engine nacelle and the cowling per paragraph
8A-8.
8B-16. TURBOCHARGER. (Lycoming.) The following paragraphs contain in-

structions for the removal, and installation procedures of turbocharger units
supplied by Avco-Lycoming Division, Williamsport, Pennsylvania, 17701, and
installed in PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes, Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up.
The turbocharger part number, serial number, model number and other
pertinent information appears on the name plate attached to the unit components.
Include this information in all correspondence.
Inspection procedures may be found in Section II.
8B-17. REMOVAL OF TURBOCHARGER.

a. Remove the engine cowling. (Refer to Removal of Engine Cowling, Section
VIIIA.)
b. Remove the turbocharger assembly from the engine by the following pro-
cedure:
1. Remove duct from air filter to compressor housing by removing the
clamps.
2. Disconnect the oil scavenge line at the side of the reservoir tank which
is mounted on the bottom of the turbocharger.
3. Loosen clamps and slide connecting hose between compressor and con-
troller housing down inlet pipe far enough to clear the compressor.
NOTE
Always apply penetrating oil to all mount bolts and

turbine plenum bolts prior to removal. Bolts seize
due to carbon and rust build up on threads. Working
them back and forth usually avoids shearing them off.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3H 19
EXHAUST MANIPOLD
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3H20
4. Remove tail pipe by the following steps:

(a) Remove clamps at the exhaust turbine and at the rear of the by-pass
valve.
(b) Remove support bracket from tail pipe.
5. Remove oil lines at the top of the turbocharger unit.
6. Remove turbocharger unit by removing the four attaching bolts, nuts
and washers at the turbine housing flange.
8B-18. REMOVAL OF THE CONTROLLER HOUSING.

a. Loosen clamps and slide connecting hose between compressor and control-
ler housing down inlet pipe far enough to clear the compressor.
b. Disconnect all hoses attached to the density controller, differential pressure
controller and housing.
c. Remove the controller housing from the injector by removing the attaching
bolts.
8B-19. REMOVAL OF EXHAUST BY-PASS VALVE ASSEMBLY.

a. Disconnect two oil lines from on top of valve assembly.
b. Remove tail pipe by the following procedure:
1. Remove clamps at the exhaust turbine and the by-pass valve.
2. Remove support bracket from tail pipe.
c. Remove remaining clamp between by-pass valve and exhaust manifold.
8B-20. TURBOCHARGER LUBRICATION SYSTEM PRIMING. Immediately prior to

mounting the unit, prime the lubrication system as follows:
a. Invert turbocharger and fill center housing with new clean oil through oil drain.
b. Turn rotating assemblyby hand to coat bearings and thrust washer with oil.
c. Coat threads of attaching bolts or studs with high temperature thread lubricant.
d. After installing turbocharger. (Ref. para. 8B-20.)flush oil through oil inlet line and
ensure that line is clean and unobstructed.
e. Fill engine and oil inlet line with new, clean lubricating oil, and connect line.
f. Connect oil return line.
NOTE
If the turbocharger is to be installed on a new or newly
overhauled engine, operate the engine with a separate oil
filter in the oil supply line to the turbocharger during the
first hour of operation. This must be done to ensure that no
metal particles are carried from the engine into the
turbocharger lubrication system.
POWER PLANT
8B-21. INSTALLATION OF TURBOCHARGER.

a. Slide connecting hose on inlet pipe of the controller housing far enough to allow clearance to mount
turbocharger unit.
b. Position turbocharger unit on mounting brackets and attach to exhaust transition section or
plenum flange with attaching bolts, nuts and washers. Torque to 225-300 inch pounds.
c. Attach oil lines at the top of turbocharger unit.
d. Install tailpipe by the following steps:
1. Install tailpipe to turbine outlet and secure with clamp. Do not tighten clamp at this time.
2. Install exhaust pipe to by-pass valve making sure to insert metal gasket between matching
parts before attaching clamp. Do not tighten clamps at this time.
3. Attach tubular bracket to tail pipe with attaching bolt. Do not tighten.
4. Position tail pipe and torque per paragraph 8B-15.
e. Attach the oil scavenge line at the side of the reservoir tank mounted on the bottom of the turbo-
charger.
CAUTION
Connect turbocharger ducts so as to impose no compressive bending

or torsional loads on turbocharger.
f. Secure duct, from air filter to compressor housing, by attaching clamps.

g. Slide the connecting hose on the controller housing onto the compressor outlet and secure with
clamps. Turbo oil scavenge line support is mounted underneath the upper clamp.
8B-22. INSTALLATION OF THE CONTROLLER HOUSING.

a. Slide connecting hose and clamps on inlet pipe of the controller housing far enough to allo
clearance between the compressor outlet and controller housing.
b. Install controller housing with gasket to injector and secure with attaching bolt and lockwashers
and torque.
c. Connect all hoses to the density controller, differential pressure controller and housing.
d. Slide the inlet pipe connecting hose on compressor outlet and secure with clamps. Turbo oil
scavenge line support is mounted underneath the upper clamp.
8B-23. INSTALLATION OF EXHAUST BY-PASS VALVE ASSEMBLY.

a. Mount by-pass valve, with gasket, to exhaust manifold by attaching clamp. Torque to 130 inch
pounds.
b. Install tailpipe by the following steps:
POWER PLANT
3H22
1. Install tailpipe to turbine outlet and secure with clamp. Do not tighten clamp at this time.
2. Install exhaust pipe to by-pass valve making sure to insert metal gasket between mating parts
before attaching clamp. Do not tighen clamps at this time.
3. Attach tubular bracket to tailpipe with attaching bolt but do not tighten.
4. Position and torque tailpipe. (Refer to Paragraph 8B-14.)
c. Connect hoses on top of valve assembly.
8B-24. ADJUSTMENT OF TURBOCHARGER. It is recommended that adjustments of the turbocharger

be conducted by an authorized overhaul facility, in accordance with the latest revision of Avco Lycoming
Service Instruction No. 1187.
8B-25. FUEL INJECTOR.
8B-26. REMOVAL OF FUEL INJECTOR, NOZZLE LINES, FUEL LINES AND FUEL FLOW
DIVIDER.
a. Remove the engine cowling. (Refer to Removal of Engine Cowling, Section VIIIA.)
b. Disconnect the throttle and mixture control cables at the injector.
c. Remove controller housing. (Refer to Paragragh 8B-17.)
d. Disconnect the fuel inlet line at the injector.
e. Disconnect the fuel outlet line to the flow divider at the injector.
i. Disconnect the inlet fuel line at the flow divider.
j. Remove the two attaching bolts and remove fuel flow divider and nozzle lines as a unit.
k. Remove air bleed nozzles. (Refer to Paragraph 8A-39.)
8B-27. INSTALLATION OF FUEL INJECTOR.

a. Install air bleed nozzles. (Refer to Installation of Fuel Air Bleed Nozzle, Section VIIIA.)
b. Install fuel flow divider and nozzle lines, attach divider to the crankcase with attaching bolts, and
connect lines to nozzles.
c. Connect inlet fuel line and fuel flow meter line.
d. Install a gasket and attach the injector unit to the engine sump with washers and nuts.
e. Mount controller housing on bottom of injector. Refer to Paragraph 8B-21.
f. Connect the throttle and mixture control cables.
h. Install the cowling as described in paragraph 8A-8.
i. Adjust the idle speed and mixture of the injector.
POWER PLANT
3H23
3H23
Reissued: 2/ 18/81
TABLE VIIIB - I. ENGINE TROUBLE SHOOTING
Failure of engine to Lack of fuel. Check fuel system for

start. leaks. Fill fuel tank.
Clean dirty lines,
strainers or fuel
valves.
Overpriming. Leave ignition "off"

and mixture control
in "Idle-Cut-Off",
open throttle and
"unload" engine by
cranking for a few
seconds. Turn igni-
tion switch on and
proceed to start in a
normal manner.
Defective spark plugs. Clean and adjust or

replace spark plugs.
Defective ignition wire. Check with electric

tester, and replace
any defective wires.
Defective battery. Replace with charged

battery.
Improper operation of Clean points. Check

magneto breaker. internal timing of
magnetos.
Lack of sufficient fuel Disconnect fuel line

flow. and check fuel flow.
Water in fuel injector Drain fuel injector or

or carburetor. carburetor and fuel
lines.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
3H24
TABLE VIIIB-I. ENGINE TROUBLE SHOOTING (cont.)
Failure of engine to Internal failure. Check oil screens for

start. (cont.) metal particles. If
haul of the engine
may be indicated.
Failure of engine to Incorrect idle mixture. Adjust mixture.

idle properly.
Leak in the induction Tighten all connections
system. in the induction sys-
tem. Replace any
parts that are defec-
tive.
Incorrect idle adjust- Adjust throttle stop to

ment. obtain correct idle.
Uneven cylinder Check condition of

compression. piston rings and
valve seats.
Faulty ignition system. Check entire ignition

system.
Insufficient fuel Adjust fuel pressure.

pressure.
Low power and uneven Mixture too rich indi- Readjustment of fuel
running. cated by sluggish injector or carbure-
engine operation, red tors by authorized
exhaust flame at night. personnel is indi-
Extreme cases indicated.
cated by black smoke
from exhaust.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
311
Low power and uneven Mixture too lean; indi- Check fuel lines for
running. (cont.) cated by overheating dirt or other restric-
or backfiring. tions. Readjustment
of fuel injector or
carburetor by author-
ized personnel is
indicated.
Leaks in induction Tighten all connections.

system. Replace defective
parts.
Defective spark plugs. Clean and gap or re-

place spark plugs.
Improper fuel. Fill tank with fuel of

recommended grade.
Magneto breaker points Clean points. Check

not working properly. internal timing of
magnetos.
Defective ignition wire. Check wire with elec-

tric tester. Replace
defective wire.

Failure of engine to Leak in the induction Tighten all connections

develop full power. system. and replace defective
parts.
Throttle lever out of Adjust throttle lever.

adjustment.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
312
Trouble
dy
Failure of engine to Improper fuel flow. Check strainer, gage

develop full power. and flow at the fuel
(cont.) inlet.
Restriction in air scoop. Examine air scoop and

remove restrictions.
Improper fuel. Drain and refill tank

with recommended
fuel.

Check system with
tester. Check igni-
tion timing.
Rough engine. Cracked engine mount. Replace or repair

mount.

bushings. bushings.
Uneven compression. Check compression.
Low oil pressure. Insufficient oil. Fill sump to proper

level with recom-
mended oil.
Air lock or dirt in Remove and clean oil

relief valve. pressure relief valve.
Leak in suction line Check gasket between

or pressure line. accessory housing
and crankcase.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
313
Low oil pressure. High oil temperature. See "High Oil Temper-
(cont.) ature" in "Trouble"
column.
Defective pressure gage. Replace.

strainer.
High oil temperature. Insufficient air cooling. Check air inlet and
outlet for deformation
or obstruction.
Insufficient oil supply. Fill oil sump to proper

level with specified
oil.
Low grade of oil. Replace with oil con-

forming to specifi-
cations.

Excessive blow-by. Usually caused by

worn or stuck rings.
Failing or failed Examine sump for

bearing. metal particles. If
found, overhaul of
engine is indicated.
Defective temperature Replace gage.

gage.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
314
ruble Cause Remeidy
Excessive oil con- Low grade of oil. Fill tank with oil con-
sumption. forming to specifi-
cation.
Failing or failed Check sump for metal

bearings. particles.

of piston rings.
Failure of rings to Use mineral base oil.

seat (new nitrided Climb to cruise
cylinders). altitude at full power
and operate at 75%
cruise power setting
until oil consumption
stabilizes.
TABLE VIIIB-I. ENGINE TROUBLE SHOOTING (TURBOCHARGER)
Excessive noise or Improper bearing Supply required oil

vibration. lubrication. pressure. Clean or
replace oil line; clean
oil strainer. If
trouble persists,
overhaul turbo-
charger.
Leak in engine intake Tighten loose connec-

or exhaust manifold. tions or replace
manifold gaskets as
necessary.
Dirty impeller blades. Diassemble and clean.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
315
TABLE VIIIB-I. ENGINE TROUBLE SHOOTING (TURBOCHARGER) (cont.)
Engine will not deliver Clogged manifold system. Clear all ducting.
rated power.
Foreign material lodged Disassemble and clean.
in compressor impeller
or turbine.
Excessive dirt build-up Thoroughly clean com-

in compressor. pressor assembly.
Service air cleaner
and check for leakage.
Leak in engine intake Tighten loose connec-

or exhaust. tions or replace
manifold gaskets as
necessary.
Rotating assembly Overhaul turbocharger.

bearing seizure.
Restriction in return Remove and clean

lines from actuator lines.
to waste gate con-
troller.
Waste gate controller Have waste gate con-

is in need of adjust- troller adjusted.
ment.
Oil pressure too low. Tighten fittings. Re-

place lines or hoses.
Increase oil pressure
to desired pressure.
Inlet orifice to actuator Remove inlet line at

clogged. actuator and clean
orifice.
POWER PLANT
Reissued:2/18/81
316
Engine will not deliver Waste gate controller Replace unit.

rated power. (cont.) malfunction.
Waste gate butterfly Low pressure. Clogged

not closing. orifice in inlet to
actuator.
Butterfly shaft binding. Check bearings.
Turbocharger impeller Check bearings. Re-

binding, frozen or place turbocharger.
fouling housing.
Piston seal in actuator Remove and replace

leaking. (Usually actuator or dis-
accompanied by oil assemble and replace
leakage at drain line.) packing.
Critical altitude lower Controller not getting Check pump outlet

than specified. enough oil pressure pressure, oil filters,
to close the waste external lines for
gate. leaks or obstructions.
Chips under metering Replace controller.

valve in controller
holding it open.
Metering jet in actuator Remove actuator and

plugged. clean jet.
Actuator piston seal If there is oil leakage

failed and leaking at actuator drain,
excessively. clean cylinder and
replace piston seal.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
317
TABLE VIIIB-I. ENGINE TROUBLE SHOOTING (TURBOCHARGER)(cont.)
Critical altitude lower Waste gate valve sticking. Clean and free action.
than specified.
(cont.)
Engine surges or Air in oil lines or Bleed system.

smokes. actuator.
Controller metering Replace controller.

valve stem seal leak-
ing oil into manifold.
Clogged breather. Check breather for

restrictions to air
flow.
NOTE
Smoke would be normal if engine has idled

for a prolonged period.
High deck pressure Controller metering Replace controller

(Compressor dis- valve not opening, assembly or replace
charge pressure) aneroid bellows aneroid bellows.
leaking.
Waste gate sticking Shut off valve in return

closed. line not working.
Butterfly shaft binding. Check bearings.
Replace by-pass valve

or correct linkage
binding.
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
318
High deck pressure Controller return line Clean or replace line.

(Compressor dis- restricted.
charge pressure)
(cont.) Oil pressure too high. Check pressure 75 to
85 psi (80 psi desired)
at waste gate actuator
inlet.
If pressure on outlet
side of actuator is
too high, have waste
gate controller
adjusted.
Waste gate actuator Remove and disassem-

piston locked in full ble actuator, check
closed position. condition of piston
(Usually accompanied and packing or replace
by oil leakage at actu- actuator assembly.
ator drain line.)
NOTE: Waste gate
normally closed in
idle and low power
conditions. Should
open when actuator
inlet line is
disconnected.
Waste gate controller Replace controller.

malfunction.
Manifold pressure Malfunction of pressure Replace pressure ratio

drops as altitude ratio controller. controller.
increases (below
15,000 feet).
POWER PLANT
Reissued: 2/18/81
319
IX
SECTION
SYSTEM
FUEL
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
9-1. Introduction .................................... 3113

9-2. Description ................................... . 3113
9-3. Troubleshooting ............... ....... ... . . . . .. 3121
94. Fuel Cells ...................................... 3121
9-5. Removalof Fuel Cells ......................... 3121
9-6. Removalof WingTip Fuel Cell .................... 3122
9-7. Cleaning,Inspection and Repair of Fuel Cells ............. . 3122
9-8. Fuel CellCompartment ........................ 3J1
9-9. ResealingInboard Fuel CellWingCavity Area ........... 3J1
9-10. Molded Nipple Fittings ........................ 3J4
9-11. Installation of Fuel Cell ........................ 3J4
9-12. Installation of WingTip Fuel Cell .................. 3J5
9-13. Handlingand Storageof Fuel Cells ....................... 3J6
9-14. Repair of Fuel Cell ........................... . 3J6
9-15. Testing Fuel Cells ........................... 3J8
9-16. Fuel Quantity Indicating System ........................ 3J9
9-17. CheckingFuel Quantity Indicating System ............. 3J9
9-18. Removal and Installation of WingFuel Sight Gauge ........ 3J12
9-19. Removalof Fuel Sender ....................... 3J12
9-20. Installation of Fuel Sender ........................ .. 3J13
9-21. Fuel Selector Valves(PA-23-250;and PA-23-250(six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2222 incl.) .................... 3J13
9-22. Removalof Fuel Selector Valve ................... 3J13
9-23. Disassemblyof Fuel Selector Valve ................. 3J13
9-24. Cleaning,Inspection and Repair of Fuel
Selector Valve ......................... . 3J 14
9-25. Assemblyof Fuel Selector Valve.................... 3J14
9-26. Leak Test of Fuel Selector Valve .................. 3J14
9-27. Installation of Fuel Selector Valve .................. 3J15
9-28. Adjustment of Fuel Shutoff ValveControls ............ 3J16
9-29. Fuel Selector Valve(Three-wayvalve)(PA-23-235;and
PA-23-250 (six place), SerialNos. 27-2223 and up) ............ 3J16
9-30. Removalof Fuel Selector Valve ................... 3J17
9-31. Disassemblyof Fuel Selector Valve ................. 3J17
9-32. Cleaning,Inspection and Repair of Fuel
Selector Valve ................... . . . .... 3J17
9-33. Assemblyof Fuel Valve ........ ........ .... 3J18
9-34. Leak Test of Selector Valve ............... .... 3J18
9-35. Installation of Fuel Selector Valve .................. 3J19
Reissued:2/18/81
3110
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
9-36. Adjustment of Fuel Selector Valve ..................... 3J20

9-37. Fuel Selector Valve (Three-Way Valve)(PA-23-235;PA-E23-250;
and PA-23-250)(six place) (Dukes P/N 3564-00-1,-2)......... 3J20
9-38. Removal of Fuel Selector Valve ....................... 3J20
9-39. Inspection and Leak Test of Fuel Selector Valve......... 3J21
9-40. Installation of Fuel Selector Valve ..................... 3J23
9-41. Adjustment and Lubrication of Fuel Selector Valve ...... 3J24
9-42. Adjustment and Lubrication of Fuel Selector Valve ...... 3J24
9-43. Fuel Selector Valve Control Cables (Earlier) ..................... 3K1
9-44. Removal of Fuel Selector Valve Control Cables ......... 3K1
9-45. Installation of Fuel Selector Valve Control Cables ....... 3K1
9-46. Fuel Selector Valve Control Cables (Later) ...................... 3K2
9-47. Removal ......................................... 3K2
9-48. Installation......................................... 3K3
9-49. Fuel Crossfeed Valve ......................................... 3K4
9-50. Removal of Crossfeed Valve .......................... 3K4
9-51. Disassembly of Fuel Crossfeed Valve ................... 3K4
9-52. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Fuel Crossfeed
Valve ......................................... 3K5
9-53. Assembly of Fuel Crossfeed Valve ..................... 3K5
9-54. Leak Test of Crossfeed Valve ......................... 3K5
9-55. Installation of Fuel Crossfeed Valve.................... 3K6
9-56. Fuel Filter................................................... 3K6
9-57. Removal of Fuel Filter ............................... 3K6
9-58. Disassembly, Inspection and Assembly of Fuel Filter..... 3K7
9-59. Disassemblyof Fuel Filter Assembly ................... 3K7
9-60. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Fuel Filter .......... 3K8
9-61. Assemblyof Fuel Filter .............................. 3K8
9-62. Installation of Fuel Filter Assembly .................... 3K9
9-63. Electric Fuel Pumps .......................................... 3K9
9-64. Plunger Fuel Pumps (Bendix) (PA-23-250;PA-23-235;and
27-2504incl.) ............................................ 3K9
9-65. Removal of Fuel Pump............................... 3K9
9-66. Disassembly of Fuel Pump............................ 3K9
9-67. Cleaning, Inspection and Repair of Fuel Pump .......... 3K11
9-68. Resistance Check (Plunger Type Pump) ................ 3K1
9-69. Assembly of Fuel Pump .............................. 3K11
9-70. Installation of Fuel Pump ............................ 3K13
9-71. Adjustment of Electric Fuel Pump (Bench Test) ......... 3K13
9-72. Adjustment of Electric Fuel Pump (In Airplane) ......... 3K13
9-73. Rotary Fuel Pumps (Weldon) (PA-23-250- six place,
Serial Nos. 27-2322and up) ................................ 3K14
9-74. Removal of Fuel Pumps .............................. 3K14
Reissued: 2/18/81
3111
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
9-75. Disassembly of Fuel Pump ......................................... 3K 14

9-76. Inspection and Repair ............................................. 3K16
9-77. Assembly of Fuel Pump ........................................... 3K17
9-78. Installation of Fuel Pump.......................................... 3K19
9-79. Adjustment of Electric Fuel Pump (Bench Test)....................... 3K19
9-80. Adjustment of Electric Fuel Pump (In Airplane) ...................... 3K20
9-81. Engine Primer Pump....................................................... 3K20
9-82. Removal of Engine Primer ......................................... 3K20
9-83. Disassembly, Cleaning and Assembly of Engine
Primer ........................................................ 3K20
9-84. Installation of Engine Primer Pump ................................. 3K21
9-85. Prime Jets ....................................................... 3K21
9-86. Cleaning Fuel System ...................................................... 3K22
Reissued: 2/18/81
3112
SECTIONIX
FUEL SYSTEM
9-1. INTRODUCTION.The fuel system components covered in this section consist of the
fuel cells, selector valves, control cables, filter screens and electric fuel pumps. Instructions
are given for remedying difficulties which may arise in the normal operation of the fuel
system. The instructions are organized so the mechanic can refer to: Removal, Repair,
Installation and Adjustment of each part of the system.
Maintenance for the carburation and fuel injection system may be found under Power
Plant, SectionsVIII, VIIIA or VIIB.
9-2. DESCRIPTION.The fuel system is contained in two independent units that allow
each engine to have its own fuel supply. The systems are connected only by a crossfeed
valve that willallow fuel to be drawn from one set of fuel cells to the engine on the opposite
side, in the event of an emergency.
The fuel cells are of the bladder type and are installed in cavitieswithin the wings,with
each inboard cell having a capacity of 35 or 36 U.S. gallons.The outboard cells hold 35 or
36 U.S. gallonseach. (Refer to the Pilot's Information Manualfor the exact amount of fuel
availablefor the particular airplane being serviced.)Aircraft with serial numbers 27-7654001
and up may have additional optional wing tip fuel cells which are interconnected to the
outboard main cells, thus increasing the capacity of each outboard cell to 55 U.S. gallons.
On airplanes including wing tip fuel cells an optional sight gauge is installed on the main
outboard fuel cell of each wing. A check of the fuel quantity can be performed on the
ground during the preflight check of the airplane.
Fuel is taken from each cell through a finger screen located in the cell outlet fitting and
then onto the shutoff selector valve. From the selector valve, fuel is drawn in a series
configuration through the fuel filter, electric fuel pump and onto the engine driven pump.
Drains are provided for each fuel cell, filter bowl and crossfeed line. The cell drains and
filter screen drains are accessiblethrough an accessdoor on the bottom inboard part of each
nacelle. The crossfeed drain is located in the fuel control box between the two front seats
and is operated by a knob on the front of the box.
The fuel valvesare operated by control handles located on the fuel control box between
the two front seats. The fuel gaugeswill indicate the quantity of fuel in each cell that fuel is
being drawn from. On aircraft which incorporate wing tip fuel cells, the quantity of fuel is
combined with the main outboard fuel cells to givea combined total indication.
Figures 9-1 through 9-7 give a pictorial diagram of the various fuel systems for specific
serial numbered aircraft.
FUEL SYSTEM
3113 3I13 Reissued: 2/18/81

FUELS
VAI
DRAIN
ELECTRIC
FUELPUMPS
STRAINER
PRIMER
JETS IETS
PRIMER
Figure 9-1. Fuel System Diagram (2 valves)

PA-23-250; and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2222 incl.
FUEL SYSTEM
3114 3I14 Reissued: 2/18/81

2494
n VENT
OUTBOARD
RIGHT LEFT
OUTBOARD
CELL CELL
ELECTRIC
FUELPUMPS FUEL
ELECTRIC PUMPS
ENGINE ENGINE
DRIVEN
FUEL FUEL
PUMP
CARBURETOR CARBURETOR
HEATER
Figure 9-2. Fuel System Diagram

PA-23-235; and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2223 to 27-2504 incl.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
3I15
2496
Figure 9-3. Fuel System Diagram

FUEL SYSTEM
2495
VENT ENT nUT n EIIT
FUEL FLOW CAUSE
HEATER
FUEL
cE icUMLECTRIC
FUEL
PUMP
FUEL
INJECTOR FUEL
REGULATOR IECTO
SAFETY
VALVE
FUEL
FLOW
DISTRIBUOR FUEL
FLOW
DISTRIBUOR
FLOW VENT
GAUGE LINE
FUEL
NOZZLES FUEL
NOZZLES
Figure 9-4. Fuel System Diagram, PA-23-250(six place),

Serial Nos. 27-2505to 27-3836;27-3838to 27-3943incl.
(Except 27-2582,27-2686,27-3135and 27-3941)
FUEL SYSTEM
3I17
2497
Figure 9-5. Fuel System Diagram, PA-23-250(six place),

Serial Nos. 27-3937and 27-3944to 27-7554172incl.
(Except 27-4520)
FUEL SYSTEM
.2490
VENT NOTE VENT

WING TIP FUEL CELLS ARE EFT
RISGHTTIP OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT SEE NOTLEFT TIP
SEE NOTE SEE NOTE
INTERCONNECT LINE INTERCONNECT LINE

VENT VENT
RIGHT OUTBOARD RIGHT INBOARD LEFT INBOARD LEFT OUTBOARD

CELL CELL FUEL FLOW GAUGE CELL CELL
SIGHT GAUGE FUEL SELECTOR TR VALVE SIGHT GAUGE
STRAINR STRAINER
SAINER
LINE DRAIN LINEDRAIN
CHECK VALVE CROSSCHED CHECK VALVE
(TURBO INSTALLATION ON-OFF VALVE (TURBO INSTALLATION
ONLY) ONLY)
CHECK VALVE CHECK VALVE
ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP CROSSFEED ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP
DRAIN VALVE
ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP ENGINE DRIVEN FUEL PUMP
FUEL INJECTOR FEL INJECTOR

FUEL REGULATOR
FUEL FLOWFUEL REGULATOR FUEL FLOW
DISTRIBUTOR DISTRIBUTOR
FLOW GAUGE VENT LINE
FUEL NOZZLES R FUEL NOZZLES

HEATER
FLOW GAUGE VENT LINE
Figure 9-6. Fuel System Diagram, PA-23-250 (six place),

Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up with Optional Wing Tip Fuel Cells
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3I19
Figure 9-7. Fuel System Diagram, PA-23-250 (six place),

Serial Nos. 27-2582, 27-2686, 27-3135, 27-3941 and 27-4520
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3120
9-3. TROUBLESHOOTING.Troubles peculiar to the fuel system are listed in Table IX-Iat
the back of this section, along with their probable causes and suggested remedies. When
troubleshooting, check from the fuel supply to the items affected. If no trouble is found by
this method, the trouble probably exists inside individual pieces of equipment; they may
then be removed from the airplane and overhauled, or identical units or units tested and
known to be good, installed in their place. Troubleshooting the fuel quantity indicator may
also be found in Section X, Instruments. The complete electrical system diagram for the
system may be found in Section XI, Electrical System.
94. FUEL CELLS.
9-5. REMOVAL OF FUEL CELLS. (Refer to Figure 9-9.)

a. Drain the fuel cell to be removed. (Refer to Draining Fuel System, Section II.)
Should time permit, and if the cell is to be reused, it is suggested that the cell be flushed,
sprayed or rubbed with a light engine oil. Then do not remove the cell until 24 hours have
elapsed after the oil has been applied. This willkeep the cell pliable until ready to reinstall.
b. Remove the accessplate from the underside of the wing at the inboard end of the
fuel cell being removed.
NOTE
On aircraft with serial nos. 27-7654001and up with tip fuel

cells, refer to Paragraph 9-6 for removal instructions.
c. Loosen the clamp on the outlet neck.
d. Removethe ovalaccessplate on top of the wing.
e. Disconnect the fuel sender unit wires from the unit inside the accessopening.
f. Remove the sender unit plate by removingmounting bolts, lockwashersand gaskets.
g. Remove the filler cap and the mounting bolts around the filler neck plate or
optional sight gauge and mounting bolts around plate.
h. Insert an arm between the fuel cell and the top of the wing; work outward from the
opening releasing the cell support bayonet clips. The clips fit into brackets in the cell-
compartment and can be released by exerting pressure downward.
i. Reach under the fuel cell and release the button type fasteners by pushingthem in
an outward direction toward the corner of the cell unseating them from their mounting
brackets.
j. Place tape or equal protective covering around the ovalaccesshole in the top of the
wing to prevent damage to the cell when removingit.
k. Fold the cell neatly within the wing and remove it gently through the oval opening.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3I21
9-6. REMOVAL OF WING TIP FUEL CELL. (Refer to Figure 9-8.)

NOTE
Airplanesequipped with pneumatic deicers. (Refer to Section

XIV for removal instructions.)
a. Place the crossfeed valve in the OFF position and drain the fuel from the outboard
and tip fuel cells to be removed. (Refer to DrainingFuel System, Section II.)
b. Remove the wing tip fairing attachment screws; disconnect the navigation light
electrical connector, and remove the fairing.
c. Remove the fuel sender access plate on the wing tip; disconnect the sender unit
electrical leads; remove the sender unit screws, and carefully withdraw the sender unit with
the gaskets from the cell. Note the position of the installed unit to facilitate installation.
d. Disconnect the fuel vent line; remove the oval access plate and the outer and inner
rings from the outboard tip rib.
e. Reach into the outboard fuel cell and remove the clamp on the large diameter
internal nipple; remove the accessplates on the bottom and top skins.
f. Remove the wing tip hinge pin at the centerline of the main spar by removing the
screw securing the end of the pin to the bottom of the wing tip, grasping it with pliers, and
pulling it out.
g. Remove the wing tip attachment screws and carefully pull the tip away from the
wing far enough to gain accessto the external nipples of the tip fuel cell, crossover tubes
and electrical connector.
h. Loosen the clamps on the three external nipples of the tip fuel cell and the clamp
securing the ground lead to the large diameter interconnect tube. Unplug the electrical
connector.
i. Remove the tip by separating the tip cell nipples from the crossover tubes and
disconnecting the ground leads on the tip rib.
j. Remove the filler cap assembly from the wing tip and the bolts attaching the fuel
cell to the filler neck plate assembly.
k. Untie the nylon cords; collapse the fuel cell and neatly fold the cell within the tip.
Tape the edges of the oval access opening; tape or tie the cell and remove it through the
opening in the tip rib.
9-7. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF FUEL CELLS.

a. Fuel cellsmay be cleaned by the followingprocedure:
1. New Cells: It should not be necessary to clean new cells upon removing them
from their containers, if they are installed in the fuel cell cavities promptly. If for any
reason the cells are not installed immediately and they become dirty, they should be cleaned
with soap and warm water to remove foreign material prior to installation in a clean cavity.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3122
2. Used Cells: Prior to removal, the cells are to be drained of fuel, purged with fresh air and
swabbed out to remove all traces of fuel. Following removal, the cells are to be cleaned inside and out with soap
and warm water.
WARNING
Use a vapor-proof light for inspection.
b. Fuel cells may be inspected by the following procedure:

1. New Cells: Inspect the cell surface inside and outside for cuts, abraded (scuffed) areas and
accessory damage. Also, inspect the fitting seals for nicks, scratches and foreign material.
2. Used Cells: Cells removed from the fuel cell cavity for inspection and repair or cells being
returned to service from storage, should be inspected as outlined below:
(a) Remove fuel cells from wing cavity in accordance with Paragraph 9-5.
(b) Check for leakage in accordance with test procedure in Paragraph 9-15.
(1) If leaks appear, repair per Paragraph 9-14, clean per Paragraph 9-7, and reinstall per
Paragraph 9-11 or replace with new cells.
(2) If no leakage appears, clean and reinstall cell per Paragraph 9-7 and 9-11.
(c) Check condition of fuel cap assemblies especially the rubber expandable seal portion.
Caps showing indications of deterioration or hardening (of seal) should be replaced. On
models with Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-7654000 inclusive, the caps have holes which act as
vents for the fuel system. In addition the fuel cells have drain tubes that are attached to the
filler neck plate assembly just below the filler cap and gasket. With later models, Serial
Nos. 27-7654001 and up, the caps do not have vents. The venting tube is attached lower
down in the filler neck assembly, underneath a retainer and gasket. (See Figures 9-9 and
9-10.)
WARNING
Only use the correct type of cap for the airplane in question.
(d) Inspect the fuel cell filler cover plate gasket for evidence of aging, hardening or deteriora-
tion; replace gasket if any of these conditions are noted:
(1) Check fit of cover plate in relation to wing surface when closed; cover plate should
fit flush with wing surface.
(e) Check fuel lines and fittings for integrity.
(1) Fuel lines showing evidence of damage or possible splitting and loose or damaged
fittings should be replaced.
FUEL SYSTEM
3I23
3123
Reissued: 2/18/81
3. Baffled Fuel Cells: After each 500 hours of operation, conduct the following
inspection:
(a) Defuel the aircraft.
(b) Remove the inboard and outboard cell access plates on the wingsand fuel
cells.
(c) Check the tension and knots of the support cells.
(d) Inspect the interior of the cells for security of the baffle and free operation
of the flapper valve. Inspect both sides of the baffle.
(e) Inspect the exterior of the cells to insure the Velcro tape has not parted
from the cell surface or linear surface.
(f) Install all access plates on fuel cells and wings; fill cells and check for leaks.
c. Due to the length of the fuel cell repair procedures, this information will be found in
paragraph 9-14.
1. ACCESS COVER, WING TIP SENDER UNIT 9. EXTERNAL NIPPLE

2. FUEL VENT LINE 10. OUTBOARD FUEL CELL
3. FUEL FILLER ASSEMBLY 11. GROUND WIRES
4. NYLON CORD 12. OUTBOARD WING TIP RIB ACCESS
5. EXTERNAL NIPPLE PANEL
6. ACCESS COVER, OUTBOARD FUEL CELL 13. CHECK VALVE (SEE NOTE)
SENDER UNIT 14. FUEL SIGHT GAUGE (ON PA-23-250
7. EXTERNAL NIPPLE (SIX PLACE) LATER MODELS)
8. INTERNAL NIPPLE
Figure 9-8. Wing Tip Fuel Cell Installation
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
3124
9-8. FUEL CELL COMPARTMENT.

a. Thoroughly clear the cell compartment of all fittings, trimmings, loose washers,
bolts or nuts.
b. Round off all sharp edges of the fuel cell compartment.
c. Inspect the fuel cell compartment just prior to fuel cell installation.
d. Tape over all sharp edges and all rough rivets with moleskin tape which may be
obtained locally.
9-9. RESEALING INBOARD FUEL CELL WING CAVITY AREA.
a. Remove inboard fuel cells from the left and right wings in accordance with
Paragraph 9-5.
b. Remove tape from fuel cell liner cutout area where the fuel cell's outlet nipple fits.
c. To facilitate flow-thru of sloshing compound along bottom rib flange at Station
80.31 and bottom skin stringer to rib attachment areas (see detail), proceed as follows:
1. Insert a 1/8 inch welding rod (pointed on end) into fuel cell liner cutout (fuel
cell outlet area), routing rod behind inboard fuel cell liner and along bottom rib outside
flange using a push-pull motion which will "drill" hole through existing sealant. This
procedure shall apply to all four stringer to rib attachment points. Remove rod from wing
cavity.
d. Insert two 1/16 inch welding rods into fuel cell liner cutout, one toward front spar
and one toward rear spar, routing rods behind inboard fuel cell liner and along bottom
inside radius of rib flange. (See detail.) Leave rods in this position. They will be removed
later.
e. Cover hole in rib through which the fuel cell's outlet nipple fits, and cover all drain
holes in bottom of wingskin between Stations 80.31 and 127.25 with maskingtape.
f. Levelaircraft longitudinally.
g. Resealthe fuel cell cavity area of one wingat a time, using a sloshingcompound that
meets MIL-S-4383Bspecifications.Two sources of this sloshingcompound are:
1. Products Research & ChemicalCorporation - Gloucester City, New Jersey (Part
No. 1005-L)
2. Coast Pro-Seal Company - Compton, California(Part No. 444R)
(a) Pour two quarts of the sloshing compound into the two inboard fuel cell
mounting bracket holes in the liner and the liner cutout area of the left wing,
so that the compound will flow under the fuel cell liner and be distributed
fore and aft along the rib to skin junction.
(b) Place jack under jack pad of right wing and raise until left wing is level on
underside. This action will distribute the sloshing compound laterally along
the rear and front spar skin junctions. Let the aircraft sit in this position for
ten (10) minutes and then removejack.
(c) Perform Steps (a) and (b) on the right wing.
h. Open drain holes in bottom of wing skins to allow excess sloshing compound to
drain out. Return aircraft to normal ground attitude and let drain for one (1) hour.
i. Allow the sloshing compound to dry for twenty-four (24) hours and then remove
the two 1/16 inch weldingrods from both wings.
j. Retape liner cutout area at inboard end of fuel cell cavities. Also clean out drain
holes on bottom wing skins of any buildup of sloshingcompound.
k. Reinstall inboard fuel cells in accordance with Paragraph 9-1 1.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3J1
A770
2498 VENT HOLE IN
FILLER CAP
15
16
A
19
VIEW-A
20
VENT SYSTEM
SERIAL NOS.
27-1 TO 274816
INCLUSIVE
VENT SYSTEM
SERIAL NOS. 274817 TO 27-7664000 INCL.
1. FUEL CELL, INBOARD

12. FUEL CELL LINER, BOTTOM AFT
= 3. FUEL CELL LINER, OUTBOARD
4. FUEL CELL VENT ASSEMBLY
5. REAR SPAR
6. FUEL CELL, OUTBOARD
7. VENT LINE ASSEMBLY, OUTBOARD
8. VENT LINE ASSEMBLY, INBOARD
9. FUEL CELL LINER, BOTTOM FORWARD
10. FUEL CELL VENT DRAIN
/ 11. MAIN SPAR
12. GASKET
13. FILLER NECK MOUNTING PLATE
14. CAP ASSEMBLY
15. FUEL CELL ACCESS PLATE
16. WING SKIN
17. FUEL CELL ATTACHMENT BRACKET
18. FUEL SENDER MOUNTING PLATE
19. GASKET
20. FUEL CELL LINER, INBOARD
Figure 9-9. Fuel Cell Installation and Vent System

(Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-7654000 inclusive)
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3J2
A867 A868
VIEW-B VIEW-C
NOTE
18
REFER TO FIGURE 5b FOR
19 AIRPLANES WITH TIP TANKS
INSTALLED, SERIAL NOS.
27-7654001 AND UP.
1. FUEL CELL, INBOARD

2. FUEL CELL LINER, BOTTOM AFT
3. FUEL CELL LINER, OUTBOARD
4. FUEL CELL VENT DRAIN
5. FUEL CELL VENT ASSEMBLY
6. REAR SPAR
7. FUEL CELL, OUTBOARD
8. VENT LINE ASSEMBLY, OUTBOARD 16. "O" RING, CAP ASSEMBLY
9. VENT LINE ASSEMBLY, INBOARD 17. CAP ASSEMBLY
10. FUEL CELL LINER, BOTTOM FORWARD 18. FUEL CELL ACCESS PLATE
11. MAIN SPAR 19. WING SKIN
12. GASKET 20. FUEL CELL ATTACHMENT BRACKET
13. FILLER NECK MOUNTING PLATE 21. FUEL SENDER MOUNTING PLATE
14. GASKET, FILLER NECK 22. GASKET
15. ADAPTER ASSEMBLY 23. FUEL CELL LINER, INBOARD
Figure 9-10. Fuel Cell Installation and Vent System

(Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up)
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3J3
9-10. MOLDED NIPPLE FITTINGS. The molded nipple fitting is a lightweight fitting
developed for ease in installation in certain locations in the airplane. In order to get the best
service from this type fitting, it is necessary to exercise certain precautions at the fime of
installation. The specific precautions other than the general care in handling are as follows:
a. Insert the flow tube into the fitting until the end is flush with the inside edge of the
nipple.
b. The hose clamp must be clear of the end of the fitting by one-quarter inch where
possible.
c. Locate the hose clamp on the fabric reinforced area of the nipple.
d. Tighten hose clamp snug. Do this once. Do not re-tighten unless hose clamp is
loosened completely and allowed to set for 15 minutes before retightening.
e. Do not use sealingpaste or gasket compound.
f. Apply a thin film of Simonize Wax to metal flow tubes to facilitate installation and
removal.
9-11. INSTALLATION OF FUEL CELL. (Refer to Figure 9-9.)

a. To allow hook-up of all cell fasteners, note location of each fastener bracket. Do not
use sharp tools such as files and screwdriversfor installation purposes.
b. Fold the cell and insert it through the oval openingin the top of the wing.
NOTE
On aircraft with Serial Nos. 27-7654001and up with tip fuel

cells installed, refer to Paragraph 9-12 for installation
instructions.
CAUTION
Use care when inserting the fuel cell so as not to cut or

damage the cell.
c. Unfold the cell within the wing and position the outlet neck through its hole inside
the wing.
d. Fasten the button type fasteners located on the bottom of the cell and then the
bayonet type clips on the top, to their respective brackets. Draw each button fastener
inward toward the center of the cell cavity to engage it into its bracket. Early cells have
locating tabs at each fastener, located inside the cell; later cells do not have these tabs,
though installation is similar. Grip the tab or the cell area around the fastener and insert the
fastener into its bracket.
e. Reach inside the fuel cell and position the filler opening to the filler neck plate and
gaskets. Secure with attaching bolts and washers. If optional sight gauge is installed secure
with same procedure.
f. Replace the two oval gaskets and sender unit mounting plate on oval opening to cell.
Insert locating pins (P/N 18551-00) to align the gaskets and plate with the twenty four holes
in the cell. Pull the pins through the bolt holes in the wing opening and safety temporarily.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3J4
Place lock washers under the bolt heads. Turn the 24 bolts in by hand and tighten to 25
inch-pounds with a torque wrench and special torque wrench adapter (P/N 18642-00).
g. Connect the sender unit wires.
h. Tighten the clamp on the cell outlet neck.
i. Check the fuel sender unit as describedin Paragraph 9-14.
j. Check for fuel leaks at all fittings.
k. Install accessplates.
9-12. INSTALLATION OF WING TIP FUEL CELL. (Refer to Figure 9-8.)

a. Inspect the tip cell cavity for sharp edges.
b. Place tape over the edges of the ovalaccessopening in the tip rib to prevent damage
to the fuel cell.
CAUTION
Do not use sharp tools such as files or screwdrivers for

installation purposes.
c. Roll the cell into the shape and size that can be inserted through the oval access
opening in the tip outboard rib.
d. Insert and unroll the cell establishing the correct relationship of the cell to the tip
compartment.
e. Feed the nylon cord through the cell hangers and the tip ribs; draw the cords tight
and tie each end as shown in Figure 9-7.)
f. Install the fuel filler neck assemblyand secure to fuel cell with screws.The gasket
should be positioned between the filler neck plate assembly and the fuel cell outer ring.
Torque cap bolts to 25 inch-pounds.
g. Wipe the inside of the cell clean of all dirt and foreign material with a clean, lint free
tank cloth, and inspect for cleanliness.
h. Hold the wing tip in position next to the wing and insert the crossovertubes. Install
the clamps on the external tip cell nipples. Ascertain that each crossovertube is grounded.
Connect electrical wiring.
NOTE
Position clamps on the external nipples with the screwheads
positioned so they will be accessiblethrough the accessholes
in the skins.
i. Secure wing tip to the wing with the attachment screws and insert wing tip hinge
pin. Secure the end of the pin.
j. Reach into the outboard fuel cell and install the clamp on the large internal nipple.
k. Install the outboard fuel sender unit; torque cap bolts to 25 inch-pounds. Connect
electrical leads and install the oval accessplate.
1. Install the tip sender unit; torque cap bolts to 25 inch-pounds. Install accessplate.
m. Connect the fuel cell vent line. Ascertain that word "Hinge" on vent check valveis
in the up position when installingfuel cell vent line.
FUEL SYSTEM
3J5
n. Install the oval accesscover in the tip rib with a gasket on each side of the rib and
torque cap bolts to 25 inch-pounds.
o. Place enough fuel in the cellsto check for any leakagearound the crossovertubes.
p. Install the access plates on the upper and lower skins.
q. Connect the navigation light wires and install the wing tip fairing.
r. Install deicer boots, if equipped, per instructions in Section XIV.
9-13. HANDLING AND STORAGE OF FUEL CELLS. When synthetic rubber fuel cells
are placed in service, the gasoline has a tendency to extract the plasticizer from the inner
liner of the fuel cell. This extraction of plasticizer is not detrimental as long as gasoline
remains in the fuel cell, inasmuch as the gasoline will act as a suitable plasticizer. Whenthe
gasoline is drained from the fuel cell, the plasticizing effect of the gasoline is lost and the
inner liner of the fuel cell begins to dry out and subsequent cracking will occur. This
cracking may penetrate through the walls of the cell after the cell has been refueled. To
prevent this failure from affecting serviceable fuel cellswhich previously contained gasoline
and are now to be stored for more than 10 days in the airplane or in storage, a thin coat of
engine oil should be applied to the inner liner of the cells. If it becomesnecessary to return
cells to the contractor, they should be repacked as nearly similar to the original factory pack
as possible.
a. Do not drag or handle the fuel cells any more than necessaryby their molded nipple
fittings, cell openings or attachment fittings.
b. Store cells at room temperature with no more than normal humidity.
c. Do not allow the cells to remain any longer than necessaryunder strong light.
d. When storing the cells, store in such a manner that their shipping containers are
placed level and will not crush the cells. When necessary to stack more than one high, see
that the containers are placed squarely on each other so as to preclude any danger of
slipping and the sharp edge of one container perforating another.
9-14. REPAIR OF FUEL CELL.

CAUTION
No repairs are to be made on the radius of a cell or in the

fitting area of a cell. Cells with such damage are to be
returned to the factory for repairs. No damaged areas such as
cuts and tears larger than one inch are to be repaired in the
field. Return cells to: U.S. Rubber Co.,Fuel Cell Dept.,
Mishawaka,Indiana.
NOTE
To determine if the fuel cell is repairable, reach through the

fuel cell access plate and take a section of cell between
thumb and forefinger. Wipe the ridge created by this action
with Methylethylketone. If fine cracks are evident, the fuel
cell is not repairable.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3J6
NOTE
For the followingprocedure use Piper Fuel Cell Repair Kit,
P/N 754 321.
a. Outside of Cell:
1. Use a piece of synthetic rubber coated fabric (U.S. Rubber 5200 outside repair
material) large enough to cover damage at least two inches from cut in any direction. Buff
this material lightly and thoroughly with garnet paper and wash with Methylethylketone
(U.S. Rubber Co. 3339 solution) to remove buffing dust.
2. Cement buffed side to patch with two coats of U.S. Rubber Co. 3230 cement or
MinnesotaMiningCo. EC-678.Allow each coat to dry 10 to 15 minutes.
3. Buff cell area to be patched lightly and thoroughly with garnet paper and wash
with 3339 solution to remove buffing dust.
4. Cement buffed area with two coats of U.S. Rubber 3230 or Minnesota Mining
Co. EC-678 cement. Alloweach coat to dry 10 to 15 minutes.
5. Freshen cemented area of patch and cemented area of cell with 3339 solution.
6. Whilestill tacky, apply edge of patch to edge of cemented area on the cell. With
a roller or blunt instrument, roll or press the patch to the cemented area and roll or press it
down a half-inchto an inch across at a time so as not to trap air between patch and cell. Lay
50 pound shot bag over patch which is protected by a piece of Holland Cloth to prevent
sticking. Weight should not be removed for six hours.
7. Seal coat edge of patch one-half inch with one coat of U.S. Rubber 3230 or
Minnesota MiningCo. EC-678 cement and allow the cement to dry thoroughly.
b. Inside of Cell:
1. After the damaged area has been patched on the outside of the cell and the
repair allowed to stand a minimum of six hours, the cell is then ready to have the patch
applied on the inside of the cell.
2. Lightly and thoroughly buff a piece of cured U.S. Rubber 5200/5187 nylon,
sandwich material large enough to cover damage at least two inches from cut in any
direction. Wash buffing dust off patch with Methylethylketone solution (U.S. Rubber
3339).
3. Cement buffed side of patch with two coats of black rubber cement, U.S.
Rubber 3230 or MinnesotaMiningCo. EC-678 and allow each coat to dry 10 to 15 minutes.
4. Buff cell area to be patched lightly and thoroughly with fine sandpaper( "0")
and then washoff buffing dust with Methylethylketone solution (U.S. Rubber 3339).
5. Coat buffed area with two coats of black rubber cement, U.S. Rubber 3230 or
Minnesota MiningCo. EC-678, and allow each coat to dry 10 to 15 minutes.
6. Freshen cemented area of patch and cemented area of cell with
Methylethylketone solution (U.S. Rubber 3339).
7. Whilestill tacky, apply edge of patch to edge of cemented area, centering patch
over cut in cell. With a roller or blunt instrument, roll or press the patch to the cemented
area on the cell. Hold part of patch off the cemented area and roll or press it down a
half-inch to an inch across at a time so as not to trap air between patch and cell. Apply 50
pound shot bag to repaired area and do not disturb for six hours.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3J7
8. Seal coat patch and one-half inch from edge of patch with two coats of U.S.
Rubber 3230 or Minnesota MiningCo. EC-678 cement. Allow the first coat to dry one hour
or more. Wipe patch and cemented area lightly with No. 10 oil, so that when the cell is in its
original position, the patch area will not stick to other areas of the cell.
c. Scuffed Fabric:
1. Buff area surrounding scuffed fabric.
2. Wash buffing dust from area with 3339 solution.
3. Apply two coats of U.S. Rubber 3230 or MinnesotaMiningCo. EC-678 cement
to the buffed area, allowing 10 minutes drying time between coats.
9-15. TESTING FUEL CELLS. When cells are removed from the airplane for suspected
leakage, the following method for locating leaks may be used. This method may also be
employed after local repairs have been made to check both the efficiencyof the repair and
presence of other leaks not originally found.
a. MaterialsNeeded:
1. Commercial or household ammonia (28-29%concentration).
2. Indicator solution - contents per gallon as follows:
(a) 1/2 gallon of distilled water.
(b) 1/2 gallon of denatured alcohol.
(c) 15 grams of phenolphthalein crystalsor powder.
NOTE
New phenolphthalein-ammonia solution must be prepared

each shift and clean or new cloths shall be used each shift.
3. Approximately three yards of balloon cloth or airplane cloth.

b. Procedure:
1. Pour ammonia on an absorbent cloth at the rate of 3cc per cubic foot of cell
capacity with a minimum of 10cc.Place saturated cloth inside cell.
2. Close all openings and apply positive test air pressure of 1/4 to 1/2 psi.
CAUTION
Extreme caution must be maintained to prevent cover plates

from damaging or cutting the cell during installation, phenol
test, deflation and removal.
NOTE
Unsupported tests must be conducted on a level, dirt free

surface having no sharp projections or anything which could
damage the inflated cell. An unsupported bladder cell can be
inflated only to a pressure of 1/4 to 1/2psi. Any pressure in
excess of this will cause damage or rupture of the cell.
FUEL SYSTEM
3J8
3. Soak cloth in phenolphthalein indicator solution.

4. Wringout cloth and spread evenly and smoothly over area of cell being checked.
5. Check all surfaces of cell. Leaks will be indicated by the appearance of pink
spots on the cloth.
9-16. FUEL QUANTITY INDICATING SYSTEM.
NOTE
On the latest models of the PA-23-250(six place), there are

fuel gauges installed on the wing tips, left and right. (See
Paragraph 9-18 for installation and removal procedures.)
9-17. CHECKING FUEL QUANTITY INDICATING SYSTEM.

a. General checking of the system.
1. Completely drain the fuel cells that relate to the gauge that is to be checked.
(Refer to DrainingFuel Cells,Section II.)
2. Level the airplane longitudinally and laterally. (Refer to Leveling,Section II.)
3. Ascertain that the crossfeed valveis closed.
4. Connect a 14-28-volt power supply to the airplane electrical system and observe
the fuel quantity gauge.It should read empty with the respective fuel selector lever at both
the inboard and outboard ON positions.
5. Add fuel to each cell in the amount of 9.0 U.S. gallons to the outboard cell and
9.0 gallonsto the inboard cell, to bring each cell to one-quarter its full capacity.
6. Again move the selector lever to both ON positions and observe the gauge. At
either position the quantity pointer should align with any part of the one-quarter index of
the gauge.
7. Continue to add fuel in increments of 9.0 and 9.0 U.S. gallonsto the outboard
and inboard cells respectively for each quarter capacity of the cells. At each quarter
increment, until full, check that the quantity pointer aligns with any part of the index, with
the selector lever at either ON position.
8. Should the gauge and the amount of fuel in the cell not correspond, the
procedure in step "b" through "d" may be necessary to isolate the trouble in the system.
FUEL SYSTEM
3J9
2515
MAIN BUS 1. ON PA-23-250 AND PA-23-250 (SIX
PLACE) SERIAL NOS. 27-2505 TO
27-3836; 27-3838 TO 27-3943 INCL.
5 AMP ONLY.
2. ON PA-E23 AND PA-23-250 (SIX
PLACE)ONLY.
3. RESISTANCE VALUE FORFUELTANK
SENDERUNITSON AIRCRAFTTOTAL
30.0 - 31.0 OHMS.(REFERTOSECTION
XI, ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICBY AP-
PROPRIATE AIRCRAFTSERIALNOS.).
RIGHT WING
CONNECTOR
SEE NOTE 2
GAUGES GAUGES
LEFT OUTBOARODLEFT INBOARD RIGHT INBOARD RIGHT OUTBOARD

FUELSENDER FUELSENDER FUEL SENDER FUELSENDER
SEENOTE3 SEENOTE3
OPTIONALWINGTIP FUEL TANKS

SERIAL NOS. 27-7654001 ANDUPO
FUELTANK SWITCH FUELTANK SWITCH
LEFTOUTBOARD RIGHT OUTBOARD

FUELSENDER FUELSENDER
16-17 OHMS 15-17 OHMS
I
. ,
RIGHTTIP TANK
FUELSENDER
13-16 OHMS 13-15 OHMS
Figure 9-11. Fuel Indicating System Wiring Schematic
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3J10
A771
SUPPLY 14-28 VOLTS
28
Figure 9-12. Checking Fuel Figure 9-13. Checking Fuel

Quantity Sender Gauges Schematic
b. Sender Check:
1. Remove the fuel sender to be checked. (Refer to Paragraph 9-19.)
2. Secure the sender in the appropriate position on the fabricated jig as shown in
Figure 9-12. (The jig may be fabricated from dimensions given in Figure 9-26.)
3. With the float arm against the bottom stop, the float should be just touching the
base of the jig. If the float arm is not touching the base of thejig or the bottom stop, adjust the
float by bending the arm at a position shown in Figure 9-12.
4. After the sender has been adjusted, check for the proper amount of resistance by
the following procedure:
(a) Connect an ohmmeter to the sender unit.
(b) Position the float arm against its bottom stop and ascertain the ohmmeter
indicates 0.00 ohms resistance.
(c) Slowly move the float arm from the bottom stop to the top stop while watching.
the ohmmeter indicator. The ohmmeter needle should steadily move up, with-
out fluctuation, as the float arm is moved.
(d) With the float arm against its top stop, the ohmmeter should indicate the
following:
(1)Without tip tank-inboard and outboard 30.0 to 31.0 ohms.
(2)With tip tank-inboard 30.0 to 31.0 ohms; outboard 15.0 to 17.0
ohms; tip tank 13.0 to 15.0 ohms.
If incorrect resistance or fluctuation is found, the sender should be replaced.
c. Wiring Check: (Refer to Figure 9-13.)
1. Check all ground connections throughout the indicating system for corrosion or
loose connections that may cause excessive resistance in the circuit.
2. Check all splices and terminal connections for corrosion and security.
3. Check wiring between connections for excessive resistance due to frayed or
broken strands.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3J11
Jll
d. Gauge check:
1. Sender Method:
(a) Position and secure a calibrated sender to the fabricated checkingjig.
CAUTION
Make certain the sender restrictor is connected to the proper side of
the gauge.
(b) Connect the sender directly to the gauge being checked using No. 16or larger wire. (Refer
to Figure 9-13.)
(c) Connect a 14-28 volt power supply to the electrical system of the airplane.
(d) Operate the power supply and move the sender float arm through its travel. Ascertain
that the empty and full positions of the sender and the gauge correspond. If not, the gauge
should be replaced.
2. Resistor Method:
(a) Connect a 15 ohm resistor to the sender unit of the gauge being checked. (Refer to Figure
9-13.)
(b) Connect a 14-28 volt power supply to the electrical system of the airplane.
(c) Operate the power supply and ascertain the gauge indicates one-half full.
(d) Repeat the procedure using a 30 ohm resistor which should cause the gauge to indicate
full.
(e) If the gauge does not indicate properly,-it should be replaced.
9-18. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF WING TIP FUEL SIGHT GAUGE. (On latest models of
PA-23-250 (six place) only.)
a. Remove gauge by removing inner circle of screws which fasten gauge to gasket and plate.
b. Withdraw first the gauge, then the arm and float.
c. To install gauge, place the arm and float in wing then secure gauge to gaskets and plates with screws.
9-19. REMOVAL OF FUEL SENDER.

a. Remove the screws attaching the oval access plate to the top of the wing and remove the plate.
b. Disconnect the two electrical leads from the sender.
c. Remove the screws and washers attaching the sender to the mounting plate and remove the sender.
d. On aircraft with tip tanks installed (serial nos. 27-7654001 and up), an additional sender unit is
mounted in the tip tank. Remove the tip tank sender unit as follows:
1. Remove the screws attaching the round sender unit cover to the top of the wing tip.
2. Disconnect the electrical leads to the sender unit.
3. Remove the screws attaching the sender unit to the fuel cell mounting plate and carefully
withdraw the sender with the gasket from the fuel cell.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3J12
9-20. INSTALLATION OF FUEL SENDER.

a. Position the fuel sender to its mounting plate inside the wing. The sender should be
installed with the float arm forward.
b. Securethe sender with machine screwsand washer.
c. Connect the electrical leads. Connect the lead coming through the wing to the
terminal post of the fuel sender. Connect the sender ground strap to one of the mounting
plate attaching bolts.
d. Install the oval accessplate to the top of the wing.
e. On aircraft with tip tanks installed (serial nos. 27-7654001 and up), install the tip
sender unit as follows:
1. Install the gasket on the sender unit and insert the sender unit into the fuel cell
with the float arm and float facing outboard.
2. Secure the sender unit with machine screws and washers; connect the ground
lead to one of the sender unit mounting screws, and torque all screws evenly to 25
inch-pounds.
3. Connect the positive lead to the sender unit terminal and install accesscover.
9-21. FUEL SELECTOR VALVES. (PA-23-250;and PA-23-250 (six place). Serial Nos.
27-2000 to 27-2222 incl.)
9-22. REMOVAL OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE. (Refer to Figure 9-15.)

a. Remove the aft bottom section of the nacelle by removing attaching screws.
b. Drain the appropriate fuel cell or cellsfor the selector valve or valvesto be removed.
(Refer to DrainingFuel System, Section II.) Close the crossfeedline.
c. Remove the fuel selector for the outboard fuel cell by the followingprocedure:
1. Disconnect the operating rod and control cable from the valve arm removingthe
cotter pin and pin.
2. Disconnect the fuel lines from the valvefittings.
3. Remove the valveassemblyby removingthe two machine screwsand self-locking
nuts, installed through the valveassembly.
d. Removethe fuel selector for the inboard fuel cell by the followingprocedure:
1. Disconnect the operating rod from the valve arm if not previouslydisconnected
at the opposite end.
2. Disconnect the fuel lines from the selector valve and fuel strainer fittings.
3. Remove the valve and strainer assembly by removing the two machine screws
and self-lockingnuts installed through the valve.
4. Separate the selector valveand fuel strainer.
9-23. DISASSEMBLY OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE. (Refer to Figure 9-14.)

a. Remove the end fitting (1) and "O" ring (2) by unscrewing it from the valvebody
(5).
b. Disconnect the control arm from the valve stem by removing the speed nut, washers
and rivet.
FUEL SYSTEM
3J13 Reissued: 2 18 81
3J13
c. Examine the exposed portion of 1. END FITTING

the piston (6) for damage before re- 2. "O" RING
3. "O" RING
moving it. 4. RINGSTOP
. VALVE BODY
d. Remove the piston (6) by pushing 6. PISTON
it through the end fitting (1) end of the
body assembly.
9-24. CLEANING. INSPECTION AND

REPAIR OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE.
a. Clean the valve components in a
suitable dry type cleaning solvent.
1. Check that the friction sur-
faces of the valve body and stem are
free of nicks, dents and burrs. Figure 9-14. Fuel Selector Valve
2. Checkthat the stop on the pis-
ton is secure and undamaged.
3. Check that the threaded surfaces of the body and end fitting are not strip-
ped or cross-threaded.
out minor nicks and scratches and the replacement of "O" ring packings.
9-25. ASSEMBLY OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE. (Refer to Figure 9-14.)

a. Install new "0" rings (3) to the piston assembly (6).
b. Lubricate "O" rings (3) with lubricating oil (MIL-L-6082) and install the
piston (6) to the body assembly (5).
c. Install the end fitting (1) with a new "O" ring (2) to the body assembly (5).
d. Connect the control arm to the piston using washers, rivet and a speed nut.
9-26. LEAK TEST OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE.

a. Connect the inlet port of the valve to a 50 psi air source.
b. Close valve, apply pressure to 50 psi and submerge in kerosene or a sim-
ilar petroleum base fluid for two minutes.
c. There should be no evidence of leakage through the valve port around the
seat.
d. Disconnect air source and wipe fluid from exterior of valve.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
J 14
1. FUEL LINE, TO OUTBOARD CELL

2. VALVE, OUTBOARD FUEL 7
3. CONTROL CABLE
4. ROD, OPERATING
5. VALVE, INBOARD FUEL
6. FUEL LINE, TO ENGINE
7. FILTER ASSEMBLY
8. DOOR, FUEL DRAINS
9. FUEL DRAINS
Figure 9-15. Fuel Selector Valve Installation

PA-23-250;and PA-23-250(six place). Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504incl.
9-27. INSTALLATION OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE. (Refer to Figure 9-15.)

a. Install the selector valve for the inboard fuel cell by the following proce-
dures:
1. Assemble all fuel line fittings, if previously removed, and fuel strainer
to the selector valve.
2. Position the valve and strainer to the mounting bracket inside the aft
bottom section of the appropriate nacelle. Install the two machine screws and
self-locking nuts securing the units in place.
3. Connect the fuel lines to the valve and strainer fittings.
4. Connect the operating rod to the valve arm, if previously disconnected,
and check for proper adjustment. (Refer to Paragraph 9-28.)
b. Install the selector valve for the outboard fuel cell by the following proce-
dure:
1. Assemble all fuel line fittings, if previously removed, to the selector
valve.
FUEL SYSTEM
3J15 Reissued:2 18 81
3J13
2. Position the valve to the mounting bracket inside the aft bottom of the
appropriate nacelle. Install the two machine screws and self-locking nut, se-
curing the valve in place.
3. Connect the fuel lines to the valve fittings.
4. Connect the operating rod and control cable to the valve arm and check
for proper adjustment. (Refer to Paragraph 9-28.)
c. Fill the fuel cell or cells and allow fuel to flow through the valves. Check
for leaks.
d. Install the aft bottom section of the nacelle.
9-28. ADJUSTMENTS FOR FUEL SHUT-OFF VALVE CONTROLS. (Refer to

Figure 9-15.)
a. With fuel valve controls disconnected at switch actuating arm (under front
floorboard) place valve control levers (in cockpit) in "OFF" position.
b. Adjust the position of the valve arms on the inboard tank valve and the
outboard tank valve so that they are parallel to each other.
c. Move each valve to the "ON" position and measure distance between valve
face and valve arm attachment pin centerline. A 3/4 inch minimum dimension is
required here to obtain adequate fuel flow.
NOTE
If this distance is less than 3/4 inch, adjust the

connector rod until 3/4 inch is obtained.
d. Reposition valve arms as described in step "B" (both OFF) and secure
control cables at switch actuating arm with switch actuating arm in neutral
position between switches.
e. Move inboard valve control lever (in cockpit) to "ON" position and check
position of valve arm on outboard tank valve. The arm stop bushing must con-
tact the valve face. Move outboard valve control lever to "ON" position and
check. The inboard tank valve stop bushing must contact the valve face.
9-29. FUEL SELECTOR VALVE. (Three-way valve.) (PA-23-235; and PA-23-250 (six
place). Serial Nos. 27-2223to 27-7305126incl.)
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3J16

a. Remove the aft bottom section of the nacelle byremoving attaching screws.
b. Drain the appropriate fuel cells. (Refer to Draining Fuel System, Section
II. )
c. Disconnect the control cable from the control arm by removing the cotter
pin and loosening the nut. Draw the wire from the stud.
d. Disconnect the fuel line from the fuel selector valve and strainer fittings.
e. Remove the selector valve and strainer by removingthe four machine screws
and self-locking nuts installed through the valve assembly.
f. Separate the valve and strainer.
9-31. DISASSEMBLY OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE. (Refer to Figure 9-16.)

a. Remove the four screws (10) and washers (11) that attach the cap assembly
(12) to the valve body (15).
b. Pull the cap assembly straight from the valve body.
c. Push the spool (19) from the valve body.
d. To disassemble the cap assembly (12), remove the roll pin (13) that secures
the gear (14) on its shaft (7) by driving the pin with a 1/16 straight drift punch.
e. Remove the gear and spacer (1) from the shaft. Note position of gear in
relation to handle.
f. Remove the four screws (9) that secure the packing and seal cover (2). Re-
move the cover.
g. Remove old packings and seal.
h. If fitting (17) is removed, replace "O" ring packing (18).
9-32. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE.

a. Clean the valve components in a dry cleaning solvent.
1. Check that the friction surfaces of the valve are free from nicks, dents
and burrs.
2. Check that the teeth of the gear and spool are not damaged.
3. Check that the threaded surfaces are not stripped or cross-threaded.
4. Check that the selector detent mechanism is operating properly.
out minor nicks and scratches, and the replacing of "O" ring packings and seal.
NOTE
Fittings (17) in valve are special. DO NOTuse AN fit-

tings.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3J17
Figure 9-16. Fuel Selector Valve(Scott)
9-33. ASSEMBLY OF FUEL VALVE. (Refer to Figure 9-16.)

a. If either fitting (17) was removed, install the packing (18) and assemble the fitting
on the valvebody (15). Torque to 20 foot-pounds.
b. Apply a thin coat of Krytox Lubricant (No. 240 AB) to the packings (18), to
sprocket of lever (6), and to bore of fittings (17).
c. Insert and center the spool in the valvebody.
d. Apply a thin coat of Krytox Lbricant (No. 240 AB) to the seal (5) and packing (4),
and install in the cap assembly(12).
e. Ascertain that the shaft (7) is in place and install cover (2). Secure with screws(9).
f. Slide the spacer (1) and gear (14) on the shaft, with the pin holes alignedso that the
gear teeth are 90 degreesto the selector lever (6). Secure the gear with roll pin (13). The
position of the gear in relation to the selector handle for the valveof the left wing is shown
in Figure 9-16; the gear for the right wing is positioned opposite.
g. Install the packing (3) on the cap assembly.
h. Place the selector handle in neutral in relation to the cap and install the cap
assemblyin the valvebody. Secure the cap assemblywith screws(10) and washers (11).
i. Check valveoperation.
9-34. LEAK TEST OF SELECTOR VALVE.

a. Connect the inlet port of the valveassemblyto a 24 psi source.
b. Plug the right-hand port and close the left-hand port by placing the control lever to
the right.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3J18
2493
1 VALVE, SELECTOR
2. FUEL LINE
3. CONTROL CABLE
FILTER ASSEMBLY
7. DRAIN ASSEMBLY
8. FUEL LINE.
OUTBOARD
LEFT INSTALLATION SHOWN

RIGHT INSTALLATION OPPOSITE
Figure 9-17. Fuel Selector Valve Installation (Scott)

PA-23-235:and PA-23-250 (six place). Serial Nos. 27-2223to 27-7305126incl.
c. Apply pressure to 24 psi. There shall be no evidence of leakage either

through the port or around the fitting and lever when submerged in kerosene or
a similar petroleum-base fluid for 30 seconds.
d. Depressurize, remove the plug from the right hand port, place on left hand
port and close right hand port by placing the lever to left.
e. Repeat step c.
f. Disconnect and wipe fluid from exterior.
9-35. INSTALLATION OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE.

a. Assemble the line fittings, if previously removed, and the strainers to the
selector valve.
b. Position the valve and strainer inside the aft bottom section of the appro-
priate nacelle. Install the machine screws and self-locking nuts, securing the
units in place.
c. Connect the fuel lines to the valve and strainer fittings.
d. Connect the cable wire to the valve arm and check for proper adjustment.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2 18 81
3J19
(Refer to Paragraph 9-36.)

e. Fill fuel cells allowing fuel to flow through the valve. Check for leaks.
f. Install the aft bottom section of the nacelle.
9-36. ADJUSTMENT AND LUBRICATION OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE. (Refer to

Figure 9-17.)
a. Place the fuel control levers on the fuel control panel box, located between the front
seats, in the OFF position. Ascertain that the control cable is connected at the control panel
box and clamp at the spar.
°
b. Place the fuel valve in an OFF position. The fuel valve arm should be at a 90 angle
to the spar and can be felt when moved into the OFF position.
c. Clamp the control cable to the spar in the fuselage and at the engine nacelle.
d. Connect and secure the control cable to the shutoff valve.
1. Lubrication: It will be required that the fuel valve selector mechanism be lubri-
cated with ESSO Beacon 325 grease at the following points:
(a) Detent sprocket on the Scott fuel selector valve.
(b) At the attachment of the control cable to the valve.
(c) Inner member of the control cable.
(d) Attachment of control cable to the lever in the cockpit.
NOTE
A check should be made that there is no friction in the system

with the control disconnected at the valve.
9-37. FUEL SELECTOR VALVE. (Three Way Valve.) PA-23-235 and PA-23-250 (six
place) (Dukes P/N 3564-00-1, -2.)

a. Remove the aft bottom section of the nacelle by removing attaching screws.
b. Drain the appropriate fuel cells. (Refer to Draining Fuel System, Section II.)
NOTE
On Serial Nos. 27-7954057 and up, remove (noting the order

of) two flexible push-pull control cable assemblies (with rod
end bearings) from the control arm of the fuel selector valve
and proceed with Step d following. Otherwise, (Serial Nos.
27-7954056 and earlier) proceed with Step c following.
c. Disconnect the control cable from the control arm by removing the cotter pin and
loosening the nut. Draw the wire from the stud.
d. Disconnect the fuel lines from the fuel selector valve and strainer fittings.
e. Remove the selector valve and strainer by removing the mounting hardware.
f. Separate the valve and strainer.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3J20
A774
LEVER SHOWN IN CLOSED POSITION - LEVER SHOWN IN CLOSED POSITION -

ALL THREE PORTS CLOSED. ALL THREE PORTS CLOSED.
PORTS 1AND 3 OPEN WITH PORTS 2 AND 3 OPEN WITH

LEVER IN THIS POSITION. LEVER IN THIS POSITION.
PORTS 2 AND 3 OPEN WITH PORTS I AND 3 OPEN WITH

LEVER IN THIS POSITION. LEVER IN THIS POSITION.
Left Valve (3564-00-1) Right Valve (3564-00-2)
Figure 9-18. Fuel Selector Valve Port Positions
9-39. INSPECTION AND LEAK TEST OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE. (Refer to Figure
9-18.)
a. Inspect fuel selector valve for proper function. The following function inspection
is accomplished with the valve removed from the airplane. (See step b, noted below for
function inspection of valvewhile installed in airplane.)
1. With the selector in the "OFF" position, observe that all three ports are
closed.
2. Movethe selector lever to either side against the stop. Insert a pipe cleaner or
equivalent through the open inlet port. The cleaner should pass through the ball and out
port number 3.
3. Move the selector lever to the opposite stop position; use a pipe cleaner to
observe that the center and opposite (from step 2) port are open. All lever and port
positions must agree with Figure 9-18.
4. If the valve assembly fails any of these steps, remove lever safety wire, screw
and washer. Reposition selector lever until all port and lever positions correspond with
above inspection as noted in Figure 9-18.
FUEL SYSTEM
3J21 3J21 Reissued: 2/18/81
b. Inspect fuel selector valveswhile installed in the airplane per the following:
1. Ascertain that fuel tanks are full.
2. Turn left and right fuel selector valvesand crossfeed valveto off position.
3. At the right and/or left engine compartment(s), gain accessto the main fuel
feed line at the engine firewall by removingthe inboard engine cowl side panels.
4. Disconnect the fuel line from the fitting at the firewall and cap the fuel line
to prevent fuel spillage.
5. Place flexiblehose over the firewall fitting and place the opposite
end of the hose into a five gallon container.
NOTE
Use caution to prevent fuel spillage.
6. Select the "Inboard - Main Tank" position and turn on EmergencyFuel Pump.
Observe flow of fuel into container; flow should be full line capacity, indicating proper
selector valve function (i.e., no restriction to flow). Allow approximately five gallons to
flow into container.
7. Check tank to insure that fuel has been drawn from the selected (inboard) tank.
8. Select "Outboard" tank and repeat step numbers five and six.
9. If no restriction to fuel flow is observed in either tank position, reconnect fuel
lines and repeat steps two through seven (above) on opposite engine.
10. Should there be any indication of restricted fuel flow during the above
procedure, remove valve from the airplane and conduct function inspection per step a.
noted above.
c. Leak test the fuel selector valve using the steps noted below. The valvemust first be
removed from the airplane. If the followingtests indicate a defect, refer to Parts Catalog for
replacement valve or components.
NOTE
The leak tests should be conducted with the valve submerged

in test fluid of kerosene or similar petroleum-base fluid. The
valve should remain submerged when changinglever position.
1. Shaft and cover leak test.

(a) Plug 1 and 2 ports and position the lever halfwaybetween offposition and
either stop (neither open or closed). Apply 30 psi air pressure to port 3. There
should be no indication of air leakage around the shaft or the cover.
2. Internal leak test.
(a) Position the lever in the closedposition. Apply 13psi air pressure to port 1.
(b) Move the lever to the open position for port 2 and back to the closed
position.
(c) There should be no air leakage from port 2 or port 3 during the above
open-close cycle.
(d) Repeat steps (a) through (c) with 2 psi air pressure. This provides a test of
valve packing at a lower psi.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3J22
2499 1. VALVE, SELECTOR

2. FUEL LINE
3. CONTROLCABLE
5. FILTER ASSEMBLY
7. DRAIN ASSEMBLY
8. FUEL LINE
OUTBOARD
LEFTINSTALLATION SHOWN
RIGHT INSTALLATION OPPOSITE 7
Figure 9-19. Fuel Selector Valve Installation

PA-23-235 and PA-23-250 (six place)
(Dukes P/N 3654-00-1,-2)
(e) Position the leverin the closedposition and slowlyapply 0 to 15psi air pressure
to port 3. Move the lever 8° clockwiseand 8° counterclockwise.There should be
no indication of leakage for ports I or 2 when the lever is at the closed position or
at either 8° position.
d. Check the valve lever for ease of operation from the open position for port 1to the
open position for port 2 (or opposite). Shaft operating torque should not exceed 3 pounds.
This includes the breakaway force. The test force must be applied at the lever hole.
9-40. INSTALLATION OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE. (Refer to Figure 9-19.)

a. Assemblethe linefittings, if previouslyremoved, and the strainers to the selectorvalve.
Apply Parker Sealube or equivalent to first thread on elbow.
b. Position the valve and strainer assembly in the mounting bracket and install the
machine screwsand self-lockingnuts securingthe unit in place. Do not install mountingscrew
in the forward inboard hole of the selector valve.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3J 23
c. Connect the fuel lines to the valve and strainer fittings.

NOTE
On Serial Nos. 27-7954057and up, reinstalltwo flexible push-

pull control cable assemblies (with rod end bearings) in the
reverse order previouslyremoved from the control arm of the
fuel selector valve, and adjust lengths per Paragraph 9-42 and
the proceed with Step e following. Otherwise,(for Serial Nos.
27-7954056and earlier) proceed with Step d following.
d. Connect the cable wire to the valve arm and adjust per Paragraph 9-41.
e. Fill the fuel cellsand allow fuel to flow through the valveand strainer; checkfor leaks.
f. Install the aft bottom section of the nacelle.
9-41. ADJUSTMENT AND LUBRICATION OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE. (PA-23-

250 (six place) up to Serial Nos. 27-7954056incl.)
a. Place the fuel control levers on the fuel control box in the OFF position. Check to
be certain the control cable is connected at the control panel box and clamp at the spar.
b. Place the fuel valve in the OFF position. The fuel valve lever should be at a 90 degree
angle to the spar. Operate the valve lever and check to be sure the valve detents in the OFF
position.
c. Clamp the control cable to the spar in the fuselage and at the engine nacelle.
d. Connect and secure the control cable to the shutoff valve.
e. Lubricate the followingpoints with Exxon Beacon 325 grease:
1. At the attachment of the control cable to the valve.
2. Inner member of the control cable.
3. Attachment of control cable to the lever in the cockpit.
9-42. ADJUSTMENT AND LUBRICATION OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE. (PA-23-

250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-7954057and up.)
a. Check to be certain the rod end bearing of the control cable is connectedat the control
box.
b. With the fuel control lever on the control box heldin the off position and the fuel valve
in the off position, adjust the effectivelength of the control cable by proper positioningof the
rod end bearing on the cable assemblyand mount sameto the control arm of the fuelselector
valve.
NOTE
OFF position of the control arm is attained with its centerline

at 90 degrees with the spar.
c. With the switch actuator (Figure 9-28) centered between the fuel tank switchesand
the selector valve arm at the OFF positionadjust the effectivelength of the control cable (to the
switch actuator) by proper positioningof the rod end bearing on the cable assemblyand mount
same to the control arm of the fuel selector valve.
FUEL SYSTEM
3J24
d. Secure both rod end bearings to the control arm of the selector valve.
e. Lubricate the inner member of the control cables with Exxon Beacon 325 grease and
the rod end bearings with MIL-L-7870.
9-43. FUEL SELECTOR VALVE CONTROL CABLES. (See Figure 9-27.) (PA-23-235,
PA-23-250, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-7954056 incl.)
9-44. REMOVAL OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE CONTROL CABLES. (Serial Nos. to

27-7954056 incl.)
a. Remove the outboard control cable by the following procedure:
1. Remove the top aft part of the nacelle by removing attaching screws.
2. Remove the access panel covering the main spar from the bottom section of the
nacelle. (Refer to Access and Inspection Provisions, Section II.)
3. Remove the clamps holding the cable next to the selector valve.
4. Disconnect the cable from the selector valve arm.
5. Attach a fish line or similar material to the outboard end of the cable.
6. Remove the clamps holding the cable inside the fuselage on the forward side of
the main spar.
7. Disconnect the control cable from the actuator arm on the main spar.
8. Remove the outboard cable drawing it inboard from the wing.
b. Remove the inboard control cable by the following procedure:
1. Remove the access panel covering the main spar from the bottom of the fuselage,
if not previously removed. (Refer to Access and Inspection Provisions, Section II.)
2. Remove the clamps holding the cable to the main spar and inside the fuel control
box.
3. Disconnect the cable from the actuator arm on the main spar.
4. Disconnect the cable from the control handle assembly inside the fuel control box.
5. Remove the cable.
9-45. INSTALLATION OF FUEL SELECTOR VALVE CONTROL CABLES. (Serial

Nos. to 27-7954056 incl.)
a. The outboard cable may be installed by the following procedure:
1. Draw the cable from the fuselage through the wing to the nacelle.
2. Ascertain that the selector valve is in the OFF position and connect the cable end
to the valve arm.
NOTE
If the inboard cable is also being installed, perform Steps 3

thru 6 simultaneously with Steps 3 thru 6 of Part b.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3K1
3. Position the actuator arm so the screw in the end is centered betweenthe two fuel
quantity switches.
4. Insert the cable end to the swivel fitting on the actuator arm.
5. Maintaining an OFF position of the selectorvalve and the centeredposition of the
actuator arm, tighten the swivel fitting nut and safety with a cotter pin.
6. Install the cable clamps on the main spar and inside the nacelle.
b. The inboard cable may be installed by the following procedure:
1. Position the cable and connect it to the control handle insidethe fuel control box.
2. Ascertain that the fuel control handle is in the OFF position.
3. Position the actuator arm so the screw in the end is centeredbetween the two fuel
quantity switches.
4. Insert the remaining cable end to the swivel fitting on the actuator arm.
5. Maintaining an OFF position of the control handle and the centered position of
the actuator arm tighten the swivel fitting nut and safety with a cotter pin.
6. Install the cable clamps on the main spar and inside the fuel control box.
c. Check the operation of the cable and selector valve. (Refer to Figure 9-27.)Visually
check control cable wires at the related swivelfittings for indications of binding, kinking, or
bending; have someone in the cockpit operate fuel controls while mechanicinspectsthe swivel
fittings for indications of binding, kinking and/or bending. Replace cables exhibiting any of
the above conditions.
d. Check the adjustment of the fuel indicating switches. The actuating screw should be
adjusted to actuate the switch and allow free play after actuating, so as not to damage the
switch.
e. Install the access panel to the bottom of the fuselage and the top of the nacelle.
9-46. FUEL SELECTOR VALVE CONTROL CABLES. (See Figure 9-28.) (PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-7954057 and up.)
9-47. REMOVAL OF FUEL SELECTOR CONTROL VALVE CABLES. (Serial Nos.

27-7954057 and up.)
a. Gain access to the flexible push-pull fuel control cable assembliesas follows:
1. Release the top aft part of the nacelle by removing the attaching screws.
2. From the bottom section of the nacelle, removethe accesspanel coveringthe main
spar.
3. From the bottom of the fuselage, remove the accesspanel coveringthe main spar
and exposing the fuel quantity actuating switch arm.
b. Remove the flexible push-pull fuel control cable assemblies as follows:
1. Disconnect the outboard end of the push-pull cable assemblyfrom the fuelselector
control arm by removing the attaching hardware.
2. Disconnect the inboard end of the push-pull assemblies(one from the fuelquantity
switch actuator arm and one from the internal arm on the fuel tank control lever)by removing
the hardware securing the respectiverod-end bearings.
3. Release the outboard ends of both push-pull cable assemblies by removing the
cable anchor bracket holding the cable assemblies in place.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3K2
4. Release the inboard end of the cable assembly (connected to the fuel quantity
switch actuator) by removing the cable retainer holding the cable assembly in place.
5. Attach a fish line or similar material to the outboard end of the cable. Remove the
cable by drawing it inboard from the wing.
6. Release the inboard end of the cable assembly (connected to the fuel tank control
lever) by removing the cable retainer holding the cable assembly in place.
7. Attach a fish line or similar material to the outboard end of the cable and remove
the cable by drawing it inboard from the wing.
9-48. INSTALLATION OF FUEL SELECTOR CONTROL VALVE CABLES. (Serial

Nos. 27-7954027 and up.)
a. Draw the cables from the fuselage outboard toward the nacelle.
b. Set the fuel selector valve in the OFF position (with the lever arm at 90 degrees to the
wing spar as shown in Figure 9-19.)
c. Assemble and secure the rod-end bearings to the fuel selector valve arm using hard-
ware previously removed. (Be sure the longer of the two control cable assemblies is mounted
closest to the selector valve arm.)
CAUTION
Observe standard precautions regarding proper and sufficient

thread engagement when assembling and securing rod-end
bearings to the selector valve arm.
d. Secure the two cable assemblies in place using the dual cable anchor bracket and hard-
ware previously removed.
e. Secure the sheaths of both cable assemblies within the fuselage, using one cable re-
tainer each and hardware previously removed.
f. With the fuel selector valve arm at 90 degrees with the wing spar (OFF position) and
the fuel quantity actuator arm set midway between the fuel quantity switches, set and secure
the length of the cable to be connected to the fuel quantity actuator arm.
g. Secure the rod-end bearing to fuel quantity arm. Recheck position of fuel selector
valve arm (at 90 degrees with spar) and switch actuator arm (midway between actuating
switches). If necessary, readjust length and resecure cable assembly to actuator arm.
h. With the fuel selector lever arm at OFF position (90 degrees with spar) and the fuel
tank selector lever in the cabin at "OFF" position, set and secure the length of the cable to be
connected to the internal arm of the fuel tank selector lever.
i. Secure rod-end bearing to the internal arm of the fuel tank selector lever.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3K3
9-49. FUEL CROSSFEED VALVE.
9-50. REMOVAL OF CROSSFEED VALVE.

a. Remove the two front seats from the airplane.
b. Remove the attaching screws along the sides and bottom of the fuel control
box.
c. Remove the crossfeed drain knob from the lower front of the fuel control
box by one of the following procedures:
1. On PA-23-235, PA-23-250, and PA-23-250 (six place) airplaneswith Se-
rial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504, remove the knob by pulling it forward from the
stem.
2. OnPA-23-250(six place) airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-2505 andup, re-
move the knob by removing the socket set screw from the bottom of the knob and
pulling it forward from the stem.
d. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up, remove
the crossfeed valve knob by unscrewing it from its handle on top of the control box.
e. Lean the box forward away from the main spar cover and remove the ma-
chine screws and self-locking nuts from the heater fuel valve handle.
f. Disconnect all quick disconnect fuellines from the crossfeed valve, cross-
feed drain and heater fuel valve.
g. Disconnect the spring from the crossfeed drain valve.
h. Disconnect the crossfeed drain line from the bottom of the crossfeedvalve.
i. Remove the two machine screws and self-locking nuts securing the valve
to its bracket.
j. Remove the crossfeed valve, crossfeed drain and heater fuelvalve from the
control box.
k. Separate the fuel valve from the other units.
9-51. DISASSEMBLY OF FUEL CROSSFEED VALVE. (Refer to Figure 9-20.)

a. Remove the end fitting (1) and "O" ring (2) by unscrewing it from the valve
body (5).
b. Disconnect the control arm from the valve stem by removing the speed nut,
washers and rivet.
c. Examine the exposed portion of the piston (6) for damage before removing
it.
d. Remove thepiston (6) by pushing itthrough the end fitting (1)end of the body
assembly.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3K4
A772
9-52. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND
REPAIR OF FUEL CROSSFEED
VALVE.
a. Clean the valve components in a
suitable dry type cleaning solvent.
1. Check that the friction sur-
faces of the valve body and stem are
free from nicks, dents and burrs.
2. Check that the stop onthepis -
ton is secure and undamaged.
1. END FITTING 3. Check that the threaded sur-
2. "0" RING
3. "O" RING faces of the body and end fitting are not
4. RING STOP
5. PISTON
stripped or cross-threaded.
c. Repair to the valve is limited to
Figure 9-20. Fuel Crossfeed Valve reconditioningof parts, suchas smooth-
ing out minor nicks and scratches, and
the replacement of "O" ring packings.
9-53. ASSEMBLY OF FUEL CROSSFEED VALVE. (Refer to Figure 9-20.)

a. Install new "0" rings (3) to the piston assembly (6).
b. Lubricate "0" rings (3)with lubricating oil (MIL-L-6082) and install the
piston (6) to the body assembly (5).
c. Install the end fitting (1) with a new "0" ring (2) to the body assembly (5)..
d. Connect the control arm to the piston using washers, rivet and a speed nut.
9-54. LEAK TEST OF CROSSFEED VALVE.

a. Connect the inlet port of the valve to a 50 psi air source.
b. Close valve, apply pressure to 50 psi and submerge in kerosene or a sim-
ilar petroleum base fluid for two minutes.
c. There should be no evidence of leakage, through the valve port around the
seat.
d. Disconnect air source and wipe fluid from exterior of valve.
FUEL SYSTEM
3K5
9-55. INSTALLATION OF FUEL CROSSFEED VALVE.

a. Assemble the crossfeed drain, heater fuel valve and line fittings to the
crossfeed valve.
b. Position the assembled unit inside the fuel control box and install the ma-
chine screws and self-locking nuts, securing the crossfeed valve to its bracket.
c. Connect the spring to the crossfeed drain valve.
d. Connect the crossfeed drain line to the bottom of the crossfeed valve and
safety with MS20995-C32 wire.
e. Connect the fuel lines to the crossfeed valve, crossfeed drain and heater
fuel valve.
f. Position the heater fuel knob and stem to the heater fuel valve handle and
connect the two with machine screws and self-locking nuts.
g. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up, in-
stall the crossfeed knob to the valve handle on top of the control box.
h. Install the crossfeed drain knob to the stem on the lower front side of the
control box by one of the following procedures:
1. On PA-23-235, PA-23-250, and PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes with Se-
rial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl., align the knob to the stem and press firmly
in a parallel direction with the stem.
2. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up,
position the knob on the stem with the pointed end to the right. Install the socket
set screw in the bottom of the knob.
i. Operate the crossfeed system and check all fittings for evidence of fuel
leakage.
j. Position the fuel control box to the main spar cover and install attaching
screws.
k. Install the two front seats.
9-56. FUEL FILTER.
9-57. REMOVAL OF FUEL FILTER. The instructions given are for removal of the
complete filter assembly from the airplane. For cleaning and servicingpurposes only, refer
to paragraphs 9-58 or 9-59 thru 9-61.
a. Drain the fuel cells on the side which the filter is to be removed and close
the fuel selector valves. (Refer to Draining Fuel System, Section II. )
b. Remove the aft bottom section of the nacelle by removing attaching screws.
c. Disconnect the control cable or control rod from the selector valve by re-
moving the cotter pin and nut or pin.
d. Disconnect the quick-disconnect fuel line fittings from the selector valve
and filter.
FUEL SYSTEM
3K6
e. Remove the attachingmachine screws and self-lockingnuts from the selec-

tor valve.
f. Remove the filter and selector valve from the airplane.
9-58. DISASSEMBLY, INSPECTION AND ASSEMBLY OF FUEL FILTER.

(PA-23-250: PA-23-235: and PA-23-250 (six place). Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504
incl.) (Refer to Figure 9-21.) If the filter assembly has been removed from the airplane,
disregard steps a, b and j.
a. Move the fuel selector valve to the OFF position.
b. Open the fuel strainer access door on the bottom inboard side of the nacelle.
c. Cut the safety wire and loosen the round nut on the bottom of the strainer.
d. Swing the bail off to the side and remove the bowl.
e. Remove the bowl gasket and screen.
f. Inspect the screen and bowl quick drain. If the screen wire is broken or
frayed, it should be replaced. If the quick drain has been leaking, the "0" ring
-should be replaced.
g. Install the screen and a new gasket to the strainer housing.
h. Position the bowl and bail, and tighten the round nut at the bottom of the
bowl.
i. Safety the round nut and bail with MS20995-C32 safety wire.
j. Open the selector valve and check the strainer for leakage.
9-59. DISASSEMBLY OF FUEL FILTER ASSEMBLY. PA-23-250 (six place), Serial

Nos. 27-2505and up.) (Refer to Figure 9-22.)
a. Cut safety wire (16) and remove the cap nut (17) from the bottom of the fil-
ter bowl (13).
b. Take the bowl from the filter housing (1).
c. The bowl gasket (5) may be removed from the housing.
d. Loosenandremove both the check nut (11) and the nut (10) from the stud (12)
that holds the filter cartridge subassembly.
e. Slide the filter cartridge from the stud. The filter discs (7) and washers
(8) need not be separated from the element outlet tube (6) for normal cleaning.
f. If it is necessary to disassemble the filter cartridge, remove the retainer
cup (9) from the outlet tube (5) and slide the discs (7) and washers (8) from the
outlet tube. Do not use a screw driver or sharp tool that may damage the discs.
g. The filter by-pass assembly may be removed byusing theproper size screw
driver and turning out the relief valve seat (4). Then remove the check ball (3)
and spring (2).
FUEL SYSTEM
3K7
A775 A776
15
1 BODY 1. BODY 12. STUD

2. WIRE, SAFETY 2. SPRING, RELIEF 7. DISCS, FILTER 13. BOWL, FILTER
3. BAIL WIRE 3. BALL, RELIEF 8. WASHERS 14. DRAIN, FILTER
4. BOWL 4. SEAT, RELIEF 9. CUP 15. WASHER
5. GASKET 5. SEAL 10. NUT 16. WIRE, SAFETY
6. SCREW 6. TUBE OUTER 11. NUT, CHECK 17. NUT, BOWL
Figure 9-21. Fuel Filter Figure 9-22. Fuel Filter

PA-23-235; PA-23-250;and PA-23-250 PA-23-250 (Six place),
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000to Serial Nos. 27-2505and up
27-2504 incl.
9-60. CLEANING. INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF FUEL FILTER. (PA-23-250 (six

place), Serial Nos. 27-2505and up.) (Refer to Figure 9-22.)
a. Wash the element in oil solvent such as mineral spirits. (It is not necessary
to remove discs from element outlet tube for normal cleaning. ) Plug open ends
of element outlet tube while washing to keep out dirt.
b. Inspect filter discs for damage and broken screens.
c. Check condition of bowl gaskets (5 and 15).
d. Check condition of bowl drain and drain "O" ring.
e. Check for corrosion of filter parts.
f. Check movement of by-pass valve.
g. Check condition of filter rubber shock mounts.
h. Normal repairs necessary for the filter are replacement of bowl gaskets
and damaged filter discs.
9-61. ASSEMBLY OF FUEL FILTER. (PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505and
up.) (Refer to Figure 9-22.)
a. If removed, install by-pass valve spring (2), relief ball (3) and seat (4).
b. Place the filter cartridge (assembled) on the housing stud (12). Ascertain
that the end of the outlet tube (6) has positioned itself in the filter body (1).
c. Secure the filter cartridge with nut (10) and check nut.
d. Place bowl gasket (5) on housing and install bowl (13), gasket (15) and cap
FUEL SYSTEM
3K8
nut (16). Tighten the cap nut and safety.

e. Install the filter. If the filter was not removed, proceed to step g of para-
graph 9-62.
9-62. INSTALLATION OF FUEL FILTER ASSEMBLY.

a. Assemble the fuel selector valve to the strainer, if previously removed.
b. Position the assembled unit inside the lower part of the nacelle.
c. Install machine screws and locking nuts securing the selector valve in place.
d. Connect the fuel lines to the filter and selector valve.
e. Connect the control cable or control rod to the selector valve. Check adjust-
ment of the fuel selector valve cable as described in paragraphs 9-28 and 9-36.
f. Fill the fuel cell or cells.
g. Open the fuel selector valve allowing fuel to flow to the filter.
h. Check the fuel line fittings and filter for evidence of fuel leakage.
NOTE
Ensure fuel filter drain does not open when door is closed.
i. Install the bottom aft section of the nacelle.
9-63. ELECTRIC FUEL PUMPS.
9-64. PLUNGER FUEL PUMPS (BENDIX). (PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504incl.)
9-65. REMOVAL OF FUEL PUMP.

a. Remove the inboard access panel on the nacelle that the fuel pump is to be
removed from.
b. Determine that the fuel selector valve is in the OFF position.
c. Disconnect the electrical lead.
d. Disconnect the fuel lines from the pump fittings.
e. Remove the pumps by removing the nuts and bolts securing them to the
mounting bracket.
9-66. DISASSEMBLY OF FUEL PUMP. (Refer to Figure 9-23.) The following

procedure is given for complete disassembly of the fuel pump. For cleaningand servicing
purposes only, refer to step I of a or b, then proceed to paragraph 9-67 for Cleaning,
Inspection and Repair of Component Parts.
a. Early type pump:
1. Cut the safety wire and remove the bottom cover, gasket and filter
screen from the pump.
FUEL SYSTEM
3K9
NOTE
If the screen does not come out, use caution removing

it from the pump housing so as not to damage it.
2. Remove the three screws securing the plunger spring cup inside the
pump. Remove the cup and gasket.
3. Pull the plunger springandplungerassemblyfromthepump with fingers.
CAUTION
Do not remove the buffer spring and valve from the

plunger assembly.
Do not tamper with seal at center of mounting bracket

at side of pump as it retains the dry gas, which sur-
rounds the electric system, in the upper portion of the
pump.
b. Late type pump:

1. Cut the safety wire and remove the bottom cover, gasket, magnet and
filter screen from the pump.
NOTE
If the screen does not come out use caution removing

it from the pump housing so as not to damage it.
2. Remove the retainer spring from the plunger tube using thin nose pliers
to spread and remove the ends of the retainer from the tube.
3. Remove the washer, "0" ring seal, cup valve, plunger assembly from
the pump.
CAUTION
Do not remove the buffer spring and valve from the

plunger assembly.
Do not tamper with seal at center of mounting bracket

at side of pump as it retains the dry gas, which sur-
rounds the electric system, in the upper portion of the
pump.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3K10
9-67. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF FUEL PUMP.

a. Clean all parts with a suitable dry type solvent. If the plunger assembly
does not come clean or there are any rough spots, polish gently with crocus cloth.
b. Inspect the pump for the following:
1. Check the filter screen for damage or distortion.
2. Gently touch the cup valve and check for freedom of movement. Do not
disassemble.
3. Shake the plunger assembly and listen for clicks to indicate valve action.
4. On the late model pumps, check the condition of the "0" ring.
5. Check the condition of the cover gasket and plunger spring cup gasket.
c. Repair of the pump is limited to replacement of parts found defective during
inspection.
9-68. RESISTANCE CHECK (PLUNGER TYPE PUMP). To check the resistance

of the pump, connect an ohmmeter to the lead wire of the pump and the pump body.
A reading of 4.87 to 6.4 ohms for a 14-voltpump should be obtained.
9-69. ASSEMBLY OF FUEL PUMP. (Refer to Figure 9-23.)

a. Early type pump:
1. Insert the plunger assembly (10) in the tube with the buffer spring end
first. Check fit by slowly raising and lowering the plunger in the tube. It should
move fully without any tendency to stick. If a click cannot be heard, the inter-
rupter assembly is not functioning properly in which case the pump should be re -
placed.
2. Install the component parts in the followingorder: Cup valve, "0" ring
seal, and washer. Install the retainer spring securing the components inside the
pump housing.
3. Place the cover gasket and magnet in the bottom cover with the filter
screw.
4. Carefully guide the screen around the plunger spring cup. The screen
must fit snugly at both ends. Do not pinch or distort the screw. Draw the bottom
cover tight with a wrench and safety.
b. Late type pump:
1. Insert the plunger spring assembly (10) in the tubewith the buffer spring
end first. Check fit by slowly raising and lowering the plunger in the tube. It
should move fully without any tendency to stick. If a click cannot be heard, the
interrupter assembly is not functioning properly in which case the pump should
be replaced.
2. Install the plunger spring cup gasket (use a new one) and the plunger
spring cup. Draw the screws reasonably tight, but do not over-tighten them. Be
FUEL SYSTEM
3K11
3K1I Reissued: 2/18/81
7 6 8 3 5 4 2 1
1. COVER
2. COVER, GASKET
3. SCREW
4. SCREEN
5. CUP VALVE
6. GASKET
7. PLUNGER VALVE
8. PLUNGER CUP
9. PLUNGER, SPRING
10. PLUNGER
11. PUMP, BODY
Early
9 8 7 6 5 3 2 1
1. COVER
2. COVER, GASKET
3. MAGNET
4. FILTER
5. RETAINER
6. WASHER
7. "O" RING
8. CUP VALVE
9. SPRING
10. PLUNGER
11. PLUNGER TUBE
12. PUMP BODY
Late
Figure 9-23. Bendix Electric Fuel Pumps (Early and Late)
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3K12
sure the cup is not cocked to prevent the plunger from binding in the tube.
3. Place the filter screen around the bottom cover magnet.
4. Carefully guide the screen around the plunger spring cup. The screen
must fit snugly at both ends. Do not pinch or distort the screen. Draw the bottom
cover tight with a wrench and safety with MS20995-C32 wire.
9-70. INSTALLATION OF FUEL PUMP.

a. Position the fuel pumps inside the engine nacelle and secure to its mounting
bracket with attaching bolts and nuts.
b. Connect the fuel lines to the pump and tighten.
c. Connect the electrical lead to the fuel pumps.
d. Turn fuel selector valve in the ON position.
e. Operate fuel pump and inspect for leaks.
f. Secure access panel to engine nacelle.
9-71. ADJUSTMENT OF ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP (BENCH TEST).

a. Ascertain that the pump is sufficiently lubricated to prevent damage if run
dry for a period greater than five minutes.
-b. Connect the electrical lead of one pump to a 14-volt dc power source.
c. Using a suitable container with the proper octane fuel, connect a fuel line
from a container to the inlet side of the pump.
d. Connect another line from the outlet side of the pump to a pressure gauge
and by-pass valve and back to the container.
e. Run the pump with the by-pass valve open until a steady flow of fuel is ob-
tained. Then close the by-pass valve and check the pressure gauge for the proper
reading of 4 to 4. 75 psi maximum, no flow.
f. Repeat steps b through e for the second fuel pump.
g. If the proper pressure is not obtained, the plunger spring may be replaced
or it may be necessary to replace the complete pump assembly.
9-72. ADJUSTMENT OF ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP (IN AIRPLANE).

a. With the access panel removed and the fuel selector in the OFF position,
remove the fuel line from the outlet end of the pump.
b. Connect a test line with a by-pass valve and pressure gauge to the outlet
end of the pump to be checked.
c. Place a container below the pump to catch any fuel from the test line during
the adjustment of the pump.
d. Disconnect the electrical lead to the pump that is not being checked.
e. Turn the fuel selector on, open the by-pass valve on the test line and start
FUEL SYSTEM
3K13 3K13 Reissued: 2/18/81

the pump.
f. When a steady flow of fuel is obtained, close the by-pass valve and check the reading on the
pressure gauge. It should read 4 to 4.75 psi maximum, no flow. Do not keep by-pass valve closed for more
than one minute during pump operation and adjustment.
g. Repeat steps b through f for the other pump.
h. If the proper pressure is not obtained, the plunger spring may be replaced or it may be necessary
to replace the complete pump assembly.
i. Reconnect the orignal fuel line to the pump. Open fuel selector and run the pump to check for
any fuel leaks.
j. Shut off the pump, close the fuel selector and replace and secure the access panel.
9-73. ROTARY FUEL PUMPS (WELDON). (PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2322 and up.
9-74. REMOVAL OF FUEL PUMPS.

a. Remove the top center section or access panel of the nacelle.
b. Determine that the fuel selector valve is in the OFF position.
c. Disconnect the fuel lines from the pump fittings.
d. Disconnect the electrical leads.
e. Remove the pump assembly by cutting the safety wire and removing the four attaching bolts
inside the wheel well.
9-75. DISASSEMBLY OF FUEL PUMP. (Refer to Figure 9-24.)

Disassembly and assembly of the Weldon fuel pump should only be attempted when the below listed
tools are available to the mechanic. Should these tools not be available, the pump should be returned to:
The Weldon Tool Co.

3000 Woodhill Road
Cleveland, Ohio 44104
Name P/N or Description Source
Seal Installation Tool TP-617 Weldon Tool Co.

Seal Installation Tool TP-723 Obtain Locally
Steel Rod 3/16" Dia. x 3" length Obtain Locally
Fixture 15/16" I.D. x 5/8" Deep Obtain Locally
Tube 13/16" I.D., I 7/64" O.D. (Max.) Obtain Locally
x I" Length (Min.)
Alignment Checking Tool TP-793 Weldon Tool Co.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3K14
C168
REMOVE
AS AN
ASSEMBLY
11
16
PUMP EXPLODED VIEW 3
A778
1. MOTOR
2. ROTOR
3. BODY
4. SEAL, SHAFT
5. INSERT
6. BLADE
7. RING
8 "O" RING
9. COVER, INSERT
10. SCREW
11. LOCKNUT
12. SCREW, RELIEF
VALVE ADJUSTING
13. SPRING
14. PLUNGER A
15. SCREW
16. PLUG PUMP END - (SECTIONAL)
Figure 9-24. Weldon Rotary Fuel Pump
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3K15
a. Remove the four screws which secure the pump assembly to the motor assembly.
b. Separate the motor assembly from the pump assembly.
NOTE
The drive motor is non-repairable. If defective, replace with

new motor. Pump performance may be altered as a result of
installing a new motor assembly. Therefore, retest is necessary
and pressure relief valve adjustment may be required.
c. Remove locknut, adjusting screw, spring and plunger from end of pump assembly.
d. Insert a 3/16 inch diameter rod through the 1/2 inch tapped hole, from which the relief valve
adjusting screw was removed and through the center hole in the insert cover until the rotor is contacted.
Apply pressure to the rod with an arbor press to unseat and remove the pumping element from the pump
housing. (Refer to Figure 9-24.)
NOTE
To facilitate reassembly, index the relative position of the insert

cover to the insert. Also, note proper orientation of the two inlet
holes in the insert cover to assist in proper reassembly.
e. Remove the screws which secure the insert cover to the insert and remove the cover.
f. Remove the rotor, blade retaining ring and blades from the insert.
g. To remove the shaft seal from the insert, clamp a simple fixture having a 15/16 inch diameter hole
5/8 inch deep, in a vise (A 15/16 inch socket wrench head may be used as a temporary fixture). Place the
insert into the fixture with the shaft seal end up (Refer to Figure 9-24). Using a small screwdriver inserted
in the shaft hole of the seal, pry the seal from the seal well. Use extreme caution to avoid damage to the
seal well area.
h. Wash pump parts in clean solvent and dry with filtered compressed air.
9-76. INSPECTION AND REPAIR.

a. Inspect those areas from which parts have been removed. Smooth nicks, scratches and burrs in
these areas to avoid damage to new seals.
b. Replace "O" rings and seals which have been removed.
NOTE
For detailed inspection procedures and a table of wear limits,

refer to the Service Information Manual, Weldon Pump Model
No. 33959-3 available from The Weldon Tool Co., 3000 Woodhill
Road, Cleveland, Ohio 44104.
FUEL SYSTEM
3K16
C172
SEAL PRESS-INTOOL
NO. TP-723 SEAL INSTALLATION TOOL
NO. TP-617
ROTOR SHAFT
SHAFT SEAL
INSER
T
APPLYLOCKTITETO
THISEDGEBEFORE
PRESSING INTO
HOUSING
SUPPORT TUBE
Figure 9-25. Shaft Seal Installation
9-77. ASSEMBLY OF FUEL PUMP (Refer to Figure 9-24.)

a. Install the blade retaining ring on the insert and install the blades.
b. Tilt the blades at an outward angle to allow the rotor to be installed and install the rotor.
c. Place a few drops of light oil on the end of the rotor and in the insert. Position the insert cover and
secure with 3/8 inch screws. Torque to 10 inch lbs.
CAUTION
Earlier production fuel pumps usea a 1/4 inch long screw

which requires 6 inch pounds of torque. Identify hardware before
applying torque.
d. Place the insert in a 15/16 inch I.D. Support Tube (Refer to Figure 9-25).
e. Apply a coating of petroleum jelly to the shaft of the rotor, the shaft seal and Installation Tool
No. TP-617.
f. Place Seal Installation Tool TP-617 over the rotor shaft.
g. Slip shaft seal assembly onto Tool TP-617 and bottom seal by hand.
h. With Tool TP-617 still in position, place Seal Installation Tool TP-723 over Tool TP-617.
i. Using an arbor press, push the shaft seal into seal well of insert until it is seated and square.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3K17
j. Remove the Seal Installation Tools from the insert. Install a new "0" ring on the insert cover and
lubricate the "0" ring with petroleum jelly.
k. Apply Loctite 290 to the 1 1/8 inch "press fit" diameter of the insert assembly.
NOTE
Use a small amount of Loctite exercising care to prevent Loctite

from getting into blade slot area of insert.
1. Start the insert assembly into the pump housing by hand to ensure proper alignment.
m. Using an arbor press against a suitable tube (refer to Tool list under "Disassembly" section), press
the insert into housing until it is firmly seated.
NOTE
Improper alignment of the insert will cause binding between

the rotor tang and motor shaft slot causing excessive motor
current and early failure. Use Tool TP-793 (or similar tool) to check
alignment. Should the pump shaft bind when the stem of the tool
is turned and while the face of the tool is held tight against the
pump flange, remove the insert asembly, clean the mating surfaces,
re-install and recheck.
Fifteen minutes after installing insert, repress the insert to ensure

that it has not moved upward due to the action of the "0" ring.
Allow Loctite to cure for four hours before testing pump.
n. Install locknut on adjusting screw. Place spring and plunger in adjusting screw and install in
tapped hole of pump body. Tighten locknut.
CAUTION
The spring loaded poppet contacts the insert cover and provides
pressure relief. Over-tightening of adjusting screw will prevent
proper pressure relief by restricting return flow or by deforming
cover.
o. Align the pump end assembly with the motor assembly. Ensure proper coupling between motor
armature slot and pump rotor shaft. Secure pump and motor assemblies together using screws with Loctite
222.
p. Adjust pump pressure as described in "Adjustment of Electric Fuel Pump (Bench Test)."
FUEL SYSTEM
3K18
9-78. INSTALLATION OF FUEL PUMP.

a. Position the fuel pump in the engine nacelle and secure with four attaching bolts up through the
bottom of the wheel well. Safety the bolts.
b. Connect the fuel lines to the pump and tighten.
c. Connect the electrical leads.
d. Turn the selector valve to the ON position.
e. Operate the fuel pump and inspect for leaks.
f. Secure the center section or access panel of the engine nacelle.
9-79. ADJUSTMENT OF ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP (BENCH TEST). (Refer to Figure 9-26.)
a. Ascertain that the pump is sufficiently lubricated to prevent damage if run dry for a period greater
than five minutes.
b. Connect the electrical leads to a 14-28-volt DC power source, depending on electrical system
installation.
c. Using a suitable container with the proper octane fuel, connect a fuel line from a container to the
inlet side of the pump.
d. Connect another line from the outlet side of the pump to a pressure gauge and bypass valve and
back to the container.
e. Run the pump with the bypass valve open until a steady flow of fuel is obtained. Then close the
bypass valve and check the pressure gauge for the proper reading of 26 +3 -0 psi, no flow. Do not keep the
bypass valve closed for more than one minute during pump operation and adjustment.
C172
ORANGE LEAD
D.C. POWERSUPPLY (POSITIVE)
AMMETER
(0-10 AMPS)
BLACK LEAD
(NEGATIVE)
PRESSURE
GAUGE
(60 PSI)
SHUTOFF
IN VALVE
(SEE NOTE)
NOTE
ADJUST SHUTOFF VALVE FOR
(IN MARKED [GALLONS] CONTAINERS) RATED PRESSURE. CLOSE VALVE
TO CHECK FULL RELIEF PRESSURE.
Figure 9-26. BenchTest Set-Up (Typicall)
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3K19
f. Loosen the locknut and turn the adjusting screw until there is a reading of 26 +3 -0 psi, no flow, on
the gauge. Repeat steps e and f until the proper pressure is obtained.
g. Disconnect the power source from the pump and lock the adjustment screw with the locknut.
Remove the fuel lines from the pump.
9-80. ADJUSTMENT OF ELECTRIC FUEL PUMP (IN AIRPLANE).

a. With the access panel removed and the fuel selector in the OFF position, remove the fuel line
from the outlet end of the pump.
b. Connect a test line with a bypass valve and pressure gauge to the outlet end of the pump.
c. Place a container below the pump to catch any fuel from the test line during the adjustment
of the pump.
d. Turn the fuel selector on; open the bypass valve on the test line and start the pump.
e. When a steady flow of fuel is obtained, closethe bypass valveand check the readingon the pressure
gauge. It should read 26 +3 -0 psi, no flow. Do not keep bypass valve closedfor more than one minute during
pump operation and adjustment.
f. Loosen locknut on adjusting screw and turn screwto obtain the proper pressure of 26+3 -0 psi, no
flow. Repeat steps g and h until adjustment is complete. Lock adjusting screw with locknut.
g. Turn off fuel pump and close fuel selector. Remove the test line from the pump.
h. Reconnect the original fuelline to the pump. Open fuel selector and run the pump to check for any
fuel leaks.
i. Shut off the pump; close the fuel selector and replace and secure the access panel.
9-81. ENGINE PRIMER PUMP.
9-82. REMOVAL OF ENGINE PRIMER. (Refer to Figure 9-27.)

a. Disconnect the fuel lines from the primer behind the instrument panel.
b. Loosen the locknut (12) from behind the panel.
c. Unscrew the knurled face nut (10) and withdraw the pump handle (9) and piston (7) from the
cylinder (5).
d. Remove the remaining portion of the primer.
9-83. DISASSEMBLY, CLEANING AND ASSEMBLY OF ENGINE PRIMER. (Refer to Figure

9-27.)
a. The primer may be further disassembled after removal by removing the screws (3), springs (2),
and check balls (1) from the end of the cylinder housing.
b. Clean the primer parts with acetone or a dry type solvent.
c. Install new "0" rings to the piston (7) and lubricate with light motor oil.
d. Install the balls (1), springs (2) and screws (3) to the cylinder housing.
FUEL SYSTEM
3K20
e. Insert the pump handle (9) and

3 4 5 6 7 8
piston (7) into the cylinder (5), and
finger tighten the knurled face nut (10).
f. Immerse the pump in gasoline
and operate several times to insure
proper operation.
9-84. INSTALLATION OF ENGINE 1 2 13 12 11 10 9

PRIMER PUMP. (Refer to Figure 9-27.)
1. CHECK BALL 8. STOP PIN
a. Remove the pump handle (9) and 2. BALL SPRING 9. PUMP HANDLE
piston (7) by unscrewing the knurled 3. RETAINER SCREW
4. "0" RING
10. FACE NUT
11. WASHER
face nut (10), if previously installed. 5. CYLINDER 12. LOCK NUT
6. SEALING SPRING 13. SEALING PIN
b. Insert the cylinder assembly 7. PISTON
through the back side of the panel.
c. Insert the piston into the cylinder Figure 9-27. Engine Primer
(5) and tighten the knurled face nut.
d. Position the primer and tighten the locknut (12) on the cylinder behind the
panel.
e. Connect the fuel lines to the primer.
f. Disconnect the primer line inside the engine compartment. Operate the
pump to ascertain proper operation.
9-85. PRIME JETS.

a. To remove the prime jets, disconnect the supply line from each jet. With
a deep socket and light pressure, remove the jet from the cylinder.
b. To clean the jet, soak in a carbon remover solution long enough to loosen
any dirt and blow clean with air pressure in the direction opposite that of fuel
flow. Do not use sharp objects or wire brush to clean the jet tube.
c. Install the jet finger tight to assure that the threads are not crossed and
then torque 60 inch pounds. Align and install the fuel supply lines, tighten to a
snug fit.
NOTE
Should further fuel stoppage of the primer system exist,

check the supply lines for stoppage, bent or collapsed
walls.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
3K21
9-86. CLEANING FUEL SYSTEM.

a. To flush the fuel cells and selector valve, disconnect the fuel line at the
carburetor or injector.
b. Select a fuel cell, turn on the electric fuel pump and flush fuel through the
system until it is determined there is no dirt and foreign matter in the fuel valve
or cell. During this operation, agitation of the fuel within the cell will help pick
up and remove any dirt.
c. Repeat this procedure for each cell.
d. When all cells are flushed, clean all filters.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3K22
TABLE IX-I. FUEL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
Fuel gauge fails to indi- Sender arm improperly Bend sender arm to
cate proper tank level. positioned. proper position.
Incorrect resistance in Replace sender.

sender.
Gauge inoperative. Replace gauge.
Incorrect resistance in Replace gauge.

gauge.
Incomplete ground. Check ground connec-

tions at fuel senders
and security of sender
mounting plate attach-
ing bolts.
Broken wire. Check and repair.
Fuel cell selector Repair or replace.

connections broken.
No fuel pressure in- No fuel in cells. Fill fuel cells.

dication.
Broken or disconnected Check for broken or
lines. disconnected lines.
Replace or tighten
where necessary.
Fuel selector valve(s) Check selector valve(s)

not positioning for proper travel and
properly. positioning.
Filters dirty. Clean filters.
Defective fuel pressure Replace gauge.

gauge.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3K23
TABLE IX-I. FUEL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING(cont. )
No fuel pressure indi- Defective fuel pump. Check pump(s) for fuel
cation (cont. ). flow. Check diaphragm
and relief valves in en-
gine pump. Check
plunger in "Bendix"
electric fuel pumps.
Check for obstruction
in electric fuel pump(s).
Check by-pass valve.
Check for air leak in
inlet lines.
Defective gauge. Replace gauge.
Pressure low or surges, Blockage in fuel cell Check and clean fuel
vent. cell vent caps.
Obstruction in inlet Trace lines and locate

side of pump. obstruction.
Faulty engine driven Replace pump.

pump.
Fuel selector valve(s) Check selector valves

defective or improper for proper operation
positioning. and adjustment.
Loose fuel line connec- Check and tighten fuel

tion. line fittings where
necessary.
Fuel valve leaking. Defective "O" ring. Replace "O" rings or

valve.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
3K24
FUEL SYSTEM
3L1
TABLE IX-II. FUEL SYSTEM PRESSURES
ITEM 0-540-A 0-540-B 10-540-CIB5 10-540-J4A5 TIO-540-CIA

SERIES SERIES
Carburetor Inlet Desired 3 psi Desired 3 psi

Pressure Maximum 8 psi Maximum 8 psi
Minimum .5 psi Minimum .5 psi
Engine Driven Pump Maximum 45 psi 45 psi

Inlet Pressure 30 psi to to
Minimum -4 psi -4 psi
-2 psi
Injector Inlet 14 psi 18 psi 18 psi

Pressure to to to
45 psi 45 psi 45 psi
Boost Pump
+3- 26 psi 26 psi
Outlet Pressure 26+ psi
with zero fuel flow
8.0psi
Maximum Nozzle
Pressure with 8.0 psi 8.0 psi 11.0 psi
fuel flow gauge
red line.
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2, 18/81
3L2
A762 RIGHT FUEL SELECTOR VALVE

\ Serial Nos. 27-2505 thru 27-7954076
PA-23-235
PA-23-250
Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504
Figure 9-29. Fuel Selector Valve Control Cables, PA-23-235, PA-23-250 and
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 thru 27-7954076
FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3L3
RIGHT SWITCH
ACTUATING CABLE
FUEL SELECTOR
CABLES
SELECTOR
VALVE
LEFT SWITCH
BEARINGS
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
CABLE END
BEARINGS
SWITCH
ACTUATOR
LEFT FUEL
SELECTOR
VALVE
Figure 9-30. Fuel Selector Control Cables,

FUEL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
3L4
3L5 THRU 3L24
AZTEC
MANUAL
SERVICE
CARD
4 OF5
PA-23-235
APACHE
PA-23-250
AZTEC
PA-23-250
(SIXPLACE)
AZTEC
CORPORATION
PIPERAIRCRAFT
(PART 753564)
NUMBER
4A1
general specificationsof Aeroficheadopted by the General Aircraft Manufacturer's Association.Information
compiled in this Aeroficheservicemanual is kept current by revisionsdistributed periodically.Theserevisions
supersede all previous revisions, are complete Aerofichecard replacements, and supersedeAerofichecards of
same number.

frame, opposite revised or added material. Revision lines indicate only current revisions with changes and
additions to existing text and illustrations. Changes in capitalization, spelling,punctuation, indexing,physical
Revisions Date AeroficheCard Effectivity
ORG600401 April 1, 1960 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
CR810218 February 18, 1981 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
PR830426 April 26, 1983 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
IR860429 April 29, 1986(Interim) I
IR860921 September 21, 1986(Interim)* I
* INTERIM REVISION
this servicemanual. Please discard your
CARDS 2, 3, 4, or 5.
4A2
OFCONTENTS
TABLE
AEROFICHE
CARD
NO.1 GRID
NO.
I INTRODUCTION
................... .. 1A21
II HANDLING
ANDSERVICING
................. 1B2
III .........................
INSPECTION 1E23
IV STRUCTURES ........................ 1F15
V CONTROLS
SURFACE ..................... 1119
NO.2
CARD
AEROFICHE
VI SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC ........... .. .... 2A8
VII LANDING ANDBRAKE
GEAR .............
SYSTEM 2G1
CARD
AEROFICHENO.3
VIII POWER
PLANT
(NORMALLYASPIRATED).......... 3A8
VIIIA PLANT
VIIIB PLANT
POWER .......
(LYCOMING-TURBOCHARGED) 3H4
IX FUEL ..................
SYSTEM ...... 3110
NO.4
CARD
AEROFICHE
X INSTRUMENTS
................. . 4A8
Xl SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL ..................... 4C1
CARD
AEROFICHENO.5
XII ELECTRONICS
......................... 5A9
XIII HEATING
ANDVENTILATING
................. B55
XIV ANDUTILITIES
ACCESSORIES ............... 5H13
4A3
LISTOFILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
10-1. Instrument Panel, PA-23-250and PA-23-235 . ........... 4A11
10-2. Instrument Panel, PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos.
27-2000 to 27-2504 incl . ...................... 4A12
10-3. Instrument Panel, PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 to 27-3153 incl . ...................... 4A13
27-3154 to 27-3836 and 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl......... 4A14
27-3837, 27-3944 to 27-4425 and 27-4427 to 27-4573 incl. ... 4A15
274426 and 27-4574 to 27-7554172 incl. ............ 4A16
10-7. Dual Instrument Panel (Optional Equipment), PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-7305222, 27-7405235 to 27-7554172 incl. .... 4A17
10-8. Instrument Panel, PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos.
27-7554001to 27-7554168incl ..................... 4A18
10-9. Instrument Panel (Typical) PA-23-250(six place),
SerialNos. 27-7654001 and up .................... 4A19
10-10. Vacuum System, PA-23-250,Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-443 incl ..... 4B3
10-11. Vacuum System, PA-23-250,PA-23-235and PA-23-250(six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. ................. 4B5
10-12. VacuumSystem, PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 and up ........................................... 4B7
10-13. VacuumSystem, PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos.
27-3837, 27-3944 and up ....................... 4B8
10-14. Vacuum System, Dual (Optional Equipment), PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 7305222 and 7405235 and up ....... 4B9
11-1. Generator WiringSystem Schematic ................... 4C12
11-2. SectionalView of Generator ........................ 4C16
11-3. WiringCircuit ................................ 4C18
11-4. Current/Voltage Regulator ......................... 4C24
11-5. Use of Riffler File to Clean Contact Points ............... 4D4
11-6. Voltage Regulator Air Gap ......................... 4D4
11-7. CheckingVoltage Setting-FixedResistanceMethod .......... 4D5
11-8. CheckingVoltage Setting-VariableResistanceMethod ......... 4D5
11-9. Adjusting Voltage Regulator Setting ................... 4D6
11-10. Cutout Relay Air Gap Check and Adjustments ............. 4D8
Reissued: 2/ 18/81
4 A4
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS(cont.)
Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
11-11. Cutout Relay Point Opening Check and Adjustment ............ 4D8
11-12. Checking Cutout Relay Closing Voltage ................... 4D9
11-13. Adjustment of Cutout Relay Closing Voltage ................ 4D9
11-14. Checking Current Regulator, Load Method .................. 4D10
11-15. Checking Current Regulator, Jumper Lead Method ............. 4D10
11-16. Checking and Adjusting Relay Air Gap .................... 4D13
11-17. Checking and Adjusting Relay Point Opening ................ 4D13
11-18. Checking Relay Closing Voltage ........................ 4D14
11-19. Adjusting Relay Closing Voltage ........................ 4D14
11-20. Alternator System Wiring Schematic (Delco-Remy) ............. 4D17
11-21. Cross-Sectional View of Alternator ...................... 4D18
11-22. Checking Rotor ................................. 4D19
11-23. Slip Ring End Frame ..................... ....... . 4D20
11-24. Checking Stator .......................... ....... 4D20
11-25. Checking Diodes ................................. 4D21
11-26. Brush Holder Assembly ............................. 4D23
11-27. Exploded View of Heat Sink Assembly .................... 4D24
11-28. Alternator Output Check ........................... 4E1
11-29. Volt - Ohmmeter Test ...... ...................... .. 4E4
11-30. Jumper Connection . ................. ............. 4E4
11-31. Regulator Checks .................. . ... ....... 4E5
11-32. Relay Tests .................................... 4E7
11-33. Exploded View of Alternator ......................... 4E8
11-34. Alternator Blast Tube Routing ......................... 4E9
11-35. Alternator System Wiring Schematic (Prestolite) .............. 4E10
11-36. Removal of Rectifier ............................. . 4E11
11-37. Removal of Slip Ring End Bearing ....................... 4E11
11-38. Removal of Drive End Head ......... ... ............... 4E12
11-39. Removal of End Head Bearing ......................... 4E12
11-40. Testing Rotor for Grounds ........................... 4E13
11-41. Testing Rotor for Shorts ............................ 4E13
11-42. Installation of Bearing ............................ . 4E14
11-43. Installation of Rectifier ............................. 4E14
11-44. Terminal Assembly ............................. .. 4E15
11-45. Slip Ring End Bearing Assembly ........................ 4E15
11-46. Testing Alternator ................................ 4E16
11-47. Brush Installation ................................ 4E17
11-48. Internal Wiring Diagram ............................. 4E17
11-49. Alternator Paralleling System Wiring Schematic ............... 4E21
4A5 Reissued:2 18 81
4 A5
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont.)

Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
11-50. Regulator Diagram (Prestolite) ....... .............. 4F2

. . .
11-51. Regulator Diagram (Lamar) ........ .............. . 4F2
. . .
11-52. Testing Regulator (Prestolite) ....... .............. 4F5
. . .
11-53. Testing Regulator (Lamar) .... .............. 4F6
. . .
11-54. Adjusting Regulator (Lamar) ........ .............. 4F7
. . .
11-55. Application of Over-Voltage Control . .. .............. 4F9
. . .
11-56. Testing Over-Voltage Control ....... .............. 4F9
11-57. No-Load Test Hookup ........... .............. 4F15
. . .
11-58. Lock-Torque Test Hookup ......... .............. 4F16
11-59. Resistance Test Hookup .......... .............. 4F16
11-60. Exploded View of Gear Reduction Starting Motor ............. 4F20
11-61. Turning Starting Motor Commutator . . . . . . .............. 4F23
11-62. Testing Motor Armature for Shorts .... . . . ................ 4F23
11-63. Testing Motor Fields for Grounds ..... .............. 4F24
11-64. No-Load Test Hookup ........... ................ 4G1
11-65. Stall-Torque Hookup ............ ................ 4G1
11-66. Landing Light Installation, PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 235 ........... 4G6
11-67. Landing Light Installation, PA-23-250 (six place) ............... 4G6
NOTE
4 A6 Reissued: 2/18/81
LIST
OFTABLES
Table Aerofiche
Grid No.
X-l. Instrument Markings - PA-23-250; PA-23-235: and PA-23-250

(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. with
Carburetor Induction System .................... 4B12
X-II. Instrument Markings - PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2322 and up with
Fuel Injected Induction System or AiResearch Turbocharger . 4B13
X-III. Instrument Troubleshooting ....................... 4B14
XI-I. Index - Electrical System Schematics .................. 4C5
XI-ll. Summary of Alternator Checks ..................... 4E3
XI-III. Electrical System Troubleshooting ................... 4G12
XI-IV. Lamp Replacement Guide ........................ 4G23
XI-V. Circuit Load Chart ............................. 4H1
XI-VI. Electrical Wire Coding ........................... 4H8
XI-VII. Electrical Symbols ............................. 4H9
4 A7 Reissued: 2 18 81
SECTION
X
INSTRUMENTS
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
10-1. Introduction .................................... 4A10

10-2. Description ..................................... 4A10
10-3. Instruments ..................................... 4A20
10-4. Vacuum-GyroInstruments ...................... 4A20
10-5. Pitot-Static Instruments ........................ 4A20
10-6. Electrical Instrument ......................... 4A21
10-7. MiscellaneousInstruments ...................... 4A22
10-8. Troubleshooting .................................. 4A22
10-9. Removal of Instruments (PA-23-250;PA-23-235;
PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos. 27-2000 to
27-2504 incl.; and PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3836 incl.;
27-8388 to 27-3943 incl.) .................... 4A22
10-10. Installation of Instruments (PA-23-250;PA-23-235;
PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos. 27-2000 to
27-2504 incl; and PA-23-250 (six place)
SerialNos. 27-2504 to 27-3836 incl;
27-3838 to 27-3943 incl.) .................... 4A23
10-11. Removal of Instruments (PA-23-250(six place), Serial
Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 and up) ................. 4A23
10-12. Installation of Instruments (PA-23-250
27-3944 and up) ................... 4A24
10-13. Gyro ServiceProcedure ................... .. 4A24
10-14. Gyro Installation Inspection ..................... 4A24
10-15. Gyro Handlingand Shipping .. . . .............. 4A24
10-16. Gyro Vacuum System (Three Relief ValveSystem) (PA-23-250,
Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-443 incl.) ................. 4B1
10-17. Description of Operation . .................. 4B1
10-18. Adjustment of Vacuum Regulator and Relief Valves ....... 4B2
10-19. Gyro Vacuum System (Two Relief Valve System) (PA-23-250,
Serial Nos. 27-444 and up; PA-23-235;PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up ......................... 4B4
10-20. Descriptionof Operation ....................... 4B4
10-21. Adjustment of Vacuum Regulator and Relief Valves ....... 4B6
4 A8 Reissued: 2 1881
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
10-22. Vacuum Test Selector Valve (PA-23-250, PA-23-235 and
27-2504incl............................................. 4B10
10-23. Removal of Vacuum Test Selector Valve................ 4B10
10-24. Installation of Vacuum Test Selector Valve ............. 4B10
10-25. Manifold Pressure Gauge Filters (Turbocharger Installation Only) .. 4B10
10-26. Exhaust Gas Temperature Gauge ...................... ......... 4B11
10-27. Removal of EGT Probe and Gauge ............................. 4BII
10-28. Cleaning and Inspection ....................................... 4B11
10-29. Installation of EGT Probe and Gauge .......................... . 4B1
1
4 A9 Reissued: 2 18 /8I
SECTION X
INSTRUMENTS
10-1. INTRODUCTION. This section contains procedures for removal and in-
stallation of the various instruments installed in the PA-23 series airplanes. A
description of each instrument system along with minor adjustments, tests and
maintenance are found in this section. Instrument repairs other than those de-
scribed in this section should be done by the manufacturer or an authorized re-
pair station.
10-2. DESCRIPTION. The instrumentation of the various models provides for all
conditions of flight. The instruments are designed to give a quick and actual in-
dication of attitude, performance and condition of the airplane. They are divided
into fourgroups: Vacuum Gyro, Pitot-Static, Electricaland Miscellaneous. Some
of the instruments are components of indicating systems that indicate conditions
at remote parts of the airplane. A few of the instruments, however, are self-
contained and merely have to be correctly installed to give an indication. Warn-
ing lights are installed to indicate unsatisfactory or dangerous conditions in some
systems. Instruments requiring power from the electrical system are provided
with circuit breakers to isolate the individual systems in the event of trouble.
For night operation, each instrument is either individually lighted by overhead
spot lights, shielded post lights and/or a light incorporated as part of the instru-
ment.
The panel has been arranged to accommodate flight instruments in the left
side, in front of the pilot, electronic equipment in the center, and the engine and
miscellaneous instruments to the right.
The flight instruments have been shock mounted to minimize vibration and
shock conditions transmitted to the panel.
INSTRUMENTS
4A10
4A10 Reissued: 2 18/81
2510
22 21 20 19 18
1. ALTIMETER 12. AMMETER

2. AIRSPEED INDICATOR 13. LEFT TACHOMETER
3. RATE OF CLIMB INDICATOR 14. VACUUM SUCTION GAUGE
4. DIRECTIONALGYRO 15. RIGHT TACHOMETER
5. CLOCK 16. CARBURETORAIR TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
6. AUTOFLIGHT TRIM CONTROL 17. CARBURETORAIR TEMPERATURE SELECTORSWITCH
7. GYRO HORIZON 18. FUEL QUANTITY INDICATOR
8. FREE AIR TEMPERATURE 19 FUEL PRESSUREINDICATOR
9. MAGNETIC COMPASS 20. OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR
10. FLAP INDICATOR 21. OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
11. MANIFOLD PRESSUREINDICATOR 22. TURN AND BANK INDICATOR
Figure 10-1. Instrument Panel. PA-23-250 and PA-23-235
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2 18 81
4A11
1. AIRSPEED INDICATOR 10. MANIFOLD TEMP GAUGE

2. DIRECTIONALGYRO 11. SUCTION GAUGE
3 ARTIFICIAL HORIZON 12. AMMETER
4. OMNI INDICATOR 13. INSTRUMENTCLUSTER
5. ADF RADIO COMPASS 14. OMNI INDICATOR
6 COMPASS 15. RATE OF CLIMB INDICATOR
7 MANIFOLD PRESSUREGAUGE 16. EIGHT DAY CLOCK
8 FLAP INDICATOR 17. TURN AND BANK INDICATOR
9. TACHOMETER 18. ALTIMETER
Figure 10-2. Instrument Panel

INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/18/81
4A12
2506
13 12
1 AIRSPEED INDICATOR 10 FUEL FLOW INDICATOR

2 DIRECTIONALGYRO 11. AMMETER
3. ARTIFICIAL HORIZON 12. SUCTION GAUGE
4 OMNI INDICATOR 13 INSTRUMENTCLUSTER
5. ADF RADIO COMPASS 14 VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR
6. COMPASS 15 CLOCK
7. MANIFOLD PRESSUREGAUGE 16. TURN AND BANK INDICATOR
8. FLAP INDICATOR 17 ALTIMETER
9 TACHOMETER

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3153 incl
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2 18/ 81
4A13
2507
1. STARTER SWITCH 13. FUEL FLOW GAUGE 25. VHF RADIO NAV 2
2. STALL WARNING 14. TURBO OIL PRESSURE 26. DISTANCE/SPEED INDICATOR
3. MARKER BEACON INDICATOR 15. DEICER AMMETER 27. OMNI INDICATOR
4. AIRSPEED 16. METER SWITCH 28. AUDIO SELECTOR
5. DIRECTIONAL GYRO 17. ALTIMETER 29. VERTICAL SPEED
6. OMNI COUPLER 18. AMMETER 30. CLOCK
7. ARTIFICIAL HORIZON 19. SUCTION GAUGE 31. SWITCH/BREAKER PANEL
8. ADF INDICATOR 20. TRANSPONDER 32. TURN AND BANK
9. ADF RADIO 21. MIXTURE MONITOR 33. ALTIMETER
10. MANIFOLD PRESSURE 22. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 34. ALTIMATIC PILOT
11. TACHOMETER (LEFT ENGINE) 23. FLAP POSITION 35. DOOR AJAR LIGHT
12. TACHOMETER (RIGHT ENGINE) 24. VHF RADIO NAV 1 36. PARKING BRAKE
Figure 10-4. Instrument Panel, PA-23-250 (six place),

Serial Nos. 27-3154 to 27-3836 and 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl.
INSTRUMENTS
4A14 Reissued: 2 18 81
2509
1. TURN COORDINATOR 16. MANIFOLD PRESSUREGAUGE 31. PARKING BRAKE HANDLE

2 AIRSPEED INDICATOR 17. TACHOMETER, LEFT 32. ALTIMATIC III
3. GYRO HORIZON 18. FUEL FLOW GAUGE 33. FUEL PUMP SWITCHES
4. G/S COUPLER LIGHT 19. TACHOMETER, RIGHT 34. FLAP POSITION INDICATOR
5. STALL WARNING LIGHT 20. DOOR AJAR LIGHT 35. PANEL LIGHTS
6. DIRECTIONALGYRO 21. FUEL/ENGINE GAUGE CLUSTER 36. DEICING SWITCHES
7. ALTIMETER 22. GYRO SUCTION GAUGE 37. EGT GAUGE
8 RATE OF CLIMB 23. AMMETER 38 PANEL
9. MARKER BEACON 24. HOUR METER (TOTAL) 39. ALTERNATOR SWITCHES
10. ADF INDICATOR 25. NAV/APPROACH COUPLER 40. CIRCUIT BREAKERS
11. OMNI BEARING SELECTOR 26. MASTER SWITCH 41. LIGHTER
12. JUNCTION BOX 27. VOLTAGE REGULATOR 42. TRANSPONDER
13. ADF RADIO 28. TRANSMITTER SELECTOR 43. HEAT CONTROL
14. COMM/NAV TRANSCEIVERS 29. AUTOFLITE SWITCH
15. DME CONTROL 30 AUTOFLITETRIM

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 to
274425, and 27-4427 to 274573 incl.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/18/81
4A15
1. TRIM INDICATOR LIGHT 17. TACHOMETER, LEFT 33. PANEL LIGHTS

2. TURN COORDINATOR 18. FUEL FLOW GAUGE 34. FLAP POSITION INDICATOR
3. AIRSPEED INDICATOR 19. TACHOMETER, RIGHT 35. PARKING BRAKE
4. GYRO HORIZON 20. DOOR AJAR LIGHT 36. FUEL PUMP SWITCHES
21. FUEL/ENGINE GAUGE CLUSTER 37. PROP SYNCHRONIZER CONTROL
5. G/S COUPLER LIGHT
22. AMMETER 38. DME CONTROL
6. STALL WARNING LIGHT
7. DIRECTIONAL GYRO 23. GYRO SUCTION GAUGE 39. PANEL
8. ALTIMETER 24. ALTERNATOR SWITCH 40. DEICER SWITCHES
9. RATE OF CLIMB 25. HOUR METER (TOTAL) 41. AMMETER - PROP DEICER
26. NAV/APPROACH COUPLER 42. PNEUMATIC DEICER INDICATOR
10. MARKER BEACON
27. MASTER SWITCH 43. ALTERNATOR SWITCHES
11. ADF INDICATOR
12. OMNI BEARING SELECTOR 28. VOLTAGE REGULATOR 44. LIGHTER
29. TRANSMITTER SELECTOR 45. CIRCUIT BREAKERS
13. JUNCTION BOX
30. AUTOFLITE SWITCH 46. TRANSPONDER
14. ADF RADIO
31. AUTOFLITE TRIM 47. HEAT CONTROL
15. COMM/NAV TRANSCEIVERS
16. MANIFOLD PRESSURE GAUGE 32. ALTIMATIC IIIB

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-4426, 27-4574 to 27-7554172 incl.
INSTRUMENTS
NOT ON 7554001 AND UP
13
1. TRIM INDICATOR LIGHT 16. TURN COORDINATOR 31. ALTIMATIC IIIB

2. TURN COORDINATOR 17. AIRSPEED INDICATOR 32. PANEL LIGHTS
3. AIRSPEED INDICATOR 18. DIRECTIONAL GYRO 33. FLAP POSITION INDICATOR
4. GYRO HORIZON 19. GYRO HORIZON 34. PARKING BRAKE
5. G/S COUPLER LIGHT 20. ALTIMETER 35. FUEL PUMP SWITCHES
6. STALL WARNING LIGHT 21. FUEL/ENGINE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 36. LEFT PITOT HEAT
7. DIRECTIONAL GYRO 22. RATE OF CLIMB 37. E.G.T. GAUGE
8. ALTIMETER 23. AMMETER 38. RIGHT PITOT HEAT
9. RATE OF CLIMB 24. ALTERNATOR SWITCH 39. GYRO SUCTION GAUGE
10. MARKER BEACON 25. NAV/APPROACH COUPLER 40. ALTERNATOR SWITCHES
11. ADF INDICATOR 26. MASTER SWITCH 41. HOUR METER (TOTAL)
12. OMNI BEARING SELECTOR 27. VOLTAGE REGULATOR 42. CIRCUIT BREAKERS
13. COVER PLATE 28. TRANSMITTER SELECTOR 43. LIGHTER
14, MANIFOLD PRESSURE GAUGE 29. AUTOFLITE SWITCH 44. DUAL FUEL FLOW GAUGE
15. DUAL TACHOMETER 30. AUTOFLITE TRIM 45. HEAT CONTROL
Figure 10-7. Dual Instrument Panel (Optional Equipment)

PA-23-250 (Six Place). Serial Nos. 27-7305222, 27-7405235 to 27-7554172 incl.
INSTRUMENTS
4A17 Reissued: 2/18 81
1. HOUR METER 22. AIRSPEED INDICATOR 42. PITOT HEAT

2. CLOCK 23. ENGINE GAUGES 43. SURFACE DEICE
3. AIRSPEED INDICATOR 24. ALTIMETER 44. PROP DEICE
4. TURN COORDINATOR 25. AMMETER 45. RNAV
5. STALL WARNING LIGHT 26. ALTERNATOR OUTPUT SELECTOR SWITCH 46. ALTERNATOR CIRCUIT
6. ATTITUDE GYRO 27. ALTERNATOR INOPERATIVE LIGHTS BREAKER SWITCH
7. HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR 28. VOR/LOC COUPLER 47. DME
8. ENCODING ALTIMETER 29. MASTER SWITCH 48. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
9. DOOR AJAR LIGHT 30. ALTIMATIC III C 49. TURN COORDINATOR
10. RATE OF CLIMB INDICATOR 31. PARKING BRAKE 50. RATE OF CLIMB
11. GLIDE SLOPE ENGAGED LIGHT 32. GYRO SUCTION GAUGE 51. HEATER SWITCH
12. ADF INDICATOR 33. RADAR ALTIMETER SWITCH
13. RADAR ALTIMETER 34. FUEL PUMP SWITCHES
14. VOR/GLIDE SLOPE INDICATOR 35. PROP SYNC
15. RADIO PANEL 36. AVIONICS MASTER SWITCH
16. MANIFOLD GAUGE 37. FLAP SELECTOR
17. TACHOMETER 38. FLAP POSITION INDICATOR
18. EGT GAUGE 39. RADAR
19. FUEL FLOW GAUGE 40. LANDING GEAR INDICATOR LIGHTS
20. DIRECTIONAL GYRO 41. LANDING GEAR SELECTOR
21. ATTITUDE GYRO
Figure 10-8. Dual Instrument Panel (Optional Equipment)

PA-23-250, Serial Nos. 27-7554001 to 27-7554168 incl.)
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/ 18 81
4A18
1-5
1. HOUR METER 26. STARTERAND MAGNETO SWITCHES

2. CLOCK 27. MASTER SWITCH
3. AIRSPEEDINDICATOR 28. A/P NAV AND ELECTRICTRIM SWITCHES
4. TURN COORDINATOR 29. AUTOPILOT CONTROL PANEL
5. ATTITUDEGYRO 30. PARKING BRAKE
6. HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR 31. GYRO SUCTION GAUGE
7. RATE OF CLIMB INDICATOR 32. CIGAR LIGHTER
8. GUDE SLOPE ENGAGED LIGHT 33. RADAR ALTIMETER SWITCH
9. DOOR AJAR LGHT 34. LEFT ELECTRICALSWITCH PANEL
10. ADF INDICATOR 35. AVIONICS MASTER SWITCH
11. RADARALTIMETER 36. VOR/GUDE SLOPE INDICATOR
12. OUTSIDE AIR TEMP. GAUGE 37. RADAR
13. COMPASS 38. RIGHT ELECTRICALSWITCH PANEL
14. RADIO PANEL 39. DME
15. TACHOMETER 40. ALTERNATORCIRCUIT BREAKER
16. MANIFOLD PRESS. GAUGE SWITCHES
17. FUEL FLOW GAUGE 41. CIRCUIT BREAKER PANEL
18. EGT GAUGE 42. TURN COORDINATOR
19. ATTITUDEGYRO 43. RATE OF CLIMB INDICATOR
20. ENGINE GAUGES 44. HEATER SWITCH
21. DIRECTIONALGYRO 45. PROP DEICE AMMETER
22. AIRSPEED INDICATOR 46. OXYGEN OUTLET
23. ALTIMETER 47. HEATER OVERTEMPRESET
24. AMMETER SWITCH 27-8154001
25. ALTERNATOROUTPUTSELECTOR
SWITCH
Figure 10-9. Instrument Panel (Typical)

PA-23-250 (Six Place) Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/18/81
4A19
10-3. INSTRUMENTS.
10-4. VACUUM-GYRO INSTRUMENTS. The directional gyro is a flight instru-

ment incorporating an air driven gyro stabilized in the vertical plane. The gyro
is rotated at high speed by lowering the pressure in the air tight case and simul-
taneously allowing atmospheric air pressure to enter the instrument against the
gyro buckets. Due to gyroscopic inertia, the spin axis continues to point in the
same direction even though the aircraft yaws to the right or left. This relative
motion between the gyro and the instrument case is shown on the instrument dial
which is similar to the compass card. The dial, when set to agree with the air-
plane magnetic compass, provides a positive indicationfree from swing and turn-
ing error.
The gyro-horizon is essentially anair-driven gyroscope rotating in ahori-
zontal plane and is operated by the same principal as the directional gyro. Due
to the gyroscopic inertia, the spin axis continues to point in the vertical direction,
providing a constant visual reference to the attitude of the airplane relative to
pitch and rollaxis. A bar across the face of the indicator represents the horizon.
A miniature adjustable airplane is mounted to the case and aligning the miniature
airplane to the horizon bar simulates the alignment of the airplane to the actual
horizon. Any deviation simulates the deviation of the airplane from the true ho-
rizon.
10-5. PITOT-STATIC INSTRUMENTS. The airspeedindicatorprovides a means

of indicating the speed of the airplane passing through the air. The airspeed in-
dication is the differential pressure reading between pitot air pressure and static
air pressure. This instrument has the diaphragm vented to the pitot air source
and the case is vented to the static air system. As the airplane increases speed,
the pitot air pressure increases, causing thediaphragm to expand. Amechanical
linkage picks up this motion and moves the instrument pointer to the indicator
speed. The instrument dial is calibrated in knots and miles per hour, and also
has the necessary operating range markings for safe operation of the airplane.
The altimeter indicates pressure altitude in feet above sea level. The in-
dicator has three pointers and dial scale. The long pointer is read in hundreds
of feet. The middle pointer is read in thousands of feet and the short pointer in
ten thousand feet. A field pressure window is located on the right side of the in-
dicator dialand set by the knob located on the lower left corner of the instrument.
The altimeter consists of a sealed diaphragm that is connected to the pointers
through a mechanical linkage. The instrument case is vented to the static air
system, and as static air pressure decreases, the diaphragm expands, causing
the pointers to move through the mechanical linkage.
INSTRUMENTS
4A20
The rate of climb indicator measures the rate of change in static pressure when the
airplane is climbing or descending. By means of a pointer and dial, this instrument will
indicate the rate of ascent or descent of the airplane in feet per minute.
10-6. ELECTRICAL INSTRUMENT. The turn and bank indicator is an electrical

instrument used for making correctly controlled turns. The turn portion of the indicator is
an electrically driven gyroscope, while the bank portion is a ball sealed in a curved glasstube
filled with damping fluid.
The ammeter will indicate the amount of current received or the amount of current
drain on the battery. The ammeter is mounted in the right instrument panel.
The two fuel quantity gauges are mounted in a cluster on the right instrument panel.
These instruments are calibrated in fractional divisions of one-fourth, one-half, three-fourths
and full. A transmitter unit is installed in each fuel cell. This unit contains a resistance strip
and a movable control arm. The position of this arm is controlled by a float in the fuel cell
and this position is transmitted electrically to the indicator gauge to show the amount of
fuel in the cell. The quantity gauges will indicate the amount of fuel in the cell to which the
fuel control levers are positioned. When the fuel control levers are moved to the OFF
position, the quantity gauges willindicate empty.
The two oil temperature indicators are mounted in the instrument cluster on the right
instrument panel. These instruments will provide a temperature indication of the engine oil
in degrees Fahrenheit. Each instrument has a separate temperature bulb located in the oil
screen assembly,on the engine accessorysection.
On PA-23-250;PA-23-235;and PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504,
the carburetor air temperature indicator is mounted in the right instrument panel. A selector
switch is incorporated in the system to eliminate the use of two instruments. This
instrument is calibrated in degrees Fahrenheit and will provide a means of anticipating
carburetor icing conditions. A temperature bulb is located in the carburetor air box of each
engine and the air temperature indication is transmitted through wires back to the
instrument.
On early models the flap position indicatorjust shows the position of the flaps. On later
ones the position of the indicator shows the flap position and also corresponds to the
maximum KIAS allowable when the flap is in a certain position. A transmitting unit for this
instrument is located under the right rear floor board. The transmitter contains a resistance
strip and a moveable contact arm which is connected mechanically to the flap actuating
torque tube. As the flaps are actuated, their position is transmitted electrically to the flap
position indicator.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2 18 81
4A21
10-7. MISCELLANEOUS INSTRUMENTS. The magnetic compass is a self-

contained instrument and has an individual light which is connected to the instru-
ment lighting circuit. The compass correction card is located in the card holder
mounted near the compass.
The clock is a hand wound, 8-day time piece. It incorporates a stem wind
with the knob at the lower left-hand side of the dial. This knob, when pulled and
turned, also adjusts the hands.
The tachometer provides an indication of crankshaft speed in revolutions
per minute for each engine. The tachometer connects to each engine accessory
section by a flexible drive cable. The drive operates a magnetic drag mechanism
that gives smooth operation, practically eliminating all pointer oscillation.
The dual manifold pressure gauge is a direct reading pressure instrument
that indicates manifold pressure graduated in inches of mercury. As the pressure
in the intake manifolds increases or decreases, the evacuated diaphragms con-
tract or expand, moving the respective pointers through a mechanical linkage.
On PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000
27-2504 incl.,two fuel pressure gauge instruments are mounted in a cluster on
the right side of the instrument panel. Each gauge is connected to the fuel system
at the wing root section. Pressure is routed through small lines to the individual
gauges which are calibrated in pounds per square inch.
On PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up, the dual fuel flow instrument
is a differential pressure gauge comprised of diaphragm sensingunits with sector and pinion
movement to amplify diaghragm movement. The gauge indicates fuel flow in gallons per
hour by measuringdifferential pressure between the injector outlet versus deck pressure.
10-8. TROUBLESHOOTING. For troubleshooting of the various instruments,

refer to Table X-III in this section.
10-9. REMOVAL OF INSTRUMENTS.(PA-23-250; PA-23-235; PA-23-250 (six place),

Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl; and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 to
27-3836, 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl.) Seeing that all instruments are mounted in a similar
manner, the followingdescription of a typical removal is provided as a guide.
a. Remove the trim panel from the top of the instrument panel by removing
the attaching screws.
b. Remove the royalite cover panel from the face of the instrument panel.
c. Disconnect the plumbing and/or electrical connector from the back of the
instrument to be removed. Attach a dust cover or plug to each fitting.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/18/81
4A22
NOTE
Each line and/or wire removed should be marked for

identification to facilitate reinstallation.
d. Remove the mounting screws from the instrument to be removed and remove
the instrument.
NOTE
It may be necessary to remove the screws from the

shock mounted panel on the left side of the instrument
panel or to remove an upper instrument to gain access
to a lower instrument.
10-10. INSTALLATION OF INSTRUMENTS.(PA-23-250; PA-23-235; PA-23-250 (six

place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl; and PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos. 27-2504
to 27-3836, 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl.) All instruments are mounted in a similar manner,
thus the followingdescription of a typical installation is provided as a guide.
a. Position the instrument and secure with attaching screws.

b. Connect the plumbing and/or electrical connector to the back of the instru-
ment.
c. Install the royalite cover panel to the face of the instrument panel.
d. Install the trim panel to the topof the instrument panel and secure with at-
taching screws.
10-11. REMOVAL OF INSTRUMENTS.(PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-3837,

27-3944 and up.)
a. Pull the control wheel that is at the opposite side of the instrument panel
from where the shock-mounted panel is to be removed, to its aftmost position
and secure with a cord tied between the wheel and around the seat back.
b. Pad the control wheel tube with foam rubber or similar material.
c. Remove the self-locking nuts that secure the floating panel to its shock
mounts. With an open end wrench held next to the back side of the panel, hold
the rubber mounts to eliminate twisting as the nuts are being removed.
d. Pull the panel back and allow it to rest on the padded control wheel tube.
e. Unscrew the electrical connector from the post light(s).
f. Disconnect the plumbing and/or electrical connector from the back of the
instrument and identify each line to facilitate reinstallation. Attach a dust cap
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/18/81
4A23
or plug to each fitting.

g. Remove the post light(s) by turning off nut.
h. Remove the screws that secure the instrument in the panel cutout.
i. Remove the instrument from the panel and secure the panel from rolling off the
control tube.
j. Check the general condition of the rubber shock mounts and replace if necessary.
10-12. INSTALLATIONOF INSTRUMENTS. (PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-3837,

27-3944 and up.)
a. Place the instrument in its proper panel cutout and secure with screws.
b. Install the post light(s) and secure. Do not overtighten nut.
c. Connect the plumbing and/or electrical connector to back of instrument.
d. Connect the electrical connector of the post light(s). Tighten connector fingertight.
e. Ascertain that one end of the ground straps is placed over the panel side of the
shock mount stud.
f. Place the floating panel in position and allow the shock-mount attachment studs to
protrude through the panel. Install and tighten attachment nuts.
g. Remove the padding and release the control wheel.
h. Check the instrument and post light operation.
10-13. GYRO SERVICEPROCEDURE.
10-14. GYRO INSTALLATIONINSPECTION.The followinginspections should be made

before removinga suspected gyro instrument from the airplane:
Visual Examination:
a. Has the instrument been modified?
b. Has the instrument been damaged?
c. Does the instrument show any signs of abuse?
Installation Inspection:
a. Are all pressure and static lines free from bends, restrictions or leaks?
b. Has the central air filter been replaced?
c. Is the instrument properly mounted in the panel?
d. Does the instrument physically touch other instruments, tubing or airframe
members when the enginesare started or stopped?
e. Are unused ports correctly sealed againstair leaks?
f. Is the vacuum system correct, and does the vacuum gaugegivean accurate
reading?
g. Is the vacuum regulator adjusted correctly and functioning properly?
10-15. GYRO HANDLINGAND SHIPPING. The followinginformation applies to all three

inch directional gyros and attitude horizon instruments installed by the factory or a Piper
field servicefacility.
Gyro instruments being returned to the factory are to be placed in approved containers
with all ports properly sealed immediately after removal from the aircraft instrument panel.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2 18 1
4A24
The instrument must also be accompanied by factory copies of the warranty and credit claim forms. These
forms and the special containers should be available at any Piper Dealer and/or Distributor. Should any gyro
instrument be received by the factory in an unapproved container or if the ports are not sealed, the warranty
will be immediately voided and the instrument returned to the sender. The instrument must be returned
immediately after removal from the aircraft (not to exceed 15 days following discovery of defect.)
10-16. GYRO VACUUM SYSTEM (Three Relief Valve System). (PA-23-250, Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-443
incl.) (Refer to Figure 10-6.)
10-17. DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION. The three relief valve system employed to operate the gyro
instruments is comprised of engine driven wet vacuum pumps, and air-oil separator for each pump, two
vacuum relief valves, two check valves, a vacuum gauge, necessary tubing and fittings, and a test selector valve.
The vacuum pumps on the Aztecs are rotary vane, positive displacement units. These units consist of a
housing containing a sleeve in which an offset rotor with moving blades is installed. The pumps are gear driven
and mounted on the accessory case of the engine. As the pumps operate, they draw engine oil for internal
lubrication. Either pump is capable of maintaining a vacuum should one pump fail.
The air-oil separators are mounted on the engine mount tube along the outboard side of each engine. As
the air is drawn through the pump it mixes with the lubricating oil and is expelled through the exhaust side of
the pump. The air-oil mixture is routed through the separator where the oil collects on baffles and falls to the
bottom of the separator to be returned to the engine. The air is vented overboard.
The vacuum relief valves are located in each nacelle. As the vacuum builds up with increasing engine
RPM, the relief valves open and allow air to enter the inlet lines to prevent the vacuum in the system from
exceeding the operating limits.
A check valve in the line from each pump permits air to move in only one direction; from the instruments
toward the pump. If one pump fails, its check valve will close, preventing the operative pump from drawing air
through the inoperative side. The check valves are located in the bottom center section of the fuselage.
Two types of vacuum air filter systems are utilized. Some airplanes use individual filtering pads installed
in the back of the individual instrument, while others use a central air filter of the dry cartridge type attached to
the air inlet lines forward of the instruments. The system using a central air filter is the newer allowing easy
filter replacement when necessary and providing improved filtration.
The vacuum test selector valve, located on the right side of the instrument panel, is a four position,
manually operated type valve. This valve, incorporated with the vacuum gauge, provides a means of checking
the vacuum at four different locations in the system. This provides a means of localizing trouble in the event a
portion of the system is malfunctioning.
The vacuum gauge is mounted in the right side of the instrument panel,just above the test selector valve.
The vacuum gauge is calibrated in inches of mercury and indicates the amount of vacuum created by the engine
driven vacuum pumps.
INSTRUMENTS
4B1
10-18. ADJUSTMENTOF VACUUMREGULATORAND RELIEF VALVES.

a. Remove the inboard access panels from each engine nacelle and the access panel
from the right side of the nose section.
WARNING
Do not attempt to adjust the regulator and relief valveswith

the engine running.
b. With a qualified pilot or other responsible person at the controls, start the engines.
Allow time for warm-up and operate at medium RPM.
c. With engines running at medium RPM, move the test selector valve to the right
source: the vacuum gauge should indicate between 8.00 and 10.00 inches of mercury. When
the selector is moved to the left source, the indication should be the same. If the vacuum
reading fails to fall within this range, shut down the engines and adjust the relief valvesby
loosening the locking mechanism from the valve adjusting screw and move the valve
adjustment screw clockwiseto increase the vacuum. Start the enginesand repeat the check.
With the right and left source both indicating the recommended vacuum, move the selector
to gyro horizon or gyro compass position. The recommended vacuum for these positions is
4.5 to 5.0 inches of mercury. If the vacuum reading fails to fall within this range, shut the
engines down and adjust the relief valve located in the nose section as previouslydescribed.
d. Restart the enginesand repeat the complete system check.
e. Tighten the locking mechanism on the regulator relief valvesand replace the engine
and nose section accesspanels.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued:2 18 81
4B2
2504
1. VACUUM REGULATOR
2. FROM ENGINE BREATHER
3. AIR OIL SEPARATOR
4. DRAIN
5. VENT
6. OIL COLLECTOR TANK
7. VACUUM PUMP
8. CHECK VALVE
9. VACUUM REGULATOR
10. CHECK VALVE
11. VACUUM SELECTOR
12. SUCTION GAUGE
13. GYRO HORIZON
14. DIRECTIONAL GYRO
Figure 10-10. Vacuum System, PA-23-250, Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-443 incl.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2. 18:81
4B3
10-19. GYRO VACUUM SYSTEM. (Two Relief Valve System). PA-23-250, Serial Nos.
27-444 and up: PA-23-235, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.:
PA-23-250 (Six Place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up. (Refer to Figure 10-11 or 10-12.)
10-20. DESCRIPTIONOF OPERATION. The two relief valvesystem employed to operate

the gyro instruments is comprised of engine driven wet or dry vacuum pumps, two vacuum
relief valves,two check valves, a vacuum gauge, necessary tubing and fittings and on some
airplanes, a test selector valve.
The vacuum pumps are rotary four vane, positive displacement units. These units consist
of a housing containing a sleevein which an offset rotor with four movingblades is installed.
The pumps are gear drivenand mounted on the accessorycase of the engine. PA-23-250and
PA-23-235 airplanes, Serial Nos. 27-444 to 27-548 incl. are equipped with wet vacuum
pumps which use engine oil for internal lubrication. The PA-23-235, SerialNos. 27-549 and
up, the PA-23-250(six place) and the PA-E23-250airplanes, without deicers, are equipped
with dry vacuum pumps which are internally lubricated and sealed when manufactured. One
wet vacuum pump or one dry vacuum pump is capable of maintaining the vacuum system
should the other pump fail.
On airplanes equipped with wet vacuum pumps, an air-oil separator is mounted on the
fire wall. As the air is drawn through the pump it mixes with the lubricating oil and is
expelled through the exhaust side of the pump. The air-oil mixture is routed through the
separator where the oil collects on baffles and falls to the bottom of the separator to be
returned to the engine. The air is vented overboard.
The vacuum relief valvesare located in the center section of each nacelle. As the vacuum
builds up with increasing engine RPM, the relief valvesopen and allow air to enter the inlet
lines to prevent the vacuum in the system from exceedingthe operating limits.
A check valve in the line from each pump permits air to move in only one direction;
from the instruments toward the pump. If one pump fails, its check valve will close;
preventing the operative pump from drawing air through the inoperative side. The check
valvesare located in the bottom center section of the fuselage.
Two types of vacuum air filtering systems are utilized. Some airplanes use individual
filtering pads installed in the back of the individualinstrument, while others use a central air
filter of the dry cartridge type attached to the air inlet lines forward of the instruments. The
system using a central air filter is the newer, allowingeasy filter replacement when necessary
and providingimproved filtration.
On PA-23-250, PA-23-235 airplanes, Serial Nos. 27443 and up; and PA-23-250 (six
place) airplanes, Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 inclusive, a vacuum test selector valve is
incorporated. The selector valve, located on the right side of the instrument panel, is a four
position, manually operated type valve. This valve, incorporated with the vacuum suction
gauge, provides a means of checking vacuum pressure at four different locations of the
system. Therefore givinga means of localizing trouble in the event a portion of the system is
malfunctioning.
The vacuum gaugeis mounted in the right side of the instrument panel, just above the
test selector valve. The vacuum gauge is calibrated in inches of mercury and indicates the
amount of vacuum created by the engine drivenvacuum pumps.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/ 18/81
4B4
2505
NOTE. THE ONLY DRY AIR PUMP MOUNTING GASKET
AUTHORIZED AND APPROVED FOR USE ON THE
AIRBORNE DRY AIR PUMP IS THE AIRBORNE GASKET
B3-1-2, PIPER PART NUMBER 751 859. USE OF ANY OTHER
GASKET MAY RESULT IN OIL SEEPAGE OR LEAKAGE AT
THE MOUNTING SURFACE.
8. GYRO HORIZON
1. VENT 9. DIRECTIONAL GYRO
2. VACUUM PUMP 10. DRAIN
3. VACUUM REGULATOR 11. OIL COLLECTOR TANK
4. CHECK VALVE 12. OIL COLLECTOR TANK
5. CHECK VALVE 13. FROM ENGINE BREATHER
6. VACUUM SELECTOR 14. VENT
7. SUCTION GAUGE 15. GASKET (SEE NOTE)
Figure 10-11. Vacuum System. PA-23-250. PA-23-235 and

PA-23-250 (six place). Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/ 18/81
4B5
On PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up, a test selector valve is not
installed. The vacuum gauge is on the right side of the instrument panel above the control
column and operates similar to the one previously described. This gauge will indicate a
failure in either side of the system. Should either side of the system fail, a small red button
will pop out on the correspondingside of the gauge.
10-21. ADJUSTMENTOF VACUUMREGULATORAND RELIEF VALVES.

a. Remove the engine accesspanels from each engine.
WARNING
Do not attempt to adjust the regulator and relief valveswith

the engine running.
b. On PA-23-250, PA-23-235 airplanes, Serial Nos. 27-443 and up and PA-23-250(six

place) airplanes, Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl., the regulator relief valvesmay be
adjusted as follows:
1. With a qualified pilot or other responsible person at the controls, start the
engines.Allow time for warm-up and operate at medium RPM.
2. With enginesrunning at medium RPM, move the test selector valve to the right
source: the vacuum gauge should indicate between 4.5 and 5.0 inches of mercury, or 4.8 to
5.1 inches when a central air filter is installed. Whenthe selector is moved to the left source,
the indication should be the same. If the vacuum reading fails to fall within this range, shut
down the engine and adjust the relief valves on the fire wall by loosening the locking
mechanism from the valve adjusting screw and then turn the valve adjustment screw
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the vacuum. Start the engines and
repeat the check.
c. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes, Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up, the regulator relief
valvesmay be adjusted as follows:
1. With a qualified pilot or other responsible person at the controls, start one
engine. Allow time for warm-up and operate at medium RPM.
2. With the engine running at medium RPM, the vacuum gauge should indicate
between 4.8 and 5.1 inches of mercury. If the vacuum reading fails to fall within range, shut
down the engine and adjust the relief valves on the fire wall by loosening the locking
mechanism from the valve adjusting screw and then turn the valve adjustment screw
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the vacuum. Start the engines and
repeat the check.
3. Repeat the above procedure for the opposite engine.
d. Install the engineaccess panels.
INSTRUMENTS
4B6
4B6 Reissued: 2/ 18/81
2511
1. VENT
2. VACUUM PUMP
3. VACUUM REGULATOR
4. VACUUM GAUGE
5. GYRO HORIZON
6. DIRECTIONAL GYRO
7. CLEAN AIR FILTER
8. GASKET (SEE NOTE)
NOTE: THE ONLY DRY AIR PUMP MOUNTING GASKET

B3-1-2 PIPER PART NUMBER 751 859 USE OF ANY OTHER
Figure 10-12. Vacuum System. PA-23-250

(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/18/81
4B7
2502
1. VENT
2. VACUUM PUMP
3. VACUUM REGULATOR
4. VACUUM GAUGE
5. GYRO HORIZON
6. DIRECTIONALGYRO
7. CLEAN AIR FILTER

B3-1-2. PIPER PART NUMBER 751 859. USE OF ANY OTHER
Figure 10-13. Vacuum System, PA-23-250 (six place).

Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 and up
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/18/81
4B8
2503
1. VENT
2. VACUUM PUMP
3. VACUUM REGULATOR
4. VACUUM GAUGE
5. GYRO HORIZON
6. DIRECTIONAL GYRO
7. CLEAN AIR FILTER
8. COPILOT GYRO'S SWITCH
9. VALVE
NOTE THE ONLY DRY AIR PUMP MOUNTING GASKET

B3-1-2, PIPER PART NUMBER 751 859 USE OF ANY OTHER
Figure 10-14. Vacuum System. Dual, (Optional Equipment)

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 7305222 and 7405235 and up
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2 /18/81
4B9
10-22. VACUUMTEST SELECTORVALVE. PA-23-250,PA-23-235 and PA-23-250 (six

place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.
10-23. REMOVALOF VACUUMTEST SELECTORVALVE.

a. Remove the royalite trim panel by removingattaching screws. If instrument lighting
is installed, disconnect the electrical connector along the bottom of the trim panel.
b. Disconnect and cap the vacuum lines connected to the valve. The lines should be
marked for identification and ease of installation.
NOTE
It may be necessary to remove the glove compartment, by

removing the attaching machine screws, to gain accessto the
selector valve.
c. Remove the machine screws and nuts securingthe valveto the instrument panel and
remove the valve.
NOTE
All open vacuum lines should be covered to prevent dust or

other foreign material from entering the system.
10-24. INSTALLATIONOF VACUUMTEST SELECTORVALVE.

a. Position the test selector valve to the instrument panel and secure with machine
screwsand nuts.
b. Uncap and connect the fivevacuum lines to the selector valve.
c. If the glove compartment was removed, reinstall at this time, and secure with
machinescrews.
d. Install the royalite trim panel and secure with attaching screws. If instrument
lighting is installed, connect the electrical connector along the bottom of the trim panel
prior to installation.
10-25. MANIFOLDPRESSURE GAUGE FILTERS (Turbocharger Installation Only). The

manifold pressure gauge has two filter assemblies secured to the rear of the gauge. The
removal of the top instrument access panel is necessary to gain access to the filter
assemblies. Remove the two filter assembliesand replace the filter elements during the 500
hour inspection of the airplane.
INSTRUMENTS
4B10
10-26. EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE GAUGE. This instrument, which is commonly

referred to as EGT, is used to aid the pilot in selecting the economical fuel-air mixture for
cruising flight at a power setting of 75% or less. It is a sensing device to monitor the fuel-air
mixture entering the enginecylinders.This gaugeis not adjustable. If it is found defectiveafter
checking with the troubleshooting chart, it should be replaced.
CAUTION
When replacingleads, it is very important to use the sametype

and length of thermocouple wire, as the resistance of the leads
is critical for the proper operation of this gauge.
10-27. REMOVAL OF EGT PROBE AND GAUGE.

a. Disconnect wires from the EGT gauge at the instrument panel.
b. Remove four bolts which secure the gauge to the instrument panel and remove the
gauge.
c. Remove wires from the wire harness going to the engine.
d. Loosen the nut which secures the EGT probe to the exhaust system below the waste-
gate and remove the probe. (Note location of probe.)
10-28. CLEANING AND INSPECTION. Unless mechanical damage is evident, broken

glass, bent or broken pointers, or broken case, the followingchecks should be performed be-
fore removing the instrument.
a. Removethe probe from the exhaust system and check for broken weld (at tip end) or
burnt off end.
b. Disconnectthe lead wires at the instrument and check for poor electricalconnections.
c. With leads connected to the instrument, heat the probe with a propane torch to a dull
red. The meter should show a reading. If the pointer does not move, replace the meter.
CAUTION
Do not connect an ohmmeter across the meter. It willburn out

the movement of the meter.
10-29. INSTALLATION OF EGT PROBE AND GAUGE.

a. Install the probe into the hole in the exhaust system below the wastegate and secure
with locknut.
b. Route the thermocouple wires along with the existing wire harness to the instrument
panel.
c. Install the EGT gauge into the instrument panel and secure with four bolts.
d. Connect the thermocouple wires to the rear of the EGT gauge.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2' 18'81
4B11
TABLE X-I. INSTRUMENT MARKINGS

27-2504 incl. with Carburetor Induction System)
Fuel Pressure
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) .5 to 5 PSI
Radial Red Line:
Minimum .5 PSI
Maximum 5 PSI
Tachometer
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 500 to 2575 RPM
Radial Red Line (Maximum continuous) 2575 RPM
Cylinder Head Temperature

Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 200 ° to 500 ° F
Radial Red Line (Never Exceed) 500° F
Oil Pressure
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 60 to 85 PSI
Yellow Arc (Caution Range) 25 to 60 PSI
Radial Red Line:
Minimum 25 PSI
Maximum 100 PSI
Oil Temperature
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 120 ° to 245 ° F
Yellow Arc (Caution Range) 60 ° to 120 ° F
Radial Red Line (Never Exceed) 245 ° F
Airspeed Indicator
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 72 to 198 MPH
Yellow Arc (Caution Range) 198 to 249 MPH
White Arc (Flaps Extended Range) 62 to 125 MPH(1)
63 to 125 MPH (2)
Radial Red Line (Never Exceed - Smooth Air) 249 MPH
(1) PA-23-250 AND PA-23-235 ONLY

(2) PA-23-250 (SIX PLACE), SERIAL NOS. 27-2000 TO 27-2504 INCL WITH CARBURETOR INDUCTION SYSTEM
INSTRUMENTS
4B12 4B12 Reissued: 2/ 18/81
TABLEX-II. INSTRUMENTMARKINGS
(PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2322 and up with Fuel
Injection Induction System or AiResearchTurbocharger.)
Fuel Flow
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 0 to 26 GPH
Maximum 26 GPH
Tachometer
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 500 to 2575 RPM
Radial Red Line (Maximum) 2575 RPM
Cylinder Head Temperature
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 200° to 500 ° F
Radial Red Line (Never Exceed) 500°F
Oil Pressure
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 60 to 90 PSI
Radial Red Line:
Minimum 25 PSI
Maximum 100 PSI
Oil Temperature
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 120 ° to 245 F
YellowArc (Caution Range) 60 ° to 120 ° F
Radial Red Line (Never Exceed) 245 ° F
Airspeed Indicator
Green Arc (Normal Operating Range) 72 to 198 MPH
76 to 198 MPH (2 ), 61 to 175 KIAS
Yellow Arc (Caution Range) 198 to 249 MPH, 175 to 221 KIAS
White Arc (Flaps Extended Range) 68 to 125 MPH
70 to 125 MPH, 55 to 108 KIAS
Radial Red Line (Never Exceed - Smooth Air 249 MPH, 221 KIAS
Radial Red Line (MinimumControl Speed Single Engine) 64 KIAS
Radial Blue Line (Best Rate of ClimbSpeed - Single Engine) 88 KIAS
(1) PA-23-250 (SIX PLACE), SERIAL NOS. 27-2505 TO 27-2868 INCL.

(2) PA-23-250 (SIX PLACE), SERIAL NOS. 27-2869 AND UP
(3) 4800 LBS GROSS WT.
(4) 5200 LBS GROSS WT.
(5) PA-23-250 "F" ONLY.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/18/81
4B13
TABLE X-III. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART (INSTRUMENTS)
Trouble Cause
I Remedy
DIRECTIONAL GYRO INDICATOR
Excess drift in either Excessive vibration Check shock mounts.

direction. with amplitude more
than 0. 006 inch.
Insufficient vacuum.
If vacuum below that
required for model,
check for the following:
a. Relief valve im- a. Adjust.
properly adjusted.
b. Incorrect gauge b. Recalibrate.
reading.
c. Pump failure. c. Repair or replace.
d. Vacuum line kinked d. Check and repair.
or leaking. Check for collapsed
inner wall of hose.
Defective instrument. Replace instrument.
Dial spins continuously. Defective mechanism. Replace.
GYRO HORIZON INDICATOR
Bar fails to respond. Insufficient vacuum. Check pump and tubing.
Bar does not settle. Excessive vibration. Check shock mounts.

Replace if necessary.
Insufficient vacuum. Check line and pump.

Adjust valve.
Defective instrument. Replace.
Bar oscillates or shim- Excessive vibration. Check shock mounts.

mies continuously. Replace if necessary.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/18/81
4B14
TABLE X-III. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART (INSTRUMENTS) (cont.)
Trouble
I Cause
I Remedy
GYRO HORIZON INDICATOR (cont.)
Bar oscillates or shim- Vacuum too high. Adjust valve.

mies continuously.
Defective mechanism. Replace instrument.
ALTIMETER
Excessive scale error. Improper calibration Replace instrument.

adjustment.
Excessive pointer Defective mechanism. Replace instrument.

oscillation.
High reading. Improper venting. Eliminate leak in static

pressure system and
check alignment of air-
speed tube.
Setting knob is hard Wrong lubrication or Replace instrument.

to turn. lack of lubrication.
Inner reference mark- Out of engagement. Replace instrument.

er fails to move
when setting knob
is rotated.
Setting knob set screw Excessive vibration. Tighten instrument

loose or missing. screw if loose. Re-
place instrument, if
screw is missing.
Cracked or loose Excessive vibration. Replace instrument.

cover glass.
Dull or discolored Age. Replace instrument.

luminous markings.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/18/81
4B15
Trouble
I Cause Remedy
ALTIMETER (cont.)
Barometric scale and Slippage of mating Replace instrument.

reference markers parts.
out of synchronism.
Barometric scale and Drift in mechanism. Refer to the latest

reference markers revision of AC 43-13-1.
out of synchronism
with pointers.
AIRSPEED TUBES AND INDICATOR
Tube does not heat or Circuit breaker popped. Reset.

clear itself of ice
with switch ON. Open circuit. Repair.
(Heated pitot tubes
only. ) Excessive voltage Check voltage at pitot
drop between battery head.
and pitot head.
Heating element Replace pitot head.

burned out.
Pointers of static in- Leak in instrument Check for leak and seal.
struments do not in- case or in pitot
dicate properly. lines.
Pointer of instrument Leak in instrument Check for leak and seal.

oscillates. case or in pitot
lines.
INSTRUMENTS
Revised: 4/26/83
4B16
Trouble
I Cause
I Remedy
RATE OF CLIMB INDICATOR
Pointer does not set Aging of diaphragm. Reset pointer to zero by

on zero. means of setting screw.
Tap instrument while
resetting.
Pointer fails to Obstruction in static Disconnect all instru-

respond. line. ments connected to the
static line.
Check individual in-
struments for obstruc-
tions in lines.
Pointer oscillates. Leaks in static line. Disconnect all instru-

ments connected to the
static line. Check
individual instruments
for leaks. Reconnect
instruments to static
line and test installa-
tion for leaks.
Defective mechanism. Replace instrument.
TURN AND BANKINDICATOR
Pointer fails to Foreign matter lodged Replace instrument.

respond. in instrument.
No electrical circuit. Check for voltage at

instrument.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/18 81
4B17
TABLE X-III. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART (INSTRUMENTS) (cont. )
Trouble
I Cause Remedy
TURN AND BANKINDICATOR (cont.)
Incorrect sensitiv- Misadjustment of Adjust by means of

ity. sensitivity spring. sensitivity spring
screw. If this pulls
the pointer from zero,
replace instrument.
Pointer does not Gimbal and rotor Replace instrument.

set on zero. assembly out of
balance.
Pointer incorrectly Replace instrument.

set on staff.
Sensitivity adjust- Replace instrument.

ment pulls pointer
off zero.
Vibrating pointer. Gimbal and rotor Replace instrument

assembly out of
balance.
Pitted or worn pivots Replace instrument.

or bearings.
In low temperature, Oil has become too Replace instrument.

pointer fails to re- thick.
spond or does so
sluggishly and with Insufficient bearing Replace instrument.
insufficient deflec- clearance.
tion.
Pointer sluggish in Oil or dirt between Replace instrument.

returning to zero damping pistons
and does not set on and cylinder.
zero when station-
ary.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/18/81
4B18
TABLE X-III. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART (INSTRUMENTS) (cont.)
Trouble
I Cause
I Remedy
TURN AND BANK INDICATOR (cont. )
Pointer sluggish in re- Excessive clearance Replace instrument.

turning to zero and between rotor and
does not set on zero rotor pivots.
when stationary (cont).
Ball in inclinometer Instrument out of Correct alignment.

does not center. alignment on panel.
OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATORS
Instrument fails to Broken or damaged Check engine unit and

show any reading. capillary. Wiring wiring to instrument.
open.
Excessive scale Improper calibration Repair or replace.

error. adjustment.
Pointer fails to move Broken or damaged Check engine unit and

as engine is warmed capillary or open wiring.
up. wiring.
Dull or discolored Age. Replace instrument.

luminous marking.
MANIFOLD PRESSURE INDICATOR
Excessive error at Pointer shifted. Replace instrument.

existing barometric
pressure.
Excessive error when Line leaking. Tighten line connections.

engine is running.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2, 18/81
4B19
TABLE X-III. TROUBLESHOOTING

CHART (INSTRUMENTS) (cont.)
(INSTRUMENT)
CHART
TROUBLESHOOTING
MANIFOLD PRESSURE
MANIFOLD
PRESSURE INDICATOR (cont.)
INDICATOR
Sluggish or jerky Improper damping Adjust damping scr ew.

pointer movement. adjustment.
Broken or loose Vibration or exces- Replace glass and

cover glass. sive pressure. seat case.
Dull or discolored Age. Replace instrument

luminous markings.
Incorrect reading. Moisture or oil in Disconnect lines and

line. blow out.
FUEL PRESSURE GAUGE 0

Low or no pressure Defective fuel pump. Replace.
indication.
Defective electric Replace.
fuel pump switch.
Defective wiring. Repair.
Defective gauge. Replace.
Leak in engine pump Repair.

diaphragm.
Leak in pressure Repair.

line.
Needle fluctuation. Surge dome on pump Remove and empty.

filled with fuel.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/18/81
4B20
Trouble
I Cause
I Remedy
FUEL QUANTITY INDICATORS
Inaccurate or no Defective gauge. Replace.

indication.
Defective micro Replace.
switch.
Defective fuel trans- Repair or replace.

mitter.
Gauge indicates full Intermittent or no Repair.

constantly. ground.
CARBURETOR AIR TEMPERATURE INDICATOR
No temperature Broken wire or lead. Repair.

indication.
Defective instrument. Replace.
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE
Excessive error at Pointer loose on shaft. Replace instrument.

zero. Overpressure or
seasoning of bourdon
tube.
Excessive scale. Improper calibration Replace instrument.

adjustment.
Excessive pointer Improper damping or Disconnect line and

oscillation. rough engine relief Check for leaks. If
valve. trouble persists, clean
and adjust relief valve.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/18/81
4B21
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE (cont.)
Sluggish operation of Engine relief valve Check and clean.

pointer or pressure open.
fails to build up.
TACHOMETER
No reading on indica- Broken shaft. Replace instrument.

tor, either permanent
or intermittent. Springs weak. Replace instrument.
Pointer oscillates Rough spot on, or Repair or replace.

excessively. sharp bend in shaft.
Excess friction in Replace instrument.

instrument.
FLAP POSITION INDICATOR
Inaccurate or no Defective indicator. Replace.

indication.
Defective flap trans- Repair or replace.

mitter.
Indicator indicates Intermittent or no Repair.

up constantly. ground.
MAGNETIC COMPASS
Excessive card error. Compass not properly Compensate instrument.

compensated.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued:2/18/81
4B22
TABLE X-III. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART (INSTRUMENTS) (cont. )
MAGNETIC COMPASS(cont.)
Excessive card error External magnetic Locate magnetic inter-

(cont). interference. ference and eliminate
if possible.
Excessive card Improper mounting on Align instrument.

oscillation. instrument panel.
Insufficient liquid. Replace instrument.
Card sluggish. Weak card magnet. Replace instrument.
Excessive pivot fric- Replace instrument.

tion or broken jewel.
Instrument too heavily Remove excess com-

compensated. sation.
Liquid leakage. Loose bezel screws. Replace instrument.
Broken cover glass. Replace instrument.
Defective sealing Replace instrument.

gaskets.
Discolored luminous Age. Replace instrument.

markings damping
liquid.
Defective light. Burned out lamp or Check lamp or

broken circuit. continuity of wiring.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2 18 81
4B23
TABLE X-III. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART (INSTRUMENTS) (cont.)
EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE
Gauge inoperative. Defective gauge, probe Isolate defective cir-

or wiring. cuit, replace defective
probe or gauge.
Fluctuating reading. Loose, frayed or Tighten connections,

broken electrical lead. and repair or replace
defective leads.
INSTRUMENTS
Reissued: 2/18/81
4B24
SECTION
XI
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEM
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
11-1. Introduction .............................. . 4C10
11-2. Description .............. ......... ...... . 4C10
11-3. Troubleshooting ............................... . 4CI 1
11-4. Generator System (Delco-Remy) ....................... 4C11
11-5. Description of Generator System ................. 4C11
11-6. Description of Generator ParallelingSystem ........... 4C11
11-7. CheckingGenerator System . ............. .......... 4C13
11-8. Adjustments, Tests and Maintenanceof
Generator System ........................ 4C14
11-9. Test and Maintenanceof Generator
(Delco-Remy) .......................... 4C15
11-10. Inspection of Generator .................... .......... 4C15
11-11. Shunt Generator Output ....................... . 4C16
11-12. CheckingDefectiveGenerators .................... 4C17
11-13. No O utput . ....................... 4C17
11-14. Unsteady or Low Output . .................. .. . 4C19
11-15. ExcessiveOutput ...... ............ ........... 4C19
11-16. Noisy Generator ........................... 4C20
11-17. Disassembly,Repair and Reassembly . .............. 4C20
11-18. Field Coil Removal ......................... 4C20
11-19. Inspection and Repairof Parts . ................. . 4C21
11-20. Field Coil Service .......................... 4C21
11-21. Armature Service .......................... 4C21
11-22. PolarizingGenerator ......................... 4C22
11-23. Generator ServiceTest Specifications ............... 4C22
11-24. Regulator (Delco-Remy) ...................... 4C23
11-25. Description of Regulator ................... . 4C23
11-26. Cutout Relay ............................. 4C23
11-27. Voltage Regulator ......... ................ 4C24
11-28. Current Regulator ................... 4D1
11-29. Resistances ............................. 4D1
11-30. Temperature Compensation . .................. 4D2
11-31. Regulator Polarity ................... 4D2
11-32. Regulator Maintenance . .................. . 4D3
11-33. Maintenance Instructions . .................. . 4D3
11-34. CleaningContact Points ....................... 4D4
11-35. Regulator Checks and Adjustments . .............. . 4D4
11-36. Voltage Regulator .. ............... 4D4

Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
1-37. Cutout Relay .............. 4D8
11-38. Current Regulator ........... . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
4D9
11-39. Regulator Repairs ........... . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .
4D10
11-40. Regulator Spring Replacement .... . .. . . . . . . . . . .. .
4D10
11-41. Radio By-Pass Condensers ... 4D11
11-42. Regulator Armature Replacement . . 4D1
11-43. High Points on Regulator Performance and
Checks ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4D11
11-44. Regulator Service Test Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D12
11-45. Paralleling Relay (Delco-Remy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D13
1146. Relay Checks and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D13
11-47. Air Gap ................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D13
11-48. Point Opening ............. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D13
11-49. Closing Voltage ............ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D13
11-50. Relay Service Test Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D14
11-51. Alternator System ................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D15
11-52. Description of Alternator ....... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D15
11-53. Checking Alternator System ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D15
11-54. Adjustments ....... 4D16
11-55. Alternator and Components (Delco-Remy) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D18
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-56. Inspection .............. 4D18
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-57. Disassembly ...... 4D18
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-58. Checks ........ 4D19
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-59. Diode Replacement .......... 4D22
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-60. Slip Ring Servicing ........... 4D22
11-61. Bearing Replacement and Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D22
11-62. Brush Replacement ..... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D23
11-63. Heat Sink Replacement ........ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D24
11-64. Reassembly ............... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4D24
11-65. Output Check ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E1
11-66. Alternator Service Test Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E2
11-67. Regulator (Delco-Remy) ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E4
11-68. Checking Regulator Circuit ...... . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4E4
11-69. Relay (Delco-Remy) .......... 4E6
11-70. Checking Relay ............ 4E6
11-71. Alternator and Components (Prestolite) .... 4E8
11-72. Description of Alternator ....... 4E8
11-73. Overhaul of Alternator ........ 4E9
11-74. Alternator Service Inspection .... 4E9
..............
11-75. Disassembly of Alternator ... 4E11
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-76. Inspection and Testing of Components 4E12
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-77. Assembly of Alternator ........ 4E14
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
11-78. Testing of Alternator ......... 4E16
11-79. Precautions ....... ...... 4E16
Reissued: 2/18/81
4C2
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid
Grid No.
No.
11-80. Alternator Nomenclature .................. .... 4E17
11-81. Alternator ServiceTest Specifications ..... . ...... . 4E18
11-82. Alternator ParallelingSystem ................... .. 4E19
11-83. Description of Alternator ParallelingSystem .......... 4E19
11-84. Description of Alternator ..................... 4E19
11-85. CheckingAlternator ParallelingSystem .............. 4E19
11-86. Regulator .. .................. ..... 4E23
11-87. Regulator Components (Prestolite) ................ 4E23
11-88. Regulator Components (Lamar) ................. 4E24
11-89. Operation of Regulator (Prestolite) ................ 4E24
11-90. Operation of Regulator (Lamar) .................. 4F1
11-91. BalancingCircuit Operation .................... 4F3
11-92. Preparation for Testing ....................... 4F3
11-93. Testing Regulator (Prestolite) ................ . 4F4
11-94. Testing Regulator (Lamar) .................... . 4F5
11-95. Adjusting Regulator (Prestolite) .................. 4F6
11-96. Adjusting Regulator (Lamar) ................ ... 4F7
11-97. OvervoltageControl ......................... 4F8
11-98. Purpose and Operation ....................... 4F9
11-99. Test Procedure ................... . 4....
4F9
11-100. OvervoltageRelay Operational Check
(Non-ParallelingSystem) .................... 4F10
11-101. OvervoltageRelay Operational Check
(ParallelingSystem) ....................... 4F1 1
11-102. CheckingGenerator or Alternator Belt Tension .............. 4F11
11-103. Starting Motor (Delco-Remy) ....................... 4F14
11-104. Operation of Starting Motor .................... 4F14
11-105. CheckingStarting Motor ................ . 4F14
11-106. Test and Maintenanceof Starting Motors ............. 4F15
11-107. Inspection .............................. 4F15
11-108. No-Load Test ............................. 4F15
11-109. Lock-Torque Test .................... . 4F16
11-110. Resistance Test ............................ 4F17
1-111. Disassembly ............................. 4F17
11-112. Component Inspection and Repair ................ 4F18
11-113. Assembly ............................... 4F19
11-114. Starting Motor ServiceTest Specifications ............ 4F19
11-115. Starting Motors (Prestolite) ........................... 4F20
11-116. Description .............................. 4F20
11-117. Operation ............................... 4F20
11-118. Maintenance ............................. 4F21
11-119. Overhaul ............................... 4F22
11-120. Removal .. ................. ............ 4F22
11-121. Disassembly ............................. 4F22
11-122. Brushes ................................ 4F23
4C3 Reissued: 2 18/81

Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
11-123. Armature ..... ................ 4F23
.. 4F24
11-125. BrushHolders ........... ......... .. 4F24
.. 4F24
11-127. BendixDrive ............................ .. 4F24
11-128. Assembly .............................. .. 4F24
11-129. BenchTests ............................. .. 4G1
11-130. Starting Motor Control Circuit .................. .. 4G2
11-131. Starting Motor ServiceTest Specifications .... ...... .. 4G3
11-132. Battery ..................................... .. 4G4
11-133. Servicingthe Battery ....................... .. 4G4
11-134. Removalof Battery ........................ .. 4G4
11-135. Installation of Battery ....................... .. 4G4
11-136. ChargingBattery .......................... . 4G4
11-137. Battery Box Corrosion Prevention ................ . 4G5
11-138. CheckingElectricalSwitch and Circuit
Breaker ............................. .. 4G5
11-139. LandingLight ................................. .. 4G6
11-140. Removalof Landing Light
(PA-23-250and PA-23-235) ................. .. 4G6
11-141. Installation of LandingLight
(PA-23-250and PA-23-235) ................. 4G6
11-142. Removalof Landing Light (PA-23-250
(six place) ........................... .. 4G7
11-143. Installation of Landing Light (PA-23-250
(six place) ........................... .. 4G7
11-144. Removalof LandingLight (PA-23-250
SerialNos. 27-4426 and 27-4574 and up) ......... .. 4G7
11-145. Installation of LandingLight (PA-23-250
SerialNos. 27-4426 and 27-4574 and up) ......... .. 4G7
11-146. Removalof Lamp in Anti-CollisionWing
Tip Strobe Light .................... .. 4G8
11-147. Installation of Lamp in Anti-Collision
WingTip Strobe Light ..... .............. .. 4G8
11-148. Removalof Lamp in Anti-Collision
Strobe Light ................................ .. 4G8
11-149. TroubleshootingProcedurefor Anti-Collision
and WingTip Strobe Light Systems ............. .. 4G8
11-150. Installationof Anti-CollisionLight ............... .. 4G10
4C4 Reissued:2/18/81
TABLE XI-I. INDEX- ELECTRICALSYSTEMSCHEMATICS
Aerofiche
System Figure Grid No.
Accessoryand Autopilot, PA-23-250(six place),
Serial Nos. 27-3457 to 27-7554172 incl. 11-99 4112
Accessoryand Autopilot, PA-23-250(six place) "F" Model,
Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up 11-147 4L11
Alternator System (Delco-Remy),PA-23-250(six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3836 incl. and
27-3838 to 27-3943 incl. 11-106 4119
Alternator System (Prestolite), PA-23-250(six place),
Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 to 274793 incl. 11-107 4121
Alternator ParallelingSystem (Prestolite), PA-23-250(six
place), SerialNos. 274794 to 27-5005 incl. 11-109 4J1
place), SerialNos. 27-5006 to 27-7554172 incl. 11-108 4123
place) "F" Model, Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up 11-149 4L13
External Power Supply, PA-23-250and PA-23-250(six place) 11-100 4113
External Power Supply, PA-23-250and PA-23-235 11-101 4113
External Power Supply, PA-23-250(six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3836 incl. and 27-3838
to 27-3943 incl 11-102 4114
External Power Supply, PA-23-250(six place),
Serial Nos. 27-3837, 37-3944 to 27-7554172 incl. 11-103 4114
Fuel Pumps (14 & 28-volt),PA-23-250;PA-23-235; and
PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. 11-68 4H10
Fuel Pumps, PA-23-250(six place), Serial
Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3836 incl. and 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl. 11-69 4H11
Fuel Pumps, PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos.
27-3837, 27-3944 to 27-7554172 incl. 11-70 4H12
Fuel Pumps, PA-23-250(six place) "F" Model, SerialNos.
27-7654001 and up (Earlier Models) 11-134 4K23
Fuel Pumps, PA-23-250(six place) "F" Model, SerialNos.
27-7654001 and up (Later Models) 11-135 4K24
Generator System (Delco-Remy)(14 & 28-volt), PA-23-250and
PA-23-235 11-104 4115
Generator System (DelcoRemy) (14 & 28-volt), PA-23-250(six
palce), SerialNos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. 11-105 4117
Heated Windshield,PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 to 27-7554172 incl. 11-98 4112
Heated Windshield,PA-23-250(six place) "F" Model,
Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up 11-141 4L5
Heater, Map Lights and Cigar Lighter (14 & 28-volt),PA-23-250
and PA-23-235 11-71 4H13
Reissued: 2/18/81
4C5
TABLE XI-I. INDEX - ELECTRICAL SYSTEM SCHEMATICS (cont)
Aerofiche
Heater, Map Lights and Cigar Lighter, PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. 11-72 4H 14
Heater, Map Lights and Cigar Lighter (28-volt), PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2298 and 27-2331 11-73 4H 15
Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3049 incl. and 27-3151 to
27-3154incl. 11-74 4H 16
Serial Nos. 27-3050, 27-3154 to 27-7554168 incl. 11-75 4H 17
Heater and Cigar Lighter, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up (Earlier Models) 11-136 4L1
Heater and Cigar Lighter, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up (Later Models) 11-137 4L2
Heater with Reset and Cigar Lighter, PA-23-250 (six place)
"F" Model, Serial Nos. 27-8154001 and up 11-138 4L3
Instrument Cluster Wiring (14 & 28-volt Systems), PA-23-250
and PA-23-235 11-121 4K3
Instrument Cluster Wiring (14 & 28-volt Systems), PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-3837 incl.
and 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl. 11-122 4K5
Instrument Cluster Wiring, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-3837, 27-3944 to 27-7554172 incl. 11-123 4K7
Instrument Cluster Wiring, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up (Earlier Models) 11-150 4L17
Instrument Cluster Wiring, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up (Later Models) 11-151 4L19
Interior Lights, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 to 27-3153 incl. 11-117 4J19
Interior Lights, PA-23-250 (six place). Serial Nos.
27-3154 to 27-3836 incl. and 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl. 11-118 4J21
Interior Lights, PA-23-250 (six place). Serial Nos.
27-3837, 27-3944 to 27-4766 incl. 11-119 4J23
27-4767 to 27-7554172 incl. 11-120 4K1
Interior Lights, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model, Serial Nos.
27-7654001 to 27-7954121 incl. 11-145 4L9
27-8054001 and up 11-148 4L12
Landing and Taxi Lights (14 & 28-volt), PA-23-250 and
PA-23-235 11-76 4H 18
Landing and Taxi Lights (14 & 28-volt), PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-7554172 incl. 11-77 4H19
Landing and Taxi Lights, PA-23-250 "F" Model, Serial Nos.
27-7654001 and up 11-139 4L4
Landing Gear and Flap System, PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 11-124 4K9
Reissued: 2/18/81
4C6
TABLEXI-I. INDEX - ELECTRICALSYSTEMSCHEMATICS(cont)
Aerofiche
Landing Gear and Flap System (14 & 28-volt), PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. 11-125 4K11
LandingGear and Flap System, PA-23-250(six place),
to 27-3943 incl. 11-126 4K13
LandingGear and Flap System, PA-23-250(six place),
Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 to 27-7554172 incl. 11-127 4K15
Landing Gear and Flap System, PA-23-250(six place) "F"
Model, SerialNos. 27-7654001 and up (EarlierModels) 11-152 4L21
LandingGear and Flap System, PA-23-250(six place) "F"
Model, SerialNos. 27-7654001 and up (Later Models) 11-153 4L23
Navigationand Instrument Lights, PA-23-250,Serial Nos.
27-1 to 27-258 incl.; 27-365 to 27-401 incl. and 27403
to 27-504 incl. and PA-23-235 11-80 4H21
Navigationand Instrument Lights (28-volt), PA-23-250,
Serial Nos. 27-259 to 27-364 incl. 11-81 4H22
Navigationand Instrument Lights (28-volt), PA-23-250,
Serial Nos. 27402 11-82 4H23
Pitot Heat (14 & 28-volt), PA-23-250 and PA-23-235 11-78 4H20
Pitot Heat (14 & 28-volt),PA-23-250 (six
place), SerialNos. 27-2000 to 27-7554172 incl. 11-79 4H20
Pitot Heat, PA-23-250(six place) "F" Model, Serial
Nos. 27-7654001 and up 11-140 4L4
Position Lights (14 & 28-volt), PA-23-250(six place), Serial
Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. 11-83 4H24
Position Lights,PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 to 27-7554172 incl. 11-84 411
Position Lights,PA-23-250(six place) "F" Model, Serial Nos.
27-7654001 and up.(Earlier Models) 11-142 4L6
Position Lights,PA-23-250(six place) "F" Model, Serial Nos.
27-7654001 and up (Later Models) 11-143 4L7
Post Lights,PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 to 27-2704 incl. 11-85 412
Post Lights,PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos.
27-2705 to 27-3836 incl. and 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl. 11-86 413
Post Lights,PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
274794 to 27-7554172 incl. 11-87 414
Post Lights,PA-23-250 (six place), SerialNos.
27-3837, 27-3944 to 274793 incl. 11-88 415
Post Lights, PA-23-250(six place) "F" Model, SerialNos.
27-7654001 and up 11-144 4L8
Reissued: 2/18/81
4C7
TABLEXI-I. INDEX- ELECTRICALSYSTEMSCHEMATICS(cont)
Aerofiche
Rotating Beacon (14 & 28-volt), PA-23-250and PA-23-235 11-89 416
Rotating Beacon (14 & 28-volt), PA-23-250(six place) 11-90 416
Stall Warning(14 & 28-volt), PA-23-250;PA-23-235;and
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. 11-93 418
Stall Warning,PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 to 27-7554172 incl. 11-94 419
Stall Warning,PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505 to 27-7554172 incl. 11-95 4110
Stall Warning,PA-23-250(six place) "F" Model, SerialNos.
27-7654001 and up 11-146 4L10
Starter System (Delco-Remy, 14 & 28-volt), PA-23-250;
PA-23-235;and PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000
to 27-2504 incl. 11-110 4J3
Starter System (Delco-Remy),PA-23-250(six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3831 inc. 11-111 4J5
Starter System (Delco-Remy),PA-23-250(six place),
to 27-3943 incl. 11-112 4J7
Starter System (Delco-Remy),PA-23-250 (six place),
to 27-3943 incl. with AiResearchTurbocharger Starter
System Schematic 11-113 4J9
Starter System (Prestolite), PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 to 27-7554172 incl. 11-114 4J11
Starter System (Prestolite), PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
SerialNos. 27-7654001 and up (EarlierModels) 11-115' 4J13
Starter System (Prestolite), PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
SerialNos. 27-7654001 and up (Later Models) 11-116 4J15
Strobe Light (Red Anti Collision)(14 & 28-volt), PA-23-250
and PA-23-235 11-91 417
Strobe Light (Red Anti-Collision)(14 & 28-volt), PA-23-250
(six place) 11-92 417
Strobe Light (Red Anti Collision) 11-128 4K17
Strobe Light (Red Anti Collision) 11-129 4K18
Strobe Light (White Anit Collision) 11-130 4K19
Strobe Light (White Anti Collision) 11-131 4K20
Strobe Light (WhiteAnti Collision)PA-23-250(six place) "F"
Model, SerialNos. 27-7654001 and up (Earlier Models) 11-132 4K21
Strobe Light (WhiteAnti Collision)PA-23-250(six place) "F"
Model, SerialNos. 27-7654001 and up (Later Models) 11-133 4K22
Turn & Bank (14 & 28-volt),PA-23-250(six place), Serial
Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. 11-96 4111
Turn and Bank, PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos.
27-2505 and up 11-97 4111
Reissued:2/18/81
4C8
4C9
SECTION XI
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
11-1. INTRODUCTION. This section contains instructions for correcting diffi-

culties which may arise in the operation of the electrical system. It includes a
general description and function of each part of the system along with test and
adjustments of the various components, a circuit load chart and electrical
system schematics. For AutoPilot or Radio Service Information, refer to
Section XII of this manual.
11-2. DESCRIPTION. Electrical power is supplied by a 14- or 28-volt, direct

current, single wire, negative ground electrical system. One or two 12-volt
batteries are incorporated in the system to furnish power for starting, and as a
reserve power source, in case of generator or alternator failure.
On PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000
to 27-2504 incl. airplanes, the system consists of two engine driven, 50-ampere
generators when the 14-volt system is installed and two 25-ampere generators
when the 28-volt system is utilized; however, a kit is available to convert the
28-volt, 25-ampere system to a 50-ampere system. Two generator regulator
assemblies, composed of a voltage regulator, current regulator, and a reverse
current cutout, are installed in the generator circuits to protect the system and
its components.
On PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos. 27-2505 and up airplanes, the electricalsystem
consists of two engine-driven70-ampere alternators. They are paralleled by the use of one
voltage regulator to control field voltage of both units. Also incorporated in the system is an
over-voltage relay. Its function is to open and remove field voltage to the unregulated
alternators in the event of a failure of the voltage regulator. An auxiliary voltage regulator
and over-voltagerelay are also furnished.
An external power receptacle can be provided as optional equipment in the

nose of the airplane, for the use of external power during cold weather operation.
Electrical switches and rheostats are located onthe left side of the cockpit under
the instrument panel. The circuit breakers are mounted, in a panel, just to the
left of the control quadrant. The airplane is equipped with standard navigation
lights, one landing light located in the nose, and a taxi light mounted on the nose
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2. 18 81
4C10
gear assembly.
11-3. TROUBLESHOOTING. Troubles peculiar to the electrical system are listed in Table
XI-I in the back of this section, along with their probable causes and suggestedremedies. An
electrical schematic index may be found just prior to Section XI.
WARNING
All checks and adjustments of the generator or alter-

nator and/or its components should be made with the
engines stopped. Therefore, to complete some checks
or adjustments, it will be necessary to remove these
units from the airplane and be placed on a test stand.
11-4. GENERATOR SYSTEM (Delco-Remy).
11-5. DESCRIPTION OF GENERATOR SYSTEM. The generator is of the two

brush, shunt type and is controlled by a regulator operating on the principal of
inserting resistance into the generator field circuit to cause a reduction of gen-
erator voltage and current output. With each generator is the regulator assem-
bly, composed of a voltage regulator and current regulator, to prevent overload-
ing of the battery and electrical circuits. Also with the regulator is a reverse
current cutout to prevent the generator from being motorized by the battery when
the generator output drops below the battery voltage. A paralleling relay is used
to connect the two generators. The generator is located on the front lower right
side of the engine and utilizes a belt drive from the engine crankshaft. The gen-
erator voltage regulator is located on the engine firewall. The best assurance of
obtaining maximum service from the generator with minimum trouble is to follow
a regular inspection and maintenance procedure.
11-6. DESCRIPTION OF GENERATOR PARALLELING SYSTEM. Dual genera-

tors are installed with standard three unit regulators which incorporate a "par-
alleling winding"on the voltage regulator unit. These paralleling windings func-
tion in such a manner that each generator tends to take an equal portion of the
electrical load.
The cut-out relay, current regulator and voltage regulator unit of the reg-
ulators function in the same manner as standard regulators. The paralleling coil,
located on the voltage regulator unit of each regulator, is connected into the cir-
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18 81
4C11
RIGHT VOLTAGE PARALLELING

REGULATOR RELAY
RIGHT
GENERATOR
RIGHTGENERATOR
SWITCH
RESISTOR
TO MASTER
SOLENOID
LEFT VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
LEFT GENERATOR
SWITCH BAT F GEN
LEFT
GENERATOR
Figure 11-1. Generator Wiring System Schematic
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4C12
4C12 Reissued: 2/ 18/81
cuit so that it either aids or opposes the voltage regulator shunt winding, depend-
ing on the direction of current flow through the coil.
When the operating voltage of one regulator tends to be at a different volt-
age than that of the other regulator, current will flow through the paralleling coils
from the regulator with the higher setting. The paralleling coils are connected
so that this current flow lowers the voltage of the regulator with the highest set-
ting. The amount of currentwhichflows through theparalleling coils is the amount
required to cause the regulators to operate at the same voltage.
The two-unit paralleling relay acts as a switch to either join or separate
the ends of the paralleling coils of the two regulators. Each set of contacts in
the external two-unit paralleling relay (Refer to Figure 11-4. ) close when the
voltage of each respective generator reaches the value for which the relay is ad-
justed. These contacts close the circuit joining the ends of the paralleling wind-
ings on the voltage regulator units. If one generator should fail, the contacts of
the paralleling relay unit of that charging system open, breaking the circuit be-
tween the paralleling windings. If the other generator and regulator are not de-
fective, they will operate as a normal single generator charging system.
11-7. CHECKING GENERATOR SYSTEM. Inanalyzingcomplaintsofgenerator-

regulator operation, any of several basic conditions may be found.
a. Fully Charged Battery and Low Charging Rate: This indicates normal gen-
erator-regulator operation. Regulator setting may be checked as outlined inpara-
graph 11-24.
b. Fully Charged Battery and a High Charging Rate: This indicates that the volt-
age regulator is not reducing the generator output as it should. A high charging
rate to a fully charged battery will damage the battery and the accompanying high
voltage is very injurious to all electrical units.
This operating condition may result from:
1. Improper voltage regulator setting.
2. Defective voltage regulator unit.
3. Grounded generator field circuit (in either generator, regulator or wir-
ing).
4. Poor ground connection at regulator.
5. High temperature which reduces the resistance of the battery to charge
so that it will accept a high charging rate even though the voltage regulator set-
ting is normal.
If the trouble is not due to high temperature, determine the cause of trouble
by disconnecting the lead from the regulator "F" terminal with the generator op-
erating at medium speed. If the output remains high, the generator field is ground-
ed either in the generator or in the wiring harness. If the output drops off, the
regulator is at fault, and it should be checked for a high voltage setting or grounds.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4C13
c. Low Battery and High Charging Rate: This is normal generator-regulator

action. Regulator settings may be checked as outlined in paragraph 11-24.
d. Low Battery and Low or No Charging Rate: This condition could be due to:
1. Loose connections, frayed or damaged wires.
2. Defective battery.
3. High circuit resistance.
4. Low regulator setting.
5. Oxidized regulator contact points.
6. Defects within the generator.
If the condition is not caused by loose connections, frayed or damaged wires,
proceed as follows to locate cause of trouble.
To determine whether the generator or regulator is at fault, momentarily
ground the "F" terminal of the regulator and increase generator speed. If the
output does not increase, the generator is probably at fault and it should be check-
ed as outlined in paragraph 11-9. If the generator output increases, the trouble
is due to:
1. A low voltage (or current) regulator setting.
2. Oxidized regulator contact points which insert excessive resistance into
the generator field circuit so that output remains low.
3. Generator field circuit open within the regulator at the connections or
in the regulator wiring.
e. Burned Resistances, Windings or Contacts: These result from open circuit
operation or high resistance in the charging circuit. Where burned resistances,
windings or contacts are found, always check wiring before installing a new reg-
ulator. Otherwise the new regulator may also fail in the same way.
f. Burned Relay Contact Points: This is due to reversed generator polarity.
Generator polarity must be corrected as explained in paragraph 11-22 after any
checks of the regulator or generator or after disconnecting and reconnecting leads.
11-8. ADJUSTMENTS, TESTS AND MAINTENANCE OF GENERATOR SYSTEM.

The best assurance of obtaining maximum service from generators with
minimum trouble is to follow a regular inspection and maintenance procedure.
Periodic lubrication where required, inspection of the brushes and commutator
and checking of the brush spring tension are essentials in the inspection proce-
dure. In addition, disassembly and thorough overhauling of the generator at pe-
riodic intervals are desirable as a safeguard against failures from accummula-
tions of dust and grease and normal wear of parts. This is particularly desir-
able on installations where maintenance of operating schedules is of special im-
portance. In addition to the generator itself, the external circuits between the
generator, regulator and battery must be kept in good condition since defective
wiring or loose or corroded connections will prevent normal generator and reg-
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4C14 4C14 Reissued: 2 1881
ulator action. At times it may be found necessary to adjust the voltage regulator
or if dual generators are installed, the voltage regulators and paralleling relay.
More detailed instructions may be found in the paragraph to follow.
11-9. TEST AND MAINTENANCE OF GENERATOR (Delco-Remy).
11-10. INSPECTION OF GENERATOR.

a. At periodic intervals the generator should be inspected to determine its con-
dition. The frequence with which this should be done will be determined by the
type of service in which it is used. High speedoperation, excessive dust or dirt,
high temperatures and operating the generator at or near full output most of the
time are all factors which increase bearing, commutator, and brush wear. Gen-
erally speaking,the units should be inspectedat approximately 100-hourintervals. The inspec-
tion procedure follows:
b. First inspect the terminals, external connections and wiring, mounting,
pulley and belt. Then remove the cover band so that the commutator, brushes
and internal connections can be inspected. If the commutator is dirty it may be
cleaned with a strip of No. 00 sandpaper. Never use emery cloth to clean the
commutator.
c. The sandpaper may be used by holding it against the commutator with a wood
stick while the generator is rotated, moving it back and forth across the commu-
tator. Gum and dirt will be sanded off in a few seconds. All dust should be blown
from the generator after the commutator has been cleaned. A brush seating stone
can also be used to clean the commutator.
d. If the commutator is rough, out of round, or has high mica, the generator
must be removed and disassembled so that the armature can be turned down in a
lathe and the mica undercut.
e. If the brushes are worn down to less than half their original length, they
should be replaced. Compare the old brush with a new one to determine how much
it is worn. New brushes should be seated to make sure that they are in good con-
tact with the commutator. Aconvenient tool for seating brushes is a brush seat-
ing or bedding stone. This is a soft abrasive material which, when held against
a revolving commutator, disintegrates so that particles are carried under the
brushes and wear their contacting faces to the contour of the commutator in a few
seconds. All dust should be blown from the generator after the brushes are seated.
f. The brush spring tension must be correct since excessive tension will cause
rapid brush and commutator wear, while low tension causes arcing and burning
of the brushes and commutator. Brush springtension can be checked with a spring
gauge hooked on the brush armor brush attaching screw. Correction can be made
by bending the brush spring as required. If the brush spring shows evidence of
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4C15 4C15 Reissued: 2 18/81
COMMUTATOR
END FRAME
BRUSH
COVERBAND
ARMATURE
DRIVE ENDFRAME FIELD COIL
Figure 11-2. Sectional View of Generator
overheating (blued or burned), do not attempt to readjust it, but install a new
spring. Overheating will cause a spring to lose its temper.
g. The belt should be checked to make sure that it is in good condition and has
correct tension. Low belt tensionwill permit belt slippagewith a resulting rapid
belt wear and low or erratic generator output. Excessive belt tension will cause
rapid belt and bearing wear. Check the tension of a new belt 25 hours after in-
stallation. Proper adjustment is given in paragraph 11-102.
11-11. SHUNT GENERATOR OUTPUT. The maximum output of shunt generators

is determined by the current setting of the current regulator with which the shunt
generator is used. Checking of this setting is discussed in the applicable regula-
tor bulletin.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
/fReissued: 2/ 18/81
4C16
11-12. CHECKING DEFECTIVE GENERATORS. If the generator-regulator sys-

tem does not perform according to specifications (generator does not produce
rated output or produces excessive output), and the trouble has been isolated in
the generator itself by following the procedure outlined in paragraph 11-6, the
generator may be checked further as follows to determine the location of trouble
in the generator.
11-13. NO OUTPUT.
a. If the generator will not produce any output, remove the cover band and
check the commutator, brushes and internal connections. Sticking brushes, a
dirty or gummy commutator (Refer to paragraph 11-21. ) or poor connections may
prevent the generator from producing any output. Thrown solder on the cover
band indicates that the generator has been overloaded (allowed to produce exces-
sive output) so it has overheated and melted the solder at the commutator riser
bars. Solder thrown out often leads to an open circuit and burned commutator
bars. If the brushes are satisfactorily seated and are making good contact with
the commutator, and the cause of trouble is not apparent, use a set of test points
and a test lamp as follows to locate the trouble (leads must be disconnected from
generator terminals).
b. Raise the grounded brush from the commutator and insulate with a piece of
cardboard. Check for grounds with test points from the generator main brush to
the generator frame. If the lamp lights, it indicates that the generator is inter-
nally grounded. Location of the ground can be found by raising and insulating all
brushes from the commutator and checking the brush holders, armature, com-
mutator and field separately. Repair or replace defective parts as required.
(Refer to paragraph 11-19. )
NOTE
If a grounded field is found, check the regulator con-

tact points, since a grounded field may have permit-
ted an excessive field current which will have burned
the regulator contact points. Burned regulator points
should be cleaned or replaced as required.
c. If the generator is not grounded, check the field for an open circuit with a
test lamp. The lamp should light when one test point is placed on the field ter-
minal or grounded field lead and the other is placed on the brush holder to which
the field is connected. If it does not light, the circuit is open. If the open is due
to a broken lead or bad connection, it can be repaired, but if the open is inside
one of the field coils, it must be replaced.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4C17
C502
REGULATOR REGULATOR
RELAY
GENERATOR
Figure 11-3. Wiring Circuit
d. If the field is not open, check for a short circuit in the field by connecting
a battery of the specified voltage and an ammeter in series with the field circuit.
Proceed with care, since a shorted field may draw excessive current which might
damage the ammeter. If the field is not within specification, new field coils will
be required. (Refer to paragraph 11-19. )
NOTE
If a shorted field is found, check the regulator contact

points, since a shorted field may have permitted ex-
cessive field current whichwould have caused the reg-
ulator contact points to burn. Clean or replace points
as required.
e. If the trouble has not yet been located, check the armature for open and
short circuits. Open circuits in the armature are usually obvious, since the open
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4C18
circuited commutator bars will arc every time they pass under the generator
brushes so that they will soon become burned. If the bars are not too badly burn-
ed and the open circuit can be repaired, the armature can usually be saved. In
addition to repairing the armature, generator output must be brought down to
specifications to prevent overloading by readjustment of the regulator.
f. Short circuits in the armature are located by use of a growler. The ar-
mature is placed in the growler and slowly rotated (while a thin strip of steel such
as a hacksaw blade is held above the armature core). The steel strip will vibrate
above the area of the armature core in which short circuited armature coils are
located. If the short circuit is obvious, it can often be repaired so that the ar-
mature can be saved.
11-14. UNSTEADY OR LOW OUTPUT. If the generator produces a low or un-

steady output, the following factors should be considered:
a. A loose drive belt will slip and cause a low or unsteady output.
b. Brushes which stick in their holders, or low brush spring tension will pre-
vent good contact between the brushes and commutator so that output will be low
and unsteady. This will also cause arcing and burning of the brushes and com-
mutator.
c. If the commutator is dirty, out of round, or has high mica, generator out-
put is apt to be low and unsteady. The remedy here is to turn the commutator
down in a lathe and undercut the mica. Burned commutator bars may indicate an
open circuit condition in the armature as already stated above. (Refer to para-
graph 11-13. )
11-15. EXCESSIVE OUTPUT.

a. When a generator produces excessive output on an application, the proce-
dure for determining whether the trouble is in the generator, regulator, or else-
where is outlined in paragraph 11-7. If the generator output remains high, even
with the "F" terminal lead disconnected, then the trouble is in the generator it-
self, and it must be further analyzed to locate the source of trouble.
b. In the systemwhich has the generator fieldcircuit grounded externally, ac-
cidental internal grounding of the field circuit would prevent normal regulation so
that excessive output might be produced by the generator. On this type of unit,
an internally grounded field which would cause excessive output may be located
by use of test points connected between the "F" terminal and the generator frame.
Leads should be disconnected from the "F" terminal and the brush to which the
field lead is connected inside the generator should be raised from the commu-
tator before this test is made. If the lamp lights, the field is internally grounded.
If the field has become grounded because the insulation on a field lead has worn
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4C19
4C19 Reissued: 2/ 18'81
away, repair can be made by reinsulating the lead. It is also possible to make
repair where the ground has occurred at the pole shoes by removing the field coils
and reinsulating and reinstalling them. A ground at the "F" terminal stud can be
repaired by installing new insulating washers or bushings.
NOTE
If battery temperature is excessive, battery over-

charge is apt to occur, even though regulator settings
are normal. Under this condition, it is permissible
to reduce the voltage regulator setting as explained in
the applicable bulletinpertaining to the regulator used
on the application.
11-16. NOISY GENERATOR. Noise emanating from agenerator may be caused

by a loose mounting, drive pulley, or gear; worn or dirty bearings; or improp-
erly seated brushes. Dirty bearings may sometimes be saved by cleaning and
relubrication, but worn bearings should be replaced. Brushes can be seated as
explained in paragraph 11-10. If the brush holder is bent, it may be difficult to
reseat the brush so that it will function properly without excessive noise. Such
a brush holder will require replacement.
11-17. DISASSEMBLY, REPAIR AND REASSEMBLY. Normally, disassembly

should proceed only so far as is necessary to make repair or replacement of the
defective parts. For example, the field coils should be checked for opens, shorts,
or grounds before being removed from the field frame. They should be removed
only if they require repair or replacement.
11-18. FIELD COIL REMOVAL. Field coils can be removed from the fieldframe
most easily by use of a pole shoe screw driver. It is also advisable to use a pole
shoe spreader, since this prevents distortion of the field frame. The pole shoe
screw driver permits easy loosening and removal of the pole shoe screws so that
the pole shoes and field coils can be taken out of the field frame. The pole shoe
screw driver and spreader should be used on reassembly of the field frame. Care -
ful reassembly is necessary to prevent shorting or grounding of the field coils as
the pole shoes are tightened into place.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4C20 4C20 Reissued:2/ 18/81
11-19. INSPECTION AND REPAIR OF PARTS. The armatureor field should not
be cleaned in any degreasing tank or by use of degreasing compounds, since this
might damage insulation so that a short or ground would subsequently develop.
Sealed ball bearings do not require cleaning or relubrication. Other generator
parts should be cleaned and carefully inspected for wear and other damage. Any
defective parts should be repairedor replaced. On reassembly all soldered elec-
trical connections should be made with rosin flux. Acid flux must never be used
on electrical connections.
11-20. FIELD COIL SERVICE.

a. The field coils should be checked for grounds, opens or shorts as already
explained in paragraph 11-13.
b. Grounded field coils may sometimes be repaired by removing them so they
can be reinsulated. Care must be used to avoid excessive bulkiness when ap-
plying new insulation, since this might cause the pole shoe to cut through and
cause another ground when the coils are reinstalled.
c. Usually if a field coil is open or shorted internally it will require replace-
ment, since it is difficult to repair such a defect.
d. To remove or replace field coils in the field frame, the use of a pole shoe
spreader and screw driver is recommended.
11-21. ARMATURE SERVICE.

a. The armature should be checked for opens, shorts and grounds as explained
in followingparagraphs. If the armature commutator is worn, dirty, outof round,
or has high mica, the armature should be put in a lathe so the commutator can be
turned down and the mica undercut. The mica should be undercut .031 of an inch
and the slots cleaned out carefully to remove any trace of dirt or copper dust. As
a final step in this procedure, the commutator should be sanded lightly with No.
00 sandpaper to remove any slight burrs that might be left as a result of the un-
dercutting procedure.
b. Open circuited armatures can often be saved when the open is obvious and
repairable. The most likely place an open will occur is at the commutator riser
bars. This usually results from overloading of the generator which causes over-
heating and melting of the solder. Repair can be effected by resoldering the leads
in the riser bars (using rosin flux) and turning down the commutator in a lathe to
remove the burned spot and then undercutting the mica as explained in the pre-
vious paragraph. In some heavy-duty armatures, the leads are welded into the
riser bars and these cannot be repaired by resoldering.
c. Short circuits in the armature are located by use of a growler. When the
armature is revolved in the growler, with a steel strip such as a hacksaw blade
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4C21
held above it, the blade will vibrate above the area of the armature core in which
the short is located. Copper or brush dust in the slots between the commutator
bars sometimes causes shorts between bars which can be eliminated by cleaning
out the slots. Shorts at cross-overs of the coils at the core end canoften be elim-
inated by bending wires slightly and reinsulating the exposed bare wire.
d. Grounds in the armature are detected by use of a test lamp and test points.
If the lamp lights when one test point is placed on the commutator with the other
point on the core or shaft, the armature is grounded. Grounds occur as a result
of insulation failure, which is often brought on by overloading and consequent
overheating of the generator. Repairs can sometimes be made if grounds are at
core ends (where coils come out of slots) by placing insulating strips between
core and coil which has grounded.
11-22. POLARIZING GENERATOR. After a generator has been repaired and

reinstalled or at any time after a generator has been tested, it must be repolar-
ized to make sure that it has the correct polarity with respect to the battery it is
to charge. Failure to repolarize the generator may result in burned relay con-
tact points, a run-down battery and possibly serious damage to the generator it-
self. The procedure to follow in correcting generator polarity depends upon the
generator-regulator wiring circuits; that is, whether the generator field is inter-
nally grounded or is grounded through the regulator.
11-23. GENERATOR SERVICE TESTSPECIFICATIONS. Delco-RemySpecifica-

tions for 14- and 28-volt generators installed on PA-23 series airplanes are as
follows:
Generator 1101915 1101905 1105055
Delco -Remy,
Ref. Service Bulletin 1G-150 1G-150 1G-150
Brush Spring Tension 24 oz. 24 oz. 28 oz.
Field Current (80 ° F)

Amps 1. 62-1. 72 0. 75-0. 85 1. 45-1.55
Volts 12 24 24
Cold Output
Amps 50 25 50
Volts 14. 0 26. 0 28. 5
Approx. R.P.M. 3960 3550 3730
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4C22 4C22 Reissued: 2/18/81

COLD OUTPUT: Cold output data applies to generators at 80 degrees F,

and with brushes well seated. Variations in temperature and brush seating
as well as the condition of the generator may cause deviations of 100 RPM
or more from rated speed.
HOT OUTPUT: Hot output is maximum output as controlled by current reg-
ulator.
11-24. REGULATOR (Delco-Remy).
11-25. DESCRIPTION OF REGULATOR. The regulator shown in Figure 11-4

consists of a cutout relay, a voltage regulator and a current regulator unit. The
cutout relay closes the generator to battery circuit when the generator voltage is
sufficient to charge the battery, and it opens the circuit when the generator slows
down or stops. The voltage regulator unit is a voltage-limiting device that pre-
vents the system voltage from exceeding a specified maximum and thus protects
the battery and other voltage-sensitive equipment. The current regulator unit is
a current-limiting device that limits the generator output so as not to exceed its
rated maximum.
11-26. CUTOUT RELAY.

a. The cutout relay (Refer to Figure 11-4. ) has two windings, a series winding
of a few turns of heavy wire and a shunt windingof many turns of fine wire (shown
in dashed lines). The shunt winding is connected across the generator so that
generator voltage is impressed upon it at all times. The series winding is con-
nected in series with the charging circuit so that all generator output passes
through it. The relay core and windings areassembled into a frame. A flat steel
armature is attached to the frame by a flexible hinge so that it is centered just
above the stationary contact points. When the generator is not operating, the ar-
mature contact points are held away from the stationary points by the tension of
a flat spring riveted on the side of the armature.
b. When the generator voltage builds up a value great enough to charge the
battery, the magnetism induced by the relay windings is sufficient to pull the ar-
mature toward the core so that the contactpoints close. This completes the cir-
cuit between the generator and battery. The current which flows from the gen-
erator to the batterypasses through the series winding in a direction to add to the
magnetism holding the armature down and the contact points closed.
c. When the generator slows down or stops, current begins to flow from the
battery to the generator.
d. This reverse flow of current through the series winding causes a reversal
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
4C23
of the series winding magnetic field.

The magnetic field of the shunt winding CURRENT
does not reverse. Therefore, instead REGULATOR
of helping each other, the two windings VOLTAGE
now oppose so that the resultant mag- REGULATOR
netic field becomes insufficient to hold
the armature down. The flat spring
pulls the armature away from the core
so that the points separate; this opens
the circuit between the generator and
battery.
a. The voltage regulator (Refer to

Figure 11-4. ) has twowindings assem- Figure 11-4. Current/Voltage
bled on a single core, a shunt winding Regulator
consisting of many turns of fine wire
(shown in dashed lines) which is shuntedacross the generator, and a series wind-
ing of a few turns of relatively heavy wire which is connected in series with the
generator field circuit when the regulator contact points are closed.
b. The windings and core are assembled into a frame. A flat steel armature
is attached to the frame by a flexible hinge so that it is just above the end of the
core. The armature contains a contact point which is just beneath a stationary
contact point. When the voltage regulator is notoperating, the tensionof a spiral
spring holds the armature away from the core so that the points are in contact and
the generator field circuit is completed to ground through them.
c. When the generator voltage reaches the value for which the voltage regu-
lator is adjusted, the magnetic field produced by the two windings (shunt and se-
ries) overcomes the armature spring tension and pulls the armature down so that
the contact points separate. This inserts resistance into the generator field cir-
cuit so that the generator field current and voltage are reduced. Reductionof the
generator voltage reduces the magnetic field of the regulator shunt winding. Also,
opening the regulator points opens the regulator series winding circuit so that its
magnetic field collapses completely. The consequence is that the magnetic field
is reduced sufficiently to allow the spiral spring to pull the armature away from
the core so that the contact points again close. This directly grounds the gener-
ator so that generator voltage and output increase. The above cycle of action
again takes place and the cycle continues at a rate of 50 to 200 times a second,
regulating the voltage to a predetermined value. With the voltage thus limited,
the generator supplies varying amounts of current to meet the varying states of
battery charge and electrical load.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4C24
11-28. CURRENT REGULATOR.

a. The current regulator (Refer to Figure 11-4. ) has a series winding of a few
turns of heavy wire which carries all generator output. The winding core is as-
sembled into a frame. Aflat steelarmature is attached to the frame bya flexible
hinge so that it is just above the core. The armature has a contact pointwhich is
just below a stationary contact point. When the current regulator is not operating,
the tension of a spiral spring holds the armature away from the core so that the
points are in contact. In this position the generator field circuit is completed to
ground through the current regulator contact points in series with the voltage reg-
ulator contact points.
b. When the load demands are heavy, as for example, when electrical devices
are turned on and the battery is in a discharged condition, the voltage may not in-
crease to a value sufficient to cause the voltage regulator to operate. Consequen-
tly, generator output will continue to increase until the generator reaches rated
maximum current. This is the current value for which the current regulator is
set. Therefore, when the generator reaches rated output, this output, flowing
through the current regulator winding, creates sufficient magnetism to pull the
current regulator armature down and open the contact points. With the points
open, resistance is inserted into the generator field circuit so that the generator
output is reduced.
c. As soon as the generator output starts to fall off, the magnetic field of the
current regulator winding is reduced, the spiral spring tension pulls the arma-
ture up, the contact points close and directly connect the generator field to ground.
Output increases and the above cycle is repeated. The cycle continues to take
place while the current regulator is in operation 50 to 200 times a second, pre-
venting the generator from exceeding its rated maximum. When the electrical
load is reduced (electrical devices turned off or battery comes up to charge), then
the voltage increases so that the voltage regulator begins to operate and tapers
the generator output down. This prevents the current regulator from operating.
Either the voltage regulator or the current regulator operates at any one time -
the two do not operate at the same time.
11-29. RESISTANCES. The current and voltage regulator circuits use a common
resistor which is inserted in the field circuit when either the current or voltage
regulator operates. A second resistor(1) is connected between the regulator field
terminal and the cutout relay frame, which places it in parallel with the generator
field coils. The sudden reduction in field current occurring when the current or
voltage regulator contact points open, is accompanied by a surge of induced volt-
age in the field coils as the strength of the magnetic field changes. These surges
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

are partially dissipated by the two resistors, thus preventing excessive arcing at
the contact points.
(The second resistor is not present on allregulators. Many aircraft regulators
have this resistor omitted. )
11-30. TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION. Voltage regulators are compensated

for temperature by means of a bimetal thermostatic hinge on the armature. This
causes the regulator to regulate at a higher voltage when cold which partly com-
pensates for the fact that a higher voltage is required to charge a cold battery.
Many current regulators also have a bimetal thermostatic hinge on the armature.
This permits a somewhat higher generator output when the unit is cold, but causes
the output to drop off as temperature increases.
11-31. REGULATOR POLARITY. Some regulators are designed for use with
negative grounded systems, while other regulators are designed for use with pos -
itive grounded systems. Using the wrong polarity regulator on an installation will
cause the regulator contact points to pit badly and give short life. As a safeguard
against installation of the wrong polarity regulator, all regulators of this type
have the model number and the polarity clearly stamped on the end of the regu-
lator base. (Refer to paragraph 11-33, step f. )
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
11-32. REGULATOR MAINTENANCE.
NOTE
The regulator maintenance instructions to follow apply

to Regulators, P/N 1119246 and 1118976. For mainte-
nance instructions for Regulator, P/N 1119656, refer
to Delco-Remy Service Bulletin 1R-119A. Specifica-
tions for all regulators are found in paragraph 11-44.
11-33. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS.

a. Mechanical checks and adjustments (air gaps, point opening) must be made
with battery disconnected and regulator preferably off the aircraft.
CAUTION
The cutout relay contact points must never be closed

by hand with the battery connected to the regulator.
This would cause a high current to flow through the
units which would seriously damage them.
b. Electrical checks and adjustments may be made either on or off the air-
plane. The regulator must always be operated with the type generator for which
it is designed.
c. The regulator must be mounted in the operating position when electrical
settings are checked and adjusted and it must be at operating temperature.
d. Specified generator speeds for testing and adjusting.
1. Voltage Regulator
(a) Operating speed
2. Current Regulator
(a) All generators must be operated at a speed sufficient to produce
current in excess of specified setting.
(b) Voltage of the generator must be kept high enough to insure suffi-
cient current output, but below the operatingvoltage of the voltage regulator unit.
e. After any tests or adjustments the generator on the airplane must be polar-
ized after leads are connected, but before the engine is started, as follows:
After reconnecting leads, momentarily connect a jumper lead between the
GEN and BAT terminals of the regulator. This allows a momentary surge of cur-
rent to flow through the generator which correctly polarizes it. Failure to do this
may result in severe damage to the equipment since reversed polarity causes vi-
bration, arcing and burning of the relay contact points.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4D3 Reissued: 2, 18/81
4D3
AIR GAP
CONTACT
TO CLEANCONTACTPOINTS MOUNTING SCREWS
Figure 11-5. Use of Riffler File Figure 11-6. Voltage Regulator

to Clean Contact Points Air Gap
11-34. CLEANING CONTACT POINTS. The contact points of a regulator will

not operate indefinitely without some attention. It has been found that a great
majority of all regulator trouble can be eliminated by a simple cleaning of the
contact points, plus some possible readjustment. The flat points should be clean-
ed with a spoon or riffler file. On negative grounded regulators which have the
flat contact point on the regulator armatures, loosen the contact bracket mount-
ing screws so that the bracket can be tilted to one side. Aflat file cannot beused
successfully to clean the flat contact points since it will not touch the center of
the flat point where point wear is most apt to occur. Never use emery cloth or
sandpaper to clean the contact points. Remove all the oxides from the contact
points but note that it is not necessary to remove any cavity that may have devel-
oped.
11-35. REGULATOR CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS.
11-36. VOLTAGE REGULATOR. Two checks and adjustments are required on

the voltage regulator; air gap and voltage setting.
a. Air Gap: To check air gap, push armature down until the contact points are
just touchingand thenmeasure air gap. (Refer to Figure 11-6. ) Adjust byloosen-
ing the contact mounting screws and raising or lowering contact bracket as re-
quired. Be sure the points are lined up and tighten screws after adjustment.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2 18 81
4D4
Figure 11-7. Checking Voltage Figure 11-8. Checking Voltage

Setting - Fixed Resistance Method Setting - Variable Resistance Method
b. Voltage Setting: There are two ways to check the voltage setting; the fixed
resistance method and the variable resistance method. (Refer to Figures 11-7
and 11-8. )
1. Fixed Resistance Method:
(a) Connect a fixedresistance between the batteryterminal and ground
as shownin Figure 11-7 after disconnecting the battery lead from the battery ter-
minalof the regulator. The resistance must be one and one-half ohms for 14-volt
and seven ohms for 28-volt units. It must be capable of carrying 10 amperes
without any change of resistance with temperature changes.
(b) Connect a voltmeter from regulator BAT terminal to ground.
(c) Place the thermometer within 0.25 inch of regulator cover to mea-
sure regulator ambient temperature.
(d) Operate generator at specified speed for 15 minutes with regulator
cover in place to bring the voltage regulator to operating temperature.
(e) Cycle the generator:
Method 1: Move voltmeter lead from BAT to GEN terminal of the
regulator. Retard generator speed until generator voltage is reduced to 4-volts.
Move voltmeter lead back to BAT terminal of the regulator. Bring the generator
back to specified speed and note voltage setting.
Method 2: Connect a variable resistance into the field circuit as in
Figure 11-7. Turn out all resistance. Operate the generator at specified speed.
Slowly increase (turn in) resistance until generator voltage is reduced to 4-volts.
Turn out all resistance again and note voltage setting (with voltmeter connected
as shown in Figure 11-7). Regulator cover must be in place.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4D5
(f) Note the thermometer

reading and select the Normal Range of ADJUSTING
SCREW
ADJUSTING
SCREW
Voltage for this temperature as listed (TURNTO ADJUSTSETTING
in specifications paragraph 11-44.
(g) Note the voltmeter read-
ing with regulator cover in place.
(h) To adjust voltage setting,
turn adjusting screw. (Refer to Figure
11-9.) Turn clockwise to increase set-
ting and counterclockwise to decrease
setting.
Figure 11-9. Adjusting Voltage

Regulator Setting
CAUTION
If adjusting screw is turned down (clockwise) beyond

range, spring support may not return when screw is
backed off. In such case, turn screw counterclock-
wise until there is ample clearance between screw
head and spring support. Then bend spring support
up carefully until it touches the screw head. Final
settingof the unit should always be made by increasing
spring tension, never by reducing it. If setting is too
high, adjust unit below required value and then raise
to exact setting by increasing the spring tension. After
eachadjustmentand before taking reading, replace the
regulator cover and cycle the generator.
2. Variable Resistance Method:

(a) Connect ammeter and one-quarter ohm variable resistor in series
with the battery as shown in Figure 11-7.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4D6 Reissued: 2 /18/81
4D6
NOTE
It is very important that the variable resistance be

connected at the BATterminal as shown in Figure 11-7
rather than at the GEN terminal even though these ter-
minals are in the same circuit. Anexamination of the
wiring diagram, Figure 11-3, will show that regulation
begins at the point where the shunt windings are con-
nected to the series circuit. Any small resistance
added to the circuit between the generator and this point
will simply be offset by a rise in generator voltage
without affecting the output shown at the ammeter.
(b) Connect voltmeter between BAT terminal and ground.

(c) Place thermometer within one-quarter inch of regulator cover to
measure regulator ambient temperature.
(d) Operate generator at specified speed. Adjust variable resistor un-
til current flow is 8 to 10-amperes. If less current than is required above is
flowing, it will be necessary to turn on airplane lights to permit increased gen-
erator output. Variable resistance can then be used to decrease current flow to
the required amount.
Allow generator to operate at this speed and current flow for 15
minutes with regulator cover in place in order to bring the voltage regulator to
operating temperature.
(e) Cycle the generator by either method listed in "Fixed Resistance
Method" of "Voltage Setting" procedure.
(f) Note the thermometer reading and select the "Normal Range" of
voltage for this temperature as listed in specifications paragraph 11-44.
(g) Note the voltmeter reading with regulator cover in place.
(h) Adjust voltage regulator as required as described in step (h) of
"Fixed Resistance Method" of "Voltage Setting Procedure. " In using the vari-
able resistance method, it is necessary to readjust the variable resistance after
each voltage adjustment to assure that 8 to 10-amperes are flowing. Cycle gen-
erator after each adjustment before reading voltage regulator setting with cover
in place.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
4D7
ADJUSTINGSCREWS
(LOOSENTO SETAIR GAP)
Figure 11-10. Cutout Relay Air Gap Figure 11-11. Cutout Relay Point
Check and Adjustments Opening Check and Adjustment
11-37. CUTOUT RELAY. The cutout relay requires three checks and adjust-
ments: air gap, point opening and closing voltage. The air gap and point open-
ing adjustments must be made with the battery disconnected.
a. Air Gap: Place fingers on armature directlyabove core andmove armature
down until points just close and then measure air gap between armature and cen-
ter of core. (Refer to Figure 11-10. ) On multiple contact point relays, make
sure that all points close simultaneously. If they do not, bend spring finger so
they do. To adjust air gap, loosen two screws at the back of relay and raise or
lower the armature as required. Tighten screws after adjustment.
b. Point Opening: Check point opening and adjust by bending the upper arma-
ture stop. (Refer to Figure 11-11. )
c. Closing Voltage: Connect regulator to proper generator and battery. Con-
nect voltmeter between the regulator GEN terminal and ground. (Refer to Fig-
ure 11-12. )
Method 1: Slowly increase generator speed and note relay closing voltage.
Decrease generator speed and make sure the cutout relay points open.
Method 2: Make connections as in Step c; but, in addition, add a variable
resistor connected into the field circuit. (Refer to Figure 11-12. ) Use a 25-ohm
- 25-watt resistor. Operate generator at medium speed with variable resistance
turned all in. Slowly decrease (turn out) the resistance until cutout relay points
close. Note closing voltage. With cover in place, slowly increase (turn in) re-
sistance to make sure points open.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4D8
4D8 Reissued: 2/ 18/ 81
Figure 1. 11-12.
Load Checking
Method: Cutout Relay Figure 11-13.
Adjustment of
Closing Voltage Cutout Relay Closing Voltage
Turn screw clockwise to increase setting and counterclockwise to decrease set-

ting.
(c) Operate REGULATOR.

11-38. CURRENT generator at Two
specified
checksspeed for 15 minutes arewith
and adjustments cover on
required in
the current regulator; air gap and current setting.
a. Air Gap: Check and adjust in exactly the same manner as for the voltage
regulator.
b. Current Setting: Current regulator setting on current regulators having
temperature compensation should be checked by the following method:
1. Load Method:
(a) Connect ammeter into charging circuit as in Figure 11-13.
(b) Turn on all accessory load (lights, radio, etc.) and connect an ad-
ditional load across the battery (such as a carbon pile or band of lights) so as to
drop the system voltage approximately one-volt below the voltage regulator set-
ting.
(c) Operate generator at specified speed for 15 minutes with cover in
place. (This establishes operating temperature; see steps (c) and (d) in paragraph
11-33.) If current regulator is not temperature-compensated, disregard 15 min-
ute warm-up period.
(d) Cycle generator and note current setting.
(e) Adjust in same manner as described for voltage regulator. (Refer
to Figure 11-9.)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4D9
Figure 11-14. Checking Current Figure 11-15. Checking Current

Regulator, Load Method Regulator, Jumper Lead Method
2. Jumper Lead Method: (Use only for current regulators without temper-
ature compensation. )
(a) Connect ammeter into charging circuit as in Figure 11-15.
(b) Connect jumper lead across voltage regulator points as in Figure
11-14.
(c) Turn on all lights and accessories or load battery as in (b) under
Load Method.
(d) Operate generator at specified speed and note current setting.
(e) Adjust in same manner as described for the voltage regulator. (Re-
fer to Figure 11-9. )
11-39. REGULATOR REPAIRS.
11-40. REGULATOR SPRING REPLACEMENT. If it becomes necessary to re-

place the spiral spring on either the current or voltage regulator unit, the new
spring should first be hooked on the lower spring support and then stretched up
until it can be hooked at the upper end. Stretch the spring only by means of a
screw driver blade inserted between the turns (or in a similar manner). Do not
pry the spring into place as this is likely to bend the spring support. After in-
stalling a new spring, readjust the unit setting as already described.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
11-41. RADIO BY-PASS CONDENSERS. The installation of radio by-pass con-

densers on the field terminal of the regulator or generator will cause the regula-
tor contact points to burn and oxidize so that generator output will be reduced and
a run down battery will result. If a condenser is found connected to either of these
terminals, disconnect the condenser and clean the regulator contact points as pre-
viously explained.
11-42. REGULATOR ARMATURE REPLACEMENT. The armature may be re-

placed by drilling out the two rivets attaching the armature to the regulator frame.
Support the frame to avoid bending. Center-punch the rivet heads and drill out
with a 3/32 inch drill. Attach the new armature with screws, lockwashers and
nuts supplied with the service armature. Assemble screws down so that they will
not ground against cover.
11-43. HIGH POINTS ON REGULATOR PERFORMANCE AND CHECKS.

a. The voltage regulator unit limits the voltage of the circuit, thus protecting
the battery, lights and other accessories from high voltage.
b. The current regulator unit provides protection to the generator, preventing
it from exceeding its maximum rated output.
c. Never set the current regulator above the maximum specified output of the
generator.
d. Many of the regulators are designed to be used with a positive grounded
battery while others are designed to be used with a negative grounded battery
only. Never attempt to use the wrong polarity regulator on an application.
e. The majority of reported regulator troubles arise from dirty or oxidized
contact points which cause a reduced generator output. Clean the contact points
with a spoon or riffler file. Never use emery cloth or sandpaper to clean points.
f. Always make sure that the rubber gasket is in place between the cover and
base before replacing the cover. The gasket prevents entrance of moisture, dust
and oil vapors which might damage the regulator.
g. The proper testing equipment in the hands of a qualified mechanic is nec-
essary to assureproperand accurate regulator settings. Any attempt on the part
of untrainedpersonnel to adjust regulators is apt to lead to serious damage to the
electrical equipment and should therefore be discouraged.
h. After any generator or regulator tests or adjustments, the generator must
be polarized as explained in paragraph 11-33, step f, in order to avoid damage
to the equipment.
i. It is recommended that following replacement or repair of a generator or
regulator they be adjusted on a test bench as a matched unit.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18, 81
4D11
11-44. REGULATOR SERVICE TEST SPECIFICATIONS. Delco-Remy specifi-

cations for 14 - and 28-volt regulators installed as standard equipment on PA-23
series airplanes are as follows:
Regulator Model 1119246 1118976 1119656'
Delco -Remy
Ref. Service Bulletin 1R-116A 1R-116 1R-119A
Cutout Relay:
Air Gap 0.020 in. 0.017 in. 0.017 in.
Point Opening 0.020 in. 0.032 in. 0.032 in.
Closing Voltage 11.8-13.5-volts 24 - 27-volts 22.8-25.2 volts
Voltage Regulator:
Air Gap 0.075 in. 0.075 in. 0.067 in.
Current Setting 65 0 F - 27.9 29.4-volts 65F -
14.2-15.7-volts 29.4-31.4-volts
85 0 F - 85F -
14.4-15.4-volts 28.9-30.8-volts
105 0 F - 105F -
14.2-15.0-volts 28.3-30. 1-volts'
Current Regulator:
Air Gap 0.075 in. 0.075 in. 0.075 in.
Current Setting 48 - 52-amps 23 - 27-amps 48 - 52-amps
Paralleling: With no load on battery terminal, add 5-amp load at

P-terminal - voltage regulator to operate 2 to 3-volts lower.
Paralleling: With no load on battery terminal, add 2. 5-amp load at

P-terminal - voltage regulator to operate 2 to 3-volts lower.
Operation on lower contacts must be 0. 2 to 0. 6-volts lower than on

upper contacts.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4D12
4D12 Reissued: 2/18,81
11-46. RELAY CHECKS AND ADJUSTMENTS. The cutout relay requires three
checks and adjustments: air gap, point opening and closing voltage. The air gap
and point opening adjustments must be made with the battery disconnected. (Re-
fer to specifications given in paragraph 11-50.
11-47. AIR GAP. With the armature pushed down so the points are closed, check
the air gap between the armature and core. (Refer to Figure 11-16. ) To adjust,
loosen the two adjusting screws and raise or lower the armature as required. Be
sure the points align and tighten the screws after adjustment.
11-48. POINT OPENING. Check point opening and adjust by bending the upper
armature stop as illustrated in Figure 11-17.
11-49. CLOSING VOLTAGE. To check the closing voltage of the cutout relay,
connect a voltmeter from the GEN terminal of the relay to the relay base or
ground as shown in Figure 11-20. Slowly increase the generator speed until the
contact points close and read the voltage on the meter. To adjust the closing
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4D13
A784
Figure 11-18. Checking Relay Figure 11-19. Adjusting Relay

Closing Voltage Closing Voltage
voltage, shut down the engine and bend the armature spring post (Refer to Fig-
ure 11-19. ) up to increase the closing voltage and bend down to decrease the
closing voltage. After each adjustment for both armatures, stop the generator
and then slowly increase its speed and check the setting.
11-50. RELAY SERVICE TEST SPECIFICATIONS. Delco-Remy specifications

for 14 and 28-volt relays installed as standard equipment on the model PA-23
Relay Model 1116887 1116903
Delco - Remy
Ref. Service Bulletin 1R100 1R100
Air Gap at Core,

Points Closed 0.022 ± 10%in. 0.022 ± 10% in.
Point Opening 0.028 in. 0.028 in.
Closing Voltage (Range) 10. 5 to 12. 3 21 to 24. 6
Opening Voltage (Range) 8 minimum 16 minimum
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4D14
11-51. ALTERNATOR SYSTEM.
11-52. DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATOR. For each alternator, the alternator

output circuit is connected by means of a 90-ampere circuit breaker, a filter in
the line to eliminate radio interference and a shunt to monitor alternator output.
The field circuit consists of a 10-ampere thermal circuit breaker, a volt-
regulator, selector switch, over voltage relay, radio noise filter and a special
switch ganged to the 90-ampere circuit breaker to remove field voltage from the
alternator should the circuit breaker open.
The field and output circuit of both alternators are joined by a bus bar which
directs current to the battery. A shunt is installed between the battery and bus
to measure current flow to and from the battery. The field circuit is combined
with the master switch to turn off the alternator when the master switch is turned
off.
A second set of components is installed in the field circuit should a failure
of the main regulating system occur.
The 90-ampere alternator circuit breakers should not be switched on and
off under load for testing or any other reason.
11-53. CHECKING ALTERNATOR SYSTEM. The ammeter is equipped with a

selector switch which enables an independent output check of each alternator, as
well as the electrical output-input of the battery. Should either alternator show
no output on the ammeter, check the appropriate circuit breakers. If a further
check of the ammeter shows no output from both alternators, switch to the aux-
iliary voltage regulator and over voltage relay. If switching to the auxiliary sys-
tem indicates no electrical output, further check the alternator system. (Refer
to Figure 11-20. )
a. Ascertain that the ammeter is operating properly.
b. Disconnect the battery and field leads at the alternator.
c. Ascertain that all electrical units are off and the battery is fully charged.
d. Turn on the master switch.
e. To check the alternator output circuit, connect avoltmeter or 14 or28-volt
test light to the battery lead and to ground. If a reading of approximately 14 or
28 -volts registers on the voltmeter or the test light lights, the battery circuit is
operational.
f. Should there be no indication of voltage, trace back through the output cir-
cuit until voltage is indicated. (Refer to Figure 11-20.) A component that allows
no voltage to pass through it should be replaced.
g. To check the field circuit, connect a voltmeter or 14 or 28-volt test light
to the field lead and to ground. Test the field circuit using the same procedure
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4D15
as in steps e and f. Both the main and auxiliary field systems may be checked in
a like manner.
h. If voltage is indicated at both the battery lead and field lead, the alternator
should be checked for possible malfunction. (Refer to Paragraph 11-55. )
11-54. ADJUSTMENTS. The only adjustments necessary to maintain the alter-

nator system is the adjustment of the voltage control on the voltage regulator.
A voltage of 14 or 28-volts is maintained. All other control adjustments are made
at time of installation and need not be reset.
IMPORTANT
Since the alternator and regulator are designed for use

on only one polarity system, the following precautions
must be observedwhenworking on the charging circuit.
Failure to observe these precautions will result in se-
rious damage to the electrical equipment.
a. When installing a battery, always check the ground polarity of the alternator to
ensure correct battery grounding.
b. When connecting a booster battery, make certain to connect the negative
battery terminals together.
c. When connecting a charger to the battery, connect the charger positive lead
to the battery positive terminal and the charger negative lead to the battery neg-
ative terminal.
d. Never operate the alternator on open circuit. Make absolutely certain all
connections in the circuit are secure.
e. Do not short across or ground any of the terminals on the alternator or reg-
ulator.
f. Do not attempt to polarize the alternator.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4D16 Reissued:2/18 81
4D16
TO MASTER
SOLENOID
MASTER
SWITCH
RIGHTWING
PLUG
Figure 11-20. Alternator System Wiring Schematic (Delco-Remy)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4D17
LUG
Figure 11-21. Cross-Sectional View of Alternator
11-55. ALTERNATOR AND COMPONENTS (Delco-Remy).
11-56. INSPECTION. At regular intervals, inspect the terminals for corrosion

and loose connections, and the wiring for frayed insulation. Check the mounting
bolts for tightness, and the belt for alignment, proper tension and wear. Belt
tension should be adjusted in accordance with engine manufacturer's recommen-
dations. When tightening belt tension, apply pressure against the stator lamin-
ations between the end frames, and not against either end frame.
Noise from an alternator may be caused by worn or dirty bearings, loose
mounting bolts, a loose drive pulley, a defective diode, or a defective stator.
11-57. DISASSEMBLY. After extended periods of operation, or at time of en-

gine overhaul, the alternator may be removed for a thorough inspection and clean-
ing of all parts. The alternator consists of four main components - the two end
frames, the stator and the rotor.
To disassemble the alternator, take out the four thru-bolts and separatethe
drive end frame and rotor assembly from the stator assembly by prying apart with
a screwdriver at the stator slot. A mark will help locate the parts in the same
position during assembly. The fit between stator and frame is not tight and the
two can be separated easily. Note that the separation is to be made between the
stator frame and drive end frame. Afterdisassembly, place a piece of tape over
the slip ring end frame bearing on both sides to prevent entry of dirt and other
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4D18
OHMMETER
(CHECK
FORGROUNDS) foreign material, andalsoplacea piece
of tape over the shaft on the slip ring
end. If brushes are to be re-used,
clean with a soft, dry cloth.
CAUTION
Do not use black friction

tape. Use only pressure
sensitive tape that will not
leave any contamination on
the shaft surface.
To remove the drive end frame

OHMMETER (CHECK
FORSHORTS
AND OPENS) from the rotor, place the rotor in a vise
Figure 11-22. Checking Rotor and tighten only enough to permit re-
moval of the shaft nut.
CAUTION
Avoid excessive tighteningas this may cause distortion. Re-
move the shaft nut, washer, pulley, fan and the collar, and
then seperate the drive end frame from the rotor shaft.
Additional disassembly procedures are covered in the following sections.
11-58. CHECKS.
a. ROTOR CHECKS: The rotor may be checked electrically for grounded, open,
or short circuited field coils. To check for grounds, connect a 110-volt test lamp
or an ohmmeter from either slip ring to the rotor shaft or to the rotor poles. If
the lamp lights, or if the ohmmeter reading is low, the field winding is grounded.
(Refer to Figure 11-21. )
To check for opens, connect the test lamp or ohmmeter to each slip ring.
If the lamp fails to light, or if the ohmmeter reading is high (Infinite), the wind-
ing is open. (Refer to Figure 11-21. )
The winding is checked for short circuits by connecting a battery and am-
meter in series with the two slip rings. Note the ammeter reading and refer to
paragraph 11-66 for specifications. An ammeter reading above the specified
value indicates shorted windings. An alternate method is to check the resistance
of the field by connecting an ohmmeter to the two slip rings. (Refer to Figure
11-21. ) If the resistance reading is below the specified value, the winding is
shorted. The specified resistance value can be determined by dividing the voltage
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2 18 81
4D19
BRUSH HOLDER
ASSEMBLY OHMMETER
HEAT
SINK
DIODES
OHMMETER OHMMETER
LEAD ATTACHING NUTS (CHECK FOR OPENS)
(CHECK FOR GROUNDS)
Figure 11-23. Slip Ring End Frame Figure 11-24. Checking Stator
by the current given in paragraph 11-66. If the rotor is not defective, and the
alternator fails to supply rated output when checked as covered in the section en-
titles Output Check, the trouble is in the stator or rectifying diodes.
b. STATOR CHECKS: To check the stator windings, remove all three stator
lead attaching nuts (Refer to Figure 11-23), and then separate the stator assem-
bly from the end frame. The fit between stator frame and end frame is not tight,
and the two can be separated easily.
The stator windings may be checked with a 110-volt test lamp or an ohm-
meter. If the lamp lights, or if the meter reading is low when connected from
any stator lead to the frame, the windings are grounded. If the lamp fails to light,
or if meter reading is high when successively connected between each pair of
stator leads, the windings are open. (Refer to Figure 11-24. )
A short circuit in the stator windings is difficult to locate without labora-
tory test equipment due to the low resistance of the windings. However, if all
other electrical checks are normal and the alternator fails to supply rated out-
put, shorted stator windings are indicated. Also, another possibility is a ground
which may have existed between stator windings and either end frame before dis-
assembly. Visually inspect very carefully for this possibility.
c. DIODE CHECKS: Each diode may be checked electrically for a shorted or
open condition. Any one of the following methods may be used.
Ohmmeter Method: One method of checking diodes is to use an ordinary
ohmmeter. The lowest range scale on the ohmmeter should be used, and the
ohmmeter should have a one and one-half volt cell. To determine the cell volt-
age turn the selector to the lowest scale, and then connect the ohmmeter leads
to a voltmeter. The voltmeter will indicate the cell voltage.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4D20
With the stator disconnected,

check a diode in the heat sink by con-
nectingone of the ohmmeter leads to the
heat sink, and the other ohmmeter lead
to the diode lead, and note the reading.
(Refer to Figure 11-25.) Then reverse
the ohmmeter lead connections, and
\^ note the reading. If both readings are
very low, or if both readings are very
high, the diode is defective. A good
diode will give one low reading and one
high reading. Check the other two diodes
in the heat sink in the same manner.
end frame, connect one of the ohmmeter

Figure 11-25. Checking Diodes leads to the end frame, and the other
ohmmeter lead to the diode lead (Refer
to Figure 11-25. ), and note the reading. Then reverse the ohmmeter lead con-
nections, and note the reading. If both readings are very low, or if both readings
are very high, the diode is defective. A good diode will give one low reading and
one high reading. Check the other two diodes in the end frame in the same man-
ner:
Test Lamp Method: An alternate method of checking the diodes is to use a
test lamp of not more than 14 or 28-volts (depending on voltage of system) in place
of the ohmmeter.
CAUTION
Do not use 110-volt test lamps to check diodes.
With the stator disconnected, connect the test lamp leads across each diode
as previously described first in one direction and then in the other. If the lamp
lights in both checks, or fails to light in both checks, the diode is defective.
Special Tester Method: Special testers are availablewhichoperatewithout
disconnecting the stator. To use these testers, follow the tester manufacturer's
recommendations.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4D21
11-59. DIODE REPLACEMENT. To replace a diode, use a suitable tool to sup-

port the end frame or heat sink, and use an arbor press or vise topush the diode
out. Also use a special tool which fits over the outer diode edge to push the diode
in, and support the heat sink and end frame with a suitable tool.
NOTE
Diode replacement tools are available from various

manufacturers normally supplying tools and test equip -
ment to the aviation industry.
CAUTION
Do not strike the diode, as the shock may damage the

other diodes.
11-60. SLIP RING SERVICING. If the slip rings are dirty, they may be cleaned
and finished with 400 grain or finer polishing cloth. Spin the rotor in a lathe, or
otherwise spin the rotor, and hold the polishing cloth against the slip rings until
they are clean.
CAUTION
The rotor must be rotated in order that the slip rings

will be cleaned evenly. Cleaning the slip rings by hand
without spinning the rotor may result in flat spots on
the slip rings, causing brush noise.
Slip rings which are rough or out of round should be trued in a lathe to .002
inch maximum indicator reading. Remove only enough material to make the rings
smooth and round. Finish with 400 grain or finer polishing cloth and blow away
all dust.
11-61. BEARING REPLACEMENT AND LUBRICATION. The bearingin the drive

end frame can be removed by detaching the retainer plate screws, and then press-
ing the bearing from the end frame. If the bearing is in satisfactory condition,
it may be re-used, and it should be filled one-quarter full with Delco-Remy lub-
ricant No. 1960373 before reassembly.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4D22
CAUTION
Donot overfill, as this may

cause the bearing to over-
heat, and use only 1960373
lubricant.
To install a new bearing, press

in with a tube or collar that just fits over
HOLE FORPIN the outer race. It is recommended that
a new retainer plate be installed if the
felt seal in the retainer plate is hard-
ened or excessively worn.
Figure 11-26. Brush Holder Assembly The bearing in the slip ring end
frame should be replaced if its grease
supply is exhausted. No attempt should be made to re-lubricate and re-use the
bearing. To remove the bearing from the slip ring end frame, press out with a
tube or collar that just fits inside the end frame housing. Press from the outside
of the housing towards the inside.
To install a new bearing, place a flat plate over the bearing and press in
from the outside towards the inside of the frame until the bearing is flushwith
the outside of the end frame. Support the inside of the frame with a hollow cy-
linder to prevent breakage of the end frame. Use extreme care to avoid mis-
alignment or otherwise placing undue stress on the bearing.
Saturate the felt seal with S. A. E. 20 oil, and then reassemble the felt seal
and steel retainer.
11-62. BRUSHREPLACEMENT. When the slip ring end frame assembly is sep-
arated from the rotor and drive end frame assembly, the brushes will fall down
onto the shaft and come in contact with the lubricant. If the brushes are to be
re-used, they must be thoroughly cleaned with a soft dry cloth. Also, the shaft
must be thoroughly cleaned before reassembly.
The brush springs should be inspected for any evidence of damage or cor-
rosion. If there is any doubt as to the condition of the brush springs, they should
be replaced.
To install new brushes, remove the brush holder assembly from the end
frame by detaching the two brush holder assembly screws. Install the springs
and brushes into the brush holder, and insert a straight wire or pin into the holes
at the bottom of the holder to retain the brushes. (Refer to Figure 11-26.) Then
attach the brush holder assembly onto the end frame, noting carefully the proper
stack-up of parts as shown in Figure 11-26. Allow the straight wire to protrude
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4D23
Figure 11-27. Exploded View of Heat Sink Assembly
through the hole in the end frame.
11-63. HEAT SINK REPLACEMENT. The heat sink may be replaced byremov-
ing the BAT and GRD terminals from the end frame, and the screw attaching the
condenser lead to the heat sink. During reassembly, note the proper stack-up of
parts as shown in Figure 11-27.
11-64. REASSEMBLY. Reassembly is the reverse of disassembly. Remember

when assembling the pulley to secure the rotor in a vise only tight enough to per-
mit tightening the shaft nut to 50 to 60 foot pounds. If excessive pressure is ap-
plied against the rotor, the assembly may become distorted. To install the slip
ring end frame assembly to the rotor and drive end frame assembly, remove the
tape over the bearing and shaft, and make sure the shaft is perfectly clean after
removing the tape.
Insert a straightwire as previously mentioned throughthe holes inthe brush
holder and end frame to retain the brushes in the holder. Then withdraw the wire
after the alternator has been completely assembled. The brushes will then drop
onto the slip rings.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4D24
11-65. OUTPUT CHECK. To check

the alternator on a test bench, make
electrical connections as shown in
Figure 11-28, operate at specified
speed, and check for rated output as
given in paragraph 11-66. Adjust the
load rheostat, if necessary, to obtain
' the desired output.
f NOTE
A special adapter which can

be used for making connec-
tions to the alternator is
available from tool compan-
Figure 11-28. Alternator Output Check ies and test equipment man-
ufacturers normally sup-
plying equipment to the avi-
ation trade.
CAUTION
Do not polarize alternator.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
4E1
11-66. ALTERNATOR SERVICE TEST SPECIFICATIONS. Delco-Remy spec-

ifications for 14 or 28-volt alternators installed as standard equipment on the
PA-23 series airplanes are as follows:
Alternator 1100660 1100717 1100718
Delco-Remy,
Ref. Service Bulletin 1G-186, IG-262 1G-187, 1G-262 1G-187, 1G-262
Field Current (80° F)

Amps 2. 2-2. 6 2.2 -2. 6 1.2-1.3
Volts 12. 0 12. 0 24. 0
Cold Output:
Spec. Volts 14. 0 14. 0 24. 0
Amps 25 25 6
Approx. R.P.M. 2000 2000 2000
Amps 65 65 46
Approx. R. P. M. 5000 5000 5000
Hot Output:
Amps 70 70 70
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4E2
TABLE X1-11. SUMMARY OF ALTERNATOR CHECKS
COMPONENT CONNECTION READING RESULTS
Rotor Ohmmeter from slip ring to shaft Very low Grounded
110 volt test lamp from slip ring to shaft Lamp lights Grounded
Ohmmeter across slip rings Very high Open
110 volt test lamp across slip ring Lamp fails to light Open
Battery and ammeter to slip rings, Observe voltmeter and Compare

across slip rings ammeter readings with spec-
ifieations
in 1G-186
for shorts
Stator Ohmmeter from lead to frame Very low Grounded
(Disconnected 110 volt test lamp from lead to frame Lamp lights Grounded
from diodes)
Ohmmeter across each pair of leads Any reading very high Open
110 volt test light across each pair of leads Fails to light Open
Diode Ohmmeter across diode, then reverse Both readings very low Shorted
connections
(Disconnected Both readings very high Open
from diodes)
14 or 28-volt test lamp across diode, Lamp fails to light in Open
then reverse connections. both checks
Lamp lights in both Shorted

checks
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4E3
OHMMETER
TYPICAL
BATTERY
HARNESS
CONNECTOR
11-68. CHECKING REGULATOR CIRCUIT. Alternator failures may be caused

by circuit misconnections, such as reversed leads or shorted or grounding of
terminals with a screw driver, etc. The following provides a means of locating
circuit misconnections. It also covers thedifferent types of regulatorpanel board
circuit trace defects which indicate a certain type of wiring harness misconnec-
tions. A burned circuit trace on the regulator panel board is proof that a circuit
misconnection exists, or occurred at some time. However, a misconnection will
not always cause a burned circuit trace even though circuit component failures
have been caused.
Before installing a new regulator, it is very important to make sure that
no wiring circuit defects or wiring harness misconnections exist. If the wiring
harness is defective, or if misconnections exist, the new regulator will fail too.
Furthermore, repeated replacement of regulators will only result in repeated
regulator failures, and this will continue until the circuit defect is corrected.
To check the wiring harness for defects or misconnections before installing
the new regulator, observe the following procedure.
NOTE
Meter connections are made to the harness connector

that has been unplugged from the regulator.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2 18/81
4E4
a. Check the alternator field resis-

tance with an ohmmeter as shown in
Step 1, Figure 11-29, and note the read-
ing. Make sure the master switch is
OFF. Readings of less than 2-ohms,
or more than 8-ohms indicate a defec-
tive field winding in the alternator or a
defective wiring harness. If the reading
is within the 2 to 8-ohm range, check
the reading against the allowable re-
sistance in the circuitwhichcan be cal-
culated by dividing the specified voltage
for the alternator by the current rating.
The specified voltage and the current
rating values are found in paragraph
Figure 11-31. Regulator Checks 11-66.
1. If the reading is the same as
the calculated value, proceed to part b.
2. If reading is much higher (infinite) than the calculated value, proceed
to part b.
3. If reading is zero, check for short between NEG and FLD leads, or for
a grounded FLD lead. Circuit trace will be burned open between points A-A, B-B
or C-C, Figure 11-31.
4. If reading is low, alternator fieldwinding is shorted. Circuit trace may
be burned between points A-A, B-B, or C-C, Figure 11-31.
NOTE
To expose the printed circuit for viewing, remove the

bottom plate from the regulator, the three panel board
attaching screws, the transistor attaching screws, and
then separate the heat sink from the panel board.
b. With switch turned ON, connect voltmeter as shown in Step 2, Figure 11-29.
Make sure positive (+) and negative (-) voltmeter leads are connected as shown.
c. If meter reads battery voltage, disconnect lead at alternator "Fl" (field)
terminal.
1. If reading is still battery voltage, wiring is not defective, and no more
wiring tests need be made.
2. If voltage reading is zero, the NEG and FLD leads are reversed. Cir-
cuit trace will be burned open between points A-A, B-B or C-C, Figure 11-31.
d. If meter reads zero voltage, disconnect lead at alternator "Fl" (field) ter-
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4E5
4E5
Reissued: 2/18/81
minal, and connect a jumper lead from this lead to battery positive (+) post. (Re-
fer to Figure 11-30. )
1. If meter now reads battery voltage, the POS and FLD leads are reversed.
This misconnection alone will not cause the circuit trace to be burned open.
2. If meter now reads backwards, alternator field terminal is connected
to regulator negative terminal, the positive line is connected to regulator field
terminal, and regulator positive terminal is connected to negative side of circuit.
Either the circuit trace will be burned between points C-C, D-D, or E-E,
11-31; or the driver transistor will be open. In either case, the driver bias re-
sistor will have been overheated.
e. If voltmeter reads backwards, disconnect lead at alternator "Fl" (field)
terminal.
1. If meter still reads backwards, the POS and NEG leads are reversed.
The circuit trace may be burned between points C-C, D-D, E-E or F-F, Figure
11-31. The transient suppression diode always will be open or shorted.
2. If meter now reads zero, the positive line is connected to regulator NEG
terminal, the negative line is connected to the regulator FLD terminal, and the
alternator "Fl" (field) terminal is connected to the regulator POS terminal. The
circuit trace will be burned open between points F-F, Figure 11-31.
IMPORTANT
For further assistance, follow the procedure in Delco-

Remy Service Bulletin 1R-273when troubleshooting cir-
cuits containing this regulator.
11-69. RELAY (Delco-Remy).
11-70. CHECKING RELAY. The relay is a protective device against high volt-
age that may appear in the electrical system. The relay will open the circuit to
the alternator field winding if the system voltage should ever reach a predeter-
mined value. When the circuit opens, the alternator voltage will be eliminated.
The relay is designed so that the battery will continue to hold the relay contacts
open until the engine is stopped or the master switch is opened. The No. 1 ter-
minal on the relay is connected to the master switch, and the No. 2 terminal to
the regulator POS terminal. For connections, refer to the aircraft wiring dia-
gram.
With the relay removed from the aircraft, an electrical check can be made
on a test bench to determine if the relay is operating properly.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4E6
v VARIABLE
RELAY RESISTOR
Figure 11-32. Relay Tests
CAUTION
Do not remove the cover and attempt to make adjustments
on this relay. If the assembly does not pass the following
electrical check, discard the relay. If the relay does pass the
followingelectrical check, it may be re-used.
a. Turn to the "open" or maximum resistance position a 100 ohm variable resistor
having a wattage rating of one and one-half watts or above.
b. Connect this resistor with a voltmeter and two 12 volt batteries (for 14 volt systems
or three 12 volt batteries for 28 volt systems) in series to the relay as shown in Figure 11-32.
Connect the negative battery post to the relay base, and the positive battery post to the
variable resistor.
c. Slowly decrease the resistance and observe the maximum voltmeter reading.
obtained. This reading will be the voltage at which the contacts open.
d. The contacts should open at 16 to 17 volts (14volt system) or 32 to 36 volts (28
volt system). If they do not, discard the relay.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4E7
1240
2 3. 5 6
Figure 11-33. Exploded View of Alternator
11-71. ALTERNATORAND COMPONENTS(Prestolite).
11-72. DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATOR. (Refer to Figure 11-33.) The principal

components of the alternator are the brush holder assembly (1), the slip ring end head (2),
the rectifiers (3), the stator (4), the rotor (5) and the drive end head (6).
a. The brush and holder assembly contains two brushes, two brush springs, a brush
holder and insulators. Each brush is connected to a separate terminal stud and is insulated
from ground. The brush holder assembly can easily be removed for inspection or brush
replacement purposes.
b. The slip ring end head provides the mounting for the rectifiers and rectifier
mounting plate, output and auxiliary terminal studs, and the brush and holder assembly.
The slip ring end head contains a roller bearingand outer race assemblyand a greaseseal.
c. The rectifiers used in these units are rated at 150 peak inverse voltage (PIV)
minimum for transient voltage protection. Three positive rectifiers are mounted in the
rectifier mounting plate while the three negativerectifiers are mounted in the slip ring end
head. Each pair of rectifiers is connected to a stator lead with high temperature solder. The
stator leads are anchored to the rectifier mounting plate with epoxy cement for vibration
protection.
d. The stator contains a special lead which is connected to the center of the three phase
windings and is used to activate low voltage warning systems or relays. The stator has been
treated with a special epoxy varnish for high temperature resistance.
e. The rotor contains the slip ring end bearing inner race and spacer on the slip ring end
of the shaft. The rotor winding and winding leads have been specially treated with a high
temperature epoxy cement to provide vibration and temperature resistance characteristics.
High temperature solder is used to secure the winding leads to the slip rings.
f. The drive end head supports a sealed, prelubricated ball bearing in which the drive
end of the rotor shaft rotates.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2, 18/81
4E8
ALTERNATOR
ALTERNATOR BLAST TUBE
ALTERNATOR
SHIELDEDWIRE
TO FILTER
TERMINAL
AFT VIEW OF ALTERNATOR POSTS
Figure 11-34. Alternator Blast Tube Routing
11-73. OVERHAUL OF ALTERNATOR. When repairing the alternator, complete

disassemblymay not be required. In some cases it will only be necessary to perform those
operations which are required to effect the repair. However, in this section, the complete
overhaulis covered step-by-stepto provide detailed information on each operation. In actual
servicepractice, these,operations may be used as required.
11-74. ALTERNATOR SERVICE INSPECTION. This inspection should be accomplished

whenever any service is being done on or around the alternator or during a 100 hour
inspection. The inspection consists of visually checking the routing of the alternator blast
tube to insure it's not being chafed against the field terminal posts on the alternator. This
condition could expose the coiled wire in the blast tube which would then short out the
field terminals on the alternator, with subsequent alternator failure. This tube should be
routed over the shielded wire to the filter, to clear the field terminal posts. (Refer to Figure
11-34.)
These alternators should also have insulation used to provide protection against bridging
the field terminals with a wrench or in the event of a loose connection to keep the field
terminal leads from contacting one another. If either of these conditions exist with the
master switch on, the regulator will be destroyed. This insulation will deteriorate after a
period of time and will no longer provide protection and should be replaced. Refer to
latest revision of Lycoming Service Instruction No. 1253 for the proper material.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4F9 Reissued: 2, 18/81
4E9
MASTER
SWITCH
METER
FUNCTION
SWITCH
RIGHTWING
PLUG
FILTER
LEFT RIGHT
ALTERNATOR ALTERNATOR
Figure 11-35. Alternator System Wiring Schematic (Prestolite)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4E10
Figure 11-36. Removal of Rectifier Figure 11-37. Removal of Slip Ring

End Bearing
11-75. DISASSEMBLY OF ALTERNATOR.

a. Remove the two Number 10-24 screws holding the brush holder assembly
in the slip ring end head. Remove the brush and holder assembly from the end
head.
b. Remove the safety wire from the through bolts. Hold the pulleywith a strap
wrench and remove the pulley nut. The pulley must be removed with a puller.
Remove the fan, woodruff key and spacer from the shaft.
c. Remove the four through bolts and tap the drive end head lightly to separate
the drive end head and rotor, as a unit, from the stator and slip ring end head.
d. Remove the nuts, lock washers, flat washers and insulators from the output and
auxiliary terminal studs. Note carefully the correct assembly of the insulator washers and
bushings. Using the special tools shown in Figure 11-36, support the end head and press out
the three negative rectifiers. The end head can now be separated from the stator assembly.
e. To remove the slip ring end bearing and grease seal, it will be necessary to have
a hook type or impact type bearing puller as shown in Figure 11-37. Do not remove the
bearing unless replacement is necessary.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4E11
Figure 11-38. Removal of Drive End Head Figure 11-39. Removal of End Head Bearing
NOTE
The inner race of the slip ring end bearing is pressed onto the rotor
shaft. When bearing replacement is necessary, always replace the
complete bearing assembly, including the inner race.
f. To remove the drive end head from the rotor shaft, use a puller that grips on the bearing retainer
plate as shown in Figure 11-38. Do not attempt to remove by supporting the end head and pressing on the
shaft, as this may result in distortion of the end head or stripping of the retainer plate screws. Remove the three
retainer plate screws and press the bearing out of the end head. (Refer to Figure 11-39.)
11-76. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF COMPNENTS. Upon completion of the disassembly, all parts
should be cleaned and visually inspected for cracks, wear or distortion and any signs of overheating or
mechanical interference.
a. Rotor: The rotor should be tested for grounded or shorted windings. The ground test can be made
with test probes. connected in series with a 110-volt test lamp, an ohmmeter or any type of continuity tester.
(Refer to Figure 11-40.) There must not be any continuity between the slip rings and the rotor shaft or poles. To
test for shorted turns in the rotor winding, connect a voltmeter, ammeter and rheostat as shown in Figure
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4E12
AMMETER
BATTERY
Figure 11-40. Testing Rotor for Grounds Figure 11-41. Testing Rotor for Shorts
or use an ohmmeter. Rotor current draw and resistance are listed in the individual specification pages.
Excessive current draw or a low ohmmeter reading indicates shorted windings. No current draw or an infinite
ohmmeter reading would indicate an open winding.
b. Rectifiers: A diode rectifier tester will detect and pinpoint open or shorted rectifiers without going
through the operation of disconnecting the stator leads. However, if a tester is not available, test probes and a
No. 57 bulb, connected in series with a 12-volt battery, can be used in the following manner. Touch one test
probe to a rectifier heat sink and the other test probe to a lead from one of the rectifiers in that heat sink. Then
reverse the position of the leads. The test bulb should light in one direction and not light in the other direction.
If the test bulb lights in both directions, one or more of the rectifiers in that heat sink is shorted. To pinpoint the
defective rectifier, the stator leads must be disconnected and the above test repeated on each rectifier. Open
rectifiers can only be detected, when using the test bulb, by disconnecting the stator leads. The test bulb will fail
to light in either direction if the rectifier is open.
c. Stator: The stator can be tested for open or grounded windings with a 12-volt test bulb. described in
the rectifier section, or an ohmmeter, in the following manner. Separate the stator from the slip ring end head
just far enough to insert a fold of rags or blocks of wood. In other words, insulate the stator from the end head. To
test for grounded windings, touch one test bulb or ohmmeter probe to the stator frame. If the test bulb lights,
or the ohmmeter indicates continiuty, the stator is grounded. To test for open windings, connect one test probe
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4E13
4E 13
Reissued: 2/18/81
Figure 11-42. Installation of Bearing Figure 11-43. Installation of Rectifier

to the auxiliary terminal or the stator winding center connection and touch each
of the three stator leads. The test bulb must light, or the ohmmeter must show
continuity. Due to the low resistance in the stator windings, shorted windings
are almost impossible to locate. However, shorted stator windings will usually
cause the alternator to "growl" or be noisy during operation and will usually show
some signs of overheating. If all other electrical checks are normal and the al-
ternator fails to supply its rated output, the stator should be replaced to determine
whether or not it is the faulty component.
d. Bearings and Seals: Whenever the alternator is overhauled, new bearings
and oil or grease seals are recommended, even though the bearings and seals
appear to be ingood condition. A faulty seal can cause an alternator to fail with-
in a very short period of time.
11-77. ASSEMBLY OF ALTERNATOR.

a. Press the ball bearing into the drive end head using a flat block approx-
imately two inch square so that the pressure is exerted on the outer race of the
bearing. Install the retainer plate. With the snap ring and retainer cup in place
on the rotor shaft, use a tool that fits over the shaft and against the inner bearing
race, and press until the inner bearing race is against the snap ring retainer cup.
b. Carefully install the rectifiers in the slip ring end head or rectifier mounting
plate by supporting the unit and using the special tools illustrated in Figure 11-43.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4E14
NUT LOCKWASHER
FLATWASHER FFIERWASHER SEAL-INSTALL SEAL
WITH LIP
a ENDHEAD TOWARDBEARING
TERMINAL STUD MOUNTING PLATE

INNER RACE
AUXILIARY
TERMINAL
NUT LOCCKWASHER
FLATWASHER FIBERWASHER
GREASE
END HEAD
CAVITY
INSULATOR
SPACER
RECTIFIER TERMINAL STUD
MOUNTING PLATE
BEARING
OUTPUT(+)
TERMINAL
Figure 11-44. Terminal Assembly Figure 11-45. Slip Ring End Bearing
Assembly
CAUTION
Use an arbor press, do not hammer. Reconnect the

stator leads to the rectifiers. When soldering these
connections, use pliers as a heat dam on the lead be-
tween the solder joint and the rectifier. Too much
heat will damage the rectifiers.
c. Reassemble the rectifier mounting plate studs and insulators, making sure
they are in the correct order. (Refer to Figure 11-44.)
d. After the slip ring end head is completely assembled, the stator and rec-
tifier leads must be secured to the rectifier mounting plate with epoxy. Make
sure the stator leads are positioned so that they do not interfere with the rotor.
e. Install the slip ring end bearing and oil seal. Make sure the lip of the oil
seal is toward the bearing and stake the seal in place. Correct assembly of
bearing, seal, inner race and spacer is shown in Figure 11-45.
f. Assemble the alternator and install the through bolts. Spin the rotor to
make sure there is no mechanical interference. Torque the through bolts to 30
to 35 inch pounds. Safety wire should be installed after the unit has been bench
tested for output. Install spacer, woodruff key, fan, pulley, lockwasher and nut.
Torque the nut to 35 foot pounds, using a strap wrench to hold the pulley. Do not
install the blast tube assembly until after the unit has been bench tested.
g. Install the brush and holder assembly and retaining screws. Spin the rotor
and check for interference between the brush holder and rotor. Checkacross the
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4E15
4E15 Reissued:2 18 81
Figure 11-46. Testing Alternator
field terminals with an ohmmeter. The ohmmeter must indicate the amount of rotor resistance listed on the
individual specifications page.
11-78. TESTING OF ALTERNATOR.

a. Wiring connections for bench testing the alternator are shown in Figure 11-46. Refer to the
individual specification pages for output test figures. Adjust the carbon pile, if necessary, to obtain the
specified voltage.
b. After bench testing the alternator, install the safety wire and blast tube and install the alternator on
the engine.
NOTE
Always refer to the wiring diagram (Refer to Figure 11-35) when

installing the alternator or testing the alternator.
11-79. PRECAUTIONS. The following precautions are to be observed when testing or servicing the
electrical system.
a. Disconnect the battery before connecting or disconnecting test instruments (except voltmeter) or
before removing or replacing any unit or wiring. Accidental grounding or shorting at the regulator, alternator.
ammeter or accessories, will cause severe damage to the units and, or wiring.
b. The alternator must not be operated on open circuit with the rotor winding energized.
c. Do not attempt to polarize the alternator. No polarization is required. Any attempt to do so may
result in damage to the alternator, regulator or circuits.
d. Grounding of the alternator output terminal may damage the alternator and or circuit and
components.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4E16
1371
ALTERNATOR
II
END VIEW SIDE VIEW
Figure 11-47. Brush Installation Figure 11-48. Internal Wiring Diagram
e. Reversed battery connections may damage the rectifiers, wiring or other components of the
charging system. Battery polarity should be checked with a voltmeter before connecting the battery. Most
aircraft are negative ground.
f. If a booster battery or fast charger is used, its polarity must be connected correctly to prevent
damage to the electrical system components.
11-80. ALTERNATOR NOMENCLATURE.

a. Bearings: These units have a sealed ball bearing at the drive end and a two-piece roller bearing at the
slip ring end. The inner race is presssed onto the rotor shaft and the rest of the bearing is in the slip ring end
head. When the unit is assembled, the inner race aligns with the bearing. When the bearing is replaced. the new
inner race must be installed on the rotor shaft.
b. Lubrication: The slip ring end bearing should be lubricated whenever the alternator is disassembled.
The bearing should be thoroughly cleaned and repacked with Shell Alvania No. 2 or an equivalent bearing
lubricant. The cavity behind the bearing should be packed on-third to one-half full with the same lubricant.
c. Brushes: These units have a separate brush holder assembly that is installed after the alternator has
been assembled. The brush holder has a small hole that intersects the brush cavities. Use a pin or a piece of
wire, as shown in Figure 11-47, to hold the brushes in the holder during assembly. Remove the pin after the
brush holder retaining screws have been tightend. Make a continuity check to be sure the brushes are seated
against the slip rings.
d. Drive Pulley: Torque the drive pulley retaining nut to 35 foot pounds.
e. Ventilation: The 8400 series units use a slip ring end cover that has a hose type connection for air
pressure ventilation. Remove this cover when bench testing the alternator.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4E17
PIPER AZTEC SERVICE MANUAL 0
11-81. ALTERNATOR SERVICE TEST SPECIFICATIONS. Prestolite specifi-

cations for the 14 or 28-volt alternators installed as standard equipment on PA-23
Alternator Model ALX8403 ALU8403
Voltage 14 -volts 28 -volts
Rated Output 70 amperes 70 amperes
Ground Polarity Negative Negative
Rotation Bi-Directional Bi-Directional
Rotor:
Current Draw (77 ° F) 2. 9 to 3. 3 amps 2. 0 to 2. 2 amps
@ 12. 0-volts @ 24. 0-volts
Resistance (77 ° F) 3. 7 to 4. 1 ohms 11. 3 to 11.9 ohms
Output Test (77 ° F):

Volts 13.0 14. 2 26. 3 28. 4
Amperes Output 10. 0 71. 5 10. 0 51.0
Field Amperes 2.85 3. 15 2.05 2.05
Alternator RPM 1780 min. 5000 min. 3220 min. 5000 min.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4E18
11-82. ALTERNATOR PARALLELING SYSTEM. (PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.

27-4794and up.)
11-83. DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATOR PARALLELING SYSTEM. The positive

output terminal of each alternator is connected to the aircraft electrical bus through
separate 90 ampere circuit breaker switches. Each alternator has a shunt installed between
aircraft electrical bus and its positive output terminal in order to monitor output current on
an ammeter.
The field circuit for each alternator is wired through a section of a Dual Master Switch
(L or R as appropriate), an auxiliary switch which is ganged to the circuit breaker switch, an
overvoltagerelay and a voltage regulator. Field voltage can be manually disconnected from
either alternator by turning off the appropriate section (L or R) of the Dual Master Switch.
Turning both sections of the master switch off completely disconnects all electrical power
from the aircraft bus bar. Field voltage will be automatically removed from an alternator
wheneverits overvoltagerelay actuates or its circuit breaker switch trips.
The system has one ammeter installed to measure system currents. The output current
of either alternator may be checked by rotating the switch, located below the ammeter to
the "Left" or "Right" position. A shunt is installed between aircraft electrical bus and the
positive terminal of the battery to allow measuring of the battery charge and discharge
current with the ammeter.
An alternator inoperative ("INOP") warning light is provided for each alternator. The
appropriate light will illuminate whenever its respective alternator fails to provide output
voltage. Whenever the engines are operating at a high differential RPM, the alternator
inoperative light for the slowerengine may come on.
The 90 ampere circuit breaker switches should not be turned off when their associated
alternator is operating normally. Turning "OFF" one of these switches while it is carrying
current could cause a high voltage transient to occur on the electrical bus with possible
subsequent damage to the semiconductor equipment attached to it.
11-84. DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATOR. For a complete description of the alternator,

refer to Paragraph 11-73.
11-85.CHECKING ALTERNATOR PARALLELING SYSTEM. Thealternatorparalleling

system incorporates an ammeter which provides for an independent check of each
alternator, as well as the charge/discharge current of the battery. In the event either
ALTERNATOR INOPERATIVE light begins to glow or the ammeter check for either
alternator fails to indicate an output, check the appropriate alternator circuit breaker
switch, also the voltage regulator circuit breaker. If the circuit breakers are in their normal
operating position a further check of the alternator system should be accomplished. (Refer
to Figure 11-49.)
a. Verify that the ammeter is operating properly.
b. Disconnectthe output (+) lead at the alternator.
c. Disconnect the field F-2 lead at the alternator.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4E19
4E20
NOTE: THIS IS A TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM FOR GENERAL
REFERENCE ONLY. FOR DETAILED SCHEMATIC SEE
TABLE XI-I.
OVERVOLTAGE
RELAY (RIGHT)
RIGHT
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
LEFT
WING
PLUG
SHUNT
IOOA
5mV
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Rcissued:2/18/81
4E21 4E22
CAUTION
DO NOT ALLOW THE FIELD LEAD TO COME IN CONTACT

WITH AIRFRAME GROUND WHEN THE MASTER
SWITCH IS ON AS THE VOLTAGE REGULATOR WILL BE
DAMAGED.
d. Verify that all electrical units are off and the battery is fully charged.
e. Turn ON the section of the master switch for the alternator being tested. (L or R.)
f. To check the alternator output circuit, connect a voltmeter or 14-volt test light to the previously
disconnected output (+) lead. Check that the circuit breaker switch for the alternator under test is turned on. If
a reading of approximately 14-volts is obtained on the voltmeter, or the test light glows, the output circuit is
operational.
g. Should there be no indication of voltage, trace back through the output circuit until voltage is
indicated. (Refer to Figure 11-35.) A component that does not indicate voltage at both its input and output
terminals should be replaced.
h. Check the field circuit by connecting a voltmeter to previously disconnected field (F-2) lead. If a
reading of approximately 14 volts is obtained on the voltmeter, the field circuit is operative.
i. If voltage is present at both the output and field leads, the alternator should be checked for a
possible malfunction. (Refer to Paragraph 11-76.)
11-86. REGULATOR.
11-87. REGULATOR COMPONENTS. (Prestolite). Alternator output voltage can, within the limits of the
design capability of the alternator, be controlled by properly varying the average level of current flow in the
rotor winding of the Prestolite full electronic solid state regulator. The Prestolite alternator has self-limiting
current characteristics and needs no current-limiting unit in the regulator.
a. Transistor: The transistor (Symbol "Q") is an electronic device which can control the flow of current
in an electric circuit. It has no mechanical or moving parts to wear out.
b. Rectifier Diode: The rectifier diode (Symbol "D") will pass current in only one direction (forward
direction): and in this respect it may be compared to a check valve.
c. Zener Diode: The zener diode (Symbol "Z") in addition to passing current in the forward direction,
will also pass current in the reverse direction when a particular value of reverse voltage is applied. This
property makes it useful as a voltage reference device in the regulator.
d. Capacitor: The capacitor (Symbol "C") is a device which will store electrical energy for short periods
of time. This property makes it useful as a filter element to smooth variations of voltage.
e. Resistor: The resistor (Symbol "R") is a device which is used to limit current flow.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4E23
11-88. REGULATOR COMPONENTS (Lamar). Alternator output voltage can, within limits of the design
capability of the alternator, be controlled by properly varying the average level of current flow in the rotor
winding of the Lamar solid state electronic regulator. The Prestolite alternator has self-limiting current
characteristics and therefore needs no current-limiting element in the regulator.
a. Transistor: The transistor (Symbol "Q") is an electronic device which can control the flow of current
in an electric circuit. It has no mechanical or moving parts to wear out.
b. Rectifier Diode: The rectifier diode (Symbol "D") will pass current in only one direction (forward
direction); and in this respect it may be compared to a check valve.
c. Zenor Diode: The zener diode (Symbol "Z") in addition to passing current in the forward direction,
will also pass current in the reverse direction when a particular value of reverse voltage is applied. This
property makes it useful as a voltage reference device in the regulator.
d. Capacitor: The capacitor (Symbol "C") is a device which will store electrical energy for short periods
of time. This property makes it useful as a filter element to smooth variations of voltage.
e. Resistor: The resistor (Symbol "R") is a device which is used to limit current flow.
11-89. OPERATION OF REGULATOR (PRESTOLITE). (Refer to Figure 11-50.)

a. When the alternator switch is turned on, battery voltage is applied to the "I" terminal of the
regulator.
b. The npn (negative-positive-negative) power transistor, T3, is turned on by current flow from the
ignition terminal through R6 and the collector emitter junction of T2 through D2 through the base emitter
junction of T3 to ground.
c. Whenever the power transistor, T3, is on (T2 is also on and T1 is off), current will flow from the
ignition terminal through the field winding, through the collector - emitter of T3 to ground.
d. With the master switch on, current will flow from the regulator "I" terminal to ground through a
voltage dividing network consisting of R 1, R2 and P1. This network determines the system operating voltage
relative to the Zenor diode, Z1, reverse conducting voltage.
e. When the system voltage connected to "I" terminal reaches a value at which the Zener diode
connected to the divider network conducts, current will flow from the "I" terminal through RI through Z I
and through the base emitter junction of T1 to ground. This causes the collector emitter junction of T1 to
conduct which diverts the base current of T2 flowing from "I" terminal through R4 to ground, turning off T2
which turns off T3, de-energizing the rotor winding; then, when the alternator output voltage falls to a value
which permits Z1 to cease conduction, T1 will turn off which turns on T2 and T3, re-energizing the rotor
winding.
f. This sequence is performed so rapidly that the rotor current average appears as values usually less
that full rotor current depending on rotor RPM and system load connected.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4E24
g. Each time the power transistor, T3, is turned off, current flow in the rotor winding
is reduced. This causes the rotor magnetic field to collapse which would generate high
voltage at the power transistor, T3, if a path were not provided so that the field current can
decay at a slower rate. The field suppression diode, D1, provides this path, thus protecting
the system and regulator from possible damage.
h. Temperature compensation is flat which means the regulator will hold the alternator
output voltage constant with temperature increase or decrease after initial warm-up.
i. The Prestolite solid state regulator uses three npn silicon transistors.
j. Capacitor, C1, is used to filter ripple and alternator diode switching spike when
operating without a battery.
k. Neon lamp, L1, provides transient voltage protection acting as a surge suppressor.
1. Control P1 is used to provide a limited range of voltage adjustment.
11-90. OPERATION OF REGULATOR (LAMAR). (Refer to Figure 11-51.)

a. When the alternator is turned on, battery voltage is applied to the "BUS" terminal
of the regulator and via Q4 through the "FIELD" terminal of the regulator to the alternator
field terminal F2. The amount of voltage applied to the field of the alternator is controlled
automatically by action of the regulator in response to alternator output as described below.
b. Current flow through R6 and Z1 establishesa reference voltage across Z1.
c. Resistors R1 and R2+R3comprise a voltage divider which is adjustable by means of
the variable portion R3. Voltage at the junction of R1 and R2 and the reference voltage
across Z1 are applied to comparison transistor Q1. R3 is adjusted so that these voltagesare
balanced with the desired alternator output voltage present on the "BUS" terminal of the
regulator.
d. Thereafter, wheneveralternator output voltage (as applied to the "BUS" terminal)
falls below the desired regulation value, the comparison transistor Q1 will supply increased
current to driver transistors Q2/Q3, which in turn will drive power transistor Q4 to a higher
value of field current. This will result in alternator output voltage increasing to a value
which willrestore balance between the two voltagesapplied to Q1.
e. Conversely,if alternator output voltage (as applied to the "BUS" terminal) increases
due to a greater engine speed or reduced loading of the electrical system, the comparison
transistor Q1 will act to reduce current flow to the driver transistors Q2/Q3, and thus
reduce the drive to power transistor Q4. This will result in a reduction of alternator field
current and automatically restore balance between the two voltages applied to comparison
transistor Q1.
f. Capacitors C1 and C2 function, together with their related transistors, in a way to
smooth alternator output ripple and voltage spikes so that the alternator field current is
controlled at a steady value.
g. The LAMARsolid state regulator controls alternator field current to a steady value
as required by the electrical load conditions and engine speed. It does not continuously
switch field current between high and low values as do mechanical regulators and the
switchingtype of electronic regulators.
h. The design of this unit is such as to provide an alternator output voltage that does
not vary with ambient temperature.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
4F1
Figure 11-50. Regulator Diagram (Prestolite)
ENCAPSULATED
CONTROL ASSY.
R 2
Figure 11-51. Regulator Diagram (Lamar)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4F2
11-91. BALANCING CIRCUIT OPERATION. (Considering two identical alternators and regulators
having the "PAR" terminals of the regulators connected.)
a. Balancing circuit operation is initiated within one regulator whenever individual field voltages
delivered by the regulator units to their related alternators are not equal.
b. When a difference in individual field voltages occurs, one-half the difference is impressed across R 12
within each regulator and is thus applied to the input of Q5.
c. In that regulator which is delivering the lower field voltage, the polarity of R 12voltagedrop causes
Q5 collector current flow.
d. Q5 collector current flow results in conduction occurring in the collector circuit of Q6.
e. Q6 collector current flows from regulator divider R I R2 + R3 through limiting resistor R 17 to
ground.
f. Conduction through R 17 effectively alters the ratio of the regulator divider R1 R2 + R3 in the
direction to increase Q I collector current flow.
g. As described above under REGULATING CIRCUIT OPERATION, increased Q1 current results
in increased output from the regulator to the field of its related alternator.
h. Feedback action results in Q6 collector current stabilizing at a value that results in nearly equal field
voltage being delivered by the two regulators to their respective alternator fields.
i. The balancing circuit will thus automatically maintain, at a proper value, the difference voltage
applied to the alternator fields. In a parallel system having identical alternators operating at the same RPM.
the output currents of the alternators will thus be maintained nearly equal.
j. In whichever regulator of a pair is set to deliver the highest voltage, the balancing circuits are
inactive. Thus system voltage is determined by the regulator of a pair which is set to higher voltage. The lower
set regulator will adjust itself automatically, as described above, to deliver the same field voltage as the one
which is set higher, within the limits of its design capability.
k. The balancing regulator system as described provides for automatic load balancing of parallel
operated alternators having independent field excitation circuits. The pilot can, while in flight, remove either
alternator system completely from the aircraft system and maintain operation of the other system.
11-92. PREPARATION FOR TESTING. (Regulators may be tested using the aircraft's alternator or an
alternator test stand.)
CAUTION
Do not interchange regulator leads. This will destroy regulator and

void warranty.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2 18 81
4F3
a. The aircraft technician or other electrical systems specialist, must disconnect the battery ground
cable at the battery before connecting or disconnecting a test ammeter or other test equipment or before
making wiring changes in the electrical system.
b. Voltmeters with test probes or clips are not recommended. Fully insulated bolted terminal
connections are best, and these should be attached when all power is removed as described above.
c. When installing a battery in an aircraft, be sure that the battery negative terminal is in a position so
that this terminal can be connected to the battery ground cable for negative ground systems.
d. The regulator under test is to be mounted on a grounded metallic surface using three No. 8 screws
pulled up tight. For extended test periods the heat transfer from regulator to the mounting surface is
significant.
e. A ground wire between the regulator "GND" terminal and the aircraft or test stand structure is
essential for proper operation. The alternator frame must also be solidly bonded to the system ground.
f. The alternator does not need to be polarized; therefore, never connect ground, even momentarily, to
either the regulator field terminal or to the alternator field terminals. Do not interchange I and F leads to
regulator as this will destroy the regulator.
g. The LAMAR regulator is intended for use with alternator systems having one field terminal
grounded at the alternator. The other field terminal F2 of the alternator is connected to the "FIELD" terminal
of the regulator. NEVER UNDER ANY CIRCUMSTANCE PERMIT A GROUND TO CONTACT THIS
CIRCUIT EVEN FOR AN INSTANT WHILE POWER IS APPLIED TO THE SYSTEM. Due to this
precaution, the mechanic should not use tools near these circuits while power is applied.
h. The alternator should be in good condition and capable of producing full output, and the alternator
drive belt must be adjusted tight enough to prevent slippage. (Refer to Paragraph 11-102.)
i. The battery must be in good condition and should be fully charged.
j. The voltmeter and ammeter should be of the best quality and should be accurate.
k. A carbon-pile connected across the battery may be used to load the charging circuit while testing the
regulator.
11-93. TESTING REGULATOR (PRESTOLITE).
a. The procedure for testing the regulator, whether on the airplane or on the test bench, remains the
same. Connect test meters as shown in Figure 11-52.
b. All circuit connections should be clean and tight. This includes the test instrument connections
which must not come loose or open the charging circuit at any time while the system is operating.
c. The voltmeter will not indicate the true regulator setting until the regulator has been operating in the
charging system or on the test bench for at least one minute, at a charge rate of from 10 to 15 amperes.
d. Connect the voltmeter and the ammeter as shown in Figure 11-52. Start the engine and adjust its
speed to obtain 900 to 1200 RPM or 3,000 to 4,000 alternator RPM on a test bench setup. Turn on the
accessories as needed to establish 10 to 15 amperes electrical load, or use a carbon-pile across the battery to
obtain this charge rate.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4F4
4F4
Reissued: 2/18/81
Figure 11-52. Testing Regulator (Prestolite)
e. After one minute operating time, check the regulator operating voltage as indicated by the volt-
meter. Refer to Alternator Service Test Specifications, Paragraph 11-81for the correct operating voltage. The
operating voltage is shown for the ambient temperature in which the regulator is operating.
f. If the voltmeter indicates that the operating voltage is not within limits, lift the plastic plug from top
of regulator and adjust the voltage to the desired value. Replace the plug after adjustment. Before condemning
the regulator, recheck the alternator and the battery; making sure that they are in good condition. Recheck all
circuit connections and all wiring for unwanted resistance (voltage drop test). Recheck the voltmeter for
accuracy and repeat the entire operating test.
11-94. TESTING REGULATOR (LAMAR).

a. The procedure for testing the regulator, whether on the airplane or on the test bench, remains the
same. Connect the test meters and regulator wiring as shown in Figure 11-53.
b. All circuit connections should be clean and tight. This includes the test instrument connections
which must not come loose or open the charging circuit at any time while the system is operating.
c. The voltmeter will not indicate the true regulator setting until the regulator has been operating in the
charging system or on the test bench for at least five minutes, at a charge rate of from 10 to 15 amperes.
d. With the connections made asshown in Figure 11-53. start theengine and adjust speed to obtain 900
to 1200 RPM or 3,000 to 4,000 alternator RPM on a test bench setup. Adjust the carbon pile or accessory load
to establish the 10to 15ampere load value. Note that the battery charge current is indicated by the ammeter.
Therefore, the current value may change downward at the beginning of a test run. This will be especially true if
the batters was used for engine starting.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4F5
DC CARBON
AMMETER PILE
Figure 11-53. Testing Regulator (Lamar)
e. After five minutes operating time, check the regulator operating voltage as indicated
by the voltmeter. Refer to Alternator Service Test Specificationsas outlined in Paragraph
11-81for correct operating voltage. The operating voltage is shown for ambient temperature
in which the regulator is operating.
f. If the voltmeter reading indicates that the operating voltage is not within limits,
carefully insert a small screwdriver (Phillips#0) in the voltage adjustment access hole on
top of the regulator and adjust voltage adjustment slowly to obtain desired value. Before
condemning the regulator, recheck the alternator and the battery; making sure that they are
in good condition. Recheck all circuit connections and all wiring for unwanted resistance
(voltage drop test). Recheck the voltmeter for accuracy and repeat the entire operating test.
g. Balance circuit operation is confirmed by closing the press-to-test switch
momentarily and observing that the alternator output current increases abruptly to a higher
level. Upon release of this switch, the alternator output will be restored to its previouslevel,
except that minor differencesmay be noted which are due to battery charge conditions.
11-95. ADJUSTING REGULATOR (PRESTOLITE).

a. Adjustment: These units have an external adjustment located under the plastic plug
on top of the regulator. The regulator has an adjustment spread rangingfrom 13.0-voltsto
15.0-volts for the 14-voltelectrical system or 26.0-volts to 30.0-volts for the28-volt system.
Output is increased by turning the adjustment clockwise.
b. Operating Voltage: The regulator should be adjusted to 14.2-volts(14-Yoltsystem)
or 28.4-volts (28-volt system) when controlling a load of 10 to 15-ampsafter one minute
operation. These units are not affected by ambient temperatures. The voltmeter must be
connected from the "I" or switch terminal to ground.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4r6
B294 D.C. BUS
PRECISIONV/M
(INITIALSETTING
O/V POSITION) O/V
FORADJUSTMENT
DISCONNECT
BUS GND PAR EADS BUS GND
REGULATOR REGULATOR
"A"
FIELD PAR FIELD PAR
2 SUGGESTEDMETER2
SIMPSON#260 OR EQUV.
RANGE 0-50V & O-5V DC
(FINALADJUSTMENTPOSITION)
NOTE:
THIS DIAGRAM SHOWSONLY BASIC CAUTION:
CONNECTIONSFORTHE PURPOSEOF FIELD V/M CIRCUIT MUST
EXPLAINING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE. NEVER TOUCH GROUND
Figure 11-54. Adjusting Regulator (Lamar)
c. Caution Notes:
1. Use only with insulated (ungrounded) field alternators.
2. Regulator base must have a good ground connection.
3. Do not connect ground power to aircraft until voltage regulator "I" terminal has
been disconnected from electricalsystem.
4. Do not (even momentarily) connect the two voltage regulator terminals
together.
5. Do not connect battery into system with polarity reversed.
6. Do not force the voltage adjustment screw.
7. This is a sealedunit and not repairable. Replacewith a new unit.
11-96. ADJUSTING REGULATOR (LAMAR). (Refer to Figure 11-54.)

a. These regulators are normally used in parallel alternator systems of multi-engine
aircraft. Their final adjustment should be made in actual operation in the aircraft system
with test equipment connected as shown in Figure 11-54. The balance adjustment is made
while operating only one engine, either left or right. The engine to be operated must be
selected so as to permit the technician a completely safe access to both of the regulators, so
that they may be adjusted while the engine is operating-without danger. We shall designate
the engine selected to be operated as "LEFT" and the inoperative engine as "RIGHT" for
purposes of discussion.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4F7
b. Lift the wire from the "PAR" terminal of either regulator and insulate the free end so it will
contact other circuits or ground during the adjustment procedure. Breaking this circuit disables the balancing
circuits in both regulators.
c. Turn off the "RIGHT" alternator field switch. All the "LEFT" alternator switches are to be on.
d. Operate the left engine and alternator system with a load of at least 15 amperes and engine speed of
900 to 1500 RPM for at least one minute for warm-up of the system. Place the positive (+) lead of a precision
voltmeter on the bus terminal of the left regulator and the negative (-) lead of the voltmeter on the ground
terminal of the "LEFT" regulator. If required, carefully set the "LEFT" regulator voltage adjustment to 14.3 or
28.5 volts as per aircraft system. Replace the snap plug in the "LEFT" regulator adjustment access hole.
CAUTION
DO NOT MAKE ANY FURTHER ADJUSTMENT OF THE

"LEFT" REGULATOR.
c. While continuing "LEFT" engine operation with electrical load the same as before, turn on the
"RIGHT" alternator system switches. (The "RIGHT" engine, however is NOT operating.)
.f. Connect a Simpson #260 (or equivalent voltmeter, range 0-50 and 0-5 VDC. as indicated in Figure
11-54. The positive (+) lead of the voltmeter is conneted to the "field"terminal of the "LEFT" regulator and the
negative (-) lead of the voltmeter is connected to the "field" terminal of the "RIGHT" regulator. Now very
slowly rotate the "RIGHT" regulator voltage adjustment while observing the field circuit voltmeter.
(Suggested voltmeter range setting. 0-50V.) If a reverse (downscale) reading is obtained turn the "RIGHT"
regulator adjustment counterclockwise to bring the meter up scale. Then, very slowly turn the "RIGHT"
regulator adjustment clockwise to make the field voltmeter read near zero. A stable reading should not be
expected. A correct adjustment has been achieved when the meter will remain briefly in the vicinity of zero
swinging both upscale and downscale. The use of a low range on the voltmeter is recommended for the fi
adjustment. (Suggested voltmeter range setting. 0-5V.)
g. Replace the snap plug in the "RIGHT" regulator adjustment hole.
h. Shut down the engine and master switch, then replace the connection to the "PAR"terminal which
was removed in step b. Remove all voltmeter leads and test equipment.
11-97. OVERVOLTAGE CONTROL.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4F8
Figure 11-55. Application of Over-Voltage Figure 11-56. Testing Over-Voltage Control

Control
11-98. PURPOSE AND OPERATION.

a. The overvoltage control is used to protect electrical circuits and electronic equipment from
excessive voltage in the event of a charging circuit malfunction.
b. The overvoltage control consists of a mechnical relay and a solid state triggering device. The solid
state triggering device activates the mechanical relay, when the voltage reaches a present value, thereby
opening the relay contacts and disconnecting the field circuit of the alternator.
c. The relay contacts will remain open until the alternator switch is turned off. Figure 11-55illustrates
the overvoltage control connected in a typical Prestolite insulated field alternator.
11-99. TEST PROCEDURE. Connect the relay as shown in Figure 11-56. Use a 100 ohm potentiometer of
15 watt rating, or more, to adjust the voltage. The voltmeter is used to read the voltage until the relays opens, at
which time the voltmeter reading will drop to zero. See tabulation for voltage reading. Test figures are at 75
degrees Fahrenheit.
a. 14-volt system: Relay contacts open between 15.5 and 16.5 volts. Use 18 or 24 volts to test.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4F9
4F9 Reissued: 2 18 81
b. 28 volt system: Relay contacts open between 31.5 and 32.5 volts. Use 36 volts to test.
NOTE
These units are not adjustable. Replace the overvoltage control

if it does not test to specifications.
11-100. OVERVOLTAGE RELAY OPERATIONAL CHECK. This check should be made

at each 500 hour inspection, per the following instructions:
a. Determine that aircraft master switch is OFF.
b. Pull out (OFF) all circuit breakers except the main and auxiliary voltage regulators( 10
amp).
c. Turn off the right and left alternator output circuit breaker switches (90 amp).
d. Set the voltage regulator to MAIN.
e. Obtain a variable D.C. voltage power supply and set it to zero output.
f. Connect the power supply to the aircraft through the external power receptacle.
NOTE
On aircraft without an external power receptacle, disconnect

the battery cables and connect the power supply to the cables.
CAUTION
Connections must be positive to positive and negative to

negative.
g. Obtain a volt/ohmmeter and set the selector to a D.C. voltage scale of no less than 16.5
volts. Connect the meter VOM lead to the output (REG.) terminal of the MAIN overvoltage
relay. Connect the meter COM lead to the airframe ground.
h. Increase the output voltage of the variable D.C. power supply until the MAIN
overvoltage relay trips out. When the relay operates, the VOM needle should drop to zero
volts. Record the power supply voltmeter reading which was indicated just prior to the
overvoltage relay operating. Voltage limits are: Min. 15.5-volts - Max. 16.5-volts for the 14-
volt system and Min. 31.5-volts - Max. 32-5-volts for the 28-volt system.
CAUTION
Limit overvoltage operation to two minutes maximum.
i. Reduce the power supply voltage to zero.

j. Set the VOM to resistance scale and determine continuity between battery terminal
(BAT) and regulator terminal (REG.) on the overvoltage relay, to insure that the relay is reset.
k. Change the voltage regulator selector switch from MAIN to AUX. Reconnect the
volt/ohmmeter to the AUX overvoltage relay and repeat steps i thru 1.
1. Reset circuit breakers, turn on alternator output circuit breakers, reset voltage
regulator selector to MAIN, disconnect VOM, and reconnect the battery cables if previously
removed.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4F10
11-101. OVERVOLTAGE RELAY OPERATIONAL CHECK (PARALLELING

SYSTEM). This check should be accomplished at each 500 hour inspection, per the following
instructions:
a. Pull all circuit breakers to the out (OFF) position except the left and right voltage
regulator (10 amp) circuit breakers and the alternator (90 amp) circuit breaker switches.
b. Obtain a variable D.C. voltage power supply and set it to zero output.
c. Connect the power supply to the aircraft through the external power receptacle.
d. Turn ON the left alternator section of the Dual Master Switch.
e. Obtain a volt/ohmmeter and set to 60-volts D.C. Connect the positive lead of the
VOM to the output (LOAD) terminal of the LEFT overvoltage relay. Connect the negative
lead of the VOM to airframe ground.
f. Increase the output voltage of the variable D.C. power supply until the LEFT
overvoltage relay trips out. (An audible click will be heard whenn the relay operates and the
VOM needle must drop to zero volts.) Record the power supply voltmeter reading which was
indicated just prior to the overvoltage relay operating. Voltage limits are: Min. 15.50-volts-
Max. 16.50-volts.
g. Reduce the power supply to zero. Turn OFF the left alternator section of the Dual
Master Switch. Another click will be heard when the overvoltage relay resets itself for normal
operation.
h. Turn ON the right alternator section of the Dual Master Switch. Reconnect the volt/
ohmmeter to the right overvoltage relay and repeat steps f and g.
Width of Torque Indicated at Generator

Belt Condition or Alternator Pulley
3/8 inch New 11 to 13 ft. lbs.

3/8 inch Used 7 to 9 ft. Ibs.
1/2 inch New 13 to 15 ft. Ibs.
1/2 inch Used 9 to 11 ft. Ibs.
11-102. CHECKING GENERATOR OR ALTERNATOR BELT TENSION. If properly

installed, tensioned and checked periodically, the generator or alternator drive belt will give
very satisfactory service. However, an improperly tensioned belt will wear rapidly and may slip
and reduce generator or alternator output. Consequently, a belt should be checked for proper
tension at the time it is installed, again after 24 hours of operaion and each 100 hours
thereafter.
There are two satisfactory methods of checking generator or alternator belt tension;
however, the first method described will be found preferable by most maintenance personnel
because it is technically simple and requires little time for accomplishment.
a. Torque Method: This method of checking belt tension consists of measuring torque
required to slip the belt at the small pulley and is accomplished as follows:
I. Apply a torque indicating wrench to the nut that attaches the pulley to the
generator and alternator and turn it in a clockwise direction. Observe the torque shown on the
wrench at the instant the pulley slips.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4F11 4F11 Reissued: 2/18/81

2. Check the torque indicated in step b with torqe specified in the following chart.
Adjust belt tension accordingly.
NOTE
The higher tension specified for a new belt is to compensate for

the initial stretch that takes place as soon as it is operated.
These higher tension values should not be applied to belts
which previously have been used.
b. Deflection Method: Belt tension may be checked by measuring the amount of

deflection caused by a predetermined amount of tension. This is accomplished in the following
manner:
1. Attach the hook of a small spring-scale to the belt at the approximate mid-point
between the rear gear support and the generator or alternator.
2. Pull on the scale until a reading of 14 pounds is obtained. (10 pounds for used
belts.)
3. Measure the distance the belt has moved with the 10 or 14 pound load applied. The
distance (deflection) should be 5/16 inch. If less than 5/16 inch, the belt is too tight.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4F12 4F12 Reissued: 2/18/81

4F13
11-103. STARTING MOTOR (Delco-Remy).
11-104. OPERATION OF STARTING MOTOR. When the starting motor switch

is closed, the armature begins to rotate. The drive pinion, being a loose fit on
the drive sleeve located on the armature shaft, does not pick up speed as fast as
the armature. Therefore, the drive pinion, having internally matched splines
with respect to the splined drive sleeve, moves endwise on the shaft and into mesh
with the flywheel. As the pinion hits the pinion stop, it begins to rotate with the
armature and cranks the engine.
When the engine starts, the flywheel begins to spin the pinion faster than
the armature. Again, because of the splined action of the pinion and drive sleeve
assembly, the pinion backs out of mesh with the flywheel ring gear protecting the
armature from excessive speeds.
Some Bendix drives incorporate a small anti-drift spring between the drive
pinion and the pinion stop which prevents the pinion from drifting into mesh when
the engine is running. Others use a small anti-drift pin and spring inside the pin-
ion which provides enough friction to keep the pinion from drifting into mesh.
Never operate the motor for more than 30 seconds without pausing for two
minutes to allow it to cool.
11-105. CHECKING STARTING MOTOR. Several checks, both visual and elec-
trical, should be made in a defective starting circuit to isolate trouble before
removing any unit. Many times a component is removed from the airplane only
to find it is not defective after reliable tests. Therefore, before removing a unit
in a defective starting system, the following checks should be made:
a. Determine the condition of the battery.
b. Inspect the wiring for frayed insulation orother damage. Replace anywir-
ing that is damaged. Inspect all connections to the starting motor, solenoid
switch, starting switch or any other control switch, and battery, including all
ground connections. Clean and tighten all connections and wiring as required.
The engine manufacturer specifies allowable voltage drop in the starting circuit.
For this information, refer to the manufacturer's shop manual.
c. Inspect starting and solenoid switches to determine their condition. Con-
nect a jumper lead around any switch or solenoid suspected of being defective.
If the system functions properly using this method, repair or replace the bypassed
unit.
d. If specified battery voltage can be measured at the motor terminal of the
starting motor, allowing for some voltage drop in the circuit and the engine is
known to be functioning properly, remove the motor and follow the test proce-
dures outlined below.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4F14
11-106. TEST AND MAINTENANCE OF

STARTING MOTORS.
drag and it will not turn freely. If the

armature does not turn freely, the mo-
tor should be disassembled immedi-
Figure 11-57. No-load Test Hookup
ately. However, if the armature does
operate freely, the motor should be given electrical tests before disassembly.
11-108.NO LOAD TEST. (Refer to Figure 11-57.) Connect the starting motor
in series with a fully charged battery of the specified voltage, an ammeter ca-
pable of reading several hundred amperes, and a variable resistance. Also con-
nect a voltmeter as illustrated, from the motor terminal to the motor frame. An
RPM indicator is necessary to measure armature speed. Obtain the specified
voltage by varying the resistance unit. Then read the current draw and the ar-
mature speed and compare these readings with the values listed in paragraph
11-114.Interpret the test results as follows:
a. Rated current draw and no load speed indicate normal conditionof the start-
ing motor.
b. Low free speed and high current draw indicate:
1. Too much friction - tight, dirty, or worn bearings, bent armature shaft
or loose pole shoes allowing armature to drag.
2. Shorted armature. This can be further checked on a growler after dis -
assembly.
c. Failure to operate with high current draw indicates:
1. A direct ground in the terminal or fields.
2. "Frozen" bearings (this should have been determined by turning the ar-
mature by hand).
d. Failure to operate with no current draw indicates:
1. Open field circuit. This can be checked after disassembly by inspec-
ting internal connections and tracing circuit with a test lamp.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
CRANKINGMOTO
Figure 11-58. Lock-Torque Figure 11-59. Resistance

Test Hookup Test Hookup
2. Open armature coils. Inspect the commutator for badly burned bars
after disassembly.
3. Broken brush springs, worn brushes, high insulation between the com-
mutator bars or other causes which wouldprevent good contact between the brush-
es and commutator.
e. Low no-load speed and low current draw indicate high internal resistance
due to poor connections, defective leads, dirty commutator and causes listed under.
step d.
f. High free speed and high current draw indicate shorted fields. If shorted
fields are suspected, replace the field coil assembly and checkfor improvedper-
formance.
11-109. LOCK-TORQUE TEST. (Refer to Figure 11-58.) The lock-torque test

requires the equipment illustrated. A variable resistance with a high current
capacity should be used. The starting motor should be securely mounted and a
brake arm hooked to the drive pinion. Use extreme caution during this test to
make sure the end of the brake arm does not slip off the pinion when current is
applied. When specified current is applied, the torque can be computed from the
reading on the scale. A one foot brake arm will directly indicate pound-feet.
Compare the pound-feet of torque as read on the scale with that listed in para-
graph 11-114. If the torque is low, the motor must be disassembled for further
tests and repair.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4F16
4F16 Reissued:2/18/81
11-110. RESISTANCE TEST. (Refer to Figure 11-59.) This test requires equipment
similar to the lock-torque test, with the exception that the pinion is locked secureley so it
cannot rotate. When the specified voltage is applied, the current should fall in a range as
indicated in paragraph 11-114. A high current indicates grounded or shorted condutors,
and a low current indicates excessiveresistance.
11-111. DISASSEMBLY. If the motor does not perform in accordance with pub-
lished specifications, it may need to be disassembled for further testing of the
components. Normally the starting motor should be disassembled only so far
as is necessary to make repair or replacementof the defective parts. As a pre-
caution, it is suggested that safety glasses be worn when disassembling or as-
sembling the starting motor. Following are general instructions for disassem-
bling a typical Bendix drive starting motor.
a. Remove the cover band, if present, and detach the field coil leads from the
brush holders.
b. If gear reduction, remove the drive housing and reduction housing.
c. Remove the bolts attaching the drive housing and commutator end frame to
the field frame assembly. Discard the tang lock washers.
d. Separate the commutator end frame, armature assembly, field frame and
drive housing.
e. Remove and disassemble the drive from the armature shaft by first iden-
tifying the type Bendix drive and then following one of the guides below:
1. Standard Bendix Drive: Remove the head spring screw and slip it off
the armature shaft.
2. Folo-Thru-Bendix Drive: Push in the outer anchor plate so the pilot
screw or pin can be removed.
NOTE
Some Folo-Thru drives use a rubber cushion in place

of a drive spring. To remove from shaft, screw pin-
ion out to drive position, then force pin from shaft
through screw sleeve holes.
CAUTION
Do not disassemble this drive, service is by complete

replacement.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4F17
11-112. COMPONENT INSPECTION AND REPAIR.

a. Brushes and Brush Holders: Inspect the brushes for wear. If they areworn
down to one-half their original length, when compared with a new brush, they
should be replaced. Make sure the brush holders are clean and the brushes are
not binding in the holders. The full brush surface should ride on the commutator
with proper spring tension (Refer to Paragraph 11-114. ) to give good, firm con-
tact. Brush leads and screws should be tight and clean.
b. Armature: The armature should be checked for short circuits, opens and
grounds:
1. Short circuits are located by rotating the armature in a growler with a
steel strip such as a hacksaw blade held on the armature. The steel strip will
vibrate on the area of the short circuit. Shorts between bars are sometimes pro-
duced by brush dust or copper between the bars. Undercutting the insulation will
eliminate these shorts.
2. Opens: Inspect the points where the conductors are joined to the com-
mutator for loose connections. Poor connections cause arcing and burning of the
commutator. If the bars are not badly burned, resolder the leads in the riser
bars and turn the commutator down in a lathe. Then undercut the insulation be-
tween the commutator bars .031 of an inch.
3. Grounds in the armature can be detected by the use of a test lamp and
prods. If the lamp lights when one test prod is placed on the commutator and the
other test prod on the armature core or shaft, the armature is grounded. If the
commutator is worn, dirty, out of round, or has high insulation, the commutator
should be turned down and undercut as previously described.
c. Field Coils: The field coils should be checked for grounds andopens using
a test lamp.
1. Grounds: Disconnect field coil ground connections. Connect one test
prod to the field frame and the other to the field connector. If the lamp lights,
the field coils are grounded and must be repaired or replaced.
2. Opens: Connect test lamp prods to ends of field coils. If lamp does not
light, the field coils are open.
If the field coils need to be removed for repair or replacement, a pole shoe
spreader and pole shoe screwdriver should be used. Care should be exercised
in replacing the field coils to prevent grounding or shorting them as they are tight-
ened into place. Where the pole shoe has a long lip on one side, it should be as-
sembled in the direction of armature rotation.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4F18
4F 18 Reissued: 2/18/81
11-113. ASSEMBLY. To reassemble the motor, follow the disassembly proce-

dures in reverse. Install new tang lock washers where removed.
CAUTION
If Folo-Thru drive is manually rotated to locked posi-

tion, do not attempt to force it in a reverse direction.
Proceed to install with pinion meshing with flywheel.
When engine starts, the drive will return to the de-
meshed position.
11-114. STARTING MOTOR SERVICE TEST SPECIFICATIONS. Delco-Remy

specifications for 14 and 28-volt starting motors installed as standard equipment
on PA-23 series airplanes are as follows:
Motor Model 1109688 1109511 1109696
Delco -Remy, Ref,

Service Bulletin 1M-110 1M-110 1M-110
Minimum Brush Tension 24 oz. 24 oz. 24 oz.
No-Load Test
Volts 10.6 10.6 23.5
Min. Amps ---- ---- ----
Max. Amps 60 60 55
Min. RPM 3000 3000 2800
Max. RPM --- --
Lock Test
Amps 300 300 150
Torque (ft-lbs) 18 18 14
Approx. Volts 7.3 7.3 21.0
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4F19
Figure 11-60. Exploded View of Gear Reduction Starting Motor
11-115. STARTING MOTORS (Prestolite).
11-116.DESCRIPTION. The gear reduction starting motor consists of six major

components: The Commutator End Head Assembly,The Armature, The Frame and Field
Assembly. The Gear Housing, The Pinion Housing, and The Bendix Drive Assembly.
11-117. OPERATION. When the starting circuit is energized, battery current

is applied to the starting motor terminal. Current flows through the field coils,
creating a strong magnetic field. At the same time, current flows through the
brushes to the commutator, through the armature windings to ground. The mag-
netic force created in the armature combined with that created in the field wind-
ings begins to turn the armature.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4F20 4F20 Reissued: 2/18/81
The gear cut on the drive end of the armature shaft extends through the gear
housing, where it is supported by a roller bearing. The gear mates with the teeth
of the reduction gear that drives the Bendix shaft. The shaft is keyed to the re-
duction gear. The Bendix drive is held in position on the shaft by a "spirol" pin.
The shaft is supported in the gear housing by a closed end roller bearing and in
the pinion housing by a graphitized bronze bearing.
When the armature turns the reduction gear, the Bendix drive pinion meshes
with the flywheel ring gear by inertia and action of the screw threads within the
Bendix sleeve. A detent pin engages in a notch in the screw threads which pre-
vents demeshing if the engine fails to start when the starting circuit is de-ener-
gized.
When the engine reaches a predetermined speed, centrifugal action forces
the detent pin out of the notch in the screw shaft and allows the pinion to demesh
from the flywheel.
11-118. MAINTENANCE. The starting circuit should be inspected at regular

intervals, the frequency of which should be determined by the amount of service
and the conditions under which the airplane is operated. It is recommended that
such inspection be made at least twice a year and include the following:
a. The battery should be checked with a hydrometer to be sure it is fully
charged and filled to the proper level with approved water. A load test should
be made to determine battery condition. If dirt and corrosion have accumulated
on the battery, it should be cleaned with a solution of baking soda and water. Be
sure none of the solution enters the battery cells.
b. The starting circuit wiring should be inspected to be sure that all connec-
tions are clean and tight and that the insulation is sound. A voltage loss test
should be made to locate any high-resistance connections that would affect start-
ing motor efficiency. This test is made with a low-reading voltmeter while crank-
ing the engine or at approximately 100 amperes, and the following limits should
be used:
1. Voltage loss from insulated battery post to starting motor terminal -
0. 3-volt maximum.
2. Voltage loss from battery ground post to starter frame - 0.1-volt max-
imum.
NOTE
If voltage loss is greater than the above limits, addi-

tional tests should be made over each part of the cir-
cuit to locate the high-resistance connections.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4F21
PIPER AZTECSERVICE MANUAL
PIPERAZTEC
SERVICE
MANUAL
c. No lubrication is required on the starting motor except at the time of over-

haul. Then lubricate the entire shaft under Bendix Drive, fill grooves in arma-
ture shaft at drive end and pack gear box with 1. 3 to 2. 0 ounces of Lithium Soap
Base Grease #1925 Molytex "O" or equivalent.
d. The starting motor should be operated for a few seconds with the ignition
switch off to make sure that the pinion engages properly and that it turns freely
without binding or excessive noise. Then the engine should be started two or three
times to see that the pinion disengages properly when the engine is turned off.
11-119. OVERHAUL. If, during the above inspection, any indication of starting
motor difficulty is noted, the starting motor should be removed from the engine
for cleaning and repair.
11-120. REMOVAL. To remove the starting motor from the engine, first dis-
connect the ground cable from the battery post to prevent short circuiting. Dis-
connect the lead from the starting motor terminal, then take out the mounting
bolts. The motor can then be lifted off and taken to the bench for overhaul.
11-121. DISASSEMBLY.
a. Remove the frame screws from the commutator end head and pull end head
and armature from frame. Lift the brushes and lock in elevated position with
brush springs. Use a puller to remove the end head from the armature. Use a
special bearing puller to remove the sealed ball bearing from the armature shaft.
b. Remove the frame screws that secure the gear housing to the frame. Re-
move bolts and nuts holding the gear housing to the pinion housing and separate
the two units. Pull Bendix shaft from pinion housing. Do not lose the steel spacer
that is located on the pinion end of the shaft. Remove reduction gear, woodruff
key and steel spacer from shaft.
c. Turn the Bendix pinion until it locks in the extended position. Locate "spi-
rol" pin and use a punch to remove. Slide drive assembly off the shaft. Do not
attempt to disassemble the drive and do not dip it in cleaning solvent.
d. To remove the roller bearings from the gear housing, use an arbor press
and the correct bearing arbor. DO NOT HAMMER OUT. Each part should be
cleaned and inspected for excessive wear or damage. Bearings should be checked
for proper clearance and evidence of roughness or galling. Oil and dirt should be
removed from insulation and the condition of the insulation checked.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4F22
375 376 A
Figure 11-61. Turning Starting Figure 11-62. Testing Motor

Motor Commutator Armature for Shorts
11-122. BRUSHES. Check the brushes to see thatthey slide freely in their hold-
ers and make full contact on the commutator. If worn to half their original length
or less, they should be replaced.
11-123. ARMATURE.
a. Check the commutator for uneven wear, excessive glazing or evidence of
excessive arcing. If only slightly dirty, glazed or discolored, the commutator
can be cleaned with 00 or 000 sandpaper. If the commutator is rough or worn, it
should be turned in a lathe. (Refer to Figure 11-61.) The armature shaft should
be inspected for rough bearing surfaces and rough or damaged splines.
b. To test the armature for grounds, a set of test probes connected in series
with a 110-volt light should be used. Touch one probe to a commutator segment
and the other to the armature core. If the test lamp lights, the armature is
grounded and should be replaced.
c. To test for shorted armature coils, a growler is used. (Refer to Figure
11-62.) The armature is placed on the growler and slowly rotated by hand while
a steel strip is held over the core so that it passes over each armature core slot.
If a coil is shorted, the steel strip will vibrate.
d. A quick check for opens can be made by inspecting the trailing edge (in di-
rection of rotation) of the commutator segments for excessive discoloration. This
condition indicates an open circuit.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4F23
11-124. FIELD COILS.

a. Check the field coils for grounds
(Refer to Figure 11-63) by placing one
test probe on the frame and the other
on the starter terminal. Be sure the
brushes are not accidentally touching
the frame. If the lamp lights, the fields
are grounded. Repair or replace.
b. Inspect all connections to make
sure they are clean and tight and in-
spect insulation for deterioration.
11-125. BRUSH HOLDERS.

a. To test brush holders, touch one
test probe to the brush plate and the Figure 11-63. Testing Motor
other to each brush holder. Fields for Grounds
b. The test lamp should light when
the grounded brush holders are touched and should not light when the insulated
brush holders are touched.
11-126. GEAR AND PINION HOUSING. Inspect housingsforcracksandbearings

for excessive wear. Remove rust, paint or grease from mounting surfaces.
11-127. BENDIX DRIVE. The Bendix Drive should be wiped clean with a dry
cloth. The pinion should turn smoothly in one direction and should lock in the
other direction. Replace drive if it fails to check as above or if the pinion teeth
are excessively worn or damaged.
11-128. ASSEMBLY.
a. When assembling the starting motor, always use an arbor press and the
proper bearing arbor for installing graphitized bronze and roller bearings. The
Bendix shaft should have a thin film of Lubriplate #777 or equivalent on the Bendix
portion of the shaft. End play should be 0. 005 to 0. 050 of an inch
b. New brushes should be properly seated when installing bywrapping a strip
of 00 sandpaper around the commutator (with the sanding side out) 1-1/4 to 1-1/2
times maximum. Drop brushes on sandpaper covered commutator and turn the
armature slowly in the direction of rotation. Dust should be blown out of the
motor after sanding.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4F24
Figure 11-64. No-Load Figure 11-65. Stall-Torque

Test Hook-up Hook-up
NOTE
The spring tension is 32 to 40 ounces with new brushes.

This tension is measured with the scale hooked under
the brush spring near the brush and the reading is taken
at right angles to the line of force exerted by the brush
spring.
c. Check the position of the pinion to be sure the unit will mesh properly with
the flywheel ring gear. See specifications for unit for correct dimensions. (Re-
11-129. BENCH TESTS.

a. After the starting motor is reassembled, it should be tested to see that the no-load
current at a certain voltage is within specificationsas given in paragraph 11-131.To make
this test, connect as shown in Figure 11-64.If current is too high, check the bearingalignment
and end play to make sure there is no binding or interference. Two or three sharp raps on
the frame with a rawhide hammer will often help to align the bearings and free the armature.
b. If no difficulty is indicated in the above test, a stall torque test may be made to see
if the starting motor is producing its rated cranking power. Make test connections as shown
in Figure 11-65.
c. If torque and current are not within specifications, check the seating of the
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
4G1
brushes and internal connections for high resistance. If these checks are made
and found to be in good order, replace frame and field assembly and retest starter.
11-130. STARTING MOTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT.

a. Inspect the control circuit wiring between the battery, solenoid and manual
starting switches for breaks, poor connections and faulty insulation. Tighten all
connections and make sure solenoid is firmly mounted and makes a good ground
connection.
b. Check the voltage loss across the switch contacts during normal starting.
If loss is in excess of 0.2 volts per 100 amperes, the solenoid should be replaced.
c. If solenoid fails to operate when the manual is turned on or if it fails to re-
lease when the manual switch is released, it should be removed and tested to
specifications. If either opening or closing voltages are not specified, replace
the solenoid.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4G2
4G2 Reissued: 2/ 18/81
11-131. STARTING MOTOR SERVICE TEST SPECIFICATIONS. Prestolite spec-

ifications for 14and 28-volt starting motors installed as standard equipment on the PA-23
Motor Model MZ-4206 MHB4001
Min. Brush Tension 32 oz. 32 oz.

Max. Brush Tension 40 oz. 40 oz.
No-Load Test (77 ° F)

Volt 10 29
Max. Amps 75 35
Min. RPM 2000 1800
Stall-Torque
Amps 560 275
Min. Torque, ft. lbs 38.0 42. 7
Approx. Volts 4. 1 16. 0
Pinion Position
Drive at rest 1.748 to 1.855 in. 1.748 to 1.855 in.
Drive extended 2.388 to 2.495 in. 2.388 to 2.495 in.
"'This dimension is measured from the centerline of

the mounting hole nearest the drive end head to the
edge of the pinion.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4G3 4G3 Reissued: 2/18/81

11-132. BATTERY.
11-133. SERVICING THE BATTERY. Accessto thebatteryisthroughtheaccess

panel on the right side of the nose. The stainless steel box has a plastic drain
tube located on the bottom side near the right rear corner which is normally closed
off with a clamp and should be opened occasionally to drain off any accumulation
of liquid. The battery should be checked for fluid level, but must not be filled
above the baffle plates. A hydrometer check should be performed to determine
the percent of charge present in the battery. All connections must be clean and
tight.
11-134. REMOVAL OF BATTERY.

a. Remove the access panel from the right side of the nose section.
b. Remove the wing nuts from either side of the box and remove the lid.
c. Disconnect the battery cables.
NOTE
Always remove the ground cable first and install last

to prevent accidental short circuiting or arcing.
d. Remove the battery from the box.
11-135. INSTALLATION OF BATTERY

a. Ascertain that the battery and battery box has been cleaned and is free of
acid.
b. Install the battery with the terminals inboard.
c. Connect the battery cables.
d. Install the lid and secure with wing nuts.
11-136. CHARGING BATTERY. If the battery is not up to normal charge, re-

move the battery and recharge starting with a charging rate of 4 amperes and
finishing with 2 amperes.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G4
HYDROMETER READING AND BATTERY CHARGE PERCENT
Hydrometer Readings Percent of Charge
1280 100
1250 75
1220 50
1190 25
1160 Very little useful capacity
1130 or below Discharged
11-137. BATTERY BOX CORROSIONPREVENTION. The following check against

corrosion within the battery box should be performed at least every 30 days.
a. Open the clamp at bottom right rear corner of the battery box and drain off
any electrolyte that may have overflowed into the box.
b. Check terminals and connections for corrosion. Corrosion effects may be
neutralized by applying a solution of baking soda and water mixed to the consis-
tency of thin cream. Repeat application until all bubbling action has ceased.
CAUTION
Do not allow soda solution to enter battery.
c. Wash battery and box with clean water and dry.

d. Close battery box drain tube clamp.
e. As necessary, paint the battery box with an acid resistant paint.
11-138. CHECKING ELECTRICALSWITCHES AND CIRCUITBREAKERS. Elec-

trical switches and circuit breakers, located on the lower left instrument panel,
control the navigation and instrument lights, one landing light, one taxi light, the
electric turn and bank indicator and other electrical components. The circuit
breakers automatically break the electrical circuit if an overload is applied to the
system, thus preventing damage to the electrical wiring. To reset the circuit
breakers, simply push in the buttons. Allow sufficient time for cooling before
resetting circuit breakers. The time for resetting circuit breakers may vary
considerably, depending on the nature of the overload and the temperature.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4G5
PIPER AZTEC SERVICEMANUAL
1. GROMMET
2. REAR BRACKET GROMMET
3. LIGHT BRACKET
4. TOP PLATE LIGHT
5. SIDE PLATE COVER PLATE
6. FRONT BRACKET SCREWS
Figure 11-66. Landing Light Inst. Figure 11-67. Landing Light Inst.
PA-23-250and PA-23-235 PA-23-250(six place)
11-139. LANDING LIGHT.
11-140. REMOVAL OF LANDING LIGHT. (PA-23-250and PA-23-235.)

a. Remove fuselage nose cone fairing.
b. Remove the two self-locking nuts from the lower screws passing through
both rear and front brackets (2 and 6, Figure 11-66.)
c. Loosen the two self-locking nuts on the upper screws passing through the
brackets.
d. Disconnect the electrical leads from the rear of the light (3) and remove
the light.
11-141. INSTALLATION OF LANDING LIGHT. (PA-23-250 and PA-23-235.)

a. Install the light between the brackets, making sure the key on the back of
the light is in the rear bracket slot at the left of the bracket.
b. Install the two self-locking nuts on the two lower bracket screws, tighten
them and the two upper nuts until the edges of both brackets are parallel. Con-
nect the electrical leads to the rear of the light.
c. Prior to removal of the housing, disconnect the electrical leads and use
caution not to drop the light when the front and rear brackets are separated.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G6
11-142. REMOVAL OF LANDING LIGHT. (PA-23-250 (six place.) Access for the
replacement of the landing light is achievedthrough the front baggagecompartment.
a. Remove the access panel to the nose section.
b. Remove six screws that secure the cover plate and light assembly. (Refer
to Figure 11-67.) To prevent the light assembly from dropping, it may be held
by reaching through the nose opening.
c. Withdraw the light assembly through the panel opening, disconnect the
electrical leads, disassemble and remove light.
11-143. INSTALLATION OF LANDING LIGHT. (PA-23-250(six place.)
a. Install the light between the brackets, making sure the key on the back of
the light is in the rear bracket slot. Connect the electrical leads.
b. Reinstall the light assembly through the panel opening, hold the light in
position by reaching through the nose opening, reinstall the panel cover and
screws.
11-144. REMOVAL OF LANDINGLIGHT. (PA-23-250 Serial Nos. 27-4426 and

27-4574 and up. )
a. Remove the screws securing the plexiglas cover on the bottom of the nose
cone.
b. Remove the screws from the front of the lamp attachment plate and re-
move the plate from the mounting bracket. Do not drop the lamp.
c. Disconnect the electrical leads and remove the light.
11-145. INSTALLATION OF LANDING LIGHT. (PA-23-250 Serial Nos. 27-4426

and 27-4574 and up. )
a. Connect the electrical leads to the lamp and position the lamp on the
mounting bracket.
b. Position the front attachment plate over the lamp and secure the plate and
lamp to the mounting bracket with four screws.
c. Install the plexiglas cover on the bottom of the nose cone and secure in
place with screws.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G7
11-146. REMOVAL OF LAMP IN ANTI-COLLISION WING TIP STROBE LIGHT.

The lights are located in both wing tips next to the navigation lights.
a. Remove the screw securing the navigation light cover and remove cover.
b. Remove the three screws securing navigation light bracket assembly and
remove light assembly.
c. Remove the strobe lamp by cutting the wires on the lamp beneath the
mounting bracket.
d. Remove the defective lamp.
e. Remove and discard the plug with the cutwires from the electrical socket.
11-147. INSTALLATION OF LAMP IN ANTI-COLLISION WING TIP STROBE

LIGHT.
a. Route the wires from the new lamp down through the hole in the naviga-
tional light bracket.
b. Insert the wire terminals in the plastic plug supplied with the new lamp.
Wire according to schematic diagram located in electronics section.
c. Position strobe lamp on navigational light bracket.
d. Secure navigational light assembly and bracket with appropriate screws.
e. Replace navigational light cover and secure with appropriate screws.
11-148. REMOVAL OF LAMP IN ANTI-COLLISION STROBE LIGHT, There is

one anti-collision strobe light located on the rudder tip.
a. Loosen the screw in the clamp securing the light cover.
b. Remove the light cover.
c. Remove the defective lamp from the socket.
11-149. TROUBLESHOOTINGPROCEDURE FOR ANTI-COLLISION AND WING

TIP STROBE LIGHT SYSTEMS. The strobe light assembly functions as a con-
denser discharge system. A condenser in the power supply is charged to approx-
imately 450 volts D. C., then discharged across the xenon flash tube at intervals
approximately 45 flashes per minute. The condenser is parallel across the
xenon flash tube which is designed to hold off the 450 volt D. C. applied until the
flash tube is triggered by an external pulse. This pulse is generated by a solid
state timing circuit in the power supply.
When troubleshooting the strobe light system, it must first be determined
if the trouble is in the flash tube or the power supply. Replacement of the flash
tube will confirm if the tube is defective. A normal operating power supply will
emit an audible tone of 1 to 1. 5 KHC. If there is no sound emitted check the
system according to the following instructions. When troubleshooting the system
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G8
utilize the appropriate schematic in this manual.

a. Ascertain the input voltage at the power supply is correct.
CAUTION
When disconnecting and connecting the power supply

input connections do not get the connection reversed.
Reversed polarity of the input voltage for just an in-
stant will permanently damage the power supply. The
reversed polarity destroys a protective diode in the
power supply, causing self-destruction from over-
heating of the power supply. This damage is some-
times not immediately apparent, but will cause failure
of the system in time.
b. Check for malfunction in interconnecting cables.

1. Ascertain pins 1 and 3 of interconnecting cable are not reversed.
2. Using an ohmmeter check continuity between pin 1 and 3 of intercon-
necting cable. If you obtain a reading on the meter the cable is shorted and
: should be replaced.
NOTE
A short of the type described in steps 1 and 2 will not

cause permanent damage to the power supply but the
system will be inoperative if such a short exists.
Avoid any connection between pin 1 and 3 of intercon-
necting cable as this will discharge the condenser in
the power supply and destroy the trigger circuit.
CAUTION
When disconnecting the power supply allow five min-

utes of bleed down time before handling the unit.
c. Check interconnecting cables for shorts.

1. Disconnect the output cables from the power supply outlets.
2. The following continuity checks can be made with an ohmmeter.
3. Check for continuity between the connectors of each interconnecting
cable by checking from pin 1 to pin 1, pin 2 to pin 2 and pin 3 to pin 3. When
making these checks if no continuity exists the cable is shorted and should be
replaced.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4G9
4. Check continuity between pins 1 and 2, 1 and 3 and 2 and 3 of the inter-
connecting cable. If continuity exist between any of these connections the cable
is shorted and should be replaced.
5. Check for continuity from pins 1, 2 and 3 to airplane ground. If con-
tinuity exists the cable is shorted and should be replaced.
d. Check tube socket assembly for shorts.
1. Disconnect the tube socket assembly of the anti-collision light from
the interconnecting cables.
2. The following continuity checks can be made with an ohmmeter.
3. Check for continuity between pin 1 of amp connector to pin 1 of tube
socket, pin 2 of amp connector to pin 6 and 7 of tube socket and pin 3 of amp
connector to pin 4 of tube socket. When making these tests if no continuity
exists the tube socket assembly is shorted and should be replaced.
11-150. INSTALLATION OF ANTI-COLLISION LIGHT.

a. Plug in new lamp using correct number.
b. Replace light cover.
c. Tighten screw in clamp to secure light cover.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G10
4 G11
TABLE XI-III. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING
Trouble
I Cause
I Remedy
GENERATOR
Generator operating If the voltage is low, the Check for loose or high
within rated speed generator is operating resistance connections;
range but voltage out- on residual magnetism. clean and tighten.
put low.
Loose or high-resis- Clean and tighten all
tance electrical con- electrical connections.
nections.
Brushes excessively When brush wears down

worn. to 1/2 inch, replace with
a new one. The new
brush must be seated to
at least 75%of the con-
tact surface by running
the generator without
load (with the line switch
open) for at least 15
minutes during the en-
gine warm-up period.
CAUTION
Do not use abrasives

of any description to
assist in seating the
brushes.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G12
TABLE XI-III. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING(cont. )
Generator operating Brushes binding in the The brushes should be a

within rated speed brush boxes. free fit without exces-
range but voltage out- sive side play in the
put low. (cont. ) brush boxes. Binding
brushes and the brush
boxes should be wiped
clean with a cloth
moistened in Varsol or
undoped gasoline.
Replace the brushes as

outlined above.
Brushes not properly Reseat brushes as out-

seated. lined above.
Low brush spring Brush spring should

tension. bear centrally on the
top of the brushes, in-
suring full brush con-
tact with the face of the
commutator.
Dirty commutator. Clean the commutator

with a cloth moistened
in Varsol or undoped
gasoline.
Scored or pitted com- Remove and turn com-

mutator. mutator down on a
lathe.
Shorted or open arma- Replace armature.

ture coils.
Improper operations of Adjust regulator.

the voltage regulator.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G13
TABLE Xl-III. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING(cont. )
Generator operating Loose or high resis- Clean and tighten the

within rated speed tance field coil assem- terminals.
range but voltmeter bly terminals.
indicates zero.
Wiring not properly See airplane wiring
connected. diagram.
Grounded field coil Replace entire yoke

assembly. assembly.
Open field coil assem- Remove the generator

bly. and replace with one
known to be in good
condition.
Generator operating Unstable operation of Replace voltage regula-

within rated speed voltage regulator. Same tor. Use remedy under
range, but voltage as "Generator operating "Generator operating
output is erratic. within rated speed range within rated speed
but voltage output low, " range but voltage out-
above. put low, " above.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G14
Generator operating None. Since the voltage regu-

within rated speed lator holds the gener-
range, with line ated voltage at an al-
switch closed, but most constant value,
system ammeter indi- the current output de-
cates low or no output. pends entirely upon the
condition of the battery
and the amount of ex-
ternal load. Therefore,
when the battery is
fully charged and there
is no load on the sys-
tem, the difference in
voltage between the
generator and the
battery is so small that
little or no current will
flow between them.
Improper operation of Readjust the relay.

the reverse-current
relay.
Generator field de- Flash field.

magnetized.
Burned-out ammeter. Replace ammeter.
Generator operating Generator field magne- Flash field as explained

within rated speed tized in the wrong above and checkto see
range but system am- direction. that reverse-current
meter reads off scale relay is operating
in the wrong direction. properly.
NOTE
Flash the generator field by turning the generator and
battery switch to the "ON" position and momentarily
connect the "Bat" and "Gen" terminals of the regulator.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4G15 Reissued: 2 18 81
4G15
TABLE XI-III. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING(cont.)
System ammeter shows Generator of improper Install a generator of

full charge but bat- capacity installed in larger capacity.
tery is discharged. the system.
Battery too small for Install a battery of

load requirements. sufficient capacity.
System ammeter fluc- Generating system is Check the system for

tuates excessively when overloaded. abnormal loads.
indicating full rated
load. Improper operation of Readjust to operate
generator reverse- properly.
current relay.
Burned-out system Discharged battery. Replace with a fully

ammeter or line fuse. charged battery.
Defective wiring. Replace all defective

wiring.
ALTERNATOR
No output from alter- Malfunction of alternator Check alternator output

natur. output circuit or field and field circuits.
circuit. (Refer to paragraph
11-58.)
Checkalternator. (Refer
to paragraph 11-58.)
Reduced output from Open diode. Check alternator. (Refer

alternator. to paragraph 11-58.)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G16
Trouble
I Cause
I Remedy
STARTER
Starter fails to operate. Low battery charge. Check and recharge if

necessary.
Defective or improper Refer to wiring diagram

wiring or loose con- and check all wiring.
nections.
Defective starter sole- Replace faulty unit.

noid or control switch.
Binding, worn or im- Brushes should be a free

properly seated brush, fit in the brush boxes
or brushes with exces- without excessive side
sive play. play. Binding brushes
and brush boxes should
be wiped clean with a
gasoline (undoped) mois -
tened cloth. Anew brush
should be run in until at
least 50%seated; how-
ever, if facilities are not
available for running in
brushes, thenthe brush
should be properly seat-
ed by inserting a strip of
No. 0000 sandpaper be-
tween the brush and com-
mutator, with the sanded
side side next to the
brush. Pull sandpaper in
direction of rotation, be-
ing careful to keep it in
the same contour as the
commutator.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G17
TABLE XI-IH.ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING(cont. )
Starter fails to operate. Binding, worn, or im- CAUTION

(cont. ) properly seated brush,
or brushes with exces- Do not use coarse sand
sive side play. (cont. ) paper or emery cloth.
After seating, clean

thoroughly to remove
all sand and metal
particles to prevent
excessive wear. Keep
motor bearing free
from sand or metal
particles.
Dirty commutator. If commutator is rough

or dirty, smooth and
polish with No. 0000
sandpaper. If too
rough and pitted, re -
move and turn down.
Blow out all particles.
Shorted, grounded, or Remove and replace

open armature. with an armature known
to be in good condition.
Grounded or open field Test and then replace

circuit. new part.
Starter operates at Faulty Bendix drive. Remove Bendix drive

proper speed but fails assembly. Clean and
to crank engine. check, replace.
Low starter and crank- Worn, rough, or im- Disassemble, clean, in-
ing speed. properly lubricated spect and relubricate,
motor or starter replacing ball bearings,
gearing. if worn.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2, 18 81
4G18
Low starter and crank- Same electrical causes Same remedies listed
ing speed. (cont. ) as listed under "Starter for these troubles.
fails to operate. "
Excessive arcing of Binding, worn or im- See information above

starter brushes. properly seated brush dealing with this
or brushes, with ex- trouble.
cessive side play.
Dirty commutator, Clean as already out-

rough, pitted or lined above.
scored.
Grounded or open field Test and replace de-

circuit. fective parts.
Excessive wear and Rough or scored com- Remove and turn com-
arcing of starter mutator. mutator down on a
brushes. lathe.
Armature assembly not Reface commutator.

concentric.
BATTERY 12V
Battery will not hold Battery worn out. Replace battery.

hold charge.
Charging rate not set Reset.
right.
Discharge too great to Reduce use of starter on

replace. the ground; use external
power wherever
possible.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G19
TABLE XI-III.ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING(cont.)
Battery will not hold Standing too long. Remove and recharge
charge. (cont.) battery if left in un-
used airplane one week
or more.
Equipment left "ON" Remove and recharge.

accidentally. (Refer to paragraph
11-120. )
Impurities in electro- Replace.

lyte.
Short circuit (ground) Check wiring.

in wiring.
Broken cell partitions. Replace.
Battery life is short. Overcharge due to level Maintain electrolyte

of electrolyte being be- level.
low tops of plates.
Heavy discharge. Replace.
Sulfation due to disuse. Replace.
Impurities in electro- Replace battery.

lyte.
Cracked cell. Hold down loose. Replace battery and

tighten.
Frozen battery. Replace.
Compound on top of Charging rate too high. Reduce.

battery melts.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G20
TABLE XI-III. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING(cont.)
Electrolyte runs out Too much water added Drain and keep at prop-
of vent plugs. to battery. er level.
Excessive corrosion Spillage from over- Use care in adding

inside container. fillings. water.
Vent lines leaking or Repair or clean.

clogged.
Battery freezes. Discharged battery. Replace.
Water added and bat- Always recharge bat-

tery not charged tery at least 1/2 hour
immediately. when adding water in
freezing weather.
Leaking jar. Replace.
Battery polarity re- Connected backwards on Battery should be slowly

versed. airplane or charger. discharged completely
and then charged cor-
rectly and tested.
Battery consumes ex- Charging rate too high Correct charging rate.
cessive water. (if in all cells).
Cracked jar (one cell Replace battery.

only.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G21
Trouble
I Cause
I Remedy
BATTERY-DISCONNECT SOLENOID
Does not operate. Open circuit. Replace wiring.
Dirty contacts on con- Clean contacts.

nector plug.
Open circuited solenoid Replace unit.

coil.
Plunger binding. Remove and wash

plunger and housing
thoroughly with carbon
tetrachloride. Change
spring compression
only as a last resort.
Intermittent operation. Short-circuited coil. Replace coil. Clean and

Loose electrical con- tighten electrical con-
nection. nections.
Plunger binding. See remedy pertaining

to "Plunger binding"
under "Does not oper-
ate".
Badly burned points. If points cannot be

dressed down, replace
the unit.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G22
TABLE XI-IV. LAMP REPLACEMENT GUIDE
Location Piper Part No. Bulb No.
AltiMatic Pilot Light (Console) 751 461 65-S28

AltiMatic Pilot Light (Effort) 751 460 65-S19
Baggage Compartment Light 14V 472 753 30-31
Baggage Compartment Light 28V 472 755 30-32
Compass Light 28V 472 028 327
Compass Light 14V 472 037 330
De-Icer Light 752 343 MS25041-3
Dome Light 28V 472 029 303
Dome Light 14V 472 036 89
Door Ajar 28V 472 028 327
Door Ajar 14V 472 037 330
Gear Indicator Light 28V 472 028 327
Gear Indicator Light 14V 472 037 330
Generator Indicator 28V 472 028 327
Instrument Panel Lights 28V 472 028 327
Instrument Panel Lights 14V 472 037 220
Instrument Panel Spot Light 14V 752 322 90
Instrument Panel Spot Light 28V 753 323 304
Landing Light 100 watt 14V 472 661 4509
Map Light 14V 472 026 90
Map Light 14V 472 040 1816
Map Light 28V 472 052 304
Marker Beacon Light 752 318 47
Nav. Lights - Wing Tips 14V 751 381 1512
Nav. Lights - Wing Tips 28V 751 438 1524
Reading Light 28V 472 027 1495
Reading Light 14V 472 040 1816
Receiver Lights 472 028 327
Receiver Lights 752 324 (1401) (262 0464 00)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G23
TABLE XI-IV. LAMP REPLACEMENT GUIDE (cont. )
Location Piper Part No. Bulb No.
Rotating Beacon - Grimes 14V 752 307 A7079

Rotating Beacon - Grimes 28V 752 316 7079B
Rotating Beacon - Grimes 28V 753 440 1939
Rotating Beacon - Whelan 14V 751 448 WRM 44
Rotating Beacon - Whelan 28V 751 457 WRM 4S
Strobe Light (Red) 14V 757 635 A406
Strobe Light (White) 14V 761 157 A428
Tail Light 28V 751 437 305
Tail Light 14V 753 431 1073
Transmitter Lamp 28v 752 325 262 0179 00
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4G24
TABLE XI-V. CIRCUIT LOAD CHART
CURRENTDRAIN
CIRCUIT ITEM PER UNIT (MAX.)
IN AMPERESAT
12.OV 143V
STARTER 15 STARTER SOLENOID 1 8.40 10.00
STARTING VIBRATOR 1 4.00 4.77
VOLT REG. MAIN 10 MAIN VOLT REG.& OVERVOLT RELAY
+ALTERNATOR FIELDS L & R 1 SYSTEM 5.88 6.96
VOLT REG. AUX. 10 AUX. VOLT REG. & OVERVOLT RELAY
+ALTERNATOR FIELDS L & R
FUEL PUMPS 15 LEFT& RIGHT FUEL PUMPS 2 5.04 6.00
STALL WARNING 5 FLASHER UNIT-LIGHT-STALL WARNING 1 SYSTEM 0.18 0.21
FUEL, HORN 5 FLASHER UNIT & HORN-LDG. GEAR WARNING 1 SYSTEM 0.70 0.80
CYL. HD. TEMP. FUEL GAGES & ENG. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 1 GROUP 0.51 0.60
TURN & BANK 5 TURN & BANK GYRO 1 0.25 0.30
GEAR & FLAP 5 DOOR AJAR LIGHT 1 0.08 0.09
(INDICATORS) GEAR UP-GEAR DOWN LIGHTS 3 0.08 0.09
FLAP INDICATOR 1 0.40 0.48
ELEC.TRIM 5 PITCH TRIM SERVO 1 0.84 1.00
CABIN HEAT 20 CIGAR LIGHTER 1 6.64 790
(& LIGHTER) CABIN HEATER SYSTEM (GROUND OPERATION- MAX. 11.66 1380
HEATER IGNITION, VENT BLOWER,AND
COMBUSTION BLOWER OPERATING)
PITOT HEAT 15 PITOT HEATING ELEMENT 1 10.92 13.00
POS. LTS. 5 NAV WING TIP LIGHTS
NAV TAIL LIGHT 1 SYSTEM 4.44 4.95
PROP SYNC. 5 ARKORP PROP SYNCHRONIZER 1 1.00 1.19
LAND. LTS. 30 LANDING LIGHT 1 17.66 21.00
TAXI LIGHT 1 7.13 8.47
INT. LTS. 5 MAP LIGHTS 2 0.30 0.36
(INTERIOR LIGHTS) CABIN READING LIGHTS 4 0.86 1.02
TRIM INDICATOR LIGHTS 2 0.08 0.07
INSTRUMENT SPOT LIGHTS 2 0.52 0.61
DOME LIGHT 1 0.96 1.14
COMPASSLIGHT 1 0.07 0.08
POST LIGHTS 5 AUTOPILOT CONSOLE LIGHT 1 0.08 0.09
OMNI COUPLER LIGHT 2 0.04 0.05
POSTLIGHTS-GLAR-BAN AS 0.08 0.09
LIGHTED SWITCHES (ROCKER) INSTALLED 0.08 0.09
WINDSHIELD HEAT 15 WINDSHIELD HEATING ELEMENT 1 11.58 13.75
DEICER-WING-TAIL 5' SURFACE DEICE SYSTEM 1 4.06 4.84
DEICER-PROP 25 PROPELLER DEICE SYSTEM 1 PR. 17.30 20.60
CURRENT WILL VARY DUE TO INTERMITTENT LOADS (TYPICAL VALUES SHOWN). CIRCUIT BREAKER CAPACITY IS
SUFFICIENT FOR NORMAL OPERATION.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4H1
CURRENTDRAIN
PER UNIT (MAX.)
CIRCUIT IN AMPERESAT
ANTI-COL. RED 10 ROTATING RED BEACON

5 RED STROBE LIGHT W/POWERSUPPLY INS
ANTI-COL. WHITE 5 WHITE WING TIP STROBES W/POWER SUPPLY
COM-NAV 1 10 MK-12A OR MK-12B (NARCO) (XMIT)
TRANSCEIVER (RCV)
MK-16 (XMIT)
TRANSCEIVER (RCV)
VOA-8 INDICATOR
VOA-9 INDICATOR
VOA.40M INS
VOA-50M
COM-NAV 2 10 SIMILAR TO COM-NAV 1 AS INSTL.
ADF 5 BENDIX T12-C ADF RECEIVER AS INSTL. 0.66 0.78
KING KR-85 ADF RECEIVER 0.87 1.04
M/B 5 MBT-12 NARCO MARKER BEACON OR PIPER
PM-1 AS INSTL. 0.17 0.20
G/S 5 NARCO UGR-2 GLIDE SLOPE RECEIVER AS INSTL. 0.17 0.23
A/P 5 ALTIMATIC IIIB AS INSTL. 1.34 1.60
OR ALTIMATIC V FD/AP BENDIX 5.75 6.80
10 AUTOCONTROL III 0.80 0.96
GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER 0.15 0.18
DME 10 NARCO UDI-4 AS INSTL. 5.69 6.77
XPONDER 5 NARCO AT5-A OR AT6-A AS INSTL. 1.76 2.09
NARCO UAT-1 3.05 3.63
ACC. (ACCESSORIES) 5 AUDIO AMP, KING KA-25 0.96 1.14
RADIO JUNCTION BOX 0.32 0.38
COM-NAV 11, 12, 14 NARCO NAV 11 AS INSTL. 0.60 0.65
NARCO NAV 12 0.60 0.65
NARCO NAV 14 0.85 1.00
NARCO COM 11 (XMIT) 1 1.95 2.50
(RCV) 0.80 1.00
NARCO COM 11A (XMIT) 1 2.40 3.00
(RCV) 0.80 1.00
KING KX-175 NAV/COM (XMIT) 1 4.20 4.80
(RCV) AS INSTL. COM 0.65 0.80
NAV 0.49 0.65
KING KX-170A NAV/COM (XMIT) 1 4.20 4.80
NAV 0.49 0.65
KMA-20 1.30 1.60
KT-76 0.95 1.35
KN-65 DME 2.65 2.95
KN-60C DME 2.90 3.20
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4H2
TABLE XI-V. CIRCUIT LOAD CHART (cont.)

CURRENTDRAIN
PERUNIT (MAX.)
CIRCUIT ITEM IN AMPERESAT
12.OV 143V
KN-73 GLIDE SLOPE RECEIVER 0.20 0.20
KN-77 VOR/LOC 0.10 0.10
KNI-520 LOC/GLIDE SLOPE 0.20 0.20
KNI-211C OMNI 0.30 0.32
KI-201C OMNI 0.20 0.22
RADAR AVQ-45/46 RADAR AS INSTL.
RDR-100 RADAR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4H3
TABLE XI-V. CIRCUITLOAD CHART(cont.)

CURRENT DRAIN
PERUNIT (MAX.)
CIRCUIT ITEM N AMPERESAT
e 24.0 V. 28.5 V.
STARTER 15 STARTER SOLENOID 1 5.20
STARTING VIBRATOR 1 2.00
VOLT REG. MAIN 10 MAIN VOLT REG. & OVERVOLT RELAY
+ALTERNATOR FIELDS L& R 1 SYSTEM 4.00 4.80
VOLT REG. AUX. 10* AUX. VOLT REG. & OVERVOLT RELAY
FUEL PUMPS 15 LEFT & RIGHT FUEL PUMPS 2 2.50 3.10
STALL WARNING 5 FLASHER UNIT-LIGHT-STALL WARNING 1 SYSTEM 0.10 0.13
FUEL, HORN 5 FLASHER UNIT & HORN-LDG. GEAR WARNING 1 SYSTEM 0.50 0.60
CYL. HD. TEMP. FUEL GAGES & ENG. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 1 GROUP 0.25 0.30
TURN & BANK 5 TURN & BANK GYRO 1 0.140 0.155
GEAR & FLAP 5 DOOR AJAR LIGHT 1 0.04 0.05
(INDICATORS) GEAR UP-GEAR DOWN LIGHTS 3 0.04 0.05
FLAP INDICATOR 1 0.05 0.06
ELEC. TRIM 5 PITCH TRIM SERVO 1 0.48 0.55
CABIN HEAT 20 CIGAR LIGHTER 1 6.60 7.90
(& LIGHTER) CABIN HEATER SYSTEM (GROUND OPERATION- MAX. 6.00 7.10
HEATER IGNITION, VENT BLOWER, AND
PITOT HEAT 15 PITOT HEATING ELEMENT 1 3.20 3.70
NAV TAIL LIGHT 1 SYSTEM 2.48 2.94
PROP SYNC. 5 ARKORP PROP SYNCHRONIZER 1 1.00 1.19
LAND. LTS. 30 LANDING LIGHT 1 6.00 7.25
TAXI LIGHT 1 3.06 3.64
INT. LTS. 5* MAP LIGHTS 2 0.24 0.26
(INTERIOR LIGHTS) CABIN READING LIGHTS 4 0.44 0.50
TRIM INDICATOR LIGHTS 2 0.06 0.07
INSTRUMENT SPOTLIGHTS 2 0.35 0.40
DOME LIGHT 1 0.25 0.30
COMPASSLIGHT 1 0.03 0.04
POST LIGHTS 5 AUTOPILOT CONSOLE LIGHT 1 0.05 0.06
OMNI COUPLER LIGHT 2 0.04 0.05
POST LIGHTS-GLAR-BAN AS 0.03 0.04
LIGHTED SWITCHES (ROCKER) INSTALLED 0.03 0.04
WINDSHIELD HEAT 15 WINDSHIELD HEATING ELEMENT 1 5.80 6.90
DEICER-WING-TAIL 5* SURFACE DEICE SYSTEM
6 SEC. OF EACH 3 MIN. 1 4.96 6.30
DEICER-PROP 25* PROPELLER DEICE SYSTEM 1 PR. 10.15 12.00
* CURRENT WILL VARY DUE TO INTERMITTENT LOADS (TYPICAL VALUES SHOWN). CIRCUIT BREAKER CAPACITY IS
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4H4
TABLE XI-V. CIRCUIT LOADCHART(cont.)

CURRENT DRAIN
PER UNIT (MAX.)
24.0 V. 28.5V.
ANTI-COL. RED 10 ROTATING RED BEACON AS 2.60 3.10
5 RED STROBE LIGHT W/POWERSUPPLY INSTALLED 0.90 1.60
ANTI-COL. WHITE 5 WHITE WING TIP STROBES W/POWERSUPPLY 1 SET 2.00 2.30
COM-NAV 1 10 MK-12A OR MK-12B (NARCO) (XMIT) 1 4.00 4.90
TRANSCEIVER (RCV) 1.90 2.35
MK-16 (XMIT) 1 3.96 4.71
TRANSCEIVER (RCV) 0.38 0.45
VOA-8 INDICATOR 0.31 0.36
VOA-9 INDICATOR AS 0.31 0.36
VOA-40M INSTALLED 0.06 0.07
VOA-50M 0.06 0.07
COM-NAV 2 10 SIMILAR TO COM-NAV 1 AS INSTL.
ADF 5 BENDIX T12-C ADF RECEIVER AS INSTL. 0.46 0.54
KING KR-85 ADF RECEIVER 0.87 1.04
M/B 5 MBT-12 NARCO MARKER BEACON OR PIPER
PM-1 AS INSTL. 0.19 0.25
G/S 5 NARCO UGR-2 GLIDE SLOPE RECEIVER AS INSTL. 0.10 0.15
A/P 5 ALTIMATIC IIIB AS INSTL. 3.50 4.15
OR ALTIMATIC V FD/AP BENDIX & -l's 2.90 3.40
10 AUTOCONTROL III 0.45 0.50
GLIDE SLOPE COUPLER 0.80 0.95
DME 10 NARCO UDI-4 AS INSTL. 3.06 3.63
XPONDER 5 NARCO AT5-A OR AT6-A AS INSTL. 1.30 1.55
NARCO UAT-1 1.55 1.84
ACC. (ACCESSORIES) 5 AUDIO AMP, KING KA-25 1.00 1.15
RADIO JUNCTION BOX 0.15 0.20
COM-NAV 11, 12, 14 NARCO NAV 11 AS INSTL. 0.60 0.65
NARCO NAV 12 0.60 0.65
NARCO NAV 14 1.50 1.95
NARCO COM 11 (XMIT) 1 4.00 4.80
(RCV) 1.75 1.90
NARCO COM 11A (XMIT) 1 4.75 5.80
(RCV) 1.75 1.90
KING KX-175 NAV/COM (XMIT) 1 4.40 4.95
NAV 0.55 0.70
KING KX-170A NAV/COM (XMIT) 1 4.40 4.95
NAV 0.55 0.70
KMA-20 1.20 1.50
KT-76 0.95 1.35
KN-65 DME 0.95 1.55
KN-60C DME 1.00 1.50
KN-73 GLIDE SLOPE RECEIVER 0.20 0.20
KN-77 VOR/LOC 0.10 0.10
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2 18/81
4H5

CURRENTDRAIN
PERUNIT (MAX.)
24.0 V. 28.5V.
KNI-520 LOC/GLIDE SLOPE 0.20 0.20
KNI-211C OMNI 0.24 0.26
KI-201C OMNI 0.14 0.16
RADAR AVQ-45/46 RADAR AS INSTL. 4.3 5.1
RDR-100 RADAR 7.22 9.04
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4H6
Z
CIRCUIT ITEM CURRENT DRAIN
PER UNIT (MAX.)
NOTE: 1975 MODELS AND UP. IN AMPERES AT
27.5 V.
STARTER 10* STARTER SOLENOID 1
STARTING VIBRATOR 1
VOLT REG., LEFT 5* MAIN VOLT REG. & OVERVOLT RELAY 2.00 NOM
+ALTERNATOR FIELDS L & R 1 SYSTEM 4.10 F.L.
VOLT REG., RIGHT 5* AUX. VOLT REG. & OVERVOLT RELAY
FUEL PUMPS 15 LEFT & RIGHT FUEL PUMPS 2 3.10
STALL WARNING 5 FLASHER UNIT -HORN 1 SYSTEM .20
FUEL, HORN 5 FLASHER UNIT & HORN - LDG. GEAR WARNING 1 SYSTEM 2.30
CYL. HD. TEMP. FUEL GAUGES & ENG. INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 1 GROUP 2.30
TURN & BANK 5 TURN & BANK GYRO 1 .82
GEAR & FLAP 5 DOOR AJAR LIGHT 1 .04
(INDICATORS) GEAR UP- GEAR DOWN LIGHTS 3 .04
FLAP INDICATOR 1 .50
ELEC. TRIM 5* PITCH TRIM SERVO 1 .50
CABIN HEAT 10* CIGAR LIGHTER 1 7.60
(& LIGHTER) CABIN HEATER SYSTEM (GROUND OPERATION - MAX. 7.10 GND
HEATER IGNITION, VENT BLOWER, AND 3.60 FLT
PITOT HEAT 5 PITOT HEATING ELEMENT 1 3.70
NAV TAILLIGHT 1 SYSTEM 2.80
PROP SYNC. 5 ARKORP PROP SYNCHRONIZER 1 1.00
LAND. LTS. 15 LANDING LIGHT 1 9.00
TAXI LIGHT 1 3.60
INT. LTS. 5* MAP LIGHTS 2 0.26
(INTERIOR LIGHTS) CABIN READING LIGHTS 4 0.50
TRIM INDICATOR LIGHTS 2 0.07
INSTRUMENT SPOT LIGHTS 2 0.40
DOME LIGHT 1 0.30
COMPASSLIGHT 1 0.04
POST LIGHTS 5 AUTOPILOT CONSOLE LIGHT 1 0.06
OMNI COUPLER LIGHT 2 0.05
POST LIGHTS- GLAR-BAN AS 0.04
LIGHTED SWITCHES(ROCKER) INSTALLED 0.04
WINDSHIELD HEAT 10 WINDSHIELD HEATING ELEMENT 1 7.00
DEICER - WING-TAIL 5* SURFACE DEICE SYSTEM 1 3.90
6 SEC. OF EACH 3 MIN.
DEICER - PROP 15' PROPELLER DEICE SYSTEM 1 PR. 12.00
CURRENT WILL VARY DUE TO INTERMITTENT LOADS (TYPICAL VALUES SHOWN). CIRCUIT BREAKER CAPACITY IS
CURRENT AVAILABLE FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT - 100 AMPS.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4H7
TABLE XI-VI. ELECTRICAL WIRE CODING
12 A
WIRE SEGMENT LETTER
WIRE NUMBER
CIRCUIT FUNCTION LETTER
CIRCUIT FUNCTION
LETTER CIRCUITS
A AUTOPILOT
C CONTROL SURFACE
E ENGINE INSTRUMENT
F FLIGHT INSTRUMENT
G LANDING GEAR
H HEATER - VENTILATING & DE-ICING
L LIGHTING
P POWER
Q FUEL & OIL
RP RADIO POWER
RZ RADIO AUDIO & INTERPHONE
J IGNITION
RG RADIO GROUND
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4H8 4H8 Reissued: 2/18/81

TABLE XI-VII.ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS

CIRCUIT BREAKERS
FUSE PUSH PUSH-PULL SWITCH

TYPE TYPE TYPE TYPE
BUSBAR CONNECTORS BATTERY

I
LAMP CONDUCTORS GROUND
CONDUCTORS- crossings and junctions

of conductors. The dot at the intersection
indicates a joining of conductors.
SWITCH RESISTOR DIODE FUSE
SHIELDEDCONDUCTOR TERMINAL BLOCK INSULATEDCONNECTOR
ALTERNATOR GENERATOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4H9
RIGHT WING
PLUG
18
20
18
LEFT WING
PLUG
Figure 11-68. Fuel Pumps Schematic (14-volt and 28-volt)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4H10 4H10 Reissued: 2/18/81

FUEL PUMPS
SWITCHES
RIGHT WING
PLUG
16 L 16
CIRCUIT BREAKER,
15 AMP, SERIAL NOS.
274720,274721,
274726 AND UP.
FUEL PUMPS
SWITCHES
RIGHT
WING
PLUG
15
RIGHT
FUELPUMP
16
02
LEFT
FUELPUMP
LEFTWING
PLUG
Figure 11-70. Fuel Pumps Schematic

PA-23-250 (six place). Serial Nos. 27-3837,
27-3944 to 27-7554172 incl.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4H12
NOTE
1. ON 21 VOLT SYSTEM ONLY
2. MAP LIGHTS ON 14 VOLT SYSTEM ONLY
HEATER
SWITCH
CABI
HEATER
Figure 11-71. Heater, Map Lights and Cigar Lighter Schematic

(14-volt and 28-volt), PA-23-250 and PA-23-235
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4H13
LIGHTER
RESISTOR
4H15
HEATER,MAPLIGHTS
AND LIGHTER
/20 AMP
LIGHTER
HEATER SWITCH FUEL

VALVE
2
3
4
HA) 05
06
07
HEATER
TERMINAL
BLOCK
Figure 11-74. Heater, Map Lights and Cigar Lighter Schematic

PA-23-250 (six place) Serial Nos. 27-2505
to 27-3049 incl. and 27-3151 to 27-3154 incl.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4H16
CIGAR
LIGHTER
14
HEAT ADJUSTABLE
DUCTSTAT
SWITCH
USED ON PA-274985 & UP
Figure 11-75. Heater. Map Lights and Cigar Lighter Schematic

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-3050,
27-3154 to 27-7554168 incl.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4H17
SWITCH
Figure 11-76. Landing and Taxi Lights (14-volt and 28-volt)

PA-23-250 and PA-23-235
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/ 18/81
4H18
ONSERIALNOS. 27-2298,
27-2331
USE20 AMPCIRCUITPROTECTOR
12
LANDINGLIGHT
SOME MODELS
Figure 11-77. Landing and Taxi Lights (14-volt and 28-volt)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4H19
Figure 11-79. Pitot Heat Schematic (14-volt and 28-volt)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4H20
I8
Figure 11-80. Navigation and Instrument Lights Schematic

PA-23-250, Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-258 incl.; 27-365 to 27-401 incl.
and 27-403 to 27-504 incl. and PA-23-235
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4H21
LEFT WING
NAV LIGHT
LEFT WING
PLUG
TO MASTERSWITCH
TAIL RIGHT WING

NAV LIGHT NAVLIGHT
18
Figure 11-82. Navigation and Instrument Lights Schematic, (28-volt)

PA-23-250, Serial No. 27-402
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4H23
TAIL
NAVIGATIONLIGHT
WHITE
SWITCH
RIGHTWING
NAVIGATIONLIGHT
GREEN
LEFT WING
NAVIGATIONLIGHT
RED
LEFT
WINGPLUG
Figure 11-83. Position Lights Schematic (14-volt and 28-volt)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4H24
TAIL
NAVIGATIONLIGHT
WHITE
SWITCH1
18
RIGHTWING
NAVIGATIONLIGHT
GREEN
LEFT WING
NAVIGATIONLIGHT
RED
LEFT
WINGPLUG
Figure 11-84. Position Lights Schematic

PA-23-250 (six place),
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
411
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
PANEL TO INSTRUMENT
LIGHTS SPOTANDCOMPASS
SWITCH LIGHTSWITCH
20 LIGHT I
AUTOPILOT
-
L TO RADIOCIRCUIT CONSOLE
PROTECTORBUSBAR
Figure 11-86. Post Lights Schematic. PA-23-250 (six place)

Serial Nos. 27-2705 to 27-3836 incl. and 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
413
LIGHT
PROTECTORBUSBAR
LEFT PANEL RIGHT PANEL

LIGHTS T LIGHTS
LS23A LS20
LEFT SWITCH RIGHTSWITCH

LIGHTS LIGHTS
TO GEARAND FLAP PB P
CIRCUITPROTECTOR
MAGNETOS
SWITCH 4A
LIGHTS LIGHTS
SWITCH
TO MAGNETO
SWITCH
ion
DETAIL A
SOLIDSTATEDIMMER
WIRINGDIAGRAM
Figure 11-87. Post Lights Schematic

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
414
Figure 11-88. Post Lights Schematic

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 to 27-4793
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
415
ROTATINGBEACON
SWITCH
Figure 11-89. Rotating Beacon (14-volt and 28-volt)

PA-23-250 and PA-23-235
27.2331
NOS.27.2298.
SERIAL
USE5AMPCIRCUITPROTECTOR
SWITCH
Figure 11-90. Rotating Beacon (14-volt and 28-volt)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4I6
416 Reissued: 2/18/81
ANTI-COLLISION LIGHT (RED)
RED ANTI-COLLISION SWITCH
Figure 11-91. Anti-Collision Light (Red)

(14-volt and 28-volt PA-23-250 and PA-23-235
417
SEE NOTE 1
RESISTOR
NOTE
1. 150 RESISTORIS USEDON

ALL 24-VOLTSYSTEMS
a
NOTE
1. 150 RESISTOR IS USED ON ALL 28-VOLT SYSTEMS
Figure 11-93. Stall Warning Schematic (14-volt and 28-volt)

PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and
PA-23-250 (six place). Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4I8
INDICATOR
LIGHT
FLASHER
LEFT WING
PLUG
Figure 11-94. Stall Warning Schematic

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
419
STALL WARNING
INDICATOR
FLASHER
RESISTOR
LEFT WING
PLUG
LIFT DETECTOR
Figure 11-95. Stall Warning Schematic

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4110
TO GROUND
OF BATTERY
4111
KIT 764 096 FOR PLUG REPLACEMENT
HEATED
WINDSHIELD
SWITCH
Figure 11-98. Heated Windshield Schematic

RADIOCIRCUITPROTECTOR
BUSBAR
20
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH
AUTOFLITE HOURMETER
TO MAIN TO AUTOPILOT
BUSBAR CONSOLE
Figure 11-99. Accessory and AutoPilot Schematic

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/ 18/81
4112
EXTERNALPOWER MASTER
SAFETYCONTACTOR CONTACTOR
BATTERY
&
AMMETER
Figure 11-100. External Power Supply

PA-23-250 and PA-23-250 (six place)
BATTERY

PA-23-250 and PA-23-235
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4113
PIA A
BATTERY
14 VOLT
Figure 11-102. External Power Supply. PA-23-250 (six place)

EXTERNALPOWER MASTER
SAFETYCONTACTOR CONTACTOR
PIA AU
EXTERNAL *20
RECEPTACLE 20 BATTERY
IOE P12A
SR 1100 12
20
TO BUSBARAND MASTER
STARTERCIRCUIT SWITCH

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 to 27-7554172 incl.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4114
RIGHTWING
PLUG
RIGHT GENERATOR
SWITCH
TO BATTERY
SWITCH
Figure 11-104. Generator System Schematic (Delco-Remy, 14-volt and 28-volt),

PA-23-250 and PA-23-235
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4115 4116
Figure 11-105. Generator System Schematic (Delco-Remy, 14-volt and 28-volt),
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4117 4118
SHUNT
100AMPSOMILLIVOLT
Figure 11-107. Alternator System Schematic (Prestolite), PA-23-250 (six place)
Scrial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 to 27-4793
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4121 4122
SHUNT
100 AMP.
RIGHT
Figure 11-108.Alternator Paralleling System Schematic (Prestolite),

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4123 4124
OVERVOLTAGE
RELAY (RIGHT)
RIGHT
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
LEFT
WING
PLUG
ALTERNATOR
(LEFT)
IOOA
5mV
Figure 11-109. Alternator Paralleling SystemSchematic (Prestolite), PA-23-250 (six place),

Serial Nos. 27-4794 to 27-5005
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4J1 4J2
18
LEFT STARTER
Figure I11-110.Starter System Schematic (Delco-Remy, 14-volt and 28-volt), PA-23-250;

PA-23-235: and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4J3 4J4
16
16 18
LEFT WING
PLUG
18
18
18
16
18
16
16
18 18
18
18 RIGHT RIGHT LEFT

STARTER
SWITCH L
RIGHT WING
PLUG
RIGHTENGINE LEFT EHGINE
MAGNETOSWITCHES
Figure 11-1 I. Starter SystemSchematic(Delco-Remy), PA-23-250 (six place).

Serial Nos. 27-2505to 27-3831incl.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
4J5 4J6
PIPER AZTEC SERVICE MANUAL.
16
16
Figure 11-112. Starter System Schematic (Delco-Remy), PA-23-250 (six place),

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2 18/81
4J7 4J8
16
LEFT STARTER
MOTOR
RIGHT WING
PLUG
RIGHTENGINE LEFT ENGINE

MAGNETOSWITCHES
Figure 11-113. Starter System Schematic (Delco-Remy), PA-23-250 (six placc),

Serial Nos. 27-25(5 to 27-3X36 incl. and 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl. with AiRescarcl
'TurbochargerStarter SystemSchematic
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
4J9 4J10
LEFT WING
PLUG
TOBAGGAGE
COMPARTMENT
LIGHTS
STARTER
RIGHT
PLUG
SITCH
Figure 11-114. Starter System Schematic (Prestolite), PA-23-250 (six place).

Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 to 27-7554172 incl.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
4J11 4J12
LEFT WING
PLUG
RIGHT
ENGINE
MAGNETO
SWITCHES
RIGHT WING
PLUG STARTER
SWITCH
Figure I 1-115. Starter System Schematic (Prestolite), PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model
Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up (Earlier Models)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4J13 4J14
LEFTWING
PLUG
LEFT FUEL PUMP
Figure I I-116. Starter System Schematic (Prestolite). PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up (Later Models)
ElECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
4J15 4J16
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
4J17
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
4J18
20
EFT CENTER LEFT REAR

EADINGLIGHT READINGLIGHT
20
RIGHT CENTER
READINGLIGHT
20
COMPASS
LIGHT
SWITCHES
INSTRUMENTSPOT AND 20
COMPASSLIGHT
SWITCH
20
20 RIGHT INSTRUMENT
20 SPOT LIGHT
20
Figure 11-117. Interior Lights Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place).

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4J19 4J20
LIGHT
SWITCHES
LEFT REAR
READINGLIGHT
NOTE
WHENGLAREBAN LIGHTINGIS INSTALLED:
L3A CONNECTSTO US IN PLACE OF UR
L3E CONNECTSTO UP IN PLACE OF L30
20 SEENOTE
COMPASS
20
DOMELIGHT
SWITCH
DOME
LIGHT
Figure 11-118. Interior Lights Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place).

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4J21 4J22
LIGHT
SWITCHES
LEFT CENTER LEFT REAR

READINGLIGHT READINGLIGHT
NOTE
WHENGLARE BAN LIGHTINGIS INSTALLED:
L3A CONNECTS
TO L3S IN PLACE OF L3R
L3E CONNECTS
TO L3P IN PLACE OF L3Q
COMPASS
L4B
DOMELIGHT
SWITCH
Figure 11-119. Interior lights Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place),

Serial Nos. 27-3837,27-3944to 27-4766incl.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
4J23 4J24
LIGHT
SWITCHES
NOTE
WHENGLAREBAN LIGHTINGIS INSTALLED:
L3A CONNECTSTO US IN PLACE OF L3R
L3E CONNECTSTO UP IN PLACE OF L3Q
LIGHT
DOMELIGHT
SWITCH
Figure 11-120. Interior Lights Schematic. PA-23-250 (six place),

Serial Nos. 27-4767 lo 27-7554172 incl.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4K1 4K2
TOGROUND TO MASTER
OFBATTERY SWITCH
CARB AIR TEMP FLAP POSITION
SWITCH INDICATOR
TURNANDBANK
INDICATOR
CLUSTER
ASEMBLY
I GAUGE
RIGHT CARB
SENDER ) R TEP
I BULB
SEE
20
FLAP
SENDER
0
20
20
LEFT OIL RIGHTFUEL RIGHTOIL RIGHT OIL
LEFT OIL TEMP BULB
TEMP BULB TEMP GAUGE GAUGE TEMPGAUGE
LEFT
LEFT WING
FUEL TANKS PLUG
SWITCHES
INBOARD
NOTES
. REMOVED ON 28 VOLT SYSTEM.

2. USED ON 28 VOLT SYSTEM ONLY.
Figure 11-121. Instrument Cluster Wiring Schematic(14-volt and 28-volt systems).

PA-23-250 and PA-23-235
ELECTRICAL. SYSTEM.
Reissued: 2/18/81
4K3 4K4
20
RIGHTOUTBOARD
FUEL SENDER
NOTE
I. USEDON PA-23,250(SIX PLACE) SERIALNOS.27-2298, 272331

AND 27.2000TO 27-2504INCL. AS OPTIONALEOUIPNENT.
2. ON PA-23-250(SIX PLACE)SERIAL NOS.272298. 2712311

A
ISG0 RESISTORIS USED.
3. NOT USEDONPA-23-250(SIX PLACE) SERIALNOS.27-2298,

27-2331AND 27-2000TO 27-2504INCL.
GEARWARNING
HORN
FLAP
INDICATOR
CI
FLAP
20 SENDER
Figure 11-122. Instrument Cluster Wiring Schematic(14-volt and 28-volt systems),

I'A-23-25() (six place). Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-3837 incl. and 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl. ELECTRICAL. SYSTEM
Rcissued: 2/18/81
4K5 4K6
PIPER AZTEC SERVICE MANUAI.
THROTTLESWITCH
TEMP.
RIGHT GEARDOWN
SWITCH
5 AMP
TO TEMP.
AIR CARB SEE NOTE I
1
RIGHT WING RIGHTGEAR UP

PLUG SWITCH
NOSEGEARUP TO HEATER
SWITCH TERMINALBLOCK
20 20
LANDINGGEAR
CIRCUIT 20
20 NOTE
TO PANEL LIGHTS
SWITCH 1. AIRPLANES MAYOR MAYNOT HAVETERMINALCONNECTIONS.
2. ON PA-23-250,SERIALNOS.27-254TO 27-364AND 27-402A 150

RESISTORIS USED.
5 SEENOTE 4/ NOTE 3
3. ON PA-23-250.SERIALNOS.27-254TO27-364AND 27-402A 350
TO RESISTORIS USED.
TURN & BANK E
(INDICATOR 4. ON PA-23.250,SERIALNOS.27-254TO 27-364AND 27-402A 225
RESISTORIS USED.
INSTRUMENT LEFT NOSE RIGHT
CLUSTER
GEARDOWNINDICATORLIGHTS SEENOTE I
NOSEGEAR
DOWNSWITCH GEAR WARNING
HORN
Figure 11-124. Landing Gear and Flap System Schematic, PA-23-250 and PA-23-235
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4K9 4K10
INDICATOR
PANEL LIGHTS SEE NOTE 4 SEENOTE 3

DIMMER
NOTE
LEFT NOSE RIGHT I TO WARNINGHORNFUSE

AT BUS BAR
GEAR DOWNINDICATORLIGHTS
NOSEGEAR
DOWNSWITCH GEAR WARNING
HORN
Figure 11-125. Landing Gear and Flap SystemSchematic (14-volt and 28-volt).
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504incl.
SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL
REissued: 2/18/81
4K11 4K12
GEARAND FLAP, SENDING

UNITS
5 AMP
20
TO FLAP
SENDINGUNIT
RIGHTWING RIGHT GEARUP

PLUG SWITCH
HOSEGEARUP TO HEATER
SWITCH TERMINALBLOCK
20 G14 G14A
20 LEFT RIGHT
20 NOTE
TO POST LIGHTSFUSE
AT BUS BAR
1. AIRPLANESMAYOR MAYNOT
HAVETERMINALCONNECTIONS
75 40
PANEL LIGH
DIMMER
TO PANEL
LEFT NOSE RIGHT TO WARNINGHORNFUSE

AT BUSBAR
GEAR DOWN
INDICATORLIGHTS SEENOTE I
NOSEGEAR 3
DOWNSWITCH GEARWARNING
HORN
-
.
Figure 11-126. Landing Gear and Flap System Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505to 27-3836 incl. and 27-2838to 27-3943incl.
ELECTRICAI. SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
4K13 4K14
GEARANDFLAP, SENDING
UNITS
AND LIGHTS
(WITH BAGGAGECOMPT.ANDDOOR
AJAR LIGHTS)
S AMP DETAIL B 7
S/N 27-7554001
TO 27-80540486
I-LEFT RIGHT I
DOORAJAR
LIGHT
THROTTLE SWITCHES _
DIODE
FORWARD
BAGGAGE
COMPARTMENT
LIGHT
FLAP FLAP
INDICATOR SENDER
SEEDETAIL A FOR
SOLIDSTATEDIMMER
TO POSTLIGHTSFUSE
AT BUSBAR
DETAIL A
SOUDSTATEDIMMER
WIRINGDIAGRAM
GEARWARNING
HORN
NOTE 1
SEE DETAIL B OR C (BY APPROPRIAIF AIRCRAFT SERIAL NOS )
Figure 11-127. Landing Gcar and Flap System Schematic. PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 to 27-7554172incl.
I I.("CIRIC
' AI. SYS'I .M
Rpcissucd:
2 IX SI
4K15 4K16
ANTI-COLL. SWITCH
TO
L20N
Figure 11-128. Red Anti-Collision Strobe Light (Optional)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4K17
4K17
Reissued: 2/18/81
ANTI-COLL. SWITCH
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4K18
WHITE
ANTI-COLL.
ANTI-COLL. SWITCH
SEEFIGURE11-132 OR 11-133 FOR23-250 (SIX

PLACE)"F" MODELSTROBELIGHT
Figure 11-130. White Anti-Collision Strobe Light
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4K19
4K19
Reissued: 2/18/81
ANTI-COLL.
SWITCH
STROBELIGHTASSY.
SEEFIGURE11-132 OR 11-133 FOR23-250 (SIX

PLACE)"F" MODELSTROBELIGHT
Figure 11-131. White Anti-Collision Strobe Light
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4K20
RIGHT
RIGHT WING
PLUG
LEFT
Figure 11-132. White Anti-Collision Strobe Light, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4K21 4K21 Reissued: 2/18/81

RIGHT
POWER STROBE
20
SUPPLY LIGHT
J0
LEFT WING
PLUG
SEE A
NOTE: LEFT
SYSTEM SCHEMATIC SUPPLY LIGHT
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
(Reissued: 2/18/81
4K22
RIGHT WING
PLUG
RIGHT
FUEL PUMP
FUEL PUMP[
LEFT WING
PLUG
Figure 11-134. Fuel Pumps Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4K23
FUEL PUMPS
SWITCHES
RIGHT WING
PLUG
LEFT
FUEL PUMP
LEFT WING
PLUG
Figure 11-135. Fuel Pumps Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4K24
2.0
50 WATT
18
COMBUSTION
AIR BLOWER
FILTER
UNIT
ADJUSTABLE
DUCTSTAT TO NOSEGEAR
SWITCH UP SWITCH
Figure 11-136. Heater and Cigar Lighter Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/ 18 81
4L1
CIGAR
LIGHTER
EARLIER MODELS
CIGAR
LIGHTER
CIGAR
LIGHTER
LATER MODELS
18
Figure 11-137. Heater and Cigar Lighter Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place)
"F" Model, Serial Nos. 27-7654001 and up
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4L2
CABIN HEAT
(AND CIGAR LIGHTER)
10 AMP
HEATER
SWITCH
FAN
COMBUSTION
FILTER AIR BLOWER
FILTER
AD
HEAT H
Figure 11-138. Heater with Reset and Cigar Lighter, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4L3
WING
INSPECTION
14 LIGHT
LANDING LIGHT TAXI LIGHT OPTION
SWITCH / SWITCH
—TAXI LIGHT
14 14
LANDING LIGHT
Figure 11-139. Landing and Taxi Lights, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
18
(Earlier Models)
Figure 11-140. Pitot Heat Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4J4 Reissued: 2/ 18/81
4L4
KIT764 096 FORPLUGREPLACEMENT
HEATED
WINDSHIELD
SWITCH
Figure 11-141. Heated Windshield Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4L5
LIGHT
RIGHT WING
NAVIGATION LIGHT
GREEN
RIGHT
WING PLUG
LEFT WING
NAVIGATION LIGHT
RED
LEFT
WING PLUG -
Figure 11-142. Position Lights Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2, 18,81
4L6
TAIL
LIGHT
SEE ELT SCHEMATIC

RIGHT WING
NAVIGATION LIGHT
GREEN
LEFT WING
NAVIGATION LIGHT
RED
L2A WING PLUG20L2E

LEFT
WING PLUG
Figure 11-143. Position Lights Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
Serial Nos. 27-7654001and up (Later Models)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4L7
Figure 11-144. Post Lights Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4L8
LIGHTS
Figure 11-145. Interior Lights Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4L9
20
FLASHER
STALL WARNING
HORN
PIN 8 USEDON S/N 27-7754001 AND UP
LEFT WING
PLUG
LIFT DETECTOR
Figure 11-146. Stall Warning Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4L10
RADIO CIRCUIT PROTECTOR

BUS BAR
TO MAIN
BUS BAR
Figure 11-147. Accessory and AutoPilot Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4L11
TO ALTERNATORINOP.LIGHTS
(C~) 5 AMP
DOME LIGHT
TRIM INDICATOR
LIGHTS 300
5W
Figure 11-148. Interior Lights Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
4L12
4L12
Reissued: 2/18/81
(Later Models) EXTPOWER

CONTACTOR
EXT. POWER RECP
4 NOTE: S/N 7854136 & UP
MASTER SWITCH.
OVERVOLTAGE
RELAY (RIGHT)
TAPE AND TIE BACK WHEN

FLIGHT CLEARANCE SWITCH Figure 2.
IS NOT USED.
Figure 1 PF14 P338 20
Figure 1.
WING
PLUG
Figure 3.
(Later Models)
SEE
FIG. 4
RNATOR
NOTE:
348 WIRING DIAGRAM SHOWN WITH 7TRlGT PLUG
MASTER SWITCHS OFF AND
AIRCRAFT ON THE GROUND
I I
WITH GEAR LOCKED
Figure4.
Figure 11-149. Alternator Paralleling System (Prestolite), PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
EI.ECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4L13 4L14
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
4L15
INTENTIONALLY
LEFT
BLANK
4I16
4L16
LEFT ENGINE FUEL TANK

OIL TEMP UNIT SWITCHES
20
Gl4C
20
20
SEE GEAR & FLAP TO FLAP INDICTOR

SCHEMATIC
Figure 11-150. Instrument Cluster Wiring Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
Serial Nos. 27-7654001and up (Earlier Models)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued:2/18/81
4L17 4L18
FUEL TANK
SWITCHES
SEE GEAR 8 FLAP

SCHEMATIC TO FLAP INDICTOR
SEE NOTE
NOTE
A "VARISTOR" IS INSTALLED ON
THE LEFT FUEL QUANTITY GAUGE
FROM LINE TERMINAL TO GROUND.
Figure 11-151. Instrument Cluster Wiring Schematic, PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model,
ELECTRICAL SYSTF.M
Rcissued:2/18 81
4L19 4L20
NOTE
WIRING DIAGRAM SHOWN WITH AIRCRAFT ON GROUND.

GEAR DOWN AND LOCKED AND MASTER SWITCHES OFF.
DOOR AJAR LIGHT
Figure I I-152. Landing Gear and Flap System Schematic. PA-23-250 (six place) "F" Model.
Scrial Nos. 27-7654001 and up (Earlier Models)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4L21 4L22
NOTE NOTE 2... NOTE 3

WIRINGDIAGRAMSHOWN WITH EARLIER FLAP INDICATORSHAD EARLIER MODELS
AIRCRAFT ON THE GROUND NO GND.TERM. B HENCE
AND GEAR LOCKED. NO WIRE LABELED F4A
B G3F
DOOR AJAR LIGHT G4
F
LEFT WING RIGHT WING

PLUG PLUG
LEFT GEAR DOWN

SWITCH
SW.
LEFT GEAR UP
SWITCH
MAIN AFT BAGGAGE LEFT WING
AJAR COMPT LIGHT PLUG
(SEE NOTE3)
NOSE GEAR
DOWN SWITCH
-
FLAP SENDER
Figure 11-153. Landing Gcar and Flap System Schematic, PA-23-25()(six place) "F" Model,
Serial Nos. 27-7654001and up (Later Models)
ELECTRICAl. SYSTEM
Reissued: 2/18/81
4L23 4L24
AZTEC
SERVICE
MANUAL
CARD
5 OF5
PA-23-235
APACHE
PA-23-250
AZTEC
PA-23-250
(SIXPLACE)
AZTEC
PIPERAIRCRAFT
CORPORATION
(PART
NUMBER
753564)
5A1
general specifications of Aeroficheadopted by the General Aircraft Manufacturer's Association.Information
compiled in this Aerofiche servicemanual is kept current by revisionsdistributed periodically.Theserevisions
supersede all previous revisions, are complete Aerofiche card replacements, and supersede Aerofichecards of
same number.

frame, opposite revised or added material. Revision lines indicate only current revisionswith changes and
additions to existing text and illustrations.Changes in capitalization, spelling,punctuation, indexing, physical
ORG600401 April 1, 1960 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5

CR810218 February 18, 1981 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
PR830426 April 26, 1983 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
IR860429 April 29, 1986(Interim)
IR860921 September 21, 1986(Interim)*
* INTERIM REVISION
Revisions appear in Table III-I of card 1.
CARDS 2, 3, 4, or 5.
The date on Aerofiche cards must not be earlier than date noted for respectivecard effectivity.Consult latest
5A2
OFCONTENTS
TABLE
NO.1
CARD
AEROFICHE NO.
GRID
I ........................
INTRODUCTION 1A21
II ANDSERVICING
HANDLING ................ 1B2
III .........................
INSPECTION 1E23
IV STRUCTURES ........................ 1F15
V CONTROLS
SURFACE ..................... 1119
NO.2
CARD
AEROFICHE
VI SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC ......... ...... .. 2A8
VII GEAR
LANDING ANDBRAKE SYSTEM
............ 2G1
CARD
AEROFICHENO.3
VIII (NORMALLYASPIRATED) .......
PLANT
POWER .3A8
VIIIA PLANT
VIIIB POWERPLANT
(LYCOMING-TURBOCHARGED)....... 3H4
IX ........................
SYSTEM
FUEL 3110
NO.4
CARD
AEROFICHE
X ........................
INSTRUMENTS 4A8
XI ...................
SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL .4C1
CARD
AEROFICHENO.5
XII .................
ELECTRONICS ... 5A9
XIII .................
ANDVENTILATING
HEATING 5B5
XIV .............
ANDUTILITIES
ACCESSORIES . 5H13
5A3
Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
NOTE
12-1. Two Year, Magnesium Battery Connection (Garrett) .............. 5AII

12-2. Emergency Locator Transmitter Schematic (Garrett) .............. 5A21
Components Corp. Early Models) .......................... 5A22
Components Corp. Later Models) .......................... 5A23
12-5. Emergency Locator Transmitter Schematic (Narco) ............... 5A23
12-6. ELT Portable Folding Antenna (Narco) ......................... 5A24
12-7. ELT Using Fixed Aircraft Antenna (Narco) ...................... 5A24
12-8. Avionic Antenna Locations .................................... 5B1
13-1. Heating and Ventilating System, PA-23-235 and PA-23-250,
Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-504 incl ............................. 5B11
Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl ......................... 5B12
Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3049, 27-3051 to 27-3153 incl ....... 5B13
Serial Nos. 27-3050, 27-3154 to 27-3836, 27-3838 to
27-3943 incl ................... .......................... 5B14
Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 and up ........................ 5B15
Serial Nos. 27-4426 and 27-4574 and up ..................... 5B16
13-7. Flow System (South Wind Heater) ............................. 5B20
13-8. Fuel Safety Valve (Cutaway View) .............................. 5B21
Reissued: 2/18/81
5A4
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS(cont.)
Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
13-9. Fuel Control Valve(Cutaway View) ................... 5B24

13-10. Wiring,Models940-D and 940-DA .................... 5C1
13-11. Wiring,Models940-DBand 940-K .................... 5C1
13-12. Heater Installation, PA-23-235and PA-23-250 .......... .... 5C10
13-13. Heater Installation, PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos.
27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.; PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3049, 27-3051 to 27-3153 incl. 5C12
13-14. Flame Detector Switch (CutawayView) ................. 5C15
13-15. Exploded Parts View, Heater Assembly ................. 5D2
13-16. Exploded Parts View, Ventilating Air Blower Assembly ........ 5D4
13-17. Ventilating Air Blower Motor ....................... 5D7
13-18. Combustion Air BlowerMotor ...................... 5D8
13-19. Detail of Exhaust Extensions Installation ................ 5D13
13-20. Fuel flow Test Set Up ........................... 5D15
13-21. Heater Assembly and Combustion Air Blower .............. 5E2
13-22. Diagramatic Cutaway of Heater to Show Wirling Flame Action .. .. 5E3
13-23. Fuel Regulator and Shutoff Valve ...... ............ 5E4
13-24. Top View - Duct Switch (Typical Control LeverPositions) ...... 5E4
13-25. WiringDiagram ............................... 5E6
13-26. Primary Power Circuit ........................... 5E10
13-27. Starting Power Circuit ........................... 5E1 1
13-28. Spark Plug Gap Adjustment ........................ 5E14
13-28a. Spark Plug Fixture .. ....................................... 5E 18
13-28b. Wiring - Test Setup ........................................... 5E18
13-29. Suggested Designfor Seal Plate, Plugs and Caps for Combustion
Tube LeakageTest ........................... 5F4
13-30. Test Set-Up for Combustion Air Pressure Switch ............ 5F5
13-31. Exploded View of Heater Assembly No. 751 978 and No. 751 999.. 5F8
13-32. Exploded View - Combustion Air Blower and Motor Assembly
No. 753 443 ............................... 5F12
13-33. SuggestedSet-Up for Heater Operation Test ............... 5F13
13-34. Wiringconnections for Heater Operation Test .............. 5F14
13-35. Heater Fuel Filter ............................. . 5F17
13-36. Heater Fuel Valve .............................. 5F17
13-37. Heater Assemblyand Combustion Air Blower .............. 5F19
13-38. Diagramatic Cutaway of Heater to Show Whirling Flame Action . .. 5G2
13-39. Fuel Regulator and Shutoff Valve ..................... 5G3
13-40. Top View - Duct Switch (Typical Control Lever Position) ....... 5G3
13-41. Wiring Diagram ............................... 5G5
13-42. Primary Power Circuit ........................... 5G8
5A5 Revised: 4/26/83

5A5
(cont.)
Figure Aerofiche
Grid No.
13-43. Starting Power Circuit ........................... 5G9

13-44. Spark Plug Gap Adjustment and Tool .................. 5G13
13-44a. Spark Plug Fixture ........................................... 5G15
13-44b. Wiring - Test Setup ........................................... 5G17
13-45. SuggestedDesign for Seal Plate Plugsand Caps for
Combustion Tube LeakageTest .................... 5H1
13-46. Test Setup for Combustion Air PressureSwitch ............. 5H1
13-47. Exploded View of Heater AssemblyNo. 755 257 ............ 5H7
13-48. Exploded View of Combustion Air Blower and Motor
Assembly No. 758 304 ............... .. 5H9
13-49. Suggested Setup for Heater Operation Test ............... 5H 10
13-50. WiringConnection for Heater Operation Test .............. 5H11
14-1. Oxygen Tubing Installations ................................. 5H 19
14-2. Oxygen System Installation, PA-23-250 .............. 5H20
14-3. Oxygen System Installation, PA-23-250(six place), Serial
Nos. 27-2000 to 27-3049 incl.; and 27-3051 to 27-3153
incl .................................... 5H21
Nos. 27-3154 to 27-3836 incl.; and 27-3838 to 27-3943
incl..................................... 5H22
Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 and up .................... 5H23
14-6. Propeller De-Icer Installation, PA=23-250 ................ 516
14-7. Propeller De-Icer Installation, PA-23-250 (six place) .......... 516
14-8. Electrical Diagram ShowingCycle Sequence,Phase 1 .......... 518
14-9. Electrical Diagram ShowingCycle Sequence, Phase 2 .......... 518
14-12. Relocating Bend in Deicer Lead .................. .. .. 5111
14-13. DeterminingBrush Wear .......................... 5112
14-14. DeterminingBrush Wear .......................... 5112
14-15. CheckingSlip Ring Run-out ........................ 5113
14-16. Wear Pattern of MisalignedBrush ..................... 5113
14-17. Brush Block Positioning ........... . 5115
14-18. Schematic WiringDiagram,PA-23-250;PA-23-235;and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl. .......... 5118
Revised: 4/26/83
5A6

Aerofiche
Grid No.
14-19. Schematic Wiring Diagram, PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.
27-2505and up .......................................... 5118
14-20. Brush Insert Assembly, PA-23-250;PA-23-235;and PA-23-250
(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000to 27-2504incl ............... 5J3
14-21. Brush Block Assembly, PA-23-250(six place), Serial
Nos. 27-2505and up ...................................... 5J4
14-22. Holding Brushes for Soldering, PA-23-250;PA-23-235;and
PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000to
27-2504incl.............................................. 5J5
14-23. Holding Brushes for Soldering, PA-23-250 (six place),
Serial Nos. 27-2505and up ................................ 5J6
14-24. Modular Brush Assembly...................................... 5J7
14-25. Patching Deicer Lead Strap.................................... 5J 12
14-26. Spinner Dome Cushioning..................................... 5J 13
14-27. Hub Clamp Cushioning ....................................... 5J 14
14-28. Propeller Blade in Low Pitch .................................. 5J16
14-29. Propeller Blade in Feather Position ............................. 5J 16
14-30. Pneumatic Deicer Installation (Wet Vacuum Pump), Serial
Nos. 27-2505to 27-3944incl................................ 5J 18
Nos. 27-4510to 27-7304963;27-7304965to
27-7304993 incl .................. ........................ 5J 19
Nos. 27-7304964to 27-7554168incl ........................ 5J20
Nos. 27-7554112to 27-7554168incl ....................... 5J21
14-34. 28-Volt DC System, 3D1472Timer ............................. 5J24
14-35. 14-VoltDC System, 3D1740Timer .............................. 5J24
14-36. Pneumatic Deicer System Schematic (Using Time Module) ........ 5KI
14-37. Pneumatic Deicer System Schematic (Airborne System) ........... 5K1
14-38. Propeller Synchronizer System Installation ...................... 5K20
14-39. Synchronizer Schematic....................................... 5K22
14-40. Mechanical Connections....................................... 5K23
14-41. Fabricated Test Box .......................................... 5L I
14-42. Synchrophaser Installation..................................... 5L6
14-43. Strobe Sensor ................................................ 5L12
14-44. Pulse Generator............................................. 5L13
14-45. Computer Assembly ......................................... 5L 16
14-46. Fabricated Test Box .......................................... 5L 17
14-47. Electrical Schematic .......................................... 5L17
14-48. Strobe Sensor Internal Wiring Test Unit ........................ 5L18
14-49. Strobe Sensor Simulator ...................................... 5L18
14-50. Patch Cable and Test Terminal ................................ 5L19
14-51. Pulse Generator Simulator..................................... 5L19
14-52. Synchrophaser Schematic, PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos.
27-7854068and up ........................................ 5L21
5A7
LIST OF TABLES
Table Aerofiche
Grid No.
XII-I. Heater Troubleshooting (South Wind) ........................ 5C21

XIII-lI. Heater Troubleshooting (Janitrol) 14 volt ..................... 5D20
XIII-III. Heater Troubleshooting (Janitrol) 28 volt ..................... 5F20
XIV-I. Propeller Deicer System Troubleshooting ..................... 5119
XIV-II. Pneumatic Deicer Operating Pressures ........................ 5K3
XIV-III. Pneumatic Deicer System Troubleshooting .................... 5K15
XIV-IV. Troubleshooting Chart (Propeller Synchronizer) ................ 5L2
XIV-V. Troubleshooting Chart (Engine Synchrophaser) ................ 5L20
Revised: 4/26/83
5A8
SECTION XII
ELECTRONICS
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
12-1. Introduction ................................................. 5A10

12-2. Emergency Locator Transmitter ................................ 5A1O
12-3. Description .................................................. 5AIO
12-4. Removal and Installation (Garrett Mfg. Ltd. 2 Year
Magnesium Battery) ........................................ 5A10
12-5. Removal and Installation (Communications Components Corp.
Alkaline Battery) ........................................... 5A14
12-6. Removal and Installation (Narco) .............................. 5A15
12-7. Testing Emergency Locator Transmitter ........................ 5A15
12-8. Pilot's Remote Switch ...................................... 5A18
12-9. Testing Pilot's Remote Switch.................................. 5A18
12-10. Inadvertent Activation ........................................ 5A19
12-11. General ..................................................... 5A19
12-12. Non-Piper A.F.C.S. Equipment Contacts ........................ 5A19
12-13. Piper A.F.C.S. Equipment .................................... 5A20
5A9
SECTION XII
ELECTRONICS
12-1. INTRODUCTION. This section provides the information necessary to perform an

operational check of the Emergency Locator Transmitter and/or the Emergency Locator
Transmitter with a Pilot's Remote Switch. Included are the appropriate removal and installa-
tion instructions to facilitate battery replacement.
12-2. EMERGENCY LOCATOR TRANSMITTER.
12-3. DESCRIPTION. The ELT is an automatically activated emergency locator trans-

mitter which, when activated, will radiate an omni-directional RF signal on the international
distress frequencies. The radiated signal is modulated with a distinctive audio swept tone.
Electrical power for the ELT transmitter is supplied by its own self-contained magnesium
or alkaline battery. Per FAA regulations, a magnesium battery must be replaced 2 years from
the date of manufacture stamped on the battery pack and an alkaline battery must be replaced
after five years of shelf life (replacement date is marked on the transmitter label). The battery
must also be replaced if the transmitter has been used in an emergency situation or if accumu-
lated test time exceeds one hour. To replace the battery pack in the transmitter, it is necessary
to remove the ELT from the airplane.
12-4. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION. (GARRETT MFG. LTD. 2 year, magnesium

battery, refer to Figure 12-1.) The ELT is located underneath the dorsal fin.
a. Remove the access panel on the dorsal fin.
b. Set the ON/ARM/OFF switch on the transmitter to the OFF position.
c. Disconnect the antenna coax from the transmitter.
d. Disconnect the harness to the pilot's remote switch from the transmitter.
e. Remove the rear mounting bracket by pulling the plastic knob out. Remove the trans-
mitter from the airplane.
f. Remove the two long or four short screws securing the transmitter plain end cap.
Remove the plain end cap.
g. Disconnect the battery connector from the board terminals.
h. Withdraw the battery pack from the transmitter case.
i. Before installing the new battery pack, check the replacement date by adding two
years to the date of manufacture on the battery. Transfer this date onto the ELT label.
j. Slide the new battery pack, plain end first, into transmitter. It may be necessary to
rotate the battery slightly to get it seated properly in the transmitter case and to achieve correct
orientation of the battery connector.
k. Connect the battery connector to board terminals.
ELECTRONICS
Reissued:2/18/81
5A10
379
LONG
SCREWS
ENSURE THAT
BATTERY LEADS
ARE LOCATED
IN VEE OF
TRANSMITTER
RING
BOARD
Figure 12-1. Two Year, Magnesium Battery Connection (Garrett)
1. Insure O-ring is fitted in plain end cap and correctly seated.

m. Refit end cap and secure with the screws previously removed.
NOTE
Do not overtighten the two long screws.
n. Place transmitter into its mounting bracket; replace rearmounting bracket by pushing
plastic knob into place.
o. Connect the pilot's remote switch harness to the transmitter.
p. Connect the antenna coax to the transmitter.
q. Install the access panel on the dorsal fin and secure with appropriate screws. Make
an entry in the aircraft logbook, including the new battery run out date.
NOTE
Before installing access panel ascertain that transmitter switch

is in the ARM position. It may also be advisable to test the unit
operation before installing the access panel. (Refer to para-
graph 12-7.)
ELECTRONICS
Reissued: 2/18/81
5A11
5A12
5A13
12-5. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION. (COMMUNICATIONS COMPONENTS

CORP.. alkaline battery.) The ELT is located under the dorsal fin.
a. Remove the access panel on the dorsal fin.
b. Rotate the ON/ARM/OFF switch to the OFF position.
c. Disconnect the antenna coax cable (twist left, then pull outwards).
d. Disconnect the harness to the pilot's remote switch.
e. Remove the forward mounting bracket by pulling the black plastic knob out. Remove
the transmitter from the airplane.
f. Remove the six Phillips-head screws securing the transmitter cover. Remove the
cover.
g. Lift out the old battery pack.
h. Copy the expiration date on the battery into the space provided on the external ELT
name and date plate.
i. Disconnect and replace with a new battery pack. The nylon battery connector is a
friction fit and is easily removed by pulling on the exposed end.
j. Insert transmitter into airplane and fit into place. Reinstall mounting bracket by
pushing the black knob into place.
k. Reconnect the pilot's remote switch harness and the antenna coax cable to the
transmitter.
l. Set the ON/ARM/OFF switch to the ARM position.
NOTE
It may be advisable to test the unit operation before in-

stalling the access panel. (See paragraph 12-7.)
m. Reinstall the access panel previously removed.

n. Make an entry in the aircraft logbook, including the new battery expiration date.
NOTE
Inspect the external whip antenna for any damage. Avoid

bending the whip. Any sharply bent or kinked whip should
be replaced. Antenna damage may cause structural failure of
whip in flight.
ELECTRONICS
5A14
12-6. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION (NARCO). The ELT is located under the dorsal
fin. (Refer to Figures 12-6 and 12-7.)
1. Remove the access panel on the dorsal fin.
2. Set the ON/OFF/ARM switch on the transmitter to OFF.
3. Disconnect antenna coaxial cable from ELT.
4. Remove ELT from its mounting bracket by releasing the latch on the strap
and sliding the ELT off the bracket.
5. Extend the portable antenna. (See Figure 12-6.)
6. Unscrew the four screwsthat hold the control head to the battery casingand
slide apart.
7. Disconnect the battery terminals from the bottom of the circuit board.
8. Discard old battery pack. (DO NOT EXPOSETO FLAME.)
CAUTION
The battery pack is shipped with a sealant on the inside

lip so that a water tight seal will be retained. DO NOT
REMOVETHIS SEALANT.
9. Connect new battery pack terminals to the bottom of the circuit board.
10. Reinsert the control head section into the battery pack beingcareful not to
pinch any wires, and replace the four screws. If the four holes do not line up, rotate the
battery pack 180° and reinsert.)
11. Slide the portable antenna back into the stowed position.
12. Place transmitter into its mounting bracket and fasten the strap latch.
13. Connect the antenna coaxial cable to the ELT and ensure that the contact
separator is inserted between the antenna contact finger and the portable antenna. (Ref. Fig.
12-7.)
14. Press RESET button and set ON/OFF/ARM switch to ARM.
15. Make an entry in the aircraft logbook, including the new battery expiration
date.
16. A unit operational check may now be performed on the ELT. (Refer to
Testing EmergencyLocator Transmitter, paragraph 12-7.)
NOTE
whip in flight.
12-7. TESTING EMERGENCYLOCATORTRANSMITTER. The transmitter operates on

the emergency frequencies of 121.5 and 243 MHz;both of these frequencies are monitored
by the various FAA installations. Before performing any operational test of the ELT, the
followingprecautions should be observed:
ELECTRONICS
5A15
CAUTION
Testing of an ELT should be conducted in a screen

room or metal enclosure to ensure that electromagnetic
energy is not radiated during testing. If a shielded
-enclosure is not available, testing may be performed in
accordance with the followingprocedures:
1. Test should be no longer than three audio

sweeps
2. If the antenna is removed, a dummy load
should be substituted during the test.
3. Test should be conducted only within the
time period made up of the first five minutes
after any hour.
4. If the operational tests must be made at a
time not including within the first five
minutes after the hour, the test should be
coordinated with the closest FAA Tower or
Flight ServiceStation.
Consult FAA Advisory Circular AC 20-81 for detailed

information concerning the above caution.
a. Remove the accesspanel or cover to gain accessto the transmitter.

b. Turn the aircraft master switch ON.
c. Tune the aircraft communications receiver to 121.5 MHz and switch the receiver
ON; deactivate the squelch, and turn the receivervolume up until a slight background noise
is heard.
NOTE
If the aircraft is not fitted with a communications

receiver,request that the tower listen for your test.
d. On the transmitter, set the ON/ARM/OFF switch to the ON position. Keep the
switch in this position for only a few seconds; then set to the OFF position or ARM if there
is no OFF. Return to the ARM position.
ELECTRONICS
5A16
5A16 Reissued: 2 18 81
NOTE
The test transmission should have been picked up by the

aircraft communications receiver and/or control tower.
During cold weather, there may be a slight delay before
transmissionoccurs.
e. A transmitter which is functioning properly should emit a characteristic downward

swept tone.
f. When the test is completed, ascertain the transmitter ON/ARM/OFF switch is in the
ARM position.
WARNING
Whenever the unit is checked by moving the transmitter
ON/ARM/OFF switch from the ARM to the ON position, it
must then be moved to the OFF position, if there is one,
before reverting to the ARM position again.
CAUTION
Under normal conditions, the transmitter switch must be set

to arm.
g. Place the access panel on the dorsal fin and secure with the
appropriate screws.
NOTE

whip inflight.
ELECTRONICS
Reissued: 2/18/81
5A17
12-8. PILOT'S REMOTESWITCH.The Pilot's remote switch is located on the right side of
the cabin or on the lower front of the pedestal to provide remote control of the transmitter.
On early models, the switch is labeled ON/ARM/OFF RESET. The ON position activates
the transmitter in an emergency situation. The ARM position is the normal position for the
airplane in flight The OFF RESET disables the transmitter. On later models, the pilot's
remote switch is labeled ON/RESET and ARM (NORMAL POSITION). The switch is
normally left in the down or ARM position. To turn the transmitter off move the switch to
the ON/RESET position for one second then return it to the ARMposition. To actuate the
transmitter for test or other reasons, move the switch upward to the ON/RESET position
and leave it in that position as long as transmissionis desired.
CAUTION
Under normal conditions the switch must be set to ARM.
12-9. TESTING PILOT'S REMOTE SWITCH. Before performing any operational test of
the pilot's remote switch, the followingprecautions should be observed.
CAUTION
The transmitter operates on the emergency frequencies of

121.5 and 243 MHz;both of these frequencies are monitored
by the various FAA installations. Permission must be
obtained from the FAA/FCC Representative (or other
applicable Authority) prior to testing. Keep your test
transmission to a minimal duration. See CAUTION in
paragraph 12-7.
a. Turn the aircraft master switch ON.

b. Tune the aircraft communications receiver to 121.5 MHz and switch the receiver
ON, deactivate the squelch, and turn the receiver volume up until a slight background noise
is heard.
NOTE
If the aircraft is not fitted with a communications receiver,

request that the tower listen for your test.
c. Put Pilot's Remote Switch to the ON position. Hold in this position for a few
seconds only.
NOTE
The test transmission should have been picked up by the

aircraft communications receiver and/or control tower.
During cold weather there may be a-slight delay before
transmissionoccurs.
d. Set the pilot's remote switch to the RESETposition for one second; then select the
ARM position.
ELECTRONICS
5A18 5A18 Reissued: 2/18/81
12-10. INADVERTENT ACTIVATION.

a. In the event the ELT is inadvertently activated in aircraft without a pilot's remote switch, the ELT
will have to be reset by gaining access to the ELT. (Refer to paragraph 12-4.) Turn ON/ARM/OFF switch to
the OFF position. To reset for automatic operation, return switch to the ARM position. (See NOTE.)
b. In aircraft with a pilot's remote switch, if the ELT is inadvertently activated set the pilot's remote
switch to the OFF, RESET position for three-position remote switches. If the two-position remote switch is
installed turn the switch to the ON, RESET position for one second, then return it to the ARM position. (See
Note.)
NOTE
As a routine precaution, it is recommended that the transmitter be

replaced at the earliest oppportunity after inadvertent activation.
Note, however, that the problem may not be in the transmitter.
Check the following:
1. Proper antenna spacing so as to minimize antenna conducted

RF.
2. Rigidity of the transmitter installation.
CAUTION
Under normal conditions the Pilot's Remote Switch must be set to

ARM.
12-11. GENERAL. Due to the wide varity of A.F.C.S. (Automatic Flight Control System) options. it is
mandatory to follow. the service literature published by the individual manufacturer of the A.F.C.S.
equipment installed in any particular airplane. This includes mechanical service such as; adjusting bridle cable
tension, servo removal and installation, servo clutch adjustments, etc.
12-12. NON-PIPER A.F.C.S. EQUIPMENT CONTACTS. Refer to the following list of AutoPilot/Flight
Director manufacturers to obtain service direction, parts support, and service literature.
Bendix Avionics Division

2100 N.W., 62nd Street
Fort Lauderdale, Fla. 33310
(305) 776-4100/TWX 5109559884
Collins General Aviation Division

Rockwell International
Cedar Rapids, Iowa, 52406
(319) 395-3625 Telex: 464-421
Edo Corporation - Avionics Division

Box 610
Municipal Airport
Mineral Wells, Texas 76067
(817) 325-2517 Telex: 76067
ELECTRONICS
Revised: 4/26/83
5A19
King Radio Corporation

400 North Rodgers Road
Olathe, Kansas, 66061
(913) 782-0400 Telex: 4-2299-Kingrad
Sperry Flight Systems, Avionics Div.

8500 Balboa Blvrd.
P.O. Box 9028
VanNuys. CA, 91409
(213) 894-8111 Telex: 65-1367
Global Navigation
2144 Michelson Drive
Irvine, CA 92715
(714) 851-0119
12-13. PIPER A.F.C.S. EQUIPMENT. In the case of early models, Pier AutoPilot equipment bears the
Piper name, and the appropriate Piper AutoPilot/ Flight Director Service Manual shall be used.
NOTE
If a Roll Axis only AutoPilot is installed, or if no AutoPilot is

installed, consult the Piper Pitch Trim Service Manual - 753 771 for
manual electric pitch trim service information.
The following is a complete listing of Piper A.F.C.S. equipment service literature. It is imperative to correctly
identify the AutoPilot system by "faceplate" model name, in order to consult the appropriate service manual
Each manual identifies the revision level and revision status as called out on the Master Parts Price List -
Aerofiche published monthly by Piper. Consult the aircrafts parts catalog for replacement parts.
NAME PIPER PART NO.
Autocontrol I/II & AltiMatic I/II 753 798

Autocontrol III & AltiMatic III and IIIB 753 798
Autocontrol IIIB & AltiMatic IIIB-I 761 502
AltiMatic IIIC 761 602
AltiMatic V & V-I 761 525
AltiMatic V F/D & V F/D-I 761 526
AltiMatic X F.D./A.P. & X A.P. 761 668
AutoFlite 763 720
AutoFlite II 761 481
Piper Pitch Trim (Manual-Electric) 757 771
ELECTRONICS
5A20 Added: 4/ 26/ 83
5A20
ARM
ON OFF TRANSMITT ER
ELT
SELECTOR
3 3
5
6 6
YELLOWCASE
3 POSITIONSWITCH,2 YEAR MAGNESIUMBATTERY
Figure 12-2. Emergency Locator Transmitter Schematic (Garrett)
ECTRONICS
ELECTRONICS
sued: 2/18/81
Reissued:
5A21
ELT
BL ARM
RESET
BUS
Figure 12-3. Emergency Locator Transmitter Schematic

(Communications Components Corp. Up to Serial Nos. 27-7954006)
ELECTRONICS
5A22 5A22 Reissued: 2/18/81

A785
ELT REMOTE
. CONN
R499 18 ELTG
<-- ARM
RESET
TO POSITION
LIGHT C. B.
Figure 124. Emergency Locator Transmitter Schematic

(Communications Components Corp. Serial Nos. 27-7954007 and up)
A786
CONN
R499
ELT
REMOTE
(PANEL)
SWITCH
TO POSITION LIGHT C/B
CONN
R499
ELT
REMOTE
(PANEL)
SWITCH
Figure 12-5. Emergency Locator Transmitter Schematic (Narco)

ELECTRONICS
Reissued: 2/18/81
5A23
2614
NOTCH PIN PORTABLE

STOP ANTENNA
OPERATIVE
BUT STORED ANTENNA
EXTENSION
TAB
VIEW
SET
A
ON-OFF-ARM
SWITCH
ANTENNA TO
LATCH "ON"
POPSOUT
OF
CHANNEL
AND DOWN
VIEW
B
PIN
PULL TAB STOP
VIEW
TO EXTEND TO FULL LENGTH C
Figure 12-6. ELT Portable Folding Antenna (Narco)
2513
CONTACT
PORTABLE ANTENNA BLADE
SEPARATOR
NOT
MAKING CONTACT
FIXED ANTENNA'S
CABLE CONNECTOR AND
CONTACT SEPARATOR
Figure 12-7. ELT Using Fixed Aircraft Antenna (Narco)
ELECTRONICS
Reissued: 2/18/81
5A24
CONNECTION
ANTENNA
Figure 12-8. Avionic Antenna Locations
ELECTRONICS
Reissued: 2/18/81
5B1
5B2
5B3
5B4
SECTION
XIII
HEATING
ANDVENTILATING
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
13-1. Introduction ........ ........................

5B10
13-2. Description ............. ........................
5B10
13-3. Heater Safety Limit Switch .... ........................
5B18
13-4. Inspection of Heater and Heater Co Components ................. 5B18
13-5. Troubleshooting .......... ........................ 5B18
13-6. Heater (South Wind, Model 940 Seriies) ..................... 5B18
13-7. Instrctions...................
Heater Operational Instructions 5B18
13-8. Description and Principle of Operation .............. 5B19
13-9. Safety Valve ... ........................ 5B21
13-10. Overheat Switch (Models940-D and 940-DA) ........... 5B22
13-11. Lockout Overheat Switchi (Model 940-K) .............. 5B22
13-12. Thermal Fuse (Models94S-D, 940-DA, 940-DB a 9490-K) . . . 5B22
13-13. Cycling Switch (Models9940-DBand 940-K) ......... ... 5B23
13-14. Systems · . . . . . . . ... . . . . ........................ 5B23
13-15. Fuel System ...... ........................ 5B23
13-16. Fuel Control Valve . . ........................ 5B23
13-17. CombustionAir System ........................ 5B24
13-18. VentilatingAir System ........................ ...5C2
13-19. Electrical System . . . ........................ ...5C2
13-20. Flame Detector Switch ........................ ...5C2
13-21. Igniter .......... ........................ ...5C2
13-22. Cycle of Operation . . ........................ ...5C3
13-23. Running Cycle ..... ........................ 5C3
13-24. PurgingCycle ...... ........................ ...5C3
........................ ...5C4
13-26. Electrical System (Model 940-D and 940-DA Series) ....... 5C4
13-27. Electrical System (Model 940-DBand 940-K Series) ....... 5C5
13-28. Removalof Heater (PA-223-250and PA-23-235) .......... 5C8
13-29. Installation of Heater (P PA-23-250 and PA-23-235) ........ 5C9
13-30. Removalof Heater (PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to
27-2504 incl., and PA-23-250(six place), Serial
Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3049, 27-3051 to 27-3153 incl.) ..... 5C1
13-31. Installation of Heater (PA-23-250 (six place), SerialNos.
27-2000 to 27-2504 incl., and PA-23-250(six place), Serial
Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3049, 27-3051 to 27-3153 incl.) ..... 5C13
Reissued: 2/18/81
5B5
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
13-32. Service .............................. ......... 5C14

13-33. General .. . . ... ...... ....... ......... 5C14
13-34. Periodic Service ................... ......... 5C15
13-35. Adjusting Flame Detector Switch ......... ......... 5C15
13-36. Troubleshooting ................... ......... 5C15
13-37. External Causesof Trouble ................... ......... 5C16
13-38. Electric Check .................... ......... 5C16
13-39. Fuel Supply ..................... ......... 5C16
13-40. Combustion Air Supply ............... ......... .5C17
13-41. Ventilating Air Supply ........ . .... ......... 5C17
13-42. Check-OutProcedure for an InoperativeHeater ......... 5C18
13-43. Starting Circuit Check ................ ......... 5C18
13-44. Running Circuit Check ....... ......... 5C19
13-45. Starting Safety Devices ............... ......... 5C19
13-46. Fuel Control Components ............ ......... 5C19
13-47. Combustion Air Supply ............... ......... 5C20
13-48. Troubleshooting Chart .. . ..... .... ......... 5C20
13-49. Disassembly,Repair and Reassembly ............ ......... 5C24
13-50. Disassembly .......... ......... 5C24
13-51. VentilatingAir Blower ....... ......... 5C24
13-52. Fuel Control Valve ........ . ..... ......... 5D1
13-53. Flame Detector Switch ............... ......... 5D1
13-54. Lockout Overheat Switch .............. ......... 5D1
13-55. CyclingOverheat Switch .............. ......... 5D3
13-56. CombustionAir Blower .......... .... ......... 5D3
13-57. Standpipe and Preheater Resistor ......... ......... 5D3
13-58. Igniter......................... ......... 5D3
13-59. Combustion Air Motor ........ .... ......... 5D4
13-60. Heat Exchanger ................... ......... 5D4
13-61. Ventilating Air Blower - All Models ........ ......... 5D4
13-62. Inspection, Cleaningand Repair ................ ......... 5D5
13-63. Heat Exchanger .... . ........... ......... 5D5
13-64. Fuel Control Valve ........ ......... 5D6
13-65. Blower Assemblies ................. ......... 5D6
13-66. Ventilating Air Blower Motor Overhaul ...... ......... 5D6
13-67. Combustion Air Blower Motor Overhaul ..... ......... 5D8
13-68. Heater Housing .................... ......... 5D9
13-69. Flame Detector Switch ............... ......... 5D9
13-70. Overheat Switch and Cycling Switch ....... ......... 5D10
13-71. Lockout Overheat Switch .............. ......... 5D10
13-72. Thermal Fuse and Combustion Air Elbows .... ......... 5D10
13-73. Safety Valveand Filter ............... ......... 5D10
13-74. Wiring .... ........ ......... 5D11
13-75. Relay .. . . . . ............ ......... 5D11
13-76. Reassembly ...................... ......... 5D11
13-77. VentilatingAir Blower - All Models ........ ......... 5D11
13-78. Heater Assembly ................... ......... 5D11
Reissued:2/18/81
5B6
Aerofiche
Grid No.
13-79. Testing . ............................ . . . . . 5D13

13-80. General ................................. . 5D13
13-81. Test Set Up ............................... 5D14
13-82. Test Procedure ............................ 5D14
13-83. Fuel Control ValveLeak Test .................... 5D14
13-84. Fuel Control ValveFlow Test .................... 5D15
13-85. Lockout Overheat Switch ....................... 5D16
13-86. Overheat Switch Test (Models940-D and 940-DA only) ..... 5D16
13-87. Burn Test .................. ............ . 5D17
13-88. CyclingSwitch Test (Model 940-K) ................. 5D18
13-89. Janitrol Heater ................................... 5D19
13-90. Troubleshooting ................... ......... 5D19
13-91. Heater Operation (PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos.
27-3050,27-3154to 27-7554040). ................ 5D19
13-92. Descriptionof Heater and BasicComponents . ........ ... .... . 5E3
13-93. Spark-SprayIgnition ...................... . SE3
13-94. Fuel Regulator and Shutoff Valve .................. 5E4
13-95. Duct Switch ......................... . 5E4
13-96. Combustion Air Blower ................... 5E5
13-97. VentilatingAir Blower .. ................... .. 5E5
13-98. OperatingControls ....................... . 5E5
13-99. OperatingProcedure .5.................. 5E5
13-100. Inspection of Heater and Heater Components ................. 5E6
13-101. 50-HourInspection .......... ................ 5E6
13-102. 100-HourInspection .................... ............ 5E7
13-103. Maintenance Service ............................... . 5E7
13-104. Removalof Janitrol Heater ..................... . 5E7
13-105. Installation of Janitrol Heater .................... 5E8
13-106. Heater Electrical System Checks ......................... 5E9
13-107. Electrical Continuity Check ..................... 5E9
13-108. Vent BlowerPower Circuit Check .................. 5E10
13-109. Heater Power Circuit Check ..................... 5E11
13-110. Maintenanceand Repairs ............................. 5E12
13-111. CombustionAir Blower ........................ 5E12
13-112. Spark Plug ............. . 5E 13
13-113. VibratorAssembly ........................... E 15
13-114. Ignition Assembly ............ ............. 5E16
13-115. CyclingSwitch and Limit (Overheat) Switch ........... . 5E17
13-116. Combustion Air Pressure Switch ................... 5E19
13-117. Fuel Regulator and Shutoff Valve .................. 5E20
13-118. Duct Switch .............................. 5E20
13-119. OverhaulInstructions ............... ......... 5E21
13-120. Disassembly .............. ............... . 5E21
13-121. Disassemblyof Combustion Air Blower Assembly ......... 5E23
13-122. Cleaning ........... .................... . .. 5E23
13-123. Cleaningand Inspecting the Combustion Tube Assembly ..... 5E24
13-124. Inspection of RemainingComponents .............. . 5F1
13-125. Testing .................................................. .. 5F3
Revised: 4/26/83
5B7
Aerofiche
Paragraph Grid No.
13-126. Repair of Combustion Tube Assembly ...... . . . . . . . . 5F6

13-127. Reassembly ...................... . . . . . . . . 5F6
13-128. Reassemblyof Combustion Air Blower Assembly . . . . . . . . 5FII
13-129. Test Procedure .................... . . . .. . . . . . . . . 5FII
13-130. General Information........... . . . .. . . . . . . . . 5F11
13-131. Equipment Required .......... . . . .. . . . . . . . . 5F13
13-132. Operational Test ............. . . . .. . . . . . . . . 5F14
13-133. Replacement of Fuel Filter Element ...... . . . .. 5F16
13-134. Removal of Heater Fuel Valve, SerialNos. 27-1 to 27-74053 I incl...... 5F16
13-135. Inspection of Heater Fuel Valve, Serial Nos. 27-1 to

27-7405431 incl. ....................... ....... 5F16
13-136. Installation of Heater Fuel Valve, SerialNos. 27-1 to
27-7405431 incl. ....................... ....... 5F17
13-137. Janitrol Heater ............................ ....... 5F18
13-138. Troubleshooting ..................... ....... 5F18
13-139. Heater Operation .................... ....... 5F18
13-140. Description of Heater and BasicComponents .......... ....... 5G2
13-141. Spark-SprayIgnition .................. ....... 5G2
13-142. Fuel Regulator and Shutoff Valve ........... ....... 5G3
13-143. Duct Switch ....................... ....... 5G3
13-144. Combustion Air Blower ................. ....... 5G3
13-145. VentilatingAir Blower ................. ....... 5G3
13-146. Operating Controls ............ ....... 5G4
13-147. Operating Procedure ................... ....... 5G4
13-148. Inspection of Heater and Heater Components .......... ....... 5G4
13-149. Preflight and/or Daily Inspection ........... ....... 5G4
13-150. 100 Hour Inspection .. ............... ....... 5G5
13-151. Maintenance Service ........................ ....... 5G6
13-152. Removal of Janitrol Heater ............... ....... 5G6
13-153. Installation of Janitrol Heater ...... ....... 5G7
13-154. Heater Electrical System Checks .................. ....... 5G8
13-155. Electrical Continuity Check ....... ....... 5G8
13-156. Vent Blower Power Circuit Check .......... ..... 5G9
13-157. Heater Power Circuit Check ............. ....... 5G9
13-158. Maintenanceand Repairs ...................... .... 5G10
13-159. Combustion Air Blower ................. ..... 5G10
13-160. Spark Plug ........................ ..... 5G11
13-161. Vibrator Assembly .................... ..... 5G15
13-162. Ignition Assembly .................... .. ·5G16
13-163. Cycling Switch and Limit (Overheat) Switch ..... ..... 5G17
13-164. Combustion Air PressureSwitch ............ ..... 5G18
13-165. Fuel Regulator and Shutoff Valve ........... ....... 5G18
13-166. Duct Switch ....................... ....... 5G19
Revised: 4/26 /83

5B8
Aerofiche
Grid No.
13-167. OverhaulInstructions ............................... 5G19
13-168. Disassembly .............................. 5G19
13-169. Disassemblyof Combustion Air Blower Assembly ......... 5G21
13-170. Cleaning................................. 5G21
13-171. Cleaningand Inspecting the Combustion Tube Assembly ..... 5G22
13-172. Inspection of RemainingComponents ....... 5G23
13-173. Testing ................................. 5G24
13-174. Repair of Combustion Tube Assembly ............... 5H3
13-175. Reassembly ............................... 5H3
13-176. Reassemblyof Combustion Air Blower Assembly ......... 5H5
13-177. Test Procedure ................................... 5H10
13-178. General Information .......................... 5H10
13-179. Equipment Required ......................... 5H10
13-180. Operational Test ............................ 5H11
INTENTIONALLYLEFTBLANK
Revised: 4/26/83
5B9
SECTION XIII
HEATING AND VENTILATING SYSTEM
13-1. INTRODUCTION. This section contains instructions for the operation,

maintenance and overhaul of the different heating and ventilating systems found
in the PA-23 Series airplanes. In addition, instructions for the inspection and
servicing of the components that contribute to the operation of the heating and
ventilating system may be found in this section. Inspection time intervals for
these systems may be found in Section III of this manual.
13-2. DESCRIPTION. The flowof air for heating anddefrosting is taken through
an inlet in the airplane nose section and directed to a South Wind or Janitrol heat-
er located in the left side of the nose section. From the heater, air for defrost-
ing is directed through outlets located on the instrument panel cover, while air
for cabin heat is delivered through outlets on the forward cabin bulkhead and grills
located in the floor. Fresh air is also taken through the same inlet in the nose
and delivered to the forward cabin area through an outlet on the forward bulkhead
of the cabin. These functions are controlled by a heater switch on the right side
of the instrument panel and push-pull knobs, on the cabin air control panel, lo-
cated at the bottom of the control pedestal.
An additional scoop mounted on top of the airplane or in the dorsal fin draws
fresh air into the cabinthrough individualvents over each seat. Each vent is ad-
justable for the desired air flow. Located in the aft section of the cabin interior
is an exhaust vent to improve the circulation of air in the cabin interior.
A pictorial description of these systems may be found in Figures 13-1 thru
13-5 with a detailed description and operation of the heaters found in paragraphs
13-8 and 13-92.

5B10
5B10 Reissued:2' 18/81
CABIN HEATER AIR
CABIN EXHAUST AIR
1. CABLE - COLD AIR INLET CONTROL, FRONT SEAT

2. DUCT - FRESH AIR, FRONT SEAT
3. DUCT - HEATER SYSTEM AIR, FRONT SEAT
4. INLET - HEATER SYSTEM AIR, FRONT SEAT
5. CONTROL VALVE - HEATER FUEL
6. LI NE - HEATER FUEL
7. CONTROL VALVE * DEFROSTER
8. INLET - NEATER SYSTEM AIR, DEFROSTER
9. VENTS - FRESH AIR, FRONT SEAT
10. VENT - FRESH AIR, RIGHT REAR
11. VENT- FRESH AIR, LEFT REAR
12. OUTLET - AIR EXHAUST, CABIN
13. BOX - AIR EXHAUST, CABIN
14. SCOOP - FRESH AIR, CABIN
15. I NLET HEATER SYSTEM AIR, REAR CABIN
16. CONTROL VALVE - HEATER SYSTEM, REAR SEATS
17. INLET - HEATER SYSTEM AIR, CENTER CABIN
18. SHUT-OFF VALVE -=HEATER FUEL
19. INLET - FRESH AIR, FRONT SEAT
20. DUCT - HEATER SYSTEM AIR, REAR SEATS
21. DUCT - HEATER SYSTEM AIR,
22. DUCT - NEATER SYSTEM AIR, OVERBOARD DUMP
23. VENT LINE - HEATER FUEL
24. TUBE - HEATER EXHAUST
25. CONTROL VALVE - "HI-LO", HEATER FUEL
26. TUBE - COMBUSTION AIR INTAKE
27. HEATER
28. SCOOP, FRESH AIR, FRONT SEAT
29. SCOOP - OUTSIDE AIR TO HEATER SYSTEM
30. CONTROL - FRESH AIR, FRONT SEAT
31. CONTROL - HEATER SYSTEM AIR, DEFROSTER
32. CONTROL - NEATER SYSTEM AIR, REAR SEATS
33. CONTROL - HEATER SYSTEM AIR, FRONT SEATS
34. VENT - FRESH AIR, FIFTH SEAT
Figure 13-1. Heating and Ventilating System

PA-23-235 and PA-23-250 Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-504 incl.
Reissued: 2/18/81
5Bll
1. HEATER
2. FRESH AIR INLET
3. FRESH AIR OUTLET
4. HEATER AIR INLET
5. HEATER AIR OUTLET
6. DEFROSTER OUTLET
7. CABIN VENT CONTROL CABIN FRESH AIR
8. DEFROSTER CONTROL
9. REAR SEAT HEAT CONTROL CABIN HEATER AIR
10. FRONT SEAT HEAT CONTROL
II. CABIN EXHAUST OUTLET AIR
CABIN EXHAUST
12. HEATER FUEL VALVE

PA-23-250 (six place) Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.
Reissued: 2/18/81
5B12
2526m
1. HEATER
2. FRESH AIR INLET
3. FRESH AIR OUTLET
4. HEATER AIR INLET
6. DEFROSTER OUTLET
7. CABIN VENT CONTROL
8. DEFROSTER CONTROL CABIN FRESH AIR
9. REAR SEAT HEAT CONTROL
10. FRONT SEAT HEAT CONTROL CABIN HEATER AIR
11. CABIN EXHAUST OUTLET
12. HEATER FUEL VALVE CABIN EXHAUST AIR
Figure 13-3. Heating and Ventilating System - PA-23-250(six place)

Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3049, 27-3051 to 27-3153 incl.
Reissued: 2/18/81
5B13
2526
1. HEATER
2. FRESH AIR INLET
3. FRESH AIR OUTLET
4. HEATER AIR INLET
6. DEFROSTER OUTLET
9. THERMOSTAT CONTROL CABIN FRESH AIR
10. REAR SEAT HEAT CONTROL
11. FRONT SEAT HEAT CONTROL CABIN HEATER AIR
13. CABIN EXHAUST OUTLET CABIN EXHAUST AIR
Figure 13-4. Heating and Ventilating system - PA-23-250 (six place)

Serial Nos. 27-3050, 27-3154 to 27-3836, 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl.
Reissued: 2/18/81
5B14
2527
1. HEATER
2. FRESH AIR INLET
3. FRESH AIR OUTLET
4. HEATER AIR INLET
6. DEFROSTER OUTLET
9. CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL CABIN FRESH AIR
10. REAR SEAT HEAT
11. FRONT SEAT HEAT CABIN HEATER AIR
13. CABIN EXHAUST AIR CABIN EXHAUST AIR

PA-23-250(six place) SerialNos. 27-3837, 27-3944 to 27-4425
incl. and 27-4427 to 274573 incl.
5B15
2526
1. HEATER
2. FRESH AIR INLET
3. FRESH AIR OUTLET
4. HEATER AIR INLET
6. DEFROSTER OUTLET
9. CABIN TEMPERATURE CONTROL CABIN FRESH AIR
10. REAR SEAT HEAT
11. FRONT SEAT HEAT CABIN HEATER AIR
12. HEATER FUEL VALVE (NOT INSTALLED ON SERIAL NOS. 27-7405432 AND UP)
13. CABIN EXHAUST AIR CABIN EXHAUST AIR

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-4426 and 27-4574 and up
Reissued: 2/18/81
5B16
5B17
13-3. HEATER SAFETY LIMIT SWITCH. Located inthe South Wind andJanitrol
heaters is a heat limit switch, which acts as a safety device to render the heater
system inoperative if a malfunction should occur causing excessively high tem-
peratures. This control is located in the downstream end of the vent jacket, with
the reset button on the heater shroud. It is reached only through the access panel
in the left side of the nose section to insure that the malfunction causing the over-
heat condition is corrected prior to future heater operation.
13-4. INSPECTION OF HEATER AND HEATER COMPONENTS.

a. Inspect all fuel lines and fittings for fuel stains indicating leakage. Replace
lines or tighten fittings as necessary.
b. Check heater for cracks and loose bolts, screws and wiring.
c. Inspect all electrical connections for corrosion; if corrosion is evident,
clean affected components and wipe clean with a lightly oiled cloth.
13-5. TROUBLESHOOTING. Troubles peculiar to the heating and ventilating

systems are found throughout this section in table form. Heaters are grouped
according to heater manufacturer. Further assistance to the electrical function
of the heaters may be found in the Electrical System Schematics found in Section
XI.
13-6. HEATER (South Wind, Model 940 Series). PA-23-250; PA-23-235;PA-23-250 (six
place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.; and PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos. 27-2505
to 27-3049, 27-3051 to 27-3153 incl.
13-7. HEATER OPERATIONAL INSTRUCTIONS. The SouthWindheater installed

in the Aztec is a 27, 500 B. T.U. 12 or 24-volt unit. The 12-volt heaters are
Models 940-D12, 940-DA12, 940-DB12 and 940-K12 and the 24-volt units are
Models 940-D24, 940-DA24 and 940-DB24. The heater is controlled by a switch
located on the right side of the instrument panel labeled OFF, PRIME, LOW and
HIGH. To operate the heater, first turn on the fuel control valve located on the
fuel selector panel. Move the switch to HIGH or LOW heat. If the heater does
not start promptly, return the heater switch to PRIME position for 15 seconds to
prime the heater; then upon moving the switch to HIGH heat, the heater should
start and continue to operate after one to one and a half minutes of warm-up.
When operating the heater for any length of time on the ground, it is recommended
to operate the heater in LOW heat position.

5B18 5B18 Reissued: 2/18/81
The heater uses gasoline from either left fuel cell when the fuel crossfeed
is off, and from all cells when the crossfeed is on.
The push-pull knobs at the bottom of the control pedestal control air flow
and temperature. The left control regulates air flowing to the front seat through
the heater system and the second knob from the left controls air flowing to the
rear seat, the second knob from the right is the defroster control and the right
knob controls the supply of cool air through the vent on the forward bulkhead.
In airplanes equipped with a Model 940-K12 heater, a fifth knob is installed
and this is located in the center of the air control panel between the other knobs.
The knob is connected to an adjustable thermostat which makes it possible to se-
lect a desired temperature of heated air.
After the heater is turned to the OFF position, combustion in the heater
stops, but the combustion fan and the circulating air fan continues to operate for
about two minutes, while the heater cools and purges itself of hot air and fumes.
To obtain best service life from the heater components, it is recommended that
the heater switch be turned off about two minutes before turning off the master
switch.
During ground operation or when the landing gear is extended, the ventila-
ting fan motor operates and provides hot air flow through the heater system. In
flight, when the gear is retracted, a micro switch on the nose gear cuts off the
heater fan, and heater air is supplied by ram pressure through the nose inlet be-
side the landing light. This arrangement assures an adequate flow of air through
the heater at all times. There is a dump valve arrangement in the heater bonnet
to exhaust excessive heat thereby making it possible to operate the heater with
all controls in the closed position.
For the overhaul and complete disassembly of the South Wind heater and its
components, refer to paragraph 13-49 of this manual. A wiring diagram of the
heater Electrical System Installation will be found in Section XI of this manual.
13-8. DESCRIPTION AND PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION. Principles of operation

are basically the same for all models of the 940 Series heaters since the differ-
ences between heaters are confined to safety devices which do not function during
normal burning of the heater. Operation of the safety devices follows this de-
scription.
The heater produces heat by burning a mixture of gasoline and air in a seal-
ed, all-welded, stainless steel heat exchanger. (Refer to Figure 13-7.) Air for
combustion is obtained from a blower on the side of the heater housing and is in-
troduced into the heat exchanger through two metal elbows. Gasoline is obtained
from the airplane's fuel system and is supplied to the heater through a safety
valve and filter which is mounted in the nose section near the heater.

5B19 5B19 Reissued: 2/18/81
THERMAL FUSE
IGNI TER
VENTILATING EXHAUST
AIR BLOWER n
FRESH AIR COMBUSTION AIR FUEL COMBUSTION GASES
Figure 13-7. Flow System (South Wind Heater)

Reissued: 2/18/81
5B20
Fuel is metered at the heater by

FUEL OUTLET the fuel control valve, (Refer to Figure
13-9.) whichisenclosedin ametal case
on top of the heater. The metal case is
equipped with fittings for a drain tube
at the bottom, and a vent tube at the top.
These tubes prevent the possibility of a
fire hazard, or release of fumes, in the
event that a fuel leak should develop in
the valve or fuel line connection.
After being metered by the fuel
FUELINLET controlvalve, the fuel passes through a
short steel tube and enters a vertical
standpipe. (Refer to Figure 13-7.) The
fuel drips down the standpipe and sat-
Figure 13-8. Fuel Safety Valve urates the stainless steel wick in the
(Cutaway View) combustion chamber. The standpipe is
surrounded by an electric heating ele-
ment which is energized during the startingperiod and serves to preheat the fuel,
thus insuring quick starts even at the lowest temperatures.
The fuel is ignited within the heat exchanger by a glow-plug igniter, and the
resulting hot gases pass through the wraps of the heat exchanger and out the ex-
haust tube.
After combustion starts, the igniter and fuel preheater are turned off bythe
flame detector switch (Refer to Figure 13-10or 13-11.) which also turns on the
ventilating air blower at this time. Since the standpipe is now heated by combus-
tion in the heat exchanger, preheating is no longer required and the preheater is
also turned off.
13-9. SAFETY VALVE. (Refer to Figure 13-8.) The safety valve which is sup-
plied with all models of the 940 heater consists of a shutoff solenoid and a casting
which houses a large diaphragm and spring. The safety valve provides the initial
flow of fuel for ignition. Additional fuel to sustain combustion is permitted to flow
only after the shutoff solenoid of the safety valve is energized during a starting
cycle. Fuel flows from the fuel source through the filter to the inlet side of the
safety diaphragm. Pressure of fuel against the diaphragm forces gasoline, con-
tained in the opposite side of the chamber through the outlet port into the heater.
When the flame detector switch transfers after combustion starts, the shut-
off solenoid is energized and opens a by-pass through which fuel then flows to the
heater. Gasoline willcontinue to flow through this system until the heater is turn-
ed off. The chamber behind the diaphragm will refill during heater operation as

Reissued: 2/18/81
5B21
the spring returns the diaphragm to its normal position. This prepares the safety
valve for another start. The safety valve may be manually recharged at any time
by turning the heater switch to FAN or PRIME position for about 30 seconds.
The safety valve also acts as a second safety fuel shutoff valve, since it is
energized through the heater relay. In the event of an overheat condition, which
causes the thermal fuse or lockout overheat switch to open, the relay will be de-
energized and the safety valve solenoid will close at the same time the heater fuel
control valve shutoff solenoid closes. This double shutoff is required by Federal
Regulations on airplane heater installations.
13-10. OVERHEAT SWITCH (Models 940-Dand 940-DA). Two types ofoverheat

switches are used in the 940 Series heaters. The 940-D Series heaters are equip-
ped with a bimetal blade cycling-type switch which opens at a temperature of 250°
F and shuts off fuel flow byde-energizing the fuel control valve shutoff solenoid.
This switch is designed to protect the heater and airplane by limiting the heater
outlet temperature. The cycling-type switch shuts off fuel only; when the heater
cools, the switch will close and permit the heater to restart.
13-11. LOCKOUT OVERHEAT SWITCH (Model 940-K). This modelis equipped

with a snap-action type overheat switch with a manual reset button. This switch
is connected in series with the thermal fuse so that functioning of either device
will cause a complete shutdown of the heater. In this event, the fuel control valve
solenoid and the safety valve solenoid will both close at the same time. Both of
these devices also shut off the igniter.
13-12. THERMAL FUSE (Models 940-D, 940-DA, 940-DB and 940-K). The ther-
mal fuse used on the models listed above consists of a special combustion air in-
let elbow which contains a fusible metal link with electric terminals. The fusible
link is connected in series with the hot lead from the heater switch.
An additional requirement of Federal Regulations is that airplane heaters
be equippedwith a device which will prevent operation at any time that combustion
air flow is insufficient for safe operation. When applied to the 940 Series heaters,
this means that the heater must shut down if combustion air flow is reversed,
since the heater will operate safely under any other combustion air flow condition.
The special purposes of the thermal fuse is to shut off the heater if the di-
rection of combustion air flow should be reversed. In such a condition, combus-
tion air would enter through the heater exhaust and flow out through the combustion
air inlet. It has been demonstrated that this flow can sustain combustion at a
temperature below the overheat switch setting. For this reason, the thermal

5B22 5B22 Reissued: 2/18/81
fuse has been provided at the combustion air inlet. In the event of reverse burn-
ing, the hot gases will quickly melt the fusible link and the heater will be com-
pletely shut down. The heater cannot be restarted until the fusible link has been
replaced after such an occurrence.
NOTE
The reverse burning described above can only occur

under unusual conditions caused by improper installa-
tion, or by multiple failure of heater components. The
thermal fuse has no effect on the heater during normal
operation.
13-13. CYCLING SWITCH (Models 940-DB and 940-K). The cyclingtemperature

limit switch, used on the models listed above, is similar to the cycling overheat
switch on the other models but is set at a lower temperature. Its purpose is to
prevent unnecessary operation of the lockout overheat switch by limiting heater
outlet temperature.
13-14. SYSTEMS. The Model 940 Series heater consists of four systems: The
Fuel System, The Combustion Air System, The Ventilating Air System, and The
Electrical System. These systems are more fully described below.
13-15. FUEL SYSTEM. The fuel system consists of the safety valve (which was
described under Safety Features), the heater fuelcontrolvalve and the standpipe.
Most heaters are designed to operate with a fuel pressure between 1 and 15 psi.
Less than one pound may not be sufficient to operate the safety valve diaphragm,
and more than 15 pounds may damage the pressure regulator in the heater fuel
control valve. The 940-DB and 940-K heaters are specially designed to operate
at a fuel pressure of 20 to 35 psi and must be used onlywithinthis pressure range.
13-16. FUEL CONTROL VALVE. (Refer to Figure 13-9. ) Thefuelcontrolvalve

provides the proper amount of fuel for high or low heat operation, depending upon
position of the thermostat contacts. The complete valve consists of two solenoid
valves and a pressure regulator which maintains constant fuel pressure for heater
operation, regardless of fluctuations of pressure in the fuel supply. The flow of
fuel is regulated by an orifice plate which contains holes of the proper size to
meter fuel flow for high and low heat.

5B23 5B23 Reissued:2 18 81
Figure 13-9. Fuel Control Valve(Cutaway View)
When the shutoff solenoid is closed or de-energized, no fuel can enter the
standpipe, and the heater is completely shut off. When the shutoff solenoid is
energized, fuel flows through the low heat metering orifice and the heater burns
on low heat. When both the restriction and shutoff solenoids are energized, fuel
flows through both the low heat orifice and the restriction orifice, thereby pro-
viding sufficient fuel for high heat operation. After leaving the fuel controlvalve,,
the fuel drips down the standpipe where it saturates the stainless steel wick ex-
tending into the combustion chamber. (Refer to Figure 13-7.)
13-17. COMBUSTIONAIR SYSTEM. The combustionair blower blows air through

the metal elbows into the heat exchanger. Inside the heat exchanger the air passes
through another duct (Refer to Figure 13-7. ) and is blown into the burner cone,
where it mixes with the gasoline vapor and the mixture is ignited by the igniter.
The burning gases then swirl around the heat exchanger and exhaust through the
outlet tube.

5B24 5B24 Reissued: 2/18/81
2523
HEATERASSY.
I BLOWER
MOTOR
SAFETY
OPTIONALSWITCH FOR DETECTOR VALVE HEATER
SWITCH
USEIF BLOWERIS D SWITCH
-EMERGIZED FLIGHT SWITCH
TOBE CONNECTED IN t
SERIES
WITHBLOWER- -
FURNISHED
CUSTOMER
AD INSTALLED
RESISTOR
TO BATTERY
CIRCUITBREAKER
ORFUSE
FUSE
THERMAL
TERMINAL
-- -
Figure 13-10. Wiring, Models 940-D and 940-DA
2523
HEATER
ASSY.
YEMTILATING
LOWERMOTOR
OPTIONALSWITCH FOR VALVE HEATERSWITCH

USEIF BLOWERIS DE-
ERGIZEDINFLIGHT
TOBE CONNECTED IN
SERIESWITHBLOWER
CUSTOMER FURNISHED
ANDINSTALLED.
' TOFUEL PUMP
RESISTOR
CAPACITOR
THERMAL FUSE OF TERM STRIP

LOCKOUT TERMINAL STRIP
OVERHEAT STRIP HI-LOSWITCH
ORTHERMOSTAT
TERM • RELAY(NC)
SWITCH
NOTE:FLAMEDETECTOR SHOWN
INCOLD "START"POSITION
Figure 13-11. Wiring, Models 940-DB and 940-K

5C1 Reissued:2/18/81
13-18. VENTILATING AIR SYSTEM. The ventilating air blower is mounted on

the end of the heater by means of bayonet slots. The blower is a mixed-flow type
which discharges axially, due to the design of the housing. It picks up clean air
from outside the heater housing and blows it through the slots of the heat exchanger
and around the sides, where it absorbs heat which is transmitted through the walls
of the heat exchanger by the hot products of combustion. The heated air is then
conducted to the space which is being heated.
13-19. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM. The heater electrical system consists of the

combustion and ventilating air blower motors, the flame detector switch, the fuel
valve solenoids, the fuel preheater, and the electric safety devices.
13-20. FLAME DETECTOR SWITCH. The purpose of the flame detector switch
is to shut off the igniter and fuel preheater as soon as combustion has been es-
tablished within the heater, and to provide a "purge" cycle after the heater is shut
off. This switch consists of a hollow probe upon which is mounted a bracket and
micro switch mechanism. The hollow probe contains a quartz rod which has a
low rate of expansion when heated. (Refer to Figure 13-14.) The endof the quartz
rod actuates the plunger of the micro switch. A leaf spring between the rod and
plunger is provided to maintain a pressure through the rod against the end of the
tube.
When installed on the heater, the hollow probe extends into the interior of
the heat exchanger where it is subject to the heat of combustion. After combus-
tion starts, the heating effect of the flame causes the metal tube to expand. Since
the quartz rod does not expand, the lengthening tube relieves the pressure on the
micro switch plunger, and the switch contacts transfer. The switch will then re-
main in this position as long as the tube remains hot, but will automatically re-
turn to the starting position when the heat exchanger cools. This purge cycle,
after the heater switch is shut off, holds the blowers on until the residual fuel in
the burner has been consumed, and the heater is cooled off.
13-21. IGNITER. The igniter is anelectric "glow plug" type of heating element
which glows red hot when energized. (Refer to Figure 13-7.) To prolong the life
of the igniter, it is shut off by the flame detector switch as soon as combustion
starts.

13-22. CYCLE OF OPERATION. When the heater switch is turned on, several
things occur simultaneously. (Refer to Figure 13-10 or 13-11 according to heater
model.)
a. The shutoff solenoid is energized through terminal No. 4 of the terminal
strip, the overheat switch, and through the thermal fuse on models so equipped.
This permits fuel to drip into the standpipe and saturate the stainless steel wick.
b. The igniter is energized through the flame detector switch which obtains
its energy from terminal No. 4 of the terminal strip (or terminal No. 4A of the
relay).
c. The fuel preheater heats up, since it is connected in series in the igniter
circuit.
d. The combustion air motor is energized through the center connection of the
flame detector switch and the blower starts.
With heated fuel dripping down the standpipe, the igniter glowing red hot,
and the combustion air blower in operation, all requirements for combustion are
present and burning soon starts in the heater. The heat of combustion causes the
tube of the flame detector switch assembly to expand and permits the switch con-
tacts to transfer, as previously described.
13-23. RUNNINGCYCLE. When the flame detector switch transfers, the fol-
lowing events take place:
a. The ventilating air blower motor is energized through terminal No. 2 of the
terminal strip (or 2A of the relay) and the flame detector switch and the blower
start. The combustion air blower continues to run, since it obtains its energy,
from the center terminal of the flame detector switch. Electric energy for both
blowers is now being supplied from the No. 3 terminal which is connected directly
to the battery, and the blowers will continue to run until the flame detector switch
cools and returns to its starting position.
b. The igniter and fuel preheater are shut off when the flame detector switch
transfers. Since combustion is self-sustaining, they are no longer required.
The heater is now in full operation and will continue to burn as long as fuel,
air, and electric current are supplied. The temperature of the air may be reg-
ulated by opening and closing the restriction solenoid of the fuel control valve by
means of a thermostat or HI-LO switch mounted on the right side of the instru-
ment panel.
13-24. PURGINGCYCLE. When the heater switch is turned OFF, the following
sequence of events takes place:
a. The shutoff solenoid of the fuel control valve is de-energized, and fuel flow
stops immediately. Burning soon stops due to lack of fuel.

b. The combustion air and ventilating air blowers continue to run since the
flame detector switch is still hot and is in its running position. The flow of ven-
tilating and combustion air cools the heat exchanger and purges it of all unburned
gas fumes which might remain after burning stops.
c. When the heat exchanger cools, the tube of the flame detector switch con-
tracts and forces the quartz rod up against the micro switch plunger. The switch
then transfers to its cold position and the blowers stop. The fuel safety valve
solenoid is also de-energized and will not open again until the flame detector
switch becomes heated on another starting cycle.
13-25. OVERHEAT SWITCH. The heater is equippedwitha cycling type overheat

switch to limit duct temperature to a safe maximum level. This switch is con-
nected in series between terminal No. 4 of the terminal strip and the shutoff so-
lenoid of the fuel control valve. When the ventilating air stream exceeds a tem-
perature of approximately 250 ° F., the bimetal blade of the overheat switch will
open the switch contacts and break the solenoid circuit, shutting off fuel to the
heater. Burning then stops, but the blowers continue to run. As soon as the heat-
er cools, the overheat switch contacts will close and energize the fuel shutoff
solenoid. At this point, fuel flow is re-established in the heater, but the igniter
is off and ignition will not occur until the flame detector switch cools and trans-
fers to its starting position. The igniter is then energized and combustion again
starts.
If the heater switch remains on, and the cause of overheating is not cor-
rected, this process which is known as "re-cycling", will continue indefinitely.
Air temperature, however, will not exceed the temperature of the overheat switch
setting.
13-26. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (Model 940-Dand940-DASeries). The electrical

system of the Model 940-D and 940-DA heaters has all the components provided
for in the preceding paragraphs, plus a thermal fuse in the combustion air inlet
elbow and the safety valve relay. (Refer to Figure 13-10.)
The starting cycle for these heaters has a safety valve solenoid that is en-
ergized through the normally open terminal No. 8 of the relay. The relay is en-
ergized through the circuit from the heater switch, terminal No. 4, and the ther-
mal fuse. The relay is energized at the moment the heater switch is turned on
and completes the circuit from terminal No. 2A to terminal No. 8, but the safety
valve solenoid remains closed because of the flame detector switch, in its cold
position, does not energize terminal No. 2A of the relay.
After ignition occurs and the flame detector switch transfers, the safety
valve solenoid is energized and burning proceeds. The Model 940-D Series will

5C4
5C4 Reissued: 2/18 81
shut off and re-cycle if an overheat condition, due to restriction of ventilating

air, should occur since this condition will not normally affect the thermal fuse.
If an unsafe operating condition should occur, due to a lack of combustion
air through the heater while it is burning, the hot gases at the combustion air in-
let will quickly melt the fusible link of the thermal fuse assembly. This breaks
the circuit from the heater switch through terminal No. 4 of the terminal strip,
and is equivalent to turning off the heater switch. The heater will then shut down
in the normal manner described in the preceding paragraphs, and cannot be re-
started until the thermal fuse has been replaced, since the starting circuit will
remain open regardless of heater switch position. In the event of such a shut
down, the relay will be de-energized at the moment the overheat condition oc-
curs, and the safety valve and fuel solenoid shutoff valve will both close at the
same time without regard to flame detector switch position. The combustion air
blower and ventilating air blower will continue to run until the flame detector
switch cools and transfers.
13-27. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (Model 940-DB and 940-K Series). The Models
listed above have electrical systems similar to the system of the Model 940-D,
except that an additional safety device, the lockout overheat switch, is connected
in series with the thermal fuse in the starting circuit, and a cycling temperature
limit switch is connected into the restriction solenoid circuit. (Refer to Figure
13-11.) The purpose of the lockout overheat switch is to prevent re-cycling the
heater after an overheat condition, and the purpose of the cycling limit switch is
to prevent needless operation of the lockout overheat switch.
These heaters start in the same manner described for the 940-D Series
heaters. Heater outlet temperature will then be controlled by action of the ther-
mostat which opens and closes the restriction solenoid in the normal manner. If
the thermostat should fail in the closed position, or should fail to sense duct tem-
perature for any reason, the cycling switch will automatically limit heat output,
since it is connected into the thermostat circuit, and serves the same purpose.
This feature prevents heater shut down by the lockout overheat switch and con-
sequent loss of heat, due to a defective thermostat or duct system.
The lockout overheat switch protects the heater and the airplane from an
overheat condition caused by excessive fuel flow, or by a combinedfailure of ven-
tilating air and the cycling limit switch. The lockout overheat switch is set at a
higher temperature than the cycling limit switch, and like the thermal fuse, will
operate only under extreme conditions. In the event of such an overheat condi-
tion, the heater will shut down the same as if the heater switch were turned off
and cannot be restarted until the overheat switch plunger has been reset.

5C5
TECHNICAL DATA
Electrical Requirements
940-D12, 940-DA12, 940-DB12, 940-K12. ....... 14-volts DC
940-C24, 940-D24 ....... .. ...... .. . 28-volts DC
Current Consumption
940-D12, 940-DA12, 940-DB12, 940-K12
Starting ...... ......... 12-amp.
Running . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 7-amp.
940-D24, 940-DB24
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... 11.5-amp.
Running ...... . . . . . ..... 3. 5-amp.
Fuel Pressure
All Models except 940-DB and 940-K .......... 1 to 15 psi
Models 940-DB and 940-K.. 20 to 35 psi
Fuel Consumption
940-D
High Heat. . . . .. . . . . . . 0. 37 gph (0. 037 lb/min)
Low Heat. . . .. .. . . . . . . . 0. 12 gph (0. 012 lb/min)
940-DA
High Heat. . . . . . . . . .. . . . 0.
037 gph (0. 037 lb/min)
Low Heat . .. .. . . . . . . 0. 18 gph (0. 018 lb/min)
940-K
High Heat... .. . . . . . . . . . 0. 37 gph (0. 037 lb/min)
Low Heat . . . .. . . . . . . 0. 08 gph (0. 008 lb/min)
Heat Output
940-D
High Heat. . . ................ 27, 500 BTU/HR
Low Heat. . . ................ 10, 000 BTU/HR
940-DA, 940-DB
High Heat... ........ ... 27, 500 BTU/HR
Low Heat . . .. . . . .15,
. . .. . . . 000 BTU/HR

5C6 5C6 Reissued: 2/18/81
TECHNICAL DATA (cont. )
Heat Output (cont. )

940-K
High Heat.. . . . . ...
. . . . . . . .27, 500 BTU/HR
Low Heat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 500 BTU/HR
Overheat Switch Operating Temperature

940-D, 940-DA. ................ .. 250° F
940-K .. ............... . 140° to 160°F
940-DB .. ............... . 205 ° to 245°F
Cycling Switch Operating Temperature

940-DB, 940-K......... . . . . . . . . ..220°F
Dimensions
All Models ............. 16-7/8 in. long; 7-3/4 in. wide;
9-1/8 in. high
Weight: 20 lbs. (Approx. )
Diameter of Housing .. 6-3/16 in. O.D.
Combustion Air Inlet . .......... .... 1-1/2 in. O. D.
Heater Exhaust ..... ............ 1-1/2 in. O.D.
Exhaust Shroud Flange ............. 2-1/2 in. O. D.

Reissued:2/18/81
5C7
13-28. REMOVAL OF HEATER. (PA-23-250 and PA-23-235.) (Refer to Figure

13-12.)
a. Turn the heater control switches OFF.
b. Remove the access panel from the left side of the nose section.
c. Disconnect the four hoses from the rear of the heater air distributor box.
(Refer to Figure 13-1. )
d. Loosen, but do not remove, the four self-locking nuts securing the venti-
lating air blower assembly to the heater. Twist the blower clockwise and pull
it straight off.
e. Disconnect the black blower motor wire from the heater terminal strip.
The wire designation is No. 2.
f. Loosen the four screws at the side of the fuelcontrol valve housing and lift
off cover.
g. Disconnect electrical leads at rear of the heater terminal strip. Remove
harness clamp and starter lead clamp from flame detector switch guard.
h. Disconnect dump valve push-pull control cable.
i. Remove four cap screws located at the bottom left of the fuselage nose and
remove the ring from around the exhaust pipe.
j. Pull the heater fuel drain up and out of the grommet in the bottom of fuse-
lage.
k. Remove nut and lockwasher from the heater support bank clamp, releasing
clamp tension.
1. Remove cap screws from upper and lower tubular structure brackets which
support the heater. Reach into the front of the heater case and remove washer
and self-locking nut of each screw as they are freed.
m. With an assistant inside the fuselage, using a screw driver to prevent the
screws from turning, remove four self-locking nuts from the left front seat heater
system air inlet. Slide the inlet off the screws and push it away from the heater.
NOTE
The inlet is removed to permit heater removal without

the heater air box striking nearby components.
n. If only one mechanic is available, an alternate method for step "m", above,
is necessary. Remove the five cap screws from the periphery of the heater air
distributor box. Slide the box from the rear of the heater case. This procedure
eliminates the need to disconnect the hoses and dump box control cable as de-
scribed in steps "c" and "h".
o. Carefully remove the heater.

5C8
5C8
Reissued: 2/18/81
13-29. INSTALLATION OF HEATER. (PA-23-250 and PA-23-235. ) (Refer to

Figure 13-12.) Install the heater in reverse order of the removal instruction of
paragraph 13-28, with the qualifications which follow below.
a. Position heater between the two tubular structure brackets and secure it
with two cap screws, plain washers and self-locking nuts.
b. Install the ventilating air fan on the front of the heater case with a counter-
clockwise twist and secure it with four self-locking nuts.
c. Apply the heater support bank clamp loosely. Adjust the heater position so
that the heater distributor air box does not chafe against the tubular structure and
the defroster hose does not rubagainst the left front seat heater system air inlet.
Tighten the clamp.
d. Connect the wires to the aft side of the heater terminal strip as indicated.
HEATER TERMINAL BLOCKWIRING
Terminal No. Wire Designation
2 H2A
2 H2B
3 H3B
4 H4A
5 H5A
Ground (lowest terminal) H8A
HEATER TERMINAL BLOCK WIRING TEST
Terminal No. Switch Position at Which

Lamp Lights
2 PRIME
3 OFF, PRIME, LOW HEAT,
HIGH HEAT
4 LOW HEAT, HIGH HEAT
5 HIGH HEAT
*With fuel applied and burning, the lamps will light in the PRIME,
LOW HEAT, HIGH HEAT positions at Terminal No. 2.

5C9
2522
10
5- 11
1. HOSE, AIR INLET

2. VENTILATING AIR BLOWER
3. ELECTRICAL LEAD,
VENTILATING AIR BLOWER
4. FUEL LINE
5. FUEL CONTROL VALVE
6. FLAME DETECTOR SWITCH
7. FUEL VALVE VENT
8. HOSE, CABIN HEAT
9. HOSE, DEFROSTER
10. AIR DISTRIBUTION BOX
11. TERMINAL STRIP
12. HOSE, CABIN HEAT
13. EXHAUST TUBE
14. FUEL VALVE DRAIN
15. COMBUSTION AIR BLOWER
16. AIR INLET COMBUSTION
Figure 13-12. Heater Installation (PA-23-235 and PA-23-250)

Reissued: 2/18/81
5C10
e. Connect the black fan motor wire No. 2 to terminal No. 2 at the leading
side of the terminal strip.
f. When a new heater is installed (PA-23-250 only), it will be necessary to re -
move its name plate. Then move the name plate aft until its two leading attaching
holes coincide with the two rear mountingholes in the heater housing. Install two
of the original attaching screws inthe front of the name plate. Using the two holes
in the rear of the name plate as guides, drill two holes into the heater housing and
install the two remaining self-tappingattaching screws. It will also benecessary
to drill two holes in the heater housing to accommodate the screws from the upper
and lower tubular structure brackets.
13-30. REMOVALOF HEATER. (PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504
incl., and PA-23-250 (six place), SerialNos. 27-2505 to 27-3049, 27-3051 to 27-3153 incl.)
a. Turn the heater control switches OFF.
b. Remove the aft panel in the forward baggage compartment and the heater
forward access panel on the left side of the fuselage nose section.
c. From inside the forward baggage compartment remove the fresh air duct
from the ventilating fan assembly.
d. Disconnect the black wire to ventilating fan. Loosen, but do not remove,
the four self-locking nuts securing the ventilating fan assembly to the heater.
Twist the fan clockwise and pull straight off.
e. Loosen the four screws at the side of the fuel control valve housing and lift
off the cover. Disconnect the fuel line at the fuel control valve.
f. Disconnect all electrical leads at the rear of the heater terminal strip. Re-
move the harness clamp and the starter lead clamp from the flame detector switch
guard.
g. Remove the four cap screws located at bottom left of fuselage nose and re-
move ring from around exhaust pipe assembly.
h. Pull the heater fuel drain tube up and out of the grommet in bottom of fuse-
lage.
i. Disconnect the air duct to the heater combustion fan.
j. Remove the nut and lockwasher from heater support band clamp, releasing
clamp tension.
k. Remove the cap screw from the lower tubular structure bracket which sup-
ports front of heater assembly.
1. Remove the heater distributor assembly located at the aft end of the heater
by removing the four securing screws.
m. Carefully remove the heater assembly.
5Cll 5C11 Reissued: 2/18/81

PIPER AZTEC SERVICEMANUAL
2622
11
1. HOSE, AIR INLET

2. INTAKE, HEATER AIR
4. ELECTRICAL LEAD,
VENTILATING AIR BLOWER
5. FUEL LINE
6. FUEL CONTROL VALVE
7. FLAME DETECTOR SWITCH
8. FUEL VALVE VENT
9. HOSE, CABIN HEAT
10. HOSE, DEFROSTER
11. TERMINAL STRIP
12. HOSE, CABIN HEAT
14. HOSE, HOT AIR DUMP
15. EXHAUST TUBE
16. FUEL VALVE DRAIN
16. AIR INLET COMBUSTION
Figure 13-13. Heater Installation

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.; and PA-23-250 (six place).
Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3049, 27-3051 to 27-3153 incl.

13-31. INSTALLATION OF HEATER. (PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to

27-2504 incl., and PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3049, 27-3051 to
27-3153 incl.) (Refer to Figure 13-13.) Install the heater in reverse order of the removal
instructions of Paragraph 13-30 with the qualifications which follow below.
a. Position heater between the two tubular structure brackets and secure it
with two cap screws, plain washers and self-locking nuts.
b. Install the ventilating air fan on the front of the heater case with a counter-
clockwise twist and secure it with four self-locking nuts.
c. Apply the heater support bank clamp loosely. Adjust the heaterposition so
that the heater distributor air box does not chafe against the tubular structure and
the defroster hose does not rub against the left front seat heater system air inlet.
Tighten the clamp.
d. Connect the wires to the aft side of the heater terminal strip as indicated.
HEATER TERMINAL BLOCK WIRING
2 H2A
2 H2B
3 H3B
4 H4A
5 H5A
Ground (lowest terminal) H8A
HEATER TERMINAL BLOCK WIRING TEST
Terminal No. Switch Position at Which

Lamp Lights
2 PRIME
3 OFF, PRIME, LOW HEAT,
HIGH HEAT
5 HIGH HEAT
*With fuel applied and burning, the lamps will light in the PRIME,
LOW HEAT, HIGH HEAT positions at Terminal No. 2.

5C13 5C13 Reissued: 2/18/81
e. Connect the black fan motor wire No. 2 to terminal No. 2 at the leading side
of the terminal strip.
f. When a new heater is installed, it will be necessary to remove its name
plate. Then move the name plate aft until its two leading attaching holes coincide
with the two rear mounting holes in the heater housing. Install two of the original
attaching screws in the front of the name plate. Using the two holes in the rear
of the name plate as guides, drill two holes into the heater housing and install the
two remaining self-tapping attaching screws. It will also be necessary to drill
two holes in the heater housing to accommodate the screws from the upper and
lower tubular structure brackets.
13-32. SERVICE.
13-33. GENERAL. The Model 940 heater is specifically designed to simplify

servicing procedures. All controls are easily accessible and the ventilating air
blower is attached by means of bayonet slots to facilitate removal and replace-
ment.
All repairs in the field should be confined to replacement of major sub-
assemblies of the heater. It is not recommended that any attempt be made to
repair these assemblies without shop facilities. Attempts to repair the ventila-
ting air blower, fuel control valve, safety valve, or overheat switches, without
complete tools and test equipment, are likely to result in equipment failure or
inadequate operation. The following major subassemblies are specially designed
to permit unit replacement, and this type of maintenance is recommended for
field service personnel:
a. Ventilating air blower.
b. Flame detector switch.
c. Fuel control valve.
d. Igniter.
e. Preheater resistor.
f. Overheat switch.
g. Cycling switch.
h. Combustion air blower motor.
Instructions for disassembly, repair and reassembly, appear with para-
graph 13-49 of this manual. The assemblies need not be removed in the order
shown since each unit is designed for separate replacement.

5C14 5104 Reissued: 2/18/81
C498 13-34. PERIODIC SERVICE.

a. A complete overhaul of the heater
MICRO SWITCH
is recommendedat 1000 hours of heater
operating time and thereafter at 500
ADJUSTING
SCREW hour intervals.
BRACKET b. The fuel filter must be cleaned at
regular intervals to prevent the conden-
sation of moisture and formation of ice
during cold weather.
c. When the fuel filter is cleaned,
all fuel connections should be checked
for firmness of connections and condi-
tion of insulations.
13-35. ADJUSTING FLAME DETECT-

OR SWITCH. To adjust the flame de-
tector switch, proceed as follows:
Figure 13-14. Flame Detector Switch a. Loosen the two locking nuts so
(Cutaway View) that the switch is held firmly but is not
locked in position.
b. Back off the adjusting screwuntil the switchclicks. (Refer to Figure 13-14.)
c. Turn the adjusting screw in slowly until the switch just clicks again.
d. Turn the screw an additional three-quarter turn past the click point.
e. Hold the screws and tighten the switch mounting nuts. Check to make sure.
the adjusting bracket has not pulled away from the adjusting screw head.
13-36. TROUBLESHOOTING. The Series 940 heaters require a supply of fuel,

electric current at the proper voltage, and an unrestricted supply of ventilating
and combustion air, for proper operation. External failure of any requirement
will cause failure or malfunction, even if the heater itself is in perfect condition.
For this reason the external causes should always be checked first and repaired,
if necessary, before an inoperative heater is removed from the airplane, or dis-
assembled for repair.

5C15
13-37. EXTERNAL CAUSES OF TROUBLE.
13-38. ELECTRIC CHECK.

a. Check voltage at the fuse or circuit breaker, through the heater switch and
at terminal No. 3 of the heater terminal strip. Terminal No. 3 should be "hot"
at any time the airplane's master switch is on. A minimum of 21-volts atthese
points is required for proper heater operation. Terminal No. 4 should be "hot"
when the heater switch and the master switch are on.
b. Turn the heater switch to FAN or PRIME position andcheck voltage through
the switch to the hot terminal of the heater safety valve. It is possible for the
safety valve to lose its charge of gasoline, in which case the heater will not start
until the valve is recharged. A defective heater switch or wiring can, therefore,
result in failure to start even if the heater and valve are in good condition.
c. Check wiring through the heater thermostat to terminal No. 5 of the heater.
This terminal should be hot at any time the heater switch is turned on and the
thermostat is calling for heat. A defective thermostat or wiring can cause the
heater to burn on low heat continuously and the output will be insufficient for cold
weather service.
13-39. FUEL SUPPLY. The Model 940 heaters (except Models 940-DBand 940-K)
require a supply of fuelunderpressureof at least one pound to operate the safety
valve and to properly meter fuel to the heater. Check fuel pressure with a pres-
sure gauge and tee fitting at the inlet to the safety valve while the engine fuel pump,
auxiliary fuel pump, or other source of fuel pressure is operating. The heater
fuel control valve contains a pressure regulator which will reduce fuel pressure
to one psi for proper metering of fuel through the orifice plate. If fuel pressure
at the control valve inlet is less than one pound, the pressure regulator ceases
to function and the heater will burn at reduced level of heat output, or may fail to
ignite. Any pressure between one and fifteen pounds will provide satisfactory op-
eration. The fuel controlvalve used with the Model 940-DB, 940-K heaters is ad-
justed for use at a higher pressure and must not be used in a low-pressure system.
Conversely, the low-pressure valve must not be used in a high-pressure system.

5C16 5C16 Reissued: 2/18/81
13-40. COMBUSTIONAIR SUPPLY. Areducedorrestricted combustionair sup-

ply will usually be easy to identify since the heater will produce black smoke at
the exhaust outlet and the tube will contain a deposit of soft black carbon. This
condition can be caused by an obstruction of any sort in the combustion air inlet,
pinching off the combustion air tube, or an installation defect which prevents the
combustion air blower from obtaining a sufficient amount of air. Always check
these external causes before changing the combustion air motor. (These same
symptoms can be caused by a high fuel rate. )
NOTE
The Models 940-D and 940-K heaters require ram air

at the combustion air inlet, and the symptoms noted
above will always appear if this heater is substituted
for one of the other models without making ram air
provision. These symptoms will also appear if these
heaters, even when properly installed, are operated
for any extended period on the ground.
13-41. VENTILATING AIR SUPPLY.

a. The need for ventilating air is apparently less critical than other require-
ments, since the heater will usually operate at a reduced heat output without any
symptoms of malfunctioning when ventilating air flow is impeded. This condition
may give the appearance of inadequate heater capacity when the fault is actually
an obstruction in the ventilating air stream or a duct system which unduly re-
stricts air flow.
b. Symptoms of inadequate air flow are constant cycling on the cycling switch
(or overheat switch) and a relatively high air temperature at the heater outlet.
Test for cycling by connecting a test lamp to terminal No. 9 of the overheat switch
(or terminal No. 30 of the cycling switch). If the heater cycles constantly, insert
a thermometer into the duct about 18 inches from the heater outlet. If the tem-
perature at this point is near 200 ° F., it can be assumed that ventilating air flow
is inadequate and the load on the ventilating air blower must be reduced by re-
moving an obstruction, or reducing the length of the duct system.
c. In extreme cases where air flow is drastically reduced, or completely shut
off, the lockout overheat switch on the Models 940-DB or 940-K may operate,
shutting the heater completely off. Under the same conditions the Model 940-D
will cycle on the overheat switch.

5C17 5C17 Reissued: 2/18/81
13-42. CHECK-OUT PROCEDURE FOR AN INOPERATIVE HEATER. If a heat-

er fails to ignite, first check external causes previously noted, then proceed as
directed in the check-out procedure below. This procedure should be followed
through in the order presented, since it is designed to isolate the trouble with a
minimum of disassembly.
a. On models so equipped, press the reset button of the lockout overheat switch.
b. Turn the heater control switch to FAN or PRIME position and waitapprox-
imately 30 seconds (for the safety valve to charge), then turn heater switch to ON
position.
c. The requirements for heater ignition are (1) fuel, (2) a flow of combustion
air, and (3) ignition. If the combustion air blower starts when the heater is turn-
ed on, the combustion air requirement is satisfied and the thermal fuse and lock-
out overheat switch are also eliminated as possible sources of trouble, since these
components are necessary for blower operation. This leaves only fuel and ignition
as causes of failure.
d. If the combustion air blower fails to start, it will be probable that the trouble
is in the thermal fuse, lockout overheat switch, flame detector switch, or the
combustion air blower itself.
e. Since there is more than one possible cause of either condition described
above, the heater starting circuit must be checked out in a methodical way to pro -
gressively eliminate the different components. The Starting Circuit Check as-
sumes that the blower is inoperative. If the blower operates, the check-out pro-
cedure may be started with paragraph (b) below, since the blower circuit will not
be in question.
13-43. STARTING CIRCUIT CHECK.

a. On the 940-D, 940-DB and 940-K heaters, check voltage at terminal No. 4
of the terminal strip, with a test light or voltmeter, then check progressively at
both sides of the thermal fuse, at terminal 4A of the relay, and at terminal No.
6 of the terminal strip. Loss of voltage at the thermal fuse indicates a defective
fuse; at terminal No. 4A a defective lockout overheat switch (or wiring on 940-D);
at terminal No. 6, a defective flame detector switch.
b. If there is voltage at terminal No. 6 and the combustion air blower runs,
the trouble is caused by ignition failure or lack of fuel. To differentiate between
these possibilities, check voltage at terminal No. 7 of the terminal strip. Loss
of voltage at this point will indicate a defective flame detector switch on any model
heater.
c. If there is voltage at terminal No. 7, turn off the heater switch and discon-
nect the igniter wire from terminal No. 7. Connect an ammeter in series be-
tween terminal No. 7 and the igniter wire, then turn on the heater switch. The
igniter should draw approximately 10 amperes. If there is no current draw, either

5C18 5C18 Reissued: 2/18/81
the igniter or preheat resistor is defective (any model heater). If current draw
is normal and there is voltage atterminal4A of the relay, it can be assumed that
the fuel control valve shutoff solenoid is defective (on Models 940-D, 940-DB or
940-K) and the valve must be replaced.
13-44. RUNNING CIRCUIT CHECK. If the heater starts properly, burns for a
short time and then goes out, or develops some other type of malfunction, it can
be asuumed that the starting circuit is operating properly and the difficulty is in
the heater control system. The elements which affect heater operation, after
starting, are as follows:
a. Starting safety devices.
b. Fuel control components.
c. The combustion air supply.
13-45. STARTING SAFETY DEVICES. Failure of the flame detector switch to

transfer will be indicated by failure of the ventilating air blower to start after the
heater has burned for a short time. The fuel safety valve will shut off fuel after
about two minutes, but the igniter will continue to be energized and may burn out
before the condition is detected, since it is not designed for continuous operation.
In all cases where the heater ignites normally and then goes out, it will be
necessary to differentiate between the flame detector switch and the safety valve.
First, reset the flame detector switch as directed in this section, prime the safety
valve, and make another trial start. If the heater goes out again, check wiring
from the heater terminal strip to the safety valve and then replace the flame de-
tector switch if no defect is found in the wire. If the valve primes when the heater
switch is in PRIME position but fails to prime automatically when the heater is
burning, the defect will be found in the wiring between the safety valve and ter-
minal strip, or between the terminal strip and relay on heaters so equipped. If
the heater burns for less than one minute and then goes out, the safety valve is
not holding an adequate charge of fuel and must be replaced.
13-46. FUEL CONTROL COMPONENTS. If the heater ignites and the ventilating
air blower starts but heat output is unsatisfactory (too low, too high, or constant
cycling), the trouble will be found in the thermostat, the cycling switch, or the
fuel control valve. Failure of the restriction solenoid to open will cause low heat
output andconstant burning, regardless of thermostat setting. Failure of the so-
lenoid to close will cause high heat output and constant cycling. Low heat and
constant cycling are caused by a cycling switch or a thermostat out of adjust-
ment. Check these causes and replace the defective component, as required.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5C19
13-47. COMBUSTION AIR SUPPLY. Since an excess of combustion air (within

limitations of the blower design) does not adversely affect heater operation, the
only trouble likely to be encountered with combustion air is an inadequate supply.
The symptoms of combustion air restriction are easy to recognize, and have been
described under External Causes of Failure in this Section. If the air supply is
inadequate and the trouble is not caused by restriction, replace the combustion
air motor.
NOTE
The combustion air blower must not be subjected to

excessive ramair pressures. The blower needs about
1 to 2 inches of water ram air pressure above the pres-
sure in the heater exhaust, especially Models 940-D and
940-K; but ram air pressures above 3 inches of water
are quite liable to cause blower wheel failure.
13-48. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART. The TroubleshootingChartisabrief sum-

mary of the defects and remedies discussed in this Section. The chart may be
used as a guide when servicinga heater which fails to perform properly when in-
stalled.

5C20 5C20 Reissued: 2/18/81
TABLE XIII-I. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART (SOUTH WIND HEATER)
Heater will not start, Heater fuel valve not Check valve position.
combustion air blow- ON.
er does not run.
Defective wiring. Check wiring and con-
nections.
Defective combustion Replace blower.

air blower.
Defective thermal fuse. Replace fuse.
Defective lockout over- Replace switch.

heat switch.
Defective overheat Replace switch.

switch.
Blower runs when No fuel pressure. Check fuel supply.

switch is in HEAT
position but heater Defective igniter. Replace igniter.
will not ignite.
Defective fuel control Replace valve.
valve.
Defective cycling over- Replace switch.

heat switch.
Defective preheat Replace resistor.

resistor.
Broken quartz rod. Replace quartz rod.
Heater ignites but ven- Defective or improper- Replace or reset switch.

tilating air blower will ly adjusted flame de-
not start. tector switch.

5C21 5C21 Reissued: 2/18/81
TABLE XIII-I. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART (SOUTH WIND HEATER) (cont.)
Heater ignites but ven- Defective safety valve. Replace valve.

tilating air blower will
not start (cont. ).
Heater starts and runs, Restricted ventilating Remove restriction

but goes out later. air flow.
Defective cycling Replace switch.

overheat switch.
Defective safety valve. Replace valve.
Defective relay. Replace relay.
Heater overheats. Defective fuel control Replace valve.

valve.
Restricted ventilating Remove restriction.

air flow.

overheat switch.

switch.
Heat output low. Defective fuel control Replace valve.

valve.
HI-LO switch on LO. Turn to HI.
Thermostat out of Replace thermostat.

calibration.

5C22 5C22 Reissued: 2/18/81
TABLE XIII-I. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART (SOUTH WIND HEATER) (cont. )
Heat output low (cont. ). Cycling switch out of Replace switch.

calibration.
Heater smokes ex- Leaking fuel control Replace valve.

cessively. valve.
Slow combustion air Replace motor.

motor.
Defective installation. Correct combustion air

supply.
Blower will not stop Defective flame de- Replace or reset

when heater is turn- tector switch. switch.
ed off.
Heater "pops" or Leaking fuel control Replace valve.

"bangs" when valve.
starting.

5C23 5C23 Reissued: 2/18/81
13-49. DISASSEMBLY, REPAIR, AND REASSEMBLY. An overhaul of the 940

heater consists of a complete disassembly, cleaning, repair, reassembly and
test, as described in the following pages. The information is presented in over-
haul sequence, but it should be noted that parts are not necessarily removed in
the order shown. When making repair or replacements, it is possible to remove
most subassemblies without disturbing other parts.
The instructions in the following paragraphs cover all models of the 940
Series heaters. Figure 13-15 is a composite exploded parts view, showing all
parts used on all heaters. Not all of these parts are used on any one heater, but
the differences and usage of parts are noted in the text. The procedures outlined
below are applicable to all models, unless otherwise noted.
The following special service tools are recommended for service and over-
haul of the 940 heater:
a. Fuel valve screen tool.
b. Igniter housing scraper.
13-50. DISASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 13-15.)

a. Remove the combustion air inlet adapter (1) by removing the sheet metal
screw (2) in its center.
b. Remove the shroud adapter (3) by removing the six screws (4) from the weld
nuts in the heater housing.
NOTE
The combustion air inlet adapter and shroud adapter

may remain in the airplane when the heater is re-
moved. If attached to the heater they may have other
installation parts welded or clamped to them. If such
is the case, note positions of such parts before they
are removed.
c. Remove the exhaust extension (5), washers (6), "0" ring (7), and gasket
(8) from the heater exhaust outlet.
13-51. VENTILATING AIR BLOWER.

a. To remove the ventilating air blower (9), disconnect the blower lead from
the heater terminal No. 2, or the relay terminal No. 2A, and free the wire.
b. Loosen, but do not remove the four nuts (10) which secure the blower to the
heater housing.
c. Turn the blower counterclockwise and pull it straight off of the heater housing.
5C245C24 Reissued: 2/18/81

d. Remove the air inlet louver (11) from the blower assembly byremoving the
three screws (12).
13-52. FUEL CONTROL VALVE.

a. Remove the cover (13) from the fuelcontrol valve housing by loosening the
four screws (16). Disconnect valve solenoid leads.
b. Disconnect the short fuel line (17) from the standpipe by loosening the com-
pression nut (18). The ferrule (19) will remain on the fuel line.
c. Lift the fuel control valve (20) out of the housing and remove the fuel line
(17) from the valve by removing the compression nut. Do not attempt to remove
the ferrules from the fuel line.
13-53. FLAME DETECTOR SWITCH.

a. Disconnect leads of the flame detector switch (40) from the terminal strip,
or from terminal strip and relay, according to heater model.
b. On Models 940-D and 940-K, disconnect wires from relay (25) by removing
terminal screws (28). Reinstall screws in terminals.
c. Remove the four screws (24) which secure the flame detector switch guard
(23) to the heater housing. Remove the guard and relay as an assembly, on heat-
ers so equipped.
d. On heaters equippedwith the relay (25), remove the nut (26) and lockwasher
(27) to free the relay ground wire and relay assembly.
e. Loosen the compression nut (42) underneath the flame detector switch (40)
and back it off until it clears the threads of the heat exchanger bushing.
f. Pull the flame detector switch straight out of the heat exchanger, beingcare-
ful not to bend the tube since it contains aquartz rod (41) which may be broken by
rough handling.
13-54. LOCKOUT OVERHEAT SWITCH.

a. On models so equipped, disconnect push-on lead of the lockout overheat
switch (44) from the thermal fuse (57). Remove the overheat switch by removing
the four screws (45). On older model heaters the leads (91 and 92) are attached
to the switch. On current production, leads are separate.
b. On the 940-D heater, the lockout overheat switch is not used, but provis-
ion for its installation has been made and the heater housing will have a circular
cover plate (46) in its place. This cover need not be removed for overhaul.

5D1
1. AIR INLET ADAPTER 25. RELAY 49. 72. KNIi CABLE

2. SCREW 26. NUT OR LIMIT SWITCH 73. PREHEAT RESISTOR
3. SHROUD ADAPTER 27. LOCKWASHER 50. SCREW 74. NUT
4. SCREW (6 REQ) 28. SCREW (3 RED) 51. NUT 75. LOCKWASHER
5. EXHAUST EXTENSION 29. TERMINAL STRIP 52. WASHER 76. GROUND STRAP
6. WASHER (2 REQ) 30. INSULATOR 53. WIRE ASSEMBLY 77. SCREW
7. "0" RING 31. SCREW (4 RED) 54. WIRE ASSEMBLY 78. LOCKWASHER
8. GASKET 32. WASHER 55. CLAMP (2 REQ) 79. IGNITER
9. VENTILATING AIR SLOWER 33. SCREW (10 REQ) 56. ELBOW 80. NUT
10. NUT (4 REQ) 34. WASHER (4 REQ) 57. THERMAL FUSE 81. GASKET
11. AIR INLET LOUVER 35. JUMPER 58. ELBOW 82. COMBUSTION AIR MOTOR
12. SCREW (4 REQ) 36. CLAMP 59. BLOWER COVER 83. SCREW (3 REO)
13. COVER 37. SCREW 60. SCREW (9 REQ) 84. BLOWER HOUSING
14. GROMMET (2 REQ) 38. NUT 61. NUT (9 REQ) 85. HEATER HOUSING
15. GROMMET 39. FANNING STRIP 62. BRACKET 86. SCREW (3 REO)
16. SCREW (4 REQ) 40. FLAME DETECTOR STRIP 63. SCREW (2 REQ) 87. HEAT EXCHANGER ASSEMBLY
17. FUEL LINE 41. QUARTZ ROD 64. BLOWER WHEEL 88. NAMEPLATE
18. NUT (3 REQ) 42. NUT 65. FLANGE 89. SCREW (4 REQ)
19. FERRULE (3 REQ) 43. FERRULE 66. TAPPING PLATE 90. SAFETY VALVE
20. FUEL CONTROL VALVE 44. LOCKOUT OVERHEAT SWITCH 67. GASKET 91. CABLE ASSEMBLY
21. ELBOW 45. SCREW (4 REQ) 68. SCREW (2 REQ) 92. CABLE ASSEMBLY
22. WIRE ASSEMBLY 46. COVER 69. STANDPIPE 93. CAPACITOR ASSEMBLY
23. GUARD 47. WIRE ASSEMBLY 70. NUT
24. SCREW (4 REQ) 48. WIRE ASSEMBLY 71. "Q" RING
Figure 13-15. Exploded Parts View, Heater Assembly

13-55. CYCLING OVERHEAT SWITCH. Onallmodels, remove the cyclingover-

heat switch, or cycling temperature control switch (49) by removing the two at-
taching screws (50). Also remove the capacitor (93) on the 940-DB models only.
These switches appear identical on all heaters, but are set at a lower temperature
on models which have the lockout overheat switch and have a different part number.
13-56. COMBUSTIONAIR BLOWER.

a. Loosen the two clamps (55) which attach the combustion air elbows (56 and
58), or elbow (56) and thermal fuse (57). Only two of the parts illustrated are
used on any one heater. The thermal fuse (57) is used on all models. On all
models, disassembly is the same. Disconnect wires from the thermal fuse (if
used) and then work the two parts off the blower outlet and heat exchanger inlet.
Separate parts after removal.
b. Remove the cover (59) of the combustion air blower, by removing the nine
screws (60) and speed nuts (61). It is not necessary to remove the bracket (62),
or screws (63) unless replacement is required.
c. Loosen the set screw in the hub of the blower wheel (64) and slide the wheel
off the motor shaft.
13-57. STANDPIPEAND PREHEATER RESISTOR.

a. Remove the two screws (68) from the fuel line flange (65)and tapping plate
(66). Remove the two plates and the gasket (67).
b. Disconnect preheater connector strip from the igniter (69) and loosen the
large hex nut (70) on the bottom of the standpipe (69), one or two turns. Remove
the standpipe by backing off the smaller hex, which is welded to the pipe. When
the threads are clear, the standpipe (69) and preheat resistor (73) can be lifted
out through the opening in the heater housing.
c. Remove the preheat resistor (73) from the standpipe and pull out the knit
cable (72). Discard the cable and the "O" ring (71). These parts must be re-
placed at each overhaul.
13-58. IGNITER.
a. Remove the nut (74) and lockwasher (75) from the ground stud inside the
heater housing, to free the igniter ground strap (76), then remove the screw (77)
and lockwasher (78) to free the igniter ground wire.
b. Remove the igniter (79), using a 13/15 inch deep socket, and remove and
discard the igniter gasket (81).

3
12 .4
9
13
14
15
2
4
7
8 10
1. SCREW 7. MOTOR 12. GROMMET

2. LOCKWASHER 8. BLOWER WHEEL 13. SCREW
3. SCREW (3 REQ) 9. MOTOR MOUNTING 14. LOCKWASHER
4. WASHER (3 REQ) BRACKET 15. NUT
5. GROMMET (3 REQ) 10. SCREW 16. GROUND STRAP
6. WASHER (3 REO) 11. LOCKWASHER 17. HOUSING
Figure 13-16. Exploded Parts View, Ventilating Air Blower Assembly
13-59. COMBUSTIONAIR MOTOR.

a. To remove the combustion air motor, it is necessary to first remove the
combustion air elbows, the blower housing cover, the blower wheel, the stand-
pipe and the preheat resistor.
b. After removing the parts noted above, remove the three mounting screws
(83) and remove the motor (82) from inside the housing. This will also free the
blower housing (84).
13-60. HEAT EXCHANGER. Remove the three screws (86) from the seam of
the heat exchanger housing (85) and spread the housing sufficiently to permit the
heat exchanger (87) to drop out through the end of the housing.
13-61. VENTILATING AIR BLOWER - ALL MODELS. (Refer to Figure 13-16.)

a. Remove the screw (1) and lockwasher (2) from the end of the motor (7) to
free the motor from the ground strap.
b. Remove the three screws (3), washers (4), grommets (5), and smallwashers
(6) to free the motor mounting bracket (9), then withdraw the motor (7), bracket
(9), and blower wheel (8) as an assembly.
c. Loosen the set screw in the hub of the blower wheel (8) and remove the wheel
from the motor shaft.

d. Mark the position of the mounting bracket (9) on the motor (7) and remove
the bracket by loosening the screw (10).
e. Remove the screw, lockwasher, and nut (12, 13 and 14) from the blower
housing to free the ground strap (15), then remove the grommet (11) from the
housing.
13-62. INSPECTION, CLEANING AND REPAIR.
13-63. HEAT EXCHANGER.

a. Inspect the heat exchanger for possible damage or leaks. Small cracks in
the header plate or seams may be repaired by welding, provided the work is done
by a welder who is thoroughly experienced in the welding of stainless steel. If
the heat exchanger has large cracks, is excessively warped, or has burned through
at any point, it must be replaced. When welding cracks, Type 347 weld rod is
preferred, although 321 or 310 may be used.
NOTE
Before welding, it is very important to clean all com-

bustion deposits away from the area to be welded, since
the lead compounds in the heat exchanger cancontam-
inate the weld to such an extent that a tight weld is al-
most impossible. Keep allweld beads as small as po-
ssible, preferably not over one-eight of an inch.
b. Clean combustion residue from inside walls of igniter housing with igniter
housing scraper tool.
c. Remove combustion residue from inside heat exchanger by soaking this
assembly in a 20% by weight solution of ammonium acetate at a temperature of
180° F., for a period of 5 to 10 hours. Flush out exchanger with water after
cleaning, and dry as well as possible with compressed air. This is the preferred
method of cleaning. An alternate is to tap the heat exchanger lightly with a raw-
hide mallet to loosen carbon from the walls. This will loosen most of the residue,
which may then be blown out with compressed air.
d. Pressure test heat exchanger by plugging openings and applying 10 psi air
pressure to the flame detector switch or standpipe bushing while the unit is sub-
merged in water. Leakage will be indicated by bubbles. No leakage is permit-
ted.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5D5
13-64. FUEL CONTROL VALVE. Replace valve if found defective.
13-65. BLOWERASSEMBLIES.
a. Clean both blower wheels, housings, and the ventilating air blower motor
mounting bracket with dry cleaning solvent, and blow dry. Wipe off outside of
motors with a cloth dampened in solvent, but do not immerse motors.
b. Inspect blower wheels for bent blades and cracks. Pay special attention to
the combustion air blower wheel. The slightest evidence of small cracks in, or
around, the strain relief cutouts near the hub is reason to replace this wheel.
13-66. VENTILATING AIR BLOWER MOTOR OVERHAUL. An overhaul kit,

PAC part No. 754 306, is available for all ventilating air blower motors of the
940 Series. This kit contains new bearings, brushes, and other parts required
for installation. To overhaul the motor, proceed as follows: (Refer to Figure
13-17.)
a. Remove the two nuts (1) from the end of the motor and pull the end bell (3)
off far enough to permit unsoldering of the capacitor lead from the eyelet on the
brush holder insulator. Remove the end bell (3).
b. Remove the two nuts (12) from the other end of the motor and pull the two
long studs (11) out of the stator (16) without disturbing the two nuts (4) which are
threaded part way down to center the studs in the stator.
c. Pull the brush holder (6) out far enough to unsolder stator leads from the
eyelets, then remove the brush holder assembly and brushes. If the stator does
not have flexible leads to the solder eyelets, cut leads off close to the windings
and solder in new leads of flexible stranded wire. This will prevent possible
future failure due to vibration.
d. Pull the rotor (13) out of the stator (16). The bearings will remain on the
rotor shaft.
e. Remove the load springs (14) from inside the stator (16).
f. Clean the shaft and pull the bearings off the shaft of the rotor (13) with a
bearing puller, using anti-seize compound as a lubricant.
g. Clean all parts with a soft bristle brush and blow off with compressed air.
Sand commutator of rotor (13) if necessary, or turn down slightly. Do not at-
tempt to repair a badly worn motor. Replace the entire assembly if major re-
pairs are required.

5D6 Reissued:2/18/81
-16 1. NUT (2 REQ)

2. LOCKWASHER (2 REO)
3. END BELL
4. NUT (2 REO)
56. LOCKWASHER
6. BRUSH HOLDER AND CLIP
7. SPACER (2 REO)
8. BRUSH AND CLIP
13
- SOLDEREYELET
14 6
-5
11
8
SOLDEREYELET
9. BRUSH 10 -2
10. BRUSH SPRING (2 REO) 9
11. STUD (2 REO)
12. NUT (2 REQ)
13. ROTOR ASSY.
14. LOAD SPRING (2 REO)
3
15. BEARING (2 REO)
16. STATOR ASSY.
Figure 13-17. Ventilating Air Blower Motor

NOTE
If the commutator is turned, the lathe tool must be

ground for copper and must be extremely sharp. Com-
mutator slots must be cleaned after turning to avoid
shorts between bars. Sand lightly after turning.
h. Press new bearings on the rotor shaft until they bottom against shoulders
on the shaft, using a lubricant.
i. Reassemble the motor parts, using new brushes, brush springs and load
springs from the kit. Note that two sets of brushes are provided. Use the new
brushes which fit the motor brush holders. The 718855 springs must be used
with 1/4 x 3/8 brushes and the 717472 springs with 1/4 x 1/4 brushes. Make
sure that stator leads and capacitor lead are securely soldered.
j. No specific test of the motor is required after this repair procedure pro-
vided the rotor turns freely and the motor performs satisfactorily after reas-
sembly into the blower assembly. Extensive repairs, that would require per-
formance testing after completion, are not recommended.

5D7 Reissued:2/18/81
-
1. SCREW (2 REQ)
4 2. NUT (2 REQ)
3. LOCKWASHER (2 REQ)
4. END BELL
5. END BELL
6. SPACER (4 REQ)
7. NUT (2 REQ)
8. LOCKWASHER (2 REQ)
13
17
15
14
12
9. BRUSH HOLDER ASSY.

10. BRUSH AND CLIP ASSY. 13 5
11. BRUSH
12. BRUSH SPRING (2 REQ)
13. BEARING (2 REQ)
14. SNAP RING 2
15. ROTOR ASSY. 12
16. STATOR ASSY. 11
17. LOAD SPRING (2 REQ)
Figure 13-18. Combustion Air Blower Motor
13-67. COMBUSTIONAIR BLOWER MOTOR OVERHAUL. An overhaul kit, PAC

Part No. 754 307, is available for overhaul of the combustion air blower motor
on all models of the 940 Series heaters. To overhaul motor, proceed as follows:
(Refer to Figure 13-18.)7. )
a. Remove the two nuts (2) from the endof the motor and remove the end bell
(5).
b. Loosen the two small nuts (7) slightly with a 1/4 inch end wrench (or deep
socket), then remove long screws (1) with a screw driver while holding nuts (7).
This will free the other end bell (4) and spacers (6).
c. Pull the brush holder assembly (9) out far enough tounsolder the stator lead
and remove this entire assembly.
d. Pull the rotor (15) out of the stator (16) with bearings on the shaft. Clean
the shaft and remove the bearings with a bearing puller, using a lubricant on the
shaft.
e. Clean all parts with a soft bristle brush and blow off with compressed air.
Sandpaper commutator of rotor (15) or turn down slightly if required.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5D8
NOTE
If the commutator is turned, the lathe tool must be

ground for copper and must be extremely sharp. Com-
mutator slots must be cleaned after turning to avoid
shorts between bars. Sand lightly after turning.
f. Rebuild motor using new bearings (13), brushes (10 and 11), and brush
springs (12). When soldering brush pigtails, use long nosed pliers next to the
solder joint to prevent solder from "wicking" into the pigtail.
g. No specific test of the motor is required after the above repair procedure
provided the shaft turns freely and the motor performs satisfactorily when re-
installed in the heater. More extensive repairs than those described should not
be attempted.
13-68. HEATER HOUSING.

a. Clean inside and out with dry cleaning solvent, and inspect housing for
roundness and dents. Straighten, or re-shape, as necessary.
b. Replace all rubber grommets in the housing.
13-69. FLAME DETECTOR SWITCH. Check bow spring to see if pressure of

quartz rod is causing it to bow up toward the top of the switch. If the spring is
not bowed, but is in a straight position, the quartz rod is broken and must be re-
placed.
If such is the case, proceed as follows:
a. Loosen the two switch mounting screws.
b. Remove the adjusting screw.
c. Turn micro switch back on the bracket and remove the bow spring. Inspect
condition of the quartz rod.
d. If the quartz rod is broken or chipped on either end, it must be replaced.
If it is in good condition, replace it in the tube, turn the switch back into posi-
tion and reinstall the adjusting screw.
e. Back off the adjusting screw until the switch clicks, indicating that the micro
switch has transferred.
f. Turn the adjusting screw slowly in, until the switch just clicks again, to
determine point of transfer, then turn the screw exactly three-quarter turn past
the transfer point.
g. Hold the screws and tighten micro switch mounting nuts to lock switch se-
curely in place.

13-70. OVERHEAT SWITCH AND CYCLING SWITCH. Visually inspectthe over-

heat switch, or cycling switch, for damage and clean contacts by sliding a strip
of clean bond paper between the contacts. Do not use a file or sandpaper, and do
not attempt to bend the contact arm. These switches are adjusted at the factory
and the adjustment cannot be changed in the field. Replace switch if found defec -
tive.
13-71. LOCKOUT OVERHEAT SWITCH.

a. Connect wires to the two connector wires of the lockout overheat switch,
and suspend this assembly in an oven with an accurate thermometer. Provide a
test light, or meter, to indicate opening of the switch contacts. Press the reset
button of the switch.
b. Slowly raise the oven temperature until the switch contacts open. Note
temperature in the oven at the moment of switch operation. The switch must open
at the temperature noted below, according to model. If not within limits, install
a new switch. This unit is not adjustable.
Model Used On Opening Temperature
940-DB 205 to 245°F.

940-K 140 to 160°F.
13-72. THERMAL FUSE AND COMBUSTIONAIR ELBOWS.

a. Inspect for dents and fit between parts.
b. Clean elbows with dry cleaning solvent and blow out with compressed air.
c. Inspect fusible link of thermal fuse assembly for tightness of attaching
screws and condition of link. The attaching screws may be tightened, if loose,
but the entire assembly must be replaced if the link has been damaged or fused.
Do not use compressed air to clean the thermal fuse assembly.
13-73. SAFETY VALVE AND FILTER.

a. To clean filter, remove bowl by loosening bail nut and clean inside of bowl.
Wash filter element in dry cleaning solvent and blow dry by directingcompressed
air jet inside the filter. When replacing the bowl, make sure the gasket is in
place.
b. Replace the fuel screen in the safety valve and wipe off the outside with a
cloth dampened in cleaning solvent. Do not disassemble, or attempt to repair
this unit.
c. Replace safety valve if found defective.

Reissued:2/18/81
5D10
13-74. WIRING.
a. Inspect all heater wiringfor condition of insulation, and condition of solder
connection of the terminals. Repair, or replace, as required.
b. Inspect the terminal strip for damage and the terminal screws for condition
of threads.
13-75. RELAY. Apply a variable voltage between terminal 4A of the relay and
the ground wire. Increase and decrease the voltage to determine relay pull-in
voltage. The 28 -volt relay must pull in at not more than 18-volts and the 14 -volt
relay at not more than 9-volts. Replace relay if not within limits.
13-76. REASSEMBLY.
13-77. VENTILATING AIR BLOWER - ALL MODELS. (Refer to Figure 13-16.)

a. Replace the bracket (9) on the motor (7) in its original position and tighten
the screw (10). Slip the wheel (8) on the motor shaft but do not tighten set screw.
b. Install large flat washers (4), new grommets (5), and small washers (6) on
each of the three motor mounting bracket screws (3), in order illustrated.
c. Fit the motor and bracket assembly into the housing and start ends of the
mounting bracket screws (3) into the weld nuts on the bracket with the washers
and grommets on the screws. After screws are started, drop the small washers
(6) through the holes in the housing and stuff grommets (5) into the holes. Tighten
the screws alternately and evenly to apply a firm pressure to the grommets, and
center the motor in the housing. Do not overtighten screws (3), since this will
defeat the purpose of the shock-mounting grommets.
d. Reconnect the ground wire (15) to the end of the motor by reinstalling the
screw (1) and lockwasher (2).
13-78. HEATER ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 13-15.) Reassemblyof theheat-

er is essentially the reverse of disassembly. If the heater is completely disas-
sembled, reassembly will be simplified by following the procedure below, instead
of a strict reversal of disassembly.
a. Reinstall the combustion air motor (82) from inside the heater housing (85),
place the blower housing (84) on the outside and reinstall the three screws (83).
Replace blower wheel (64) on the motor shaft. Adjust wheel for one-sixteenth inch
clearance from housing, and tighten set screw.
b. Replace the blower housing (59) by reinstalling nine screws (60) and speed
nuts (61).

Reissued: 2/18/81
5D11
c. Reinstall the igniter (79) in the heat exchanger (87), using a new gasket (81),
and tighten with a 13/16 inch deep socket. Reinstall the screw (77) to connect the
igniter ground wire, attaching one end of the bonding strap (76) with the same
screw and lockwasher (78).
d. Adjust the vaporizer cable (72) in the standpipe (69), so that it extends about
one-half inch from the threaded end. Smooth the end of the cable and twist strands
so that loose particles will not break off on threads inside the heat exchanger.
Run the nut (70) up on the threads of the standpipe as far as it will go. Place a
new "0" ring (71) on the threads at the bottom. Reinstall the standpipe in the
heat exchanger by first turning the welded hexagon down tightly into the threads,
then turning down the nut (70) against the "0" ring, to obtain a tight seal.
e. Place the preheat resistor (73) around the standpipe, and install the nut (80)
to attach the preheat conductor to the igniter terminal.
f. Spread the housing and combustion air blower assembly, and fit it over the
heat exchanger, with the end of the standpipe projecting through the opening pro-
vided. Reinstall the three screws (86) in the seam of the housing. Attach the free
end of the igniter ground wire bonding strap (76) to the stud inside the housing,
using the nut (74) and lockwasher (75).
g. Fit the tapping plate (66) around the standpipe inside the housing, and place
a new gasket (67) and the old flange (65) on the outside. Reinstall the two screws
(68) to secure and seal the standpipe.
h. Fit the large combustion air elbow (56) and small elbow (58), or thermal
fuse (57) loosely together, using one of the clamps (55). Fit these parts on the
combustion air blower outlet and heat exchanger inlet, using the remaining clamp
(55). Adjust parts to fit, then tighten both clamps securely.
i. Reinstall the overheat switch, or cycling switch (49), by reinstalling the two
screws (50). Do not overtighten screws, since this may distort the switch and
affect its calibration. Also, reinstall the lockout overheat switch (44), on models
so equipped, by reinstalling the four screws (45).
j. Reinstall the flame detector switch (40) by tightening the nut (42) on the fer-
rule (43). Tighten nut firmly, but avoid excessive crushing of the flame detector
switch tube. If a new flame detector switch is being installed, use a new ferrule
(43) and nut (42). These parts should remain on the tube after the first installa-
tion, since the ferrule will be firmly pressed onto the tube. This does not affect
operation of the switch which may be removed and replaced, as required, so long
as it continues to function properly.
k. Reinstall the terminal strip (9) and insulator (30) on the flame detector
switch guard (23) by reinstalling the four screws (31). Also, reinstall the relay
(25), on models so equipped, by installing the lockwasher on the relay stud in-
side the guard, then the relay ground wire and the lockwasher nut (26). Tighten
nut securely to obtain good electrical contact, then reinstall guard (23) over flame
detector switch, using the four screws (24).

Reissued: 2/18/81
5D12
1. Connect the short fuel line (17) to

the outlet of the fuel control valve (20)
and tighten compression nut finger tight.
Start the screws (16) into the nuts on
GASKET the fuel control valve mounting bracket.
Fit the fuel control valve into the hous-
SHROUD
ADAPTER ing and the fuel line into the standpipe,
-EXHAUST EXTENSION (18) very carefully. Fit newgrommets
HEATEREXHAUST (14 and 15) into the slots in the valve
housing, then fit the cover (13) on the
housing and tighten the four screws (16)
into the fuel control valve mounting
bracket.
m. Reinstall the air inlet louver plate
Figure 13-19. Detail of Exhaust (11) on the ventilating air blower (9)us-
Extensions Installation ing screws (12), and reinstall the blower
on the heater housing.
n. Install the loose wires (54, 53, 48 and 47), according to the wiring diagram
for the heater model, and connect leads of all electric components, using the
wiring diagram as a guide. All leads are numbered, with the exception of the two
push-on terminals which connect to the thermal fuse. Connect these wires to the
nearest terminal. The thermal fuse has no polarity.
o. Place flat washers (6), new "O" ring (7), exhaust extension (5), and flat
washer (6) on heater exhaust. Fit new gasket (8) around exhaust and install shroud
adapter (3) to hold entire assembly by reinstalling six screws (4).
p. Reinstall the air inlet adapter (1) when the heater is reinstalled in the air-
plane.
13-79. TESTING.
13-80. GENERAL. Any heater that has been overhauled, or subjected to major
repair, should be tested before being returned to service. The test should in-
clude a "leak test" and "flow test" of the fuel control valve, a "burn test" of the
assembled heater, and a test of the overheat switch.

5D13 5D13 Reissued: 2/18/81
NOTE
The heat exchanger should have been leak tested as di-

rected in paragraph 13-63 prior to reassembly.
13-81. TEST SET UP. The test set up should include the followingcomponents:
a. A suitable cradle or bracket for mounting the heater with provision to dis-
pose of the exhaust gases.
b. A source of 14 or 28-volts dc, depending on the heater model being tested.
This should be a variable source from a transformer and rectifier, so that the
voltage can be regulated, and must,include a voltmeter and ammeter.
c. A source of fuel at a pressure of 1 to 15 psi for all models except 940-DB
and 940-K. A filter should be included in the fuel supply line. Fuel pressure
may be supplied by a gravity system with a head of at least four feet, or by an
electric fuel pump. The 940-DB and 940-K heaters require a source of fuel at
20 to 35 psi from a fuel pump which operates at this pressure.
d. A glass graduate of the type shown in Figure 13-20 is required for testing
the fuel control valve, unless a flow meter is available in the fuel supply line.
e. A strobo -type tachometer, although not necessary is desirable to time blow-
er speed.
f. An oven and thermometer, for testing the lockout overheat switch.
13-82. TEST PROCEDURE. The heatertest should be conducted in thefollowing

order, if possible, since the heater must be cold at the start of the overheat switch
test.
13-83. FUEL CONTROL VALVE LEAK TEST. Remove the fuel control valve
from the heater, or test the valve separately before reassembly, during the over-
haul. Proceed with test as follows:
a. Connect the control valve to the fuel source.
b. Install the short heater fuel line (Refer to Figure 13-15. Ref. 17. ) in the
fuel control valve outlet, in its normal position. Support the valve in its normal
mounting position (Refer to Figure 13-20) so that fuel from the fuel linewill drip
into a glass graduate.

Reissued:2/18 81
5D14
FUELLINE
NOTE
OFMTG. The valve must be support-

SCREW HOLES ed ina normalpositionso a
line through the mounting
screw holes of the bracket
will be level. Failure to
HEATER test the valve in its proper
FUEL LINE position will affect the fuel
rate and may cause rejec-
tion of good equipment.
GRADUATE c. Ground the body of the fuel con-

trol valve and apply a test voltage to
each of the solenoid leads. A distinct
click should be heardwhen the solenoids
are energized.
=d. Turn on the fuel pressure and en-
ergize both solenoids at once. Allow
fuel to flow through the valve for a few
seconds, then de-energize both sole-
Figure 13-20. Fuel Flow Test Set Up noids. One or two drops of fuelmay fall
from the outlet within 15 seconds after
the solenoids are closed. After 15 seconds, a drop of fuel may form, but it should
not fall. If the valve does not shut off completely, it must be replaced.
13-84. FUEL CONTROL VALVE FLOW TEST. Check fuel flow through the
valve, as follows, using the test set up illustrated in Figure 13-20:
a. Energize both solenoids and permit fuel to flow through thevalve for a few
seconds.
b. Place a glass graduate under the valve outlet andpermit fuel to flow for ex-
actly 60 seconds, then shut off both solenoids.
c. Read the graduate at eye level - it should contain the amount of fuel shown
in the chart for high heat fuel flow.
d. Repeat the above test with the restriction solenoid de-energized (low heat
fuel flow). The graduate should then contain the amount of fuel shown in the table
for low heat fuel flow.
e. If fuel flow is not within limits, turn adjusting screw clockwise to increase,
or counterclockwise to decrease, fuel flow and retest. Both low and high heat fuel
flow must be within limits for proper operation of the heater. Replace or repair
the valve if it cannot be brought within limits by adjustment. Reseal the adjusting

Reissued:2. 18/81
5D15
FUEL FLOW CHART
Heater Fuel
Model Pressure High Heat Low Heat
22 ± 2 cc 7. 0 to 9. 0 cc
940-D 1 to 15 psi (0. 034 to 0. 041 (0. 010 to 0. 014
lb/min on flowmeter) lb/min on flowmeter)
22 ± 2 cc 12 ± 2cc
940-DA 1 to 15 psi (0. 034 to 0. 041 (0. 016 to 0. 020
22 ± 2 cc 12 ± 2 cc
940-DB 20 to 35 psi (0. 034 to 0. 041 (0. 016 to 0. 020
22 ± 2 cc 3.5 to 6 cc
940-K 20 to 35 psi (0. 034 to 0. 041 (0. 006 to 0. 014
screw with glyptal cement after test.
13-85. LOCKOUT OVERHEAT SWITCH. The test for the lockout overheat switch
is described in paragraph 13-71. This test is normally performed during over-
haul, before the switch is installed, but the switch may be removed and tested at
any time its operation is in doubt.
13-86. OVERHEAT SWITCH TEST (Models 940-D and 940-DA only). Install the
fuel control valve on the heater and install the heater on the test fixture. Make
fuel and electrical connections. Proceed with overheat switch test as follows:
(Heater should be at room temperature when test is started. )
a. Set the HIGH-LOW switch to HIGH. Preset the voltage control so that volt-
age, with full starting load, will be 22-volts for the 28-volt heater and 11-volts
for the 14-volt heater.
b. Cover the inlet of the ventilating air blower with cardboard or sheet metal,
to stop off all flow of ventilating air.
c. Turn on the control switch. Start timing the operation as soon as ignition
occurs. When the flame detector switch transfers, reset voltage to 22-volts, or
5D116 5D116 Reissued: 2/18/81

11-volts, according to heater model.

d. Continue timing until the overheat switch opens and shuts off fuel flow (com-
bustion will stop in the heater). This time must be more than 50 seconds, but less
than 80 seconds from the moment of ignition. Replace the overheat switch, if not
within limits.
13-87. BURNTEST. Shut the heater off and remove the cover from the ventila-
ting air blower inlet. Allow time for the heater to cool. Proceed with "burn test"
as follows:
a. Turn on the heater switch and adjust voltage to 14 or 28-volts, according to
heater model. Start timing heater action from the moment the switch is turned
on.
b. The current draw should not exceed 13-amperes for either 14 or 28-volt
heaters.
c. Ignition should occur within 20 seconds from the moment the switch is turn-
ed on.
d. The flame detector switch should close more than 8 seconds, but less than
25 seconds, from the instant the heater ignites.
e. Readjust voltage immediately after the flame detector switch transfers, and
allow the heater to run on high heat for at least one minute. If a tachometer is
available, the speed of the combustion air motor should be determined with the
combustion air adapter removed, and with no restriction on the heater exhaust.
The speed should be at least 5000 RPM. In the absence of a suitable light to time
the blower, it can be presumed to be operating properly if the heater burns nor-
mally and did not have an excessive deposit of carbon in the exhaust tube, or com-
bustion chamber, when cleaned during overhaul. Speed of the ventilating air blow-
er is not critical, since it has no direct effect on combustion.
f. After the heater has burned on high heat for one minute, turn the HIGH-LOW
switch to LOW. Burning should decrease in intensity and the heat output should
be reduced.
g. Turn off the control switch. Burning must stop within 45 seconds, and both
blowers should continue to run for more than one minute but less than two minutes
twenty seconds (time from instant the switch is turned off).

Reissued: 2/18/81
5D17
13-88. CYCLING SWITCH TEST (Model 940-K).

a. Attach a duct to the heater outlet and insert an accurate thermometer into
the airstream, about 18 inches from the heater.
b. Start the heaterand permit it to burn until it begins to cycle on the cycling
switch.
c. Read the duct temperature, as indicated by the thermometer. It must be
within the limits of 200 ° F to 225° F. If the temperature is not within limits, the
cycling switch is defective and must be replaced.
If the heater should fail any test, refer to the Troubleshooting Chart and
make repairs or replacements as required.

5D18 5D18 Reissued: 2/18/81
13-89. JANITROL HEATER. This section contains information for operation, service and
overhaul of the combustion heater, Part No. 751 978 and combustion air blower, Part No.
753 443 (14-volt), 758 120 (28-volt) (used with the heater). (Refer to Figure 13-21.)
13-90. TROUBLESHOOTING. The service troubles and suggested remedies listed in Table
XIII-II or XIII-III are provided to assist in locating and correcting malfunctions in the heating
system. The following procedure is based upon the use of optional components.
13-91. HEATER OPERATION. (PA-23-250 [six place], Serial Nos. 27-3050, 27-3154 to
27-7554040.) The 35,000 B.T. U. Janitrol heater is controlled by a three position switch located
on the right side of the instrument panel, labeled FAN, OFF and HEAT. The FAN position
will operate the vent blower only and may be used for cabin ventilation on the ground or wind-
shield defogging when heat is not desired. For heat the manual heater fuel valve located on the
fuel selector panel must be on and the three position switch turned to HEAT. This will start
fuel flow and ignite the burner simultaneously. On Serial Nos. 27-7405432 and up, the manual
fuel valve is not installed.
The heater uses gasoline from either left fuel tank when the fuel crossfeed is off and from
all tanks when the crossfeed is on.
The push-pull knobs at the bottom of the control pedestal control airflow and temp-
erature. The control regulates air flowing to the front seat through the heater system and the
second knob from the left control air flowing to the rear seat. The middle knob is connected
to an adjustable thermostat which makes it possible to select a desired temperature of heat air.
The second knob from the right is the defroster control and the right knob controls the supply
of cold air through the vent on the forward bulkhead. There is also a heater overtemp. reset
switch on the lower right hand instrument panel above the heater switch, for inflight reset if
and overtemp. of the heater occurs.
For the overhaul and complete disassembly of the janitrol heater and its components,
refer to Paragraph 13-103of this manual. A wiring diagram of the heater Electrical System by
appropriate serial number will be found in Section XI of this manual.
5D19 5D19 Reissued:2/18/81

TABLEXIII-II. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART(JANITROL HEATER) (14-VOLT)
Heater fails to light. Heater switch or cir- Turn on heater switch

cuit breaker off. or close circuit break-
er.
Low voltage supply. Apply external power

supply. Attempt to
start heater. (Refer to
paragraph 13-99. )
Fuel cut off from fuel Turn on manual shutoff

cell. valve or master sole-
noid.
Regulator not oper- Check for low pressure

ating properly or replace regulator.
(Refer to paragraph
13-117.)
I
Restriction in fuel Remove the nozzle and
nozzle orifice. clean or replace it.
(Refer to paragraph
13-120, m and n;
13-124, i; and 13-127,
k and 1. )
Fuel heater solenoid Remove and check sole-

not operating. noid. Replace if faulty.
(Refer to paragraph
13-120; 13-124, kand
13-127, a.)
Fuel lines clogged or Inspect all lines and

broken. connections. It may be
necessary to discon-
nect lines at various
points to determine
where the restriction
is located.
5D20 5D20 Reissued: 2/18/81

TABLE XIII-II. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART (JANITROL HEATER) (14-VOLT) (cont.)
Heater fails to light Ignition vibrator inop- Replace vibrator.

(cont. ). erative. Check for defective
radio noise filter.
(Refer to paragraph
13-113. )
Manual reset limit Press reset button firm-

(overheat) switch ly and recheck to deter -
open. mine reason for switch
opening.
Combustion air pres- Check for low blower

sure switch open. (De- output due to low volt-
fective switch or low age and correct it. If
combustion air blower switchis defective, re-
output. ) place it. (Refer to
paragraph 13-116. )
Cycling switch open. Replace if defective.

(Refer to paragraph
13-115. )
Duct switch open. Operate control to see

if switch will come on.
Replace switch if de-
fective. (Refer to
paragraph 13-118. )
Ventilating air blower HEATER switch OFF. Energize the HEATER

fails to run. Broken or loose wiring switch. Check and re-
to motor. pair wiring.
Circuit breaker open. Close circuit breaker.
Worn motor brushes. Replace motor brushes.

(Refer to paragraph
13-111. )

5D21 5D21~Reissued: 2/18/81
TABLE XIII-II. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART (JANITROL HEATER) (14-VOLT)(cont.)
Ventilating air blower Blower wheel jammed. Remove and check the
fails to run (cont. ). ventilating air blower
wheel and realign if
necessary. (Refer to
paragraph 13-127, g. )
Motor burned out. Remove blower assem-

bly and replace motor.
(Refer to paragraph
13-120, land r thruu;
13-127, b thru g. )
Defective radio-noise Replace filter.

filter.
Combustion air blower Faulty wiring to motor. Inspect and replace

fails to run. faulty wiring.
Poor ground connection. Tighten ground screw.

(Refer to paragraph
13-111, b.)
Blower wheel jammed. Overhaul the combustion

(Usually indicated by air blower. (Refer to
hot motor housing. paragraphs 13-121 and
13-128. )
Faulty or burned-out Remove combustion air

motor. motor for overhaul or
replacement of motor.
(Refer to paragraphs
13-110, 13-120 and
13-128.)

5D22 5D22 Reissued: 2/18/81
TABLE XIII-II. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART (JANITROL HEATER) (14-VOLT) (cont.)
Heater fires but burns Insufficient fuel supply. Inspect fuel supply to
unsteadily. heater including shut-
off valve, solenoid
valve and fuel lines.
Make necessary re-
pairs.
Spark plug partially Replace spark plug.

fouled. (Refer to paragraph
13-112.)
Loose primary con- Tighten the connection.

nection at ignition
assembly.
Faulty vibrator. Replace the vibrator.

(Refer to paragraph
13-113. )
Combustion air blower Remove and overhaul

speed fluctuates. (Can the combustion air
be caused by low volt- blower assembly as
age, loose blower required or correct
wheel, worn brushes low voltage condition.
or motor. (Refer to paragraphs
13-111, 13-121,
13-125 and 13-128. )
High-voltage leak in Replace ignition as-

lead between ignition sembly. (Refer to
assembly and spark paragraph 13-114.)
plug.
Inoperative ignition If vibrator is in good

assembly. condition, replace ig-
nition assembly only.
(Refer to paragraph
13-114.)

Reissued: 2/18/81
5D23
TABLEXIII-II. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART (JANITROLHEATER) (14-VOLT) (cont.)
Heater fires but burns Restriction in fuel Remove nozzle for

unsteadily (cont. ). nozzle orifice. cleaning or replace-
ment. (Refer to para-
graphs 13-120, m and
n; 13-124, i; and
13-125, k and 1. )
Nozzle loose in retain- Tighten or replace the

er or improper spray nozzle as required.
angle. (Refer to paragraphs
13-123, e; 13-125, k. )
Heater starts then goes Lack of fuel at heater. Check fuel supply
out. through all components
from the cell to the
heater. Make nec-
essary corrections.
Inoperative or chat- Check, adjust, or re-

tering combustion air place switch. (Refer
pressure switch. to paragraph 13-116.)
Inoperative overheat Check or replace switch.

switch. (Refer to paragraphs
13-115 and 13-132. )
Inoperative cycling Adjust or replace the

switch. switch. (Refer to
paragraphs 13-115
and 13-132. )
Low voltage. Attach external power.
5D24 5D24 Reissued: 2/18/81

TABLE XIII-II. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART(JANITROL HEATER) (14-VOLT)(cont.)
Heater fails to shut off. Fuel solenoid valve in Remove and replace
heater stuck open. solenoid assembly.
13-120, q; 13-122, k;
and 13-125, a. )
Inoperative duct and Check and repair.

cycling switch. (Refer to paragraphs
13-115 and 13-118. )
Defective HEATER Replace the HEATER

switch. switch.

Reissued:2/18/81
5E1
2524
4
10
11
3
12
2
14
16
17
,VENTILATING AIR BLOWER

2. FUEL INLET
3. PRESSURE SWITCH
4. FUEL REGULATOR
6. HOSE, CABIN HEAT
7. IGNITION ASSEMBLY
8. TERMINAL STRIP
9. HOSE, DEFROSTER
10. LIMIT SWITCH
11.HEAT REGULATOR
12. CYCLING SWITCH
13. HOSE, CABIN HEAT, REAR
14. CONTROL CABLE,
CABIN HEAT, REAR
16. EXHAUST TUBE
17. DRAIN, FUEL LINE
18. DRAIN, HEATER
19. HOSE, HEATER AIR INTAKE
Figure 13-21. Heater Assembly and Combustion Air Blower

251
HIGH VELOCITY
WHIRLINCFLAME
PLUG
SPARK / COMBUSTION
AIR
INLET
FUELINLET
AIR
HEATED
VALVE
EXHAUST
GASES
FRESHAIR
FROMBLOWER
Figure 13-22. Diagramatic Cutaway of Heater to Show Whirling Flame Action
13-92. DESCRIPTIONOF HEATER AND BASICCOMPONENTS.
13-93. SPARK-SPRAYIGNITION. (Refer to Figure 13-22.) The controlled atomized

spray from a specially designedspray nozzle, coupled with high-voltagespark plug ignition,
insures instant firing and continuous burning under all flight conditions.
Heat is produced by burning a fuel-air mixture in the combustion chamber of the heater.
Aviation gasoline is injected into the combustion chamber through the spray nozzle. The
resulting cone-shaped fuel spray mixes with combustion air and is ignited by a spark from
the spark plug. Voltage for ignition is supplied by an ignition unit which steps up the
14 or 28-volts to a high, oscillatingvoltage to provide a continuous spark across the spark
plug gap. A shielded, high voltage lead connects the ignition assembly to the spark plug.
Combustion air enters the combustion chamber tangent to its surface and imparts a whirling
or spinning action to the air. This produces a whirling flame that is stable and sustains
combustion under the most adverse conditions because it is whirled around itself many
times. Therefore, ignition is continuous and the combustion process is self-piloting. The
burning gases travel the length of the combustion tube, flow around the outside of the inner
tube, pass through cross-overpassagesinto an outer radiating area, then travel the length of
this surface and out the exhaust.
Ventilating air passes through the heater between the jacket and combustion tube
assembly outer surface and through an inner passage in the assembly. Consequently,
ventilating air comes into contact with two or more heated, cylindrical surfaces.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5E3
382 C499
Figure 13-23. Fuel Regulator Figure 13-24. Top View - Duct Switch
and Shutoff Valve (Typical Control Lever Positions)
13-94. FUEL REGULATORAND SHUTOFF VALVE. (Refer to Figure 13-23.)

This unit provides preset, regulated fuel pressure as well as remote shutoff to the heater,
regardless of fuel inlet pressure variations. It is adjustable to 7 psi, with inlet pressuresup to
50 psi. The shutoff valveis operated by a solenoid.
13-95. DUCT SWITCH. (Refer to Figure 13-24.) This switch is installed in the ventilating
air duct downstream from the heater to sense the ventilating air outlet temperature. To
select the desired cabin temperature, the switch may be adjusted manually from a high of
250"F + 10° downward through a range of 146"F + 6° . The switch has a differential of
10' F + 5 ° at any givensetting.

5E4 Reissued:2/18/81
13-96. COMBUSTIONAIR BLOWER. This centrifugal-type blower supplies com-

bustion air to the combustion chamber of the heater. Performance of the com-
bustion air blower is assisted by the use of ram air during flight.
13-97. VENTILATING AIR BLOWER. This blower is attached to the inlet end of
the heater assembly and provides a source of ventilating air through the heater.
Ram air from the ventilating air intake scoop is used during flight.
13-98. OPERATING CONTROLS. (Refer to Figure 13-25.)
NOTE
The schematic diagram (Refer to Figure 13-25.) shows

the heater circuit, including the electrical wiring in the
airplane.
a. The HEATER SWITCH is connected in the line that supplies electricalpower

to all heater equipment and controls. When this switch is in the OFF position,
the entire heater system is inoperative. This switch has a FAN position which
permits use of the ventilating air blower to circulate cool air through the system
for summer ground operation. With the switch in FAN position, the heater is in-
operative and only the ventilating air blower is energized.
b. The HEATER SWITCH is a normally open switch that supplies power to
(lock-in) the safety relay through which power is supplied to the ignition and fuel
circuits of the heater.
13-99. OPERATING PROCEDURE. (Refer to Figure 13-25.)

a. Place the HEATER SWITCH in the ON (or HEAT) position. The ventilating
air and combustion air blowers should operate.
b. The heater will ignite and continue to operate.
c. The DUCT SWITCH can be set to regulate the cabin temperature for desired
comfort level. If this switch is set for ground operating comfort, it may be nec-
essary to reposition it after being airborne, since ram air will increase the ven-
tilating air flow and the heater output.
d. To stop heater operation, turn off the HEATER SWITCH.
e. It is desirable to operate the fan several minutes to cool the heater after
operation. To stop fan operation, turn OFF the HEATER SWITCH.

VENT AIR
TO LANDINGGEAR ITERMINAL BLOWER
"UP" LIGHT - I- STRIP
:UIT
CIRC - LANDINGGEAR L1 RADIONOISE
BREAKER SWITCH FILTER
14-28
VOLTS
FUEL
SOLENOID
VALVE
HEAT
HEATER
SWITCH
107-16
RADIO NOISE
FILTER COMBUSTION
AIRCRAFT CONTROL CIRCUIT AIR BLOWER
Figure 13-25. Wiring Diagram
13-100. INSPECTION OF HEATER AND HEATER COMPONENTS.
13-101. PREFLIGHT AND OR DAILY INSPECTION.

a. Inspect the ventilating air inlet scoop, combustion air inlet scoop, exhaust
outlet and fuel drain for possible obstructions. Make sure that all of these open-
ings are clear of any restrictions and that no damage has occurred to air scoop
protrusions.
b. Perform an operational check as follows:
1. Place the HEATER SWITCH in the ON (or HEAT) position. The venti-
lating air blower and combustion air blower should operate.

Revised: 4/26/83
5E6
NOTE
To proceed with the operational check, follow paragraph 13-99

entitled Operating Procedure, steps a through e. The above
procedure should be repeated one or more times.
13-102. 100-HOUR INSPECTION. The mandatory 100-Hour Inspection shall beconducted on new heaters
or overhauled heaters with a new combustion tube assembly upon accumulation of 500-heater operating hours
or twenty-four months, which-ever occurs first, and thereafter at intervals not to exceed 100-heater operating
hours or twenty-four months, whichever occurs first. If an hour-meter is used on the heater assembly, it should
be connected across terminals number 2 and 5 on the heater terminal strip. If an hourmeter is not used, count
one heater operating hour for each two flight hours for normal aircraft operation. Consideration should be
given for any excessive ground operation of the heating system.
NOTE
The 100 Hour Inspection consists of the functional checks and

inspection listed below and the Pressure Decay Test.
a. Inspect ventilating air and combustion air inlets and exhaust outlet for restrictions and security at
the airplane skin line.
b. Inspect the drain line to make sure it is free of obstructions. Run a wire through it if necessary to
clear an obstruction.
c. Check all fuel lines for security at joints and shrouds, making sure that no evidence of leaks exists.
Also check for security of attachment of fuel lines at the various attaching points in the airplane. Check fuel
pressure to ensure 7 psi.
d. Inspect electrical wiring at the heater terminal block and components for loose connections,
possible chafing of insulation, and security of attachment points.
e. Inspect the high-voltage cable connection at the spark plug to make sure it is tight. Also, examine
the cable sheath for any possible indications of arcing, which would be evidenced by burning or discoloration
of the sheath.
f. Inspect the combustion air blower assembly for security of mounting and security of connecting
tubing and wiring. Tigthen any loose electrical terminals and air tube connections.
g. Operate both the combustion and ventilating air blowers and check for unusual noise or vibrations.
h. It is recommended that the condition of the spark plug be check for operation as described in
paragraph titled "Spark Plugs".
i. Evaulate the condition of the combustion chamber by performing a "Pressure Decay Test" as
described in Janitrol Maintenance and Overhaul Manual P/N 24E25-1 dated October 1981.
j. Following the 100 hour inspection, perform the "Preflight and/or Daily Inspection".
13-103. MAINTENANCE SERVICE. Instructions contained in this section consists of periodic inspection,
adjustments, and minor corrections required at normal designated intervals for the purpose of maintaining the
heating system in peak operating condition. These inspections assume that a heating system includes accessory
components mentioned in preceding paragraphs.
13-104. REMOVAL OF JANITROL HEATER.

a. Turn the heater control switches off.
b. Remove the forward access panel, located on the left side of the fuselage nose section.
c. Open the forward baggage door and remove the heater cover box located on the left rear side of the
baggage compartment floor.
d. Remove the screws that attach the air intake elbow to the front of the heater.

5E7
5E7
Revised: 4/26/83
e. Note the hook-up of the electrical wires to facilitate reinstallation and dis-
connect wires from heater.
f. Disconnect the heater exhaust shroud from the heater jacket at the aft bot-
tom side of the heater and slide it down enough to allow the exhaust tube to be
disconnected. Remove both the shroud and tube.
g. Disconnect the drain from the forward bottom side of the heater.
h. Loosen the shroud covering the fuel inlet line fitting located at the forward
top side of the heater.
i. Disconnect the combustion air blower inlet tube and outlet adapter leading
to the heater. Loosen the clamp that secures the air blower motor and roll the
unit out of the way or remove it, as desired.
j. Loosen the two clamps that secure the heater to its mounting brackets.
k. Located under the aft clamp are four screws that attach the air distribution
box to the heater. Remove these screws.
1. Separate the heater from the air distribution box and remove the heater
from the airplane.
m. To remove the air distribution box, disconnect the air hoses locatedon each
upper side of the box.
n. Disconnect the duct switch and cabin heat control cables.
o. Remove the two screws that attach the cabin heat hose to the lower aft end
of the distribution box and remove box.
13-105. INSTALLATION OF JANITROL HEATER.

a. Position the air distribution box and attach the cabin heat hose to the lower
aft end of the distribution box.
b. Place the heater in position on its mounting brackets andattach the air dis-
tribution box to the heater with four screws.
c. Connect and secure the exhaust tube to the exhaust of the heater.
d. Position and secure the exhaust tube shroud to the jacket of the heater.
e. Connect the drain tube to the bottom of the heater.
f. Tighten the two clamps that secure the heater to its mounting brackets.
g. Connect the heat control cable to the control arm located on the right side
of the air distribution box. Adjust the cable so that when the door is completely
closed, approximately one-sixteenth of an inch exists between the control knob
and knob stop.
h. Connect the duct switch control cable to the switch on the left side of the
air distribution box. Adjust the cable so that when the control knob is full in
against its stop, the control arm aligns with the vertical line of the switch. (Do
not loosen the allen set screw that secures the arm to the switch shaft.) Pull the
control knob out to ascertain that the control arm will have a 140° ± 1° travel to
high heat position. (Refer to Figure 13-24.)

5E8
i. Connect the cockpit heat and defroster air hoses to the air distribution box.
j. Place the combustion air blower in position, connect the outlet adapter to
the heater and blower inlet tube. Secure blower in position.
k. Connect the fuel inlet line, and secure the fitting shroud in position.
l. Connect the electrical wires to the heater.
HEATER TERMINAL BLOCK WIRING
1 H4A
2 H1E H2B
3 H1D
4 H9A
5 H8A H10A
6 H2A
m. Within the baggage compartment, attach the air intake elbow to the front of
the heater.
n. Operate the heater long enough to determine that the unit is operatingprop-
erly.
o. Install the access box in the baggage compartment and panel at the side of
the fuselage.
13-106. HEATER ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CHECKS.
13-107. ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY CHECK. These tests are listed as an aid

in isolating open circuited or inoperative components.
NOTE
The schematic wiring diagram (Figures 13-25, 13-26
and 13-27 shows, in addition to the heater circuitry,
a suggested aircraft control circuit. For the purposes
of this manual, the circuitry shown in these illustra-
tions will be utilized to describe electrical continuity
checks.
It must be assumed that power, which is furnished through the heater cir-
cuit breaker, is present at the HEATER SWITCH at all times. Always check the

5E9
VENT.AIR
TO LANDINGGEAR TERMINAL BLOWER
"UP" LIGHT STRIP
CIRCUIT LANDING GEAR FILTER

BREAKER LAND
14-28 1301-1 I
VOLTSD.C. r CYCLING
ADJUSTABLE
I OVERHEAT
SWITCH SPARK
PLUG
107-16
I RADIO NOISE
FILTER COMBUSTION
AIRCRAFT CONTROL CIRCUIT AIR BLOWER
Figure 13-26. Primary Power Circuit
circuit breaker before performing electrical continuity checks.
13-108. VENT BLOWER POWER CIRCUIT CHECK. (Refer to Figure 13-26.) With the
HEATER SWITCH in the FAN position, electrical continuity (1 4-28-volts nominal) should
be present at the followinglocations:
a. Terminal No. 6 on the heater terminal strip.
b. From terminal No. 6 of the heater terminal strip through the radio noise filter to the
ventilating air motor.
c. Electrical ground circuit for the ventilating air motor is provided from terminal No.
4 of the heater terminal strip through the LANDINGGEAR SWITCHwhen the landing gear
is down. Ventilatingair motor is inoperative when the landing gear is up.

5E10
FUEL
SOLENOID
VALVE
AIRCRAFT CONTROL CIRCUIT
Figure 13-27. Starting Power Circuit
13-109. HEATER POWER CIRCUIT CHECK. (Refer to Figure 13-27.) ) With the
HEATER SWITCH in the HEAT position, electrical continuity should be present
at the following locations:
NOTE
Power for the ventilating air blower is the same as

described above except that power is now supplied
through the HEAT side of the HEATER SWITCH.
a. Terminal No. 1 of the heater terminal strip.

b. From terminal No. 1 of the heater terminal strip through the radio noise
filter, to the combustion air motor and to terminal No. 1 of the overheat switch.
c. From terminal No. 3 of the overheat switch through the combustion air
pressure switch to terminal No. 2 of the heater terminal strip.
5E11 5E Reissued: 2/18/81

d. From terminal No. 2 of the heater terminal strip, through the radio noise
filter, to the ignition unit; to the shutoff valve; and through the adjustable duct
switch to terminal No. 3 of the heater terminal strip.
e. From terminal No. 3 of the heater terminal strip, through the cycling switch
to the fuel solenoid valve.
In the event that electrical continuity is not present at one or more of the
above listed points, the wiring must be traced back to the power source. If com-
ponents are still inoperative after the wiring inspection, check the individual in-
operative components for continuity and, if necessary, replace them.
13-110. MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS. Instructions in this paragraph pertain

to maintenance of the basic heater and components while the heater is installed
in the airplane. Instructions for removal of components are included provided
the installation permits accessibility.
NOTE
No special service tools are required for normal pe-

riodic maintenance.

a. Removal:
1. Disconnect wire at quick-disconnect terminal.
2. Disconnect the inlet tubing from the inlet air adapter.
3. Loosen the clamps that hold the combustion air blower assembly in the
support bracket and slide the motor out of the bracket.
b. Replacing Motor Brushes: (Refer to Figure 13-32.)
1. Remove the brush cap at one of the brush locations. Note position of
brush inside the guide and carefully lift the brush and brush spring out of the
guide. Be sure to hold the brush so that it can be reinstalled in precisely the
same position if no brush replacement is required.
2. Inspect the brush for wear. A new brush is 17/32 inch long. If brushes
are worn to a length of 3/16 inch, they must be replaced.
3. Looking through the brush guide, inspect the commutator, which should
be smooth and medium brown to dark brown in color. Remove all dust from com-
mutator with compressed air. If the commutator is grooved in the brush track,
gouged, scored or shows signs of having burned spots, replace the complete mo-
tor assembly. If the commutator is in good condition, install new motor brushes,
and tighten brush caps into place. Make sure each brush is oriented so that the
curved end fits the curvature of the commutator.
5E12 5E12 Reissued: 2/18/81

4. After installing new brushes, it is advisable to run-in the brushes as

follows: Connect the motor to a controlled voltage supply (rheostat in a 12-volt
line). Operate the motorat approximately one-half its normal speed for the first
hour, then gradually increase the speed until it is rotating at approximately nor-
mal speed. Continue the run-in operation for at least two hours to properly seat
the brushes before installing the blower in the airplane.
c. Installation:
1. Prior to installing the combustion air blower, inspect all parts of the
assembly for loose screws, loose nuts and poor ground connection on the blower
housing. Make sure the blower wheel is tight on the shaft and properly located
in the housing. It should have just enough clearance to rotate at full speed with-
out binding against the spill plate. Blower performance is based upon this close-
tolerance clearance. It is recommended that correct voltage be applied for this
clearance check.
2. Install the blower inlet adapter in the same orientation as before re-
moval.
3. Place the combustion air blower assembly in position in the attaching
clamp so the air tubing can be connected, and slide the tubing into position at the
point where it was disconnected during removal. Tighten the motor in the at-
taching strap.
4. Secure the air tubing by tightening the clamp or installing the sheet metal
attaching screws.
5. Connect the wire lead to No. 1 terminal on terminal strip.
6. Check motor operation. Bydisconnecting the wire at the No. 3 terminal
on heater terminal strip, blower can be operated without fuel flow to the heater.
13-112. SPARK PLUG. (Refer to Figure 13-31.)

a. Removal:
1. Remove the necessary access panels to expose the spark plug area of
the heater assembly.
NOTE
Insure that heater electrical circuits are de-energized.
2. Unscrew and remove the high-voltage lead connector at the spark plug.
Exercise care to avoid fouling or damaging the connector.
3. Remove the grommet (23).
4. Using a 7/8 inch deep hex socket, unscrew and remove the spark plug
(22). Make sure the spark plug gasket is removed with the spark plug. It will
normally stick on the spark plug threads, but if loose, it might drop into the ven-

Reissued: 2/18/81
5E13
tilating air passages of the heater. 385

Should this happen, remove the gasket
with a wire hook. 0.050 to 0.060 inch BEND TO ADJUST
b. Inspection and Servicing:
1. If the spark plug appears to CENTER
ELECTRODE
be in good condition, except for a mild GROUNDELECTRODE
coating of oxide on the porcelain and
electrodes, it may be cleaned and re-
used. Cleaning is accomplished on a
conventional airplane type spark plug
cleaner, except that it will be necessary
to use two or more adapters in order
to raise the long extension of the plug
far enough out of the cleaner nozzle
opening to provide an effective job. Plug
the ceramic insert cavity at the ter- Figure 13-28. Spark Plug Gap
minal-end of the plug with a piece of Adjustment
paper or cloth to keep out any of the
cleaning sand. Wipe this cavity out thoroughly with a cloth, wet with carbon tet-
rachloride. If, after cleaning, the spark plug porcelain is white, and the elec-
trodes are not eroded, re-gap the spark plug by carefully bending the ground
electrode until a 0.055 inch feeler gauge can be inserted between the end of the center
electrode and the ground electrode.
NOTE
If the spark plug fails to clean up properly and/or if

electrodes are badly eroded, it should be replaced.
c. Installation: (Refer to Figure 13-28.)

1. If a new spark plug is being installed, be sure to measure the gap which
should be between 0.051 and 0.060-inches. Do not bend the center electrode.
NOTE
The spark plug can be checked visually for sparking

across the gap prior to installing the plug as follows:
Disconnect the wire from the No. 3 terminal on the
heater wiring side of the terminal strip to de-energize
the fuel solenoid valve. Connect the high-voltage lead
temporarily and lay the spark plug on the heater jacket.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5E14
WARNING
Be sure to plugthe spark plug hole in the heater to pre-

vent any possibility of residual fuel blowing out and ig-
niting. Do not touch the spark plug while energized
because of dangerously high voltage.
2. Place a new spark plug gasket on the threads. If the gasket does not
hold on the threads and would be likely to fall off during installation, place a small
drop of Aviation Permatex, or similar material, on the gasket to stick it tempo-
rarily to the plug shell.
3. Screw the spark plug into the heater with a deep socket. Tighten to a
torque of 28 foot pounds.
4. Install the grommet (Refer to Figure 13-31, 23) in the heater jacket
opening.
5. Carefully insert the spring connector on the high-voltage lead into the
spark plug shell, press down gently and start the nut on the threads. Tighten the
nut to 20 foot pounds.
6. Reconnect the wire to the No. 3 terminal on terminal strip, if discon-
nected for above tests.
7. Operate the heater to check dependability and close all access openings.
13-113. VIBRATOR ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 13-31.)

a. Measure the distance the vibrator protrudes out of the ignition assembly to
determine when the new unit is inserted properly. Grasp the vibrator (19) and
with a slight back and forth movement, pull it straight out of the ignition unit.
(For a friction grip, it may be necessary to use a piece of masking or friction
tape around the exposed portion of vibrator.)
b. Carefully rotate the new vibrator until the index marks are aligned and the
connector pins on the vibrator can be felt entering the pin sockets in the vibrator
socket, then press the vibrator fully and firmly into position.
c. Check the heater for operation.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5E15
13-114. IGNITION ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 13-31.) This unit converts aircraft DC buss voltage t
oscillating current capable of producing a continuous spark in the combustion chamber of the heater. This uni
remains energized and produces a continuous spark during heater operation. It contains a condenser, resistor,
radio noise filter and vibrator socket. It also has an externally mounted vibrator and ignition coil.
a. Removal of ignition assembly:
NOTE
Make sure the heater electrical circuits are de-energized.
I. Disconnect the primary wire (5) from the primary terminal of the ignition assembly (18).
2. Carefully unscrew and disconnect the high voltage ignition cable at the spark plug. Exercise
care to avoid fouling or damaging the connector.
3. Remove the four attaching screws (20) and lockwashers (21) and lift the ignition assembly (18)
off the mounting brackets on the heater jacket.
b. Installation of ignition assembly:
1. Place the ignition assembly in position on the brackets attached to the heater jacket, with the
high voltage cable facing the spark plug end of the heater.
2. Install the four screws (20) and lockwashers (21). Tighten the screws assembly.
3. Carefully connect the high voltage lead to the spark plug. (Refer to paragraph 13-112, c.)
4. Connect the primary lead (5) to the primary terminal on the ignition unit (18) and tighten the
nut securely.
5. Check for proper heater operation.
c. Testing ignition unit:
The ignition unit does not require complete overhaul. The following test will indicate whether
or not the unit is operational and whether the vibrator should be replace before reinstallation in the aircraf
The following equipment is required to test the components:
1. A battery that will supply power at approximately 14 to 28 volts DC.
2. A voltmeter with a range of 0-30 volts.
3. A lead from the battery to the test fixture in which is included an ammeter with a range of 0-3
amperes and a normally open, momentary-closed switch. The total resistance of the lead including the
ammeter and switch must not exceed 0.3 ohms.
4. A spark gap of 0.187 of an inch +/-0. A convenient means of arranging the correct spark gap is
to install a spark plug, P/ N 39D 18, in a test fixture arranged to provide a ground electrode and a .187 of an
inch spark gap. (Refer to Figure 13-28a for information on fabricating this fixture.)
NOTE
Any one of the several spark plugs may be used with the new spark
plug fixture detailed in Figure 13-28a. However, the "A" dimension
in that sketch must be varied with the length of the spark plug
electrode to provide a gap of .187 of an inch for all spark plugs.
NOTE
When testing an ignition unit, do not use a screwdriver as a

substitute for a spark plug and spark plug fixture.
HEATING AND VENTILATION SYSTEM

5E16
5E16 Revised: 4/26/83
5. The high tension shielded ignition lead between the ignition unit and the spark plug is a part of
the cover-assembly.
6. Arrange the test equipment as shown in Figure 13-28b.
d. Operational test of ignition unit:
1. Close the momentary switch and read the voltmeter and ammeter. Release the momentary
switch immediately.
2. The amperage reading at 28 volts DC must be 1.25 +/-0.25 amperes.
13-115. CYCLING SWITCH AND LIMIT (OVERHEAT) SWITCH. (Refer to Figure 13-31.)
a. Removal:
1. If the limit switch (27) is damaged or defective, disconnect the two electrical leads from the
switch terminals. Be sure to mark the leads for proper reassembly. (The switch terminals are identified by
numbers "1", "2" and "3".)
2. Remove the two attaching screws (28), lockwashers (20) and plain washers (30) and lift the
limit switch (27) and spacers (gaskets) (31) from the jacket opening.
3. If the cycling switch (32) is damaged or defective, disconnect the electrical leads, being sure to
mark them for proper reassembly.
4. Remove the two screws (33), lockwashers (34) and plain washers (35) and lift the cycling switch
(32) from the jacket opening.
5E17 5E17 Revised: 4/26/83

C697
NOTE
1 IN. HEX S.A.E. 1112 SCREW
STOCK 0.640 DIA. DRILL
CANFER 45 x 1/16 NEAR
0
DIMENSION (A) VARIES WITH
END ONLY. THREAD 18 M.M.
LENGTH OF SPARK PLUG.
-1.5 M.M. PITCH S.A.E. SPARK
0.125 DIA. PLUG STANDARD
3.00 INCH
ABLE GAP 1010-1020 STEEL ROD
1.50
0.3125 DIA. ROD, 0.50 LONG

1010-1020 STEEL ROD
DRILL AND TAP FOR 4-40 SCREW
LOCATED 1/4 IN. EITHER END
SCREW-MACHINE, RD. HD, AN OR NOTE: ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
MS 4-40-1/4 IN. LONG *DENOTES SILVER SOLDER
Figure 13-28a. Spark Plug Fixture
C584
INTERNAL
TEST
CIRCUIT
TOTAL RESISTANCE A TO B MUST NOT

EXCEED 0.3 OHMS
Figure 13-28b. Wiring - Test Setup

5E18 Revised: 4/26/83
NOTE
No attempt should be made to repair either of these

switches. If they do not operate properly, they should
be replaced. (Refer to paragraph 13-132, m and n for
test instructions.)
b. Installation:
1. Install the limit switch (27) and spacer (gasket, 2 required) (31) by placing them
in position in the heater jacket openingand installingtwo screws (28), lockwashers (29) and
plain washers(30).
2. Tighten screws securely, then reconnect the electrical leads inaccord-
ance with markings made during disassembly. (If electrical connections are un-
certain, refer to the wiring diagram, Figure 13-25.)
3. Install the cycling switch (Refer to Figure 13-31, 32)by placing it in po-
sition in the heater jacket opening and securing it with the two screws (33), lock-
washers (34) and plain washers (35). Tighten screws securely, then reconnect
the electrical leads to their respective terminals as marked during disassembly.
(If connections are uncertain, refer to wiring diagram, Figure 13-25.)
13-116. COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH. (Refer to Figure 13-31.)

a. Removal:
1. Disconnect electrical leads from the terminals of the combustion air
pressure switch (41), being sure to mark them for proper reassembly. Discon-
nect the tube from the switch cap. Exercise caution not to exert excessive bend-
ing of the tube. (It is "tacked" to the combustion chamber inside the jacket.)
2. Unscrew and remove the combustion air pressure switch from the fit-
ting on the combustion air inlet tube.
b. Installation:
1. Install the combustion air pressure switch (41) by rotating it on the
threaded fittingof the combustion air inlet tube and tighten it securely. Exercise
caution not to over-torque the switch as this could change the setting.
2. Connect electrical leads to their respective terminals in accordance
with markings made during removal. If in doubt regarding proper connections,
refer to the wiring diagram, Figure 13-25. Connect the tube to the switch cap.

5E19
13-117. FUEL REGULATOR AND SHUTOFF VALVE. (Refer to Figure 13-32.)

a. Removal:
1. Remove the cover from the fuel regulator/shutoff valve shroud assembly.
2. Disconnect the electrical lead to the valve.
3. Disconnect the fuel lines from the valve nipples.
4. Remove the two bolts securing the valve and shroud to the bulkhead, and save the standoff
bushings and washers for reinstallation of the valve and shroud assembly.
b. Installation:
1. Place the regulator/shutoff valve into the shroud. Insure the correct positioning of inlet and
outlets ports to their respective lines, and secure the valve and shroud to the bulkhead using the two standoff
bushings, washers and bolts.
2. Connect the fuel lines to the valve and tighten securely.
3. Connect the electrical lead. Be sure an insulating sleeve or tape is placed over the connection to
avoid any possiblity of a short circuit. If a sleeve is used, secure it in place.
4. Perform an operational check of the heater to insure that the unit is functioning properly and
no fuel leaks exist.
Reinstall the shroud cover on the shroud assembly
13-118. DUCT SWITCH. (Refer to Figure 13-32.)

a. Removal:
1. Place the control lever arm in high position and loosen the Allen-head set screw that secures
the arm to the temperature selector shaft. Slide the lever and arm off the shaft.
2. Disconnect the two electrical leads from the terminals on the exposed face of the switch.
3. Remove the two attaching screws and washers from the duct.
4. Carefully lift out the switch and gasket (if gasket is used).
b. Cleaning and Inspection:
I. Brush-off any duster lint from the switch operating mechanism (exposed inside the duct) at
wipe external surfaces with a clean cloth.
c. Installation:
1. Insert the switch carefully, with gasket (if used), into the ventilating duct opening and install
the two attaching screws and washers.
2. Connect the two electrical leads to their respective terminals, as marked during removal.
3. Set the temperature selector shaft at the high stop. Then carefully place the control lever arm
on the shaft at the high position and lock the lever by tightening the Allen-head set screw. (Do not overtighten.)
Rotate the lever arm to make sure it clears the electrical terminal screws and support bracket when it is moved
to the high position.
4. Operate the heater with the duct switch set above ambient temperature to check operation.
(Refer to paragraph 13-132, 1 for additional tests and setting instructions.)

5E20
5E20
Revised: 4/26, 83
13-119. OVERHAUL INSTRUCTIONS. The heater assembly shall be overhauled after

1000 hours or whenever the pressure decay test requirement cannot be met. The heater should
be removed from the aircraft, disassembled, all parts throughly inspected and necessary
repairs and/or replacements made prior to reassembly. Detailed step-by-step instructions are
included for a complete heater overhaul. In some instances, however, inspections may reveal
that it is unnecessary to remove certain parts. If so, those portions of the overhaul procedures
may be eliminated.
NOTE
For disassembly and reassembly operations, refer to the

exploded view drawingsand the parts list.
13-120. DISASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 13-31.)

a. Remove the screw (4) and slide the elbow adapter (3) off the combustion air inlet
tube.
b. Disconnect and remove electrical wiring and individual wires from the various
components on the heater. If wires appear to be in good condition, it may be desirable to
remove wire harness assembly intact. First, disconnect wires at terminal strip and
components. The ventilating air blower housing must be removed so that the two motor
wires and solenoid valve quick-disconnect connections may be released.
NOTE
It is advisable to label all wires, prior to removal to insure

correct connections during reassembly. Cable straps and clips
must be replaced if removed, as they cannot be reused.
c. Carefully disconnect the high-voltage ignition lead at the spark plug. Handle the
spring connector on the end of this lead with care to prevent fouling or damage.
d. Remove the four screws (20), lockwashers (21) and cable straps (17) to free the
ignition assembly (18) from the heater jacket and remove the ignition assembly. The
vibrator may be removed by exerting a firm pull straight away from the ignition assembly
case.
e. Remove the two screws (25) and lockwashers (26) to release the radio-noise filter
(24) from the jacket (84).
f. Remove the grommet (23) from the jacket (84) and remove the spark plug (22) with
a 7/8 inch deep socket. Make sure the spark plug gasket is removed.

Revised: 4/26/83
5E21
g. Remove the two screws (28), lockwashers (29) and plain washers (30) and
lift out the overheat (limit) switch (27) and spacer gaskets (31).
h. Remove the two screws (33), lockwashers (34) and plain washers (35) and
lift out the cycling switch (32).
i. Remove the four screws (37) and lockwashers (38) to release the terminal
strip (36) and insulator (39) from the jacket (84).
j. Disconnect the tube fitting (40) at the cover of the combustion air pressure
switch (41). (Refer to paragraph 13-116, a, (1) for precaution on tube bending. )
Unscrew andremove the combustion airpressure switch (41) from the combustion
air inlet tube.
k. Loosen the four screws (48) and rotate the blower and motor housing (59)
to disengage the notched end from the four screws in the end of the heater jacket.
Remove the grommet (47) and separate the two electrical quick-disconnects after
sliding back the insulator sleeves on the wire ends.
1. Reach inside the inlet end of the jacket assembly (84) with a 3/4 inch open-
end wrench and, while holding the fuel-tube fitting at the jacket, remove the re-
ducing bushing adapter (42). Then, with 3/4 inch deep socket, remove the nut
(44), fuel fitting shroud (43) and gasket (46).
m. Remove the two screws (72) and lockwashers (73) and carefully withdraw
the nozzle holder and valve assembly from the combustion tube assembly (86).
Remove the gasket (82).
n. Remove the screws (88 and 69), lockwashers (71) andremainingcable straps
(17), if not previously removed, from the seam of the jacket assembly (84). Note
positions of cable straps as they are removed. Spread the jacket (84) at the seam
and remove it from the combustion tube assembly (86). This will free the rope
gasket (85) which can be removed from the particular part on which it remains
attached.
o. Carefully unscrew and remove the spray nozzle (83) from the nozzle holder
and solenoid valve assembly.
CAUTION
Handle the nozzle with care to avoid damage to the tip.

The material around the orifice is very thin and any
sharp blow on the face of the nozzle can distort the
spray patternandcause mal-ignition or improper com-
bustion.
p. Remove the screw (76), lockwasher (77), cover (75) and "O" ring (78). Then
carefully slide the solenoid coil (79) off the valve assembly. It is not necessary
to remove the base plate (80) unless it is warped.
q. Loosen the nut (55) and remove the screw (53), flat washer (45) and rubber

5E22 5E22 Reissued: 2/18/81
grommet (58) from the blower housing.

r. Remove the two screws (54), flat washers (45) and rubber grommets (58)
at the other two locations around the blower motor housing (59).
s. Slide the ventilating air blower motor out of the blower housing (50) with
the motor bracket assembly (52) and blower wheel (60) attached. Loosen the set
screw in the blower wheel (60) and slide it off the end of the motor shaft. The
flat washers (58) and rubber washers (57) will fall out when the bracket is re-
moved. Then remove the motor bracket assembly (52). If these parts are in good
condition, they need not be disassembled further.
t. Remove the screw (62) and lockwasher (63) to free the capacitor assembly
(61) with attached leads.
13-121. DISASSEMBLYOF COMBUSTIONAIR BLOWER ASSEMBLY. (Refer to

Figure 13-32.)
a. Remove the combustion air blower inlet adapter (2) by removing three
screws, lockwashers, cover plate and gasket.
b. Remove the outlet adapter (5) by removing the two screws (6)and lockwash-
ers (7).
c. Remove the inlet flange (8) by removing the three screws (9)and lockwash-
ers (10).
d. Remove screws (12 and 16) and lockwashers (13 and 17), then separate the
back plate (20), with motor (25) attached, from the blower housing (15) and free
the motor leads and capacitor (11) from the back plate (20).
e. Loosen the set screw in the blower wheel (19) and slide it off the motor
shaft.
f. Remove the two hex nuts (21), lockwashers (23) and flat washers (22), and
slide the back plate (20) off the motor through bolts. The spacer (24) will drop
out.
g. Install new motor brushes as described in paragraph 13-111, b. If the
motor commutator is badly worn, or if the motor is defective in any respect, it
must be replaced.
13-122. CLEANING. (Refer to Figure 13-31.)

a. Clean individual metal parts (except those parts containing switches and
electrical wiring) and the combustion tube assembly, by immersing them in dry-
cleaning solvent, such as Stoddard solvent (Federal Specification P-D-680). A
bristle brush should be used to assist the cleaning process if foreign accumula-
tions are stubborn to remove.

5E23
CAUTION
Do not attempt to buff or scrape off any deposits on

face of spray nozzle. The face of the nozzle is very
susceptible to damage from mishandling. Carefully
repeat cleaning process using only a bristle brush and
repeated applications of solvent to loosen any stub-
born deposits.
b. Use compressed air or lintless cloth to dry the parts, unless sufficient time
is available for them to air dry.
c. Wipe electrical components with a clean, dry cloth. If foreign material is
difficult to remove, moisten the cloth in carbon tetrachloride or electrical con-
tact cleaner and clean all exterior surfaces thoroughly.
13-123. CLEANING AND INSPECTING THE COMBUSTION TUBE ASSEMBLY.

a. Slight scaling and discoloration of the combustion tube assembly (86) is a
normal condition for units that have been in service up to 1000 airplane hours.
The slight scaling condition will appear to be mottled and a small accumulation
of blue-gray powder may be present on the surface in certain areas. This con-
dition does not require replacement of combustion tube assembly, unless severe
overheating has produced soft spots in the metal.
NOTE
This assembly should be inspected prior to cleaning

in order to prevent the removal of visible evidences
of damage.
b. Look inside the exhaust outlet to determine if the combustion tube appears
to be heavily scaled or mottled. Deformation is more difficult to detect visually
but can usually be observed by looking straight through the combustion tube as-
sembly and sighting along the outer surface of the inner combustion tube. An as-
sembly that has been obviously deformed should be replaced. Slight deformation
will not affect heater operation unless it is extensive and localized enough to re-
duce the flow of ventilating air through the heater more than 10 percent.
c. The combustion tube assembly may be cleaned by either of two methods:
1. One method is to soak the combustion tube assembly overnight in an
Oakite M-S Stripper solution, made by mixing one pound of Oakite salts with each
gallon of water used. The solution should be maintained at a temperature of be-

Reissued: 2/18/81
5E24
tween 190° F and 210 ° F. After overnight soaking, rinse the combustion tube
assembly thoroughly in water to remove all traces of the Oakite solution. In or-
der to reach all areas of the combustion tube assembly, it is advisable to let it
stand in the rinsingwater for as long as one-half hour, while occasionallyagitating
it to circulate the water. All openings should be left open during this operation.
Be sure to dry the combustion tube assembly thoroughly after cleaning.
2. A second method of cleaning is what is commonly known as hand "tum-
bling. " Insert shot or other metallic particles through the exhaust outlet open-
ing, then close all openings and shake the combustion tube assembly vigorously,
while rotating it and changing from end-to-end frequently. Be sure to pour out
all of the particles and loosened material, then with all openings uncovered, di-
rect a stream of compressed air into the combustion tube assembly from first
one opening, then the other. Make sure all loose material is removed.
13-124. INSPECTION OF REMAINING COMPONENTS. (Refer to Figure 13-31.)

a. Discard all rubber parts such as grommets, gaskets, etc. These items
should always be replaced at overhaul. Also discard the rope gasket (85).
b. Inspect all wires and wiring harnesses for damage to insulation, damaged
terminals, chafed or cracked insulation and broken plastic bands. Individual
wires can be replaced by making up new wires from No. 16 AWG stock and cut to
correct length. It is advisable to use an acceptable crimping tool for installing
terminals, rather than solder for all heater wiring connections. If wiring har-
ness damage is visible, the entire harness assembly should be replaced. If only
one or more wires are damaged, cut the cable ties, make up new wires, install
them in the harnesses, and restore all cable ties and clamps. If heater controls
were operating properly at the time of removal, reinstall them.
c. Inspect all hard parts, consisting of bolts, screws, nuts, washers and lock-
washers. Replace damaged parts.
d. The combustion air pressure switch (41) must respond to delicate pres-
sure changes and should always be checked and/or replaced at overhaul. (Refer
to paragraph 13-125, c, and Figure 13-30.)
e. Replace the vibrator in the ignition unit at each overhaul.
f. Inspect the ignition assembly (Figure 13-31. 18) for dented case, loose or
damaged primary terminal insulator and broken or obviously damaged high-voltage
lead. Give particular attention to the condition of the spring connector at the end
of the lead. If the spring is burned off, visibly eroded, or carbon tracked, the
ignition assembly should be replaced.

Reissued:2/18/81
5F1
NOTE
Do not attempt a field repair of the ignition unit, as it

is a sealed assembly.
g. Inspect the terminal strip (36) for distortion and cracks and replace it if
either condition exists.
h. Inspect radio-noise filters for short circuits by checking from either ter-
minal to ground with an ohmmeter. An open-circuit reading should be obtained.
i. Inspect the spray nozzle (83) with a magnifying glass for any obstructions
in the nozzle orifice and any sign of damage to the slight conical protrusion at the
nozzle tip. Use compressed air to remove obstructions and re-examine it to make
sure the orifice is open. Exercise care when handling the nozzle to avoid press-
ing or rapping on the tip face. Do not burr or scrape off deposits on the tip face.
After cleaning, it is advisable to store the nozzle in a polyethylene bag until ready
for reassembly.
j. Replace the nozzle at overhaul.
NOTE
The nozzle (83) can be spray tested by installing it in the

holder and connecting the fuel tube to a 7 psi fuel pressure
source. Connect the solenoid leads to a 14-28-volt source
(battery) to open the solenoid valve. The conical angle spray
pattern should be even and dispersed the same in all
directions. Exercise caution to keep atomized fuel away from
fire.
k. Inspect the nozzle holder and solenoid valve assembly for damaged threads
at the fuel-tube fitting, crimped or cracked fuel line or distorted housing. The
only part in this assembly that can be replaced is the solenoid winding. Check
the solenoid for continuity by connecting across each wire lead with an ohmmeter.
A reading of between 18 and 22-ohms should be obtained at room temperature. If
not within these limits, or if the solenoid winding shows any form of physical dam -
age or overheating, it should be replaced.
1. Remove the brushes, one at a time, from the ventilating air blower motor
(65) by removing the brush cap and carefully withdrawing the brush from its guide.
Remove foreign material from the brush guide and commutator with a stream of
filtered compressed air. Check for brush wear. (Refer to paragraph 13-111. )
Inspect the commutator for grooved brush track, pitting or burning. The commu-
tator surface should be smooth and medium brown in color. Replace the motor
if the commutator or other parts show damage.

m. Inspect the combustion air blower motor as described in the preceding step.
n. Inspect the blower wheel for broken or bent vanes and replace it for either
condition.
13-125. TESTING. The following tests should be performed as outlined in the succeeding
paragraphs.
a. Check ventilating air and combustion air motors for correct RPM and current draw:
1. Connect motor to 14-28-volt DC power supply. Rotation should be
counterclockwise when viewedfrom the shaft end.
2. Both motors should rotate at approximately 7500 RPM at rated voltage. Current
draw is approximately five amperes.
3. If current draw is excessive, or if speed is too low, replace the brushes. Recheck
both current draw and RPM after brushes are properly run-in. (Refer to paragraph 13-111,
b.)
4. If after replacing brushes operation is still unsatisfactory, replace the motor.
NOTE
The motor checks described above should be made without

the blower housing attached, for both the ventilating air and
combustion air motors.
b. Test the combustion tube assembly(86) for leads as follows:

1. Fashion a sealing plate from approximately .125 inch thick flat stock to seal the
nozzle holder opening in the combustion tube assembly. (Refer to Figure 13-29.) Use a
rubber gasket under the plate and attach the plate with two screws.
2. Make up seals for all remaining openings, except the one used to connect the air
pressure source. (Refer to Figure 13-29.) Use rubber stoppers as shown. The combustion air
inlet tube can be sealed best with a drilled stopper and clamp. Other openings should be
sealed with expansion plugs. The seal used in the exhaust tube should be formed so that it
will not deform the air pressure switch tube which protrudes into the exhaust.
3. Install plugs and caps in all openings except the one to which the combustion air
pressure switch is attached. (Any opening can be used to connect the air pressure source,
however, the combustion air pressure switch opening is usually the most convenient. The
drain openingwould normally be considered a second choice.)
4. Connect a regulated air supply to the opening that has not been plugged and
apply a pressure of between three and five psi to the combustion tube assembly.
5. Submerge the combustion tube assembly in water for several minutes while
watching for bubbles, which would indicate leaks. No air leakage is permitted from the
combustion tube assembly. No weld or braze repairs are permitted on a combustion tube
assembly.
c. Test the combustion air pressure switch as follows:
1. Connect an adjustable air pressure line that can be controlled in a range of zero
to 5.0 (maximum) of water to the switch opening with a water manometer and needle valve
in the line ahead of switch. Switch must be tested in 45 degree position as shown in Figure
13-30.

5F3 Revised: 4 26 83
387
1/8" THICK STOCK
STOPPER
RUBBER
0.180 DIA.
I-
NOZZLE OPENING COVER PLATE
DRILLOUT TO
WING NUT NECESSARYDIA.
FLATWASHER
STOPPER
RUBBER
I I CLAMP
DRILLFORBOLT
SEALCAP
FLATWASHER
BOLT
- EXPANSION PLUG
Figure 13-29. Suggested Design for Seal Plate,

Plugs and Caps for Combustion Tube Leakage Test
2. Connect an ohmmeter across the switch terminals to determine the exact instant
of switch closing.
3. Apply air pressure allowing it to build up very slowly from zero. The switch
contacts should close at 0.5 ± 0.1 inches of water which will be indicated on the
manometer.
NOTE
The switch cover has a differential pressure tap and this

opening must be left open to atmosphere during the test.
4. Make several trials to insure switch reliability. Be sure to increase and decrease
the air pressure slowly in order to produce accurate indications.
5. If an adjustment is required, rotate the adjusting screw clockwise to increase
settings and counterclockwise to decrease settings.
d. Test the fuel feed and nozzle holder assembly for leaks as follows: This test can be
simplified if the following routine is used to test both the fuel line and fuel line shroud
tube:
1. Using filtered compressed air, apply 20 psi to the shroud drain port, located on
the surface near the threaded nozzle cavity.
2. Immerse the fuel feed and nozzle holder assembly in clean water with the fuel
inlet and nozzle cavity left open.
3. Observe for bubbles which would indicate leakage. If bubbles appear at either
fuel fitting, there is a leak in the fuel tube. If bubbles appear externally on the shroud tube
or at either end of the shroud tube juncture, the shroud tube is leaking.
HEATING AND VENTII.ATING SYSTEM

Reissued:2 18 81
5F4
ADJUSTING
SCREW
Figure 13-30.Test Setup for Combustion Air Pressure Switch
4. In either of the above cases, the complete fuel feed and nozzle holder assembly
must be replaced.
e. Spray test the nozzle (Figure 13-31,83) as follows:
1. Install the nozzle in the fuel feed and nozzle holder assembly and connect the
fuel tube to a 7 psi fuel pressure source.
2. Connect the solenoid leads to a 14-28-voltbattery. Connect a switch in the line
to open and close the solenoid when desired.
WARNING
Be sure to keep the atomized spray away from fire.

3. With the switch closed (solenoid valve energized) and the fuel line connected,
observe the fuel spray pattern. It should be conical in shape with even dispersion in all
directions.

5F5 5F5 Reissued: 2/18/81
4. Energize and de-energize the solenoid several times. The spray should
shut off permanently each time the solenoid is de-energized. There should be no
sign of dribbling at the nozzle tip in excess of one or two drops.
5. If the spray pattern is distorted, check for an obstruction and clean the
nozzle as described in paragraph 13-124, i. If this fails to provide a normal
spray pattern, replace the nozzle.
6. If the nozzle continues to dribble, the solenoidvalve is not closingprop-
erly and the fuel feed and nozzle holder assembly must be replaced.
13-126. REPAIR OF COMBUSTION TUBE ASSEMBLY. No weld or braze repairs of

the combustion tube assemblyare authorized.
13-127. REASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 13-31.)

a. If removed during disassembly, slide the solenoid coil (79) on the stem of
the nozzle holder and solenoid valve assembly. Install the "O" ring (78), cover
(75), screw (76) and lockwasher (77), then tighten the screw securely. Be care-
ful to avoid pinching the wire leads connected to the solenoid core.
b. Insert the ventilating air motor (65) into the motor bracket assembly (52),
slide the blower wheel (60) on the end of the motor shaft and rotate it until the set
screw is aligned with the flat side of the motor shaft. Tighten the set screw just
tight enough to hold it at this time.
c. Attach the capacitor and leads assembly (61) to the motor bracket (52) with
HEATING AND VENTILATINGSYSTEM

Revised:4/26 83
5F6
Legend for Figure 13-31.
1. HEATER ASSEMBLY 45. WASHER - FLAT

2. PLATE - IDENTIFICATION 46. GASKET - AN900-8
3. ADAPTER 47. GROMMET - MS35489-35
4. SCREW - AN530-6R6 48. SCREW
5. WIRE ASSEMBLY IGNITION TO FILTER 49. BLOWER ASSEMBLY - VENT AIR
6. WIRE ASSEMBLY - BLOWER GROUND 50. SLEEVE - HIGH TEMPERATURE
7. WIRE ASSEMBLY - HEATER GROUND 51. SLEEVE - HIGH TEMPERATURE
8. WIRE ASSEMBLY - TERMINAL I TO OVERHEAT SWITCH 52. BRACKET ASSEMBLY - MOTOR
9. WIRE ASSEMBLY - TERMINAL 2 TO IGNITION FILTER 53. SCREW - MACHINE
10. WIRE ASSEMBLY - TERMINAL 6 TO BLOWER FILTER 54. SCREW - MACHINE
11. WIRE ASSEMBLY - TERMINAL 2 TO PRESSURE SWITCH 55. NUT - AN335-4
12. WIRE ASSEMBLY - TERMINAL 3 TO CYCLE SWITCH 56. WASHER - FLAT
13. WIRE ASSEMBLY- PRESSURE SWITCH TO OVERHEAT SWITCH 57. WASHER - RUBBER
14. WIRE ASSEMBLY - CYCLE SWITCH TO FUEL VALVE 58. GROMMET - MS35489-8
15. WIRE ASSEMBLY TERMINAL 1 TO COMBUSTION AIR BLOWER 59. HOUSING - BLOWER
16. TIE - CABLE 60. FAN - VENT AIR BLOWER
17. STRAP - CABLE 61. CAPACITOR ASSEMBLY
18. IGNITION ASSEMBLY 62. SCREW - AN515-8R6
19. VIBRATOR - IGNITION 63. WASHER . AN936A6
20. SCREW - AN515-BR7 64. WIRE ASSEMBLY - BLOWER GROUND
21. WASHER - AN935AB 65. MOTOR ASSEMBLY - VENT AIR BLOWER
22. PLUG - SPARK 66. CAP - BRUSH ASSEMBLY
23. GROMMET - AN931-10-20, MS35489-18 67. BRUSH ASSEMBLY - MOTOR
24. FILTER - RADIO NOISE 68. TERMINAL
25. SCREW - AN515-8R5 69. SCREW - AN515-8R5
26. WASHER - AN936AB 70. WASHER - AN960-8
27. SWITCH - LIMIT 71. WASHER - AN936A8
28. SCREW- AN515-6R6 72. SCREW - AN515-8R8
29. WASHER - AN936AB 73. WASHER - AN935-8
30. WASHER - AN960-8 74. FUEL FEED, NOZZLE HOLDER AND VALVE ASSEMBLY
31. GASKET - LIMIT SWITCH 75. COVER - SOLENOID
32. SWITCH - CYCLING 76. SCREW * AN515-8R6
33. SCREW - AN515-8R8 77. WASHER - AN935-8
34. WASHER - AN936A8 78. PACKING * "O" RING
35. WASHER - AN960-8 79. COIL ASSEMBLY - SOLENOID
36. STRIP - TERMINAL 80. PLATE - SOLENOID BASE
37. SCREW - AN 15-8R10 81. VALVE ASSEMBLY - FUEL
38. WASHER - AN935A8 82. GASKET - VALVE ASSEMBLY
39. INSULATOR - TERMINAL STRIP 83. NOZZLE - FUEL SPRAY
40. ELBOW - PRESSURE SWITCH 84. JACKET ASSEMBLY
41. SWITCH - PRESSURE 85. GASKET - ASBESTOS
42. BUSHING - AN894-4-2 86. TUBE - COMBUSTION
43. SHROUD - FUEL FITTING 87. TUBE - COMBUSTION AIR SWITCH
44. NUT - AN924-4 88. SCREW - AN515-8R4

Reissued: 2/18/81
5F7
Reissue: 2/18/81
AND
751 999 (28-volt)
5F8
the screw (62) and lockwasher (63). Make sure a good electrical ground connec-
tion is made at this point.
d. Insert this assembly into the blower housing (59) and position it so the long
screw (53) is in alignment with the gap on the inner ring of the motor bracket as-
sembly (52). This is the screw used to secure and align the motor in the bracket.
e. Slide the flat washer (58) and rubber washer (57) into position between the
legs of the motor bracket (52) and blower housing (59).
f. Make sure all wires are routed and grommeted as they were prior to dis-
assembly and install the two screws (54), flat washers (45) and new grommets
(58) at the two lower edges securing the motor bracket assembly (52). Then in-
stall the grommet (58), flat washer (45), nut (55) and screw (53) in the remaining
(upper) corner of the motor bracket assembly.
g. Center the motor bracket (52) in the housing and tighten the screw (53) to
secure it. The motor (65) should be positioned in the bracket (52) to locate the
blower wheel (60) properly in the blower housing (59). The blower wheel should
be positioned so it will rotate freely and just clear the contoured spill plate in the
blower housing. Tighten the Allen-head set screws and spin the blower wheel by
hand for a clearance check. Then apply appropriate voltage to run the motor as
a final clearance check.
h. Place a new asbestos gasket (85) in position on the exhaust outlet, spring the
jacket assembly (84) open at the seam and insert the combustion tube assembly
(86) carefully into the jacket. Exercise care to clear the pressure switch tube in
the exhaust outlet and see that the asbestos gasket (85) is properly located. Close
the gap on the jacket assembly and install screws (88 and 69) and lockwashers
(71) to secure it at the seam. (Two leads ground under these screws. See nota-
tions made during disassembly. ) Make sure the tongue and channel at the seam
are in good condition and a tight fit is effected.
i. Install cable straps at locations noted during disassembly.
j. Remove the spray nozzle (83) from the polyethylene bag. Screw the nozzle
into the nozzle holder and tighten to 75-100 inch pounds. It is very important to
torque the nozzle to this valve as incorrect tightening could cause improper heater
operation and "drool. "
CAUTION
The spray nozzle has a slight protrusion on the nozzle

face. If this area has been struck by any object which
would make a dent or destroy the original contour, the
nozzle must be replaced. It cannot be disassembled for
cleaning.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5F9
k. Insert the fitting on end of nozzle fuel tube throughthe opening in the jacket
(84) and attach the nozzle holder to the combustion tube assembly (86) with the
two screws (72) and lockwashers (73). It may be necessary to place a slight bend
in the shrouded fuel tube to permit alignment of screw holes. Be sure to use a
new gasket (82) and connect the solenoid ground wire under one of these screws.
Make sure a good electrical ground connection exists at this point.
1. Using a new spark plug gasket, install the spark plug (22) and tighten to a
torque of 28 foot pounds. Install the grommet (23) in the jacket around the spark
plug.
m. Install the ignition assembly (18) on the jacket assembly (84) with the four
screws (20) and lockwashers (21). Connect the high-voltage lead to the spark
plug and tighten it to 20 foot pounds.
n. Attach the radio-noise filter (24) to the jacket assembly (84) with the two
screws (25) and lockwashers (26).
o. Attach the overheat limit switch (27) and spacer gaskets (31) to the jacket
assembly (84) with two screws (28), lockwashers (29) and flatwashers (30). Tight-
en the screws securely.
p. Attach the cycling switch (32) to the jacket assembly (84)with the two screws
(33), lockwashers (34) and flat washers (35).
q. Place the terminal strip insulation (39) in position on the jacket (84), fol-
lowed by the terminal strip (36). Secure both parts by installing the two screws
(37) and lockwashers (38). The two screws are located at two diagonal corners
of the terminal strip.
r. Center the fuel fitting in jacket opening. Place the fuel fitting shroud gasket
(46) and shroud (43) on the fuel fitting and install the nut (44) finger tight. Insert
a 3/4 inch open-end wrench inside the jacket and hold the fuel-tube fitting while
tightening the nut (44) with a 3/4 inch deep socket. Install the reducer fitting (42).
s. Rotate the combustion air switch (41) onto the threaded fitting on the com-
bustion air tube and tighten it firmly.
t. Slide the grommet (47) over the combustion air tube and connect the tube to
the elbow fitting (40) on the combustion air pressure switch (41).
u. Install the wiringharness and connectall wire leads totheirrespective ter-
minals. (Refer to the wiring diagram, Figure 13-25.) Place the grommet (47,
Figure 13-31) in position in the jacket (84), locate the ventilating air blower (49)
at the end of the jacket. Thread the quick-disconnect on the wiring harness through
the grommet (47) and connect it to the mating connector on the motor lead.
v. Place the blower housing in position on the jacket assembly (84) and secure
it by installing the four screws (48), if removed at disassembly. This operation
is easier if the screws (48) are started into their threads and the blower housing
rotated into place, allowing the screws to enter the notched openings in edge of
blower housing. Tighten all screws securely.
w. Install the elbow adapter (3) with the screw (4).

Reissued: 2/18/81
5F10
13-128. REASSEMBLYOF COMBUSTIONAIR BLOWER ASSEMBLY. (Refer to

Figure 13-32.)
a. Place the spacer (24) over the end of the motor shaft and attach the motor
assembly (25) to the back plate (20) with the two self-locking nuts (21), flat wash-
ers (22) and lockwashers (23).
b. Slide the blower wheel (19) on the motor shaft and tighten the set screw
lightly against the flat portion of the motor shaft.
c. Place the blower housing (15) in position on the back plate (20) and install
screws (16) and lockwashers (17).
d. Attach the capacitor (11) at the point shown with the screw (12) and lock-
washer (13). The motor ground lead terminal (28) can be grounded to the motor
support bracket (3).
e. Attach the inlet flange (8) and blower inlet adapter (2) to blower housing (15)
with three screws (9) and lockwashers (10).
f. Loosen the Allen set screw in the blower fan (19) and shift the fan on the
motor shaft until it is near the inlet in the blower housing. Tighten the set screw
securely. The blower fan should just clear the inlet flange when rotated at full
RPM. Spin the blower fan by hand for clearance check; then apply proper voltage
to run motor and recheck for proper clearance.
g. Slide the blower outlet adapter (5) on the blower housing outlet (15) and in-
stall the two screws (6) and lockwashers (7).
13-129. TEST PROCEDURE.
13-130. GENERAL INFORMATION. A test of all components should have been

made after overhaul to insure proper operation. Some shops may not have com-
plete testing facilities for measuring air flows, pressure drops and other factors
which would be accomplished in a laboratory-type test. If such a test cannot be
made, install the heater and check operation on the ground and in the air to de-
termine if operation is normal. In shops where complete test equipment is avail-
able and a complete functional test can be performed, the test routine described
in subsequent paragraphs should be made.

Reissued: 2/18 81
5F11
-
25
1. COMBUSTION AIR BLOWER AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY 24. SPACER

2. ADAPTER ASSEMBLY - BLOWER INLET 25. MOTOR ASSEMBLY - COMBUSTION AIR BLOWER
3. BRACKET - MOTOR SUPPORT 26. BRUSH ASSEMBLY
4. CLAMP - MOTOR MOUNTING 27. CAP - BRUSH ASSEMBLY
5. ADAPTER - OUTLET 28. TERMINAL - PREINSULATED
6. SCREW 29. STRAP - CABLE
7. WASHER - AN936AB 30. SCREW - AN520-10R
6. PLATE - BLOWER HOUSING 31. NUT - MS20364-1032A
9. SCREW 32. SCREW
10. WASHER - AN936A6 33. WASHER - AN936-A8
11. CAPACITOR 34. TUBE - HOUSING OUTLET
12. SCREW 35. SWITCH ASSEMBLY - ADJUSTABLE DUCT
13. WASHER - AN93A6 36. LEVER ASSEMBLY - SWITCH
14. SLEEVE- HIGH TEMPERATURE 37. SCREW - ANSB65DH3
13. HOUSING - BLOWER 38. COVER - SWITCH
16. SCREW 39. SWITCH - ADJUSTABLE DUCT
17. WASHER - AN936A6 40. SPACER
18. GASKET - BACK PLATE 41. FUEL REGULATOR AND SHUTOFF VALVE
19. FAN - COMBUSTION AIR BLOWER 42. SHROUD- FUEL FITTING
20. PLATE - BACK 43. HOSE - FUEL FITTING SHROUD
21. NUT - AN345-10 44. CLAMP - HOSE
22. WASHER - AN60-10L 45. GROMMET - AN93 1-2-9
23. WASHER - AN936-B10 46. CAPACITOR - .02M- IKV
Figure 13-32. Exploded View - Combustion Air Blower

and Motor Assembly No. 753 443 (14-volt), 758 120 (28-volt)

5F12
5F12 Reissued: 2 18:81
11 VENTILATING
COMBUSTION OMBUSTION AIR BLOWER AIR

AIR MANOMETER MANOMETER
COMBUSTION AIR
PRESSURE
SWITCH THERMOMETER
OVERHEAT (LIMIT)
FUEL IN SWITCH
(FROM PUMP)
CYCLING SWITCH
HEATER
Figure 13-33. Suggested Set-Up for Heater Operation Test
13-131. EQUIPMENTREQUIRED. (Refer to Figure 13-33.)

a. An improvisedstand to hold the heater during test. The heater should be located far
enough away from any combustible material or atmosphere to avoid hazard. A location
should be chosen where exhaust can be dispelled. Do not add an excessiveextension to the
heater exhaust.
b. A source of fuel capableof being regulated at seven psi.
c. The combustion air blower to be used with the heater should be used for the test.
d. A 14-28-volt DC power supply. A rheostat connected in series with the supply to
adjust the voltage and current. An ammeter connected in series with the supply to monitor
the current. A voltmeter connected in parallel with the supply to monitor the voltage.
e. Two water manometers (zero to 5.0-inch water column) for measuringthe pressure
in the ventilatingair duct and in the combustion air stream.
f. A piece of duct to be attached to the downstream end of the heater. It should have a
minimum length of 24-inches and the same diameter as the heater being tested. A 2.25-inch
diameter orifice should be centrally located at the outlet end. An aperature should be
provided for the thermometer and duct switch and a static tap should be attached as shown
in Figure 13-33.
g. A thermometer with 500 F scale.
h. A fuel-pressuregauge.
i. A controlled source of compressedair for final leakage test.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5F13
VENT.AIR
STRIP
Figure 13-34. Wiring Connections for Heater Operation Test
13-132. OPERATIONAL TEST. (Refer to Figures 13-33and 13-34.)

a. Connect the heater to the test set-up as shown in Figure 13-33. Make sure
the combustion air blower is mounted securely andat at the heater is clamped to
its supporting stand.
b. Insert the ductswitch inhe sheet metal extension tubeat the location shown
in Figure 13-33.
c. Connect components and heater as outlinedin thewiringconnectiondiagram,
Figure 13-34. The power supply switch should beopen.
d. Connect the power source to the heater.
e. Disconnect wire lead from terminal "3" on the heater side of the heater
terminal strip to prevent the heater from lighting and close the power source
switch to check operation of blowers. The combustion air blower and ventilating
air blower should operate at full speed with no blower wheel interference. If
either blower fails to run, locate and correct the trouble before proceeding with
the test.
f. Connect a voltmeter from open side of combustion air pressure switch ter-
minal to ground to determine if the switch is closed, which would be indicated by
a full voltage reading on the meter. If a full voltage reading is not obtained, the

Reissued: 2/18/81
5F14
combustion air supply is either inadequate or the switch is defective or improp-

erly adjusted. Make necessary corrections.
g. Observe the manometer connected to the ventilating air pressure tap, which
should show a reading of 1. 1 inches of water (minimum) at rated voltage.
h. Observe the manometer connected to the combustion air tube tap, which
should show a reading of 1. 5 inches of water (minimum) at rated voltage.
i. Open the power supply switch and reconnect the terminal lead disconnected
in preceding step e.
j. Close the power supply switch and turn on the fuel supply. The heater should
light within five seconds (may require slightly longer for air to be purged from
fuel lines on the first trial).
k. Observe operation of duct switchwhich should control heater operation ac-
cording to the switch setting.
1. If the duct switch fails to control the temperature according to the setting,
place the control lever in high "H" position and notice the control variation. A
high reading of 250 ° F ± 10° should be obtained (reading willvary indifferent ap-
plications).
m. Connect a jumper across the terminals of the duct switch to make it inop-
erative and observe action of the cycling switch. The cycling switch should cycle
to control the outlet air temperature at approximately 250 ° F (nominal). This is
^ a function of ambient temperature and air flow conditions. If operation is within
a range of 190° F to 290° F, the switch is operating normally. If the switch is
out of range it can be reset in the same manner as described for the duct switch,
except that no control lever or indicator stop are used. If adjustment fails to
restore proper temperature range, replace the switch.
n. With duct switch still jumped, place a jumper across the cycling switch
terminals to check operation of the overheat switch. Block the ventilating air
outlet and notice if the overheat switch shuts off the heater. It should open at
between 300° F and 400 ° F. (This is also a function of ambient temperature and
air flow.) After the switch shuts off, remove ventilating air restriction; remove
jumpers from cycling and duct switches and press firmly on the overheat switch
reset button until it "clicks. " The heater should light and operate.
o. Shut down the heater and check all components visually to make sure no
damage has occurred to any of them.
p. Remove heater and other components from the test set-up and install it in
the airplane.

Reissued:2/18/81
5F15
13-133. REPLACEMENTOF FUEL FILTER ELEMENT. The fuel filter element located
on the aft bulkhead in the fuselage nose section may be replaced by the following
procedures:
a. Remove the access panel from the right side of the nose section.
b. Cut the safety wire on the bottom of the filter.
c. Remove the bowl and filter by unscrewing the round nut at the bottom of the bowl.
d. Clean the bowl and filter with a dry cleaningsolvent. Replace the filter element and
gasket as necessary.
e. Position the bowl and filter; tighten the round nut and safety with MS20995C32
safety wire.
f. Operate the system and check for fuel leaks.
13-134. REMOVAL OF HEATER FUEL VALVE. (Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-7405431

inclusive.) The fuel control valve for the heater operation is located in the fuel control box
between the two front seats, and may be removed by the followingprocedure:
a. Remove the two front seats from the airplane.
b. Remove the attaching screws from around the top and sides of the fuel control box.
NOTE
If the valve assembly is being removed due to leakage around

the valve stem, refer to paragraph 13-135 for corrective
action.
c. Lean the box forward and disconnect the outlet fuel line from the valvein the right
side of the box.
d. Disconnect the knob and rod from the top of the valve by removing the self-locking
nuts and machine screws.
e. Remove the valve by unscrewingit from the attaching fitting.
13-135. INSPECTION OF HEATER FUEL VALVE. (Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-7405431

inclusive.) (Refer to Figure 13-36.)
a. Remove the elbow fitting from the valveassembly.
b. The stem assembly (2) may be removed by cutting the safety wire (1) and
unscrewing the cap nut (6) with stem handle (3).
c. Inspect the stem, seat body and threads for possible damage.
d. If any part of the stem assembly is damaged or if the cap nut (6) is not drilled for
safetying purposes, replace the complete valve assembly.
e. Reassemble the unit and tighten the cap nut (6) tight enough to prevent leakagebut
not to hamper turning the stem handle (3).
f. Safety the cap nut (6) with safety wire (1) MS20995C32. (Refer to Figure 13-36.)
NOTE
If leakage is still evident around the valve stem, replace the

complete valve assembly. (Refer to Parts Catalog for Part
No.)

Reissued: 2/18/81
5F16
A792
1. SAFETY WIRE 6. CAP NUT

1. SAFETY WIRE 5. INLET PORT 2. STEM 7. OUTLET PORT
2. ROUNDNUT 6. GASKET 3. STEM HANDLE 8. VALVE BODY
3. BAIL WIRE 7. FILTER 4. SEAL 9. INLET PORT
4. FILTER BOWL 8. SPRING 5. WASHER
Figure 13-35. Heater Fuel Filter Figure 13-36. Heater Fuel Valve. Serial
Nos. 27-1 to 27-7405431 incl.
13-136. INSTALLATIONOF HEATER FUEL VALVE. (Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-7405431
inclusive.)
a. Install the pressure side of the valve to the crossfeed drain line. The pressure side is
marked with a "P" stamped on the valve body. On early valvesthat are not stamped the
pressure side can be determined by looking into the body ends, with the valve closed; the
end where no part of the stem or seat is visible is the pressure side.
b. Connect the knob and rod to the stem handle of the valvewith machine screwsand
self-lockingnuts.
c. Connect the fuel line fitting on the right side of the box to the valve.
d. Operate the left electric fuel pump and check for leakagearound the valve stem and
connections of the valve body. To determine that the valve seat does not leak when the
valve is closed, remove the fuel filter bowl, turn on the electric fuel pump and note if fuel
flows from the filter housing inlet port.
e. Position the fuel control box and secure to the spar covering with attaching screws.
f. Install the front seats.
5F17 5F17 Reissued: 2/18/81

13-137. JANITROL HEATER. PA-23-250E, Serial Nos. 27-7554041 and up. This section
contains information for operation, serviceand overhaul of the combustion heater, Part No.
755 257 and combustion air blower, Part No. 758 304 (used with the heater).
13-138. TROUBLESHOOTING.The service troubles and suggested remedies listed in

Table XIII-II are provided to assist in locating and correcting malfunctions in the heating
system. The followingprocedure is based upon the use of optional components.
13-139. HEATER OPERATION. The 35,000 BTU Janitrol heater is controlled by a three
position switch located on the right side of the instrument panel, labeled FAN, OFF and
HEAT. The FAN position will operate the vent blower only and may be used for cabin
ventilation on the ground or windshield defogging when heat is not desired. For heat, the
three position switch must be turned to HEAT. This will start fuel flow and ignite the
burner simultaneously.
The heater uses gasoline from either left fuel tank when the fuel crossfeed is off and
from all tanks when the crossfeed is on.
The push-pull knobs at the bottom of the control pedestal control airflow and
temperature. The left control regulates air flowing to the front seat through the heater
system and the second knob from the left controls air flowing to the rear seat. The middle
knob is connected to an adjustable thermostat which makes it possible to select a desired
temperature of heated air. The second knob from the right is the defroster control and the
right knob controls the supply of cold air through the vent on the forward bulkhead.
For the overhaul and complete disassembly of the Janitrol heater and its components,
refer to paragraph 13-167 of this manual. A wiring diagram of the Heater Electrical System
Installation will be found in Section XI of this manual.
5F18 5F18 Reissued: 2 18 81

2525
7 8
10
12
13
15
.
20
17

2. FUEL SHROUD
3. PRESSURE SWITCH
4. FUEL REGULATOR
6. HOSE, CABIN HEAT
8. TERMINAL STRIP
9. HOSE DEFROSTER
10. LIMIT SWITCH
11. HEAT REGULATOR
12. CYCLING SWITCH
13. HOSE, CABIN HEAT, REAR
14. CONTROL CABLE, CABIN HEAT, REAR
16. EXHAUST TUBE
17. FUEL LINE DRAIN
18. DRAIN HEATER
19. HOSE, HEATER AIR INTAKE
20. HEATER COVER BOX ASSEMBLY
Figure 13-37. Heater Assembly and Combustion Air Blower

Reissued: 2/18/81
5F19
TABLE XIII-III. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART(JANITROL HEATER) (28-VOLT)
Heater fails to light. Heater switch or cir- Turn on heater switch

cuit breaker off. or close circuit breaker.
Low voltage supply. Apply external power

supply. Attempt to
start heater. (Refer to
paragraph 13-147.)
Fuel cut off from fuel Turn on manual shutoff

cell. valve or master sole-
noid.
Regulator not oper- Check for low pressure

ating properly. or replace regulator.
(Refer to paragraph
13-165.)
Restriction in fuel Remove the nozzle and

nozzle orifice. clean or replace it.
13-168, 13-172 and
13-175.)
Fuel heater solenoid Remove and check sole-
not operating. noid. Replace if faulty.
13-168, 13-172,k and
13-175, a.)
Fuel lines cloggedor Inspect all lines and

broken. connections. It may be
necessaryto disconnect
lines at various points
to determine where the
restriction is located.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5F20
TABLEXIII-III. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART(JANITROL HEATER) (28-VOLT) (cont.)
Heater fails to light. Ignition vibrator inop- Replace vibrator. Check

(cont.) operative. for defective radio
noise filter. (Refer to
paragraph 13-161.)
Manual reset limit Press reset button
(overheat) switch firmly and recheck to
open. determine reason for
switch opening.
Combustion air pres- Check for low blower
sure switch open. (De- output due to low volt-
fective switch or low age and correct it. If
combustion air blower switch is defective, re-
output.) place it. (Refer to
paragraph 13-164.)
Cyclingswitch open. Replace if defective.
(Refer to paragraph
13-163.)
Duct switch open. Operate control to see

if switch will come on.
Replace switch if de-
fective. (Refer to
paragraph 13-166.)
Ventilating air blower HEATER switch OFF. Energizethe HEATER

fails to run. Broken or loose wiring switch. Check and re-
to motor. pair wiring.
Circuit breaker open. Close circuit breaker.

(Refer to paragraph
13-159.)

Reissued: 2/18/81
5F21
TABLE XIII-III. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART (JANITROL HEATER) (28-VOLT)(cont.)
Ventilating air blower Blower wheeljammed. Remove and check the

fails to run. (cont.) ventilating air blower
wheel and realignif
necessary.(Refer to
paragraph 13-175.)
Motor burned out. Remove blower assem-

bly and replace motor.
13-168 and 175.)
Defectiveradio-noise Replace filter.

filter.
Combustion air blower Faulty wiring to motor. Inspect and replace

fails to run. faulty wiring.
Poor ground connection. Tighten ground screw.
(Refer to paragraph
13-159.)
Blower wheeljammed. Overhaulthe combustion

(Usually indicated by air blower. (Refer to
hot motor housing.) paragraphs 13-169and
13-176.)
Faulty or burned-out Remove combustion air

motor. motor for overhaul or
replacement of motor.
13-158, 13-168 and
13-176.)

Reissued: 2/18/81
5F22
TABLEXIII-III. TROUBLESHOOTINGCHART(JANITROL HEATER) (28-VOLT)(cont.)
Heater fires but bums Insufficient fuel supply. Inspect fuel supply to
unsteadily. heater including shut-
off valve,solenoid
valveand fuel lines.
Make necessaryrepairs.
Spark plug partially Replace spark plug.

fouled. (Refer to paragraph
13-160.)
Loose primary con- Tighten the connection.
nection at ignition
assembly.
Faulty vibrator. Replace the vibrator.
(Refer to paragraph
13-161.)
Combustion air blower Removeand overhaul
speed fluctuates. (Can the combustion air
be caused by low volt- blower assemblyas
age, loose blower required or correct
wheel,worn brushes low voltage condition.
or motor. (Refer to paragraphs
13-159, 13-169,
13-173 and 13-176.)
High voltage leak in Replace ignition as-

lead between ignition sembly. (Refer to
assemblyand spark paragraph 13-162.)
plug.
Inoperative ignition If vibrator is in good

assembly. condition, replace ig-
nition assemblyonly.
(Refer to paragraph
13-162.)

Reissued: 2/18/81
5F23
Heater fires but burns Restriction in fuel Remove nozzle for

unsteadily. (cont.) nozzle orifice. cleaningor replace-
ment. (Refer to para-
graphs 13-168, 13-172
and 13-173.)
Nozzle loose in retain- Tighten or replace the
er or improper spray nozzle as required.
angle. (Refer to paragraphs
13-171and 13-172,k.)
Heater starts then goes Lack of fuel at heater. Check fuel supply
out. through all components
from the cell to the
heater. Make nec-
essary corrections.
Inoperative or chat- Check, adjust, or re-

tering combustion air place switch. (Refer
pressure switch. to paragraph 13-164.)
Inoperative overheat Check or replace switch.

switch. (Refer to paragraphs
13-163 and 13-180.)
Inoperative cycling Adjust or replace the

switch. switch. (Refer to
paragraphs 13-163
and 13-180.)
Low voltage. Attach external power.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5F24
Heater fails to shut off. Fuel solenoid valvein Remove and replace
heater stuck open. solenoid assembly.
13-168, 13-170 and
13-173.)
Inoperativeduct and Check and repair.

cycling switch. (Refer to paragraphs
13-163 and 13-166.)
DefectiveHEATER Replace the HEATER
switch. switch.

5G1
5G1 Reissued:2/18/81
13-140. DESCRIPTIONOF HEATER AND BASICCOMPONENTS.
13-141. SPARK-SPRAY IGNITION. (Refer to Figure 13-37.) The controlled atomized

spray from a specially designed spray nozzle, coupled with high voltage spark plug ignition,
insures instant firing and continuous burning under all flight conditions.
Heat is produced by burning a fuel-airmixture in the combustion chamber of the heater.
Aviation gasoline is injected into the combustion chamber through the spray nozzle. The
resulting cone-shaped fuel spray mixes with combustion air and is ignited by a spark from
the spark plug. Voltage for ignition is supplied by an ignition unit which steps up the
28-volts to a high, oscillating voltage to provide a continuous spark across the spark plug
gap. A shielded, high voltage lead connects the ignition assembly to the spark plug.
Combustion air enters the combustion chamber tangent to its surface and imparts a whirling
or spinning action to the air. This produces a whirling flame that is stable and sustains
combustion under the most adverse conditions because it is whirled around itself many
times. Therefore, ignition is continuous and the combustion process is self-piloting. The
burning gases travel the length of the combustion tube, flow around the outside of the inner
tube, pass through crossover passagesinto an outer radiating area, then travel the length of
this surface and out the exhaust.
Ventilating air passes through the heater between the jacket and combustion tube
assembly outer surface and through an inner passage in the assembly. Consequently,
ventilating air comes into contact with two or more heated, cylindrical surfaces.
381
HIGH VELOCITY
HEATED AIR
FRESH AIR
FROM BLOWER
Figure 13-38. Diagramatic Cutaway of Heater to Show Whirling Flame Action

5G2 Reissued: 2 18 81
5G2
382
Figure 13-39. Fuel Regulator Figure 13-40. Top View - Duct Switch
and Shutoff Valve (Typical Control Lever Positions)
13-142. FUEL REGULATOR AND SHUTOFF VALVE. (Refer to Figure 13-39.) This
unit provides preset, regulated fuel pressure as well as remote shutoff to the heater,
regardlessof fuel inlet pressure variations. It is adjustable to 7.5 ± .5 psi with inlet pressures
up to 50 psi. The shutoff valveis operated by a solenoid.
13-143. DUCT SWITCH.(Refer to Figure 13-40.) This switch is installed in the ventilating
air duct downstream from the heater to sense the ventilating air outlet temperature. To
select the desired cabin temperature, the switch may be adjusted manually from a high of
250° F i 10 downward through a range of 146 F ± 6 . The switch has a differential of
10 F ± 5 ° at any givensetting.
13-144. COMBUSTIONAIR BLOWER. This centrifugal-type blower supplies combustion

air to the combustion chamber of the heater. Performance of the combustion air blower is
assisted by the use of ram air during flight.
13-145. VENTILATINGAIR BLOWER.This blower is attached to the inlet end of the

heater assembly and provides a source of ventilating air through the heater. Ram air from
the ventilating air intake scoop is used during flight.

Reissued: 2 18/81
5G3
13-146. OPERATINGCONTROLS.
NOTE
The schematic diagram (refer to Figure 13-41) shows the

heater circuit, including the electrical wiring in the airplane.
a. The HEATER SWITCHis connected in the line that supplies electricalpower to all
heater equipment and controls. When this switch is in the OFF position, the entire heater
system is inoperative. This switch has a FAN position which permits use of the ventilating
air blower to circulate cool air through the system for summer ground operation. With the
switch in FAN position, the heater is inoperative and only the ventilating air blower is
energized.
b. The HEATER SWITCHis a normally open switch that supplies power to (lock in)
the safety relay through which power is supplied to the ignition and fuel circuits of the
heater.
13-147. OPERATINGPROCEDURE.
a. Place the HEATER SWITCHin the ON (or HEAT) position. The ventilating air and
combustion air blowers should operate.
b. The heater will ignite and continue to operate.
c. The DUCT SWITCH can be set to regulate the cabin temperature for desired
comfort level. If this switch is set for ground operating comfort, it may be necessary to
reposition it after being airborne, since ram air will increase the ventilating airflowand the
heater output.
d. To stop heater operation, turn off the HEATER SWITCH.
e. It is desirable to operate the fan several minutes by placing HEATER SWITCHin
FAN position to cool the heater after operation. To stop fan operation, turn OFF the
HEATER SWITCH.
13-148. INSPECTIONOF HEATER AND HEATER COMPONENTS.
13-149. PREFLIGHT AND OR DAILY INSPECTION.

a. Inspect the ventilating air inlet scoop, combustion air inlet scoop, exhaust outlet and
fuel drain for possible obstructions. Make sure that all of these openings are clear of any
restrictions and that no damage has occurred to air scoop protrusions.
b. Perform an operational check as follows:
1. Place the HEATER SWITCHin the ON (or HEAT) position. The ventilating air
blower and combustion air blower should operate.
NOTE
To proceed with the operational check, follow paragraph

13-147 entitled Operating Procedure, steps a through e. The
above procedure should be repeated one or more times.

5G4 Revised:4 26 83
5G4
A493
TO LANDINGGEAR
"UP" LIGHT r-
CIRCUIT LANDINGGEAR
FUEL
SOLENOID
VALVE
ADJUSTABLE
HEATER SHUTOFF
ADJUSTABLE
107-16
RADIO NOISE
FILTER COMBUSTION
AIR BLOWER
Figure 13-41. Wiring Diagram
13-150. 100-HOUR INSPECTION. The mandatory 100-Hour Inspectionshallbeconductedonnew heaters

or overhauled heaters with a new combustion tube assembly upon accumulation of 500-heater operating hours
or twenty-four months, which-ever occurs first, and thereafter at intervals not to exceed 100-heater operating
hours or twenty-four months, whichever occurs first. If an hour-meter is used on the heater assembly, it should
be connected across terminals number 2 and 5 on the heater terminal strip. If an hourmeter is not used, count
one heater operating hour for each two flight hours for normal aircraft operation. Consideration should be
given for any excessive ground operation of the heating system.
NOTE
The 100 Hour Inspection consists of the functional checks and

inspections listed below and the Pressure Decay Test.
a. Inspect ventilating air and combustion air inlets and exhaust outlet for restrictions and security at
the airplane skin line.
b. Inspect the drain line to make sure it is free of obstructions. Run a wire through it if necessary to
clear an obstruction.

Revised: 4/26/83
5G5
c. Check all fuel lines for security at joints and shrouds, making sure that no evidenceof leaksexist
Also check for security of attachment of fuel lines at the various attaching points in the airplane. Check fuel
pressure to ensure 7 psi.
d. Inspect electrical wiring at the heater terminal block and components for loose connections,
possible chafing of insulation, and security of attachment points.
e. Inspect the high-voltage cable connection at the spark plug to make sure it is tight. Also, examine
the cable sheath for any possible indications of arcing, which would be evidenced by burning or discoloration
of the sheath.
f. Inspect the combustion air blower assembly for security of mounting and security of connecting
tubing and wiring. Tighten any loose electrical terminals and air tube connections.
g. Operate both the combustion and ventilating air blowers and check for unusual noise or vibrations.
h. It is recommended that the condition of the spark plug be checked for operation as described in
paragraph titled "Spark Plug".
i. Evaluate the condition of the combustion chamber by performing a "Pressure Decay Test" as
described in Janitrol Maintenance and Overhaul Manual P/N 24E25-1 dated October 1981.
j. Following the 100 hour inspection, perform the "Preflight and/or Daily Inspection".
13-151. MAINTENANCE SERVICE. Instructions contained in this section consists of periodicinspection,

adjustments, and minor corrections required at normal designated intervals for the purpose of maintaining
the heating system in peak operating condition. These inspections assume that a heating system includes
accessory components mentioned in preceding paragraphs.
13-152. REMOVAL OF JANITROL HEATER.

a. Turn the heater control switches off.
b. Remove the forward access panel located on the left side of the fuselage nose section.
c. Open the forward baggage door and remove the heater cover box located on the left rearside of the
baggage compartment floor.
d. Remove the screws that attach the air intake elbow to the front of the heater.
e. Note the hookup of the electrical wires to facilitate reinstallation and disconnect wires from heater.
f. Disconnect the heater exhaust shroud from the heaterjacket at the aft bottom side of the heater and
slide it down enough to allow the exhaust tube to be disconnected. Remove both the shroud and tube.
g. Disconnect the drain from the forward bottom side of the heater.
h. Remove the shroud covering the fuel inlet line fitting located at the forward top side of the heater.
i. Disconnect the combustion air blower inlet tube and outlet adapter leading to the heater. Loosen
the clamp that secures the air blower motor and roll the unit out of the way or remove it, as desired.
j. Loosen the two clamps that secure the heater to its mounting brackets.
k. Located under the aft clamp are four screws that attach the air distribution box to the heater.
Remove these screws.
l. Separate the heater from the air distribution box and remove the heater from the airplane.

5G6 5G6 Revised: 4/26/83
m. To remove the air distribution box, disconnect the air hoses located on each upper
side of the box.
n. Disconnect the duct switch and cabin heat control cables.
o. Remove the two screws that attach the cabin heat hose to the lower aft end of the
distribution box and remove box.
13-153. INSTALLATIONOF JANITROL HEATER.

a. Position the air distribution box and attach the cabin heat hose to the lower aft end
of the distribution box.
b. Place the heater in position on its mounting brackets and attach the air distribution
box to the heater with four screws.
c. Connect and secure the exhaust tube to the exhaust of the heater.
d. Position and secure the exhaust tube shroud to the jacket of the heater.
e. Connect the drain tube to the bottom of the heater.
f. Tighten the two clamps that secure the heater to its mounting brackets.
g. Connect the heat control cable to the control arm located on the right side of the air
distribution box. Adjust the cable so that when the door is completely closed,
approximately one-sixteenth of an inch exists between the control knob and knob stop.
h. Connect the duct switch control cable to the switch on the left side of the air
distribution box. Adjust the cable so that when the control knob is full in against its stop,
the control arm alignswith the vertical line of the switch. (Do not loosen the Allen set screw
that secures the arm to the switch shaft.) Pull the control knob out to ascertain that the
control arm will have a 140° + 1 travel to high heat position. (Refer to Figure 13-40.)
i. Connect the cockpit heat and defroster air hoses to the air distribution box.
j. Placethe combustion air blower in position, connect the outlet adapter to the heater
and blower inlet tube. Secure blower in position.
k. Connect the fuel inlet line and secure the fitting shroud in position.
1. Connect the electrical wires to the heater.
m. Within the baggage compartment, attach the air intake elbow to the front of the
heater.
n. Operate the heater long enough to determine that the unit is operating properly.
o. Install the access box in the baggage compartment and panel at the side of the
fuselage.
HEATER TERMINALBLOCKWIRING

1 H4A
2 H1E H2B
3 HID
4 H9A
5 H8A H1OA
6 H2A

5G7
A494
24
VOLTS
FUEL
SOLENOID
VALVE
107-16
RADIONOISE
FILTER COMBUSTION
AIR BLOWER
Figure 13-42. Primary Power Circuit
13-154. HEATER ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CHECKS.
13-155. ELECTRICAL CONTINUITY CHECK. These tests are listed as an aid in isolating
open circuited or inoperative components.
NOTE
The schematic wiring diagram (Figures 13-41, 13-42 and

13-43 shows, in addition to the heater circuitry, a suggested
aircraft control circuit. For the purposes of this manual, the
circuitry shown in these illustrations will be utilized to
describe electrical continuity checks.
It must be assumed that power, which is furnished through the heater circuit breaker, is
present at the HEATER SWITCH at all times. Always check the circuit breaker before
performing electrical continuity checks.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5G8
A495
TO LANDING GEAR TERMINAL

"UP" LIGHT STRIP
CIRCUIT LANDINGGEAR
BREAKER SWITCH 106
FUEL
SOLENOID
VALVE
VALVE
Figure 13-43. Starting Power Circuit
13-156. VENT BLOWERPOWERCIRCUIT CHECK. (Refer to Figure 13-41.) With the

HEATER SWITCHin the FAN position, electrical continuity (28-volts nominal) should be
present at the followinglocations:
a. TerminalNo. 6 on the heater terminal strip.
b. From terminal No. 6 of the heater terminal strip through the radio-noisefilter to the
ventilating air motor.
c. Electrical ground circuit for the ventilating air motor is provided from terminal No.
4 of the heater terminal strip through the LANDINGGEAR SWITCHwhen the landing gear
is down. Ventilating air motor is inoperative when the landing gear is up.
13-157. HEATER POWERCIRCUITCHECK. (Refer to Figure 13-43.) With the HEATER

SWITCH in the HEAT position, electrical continuity should be present at the following
locations:

Reissued:2/18/81
5G9
NOTE
Power for the ventilating air blower is the same as described

above except that power is now supplied through the HEAT
side of the HEATER SWITCH.
a. Terminal No. 1 of the heater terminal strip.

b. From terminal No. 1 of the heater terminal strip through the radio-noisefilter to the
combustion air motor and to terminal No. 1 of the overheat switch.
c. From terminal No. 3 of the overheat switch through the combustion air pressure
switch to terminal No. 2 of the heater terminal strip.
d. From terminal No. 2 of the heater terminal strip to the ignition unit, to the shutoff
valve, and through the adjustable duct switch to terminal No. 3 of the heater terminal strip.
e. From terminal No. 3 of the heater terminal strip through the cycling switch to the
fuel solenoid valve.
In the event that electrical continuity is not present at one or more of the above listed
points, the wiring must be traced back to the power source. If components are still
inoperative after the wiring inspection, check the individual inoperative components for
continuity and, if necessary,replace them.
13-158. MAINTENANCE AND REPAIRS. Instructions in this paragraph pertain to

maintenance of the basic heater and components while the heater is installed in the airplane.
Instructions for removal of components are included provided the installation permits
accessibility.
NOTE
No special service tools are required for normal periodic

maintenance.

a. Removal:
1. Disconnect wire at quick-disconnectterminal.
2. Disconnect the inlet tubing from the inlet air adapter.
3. Loosen the clamps that hold the combustion air blower assembly in the support
bracket and slide the motor out of the bracket.
b. ReplacingMotor Brushes: (Refer to Figure 13-48.)
1. Remove the brush cap at one of the brush locations. Note position of brush
inside the guide and carefully lift the brush and brush spring out of the guide. Be sure to
hold the brush so that it can be reinstalled in precisely the same position if no brush
replacement is required.
2. Inspect the brush for wear. A new brush is 17/32 inch long. If brushes are worn
to a length of 3/16 inch, they must be replaced.
3. Looking through the brush guide, inspect the commutator, which should be
smooth and medium brown to dark brown in color. Remove all dust from commutator with
compressedair.
5G10 5G10 Reissued: 2/18/81

NOTE
Installation of new brushes in a motor that has a badly scored
or dirty commutator will result in a very short brush life.
If the commutator is grooved in the brush track, gouged, scored or shows signs of having
burned spots, replace the complete motor assembly.If the commutator is in good condition,
install new motor brushes and tighten brush caps into place. Make sure each brush is
oriented so that the curved end fits the curvature of the commutator.
4. After installing new brushes, it is advisable to run in the brushes as
follows: Connect the motor to a controlled voltage supply (rheostat in a 28-volt line).
Operate the motor at approximately one-half its normal speed for the first hour; then
gradually increase the speed until it is rotating at approximately normal speed. Continue the
run-in operation for at least two hours to properly seat the brushes before installing the
blower in the airplane.
c. Installation:
1. Prior to installing the combustion air blower, inspect all parts of the assembly
for loose screws,loose nuts and poor ground connection on the blower housing. Make sure
the blower wheel is tight on the shaft and properly located in the housing. It should have
just enough clearance to rotate at full speed without binding against the outer housing.
Blower performance is based upon this close tolerance clearance. It is recommended that
correct voltage be applied for this clearance check.
2. Install the blower inlet adapter in the same orientation as before removal.
3. Place the combustion air blower assembly in position in the attaching clamp so
the air tubing can be connected and slide the tubing into position at the point where it was
disconnected during removal. Tighten the motor in the attaching strap.
4. Secure the air tubing by tightening the clamp or installing the sheet metal
attaching screws.
5. Connect the wire lead to No. 1terminal on terminal strip.
6. Check motor operation. By disconnecting the wire at the No. 3 terminal on
heater terminal strip, blower can be operated without fuel flow to the heater.
13-160. SPARK PLUG. (Refer to Figure 13-47.)

a. Removal:
1. Remove the necessary access panels to expose the spark plug area of the heater
assembly.
NOTE
Insure that heater electrical circuits are de-energized.
2. Unscrew and remove the high voltage lead connector at the spark plug. Exercise
care to avoid fouling or damagingthe connector.
3. Remove the grommet. (39) of Figure 13-47from the heater jacket opening.

Revised: 4/26 83
5G11
4. Using a 7/8 inch deep hex socket, unscrew and remove the spark plug. Make sure
the spark plug gasket is removed with the spark plug. It will normally stick on the spark plug
threads, but if loose, it might drop into the ventilating air passagesof the heater. Should this
happen, remove the gasket with a wire hook.
b. Inspection and Servicing(Spark Plug):
1. If the spark plug appears to be in good condition, except for a mild coating of
oxide on the porcelain and electrode, it may be cleaned and reused. Cleaning is
accomplished on a conventional airplane type spark plug cleaner, except that it will be
necessary to use two or more adapters in order to raise the long extension of the plug far
enough out of the cleaner nozzle opening to perform an effective job. Plug the ceramic
insert cavity at the terminal end of the plug with a piece of paper or cloth to keep out any
of the cleaning sand. Wipe this cavity out thoroughly with a cloth wet with carbon
tetrachloride. If after cleaning the spark plug porcelain is white and the electrode is not
eroded, proceed to check the ground electrode in the heater and adjust the spark gap in
accordance with paragraph 13-160,c and Figure 13-44.
NOTE
If the spark plug fails to clean up properly and/or the

electrode is badly eroded, it should be replaced.
c. Spark Gap Check and Adjustment: (See Figure 13-15.)
A spark gap of 0.156 to 0.188 of an inch must be maintained on the P/N 39D18 spark
plug. This gap should be checked any time a plug is replaced or at the time of heater
overhaul. A spark gap greater than that specified can shorten the life of the ignition
assembly. There are several methods in which the spark gap of this heater may be checked.
Method I is recommended when the heater is being overhauled and before the installation of
the fuel nozzle. Methods II and III are suitable for checking the gap through the spark plug
well when the heater is not disassembled.
Method I:
1. Using a 5/32 inch drill (0.156) or a piece of 5/32 rod, reach down through the
small openingin the combustion head and find the ground electrode. (It is weldedinside the
head.)
2. Move the drill along the side of the electrode on the spark plug side. (Movement
should be from the outer edge towards the center.) The drill should just pass through the
spark plug gap opening. Should the drill fail to pass through this opening, the gap is too
narrow. If it passes through too freely, the gap is too wide. In either case, it will be
necessary to bend the ground electrode in the direction required. This may be done by
removingthe spark plug and reaching through the opening.
3. Recheck the gap after repositioning of the ground electrode.
Method II:
1. Measure the distance between the seating surface of the spark plug with a new
gasket installed to the end of the plug electrode.
2. Using a depth gauge, measure the distance between the ground electrode in the
heater to the spark plug seating surface in the heater jacket and check this measurement
against the measurement obtained in Step 1. The difference should be between 0.156 to
0.188 of an inch.

Reissued:2/18/81
5G12
425 1. SPARK PLUG

2. SEATING SURFACE
3. COMBUSTION TUBE ASSEMBLY
4. GROUND ELECTRODE
5. JACKET ASSEMBLY
6. COMBUSTION HEAD ASSEMBLY
7. MEASURE
8. GASKET
7.
4
6
-5
447
6.00
1.50 .38
SLIP FIT 1.255

DIA. HOLE
I I
18 MM THREAD
.875 HEX STOCK
.250 DIA. ROD

3.444
UNDER CUT.010
MARK WITH 3.387
BLACK PAINT
I
MATERIAL CAN BE SAE TYPE 303, 321 OR 347 ST. ST. OR ALUMINUM - CASE HARDENED
GAUGE FOR LOCATINGGROUND ELECTRODE IN JANITROL HEATERS.

PIPER TOOL NO. 55988-2.
Figure 13-44. Spark Plug Gap Adjustment and Tool

Reissued: 2/18/81
5G13
3. The ground electrode can be bent to obtain the required gap.

Method III:
1. Fabricate or purchase from Piper, the special tool from dimensionsgivenin Figure
13-44.
2. Install the threaded end of the tool into the spark plug hole.
3. Slide the rod of the tool into the combustion head until it contacts the ground
electrode.
4. Check that the indicator ring on the rod lines up with the end of the tool. The
ground electrode may be bent to obtain the required gap.
NOTE
Inspect the ground electrode for erosion. If it is eroded to

approximately half of its original 1/8 inch diameter, it should
be replaced. This can be done as follows:
(a) Grind off the head of the rivet where it projects through
the combustion head and remove the electrode.
(b) Install a new CRES rivet AN125452 which is 1.500
inches in length.
(c) Heliarc tack weld the rivet head to hold it in place.
(d) Check spark gap as noted in Methods I, II or III.
d. Installation:
1. If a new spark plug is being installed, be sure to adjust the spark gap as outlined
in step c. Do not bend the electrode on the spark plug.
2. Place a new spark plug gasket on the threads. A small drop of Aviation
Permatex, or similar material may be used on the gasket to help hold it to the spark plug
shell during installation.
3. Screw the spark plug into the heater with a deep socket wrench. Tighten to a
torque of 28 foot-pounds. Install the grommet in heater jacket opening.
4. Carefully insert the spring connector on the high voltage lead into the spark plug
shell; press down gently and start the nut on the threads. Tighten the nut to 20 foot-pounds.
5. Operate the heater to check dependability and replace the accesspanels.

Revised: 4/26/83
5G14
13-161. VIBRATOR ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 13-47.)

a. Measure the distance the vibrator protrudes out of the ignition assembly to
determine when a new unit is inserted properly. Loosen the clamp that holds the vibrator in
position and with a slight back and forth movement,pull it straight out of the ignition unit.
(For a friction grip, it may be necessary to use a piece of masking or friction tape around
the exposed portion of the vibrator.)
b. Carefully rotate the new vibrator until the index marks are aligned and the
connector pins on the vibrator can be felt entering the pin sockets in the vibrator socket;
then press the vibrator fully and firmly into position.
c. Checkthe heater for operation.
c697 1 IN. HEX S.A.E. 1112 SCREW

NOTE STOCK 0.640 DIA. DRILL
DIMENSION (A) VARIES WITH CANFER45 x 1/16 NEAR
LENGTH OF SPARK PLUG. END ONLY. THREAD 18 M.M
-1.5 M.M. PITCH S.A.E. SPARK
3.00 INCH 0.125 DIA. PLUG STANDARD
ADJUSTABLE GAP 1010-1020 STEEL ROD
2 HOLES 0.1285
DIA. (#30 DRILL)
019 DEEP
0.3125 DIA. ROD, 0.50 LONG TYPE SPARK PLUG INSTALLED

1010-1020 STEEL ROD IN FIXTURE
DRILL AND TAP FOR 4-40 SCREW
LOCATED 1/4 IN. EITHEREND
SCREW-MACHINE, RD. HD, AN OR NOTE.ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES
MS 4-40-1/4 IN. LONG DENOTES SILVER SOLDER
Figure 13-44a. Spark Plug Fixture

- Revised: 4/26/83
13-162. IGNITION ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 13-47.) This unit converts aircraft DC buss voltage
oscillating current capable of producing a continuous spark in the combustion chamber of the heater. This unit
remains energized and produces a continuous spark during heater operation. It contains a condenser, resistor,
radio noise filter and vibrator socket. It also has an externally mounted vibrator and ignition coil.
a. Removal of ignition assembly:
NOTE
Make sure the heater electrical circuits are de-energized.
1. Disconnect the primary wire from the primary terminal of the ignition assembly (2).
2. Carefully unscrew and disconnect the high voltage ignition cable at the spark plug. Exercise
care to avoid fouling or damaging the connector.
3. Remove the four attaching screws and lift the ignition assembly (2) off the heater jacket.
b. Installation of ignition assembly:
1. Place the ignition assembly in position on the brackets attached to the heater jacket, with the
high voltage cable facing the spark plug end of the heater.
2. Install the four screws. Tighten the screws securely.
3. Carefully connect the high voltage lead to the spark plug. Torque to 20 foot-pounds.
4. Connect the primary lead to the primary terminal on the ignition unit (2) and tighten the nut
securely.
c. Testing ignition unit:
The ignition unit does not require complete overhaul. The following test will indicate whether
or not the unit is operational and whether the vibrator should be replaced before reinstallation in the aircraft.
The following equipment is required to test the components:
1. A battery that will supply power at approximately 14 to 28-volts DC.
2. A voltmeter with a range of 0-30 volts.
3. A lead from the battery to the test fixture in which is included an ammeter with a range of 0-3
amperes and a normally open, momentary-closed switch. The total resistance of the lead including the
ammeter and switch must not exceed 0.3 ohms.
4. A spark gap of 0.187 of an inch +/-0. A convenient means of arranging the correct spark gap is
to install a spark plug, P/N 39D18, in a test fixture arranged to provide a ground electrode and a .187 of an
inch spark gap. (Refer to Figure 13-44a for information on fabricating this fixture.)
NOTE
Any one of several spark plugs may be used with the spark plug
fixture detailed in Figure 13-44a. However, the "A" dimension in
that sketch must be varied with the length of the spark plug electrode
to provide a gap of .187 of an inch for all spark plugs.
NOTE
When testing an ignition unit, do not use a screwdriver as a

substitute for a spark plug and spark plug fixture.
5G16 5G16 Revised: 4/26/83

5. The high tension shielded ignition lead between the igntion unit and the spark plug is a part of
the cover assembly.
6. Arrange the test equipment as shown in Figure 13-44b.
d. Operational test of ignition unit:
1. Close the momentary switch and read the voltmeter and ammeter. Release the momentary
switch immediately.
2. The amperage reading at 28 volts DC must be 1.25 +/-0.25 amperes.
13-163. CYCLING SWITCH AND LIMIT (OVERHEAT) SWITCH. (Refer to Figure 13-47.)
a. Removal:
1. If the limit switch (25) is damaged or defective, disconnect the two electrical leads from the
switch terminals. Be sure to mark the leads for proper reasembly. (The switch terminals are identified by
numbers "1", "2" and "3".)
2. Remove the two attaching screws and lift switch (25) and spacers (gaskets, 2 required) (27)
from the jacket opening.
3. If the cycling switch (24) is damaged or defective, disconnect the electrical leads, being sure to
mark them for proper reassembly.
4. Remove the two screws and lift the cycling switch (24) from the jacket opening.
NOTE
No attempt should be made to repair either of these switches.

Switches that do not operate properly must be replaced. (Refer to
paragraph 13-138, m and n for test instructions.)
C584
MOMENTARY
SWITCH BATTERY
EXTERNAL
TEST
CIRCUIT AMMETER
VOLTMETER
VIBRATOR
INTERNAL
TEST
CIRCUIT
FILTER
ILTER RESISTOR
TOTAL RESISTANCE A TO B MUST NOT

EXCEED 0.3 OHMS
Figure 13-44b. Wiring - Test Setup

Revised: 4/26/83
5G17
b. Installation:
1. Install the limit switch (25) and two spacer gaskets(27) by placing the gaskets in
position in the heater jacket opening and installing two screws.
2. Tighten screws securely; then reconnect the electrical leads in accordance with
markings made during disassembly. (If electrical connections are uncertain, refer to the
wiring diagram, Figure 13-41.)
3. Install the cycling switch by placing it in position in the heater jacket opening
and securing it with the two screws. Tighten screws securely; then reconnect the electrical
leads to their respective terminals as marked during diasssembly. (If connections are
uncertain, refer to wiring diagram. Figure 13-41.)
13-164. COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURESWITCH.(Refer to Figure 13-47.)

a. Removal:
1. Disconnect electrical leads from the terminals of the combustion air pressure
switch (26), being sure to mark them for proper reassembly. Disconnect the tube from the
switch. Exercise caution not to exert excessivebending of the tube. (It is "tacked" to the
combustion chamber inside the jacket.)
2. Unscrew and remove the combustion air pressure switch from the fitting on the
combustion air inlet tube.
b. Installation:
1. Install the combustion air pressure switch (26) by rotating it on the threaded
fitting of the combustion air inlet tube and tighten it securely.Exercise caution not to over
torque the switch as this could change the setting.
2. Connect electrical leads to their respective terminals in accordance with
markingsmade during removal. If in doubt regardingproper connections, refer to the wiring
diagram. Figure 13-41.Connect the tube to the switch.
13-165. FUEL REGULATOR AND SHUTOFF VALVE. (Refer to Figure 13-48.)

a. Removal:
1. Remove the cover from the fuel regulator shutoff valve shroud assembly.
2. Disconnect the electrical lead to the valve.
3. Disconnect the fuel lines from the valve nipples.
4. Remove the two bolts securing the valve and shroud to the bulkhead, and save the
standoff bushings and washers for reinstallation of the valve and shroud assembly.
b. Installation:
1. Place the regulator, shutoff valve into the shroud. Insure the correct positioning
of inlet and outlet ports to their respective lines, and secure the valve and shroud to the
bulkhead using the two standoff bushings. washers and bolts.
2. Connect the fuel lines to the valve and tighten securely.
3. Connect the electrical lead. Be sure an insulating sleeve or tape is placed over the
connection to avoid any possibility of a short circuit. If a sleeve is used. secure it in place.
4. Perform an operational check of the heater to insure that the unit is functioning
properly and no fuel leaks exist.
5. Reinstall the shroud cover on the shroud assembly.

Revised: 4 26 83
5G18
13-166. DUCTSWITCH.(Refer to Figure 13-48.)

a. Removal:
1. Place the control lever arm in high position and loosen the Allen head set screw
that secures the arm to the temperature selector shaft. Slide the lever and arm off the shaft.
2. Disconnect the two electrical leads from the terminals on the exposed face of
the switch.
3. Remove the two attaching screwsand washersfrom the duct.
4. Carefully lift out the switch and gasket (if gasket is used).
b. Cleaningand Inspection:
1. Brush off any dust or lint from the switch operating mechanism(exposed inside
the duct) and wipe external surfaces with a clean cloth.
c. Installation:
1. Insert the switch carefully, with gasket (if used), into the ventilating duct
opening and install the two attaching screwsand washers.
2. Connect the two electrical leads to their respective terminals, as marked during
removal.
3. Set the temperature selector shaft at the high stop. Then carefully place the
control lever arm on the shaft at the high position and lock the lever by tightening the Allen
head set screw. (Do not over-tighten.) Rotate the lever arm to make sure it clears the
electrical terminal screwsand support bracket when it is moved to the high position.
4. Operate the heater with the duct switch set above ambient temperature to check
operation. (Refer to paragraph 13-180, 1for additional switch tests and setting instructions.)
13-167. OVERHAUL INSTRUCTIONS. The heater assembly shall be overhauled after

1000 hours or whenever the pressure decay test requirement cannot be met. The heater should
be removed from the aircraft, disassembled, all parts throughly inspected and necessary
repairs and/ or replacements made prior to reassembly. Detailed step-by-step instructions are
included for a complete heater overhaul. In some instances, however, inspection may reveal
that it is unnecessary to remove certain parts. If so, those portions of the overhaul procedures
may be eliminated.
NOTE
For disassembly and reassembly operations, refer

to the exploded view drawings and the parts list.
13-168. DISASSEMBLY.(Refer to Figure 13-47.)

a. Remove the screw and slide the adapter (23) off the combustion air inlet tube.
b. Disconnect and remove electrical wiring and individual wires from the various
components on the heater. If wires appear to be in good condition, it may be desirable to
remove wire harness assembly intact. First, disconnect wires at terminal strip and
components.

Revised: 4/26/83
5G19
NOTE
It is advisable to label all wires, prior to removal, to insure

correct connections during reassembly.Cable straps and clips
must be replaced if removed, as they cannot be re-used.
c. Carefully disconnect the high voltage ignition lead at the spark plug. Handle the
spring connector on the end of this lead with care to prevent fouling or damage.
d. Remove the four screws and cable straps to free the ignition assembly(2) from the
heater jacket and remove the ignition assembly. The vibrator may be removed by loosening
the clamp and exerting a firm pull straight away from the ignition assemblycase.
e. Remove the grommet (39) from the jacket (5) and remove the spark plug (32) with
a 7/8 inch deep socket. Make sure the spark plug gasket is removed.
f. Remove the two screws and lift out the overheat (limit) switch (25) and spacer
gaskets (27).
g. Remove the two screwsand lift out the cycling switch (24).
h. Remove the four screws to release the terminal strip (35) and insulator (36) from
the jacket (5).
i. Disconnect the tube fitting (33) at the cover of the combustion air pressure switch
(26). (Refer to paragraph 13-164, a, 1 for precaution on tube bending.) Unscrew and
remove the combustion air pressure switch (26) from the combustion air inlet tube.
j. Open baggage door on the right side of the fuselage for access to the heater cover
box assembly and remove the screws attaching the cover to the baggage compartment
bulkhead and floor. Remove the three screws securingthe heater air intake tube assemblyto
the heater and set aside.
k. Loosen the four screws (20) and rotate the blower and motor housing (11) to
disengagethe notched end from the four screwsin the end of the heater jacket. Remove the
grommet (45) and separate the electrical quick-disconnects.
1. Remove the upper fuel shroud (10). Remove grommet from fuel shroud (9) and
carefully pull fuel solenoid wires through hole in shroud. With open end wrench, remove
fuel solenoid assembly. Reach inside the inlet end of the jacket assembly with a 3/4 inch
open end wrench and while holding the fuel-tube fitting at the jacket, remove the elbow
fitting (34), nut (38), washer (41), gasket (29) and fuel shroud (9).
m. Remove the two screws and carefully withdraw the nozzle holder from the
combustion head assembly (6). Remove the gasket (28). Remove the six screws and
withdraw the combustion head assembly from the combustion tube assembly (7). Remove
the gasket (30).
n. Remove the screws and remaining cable straps, if not previouslyremoved, from the
seam of the jacket assembly (5). Note positions of cable straps as they are removed. Spread
the jacket at the seam and remove it from the combustion tube assembly(7). This will free
the rope gasket (31) which can be removed from the particular part on which it remains
attached.
o. Carefully unscrew and remove the spray nozzle (21) from the nozzle holder (8) and
remove gasket (28).

5G20 Reissued:2 18 81
5G20
CAUTION
Handle the nozzle with care to avoid damage to the tip. The
material around the orifice is very thin and any sharp blow
on the face of the nozzle can distort the spray pattern and
cause malignitionor improper combustion.
p. Removethe three screwsand rubber grommet from the blower housing (12).
q. Slide the ventilating air blower motor out of the blower housing with the motor
bracket assembly(19) and blower wheel (17) attached. Loosen the set screw in the blower
wheel and slide it off the end of the motor shaft. Then remove the motor bracket assembly
(19) and fasteners(43).
r. Remove the screw and lock washer to free the capacitor assembly(18) with attached
leads.
13-169. DISASSEMBLYOF COMBUSTIONAIR BLOWERASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure

13-48.)
a. Remove the combustion air blower inlet adapter (2) by removing the screw (18).
b. Remove screws (18); then separate the outer housing (3) from the inner blower
housing (8) and free the motor leads and capacitor (10) from the inner housing.
c. Loosen the set screwin the blower wheel (7) and slide it off the motor shaft.
d. Remove the two hex nuts (17), lock washers and flat washers (16) and slide the
inner housing (8) off the motor through bolts. The spacer (15) will drop out.
e. Install new motor brushes as described in paragraph 13-159, b. If the motor
commutator is badly worn, or if the motor is defective in any respect, it must be replaced.
13-170. CLEANING. (Refer to Figure 13-47.)

a. Clean individual metal parts (except those parts containing switches and electrical
wiring) and the combustion tube assembly,by immersingthem in dry-cleaningsolvent, such
as Stoddard solvent (Federal SpecificationP-D-680).A bristle brush should be used to assist
the cleaningprocessif foreignaccumulations are stubborn to remove.
CAUTION
Do not attempt to buff or scrape off any deposits on face of
spray nozzle. The face of the nozzle is very susceptible to
damage from mishandling. Carefully repeat cleaning process
using only a bristle brush and repeated applications of solvent
to loosen any stubborn deposits.
b. Use compressed air or lintless cloth to dry the parts, unless sufficient time is
available for them to air dry.
c. Wipe electrical components with a clean, dry cloth. If foreign material is difficult to
remove, moisten the cloth in carbon tetrachloride or electrical contact cleaner and clean all
exterior surfacesthoroughly.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5G21
13-171. CLEANINGAND INSPECTINGTHE COMBUSTIONTUBE ASSEMBLY.(Refer

to Figure 13-47.)
a. Slight scaling and discoloration of the combustion tube assembly (7) is a normal
condition for units that have been in serviceup to 1000 airplane hours. The slight scaling
condition will appear to be mottled and a small accumulation of blue-graypowder may be
present on the surface in certain areas. This condition does not require replacement of
combustion tube assembly, unless severeoverheating has produced soft spots in the metal.
NOTE
This assembly should be inspected prior to cleaning in order
to prevent the removal of visibleevidencesof damage.
b. Look inside the exhaust outlet to determine if the combustion tube appears to be
heavily scaled or mottled. Deformation is more difficult to detect visuallybut can usually be
observed by looking straight through the combustion tube assembly and sightingalong the
outer surface of the inner combustion tube. An assembly that has been obviously deformed
should be replaced. Slight deformation will not affect heater operation unless it is extensive
and localized enough to reduce the flow of ventilating air through the heater more than 10
percent.
c. The combustion tube assemblymay be cleaned by either of two methods:
1. One method is to soak the combustion tube assemblyovernight in an Oakite M-S
Stripper solution, made by mixing one pound of Oakite salts with each gallon of water used.
The solution should be maintained at a temperature of between 190 F and 210 F. After
overnight soaking, rinse the combustion tube assembly thoroughly in water to remove all
traces of the Oakite solution. In order to reach all areas of the combustion tube assembly,it
is advisableto let it stand in the rinsing water for as long as one-half hour, while occasionally
agitating it to circulate the water. All openings should be left open during this operation. Be
sure to dry the combustion tube assemblythoroughly after cleaning.
2. A second method of cleaningis what is commonly known as hand "tumbling."
Insert shot or other metallic particles through the exhaust outlet opening; then close all
openings and shake the combustion tube assemblyvigorously,while rotating it and changing
from end-to-end frequently. Be sure to pour out all of the particles and loosened material;
then with all openings uncovered, direct a stream of compressed air into the combustion
tube assembly from first one opening, then the other. Make sure all loose material is
removed.

Reissued: 2 18 81
5G22
13-172. INSPECTION OF REMAINING COMPONENTS. (Refer to Figure 13-47.)

a. Discard all rubber parts such as grommets, gaskets, etc. These items should always be
replaced at overhaul. Also discard the rope gasket: (31).
b. Inspect all wires and wiring harnesses for damage to insulation, damaged terminals,
chafed or cracked insulation and broken plastic bands. Individual wires can be replaced by
making up new wires from No. 16 AWG stock and cut to correct length. It is advisable to
use an acceptable crimping tool for installing terminals, rather than solder for all heater
wiring connections. If wiring harness damage is visible, the entire harness assembly should be
replaced. If only one or more wires are damaged, cut the cable ties, make up new wires,
install them in the harnesses, and restore all cable ties and clamps. If heater controls were
operating properly at the time of removal, reinstall them.
c. Inspect all hard parts, consisting of bolts, screws, nuts, washers and lock washers.
Replace damaged parts.
d. The combustion air pressure switch (26) must respond to delicate pressure changes
and should always be checked and/or replaced at overhaul. (Refer to paragraph 13-173, c,
and Figure 13-46.)
e. Replace the vibrator in the ignition unit at each overhaul.
f. Inspect the ignition assembly for dented case, loose or damaged primary terminal
insulator and broken or obviously damaged high voltage lead. Give particular attention to
the condition of the spring connector at the end of the lead. If the spring is burned off,
visibly eroded, or carbon tracked, the ignition assembly should be replaced.
NOTE
Do not attempt a field repair of the ignition unit, as it is a

sealed assembly.
g. Inspect the terminal strip (35) for distortion and cracks and replace it if either
condition exists.
h. Inspect radio-noise filters for short circuits by checking from either terminal to
ground with an ohmmeter. An open-circuit reading should be obtained.
i. Inspect the spray nozzle (21) with a magnifying glass for any obstructions in the
nozzle orifice and any sign of damage to the slight conical protrusion at the nozzle tip. Use
compressed air to remove obstructions and re-examine it to make sure the orifice is open.
Exercise care when handling the nozzle to avoid pressing or rapping on the tip face. Do not
burr or scrape off deposits on the tip face. After cleaning, it is advisable to store the nozzle
in a polyethylene bag until ready for reassembly.
j. Replace the nozzle at overhaul.
NOTE
The nozzle (21) can be spray tested by installing it in the

holder and connecting the fuel tube to a 7 psi fuel pressure
source. The conical angle spray pattern should be even and
dispersed the same in all directions. Exercise caution to keep
atomized fuel away from fire.
5G23 5G23 Reissued: 2/18/81

k. Inspect the nozzle holder for damaged threads at the fuel tube fitting, crimped or
cracked fuel line or distorted housing.
l. Check the solenoid for continuity with an ohmmeter. A reading of between 100 and
125 ohms at room temperature should be obtained. If the reading is not within these limits,
the solenoid should be replaced.
m. Remove the brushes, one at a time, from the ventilating air blower motor (13) by
removing the brush cap and carefully withdrawingthe brush from its guide. Remove foreign
material from the brush guide and commutator with a stream of filtered compressed air.
Check for brush wear. (Refer to paragraph 13-159.) Inspect the commutator for grooved
brush track, pitting or burning. The commutator surface should be smooth and medium
brown in color. Replace the motor if the commutator or other parts show damage.
n. Inspect the combustion air blower motor as described in the preceding step.
o. Inspect the blower wheel for broken or bent vanes and replace it for either
condition.
13-173. TESTING. The following tests should be performed as outlined in the succeeding
paragraphs:
a. Check ventilating air and combustion air motors for correct RPM and current draw:
1. Connect motor to 28-volt DC power supply. Rotation should be
counterclockwisewhen viewedfrom the shaft end.
2. Both motors should rotate at approximately 7500 RPM at rated voltage. Current
draw is approximately three amperes.
3. If current draw is excessive,or if speed is too low, replace the brushes. Recheck
both current draw and RPM after brushes are properly run in. (Refer to paragraph 13-159,
b.)
4. If after replacingbrushes, operation is still unsatisfactory, replace the motor.
NOTE
The motor checks described above should be made without
the blower housing attached, for both the ventilating air and
combustion air motors.
b. Test the combustion tube assembly for leaks as follows:
1. Fashion a sealing plate from approximately .125 inch thick flat stock to sealthe
combustion head opening in the combustion tube assembly. (Refer to Figure 13-29.)Use a
rubber gasket under the plate and attach the plate with six screws.
2. Make up seals for all remaining openings,except the one used to connect the air
pressure source. (Refer to Figure 13-45.)Use rubber stoppers as shown. The combustion air
inlet tube can be sealed best with a drilled stopper and clamp. Other openings should be
sealed with expansion plugs. The seal used in the exhaust tube should be formed so that it
will not deform the air pressure switch tube which protrudes into the exhaust.
3. Install plugs and caps in all openingsexcept the one to which the combustion air
pressure switch is attached. (Any opening can be used to connect the air pressure source;
however, the combustion air pressure switch opening is usually the most convenient. The
drain opening would normally be considered a second choice.)
4. Connect a regulated air supply to the opening that has not been plugged and

Reissued: 2/18/81
5G24
387
.19 DIA. HOLES

(6 - EQUALLY SPACED)
4.20
RUBBER STOPPER
DIA.
I OUT TO
DRILL
NECESSARYDIA.
COMBUSTION HEAD OPENING
WING NUT CLAMP

SEAL CAP
FLAT WASHER
RUBBER STOPPER
DRILL FOR BOLT
FLAT WASHER
BOLT
EXPANSION PLUG
Figure 13-45. Suggested Design for Seal Plate,

Plugs and Caps for Combustion Tube Leakage Test
427
1. WATER MANOMETER
2. OHMMETER
3. NEEDLE VALVE
4. TEE
5. PRESSURE TAP (OPEN)
6. ADJUSTING SCREW
7. COMBUSTION AIR PRESSURE SWITCH
AIR SUPPLY
Figure 13-46. Test Setup for Combustion Air Pressure Switch
5H1 5H1~ Reissued: 2/18/81

apply a pressure of between three and five psi to the combustion tube assembly.
5. Submerge the combustion tube assembly in water for several minutes while
watching for bubbles, which would indicate leaks. The presence of a small leak, due to a
pinhole in the metal or at welded joints, can be repaired successfully,provided it is located
in an accessible area and the welder is familiar with stainlesssteel welds and does not create
excessiveweld stress concentrations. Be sure to recheck the assemblyfor leak after welding.
c. Test the combustion air pressure switch as follows:
1. Connect an adjustable air pressure line that can be controlled in a range of zero
to 5.0 (maximum) of water to the switch opening with a water manometer and needle valve
in the line ahead of switch. Switch must be tested in 45 degree position as shown in Figure
13-46.
2. Connect an ohmmeter across the switch terminals to determine the exact instant
of switch closing.
3. Apply air pressure allowing it to build up very slowly from zero. The switch
contacts should close at 0.5 ± 0.1 inches of water which will be indicated on the
manometer.
NOTE
The switch cover has a differential pressure tap and this

openingmust be left open to atmosphere during the test.
4. Make several trials to insure switch reliability. Be sure to increase and decrease
the air pressure slowly in order to produce accurate indications.
5. If an adjustment is required, rotate the adjusting screw clockwise to increase
settingsand counterclockwiseto decrease settings.
d. Test the fuel feed and nozzle holder assembly for leaks as follows. This test can be
simplifiedif the followingroutine is used to test both the fuel line and fuel line shroud tube.
1. Using filtered compressed air, apply 20 psi to the shroud drain port, located on
the surface near the threaded nozzle cavity.
2. Immerse the fuel feed and nozzle holder assembly in clean water with the fuel
inlet and nozzle cavity left open.
3. Observe for bubbles which would indicate leakage. If bubbles appear at either
fuel fitting, there is a leak in the fuel tube. If bubbles appear externally on the shroud tube,
or at either end of the shroud tube juncture, the shroud tube is leaking.
4. In either of the above cases, the complete fuel feed and nozzle holder assembly
must be replaced.
e. Spray test the nozzle as follows:
1. Install the nozzle in the fuel feed and nozzle holder assembly.Connect the fuel
tube to the fuel solenoid.Connect solenoid to a 7 psi fuel pressure source.
2. Connect the solenoid leads to a 14/28-volt battery. Connect a switch in the line
to open and close the solenoid when desired.
WARNING
Be sure to keep the atomized spray away from fire.

3. With the switch closed (solenoid valve energized) and the fuel line connected,
observe the fuel spray pattern. It should be conical in shape with even dispersion in all
directions.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5H2
4. Energize and de-energize the solenoid several times. The spray should shut off
permanently each time the solenoid is de-energized.There should be no sign of dribbling at
the nozzle tip in excess of one or two drops.
5. If the spray pattern is distorted, check for an obstruction and clean the nozzle as
described in paragraph 13-172. If this fails to provide a normal spray pattern, replace the
nozzle.
6. If the nozzle continues to dribble, the solenoidvalve is not closingproperly and
the solenoid must be replaced.
13-174. REPAIROF COMBUSTIONTUBE ASSEMBLY.

a. If weldingis attempted, clean the area thoroughly with a stainlesssteel brush.
CAUTION
Do not use a brush with ordinary steel bristles, as it would

cause subsequent damage to the metal.
b. Wipe the area to be welded with a 30 percent solution of nitric acid; then weld with
stainless steel rod (SAE Type 309, using Solar No. 16GH flux) if welding is accomplished
with an acetylene torch. If the Heliarc method is used, use either Solar Type I or Type B
flux. If a stainlesssteel rod is not available,a piece of scrap heater combustion chamber may
be used as repair material. Make sure severeweldingstressesare not present after welding.
NOTE
After welding,test the combustion tube assembly for leaks as
outlined in the preceding paragraph.
13-175. REASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 1347.)

a. If removed during disassembly, secure the nipple (37) and elbow (34) to the fuel
solenoid (22).
b. Insert the ventilating air motor (13) into the motor bracket assembly (19); slide the
blower wheel (17) on the end of the motor shaft and rotate it until the set screw is aligned
with the flat side of the motor shaft. Tighten the set screw just tight enough to hold it at
this time.
c. Attach the capacitor and leads assembly (18) to the motor bracket (19) with the
screw and lock washer. Make sure a good electricalground connection is made at this point.
Install ground bracket (44) and three new fasteners.
d. Insert this assemblyinto the blower housing(12).
e. Make sure all wires are routed and grommeted in the same manner as before
disassembly.
f. The motor (13) should be positioned in the bracket (19) to locate the blower wheel

5H3
(17) properly in the blower housing (12). The blower wheel should be positioned so it will
rotate freely and just clear the contoured spill plate in the blower housing. Tighten the Allen
head set screws and spin the blower wheel by hand for a clearance check. Then apply
appropriate voltage to run the motor as a final clearance check.
g. Secure the heater air intake tube assembly to the forward section of the heater.
Open the baggage door on the forward right side of the fuselageand install the heater cover
box assembly.
h. Place a new asbestos gasket (31) in position on the exhaust outlet; spring the jacket
assembly (5) open at the seam and insert the combustion tube assembly (7) carefully into
the jacket. Exercise care to clear the pressure switch tube in the exhaust outlet and see that
the asbestos gasket is properly located. Close the gap on the jacket assembly and install
screws (21) to secure it at the seam. Solenoid lead wire is grounded under one of these
screws.Make sure the seamis in good condition and a tight fit is effected.
i. Install cable straps at locations noted during disassembly.
j. Remove the spray nozzle from the polyethylene bag. Screw the nozzle into the
nozzle holder and tighten to 75-100 inch-pounds. It is very important to torque the nozzle
to this valveas incorrect tightening could cause improper heater operation and "drool."
CAUTION
The spray nozzle has a slight protrusion on the nozzle face. If
this area has been struck by any object which would make a
dent or destroy the original contour, the nozzle must be
replaced.
k. Install a new gasket (30) and combustion head (6) in the combustion tube (7) and
secure with the six screws.
1. Insert the fitting on end of nozzle fuel tube through the opening in the jacket (5)
and attach the nozzle holder to the combustion head assembly (6) with the two screws.It
may be necessary to place a slight bend in the shrouded fuel tube to permit alignment of
screw holes. Be sure to use a new gasket (28).
m. Using a new spark plug gasket, install the spark plug (32) and tighten to a torque of
28 foot-pounds. Install the grommet (34) in the jacket around the spark plug.
n. Install the ignition assembly (2) on the jacket assembly (5) with the four screws.
Connect the high voltage lead to the spark plug and tighten it to 20 foot-pounds.
o. Attach the overheat limit switch (25) and spacer gaskets (27) to the jacket assembly
(5) with two screws.Tighten the screwssecurely.
p. Attach the cycling switch (24) and bracket to the jacket with the six screws.
q. Place the terminal strip insulation (36) in position on the jacket (5), followed by the
terminal strip (36). Secureboth parts by installingthe two screws.
r. Center the fuel fitting in jacket opening. Position the fuel fitting shroud gasket (29),
washer (41) and shroud (9); then install the nut (38) finger tight. Insert a 3/4 inch open-end
wrench inside the jacket and hold the fuel-tube fitting while tightening the nut (38) with a
3/4 inch deep socket. Install the fuel solenoid elbow (34) and solenoid (22). Avoid twisting
or damaginglead. Install wires through grommet in lower shroud (9).

Reissued: 2 18 81
5H4
s. Rotate the combustion air switch (26) onto the threaded fitting on the combustion
air tube and tighten it firmly.
t. Slide the grommet (16) over the combustion air tube and connect the tube to the
elbow fitting (33) on the combustion air pressure switch (26).
u. Install the wiring harness and connect all wire leads to their respective terminals.
(Refer to the wiring diagram. Figure 13-41.) Place the grommet (45, Figure 13-47) in.
position in the jacket (5); locate the ventilating air blower (11) at the end of the jacket.
Thread the quick-disconnect on the motor lead through the grommet and connect it to the
mating connector on the wiring harness.
v. Place the blower housing in position on the jacket assembly (5) and secure it by
installing the four screws (20), if removed at disassembly.This operation is easier if the
screws(20) are started into their threads and the blower housing rotated into place, allowing
the screws to enter the notched openings in edge of blower housing. Tighten all screws
securely.
w. Install the adapter (23) with the screw.
x. After heater is installed in the aircraft and the fuel line is connected, install the
upper fuel shroud box (10) with the screws.Ascertain grommet (40) is installed.
13-176. REASSEMBLYOF COMBUSTIONAIR BLOWERASSEMBLY.(Refer to Figure

13-48.)
a. Place the spacer (15) over the end of the motor shaft and attach the motor assembly
(5) to the inner housing (8) with the two self-lockingnuts (17), flat washers(16) and lock
washers.
- b. Slide the blower wheel (7) on the motor shaft and tighten the set screw lightly
against the flat portion of the motor shaft.
c. Place the outer blower housing (3) in position on the inner housing (8) and install
screws (18).
d. Attach the radio noise filter (10) at the point shown with the screw. The motor
ground lead terminal can be grounded to the motor support bracket (13).
e. Loosen the Allenhead set screwin the blower fan (7) and shift the fan on the motor
shaft until it is near the inlet in the blower housing. Tighten the set screw securely. The
blower fan should just clear the inlet flange when rotated at full RPM. Spin the blower fan
by hand for clearance check; then apply proper voltage to run motor and recheck for proper
clearance.
f. Attach the blower inlet adapter (2) to blower housing (3) with screw(18).

Reissued: 2 18 81
5H5
5H6
2519
34 27
13
Figure 13-47. Exploded View of Heater Assembly No. 755 257 (28-Volt)

Reissued: 2/18/81
5H7
CALLOUTS FOR FIGURE 13-47
1. HEATER ASSEMBLY
3. VIBRATOR - IGNITION
4. COIL IGNITION
5. JACKET ASSEMBLY
6. HEAD ASSEMBLY - COMBUSTION
7. TUBE ASSEMBLY - COMBUSTION
8. FUEL FEED AND NOZZLE HOLDER ASSEMBLY
9. BOX ASSEMBLY FUEL SHROUD, LOWER
10. BOX ASSEMBLY FUEL SHROUD, UPPER
11. BLOWER ASSEM BLY - VENT Al R
12. HOUSING - BLOWER
13. MOTOR ASSEMBLY - VENT AIR BLOWER
14. CAP BRUSH ASSEMBLY
15. BRUSH ASSEMBLY - MOTOR
16. GROMMET
17. FAN VENT BLOWER
18. CAPACITOR
19. BRACKET ASSEMBLY - MOTOR
20. FASTENER
21. NOZZLE-FUEL
22. SOLENOID ASSEMBLY - FUEL
23. ADAPTER
24. SWITCH - CYCLING
25. SWITCH- LIMIT
26. SWITCH PRESSURE
27. GASKET LIMIT
28. GASKET
29. GASKET
30. GASKET
31. GASKET ASBESTOS
32. SPARK PLUG
33. ELBOW
34. ELBOW
35. STRIP-TERMINAL
36. INSULATOR -TERMINAL STRIP
37. NIPPLE
38. NUT
39. GROMMET
40. GROMMET
41. WASHER
42. SCREWS
43. FASTENERS
44. BRACKET-GROUND
45. GROMMET
46. GROMMET

5H8
2520
1. COMBUSTION AIR BLOWER AND MOTOR ASSY. 14. SPACER

2. ADAPTER ASSY. - BLOWER INLET 15. SPACER
3. HOUSING BLOWER OUTER HALF 16. WASHER
4. COMBUSTION AIR BLOWER AND MOTOR 17. LOCKNUT - AN345-10
5. MOTOR ASSY. COMBUSTION AIR BLOWER 18. SCREWS
6. SET SCREW BLOWER FAN 19. SPACER
7. FAN COMBUSTION AIR BLOWER 20. SWITCH - ADJUSTABLE DUCT
8. HOUSING - BLOWER INNER HALF 21. COVER- SWITCH
9. STRAP - CABLE 22. SCREW - AN565-0S-H3
10. CAPACITOR 23. LEVER ASSEMBLY SWITCH
11. BRUSH ASSEMBLY
12. CAP BRUSH ASSEMBLY
13. MOUNT COMBUSTION AIR BLOWER SUPPORT
Figure 13-48. Exploded View of Combustion Air Blower and Motor Assembly No. 758 304

Reissued: 2/18/81
5H9
391
2512 VENTILATING
COMBUSTION OMBUSTION AIR BLOWER AIR
AIR MANOMETER MANOMETER
24" MIN.
COMBUSTION AIR
SWITCH
PRESSURE THERMOMETER
_OVERHEAT (LIMIT)
FUEL IN SWITCH
(FROM PUMP) I
CYCLING SWITCH
HEATER PPROX
VENT. AIR BLOWER EXHAUST OUTLET / 2.25 DIA. ORIFICE

VENT AIR BLOWER TERMINAL
STRIP DUCT
DUCT SWITCH
28 VDC
Figure 13-49. Suggested Setup for Heater Operation Test
13-177. TEST PROCEDURE.
13-178. GENERAL INFORMATION.A test of all components should have been made
after overhaul to insure proper operation. Some shops may not have complete testing
facilities for measuring airflows, pressure drops and other factors which would be
accomplished in a laboratory-type test. If such a test cannot be made, install the heater and
check operation on the ground and in the air to determine if operation is normal. In shops
where complete test equipment is available and a complete functional test can be
performed, the test routine described in subsequent paragraphs should be made.
13-179. EQUIPMENTREQUIRED. (Refer to Figure 13-49.)

a. An improvised stand to hold the heater during test. The heater should be located far
enough away from any combustible material or atmosphere to avoid hazard. A location
should be chosen where exhaust can be dispelled. Do not add an excessiveextension to the
heater exhaust.
b. A source of fuel capable of being regulated at seven psi.
c. The combustion air blower to be used with the heater should be used for the test.
d. A 28-volt DC power supply. A rheostat connected in series with the supply to adjust
the voltage and current. An ammeter connected in series with the supply to monitor the
current. A voltmeter connected in parallel with the supply to monitor the voltage.
e. Two water manometers (zero to 5.0 inch water column) for measuringthe pressure
in the ventilating air duct and in the combustion air stream.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5H10
f. A piece of duct to be attached to the downstream end of the heater. It should have a
minimum length of 24 inches and the same diameter as the heater being tested. A 2.25 inch
diameter orifice should be centrally located at the outlet end. An aperature should be
provided for the thermometer and duct switch and a static tap should be attached as shown
in Figure 13-49.
g. A thermometer with 500 F scale.
h. A fuel-pressuregauge.
i. A controlled source of compressedair for final leakage test.
13-180. OPERATIONAL TEST. (Refer to Figures 13-49and 13-50.)

a. Connect the heater to the test setup as shown in Figure 13-49. Make sure the
combustion air blower is mounted securely and that the heater is clamped to its supporting
stand.
b. Insert the duct switch in the sheet metal extension tube at the location shown in
Figure 13-49.
c. Connect components and heater as outlined in the wiring connection diagram,
Figure 13-50. The power supply switch should be open.
A788
VENT.AIR
TERMINAL BLOWER
I STRIP
RAIO NOISE
106-16
301-16 CYCLING
SWITCH
24VDC
302-1 (N.C.)
1202-16
201-16 FUEL
1
3 104-16 SOLENOID
VALVE
01RADIO
_010[
NOISE
ADJUSTABLE ILTELR 107-15
DUCT SWITCH 107-
LPM RADIO NOISE

FUEL PUMP FILTER COMBUSTION
AIR BLOWER
EXTERNAL WIRING
REQUIRED FOR BENCH TEST
HEATER WIRING
Figure 13-50. Wiring Connections for Heater Operation Test

Reissued: 2/18/81
5H11
d. Connect the power source to the heater.

e. Disconnect wire lead from terminal "3" on the heater side of the heater terminal
strip to prevent the heater from lighting and close the power source switch to check
operation of blowers. The combustion air blower and ventilating air blower should operate
at full speed with no blower wheel interference. If either blower fails to run, locate and
correct the trouble before proceeding with the test.
f. Connect a voltmeter from open side of combustion air pressure switch terminal to
ground to determine if the switch is closed, which would be indicated by a full voltage
reading on the meter. If a full voltage reading is not obtained, the combustion air supply is
either inadequate or the switch is defective or improperly adjusted. Make necessary
corrections.
g. Observe the manometer connected to the ventilating air pressure tap, which should
show a reading of 1.1 inches of water (minimum) at rated voltage.
h. Observe the manometer connected to the combustion air tube tap, which should
show a reading of 1.5 inches of water (minimum) at rated voltage.
i. Open the power supply switch and reconnect the terminal lead disconnected in
preceding step e.
j. Close the-power supply switch and turn on the fuel supply. The heater should light
within five seconds (may require slightly longer for air to be purged from fuel lines on the
first trial).
k. Observe operation of duct switch which should control heater operation according
to the switch setting.
1. If the duct switch fails to control the temperature according to the setting, place the
control lever in high "H" position and notice the control variation.A high reading of 250°F
+ 10*F should be obtained (reading willvary in different applications).
m. Connect a jumper across the terminals of the duct switch to make it inoperative and
observe action of the cycling switch. The cycling switch should cycle to control the outlet
air temperature at approximately 250 F (nominal). This is a function of ambient
temperature and airflow conditions. If operation is within a range of 190"F to 290° F, the
switch is operating normally. If the switch is out of range it can be reset in the same manner
as described for the duct switch, except that no control lever or indicator stop are used. If
adjustment fails to restore proper temperature range, replace the switch.
n. With duct switch still jumped, place a jumper across the cycling switch terminals to
check operation of the overheat switch. Block the ventilating air outlet and notice if the
overheat switch shuts off the heater. It should open at between 300' F and 400*F. (This is
also a function of ambient temperature and airflow). After the switch shuts off, remove
ventilating air restriction; remove jumpers from cycling and duct switches and press firmly
on the overheat switch reset button until it "clicks." The heater should light and operate.
o. Shut down the heater and check all components visually to make sure no damage
has occurred to any of them.
p. Remove heater and other components from the test setup and install it in the
airplane.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5H12
SECTION XIV
ACCESSORIES AND UTILITIES
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
14-1. Introduction ................................................. 5H 16

14-2. Oxygen System .............................................. 5H 17
14-3. Description and Principles of Operation ................ 5H17
14-4. Troubleshooting ..................................... 5H 17
14-5. Safety Precautions ............. ................. 5H 17
14-6. Inspection and Overhaul Time Limits .................. 5H17
14-7. Testing for Leaks .................................... 5H 18
14-8. Maintenance ........................................ 5H 18
14-9. Cleaning Operations ................................. 5H24
14-10. Removal of Oxygen Cylinder and Regulator ............ 5H24
14-11. Installation of Oxygen Cylinder and Regulator .......... 511
14-12. Removal of Oxygen Cylinder Recharge Valve ........... 512
14-13. Installation of Oxygen Cylinder Recharge Valve ......... 513
14-14. Removal of Pressure Gauge ........................... 513
14-15. Installation of Pressure Gauge ......................... 513
14-16. Removal of Outlets .................................. 514
14-17. Installation of Outlets ................................ 514
14-18. Purging Oxygen System .............................. 514
14-19. Cleaning of Face Masks ............................. 514
14-20. Propeller De-Icer System ...................................... 515
14-21. Description and Principles of Operation ................ 515
14-22. De-lcer System Operational Check ..................... 5110
14-23. Inspection .......................................... 5110
14-24. Fifty-Hour Inspection ................................ 5110
14-25. One-Hundred Hour Inspection ........................ 5112
14-26. Troubleshooting ..................................... 5115
14-27. Helpful Hints ....................................... 5115
14-28. Using Ammeter ..................................... 5116
14-29. Timer Test .......................................... 5116
14-30. De-Icer Resistance Check ............................. 5117
14-31. Brush Block Resistance Check......................... 5117
14-32. Overall Procedures .................................. 5J I
14-33. Use of Correct Parts ................................. 5J
14-34. Electrical .......................................... 5J 1
14-35. Mechanical......................................... 5J2
14-36. Balancing Weights ................................... 5J2
14-37. Propeller Markings.................................. 5J2
14-38. Switch, Circuit Breaker. Ammeter, Timer, Harness ....... 5J2
14-39. Brushes ............................................ 5J2
Revised: 4/26/83
5H13
Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
14-40. Brush Replacement as Sub-Assembly (PA-23-250;

PA-23-235; and PA-23-250 [six place], Serial
Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) ..................... 5J3
14-41. Brush Replacement as Sub-Assembly (PA-23-250 [six
place], Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up) ................ 5J4
14-42. Replacing Individual Brushes (PA-23-250: PA-23-235:
to 27-2504 incl.) ................................. 5J5
14-43. Replacing Individual Brushes (PA-23-250 [six place],
Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up)....................... 5J6
14-44. Alignment and Run-In of New Brushes ................. 5J6
14-45. Modular Brush Assembly Replacement for Brush
Block Assembly ................................. 5J7
14-46. Modular Brush Assembly Maintenance ................. 5J7
14-47. Slip Rings.......................................... 5J9
14-48. Machining.......................................... 5J9
14-49. Replacement........................................ 5J9
14-50. Torque Limits....................................... 5J9
14-51. Alignment.......................................... 5J 10
14-52. Eccentric Running ................................... 5 10
14-53. Blade De-Icers ...................................... 5J10
14-54. Replacement........................................ 5J 10
14-55. Cementing Procedure ................................ 5J 11
14-56. Blade De-lcer Surface, Outboard of Clamp ............. 5J 12
14-57. Blade De-lcer Lead Strap............................. 5J13
14-58. Spinner Dome Strip ................................. 5J13
14-59. Clamp Sponge Cushion .............................. 5J 14
14-60. Wrinkled De-lcers ................................... 5J14
14-61. Installation of De-lcer Straps and Wire Harness ......... 5J15
14-62. Other Components .................................. 5J15
14-63. Pneumatic De-lcer System..................................... 5J 17
14-64. Introduction....................................... 5J 17
14-65. Description and Principles of Operation ................ 5J 17
14-66. System Troubleshooting .............................. 5J22
14-67. System Checkout.................................... 5J22
14-68. Electrical Test....... ..... ................... 5J22
14-69. Vacuum Regulator Adjustment ........................ 5J23
14-70. Component Maintenance and Replacement ............. 5J23
14-71. Air Filter ........................................... 5J23
14-72. Control Valves...................................... 5J23
14-73. Timer or Time Module ............................... 5K2
14-74. Shuttle Valve ....................................... 5K2
14-75. Replacement ........................................ 5K2
14-76. Inspection (Preflight) ................................. 5K2
14-77. Inspection (Post Flight) .............................. 5K2
14-78. Inspection (100 Hours) ............................... 5K2
14-79. Inspection (500 Hours and Pressure Test) .............. 5K3
14-80. Pressure Control Valves Adjustments................... 5K6
14-81. High Pressure Deicer Boots ........................... 5K6
5H14 5H14 Revised: 4/26/83

Paragraph Aerofiche
Grid No.
14-82. Description ................... ............... 5K6

14-83. Removal ................ 5K7
14-84. Pre-Installation Requirements ......................... 5K7
14-85. Materials ........................................... 5K7
14-86. Preparation of Leading Edges ......................... 5K8
14-87. Preparation of Deicer ................................ 5K8
14-88. Installation of Deicer ................................ 5K8
14-89. Service Life of Deicers ............................... 5K9
14-90. Maintenance ........................................ 5K9
14-91. Icex Application..................................... 5K9
14-92. Repair ............................................. 5K10
14-93. Cold Repair ........................................ 5K10
14-94. Deleted............................................
14-95. Deleted .............................................
14-96. Scuff Damage....................................... 5K12
14-97. Tube Area Damage ................. ............... 5K12
14-98. Loose Surface Ply in Dead Area (Non-Inflatable Area) ... 5K13
14-99. Loose Surface Ply in Tube Area ....................... 5K13
14-100. Damage to Fabric Back Ply of High Pressure Deicer
During Removal ......................... 5K14
14-101. Vulcanized Repair ................................... 5K14
14-102. Propeller Synchronizer (Hushtrol System) .............. 5K19
14-103. Description of Propeller Synchronizer System ........... 5K19
14-104. Troubleshooting ..................................... 5K19
14-105. Functional Test ..................................... 5K19
14-106. Maintenance ........................................ 5K21
14-107. Removal of Phase Servo......... ..................... 5K21
14-108. Installation of Phase Servo ........................... 5K21
14-109. Adjustment of Phase Servo ........................... 5K21
14-110. Propeller Governor Adjustment ....................... 5K22
14-111. Removal of Electronic Chassis ........................ 5K23
14-112. Installation of Electronic Chassis ...................... 5K23
14-113. Test Equipment ..................................... 5K24
14-114. Electric Windshield Anti-Ice ................................... 5K24
14-115. Description ......................................... 5K24
14-116. Engine Synchrophaser ........................................ 5L4
14-117. Description of Synchrophaser System .................. 5L4
14-118. System Operating Procedure .......................... 5L4
14-119. Operational Checks .................................. 5L5
14-120. Troubleshooting ..................................... 5L8
14-121. Removal of Strobe Sensor ............................ 5L11
14-122. Installation and Adjustment of Strobe Sensor ........... 5L11
14-123. Removal of Pulse Generator .......................... 5L13
14-124. Installation and Adjustment of Pulse Generator ......... 5L14
14-125. Removal of Computer Assembly ....................... 5L15
14-126. Installation of Computer Assembly .................... 5L15
14-127. Removal and Installation of Glow Lamp and Photo
Conductor Assemblies............................ 5L15
Revised: 4/26/83
5H15
SECTION XIV
14-1. INTRODUCTION. This section covers accessories which are available

in this airplane and are not covered in other sections of this Service Manual.
This information provides instructions for remedying difficulties which may arise
in any of the accessories andthe instructions are organized so the mechanic may
refer to whichever component or system he must repair or adjust.
The Oxygen System contains service and maintenance procedures. Refer-
ence to this portion will aid the mechanic by providing information, such as the
location of the various components, Inspection, Maintenance, Removal and Instal-
lation, Safety Precautions and other information of value, for the proper care of
the system. A Troubleshooting Table at the end of the instructions will help to
locate and remedy any troubles which may arise in the oxygen system.
The B. F. Goodrich Electrical Propeller De-Icing System information pro-
vides service and maintenance procedures for the De-Icers. This information
consists of Inspection, Repair, Removal and Installation of all the parts which
make-up the system. A Troubleshooting Table is incorporated at the end of these
instructions to help in locating any trouble which may arise in this system and its
probable cause and recommended remedy for repair. All work done on the De-.
Icing System must comply with the appropriate Civil Aeronautics Regulations.
The B. F. Goodrich Pneumatic System information provides Service, Main-
tenance and Repair procedures for the lightweight pneumatic de-icers installed
on the wing and tail surfaces. For the various components that control the de-
icers, there are check and adjustment procedures, as well as information for
setting-up of the complete system. A Troubleshooting Table is also incorporated
as an aid in remedying trouble which may arise.

Reissued: 2 18/81
5H16
14-2. OXYGENSYSTEM.
14-3. DESCRIPTIONAND PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION. The oxygen system for the

PA-23-250 series airplanes consists of an oxygen cylinder and regulator, filler valve, pressure
gauge, outlets and masks and an ON-OFF control. High pressure is routed from the cylinder
and regulator to the pressure gauge. Low pressure oxygen is routed from the cylinder and
regulator to the outlets and masks whenever the control knob is pulled to the ON position.
Each outlet has a spring-loadedvalvewhich prevents the flow of oxygen until a mask hose is
engagedin the outlet.
14-4. TROUBLESHOOTING.A troubleshooting table, Table XIV-I, is located at the back

of the oxygen system portion of this section.
14-5. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.Utmost care must be exercised in servicing,handling and

inspection of the oxygen system. A fully charged oxygen cylinder contains enough pressure
to cause serious injury to personnel and damage to equipment. Keep hands, tools and
working area clean and post NO SMOKINGsigns. Keep all components of the system free
from oil, grease, gasoline and all readily combustible material. Never allow electrical
equipment to come in contact with the oxygen cylinder. Keep fire and heat away from
oxygen equipment and take care not to generate sparks with carelesslyhandled tools.
14-6. INSPECTIONAND OVERHAULTIME LIMITS. It is recommended that inspection

and overhaul be conducted by a DOT Approved Station or the manufacturer, Scott
Aviation. The following checks and chart gives recommended inspection and overhaul time
for the various parts of the oxygen system:
a. Standard weight cylinders (DOT 3AA 1800 classification) must be hydrostatic
tested every 5 years. The lightweight cylinders (DOT 3HT 1850 classification) must be
hydrostatic tested every 3 years and must be retired from service after 15 years or 4,380
pressurizations whichever occurs first. The month and year of the last test is stamped on the
cylinder beneath the DOTidentification.
b. The outlets should be checked for leakage both in the non-use condition and for
leakagearound an inserted connector.
c. The high pressure gauge may be checked for accuracy by comparing its indicated
pressure with that of a gauge of known accuracy.
d. Inspection of the regulator may be effected by introducing into an outlet a mask
connector to which is attached a 100 psi gauge. With one other outlet flowing through a
plugged in mask, the indicated regulator output pressure shall be not less than 45 psig at sea
level with 200 psig supply cylinder pressure. It should be noted that the permissibleleakage
through the 1/16 diameter vent hole in the side of the upper regulator housing is 10 cc/min.
maximum, when the regulator is turned on. There shall be no external leakageanywhere on
the regulator when it is turned off. All fittings shall be leak free.

Reissued: 2 18 81
5H17
PARTS INSPECTION OVERHAUL
Regulator 300 Flight Hrs. 5 Yrs.

Pressure Gauge 300 Flight Hrs. 5 Yrs.
High Pressure Lines 300 Flight Hrs.
Low Pressure Lines 300 Flight Hrs.
Outlets (Cabin) 300 Flight Hrs. 5 Yrs.
External Recharge Valve Each Use Replace every 5 yrs.
Masks Each Use Replace as Necessary
14-7. TESTING FOR LEAKS. Apply detector fluid type CD-I solution or its equivalent. The solution
should be shaken to obtain suds or foam. The suds or foam should be applied sparingly to thejoints of a closed
system. Look for traces of bubbles. No visible leakage should be found. Repair or replace any defective parts
and retest system. With the system pressurized to service pressure, further test can be made. The rate of any
leak should not exceed one percent of the total supply per 24 hour period. All traces of the detector fluid should
be wiped off at the conclusion of the examination.
14-8. MAINTENANCE.
a. Make sure to check the oxygen lines for proper clearance as follows: (Refer to Figure 14-1.)
I. Two inch minimum between oxygen tubes and all flexible moving parts of the aircraft (flexible
control cables, etc.). If enough space cannot be attained, protection from abrasion must be provided.
2. At least 1/2 inch minimum between oxygen tubes and all rigid moving parts of the aircraft such
as levers and rigid control rods.
3. Six inch minimum separation between oxgyen tubes and hydraulic, fuel, and electrical system
lines and components.
(A.) When six inch requirement cannot be complied with, one inch is allowed as long as
electrical cables and other lines are supported at least every two inches; and, the oxygen
tube(s) is protected by rubber neoprene hose fastened in place with cable ties at the
location the specific item crosses or is near the oxygen tube(s). If an item is near the
oxygen tube for a certain distance the oxygen tube for that distance must be covered.
4. A minimum of 1/8 inch between tubing and structure adjoining the supporting clamp, as
shown in Figure 14-1, Sketch A.
5. Where a tube passes through a grommet, the tube must not bear on the grommet in any way
that might cause cutting of the grommet in service as shown in Figure 14-1, Sketch D.
6. While in service, items may receive vibrations causing them to come in contact with other parts
of the aircraft. With this in mind, low pressure tubing that is supported well enough to prevent relative motion
must have at least a minimum clearance of I /8 inch from a projection (bolt, nut, etc.). Low pressure tubing that
cannot be supported will enough to prevent motion must have a minimum clearance of 1/8 inch allowed after
the maximum travel of the tube. High pressure lines are affected similarly but require 1/2 inch minimum
clearances. Refer to Figure 14-1, Sketch B.
b. Check the cylinder for DOT identification number and for the date of the last FAA inspection and
test.
c. If cylinder is completely empty it must be completely disassembled and inspected in an FAA
approved facility before recharging.
d. Any lines that are defective should be replaced with factory replacements.
e. Clean all lines and fittings as described in paragraph 14-9.
f. Use Ribbon Dope Thread Sealant (Permacel 412) on male ends of fittings only. Wrap thread in
direction of thread spiral, beginning with the second thread on the fitting. Avoid getting any sealant into the
lines.
Reissued:2/18/81
5H18
1/8 MIN
MIN
1/8 MIN
SKETCHB
NEOPRENE HOSEMAY BE
SLITTO FIT OVERTUBING.
SECURE WITHMS3367 CABLETIES.
POSITIONSLITAWAYFROMWIRES,
ETC.
GROMMET
CORRECT INCORRECT
-
EVERY2" AT CROSS-OVERS SKETCHD
SKETCH
C
Figure 14-1. Oxygen Tubing Installations

Reissued: 2/18/81
5H19
2530
1. MOUNTING STRAPS
2. REGULATOR
3. ON/OFF CONTROL
4. PRESSURE GAUGE
5. CYLINDER
6. MASK AND LINE ASSEMBLY
7. ALTITUDE/FLOW RATE GAUGE
8. FLOW RATE CONTROL
9. PRESSURE GAUGE
10. ON/OFF CONTROL
II. OXYGEN OUTLETS
Figure 14-2. Oxygen System Installation, PA-23-250

Reissued: 2/18/81
5H20
2533
1. ON/OFF CONTROL
2. OXYGEN OUTLETS
3. RECHARGE VALVE
4. FORWARD BAGGAGE
COMPARTMENT FLOORBOARD
5. REGULATOR
6. PRESSURE GAUGE
7. CYLINDER
8. MOUNTING STRAPS
Figure 14-3. Oxygen System Installation. PA-23-250; PA-23-250 (six place),


Reissued: 2/ 18 81
5H21
2632
1. OXYGEN OUTLETS
2. ON/OFF CONTROL
3. PRESSURE GAUGE
4. REGULATOR
5. FUSELAGE FRAME
6. MOUNTING STRAP
7. CYLINDER
8. BASE
Figure 14-4. Oxygen System Installation. PA-23-250 (six place).

Serial Nos. 27-3050, 27-3154 to 27-3836 incl. and 27-3838 to 27-3943 incl.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5H22
1. OXYGEN OUTLETS
2. ON OFF CONTROL
3. PRESSURE GAUGE
4. EXTERNAL RECHARGE VALVE
5. REGULATOR
6. MOUNTING STRAP
7. CYLINDER
8. BASE
Figure 14-5. Oxygen System Installation. PA-23-250 (six place).

Serial Nos. 27-3837. 27-3944 and up
Reissued: 2 18 81
5H23
14-9. CLEANING OPERATIONS. To remove oil and grease from tubing and fit-
tings, one of the following cleaning methods may be used:
a. First Method:
1. A vapor degreasing with stabilized trichlorethylene conforming to spec-
ification MIL-T-7003 shall be used.
2. Blow tubing clean and dry with a stream of clean, dried, filtered air.
Care shall be taken to insure that the interior of the tubing and fittings are thor-
oughly cleaned.
b. Second Method:
1. Flush with naptha conforming to specifications TT-N-95.
2. Blow clean and dry off all solvent with water pumped air.
3. Flush with anti-icing fluid conforming to specifications MIL-F-566 or
anhydrous ethyl alcohol.
4. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water.
5. Dry thoroughly with a stream of clean, dried, water pumped air or by
heating at a temperature of 250° to 300° F for a suitable period.
6. The solvents may be reused provided they do not become excessively
contaminated with oil. This condition shall be determined as follows:
(a) Evaporate 100 milliliters of the liquid to dryness in a weighed glass
dish. Evaporation may be accomplished by heating at 200° F for one-half hour.
(b) After evaporation, cool and weigh the residue. The solvent shall
not be used if the residue exceeds 100 milligrams in weight.
c. Third Method:
1. Flush with hot inhibited alkaline cleaner until free from oil and grease.
2. Rinse thoroughly with fresh water.
3. Dry thoroughly with a stream of clean, dried, water pumped air or by
heating at a temperature of 250° to 300° F for a suitable period.
14-10. REMOVAL OF OXYGEN CYLINDER AND REGULATOR.
WARNING
Do not attempt to remove the regulator from a charged

cylinder.
CAUTION
Be sure the regulator valve is closed before discon-

necting any oxygen lines from the cylinder.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5H24
a. The oxygen cylinder and regulator, located in the aft cabin section of PA-23-250 airplanes, may be
removed as follows:
I. Disconnect the oxygen lines from the regulator.
2. Cut the safety wire loosen and separate the clamps holding the cylinder in place.
3. Remove the cylinder from the airplane. Use caution not to bump the neck of the cylinder and
regulator.
b. The oxygen cylinder and regulator, located under the floor of the aft baggage compartment of
PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes in Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-3049 incl. and 27-3051 to 27-3153 incl., may be
removed as follows:
1. Fold the carpet back from the forward part of the aft baggage compartment floor.
2. Remove the forward section of the baggage compartment floorboard by removing attaching
screws.
3. Remove the aft baggage compartment trim panel by removing attaching screws.
4. Disconnect the oxygen lines and the ON-OFF control cable from the regulator.
5. Cut the safety wire, loosen and separate the clamps securing the oxygen bottle to the baggage
compartment floor channels.
6. Remove the oxygen bottle and regulator through the rear of the aft baggage compartment.
c. The oxygen cylinder and regulator, located in the aft baggage compartment of the PA-23-250 (six
place) airplane with Serial Nos. 27-3154 and up, may be removed as follows:
1. Disconnect the oxygen lines and the ON-OFF control cable from the regulator.
2. Cut the safety wire, loosen and separate the clamps holding the cylinder in place.
3. Remove the cylinder from the airplane. Use caution not to bump the neck of the cylinder and
regulator.
14-11. INSTALLATION OF OXYGEN CYLINDER AND REGULATOR.

a. On PA-23-250 airplanes, the oxygen cylinder and regulator may be installed in the following
manner:
1. Position the cylinder and regulator inside the aft section of the cabin.
2. Connect the clamps securing the bottle in place. Safety the wing nuts.
3. Connect the oxygen lines to the regulator.

5I1
511 Reissued: 2 18 81
b. On PA-23-250(six place) airplane with SerialNos. 27-2000 to 27-3049 inclusiveand

27-3051 to 27-3153 inclusive, the oxygen cylinder and regulator may be installed in the
followingprocedure:
1. Position the oxygen bottle and regulator under the aft baggage compartment
floor.
2. Secure the bottle and safety the clamps.
3. Connect the oxygen lines and ON-OFF control cable to the regulator.
4. Install the forward section of the baggagecompartment floor and the aft trim
panel with attaching screws.
5. Re-position the baggagecompartment floor carpet.
c. On PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-3154 and up, the oxygen
cylinder and regulator may be installed in the followingmanner:
1. Position the cylinder and regulator inside the aft baggagecompartment.
2. Connect the clamps securingthe bottle in place. Safety the wing nuts.
3. Connect the oxygen lines and the control cable to the cylinder.
NOTE
Refer to Section II for filling instructions.
14-12. REMOVALOF OXYGENCYLINDERRECHARGEVALVE.

CAUTION
Before attempting to remove the recharge valve,ascertain the

oxygen bottle is dischargedor the regulator valveis off.
a. The recharge valve on PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-2000 to
27-3049 inclusive;27-3051; 27-3153 and up may be removed by the followingprocedure:
1. Remove the screwsaround the base of the recharge valve.
2. Pull the carpet back from around the forward edge of the baggagecompartment
floor.
3. Remove the screws around the front section of the baggagecompartment floor
and around the recharge valve. Remove the floor panel.
4. Remove the recharge valve by disconnecting the line fitting just below the valve.
Cover the open line to prevent contamination.
b. Remove the recharge valveas followson PA-23-250(six place), SerialNos. 27-3050,
27-3154 and up which incorporate an external valve along the left side of the fuselage.
1. Remove the cover from the top of the oxygen cylinder by removing attaching
screws.

Reissued:2 /18/81
512
2. Disconnect the line fitting to the recharge valve. Cover the open line to prevent contamination.
3. Remove the valve by removing the screws securing it to the side of the fuselage.
14-13. INSTALLATION OF OXYGEN CYLINDER RECHARGE VALVE.

a. The recharge valve on PA-23-250(six place) airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-3049 inclusive;
27-3051; 27-3153 and up may be installed by the following procedure:
1. Position the valve and tighten the line fitting.
2. Install the forward section of the baggage compartment floor panel and secure with attaching
screws.
3. Re-position the carpet and install the screws around the base of the recharge valve.
b. Install the recharge valve as follows on PA-23-250 (six place) airplanes with Serial Nos. 27-3050.
27-3154 and up which incorporate an external valve along the left side of the fuselage.
1. Position the valve from the outside of the fuselage and secure with attaching screws.
2. Connect the recharge valve to the oxygen cylinder inside of the baggage compartment.
3. Install the cover over the top of the cylinder and secure with attaching screws.
14-14. REMOVAL OF PRESSURE GAUGE. Ascertain that the control valve is closed and there is not
pressure in the system.
a. Disconnect the connector from the back of the pressure gauge.
b. Loosen and remove the retainer nut and clamp holding the gauge in place.
c. Pull the gauge out from the front of the panel.
14-15. INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGE.

a. Place the gauge into the panel from the front and replace the clamp and retainer nut on the back of
the gauge. Be sure the gauge is positioned properly before tightening the clamp.
b. Reconnect the connector at the rear of the gauge.

5I3
513 Reissued: 2/18/81
14-16. REMOVAL OF OUTLETS.

a. Using a suitable spanner wrench, remove the outer half of the outlet.
b. Remove the screws holding the trim panel and remove the panel.
c. The outlet can now be removed from the low pressure line.
14-17. INSTALLATION OF OUTLETS.

a. Apply a sealant to the male end of the fitting.
b. Connect the outlet to the low pressure line.
c. Position the trim panel and secure with screws.
d. Position the outer half outlet and secure with a suitable spanner wrench.
e. Torque the fittings into the outlets approximately 30 inch-pounds. Do not over torque as this could
damage the outlet.
14-18. PURGING OXYGEN SYSTEM. The system should be purged whenever the cylinder pressure fails
below 50 psi or if any lines are left open for any length of time. Also, whenever there are any offensive odors
present it will be necessary to purge the system. Use the following procedure:
a. Park the airplane in a NO SMOKING area.
b. Keep all doors and windows open.
c. Be sure all electrical systems are shut off.
d. Connect the oxygen recharging unit to the filler valve.
e. Plug the oxgyen masks into the outlet valves and turn on the system.
f. Set the recharging unit pressure regulator to deliver 50 psi and let the system purge for one hour. If
any odor is still present, repeat the procedure for one or more hours. If the odor persists after the second
purging, replace the cylinder.
14-19. CLEANING OF FACE MASKS. The disposable masks are designed for one-time use and require
maintenance. The pilots and co-pilots masks can be cleaned as follows:
a. Remove the microphone from the mask.
b. Remove the sponge rubber discs from the mask turrents. Do not use soap to clean sponge rubber
discs, as this would deteriorate the rubber and give off unpleasant odors. Clean in clear water and squeeze dry.
c. Wash the rest of the mask with a very mild solution of soap and water.
d. Rinse the mask thoroughly to remove all traces of soap.
e. Make sure the slides of the breathing bag do not stick together while drying, as this may decrease the
life of the rubber in the bag. The mask can be sterilized with a solution of 70 percent ethyl alcohol.
514
5I4 Reissued: 2 18 81
14-20. PROPELLER DE-ICER SYSTEM.
14-21. DESCRIPTION AND PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION. (Refer to Figure 14-6 or

14-7.) This section provides service and maintenance procedures for the B. F. Goodrich Elec-
trical Propeller De-Icing System. Each Propeller De-Icing System consists of an electrically-
heated De-lcer (9) bonded to each propeller blade. a slip ring assembly (8) with a brush block
assembly (7) to transfer electrical power to the rotating De-lcers, a timer (1), an ammeter (5),
and a control switch (3) together with wiring harnesses to complete the circuit.
To conserve electrical power, current is cycled to the De-lcer heaters at timed intervals
rather than continuously. Each De-lcer has two separate heaters, one for the outer half and
one for the inner half. By heating all outer or inner heaters on only one propeller at a time,
rotational balance is held during de-icing. Current is drawn from the airplane electrical
system through the switch, ammeter and timer. The timer successively delivers current via the
slip ring and brush block arrangement to the outer heaters on the right propeller, the inner
heaters on the same propeller, the outer heaters on the left propeller and the inner heaters on
the left propeller. The timer energizes each of these four phases in turn for about 30 seconds
and then repeats the cycle as long as the control switch is on. The cycling sequence given is vital
so that outboard heaters on each propeller operate before the inboard heaters. Refer to Figures
14-8 through 14-11which represent a typical. not a particular. system. Correct circuit diagrams
for each system are shown in Figures 14-18 and 14-19. The use of heat at the ice adhesion sur-
face reduces the grip of the ice which is then removed by the centrifugal effect of rotation and
the blast of the airstream. Note that a minimum thickness or weight of ice must build-up
before centrifugal force becomes important. The system may be used continuously in flight if
needed.
NOTE
Heating may begin at any phase in the cycle depending on the

timer position when the switch was turned off from previous
use.

Reissued:2/18/81
515
5. AMMETER
1. TIMER 6. RECEPTACLE
2. DE-ICER STRAP CLAMP 7. BRUSH BLOCK ASSEMBLY
3. ON-OFF SWITCH 8. SLIP RING
4. BRUSH AND RETAINER PLATE ASSEMBLY 9. DE-ICER
Figure 14-6. Propeller De-Icer Installation, PA-23-250
1. TIMER
2. PNEUMATIC TIMER ALTERNATE LOCATION
3. ON-OFF SWITCH
4 EXTERNAL SHUNT 0
5. AMMETER
Figure 14-7. Propeller De-Icer Installation, PA-23-250 (six place)
516 5I6 Reissued: 2 18 81

a. De-Icers: The De-Icers contain special heater wires protected by fabric

plies and by oil and abrasion-resistant rubber. The side of the De-Icer cemented
to the prop has a dull finish whereas the air side finish is "glossy". B. F. Goodrich
Report 59-728 covers installation of the De-Icers on the propellers; a copy of
such report should be kept with this manual.
NOTE
Each De-Icer has a separate lead for the inboard and

outboard heater and a third lead which is a common
ground. These leads are so marked on all but a few
early de-icers. An unmarked ground canbe identified
by using an ohmmeter across the three possible pairs
of leads. Two pair will show identical resistance; the
third pair will show double this resistance. The latter
are the "hot" leads and the lead not in this pair is the
ground lead.
NOTE
The wiring diagrams in Figures 14-18and 14-19 show

the brush, slip ring and De-Icer connections, which
vary accordingto the system number at hand. Be sure
to follow the wiring diagram for the specific system
involved.
b. Slip Rings - Brushes and Brush Blocks: To transfer electrical power to the
rotating De-Icers, a brush block assembly is mounted to the engine or similar
stationary member and has brushes which are spring loaded to press against the
revolving slip rings. The slip ring assembly is either mounted on the aft side of
the spinner bulkhead or crankshaft flange or, alternately, is provided as a slip
ring gear assembly which replaces the original starter ring gear of the engine.
c. Timer: The timer is a sealed unit. If found inoperative, it must be re-
placed as an assembly - no field repairs are authorized. The two types of timers
used are interchangeable electrically. By drilling new mounting holes, timers of
either type may be used as replacement for the other.
d. Ammeter: The ammeter is designed for each particular system and it is
therefore important that the correct replacement part number be used if replace-
ment should be required. In the event of low airplane battery voltage (very pos-
sible in ground checks), the ammeter readings will be lower than at full voltage.
Provided the ammeter needle reads in the shaded range on the scale, current
flow is to be considered as normal.
5I7
517 Reissued: 2/18/81
"A" FOR 14 VOLT SYSTEM
BRUSHBLOCK
/ SLIP RINGS
Figure 14-8. Electrical Diagram Showing Cycle Sequence, Phase I
PIN "A" FOR 14 VOLT SYSTEM

PIN "G" FOR 28 VOLT SYSTEM L
BRUSHBLOCK
SLIP RINGS
I
TO POWERSOURCE
Figure 14-9. Electrical Diagram Showing Cycle Sequence, Phase 2

518 Reissued: 2, 18/81
DE-ICER
"A" FOR 14 VOLT SYSTEM

"" FOR 28VOLT SYSTEM
BRUSHBLOCK
SLIP RINGS
TO POWERSOURCE
I
DEICER
BRUSHBLOCK
SLIP RINGS
TO POWERSOURCE

Reissued: 2/ 18/81
519
14-22. DE-ICER SYSTEM OPERATIONAL CHECK.

a. Chock the wheels and operate the engine at near take-off power.
b. Turn De-Icer system switch ON and observe De-lcer ammeter for at least two minutes.
c. The ammeter needle must "flicker" approximately every 30 seconds as the step switch
of the timer operates.
d. With engines stopped, turn De-lcer switch ON and feel De-lcers on propellers for
proper sequence of heater operation.
e. The starting point is not important but the sequence is vital and must be: Right Out-
board, Right Inboard, Left Outboard, Left Inboard heaters. in that order.
f. Temperature rise should be noticeable and each heater should warm for about 30
seconds.
g. Local hot spots indicate surface damage of De-Icer heaters and should be repaired.
14-23. INSPECTION.
14-24. FIFTY-HOUR INSPECTION.

a. Lock brakes and operate engines at near take-off power. Turn De-lcer system switch
ON and observe De-lcer ammeter for at least 2 minutes. Ammeter needle must reset within
the shaded band except for a "flicker,"each approximately 30seconds,as the step switch of the
timer operates. If not, refer to the appropriate entry of the troubleshooting table, Table
XIV-III.
WARNING
Stand clear of propellers - be sure ignition switch is OFF.
b. With engines stopped, turn De-lcer switch ON and feel De-Icers on propellers for
proper sequence of heater operation. The starting point is not important but sequence is
vital and must be: RIGHT OUTBOARD. RIGHT INBOARD, LEFT OUTBOARD AND
LEFT INBOARD heaters, in that order. Temperature rise should be noticeable and each
heater should warm for about 30 seconds. Local hot spots indicate service damage of
De-lcer heaters - inspect and repair as in paragraph 14-32.

5I10
ORIGINAL BEND IN
LEAD STRAP
Figure 14-12. Relocating Bend in De-Icer Lead
c. Remove spinner dome and open access doors as required. With assistant observing
De-Icer ammeter and with De-Icer switch ON, flex all accessible wiring - particularly the
De-Icer lead straps, leads from slip ring assembly and the firewall electrical connectors and
their wiring. Any movement of the ammeter needle - other than the "30 second flicker" of
cycling - indicates a short or open that must be located and corrected. (Refer to paragraph
14-25, f.)
d. Relocate bend of lead strap between hub clamp and clip as in Figure 14-12. This
periodic relocation increases the life of the straps.
e. Check for damaged brush rods, springs or for worn or damaged brushes. Refer to
Figure 14-13 or 14-14 as applicable, to determine brush wear.
NOTE
Brush modules should be replaced when 3/8 inch of brush

material remains; brush modules MUST be replaced when 1/4
inch remains. Measure as shown in Figure 14-14.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5111
1/8 MIN
CHECKINGBRUSH WEAR-
CHECKINGBRUSHWEAR- INTERNALLYWIRED- PROTRUDINGBRUSH
ROD
ROD
EXTERNALLYWIREDBRUSH
Figure 14-13. Determining Figure 14-14. Determining

Brush Wear Brush Wear
14-25. ONE-HUNDRED HOUR INSPECTION.

a. Conduct 50-hour inspection.
b. Check for radio noise or radio compass interference by operating engine
at near take-off power and with radio gear ON while turning De-Icer switch ON
and OFF. If noise or interference occurs with De-Icer switch ON and disappears
when switch is OFF, see Troubleshooting.
c. Visually and by feel check for clamps, clips, mountings, electrical con-
nections and connectors for tightness and electrical soundness. Look for loose,
broken or missing safety wire.
d. De-Icers: Closely check De-Icers for wrinkled, loose or torn areas, par-
ticularly around the outboard end and where the strap passes under the hub clamp.
Look for abrasion or cuts, especially along the leading edge andtheflat or thrust
face. If heater wires are exposed in damaged areas or if rubber is found to be
tacky, swollen or deteriorated (as from oil or fluids solvent contact), replace
the damaged De-Icer.

Reissued:2/18/81
5112
TYPICALUSEOF DIALINDICATOR
Figure 14-15. Checking Slip Ring Run-Out
BRUSH
NOTCHWORNIN BRUSH
DUETO MISALIGNMENT
Figure 14-16. Wear Pattern of Misaligned Brush

Reissued: 2/18/81
5113
NOTE
Check that hub clamps are tight. Look for cracks or other
damage. See that cushioning material is not missing or
damaged, either under hub clamp or on edge of spinner dome.
Manually operate propeller from "full pitch" to "feathering"
and check that De-Icer lead straps do not come under tension
or are pinched by the propeller blade. (Refer to Figures 14-28
and 14-29.)
e. Slip Rings: Visually and by feel check slip rings for gouges, roughened surface, cracks,
burned or discolored areas and for deposits of oil, grease or dirt.
1. Clean greasy or contaminated slip rings with CRC 2-26 solvent (from Corrosion
Reaction Consultants, Inc. of Philadelphia, Pa.). In such case, a run-in time of 5 hours engine
operation must be allowed before De-Icer system is turned on.
2. If uneven wear is found or if wobble is noticed, set up dial indicator as in Figure
14-15 to check alignment of slip rings on prop shaft. (Push in to turn prop to eliminate play in
prop thrust bearing.) If runout over 360 degree rotation is over 0.005 inches total or exceeds
0.002 inches in any 4 inch arc, refer to paragraph 14-51.
f. Brush Block - Brushes: Examine mounting brackets and housings for cracks, de-
formation or other physical damage. See that leads are not chafed or binding. Check for tight
connections.
1. Test that each brush rides fully on its slip ring over 360 degrees. Figure 14-16 shows
wear pattern if this condition is not correct. If off alignment, shim under brush block or
elongate holes at mounting brackets to raise or lower brush block to proper position. (If
brushes ride both high and low in relation to slip rings in 360 degree rotation, the slip ring
assembly is eccentrically mounted and the spinner bulkhead must be replaced as in paragraph
14-52.
2. Check for proper clearance of brush block to slip rings as in Figure 14-17. If not
correct, loosen mounting screws and move in elongated holes to correct block position before
tightening securely. (If necessary, shim between thrust bearing plate and mounting plate.)
3. By eye, check brush block to have about 2 degree angle of attack as in Figure
14-17. If not, loosen mounting bolts and twist block but be sure to hold clearance limits shown,
when tightening.
5114
2 (APPROX.)
/ ROTATION
.06 ± .03
SLIP RINGSURFACE
Figure 14-17. Brush Block Positioning

g. System Wiring: With De-Icer system operating, have assistant observe
ammeter while visually inspecting and physically flexing wiring from brush
blocks thru firewall, to timer, to ammeter, to switch and to airplane power
supply. The ammeter will flicker as the timer switches each 30-seconds in the
cycle. Jumps or flickers at other times indicate loose or broken wiring in the
area under examination at that moment. In such case, check continuity thru
affected harness, each wire in turn, while flexing and prodding area that gave
initial indication of trouble. Use wiring diagram to trace circuitry.
14-26. TROUBLESHOOTING. (Refer to Table XIV-I.)
14-27. HELPFUL TIPS.

a. If the ammeter reading drops to one-half normal current, this indicates
that one heater circuit is open from the slip ring assembly to the De-Icer heater
or possibly improper connections allowing both inboard and outboard units to
heat at the same time.
b. Excess current reading on the ammeter always indicates a power lead is
shorted to ground. In such case, it is possible that the excess current may have
welded the time contacts in one phase. The result may be a timer which does
not cycle or, possibly, the timer may continue to cycle but also feeds the welded
contacts continuously. The latter condition will, in the heat test, show as two
phases heating simultaneously, over 3 of the 4 phases. Thus, when trouble of

Reissued: 2/18/81
5I15
this nature is found it is vital that the grounded power lead be located and cor-
rected. Otherwise, a new timer may suffer the same internal damage during
first use of the system.
c. A considerable number of timers have been returned for repair which
proved, on test, to be fully workable. Before concluding that the timer is at
fault, accomplish the test described in paragraph 14-28.
d. In cases where brush breakage or rapid brush wear is found to be a cause
of trouble, be sure to check brush block alignment and adjustment as in para-
graph 14-25, f. Also, check slip ring alignment per paragraph 14-51.
14-28. USING AMMETER. Whether in flight or during ground testing, the

ammeter can be used to indicate the general nature of most electrical problems.
The "Troubleshooting" chart is primarily based on this use of the ammeter and
assumes that the user does understand all normal operating modes of the system
as given in paragraph 14-21. Read all of the trouble entries to locate that which
matches conditions of the particular system being checked. The causes and
remedies in the same box then show the recommended sequence of check.
NOTE
When troubleshooting, first use the "ammeter test"

and "heat test", paragraph 14-24, a and b, to deter-
mine which circuits are involved. Use circuit dia-
grams to check voltages or continuity.
14-29. TIMER TEST. Field experience indicates that too often the timer is
considered at fault when the true trouble lies elsewhere. Before removing a
timer as defective, perform this test:
a. Disconnect harness at timer and with De-Icer switch ON, check voltage
from pin B of harness plug to ground. If system voltage is not present, the fault
is not in the timer. If system voltage is present at pin B, check ground circuit
using ohmmeter from either harness plug pin A (if 14-volt system) or pin G (if
28-volt system) to ground. If no circuit is shown, the fault is in ground lead, not
in timer. If ground connection is open, the timer step switch will not change
position.
b. When power and ground circuits have been checked, connect a jumper wire
from pin B of harness to B contact of timer socket to power timer. Connect a
jumper wire from either pin A (if 14-volt system) or pin G (if 28-volt system) of
harness to A or G contact respectively of timer socket to complete the power
circuit. Now use voltmeter from ground to the timer socket and check that timer
5116 5I16 Reissued: 2/18/81

is cycling to deliver system voltage to C, D, E and F contacts in that order (the

starting point is not important but sequence must be as given). Each of these
four contacts must deliver voltage for approximately 30-seconds, in turn, and
there must be zero voltage on the three contacts not energized.
c. If the timer meets these requirements, it is not the cause of trouble. If it
fails to perform as indicated, the trouble does lie in the timer and it should be
replaced.
14-30. DE-ICER RESISTANCE CHECK. To determine incorrect resistance,

short or open at the brush-to-slip ring contact, disconnect harness at the timer
and use low-range ohmmeter to read resistance from each De-Icer circuit lead
(pins C, D, E and F of harness plug) to ground. If not in the range shown in the
table following, disconnect the De-Icer lead straps to measure heater resistances
individually as in the last line of the table. If first check is off limits but second
check is OK, the trouble is probably in the brush-to-slip ring area; if the second
check is off limits, the De-Icer concerned is damaged and must be replaced.
DE-ICER RESISTANCE CHART (Ohms)
No. 4E1188 No. 4E1214
IN PARALLEL
(At harness)
Two blades 2.30 to 2.65 0.60 to 0.69
INDIVIDUAL
HEATER 4.58 to 5.26 1.15 to 1.33
14-31. BRUSHBLOCK RESISTANCE CHECK. To determine when open, short

or high resistance is present in brush block, use low range ohmmeter to meas-
ure resistance from face of brush to its terminal studs or receptacle pin. If over
0.013 ohms, locate and repair cause of high resistance; if zero, locate and re-
pair open or ground or else replace the brush. Check resistance between the
three terminal studs or receptacle pins. This resistance should not be less than
0.5 megohms.

Reissued: 2, 1881
5117
LEFT ENGINE ENGINE

SlipRing
NOTES
TO POWER SOURCE
Figure 14-18. Schematic Wiring Diagram, PA-23-250; PA-23-235;

and PA-23-250 (six place). Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.
LEFT ENGINE
TO POWER SUURCE
Figure 14-19. Schematic Wiring Diagram,

PA-23-250 (six place). Serial Nos. 27-2505 and up

Reissued: 2/18/81
5118
TABLE XIV-I. PROPELLER DE-ICER SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING

Ammeter shows zero Blown fuse (if used). Locate and correct
current. (All 4 phases short before replacing
of the 2 minute cycle.) the blown fuse.
Switch faulty. If no voltage at switch

output with voltage at
switch input, replace
the switch. If voltage
is OK at switch out-
put, check ammeter.
No power from air- If no voltage into

plane. switch, locate and
correct open.
Ammeter faulty. (If Test for voltage up to

some or all De-Icers and out of ammeter.
heat with ammeter at If low or zero output
zero, replace the and input OK, replace
ammeter.) ammeter, locate and
fix open between switch
and ammeter
Open ammeter to timer. Disconnect harness at

timer and check volt-
age pin B (of harness)
to ground. If none,
locate correct open.
Ammeter shows normal Open in wiring between Use heat test to find De-
current part of cycle, timer and firewall con- icers not heating and
zero current rest of nector. test for voltage on that
cycle. pin of firewall connec-

Reissued: 2/18/81
5119
TABLE XIV-I. PROPELLER DE-ICER SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING(cont.)
Ammeter shows normal Open in wiring between tor. If zero over 2

current part of cycle, timer and firewall con- minutes, locate and fix
zero current rest of nector. open in wiring from
cycle (cont.) timer to firewall.
Open between firewall If voltage OK to firewall

and De-Icer lead plug, try voltage at
straps. junction of De-Icer
lead and slip ring lead.
If no voltage, find and
correct open in wiring
to brush block, open
within brush block or
no contact brush to slip
ring.
No ground circuit, one If voltage at De-Icer

engine. leads, locate and fix
open from De-Icer to
ground.
Ammeter shows normal Inner and outer De-Icers Locate and repair in-
current part of cycle, heating same phase. correct connections.
low current rest of
cycle. Open in De-Icer or slip Disconnect De-Icer
ring assembly. straps to check heater
resistance as in para.
14-30. If OK, locate
and fix open in slip
ring leads. If not, re-
place De-Icer with
open circuit.
High resistance in cir- If not in contact of brush

cuit with low current. to slip ring (including
ground brush), trace
wiring to De-Icer and

Reissued: 2/18/81
5120
Ammeter shows normal High resistance in cir- to timer to fix partially

current part of cycle, cuit with low current. broken wire, loose or
low current rest of (cont.) corroded connection.
cycle. (cont.)
Ammeter shows low Airplane voltage low. Check voltage into

current over entire switch.
cycle.
Ammeter faulty. Test for voltage up to
and out of ammeter. If
low or zero output and
input OK, replace am-
meter. If no voltage to
ammeter, locate and
and ammeter.
High resistance up to Check for partially

timer. broken wire, loose or
corroded connection in
wiring from airplane
supply to timer input.
Ammeter shows excess Ammeter faulty. Test for voltage up to

current over entire and out of ammeter. If
cycle. low or zero output and
input OK, replace am-
meter. If no voltage to
ammeter, locate and
and ammeter.
Ground between ammeter Disconnect harness at

and timer. timer and, with ohm-
meter, check from pin
B (of harness) to ground.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5121

Ammeter shows excess Ground between ammeter If ground is indicated,

current over entire and timer. (cont.) locate and correct.
cycle. (cont.)
Ammeter shows normal Ground between timer Disconnect leads at

current part of cycle, and brush block. brush block and, with
excess current rest of ohmmeter, check from
cycle. power leads to ground.
If ground is indicated,
locate and correct.
Ground between brush If no short exists at

block and De-Icers. brush-slip ring con-
(Excluding ground tact, check for ground
brush circuit. ) from slip ring lead to
bare prop while flex-
ing slip ring and De-
Icer leads. If a ground
is indicated, locate and
correct.
Short between two Check for shorts or low

adjacent circuits. resistance between
circuits, if any, locate
and correct.
Timer faulty. Test timer as in para.

14-29.
Ammeter does not Timer ground open. Disconnect harness at

"flick" each 30 sec- timer and check with
onds. ohmmeter from Pin A
or G (of harness) to
ground. If no circuit,
fix open per appropriate
schematic diagram.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5122

Ammeter does not Timer contacts are weld- Test timer as in para.
"flick" each 30 sec- ed (caused by short cir- 14-28. If timer does
onds. cuit in system). not cycle with voltage
at pin B, replace timer
but be sure short
causing original failure
has been located and
corrected.
Ammeter flicks Loose connection be- If trouble occurs over

between 30 second tween airplane power entire cycle, trace wir-
phase periods (con- supply and timer in- ing from power source
firm by ground test put. to timer input to locate
as in paragraph and tighten loose con-
14-25, g.) nection.
Loose or poor con- If trouble occurs part of

nection timer to De- cycle, find which De-
Icers. Icers are affected and
check for rough or
dirty slip rings causing
brush to "skip". If not
this, trace circuits to
locate and fix loose or
poor connection. (If all
De-Icers on one prop
are affected, check the
ground circuit. )
Timer cycles errat- Test timer as in para.

ically. 14-28.
Radio noise or in- Brushes "arcing" Check brush alignment as

terference with De- in para. 14-25, f.Look
Icers on. for rough or dirty slip
rings. If this is the

Reissued: 2/ 18/81
5123

Radio noise or inter- Brushes "arcing". cause, clean, machine

ference with De-Icers (cont.) or replace slip ring
on. (cont.) assembly. Check slip
ring alignment per
paragraph 14-51.
Loose connection. Refer to next preceding

Trouble.
Switch faulty. Try jumper wire across

switch - if radio noise
disappears, replace the
switch.
Wiring located within 8" Relocate at least 8"

of radio equipment from input wiring to
wiring. radio equipment.
Cycling sequence not Crossed connections. Check system wiring

correct. against circuit diagram
for improper connec-
tions.
Rapid brush wear or Brush block out of Check brush alignment

frequent breakage. alignment as in paragraph 14-25,
f.
Slip ring wobbles. Check slip ring align-

ment with dial indicator
as in paragraph 14-51.

Reissued: 2,' 18/81
5124
14-32. OVERALL PROCEDURES.
14-33. USE OF CORRECT PARTS. The type and number of De-Icers determine
the system current drain. The ammeter and the switch are designed to operate
at such specific current. Accordingly, any mixing of De-Icer part numbers on
the same airplane or the use of the incorrect ammeter or switch will affect sys-
tem operation. The parts manual should be followed closely.
CAUTION
Guard against installing two different part number

De-Icers onthe same propeller or the same airplane.
This will throw the De-Icer system out of balance
electrically.
14-34. ELECTRICAL.
a. For soldering, use Kester "Resin Five" core solder, 0.062 strand No. 66
or equal. Where flexibility of wire lead is vital, as in brush leads, etc., guard
against applying excess solder which would stiffen the wire or joint. This con-
dition is called "wicking" and must be held to 0.125 inch maximum on brush leads.
Use care that solder does not deposit on brushrod below barrel when soldering
brush leads as this may cause brush to hang up or bind.
b. In crimping terminals to wire, use proper tool and see that terminal is
crimped to bare wire, not on insulation. If wires are found too short to repair,
replace with same grade and quality, dressed along harness.
c. Bent pins in connectors may be straightened with long nose pliers but check
that work hardening does not leave pin brittle and susceptible to breakage. If in
doubt, replace the connector. Similarly, minor damage to connector threads
may be repaired. Major damage requires replacement.
d. Locate leads and harnesses to be at least eight inches away from radio
wiring to avoid radio noise or radio compass interference. Chafed or worn har-
ness areas indicate need to redress the wiring. If not too badly damaged, chafed
areas may be wrapped well with insulating tape and covered with vinyl tubing.
If in doubt, replace the affected wires or harness.

Reissued: 2/ 18/81
5J1
14-35. MECHANICAL. Use safety wire at timer, wire harnesses, brush block
assembly, slip ring, and at hub clamp and clip of blade De-Icers where found at
disassembly and wherever provisions are made for its use.
14-36. BALANCINGWEIGHTS. For procedure when balancing weights of Hart-

zell propellers are removed or installed, refer to B. F. Goodrich Service Bulletin
E-61-12.
14-37. PROPELLER MARKINGS. For procedure when identification of Hartzell

propellers are affected by De-Icer installation, refer to B. F. Goodrich Service
Bulletin E-63-20.
14-38. SWITCH, CIRCUIT BREAKER, AMMETER, TIMER, HARNESS.

a. Tighten loose mechanical mounting hardware and/or loose electrical con-
nections but avoid excess force which might strip threads. If replacement is
found necessary, replace with the correct part number. Use the same or equiv-
alent hardware to mount and make electrical connections as in the wiring dia-
grams. Note that airplane power supply lead ties to positive ammeter terminal,
negative terminal connects to pin B of connector plug at timer.
14-39. BRUSHES. When replacing brushes or brush retainer assemblies, al-

ways install new springs.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5J2
14-40. BRUSHREPLACEMENTAS SUB-ASSEMBLY. (PA-23-250; PA-23-235 and

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) (Refer to Figure
14-20.) Dismount the brush insert assembly by taking out the mounting screws
and associated hardware at the point labeled (1). Disconnect brush leads at the
studs noting the studs to which the leads of the top, middle and bottom brushes
are connected. Now take out the screws (2) and associated washers to pull out
the brush retainer assembly (3) which includes the brushes, springs and the re-
tainer. Slip the brushes of the new sub-assembly into the slots of the holder and
mount the new sub-assembly with screws (2) and associated washers. Connect
the brush leads to the studs exactly as noted in removal and check against the
wiring diagrams in Figures 14-18 and 14-19 if in any doubt. Mount the brush
insert assembly with the screws and associated hardware at (1). (Refer to Para-
graph 14-44.)
Figure 14-20. Brush Insert Assembly,

PA-23-250:PA-23-235;and PA-23-250 (six place),

5J3
14-41. BRUSH REPLACEMENTAS SUB-ASSEMBLY.(PA-23-250 (six place), SerialNos.

27-2505 and up.) (Refer to Figure 14-21.) Take out screws at point labeled (1) and
associated washersto dismount the brush block assembly.Next, remove screws(2) and their
washers to slip the smaller block off the brush retainer assembly (3) which includes the
brushes, springs, electrical connector and the larger block. Slide the smaller block onto the
new brush retainer assembly (3) in the direction of brush travel to pass over the brushes and
to then compress the springs. Usecare that no side load is applied on brushes and that leads
are not pinched or damaged. Install screws (2) with their washers to mount the smaller
block to the larger and check for free slidingmotion of the brushes. Mount the brush block
assembly with the screws at point (1) and associated hardware. (Refer to Paragraph 14-44.)
Figure 14-21. Brush Block Assembly,


5J4
14-42. REPLACING INDIVIDUAL BRUSHES. (PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and

PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.) Remove brush in-
sert assembly by taking out screws at point labeled(1) of Figure 14-20 and asso-
ciated hardware. Use tape or rubber band to hold brushes in place while the
assembly is gently locked in a vise. (Refer to Figure 14-22.) With soldering
gun or iron, free soldered lead and barrel from end of brush rod of brush to be
replaced. Loosen tape or rubber band to draw out the old brush and its spring.
Install new spring and brush, hold with rubber band or tape. Now solder barrel
and brush lead to end of brush rod - barrel must be flush with end of brush rod.
(Work on one brush at a time and use the undisturbed brush rods adjacent to see
how barrel is to be set.) In this step, see that width of braid lead lies parallel
to the retainer plate. Avoid excess solder that would stiffen brush lead - 0.125
of an inch "wicking" is maximum allowable. Brush rods must be free of solder
between "B" barrel and brush. (Refer to Paragraph 14-44.)
SOLDERWICKING
(MAX 1 8" ALLOWED)
WIREBRAIDLEADSIN
TRANSFLEXTUBING.
USEONLYBRAIDAND
TUBINGRECOMMENDED BARREL TO BE
BY B.F.G. BRUSH ROD FLUSHWITHEND OF ROD
HOLDINGFIXTURE
BRUSHINSERTASSY.
BRUSH
OF BARRELON BRUSHROD
POSITIONING
Figure 14-22. Holding Brushes for Soldering,


Reissued: 2/18/81
5J5
14-43. REPLACING INDIVIDUAL BRUSHES. (PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.

27-2505 and up.) Remove brush holder and disassemble brush retainer assembly as in
paragraph 1441, then use rubber band or tape to hold brushes compressed in block as in
Figure 14-23.Take out hardware to free the connector and pull it out just so that the leads
of the brush to be replaced can be unsoldered. Unsolder the barrel at the end of the brush
rod to remove the old brush and its spring. Install a new spring and new brush in the block
and hold under rubber band or tape to solder the barrel flush with the end of the brush rod.
Barrel must be concentric with brush rod. Brush rod and barrel must be free of solder on its
external surface as this may cause brush to hang up. Now solder the brush lead to the
connector pin. Remount the connector and reassemblethe brush block assembly.Check for
free sliding motion of brushes before mounting on the airplane. (Refer to Paragraph 1444.)
14-44. ALIGNMENT AND RUN-IN OF NEW BRUSHES.

a. At any time that brush block assembly is dismounted, the alignment at re-
installation must be checked as described in paragraph 14-25, f.
b. New brushes must be run-in for a minimum of five (5) hours engine opera-
tion before the De-Icer system is turned on. This applies whether brushes have
been replaced individuallyor as subassemblies. This requirement does not pre-
vent static operating checkout.
BRUSH
BARRELTOBE
FLUSHWITH
HEADOF BRUSH
ROD
TOPBRUSH
BRUSH
MIDDLE
BOTTOM
BRUSH
CARDBOARD
BAND
RUBBER
POSITIONING
OF BARREL ONBRUSH
ROD
Figure 14-23. Holding Brushes for Soldering,


Reissued: 2/18/81
5J6
Should Must
X.Dimension (inches) Replace Replace MODULAR BRUSH ASSEMBLY
All modules having

brushes with rods 15/64 19/64
All modules having

brushes without rods 1-5/64 1-9/64
The X-dimension in the "Should Replace"

column indicates 3/8 inch of brush remains,
the Xdimension for "MUST Replace"
indicates 1/4 inch remains. During
measurement only 1/16 inch of brush
should be allowed to protrude from brush
block. This is the normal position of the
brush when installed on the aircraft.
Figure 14-24. Modular Brush Assembly
14-45. MODULAR BRUSH ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT FOR BRUSH BLOCK

ASSEMBLY. Modular brush assembly part number 3E2046-1, is a direct replacement for
brush block assembly 4E1515-3. Instructions concerning replacement of brush block as-
semblies with modular brush assemblies are given in B.F. Goodrich Service Bulletin No.
E-77-54.
14-46. MODULAR BRUSH ASSEMBLY MAINTENANCE. Brushes are not offered

individually as replacements.When a brush wears out, the module containing it should be re-
placed as follows:
a. Remove the modular brush assemblyfrom the aircraft by removing attaching hard-
ware and disconnect the wire harness.
b. Remove assembly screws and separate module and spacers.
NOTE
The part number of each module is etched into the surface of

the plastic housing. Replace with the same part number
module.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5J7
c. Restack modules and spacers as shown in Figure 14-24. If there is interference be-
tween adjacent ring terminals, reorient center module as shown in Figure 14-24.
NOTE
Ascertain flat washer is positioned between star washer and

housing.
d. Reconnect aircraft wire harness and insure adjacent ring terminals are not touching.
e. Install assembly on aircraft and check alignment.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5J8
14-47. SLIP RINGS.
14-48. MACHINING. If structurally sound, slip rings with roughened or damaged

surfaces can be machined to restore to serviceability. Remove the slip ring as-
sembly from the airplane to mount it in a lathe, located concentrically inthe lathe
and with not over 0.002 wobble or run-out over 360 degree rotation. Take light
cut for smooth finish and cut no deeper than required to remove surface damage.
Contact surfaces of the three slip rings must be parallel within 0.005 inch and
flat within 0.005 inch overall - deviation from flat not to exceed 0.002 inch over
a 4 inch arc. If necessary, undercut insulation between slip rings to a depth of
0.020 to 0.030 inches below the contact surface of the slip rings. In this opera-
tion, width of slip ring must not be reduced more than 0.005 inch. Contact sur-
face of slip rings must have a finish of 29-35 micro inches. De-burr slip ring
edges and re-install in the airplane, and align per paragraph 14-51.
NOTE
If, in machining, the solder or braze connection on the

underside of the slip ring is exposed, replacement of
the slip ring assembly will be necessary.
14-49. REPLACEMENT. Slip ring assemblies that are open or shorted elec-
trically, cracked or damaged structurally, or which have damaged surfaces be-
yond the scope of minor repair to clean up, should be replaced with a new slip
ring assembly. When replacing, align slip ring assembly per paragraph 14-51
and allow brushes to run-in for a minimum of 5-hours engine operation before
turning on De-Icer system, except static operating checkout.
14-50. TORQUE LIMITS. Some systems use a stud brazed to the slip ring for
making electrical connection. In any work around these studs, avoid side loads
on the studs which may lead to ultimate breaking of the brazed joint and conse-
quent failure of the slip ring.
CAUTION
Excess torque is apt to pull studs from slip rings. In installing
or tighteningnuts, use torque wrench and tighten to 10 to 12
inch-poundsonly.

Reissued:2/18/81
5J9
14-51. ALIGNMENT. (This step not applicable to slip rings on start ring gears.)
Check slip ring run-out with dial indicator set-up as in Figure 14-15.. Push in on
prop as it is turned to take out play of prop thrust bearing which would affect
readings. If the total run-out exceeds 0.005 inch or exceeds 0.002 inch in a 4
inch arc, alignment must be accomplished as follows:
a. Use AN960C416L washers between slip ring and spinner bulkhead to shim
for true running. If necessary, fabricate thinner shims to AN960 size.
NOTE
If no toothed washer is used in original mounting, in-

stallAN936B416 between two AN960C416L plain wash-
ers plus any shims required. The AN936 washers
provide an adjustable method of shimming. This
change will affect brush block clearance which must
be readjusted as in paragraph 14-25, f.
b. In mounting slip ring assembly to spinner bulkhead, snug mounting bolts to

approximately 25 inch-pound of torque. Using the dial indicator to follow the
points of maximum deviation, adjust slip ring assembly to prescribed run-out by
gradual tightening of mounting bolts until all are within 40 to 75 inch-pounds of
torque.
14-52. ECCENTRIC RUNNING. If brush block cannot be adjusted sufficiently to

prevent brushes from riding partially off the edge of the slip rings at any point
through 360 degree rotation, the spinner bulkhead must be replaced to permit
proper mounting of the slip ring assembly. There is no adjustment for this con-
dition.
14-53. BLADE DE-ICERS.
14-54. REPLACEMENT. If tests show the blade De-Icer to have an open circuit,
to be the wrong resistance or to be visibly damaged beyond repair procedures as
outlined in paragraph 14-56, replace the De-Icer. Use the correct part as spec-
ified, for replacement.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5J10
14-55. CEMENTING PROCEDURE. Use B. F. Goodrich Field Repair Kit No. 77-802
which contains rubber patch material, sponge rubber material, and rubber tubing sufficient
for several repair jobs. Cements and solvents specified in these directions are not included in
the kit. (The abbreviation "MEK" in further steps stands for Methylethylketone.) The
following steps apply wherever "cementing" is specified in the text:
a. Clean the metal or rubber area to be bonded or patched with MEK or acetone to
remove all grease and dirt.
NOTE
It is permissible when installing deicer boots on Hartzell
Polane coated propeller blades, to rough the surface with fine
sandpaper; remove all grit with air; then clean with acetone.
MEK is NOT acceptable for cleaning Polane coated
propellers. Proceed with standard installation.
It is vital that surface be clean for a good cementing job. After the last wipe with cleaner,
quickly wipe surface with a clean, dry lint-free cloth to remove solvent film.
b. Apply one even coat of EC-1300L cement (MinnesotaMiningand Mfg.Co.) to area
being bonded or patched and allow to dry (approximately 1 hour above 40 degrees F).
Apply a second even coat of EC-1300Lcement and allow to dry.
c. Cut patching or sponge material as directed in the specific repair step. This material
is exposed to airstream, cut clean edges (without fringes) and bevel. On the thicker (0.020
inch) rubber, the protective paper is on the side to be cemented. Apply maskingtape on the
open side to prevent the patch from curling as cement dries; then strip off protective paper
and apply EC-1300L cement in a smooth even coat. Allow to air dry. On the thinner
(0.010) rubber, the mylar coating is on the air side and helps to prevent the patch from
curling. Wipe the open side with MEK or acetone to clean; follow last wipe immediately
with clean, dry lint-free cloth wipe, and apply smooth even coat of EC-1300L cement.
Allow to air dry. On sponge material, the rough side is to be cemented. Use MEKor acetone
to clean this surface but avoid soaking sponge with the solvent. Apply smooth even coat of
EC-1300L cement to rough surface and allow to air dry. After 1 hour, apply second coat
and allowto air dry.
d. With cemented surfaces either dry or with just a trace of "tackiness," apply light
coat of MEK or Toluol over these surfaces to "re-tackify" and quickly complete the
cementing job as directed in the step. Allow one hour to air dry before peeling off the
masking tape or mylar coating on the air side. Rub edges and center of patch to see that it is
holding before releasingfor flight.
NOTE
Do not touch cemented surface with dirty or oily fingers.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5J11
WOODENBLOCKOR BUCKING
BARMAYBE USEDWHEN
NECESSARY
FOR SUPPORT
SECTIONA A
Figure 14-25. Patching De-Icer Lead Strap
14-56. BLADE DE-ICER SURFACE, OUTBOARD OF CLAMP. Cut the patch

(0.010 inch rubber) to be about 0.25 of an inch larger on all sides than the dam-
aged area. In setting the re-tackified patchinto place, use rubber roller to press
patch firmly - a metal roller will damage the wires within the De-Icer. (Refer
to Figure 14-25.)
a. If the wires are exposed but not broken (in the De-Icer element), use two
plies of 0.010 inch rubber to patch. Place the first patch on as described above
and allow to dry one hour. Cut the second patch to be 1/4 inch large on all sides
than the first patch. Follow the given procedure to cement the second patch in
place and allow one hour to air dry.

5J12
NOTE: WITHPROP.BLADEAT FULL FEATHER

POSITION,
USELEADSTRAPASCENTER
REFERENCE WHENPOSITIONING
PROTECTIVERUBBER
Figure 14-26. Spinner Dome Cushioning
14-57. BLADE DE-ICER LEAD STRAP. Cut the patch (0.020 inch rubber) to be
about 1/4 inch larger on all sides than the damaged area. Use rubber roller to
press the patch into place - a metal roller will damage the wires in the strap.
14-58. SPINNER DOME STRIP. Cut two pieces, each 5/8 by 3 inch of 0.020 inch
rubber to fit as shown in Figure 14-26. Lightly sand metal to remove all paint
in area to be cemented. Follow the given procedure to cement the first piece in
place and allow one hour to air dry. Now cement the second piece over the first
and allow one hour to air dry.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5J13
A-A
SECTION TYPE A
Figure 14-27. Hub Clamp Cushioning
14-59. CLAMPSPONGE CUSHION. (Refer to Figure 14-26.) If cushioning sponge

is frayed or damaged, use MEK or toluol liberally to remove old sponge. In such
case (or if the sponge cushion is missing), clean metal thoroughly. Cut the sponge
1 by 1-1/8 inches (for type "A" clamp, Figure 14-27) and follow the given pro-
cedure to cement sponge into place, pressing firmly with fingers.
14-60. WRINKLED DE-ICERS. If edge of De-Icer is found wrinkled or loose,

try recementing. Use MEK or toluol to loosen the bond for an additional 1/4 inch
beyond the loose or wrinkled area. Apply one coat of EC-1300L cement to the
De-Icer and prop bonding surfaces and allow to air dry for one hour. Then apply
a second coat of EC-I300L cement to both the De-Icer and prop bonding surfaces.
Re-tackify with MEK or acetone and press with fingers to work out wrinkles or
to secure loose edge. If material has stretched and will not cement flat, replace
the De-Icer element.
NOTE
Use polyethylene or teflon film between De-Icer ele-

ment and prop while cement coats are drying so that
they do not stick together.

5J14
14-61. INSTALLATION OF DE-ICER STRAPS AND WIRE HARNESS.

a. The De-Icer lead strap is fastened to the bulkhead in the same positions
from which they were removed.
b. The De-Icer strap is to be attached to the studs on the spinner bulkhead.
CAUTION
Never use Type "B" star washer (teeth on outer diam-

eter) adjacent to tongue of De-Icer terminals.
c. Make certain that there is no slack in the De-Icer lead strap between the
terminals and the clip. This is important because it assures enough slack be-
tween the clip and the strap restrainer to allow for proper feathering. A test
should be conducted on each propeller de-icing system to insure that De-Icer
lead straps are installed in such a manner that the propeller can be moved from
full low pitch through the feathering position without placing the straps in tension.
NOTE
De-Icers should have a piece of gray plastic bondedto

the air side (shiny side) of the De-Icer strap as shown
in Figure 14-28.. The strap restrainers should be po-
sitioned as shown in Figure 14-29 when the propeller
blades are in the full feather position.
d. If damage occurs to slip ring wire harness, rubber spacers or hose clamps,
replace damaged parts.
14-62. OTHER COMPONENTS. Do not attempt internal repairs of the timer,

ammeter or switch. If inoperative, these components must be replaced with one
of the correct part number.

5J15
RESTRAINER
STRAP
ICE PST IC BONDED

GRAY
SIDE
TOSHINY OF
STRAP
DE-ICER IN
AREA
THIS
Figure 14-28. Propeller Blade in Low Pitch

GRAY BONDED
PLASTIC
OF
SIDE
TOSHINY
DE-ICER
STRAP
IN
THIS
AREA
DE-ICER
LEADSTRAP
Figure 14-29. Propeller Blade in Feather Position

Reissued:2/18/81
5J16
14-63. PNEUMATICDEICER SYSTEM.
14-64. INTRODUCTION.This portion of Section XIV provides service and maintenance

procedures for the pneumatic deicing systems used in these aircraft.
14-65. DESCRIPTIONAND PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION.The deicer boot is essentially

a fabric reinforced rubber sheet containing built-in inflation tubes. The type used in this
installation have spanwise inflation tubes. Deicersare attached by means of a cement to the
leading edges of the surface being protected. There are either aluminum or flexible rubber
air connections on the backside of the boots called "air connection stems." Each stem
projects from the underside of the boot into the leading edge, through a hole provided in
the metal skin. The stems connect to the airplanes pneumatic air supply system.
The pneumatic deicing systemsused on these airplanes are lightweighttype havingsingle
inflation operation and utilize either the 28 volt or 14 volt electrical system. Refer to
PA-23-250 Parts Catalog 753 522 for specific part numbers and serial numbers for the
particular system and airplane being serviced. On single inflation systems, all the deicers on
the wingsand tail surfaces are inflated simultaneouslyin a single sequence.
There are three different systems used on this series of airplane models. The very early
system provided automatic cycling operation once every three minutes during timer
operation when the deicer system control switch is turned ON. On later installations the
timer was replaced with a time module. With this system there is no continuous cycling of
the system and it is not necessary to turn the system control switch OFF, as this is done
automatically. The time module provides system operation for six seconds. The switch is a
momentary ON type which returns to the OFF position when released. Should reactivation
of the system be required, the control switch can be moved to the ON position again and
released.
On still later installations the system incorporated an additional solenoid exhaust valve
and indicator light. This system also uses a momentary ON toggle switch which also has a
"MANUAL DEFLATE" position should the system malfunction with the boots inflated.
This system does not use a timer or time module to regulate inflation time, instead two
pressure switches are used to control system operation. When the system pressure reaches
the preset inflation pressure, the pressure switches in conjunction with a relay breaks the
circuit, thus de-energizing the solenoid valves and deflating the boots. If the system
controlling pressure switch should fail, the second pressure switch acts as a back-up device
to break the circuit. In the unlikely event that both of these switches failed, pressure is
limited only by the maximum capability of the dry air pumps. This method of operation
insures complete inflation of the boots regardless of altitude. There are two indicator lights
which monitor system operation, a blue light indicates normal boot inflation and operation,
while the red light indicates an over-pressureinflation condition, in which case the toggle
switch is placed in the "MANUAL DEFLATE" position which de-energizes the three
solenoid valvesand returns the boots to the normal hold down position. Should reactivation
of the system be required, the toggle switch can be moved to the ON position again and
released.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5J17
2536
1. TIMER INSTALL TEST RIG TO
2. ON-OFF SWITCH
3. PRESSURE SWITCH
INLET PORT OF CONTROL
4. INDICATOR LIGHTS VALVE (5).
5. CONTROL VALVE
6. AIR PUMP
7. REGULATING VALVE
S. OIL SEPARATOR
9. AIR FILTER
10. INFLATION TUBES
11. DEICER
2518
Figure 14-30. Pneumatic Deicing Installation (Wet Vacuum Pump),

Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3944 inclusive
Reissued: 2/18/81
5J18
INSTALL TEST RIG TO

INLET PORT OF CONTROL
VALVE (5)
2518

B3-1-2 PIPER PART NUMBER 751 859. USE OF ANY OTHER
1. TIMER 2637
2. ON-OFF SWITCH
3. PRESSURE SWITCH
4. INDICATOR LIGHTS
5. CONTROL VALVE
AIR PUMP (SEE NOTE)
7 REGULATING VALVE
8. DEICER
9. AIR FILTER
:10. INFLATION TUBES
Figure. 14-31. Pneumatic Deicing Installation (Dry Vacuum Pump),

Serial Nos. 27-4510 to 27-7304963; 27-7304965 to 27-7304993 inclusive

Reissued: 2/18/81
5J19

B3-1-2, PIPER PART NUMBER 751 859. USE OF ANY OTHER
2535
1. TIMER
2. SWITCH ASSY. CIRCUIT BREAKER
3. PRESSURE SWITCH
4. INDICATOR LIGHTS
5. PRESSURE CONTROL VALVE
6. AIR PUMP (SEE NOTE)
7. REGULATING VALVE & FILTER
8. INFLATION TUBES
9. DEICER
10. EXHAUST VALVE ASSEMBLY
Figure 14-32. Pneumatic-Deicing Installation (Dry Vacuum Pump),

Serial Nos. 27-7304964 to 27-7554168 inclusive
Reissued: 2 18 81
5J20
A789—
OVER PRESS.SW
NC-21 PSI
NO-23 PSI TO EMPENNAGE
AUTO STOP
PRESS. SW.
TO RT. WING NC-17 PSI
TO EXHAUST
VALVE WING
PRESSURE CONTROL
VALVE
CONTROL TO INSTRUMENTS
PUMP

INDICATOR AIRBORNE DRY AIR PUMP IS THE AIRBORNE GASKET
LIGHTS B3-1-2, PIPER PART NUMBER 751 859 USE OF ANY OTHER
Figure 14-33. Pneumatic Deicer Installation (Dry Vacuum Pump),

Serial Nos. 27-7554112to 27-7554168inclusive

Reissued: 2/18/81
5J21
The engine driven pneumatic pumps normally apply vacuum to the deicer boots and
instruments, while the pressure control valves in the engine nacelles relieves all of the
pressure produced by the pumps. Through the actuation of the control switch, deicer
operation is started. Electrical power is supplied to the solenoids of the control valves.When
energized the control valvesregulate the pneumatic pump output air pressure to the deicer
inflation pressure. After the required time and/or pressure is obtained electrical power is
shut-off and pressure within the deicer system is released through an integral pressure relief
section of the system and vacuum is reapplied to the deicer boots to hold them down.
14-66. SYSTEMTROUBLESHOOTING.In the utilization of the troubleshooting charts at

the end of these instructions, it must be assumed that the engine driven combination
pressure-vacuum pumps and the airplane electrical system are operational. It is further
assumed that the deicer system installation was made in an approved manner.
14-67. SYSTEMCHECKOUT.
14-68. ELECTRICALTEST.
a. With enginesoff, turn airplane battery switch to the ON position.
b. System Indicator Light: Press the indicator light to check light circuit and bulb. If
light does not function:
1. Reset circuit breaker and recheck.
2. Test or replace the bulb.
3. Check the circuit from the power source through the circuit breaker to the light
to ground.
c. Timer: Turn deicer system switch to the ON position. The timer should begin to
operate immediately. Turn the system switch to OFF position. The timer should
immediately re-cycle to the start position as evidencedby a brief timer "chatter."
d. Time Modules: Turn system switch ON. The system should begin to operate
immediately. System operation should continue for six seconds and then automatically turn
off. If timer or timer module do not function:
2. Check circuit from power source, through circuit breaker, to system switch, to
timer or time module, to ground.
3. Replace timer or time module.
e. Control Valves and Exhaust Valve: Check both control valves;one in each nacelle
and the exhaust valve in the fuselageby turning the system switch ON. The solenoids should
be actuated immediately for six seconds, as evidencedby an audible "click" that can be felt
if a hand is placed on the solenoid. If the valve does not function make the following
checks:
1. Unplug the electrical connector at the solenoid. Attach a test light or other
suitable test equipment to the connector and re-actuate the system switch. If the test
equipment does not indicate a complete circuit:
(a) Check circuit from timer or time module, to the solenoid connector, to
ground.
(b) Replace timer or time module.

Reissued:2/18/81
5J22
2. Use an ohmmeter to check the solenoid for an open circuit. If the solenoid
circuit is open, replace the control valve.
3. Removethe solenoidsafety wire and unscrew the solenoid.
CAUTION
Do not lose steel hex actuator pin or valvepoppet.
Re-attach the connector to the solenoid; insert the hex actuator pin into the
solenoid and re-actuate the system switch. If the pin is not ejected from the solenoid,
replace the control valve.
f. PressureSwitch: With deicerspressurized to 12 psig or above (for procedure, see Air
Leakage Test), pressure switch should close circuit to indicator light. If indicator light does
not function:
2. Check circuit from power source through circuit breaker, to indicator lamp, to
pressure switch, to ground.
3. Disconnect and remove pressure switch. Check for pluggedline or switch.
4. Replacepressure switch.
14-69. VACUUMREGULATORADJUSTMENT. The vacuum regulators must be adjusted

to provide adequate vacuum for the airplane instruments. (Refer to Instruments, Section X
for the proper procedure.)
14-70. COMPONENTMAINTENANCEAND REPLACEMENT.
14-71. AIR FILTER. Examine filter discs every 100 hours of engine operation and clean if
oil has accumulated in housing. As cleaning agent, use a commercial hydrocarbon type
solvent such as naphtha, petroleum ether or gasoline. Kerosene type distillates should be
avoided. If desirable to replace filter discs, the part numbers are: Air MazeCorporation (Air
Maze Division- North American Rockwell Corporation, Cleveland20, Ohio (H9S888-36 (4
required) and H9S888-26 (5 required).
14-72. CONTROL VALVES. On early Deicing System installations wet vacuum pumps
were used and this required periodic inspection of control valvesafter every 100 hours of
engine operation. The valve poppet and internal lining of the control valve can become
coated with a film of dried oil causing the valve to stick. To clean, remove the safety wire
and unscrew the solenoid. To determine if the valve poppet is sticking, perform the
electrical test. If the solenoid checks satisfactorily, remove the valve poppet and clean the
control valvebore and poppet. To clean:
a. Removesafety wire and electrical connector. Unscrew solenoid.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5J23
CAUTION
Do not lose steel hex actuator pin.
b. Removevalve poppet. It may be necessary to apply slim nose pliers to pin projection
to pull poppet from valve.
c. Thoroughly clean valvebore and poppet with commercialhydrocarbon type solvent.
d. Reassemblevalveand re-safety wire solenoid.
TIMERPLUG
11 213141 16171
II L L'
C B C B
I R I R
R E R E
C A C A
U K U K
I E I E
T R T R
Figure 14-34. 28-Volt DC System Figure 14-35. 14-Volt DC System

3D 1472 Timer 3D 1740 Timer

Reissued: 2/18/81
5J24
A792
TIME MODULE
NOMINAL DURING CONTROL PULSE-14 VDC
NOMINAL DURING CONTROL PULSE-28 VOC
RED
BLUE
GREEN
BLACK
GROUND
EXHAUST VALVE PRESS CONTROLVALVES

3.0 AMP NOMINAL- 14 VDC 3.0 AMP NOMINAL- EACH VALVE-14 VDC -
1.5 AMP NOMINAL-28 VDC 1.5 AMP NOMINAL- EACH VALVE-28 VOC
Figure 14-36.Pneumatic Deicer System Schematic

(Using Time Module)
2534
RELAY
ON
OFF
CENTER f AMP
MANUAL
AUTOSTOP BLUE RED

PRESSURE PRESS. SW.
SWITCH 17 PSI NC
23 PSI
LEFT DEICE DEFLATEVALVE RIGHTDEICE VALVE
Figure 14-37. Pneumatic Deicer System Schematic

(Airborne System)

Reissued:2/18/81
5K1
14-73. TIMER OR TIME MODULE. No field maintenance is recommended. See Parts

Catalog for replacement or vendor for repairs.
14-74. SHUTTLE VALVE. No field maintenance is recommended or authorized. For

repair or replacement, contact your B.F. Goodrich dealer or distributor.
14-75. REPLACEMENT.No component maintenance other than that described in this

manual is recommended.
14-76. INSPECTION(PREFLIGHT). Prior to the first flight each day, the deicer boots and
the operating pressure shall be checked as follows:
a. Visually examine the surface of each boot carefully for tears, bruises, holes, loose
patches, and clamps, and similar conditions which might result in further damage during
flight.
b. Repair any such damage before takeoff is made.
c. Operate the engines at normal cruisingRPM. Turn on the deicing system. Check the
instrument suction should either side of the system fail, a small red button will appear at the
correspondingside of the gaugeface.
d. Observe the operation of the deicers carefully for evidence of malfunctioning. Look
for tubes which leak or fail to inflate and deflate properly. All defects should be corrected
before takeoff is made.
14-77. INSPECTION(POST FLIGHT). After the last flight each day, examine the boots
for accumulation of oil, gasoline or other injurious substances. Particular attention should
be given to empennage boots and to the inboard wing boots, since these are most likely to
catch oil thrown by the engines.Clean off all such accumulations as soon as possible.
14-78. INSPECTION(100 HOURS). At each 100-hour inspection of the airplane, inspect

and operate the deicer boots. Make checksas follows:
a. Carefully inspect the deicer for evidence of damage or deterioration and repair or
replace damaged boots.
b. Resurface boots which show signsof considerablewear or deterioration.
c. Inspect all hose connections which form a part of the pneumatic deicing system.
Replace deteriorated sections on non-kink hose.
d. Check operation of boots. Observe all standard safety precautions while operating
the enginesand system.
e. If new or replacement boots have been installed, check the tube inflation to make
sure that the air connection stems have been properly connected.
f. On early systems using wet pneumatic pumps, disconnect all drain lines in the
system and check for proper drainage.
5K2 5K2 Reissued: 2/18/81

CAUTION
Oil which reaches the deicers will cause rapid deterioration of

the rubber. In cold weather, extreme care must be taken to
see that engine oil does not collect in critical parts of the
system and congeal. Congealed oil will cause sticking of
control valvesand distributor valve. If sticking of these parts
is encountered, remove from the airplane, clean out, and
replace.
g. Check the ON-OFF control switch for freedom of action.
h. Clean or replace the air filters.
NOTE
This operation may be omitted if boots were installed on the

airplane subsequent to the last previous 100-hour inspection.
On the other hand, if operations are being conducted under
cold weather conditions below 10°F (-12°C), the filters
should be cleaned out at each 100-hour inspection, or more
often if difficulties are encountered with valves sticking due
to congealedoil.
TABLE XIV-II. OPERATING PRESSURES
RecommendedOperating Pressure Test Pressure

PSIG In PSIG
MIN. MAX.
Early B. F. Goodrich 18 16 20
Later B. F. Goodrich 15 13 17
Airborne 17 22 25
14-79. INSPECTION(500 HOURS) ANDPRESSURE TEST. A thorough inspection of the

complete system including the 100 hour inspection and a functional inspection should be
made at every 500 hours of engine operation. The followingprocedure has been divided into
two parts to cover two different system installations. The first part will pertain to B.F.
Goodrich systems while the second part pertains to Airborne system.
Part I. Goodrich:
a. To permit ground checking the system without operating the engines,the following
procedure should be used in conjuction with recommended operating pressures given in
Table XIV-II.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5K3
b. Refer to Table XIV-II for operating pressures required for system operation.
c. Using a source of filtered shop air with a testing rig consisting of an adjustable
regulator, pressure gaugeand shut-off valve connect the shut-off valveso as to trap air in the
deicer system.
d. On Goodrich systems per Figure 14-32 disconnect the hose from the firewall
bulkhead fitting (pump side) and attach the test rig to this port. Manually depress the
solenoid plunger pin in the exhaust valve (if installed) and pressure control valvesin the
nacelle where the test rig is installed. Apply 15 psig to the system, and using the shut-off
valve, trap this pressure in this portion of the system. A soap solution may be used to check
for leaks. A pressure drop should not exceed 3 psig per minute. On Goodrich systems per
Figures 14-30and 14-31cap the overboard port of one of the control valves. Connect a
source of clean air to the inlet port of the control valve. Apply 18 psig to the system and by
using the shut-off valve, trap the pressure in the deicer system. Observe the system for
leakage.The leakage rate should not exceed a pressure drop of 3 psig per minute.
e. With the battery switch in the ON position, check the pressure switch operation
with the system under pressure, the indicator light should glow.
f. With the battery switch ON and the deicer control switch OFF, press the indicator
light to check the circuit and light bulb. If the indicator light does not function, check and
reset the circuit breaker, a short circuit may exist. Refer to wiring schematic.
g. Remove the test rig, lubricate the threads, replace and tighten items dismantled.
h. On Goodrich systems referenced in Figure 14-32 an actual operating pressure test
should be performed in the followingmanner:
1. Move airplane to a clear runup area where prop blast will not disturb anything.
2. Insert a tee connector into one of the lines which extends from the pressure
switch fitting to either wing boot. Connect a pressure gauge (0-30 psig range) to the tee to
monitor system pressure.
3. Start and permit one engine to reach normal operating temperature. With the
engine operating at approximately 2200 RPM, actuate the deicer control switch. Observe
the pressure gauge;pressure should reach approximately 17 psig.
4. Repeat step 3 with the opposite engine in operation.
CAUTION
Be sure the aircraft does not move when performing this

ground test with both enginesoperating at high RPM.
5. Repeat step 3 with both engines operating at 2500 RPM.

6. With both engines operating at approximately 2500 RPM, actuate the deicer
control switch. Pressureshould reach approximately 20 psig.
NOTE
The maximum pressure reading should not be less than 16

psig with a single engine operating at 2200 RPM or greater
than 21 psig with both engines operating at 2500 RPM. The
pressure control valvescan be adjusted to provide operating
pressureswithin these limits. Refer to paragraph 14-80.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5K4
i. On Goodrich systems referenced in Figure 14-30and Figure 14-31an operating test

and time cycle check should be performed in the followingmanner:
1. System operating test.
(a) With the engine running at cruise speed, move deicer control switch to ON
position and observe deicer operation. System is satisfactory if the indicator
light glowswithin 4.0 secondsafter switching.
(b) Repeat procedure for other engine.
2. Time cycle check.
(a) With the engines running at minimum cruise speed, move deicer control
switch to ON position and note time. With switch ON, reduce engine speed
to normal idle and hold for approximately two and one-half minutes. At the
end of this interval, increase engine speed to minimum cruise speed and
observe deicers for inflation.
(b) Elapsed time from inflation-to-inflation should be approximately three
minutes.
Part II. Airborne:

a. To permit ground checking the system without operating the engines the following
procedure should be used.
b. Disconnect the .750 inch hose to the inlet of the deicer control valvesand connect a
source of filtered shop air which is regulated at 25 psig. This hookup may be done to both
valvessimultaneously or one side at a time to check each half of the system separately.
CAUTION
Before turning on the air, disconnect and plug the .375 inch
vacuum hold down source line where it connects into the
suction side of the system to prevent possible air flow
backwards through the gyros.
c. Temporarily install a jumper wire on each of the two pressure switches located on
the cross fitting within the fuselage. On the pressure switch with the two terminals, place
the jumper wire on both terminals. On the pressure switch with three terminals, place the
jumper wire on the terminals marked "C" and "NC."
d. Turn on the air supply and energize the solenoid valves.The boots will inflate and
the blue and red panel lights will come on and the system can be checked for leaks.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the solenoid valves, do NOT leave
them energizedfor more than two minutes continuously.
e. Move the toggle switch to the "MANUAL DEFLATE" position and the boots will
deflate.
f. Remove the jumper wire shorting out the normally closed and common contacts on
the pressure switch containing three terminals.
g. Reactuate the toggle switch to the INFLATE position. The boots will inflate, the
blue light will come ON and the boots should deflate automatically.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5K5
h. Now remove the jumper wire on the other pressure switch and reinflate the boots,
they should automatically deflate as stated in step g.
i. An actual operating pressure test should be performed in the followingmanner:
1. Move the airplane to a clear runup area where prop blast will not disturb
anything.
2. Check system operation on each engine individually and then with both engines
operating.
3. A normal inflation cycle should last three to six seconds with engines operating
at minimum cruise RPM before automatic deflation. Any radical departure from this could
indicate a system leak. Refer to Table XIV-III for Troubleshooting Chart.
14-80. PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES ADJUSTMENTS. (Goodrich Systems per

Figure 14-32.)
a. To increase the high pressure setting hold the locknut on top of the solenoid push
rod with a wrench and with a screwdriver, turn the push rod clockwise until the desired
setting is obtained.
NOTE
Directions clockwise and counterclockwise assumes the

viewer is looking down on the top of the solenoid.
b. To lower the high pressure setting hold the locknut on top of the solenoidpush rod
and turn the push rod counterclockwiseuntil the desired setting is obtained.
14-81. HIGH PRESSUREDEICER BOOTS.
14-82. DESCRIPTION. A high pressure deicer boot is essentially a fabric reinforced rubber
sheet, containing built-in inflation tubes, that is attached to the leading edge of the surface
to be protected by means of a cement.
There is an air connection on the backside of the deicer, called an "air connection
stem." Each stem projects from the underside of the boot into the leading edge, through a
round hole provided in the metal skin for connection to the air supply system.
Air pressure from engine driven pumps is supplied to the inflatable tubes by a suitable
pneumatic system.
The deicer outer layer is made of conductive neoprene to allow static electricity to be
dissipated. These charges, if allowed to accumulate, would eventually dischargethrough the
boot to the metal skin beneath, causing static interference with the radio sending and
receiving sets and possible punctures in the rubber. Also, such static charges would
constitute a temporary fire hazard after each flight.
Deicers have spanwise inflatable tubes, only one inflation port and all tubes are inflated
simultaneously.Boots are lightweightconstruction designedfor lightweight airplanes.
5K65K16 Reissued: 2/18/81

14-83. REMOVAL. When necessary to remove the pneumatic deicer, it is recommended

that an approvedinstallation station accomplishthis operation.
Should it be necessary to remove any portion of the pneumatic deicer, the following
steps should be used:
a. Obtain a sharp, pointed non-metallic wedge severalinches wide. A hardwood wedge
would be suitable. Also, obtain a supply of Methylethylketone (MEK).
b. Start at a deicer corner at an upper edge and with the wedge, work up the deicer,
using MEK in combination with the wedge to avoid removing the rubber coating from the
back of the deicer. Using a small, oil type squirt can will help direct the flow of MEKand
help avoid damagingthe paint.
CAUTION
Be extremely careful when removing boot so as not to exert

force while pulling or lifting, as this could result in tearing
boot.
c. Using the wedge and MEK, continue working up the deicer skin until the deicer has
been removed to the desired point.
d. Clean the existing portions of the surface and deicer, thoroughly removing all
cement. Use MEKto do this.
14-84. PRE-INSTALLATIONREQUIREMENTS
14-85. MATERIALS. The followingmaterials are required:

EC-1300L and/or EC-1403 cement, Minnesota Mining & Manufacturing Co. FSN
8040-628-4199 and/or 8040-514-1880.
Methylethylketone (MEK) Federal Specification TT-M-261, or Acetone, Federal
Specification O-A-51.
Tackifyingsolvent, Toluol or MEK(See note)
Clean, lint-free cleaningcloths
Severalempty tin cans
3 inch paint brushes
2 inch rubber hand rollers
1/4 inch metal hand stitcher roller
Carpenter's chalk line
I inch maskingtape
Steel measuringtape
Sharp knives
Fine sharpeningstone
Sealingcompound EC-801, MinnesotaMining& ManufacturingCo.
Cement A-56-B,B. F. Goodrich Co.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5K7
NOTE
MEK may be used instead of Toluol to re-activate cement for

installation. However, tests show that MEKcauses very rapid
drying and provides only 10 seconds working time for deicer
application compared with 40 seconds for Toluol.
14-86. PREPARATIONOF LEADINGEDGES.

a. With I inch masking tape, mask off leading edge boot area, allowing 1/2 inch
margin. Take care to mask accurately, thus eliminating the need for cleaning off excess
cement later.
b. Clean the metal surfaces thoroughly at least twice with MEK or acetone. For final
cleaning, wipe the solvent film off quickly with a clean dry cloth before it has time to dry.
c. Fill gaps of skin splicesthat lead under deicers with sealingcompound EC-801.
14-87. PREPARATION OF DEICER. Moisten a clean cloth with MEK or acetone and
carefully clean the rough, back surface of the boot at least twice. Changecloths frequently
to avoid recontamination of the cleaned areas.
14-88. INSTALLATIONOF DEICER.
WARNING
The cements and solvents used for installation are flammable

and their fumes slightly toxic. Therefore, all work should be
done in a well-ventilated area away from any sparks or
flames. (Use a solvent resistant type glovesis recommended.)
NOTE
Do not inflate deicers within 12 hours of installation or until
adhesion strength of 10 pounds is obtained.
a. Thoroughly mix EC-1300L cement before using. Apply one even brush coat to the
cleaned back surface of the boot and to the cleaned metal surface. Allow the cement to air
dry for a minimumof one hour. Apply a second coat to both surfaces and allow to air dry a
minimum of one hour. Ambient temperature for installation should be held between 40 and
110 degrees F. However, longer drying time of the cement coats may be required as the
humidity approaches 99%. Deicer and leading edge may be cemented for a maximum of 48
hours before actual installation.
b. Using a clean, lint-free cloth moistened with Toluol, re-activate the cement on the
leading edge surface and boot in spanwise strips approximately 6 inches wide. Avoid
excessiverubbing of the cement which could remove the cement from the surface. Obtain
sufficient personnel to hold boot steady during installation. (Limit handling cemented side
of boot with fingers.) Roll the deicer firmly against the wing leading edge, being careful not
to trap any air under the deicer. Alwaysroll parallel to the inflatable tubes.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5K8
c. If the deicer should attach "off course," use MEK to remove and reposition
properly. Avoidtwisting or sharp bendingof the deicer.
d. Rubber roll, applying pressure over entire surface of the deicer. All rollingshould be
done parallel to the inflatable tubes. Roll trailingedges with a narrow stitcher roller.
e. After the cement has dried, remove all maskingtapes and clean surfaceswith Toluol
beingcareful not to let Toluol run under edgeof cemented down deicer.
f. Apply a brush coat of A-56-Bcement to EC-801 seams and along trailing edges of
deicer to form a neat straight line being sure that the conductive coating (A-56-B) is
continuous from the deicer surface to the wingsurface.
14-89. SERVICELIFE OF DEICERS. An averageservicelife of approximately 30 months
can be expected,if the followingprecautions are observed.
14-90. MAINTENANCE.
1. Keep pneumatic deicers free of oil, gasoline,paint remover, solvents, and other
injurioussubstances.
2. Do not rest ladders or work stands againstleading edgeshavingdeicersinstalled.
Wrap padding around those portions of work stands which could come in contact with
deicers.
3. When refueling or servicingaircraft with oil, do not drag the servicinghose over
the deicers.Use suitable padding for protection.
4. Do not walk on the deicer boots. Also, do not lay tools or other objects on
them.
5. Exercisecare at all times to prevent the boots from beingsubjected to abuse.
6. Clean deicers when the airplane is washed with a mild soap and water solution.
In cold weather, wash the boots with the airplane inside a warm hangar if possible. If the
cleaningis to be done outdoors, heat the soap and water solutionbefore taking it out to the
airplane. If difficulty is encountered with the water freezing on the boots, direct a blast of
warm air alongthe region beingcleaned, usinga portable type ground heater.
As alternates, use benzol or non-leadedgasoline. Moisten the cleaningcloth in
the solvent, scrub lightly, and then, with a clean, dry cloth, wipe dry so that the cleaner
does not have time to soak into the rubber. Petroleum products such as these are injurious
to rubber, and therefore should be used sparingly.
7. Prior to the first flight each day, the deicersshould be checked as follows:
Visually examine the surface of each boot carefully for tears, holes, bruises,
loose patches and similarconditions which might result in further damageduring flight, and
repair any such damage before takeoff per instructions included in Iceguard Repair Kit
700.
If a replacement is not available, or repair is impossible, remove both the
damaged and the corresponding deicer on the opposite side of the airplane before
attempting flight. (See paragraph 14-83for removal instructions.)
8. After the last flight each day, examine the boots for accumulation of oil,
gasoline,or other injurious substances,and clean off as soon as possible.
14-91. ICEX APPLICATION.B.F. Goodrich Icex is silicone base material specifically
compounded to lower the strength of adhesion between ice and the rubber surfaces of
airplane deicers.Icex will not harm rubber, and offers added ozone protection.
Properly applied and renewed at recommended intervals, Icex provides a smooth,
polished film that evens out the microscopicirregularitieson the surface of rubber parts. Ice
formations have less chance to cling. Ice is removed faster and cleaner when deicers are
operated.

5K9
It should be emphasized that Icex is not a cure-all for icing problems. Icex will not
prevent or remove ice formations. Its only function is to keep ice from initially getting a
strong foot-hold, thus making removal easier.
One 16 oz. pressurized can of Icex will cover deicer surfaces of the average light
twin-engine plane approximately three times. It is also available in quart cans
(unpressurized).
Before applying Icex, thoroughly clean deicer or other rubber surfaces with a rag
dampened with non-leaded gasoline. Follow by a scrub wash of mild soap and water. Allow
time for surfaces to dry.
Shake the Icex can well. Hold the nozzle approximately 12 inches from the surface and
spray. Apply sparingly. If the application is too heavy it results in a sticky surface which is
very undesirable because it will pick up runway dust and prevent best ice removing
efficiency.
Due to the natural abrasiveeffects on leading edges of deicers, propellers and abrasion
boots during flight, reapply Icex every 150 flight hours on wingsand empennagedeicers.
14-92. REPAIR. Deicer repairs are classified as cold (temporary), made on the boot
installed on the airplane, and vulcanized,made on the demounted boot in the shop.
14-93. COLD REPAIR. The materials and supplies for making cold repairs are listed as
follows:
Material and Supplies for Cold Repair
Part No. Quantity Description
74-451-C 1 Cold Patch Repair Kit

(FSN1650-856-7939) (B. F. Goodrich Co.)
74-451-11 1/2 pt. can A-56-B Conductive cement
74-451-16 30 pcs. Small oval patch 1-1/4
x 2-1/2 in.
74-451-17 30 pcs. Medium oval patch
2-1/2 x 5 inch.
74-451-18 10 pcs. Large oval patch 5 x 10 in.
74-451-19 3 pcs. Patch 5 x 19 inch.
74-451-20 (2) 1/2 pt. No. 4 cement"'
(patching only)
74-451-70 2 Cement brush 1/2 in.
74-451-73 1 1/8 in. Steel stitcher
74-451-75 6 Emery buffing sticks
74-451-87 1 Buffing shield
"'This cement will give best results with the patches in this kit.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5K10
Material and Supplies for Cold Repair (cont.)
Part No. Quantity Description
The following items may be procured from the B. F. Goodrich Company,

Akron, Ohio, or other manufacturer, as required.
74-451-23 4 ft. long x 8 in. wide Neoprene surface ply

74-451-24 1 quart EC-1403 cement and/or
(FSN8040-628-4199 and/ EC-1300 L
or FSN8040-514-1880)
74-451-74 1 2-1/2 in. sponge rubber
roller
Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company, Adhesives Division, 411

Piquette Avenue, Detroit, Michigan.
The following materials may be obtained from local supply:
Toluol
As required Clean, lint-free cloths
(preferably cheese cloth)
Rolls 1 in. masking tape
1 Sharp knife
6 ft. long Steel measuring tape
1 Fine sharpening stone
As required Steel wood pads
As required Hypodermic needles
(22 gauge or smaller)
Methylethylketone (MEK) can be used instead of Toluol, however, MEK

causes very rapid drying and provides only 10 seconds working time
compared with 40 seconds for Toluol.
5K11 5K11 Reissued: 2/18/81

14-96. SCUFF DAMAGE. This type of damage will be most commonly encoun-
tered, and, fortunately, it is not necessary in most cases to make a repair. On
those rare occasions when the scuff is severe and has caused the removal of the
entire thickness of surface ply in spots (the brown natural rubber underneath is
exposed), repair the damage, using parts No. 74-451-16, 74-451-17, 74-451-18
or 74-451-23, and proceed as follows:
a. Clean the area around the damage with a cloth dampened slightly with sol-
vent.
b. Buff the area around the damage with steel wool so that it is moderately
but completely roughened.
c. Wipe the buffed area with a clean cloth slightly dampened with solvent to
remove all loose particles.
d. Select a patch of ample size to cover the damaged area.
e. Apply one even thorough coat of cement, Part No. 74-451-20, to the patch
and the corresponding damaged area.
f. Allow cement to set a couple of minutes until tacky.
g. Apply the patch to the De-Icer with an edge, or the center, adhering first.
Work down the remainder of the patch carefully to avoid trapping air pockets.
Thoroughly roll the patch with stitcher-roller, Part No. 74-451-73, and allow to
set for ten to fifteen minutes.
h. Wipe the patch and surrounding area from the center outward with a cloth
slightly dampened with solvent.
i. Apply one light coat of A-56-B conductive cement, Part No. 74-451-11, to
the patched area.
j. Satisfactory adhesion of patch to De-Icer will be reached in four hours.
De-Icer may be inflated for checking repair in a minimum of 20 minutes.
14-97. TUBE AREA DAMAGE. Repair cuts, tears or ruptures to the tube area
with fabric reinforced patches, Part No. 74-451-16, 74-451-17, 74-451-18 or
74-451-19, depending on size of damage.
a. Select a patch of ample size to cover the damage and to extend to at least
5/8 inch beyond the ends and edges of the cut or tear. If none of the patches is
of proper size, cut one to the size desired from one of the larger patches. If
this is done, bevel the edges by cutting with the shears at an angle.
NOTE
These patches are manufactured so that they will

stretch in one direction only. Be sure to cut and apply
the patch selected so that stretch is in the widthwise
direction of the inflatable tubes.

5K12
b. Proceed with repair in the manner outlined in paragraph 14-96.

c. Buff the area around the damage with buffing stick, Part No. 74-451-75 so
that the surface is thoroughly roughened.
d. Apply the patch to the De-Icer with the stretch in the widthwise direction
of the inflatable tubes, sticking edge of patch in place, working remainder down
with slight pulling action so the injury is closed. Do not trap air between patch
and De-Icer surface.
14-98. LOOSE SURFACE PLY IN DEAD AREA (NON-INFLATABLE AREA.)

Peel and trim the loose surface ply to the point where the adhesion of surface ply
to the De-Icer is good.
a. Scrub (roughen) area in which surface ply is removed with steel wool,
scrubbing motion must be parallel to cut edge of surface ply to prevent loosening
it.
b. Scrub with steel wool and Toluol directly over all edges, but parallel to
edges of surface ply to taper them down to the tan rubber ply.
c. Cut a piece of surface ply material, Part No. 74-451-23, to cover the dam-
aged area and extend at least one inch beyond in all directions.
d. Mask off the damaged boot area 1/2 inch larger in length and width than
the size of surface ply.
e. Apply one coat of cement, Part No. 74-451-11, to damaged area and one
coat to surface ply. Allow cement to set until tacky.
f. Roll the surface ply to the De-Icer with two inch rubber roller, Part No.
74-451-74. Roll edges with stitcher-roller, Part No. 74-451-73.
g. Apply just enough tension on the surface ply when rolling to prevent wrin-
kling.
h. Be careful to prevent trapping air. If air blisters appear after surface ply
is applied, remove them with a hypodermic needle.
i . Clean excess cement from De-Icer with solvent.
14-99. LOOSE SURFACE PLY IN TUBE AREA. Loose surface ply in tube area
is usually an indication of the De-Icer starting to flex fail. This type of failure
is more easily detected in the form of a blister under the surface ply when De-
Icer is pressurized. If this type of damage (or void) is detected while still a
small blister (about 1/4 or 3/8 inch diameter) and patched immediately, the
service life of the De-Icer will be appreciably extended.
a. Apply repair patch as outlined in paragraph 14-97.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5K13
14-100. DAMAGE TO FABRIC BACK PLY OF HIGH PRESSURE DE-ICER DURING

REMOVAL. If cement has pulled loose from the wing skin and adhered to the back surface
of the De-Icer, remove it with steel wool and MEK.
a. In those spots where the coating has pulled off the fabric, leaving bare fabric exposed,
apply at least two additional coats of cement, Part No. 74-451-24. Allow each coat to dry
thoroughly.
14-101. VULCANIZED REPAIR. It is recommended that vulcanized repairs be made by an

approved De-Icer Installation Station.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5K14
TABLE XIV-III. PNEUMATIC DEICER PUMP SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING

(B. F. GOODRICH SYSTEM)
De-Icers do not in- Open circuit breaker. Push circuit breaker to

flate - both engines reset.
operating at mini-
mum cruise RPM or System connection loose Tighten or repair as re-
either engine at max- or wire broken. quired.
imum ground RPM.
(for 8 seconds.) Timer not functioning. See Electrical Test -
through Timer.
Control valves not func- See Electrical Test -

tioning. through control valve.
Valve poppet sticking;
see Maintenance - con-
trol valve.
Piping lines blocked or See air leakage test.

not connected. Blow out line and in-
spect connections.
De-Icers inflate Piping lines partially Inspect and blow out

slowly - both engines blocked or not connected lines. See air leakage
operating at minimum securely. test.
cruise RPM or either
engine at maximum Shuttle valve not func- Check fitting in De-Icer
ground RPM (for 8 tioning. port for proper instal-
seconds.) lation.
Low air pump capacity. Check performance to

manufacturer's spec-
ifications.
De-Icer puncture. Repair per specification

or replace.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5K15
TABLE XIV-III. PNEUMATIC DEICER SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING (cont.)

(B. F. GOODRICH SYSTEM)
De-Icers inflate - In- Indicator lamp burned Replace lamp.

dicator light does not out.
function.
System pressure not Check "De-Icers inflate
being reached. slowly."
Pressure switch not See Electrical Test -

functioning. Indicator Light and
Pressure Switch.
Wires loose or broken. See Electrical Test -

Poor grounding of pres- Indicator Light and
sure switch. Pressure Switch.
De-Icers deflate slowly. Vacuum regulator set Re-adjust vacuum re-

too low. gulator. See Vacuum
Regulator Adjustment.
Clogged air filters. Clean or replace filter.

See Maintenance -
Filter Element.
Piping, lines partially Inspect and blow out

blocked. lines.
Overboard line from Inspect and blow out

control valve partially lines.
blocked.

Reissued:2/18/81
5K16
TABLE XIV-III. TROUBLESHOOTING - PNEUMATIC DEICER

(AIRBORNE SYSTEM)
Slow boot inflation. Air lines blocked or Check lines and repair.
disconnected.
Low pneumatic pump Check performance to
capacity. manufacturers speci-
fications.
One or more solenoid Replacesolenoid valve
valvesnot functioning as required.
properly.
Deicer boot punctured. Repair per specifications
or replace.
Boots do not inflate. Faulty deflate valve. Replace valve.

Two faulty deice control Replace valves.
valves.
Relay not functioning. Check wiring or replace

relay.
Leak in system. Repair leak
Open circuit breaker. Reset circuit breaker.
Blue indicator light Lamp burned out. Replace bulb.

does not light on
inflation. Loose wires. Repair wires.
Faulty pressure switch. Short out N.C. switches
separately to find bad
one and replace.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5K17
TABLE XIV-III. TROUBLESHOOTING - PNEUMATIC DEICER (cont.)

(AIRBORNE SYSTEM)
Slow deflation. Low vacuum. Readjust regulator.

Leak in system. Repair leak.
Faulty deflate valve. Replacevalve.
Red indicator light Lamp burned out. Replace bulb.

does not light with
both normally closed Faulty pressure switch. Replace switch.
switches shorted out
during ground testing. Loose wires. Replacewires.
System will not Faulty pressure switch. Check and/or replace.

automatically deflate.
Faulty relay. Check wiring or replace
relay.
Defectiveswitch. Check and/or replace.

Reissued: 2, 18 81
5K18
14-102. PROPELLERSYNCHRONIZER.(Hushtrol System)
14-103. DESCRIPTIONOF PROPELLER SYNCHRONIZERSYSTEM.

The system consists of two magnetic pickups, an electrical control chassis to monitor
the system, a phase servo to regulate the slavepropeller governor, and a control head in the
cockpit along with the related wire harnesses.
The function of the propeller synchronizer system is to automatically match the
propeller RPM of both engines within a preset range of RPM. This is accomplishedby using
the left engine as the master unit and the right engine as the slave unit. The right hand
magnetos of each engine have magnetic pickups which feed electrical pulses into the
electronic control chassis located on the right engine mount aft of the firewall. The control
chassis detects any difference in the electrical pulses and in turn activates a servo assembly
mounted on the right engine mount, which trims the right propeller governor, thus
maintaining the same propeller RPM as the master left engine.
NOTE
The system will only maintain a synchronized condition as
long as the RPM setting of the master engine is not changed
from the time the system is activated. Should it be necessary
to go beyond the limit of the system, the control head switch
must be turned to the manual position which will allow the
phase servo to center itself and be ready to synchronize the
system when reactivated.
Normal governor operations are not changed, but the synchronizer will continuously
monitor the propeller RPM and regulate the slave governor as required within the RPM
range of the system as long as it is on. The limiting range of operation is built into the
system to prevent the slave propeller governor from loosing more than a fixed amount of
RPM in case the master engine propeller is feathered with the system in operation.
14-104. TROUBLESHOOTING.Troubles peculiar to this system are listed in Table

XIV-IV along with their probable causes and suggestedremedies. The followinginformation
will help locate system malfunction with the minimum amount of equipment.
14-105. FUNCTIONALTEST. This test can be done on the ground with no special test
equipment required. The followingsteps should be used:
a. Start up both enginesand run them at 2100 RPM to get both governorsoperating.
b. Turn on the synchronizer system and allowthe system to stabilize.
c. Withthe synchronizerstill on, shut down the master engine.
d. Pull the synchronizer system circuit breaker off. This willkeep the phase servoin
whatever position it has moved to.
e. Shut down the other engine and check the phase servo plunger - it should be fully
retracted.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5K19
1. ELECTRONIC CHASSIS
2. MAGNETIC PICKUP (RT. ENG.)
3. SLAVE GOVERNOR
4. SLAVE ENGINE (RT.)
5. PHASE SERVO
6. CIRCUIT BREAKER
7. CONTROL PEDESTAL
8. CONTROL HEAD
9. INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. GROUND CONNECTION
II. MAGNETIC PICKUP (LT. ENG.)
12. MASTER ENGINE (LT.)
Figure 14-38. Propeller Synchronizer System Installation
5K20 5K20 Reissued: 2/18/81

f. Repeat steps a. thru b. and now shut down the slaveengine. Continue with step d.
g. Shut down the master engine and check the phase servo plunger - it should be
fully extended.
h. If the above steps cannot be met the phase servo should be replaced.
14-106. MAINTENANCE.Little maintenance is required on this system apart from visual

inspection at the time of regular airplane inspection. Ascertain that the electrical
connections and all related components are securely attached.
14-107. REMOVALOF PHASESERVO.

a. Remove the right engine cowling.
b. Disconnect the electrical plug from the servo.
c. Loosen the jam nut from the servo cable at the governor end.
d. Loosen jam nut on cable adapter at the servo and disconnect the cable and
adapter from the servo.
e. Loosen the four screwswhich secure the servo in the clamp assemblyand slide the
servo out.
14-108. INSTALLATIONOF PHASE SERVO.

a. Place the servo into the clamp assembly, ascertainthat the actuator end is forward
the servo cable and adapter.
b. Connect the adapter to the servo, but do not tighten the jam nut at this time.
c. Connect the electrical plug to the servo.
d. Adjust the servo in accordance with paragraph 14-109.
e. Install the right enginecowling.
14-109.ADJUSTMENT OF PHASE SERVO. (Refer to Figure 14-40.)
a. Ascertain that the servo is in its neutral position by momentarily turning the unit
on to the manual position.
b. Position the servo cable into the linkassemblyand leave approximately .25 to .19
of an inch of threads exposed above the jam nut.
c. Set both propeller pitch control leversto the high position.
d. Hold the governor arm against the high RPM stop and move the servo in its
bracket to alignthe right propeller control lever with the left lever.
NOTE
Increasing the distances between the servo and the control

cable housing will move the propeller control lever forward,
and decreasingthis distance will move the lever aft. This can
be accomplished by turning the adapter at the servo or by
removing the servo cable from the governor control arm and
turning the cable. The servo control cable must be removed
at the governor to relieveany twist in the cable assembly.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5K21
e. Ascertain that the servo stays within the clamps of the mounting bracket during
the adjustment of the propeller control lever. Tighten the clamps to secure the servo in
place.
14-110. PROPELLER GOVERNOR ADJUSTMENT.For the synchronizer system to
function properly the proper adjustment of the governor is necessary.
With each governor against the high RPM stop, the left hand engine (master) should
show 2575 RPM and the right hand engine (slave)should show 2575+ RPM.
NOTE
The slave engine must always be at least 1 RPM more than

the master engine for the propeller synchronizer to function
properly.
Adjust the governor in accordancewith instructions givenin Section VIII. Set the slave
engine governor approximately 25 RPM higher than the master engine. An incorrect setting
of the governor will result in the slave engine searching for an impossible position. If the
master engine is set faster than the slaveengine when the governorsare against the high RPM
stops, and the control switch is turned from the manual to the Auto position, the servo will
extend attempting to increase the slave engine RPM to match the master engine. But
because of the slave engine high RPM stop it will force the propeller pitch control lever aft
and will never achievesynchronization.
ELECTRONIC CHASSIS
PHASE SERVO
(RIGHT ENGINE)
MAGNETIC PICK-UP MAGNETIC PICK-UP

(LEFT ENGINE) (RIGHT ENGINE)
BUS
CONTROL HEAD
(COCKPIT)
Figure 14-39. Synchronizer Schematic

Reissued: 2/18 81
5K22
14-III. REMOVALOF ELECTRONICCHASSIS.

a. Removethe accesspanel on the top of the right engine nacelle.
b. Disconnect the three electrical plugs at the electronic chassis.
c. Loosen and remove the three locknuts and screwswhich secure the chassisto the
engine mount.
d. Removethe chassisfrom the airplane.
14-112. INSTALLATIONOF ELECTRONICCHASSIS.

a. Position the electronic chassis into the nacelle and secure in place with three
screwsand locknuts.
b. Connect the three electrical plugs to the chassis.
c. Install the accesspanel to the top of the nacelle.
2517
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Figure 14-40. Mechanical Connections
5K23 5K23 Reissued: 2/18/81

14-113. TEST EQUIPMENT. A piece of test equipment can be fabricated to simulate

engine running conditions so the system operation can be checked in the hangar without
actually running the engines. A list of parts and a schematic are shown in Figure 14-41. The
following steps will explain the use of this test box:
a. Disconnect the magnetic pickup plug J-3 from the electronic chassis and connect the
matching plug from the test box.
b. Connect the test box AC plug to any available 115-volt AC power supply and set the
master switch on the test box ON and both engine switches OFF.
c. Turn the aircraft master switch ON, the synchronizer control to the AUTO position
and ascertain that the synchronizer circuit breaker is IN.
d. Set the right engine switch of the test box ON and the left engine switch OFF. The
phase servo plunger should be fully retracted.
e. Set the left engine switch of the test box ON and the right engine switch OFF. The
phase servo plunger should be fully extended, approximately .50 of an inch.
NOTE
As each engine switch is actuated it will simulate engine

running conditions and operate the phase servo accordingly.
Operation may be slow, but the plunger should go to the full
extreme of its travel.
f. With both engine switches of the test box ON, rotate the phase control slowly and
observe the phase servo for a small amount of movement as it tries to change the phase of
both engines.
g. If the phase servo does not perform as outlined, the servo, electronic chassis and
control head should be returned for further test.
14-114. ELECTRIC WINDSHIELD ANTI-ICE.
14-115. DESCRIPTION. The electric windshield anti-ice consists of an electrically heated

anti-ice panel installed in front of the pilot's windshield, a 15 amp circuit protector and a
windshield heat on-off switch.
A field repair kit, No. 764-096, is available from Piper dealers for replacement of a de-
fective windshield anti-ice panel connector plug.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5K24
PARTS LIST FOR SYNCHRONIZER TEST INSTRUMENT
Amount Part Type
1 10 Volt AC Transformer any AC

1 Switch S-P-S-T
2 Switch D-P-S-T
1 Socket M53106A-14S-6P
1 Plug 115 Volt AC
Approx. 20 feet. Cable,two conductor shielded- AN22 or larger.

A787
BOX SWITCH GROUND

LT ENG. TO BOX
MASTER
SWITCH
TO MATE WITH
MAG. PICK-UP
PLUG ON
I
Il ELECTRONIC
CHASSIS
TRANSFORMER
APPROX.
10 FT.
SWITCH
NOTE: RT. ENG.
WIRE SIZE AND D.PS.T
BOX OPTIONAL
2516
Figure 14-41. Fabricated Test Box

Reissued: 2/18/81
5L1
TABLE XIV-IV. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART (PROPELLER SYNCHRONIZER)
Synchronizer Binding of the governor Correct any mechanical

hunting. control arm, and/or binding.
cable assembly.
Master governor Overhaul governors.

speed is varying.
Synchronizer runs Intermittent shorts Replace defective

out of synchroni- or opens in the pickup.
zation when turned pickup or its wiring.
on.
Synchronizer will Defective pickup. Replace.

not center.
Defective electronic Replace.
component.
Mechanically misrigged. Rerig.
Lack of range. Improper rigging. Rerig properly.
Trying to synchronize Adjust prop control

too close to a me- in cockpit to move
chanical stop. speed control lever
further away from
stop.
Defective electronic Replace

component.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5L2
TABLE XIV-IV. TROUBLESHOOTING (PROPELLER SYNCHRONIZER) (cont.)
Synchronizer corrects Defective electronic Replace

in one direction only. component.
Mechanical binding Correct binding.

in one direction.
Improper rigging. Rerig.
Slow to syn- Defective electronic Replace

chronize and component.
won't hold syn-
chronization.
Excessive mechanical Current mechanical
friction. binding.
Intermittent short in Repair pickup lead

pickup or wiring. or replace pickup.
Defective electrical Replace plug

plug connector. connector.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5L3
14-116. ENGINE SYNCHROPHASER. (PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-3944 and
up.)
14-117. DESCRIPTION OF SYNCHROPHASER SYSTEM. (Refer to Figure 14-42.)

This system consists of a pulse generator, a strobe sensor (replaced by another pulse gen-
erator in Serial Nos. 27-7854068and up), a computer, and an electrical control solenoid.
The pulse generator, located on the master LEFT engine suppliestiming information to
the strobe sensor on the slave RIGHT engine. The resultant error signal, generated by the
strobe sensor is fed to the computer that in turn drives the servo amplifiers.The output of the
servo amplifiers controls the electrical solenoid on the slave engine governor. This control
action keeps the slave engine in phase with the rotation of the master engine.
NOTE
Serial Nos. 27-7854068and up have a second generator in lieu

of the strobe sensor. The signals from both generators are
supplied directly to the computer for comparison. The dif-
ference signal is amplified and fed to the governor solenoid
to control the slave engine.
The pulse generator is mechanicallydriven by the camshaft of the master LEFT engine.
One rotation of the camshaft constitutes one cycle of engine operation of a four stroke engine.
This permits the pulse generator to be timed to any relationship to the firing order of the
engine. The strobe sensor (another pulse generator on the later systems)is likewisedriven by
the camshaft on the slaveengine.This givesa latitude of selection,permitting any selectionof
corresponding operation between master and slave engine.
The selector switch on the panel has two positions, manual or phase. In the manual posi-
tion, engines and propellers are operated and controlled in the conventional manner. After
manuallysynchronizingengines,the selector switch can be set to the phase position. This per-
mits the synchrophaser to hold engines in RPM agreement and also in the preselectedphase
relationship.
14-118. SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE. (PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos.

27-3944and up.)
The selector switchshould be in the manual position during enginestart, taxi and warm-
up. The switch may be turned to phase position after the take-off run has started, if desired.
NOTE
With full throttle and full RPM the governors should be set
within the synchrophasing range, if not consult Section VIII
or VIIIA of this Service Manual for high RPM setting adjust-
ment.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5L4
The propeller RPM should be manually adjusted as close to synchronization as possible

for cruise, and the quadrant friction control set. Turn the switch to the phase position, if the
unit does not synchronize the props, return the selector switch to manual. After 45 seconds
adjust engine RPM manually to within 25 to 30 RPM of each other and return the selector
switch to the phase position.
Keep the function switch in manual positionexcept when desiringautomatic control. The
engine synchrophaser will bring into phase, engineswith an RPM differenceof over 30 RPM.
However,the closerthe RPM is set manuallythe sooner automatic phasing willbe established.
Note the lack of an audio beat when the propellers are in phase; this should be checked
in flight. When an audible beat is heard with the system operating, it is undoubtedly not hold-
ing the slave engine in phase with the master engine. Return the selector switch to its manual
position for 45 seconds and readjust engine RPM manually to operating RPM. Set selector
switch to phase position for automatic operation. If the phasing is not established after the
above procedure, it is possible that some unit of the system is not operating properly, and
further ground checks should be made.
14-119. OPERATIONAL CHECKS. (PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-3944 thru
27-7854067only.)
The followingchecks may be made to evaluate system operating condition. A test unit
should be fabricated to perform the required checks.Referto Figure 14-46for parts and wiring
schematic to fabricate the test unit.
a. Connect an ammeter with a two ampere scale to the meter jack on the front panel of
computer amplifier.(Refer to Figure 14-46.)Use a suitable cable and 1/4 inch phone plug to
connect to the computer.
NOTE
When fabricating this test box, it is advisable to make the
connecting cable long enough to extend from the computer
into the cockpit.
b. Connect a zero center reading 15volt voltmeterto test wiresA and B in the six pin plug
which connectsto the computer. When the tests are completed the wirescan be taped and tied
back. (Refer to Figure 14-46.)
c. With meters connected as shown in Figure 14-46,proceed with the ground checksto
determine if various units are working properly.
d. Connect the phone plug from the test box to the computer and observe the ammeter,
it should show a reading with the master switch ON. This will confirm that there is voltage to
the computer.
NOTE
The followingsteps should be performedfrom within the cock-

pit with the use of the aircraft starter switches.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5L5
7
8 11 10 8
1. MASTERENGINE(LT.)
2. STATION36.25
3. COMPUTERASSY.
4. GOVERNOR ASSY.
5. SLAVEENGINE(RT.)
6. NEWTACHOMETER SHAFTS
7. STROBESENSOR(SER.NOS.27-3944
THRU27-7854067)
7A.PULSEGENERATOR (SER.NOS.
27-7854068 AND UP)
8. EXISTINGTACH SHAFTS
9. ELECTRICAL HARNESS
10. CIRCUITBREAKER
11. CONTROLSWITCH
12. PULSE GENERATOR
Figure 14-42. Synchrophaser Installa tion

Reissued: 2/18/81
5L6
e. Ascertain that the magneto switches are OFF. Turn the master switch ON, and set
the synchrophaser switch on MANUAL. Read the solenoid current on the ammeter. A
stabilized reading should be 1 ampere i .2 ampere.
NOTE
When first selecting the manual operation, the meter current

maybe near zero or near maximum of meter scale. The
solenoid current is slowly corrected and takes five to
thirty-five seconds to stabilize.
NOTE
The above step must always proceed phase operation when

flying or making ground checks. Alwaysuse manual selection
for stand-by service.
f. Start and adjust the master LEFT engine at near cruise RPM(2200 RPM or above).
Set the selector switch to propeller sync. Rotate the slaveRIGHT engine with the use of the
starter (right Magneto switch OFF) until the zero center reading voltmeter deflects to the
right or left of center. A full deflection to the right indicates a photo conductor is supplying
a signal to the computer amplifier and must cause the ammeter to increase slowly to a
maximum of approximately 1.75 amperes.
g. When the above condition is met, rotate the slaveRIGHT engine with the use of the
starter to a position that will cause the zero center reading voltmeter to deflect to left of
center. A full deflection to left must cause a slow amperage decrease to 0 amps. This
indicates that the other conductor is supplying a signalto the computer amplifier.
NOTE
A decrease in solenoid current indicates the slave engine is

increasing RPM. An increase in solenoid current indicates the
slaveengineis decreasing RPM.
When conditions of step h and i are met, it will confirm that
all components are operating.
h. Return the selector switch to manual and start the slave RIGHT engine.Operate the
master LEFT engine at near cruise RPM. Set the selector switch to propeller sync position
and advance the slave engine speed slightly over that of the master engine noting the
deflection of the voltmeter. If it remains to the right decidely longer than it remains on left,
it confirms that the signals from the photo conductors are correct.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5L7
i. While still operating the master engine at near cruise RPM, retard revolutions of the
slave engine to less than that of master engine. Note the deflection of the voltmeter. If it re-
mains to the left decidedlylongerthan it remains on the right, it confirmsthat the signals from
the photo conductors are correct.
NOTE
The voltmeter readingswillchange from side to side with RPM

and phase changes,but will show a definitetendency to stay to
right or left of zero when engine RPM's are not in phase.
14-120. TROUBLESHOOTING. The followingchecksshould be made when a malfunction

of the system is suspected. The checks are divided into two parts, Mechanical and Electrical,
and should be performed in that order. A troubleshooting chart is also supplied at the end of
these instructions.
CAUTION
Before proceeding any further be certain that the magneto
switches are OFF.
a. MECHANICAL CHECKS (PA-23-250 (six place), Serial Nos. 27-3944and up): In-
spect the short tach cables used to drive the pulse generator, strobe sensor (or other pulse gen-
erator in later models) and related components for the following conditions:
1. Insufficient lubrication. Lubricate with a suitable High Temperature Grease.
2. The retainer clip on the drive end of the tach cable is not chafing against the bell
housing. No signs of chafing should be evident.
3. The square ends of the tach cable is fraying. If so, dip the end in silver solder or
braze it. Then file the end square to fit mating unit core.
4. Be certain the core of the pulse generator and strobe sensor (or other pulse gen-
erator in later models) rotate when the associated propeller is turned.
5. Check the bulkhead tach drive units for possible broken parts.
6. Check the engine drive pad for possible damage.
b. ELECTRICAL CHECKS (PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-3944thru 27-7854067
only): Perform the followingchecks to isolate any trouble in the electricalcomponents of the
system.
NOTE
To perform some of the followingchecks will require a stan-
dard multimeter with a 50 volt AC scale and/or other test
equipment which can be fabricated from easily obtainable
components. It is advisable to make the connectingcableslong
enough to extend into the cockpit.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5L8
1. Pulse generator, glow lamps and wire harness checks:

(a) Ascertain that all tach shafts are in position and rotate the pulse generator
and strobe sensor with rotation of the respective engines.
(b) Start and run master engine at near cruise RPM. Set selector switch at Prop
Sync.
(c) Disconnect plug PL3 at the strobe sensor and measure AC voltage at pins D
to ground coming from the computer.
(d) Measure AC voltage at pin E to ground coming from the computer.
(e) These open circuit readings should be from 30 to 40 volts AC.
NOTE
The pulse generator may be removed and checked with the

use of an electric drill or air motor regulated to limit the
RPM to 1750. Drive the generator from the tang end of the
core. A patch cable junction box may be fabricated to
simplify the following checks. (Refer to Figure 14-50.)
(f) Install the fabricated patch cable and check the volt ohmmeter readings at
the patch cable junction box with the pulse generator running or the
simulator installed.
(g) If this test is positive, a bad aircraft harness lead may be present. Check the
harness with a megger ohmmeter.
(h) Check the resistance and continuity through the pulse generator harness.
Pins D and E of the small plug attached to the computer should be
approximately 200 ohms.
(i) Check the direction of the pulse generator by operating it from both ends
and observe if lights in the strobe sensor illuminate. (Use the volt ohmmeter
to check light illumination. A decrease in resistance should be read when the
lights glow. Connect meter at pins A to C or B to C of the large plug). (The
strobe sensor can also be disassembled for a direct visual check).
(j) To ascertain that the pulse generator is supplying timing information to
strobe sensor, disconnect plug PL2 from the computer chassis and measure
the AC voltage across contacts E and D while operating the master engine at
near cruise RPM. A reading of .2 volts AC ± .1 volts is considered normal. If
no voltage is supplied, replace the pulse generator.
2. Computer amplifier:
(a) If the system operates in the manual mode but not in the phase mode, listen
to the computer for an audible relay click when the system is switched from
the manual mode to phase mode. The relay is on the bottom deck of the
computer assembly. The use of a 2 amp meter and test plug will simplify this
check. (Refer to Figure 14-46.)
(b) If no AC voltage is supplied to the strobe sensor as outlined in step 1d, it is
suspected that the lamp amplifier in the computer chassis is defective and
the computer should be replaced. (Refer to paragraphs 14-123 and 14-124.)
5L9 5L9 Reissued: 2/18/81

(c) Inspectthe insideof the computer to ascertain that the circuit boards are secure
and that the tang plugs are free of corrosion. Also check for any loose wires.
3. Strobe sensor.
(a) Connect the fabricated strobe sensor tester (refer to Figure 14-48)to the strobe
sensor plug in the right nacelle.
(b) Slowly rotate the strobe sensor core (if the tach shaft is disconnected)or pro-
peller and watch for a drop in the photo conductor resistance. Check both A
and B lights. The resistance should be 200,000ohms with the lights covered
and 180 ohms with the lights uncovered.
(c) If the latter test (Step b) proves negativethe sensor unit must be disassembled
for a visual check of lamp illumination. If the lamps do work the trouble is in
the photo conductors. To be sure, aim the photo conductor cellsat a source of
light and move a finger or some object back and forth in front of the con-
ductors. If the tester does not indicate a drop in resistancewhen the conductor
cells are exposed to the light, they are inoperative and must be replaced.
(d) Connect the strobe sensor simulator. (Refer to Figure 14-49.)Move the po-
tentiometer and listen to the computer. The motor should run at approxi-
mately 7 volts.
(e) Adjust the potentiometer just short of motor operation. Move the pressure-
drain switch from ON - Pressureto OFF and then ON again; the current on the
governor coil should be .05 amps.
(f) Move the switch from ON - drain to OFF and then ON again, the current on
the governor coil should be .05 amps.
CAUTION
The pressure or drain should not be adjusted unless it is abso-
lutely necessaryand the system still does not synchronize.
c. WIRING HARNESS CHECK (PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-7854068and
up): This check utilizes a Hartzell Test Box B-4467to provide assurance that the synchro-
phaser is properly connected. It also checks the functioning of the governor solenoid coil and
the pulse generators.
NOTE
These tests are to be made with all parts installed and con-
nected to the wiring harness except for the computer. Do not
plug the computer in until all tests have been satisfactorily
completed.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5L10
1. Connect the Hartzell Test Box B-4467 to the wiring harness in place of the
computer.
2. Turn the master switch ON. The Power light and Coillight should comeon. Other
lights may also be on but they may be disregarded at this time with the exception of the Coil
Short light. If it is on turn the master switch OFF and refer to the following NOTE.
NOTE
If any of the lights on the test box fail to operate correctly,
check the wiring harness against the wiring diagram. Check
for shorts, open circuit breaker, broken wires and wires con-
nected to the wrong pins.
3. Rotate the right engine by hand and watch the Right Engine light. If the light is
off rotate the engine until it comes on or vise versa. The engine may need to be rotated two
revolutions to obtain a change. Repeat the procedure for the left engine observing the Left
Engine light.
4. Place the phase-manual switch in the MANUAL position. The Manual light
should come on and the Phase light should go out. When the switch is placed in the PHASE
position the opposite should occur.
5. If the wiring harness checks good but the Right or Left Engine light or the Coil
light does not function properly replace the respectivepulse generator or the governor.
14-121. REMOVAL OF STROBE SENSOR. (PA-23-250(six place), Serial Nos. 27-3944

thru 27-7854067only.) This unit is located in the right enginenacelle aft of the firewall in the
upper right hand corner. (Refer to Figure 14-42.)
a. Remove the access panel on top of the nacelle.
b. Loosen the knurled nut on the rear of the strobe sensor and remove the tachometer
cable.
c. Disconnect the electrical connector.
d. Loosen the I inch hex nut, at the front of the strobe sensor, that connects it to the fire-
wall adapter and remove the sensor.
14-122. INSTALLATION ANDADJUSTMENTOFSTROBESENSOR. (RefertoFigure

14-43.)
a. Attach strobe sensor to firewall adapter by securing loosely with hex nut.
NOTE
The front of the strobe sensor can be defined by the square
hole in the center of the unit to accept the square end of a tach
shaft.
NOTE
Beforeproceedingany further be certain the magneto switches
are OFF.

Reissued: 2/18/81
5L11
FWD.
AFT VIEW
1. TIMINGMARK
2. GLOWLAMPS (RED)
3. PHOTOCONDUCTOR(BLACK)
PLUG A B
A A
C C
D D
E E
F F
G G
H H
GOV. COIL
Figure 14-43. Strobe Sensor
5L12 5L12 Reissued: 2/18/81

FOR TEST ONLY
\ offri~itt^ / UWMARK
Figure 14-44. Pulse Generator
b. Turn the engine in the direction of rotation to locate No. 2 piston at T.D.C. on the
ignition stroke. Use the engine timing mark. Move the propeller blade an additional 30 de-
grees. This is the timing position.
NOTE
If this point is missed, do not turn the engine backward, start

over.
c. Turn the strobe sensorcasecounterclockwise(viewedfrom the rear) to align the timing
mark with the center of the keyway.This is the phase position. The use of an inspection mirror
will be required to view the end of the unit.
d. Tighten the 1 inch hex nut.
e. Pull the prop through (in the direction of rotation) two complete revolutions and
stop at the phase position. Check timing mark alignment. Reset if necessary.
f. Connect tachometer shaft to the rear of the strobe sensor and securewith knurled nut.
g. Connect electrical plug connector to the strobe sensor and install the accesspanel on
top of the nacelle.
14-123. REMOVAL OF PULSE GENERATOR. (See following NOTE.) This unit is lo-
cated in the left engine nacelleaft of the firewallin the upper left hand corner. (Referto Figure
14-42.)
a. Remove the access panel on top of the nacelle.
5L13 5L13 Reissued: 2 / 18/81

b. Loosen the knurled nut on the rear of the pulse generator and removethe tachometer
cable.
c. Disconnect the electrical connector.
d. Loosen the I inch hex nut, at the front of the pulse generator, that connects it to the
firewall adapter and remove the generator.
NOTE
On Serial Nos. 27-7854068and up, a second pulse generator

is used in lieu of a strobe sensor in the right engine nacelleand
it is removed as is described for the strobe sensor in Paragraph
14-121.
14-124. INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT OF PULSE GENERATOR. (Refer to

Figure 14-44.)
a. Attach the pulse generator to the bulkhead drive unit by securinglooselywith hex nut.
NOTE
The front of the pulse generator can be defined by the square

hole in the center of the unit to accept the square end of a tach
shaft.
CAUTION
Beforeproceedingfurther, be certain the magneto switchesare

OFF.
b. Turn the engine in the direction of rotation to locate No. 1 piston at T.D.C. on the
ignition stroke. Use the engine timing mark.
NOTE
If this point is missed, do not turn the engine backward, start

over.
c. Turn the pulse generator case counterclockwise (viewedfrom the rear) to align the
timing mark with the center of the keyway. This is the phase position. The use of an inspection
mirror will be required to view the end of the unit.
d. Tighten the 1 inch hex nut.
e. Pull the prop through (in the direction of rotation) two complete revolutionsand stop
at the phase position. Check timing mark alignment. Reset if necessary.

5L14
NOTE
The pulse generator timing mark is always set up when the

master engine is at T.D.C. of No. 1 cylinder on the ignition
stroke. The slave engine is then set at the desired propeller
position, cylinder number and ignition stroke. This is
predetermined at the factory and is different for each model
aircraft.
f. Connect tachometer shaft to rear of pulse generator and secure with knurled nut.
g. Connect the electrical plug connector to the pulse generator and install the access
panel on top of the nacelle.
14-125. REMOVAL OF COMPUTER ASSEMBLY. This unit is located in the nose section
on the front of bulkhead station 36.25 in the upper center portion. (Refer to Figure 14-42.)
a. The computer unit is accessible through the top rear opening of the nose baggage
compartment.
b. Disconnect the two electrical plugs connected to the computer unit.
c. Remove the three machine screwson the top mounting flange and lift the computer
unit up and out of the aircraft.
14-126. INSTALLATION OF COMPUTER ASSEMBLY. (Refer to Figure 14-42.)

a. Position the bottom mounting flange of the computer unit into the slot along the
bottom of the mounting plate.
b. Secure the unit in place with the three machine screws in the top mounting flange.
c. Connect the two electrical plugs to the computer unit.
d. Check the fuse to ascertain that it is in good condition and of the proper size (3 amp
- 250 volts).
14-127. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF GLOW LAMP AND PHOTO

CONDUCTORASSEMBLIES.
a. Remove the strobe sensorin accordancewith paragraph 14-120.
NOTE
A reference mark should be placed along the edge of the

sensor unit to facilitate getting the proper alignment of part
upon reassembly.
5L15 5L15 Reissued: 2/18/81

1. GAIN ADJUSTMENT
2. GAIN ADJUSTMENT
4. FUSE
5. CONNECTOR PL1
6. CONNECTOR PL1
Figure 14-45. Computer Assembly
b. Remove the three allen cap screws holding the two halves of the strobe sensor
together. It may be necessaryto tap the center shaft to separate the halves.
c. Reconnect plug PL3 and visually observe if both glow lamps light with the master
engine turning at near cruising RPM. A pulse generator simulator may be used according to
paragraph 14-120and Figure 14-51.
d. If either of the glow lamps is inoperative, the red colored block that holds the lamps
must be replaced. This is done by removing the three countersunk screws, one with an
external nut, from inside the strobe sensor case and removingthe block assembly. Install the
new one by using the removalmethod in reverse.
e. If the photo conductors are inoperative, the black colored block assembly may be
replaced in the same method as the glow lamps, step d, above.
f. Place the two halves of the strobe sensor together and align the previously made
reference marks.
g. Securethe two halvesof the unit together with the three allen cap screws.
h. Install the strobe sensor in the airplane and adjust it in accordance with paragraph
14-122.

5L16
PAC 522 OR 322
AMMETER
GAIN ADJUSTMENTS
PRESSURE DRAIN
TIP CONNECTORTO +
SIDE OF AMP METER
-WIRE MUST BE LONG ENOUGH TO 6 -8 01

REACH FROM THE COMPUTERINTO LABLE
THE COCKPIT. REPLAC
Figure 14-46. Fabricated Test Box
PHOTO
STROBE SENSOR
VIEWED FROM
CONDUCTOR SIDE
(BLACK)
Figure 14-47. Electrical Schematic

Reissued: 2/18 81
5L17
RIG TO INSPECT STROBE SENSOR INTERNAL

WIRING. WHEN PHOTO CONDUCTOR IS EXPOSED
TO LIGHT THE K IS REDUCED. THIS MAY BE A
HIGH VERY HIGH NUMBER AND MAY BE DIFFICULT
V.O.M. TO READ.
STROBE SENSOR
CONDUCTOR
2700 GLOW LAMPS
POWER
110 V.
A.C.
126-196-1000CONNECTOR
90797-82 (6 REQ.)
NOTE:
NOT VOLTAGE SENSITIVE
Figure 14-48. Strobe Sensor Internal Wiring Test Unit
POT. MOTORSTARTS AT APPROX. 7.0 VOLTS.

JUST AT STARTOF MOTOR,PRESSUREOR
DRAINSHOULDREAD .05 FOR SLOT DISK.
25V .10 FOR STRAIGHT DISK.
C
c WW103 CENTRALAB
5 W POTENTIOMETER
AMPHENOL126-195MIN.HEX PLUG
STROBESENSORSIMULATOR
NOTE:
NOT VOLTAGE SENSITIVE
Figure 14-49. Strobe Sensor Simulator

Reissued: 2/18/81
5L18
DISCONNECTSTROBESENSOR
TEST A to F O to 14V D.C. TEST A to F 0
8 to F O to 14V D.C. B to F 0
C to F 14v D.C. C to F 12to 14V D.C.
D to F 6V A.C. D to F 15V A.C.
E to F 6V A.C. E to F ISV A.C.
Figure 14-50. Patch Cable and Test Terminal
PULSE GENERATORSIMULATOR- APPROX. 1200 R.RM.
Q1- UNIJUNCTIONTRANSISTOR
MOTOROLA HEP 310
RI- 39k 1/2 W. O% RES.
R2- 330 1/2W. IO%RES.
R3- 200k 1/2 W 10 RES.
ADJUST R4 FOR PULSE AMPLITUDE OF 1.5 VOLTS. USE OSCILLOSCOPEFOR MEASUREMENTS.
Figure 14-51. Pulse Generator Simulator

Reissued: 2/18/81
5L19
TABLE XIV-V. TROUBLESHOOTING CHART (ENGINE SYNCHROPHASER)
No indication Master switch OFF. Turn switch ON.

solenoid current.
Bad fuse in computer. Replace fuse.
Faulty wiring. Check wiring and

connections.
Faulty computer. Replace computer.
System not operating Pulse generator and Perform operational

properly. lamp amplifier sus- check in accordance
pected of faulty with paragraph 14-119.
operation.
Tach shafts faulty. Visually check

tach shafts.
Pulse generator and Perform electrical
glow lamp amplifier test in accordance
in computer not with paragraph 14-120.
operating.
Glow lamp or lamps Replaceglow lamp or

and/or photo conductor photo conductor
or conductors defective. assemblies.Refer to
paragraph 14-127.
Faulty computer. Perform electrical

test in accordance
with paragraph 14-120.
System will not sync. Perform electrical

(Note) test in accordance
Unit will not sync. with paragraph 14-120.
on the ground.
Mechanical. Check tach shafts per

paragraph 14-120.
Pilot. Refer to paragraph

Enginesnot set within 14-118 for operating
range of system. procedures.

Reissued:2/18/81
5L20
RIGHT LEFT
ENGINE ENGINE
FLEX SHAFTS
2RT. ND
23
7 T
GOVERNOR SOLENOID RT.EN. ONLY)
9 9 23 A
0 10
Figure 14-52. Synchrophaser Schematic,


Reissued: 2/18/81
5L21
5L22 THRU 5L24

Aztec SM PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aztec SM PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aztec SM PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AZTEC

AEROFICHE EXPLANATION AND REVISION STATUS

Identification of revised material:

ORG600401 April 1, 1960 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5

AIRPLANE SERIAL NUMBER LISTING

PA-23-250 Serial Nos. 27-1 to 27-504 incl.

PA-23-235 Serial Nos. 27-505 to 27-622 incl.

PA-23-250 (six place) "B" Serial Nos. 27-2000 to 27-2504 incl.

PA-23-250 (six place) "C" Serial Nos. 27-2505 to 27-3836 incl.

PA-E23-250 Start at Serial No. 27-2997

PA-23-250 (six place) "D" Serial Nos. 27-3837, 27-3944 to

PA-23-250 (six place) "E" Serial Nos. 27-4426, 27-4574 to

PA-23-250(six place) "F" Serial Nos.

4-5. Positioningof MainSpar AligningTool.................................................................. 1G7

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont)

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont)

6-28. Flap Actuating Cylinder ....................................... 2E11

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont)

7-31. Main Gear Oleo Service Tolerances ............................. 2122

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont)

8A-19. Using Assembling Tool........................................ 3F I

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont)

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont)

11-4. Current/Voltage Regulator .................................... 4C24

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont)

Electrical Schematics for Section XI, see Grid 4C5.

12-1. Two Year, Magnesium Battery Connection (Garrett) .............. 5A11

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont)

13-4. Heating and Ventilating System, PA-23-250 (six place),

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont)

13-36. Heater Fuel Valve ............. ............................... 5F 17

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (cont)

14-20. Brush Insert Assembly, PA-23-250; PA-23-235; and PA-23-250

II-I. Leading Particulars and Principle Dimensions ................. 1

LIST OF TABLES (cont)

1-4. FUSELAGE. The fuselage, of truss and semi-monocoque type construction,

1-6. EMPENNAGE. The empennage consists of the vertical stabilizer (fin),

1-8. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. Two separate hydraulic systems are incorporated

1-9. LANDINGGEAR. The tricycle landing gear system is hydraulically oper-

1-10. ENGINES AND PROPELLERS. The airplane is powered by two Avco-

MODEL ENGINE PROPELLER H.P. OCTANE

PA-23-250 0-540-A I B5 HC-A2XK-2 250 91, 96

PA-23-250 O-540-A3D5 HC-A2XK-2 250 91/96

PA-23-235 0-540-B I A5 HC-A2XK-2 or 235 80, 87

PA-23-250 (six place) 0-540-A I D5 HC-A2XK-2 250 91/96

10-540-J4A5 250 100/130

TIO-540-CIA 250 100/130

1-13. ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT. Provision for electronic equipment includes various

2- . Introduction .............................................................. IB5

2-45. Hydraulic System ......................................................... ID13

2-1. INTRODUCTION. This sectioncontains routinehandlingandservicingpro-

2-2. DIMENSIONS. The principle airplane dimensions are shown in Figures

2-3. STATION REFERENCE LINES. In order to facilitate the location of vari-

For weight and balance purposes, refer to the airplane

HANDLING AND SERVICING

Figure 2-1. Three-View of PA-23-250 and PA-23-235

HANDLING AND SERVICING

Figure 2-2. Three-View of PA-23-250 (six place)

HANDLING AND SERVICING